i?«;^5 






,»si%«tM,, ,^^,v» 



- :.^:* 



r^?:^^'^'*'<'''>.v-. .^■•, 



'" '^';yi-;y< 



!■:>''■ 
















1^ 






V ^,-:?.^ 









>' 

'*»" 



J...;^*c;- 






*''.V*t# 









• V- 






A' ••■'■- 













Ifcffr 




» / 



t^. . 'Jf 



■■*• - .^^ 






•*' .. .'-- i^^-^-r 



^..■^.. 



■ wr ■ ' r * 1' 

WW -» « -.-^^ I r ' .^ 



' . / ; ' 













Qass-IP i ^SS 
Book ' K SS . 



/ 



L 



GRAMMAR 



OF 



THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 

FOE THE USE OF 

HIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 

BY / 

DR. RAPHAEL KUHNER, 

CONaECTOB or THE LTCEUK, QAMOTKR. 

TBANSLATED FBOM THE GEBMAN 
BY 

B. B. EDWARDS, 

LATB FKOFE8SOB IN THE THEOLOGICAL SBMIN1.BT, AND 

S. H. TAYLOR, 

PRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADSMT, AVDOTXB. 



SIXTH EDITION. 



NEW-YORK : 
D. APPLETON & COMPANY 

846 & 848 BROADWAY. 
M.DCCC.UX. 






7-:"i 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1852, by 

D. Appleton & Co., 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States 

for the Southern District of New York. 






4 



PREFACE. 



Raphaet, Kuhxer, the author of the following Grammar 
W2^ born at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812 to 1821, he 
LJiQJed at the celebrated gymnasium in his native city. 
Among his classical teachers were DOring, Rost and Wiiste- 
mann. From 1821 to 1824, he enjoyed, at the University 
of Gottingen, the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen and 
Ottfried MuUer. While there, he prepared an essay on 
the philosophical writings of Cicero, which received a 
prize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum 
at Hanover. The principal works from the pen of Dr. 
Kuhner are the following : 

1. Versuch einer neuen Anordnung der griechischen Syntax, 

mit Beispielen begleitet. 1829. " Attempt towards a 
new Arrangement of the Greek Syntax," etc. 

2. M. Tull. Ciceronis Tusculan. Disputationum libri. 1829 

ed. altera 1835 ; ed. tertia 1846. 

3. Sammtliche Anomaliendes griechischen Verbs in Attisch. 

Dialecte, 1831. " Anomalies of the Greek Verb, etc. 

4. Ausfuhrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, in 2 

Theilen, 1834, 1835. " Copious Grammar of the Greek 
Language, in two Parts." The second Part of this 
grammar, containing the Syntax, translated by W. E. 
Jelf, of the University of Oxford, was published in 
1842; the first Part in 1845. A second edition of 
Jelfs translation of this work was published in 1851. 
This work is, however, only in part a translation, Mr. 



A* 



/ '^ AmM!iw!m?mBsmB!9i''i9fr * .'^^^ ■'viy?. 



VI PREFACE. 

'■ I 

Jelf being th6 author of the remarks on the Cases , the 
particle dv, the compound verbs, etc. 

5. Schulgramms^fik der griechischen Sprache, 1836 ; zweite 

durchaus vcrbesserte u. vermehrtfe Auflage, 1843; 
dritte .yje^besserte und* vermehrte Auflage 1851. 
" School* Qxammar of the Greek Language, third 
edition,^tei^roved and ^enlarged." The present vol- 
ume is -a translation of this Grammar, from the 
sheets, furnished for this purpose by the author. 

6. Elementa^ammatik der griechischen Sprache, neunte 

Auflage-,1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Greek 
Language, containing a series of Greek and Eng- 
lish exercises for translation with the requisite vocab- 
ularies.'^ • "This Grammar, translated by Mr. S. H. 
Taylor, pne of the translators of the* present volume, 
has passed through eleven editions in this country. 

7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841. 

8. Elementargrammatik der lateihischen Sprache, siebent 

Auflage, 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Latin 
Language with Exercises." This Grammar, trans- 
lated by Prof. Champlin, of WaterviUe College, hsis 
passed through several editions in this country. 

9. Lateinische Vorschule nebst eingereihten lateinischen 

und deutschen Ubersetzungsaufgaben, vierte Auflage, 

1849. 
10. Schulgrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, dritte sehr 

verbesserte Auflage, 1850. " School Grammar of 

the Latin Language, third edition, greatly improved." 
Dr. Kiihner has also published in the Bibliotheca Graeca 
the first part of his edition of Xenophon's Anabasis. 

From the above statements, it wdll be seen that Dr. 
Kiihner has enjoyed the most favorable opportmiities for 
preparing the work, a translation of which is now pre- 
sented to the public. The names of his early instructors 
are among the most honored in classical philology. For 



PREFACE. VU 

nearly thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of the 
principal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facili- 
ties for testing in practice the principles which he has 
adopted in his Grammars. At the same time, he has pur- 
sued the study of the classical authors with the greatest 
diligence, in connection with the productions which his 
learned countrymen are constantly publishing on the differ- 
ent parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of course, his 
works might be expected to combine the advantages of 
sound, scientific principles with a skilful adaptation to prac- 
tical use. The " School Grammar of the Greek Lan- 
guage," being his latest publication, contains the results of 
his most mature studies. Its chief excellences, it may be 
well, perhaps, briefly to indicate. 

First, The grammar is based on a profound and accurate 
knowledge of the genius and principles of the Greek lan- 
guage. The author adopts substantially the views which 
are maintained by Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and 
which are fully unfolded in the German grammars of 
Becker. According to these views, the forms and changes 
of language are the result of established laws, and not of 
accident or arbitrary arrangement. Consequently, language 
may be subjected to scientific analysis and classification. 
The multitude of details may be embraced under a few 
comprehensive principles, and the whole may have some- 
what of the completeness and spirit of a living, organic 
system. Dr. Kiihner's grammar is not a collection of de- 
tached observations, or of rules which have no connection, 
except a numerical one. It is a natural classification of 
the essential elements of the language, an orderly exhibi- 
tion of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a truly 
practical grammar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in 
his closet, but by an experienced instructor in his school. 

Second, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactory 
arrangement of his materials. This can be seen by an 



\rm PREFACE 

examination of the table of contents. To those, indeed, 
who are familiar only with the common distribution of 
subjects in our Greek grammars, the arrangement of Dr. 
Kiihner may appear somewhat obscure and complicated. 
A slight acquaintance, however, with the plan on which 
the Syntax, for example, is constructed, will show that he 
has followed the true and logical method. Abundant 
proofs of the justness of this remark may be seen in the 
exhibition of compound sentences. The particles are 
treated, not as isolated, independent words, but as a com- 
ponent and indissoluble part of discourse. 

Third, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The cor- 
rectness of every principle advanced, especially in the Syn- 
tax, is vouched for by copious citations from the classics. 
K, in any case, a principle is stated in an abstract form, or 
if a degree of obscurity rests upon the enunciation of it, 
its meaning may be readily discovered by reference to the 
illustration. The paradigms contain much more complete 
exemplifications of conjugation and declension than are to 
be found in the grammars in common use in this coun- 
try. In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. Kiihner 
has chosen a pure verb as the model of regular inflection. 
He can thus exhibit the stem unchanged, throughout the 
entire conjugation. 

Fourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the 
language, especially of the verb, is subjected, may be men- 
tioned as another excellence of the grammar. In learning 
a paradigm, in the manner which the author points out, the 
pupil first resolves the verb into its elements, and then 
rearranges these elementary parts into a complete form. 
In this method, and in no other, can he attain a mastery 
of this most difficult portion of the subject. 

Fifth, Every part of the grammar is equally elaborated. 
The closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscien- 
tious accuracy, which characterize the forms, or the first 



PREFACE. IX 

portions of the S}ntax. No part can be justly charged 
with deficiency or with superfluous statement. The view 
of the Third Declension, the scientific list of Irregular 
Verbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the observations on the 
Use and Position of the Article, on the INIiddle and Passive 
Verbs, on the delicate shades of thought indicated by the 
Modes and Tenses, and on the difference between the use 
of the Participle and Infinitive, may be referred to as spe- 
cimens of careful observation and nice analysis. 

The Appendix on Versification has been supplied by the 
translators, the grammar of Kiihner containing nothing on 
that subject. The materials were drawn from a variety of 
sources. A more full view is less necessary, as the excel- 
lent work of Munk on Greek and Roman Metres, trans- 
lated by Profs. Beck and Felton, is now accessible. 

Much pains have been taken in verifying the almost in- 
numerable references to classical authors. The very few 
exceptions are those cases where the author made use of 
an edition of a classic not accessible to the translators. Li 
this verification, the following editions of prose authors 
were used : Kiihner's edition of the Memorabilia ; Weiske's 
and Tauchnitz's editions of the other works of Xenophon ; 
Schafer's and Tauchnitz's editions of Herodotus ; Becker's 
and Tauchnitz's editions of Thucydides ; Dobson's edition 
of the Oratores Attici ; and Stallbaum's Plato. There are 
slight variations in numbering the lines of poetry in difler- 
ent editions, particularly in the tragedians. 

The present edition has been prepared from the third 
German edition, in which the author had made many im- 
portant improvements, particularly in the Syntax, having 
availed himself of the corrections or remarks of his learned 
friends and his reviewers. This the translators have en- 
deavored to put into such a form as would best meet the 
wants of American scholars. They have not aimed merely 



X PREFACE. 

at a translation ; it has been their object to state in as clear 
and concise a manner as possible the principles contained 
in the original, without reference to the particular form in 
which the statements were there made. The translators 
have also added principles and illustrations of their own, 
where it seemed desirable. 

The numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed 
in the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and 
Remarks are the same as in the former edition. The 
changes in this respect have been so few, that it has not 
been thought necessary to indicate them. 

The labor of preparing the first edition cf this work was 
shared equally by the translators ; so, also, in the second 
edition as far as the 210th page. At this point in the 
progress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards's 
health made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in 
connection with it, for the purpose of seeking a milder 
climate. After a few months' residence in one of the South- 
ern States, he was called away from his labors on earth, 
deeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of 
friends to whom his character presented so many attractive 
quahties. His loss will be extensively felt also m the cause 
of Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher- 
ished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he 
contributed with great zeal and success the rich stores of 
his elegant and varied learning. 

The proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. P. 
S. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to 
whom special acknowledgments are due for these services^ 
as well as for many valuable suggestions. 

Andover, July 15, 1852. 



TABLE OF COxNTENTS. 



ETYMOLOGY. 

SECTION L — SOUNDS OF THE <.ANGUAGE. 

Chapter I. — Lettecs axd Souxds op the Languaob. 



AXPUABET 

Sounds of the Letters . . . 
History of the Alphabet. 

Organs of Speech 

Vowels , 

Consonants 

Breathings , 

Changes of Letters 



M 

2a 

2b 
3 
4 

5 
tj 
7 



Changes of the Vowels 8 — 1 6 

Hiatus 8 

Contraction of Vowels 9 



Crasis 10, 1 1 

Synizcsis 12 

Elision 13, U 

N Paragogic (4<p€?u(u(rTiK6y) ; 

ovru(s) ; ^{ aniWff ; o' 'k 15 
Strengthening and N\ r^ 

of Vowels IG 



Prol' III. Shortening. In- 

tci ^ and Variation, ... § 16 
Influence of a Vowel or Con- 
sonant on another vowel. ... 16 
Syncope, Omission of a Vowel 16 

r ic Prothesis 16 

( ' of the Consonants... 17 — 25 

Mutes 17 

Liquids 18 

Mutes and Liquids, Liquids and 

Mntes 19 

Sibilant <r with Mut. and Liq... 20 

Change of separated Consonants 21 

Metathesis of Liquids 22 

Doubling of Consonants 23 

Sin ' Mg and Addition of 

C< us 24 

Expulsion and Omission of 

Consonant:* 25 



CuAPT. II. — Syllables. 



Nature and Division of Syllables 26 

Quantity of Syllables 27 

Quantity of the Penult 28 

A-Ccents 29 

Change and Removal of the 
Accent by Inflection, Compo- 
sition and Contraction 30 

Change and Removal of the Ac- 
cent in connected Discourse 31 — 35 



I. Grave instead of the ocuto 31 

II. Crasis 31 

III. Elision 31 

Anastrojthe 31 

Atonies or Proclitics... 32 

Enclitics 33 — 35 

Division of Syllables 36 

Punctuation Maiks — Diastole. 37 



IV. 

V. 

VI. 



SECT. IL — GRAMMATIC2VL FORMS. 

Division 0/ the Parts 0/ Speech. — Injlection. 

CuAPT. L — The Scbstaktive. 



Different kinds of Substantives. . . 39 

Gender of Substantives 40 

Number, Case aad Decleusiou ... 41 



First Declension 42 

I. Feminines 43 

II. Masculines 44 



xu 



CONTENTS. 



Quantity and Accentuation . § 45 

Second Declension 46 

Contraction of the second Dec. 47 
Attic second Declension. ... 48 

Accentuation 49 

Eemarks on Gender 50 

Third Declension 51 

Eemarks on the Case-endings 52, 53 

Paradigms 54—63 

Quantity 64 

Accentuation 65 



Gender 66 

Anomalous Nouns 67, 68 

Defective Nouns 69 

Interchange of Forms in the 

Declensions 70 — 72 

I. Redundant Nouns 70 

II. Heteroclites 71 

III. Metaplasts 72 

Indeclinable and Defective 

Nouns 73 



Chapt. II. — The Adjective 4J«rD Paeticiple. 



Nature, Gender and Declension 74 

Accentuation 75 

Summary of the Adjective and 

Part. Endings 76—80 

I. Adjectives and Partici- 
ples of three Endings. . 76, 77 
II. Adjectives of two Endings 78, 79 
III. Adjectives of one Ending 80 



Comparison of Adjectives 81 

A. -Tcpos, -Tooa, -Tepov; -raroSf 

-rdrr], -Ta'rtv 82 

B. -iuu, -lOV, -Qll/y -OV] -IffTOSf -71, 

-ov 83 

Anomalous forms of Comparison. 84 

Comparison of Adverbs 85 



Chapt. III. — The Peokoux. 



Nature and Division of Pronouns 86 

I. Personal Pronouns 87-90 

II. Demonstrative Pronouns 91 
III. Relative Pronouns 92 



IV. Indefinite and Interrogative 

Pronouns 93 

Correlative Pronouns 94 

Lengthening of the Pronoun 95 



Chapt. IV. — The Numeeals. 



Nature and Division of Numerals 96 
Numeral Signs 97 



Principal classes of Numerals. ... 98 
Remarks on the Numerals 99 



Chapt. V. — The Adveeb. 
Nature and Division of Adverbs 100 I Formation of Adverbs . 



101 



Chapt. VI. — The Veeb. 



Nature and Division of the Verb 102 

Classes 102 

Tenses 103 

Modes 104 

Infinitive and Participle 105 

Persons and Numbers 106 

Conjugation of Verbs in -« 107 

Stem, Augment, Reduplication 

and Characteristic 108 

Inflection-endings 109 

a. Tense-characteristic and 

Tense-endings 110 

b. Personal-endings and Mode- 

vowels 11 1 — 1 14 

Full Paradigm of a Regular Verb 115 
Remarks on the Inflection-endings 116 
Remarks on the Formation of the 
Attic Future 117 



Accentuation of the Verb 118 

Further view of Aug. and Redup. 119 

(a) Syllabic Augment 120 

(b) Temporal Augment. . 121, 122 

Reduplication 123 

Attic Reduplication 124 

Aug. and Redup. in Compounds 125-6 
Formation of the Tenses of Verbs 

in -o) 127 — 167 

Division of Verbs in -« according 

to the Characteristic 127 

Derivation of Tenses 128 

I. Formation of the Tenses of 

Pure Verbs 129 

a. With a short Characteristic- 

vowel 13C 

b. With (T in Aor. Pass, and Perf. 

Mid. or Pass 131 



CONTENTS. 



XIU 



Paradigms of Pure Verbs § 132—137 

A. Uncon traded Pure Verbs. . 132 

(a) Without <r in the Mid. or 

Pass 132 

(b) With (T in the Mid. and 

Pass 133 

B. Contract Pure Verbs... 134 — 136 
Remarks on contract verbs... 137 

11. Formation of the Tenses of 

Impure Verbs 138 

Strengthening of the Stem 139 

Variation of the Stem-vowel. . . . 140 
Remarks on the Secondary Tenses 141 

A. Formation of the Tenses of 

Mute Verbs 142—144 

Remarks on the Characteristic 143 
Paradigms of Mute Verbs 145 — 148 

B. Formation of the Tenses of 

Liquid Verbs 149 

Paradigms 150—153 

Peculiarities in the Formation of 

Single Verbs 154 

Syncope 155 

Metathesis 156 

Verbs in -cwwith Stem of the Pres. 

strengthened 157 

I. Verbs with v inserted 1 58 

II. Verbs with the syllable vf 159 

ni. Verbs with av or auv 160 

IV. Verbs in -okw, -iaKw 161 

V. Verbs in -3a. 162 

VI. Verbs with Reduplication. 163 
VII. Verbs whose Pure Stem- 
vowel o is strengthened by i 164 
VIII. Verbs which assume «... 165 
Verbs which assume an < in form- 
ing the Tenses 166 

Verbs whose Tenses are formed 

from different Roots 167 

Conjugation of Verbs in -/u . . . . 168 
Division of Verbs in -fxi 169 



Characteristic-vowel and Strength- 
ening of the Stem of the Pres. ^170 

Mode-vowels 171 

Personal-endings 172 

Formation of the Tenses. . . 173, 174 

Paradigms 175 

Remarks on the Paradigms 176 

Summary of Verbs in -fxi. . 172 — 190 

I. Verbs in -fu which annex the 

Personal-endings immediate- 
ly to the Stem-vowel 177 

(a)' Verbs in -a 177 

♦77/11 178 

Deponents 179 

(b) Verbs in -e 180 

(c) Verbs :r -1 : EZ/xj. — Eifii. . . 181 

II. Verbs in -/*» which annex yvv 

or w to the Stem- vowel . . 182 

Formation of the Tenses 182 

Summary of this class of Verbs 183 

—188 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Vowel 183—186 

(a) in -a 183 

(b) in -€ 184 

(c) in-i 185 

(d) in-o 186 

B. Verbs w^hose Stem ends in a 

Consonant 187,188 

(a) in a Mute 187 

(b) in a Liquid 188 

Inflection of *«?/*« and ^tiai 189, 190 

Verbs in -« analogous in Forma- 
tion to those in -m . . 191 — 196 
I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid- 
dle 191, 192 

IL Perf. and Plup. Act.. . 193, 194 

Olia and KoiKa 1 95 

III. Present and Imperfect. ... 196 
Summary of Deponent Passives. 197 
Summarv of Active Verbs with a 
Mid. Fut 198 



Chapt. VII. — Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections 199 



PECLXIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. 



A. Orthography. 
Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 200 

Interchange of the Vowels 201 

Interchange of the Consonants 202-204 

Change of the Vowels 205-207 

Contraction, Diaeresis 205 

Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Par- 

agogic, Hiatus 206 

Lengthening and Shortening of 
the Vowels. — Syncope. — Apo- 

coj/e 207 

B 



Prothesis and Insertion of Vowels 207 

Changes of Consonants 208 

Quantitv 209 

h. Dialectic Forms. 

Declensions 210- 214 

Homeric Suffix <pi or ^iv 210 

First Declension 211 

Second Declension 21S 

Third Declension 213 

Anomalous and Defective 
Words. Metaplasts 214 



XIV 



CONTENTS. 



The Adjective §215 

Comparison 216 

Pronouns 217 

Numerals 218 

The Verb 219-230 

Augment and Reduplication . . 219 
Personal-endings and Mode- 
vowels 220 

Epic and Ionic Iterative Form 221 
Contraction and Resolution in 
Verbs 222 



Formation of the Tenses ... § 223 

Conjugation in -^t ....... . 224 

E(>i and Eifii 225, 226 

Verbs in -a> vsdth a Sec. Aor. an- 
alogous to Verbs in -/tt . . . . 227 

Verbs in -w with a Perf. and 
Plup. Act. like Verbs in -fii 228 

Verbs in -w with a Pres. and 
Impf. Act. like Verbs in -fii 229 

List of Dialectic Verbs 230 



SECT. III.— FORMATION OF WORDS. 



Eadical Words, StemSjDerivatives 231 

A. Derivation 232-235 

I. Verbs 232 

II. Substantives 233 



III. Adjectives 234 

IV. Adverbs 235 

B. Compounds 236 

Formation of Compounds 237 



SYNTAX. 

SECT.! — SYNTAX OF THE SBIPLE SENTENCE. 

Chapt. I. — Parts op a Simple Sentence. 



Nature of a Sentence. — Subject 
and Predicate 238 

Comparison. Attribute and Ob- 
ject 239 

Agreement 240 

Exceptions to the general rules of 
Agreement 241 

Agreement when there are several 
Subjects 242 

Remarks on Peculiarities in use of 
Number 243 

The Article 244 

Position of the Article 245 

Use of the Article with Pronouns 

and Numerals 246 

The Article as a Demon, and 
Rel. Pronoun 247 



Classes of Verbs 248 

A. Active form 249 

B. JVIiddle 250 

C. Passive 251 

Remarks on Deponents 252 

Tenses and Modes 253 

A. Particular View of the Tenses 254 

(a) Principal tenses: Pres., 
Perf., Fut 255 

(b) Hist. Tenses : Aor., Impf, 

Plup 256 

Tenses of the Subord. Modes 257 

B. Particular View of the Modes 258 
Use of the Subj.,Opt.and Imp. 259 

The Modes ^^^th &v 260 

Position and Repetition of &v 251 



Chapt. n. — Attkibutiye Construction. 



Ellipsis of the Substantive .... 263 
(a) Attributive Adjective .... 264 



(b) Attributive Grenitive .... 265 

(c) Apposition 266 



Chapt. m. — Objective Construction. 



The Cases 268 

Nominative and Vocative . . . 269 
(1) Genitive 270 

A. Local Relation 271 

B. Causal Relation 272 

(a) Active Genitive 273 

(b) Causal Genitive 274 



I 



(c) Gren. denoting mutual re- 
lations 275 

(2) Accusative 276 

A. Local Relation 277 

B. Causal Relation 278 

(a) Ace. denoting effect . . . 278 

(b) Acc.of the Object on which 

the action is performed . 279 



CONTEJ^TS. 



XV 



Two Accusatives ^280 

Remarks on the Ace. with the 

Passive 281 

(3) Dative 282 

A. Local Dative 283 

B. Dative as a personal Object 284 

C. Dative of the thing 285 

n. Construction of Prepositions . 286 



(1) Prepositions with the Gren. 

only § 287, 288 

(2) With the Dative only . . . .' 289 

(3) With the Accusative' onlv . 290 

(4) With the Gen. and Ace, 291-294 

(5) With the Gen., Dat. and 

Ace 295-299 

Remarks on peculiarities of the 

Prepositions 300 



Chapt. IV. — The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, Attribute and 

Object. 



I. Personal Pronouns 302 

II. Remaining Pronouns 303 



Prospective and Retrospective 
Use of the Pronoun 304 



Chapt. V. — The Infinitive and Participle used as an Attributb 

AND Object. 



A. The Infinitive 305 

(I) Inf. as an Object without 

the Article 306 

Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
with the Inf. 307 

(II) Inf. with the Article .... 308 

B. The Participle 309 

(I) The Part, as the Comple- 
ment of the Verb .... 310 



Remarks on the Inter- 
change of the Part, and 

the Inf. 311 

(II) Part, used to express Ad- 
verbial Subordinate Re- 
lations 312 

Special Peculiarities in the 
Participial Construction 313 



Chapt. VI. — Tile Adverbial Objective. 



A. A^, Btjto, ^»', Srjdfv, Sr]irovbfUy 

Sai 315 

B. Coniinnative Advcbs 316 



C. Empliatic ^ . 76, xcp, rol 317 

D. Mc<rative i.^iLi ^^-^ 318 



SECT, n. — SYNTAX OF THE COilPOUNT) SENTENCE. 
Chapt. VIL A. — Coordination. 



Diflercnt Forms of Coordinate 

Sentences 320 

I. Copulative Coordinate Sen- 
tences 321 

II. Adversative Coordinate Sen- 
tences 322 



III. Disjunctive Coordinate Sen- 
tences 323 

IV. Causal Coordinate Sen- 
tences 324 

Remarks on Asyndeton 325 



Chapt. VIII. B. — Subordination. 



Principal and Subordinate Sen- 
tences 326 

Sequence of Subjunctive Tenses 

in Subordinate Sentences 327» 

Use of Modes in Subordinate 

Clauses 327b 

I. Substantive Clauses 328 

A. Introduced by 8tj or ws, that 329 

B. Introduced by Jva, so //ui/, etc 330 

II. Adjective Clauses 331 



Agreement of the Rel. Pron. . . 332 
Modes in Adjective Clauses . . 333 
Connection of several Adjective 

Clauses 33-« 

Int< ' ■ • of the Subordinate 

Ci ith the Adj. Clause 334 
III. Adverbial Clauses 335 

A. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336 

B. Adverbial Clauses of Time 337 

C. Causal Adv. Clauses . 338 — 340 



XVI 



CONTENTS. 



I. Denoting Ground or 

Cause § 338 

11. Denoting Condition 339, 340 
III. Denoting Consequence 

or Effect 341 



D. Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Manner and Quantity 342, 343 
I. Comparative Adv.Clauses 

denoting Manner 342 

11. Comparative Adv.Clauses 
denoting Quantity 343 



Chapt. IX. — Intekeogative Sentences. 
I. Interrogatives 344 Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma, 



II. Oblique Discourse 345 

III. Special Peculiarities in the 
Construction of Words and Sen- 
tences 346, 347 



Contraction, Pleonasm 346 

Anacoluthon 347 



Chapt. X. — Position of Words 348 



Appendix A. — Versification Page 574 
Appendix B. Abbreviations 
in writing 587 



Index of Subjects Page 589 

Greek Index 602 

Index for the Forms of Verbs 614 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

Aesch. Aeschylus, Ag. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th. — Ar. Aristophanes.— 
Dem. Demosthenes, 01. Olynth., Ph. Philipp., Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph. 
Aphobus. — 'Eur. Euripides, M.. Medea, C. Cyclops, H. Hecuba, 0. Orestes, H. F. 
Hercules Furens, Hipp. Hippolytus. — Her. Herodotus. — Isae. Isaeus. — Lys. Ly- 
sias. — PI. Plato, Cr. Crito, L. Leges, Th. Theages, Men. 3Ieno, Soph. Sophista, 
Crat. Cratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebits, Rp. Respuhlica. — Soph. Sopho- 
cles, O. C. Oedipus Colo7}eus, O. R. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Philoctetes, 
Aj. Ajax, El. Electra, — X. Xenophon, C. Commentarii, An. Atiabasis, H. Hellen 
tea, S. Symposiu7)i, R. Ath. Respuhlica Atheniens., R. L. Respubl. Lacedaem., O. 
Oeconomicus, Ag. Agesilaus, R. Equ. /il. Equestris. 



GREEK GRAMMAR. 



DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 

1. The Greek language was divide'd into many difFerent 
dialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the 
^olic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The ^olic prevailed in 
Boeotia, Thessaly, and in the ^olian colonies in Asia 
Minor; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the 
Dorian colonies in Asia INDnor, Italy, and Sicily ; the 
Ionic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Attic, in 
Attica. 

2. The ^olic and Doric dialects are characterized by 
harshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, 
which is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The 
Attic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two 
former and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and 
pleasant forms of the Ionic \vith the strong and full-toned 
forms of the Doric. 

3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the 
Later Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Homv. 
and of his school, although these poets were not satisfied 
with their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance 
with the true principles of art, to select, from all the 
dialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of 
their poetry ; and to employ — since the regular laws of 
versification had much influence in forming the language 

2 



14 GREEK DIALECTS. 

— a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epic, 
or Homeric. This had a great effect on the language of 
all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the 
later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born 
484 B. c, and of Hippocrates, b. 460 b. c. 

4. The Attic dialect is divided, in accordance with cer- 
tain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Latei 
Attic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 b. c. ; the 
tragic poets ; -^schylus, who died 456 b. c. ; Sophocles, 
b. 497 B. c, d. 405 b. c. ; Euripides, b. 480 b. c. ; and the 
more ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 b. c. j 
by several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 b. c, and An- 
docides, b. 467 b. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato, 
b. 430 B. c. ; Xenophon, b. 447 b. c. ; and the orator Iso- 
crates, b. b. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De- 
mosthenes, b. 385 B. c, and other orators, the later comic 
writers, and the prose authors in more recent times, who 
sought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier 
writers. 

5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed 
by Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be 
the common written language. As it extended, not only 
over all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of 
Syria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the 
introduction of foreign forms and words, and it then 
received the name of the Common, or Hellenic language, 
ri KOLvr), or ' EKkrjvLKT] Bcd\,€KTo<;. It was used, e. g. by Apol* 
iodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



SECTION I. 



CHAPTER L 



Lett 


ers : 


and Sounds 


of t.ie L 


aiiguage. 






^ 1. Alp. 


habet. 




The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty- 


four letters. 


FOBM. 


Sound. 


Name. 


V A 


a 


a 


^A\(f>a 


Alpha 


•:. B 


^ 


b 


Brira 


Beta 


1r 


7 


g 


rdfjLfia 


Gamma 


1^ 


8 


d 


AiXra 


Delta 


E 


€ 


e short 


^EyjrlXop 


Epsllon 


\z 


K 


z 


Zijra 


Zeta 


?>H 


v 


elong 


"Hra 


Eta 


00 


^6 


th 


GjJTa 


Theta 


■»! 


I 


• 

1 


^loiTa 


Iota 


:dk 


K 


k 


Kairira 


Kappa 


bA 


\ 


1 


AdfjL^Ba 


Lambda 


DM 


H' 


m 


Mv 


Mu 


;n 


V 


n 


NO 


Nu 


H 


f 


X 


at 


Xi 








short 


*0 fUKpOP 


Omikron 


In 


TT 


P 


m 


Pi 


Ip 


P 


r 


•Pw 


Kho 


6S 


0-9 


s 


Xl'yfui 


Sigma 


7T 


T 


t 


Tav 


Tau 


T 


V 


u 


"T^irlXov 


Upsllon 


* 


^ 


ph 


^l 


Phi 


X 


X 


eh 


XI 


Chi 


*• 


'dr 


ps 


W2 


Psi 


n 


(O 


olong 


'*I2fM€ya 


Omega. 



16 SOUNDS OF PAETICULAR LETTERS. [♦ Z 

Eemabk 1. Sigma at the end of a word takes the fonn s, e. g. treia-fiSs, in 
most editions of the classics. This small s is also used in the middle of com- 
pound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such 
a usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. irpos<p4pu or 
irpo(r<pep6Df Suyyej/^s or Svcyevfis. 

Eem. 2. When a and t come together, both letters may be expressed by one 
character, s-, Sti, or Stigma. 

Eem. 3. Besides their use as alphabetic characters, e and v were originally 
used as mere marks of aspiration, the former for the spiritus asper {§ 6), for which 
in the earliest times H was also employed, the latter for the Digamma (§ 25) ; 
hence, as letters, they were called, in opposition to their use as aspirates, e \pi\6y 
and v\pi\6u, i. e. unaspirated. Omicron and Omega (small and large o) derive 
their name from their relative size. 

Eem. 4. The principle on which most of the ivytters of the Greek alphabet 
are named, is entirely different from that adopted in this country and among 
the European nations, at the present day. We name each letter by the sound 
It represents, as a, Z>, c, adding a vowel to the consonants in order to vocalize 
them. But among the Orientals, from whom the Greek alphabet was derived^ 
the name was not determined by the sound of the letter. They gave their 
letters the name of some familiar object, the first sound or syllable of which 
was the alphabetic character to be represented. For example, the Phoenicians 
and Hebrews called the first letter of the alphabet Aleph (Greek Alpha), which 
means an ox : now the first sound or syllable of Aleph is the character or 
element to be i*epresented. The second letter was Beth (Greek Beta), a house, 
the first sound of which is the character to be represented. The third is Gimel 
( Greek Gamma), a camel. This mode of jj^ming letters, undoubtedly originated 
from the custom of designating those letters by the picture of the object from 
which they derived the name, instead of by the characters now used. Thus 
Aleph was represented by the picture of an ox, Beth by that of a house, etc. 

^ 2a. Sounds of particular Letters. 

The sound of the letters is indicated by the Eoman characters opposite to 
them. The following remarks on particular letters are all that is needed in 
addition : — 

Eemaek. The sounds given to the following letters are those more usually 
adopted in pronouncing the Greek in New England ; but the usage is not 
entirely uniform. 

A has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same 
syllable, e. g. xo-^-^ds; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a. single 
consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or i, e. g. 
avaa-Toia-ecDs, crTpaTid>Tr]s ; also, when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a 
syllable not final, e. g. fiey-d-Xii], arpa-rSs] it has the sound of a in father, when 
it is followed by a single p, in the same syllable, and also when it ends a word ; 
but a final in monosyllables has the sound of a in fate, e. g. Bdp-^arpos, ydp. 



i 2b.] BRIEF HISTORY OF THE ALPHABET. \1 

7, before 7, k, x» ^^^ l» ^^s the sound of ng in angle, or nasal 71 m ancle, e. g 
6,yyf\oSy ang-gslos ; KKayyr}, clangor; 'Ayxia-qs, Anchises (Angchises) ; avjKoirr], 
syncope ; \dpvy^, larynx. 7 before vowels always has the hard sound, like g in 
get ; also before consonants, except 7, k, x> f > e. g. 7/70^. 

6 has the sound of short e in 7«e/, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
game syllable, e. g. fi4y-as, fifT-d ; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a 
word or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. 7*, ^e-w, $a(Tt\- 

f-fS. ' 

t\ has the sound of e in me, e. g. ikovi]. 

h has the sound of th in thick, e. g. ^dyaros. 

I has the sound of i in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a 
syllable by itself, e. g. i\iri-(ri, 5ri, ireS-l-ov ; the sound of i in pin, when it is 
followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. irpiV, Kiy-Svyos. 

K always has the hard sound of k, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g. 
KiKiKia, Cilicia ; KfKpoxp, Cecrops ; KiKcpwy, Cicero. 

I, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of z, e. g. {eVos ; else- 
where, the sound of x, e. g. Sio^uw, irpS^iy, &ua^. 

o has the sound of short in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
same syllable, e. g. \6y-os, Kv-pos ; the sound of long in go, when it ends a 
word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. r6, vn6y ^o-6s, ro^-o-njs. 

tr has the sharp sound of s in son ; except it stands before /x, in the middle 
of a word, or at the end of a word after tj or «, where it has the sound of z, 
e. g. <TKT]v{], voixifffia, yns, KdXws : before 1 it does not have the sound of sh, as in 
Latin, but retains its simple sound, e. g. ^Aala =A-si-a, not A-shi-a. 

T followed by ( has its simple sound, never the sound of sli, as in Latin, e. g. 
TaXarla = Galati-a, not Galashi-a ; Kptrlas =Kriti-as, not Krishi-<is ; Aiyvirrioi. 

V has the sound of u in tulip, e. g. rvxn j t>ut before p the sound of u in pure, 
e. g. TTvp, yf(pvpa. 

X has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. raxvs. 

w has the sound of long o in note, e. g. &.yu. 



§ 2b. Brief history of the Alphabet . 

1. The Greeks derived most of their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Ac- 
cording to the common tradition, letters were brought into Greece by Cadmus, 
a Phanician. The Phoenician alphabet, being nearly the same as the Hebrew, ', 
consisted of 22 letters, the names of which are, Aleph, Beth, Gimel, Daleth, ! 
He,(Vau]i Zain, Heth, Teth, Jod, Kaph, Lamed, Mim, Nun, Samech, Oin, Pe, 
(Tsadej ( Koph) Resch. Schin, Thau. Van. the 6th letter of the Phoenician 
alphabet, was rejected by the Greeks as an alphabetic character, and used only 
as the numeral sign for 6. Koph (Greek Koppa), the 19th letter of the Phoe- 
nician alphabet, was also rejected, because its sound so nearly resembled that 
of Kaph (Greek Kappa), and was used as the numeral sign for 100. Zain 
and Tsade were modifications of the same sound ; Tsade. like the Greek Zeta. 

2* 



18 ORGANS OF SPEECH. [} 3, 

represents the sound of both, and takes the place of Zain, becoming the 6th 
letter of the Greek alphabet, while Zain (Greek San, Sampi), was rejected as an 
alphabetic character, and used as a numerical sign for 900. Thus 19 letters of 
the Phoenician alphabet were adopted by the Greeks, as alphabetic characters. 
These are the first 19 letters of the present alphabet. To these the Greeks 
themselves added the five last letters of the alphabet, viz., u, ^, Xj ^t w. This 
seems to be the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet, 
though somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre- 
sents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., a, P, y, S, e, i, k, A, 

fl, V, O, IT, p, a, T, V. 

2. The alphabet was not brought at once into its present complete form. 
The old Attic alphabet contained but 21 letters. H was considered merely as 
a breathing, and the place of r] and <w was supplied by e and o, and that of ;// 
and I by *5 and X2, e. g. AI0EP [alHp), EX0PON (ix^pwy), *2TXAI {^vxai), 
X5TN {^iu). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the 
Persian war, by Simonides, who added E, Y, and n, and changed the breathing 
H, to the long vowel 97. The lonians first adopted the present full alphabet 
of 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full 
alphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions 'in the archonship of Euclides, 
B.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic 
inscriptions. 

3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces 
between the words, e. g. METAAETOTTONpinEXEIPno<f>02, i. e. ^uera 5e rov- 
Tov eiTre Xeipi(ro<(>os. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till 
very late. A document has been found in Egypt written in the cursive char- 
acter, 104 B. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that 
time. It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century. 

4. The early Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from 
right to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how- 
ever, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes 
were in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate- 
ly. This was called Pova-TpocpTjdSv^ because it resembled the tm-ning about of 

.oxen in ploughing. Solon's laws were written in this way. But in the time of 
Herodotus, the Greeks wrote only from left to right. 



§ 3. Organs of Sp eech. 

1. The organs of speech, used in forming or articulating 
words, are the palate, the tlii-oat, the tongue, and the hps. 

2. The sounds wliich are emitted almost ^vithout an}^ action 
of the tluoat, tongue, and hps, and \^''liicli proceed in the freest 
manner from the breast, are called Vowels; the rest, Conso- 
nants. 



♦ 4.] VOWELS. 19 



§ 4. Vowels . 

1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, t, v, which may be 
long or short, € and o, which are always short, rj and cd 
which are always long. The character (") over one of the 
vowels a, i, v, shows that the vowel is short ; (") that it is 
long ; (") that it may be either long or short, e. g. a, a, d. 

Remarf 1 a, I, and v are called the principal vowels, because they denote 
the principal sounds ; the other vowels are called subordinate, because their 
sounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of 6 is 
intermediate between a and t, the sound of o is intermediate between a and v ; 
7] is produced by lengthening 6 or o, a> by lengthening o. The relation of these 
vowels may be illustrated by the following diagram : — 

A 




2. When two vowels are so combined as to form but 
one sound, the sound so produced is called a diphthong. 
When both the vowels are sounded, the diphthong is called 
proper ; when only one, improper. 

3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the 
vowels a, e, o, v, t), cj, with the vowels c and v, thus : — 

o -f- 1 = oi, pronounced like ai in aisle, e. g. a3f|, 

a -{■ V =^ av, " " au in laud, " j/oCs, 

e -\- I = fly " " ei in sleight, " 5eii/6s, 



ri + 



{■ " " CM in feudal, » 



e7rA.eu<ra, rju^oj/, 



o -\- t =^ oiy " " oi in oil, " koiv6s, 
o -{- V = ovj *' " ou in sound, " ovpau6sj 
V -\- I = vif " " whi in ivhine, " vlos, 
« -j- " = *"'> (o^^ylo^ic,) " " ou in sound, " 0}vr6s ; also the im- 
proper diphthongs, a, 77, « (i. e. o -}- i, tj -)- j, <» -f- 1) ; " al<rxp^, Kepcf, rfj, r^. 

Rem. 2. The pronunciation of the diphtliongs a, 77, q> is the same as that of 
the simple vowels d, 17, «, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the i a 
slight sound after the other vowel. 

Rem. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of (jt, ri, ai, is placed in a 
line witli the vowels, but is not pronounced, c. g. TXil KAAni=Ty koA.^, t^ 
AiSjfy but ^5p. 



20 VOWELS. [^ 4. 

Eem. 4. The Iota subscript, which in the most flourishing period of the 
Greek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and 
was either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which it 
belonged. It was first written under the vowel in the thirteenth century. 

Eem. 5. The following examples will show how the Eomans sounded the 
diphthongs : ai is expressed by the diphthong ae, et by I and c, oi by oe, ovhju] 
V was generally expressed by y, e. g. 

*a7S/3os, Phaedrus ; Edpos, Eurus ; 0/JOKey, Thraces ; 

TAavKos, Glaucus ; 'Boiaria, Bceotia ; ®pfj<Ta'a, Thressa ; 

NelXos, Nilus ; Movffa, Musa ; rpayecSSs, tragoedus ; 

AvKeTov, Lyceum; EiKel^via, Ilithyia; Kvpos, Cyrus. 

In words adopted later, the Eomans exprei^ed co by o, as cpS-f], ode. 

Eem. 6. When two vowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are tc 
be pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placet 
over the second vowel (t, u), e. g. alS6i, for al5o7, oi's, &i>irj/os. If the acute 
accent is on the t or v, it is placed between the points ; if the circumflex, over 
them, as aiSrjs, /cAei'Si, irpats. 

Eem. 7. The pronunciation given under § 2a, as well as that given to the 
diphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The 
original pronunciarlcoi of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the commo* cus- 
tom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of 
their own language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth 
century, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun- 
ciation defended by Eeuchlin ' in the same century, corresponds nearly with 
the modern Greek. 

^ For the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol- 
lowing explanation of the Eeuchlinian is extracted from the Greek Grammar 
of Sophocles: "A is pronoimced like a m. father, far. /3, 7, 5, like h,g hard, 
d; in later times, like Eomaic )8, 7, 5. Before ac, 7, x> l> 7 had the soimd of 
ng in hang, e, like Eomaic e, or Italian e. (, like z, but stronger, tj, like French 
^, as in f^te. &, like th in thin, ether, saith. j, like i in machine, k, like k\ 
A, /i, like I, m, respectively, j/, like n. At the end of a word it was often pro- 
nounced and written as if it were a part of the next word. |, in the Attic 
dialect, like |s 5 in the other dialects, like ks. In later times, the sound ks pre- 
vailed. 0, like Eomaic 0, or Italian 0. ir, like p. p, like r. At the begin- 
ning of a word it was rolled; when it was doubled, only the second one was 
rolled. It was rolled, also, after 3-, </>, x* <^', like s in soft, past. Before /t, it 
was, in later times, sounded like ^, and even changed into ^ in writing ; as 
Zfxvpva, for "X/jLvpua, in an inscription, t, like t in tell, strong, v, like French u. 
<p, \ikcf, but stronger. x> ^^^^ Eomaic x» German ch, or Spanish j (x). j|^, in 
the Attic dialect, like ^s ; in the other dialects, like iry. In later times, the 
sound ITS prevailed, w, like in note, nearly. When a consonant was doubfed 
in writing, it was doubled also in pronunciation. During the most flourishing 
period of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard 



♦ 5.] CONSONANTS. 21 



§ 5. Consonants. 

1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the dif- 
ferent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into — 

Palatals, y /c '^(^ 
Linguals, B r^ v\ p a, 
Labials, /8 tt </> /l6. 

Remark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of 
speech, are called cognate consonants ; thus y, k, x '-^^ cognate consonants. 

2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater 
or the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma- 
tion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes. 

(a) The Breathings form a kind of transition from the 
vowels to the consonants. There are three breath- 
ings : the lingual <t; the Spiritus Asper ('), correspond- 
ing to our /t (§ 6) ; and the labial F (Digamma) ; on 
the last, see the remarks upon the Dialects. 

(b) The Liquids, \ /jl v p, are so called, because they easily 
coalesce with the other consonants. 

Rem. 2. The Breathings and Liquids are also included under the conimo:i 
name of semivowels, forming a kind of transition to the full vowels. 



Dtrring the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age. 
the diphthongs cu, 6i, ou, had each the power of a single vowel, cu, like ai in 
aisle; in later times, like 17, or French i ; during the latter part of the brazen 
age, like e. 01/, like ou in our, house; in later times, like ay, af. «<, like ei in 
freight^ nearly ; in later times, like 1. During the silver and brazen ages, € was 
often prefixed to t long, merely to mark its quantity; as Kf^eivta, ruacu, ranrjaau. 
And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short i was represented by 
«* ; as EiciScopo;, EiVojcpaTrjs, yvfi.ycurtiapx'ho'o-^- <i'» like eh-oo rapidly pro- 
nounced ; in later times, like ey, ef. ot, like oi in oil, nearly, ov, like oh-oo 
rapidly pronounced ; in later times, like 00 in moon, or like French ou, Italian «. 
When the Boeotians used ov for u, they pronounced it long or short, according 
as the original v was long or short ; thiw, in oGSwp, oovvy it was short, like 00 in 
hooh ; in oCAt?, kaovXia, long, like 00 in moon, w, like wi in twist ; ui, like whi in 
whip; in later times, like v. As to the diphthongs a, r), <^, du, rju, a>u, tney 
differed from ai, €i, oi, au, cu, ov only in the prolongation of the first vowel. 
In later times, qi, p, tp were pronormced lik« d, tj, w, respectively." — Tb. 



22 



BREATHINGS. 



[♦«. 



(c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the 
organs of speech ; they are, yS73^/c7rT</)%. 

3. The Mutes are divided, 

(a) According to the organ of speech used in pronouncing 
them, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three 
Labials ; 

(b) According to their names, .nto tijree Kappa, three 
Tau, and three Pi-mutes ; 

(c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth, 
three medial, and three rough Mutes. 

Rem. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold 
point of view, e. g. 7 may be called a palatal, a kappa-mute, or a medial, ac- 
cording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pronounced, its 
name, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu- 
late it than a rough mute. 





SMOOTH. 


MEDIAL. 


ROUGH. 




Palatals 


K 


y 


X 


Kappa-mutes 
Tan -mutes 


Linguals 


T 


8 


& 


Labials 


TT 


iS 


</> 


Pi-mutes 



Rem. 4. The consonants, which are produced by the same effort of the 
organs, are called coordinate, e. g. the smooth mutes, k, it, t, are coordinate. 

4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breath- 
ing cr, three double consonants originate, — 

«|/ from TTtr jSo* <p(r, as rvypw {ira-), x°-^^ (j^o"), KaT7j\i;|/ (^o")? 

I from Kor ya X""? ^^ K6pa^ {'^(^)i Ae|&) (yo'), oyv^ {x'^)> 

^ is not, like \|/ and ^, to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con- 
sonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft «• 
Only in the adverbs in ^e, is ^ to be considered as composed of <r5, e. g. 
. *ASrr}vaC€ instead of 'Ai^yosSe; also, fivCvJ^ {close), for ^vcrd-rju (from fivveoo, 
to stop, Perf. fi^fiva-fj-aL). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition 
of sounds, as when the ^olic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of 
a word, cS instead of ^, e. g. fieXlaSerai for /xeA^^erai. 

§ 6. Breathings. 
1. Every word beginning with a vowel has a smooth or 
a rough Breathing; the former (Spiritus Lenis) is indi- 



W 7, 8] HIATUS. 23 

cated by the mark ( ' ) ; the latter (Spiritus Asper) by the j 
mark ( ' ). The rough breathing answers to the English 1 
and Latin A, e. g. laropia, Jiistoria^ history. The smooth \ 
breathing is connected with every vowel which has not the ' 
rough ; but the smooth has no influence on the pronuncia- 
tion, e. g. ^AiroWcoVi Apollo. 

Remark 1. With diphthongs, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, 
e. g. oTos, 6v3t5s, avriKa. But when the improper diphthongs, a, 77, a>, are capital 
letters, the breathing is placed over the first vowel, as these three diphthongs 
are regarded, to a certain extent, as simple vowels, e. g. "AxStjs (^5rjs) ; '^Hi,''Xlt 

Rem. 2. Originally, the Greeks had no mark for the smooth breathing. The 
rough breathing was at first denoted by E or H. But when H came to be used 
as a vowel, Aristophanes of Byzantium, about 200 years b. c, divided it into 
two characters I- and i, the former as the sign of the rough breathing, the 
latter of the smooth. Later, these became ( "") and ( ), and at last { * ) and ( ' ). 

Rem. 3. The liquid p at the beginning of words has the rough breathing,* 
e. g. ^dfiSos. When two p's come together, the first has the smooth breathing, 
the last the rough, e. g. nu/3^os, Pyrrhus ; but some editors omit both breath- 
ings, e. g. Uvppos. 

Rem. 4. At the beginning of a word, v always has the rough breathing, 1 
except in the ^olic dialect. 



CHANGES OF LETTERS. 

§ 7. General RemarJc. 

Both the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of 
changes. These changes result from the tendency of the 
language to euphony, from their grammatical significance, and 
from the difference of dialects. The last will be considered 
in treating of the Dialects. 



I. Changes of the Vowels. 

k 8. Hiatus. 

The concurrence of two vowels in two successive sylla- 
bles or words, occasions a harshness in the pronunciation. 



24 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. [f 9. 

called Hiatus. This is avoided by Contraction, Crasis, 
Synizesis, and Elision. 

Eemaek 1. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly averse to the 
Hiatus of two vowels in two successive words ; among the prose-writers, the 
orators sought most carefully to avoid it. 

Rem. 2. In the Iambuses of the tragic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in the 
interrogative rl; what? e.g. Tt odv ,- ri elires ,- among the comic poets, its use is 
mostly confined to ri, '6ri, ire pi, &, e.g. on is, on ovxi, Tepl vfiwy, also in ovSe 
(fx-nSe) els (4V), ne unus quidem, to distinguish it from ovdeis, nullus. In addition 
to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in the 
Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited 
to special cases ; for example, it occurs with interjections and imperatives, e. g. 
S>,vai, &ua (up!), iS^t, as r^t, l[^i fioi Traidv, Soph. Ph. 832; oAA.' &va, cf iSpd 
va>y, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus ia the Epic dialect, see § 200. 



§ 9. A. Contraction of Vowels. 

Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the 
same word into one long syllable. These contractions arise 
either from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels, 
in accordance with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical 
principles. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic, 
the latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow- 
ing contractions occur : — 



I. Euphonic Contractions. 



(a) a -j- o = d as • oreAao = a^Ka. 
e -f. e = et *' ^ix^^ = <{>i\ei (Corap. No. U.) 
i -f~ * =^ * " ""(^pra = TTopri 

-{- = ov *' v6os = vovs 

(b) o -f- e 7^ . " rZ/xae = ri/ttd 
a -f- rj > " Tifidrjre = n/xan 

= a " vnoai" = v^do 



a -\- I = <f. " yrtpai = yflpa. 





I S 't f 'I 4 

a -f- } " nfxdofxev = nyLup-cv 

o -J- '«' ^ n/jLau/JLev = nfiwfiev 

o -f- et ) " n/jLciecs = nfi5.s 

a -T P } * Tifiarjs = Ti/i(ys 

a -\- 01 = y " npdoLfxi = n/jLc^/xi 

a -{- ov = 0) " rifidov = nfxS) 



(c) € 4- a = ij " Tc/xea = Teix»? (Comp. No. II.) 

t -|- t = 6i " Tiix^'i = reix^t 

€ -f- = OU " <plK4ofl^V = (pl\OVljL€V 

e -f- « {o}) = 0) (y) " (piXeo} = <pi\u, oarita = 6ffr4 



♦ 9.] GRAMMATICAL CONTRACTIONS. 25 



e +« 


= et 


as: 


(}>i\4eis = <pi\eis 


-+v 


= 1? 


(( 


(piXeris = (pi\T)S 


e -\- 01 


= 01 


(C 


<pi\4ois = (piXois 


e -j- ou 


= ow 


(( 


<pi\4ov = <pi\ov 


(d) 77 + 6 


= "n 


(( 


uAi^eerca = vKricrffa 


r/4-t 


= V 


u 


QpTjiaaa = Qpnaca 


7? +€t 


= v 


(C 


Tlfi'flClS = rifjL'^5 


(e) * + a 




(( 


vSprias = irdprls 


* +e 


= I 


C( 


TrSpries = irSpris 


(f)o+« 


= ft) 


u 


cu56a = cuSu (Comp. No. 11.) 


o+e 


= 01/ 


(( 


fiia-^oe = /xia^ov 


+r/ 


= (O 


(C 


fiia^Srjre = fiicr^oiTe 


o+t 


= 01 


(( 


ou56i = al5o7 


N -f~ '«' (^) 


= ft) (ft)) 


(( 


fjLicr^Sci) = jLttcTi^-a), TrX6(i} = ttA.^ 


Vo -(- at 


= at 


(( 


a,TrX6ai = airXai 


-}- €t 




C( 


fiia^od = ixi(r^o7 (Comp. Rem. 2.; 


-\-V 


= 01 


(( 


fj.icr^6Ti = fxia^oT * 


»o -|- ot 




(( 


fiKX^doLfjii ^= (jLi(r^o7ui 


vo -f- ou 


= ov 


(( 


IJLia^Sovcri = fj.i(T^ov(Ti 


(g) I' H- a 




(( 


ix^vas = Ix^tjs 


v+e 


= V 


(( 


Ix^ei = ix^vs 


u H-r? 




C( 


5eiKvvT]Tat = Set/cfOrat (rarely) 


(h)« + a 


= 0) 


u 


^paja = ¥ip(t) (only in Ace. of soEie Sub. of 


a> + I 


= <Sf) 


u 


\uii(TTos = \<f(TTos. [3d Dec. 



Remark 1. The above contractions take place in accordance with the fol- 
lowing principles: (1) Both vowels are retained and form a diphthong, e. g. 
relx^'i = Tclx^i, atB6'i =^ cuho7. (2) Both vowels coalesce into a cognate long 
vowel or diphthong, e. g. Tt/xao/xe*/ = rifiufxev, alSoa = cuSw. (3) A short vowel 
is absorbed by a diphthong or long vowel preceding or following it ; e. g. 
*<^i\€ft) = (piKw, <pi\eov = <pi\ov, vK-fjeffcra = vKrjarcra. (4) The short vowels, o, t, 
V, absorb the following vowel and become long ; e. g. riuae = rlfidy Ix^vas = 
tX>^vs. (5) A short vowel coalesces with the first vowel of a diphthong, ac- 
cording to the preceding principles ; when the second vowel is t, it is subscriljed 
with o, Tj, a>, but if it is any other vowel it is dropped ; e. g. rifidris — rifias, 
Ti^doifii = Tiix(fiii = Tifidov = Tt/icD, Tinrreai = ti^ttttj. 

n. Grammatical Contractions. 

(a) e -f- « = i?* particularly in the third Dec., e. g. rpi^pee = rpiiipT), yevet 

= yivT], 

(b) 6 -f- a = d in the second Dec, e. g. otrr^a = cxtto., xP^^^°- = XP"** 

(PI.), and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, e. g. IlfpiKke-ea =*» 
Ilept/cAed, K\4-fa = /cXed, vyi-ea = vyia ; in the Acc. PL 
Fem. of Adjectives in -eoy, -eo, -eov, e. g. xp^<^4-as = xp^f"? ; 
finally, in the Pern, of Adjectives in -eos, -4a, -eov, when 
these endings are preceded by a vowel or p, e. g. epe-eoy, 
€-6a, 4-€0t/ = epeoDs, ipea, ipeovyj apyvpeos, 4ay eoy = ovs, 
a, ovv. 

3 



26 CRASIS. [^ 10 

« -|- a = 77 in tiie !Fem. Sing, of adjectives in -eo5, not preceded by st 
vowel or p ; e. g. xputreo = XP^^V> xpy<reos = XP^^V^' 

€ -f- a = €i in Accusatives PL in eas of third Dec, e. g. ara<pe-as = <ra 
(peis ; so ir6Xeis, irTjxeis, eyxeAets, from TrSXeas, etc. 
{1) -\- a = d in Adjectives in 605^ or), oov., e.g. ottaJ-o = arrXa. 

-\- 7} = 71 in Adjectives in 60s, otj, 6ov, e. g. airXS-rj = ottA^. 

-{- a = 01/ in Accusative PL of fiovs ; so also fiei^oas = /itei^oy^, anrf 
the like. 

Eem. 2. The contraction of oet into ou is found only in the Inf. Act. of 
ferbs in Sw, and is accounted for from the fact that the Inf. originally ended in 
ev, not in eiv (consequently, not fiia^6^iv = ixkt^ovv, but ixur^6ev = fiic^ovv), 
and in adjectives in Seis, e. g. '07r<Jets = ^O-kovs, in which the root ends in oerr, 
and consequently the i does not belong to the root. On the accentuation of 
contract forms, see § 30. 

Rem. 3. The Tragic poets sometimes neglect the contractions on account 
of the measure, yet only in the lyric and anapestic passages, not written in the 
pure Attic dialect, e. g. /coAeco, Aesch. Ag. 147 ; rpoixiav. Prom. 542 5 yeUeoSf 
Sept. 936; iVeo, Soph. OC. 182; eipei, Trach, 114. 

Rem. 4. Sometisses the grammatical importance of the ending, or the form 
of the nominative, prevents the usual contraction, especially if the ending 
would thereby become doubtful. 

§ 10. B. Crasis. 

1. Crasis (Kpaai^) is the coalescence of the final and 
initial vowels of two successive words into one long sylla- 
ble, e. g. TO 6voiJLa=rovvo/jba, to e7ro9=Toi'7ro?. 

Remark 1. The mark of Crasis is the same as that of the Spiritus 
Lenis ( ' ), and is named Coronis. It is placed over the vowel or diphthong 
formed by Crasis, but is omitted when the word begins ■with a vowel or diph- 
thong so formed, because it would then coincide with the Spiritus Lenis, e. g. 
Tct aya^d = raya^d ; h &v = av, & 6.v^payire = Hv^pwir^. On the accentuation, 
see § 31, II ; on the change of the smooth Mute into the rough before the 
Spiritus Asper, as rh v5(op = ^ovSwpf see 4 below, and § 17, Rem. 3. 

2. Crasis is found only with closely connected words, the first 
of which is unimportant; hence it most frequently occurs, (a) 
with the article, e. g. 6 av'^p = avT^p, rov avSpos = ravSpos ; — (b) 
frequently with Kat and the interjection w, e. g. /cat ape-r^ = Kopcrq, 
w av^poiTTi = oiv-^pooTTC, w dyo^e = oiya^i, w avcx^ = wva^ ; — (c) some- 
what often in eyw with oTSa and oT/xat, e. g. ey(S8a, ryw/Aai; — 
(d) less often with the neuter relative o and a, as o eyw, a eyw = 
ovyw, dy(6; with rot, ftevrot, ovrot, particularly in comiection 



Ml.) MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. 27 

with av, apa, e. g. rav (seldom in prose), fievrav; rapa and ovrapa 
(poetic) ; but seldom with tt/do, e. g. irpovpyov for Trpo ^ou ; fre- 
quently in composition with the augment e, as irpovSioKa. 

3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly 
a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first ; on 
this principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is 
used only when the t belongs to the last of the two vowels, 
e. g. ^at etra = Kara, eyw oT8a = eyw5a ; on the contrary, koI en-ct- 
Ttt = KOTTCLTa ; ai ayaJ^aC = dya^ot, tw o;)(Xa) = Toj;(A.a). 

4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, the 
vowels of the article — even ov and m — -are combined with the 
following a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the 
aspirate is transferred to the long a, e. g. 6 avrip = dnjp, ol avSpts 
= aj/8pe9, TO aXq^is = rdXry^c?, to, oAAa = raXXa, tov avSpo^ = ravSpos, 
Tu) avBpC = ravSpC ; also, TOV avTOv = tovtov, t<3 avrul = ravrcp. 

Rem. 2. Also the forms of the article ending in o, o, ov, w, ip, o<, ai, among 
the Attic poets, combine with the first vowel of ertpos (Doric direpos), and 
form long o ; when the second word has the aspirate, as here, the preceding 
smooth mute must be changed into the cognate rough; see also § 17, Rem. 3 
e. g.: — 

Tck erepo = ^&T€pa 6 ercpos = arepos rod krepov = ^arepov 

T(f krepo) = ^arepcf) oi erepoi = arepoi cu trepai = S.T€pcu 

5. In Crasis, <u of the particle Kal coalesces with the follow- 
ing vowel, the a being sometimes retained and sometimes 
absorbed, e. g. koX iKiXvos = KaKctvos, koI av = Kavy koI cv = KOLv, KoX 
iyo) = Kayco [xat el = Kei, kol ets = /ceis, poetic], koI -^XS^ov = ktJXSov 
[moI ov = KOVj KOL €vSaifio)v = KevBouix(i)Vj poetic]. 

$ 11. Summary of the most co'tnmon instances of 

Crasis. 

(a) The following cases conform to the rules of contractioif 
given in § 9 : — 

o-j-a=d; o-f-€ = a; a-\-o = oi\ o-f-o = <w; 

o -\- e = OV] o-f-t=ot; '7-i"€ = '7j a -{- a = ot. 

(b) The following instances belong to Crasis only : — 

-(- u = ou as: rb S5a>p = ^nijSwp (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 
o -\- av = av " rh avr6 = ravr6 
• ■+- Oi = ^ ■'" h cdriov = T^riov 



-h oi 


= V 


as 


4-97 


= n 


u 


« + 6 


= CO 


u 


« 4" 


= w 


(( 


01 -\- a 


= a 


u 


01 -{- e 


= ov 


<( 


ov-{- € 


== ov 


u 


ov -\- 


= ov 


(( 


ov -\- V 


= ov 


C( 


7] +7] 


= v 


a 


a) -\- 01 


= 4? 


(( 


ou + 1? 


= •)7 


(( 


ov -f- ov 


:= OU 


(C 


at 4" f * 


= 9 


(C 



28 SYNIZESIS. ELISION. [^ 12, 13. 

6 olvos = ^vos 

rh Tjn^Tepou = ^rf/j-erepov {§ 17, Rem. 3.) 

fi4uroi. &,y = /xevT&v 

<roi icTTiv = (ToZcTTiVy fwi eS(J/c€t = fiov56K€i (both poetic, 

irov i(TTiv = iroZariv 

Tov hvofxmos = rovuSfxaros 

rod liSaTos = ^oUSaros (§17, Rem. 3.) 

TTJ vH'^p'f = ^fiepcf, (^ 17, Rem. 3.) 

iy(i} olSa = iy^da 

rod rjfieTepov = ^fxerepov, poetic. (§17, Rem. 3.) 

rod ovpavov = rovpavov 

Koi etra = K^ra 

(c) Here belong the examples given under § 10, 4 and 5. 



§ 12. C. Synizesis. 

1. Synizesis is the contraction in pronunciation of two 
vowels into one syllable, e. g. when fir) ov is pronounced as 
a monosyllable. It can occur only among the poets,^ but 
may have been used in the common colloquial language. 

Remaek. The difference between Contraction and Synizesis is, that in the 
ordinary Contraction and also in Crasis, the contraction is made in writing, 
e. g. <^t\« from <piX4<i), rovpavov from rov ovpavov ; but in Synizesis, it is made 
only in the pronunciation, both vowels or diphthongs being WTitten out in fall. 

2. In the Attic poets, Synizesis occurs almost exclusively 
between two words, viz., with liru, % 5> M^ followed by €l, ov, a, 
oLy e. g. cTret ov, rj ovSei? (dissyllable), /x^ o^ (monosyllable), /a^ 
aAAoi, eyo) ov (dissyllable), and eyw €i//,t S. Ph. 577 ; also, in a 
few single words and forms, e. g. ^eot (=^ot, monosyllable), 
cwpttKa (=a)paKa, trissyllable), dvewy/xeVos ( = dvavy/xo/o?, four sylla- 
bles), particularly in the Ionic- Attic Genitive -ews, as Oyja-iui^ 
(dissyllable). On Synizesis in Homer, see § 236. 

§ 13. D. Elision. 

1. Elision is the omission of a short final vowel before 
the initial vowel of the following word. It occurs also Id 
compounds, but the apostrophe is then omitted. 



4 14.] USE OF ELISION IN THE POETS. 29 

Remark 1. The mark of Elision is tne same as mat of the Spiritus Lenis, 
and is called apostrophe, as toOt' earny, yivon &v. 

Rem. 2. Elision differs from Crasis in that the former elides the vowel, 
while the latter lengthens it, e. g. a\A' &y€ (Elision), to. ^AAa = toAAo (Crasis). 
This distinction, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a 
long vowel or diphthong, e. g. rh axn6 = ravrS. 

2. In the prose writers, Elision is confined mainly to the 
following cases, where it often occurs : — 

(a) In prepositions which end in a vowel, except irepl and irph', also fiexpi 
and &xph used as prepositions, but rarely in eVe/co, e. g. 51 oIkou, ctt' oiKov, but 
nepl oXkov, irph oXkov. Elision is regular in composition, except with irepi, iTp6, 
and sometimes a.fi(pl, e, g. ov6A^e?i(/, but irepiop^yj 

(b) In conjunctions and adverbs, dAAc£, &pa, ^pa, aixa, e?To, eTreiTo, /j-aKa, 
fxiXicra, rdxa, and in many other adverbs ending in a before liy ; also in tlie 
following adverbs and conjunctions, 'iva, ye, re, 5€, ouSe, jUT/5e, warty &re (noi 
3Ti), TTore (with the compounds, as oihrorc), r6r€, €tj, ovk4ti, /tTjAceVi} e. g. oAA* 
avroSy ap oZv, fidKuTT ii/] 

(c) In forms of pronouns in a, o, e, as raDro, roiavra, oAAa, riya ; irdrepa 
more rare ; tovto, ai/rS, i/xc, tre, era (never inT<^, to) ; also in nouns and adjectives 
of the second and third declensions, ending in o, as a/iiapr^^/xoTa, etc. ; &pi<TTa, 
etc. ; ip/ya-i e. g. raOr' axni, vdvr* aya^dy xP^IJ^oa ils <pepei ; 

(d) In <pr]/xiy 6Wa, ola^ay and generally in verbal forms in /**, ai, i,'a, «, o, e. g. 
(pijfi iy(t)y ol5' &y5pa, i\4ycT* &y, ^rvirrovr &yy yeyon'' &v ; of the forms which 
admit the y Paragogic (^ 15), in prose, only ia-ri often suffers elision ; 

(e) In certain familiar phrases, as vt) aC e^rj. 

Rem. 3. The above elisions are most frequent in the orators, particularly 
Isocrates, much more seldom in the historians. 

Rem. 4. A smooth mute before an aspirate is changed into the correspond- 
ing rough, as rrdy^" oaa. 

Rem. 5. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. Hence, 
in words closely connected, as j/^Af e<^, the comma is omitted, for in such cases, 
without doubt, the ancients pronounced the words in quick succession. On 
accent in Elision, see § 31, III. 



§ 14. Use of Elision in the Poets* 

1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended 
than in prose ; yet the following points are to be noted : A word ending in v is 
never elided ; nor o, t, o in a monosyllable ; hence the article t6, and the pro- 
nouns r\ and Tt, are not elided ; and vepi in no case, — at least among the Attic 
poets, — nor ort, fi^xfiiy i-xph nor substantive adverbs of place ending in ^i 
[o^i excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in ete. 

2. The Elision of the i in the Dat. of the third Dec, particularly in the 
Bing., is very rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many. 

3. The verbal endings, ncuy rot, aSfaiy which are short in respect to the 

.♦5# 



30 N Paragogic. [i 15. 

accent, are rarely elided in the Attic poets 5 the Datives fioi and trol are neve? 
elided. 

4. In the verbal forms which may take the v Paragogic {i<pe\KV(rTiK6p), the 
poets use Elision or the y, according to the necessities of the verse. 

5. Sometimes in Attic poetry, a weak and grammatically unimportant sylla- 
ble is excluded by a preceding long vowel ; this is specially the case with the 
augment e, e. g. rax^^ ' Tropeva-au, Soph. OC. 1602, eTret 'SaKpytra, Phil. 360. This 
omission of the vowel is called aphaeresis {a<paipe<ns). It can also occur after 
a punctuation-mark, e. g. <ppd(r(a ' 'iretS^ ^|« * Vi rovToi9. 

f 15. "N JParagogtc (e^eX/cvcrrtKov). — OuTco(s). — ^E^ and 

eK. — 0^(k). 

1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of t^vo vowels 
in two successive words is by appending a v, {v IfjiekKva-TLKov, or 
Paragogic,) to certain final syllables, viz. : — 

(a) to the Dat. PL in en, to the adverbs iripva-i, TravraTrdcn, and 

all adverbs of place in o-i, as iracnv oVe^a ; rj nAaratoo-tv 

•^yeju-ovta ; 
(j8) to the third Pers. Sing, and PL in <n, as rvTrrova-Lv e/x^ 

TiS^rja-LV Iv rfj rpaTri^rj ; SO also with eo-rt ; 
(y) to the third Pers. Sing, in e, e. g. tnmrev c/xe; 
(S) to the numeral eiKoo^t, though even before vowels the v 

is often omitted, e. g. ct/coo-tv avSpes and ctKoo-t o.vhp^<s ; 
(c) to the Demonstrative 6 (^ 95, e) but rarely, and then 

always after o; e. g. ovrocrtv, iKCWoa-iv, Tovrovaiv, ovroio-iv ; 
(^) to the Epic particles, v6 and kI, and to the Epic suflix ^i; 

hence also to v6<T<f)L. 

Remark. The poets place the y Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make 
a short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regularly at the end 
of a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found before the longer punctuation- 
marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronun 
elation. 

2. The adverb ovtco? always retains its fuU form before a 
vowel, but drops the final s before a consonant, e. g. ovrtoq iiroCrj- 
0-6V, but ovTOi TTotco ; still, ovTO)s may stand even before consonants, 
when it is to be made emphatic, e. g. ovrw? yc, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9. 

3. So the Prep, c^ retains its full form before vowels and at 
the end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes ck, e. g. 
ii ilp-qvrjsy but CK -njs dpyjvrjs ; SO also in composition, e. g. c^cAau- 



f 16.] STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VOWELS. 31 

WW, but eKTcXeLv. It also has its full form when it stands after 
the word it governs, and is then accented, dpriviq^ e^. 

4. So ovK has its fuU form before a vowel, e. g. ovk al<rxp6<i\ 
before a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes ovx» e. g. 
ovx -^Sv?; but before a consonant, ov, e. g. ov koXos; so also ixr^Kin 
{instead of firj In) after the analogy of ovKeVt. 

Kem. 2. When ou stands at the end of a discourse, or of a sentence, and is 
to be pronounced with emphasis, the form oit with the acute accent is used 
even before a vowel ; in this case there must be an actual break in the discourse, 
as when oH stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, witliout 
connection with what follows, as Uws yhp of/; '^Ap' oZv ktX. Xen. C. 4. 2, 37 j 
or when it is found in the answer only, and corresponds to our No ; it is found 
especially in antithetical sentences, e. g. Taya^d^ rb. 5e koko o i : "Eav 5e kt\. 
Xen. C. 1. 2, 42 ; Ai^ovs els rhv iroraixhv ipftiirrovi/, i^iKvovvrx ^e ov, oire efiXair- 
Toy ovSeua. An. 4. 8, 3. If, on the contrary, the following sentence is closely 
connected with the preceding, then it is written oitK, e. g. ovKy oAAek kt\. Xen. 
C. 2. 6, 11. and 13 ; 4. 6, 2 ; ovk, el or ijv kt\. Hell. 1. 7, 19. 

M6. Strejigthening, Weakening, Prolongation, SJwrtening, Inter- 
change, and Variation of Vowels. — Influence of a Vowel or 
a Consonant on another Vowel. — Syncope. — Omission of a 
Vowel. — Euplionic Prothesis. 

The changes, which further take place in vowels, are : — 

1. Strengthening of vowels ; this consists in changing a weaker vowel into a 
stronger (see § 4, Rem. 1). There are diiFerent degrees of strength in the 
voweb ; the weakest is e. The strengthening takes place, e. g. in words of the 
third Dec. in os, Gen. -eos; the pure stem of these words ends in es: in the 
Nom., however, which prefers fuller forms, the weaker e is changed into the 
sxronger o (in Latin into m), e. g. yivos, germs, Gen. yeveos (instead of yft/€(r-os), 
genSr-is. In yoyt and 56pv (Gen. y6var-os, 56paT-os), a, the final vowel" of the 
stem, is changed into the stronger v. 

2. The weakening or attenuation of vowels ; this is the opposite of the 
change just described ; it occurs, e. g. in substantives of the third Dec. in -ts, -<, 
-vy, -V ; in these, the stronger stem- vowels i and v are changed into the weaker e, 
e. g. tt6\is, ir6\cu)S ; irrixvs, irTjxews ; alvarri, aivdireos ] &.(Ttv, Screoy. So with 
adjectives in -iis, -u, e. g. y\vKvs, y\vKv, Gen. -eos. 

3. Prolongation of vowels ; this changes a short vowel into a long vowel or 
diphthong, viz. a into tj or cu ; i into t or et ; v into i) or eu ; e into 77 or et ; into 0$ 
or ov. This prolongation takes place either for the sake of euphony, or from 
grammatical reasons, or from both together ; in the poets often on account of the 
metre. The prolongation of vowels is very prevalent in the Greek language. 
One instance only is here mentioned, namely, the strengthening of the Present 
tense in Mute and Liquid verbs, e. g. Kptvco, vxtuuf K-fi^w, (paivcoy AeiVw, (peOym, 



32 INTERCHANGE AND VARIATION OF VOWELS. [§ 16. 

instead of Kpfvco, irXvyci), K&^Wy tpavwy XtTrw, <pvya>. — The reason of the prolon- 
gation is very often found in the omission of a y with a Tau-mute, more rarely 
of a mere x/, or in the omission of a tr after a Liquid, or of a final Sigma, e. g. 
o^ovs instead of o^6vTSy Sidovs instead of 5i56uts, fiovX^vwv instead of fiovXexf 
ovrs ; [i4\d.s instead of fXiXavs ; %<T(p7i\a instead of eafaXca, ^yyeiKa instead of 
iJYY^Kaa, €(p^eipa instead of ((p^epaa; prirwp instead of p-fjTops, iroifjLTjv instead 
of Ttoiy.4vs, Saiixwy instead of BaifjLous, cuddos instead of ot5o(rs, oA.^3^s instead of 

4. Shortening of vowels. See the remarks on the Dialects § 207. 

5. Interchange of vowels ; this consists in softening a long vowel into, a 
short one, and as a compensation, in lengthening the short vowel immediately 
following. Thus, in the Ionic and Attic dialects, ea instead of do, e. g. iA.ews, 
-ft);/, instead of iKaos, -ovy Kectis instead of Ados, v^dis instead of vdos, MeveAews 
instead of MeveXdos ; further, in the Attic dialect, ^oujikicas, ^ouxiXid instead of 
the Ionic PacriXTJos, -^a; so also, TrSXecos, ir^x^*'^> Attic, instead of -kSkios, 
iT'fjxvos ; e is weaker than i and v, see No. 2. 

6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel e into o and a, for the 
formation of the tenses (§ 140) and derivatives (§ 231, 6); when et in the 
Present is lengthened from the radical t, it becomes oi in the second Perf., but 
when from the radical e, it becomes o ; e. g. Tpe<|)co, rerpocpa, irpa<p7}i/ ; AeiVw 
(root AtTr), AeAoiTra; (p^elpa} (root (p^€p),e(p^opa, icp^aprju', (pXcyw, ^Ao| ; Tp€X«*i 
rpoxos] Tpecpta, rpocpri, Tpo<p€vs, rpacpepSs. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stahl, 
English, ring, rang, rung. The tj is changed into a>, e. g. ap^yw, apwyf}. 

Remark 1. Whether the a is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a 
euphonic change of e, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, paitic- 
ularly p and A, sometimes even /j. and y, may be doubted. Comp. iTpawovy 
irpd^rjv, i(rTp(i(pr]y, ifipdxw, iSdpTjy, icp^dpTiv, iaraXTjy, erafioy, itcrcwov with 
i\^4yr]v, €Tekoy. 

7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonant 
Here belong two special cases : — 

(a) The Attic writers change the Ionic tj into a after the vowels € and i and 
the diphthongs ending with i, sometimes even after other vowels, and 
after the Liquid p, e. g. «5ea (Ion. iSer)), aocpia, XP^'"* ^H-^po-y o-PT^P^ 
iiridfa, iirepdva ; 

(b) The union-vowel e in verbs in «, is changed into o before the terminations 
beginning with fx and y, e. g. /SouAcvo/tev, ^vXeioyrai, e/SouAeuo^ucv, c/Sow 
XevovTO. 

8. Syncope {(TvyKOTr-fi), i. e. the omission of e in the middle of a word between 
a Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between xt ; the same, also, 
occurs in the declension of certain substantives of the third Dec, e. g. -KarpSs 
instead of iraripos ; in the forming of the Present tense of certain verbs, e. g. 
yiyvo^iai instead of yiycuofiai, ttitttco instead of irnreTO), fxifivu instead, of fu/xeyw ; 
and in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. iryp6fir)v from iydpu ; 
Syncope rarely occurs after <r, e. g. itrxoy, kcmStiiiv, ea-rcu, instead of eaexoy, 
iffejrSixrjy, effeTai. A striking example of Syncope is found in ^A^ov instead 
of iiXv^oy, from 'EAET0a. Comp. § 155. 



U7.1 



MUTES. 



33 



9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, ^ 207. 

10. One of the vowels a, e, o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of 
euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. otrTepoTr^ and cTcpoTr^, aarcKpls 
and aTa<pisi €x3-€s and X"^^'^* iK€7vos and kcIuos, cid-eAw and 3^eAa>, OKpvoeis and 
Kpiosy oSvpofiai and 8vpofji.ai, okcWo) and kcAAo;, etc. 

Rem. 2. From these euphonic letters care must be taken to distinguish 
( 1 ) a when it stands for and, e. g. a-fivyeii/, to avert, or when used instead of 
avd, e. g. anixra-eiu, to tear up, or instead of the a or a copulative with the 
meaning of a/jM, from which also a intensive has been formed ; (2) €, when it 
is used instead of e| or €V, e. g. iyclpeiu, to wake up, iptvyeiUf eructare, ipe^eiy, 
irritare ; (3) o with the meaning of dfiov, e. g. dfiix^V- 



II. Changes of the Consonants. 

$ 17. a. Mutes, 

1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a gieat degree, 
from the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds. 
This assimilation is either a mejre resemblance in sounds, as 
when XcA.ey-Tat*is changed into XcXeKrat, the smooth t chang* 
ixig the medial y into the smooth k ; or it is a complete identity 
in sounds, as when a-uv-piTTToi is changed into crvppLTrTO). — 
Sometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound, 
and seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim- 
ilar, e. g. '7r€-<f>iXr]Ka for <^€-<^tXr;Ka, "Xo-Trffno for ^acfxfxx). 

2. A Pi-mute (tt /? <^) or a Kappa-mute (k y x) before a Tau- 
mute (t 8 <^) must be coordinate Avith the Tau-mute, i. e. only 
a smooth Mute {tr k) can stand before the smooth t ; only a 
medial {p y) before the medial 8; only an aspirate (<^ x) before 
the aspirate S; consequently, ttt and kt; /38 and y8; <f>& and 
X-^* e. g. 



/3 before t i 


into T as : 


from 


rplfice) 


reTpifi-Ttu 


= TfTpiirrai 


^ " 


T 


u 


fl- " 


( " 


ypd<poi)) 


yeypa<p-Tai 


= yfypairreu 


7 " 


T 


(( 


K " 


( " 


\4yb>) 


\4K€y-rai 


= AeAe/cTou 


X " 


T 


u 


K " ( 


(( 


^pex«) 


/3ej8p€X-Toi 


= fiefipiKTCU 


IT " 


8 


u 


p " ( 


(( 


Kinrrw) 


KUTT-Sa 


= KvfiSa 


•^ " 


8 


(( 


/3 " ( 


u 


ypd(pw) 


ypd<p-Sriv 


= ypd^StiV 


K " 


8 


u 


7 " < 


1 r. 


7rA.€Kw) 


'IT\4K-ht]V 


= Tr\4y5T}y 


X " 


8 


(( 


7 " 1 


[ ^' 


fipexo) 


Ppex-Sw 


= Ppey5r]V 


JT " 


S^ 


(t 


<t> " ( 


[ " 


Tre/iTTO)) 


iir€fnr-^v 


= iirc/xcp^v 


$ " 


» 


(( 


4> " 


( " 


Tpifio}) 


iTpl^-Sn\v 


= ^rpitp^v 


K " 


» 


(( 


X" ( 


f cc 


irXe/co)) 


iir\fK-^v 


= iirXex^v 


> " 


» 


u 


X " ( 


C( 


\e7Ci> ) 


iKcy-^v 


= i\4x^v. 



34 MUTES. p 17 

Kemakk 1. The preposition 4k remains unchanged, probably by virtne of an 
original movable (r> thus e/cs, e. g. eKdovycUy iK^eit/ai, etc., not iySovyaiy ix^eipou. 

3. The smooth. Mutes (tt k t) before a rough breathing, are 
changed into the cognate aspirates (</>;?( ^), not only in inflec- 
tion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough 
breathiug being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ; 
but the medials (^ y 8) are thus changed only in the iuflection 
of the verb ; elsewhere there is no change, hence : — 

itTT* ov = a(^' ov, iir-fi/xepos (from enl, rj/x^pa) == i<p'{]ixcpos 

iiTvcpaivo) (from eTrt, v(paly(o) = icpvcpaivo), rervTr-a = rervcpa 

ovK Sffius = oi/x dclws, BeK-fifxepos (from deKa^ 7]fj.4pa) = Sex'^IH-^pos 

avT€\K(a = aif^e\Kw = from ayri, e'A/c<w), but ouSeis (not ov^ds, from aits' and efr) 

e^\oy-a = ^iKoxo-i but Ae^' krepav (not Aex' kripav) 

rerpifi-a = rerpi^o, but TpTjS' ovtws (not rpT^' ovrws). 

Rem. 2. The negative ovk [ov) thus becomes oi»x> 6. g. oux ^5^s; yet this 
change does not occur before the aspirate p, e. g. ov piirru. In some com- 
pounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to 
Ionic usage, e. g. airrjMwTrjs {east wind, from airo and 7}\tos), \evKnnros {one who 
rides a white horse, from \€vk6s and 'liriros), KpdTiinroSf etc. 

Rem. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes 
place also in Crasis {^ IQ and 11), e. g. t^ erepo = ^drepa, rh tfidriov = ^olfid- 
rioVy KoX erepos = x^'^^P^^t '^°* '^^°- 2o"r's, '6tr(us = x^<^^i x^^'^^^i X^'"'^^' ^^^ 
this Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes ttt or kt precede the rough 
breathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. €^>3^/xepos instead 
of e7rT7j/xe/)os (from Ittto, rjixepa), vvx^^ o\7jv instead of yvicr' ^Kriv. Attic prose 
uses also the full forms, e. g. vvKra HXrjv. 

Rem. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid p changes the preceding 
smooth Mute into the Aspirate, e. g. (ppolfxiov, formed by Crasis from irpooifuov 
(from 'Kp6 and oinos) \ re^piTriroy (from Tc^rpa.and 'linros), bpdcraw from r<ipiluTaw\ 
so (ppovSos from 'irp6 and 6S6s. 

4. On the contrary, a rough Mute cannot stand before the 
same rough Mute, but is changed into the corresponding smooth, 
e.g. ^aTTcjxx), BciK^^os, tCtStj, 'AtSCs', not ^acfxfuDy Ba;^09, tC^^tj, 
ASS^Lsi on the same principle, when p is doubled, the first 
Aspirate disappears, e. g. Ilvf>po<s, not IIvppos. 

5. A Tau-mute (t 8 ^) before another Tau-mute is changed 
into o- (comp. claustrum from claudo) ; but it disappears before 
K (in Perf and Plup. Act), e. g. 

iirel^-^v (from irei^a)) becomes hcflcr^v 

vei^-reos ( " irel^ot) " ireiCT^os 

i]pelS-Sfr]v ( " ipeiSw) " TipeiaSujv 

veiTii^-Ka ( " Tfi^) " Threuca. 



f 18.] LIQUIDS. 35 

6. The T, which in the Attic dialect very often becomes o-, is 
frequently changed into o- by the influence of a foUowmg t, e. g. 
TrXovcTLos (instead of ttXovtlo^, from ttXovtos), ^A/jlo^ovo-los (instead 
of ^Afia^ovvT-Los), MtA-^o-tog (from MiAtttos), 'Ax'^pova-Los (instead 
of ^Ax^povT-Los), ovaia (instead of ovt-lo), ycpovaca (instead of 
yepovT-Lo), evLavaLo<; (from cvtavros). Tlie t sometimes changes 
by assimilation the other Tau-mutes, and the Palatals, into o- ; 
thus in the forms of the Comparative in -acroiv and -^(dv, where 
there is a double change, first of the Tau-mute or Palatal to tr 
by means of the i, and then the assimilation of the t to a, e. g. 
^paBv^ (/3/)a8tW, ^paa-LOiv), jSpda-a-QiVj pocr,, 7ra)(ys (7ra;^tW, ttcut- 
tW), TracrcroiVy poet, ftcyas, /xeL^oiv (instead of jxeyCtDv), ra^yS} 
^dcrcroyv (instead of Ta;(-tW). 



§ 18. b. Liquids. 

1. The Liquid v is sometimes changed into a. This takes 
place, e. g. in the Ace. Sing, tliird Dec. of substantives, whose 
stem ends with a consonant, e. g. Kopa^, KopaK-a (not KopaK-iv)^ 
Xa/x7ra9, kafx-rrdS-a. The same change, also, sometimes takes 
place in the tliird Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of 
mute and hquid verbs, which properly should end in -vrot and 
'VTo (as in pure verbs, e. g. p^/SovXevvrai, ifSe^ovXevvro), e. g. 
T€TpL<f>dTaLy lT€Tpt(^a.TOy TTCTrAe^arai, Tcra^^ttrat, to-KCuaSarai, KcxyipiSdrcUy 
i<f>SdpdTaL (instead of jirpLf^vraL, ireTpL^vro, etc., from rpi^-ui, 
TrXtK-oi, rda-cr-tOy q-Kevd^-oty )((DpL^-(jj, ffiSeip-u)). See § 116, 15. 

2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. 

<rvu-\oyi^w becomes avWoyi^w avy-fierpla becomes trvufierpla 

iv-fjiivoi " d/xfieya) trvy-piirra) " (Tvpftiina). 

Remark. Comp. iZZino, iTwrnineo, instead of in/ino, i/jwineo. Assimilation 
takes place in 6\\vfiif instead of 6\yvfii. — '£»' before ^is not assimilated, e. g. 
ivpiirru ; yet f^f>vbfj.o5 is more frequent than ivpv^ixos ; on the contrary, ivXtuc- 
m*iu stands instead of iWeucKevo}. 

3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into /?, e. g 

fjiXirreiv (from fieXi) becomes $\Itt€iv 

fifOT65 ( " fi6posy mors) " fiporSs. 



36 



MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 



[Uy 



$ 19 c. Mutes and Liquids. — Liquids and Mutes, 
1. A Pi-mute (tt y8 </>) before ft is changed into //,, 



a Kappa-miite (k y x) 
a Tau-mute (t S ^) 

(a) Pi-mute: rerpiP-fxai 

\e\enr-ixai 
yeypacp-fxai 

(/8) Kappa-mute: iriirK^K-jxai 
\4Aey-fJLai. 

{y) Tau-mute: ^uvT-fiai 

ipT]p^iZ-lxai 

KeKOfjLid-fxai 



/* 

from rplfia>) 

irAeKw) 
Aeyw) 

epeiSw) 
irei^a ) 



y^ 



(( 



or, e. g. 



becomes reTpL/xfiai 

" AcAei^/itti 

" yiypaixfxcu 

" ireirXiynat 

remains A.e\e7fuu 
becomes p^fipeyfjuu 

ip^peicTfiai 

KeKSjXKT/J.ai. 



Remark 1. In some words, the Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed 
before /j., e. g. a/c/i^, irSTfios, XaxfJ-^s, Kcv^/xcav, etc. In some words, even x 
stands before /x, instead of the original k or y, e. g. ia}x/^<is from Ic^kw, ttAoxM' 
from 7rAe/ca>. The preposition e/c, in composition, is not changed, e. g. iKfiav- 

2. The medial p before v is changed into /a, e. g. 

(refi-v6$ (from a-efiofiai) becomes ffe/xvSs 
ipefi-vSs { " epe;8os) " ipcfxySs. 

\ N before a Pi-mute (tt p (f> xj/) is changed into /a, 
N before a Kappa-mute {k y x i^ changed into y, 
N before a Tau-mute (t 8 ^) is not changed, e. g. 



iu-ireipla becomes ifiireipla 
iv-fidWco " 6>j3aAAa> 

%v-<pp(»iv " efKppwu 

fy-x^/Oxos " €iJ.\pvxos 
but ffvvTeivd}, (Tvvdeci), avvbiu}. 



trvv-KoXio} becomes (rvyKoXfce 
Cuu-yiyyaxTKU " criryyi'yi'wo-KW 

(Tvv-xpovos " avyxpovos 

cvy-^eo) " (riryleoj j 

Comp. i»i6uo, ij/iprimo. 



Rem. 2. The enclitics are not changed, e. g. pWep, rStrye, not oTTrtp, etc. 
Rem, 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mnte, as well as before ft, 
•was, without doubt, pronounced like /i, and before a Kappa-mute, like y ; and 
10 it is found in ancient inscriptions, e. g. TOMIIATEPAKAITHMMHTEPa, 
rOrXPHMASTISMON (i. e. rhy Trarepa Kol T7V jJ-rir^pa, rhv xp''7;"aT<(r^oV). So also 
k and a are used instead of v before \ and <r, e g. 'EAAHMNOI, 'E22AMO) 
<i. e. «}' Aiifiyo), iv '^.d/xa). 



f 20.] THE SIBILANT O" WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 



37 



I 20. d. Use of the Sibilant or, with Mutes and 

Liquids. 

1. A Pi-mute (tt /8 <^) with o- is changed into j/^, 

a Kappa-mute (k y x) "^^^^ o" i^ changed into ^, 
a Tau-mute (t 8 ^) disappears before cr, e. g. 



(o) Pi-mute: 


XiiiTffa 


[from AcIttw) 


becomes Xelypa 




rplfitrw 1 




rpi^ca) 


(( 


rpl\l/u 




ypd<p(r<i) 1 




ypd(f>a)) 


(( 


ypd^pu 


0) Kappa-mute 


: irAe/cffw 




ir\€Ka}) 


(( 


irAefw 




\4y(ra) 




Aeyw) 


(( 


\e|cB 




fipexa-o) 




/Bpe'xcw) 


(( 


/3pe|« 


(7) Tau-mute: 


auvTffco 1 




aj/vT«) 


(( 


ayucw 




ipiihao) 




€pe/5w) 


(( 


ip^lact 




vei^ffd) 




irei^cw) 


(( 


VilffOt 




i\TriS<ra} 




6'AirrC«) 


(C 


i\Trf<T6 



Remark 1. Comp. duxi, rexi, coxi ; from duco, re^ro, cogno. The Prep. iK 
before <r is an exception, e. g. eKaci^o}, not i^ctxrw. — In ttovs, Gen. iroS-Ss, and 
in the Perf. active Part, in -<^s, Gen. -6t-os, after the Tau-mute disappears, the 
preceding vowel is lengthened. 

2. N disappears before o-; but when v is joined with a Tau- 
mute, both disappear before cr, but the short vowel before a, is 
lengthened : e into €l, o into ov, a, t, v into a, I, i), Comp. Rem. 3, 
e.g. 

Tv<p^€vr-<ri becomes rv(p^e7<ri \eovr-<ri becomes \cov<ri 

(nrivZ-tjo) " cnrciao} eXfiiu^-ai " eX/JLicri 

Ti^avT-cri " Tx^affi ieiKvvyr-ffi " SeiKyvt'i 

5alfJiov-ffi " SaifjLOffi Rfyoipum-ffi " e,fuo(poiJ<Ti. 

Rem. 2. Exceptions : 'Ei/, e. g. iv(mipa> ; iroi'- before o- with another conso- 
nant, e. g. ■n-dyo'/coTros, in some words is assimilated ; e. g. ird(T(ro<pos is used as 
well as irdvaocpos, etc. (in irdXiu the usage varies) ; also in some inflective and 
derivative forms in -aai and -<ns from verbs in -a/i/a>, e. g. irftpaycai (from 
tl>alv(o), -Kiiravtris (from ireTro/vw), and in the substantives, t] ihfxivs, earth-icorm, t) 
iTflpivSj wagon-basket, tj Tipvys^ v is retained before <r. — In composition, the v in 
tr!)v is changed into <r before <t followed by a vowel, e. g. trvacdi^di (from <ri)v and 
(Tti^w) ; but before a followed by a consonant, or before ^, it disappears, e. g. triv 
(TTfUia. becomes avarrifia, aw-^vyia becomes av^vyla. — In x'o-p^^f^h vr is dropped ; 
on the contrary, in tcUos, fifKds (Gen. -ai/os), tcrdsy efs (Gen. -iv6s)^ els, and in 
the third Pers. PI. of the principal tenses (see ^ 103), e. g. Pov\evovai (instead 
of fiovXfvoyffi), the o/nission of the simple v is compensated by lengthening 
the vowel. 

3. On the contrary, in the Aorist of Liquid verbs, or is omitted 

4 



S8 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [^ 21 

after the Liquid, but the omission is compensated, by lengthen- 
ing the stem-vowel, e. g. 

jjyye\-a-a becomes ^77e<A.a eve/x-ffa becomes evei/xa 

etpav-ffa " ^<pTjya tcpbep-ffa * i<pbitpgu 

Rem. 3. Sigma is likewise omitted before a in the future of Liquid verbs, c 
being inserted before <r for the sake of an easier pronunciation, and e« being con- 
tracted into ft), e. g. aYY€\-4-ffa}, ayyeXu. So too in the Nom. of the third Dec 
the final Sigma is omitted, when y or p precedes, and the short vowel is 
lengthened, e. g. eiKciv instead of €lK6v-Sy Troifi'fiv instead of iroifilv-Sy pitrup 
instead of p-fjTop-s, cu^p instead of al^4p-s. — T and c are omitted in the Nom. 
of substantives and participles in -uy. Gen. -ovt-os ; but, as a compensation, o is 
lengthened into «, e. g. Xeovr-s becomes AeW, ^ovK^vovt-s becomes fiovXevojy. 

Hem. 4. In eyvvfii (instead of eff-yvfii, ves-tio) the cr is assimilatei' to the 
following V, and in el/jLi (instead of iar-fii) a- is omitted, but e is lengthened 
into e(. 

§21. e. Change of separated Consonants. 

1. Sometimes a consonant affects another consonant, though 
they do not immediately follow one another, but are separated 
by a vowel or even by two syllables. Thus, one \ changes 
another k into p, e. g. KecfxxXapyia (instead of Ke^oAoXywi from 
oAyctv), yXwa-a-apyta (instead of yXwa-a-aXyLo) , dpyoXeos (instead of 
dXyaXeos from aXyelv) ; the sufiix wXiy becomes wpijy when a k pre- 
cedes, e. g. -^oA-TTCOp^. 

2. In the reduplication of verbs whose stem begins witli a 
rough mute, instead of repeating this mute, which would be 
the regular formation, the first rou^h mute is changed into the 
corresponding smooth, thus : — 

<pe-<pi\r]Ka (from </)t\e«) is changed into x€<pl\7}Ka, 
X^'X^Ka ( " X^'*) " " KcxvKu 

M-3i)/u (stem0E) " " ri^fu. 

Likewise in the verbs, dvew, to sacrifice, and rt^evcu (stem eE), to piace, b of 
the root is changed into t, in the passive forms which begin with .& : — 

irv-^Vy Tv-^ao/jLai, ire-^y, T€-^aofjuu, instead of i^-^v, er^e-dijv. 

So also, for the sake of euphony, the p is not reduplicated, and instead of it 
1^^ is used, e. g. eppxn]Ka. 

3. In words whose stem begins with t and ends with an 
Aspirate mute, the aspiration is transferred to the preceding 



f$ 22, 23.] METATHESIS OF THE LIQUIDS. 39 

smooth T, when the Aspirate before the formative syllable be- 
ginning with cr, T, and /a, must, according to the laws of euphony 
(H 17, 2; 19, 1 ; 20, 1), be changed into a smooth consonant; 
by this transposition, t is changed into the Aspirate ^. Such a 
change is called the Metathecis of the aspiration. 

Thus, Tpi<p-o} [Tirpo<pa Perf.) is changed into {^piir-ffo}) ^p^co, ^peir-r^p, {^peit- 
fxa) ^pefifjLa; 
ra(p-f], TA*-a), racprjvai (second Aor. Pass.), into ^drpoo, ^dir-r(c, (red-air- 
uai) Te^a/jLfiai (but third Pers. PI. reTd<paTai, 6. g. Her. 6, 103, with one 
of the better MSS. is to be lead instead of re^dfarai) ; 
rpixpoSf TPT*-w into ^pv\pca, ^pinr-ru} [re^pim-fxai), re^pvfifuUf 
rp4x-o into (^pcK-cofxai) ^pf^ofiai; — rpix-^s into ^pt|, ^pi^lv] 
raxvs, in the comparative, becomes bdaawv. Por the same reason, the 
future e|a), from ex^, to have, is the proper form, the aspiration of 
the X being transfciTed to the smooth breathing and making it 
rough. 

Remark 1. Tev|a) from Teux«, and rpvl<a from rpvx<»y remain unchanged. 

Rem. 2. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, rpecpco, TA*fl 
{ddTTTO)), TPT*n (^pinrru), begin with 3-, the aspiration of the two final conso- 
nants <p^, changes t, the initial consonant of the stem, into ^, e. g. 

i^p4<p-Shri]/, dp€<p-^vat, ^pi(p-^a€(T^aiy 

Rem. 3. In the imperative ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both sylla- 
bles should begin with ,^, namely, bT}^i, not the first, but the last aspirate mute 
is changed into the corresponding smooth ; thus 37rr<, e. g. fiov\€v^Ti. 

$ 22. Metathesis of the Liquids. 

The Liquids, and also the Lingual t when ir precedes, often 
change place with a preceding vowel, for the sake of euphony. 
The vowel then usually becomes long. Tliis lengthening of 
the vowel distinguishes Metathesis from Syncope (the latter 
being the mere omission of c), e. g. /xt-/xj^o-Kco (from the root ftev, 
COmp. mens), ^vrjo-Kdi (from ^av-iiv), rerfi-qKa (from TC/x-etv), 
^el3X.r]Ka (from (SaX-eiv), Trnjaroixac (from Trcrofiat). 

^ 23. Doubling of Consonants. 

1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of 
euphony, e. g. l3aSvppoo<; from /?a^v and pim ; tppeov instead of 
^cov; in the second place, in consequence of the concurrence 



40 STRENGTHENING AND ADDITION OP CONSONANT.?. [5 24 

of like or similar sounds, in the infle'^tion and derivation, e. g 
O/-V0/I.09 (from ev and vofxos), cX-XetTro) (instead of cvX.), a-vix-fjia^o% 
(instead of o-wfi.), XikcLfx-fxaL (instead of Ae\ct7r/A.), X^fx-fxa (in- 
stead of X^TT/xa), KOfJL-jxa (instead of kott/xo), raor-a-oi or Tar-TQ) 
(instead of rdy-croi), rjcramf or TjTTcav (instead of T7K-tW), /xoXXov 
(instead of fxaX-iov), aXXos (instead of oXtos, alius). 

2. In the Common language, only the Liquids, \, /x, v, j^^ the 
Sibilant <r, and the Mute t, can be doubled; yet tt and k are 
also doubled in single words, e. g. itttto?, a horse ; k6kko<;, a berry. 
The Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is 
softened in the pronunciation (§ 2). Two Aspirates are not 
doubled (§ 17, 4). 

3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. ^pcov, 
and in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. 
apprjKTOS, (3aS^vppoo<s ', but ev-pcooros (from ev and pmnrvp^i). 

Remark. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the c, yet 
much less frequently than Homer, e. g. r6(T(Tov, Soph. Aj. 185; 6\^<r<xas, 390; 
iffffvSni, 294; ixiffcr}. Ant. 1223 ; ^tra-erai, -ffisch. Pers. 122 ; so also in the Dat. 
PL of the third Dec. eaai. 

$ 24. Strengthening and Addition of Consonants. 

1. Consonants are frequently strengthened, in the inflection, by the addition 
of a corresponding consonant, namely : — 

(a) The Labials (jS tt ^) by r, e. g. fixdir-r-u (instead of fixd^-o)), tvit-t-w 
(instead of tutt-co), piir-T-w (instead of picp-w) ; sometimes also by c, which 
assimilates the preceding Labial (thus ccr, Attic tt), e. g. •jr€<r<r« (root 
Treir), Att. ttcttcw, Put. ircrpo), the poetic iacrofiai. Put. 6\^oixou ; in 5et//<» 
(instead of Se'^oj), ^ and o- are changed into i\f ; . 

(b) The Palatals (7 k x) ^^ strengthened by <r, which assimilates the pre- 
ceding Palatal (thus orffy Att. tt), or, though more seldom, the Palatal 
unites with the a- and is changed into ^, e. g. Tcur-tr-a, Att. TdT-r-o* 
(instead of rdy-w), <ppi(r-(r-(i}, Att. (pplr-r-m (instead of (pplK-w), $'fi<T-<T-(i>, 
Att. j8^T-T-a> (instead of firix-o)] Kpd^w (instead of Kpdy(a),rpl(o} (instead 
of Tpiyai) ; a Kappa-mute with <r is seldom changed into |, e. g. ai/|« 
(aug-eo), aA6|a>, oSa|ft> and oSo^co; the strengthening t Ls found only in 
vcKTCo and tIktoj. 

(c) The Linguals (5t(^) are strengthened by (T, which with the preceding 
Lingual is changed into ^, e. g. <f>pd(Q} (instead of (ppaSu), or, though 
more seldom, c assimilates the preceding Tau-mute, e. g. xiacoum and 
Xlrojiai, epeVtrco, ipirToo (instead of ipero}), KOpvacro} (instead of Kopv^). 

2. The unpleasant concurrence of fxp and vp in the middle of some words, 
occasioned by the omission of a vowel, is softened by inserting /8 between i^p 



f 25.] EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 41 

and 5 bet"ween vp^ thus, in fi€<n]fi-0-pia (formed from /Afffrj/xepla, ix^fftiixpia)^ yttix' 
fi-p6s (from ya/x-e-p6s, yafipSs)., av-d-p6s (fi'Om avepoSy ayp6s). 

3. N also is used to strengthen the Labials, especially in poetry, so as to make 
a syllable long by position, e. g. TVfjiiravov (fr'om tvtt-t-co), crTp6fj.fio5 (from arpe- 

' ^«) ; ^d/x^os (rdtpos) ] Kopififirj (ko/ju^tj) ; ^pS/xfios {Tp4(j)€iv) ] ofx(pr\ (eiVeti')} 
vvjjLcpri (nubere) ; bfipifios and S/xfipifioSi yduv/xos and pui/vfivos. In the present 
tense of many verbs, this strengthening v is found, e. g. irvv^duofMai, ^icfydvia^ 
Kafjifiduw instead of irv^oijuuy ^iyu, \dfi(o. On the change of y, see § 19, 3. On 
the V Paragogic, see § 15, 1. 

4. 2 also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with fi, e. g 
I fiuSi^ and (TfiuSi^, fjLiKp6s and a/xiKpSs ; a strengthening o- is also inserted before /i 
\ and T in the Perf. JVIid. or Pass., and before ^ in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. rereKe- 

' a-fxai, r€Te\€-<r-rai, ireXe-ff-^v (§ 131); also in the derivation and composition 
of words, <r is frequently inserted for the sake of euphony, e. g. a-ei-ff-iJiSs, irav- 
ff-dvifxosy fioyo-ar-rSKos, etc. ; instead of o-, (^ also is inserted before fi, e. g. 
HVKrj-^-fi6s, opxn-^-H-^Sf (rKap-^-fx6s from <r/ca/pa>, nop-^fiSs from irclpu. 



$ 25. Expulsion and Omission of Consonants. 

1. In inflection, a is very often omitted between two A^owels, e. g. rvimpj 
irvTrroVf tvtttoio instead of Tinrre-a-ai or TU7rTrj-(rot, €TU7rT€-<r-o, TVTnoi-(r-o] 
y4ui-os, 7 €»'€-« 1/ instead of y4v€-(r-os, y^vi-a-uv (comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um). 
At the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yivos^ 
Txjy^u} (=TU7r(raj), irAe|« (= irAeVa-w), but after the Liquids, in inflection, as 
well as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. ¥iyyii\a (instead 
of ^TyeX-c-o), iiyyiXci (instead of ayyeX-d-c-w, ayy€\-4-u), fiiiTup (instead 
of p^Top-s). Comp. § 20, Eem. 3. 

2. The Digamraa softened into the vowel v (§ 200) is omitted: (a) in the 
middle of the word between two vowels, e. g. a}6y (oi)F6y), ovum, 6is {6Fi<i), ovis, 
tddv {alFdy), aevum, vfos (peFos), novus, o-kuiSs {aKaiF6s), scaevus, fio6s (fioFSs), 
bovis ; 3-60), ir\e«, iri/ew, i\da> instead of ^eFw, etc. ; (b) at the beginning of 
the word before vowels and p, e. g. ohos {Fo7uos), vinum, eap (Feap), ver, U 
(Fis) vis, oJkos {FoiKos}, vicus, iSelu {Fide7u), vidcrc, ia^s (Fea^s), vestis, 
piiyvvfii {Ffrriyi/v(xi), frango. On the contrary, the Digamma (this softened v) 
is retained in connection with a preceding o, e, o, with which it then coalesces 
and forms a diphthong : (o) at the end of a word, e. g. $od (instead of p6F^, 
/Soa-tAeu, etc.; ()8) before a consonant, e. g. $ovs (fiSFs, bovs, bos), vavs {vdFs)^ 
navis, fiovv, fiovci, fiacriXevs, fiaaiKevai, ^evaofxai, trX^ixrofxai, trvixxrofiai, iXavvta. 
But when an t or u precedes it, then it disappears before a consonant, but 
lengthens the t or u, e. g. k7s (instead of k'iFs), evs (instead of avFs) Ix^i 
(instead, of Ix^vFs), Ace. kIu, cvv, lx^v\ but it disappears also, in this case, 
In the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. AX-6s, Kl-6sy av-ds^ Ix^-os (instead 
of AtF-6s, kXF-6s, <rvF-6s, Ix^vF-os. 

4* 



t^M 



42 EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. [§ 25- 

3. Since the Greek language admits an accumulation of three consonants, 
only in composition, not in simple words, unless the first or the last is a 
Liquid, then, if in the inflection of the verb, a termination beginning with (r3 
is appended to the consonant of the root, the <t is dropped : — ■ 

KeKeiTT-ff^oiv (from Xei-rr-w) becomes A€A.ei<|)3-«v (§ 17 J 2.) 
\(\4yaSrai ( " Aey-o)) " AeK^x^at (§17,2.) 

iffrdK-a^ai ( " criXK-w) " iardT^ou. 

Bemark. On the omission of a Tau-mute, and a y and tn- before a; and a a 
after a Liquid, see § 20. On rreirefifiai, catpiyfjuu, etc. instead of 7re7re^t/i/iat, 
e(r<piyyij.ai, see § 144, R. 2. ' In composition, v is often omitted, e g. IIui^o/ctJ- 
r'os, 'AiroWS-dupos, instead of Hv^ojKT.f 'A7roAA(Jj/5. 

4. Some words may drop their final consonant, either to avoid an accumula- 
tion of consonants, or, in verse, to prevent a syllable becoming hug by position. 
In addition to the words mentioned under § 15, namely, ovk (ou), e| (e/c), oikws 
{ovTu), which usually retain their final consonant before a vowel to prevent 
Hiatus, but drop it before consonants, here belong, 

(a) adverbs of place in ^ev, e. g. npSa^ev, &Tri(r^€v, vircp^cv, etc., which never 
drop the v before a consonant, in prose, but very often in Epic poetry, 
more seldom in the Attic poets ; 

{h) /xexpts and &xpis, which, however, in the best classical writers, drop 
their a, not only before consonants, but commonly even before vowels, 
e. g. fi^xpi 'Ava^aySpov, PI. Hipp. Maj. 281, c 5 fte'xpt imav^a. Id. Svmp. 
210, e ; fi^xpi otou, X. C. 4. 7, 2 ; /ne'xpt ipv^pas ^aXdTJTjs, Id. Cy. 8. 
6,20; 

(c) the adverbs arpe/xas, ^fiiras, ixearjyvs, avriKpvs, Ayeccs, &<pvwSy which in 
poetry may drop their 5, but never in prose ; in the Ionic dialect, numeral 
adverbs in -ukis also frequently drop the a before consonants, e. g. 
iroWdKi. Her. 2, 2. 

5. A genuine Greek word can end only in one of the three Liquids, y, <r (»^, 
f , i. e. ir<r, Kir) and p. The two words, ovk, not, and ex, out of, form only an 
apparent exception, since, as Proclitics (§ 32), they incline to the following 
word, and, as it were, become a part of it. This law of euphony occasions 
either the omission of all other consonants, or it changes them into one of the 
three Liquids just named; hence, aa/ia (G^n. adofiar-os), instead of av/juxr, 
ydXa (Gen. yd\aKT-os), instead of ydXoKT, Xeay (Gen. Xcoyr-os), instead of 
\4ovr, i$ov\€vov instead of i^ovXevovr, — re pas (Gen. rfpar^s), instead of 
TepoT, K€pas (Gen. Kdpar-os), instead of kc/jot, fi4\i (Gen. /teAxr-os), instead 

of lki\tT, 



W 26, 27. 1 NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 43 

CHAPTER n. 
Syll ables. 

$26. Nature and Division of Syllables. 

1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with 
one or more consonants, is called a syllable. 

2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word 
consists of several syllables, a distinction is made bet'ween the 
stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. 
The stem-syllables express the essential idea of the ^vord, the 
syllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. 
Thus, e. g. in ye-ypa</)-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ; 
the two others, syllables of inflection : in Trpay-^a^ the first is 
the stem-syllable ; the last, the syllable of derivation. 

$27. Quantity of Syllables. 

1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its 
vowel is short or long. 

2. Every syllable is long wliich contains a diphthong, or a 
simple long vowel, or two vowels contracted into one, e. g. 
^ovXevw ; ripoi<i ; aKOiv (from dcKCDv), ^orpvs (from ySorpt'tt?), 

3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position, 
when two or three consonants, or a double consonant (^ i ip), 
follow the short vowel, e. g. ortAAw, tvi/'uvtc^, Kopd^ (^opoxos) 
Tpdiri^a. 

Remark 1. The pronunciation* of a syllable long by nature, and of one 
long by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced long, but tho 
latter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by p6sition, its pronun- 
ciation must be protracted. Hence a distmction is made in pronouncing such 
words as TrparTw, irpa^is, irpcLyfia (d), and tcittw, rd^is, rdyfia (d). 

Rem. 2. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Positio 
debi/is), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of 
the Liquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with more 

' The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of 
the Gennan gymnasia, and in some of the schools in England and Scotland, 
but not to any extent in this country. — Tk. 



44 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [\ 2S. 

ease, e. g. &reKvos, dverrKos, 'aK/x-f], 0oTpvs, SiSpax/J-os, yet in two cases the posi- 
tion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel : — 

a) in compounds, e. g. '%Kvi^(a ; 

b) when one of the Medials (j3 7 S) stands before one of the three Liquids 
(\ /* J/), e. g. fivfikos, eijoSfios, TreirXiyfjLai ; in tragic trimeter, ^\ also lengthen 
the preceding short vowel. 

It is obvious that a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and 
Liquid, e. g. i^iivvrpov. 

4. A syllable, which, contains one of the three doubtful 
vowels (a, t, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long 
and short, but must be either long or short. 



y 28. Quantity of the Penult. 

In order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three 
doubtful vowels, a, i, and v, in the penult of words of three or 
more syllables, must be determined. The following are the 
principal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity 
of the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the 
Forms : — 

The penult is long, 

1. In substantives in -awv (Gen. -aovos or -acows), in substantives of two or 
more syllables in -iwv (Gen. -iovos\ but -"iwv. Gen. -tuvos), and in forms of the 
comparative in -lavy -lov (Gen. -lovos)^ e. g. hirawv, -ovos, 6, r], companion, Ilotrei- 
ddojv, -<avos ; Ktciv, -ovos, ri, pillar, fipaxfov, -ovos^ 6, arm, 'AfKptwv, -ovos ; but 
AevKaXfwv, -covos ; KaKKtoDV, koKKIov, more beautiful. 

Exceptions. The two Oxytones, t] Tfidiv (X), shore, and generally ^ x^oiv, snow. 
In Homer, the comparatives in -iwv, lov, are always short, where the versifica- 
tion admits. 

2. In oxytoned proper names in -dv6sf and in the compounds in -dy6s (from 
&ya}, to lead, and &yvv[jLi, to break), -dvup and -Kpdvos, e. g. 'Aaidv6s, KoxdySst 
captain ; vavdy6s, naufrdgus ; Bidvccp, dUpdvos, having two horns. 

3. In adjectives in -d-ns (Fern. -dXs) derived from verbs- in -a«, in proper 
names in -drTjs, in substantives in -h-ns (Eem. -Ttw), and in those in -vt7}s of the 
first Dec. (Fem. -dris), and in proper names in -rrrj, e. g. axpdrjs, untouched; 
Ev(t>pdTr]s, Mii^ptSaTTjy, TroXhriSf -ov, citizen (Fem. ttoXItis) : irpea-fivrris, -ovy old 
,nan ; 'A<ppo5tTr], 'Afx^irpiTT]. 

Exceptions: (a) to the proper names in -orrjs: roAaTTjs, AaA/xarTjs, Sap^-njs, 
all in -fidTrjs and -(pdr-ns, and compounds formed from verbal roots, e. g. 'SwKpa- 
r7]s] — (b) KplT-fis, judge, from, the short root Kpl, ktXttjs, builder, and ^vttjs, 
one who sacrifices. 

4. In Proparoxytones in -IKos, -i\ov, -Ivos, -Ivovy in words in -ivn, -Iva, 
'€vr],-vva, in those in -vyosj when <r does not precede the ending; in Pro- 



$ 28.] QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 45 

Proparoxytones in -Up a, and in adjectives in -vpos with a preceding long 
syllable, e. g. 

'O ^jxlKos, multitude; Sayrh/T], gift ; b Kivdvvosj danger ; 

ir45l\op, shoe ; AXyTvay y4(f)vpa, bridge ; 

7] Kafilvos, oven ; alffx^m}, shame : l(rxi>pos, strong ; 

ffeXIvoy, parsley ; &fMvva, defence; (but ox^pos and ixvpSs), firm. 

Remark 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -ivos 
and -Opo, namely, b x'^^v6s^ rein; 6 iplvSsy wild fig-tree; and ^ KoAAupa, coarse 
bread. 

Exceptions. ElXaTrfvr], feast, and compounds in -yvy as (from yvv-ft^ woman), 
C. g. au5p6yvv OS, and Kopvurj, club. 

5. In substantives in -vtos, whose antepenult is long, and in compound 
adjectives in -SaKpvros and -rpvTos (from SoKpvo}, Tpu«), and also in sub- 
stantives in -Ojtio, -vyii, and -vyuv, and in adverbs in -05 or, e. g. 

6 KWKvrSs, wailing ; &Tpvros, indestructible ; 6\o\vyfiy vluhtus ; 

oSdKpvTos, without tears ; '(dpvfiaj -oltos, seat; 6\o\vyuu, ululatus, 

fioTpv56vf in clusters. 
Exception. Map/mpvyf}, splendor. 

6. In dissyllabic Oxy tones in -i\6s, -ip-6s, -ivSs, -i6sy -vxSs, -v(jl6s, 
-vv6s, and in Paroxytones in -i^ij, -vvt], e. g. 

x\/i\6s, bare ; t} piu6s, skin ; 6 f>vfi6s, pale ; ^vvSs, common ; 

6 x^'^^ifidder; 6 ""los, dart; 6 ^fi6s, mind; Au/iTj, injury; 

6 ?un6sf hunger ; 6 x^^^^f juice ; so, &^fios, etc. ; A^w*^* excu6e. 

Exceptions. Bi6s {6), bow ; irAvvSs (i), washing-trough. 

7. In dissyllables in -dos, -avSs (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -to, which 
begin with two consonants, e. g. 

6 vd.6s, temple ; (pdvos, bnlliant ; (rrfa, pebble ; (pXld, door-post. 

Eem. 2. The following maybe added to dissyllables in -la: KoXid, shed; 
avia, trouble ; Kovta, dust ; and to those in -aos, the variable 'tXaas, and the proper 
names in -d o s, e. g. 'AfitpidpoLos ; Olv6/xaos is an exception. 

Exceptions. Ta6s or tocJjs (6), peacock; ffKid U), shadow. 

8. The following single words should also be noted: — 

I. d. 

"AKpdros, unmixed; veavis, young girl ; rioLpa, turban ; 

avidpSs, troublesome; oiradSs, attendant; (pdAapos, clear; 

aii^aSris, self-sufficient ; a-ivdiri, mustard ; 6 ^\vdpos, tattle. 

Also the proper names, "Afidais, "Avdiros, "Apdros, A-qjxdpdTos, ©edrcS, 'litraj/, 
riptdTros, SapdTTjy (Serapis), 'S.rvfi^dXos, ^dpcrd\os. 

II. r. 

*AKpl^i\s, exact ; iuliH], rebuke ; irap^evoTrhrtjs, gallant. 

t<pd^Ifios, strong; epT^os, day-laborer; 

rh rdplxos, pickled fish ; 6 7} x«^t3«^''» swaJkw; 



46 ACCENTS. [^ 29. 

Also the proper names, 'A7x^o''7^» TpdvlKos, Evplrros, KAXkos (r),*'0«rrpiy, Boia-Ipu. 
The following dissyllables should be noted for the sake of the compounds: 
rl/j.-fj, honor; viKi], victory ; (pv\-fjy tribe ; "vKin^ forest ; \it6sj little; iilKpSs, small; 

in. V. 

'A/*u)ti«j/, blameless; ipvK<a, to holdback; ?^<pvpov, booty; 

&<rv\oy, asylum ; 6 l\v6st ^^'* V trdrrvpos, papyrus ; 

avT-fi {v}, war-cry; iyvi/rji the ham; trirvpov, bran. 

Also the proper names, "A^vdos, ^Apxvras, Bi^vvSs, Ai6vv(ros, Kafxfib<ri]s, Kip- 
Kvpa, KcokvtSs. And the dissyllables, >pvx^h soul; 6 Tvpos, cheese; 6 rrvpSs, wheat; 
i Xpv(r6s, gold; Kvirt], grief; y^vxp^Sy cold. 

k 29. Accents 

1. The written accent designates the tone -syllable, according 
to the original Greek pronunciation. The accented syllable 
was pronounced with a particular stress as w^ell as elevation of 
voice. The same is true of the modern Greek. In Enghsh, 
too, while the stress of the accented syllable is more particu- 
larly prominent, there is • often also an accompanying elevation 
of the voice, but not so much as in the modem Greek. 

2. In the pronunciation of Greek prose, the accent and quan- 
tity were both regarded ; thus, in avSporn-o's, while the accentual 
stress was laid on the a, the proper quantity of the penult w was 
preserved. Compare analogous Enghsh words, as siinrisingt 
outpouring, in which both the accent on the antepenult and the 
length of the penult are observed. 

3. How the Greeks observed both the accent and quantity in 
poetry, cannot now be determined. But as it was generally 
sung or recited in the style of chanting, the accent was probably 
disregarded, as is constantly done in singing at present 

4. The Greek has the following marks for the tone or accent 
(7r/D09(i)8iat) : — 

(a) The an^ite (- ) to denote the sharp or clear tone, e. g. 
Xoyo9 ; 

(b) The circumflex (-) io d.ei\oie Wie protracted ox idnding 
tone, e. g. o-co/xa. Tliis accent consists in uniting the rising 
and falling tone in pronoimcing a long syllable, since, e. g 
the word o-co/xa was probably pronounced as aoofxa ; 

(c) The grave (-) to denote XhefaUirig or heavy tone. 



f 29.] ACCENTS. 4** 

Remark 1. The mark of the falling tone was not used. Hence not &v^pci)- 
whs, \6yhSi but iv^pcoTTos, \iyos. The mark of the grave was used only to 
distinguish certain words, e. g. rls, some one, and rls, who ? and, as Avill be seen 
in § 31, I, instead of the acute on the final syllable of words in connected 
discourse. 

Rem. 2. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs ; at the 
beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand 
after the breathing, but the circumflex over it, e. g. o7ra|, avX^ios, tiv etirpj,, 
tZpos, oSfia. But in capital letters, in connection with the diphthongs ^, ??, y, 
the accent and the breathing stand upon the first vowel, e. g. "AiSrjs. On the 
diaeresis, see § 4, Rem. 6. 

Rem, 3. The grave accent diflFered from the acute as the weaker from the 
stronger accent in ddrim^ntal, or in the Juatin f^neratdrum, the penultimate accent 
in both words being much stronger than the preceding one. The circumflex 
accent denoted a tone like the circumflex inflection in English. 

Rem. 4. In the United States and Great Britain, Greek is not generally 
pronounced by the accents, no regard being had to these so far as the pronun- 
ciation is concerned. In a few institutions, however, the pronucciation is 
regulated by the accent ; but where this is the case, the grave and circumflex 
accents are pronoimced in the same manner as the acute. No difference is 
therefore made in the pronunciation of rifi-ff and ti/x^, nor between yvufjLcu and 
yvdfiais. In these and all similar cases, the Greeks must have made distinc- 
tions. 

5. The accent can stand only on one of the last three sylla- 
bles of a word; it was not any natural difficulty but merely 
Greek usage wliich prevented the accent from being placed 
further backpthan the antepenult. 

6. The acute stands on one of the last tln^ee syllables, whether 
tliis is long or short, e. g. koXo?, av^pomovy 7r6X€fjio<; ; but upon the 
antepenult, only when the last syllable is short, and is also not 
long by position, e. g. av^powro?, but av^puyrrov. 

7. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two sylla- 
bles, and the syllable on which it stands must always be long 
by nature, e. g. rovy o-w/xa ; but it stands upon the penult only 
when the ultimate is short, or long only by position, e. g. r^1x^> 
)(p^fx(Xy 7rpa|t9, avAa^, Gen. -aico?, KoXavpoi/', KaTrjXiKJ/, ArjfxCjva^. 

Rem. 5, Also in substantives in -l^ and -v^ (Gen. -Ikos, -vkos), i and v long 
by nature, are considered as short in respect to accentuation, e. g. <^om|, Gen. 

-iKOSy KTJpV^, Gen. -VKOS. 

8. If, therefore, the antepenult is accented, it can have only 
the acute ; but if the penult is accented, and is long by nature. 



48 ACCENTS. |i 29 

it must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. 
Tet^o?, Trparre, but the acute, when the ultimate ^ is long, e. g. 
r€Lxov<;, Trpdrroi ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g. 
TttTTw, raTTe. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex 
stands, e. g. TrarTj/a, TrarpoiVy nomiuatives accented on the ulti- 
mate usually have the acute, e. g. iTrrrcvs Trora/iot, ^-qp. 

Bem. 6. In the inflection-endings, -ai and -ox, and in the adverbs, irp6iraXtu 
and eKira\ai, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g. 
rpdwe^ai, TinrreTcu, yKwffffoUf iy^payiroi, ;^ci;pot. The optative endings, -o i and 
-oi, e. g. nn'fia'aij iKXeltroi, Xc/irot, and the adverb otKoi, domi, at home, are long; 
on the contrary, oIkoi, houses, from oIkos. 

Rem. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, u is considered as short 
in respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o, 
e. g. M€v4\€(i)s, avctr/ewv ; — irdKeus^ irSXeccv — ; TXcus, &y7jpc05. Gen. IXeo), ayriptc ; 
but if adjectives like tXioss are declined according to the third Dec, they are 
accented regularly, e. g. <pi\oye\u>s, <pi\oy(\atTos ; so also in the Dat. Sing, and 
PL, as well as in the. Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. iyripttSy 
iyfipcf), ayf]p(f)s, ayi}p(^v. 

Rem. 8. In the words, cll^e, that, vcdyly certainly, the penult has the acute, 
apparently contrary to the rule ; but these must be treated as separate words. 
The accentuation of the words cfre, oUrf, ZsTrtp, ^is, rovsSf, etc., is to bo 
explained on the ground, that they are compounded with Enclitics (^ 33). 

Rem. 9. According to the condition of the last syllable with respect to 
accent, words have the following names: — 

(a) Oxytoncs, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. rrru^s, kokSsj ^p\ 

(b) Paroxytoncs, when the penult has the acute, e. g. -rvrrw ; 

(c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. ^iv^petros, rvr- 
rSfifVos, iu^pamoi, Tinrr6iJ.evoi\ 

(d) Perispom^na, when the ultimate has the circumflex, e. g. kokus] 

(e) ProperispomCna, when the penult has the circtimflex, e. g. vpay^ia, ^- 
AoC'ca 5 

(f ) Baiytones, when the ultimate is unaccented, e. g. irpdy^ueray -rp^yfui. 

' Hence the accent often enables us to determine the quantity of syllables, 
e. g. from the acute on the antepenult of Toi^pia, /ioHrpta, we infer tliat the 
ultimate is short, othonvise the accent could not stand funhcr ' ' ' ' ^ 
penult, No. 6, above; — from the circumflex on vlros and x^. . 
syllables are long by nature, 7; — from the circumflex on fuUpa and crt.. .;. 
that the ultimate is short, 7 ; — from the acute on x^pa^&pa, and "Hpo, V—.i 
the ultimate is long, othenvise the penult of these words must be ciroumtioxed, 
8; — from the acute on <^i\os and irouciKos, that the penult of these words i» 
short, otherwise they miiit have been circuniflexed, 8. — Tb. 



i 30.] CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. 49 



♦ 30. Change and Removal of the Accent hy Inflec 
tion, Composition, and Contraction. 

1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quan- 
tity of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, there 
is generally a change or removal of the accent. 

(a) By lengthening the final syllable, 

(a) a Proparoxytone becomes a Paroxytone, e. g. 7roA.e/i.os, 

TToXilXOV ; 

(y8) a Properispomenon, a Parox^'tone, e. g. Tctx©?, tcixov? ; 
(y) an Oxytone, a Perispomenon, e. g. ^cos, Seov. Yet this 
change is limited to particular cases. See M5, 7, a, 

(b) By shortening the filial syllable, 

(a) a dissyllabic Parox}i;one witli a penult long by nature 
becomes a Properispomenon, e. g. <f>€vyoiy (^ciyc, itpam 
(but ram) ; 
.()8) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long 
or short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. ySovXeucj, Pov- 
Xcve. 

(c) By prefixing a syllable or syllables to a word, the accent 
is commonly removed towards the beginning of the word, e. g. 
</>€vya), €00701'; so also in compounds, always in verbs, com- 
monly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. 65os crvvoSo?, ^cos 
<l>tX63€osi TLyLxi arlfio^, <f>ixry€ aTr6<f>€vy€. But whcn syllables 
are appended to a word, the accent is removed towards the 
end of the word, C. g. rvTrroj, rvTrro/ic^a, n;0<^;croyxc^a. 

Remark 1. -The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and 
the exceptions to the gfcneral rules here stated, will be seen below, under the 
accentuation of the several parts of speech. 

2. The following principles apply in contraction : — 

(1) Wlien neither of the two syllables to be contracted is 
accented, the contracted syllable also is imaccented ; and the 
syllable which had the accent previous to contraction, still 
retains it, e. g. <^iXe€ = </)t!X€i (but </)tAc€t = (fnXel), yiveL = y€V€L (Init 
ycvctov = ycvtoF). 

5 



60 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [^ 3l. 

(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is 
accented, the contracted syllable also is accented, 

(a) when the contracted syllable is the antepenult or penult, 
it takes the accent which the general rules require, e. g. 

Ayaivdoixai = ayairSojiai <(>i\e6ixevo5 = (piXov^^vos 

iaraSros = iffraiTOS op^6ovffi = op^ovffi 

vXi\€(T(Ta = vKri<T<Ta tiixoSvtuv = rificivTccv ; 

(b) when the contracted syllable is the ultimate, it takes the 

acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted had 

the acute ; the chcumfLex, when the first of the syllables 

was accented, e. g. eo-racos = ka-rui^, VX^^ "^ '^X°''* 

Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below, under 
the contract Declensions and Conjugations. 

CHANGE AND REMOVAI OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED 

DISCOURSE. 

§31. I. Grave instead of the Acute. — II. Crasis. — 
III. Elision. — IV. Anastrophe. 

I. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of 
the grave, i. e. by the close connection of the words with each 
other the sharp tone is weakened or depressed, e. g. Et /x^ 
fx7]Tpvir] TrepiKoXXr]^ 'HepL/Boia rjv. But the acute must stand before 
every punctuation-mark by which an actual di\ision is made 
in the thought, as well as at the end of the verse, e. g. 'O /xcv 
Kvpob Irrepaae rbv wora/Aoj/, oi §€ irokipnot a7ri(f>vyov. 

Exceptions. The interrogatives rls, t/, quis 1 who ? quid ? ichai f always 
remain oxytoned. 

Remark 1. When an Oxytone is not closely connected with the other 
words, i. e. when it is treated grammatically, the acute remains, e. g. elrh fi^ 
\4yeis — rh av^p Suo/xa. 

II. Words united by Crasis {§ 10), have only the accent ol 
the second word, that being the more important, e. g. TayoJ^ait 
from TO dya^oV. \Vlien the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxy- 
tone with a short final syllable, the accent, accorduig to § 30, 2, 
(2) (a), is changed into the circumflex, e. g. to l^ro? = tovttos, 
Ta oAAa = ToXAa, to epyov = Tovpyov | to. ottXxi = ^J^ttAo, eytu oi/iat :^ 
eyw/xat. 



♦ 32.] ATONICS OR PROCLITICS. 51 

III. When an unaccented vowel is elided {§ 13), the accent 
of the word is not changed, e. g. tovt Icmv. But if the elided 
vowel is accented, its accent is thrown back upon the preceding 
syllable, as an acute ; yet, when the elided word is a preposi- 
tion or one of the particles, dAXa, ov8c, /xT^Se (and the poetic 
^Se, tSe), the accent wholly disappears, and also when the 
accented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g. 

iroAAcb iira^ov = ttoAA' iira^ov rrapa ifiov = irap ifiov 

Seiya ipuras = Sfiy' ipun^s anh kaurov = d<^' kavrov 

<f>r}fi\ iy(t> = (jyfjfi iyta oAAa iyu> = dAA' iy^ 

cuVxpcf €\e^as = aXaxp e^e^as ovSe iyto = ovS" iyca 

(irrh, ^<rav = eTrr* ^cay ■^ Se 8s := i) S* 3s. 

IV. Anastrophe. When a preposition follows the word which 
it should precede, the tone of the preposition naturally inclines 
back to its word, and hence the accent is removed from the 
ultimate to the penult; this drawing back of the accent is 
called Anastrophe (dvacrTpo(t>7]) , e. g. 

fidxij^ eft but M fidxTls Ufwy &Tro but airh pfuv 

'idaKTjy Kara " Kark 'l^aKrjv KoAwv irfpi " irepl koXuv. 

Hem. 2. The prepositions, a^l<pi^ ami, aud, Sid, and the poetic hrai, inrdpy 
iiai, TTopai, do not admit Anastrophe. If the preposition stands between an 
adjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchus the Anastrophe is found 
only when the substantive stands first, e. g. e.av^(f em SiKjjerr* (but Siy^evri 4irl 
Bdy^Cj)). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases. — In poetry, 
vfpi is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very 
often, and even when the Gen. and irtpl are separated by other words. See 
§ 300, (c.) 

Rem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used 
instead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. &va instead of avdaby^n ; fXfTa, irdpa, 
fiTi, vvo, irepi, tvi, instead of the indicative present of tivai, compounded with 
these prepositions, e. g. ^7« irdpa instead of irdpa/jn, ir4pi instead of irtpUaTi ; 
also, when the preposition is separated from the verb and placed after it, which 
is often the case in the Epic dialect, e. g. oAeVos itiro irdvras kralpovs. But the 
accent of ^^6 is drawn back without any reason, in such phrases as airh ^a\d(r- 
iTTjs oIk€7u, avh cTKOTTov, ott' i\iriSos, and the like ; in such cases it is properly on 
the ultimate. 



^ 32. V. Atonies or Proclitics. 

Atonies or Proclitics, are certain monosyllables which, in 
connected discourse, are so closely united to the following 



52 ENCLITICS. [^ 33. 

word, that they coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They 
axe : — 

(a) the forms of the article, 6, 17, ot, at; 

(b) the prepositions, cv, cts (is), iK (ii), m, ad; but if c| is 
after the word w^hich it governs, and at the end of a verse, 
or before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, e. g. 
Ka/cw c^, H. I, 472 ; in prose, c^ does not stand after its 
case. 

(c) the conjunctions, ws (as), d\ but if ws follows the word 
which it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, 
however, is found only among the poets, e. g. KaKol Stq, 
for o)? KaKoi; 

(d) ov {ovK, ovx), not ; but at the end of a sentence and with 
the meaning No, it has the accent, ov (ovk). Comp. 
§ 15, Rem. 2. 

§ 33. VI. Enclitics. 

Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, wliich, m 
connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, 
to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw 
it back upon the precediag word, e. g. ^tXo? n?, TroXe/tos T19. 
They are : — 

(a) the verbs elfil, to be, and (^Tj/i/, to sat/, in the Pres. Indie, except the second 
Pers. Sing., el, thou art, and (pps, thou sayest ; 

(b) the foUo-sving forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia- 
lect : — 



T. P. S. p.ov 
fiol 
Me' 



n. p. s. ffov 

col 
c4 



III. p. S. ov Dual. a<puiiv PL v(pl<n {v) 



01 

I, fly ; 



(c) the indefinite pronouns, tIs, t1, through all the cases and numbers, 
together with the abridged forms rod and rcf, and the indefinite adverbs xdiSy 
irdi, iri], irov, iroStl, Trobiv, irol, -nori 5 but the corresponding interrogative pro- 
nouns are always accented, e. g. t/s, tI, trSis, etc. ; 

(d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, t€, toI, ye, vvv, Tep (and in 
the Epic, /ce, kcV, vv, pd), and the inseparable particle Se, § 34, Rem. 3. 

Remark. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming 
with them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. cfre, oGre, firirf, Ssre, 
&STrep, 'oiTis, etc. 



i 34.] INCLINATION OP THE ACCENT. 53 



^ 34:, Inclination of the Accent. 

1. An Qxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the 
accent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence 
(^ 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. 

^p ris for b7]p r\s koKos iariv for KoXhs earh 

Kai Ttves " Kol tip is iroTaix6s 76 " iroTafihs ye 

Ka\6s re " Ka\hs t4 vora/JLoi rives " iroTafxol rives. 

2. A Perispomenon unites with tne following enclitic without 
further change of the accent, e. g. 

<pu>s ri for (pus rl <l>i\e7 ris for (piXei rU 

<pci>s icrriv '' (^ws ecriV KoXov rivos " koXov rtv6s. 

Remark 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarded 
as an Oxytone. For as (pus ianv, for example, are considered as one word in 
respect to accent, and as the circumflex cannot go further back than the penult 
(§ 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. Long syllables 
in enclitics are treated as short in respect to the accent ; hence oTvrivoiv, Zvri- 
vQ)v, are viewed as separate words, e. g. koXuv nvuv. 

3. A Pai'oxytone unites with the following monosyllabic 
enchtic without further change of the accent ; but there is no 
inclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g. 

<pi\os fiov for <plKos fxov but <pi\os iarlv, <pi\oi (pcurlv 
&X\os ira»s " &AAos irws '' &Wos vore, &W(i)V rivStv. 

Kem. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a 
Paroxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on 
the fourth syllable, e. g. ^'Xoi-<pa<TiVy which is contrary to the usa^^c of the 
language. 

4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite ^vith the 
following enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last sylla- 
ble; this syllable, forms the tone-syllable for the following 
enchtic, as av^^pw-Tros rt?, e. g. 

&v^pa}Tr6s Tis for 6.v^p(i}Tros t\s ctwjjA ri for cSifia r\ 

^.v^pwirol rives " iv^payKoi rives au/xd iffriv " trcvfjLa early. 

Exception.' A Properispomenon, ending in ^ or 1^, does not admit the incli- 
nation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. o5a.o^ riv6s, oSAo| earlvy <l>o(yi^ iariy^ t-fipv^ 
earivf \cu\wl/ eariv. 

5* 



^4 ENCLITICS ACJENTEIf. [§ 35 

Rem. 3. The local suifix 5e (^e), which expresses the relation to a place^ 
whither, coalesces with substantives according to the rules of inclination, e. g. 

"OXv/jLTToude '2,<f)rjrT6vde oi/pavSvSe Ilv^Side (from Tlv^d) 

So 'A^TjJ'a^e (i. e. 'A^vasSe), ITAoTata^e {UKaraiai), xa^fJ^C^ {x°-H-^^ Ace.) The 
suffix Se when appended to the Demon, pronoun draws the accent of this pro- 
noun to the syllable before Se. In the oblique cases, these strengthened 
pronouns are accented according to the rules for Oxytones, ^ 45, 7 (a), e. g. 

rSffos — roaSsde, rocovde, roff^Se, roa-fivSe, roaSivZe^ 

roLOs — TotosSe, rr}XLK05 — ttjAikSsSc, roiai — roialSef 

5. ¥/ben several enclitics occur together, each throws back 
its accent on the preceding, e. g. el Trip tls cri /xot ^lycrt Trore. 

$35. Enclitics accented. 

Some enclitics, whose signification allows them to be in a measure indepen- 
dent, are accented in the following cases : — 

1. 'EcT^ (j/) is accented on the penult, when it stands in connection with an 
Inf. for elecTTt (r), and after the particles ctAA', €t, ouk, /a^, ws, kuI, /xev, oti, irov, 
and the pi'onoun tout", and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. jSe?v iffnv 
(licet videre), et ianv, ovk fffriv, tout eariVj iari ^eos, etc.; the other forms of 
flfil which are capable of inclination, retain the usual accent on the ultimate, 
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. elal ^eoi. 

2. The forms of (prj/xi Avliich are capable of inclination, retain the accent, 
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, and also when they are sep- 
arated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g. <f>r}iA iyd. — "Earip 

3. The enclitic Pers. pronouns, <roD, aoif <r4, oT, ffcpitri (v), retain their accent: 
(a) when an accented Prep, precedes, e. g. iraph <rov, fiera ere, irphs aoi. But 

the enclitic fonns of ♦lie first Pers. pronoun are not used with accented 
prepositions, but, instead of them, the longer and regularly accented 
forms, e. g. 

Trap' ifiov not irapd fiov irphs i/xol not irp6s fioi 

KOT ifi4 " Kard fie vepi i/JLOv " vepl fiov. 

Remark 1. There are, however, a few instances of enclitics of the first Pers. 
pronoun standing with accented pi-epositions, e. g. Trp6s fie. PI. SjTnp. 218, c. 

Rem. 2. When the emphasis is on the preposition, there is an inclination 
of the accent, e. g. iiri ce ^ cvv croi, X. An. 7. 7, 32 (against yon, rather than with 
you). — The enclitic forms are used with the unaccented prepositions, e. g. €« 
(jlov, ^v fioi, es 0-6, €s fie, ck <tov, ev aoi. But when the emphasis is on the pro- 
noun, there is no inclination, and instead of /noO, /xof, fi4, — e/xoD, e/tof, e/xe, are 
used, e. g. 4u ifiol, aJO^ ovk iu aoL 



I 36.] DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 55 

(h) The enclitic pronouns generally retain their accent when they are em- 
phatic, as in antitheses, e. g. e>e /col (r4 ; e>e ^ <re ; hence the forms oh, of, 
e, are accented only when they are used as reflexive pronouns. 

4. The pronoun rls is accented when it stands at the beginning of a sentence, 
e. g. rives Xiyovtriv, 

5. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the enclitic 
rests disappears by Elision, e. g. KoAbs S* iariv, but KoXhs 5e itrriv — iroKKol 3* 
wrivf but TToAAol 5e eiffiv.. 



6 36. Divisio7i of Syllables , 

Preliminary Remarks. The division of syllables, according to our mode 
of pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the accent. The 
term accent and (xccented^ througliout these niles, is used ^nth reference to our 
pronunciation of the Greek, and not to the ^\Titten accent on the Greek words. 

The accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in 
polysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult 
is called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there 
is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the Avord. 

The following rules exhibit the more general method of dividing syllables, 
except where the pronunciation is regulated by the Greek accent : — 

1. A single consonant between the vowels of the penult and ultimate is 
joined to the latter, e. g. ii-yoi, ira-pd, fid-\a, 'l-va, 1-t6s, i-x^^^Pt 7r(^Ae-/ios, crrpaTeu- 
(la, X"^^"^^^* ?wxci-y6s, inroXa-fidov. 

Exception. In dissyllables, a single consonant following 6 or o is joined to 
the first syllable, e. g. A.J7-0S, TeA.-oy, 'trep-l, or-i, iro\-v, ex'*^) (Tr6\-os. 

2. The double consonants f and \^ are joined to the vowel preceding them ; 
c. g. Td|-aj, Zi^-os, irpa^-is, bLVTira^-dfievos. But ^ is joined to the vowel following 
it, except when it stands after e or 0, or after an accented vowel in the ante- 
penult, — in which case it is joined with these vowels; e. g. vo/ii-C/w, vojii-^i, 
apnrd-^(a ; but rpdire^-ay 6^-os, uofii^-oynv, apird^-oyiev. 

3. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and 
% having the accent, and also a single consonant bqfore or after e and having 
the accent, is joinei to these vowels: e. g. ay-a^6s, -rror-afLus, j8a-<rtA-ea, v-iro\- 
aPdv, S-Trdr-epos, rl^-of^ev, a-irop-ia, ev-SiK-la, iin-^lfx-ia\ for a single consonant 
after a long rovel, etc., see 4.* 

Exception. A single consonant preceded by o, and followed by two vowels, 
the first of which is e or i, is joined to the vowel after it ; e. g. arpa-Tid, aucuTTd- 
<rea>5, ffTpa-ri^ris (not (npai-id, etc.). 

4. A single consonant after a long vowel, a diphthong or u, is joined to the 
vowel following", e. g. o7roT7j-A.(J-^t, i<p7]-^iepos, (piXw-repos, affoXov-^la, OLKOv-craTe 
fii-piaSy a^v-fjiiay (pv-yovres, (pv-yofxev. 

Exception.. A single consonant following long a or t in the antepenult, and 
having the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding ; e. g. airoKpfu-aTo, iav 
(tdp-aaev. 



56 DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH, ETC. [^ 37, 38 

5. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, art 
separated ; e. g. iro\-\d, ta-rdvai, re^-vrjKa, ^ap-paXscus, KXvTorex-VT}S. 

Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following vowel \ 
e. g. iri-rpaxrxof. 

6. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last 
two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel ; if not, the last 
only ; e. g. &u-^pco'n-os, av-dpia, but irepcp-^v. 

7. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part 
ends with a consonant ; but if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a 
short syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word ; e. g. iK-fiaivw^ 
(rvi/€K-<pct>vr}<nSf irpS^-effis, auaS-acrts, but wtto-^tijs, not vTro<p-^]rT}s ', so •jrapa- 

§ 37. Punctuation-marks — Diastole . 

1. The colon and semicolon are indicated by the same mark, a point above 
the line, e. g. ES eXe|os • ttclvt^s yap uixoX6y7]cav. The interrogation-mark is 
our semicolon, e. g. Tis ravia iirolria-ev ; who did this ? The period, comma, and 
mark of exclamation have the same characters as in English; the mark of 
exclamation is rarely used. 

2. The Diastole (or Hypodiastole), which has the same character as the 
comma, is used to distinguish certain compound words from others of like 
sound, but of dissimilar meaning, e. g. o, ri, whatever, and otx, that, since ; S, t€, 
whatever^ and Sre, when. More recently, such words are generally separated in 
writing marely, e. g. '6 t<, 2 re. 



SECTION II. 

ETYMOLOGY, OR GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 

$38. Division of the Pai'ts of Speech. — Inflection 

1. Etymology relates to the form and meaning of the Parts 
of Speech. 

2. The Parts of Speech are : — 

(1) Substantives, which denote anytliing wliich exists, any 
object (person or tiling) ; as onan, rose, house, virtue; 

(2) Adjectives, which denote a property or quahty; 2iS greats 
smallf red, beautiful, hateful; 



♦ 38.] DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. INFLECTION. 57 

(3) Pronouns, which denote the relation of the object spoken 
of to the speaker (§ 86) ; as J, thoUf he, this, that, mine, thine, 
his; 

(4) Numerals, which denote the number or quantity of an 
object; as one, two, three, many, few ; 

(5) Verbs, which denote an action or state; as to hhom, to 
wake, to sleep, to love, to censure ; 

(6) Adverbs, which denote the way and manner in which an 
action takes place, or the relations of place, time, manner, qual- 
ity, and number; as here, yesterday, heautifuUy (=in a beautiful 
manner), perJmps, often, rarely ; 

(7) Prepositions, wliich denote the relation of space, time, 
etc. of an object to an action or thing; as (to stand) before the 
house, after sunset, before sleep ; 

(8) Conjunctions, wliich connect words and sentences, or 
determine the relation between sentences ; as and, but, because. 

3. Words are either essential *wox^s, i. e. such as express a 
notion, or idea, viz. the substantive, adjective, verb, and the 
adverbs derived from them ; or formal words, i. e. such as 
express merely the relations of the idea to the speaker or some 
one else, viz. the pronoun, numeral, preposition, conjunction, the 
adverbs derived from them, and the verb cTmi, to be, when it is 
used as a copula, with an adjective or substantive for its predi- 
cate; as 6 avSpwnros '^vrjros cart v. 

Remark. Besides the parts of speech above mentioned, there are certain 
organic sounds, called interjections ; as alas ! oh ! ah ! They express neither 
an idea nor the relation of an idea, and hence are not to be considered as proper 
words. — Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs not derived from adjectives 
and substantives, are included under the common name of Particles. 

4. Inflection is the variation or modification of a word in 
order to indicate its diflerent relations. The inflection of the 
substantive, adjective, pronoun, and numeral, is termed Declen- 
sion ; the inflection of the verb. Conjugation. The other parts 
of speech do not admit inflection. 



68 DIFFERENT KINDS AND GENDER OP SUBSTANTIVES. [H 39, 40 

CHAPTER I. 
The Substantive. 

$39. Different kinds of Substantives. 

1. When a substantive (^ 38) indicates an object, which has 
an actual, independent existence, it is termed a Concrete substan- 
tive, e. g. man, woman, lion, earth, flower, host ; but when the 
substantive indicates an action or quahty, which is only conceived 
of as being something actual or independent, it is called an 
Abstract substantive, e. g. virtue, wisdom. 

2. The Concretes are, 

(a) Proper nouns, when they denote only single persons or 
things, and not a class ; as Cyrus, Plato, Hellas, Athens ; 

(b) Appellatives, when they denote an entire class or an 
individual of a class ; as mortqj,, tree, man, woman, flower. 

Remark. Appellatives are called material nouns, when they indicate the 
simple material, e. g. milk, dust, water, gold, coin, grain ; collective nouns, when 
they designate many single persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind^ 
cavalry, fleet ; nouns of quantity, when they denote measure or weight, e. g. a 
bushel, a pound. 

$40. Gender of Substantives. 

Substantives have three genders, as in Latin ; the gender is 
determined partly by the meaning of the substantives, and 
partly by their endings. The last mode will be more fully 
treated under the several declensions. The following general 
rules determine the gender of substantives •by their mean- 



ing: 



1. The names of males, of nations, winds, months, and most 
rivers, are masculine, e. g. 6 ^ao-tXcvs, the king; oi "EXXrjie^y 6 
Vaix-qXuav (January, nearly) ; 6 *AA^€to9, the Alpheus ; 6 ^post tJie 
soutJieast loind. 

Remark 1. Exceptions : Diminutives in -ov, which are not proper names 
(these are conceived of as things and are neuter) ; e. g. rh /xfipdniov, the lad 
(but proper names of females in -ov are feminine, e. g. rj A(6yTioy) ; also ri 
kvSpdiroSov, a slave, mancipium; to ircuStKd, a favorite; and some rivers, e.g. 
^ 2ti;|, and also some according to the ending,' e. g. ^ A^dij. 

2. The names of females are feminine, e. g. fj fn^pt mother. 



$ 40.] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 59 

3. The names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclinable 
words, and every word used as a mere s;jT.Tibol, are neuter, e. g. 
TO Xa/xySSo, TO TVTTretv, the Striking ; to jj-i^rjp, the word mother. 

Rem. 2. The gender of the names of mountains is determined by their 
endings-, hence (a) masculine, 'EK^k^i/, -wvos, etc.; those in -os, Gen. -on, e.g. 
Ilapva(x6s\ in -ws, -«, e. g.^A^ws (d^Epul, derived from the name of a person, 
is particularly to be observed) ; (b) feminine, those in -17 (a), Gen. -rjs, e. g. 
Aj'tj/17, "IStj, OJfrTj ; those in -tj and -us, e. g. "AA-n-ts, Gen. -ews, "A\7reis, -eajv, 
Kctpa/i^ts, -tSos, "O-i^pus, -uos (masculine in Lat.), lla.pvr]s, -fi^os } (c) neuter, those 
in -oj/, e. g. AuKotoj/, n^\<ov. 

Rem. 3. The gender of the names of places also is determined almost entirely 
by the endings ; only a few of these are feminine, properly agreeing with the fem- 
inine appellatives 77], X'*>P'^i vrjaos (i. e. viovcra x^pa); t^oKis to be supplied with 
them; (a) names of cities and islands in -os, -ov, e. g. ^ Kopivbos [ttSKls]., v 'P65os 
[vrjaos], ri AtjAos [vrjo-os] (except 6 'OyxTlf^T 6s, 6 'ClpuirSs, 6 Alyia\6s, 6 Kdvcairos :, 
usually 6 'OpxofJ.ei'^s, b 'AKiapros; but generally t] UvKos and t] ^EiriSavpos) ; and 
the following names of countries : r) A^yirTrros, 7] XeppSyrfaos, rj "'Hiret^os, ■>] IleAo- 
7r6vvT](ros ; (b) names of cities in -uu, e. g. i] Ba^v\<tii/, -wvos, tj AaKeSaift&jj/, -ovos, 
7] 'Av^huiv, -6yos, ^ Xa\Kr}d(i)v, -ovos, 7] Kapxv^<^^i -ovos (except 6 Oluewu and 6 
Bpavpuv, -uvQs, usually 6 Mapa^cvy, -wvos; but commonly tj 2t/cucii/, -wi/os) ; (c) 
if Tpoi(r]w, -Tjvos. The gender of the others is determined by the endings. 
Hence, 

(a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ou (except those named above), are 
masculine, e. g. 6 B6criropos, 'la^iJ.6s, USutos, 'EWtisttovtos, Alyui\6s ; all plural 
names of cities in -01, Gen. -wu, e.g. *tAi7r7rot; names of cities in -ovs. Gen. 
•ovvTos, e. g. 6 'Tipovs (some of these are used both as masculine and feminine, 
e. g. *t\oOs ; 'Afia^ovs, Kepaaovs, 'Pa/uroCs, 2jSoi5s, and TpaiT((ovs, are feminine 
only) ; those in -as. Gen. -avros, c. g. 6 Tdpas; those in -eus, Gen. -cws, e. g. 
6 ^avoTfvs ; finally, 6 Mda-qs, Gen. -tjtos ; 

(b) All names of countries of the first Dec. and those of the third, which 
have feminine endings, are feminine (see § 66, II), e. g. ij 'EAeucts, -ivos, ri 
^aXafits, -7vos, CtC. ; 

(c) All in -oj/, Gen. -ou; plurals in -o. Gen. -uv, and those in -os, Gen. -ovs, 
are neuter, e. g. rb "Wiov, to AevKrpa, rh ''Apyos, Gen. -ovs. 

4. The names of persons wliich have only one form for the 
Masc. and Fem. are of common gender, e. g. 6 17 ^co's, god and 
goddess ; orj irats, boy and girl. 

Rem. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to 
indicate the natural gender, e. g. b fiwtriKfvs^ king ; i] fiaaiXeia, queen. See For- 
mation of Words. 

Rem. 5. Substantives (mostly names of animals) which have but one gram- 
matical gender, either Masc. or Fem., to denote both genders, are called 
Epicenes (eTriKoiva), e. g. r] akaytrri^, the fox, whether the male or female fox : 7} 
&pKros, the bear; ij KdiJ.r}\os, the camel; 6 fivs, the mouse; i} xf^*5ci>', the swallow ; 
h ols, the sheep ; fj jSoDs (collectively), ot $6€s, cattle; 6 'imros, horse (indefinitely), 
but in PI., ai linroi ; but when the natural gender is to be distinguished, ipprtu^ 
male, or ^\vs. female, is added, e. g. \ayws 6 ^\vs, the female hare; oAcotttjI ri 
&^(>r}v, the male fox ; or the gender may be indicated by prefixing the article, or 
by another adjective, e. g. 6 &pKTos, the male bear. Some masculine names of 
animals have also the corresponding feminine forms, e.g. b K4<av, a lion: ^ 
A.€aii/a, a lioness. See Rem. 4. — Here belong, in the second place, the Masc. 
names of persons in the PI., which include the Fem., e. g. oi yoviis, the parenU 
oi ircuSes, libeii, the children (sons and daughters). 



60 



NUMBER CASE, AND DECLENSION. FIRST DEC. [^ 41,4? 



§41. Number, Case, and Declension. 

1. The Greek has three Numbers ; the Singular, denoting one 
person or thing ; the Plural more than one ; and the Dual, two. 

Remark 1. The dual is not often used; it is found most frequently in the 
Attic dialect ; it does not occur in the ^olic, nor in the Hellenistic Greek 

2. The Greek has five Cases,i Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
Accusative, and Vocative. 

Rem. 2. The Nom. and Voc, as they represent an object as independent of 
any other, are called independent cases (casus recti) ; the others, as they rep- 
resent an object as dependent on or related to some other, are called dependent 
cases {casus ohliqui). 

Rem. 3. Neuter substantives and adjectives have the same form in the Nom^ 
Ace, and Voc. of all numbers. The dual has only two case-endings ; one for 
the Nom., Ace, and Voc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. 

3. Tliere are in the Greek tliree difierent ways of inflecting 
substantives; distinguished as the First, Second, and Tliird 
Declensions. 

Rem. 4. The three declensions may be reduced to two principal declensions, 
viz. the strong and the weak. The case-endings of the strong are prominent and 
clearly distinguishable, while those of the weak are less distinctly marked. 
Words of the third Dec. belong to the strong, those of the first and second to 
the weak. In tiie third Dec. the case-endings uniformly appear pure ; in the 
first and second this is less so, because in these declensions the stems end in a 
vowel, and hence combine with the case-endings which begin with a vowel. 
The inflexion of both the principal declensions, in the Masc. and ^'em^ is as 
follows : — 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 




Strong. 


Weak. 


Strong. 


Weak. 


Strong. 


Weak. 


Nom. 


s 


I— II s 


fS 


I 


6 


6 


Gen. 


05 


S 


wv 


oev 


OIV 


Uf 


Dat. 


t 




ci{v) 


IS 


oiy 


tr 


Ace. 


V and a 


V 


as 


OS 


e 


c 



M2. First Declension. 

The fii'st declension has four endings, a and 17 feminine ; ds 
and Tf]<; mascuhne. 



' See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, 4 268, seq. 



«43.] 



NOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. 



61 







Endings. 








Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 


d d or 77 


as or TJS 


at 


d 


Gen. 


TjS OS 


vs 


ov 


uv 


aiv 


Dat. 


V 9 


V 


f V 


ous 


aiv 


Ace. 


av Ov 


w 


av Tjv 


as 


a 


Voc. 


d d 


V' 


d 7?, d. 


ai 


d. 



Remark 1. It will be seen from the above terminations, that the plural as 
well as the dual endings are the same, whatever may be the form of the singu- 
lar. 

Rem. 2, The original ending of the Dat. PI. was ai<ri (v), as in the second 
Dec. to" »(»'), e.g. SiKatcri, rala-i, KofjiiraTcri, ^€o7<ti, afiiKpoiai, aya^o7<ri. This 
form is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to prose, at least 
to that of Plato, especially in the second Dec. Even the Ionic form -^<ri (y) 
is sometimes used by the Attic poets. 



$ 43. Nou7is of the Feminine Gender. 

1. (a) The Nom. ends in a or a, wliich remains in all the 
Cases, if it is preceded by p, €, or i {a jnire), e. g. x^P^ land; 
ihia,form; aocfiLa, icisdom ; -xpiiOi utility ; evvoiOy benevolence ; here 
also belong the contracts in a (see No. 2), e. g. ftm; some sub- 
stantives in d, e. g. dAxiXa, war-cry, and some proper names, e. g. 
*Av8pofif.Ba, ArySd, rcAd, <I>tA.o^ryXd, Gen. -as, Dat. -a, Acc. -ai/. 

Remark 1. Th) following words whose stem ends in p, take the ending tj 
instead of a: nSprj, vxaiden; nd^fiTjy cheek; Sfpr}^ neck; ii^dprj, uxiter-gruel ; and 
some proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g. *E<pvp7j ; the 77 then 
remains through all the cases of the Sing. — If any other vowel than e- or 1, 
precedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing, have 77, e. g. lucort, <pxrfi, <rK€vfif 
^0)7} ; except irSa, (/rass ; XP<^«» ^^^^^ > arSa, porch ; yva, field ; ciKva, rjourd ; 
Kopva, uxdmit-tree ; i\ia, olive-tree; dA«(£, threshing f oar ; Nauerj/cda, all Gen. -as. 

(b) Tlie Nom. ends in a, which remains only in the Acc. and 
Voc. ; but in the Gen. and Dat, it is changed into 1;, if the o is 
preceded by X, XX, a-, era (tt), ^, ^, x^/. 

Rem. 2. The ending is commonly in a when v precedes, e. g. extSvo (so es- 
pecially in words in -aiva) ; but 77 is often found, as is always the case in the 
SuflSx ffvvr]y e. g. fv<ppo<TVinj, also ^oimij, irpvixm] and irpvfiva, irdyr} and iruya. 
AlaiTa is the only word ending in a preceded by a single t. 

(c) In other cases, the Nom. ends in 77, which remains 
throughout the singular. 

6 



62 



NOUNS OF THE MASCULINE GENDER. 



[M4. 



2. If a is preceded by c or a, -ea is contracted in most w^ords 
into rj, and -da into a in all the Cases (comp. poppas, § 44, 3). 
The final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases. 

Bem. 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninflected forms 
end in o, e. g. yud>fj.Tj from the uninflected yydjjLca (comp. o-u/ceo), veavias from 
the uninflected veavia, iroKirns from TroA^reo; the second, the o declension, as 
its uninflected forms end in o, e. g. \6yosj uninflected form x6yo ; the third, the 
consonant declension, as its uninflected forms end in a consonant, and the vowels 
and V, which originated from consonants. 

Paradigms. 





a) 9j through all the cases. 


b) d through 


all (lie cases. 


c) d, Gen. 7]s. 1 




Opinion. 


Fig-tree. 


Shadow. 


Land. 


Hammer. 


Lioness. 


S. N. 


7) yvufiT] 


(ruK-( €0)97 


(TKl-oL 


Xwpd 


<r(pvpd 


X4aivd 


G. 


T7]S yvd}fJ.1}S 


(TV/C-TJS 


(TKi-as 


X^pd-s 


<T<pvpds 


\€aiinr]s 


D. 


TTJ yycofi-p 


(Tu/c-77 


(TKi-a 


Xwp? 


acpvpa 


X^aivri 


A. 


t)]v yvwfjLTiv 


arvK-T]v 


(TKl-aV 


X(*>pd.y 


<T<pvpdv 


\eaivdy 


V. 


S> yvufit] 


(TVK-T) 


(TKl-i. 


Xd>pd 


a(pvpd 


\4cui/d 


P. N. 


at yvu/xai 


(TVK-ai 


OTKi-ai 


Xa>pai 


(Tcjyvpai 


\4aivcu 


G. 


Tu>p yvwjxuv 


crvK-wv 


aKi-wv 


X(>}ptvv 


acpvpwv 


Xfaiuoljt/ 


D. 


rais yvw/xais 


(TVK-ais 


(TKl-aiS 


Xf^po-is 


(r<pvpats 


Xecuuais 


A. 


Tos yvdofxds 


crvK-as 


(TKl-aS 


Xc*>pds 


(T<pvpds 


AecuVds 


v. 


S) yvuixai 


avK-ai 


(TKi-ai 


Xopai 


(TtpVpOU 


\eaiycu 


Dual. 


Tci> yi/ccjxd 


arvK-a 


(TKi-a 


Xdpd 


<T<pvpd 


Keaivd 




ra7v yvdojxaiv 


avK-ouv 


(TKl-aiV 


X^pouv 


(T<pvpcuv 


\€CUVCUV. 



Kemark 1. On the form of the article t« instead of t<£, see ^ 241, Rem. 10. 
On the declension of the article ^, see § 91. The & standing before the singu- 
lar and plural Voc. is a mere exclamation. 

Kem. 2. On the contraction of -6a into -77, see § 9, 11. (a) ; in the plural and 
dual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into a. 
Comp. § 9, IL (b). Nouns in -aa are contracted as follows: N. /xvday /ivS 
{mina), G. fxydas, /xvasj D. fJLvda, fiva, A. fivata , uvav ; PI. N. fiycuj etc. 



$44. IL Nouns oj' the Masculine Gender. 

1. The Gen. O'f masculine nouns ends in -ov; nouns in -a? 
ret/iin the a in the Dat., Ace, and Voc, and those in -t;? retain 
the 17 in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. 

2. The Voc. of substantives in -779 ends in a : — 

(1) All in -nys, e. g. to^ottj^, Voc. to^oto, 7rpo<f>-qTrj^f Voc. 7rpo<f>rj" 
Ta; (2) all m -lys composed of a substantive and a verb, e. g 
yecDjaexpT/s, Vqc. yect)/;(,€rpa, /x^jpoTrwA?;?, a solve-sellerf Voc. fivpo 



H4.] 



MASCULINE NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 



63 



TTwXa; (3) national names in -t/?, e. g. ILipcn]^, a Persian, Voc. 
Hipa-a. — All other nouns in -lys have the Voc. in 17, e. g. Uipcrq^^ 
Perses (the name of a man), Voc. liipaif]. 

3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns (^ 43, 2), ap- 
ply to Masc. nouns contracted from -ea?, e. g. *Ep/u,%, poppas. 
In ^opiasy the ca is contracted into a, and not into 77, since p 
precedes, ^ 43, 1 (a). The doubling of the p in poppas is merely 
accidental. 

Remark 1. Contrary to § 43, I, compounds of fi^rpio) (to measure), as 
y€Ufji.4rp7]s, end in -77s instead of -as ; on the contrary, several proper names, etc, 
as TliXoirlSas and yeyyaSas, a noble, end in -as instead of -tjs. 

Rem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -as have the Doric Gen. in d, namc/y, 
vaTpaXoias, fn\Tpa\oias, patricide, matricide; opvi^o^pas, fowler; also several 
proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g.^YAay, Gen. 
'TAd, 2/foVos, -d, 'A^j/ZySas, -d, 2uAAas, -d ; (the pure Greek, and also several 
of the celebrated Doric names, e. g. 'Apx^ras, Aewj/iSas, tlavcravias (also the 
Boeotian 'Evafieivd^vSas), commonly have ov ;) finally, contracts in as, c g. 
Bop^as, Gen. fio^f>a. 







Paradigms 


• 






Citizen. 


Mercurv. 


Youth. 


Fowler. 


Sing. N. 


TToXh-r]s 


'Epfi (eos) rjs 


Vfavfds 


opyi^o^pds 


G. 


TToXirov 


'Epfxov 


veauiov 


opvi^o^'fjpd 


D. 


iroXiTT} 


'Ep!"^ 


veavia 


opyi^o^-fjp^ 


A. 


■JTOAlTTJJ' 


'Epix9iv 


veavidu 


opvi^oSri)pdv 


V. 


toX.7t& 


'Epfirj 


yeavld 


opvi^obiipd 


Plur. N. 


iroAtTai 


'Epfj-al 


veaviat 


opvi^o^ripai 


G. 


TOKITUU 


'Epixuu 


VfavLcou 


opvL^obripuv 


D. 


iroKiTais 


'Epfious 


veaviais 


opuibo^pais 


A. 


TTOAlTdS 


'Epfias 


veavids 


opui^o^ripds 


V. 


irokTrai 


'Ep/xa7 


veaviai 


opvi^o^qpai 


Dual. 


■JToAtTd 


'Ep/xa 


veavid 


opvi^o^pd 




iroXlraiv 


'Ep[xa7y 


yeauiaip 


opvi^o^-i]paiv 



Rem. 3. The Ionic Grenitive-ending -cw of Masc. nouns in -tjs (§ 211), is 
retained even in the Attic dialect in some proper names, e. g. 0(£Aew from 
©oA^s, T^pew from TirjpTjs. — The contract ^op^as is also found in the Attic 
writers in the uncontracted form ; thus, fiopeas, X. An. 5. 7, 7. PI. Phaedr. 229, 
b. ^opeov, Th. 3, 23. /Sopeov, 3, 4. 

Rem. 4. The ending tjs occurs, also, in the third Dec. To the first Dec. 
belong: (a) proper names in -(Stjs and -c£57jy, e.g. ©ou/cjSiStjs, 'Arpe/STjy (from 
*Arpe and iSrjs), Mi\rid5r}s, as well as gontile nouns, e. g. 27ropTiaT7jr ; (b) nouns 
in -TTjs derived from verbs, e. g. voi-fir-qs from iroidco] (c) compounds consisting 
of a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of tho 
first Dec, e. g. iraiSorpt^rjSt /3i/3Atoirc£Ai7S, d/; j^eSf/oj*. 



64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. FIRST DEC. [^5 



$45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First 

Declension. 

a. Quantity. 

1. The Nom. ending o is short in all words, which have the Gen. in -rjy [§ 43, 
1 (b)] ; but long in those which have the Gen, in -os, e. g. im\4a., a-Kid, a-ocpidy 
naiSeia, XP^ '"? Xpo'i, T^a, VH-^P°^> A-qSoL, a\a\i, etc. ; the same is tme of the Fern, 
ending of adjectives in os, e. g. ihev^epd, StKo/d. 

Exceptions. 

The following classes of words have o short in the Nom. : — 

(a) Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in -ota, e. g. 'lariouOf 
JlAdraia. 

(b) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -eid, e. g. dX^ejo, M^Scm, /SaciAeia, 
queen^ y\vK€7a, except abstracts from verbs in -ew«, e. g. ficuriKfia, king- 
dom ; Sov\eia, servitude (from jSactXeuw, SovXevw) ; 

(c) the names and designation of females, etc. in -rpia^ e. g. i/zcUrpta, afemaU 
musician, words in -via, e. g. fivla, r€Tv<pv7ay the numeral /i/d, and, finally, 
some poetic words ; 

(d) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -oia, e. g. eijvoia, &voia] 

(e) words in -pd whose penult is long by a diphthong (except av), by, v, or 
by pfi, e. g. irelpajfjAxaipa] y4<pvpa., (Tcpvpa; Tiv^pd. 'Eralpd, vaXaiaTpaiy 
Afc^pa, ^aidpa, /coAAvpo, are exceptions. 

2. The Voc. ending o is always short in nouns in -tjs ; but always long in 
nouns in -as, e. g. iroA.Td from iroKiT-qs, yeayla. from veay'ias. The quantity of 
Fem. nouns in -d and -d, is the same in the Voc. as in the Nom. 

3. The Dual ending a is always long, e. g. Moutrd from Mov<ra. 

4. The Ace. ending av is like the Nom., e. g. Movtray, x"P^ frova. MoOo-d, 
X^oa. 

5 The ending as is always long, e. g. t^ rpoKf^ds from rpdreCa, 6 veaylas, 
Tohs veoflas, rrjs oIkIols, ras oIkiols. 

b. Accentuation. 

6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws 
of accentuation permit {§ 30^. 

Exceptions. 

(a) The Voc. Secnrora from 56<r7r<^T7js, lord ; 

(b) The Gen. PI. of the first Dec. always has the final syllable oav circum- 
flexed, which is caused by the contraction of the old ending deoy, e. g. 
\€aivwy from \4aiua, vcaviwy from veayias. — But the substantives, XF^' 
ri]s, creditor ; acpvri, anchovy : irrjcrlai, ino}}soons ; and x^o'^»^s, irild-boar^ 
are exceptions ; in the Gen. PI. they remain Paroxytones, tlius xp^<"'^'f 
h<pi<aVi injalojv (but cupvwy, XPVO^^*' from oufurfis, unapt; xi"}*'^os, us^/xd). 



i 



♦ 46.] 



SECOND DECLENSfON. 



65 



Bemabk. On the accentuation of Adjectives, see § 75. 

7 The accent of the Nom. is changed, according to the quantity of the final 
Byllable, thus : — 

(a) Oxytones become Perispomena in the Gen. and Dat. of the three num- 
bers, e. g. (Nom. Tifiij) rifiys, -p, -uv, -cuv, -ous, this holds, also, in the 
second Dec; e. g. d-f6s, -ov, -^ -uv, -o7y; 

(b) Paroxytones with a short penult remain so through all the Cases, except 
the Gen. PL, which is always circumflexed on the last syllable; but 
Paroxytones with a long penult become Properispomena, if the last syl- 
lable is short, as in the Nom. PI., and in the Voc. Sing, in a of Masc. 
nouns in -Tjy (§ 44), e. g. ypdofirj, yvuf/ai, but yvufiuv] iroKtTTjs, ttoXTto,, 
voX^rai, but -KoXnuv] on the contrary, 5f«7j, Sfkot, but Zikwv ; 

(c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
Moi/o'd, TAovaris ; 

(d) Proparoxy tones become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
Kiauva, \eaiinjs. 



M6. Second Declension. 

The Second Declension has two endings, os and ov ; nouns 
in -o? are mostly masculine, but often feminine (^ 50) ; those 
in -01/ are neuter ; except Fern, diminutive proper names in -ov, 
e. g. ^ TXvKtpLov (} 40), 



Endings. 



I 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nora. 


05 ov 


01 




a 


a 


Gen. 


ov 




cov 




otv 


Dat. 


V 




015 




oiv 


Ace. 


ov 


ovs 




a 


<l> 


Voc. 


OS and e ov. 


01 




a. 


0). 



Kemark 1 . The Gen. and Dat. endings of the different genders are the 
same in all numbers; neuters have the Nom., Ace, and Voc. alike in aU 
numbers, and in the plural they end in a. 

Rem. 2. On th3 form of the Dat. PI. okti (v), see § 42, Rem. 2. 



6* 



66 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



Paradigms. 



[U7. 





Word. 


Island. 


God. 


Messenger. 


Fig. 


S.N. 


6 \6y-os 


7] VT\aos 


6(^)^eos 


6 &yy€\os 


rb cvKOv 


G. 


Tov x6y-ov 


T7JS vi\(XOV 


TOV ^eov 


ayy4\ov 


TOV CVKOV 


D. 


T(^ \6y-ca 


Tp VT\Xr(JO 


T(f 3^ey 


ayyeAoj 


T(JJ CVK(f 


A. 


Thv Koy-ov 


T^v vr\<sov 


rhv biSu 


&yy€\ov 


Th (TVKOV 


V. 


Si X6y-e 


S) Vr}<T€ 


Si Sti6s 


6776X6 


Si ffVKOV 


P.N. 


01 K6y-oi 


al V7J(roi 


Ot ^€0l 


S77€A.ot 


Th. avKa 


G. 


rwv Koy-wv 


TU>V VT\CrU}V 


rwv ^eav 


a.yy4\oiV 


rwv (TVKwv 


D. 


Tols xSy-ois 


rais vf]<Tois 


rols (S-eoTy 


ayy€\ois 


rois avKOis 


A. 


rovs \6y-ovs 


ras vi](Tovs 


Tovs ^eovs 


a,yy4\ovs 


ra avKa 


V. 


S> \6y-oi 


Si vriffoi 


& ^eoi 


&yyi\OL 


Si ffvKa 


D, 


TCi} \6y-ct) 


TCt VT]<TOi 


Tw ^eci) 


ayyeKai 


TOO avKto 




rotv \6y-oiv 


TOUU vi\(TOLV 


ro7y ^eo7v 


ayyihoiv 


roiv avKOiv. 



Rem. 3. The Voc. of words in -os commonly ends in 6, though bften in -osy 
e. g. Si (plKe, and 5 (plXos ; always S> ^cos in classic Greek. 

$47. Contraction of the Second Declension. 

1. A small number of substantives, with o or c before the 
case-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect {k 9). 

Paradigms. 





Navigation. 


Circumnavigation. 


Bone. 1 


S.N. 


6 ttXSos 


ttXovs 


6 irepiirXoos 


ireplirXovs 


rh oarcov 


oarovy 


G. 


■n\6Qv 


ir\ou 


iTepnr\6ov 


vepiirXov 


oarcov 


OtTTOV 


D. 


TT\6ci} 


ttA.^ 


irepnr\6c{} 


TTtplirXcfi 


OCTfOi 


OffTCj.' 


A. 


irXoov 


Tr\ovv 


•Kfp'nrXoov 


TTtpiirXovy 


OCTfOV 


oarovy 


V. 


ir\6e 


irXov 


■irfpLTrXoe 


TTipilCXOV 


oanov 


o<rrovv 


P.N. 


'Tr\6oi 


ttAo? 


irepiirXooi 


iTfplirXoi 


oaria 


6<rra 


G. 


ir\6(tiv 


K\u}V 


iTfpnrXowv 


iTfp'nrXwv 


OCTfOiV 


oaruv 


D. 


ttXSols 


ir\o7s 


icepnr\6ois 


TrfplirXois 


otrreois 


oarois 


A. 


■jr\6ovs 


itKovs 


TTfpnrXSovs 


vepiTrXovs 


oarta 


ocrra 


V. 


Tr\6oi 


ir\oi 


ircplTTkooi 


-irepiTrXoi 


oarea 


oara 


D. 


Tr\6cii 


irKui 


irfpnr\6w 


ireplvXai 


oaTfoo 


OOTOtf 




Tr\6oiv 


ir\6iv 


TrepiirXooiv 


TfplirXoiv 


oartoiv 


ooToty 



Only the following nouns besides the above are contracted in tliis manner : J 
v6os, vovs^ the mind ; o p6os, f>ovs, a stream ; & ^povsy noise ; 6 x*'"^^* dozm ; S dSeA- 
<pidovs, a nephew; 6 ^iryarpiSovs^ (jrandson ; 6 av€y\>taSovs^ son of a sister's child. 

Remark. Uncontractcd forms sometimes occur even in the Attic dialect 
though seldom in substantives, e. g. vow^ Plato, Prot. 344. a ; much oftener in 
adjectives, particulai-ly neuters in -oa^ as rk &yoa, h-€p6irXoa. On the contrac- 
tion of ca into a in the PI. see § 9, 11. (b). 



W 48, 49.J 



THE ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 



67 



M8. The Attic Second Declension. 

Several substantives and adjectives have the endings cos 
(Masc. and Fern.) and wv (Neut.), instead of 09 and ov; they 
retain the m through all the Cases instead of the common 
vowels and diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe i 
under w where the regular form has w or ot ; thus, ox; and a 
become w ; os, ov, and ov9 become w?, wv, and cos ; ot, ot?, and ow 
become co, cos, and cov ; — co, w, and mv remain unchanged. The 
Voc. is the same as the Nom 







Paradigms 


• 






People. 


Table. 


Hare. 


HaU. 


Sing. N. 


6 \i-di)S 


7] ndx-us 


& Kay-(Ls 


rh av<ay€-ti)v 


G. 


\i-<Ai 


KoX-d) 


Xay-ta 


avwy^-o) 


D. 


Ae-y 


KaK-o} 


\ay-(p 


ai/u>ye-cp 


A. 


\i-uv 


kolK-uu 


\ay-civ 


at/uye-cav 


V. 


\€-U5 


KaK-tas 


\ay-(as 


ayuryf-coy 


Plur. N. 


\€ (p 


K(i\-tf) 


Xay-tf 


avuy€-(o 


G. 


\e-wu 


Kd\-tay 


Kay-iav 


avuiye-coy 


D. 


\f-^5 


Koi\-evs 


AuT"^! 


avarye-ws 


A. 


\(-<i>S 


Kci\-(i}S 


Xay-ws 


ayuryf-u 


V. 


\f-(p 


Kd\-<f 


Kay-if 


aywye-co 


D. N. A. V. 


Kf-d 


K<lk-tO 


\ay-d) 


av(ayi-(a 


G. and D. 


\(-^V 


K(i\-U>V 


\ay-(2v 


avwye-wv. 



Remark 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fem. gender often reject the v 
in the Ace. Sing., namely, 6 \ayu)s, the hare; (Ace. rhv Xaywu and XaytS), and 
commonly v (tcs, the dawn ; rj &\usy a threshing-floor ; rj Ktus, rj Ka>s, d "A^us, 77 
T««r, and the adjectives liyr)p<DSj not old ; iiriir\e(i}S,fiiU; inrep^fws, .7"'%- 

Rem. 2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of tliis class 
has another form, e. g. Xeds and ,Xa6s, vtds and ya6s, McytKeus and Me>/€\dos, 
the Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -e«y; though, in the 
best Attic writers, the non-Attic forms also may be found. On the interchange 
of the long vowel in this Declension, see § 16, 5. 



$ 49. Accentuatio7i of Second Declension. 

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quan- 
tity of the final syllable permits; the Yoc. &5€A4)e from a5eA(^<Js, 6roMer, is 
an exception. 

2. The change of accent is the same as in the first Dec. (§ 45, 7) ; in the 
Gen. PL, however, only oxytones, e. g. ^^6$^ are perispomena ; the rest are pro 
paroxytones. See the Paradigm*. 



68 REMARKS ON THE GENDER OF THE ENDING OS. [^ 50. 

S. The following exceptions to the rules given for the accentuation of con 
tracts in § 30, 2, should be observed : (a) the Dual in « of words in -oos, -toy, 
-€ov, has the acute instead of the circumflex, e. g. ttXow ^ irKd, oa-Tfw ^^ baru, 
instead of ttAo), oarS):, — (b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which 
retain the accent even on the penult, when it would regularly stand as a cir- 
cumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g. ireptTrAii-ou = irep fir A. ow (instead of 
TrepiTfAoO), from TrepiirXoos = irepiTrKovs] U€ipi^6-ov = Tlfipi^ov (instead of 
Vleipi^ov), from Ileipi^oos = Ileipl^ovs] also adjectives, e. g. €w6-ov = evvov (no^ 
evroO), from eijyoos = cvpous ] yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult ; 
thus, irepiirKoi, liOt TrepiTrAot ; KaK6voi, not k6.kovoi\ — (c) t^ Kaviov, basket, takes 
the circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms; hence Kaveov = Kayovv 
(instead of Kavow) ; — (d) words in -Zi6s = Sous denoting kindred, have the cir- 
cumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, e. g. a5e\<pi5e6s = dScX^tSoCs, 
nephew (instead of dSeA^tSous). It maybe stated as the rale, that &\1 simple \ 
substantives and adjectives in -eos and -oos take the circumflex on the contracted | 
syllable, hence Kavow, a5€\<pi5ovs, xp^^^vs (from xp<^<''C'Os). 

4. In the Attic Dec, Px'opapoxytones retain the acute accent on the antepe- 
nult through all the cases and numbers. See § 29, Rem. 7. Oxytones in -<ij 
retain the acute accent in the Grcn. Sing., contrary to ^ 45, 7 (a), e, g. X^dj. O 
here absorbs o, the inflection-vowel of the Gen. (e. g. \6yo-o ^= \6yov), which 
accounts for this unusual accentuation, thus Kidi instead of Ae«6-o. 



k 50. Remarks on the Gender of the Ending os. 

Substantives in -os are regularly Masc. ; yet many are Fem. In addition to 
the names of countries, cities, and islands, mentioned under the general rule 
in § 40, the following exceptions occur, which may be divided into general 
classes • — 

(a) Substantives which denote certan products of trees and plants, e. g. 
rj &Kv\os, accrrn ; tj fidxdvos, acorn ; rj ^vaaros, Jine linen ; ri Sok6sj a beam ; ^ 
pdfiSos, a staff; rj $ifi\os, bark of the papyrus ; rj t^/o^or, rush mat; 

(b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. 6 ^ At^os, a stone; tj aX^j, partic-] 
ularly a precious stone ; t} ^(pos., a small stone ; ^ i//({/t/ior, sand ; t} (nroSoSf ashes ;| 
7] fiiKros, red earth; t] KpixTraXXos, crystal {6 KpvaraXXos, ice) ; tj fidaayos, a touch' 
stone; t] ^Ae/crpoy, electrum; rj afidpaySos, a smaraf^dus ; f} fiuKos, a clod ; rjytnffos, 
gypsum; tj va\os, glass; i] riTovos, chalk; rj ApyiXos, clay ; rj irAiK^os, brick; ^ 
&<rfio\os, soot ; t] K6irpos, ordure ; t) &a(j>aX.T0s, bitumen ; 

(c) Such as denote a hollow or cavity, e. g. ri KdpSoiros, kneading-trough ; ^ icifitif 
rSs and t] x^^^s, a box ; 7} aop6s, a coffin; rj Xijv6s, a tcine-press; tj X-fjKv^Sy an 
oil-Jiask : t) Kanlvos, an oven ; f) <po3piap.6sy a chest ; r] -rviXos, tub ; 

(d) Such as express the idea of a uxiy, e. g. rj 6S6sy a road; rj afLa^tT6s (sc 
656s), a carriage-road ; t} rpifios and ^ irpairoSy a foot-path; rj rd^posy a ditch ; 

(e) Many of the above substantives were originally adjectives, and hence 
appear as feminine nouns, because the substantives with which they properly 
agree are feminine. There are also many others, e. g. ^ aUxtios (sc ^/«]L 



I 



?{ 51, 52."' 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



69 



uouse-door; tj fjireipos (se. 7^), the mainland] t] 6.vvSpos (sc. 7^), thirsty land, desert ; 
T} veos (sc. xci;po),aya/?oi^,;?eZc?; rj vija-os (from ve7y, sc. 7^), an island; r) 5taAc/c- 
ros (sc. (payfj), a dialect; tj avyKXriros (sc. fiovXr}), senate; 7} fidp^iros (sc. Au/jo), 
lyre; t] Sidficrpos (sc. ypanfjL-f}), diameter; 7] (more seldom 6) &KaTos (sc. vavs), 
boat; 7] ^6\os (sc. oMa), round building, etc.; 

(f ) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to be 
noted, e. g. ^ y6<ros, sickness ; 7] yvd^os, jaw-bone ; t] SpSaos^ dew ; 7) fi-ffpivdos, 
twine ; 

(g) Some words which have a different meaning in different genders, e. g. 
& tinroy, horse ; t] tmros, mare, also cavalry ; 6 Xe/cl^os, pea-soup ; tj Ae/cti^oy, the 
j/oUc of an egg. 

Remark. On the diminutives in -ov, see § 40, Rem. 1. 



§51. Third Declension. 
The third Declension has the following Case-endings: — 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 


s Neut. — 

OS 

w 

( 

V and d Neut. — 

mostlv as the Nom. : Neut. — 


ey ; Neut. d 
wv 

ds ; — d 
ft; — d. 


e 

oiv 

oiv 

€ 



Remarks oic the Case-endings. 
k 52. A- Nominative. 

1. The Nom. of Masculine and Feminine nouns ends in 9, 
e. g. 6 Kopo^ (instead of Kopax-?), 17 XalXai/^ (instead of XaiXa7r-s) 
Still, the laws of euphony do not always allow the s to be an 
nexed to the stem; it is either rejected entirely, or, as a com 
pensation, the short vowel of the stem is lengthened {h 16, 3). 
But when the stem allows s to be aimexed, the usual euphonic 
{k 20) changes take place in the final consonant of the stem. 

2. In this way all Masc. and Fem. nouns may be divided into 
three classes : — 

(ay The first class includes words, which in the Nom. assume 
the gender-sign s, e. g. 

' (p\f&-6s 

K6paK-0S 

XafJLirdS-os 
yiyavT-os 
Se\<l>7y-os 
^o-6s 





' (p\€$ 






'v 


<p\t$-s 


4>X€V(«20, 1) 






KOpaK 




C3 


6 


KOpOK-S 


«({pa4(M0, 1) 


•• 


iJ 


Xa^iiraS 






V 


KafiirdS-s 


XofiTrds (4 20. 1) 


> 


yiyam 




c ■ 


6 


yiyavr-s 


ylyds (§ 20. 2) 




cc 


tfXipJv 




B 


6 


S€\(ptv-s 


S€\<pls (§ 20, 2) 


<o 




^dF {fiov, 


bov) 





6 


h $6F-s {b6vs) 


$ovs, bos (§ 25, 2) 







[a:F 




^^ 


16 


AtF-s 


Afs(§25,2) 





b 



70 THIRD DECLENSION. [♦ 53 



(b) The second class includes words, which in the Nom, i 



reject the gender-sign s, but, as a compensation, lengthen the 
short final vowel of the stem, € into rj, o into a> (H 16, 3, and 
20, Rem. 3), e. g. 



m 



TTOlfjLCy 


.. 


6 nroiirqv 


\eoi/r 


g 


6 {\4uur) \iwv 


pr]TOp 


o 


6 ^-fiTcop 


alSos 


7} aiSws 



C 



iroj/xev-or 
\4oyr-os 
f>T\rop-os 
^ ((u56a-os) alZ6-os\ 



(c) The third class includes words, which in the Nom. have 
the stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the gender-sign 
s, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. 

^p .. { ^ ^p (instead of 3^p-s) 



6 



alcav £ J ^ alwv { " " aluv-s) c 



' bT]p-6s 

aluy-os 

{?lp<tKT-os) ^pto-os 
^ idfiofrr-os. 






ireTrept 

ae\as g 

awfxar o 

repar 



Saimpr '^ [t] Safiap ( " " Sifiapr-s, Sdixapr) 

3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom. ; still, euphony 
does not permit a word to end in t (^ 25, 5). Hence, in this 
case, the t is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc. XcW, Gen. 
Xcon-os), or is changed into the corresponding <r (^ 25, 5), e. g. 

rh TreVf pt ^ f imrfpi-os or «-oy 

T^ ae\as c J (aeXcur-os) (rcAa-o; 

Ti> ((ra>/iaT) cw/xa ^ ] au^iar-os 
rh {rfpar) Ttpas [ Tepor-oj. 

Remark. The stem irvp is lengthened in the Nona., contrary to the rale : 
rh irvp. Gen. irvp-6s. 

§ 53. B. The remaining Cases. 

1. The remainmg Cases (wath a few exceptions, which will 
be specially treated), are formed by appending tlie endings to 
the stem, e. g 

Stem KopoK ]Som. K6pa^ Gen. kSpok-os PI. Nom. K6paK-(s. 

2. In forming the Dat PI. by appending the syllable a-i to 
stems ending in a consonant, the same changes take plac€ as 
have already been noticed in regard to the Nom. of similar 
words [^ 52, 2 (a)], e. g. 

(p\ffi-(rl = (pKe^l^i K6paK-<ri = KSpa^i AafiToSsTi = Xofirdoi 

ylyavT'ffi = ylyaai oh6in-ai = ohowri $oF-iri = $ovcL 

The following points also are to be noted : — 

3. (a) The Ace. Sing, has the form in -v ^vith masculines and 



^ 53.] THIRD DECLENSION. 71 

feminines in -t9, -v5, -av^f and -ov<s, whose stems end in -i, -v, -av, 
and -ov, e. g. 

Stem TToA-t Nom. v6\ts Ace. ir(^A.iv, Stem fiorpv Nom. ^orpvs Ace. ^orpvv 

vaF vav vdFs vavs vaFv vavy, fioF 0ov fi6Fs fiovs fi6Fy $ovy. 

But the Ace. has the form in -a,' when the stem ends in a con- 
sonant, e. g. <^X6^, cfiXixj/, (fiXe/ia — KopaK, K6pa$, KopaK-a — XxLfnraS, 
XafXTrd^, Aa/x7ra8-a. 

(b) Yet barytoned substantives in -is and -V5, of two or more 
syllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mute, in prose have only 
the form in v, e. g. 

Stem ^pt5 Nom. epty Acc.ipiv (poet. cpt5-a; in the dramatists Iptv) 

opvi^ tpvis tpviv (poet. 6pvi^-a) 

Kopv^ nSpvs K6pvv (poet. K6pv^-a) 

XoptT X*P** X^^ (poet, x^"^'*")- 

In prose there are hut few exceptions, e. g. TtpyAa, X. H. 3. 1, 15, and else- 
where (instead of Tepyiv) from 17 r^p^js; x'^*"'"'* (instead of xe^P'"). ih. 3. 5, 16; 
in constant use rpiiroSa, tripod. (X. An. 7. 3, 27, r air IS a is to he read instead 
of rAviia.) The goddess x^f"* has xt^P'^a in the Ace; still, in Luc. Deor. d. 
15, 1 and 2, tV X*^"'* 

Remark 1. Oxy tones of one or more syllables have only the regular form 
in •«, e. g. (iro5) ttovs, Ace. iroS-o; (^XinS) ^Krls, Ace. ^\ir(5-a; (x^a^vS) x^*" 
fivs, Ace. x^«M"^5-a. The monosyllable K\fls, Gen. k\(i5-6s, contrarj' to the 
rule, usually has the Ace. kAcii/, instead of kAcTS-o. 

4. Tlie Voc. is like the stem, e. g. 8at/xa>v, Gen. Sat/xov-o?, Voc. 

Baufiov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to 

appear. Hence the following points should be noted : — 
(1) The Voc. is like the stem in the following cases: — 
(a) When the final vowels of the stem, c and o, in the Nom. 

are lengthened into rj and w, the short stem-vowel reappears in 

the Voc, e. g. 

ZaipLwv Gen. Saifioy-os Voc. Scu/xoy 

yepwu yipovr-os ytpov [mslc&di of yipovr) 

H-V'^VP fJLTJTfp-05 H-VTfp 

2a)KpoT7jy 2a>*tpaT€-os (instead of ta-os) ^SMnpans. 



* It is probable that the Ace. Sing, in the third declension as well as in the 
first and second, originally ended in v ; but where the stem ended in a conso- 
nant, the V could not be appended without a union-vowel ; a was used for this 
purpose; hence, e. g. ^(Jpcofaj/ ; the termination ;/ was at length omitted The 
Ace. ending a, may therefore strictly be regarded as a union-vowel. 



72 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53 

Exceptions: OKytoned substantives (not adjectives) retain the lengthened 
vowel, e. g. • 

'TToifj.'fiVf Gen. TToifiev-os, Voc. itoiixiip (not voifxiv)^ 
except the three oxytones : ■jrar'fip, av-fip, and 5a^p, which, in the Voc, take 
again the short stem- vowel e, but with the accent drawn back, thus : iraTep, 
&vep, daep. According to this analogy, even 'HpaK\{€r))TJs (stem 'HpdKXees) is 
shortened in the Voc. by the later writers, into "HpoucXes. 

(b) Adjectives in -d?. Gen, -avo<s, and also adjectives (not 
participles, see Rem. 5), whose stems end in -vr, have in the 
Voc. a form Hke the neuter (or the stem) ; iras and its com- 
pounds are exceptions, e. g. 

fjLiXdsy Gen. av-os Neut. and Voc. fi^Xav 

XapieiSf €vr-05 X'*/''^*' (instead of xap'tJ^j § 52, 3). 

So substantives in -ds. Gen. -avro?, have the Voc. in -av (instead 
of -an-), § 52, 3, e. g. 

yiyas Gen. avr-os Voc. 7^70*' (instead of 7(70*0-) 

KciXx"^ aj/T-os KoAxctv 

Aids COT-OS Aldv. 

Eem. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the r reject also the v, but as 
a compensation lengthen the short o, e. g. "ArKas, Gen. -ayr-os, Voc. "ArXd, 
no\vdoi/xdSi Voc. noA.uS(£/id. 

(c) Substantives in -is, -vs, -avs, -cvs, and -ovs, whose stems 
end in -t, -v, -av, -cv, and -ov, have the Voc. like the stem, the 
s of the Nom. being rejected, e. g. 

udvTis Voc. fidvTi ; irpccrfivs Voc. irpea-fiv ; /uOs Voc. fiC ; erus Voc. <rv ; X/s Voc. 
A.t ; 7paOs Voc. 7pou ; ficuriXcis Voc. /BacriXeG ; )8oDs Voc. fiov. 

The word ttoTs, Gen. iraid-os, has Trat in the Voc, since, by rejecting the gender- 
sign s, the stem would end in 5 (TralS), a letter which canilot end a word, and 
must be dropped. 

Rem. 3. Substantives in -ty, -vs, -ous, whose stems end in a consonant, have 
the Voc. like the Nom., e. g. S opvis, Kopvst ttovs. Still, some substantives in 
-15, Gen. -ivos, have the Voc. like the stem, e. g. 5 Se\<l>iv (also 5eA^/s), from 
$e\<pis., Gren. -7t/os. 

(d) The Voc. is like the stem in all words, wliich in the 
Nom have their stem pure, e. g. ^p, aiwv, etc. ; but 'AttoXXwv 
(Gen. '(jivos), Iloo-etSaiv (-cuvos) and acorrjp (-^pos) are exceptions, 
the Vocatives being w "AttoAAgv, Ilo'o-ctSov, aCjTep, with the accent 
drawn back. 



I 



$ 54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 73 

(2) The Voc. is not like the stem, but like the Nom., in most 
words whose stems end in one of the consonants which cannot 
enphonically stand as the final letter (§ 25, 5), because after 
dropping the stem-consonant, frequently it could not be de- 
termined from the Voc. what the true sten* was ; e. g. from 
adp^. Gen. (TapK-6<s, the Voc. would be adp (instead of adpK) ; from 
o <^(05, Gen. <^a)T-os, Voc. <^w (instead of ^wt) ; from vtij/, Gen. 
vi^-o?, Voc. vt (instead of vicji) ; from wi/^. Gen. wtt-os, Voc. w 
(instead of wtt) ; from irov^y Gen. ttoS-os, ^'^oc. tt®. 

Rem. 4. The Voc. of &va^, king, in the Common language, is like the Nom. 
S) &va^, or by Crasis &va^] but in the solemn language of prayer: & &ya (in 
Hom. and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. O. C. 1485 : Zeu &ya, <rol <put/co), or S>va 
(instead of 6.vaKr, according to § 25, 5). 

3. Substantives in -ci and -ws, whose stems end in -09, have 
the Voc. neither like the stem, nor the Nom., but, contrary to 
all analogy, in -ot, e. g. 

Stem r)xos N. t]x^ Gr- VX^'^^ (instead of ■r]x^<^-os) V. ^xor( instead oirixoo'i, rix^-i) 
odSos alSds al56-os ( " " cuSJir-os) alSo7 ( " " al56a--i cuSo-'i) 

Rem. 5. The Voc. of all participles is like the Nom., e. g. S tvtttcov, tctu- 
<p<&5, Tv\pas, rv^uVy BeiKi/vs. "Apxd^V) Voc. &pxoy, when a substantive, is an 
exception. 



A. Words, which in the Gen. have a consonant before the ending 
-05, i. e. WORDS whose stem ends in a consonant. 

$ 54. I. The Nom. adds a to the stem 

(a) Tlie stem ends in X ; thus : 6 ^ aXs, Gen, oA-os, Dat. PI. 
aX-o-i(v). See Rem. 1. 
[ * (b) Tlie stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute — /S, tt, <f>; y, yy; 
Ky pK (rj crdp^, aapK'Os), and x- See § 52, 2 (a). 

(c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute — S, r, kt, S^, v^^. See 
^ 52, 2 (a). On the Ace. see § 53, 3 (b). 

The stems of the Neuter, belonging to this class, end in t and kt (yaXaKr), 
but, according to § 25, 5, reject the t and kt ; thus : (tw/jlu instead of trw/iaT, and 
yd\a instead of yd\aKT ; or, according to § 52, 3, they change the r into a- ; on 
the omission of the t before <rt in the Dat. PI. see § 20, 1. 

(d) The stem ends in v or vt. See $ 52, 2 (a). 

7 



1 



74 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[*54. 





7}y Storm. 


71, Torch. 


7], Helmet. ' 


rh, Body, tj, Nose. 6, Tooth. ] 


Sing. N. 


KaiXdip 


Xafiirds 


Kopvs 


(Tcofia pis 


oSovs 


G. 


KalXair-os 


Xa/xirdd-os 


K6pv^-os 


(rdjxaT-os ^lu-Ss 


6d6vT-as 


D. 


AaiAoTT-t 


XafxirdS-i 


K6pv^-i 


(r(*>ixaT-i plu-i 


6S6uT-i 


A. 


AatAdTT-a 


Aa/A7ra5-a 


K6pVV 


acHi-ia piv-a 


6S6vT-a 


V. 

Plur. N. 


\a7K&^ * 


Aa/XTTcts 


K6pVS 


(r(a(j.a ptu 


odous 


XaiXoLTT-cs 


AO;U7ra5-es 


KSpv^-es 


ff(aixaT-a p7v-es 


656vT-es 


G. 


XaiXaiv-av 


KaixTrdS-ccv 


KOpli^-COV 


acafidT-ODV piv-icv 


oMuT-oiv 


D. 


KaLXw\iL[v) 


\afnrd-(n{v) K6pv-(n{v) 


adnj.a-(n[v) pl-ai^y) 


o^ov-(n{v) 


A. 


Kalhair-as 


\a[A,irdS-ai 


Kopu^-as 


<TtafjiaT-a pilu-as 


ohSvT-as 


V. 


XalXair-es 


\afnrdS-es 


Kopv^-es 


ff^fiar-a (iTv-es 


6d6uT-es 


D.N.A.Y. 


\ai\air-e 


Aa/x7raS-6 


KOpV^- € 


ffciofxaT-e pTi/-e 


6B6vT-e 


G. and D. 


XaiXair-oiv 


hafiTrdS-oiv 


KOpV^:-)lV 


ffconaT-oiv plv-otv 


ohSuT-oiy. 



So: 6 K6pa^, -oLKos, raven; 6 Xdpvy^, -vyyos, throat; 6, t] 6pvis, -l^os, bird; 6 
&va^, -aKTos, king ; rj '4\fj.ivs, -tv^os, tape-worm ; 6 5e\<ptsf -7voSy dolphin ; 6 71705, 
-ayros, giant, etc. 

Eemark 1. The stem of nouns in -^ and -| commonly ends in the smooth 
TT and K ; the stem of those in -7I ends in -77, except 6, r) Xvy^, Gen. XvyK-Ss, 
lynx {hutrj Xvy^, Gen. KvYy-^s, hiccough). Instead of <pdpvyyos from 7] (pdpvy^y 
throat, the poets, according to the necessities of the verse, use <pdpvyos also. On 
Tj ^pi^, Tpix^s, hair, see § 21, 3. 

Rem. 2. The word t] aAs, Gen. aX-6s, signifying sea, and in the Fem. gender, 
is only poetic, and the Sing, 6 aXs, signifying salt, is only Ionic and poetic ; 
elsewhere, only ol aAes, salt, occurs (PL Symp. 177, b. Lys. 209, e). 

Eem. 3. To class (c) belong also the contracts in -T}is, Gen. -7}iSo5 = -ps, 
p5os, e. g. 7j irap'ps, cheek, TrapySos. 

Rem. 4. The stem of rh o5s, ear, is wt, thus : Gen. q}-t6s, Dat. wrf, PI. 5to, 
&TO}v, d)crt(j'). The word rh repas, according to the rule of the ancient gram- 
marians, usually admits .contraction in the plural, among the Attic writers, 
after the t is dropped: repd, repav (but X. C. 1. 4, 15. PI. Phil. 14, e. Hipp 
300, e. ripaTo) ; — t^ y^pas, reward of honor ; rh yrjpas, old age; rh Kpias, flesh, 
and rh Kepas, horn, reject t in all the Numbers, and then suffer contraction in the 
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat.Pl.) ; 
yet Kepds, besides these forms, has the regular form with t ; Thucyd. uses the 
contracted forms ; the uncontracted Kepara occurs only in 5, 71. Kepws is uni- 
formly employed in the phrase iirl K^pus, in column. When the a, contracted 
from aa, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision, 
not of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -as, -aos, -os, -eos, e. g 
t^era (fr. <rKe-n-as) instead of akdirji, kAco (fr. k\€os) instead of icAe'a 



^55.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



75 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 



Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 



Dual. 



rh repas, wonder. 
repar-os 
repar-i ' 



rh Kepas, hom. rh Kpeas, flesh. 

Kepar-os and Kepus (Kpea-os) npeus 
Kepar-i and Kepc^ {Kp4a-i) Kpea 



repar-a and repa 
repdr-wv and repuv 
r4pa-<li{v) 



Kepar-a and K^pd 
KcptxT-wv and Kepuy 
K€pa-<ri(v) 



(Kpea-a) Kped 
{Kped-ct)v) Kpcwy 
Kp4a-(ri{v) 



repar-e 
repdr-oiu 



K4par-e and Kcpd 
Kepdr-oiv and Kep^u 



(Kpea-e) Kped 
(Kped-oiv) Kpe^y. 



Eem. 5. To class (d) belong also the contracts, in -6eis, Gen. -6evros = oGs, 
ovvTos, e. g. & trXoKovs, cake, Gen. -TrXaKovuros ; also in -"fjeis, Gen. --fjevros = -ijSf 
'TJvTos, e. g. Tifi'^s, honorable, Tifirjvros. 

Eem. 6. For the irregular lengthening of the vowel in icrelsy els, jueXdy, and 
tiLkos, see § 20, Eem. 2. 



§ 55. II. The Nom. rejects 9, hut lengthens the short 
final vowel of the stem € or o into rj or (n Q 16, 3). 

1. The stem ends in -v, -vr, and -p. For the omission of v, 
and VT, before o-t, see § 20, 2, and for the omission of t, in the 
Nom. of stems ending in vr, e. g. Aewv, see $ 25, 5. 

2. The following substantives in 'r)p: 6 iraTrjp, father ; rj /a-jJ- 
rqpi mother ; rj SvydTrjp, daiighter ; -^ yaa-ri^p, helly ; rq Arjfii^pj 
Demeter (Ceres), and o dvrjp, man, diiFer from those in the above 
paradigms only in rejecting e in the Gen. and Dat. Sing, and 
Dat. PL (§ 16, 8), and in inserting an a in the Dat. PI. before 
the ending criy to soften the pronunciation. 

The word avf}p (stem av4p), rejects € in all Cases and Numbers, except the 
Voc. Sing., but inserts a S (§ 24, 2), thus: Gen. avdp6sf Dat. avdpl, Ace. &uSpay 
Voc. &u€py PI. &vdp€Sf avZpSiv., au8pd<ri{y), dySpaSy etc. 





d, Shepherd 


. 6, Lion. 


6, Orator. 


6, Father. 


7}, Daughter. 


Sing. N. 


iroiix-fiv 


\€(l)V 


p4]T(tSp 


irar-fip 


^vydrrip 


G. 


iroifxev-os 


\4oVT-OS 


p-l]TOp-OS 


iraTp-6s 


^vyarpos 


D. 


TTOlfieV-t 


k4ovt-i 


p7]rop-i 


irarp-i 


^iryarpi 


A. 


TToifiev-a 


\4ovT-a 


p7]Top-a 


irarep-a 


^vyarcpa 


V. 


iroifjL-fjj/ 


\4otf 


prjrop 


xarep 


^vyarep 


Plur. N. 


iroifih-es 


\4oin--es 


^{jTOp-CS 


iroTep-es 


bvyarepes 


G. 


iroificu-cov 


\e6vT-oov 


prjTSp-wu 


Trarep-cov 


^iryar4pay 


D. 


troifie-aiiv) 


\4ov(tl[v) 


^rirop-tn{v) 


iraTp-a-a'i{v) 


^uyarpacri{v) 


A. 


iroifiev-as 


x4ovT-as 


pi]TOp-Q.S 


varep-as 


^vyarepas 


V. 


TToififv-es 


\4oyT-€s 


^7)7 op-es 


irarep-es 


^vyaT4pes 


Dual. 


iroifieu-e 


\4ovT-e 


p-fjTop-e 


"Trarep-e 


^vyar4pe 
^vyarepoiv. 




iroifiev-oiv 


Xeivr-oiv 


p7}r6p-oiv 


TraT4p-oiv 



76 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[^56 



Bemark 1. The substantive ^ x^^P> hand^ belongs to nouns of class No. 2, 
and differs from them only in not lengthening the e of the stem (x^p) into ij, 
but into €t, e. g. x^^P instead of xh^ 5 ^^ is irregular in retaining the €t in 
inflection, thus : x^^P^ X^W^j ^*^-5 <Jxcept in the Dat. PI. and the Gen. and Dat. 
Dual x^pf^i{v)i x^po"'- Yet in poetry, the short as well as the long form is used 
in all the Cases, as the necessities of the verse require, e. g. xc'fx^^ and x^P^^y 
X^poiv and x^^po^f, X^P^^ ^'nd x^ipeo-t. 

Eem. 2. The following nouns in -«v, Gen. -ovos, reject the v in particular 
Cases, and suffer contraction : ^ eiKiv, image, eUSuos, e'lKoyi, eiK6va, et/cJi'os, etc., 
together with the Ionic and poetic forms : Gen. ^Ikovs, Acc. €</cc6, Acc. PI. (Ikovs 
(the irregular accent is to be noted in e'lKci and tlKovs) ; r) arjddiv, nightingale^ 
Gen. ar]S6vos and otjSoCs, Dat. arjSoi; t) X'^^^^^f'i swallow, Gen. x^AtSt^vos, Dat 
XfA.'5o?. 

Eem. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nom. o, ^ 'APH'N, lamb; the 
Nom. of this is supplied by ^ ^7 a/xuSs, Gen. apv6s, Dat. appl, Acc. Spj/o, PI. 
Nqjn. &py€s, Gen. apvcov, Dat. d/)m(rt(;'), Acc. ^/>vas; farther, the word 6 aariip, 
-epos, star, though not syncopated like iror^p, etc. belongs to this class on account 
of -the assumed a in the Dat. PI. a(rrpa(Ti{v). In substantives belonging to 
class No. 2, the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing, (and in the word atrfip, also 
that of the Gen. PI. and Gen. and Dat. Dual) is removed by syncope to the last 
syllable, and that of the Dat. PL to the penult, e. g. warpSs, narpi, avdpwVf 
TraTpa(ri{v). The word At] /x-firrip has a varying accent, viz. A^firjrpos, A-fjfiTj- 
Tpi, Voc. A'f]firiT€p (but Acc. ArifirjTepa). So also ^ttyarep Voc. of ^ydri/jp. 
On the Voc. of ttot^p and airf)p, see § 53, 4 (1) (a). In poetry, according to the 
necessities of the verse, are found ^vyarpes, ^vyaTpwu, A'f]fj.r)Tpa, and also, on 
the contrary, varepos, ^vyarcpos, ^uTjrept. 



§ 56. III. The Stem of the Nom. is pure. 

The s is omitted without changing the final vowel of the 
stem. The stem ends in v, vr, p, and (only in Sdfiap, wife) in 
pr. The Case-endings are appended to the Nom. without 
change. On the omission of t in stems ending in vr and pr, see 
§ 25, 5 ; and on the omission of v, rr, before o-t, see k 20, 2. 





6, Paean. 


6, Age. 


6, Xenophon. 


6, Wild beast 


rh, Nectar. 


Sing. N. 


iraiav 


aldov 


aevocpoiy 


^^P , 


VCKTap 


G. 


iraiav-os 


tuwv-os 


aeyoipcovT-os 


^p-6s 


yeKTap-os 


D. 


iraiav-i 


aiwv-i 


ZevocpwyT'i 


^vp-i 


y€Krap-i 


A. 


•jraiav-a 


atwu-a 


p,ivo(pS>yT-a 


^7jp-a 


yeKTap 


V. 


traiav 


alciy 


^eyocpuy 


^^p 


ysKTap 


Plur. N 


iraiaiz-es 


alwv-es 


"EeuocpaJUT-es 


^^p-€S 


veKTap a 


G. 


iraiav-au 


alwv-av 


aevocpaivT-wy 


^7]p-ay 


V€KT(ip-a)y 


D. 


iram-ort(j/) 


otw-a't(v) 


s,eyo(pu-(Tt{y) 


^p-(ri{u) 


yeKTapffi 1/) 


A. 


iraiay-as 


atctiu-as 


aevoipfavT-as 


^7jp-as 


yeKTop a 


V. 


vaiay-es 


aiay-es 


a€yo(pwyT-es 


^p-es 


y^KTop-a 


Dual. 


vaiav-f 


atwy-e 


"SevocpuvT-e 


^p-e 


yeKTap-f 




iraikv-oiv 


al^y-oiy 


aeyoipciyT-oiy 


^p-o7y 


yeKrdp-oiy. 



f 57.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



77 



Remark 1. The three words in -«j/, Gen. -wj/os: 'ATreJAAwj/, UocrfiSSfv^ ^ 
oAwv, threshing-floor^ drop v in the Ace. Sing., and suffer contraction; thus, 
('AWAXwya, 'A7r<^AA«a) 'ATreJAAw, nocetSw, oA« (on oAcw, comp. § 48, Rem. 1, on 
KvKeuj, § 213, 11). Also the Ace. y\ix'^i from 7} yXiix^^ ^^ fiXrixf^v, penny- 
royal, Gen. -ojj/os, is found in Aristophanes. 

Rkm. 2. All the Neuters belonging to this class end in -p {ap, op, up, up), 
e. g. Th v€KTap, ^Top, iriXwp, nvp (Gen. irvpSs). The word rh iap, spring, may 
also be contracted, e. g. ^p, Gen. -^pos. 



B. Words which hate a vowel before the ending -os jln the Gen. 
k 57. I. Words in -ctjs, -avs, -ovs. 

1. The stem of substantives in -cv?, -av<s, -ovs, ends in v (from 
the Digamma F) ; s is the gender-sign. On the omission of v 
between vowels, see § 25, 2. 

2. Substantives in -cvs have -cd in the Ace. Sing., and -eds in 
the Ace. PL, from e-Pa, iFas; the omission of the F lengthens 
the a and as. These nouns have the Attic form in the Gen. 
Sing., viz. -cws instead of -eo?, and in the Dat. Sing, and Nom. 
PL admit contraction, which is not usual in the Ace. PL When 
a vowel precedes the ending -ev?, as, e. g. xoe^s, 'EvjSoevs, the end- 
ings -ews, -€(j}v, -cd, -eds are also contracted into -w?, -wv, -a, -as. 
Nouns in -av<s and -ovs are contracted only in the Ace. PL, which 
is then like the Nom. PL, as in all contracts of Dec. III. 





6, King. 


6, A measure. 


6, 7], Ox. 


7), Old woman. 


Sing. N. 


^acriXevs 


Xoevs ^ 


fiovs, bos for bovs 


ypavs 


G. 


fia<ri\4-(i}S 


XG{eci))cos 


fio-6s, bov-is 


ypa-os 


D. 


fiaaiKu 


XO" 


fio-i; bov-i 


ypd-t 


A. 


fia(ri\4-d 


Xo(ed)a 


fiovu 


ypavv 


V. 


fia(ri\cv 


Xoev 


Pod 


ypav 


Plur. N. 


fia<ri\e7s 


Xoe7s 


fi6-€5 


ypa-es 


G. 


fia(Ti\4-(t)u 


Xo(4(i})cov 


fio-wv, bo-um 


ypa-tav 


D. 


Pa(n\€v(n{v) 


Xoevciii/) 


P0V(Ti{v) 


ypav(rl{v) 


A. 


^aa-iKe-ds (and 


eis) xo{4a)cis 


fiovs 


ypavs 


V. 


fiaaiK^Ts 


XO€lS 


/3o-€S 


ypa-es 


Dual. 


fia<ri\4-€ 


XO" 


fi6-e 


ypa-e 


' fia(ri\4-0LV 


Xoeoiu 


fio-o7u 


ypa-oiv. 



Remark 1. Among the Attic poets, the Gen. Sing, of nouns in -eis some- 
times ends in -eos instead of -ews; thus 07j(re'os, apiffreos, and the. Ace. Sing., 
not only in the Attic, but in all the poets, sometimes ends in -tj, instead of -4d, 
e. g. Upri, ^vyypaipTJ. The Nom. and Voc. PI. in the older Attic writers, 

' Commonly written x<^oy> contract x^vs. 

7# 



78 THIRD DECLENSION. [H 58, 59. 

especially in Thucydides, end also in -tjs (formed from the Ionic -^es), e. g. 
8a(Ti\7js, linrTjs, UKarai^s instead of UKaraieTs. The uncontracted Nom. ®r]<r4€s 
occurs in PI. Theaet. 169, 6. The Ace. ending -els instead of -4as is very 
common in Xen., e.g. rohs lirirels^ C. 3. 5, 19. rovs yoi/cTs, 2. 2, 14. ypa<p€7sf 
(r/cvTeis, xa^Ke7s, 3. 7, 6. robs fiaaiXeis, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom 
among the other Attic prose writers. The Ace. vi^is is regular in all the Attic 
writers. 

Rem. 2. The following are declined like xoeiJs : Uupaieisy Gen. Ueipaius, 
Ace. Tleipaia, 6 ayvieis^ altar before the door, Gen. ayviws, Ace. ayvia, Ace. PI. 
ayvias, and several proper names, e. g. 'Eperpias, iZreipius, MtjAiS, Evfiocas, 
EujSoa, Ev^oas, UAaraias, Awpias ; yet the uncontracted forms are often found 
in proper names, e. g. @e(riri4av, QeffirieaSf Sretpteo, XlAaTatewj', 'Eperptecov, 
AwpifMv, Ueipaiewy (in Thu., X., PI., Dem.). The uncontracted forms are 
regular in a\i€vs, fisherman, aXiioos, a\im, aAteas, 

Rem. 3. The Nom. PL of fiovs and ypMs are always uncontracted in good 
Attic writers : B6es, ypaes ; on the contrary, in the Ace. only the contract forms 
ypavs and vavs occur 5 the Ace. PI. fiovs is the common form ; fi6as occurs only 
very seldom. 

Rem. 4. Only 6 x^^^i ^ measure, a mound, and rj poVs, vinegar-tree, are de- 
clined like fiovs ; but in the PL both without contraction ; only 7] vavs {vdFs, 
navis), is declined like ypavs ', still, this noun is quite irregular; see § 68. 

§58. 11. Words in -r)s, -cs (Gen. -€os); -ws (Geti. 
-wos), -(OS and -w (Gen. -oos^; -as (Gen. -aos), -os 
(Gen. -eos). 

The stem of words of tliis class ends in s. On the omission 
of cr, see § 25, 1. In the Dat. PL, a a- is omitted. 

§ 59. 1^1) Words in -lys and -es. 

1. The endings -17s and -es belong only to adjectives (the 
ending -lys is Masc. and Fem., the ending -cs neuter), and to 
proper names, terminating like adjectives, in -^anys, -fievr]?, 
-ycurj<s, -KpoLTT)^, -ixrjSr]<;, -ttci-^t^s, -o-^eviys, -tcA,i;s, -k->]S7]<s, -avS^r]';, -epKr]?, 
-/Sapyj?, -dprjs (-^p^?)> -dpKr]';, -veLKT}?, .-Aa/X7nys, 'aa.Krj's, -rvp^ijs, and 
{KXir]<s) K\rj<5. The neuter exhibits the pure stem (^ 52, 3) ; but 
in the Masc. and Fem., c, the short final vowel of the stem, is 
lengthened into rj [§ 52, 2 (b)]. 

2. The words of this class, after dropping o-, suffer contraction 
in all the Cases, except the Noni. and Voc. Sing, and Dat, PL ; 
and nouns in -/cXer;?, which are already contracted in the Nom. 
Sing, (into kX^s), suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Sing. 



§59.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



79 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



G. 

N. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



<Ta(p^s, clear. 



aa,d)is 



{<ra<p4-os) ' (ra<povs 
(<ro</)6-i) aa<pet 
{(Ta(pe-a) aa(pT] <ra<pes 
<Ta(pes aa(p4s 

Dual N. A. V 
G. and D 

Singular. 
ii rpi-fjpTjs, trireme. 

{TpL->lp€-Os) Tpi-f^pOVS 

{rpi-fipe-i) Tpi-fipei 
{Tpi7)pe-a) Tpi-fiprj 
Tpiiipes 



{<ra(pe-es) (ra<pe7s 

{ cra(p4-ci3v ) cracpuy 
(ra(p4-(Tt(v) 

(aacpi-as) aacpels 

{cra(p4-es) aracpeTs 

cra((>4-€ <ra^ij 

a'a(p4-oiu. ixacpoiv. 

Plural. 

yrpiilpf-es) Tpirjpeis 
{TpLrip4-a}v) TpiTjpcov 
Tpi7jpe-(ri{y) 
(rpf^pe-os) Tpi-fipets 
{Tpirjpe-es) Tpcrjpeis 

Singular. 



(<ra<^e-o) <ra<pri 



{<ra(p4-a) 
(aa^4-a) 



aacprj 
aa(pT] 



Dual. 

TpiT]pe-e 
rpn]p4-oiy rpiiipoiv 



L 



G. 
D. 
A. 

V. 



"SMKpdrrjs {'n.epiK\4r]s) IlepiKAirs 

'2,oi}Kp6.Tov5 (ITepi/cAee-os) Ilejot/cAeouy 

"l^o^Kparei (nept/cA-ee-t) (XlepiKA-eet) TlepiKXei 

2«/cpaT77 (nepifcAee-o) nepi/cXed (Poet, also HepmK^) 

SwKpares (llepiKAees) TlepiKkeis. 



Eemaek 1. On the contraction in the Dual of ee into rj (not into et), and in 
the Ace. PL of -eas into -eis, see § 9, II. When a vowel precedes the endings 
-7JS, -€s, then -eo in proper names in -kKtjs is always contracted into -d, and 
commonly also in adjectires (§ 9, II. ), e.g. nept/cAeVa = Ilepi/cAed; a/cAei^y. 
without fame, oucKeea = oKAeS, vytirjy, healthy, vyi4a = vyia, ivde'f]s, poor, iySkca = 
evdea, inrep(pvf]s, supernatural, vtrep<pv4a = irjrep(pva (Ace. Sing. Masc. and Nom., 
Ace, and Voc. PI. neuter) ; but sometimes the contraction into -tj occurs, e. g. 
wyiTj, 5i(pv7i, a.(pv7j, avrocpvTJ, X. R. Equ. 7, 11 (in all the MSS.). The Ace. PI. 
Masc. and Fern, has -eis, e. g. vyicis, avTO(pv€is. 

Rem. 2. Proper names in -Kpdrvs, -a^4vr}s, -y4v't]s, -(pdvrfs, etc., also "ApTjs 
(Voc. "Apes), form the Ace. Sing, both according to the first and third Dec, 
and are hence called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declensions), e. g. 'XcoKparT) 
and 'S.wKpdr-qv, according to Dec. I., 'A\Kafi4vr] and -fiey-qu, 'Ayria-^4yT] and 
'(r^4vTiv, "Aprj and -rjy, etc. ; Plato commonly uses the form in -77, Xenophon that 
in -7iy, other writers botTi, without distinction ; in words in -yrjs. the form in -vriv 
is preferred to that in -*/7j. (The Gen. of "ApTjs in good prose is ''Apews [often in 
Plato], yet in the poets "Apeos is also used according to the necessities of the 
verse.) But in words in -kAtjs, the Ace. in -K\rjv is first used in later writers. 
The PI. is declined according to Dec. I., e. g. 'Api<rTO(pd,uou, tois AecoKparais, rohs 
'Api(TTO(pd.vas, Tohs A7ffioa^4yas ] still, 'HpojcAees occurs in PL Theaet. 169, 6. 

Rem. 3. The Gen. PL of rpi-fjpris occurs, also, in the uncontracted form, viz. 
Tpir\p4(t}v ; but in all the other Cases it is uniformly contracted ; the Dual 
also in words of this class occurs in an uncontracted form in Attic writers, 
^•&- kvYY^^^^i ^^d the Tragedians use the uncontracted forms of proper names 



* caip4-os from <ra((>4<r-os, the a of the stem being dropped j and so in the 
Other Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. 



80 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[H 60, 6.. 



in -K\4ris = K\rjsj according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. 'Hpo/cAcrjy, Dat. 
-/cAe'ej, Voc. -K\6es. The contract Ace. in -K\rj is rare. The Voc. & "HpuKKes, 
as an exclamation, belongs to the later prose. 

Rem. 4. The irregular accent of the Gen. PI. and Dual is to be noted, viz. 
TpiTipav (instead of rpnjpcou from. rpi7]pea>v)^ Tpirjpoiv (X. H. 1. 5, 19. 5. 4, 56). In 
addition to this word, adjectives in -r}^s and the word avTdpKTjs, have the like 
accent, e. g. awri^ioiv = crwrj^wv, avrapKewp = avfdpKuv. 



^ 60. (2) Words in -cos. Gen. -o>os, and in -ws and -w. 

Gen. -00^. 

-A 

^ (a) -as, Gen. -aos. 

Thus, e. g. o rj S(i)<;, Jackal, Gen. -9^wos, etc. Polysyllables have 
the Ace. Sing, and PI. either contrac^^ed or uncontracted, e. g. 
6 ^/ocos, hero, tov ypoio. and ^/3o>, tovs ^pwas and ^pws. 

{h)-a>s and -co, Gen. -oos. 
Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The 
stem ends in -os. The short final vowel, according to $ 52, 2 
(b), is lengthened into w. The ending -ws, however, is retained 
in the Attic and Common language only in the substantive 
atS(05 (stem atSos), and in poetry in ^a>s, morning (in Eurip.) ; 
but in all other words, it has been changed into a smoother 
form, so that the Nom. ends in -w, e. g. i7xw (stem t7x°0- ^^ 
the Voc. in oT, see ^ 53, 4 (3). The Dual and PL are formed 
hke the ending -os of Dec. II, ; thus, atSoi, rjx^^y ^tc. 



Sing. N. 


7} ald(os (stem alSos), shame. 


7] rix<^ (stem vxos)^ echo. 


G. 


(alS6-os) aldovs 


(vx6-os) vxovs 


D. 


(alS6-'C) al^oi 


ivx^-i) vxoT 


A. 


(aldo-a) aiSw 


(vx^-a) 7)x^ 


V. 


{alBo-'i) al5o7. 


(r/xcJ-i) 7)X0'. 



k 61. (3) Words in -as. Gen. -aos, and in -os. Gen. -eos. 

(a) -OS, Gen. -aos. 
Only the Neuters to o-eXas, light, and ro SeVas, goblet, belong to 
this class : Gen. o-cA.a-os, Dat. aika-'i, and a-iX-a ; PL oreA.a-a and 
(xiX-a, Gen. creXd-biv, Dat. o'€Xa-o-t(v) ; Dual o^eXa-e, crcXa-oii/. 

Remark 1. On the poetic shortening of the contract o, see § 54, Rem. 4. 
In the following four Neuters in -os, the o in the Gen., Dat., and in the PL, it^i 
changed, according to Ionic usage, into the weaker e, viz. V 



§62.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



8^ 



Bperas (poet.), image, Gen. /SpeVeos, PI. fiperea and iSpcrrj, fipereccv 
Kuas {■poet), place, PI. in Homer, Kciea, K(i€(ri{y). 
ovSas (poet.), ground, Gen. oiiSeoSf Dat. ot/Sei' and oi/Sti (Horn.) 
Kve<pas (poet, and prose), darkness. Gen. Kv4<paos Epic, Kv4<pov5 Attic, Kv4<pdl 
Epic, /cW<|>a Attic. 

(b) -OS, Gen. -cos. 

All substantives of this class are also neuter. In the Nom., 

€, the stem- vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o (^ 16, 1). 



Sg.N.A. 
G. 
D. 


T^ yevos (instead 
(yeVe-os) 
{yeve-'i) 


of y eves), genus. 
yevovs 
yevei 


rh K\eos (instead of K\ees), glory. 
(/fA.ee-os) K\eovs 
(/cAee-t) Kheei 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 


{yive-a) 
yevi-uv and 
y4ve-<Ti{v) 


yetni 
yeviav 


(kAcVo) K\4a 
(K\4-a)v) K\ewv 
K\4€-a-i{v) 


Dual. 


(yeve-e) 
(yeve-oiv) 


yevri 
yevoiv 


(/cAe'e-e) k\4ij 
(K\e4-oiv) K\eo7u. 



Rem. 2. On the contraction of €6 into tj (instead of ei), and of ea into a 
(instead of 77), when a vowel precedes, see § 9, 11. On the poetic shortening 
of the contracted d in kAco, see ^ 54, Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. PI. is not unusual, e. g. opeW, 
jSeAeW, KcpSeW, and almost without exception av^4(it}V, in PI. Polit. 260, a., the 
uncontracted Dual in €€ occurs : tovtw ri) y4vee. In the lyric portions of the 
Attic tragedians, 'iT6^ea, axeo, etc. occur. 

in. "WOEDS IN -ly, -VSy -If -V. 

§ 62. (1) Words in -Is, -vs* 

The substantives in -I5, -i3s originally ended in -tJFV, -vJPs. 
See ^ 25, 2. 



Sing. N. 


6 k7s, corn-worm. 


7) (tCs, sow. 


b 1x^5, fish. 


G. 


kX-6s 


ffv-6s 


ix^v'os 


D. 


kU 


av-l 


ix^i--i 


A. 


KlV 


avy 


ix^vv 


V. 


Kt 


<rv 


ix^ 


Plur. N. 


Kt-es 


(Tv-es 


Ix^-es 


G. 


Kl-COV 


crv-wv 


Ix^v-ov 


D. 


K'i-crl{v) 


<rv-a-i{v) 


ix^v-<Ti(v) 


A. 


Kt-as 


av-as, Attic <rvs 


ix^v-as, Attic Ix^vs 


V. 


nt-es 


<rv-es m 


Ix^t-es 


Dual. 


kU 


arv-e 


(Ix^t-e) ix^v 




kX-oiv . 


<rv-o7v 


ix^i>-oiv. 



Remark. The contracted Nom. PI. ot &pKvs occurs in X. Ven. 2, 9 ; 6, 2 j 
10. 2, 19. 



82 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[Us 



■V. 



$ 63. (2) Words in -ts, -t, -rs. 

The stem of these substantives ends in X or v. The stem- 
vowels t and V remain only in the Ace. and Voc. Sing. ; in the 
other Cases they are changed into e (M6, 2). In the Gen. 
Sing, and PL, masculine and feminine substantives take the 
Attic form in -ws and -cov, in which the w has no influence on 
the accent (comp. ^29, Rem. 7). In the Dat Sing, and in the 
Nom. and Ace. PL, contraction occurs. 



Sing. N. 


7} TToAts, city. 


6 'TTJxvs, cubit, rh ffivdirt, mustard. 


rh &(TTv, city. 


G. 


irSKe-as 


■n-//%e-a)s 


anraTre-os 


da-re-os 


D. 


7r(JAet 


w^Xet 


ffiudrrei 


&ffTei 


A. 


ir6\iu 


irrix^y 


aivairi 


&(TTV 


.V. 


tt6Ki 


irrixv 


civain 


&<rTV 


Plur. N. 


troKiis 


TT-hx^is 


trivdtri] 


&arii 


G. 


ir6\e-(i>u 


ir-qx^-OiiV 


aivaTre-wv 


aare-MV 


D. 


ir6\e-(n{v) 


Tri)xe-(n{v) 


<nydire-(ri(v) 


&(rT€-(ri{v) 


A. 


irSXeis 


Triix^'^s 


aivdiTT] 


&(TTt} 


V. 


'3r6\€LS 


vnxeis 


civdirri 


&<rTr) 


Dual. 


7r6\e-€ 


ir-hx^-e 


aivd-K^-€ 


&(rT€-€ 




iroXe-oiu 


TTflX^-OlV 


ffivairi-oiv 


acrre-on/. 



Remark 1. Here belong all substantives in -|ts, -\]/i5, most in -a-is and many 
others, e.g. t] kSpis, dust; 6 fidvr is ^ prophet ; rj 6<piSi serpent ; t] ttIo-t is, faith; ri 
tifipiSi abuse; d ireAe/cwy, axe; 6 vpea-fivs, old man; rh viirept, pepper ; rh riy/d- 
fiapi, cinnabar; rh iruv (poet.), herd (without contraction). Adjectives in -ws, 
-€?«, -V are declined in the Masc. and Neut. like tttjxv^ and &<Trv, except that the 
Gen. Masc. takes the regular forms -eos, -eW (not -ews, -easy), e. g. ridvs, ^Seos. 

Rem. 2. In the Attic poets, though probably only in the lyric passages, the 
Gen. in -eos, from substantives in -is, occurs, e. g. ttSKcos. 

Rem. 3. In X. An. 4. 7, 16, the contracted Gen. TrrjxSiv is found. Instead 
of the Dual forai in -ee, one in -tj is also used ; likewise a form in -et (instead 
of -6€), is quoted by the ancient grammarians from Aeschines. — The Ace. PL 
of nouns in -vs sometimes occurs uncontracted in the Attic poets, e. g. ir-f^x^tts- 

Rem. 4. Neuters in -i and -v have the Attic Gen. Sing, very seldom, e. g. 
&(rrew5, Eur. Bacch. 838 (831). Or. 761 (751). 

Rem. 5. Adjectives in -"is, -t, e. g. WpXs, XSpX, skilful, and some substantives 
in -Is, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection : i-os, i-t, i-es, etc., 
or both forms together, e. g. t) fxrjvis, anger (also /xiividos, etc.), 6 7} oTs, sheep ; rh 
irewepi (Gen. -epios and -eos)^ pepper; 6 t) irSpris, calf; 6 t) irStris, spouse (Gen. 
irSffios, but Dat. always irotrei) ; rj rpoiris, keel (also rpoiriSos, etc.) ; rj rvpa-is, 
tower {Gtin. rvpffios,^. An. 7. 8, 12. rvpaiv, ib. 13, but Plural rvptrns, rvptrea-iy 
etc.) ; 7] ndyadis (Gen. -los, Dat. fiaydSi, X. An. 7. 3, 32) ; some proper names, 
e. g. 'iv4yue<Tis, "ipis (Gen. -los, etc.), X. An. 1. 2, 12; 6. 2, 1 (5. 10, 1), finally 
one noun in -iJs, ri ^7x«Xwy, but only in the Sing. 



^ 64, 65.1 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



83 



Sing.N. 


6, 7] irSpTiSy calf. 


7] €7X€Auy, eel. 


o, ^ oTs, sheep. 


G. 


'n-6pTi-os 


4yx^^v-os 


ot<^$ 


D. 


ir6pri-i and irSpTl 


€7xe^y-i" 


oli 


A. 


irSpTiy 


eyx^^vy 


oJv 


V. 


ir6pTi 


€7xeAu 


oh 


Plur. N. 


■jTopTi-es and Tt6prls 


e7xeA.ets 


ehs 


G. 


iropri-wv 


4yX^^^-oov 


Ol(DV 


D. 


ir6pTi-<ri(v) 


€7xeAe-(rt(j') 


olai{v) 


A. 


iropTi-as and irSprn 


67xeA.eis 


oTas and oh 


V. 


Tr6pTi-es and irSpTis 


e7xeAeiy 


oles 


Dual. 


vSpTi-e 


67xeA.e-e 


oh 




TTopri-oiv 


e7xeA.e-0ij' 


OIOIV 



Kem. 6. Xenophon uses the Ionic forms of oh : aiV, oies, otwv, oias, and 6jls. 

§ 64. Quantity of the Third Declension, 

1. The inflection-endings -o, -t, -u, and -os, are short 

Exception : The o in the Ace Sing, and PL of substantives in -eis is long, 
e. g. 't})v i€p4d, Tovs Upias from 6 Upevs, priest. 

2. Words, whose Nom. ends in -a|, -t|, -u|, -ai^, -ti|/, -i/i//, -<j, and -w, have the 
penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according as the 
vowel of the above endings is long or short by nature ; a, i, v, are long in all 
Genitives in -siluos, -tj/os, -wos, e. g. 6 ^cipd^, breastplate, -olkos ; 6 ph\i, reed, piTr6s ; 
7] okt/s, ray, -Tvos^ but r/ ^aJAol, clod, -aKos, 7] i\irfs, hope, -tSos, See fuller 
explanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. § 291. 



$ 65. Accentuation of the Third Declension. 

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws 
of accentuation (§ 30) permit, e. g. rb irpayfia, deed, irpdyfiaTos (but irpayfjLaTwv), 
rh ivofxa, name, ovofiaros (but ovofiaTcav), 6 t) x^^'^ci'') swallow, xeAtScivos, Eevo- 
<pa)u, -(iuTos., -uvT€s, -(avToov. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the 
Paradigms. 

2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the 
final syllable ; the long syllable wv and oiv having the cireumflex ; the others, 
the acute, e. g. 6 fi-fju, fi7]u6s, fiTjvi, jxtivoIv, iit^v&v, fn](ri{u). 

Exceptions: 
(a) The following ten substantives are Paroxytones in the Gen. PI. and Gen. 
and Dat. Dual: tj Bas, torch; 6 S/j.d!>Sj slave; 6 tj ^ds, jackal; rh KPA2, poet. 
(Gen. KparSs), head; rh ods (Gen. wtSs), ear; 6 t) ttoTs, child; & <r4\s, moth; 6 t) 
Tp^s, Trojan, Trojan woman; f} (pcfs (Gen. (pca^6s), a burning; rh (pus (Gen. 
^aros), light; e. g. SdfSwi/, Sa.dotVf bdxDV, Kpdrcau, ioruiv, &roiv, iraiScov, TraiSoiv, 
rewv, Tp(ia>v, <pa)Z(cv, (pdorwv (on the contrary, rui/ dfxuaiv from al Suuai, rS>v 
Tptawv from ot Tpwaly ruy <p<arS)v from 6 <pcas, man; rwv ^uSiv from ri i^a>^, 
injury). 



P4 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 65 

(b) The following contracts, according to the nature of the final syllable, are 
either Properispomona or Paroxytones, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, 
as in the other Cases, e. g. rh eap (Epic ^p), spring; Krjp (Epic from Keap), heart; 
6 \as (from Kaas), stone; 6 irpciu (from Trpvycij/), hill, e. g. ^pos (rarer eapos), ^pt 
(rarer eapi), Krjposy K'^piy \aos, Aai, xdav^ irpcovos, irpuyi. 

Remark. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the principal 
rule (No. 2) : o-Tedp = arrip, tallow; ariaros = (Ttt^tSs, <ppeap, well, (ppedros and 
<PP7]t6s, pi. (ppTjTioy, ©p?!, OppI, Qp-fjiKos = OpaKos, and Opp/cJs, oh, olos, oli, 
olwu, ol<ri{v). 

(c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun ris ; quis? retain the 
accent, through all the Cases, on the stem-syllable ; but the pronoun iras and 
6 Udu is an Oxytone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. ; in the other Cases either a 
Paroxytone or a Properispomenon, according to the nature of the final syllable, 
e. g. <pvs, <pi>vros, Sov, ovTos, ovri, tvTav, oZ(n{v), ttvToiv^ tIs, tIvos, rlvi, etc. ; Tray, 
iravrSs, Travri, irdi/Tuv, iravroiu, Traaiiv), 6 Tidy, Havos, ro7s Ilaa'L{y). 

3. T]ie following are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like 
monosyllabic substantives : — 

(a) 7] yvyf], wife (yuvaiKos, yvvaiKi, yvyaiKolv, yvvaiKcay, yvvai^i{v) ; but yvvax- 
Ka, yvyaiKes, etc.) 5 or] Kvuy, dog {Kvyos, Kvyi, Kvyoiy, Kvy&v, Kvai{v) ; but 
Kvya, Kvyes, etc.) ; 

(b) Syncopated substantives in -rjp, on which see § 55, 2 ; 

(c) Compounds of els, unus, in Gen. and Dat. Sing., e. g. ovSeis, ovdevSs, 
ouSej'i ; but ovdevcay, ov5e<ri{v), so jutjScis, firj^eySs, etc.; 

(d) The Attic poetic forms, Sop6s, dopl, from 56pv. 

4. For the accentuation of substantives in -is, -vs. Gen. -e«y, see § 63 ; of 
those in -c6 (§ 60), the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of ^x<^« — VX^ 
(instead of -^x^)) 'should be noted. 

5. (a) In the Voc. of sync^cpated substantives (§ 55, 2) in -rip, the accent, 
contrary to the principal rule, is drawn back as far as possible, e. g. & irdrep, 
dvyarep, Avur}Tep, &y€p', SO also (a) in the following substantives; 'AttoAAwv 
(ayos), riocretSwj/ {couos), aar-fip (rjpos), 'A/xcpiay {ioyos), Sai'^p (epos) ; thus, & 
"AiroWoy, nSaeidoy, (ra)Tep,''Afi(pioy, daep\ — (b) in compound substantives in 
-cov, Gen. -oyos, in adjectives in -coy. Gen. -oyos, whether simple or compound ; 
also in comparatives in -icay,. -coy (in adjectives and comparatives, also, in the 
neuter gender), e. g. 'Aydixefxvoy from ' Ay afie/xyuy, ^ApiffTSyeiTov from ^Apiaro- 
yeiTwy (but 'lacrov, TlaXaiixoy, ^iXrjfioy, etc. as simple) : & and t^ ^idaifiov, §> and 
rb ix4r}/xoy, S) and rh KdWiou ; (the following are exceptions : 5 AaKeBaT/noy from 
AaKedaiixcoy, compounds in -<pp(t}y, e. g. 5 AvKocppov from AvK6(ppay, Ev^vcppoy from 
Ev^vfppcav, S} and rh Sdifpoy from Sai'^pwi/ ;) — (c) in the compound Paroxytones in 
■^s, mentioned in § 59, e. g. Sco/f/jares, Arj/xScr^eves ; 3 and rh a^^dScs from av^d- 
Brjs, (piXdXri^es from (piKaK-fi^tjs (but aX-q^es from oAtji^s as a simple), o^Top/ces, 
KatcSriSres. — (Adjectives and substantives in -arjs, -wSrjs, -wXtjs, -up-qs, -TjpT/s, are 
exceptions, e. g. ehwh-qs, evwdes, a/i^c^Tjs afx(pct)€s, irayuXris irayuXes, yecapTjs vewpes, 
^i(p'f]p7)s ^KpTJpes, 7) Tpffiprfs Tpiripes, Aidprjs S> Ai&pes. 

(b) The Voc. of nouns in -avs, -evs, -ovs, -«, and -us is Perispomenon, e. g j 
ypav, Pa(ri\€v, )8oC, SaTr^o?, atSoT. s 

1 



^ 66.] THIRD DECLENSION. 86 



^ 66. Gender of the Third Declension. 

The natural gender — the masculine and feminine — is distinguished in tho 
third Declension, not by a special form, but partly by the signification, partly 
by the forms, and in part by usage alone. The following rules will aid in 
determining the gender: — 

I. Masculines: (A) all nouns whose Nom. and stem (which can be recognized 
by the Genitive) end in -av, Gen. -av-os ; -uv. Gen. -ovr-os and -uvr-os ; -vvy 
Gen. -vv-05 (only & fiocra-vv, tower) ; -eis, Gen. -ev-os (only 6 Krelsf comb) ; -as, 
Gen. -avT-os] -ovs, Gen. -ovt-os, -ovvt-os^ -od-os {d irovs) ; -«p, Gen. -op-os; -euy, 
Gen. -ews ; -tjs, Gen. (-e-os) -ovs ; -ws, Gen. -a-os ; 

(B) the following with exceptions : — 

(a) in -T]v, Gen. 'rjvos ; but 6 ?; x^^t goose; — in -r]Vy Gen. -ev-os ; but 6 tj aS-fjUf 
gland, and tj <ppi]v, diaphragm ; 

(b) in -wv, Gen. -wv-os] but ^ oAav, threshing-floor; rj jSA.^x*"' o^ 7^^X*'*'» 
penny-royal; t] fieX^ddiy (poet.), care; ^ fi-fiKwv, poppy; t] irAaraydov, rattle 
(but 6 ttK. petal of the poppy) ; ij Tprjpwv^ pigeon; t] avXdiv (poet., but prose 
i), ravine; ^ 6 KdScav hell; 

(c) in Tjp, Gen. -rip-os ; but ^ /c^p, j/?i^e (on account of ^ K^p, goddess of fate) ; 

5 ^ ^oucrTTjp, hammer; (those in -Tjp contracted from -eap, are neuter: rh 
KTJp (poet.). Gen. Krjpos, heart; rh ^ap, Gen. ^pos, spring;) — in -Tjp, Gen. 
-pos ; but 7} yacTi]p, ya<rTp6sf belly ; — in -rip, Gen. -ep-os ; but 6 t} cd^rjp^ 
ether; 6 t) a-fjp, air; 

(d) in -eip, Gren. -eip-os; but t] x^^Pt hand (regularly, 6 avrlx^ip, the thumb) ; 

(e) in -up, Gen. -cop-os ; but t^ 'ixcop (poet.), booty; rh 'ir4\a>p (poet.), monster; 

(f ) in -ovs, Gen. -o-os, see § 57, Eem. 4; 

(g) in -cos. Gen. -«t-os; but rh ^wy, %Af; 
"(h) in '^, G«n. -ttos, -j8os. 

II. Feminines: (A) aZ^ nouns in -ay, Gen. -c(S-os; -ety, Gen. -etS-os (only ^ 
KAety, key) ; -ai/y, Gen. -e-oy ; -ivs. Gen. -iv^-os ] -vvs. Gen. -u»'(&-oy ; -Tjy, Gen. 
•TjT-oy; -jy, Gen. -tr-oy (oisJy t] x^pis) ; -uy, Gen. -v5-oy and -ui^^-oy; -(6 and -c6y, 
G«n. -(J-oy ; 

(B) the following nouns with exceptions : — 

(a) in -jy, Gen. -i-os; but 5 x^^^i P^^^ wine; 6 <poi\Kis, a part of a ship ; 6 
&pTis, carpenter's tool; 6 icic, corn-worm; 6 yXdvis, a hind offlsh; 6 \7s 
(Epic), lion, r<id 6 ri oh, sheep; — in -is. Gen. -eus, but 6 ^px'^j testicle {ij 
6pX^s, a kind of olive) ; 6 6(pis, serpent; 6 (later also tj) ex«, viper; 6 (later 
7]) K6pis, bug ; at and at Kvp$ei5, law-tables; — in -is, Gen. -i5-os', but 6 (p^6is, 
-iSoy, a kind of cake; tj 6 riypis. Gen. -toy and -iSos, tiger; — in -jy, Gen. 
-i^-os; but 6 7] opvis, bird; — in -is. Gen. -7v-os] but 6 S€\<pis, dolphin; & 
IktIs, weasel; 6 tj ^is, heap ; 6 reXfiis, marsh-mud; 

(b) in -uy, Gen. -i/-oy; but o fi6rpvs, cluster; 6 bprivvs, footstool; 6 tx^vs,fish'j 

6 fAvs, mouse ; 6 v4kvs, corpse ; 6 ffrdxvs, ear of corn ; 6 (tkSWvs, mode of 
tonsure ; 6 r7<pvs, the night-mare; 6 kolvSvs, a Median gai^mentf 6 rj Is or <rvs, 

8 



^5 THIRD DECLENSION. U ^'^• 

swme; 6 ix.xdudpvs, tun-Jisk> V (later also 6) hx^Ws, ed; 6 xp^ixvs, a sea- 
Jisk ; — in -US, Gen. -€«s ; but S irdheKvs, axe ; o Trrix^s, cubit ; 
(c) in -wK, Gen. -ou-os ; but 6 &Kfia>u, anvil; 5 irpiccu, saw; 6 Kapciu, rule; 6 
S|«i/, axle; 6 a^iffau, earthen-vessel; 6 iiri<rela,v, flag ; 6 h k^'w", P^"^^^/ ^ 
K\aUv and ^Kp^ixc^u, bough; S \ayciy,gulf; 6 irKary^u, doll ; 6 fivpfiv^d,^, 
ant's nest ; 6 tj oKsKTpvdy, cock and hen. 
Remark 1. Nouns in -f are partly masculine, partly feminine, except those • 
in -o| (Gen. -Akos), which are masculine ; most of those in -| are feminine ; the 
larger part of those in -t// are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. v koXou- 
po^, -OTTOS, shepherd's crook; t] KalKa^, tempest; Ai t^^ {vox), bir6s, voice; v (rarely 
6) &^p, wTr65,face; t] (pKirp, </)\e/3os, vein; v xe'p''«l'> holy-water; v KaTri\i^i>, -i<^s, 
upper story, etc. 

III. Neuters: (A) all in -a, Gen. -ot-os; ->?, Gen. -rjT-os (only rh Kdpri) ; -t, , 
Gen. -IT-OS (only rh fi4\t with its compounds) ; -vp, Gen. -vp-os (only t5 ttu^. Gen. 
irvp-6s, fire) ; -ap. Gen. -ar-os or -Tjp, Gen. -tjt-os ; -op, Gen. -op-os ; -as. Gen. -ar-os ; 
-oy, Gen. (-e-os) -ousj -t, Gen. -eos ; -u. Gen. -v-os, and -eoy, and -ar-oy, § 68, 1 5 — 

(B) the following with exceptions: (a) -ap. Gen. -ap-os; but ^ rffip, star- 
ling; (b) -OS, Gen. -o-os; but ^ Aas, stone; (c) -wp, Gen. -ot-os (except 6 ax<i>p, 
iX^Pi eo'Tup, T]\€KTap, ^ 68, 15). 

Rem. 2. The following single words may be noted in addition : tj dais, Gen. 
Sair-6s, feast ; rh ffroSs or ffTais, araiT6s, dough; rh ads, Gen. wt-6s, ear. 

§ 67. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declension. 

All substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and 
analogies above given, are inckided under the irregular substan- 
tives of the third Dec. All the anomalous forms of the third 
Dec. may be divided into three classes : — 

(a) The first class includes those substantives whose Norn, cannot be derived, 
according to general analogy, from the Genitive-stem, e. g. rj yvvi], wife, G«n. 
yvpaiK-6s. 

(b) The second class inc^ades those substantives, which, with one Nom. 
form, have in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation ; both of these, 
however, may come, in accordance with the general rules, from one form of the 
Nom., e. g. 6 ^ opvis, Gen. -J^os, bird, PL Spvi^es and opveis, as if from opyis. 
Gen. -ews. These substantives are called Heteroclites (i. e. of diflferent declen- 
sions or irregularly declined). 

(c) The third class includes substantives, which, with one Nom. form, admit, 
in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation, one of which may be 
derived from the Nom. form in use, but the other supposes a different Nom. 
form, e. g. ^epdrrwv, -ovtos, servant. Ace. ^epd-n-oyra and poet, ^epanra, as if from 
&6po4'. This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan- 
tives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case, 
is called the Theme. 



§68.] ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD DEC. 87 

{ 68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declenion. ^ 

1. Tow (to, knee), and Sdpv (roy spear), see $ 54 (c). 

In the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yovvaTa and yovva, yovvcuri., occur ; 

also in the Attic poets, the Gen. Zopos, Dat. 5opj, and even S6pei, and 
^Pl. Soprf instead of dopara, are formed from 56pv] and in the phrase, Sopl 
^iKuv, to take a prisoner of war^ this Dat. form is retained even by the Attic 

prose writers. 

2. Vvvri [rj, woman), Gen, ywaiAc-o? (as if from yuvai^), Dat. 
ywatK-L, Acc yvvoLK-a, Yocyvvai; PL yui/atKcs, yuvatxwv, yui/at^t (v), 
yvvoLKas; on the accentuation, see § 65, 3 (a). 

3. Aopv, see yowy No. 1. 

4. Z€V9, Gen. Ato's, Dat. At^ Acc. Ata (as if from ^is), Voc. 
2kv. 

Poet, corresponding forms are Z-nuSs, ZTyy/, Ztjj/o. 

5. ©cpaTTODv (6, servant), -ovros. In Eurip. Acc. Sepairaj PI. 
.^epaTTc?, $ 67 (c). 

6. Kdpa (to, head), an Epic and poetic "^vord, Gen. Kpar-os, 
Dat. K/HXTt and Kapa, Acc. to Kapa, to Kpara (jov KpaTO, § 214); 
Acc. PI. Tovs KpaTtt?, § 67 (c). 

7. KA.€ts (17, ^'cy), Gen. kAciS-os, Dat. kAciS-i, Acc. kXciv (^ 53, 
Rem. 1), later AcXctSa; PI. Nom. and Acc. kXcis, and KXeiSes, 
xXctSa?, ^ 67 (b). 

Old Attic, KX'ps, K\riS6s, .fcApSt, kAj^So. 

8. Kvwf (6, -^j ^ic^), Gen. kvv-os, Dat. Kvvt, Acc. Kvva, Voc. kvov; 

PI. KW€5, ICJVWVf KVCTL, KVVtt?. 

9. AC-rra (to, oil, fatness), in the Epic dialect always in the 
plirases, oXeLij/acr^aL Xltt eA.aiu), )(p2a-ai and ^toracr^at XtV* cXato), and 
so also in the Attic prose, aA,ct<^€o-^ai, ^Ua-^ai Xc-n-a; XiVa is thus 
an abridged Dat. instead of XiTrat, XiTro, from to XtVa, Gen. -aos, 
but eXatov must be considered as an adjective from cAoo, olive, 
so that XtVa cXatov means olive-oil. 

10. MapTV5 (6, ivitness). Gen. /xaprvpo^s, Dat. fidpTvpi, Acc. 
fjMpfj-upa, and in Simonides /xapTw; Dat. PI. /xapTvo-t (v). 

11. Nav9(T7, ship), Gen. vew?, Dat. vryt, Acc. vaw, Voc. want- 
ing ; Dual, Gen. and Dat. vcoiv ( Nom. and Acc. wanting) ; PL 
vrJ€<s, veojv, vavcrt (v), vavs. Comp. ypav<;, ^ 57. 

In Attic poets and later prose also, vTj6sy tnjl, K^a, etc 



S6 DKFBCTIVKS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. [t 9^ 

•2. "Opvts (^ 17, 6i>^). Gen- 5pvZ^-o9, etc. The PL has a col- 
lateral fonn declined Uke tro\t9, except the Bat. : opvl^^ and 
Jp»ti?, opix^wy and 6pv€o»'y ofyy'urt, opvlSa^, o/neis, and opvis, § 67 (b). 
So 'A»tixafxrts, 'A»tix<V>o-i&>s, and 'Avaxtifxretos. 

In the Attic ^vTiters, the i is sometimes short, Spylst 6py1y, Aristoph. At. 16. 
270. 335 (but ^prls, bpyify 70, 103, 73). # 

13. nyv$ (17, place of meeting), Gen. irvKv-o^y Dat rrw^ Ace. 
•vmti. 

14. 2 175 (o, moth), Gen. o-c-os; PL o-ees. Gen. o-cW, etc.; in the 
later \rriters, Gen. (tttos. 

15. 2ko)p (to, </irt), Gen. o-xa-os, etc., and rSwp (rojicater). 
Gen. i'>5aro9, etc. To both of these belong : — 

16. ^piap (to, a iceU), and areap (to, taUow), Gren. -caros and 
-rjTo^ (a long in Attic, short in Epic). 

17. <l>^o'ts, <j>Sol<: (o, QTt of cooking). Gen. <^ot-os and (from 
<^oi9) <^oS-os; PL ^o€is and <^^of§€s. 

18. XoCs (o, a measure), x**^* X°^ X®^"*'* X^» X**^*'* y^"^^'^ X°**' 
like ^vs (§ 57) ; also Gen. x^^^j Acc. x^^ Acc. PL xoas, as if 
from ypfx^. The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; 
xois, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like ^oOs. 
The form x*>^^ is Ionic, Bat xoei. 

19. Xpcog (64 skin), -xpnyr-oSi xf*<*"'*» )(pCrra. Collateral forms in 
the Ionic dialect and the Attic poets, axe. Gen. xpo-o^j ^poh XP^ 
like cu3a>s. The Dat x/*$ is found in certain phrases with cv, 
e. g. cv xp<5 KcipeaSoL, Xen, HelL 1. 7, 8. ^'pct cv xpw, i^ shaves close 
to th» ikin, it comes liome, Soplu Aj. 786. 

\ 

♦ 69. Defective 2\ouns of the Third Declension, 

Some notm^s of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, and 
•re, consequentlr, called Defectives. Existing forms, however, of such substan- 
tives, are found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, e. g. 

Xptms (rh, efefe), Ionic-Attic form for the Nom., Gen., and Ace; also rh 
XP«»s» Gen. xp^vs, PL to. xp^ Gen. xP^ur ; the Dat. and Dual are wanting ; 
iimf and vrap (only as Xom. and Ace), in dreaming and tcaJcing ; ^^>€Xos (only J 
as Xom. and in the construction of the Ace with the Inf.), advantage; n^ 
onlj in the phrase xnrh }jAKii$, under the arm. 



I 

i 



i$ 70, 71.] REDUNDANT NOUNS. HETEROCLITES. 89 

Bemarks on the Declensioks. 4( 

klO. I. Redundant Nouns. 

Nouns are called Redundant, wliich have two modes of 
inflection in all or in most of the Cases : — 

A. They belong to the same declension, 

(a) of the same gender, e. g. 

6 \^^s and \d6s, people; S veds and vd6s, temple; 6 Kayds and \ay6s, hare; 
b KaXws, rope, PL also ndhoi ; ^ aAcos, ihreshing-Jloor, PI. also ot oAot ; t] Fopyd 
and Topydiv. 

(b) of different genders (hence called heterogeneous), e. g. 

b pwTos and t^ vwtov, back (the last form was regarded by the Atticists as the 
only proper form, still rhv vwtov Xen. R. Equ. 3, 3) ; b ^uyJs and rb C^^^^ yoke. 
— In the PI. the neuter fonn of these heterogeneous nouns is more frequently 
used, e. g. b cItos, to. fflra ; ot Secrfioi, and more commonly rh deafxoi ; b ara^fiSst 
a station, balance, ot (rra^fioi and t^ a-To^fxd, stations, and rck aTa^p.a., sometimes 
also balances; ol C^yoi does not probably occur. 

B. To different declensions, and commonly of difierent gen- 
ders (heterogeneous), e. g. 

b <p^6yyos and t] (p^oyyii, voice; b x^pos and t] x^P°"> space; t} 6x^ ^^^ ^ 
iix^os, rising ground; tj di\\/a and rh Si\pos, thirst; tj vdirrj (the older form) and rh 
vdiros, valley, etc. It should be observed further, that the word b irpiff^vs, elder, 
has only Ace. Trpecrfiw, Voc. 7rp4crfiv; these three forms are almost entirelj 
poetic {irpeff^vTepos and TrpftrfivTaTos formed from this, are in frequent use) ; 
in the Common Language, b Trpea-fivrrjSi -ov, elder ; in the meaning of messenger, 
envoy, the Common Language uses in the Sing, b ■n-pecjSeuTi^s, -ov ; but in the 
PL ol and rovs irp^trfieis, irpea-pewv, Trpiafieai ; also, t5 SaKpvov and rh duKpv 
tear. The latter and older form is retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the Dat. 
PL SdKpvffi is found even in the Attic prose-writers (Thu. 7, 75; Dem. c. Onet. 
L § 32). 

§71. II Heteroclites. 

Heterochtes [§ 67 (b)] have two modes of formation ; they 
are either of the third Dec, which have been aheady presented 
together (} 68), or of two different declensions. Those of dif- 
ferent declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 

A. Of the Pirst and Third Declension. 
Several substantives in -r]s are inflected, either in whole or in 
part, according to the first and tliird declensions : — 
(a) Some in -tjj, Gen. -ov and -rjros, through all the Cases according to both 

8* 



90 THIRD DEC. METAPLASTS. [♦72. 

declensions : S fivK^s, mushroom, Gen. fivKov and fivicnros, and some proper 
names, e. g. Xdpris. The name 0a\^s, in the old Attic, has ths Ionic Gen. 
form 0c(Ae(k», Dat. @a\fj, Ace. QaKriv] in the later writers, QaXoZ and edxrrros^ 
®d\rjTi and ©oA-Tjra. Observe that the accent is drawn back on e<£A.ec.;. 

(b) The proper names mentioned, § 59, Eem. 2, have r} as well as j^v in the 
Ace. Sing. only. 

B. Of the Second and Third Declensions. 

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : several 
substantives in -os, as masculine, are inflected according to the 
second Dec, but as neuter, according to the third Dec, e. g. 6 
and TO oxos, chariot, tov o^ov and oxoyx:, rov oxov and to oxos ; 6 
and TO (TKOTos, darkness. 

(b) Of the contract second and third declensions : — 

Trp6xoos (t], vxitering-pot), Att. irpSxovSy Gen. irp6xov, etc., Dat. PL ir^<^OMn 
(like fiovs, fiovcrlv). 
OlSiiruvs, Gen. OlSiiroSos and (poet.) OlSlirov, Dat. OlUroSif Ace. OtSiToSa and 

OtStVouj/, Voc. OlSiirov. 

(c) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 

In the Ace. Sing., 6 yehois, laughter ^ y4x.(Dros, y4\cerij Ace. y^Kotra and 
yeKaVf and the three following: irdrpast patruus, /jL-fp-ptes, avunculus, and 
Mivus, which, in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., are inflected according to the third 
Dec. and the Attic second Dec. 5 in the other Cases, according to the third 
Dec. 

irdrpus, Gen. irdrpca and irdrpuos, Dat. irdrpon, Acc. trdrptev and wdrpva] 
Mivvs, Gen. Mlua and Miytaosy Dat. Miym, Acc. Mlim (^ 48, Rem. 1), Mliwr 
and Miyua. 

§ 72. Ill Metaplasts. 

Metaplasts [k 67 (c)] like HeterocUtes, have two modes of 
formation ; they are either of the third declension, which have 
been already presented together (68), or of two different declen- 
sions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : — 

A4ySpoy {rh, tree), Gen. S&dpov, etc.; but in the Dat. PL among the Attic 
wiiters, Se'i/Speo-t (from the stem rh AENAP02) and UySpois] the first form is 
regarded by the Atticists as the better. To this stem belong, also, the forms 
T^ 5€%ei and rh. SeVSpTj, which occur in the Attic poets, and in later prose 

writers. 

Kotya>y6s (6, partaker), Gen. Koiyuyov, etc.; Xenophon uses the forms m 
Koivwyes and rohs Koiyuyas (from KOINXIN). 



i 



73 I INDECLINABLE AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 91 



Kpivov (t^, lily) Gren. Kpivov, etc., with the secondary form in the Dat. PI. 
Kplvtai in Aristoph. from the PI. Kplyea (in Herod.). Comp. SevSpov. 

Aas {Sy stone), Gen. Xaos and in Soph. O. C. 196. \dov. 

'O 6vfipo5 [and poetic rh oveipov], dream, (Jen. ov^ipov and ovelparos. 

Tlvp (rhfjire), irvpos. But PL, ret irup<{, uxitch-Jires, according to the second 
Dec. 

Ti6s {6, son), Gen. v/ou, etc. Together with this formation, there is another 
according to the third Dec, much in use, particularly in the Attic writers, from 
the theme 'TIET2, Gen. vUosy Dat. vU7 (Ace. vUa is rejected) ; PI. vUTst Gen. 
vUuy, Dat. uiV<rt, Acc. {vUas), Attic vU7s (§ 57, Rem. 1); Dual, vUe, Gren. 
vUoiv. 

(b) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 

The three substantives, rj aXws, threshing-Jioor ; 6 raus, peacock; and 6 rix^tiy, 
whirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic 
second declension, another according to the third declension, in -wvos, etc., e. g. 
rvtpuva, 

Kemahk. The words ^ S.\us and 6 raws are generally declined accord- 
ing to the Attic second Dec, Acc. Sing. Si\iuy, rawy ; still, the y is commonly 
rejected from aAa>r in the Acc, ^ 48, Rem. 1. But the forms Sxayos, £a.wkc5, 
i\(D(ri(y), rauvi, rauya, raaxriyf etc., are used on account of their greater 
perspicuity. 

♦ 73. Ifideclinable and Defective Nouns. 

1. Substantives which do not vary the termination, but retain in all the Cases 
the form of the Nom., arc called indeclinable. Except foreign proper names, aa 
6 'Afipaafi, rov 'A/Spooft, and the indeclinable cardinal numbers, all indeclinable 
nouns are of the neuter gender. Here belong especially : — 

(a) The names of the letters, e. g. t^, rov, rtf, &X<pa ; 

(b) Most of the cardinal numbers, e. g. Stna aySpaiy; 

(c) Th, TOW, Ty, xp*«K, necessity, destiny, and ^efus with iariy and thou, and 
several foreign words, e. g. ri, toD, t^ ircUrx* 5 

(d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. rh, rov, r<f yp<i<p(iy. 

2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the PI. Such 
words may be termed defective in number. The reason of it is found, either 
in the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, e. g. 6 al^p, ether ; ol drrjaiai, 
the Etesian wind ; al 'A^yai^ Athens ; ra 'OKvfiiria, the Olympic games. Comp. 
further, S}-ntax, § 243. 

3. It has been already noted, ^ 69, that some substantives are fotmd only in 
iingle Cases (Defectiva casu). 



92 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [H 74, 75 j 

CHAPTER n. 

The Adjective and Participle. 

$74. Gender and Declension of the Adj ectiv e 

and Participle. 

1. The Adjective and the Participle, like the Substantive, 
have three genders, being varied by inflection to agree with 
the gender of their substantive. But aU adjectives have 
not separate forms for the three genders ; many have but 
two endings, one for the Masc. and Fem., the other for the 
INeuter, e. g. 6 a-w^poiv avrjp, r) a-w^poiv ^vvrj, to acjcjypov 
T6KV0V. Several, indeed, have but one ending, commonly 
used only for the Masc. and Fem. See ^ 80, e. g. 6 <f>vya^ 
avrjp, rj <j)vya<i yvvrj, 

2. In Adjectives and Participles of three endings, the 
Masc. and Neuter belong to the same declension (second or 
third), and the Neuter is Hke the Masc. in the Gen. and 
Dat. ; the Fem. is always of the first Dec. 

Remark 1. Hence, in an Adjective in -os of three endings, the Masc is 
declined like KSyos (§ 46), the Fern, like 5f/crj or ffKid (§ 44), and the Neut. 
like (rvKou (46). 

Rem. 2. The declension of Adjectives and Participles differs only in a few 
points from that of the Substantive ; these will be noted hereafter. But it may 
be remarked here, as an essential deviation, that Participles always have the 
Voc. of the third Dec. like the Nom., § 53, Rem. 5. 

^75. Accentuation of Adjectives and Participles. 

The accentuation of Adjectives and Participles is like that 
of Substantives, with a few exceptions, wliich are now to be 
noted : — 

1. The Fern, is accented on the same syllable as the Masc. through all the 
Cases, where the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. koXSs, KoX-f}, iraXoV; 
Kod(pos, Ko{><pn, Kov<t>ov] xap^ew/ Xopieo-ca, Xapi^v ; fieXas, fi€?^iya, /lieXay; -c'pij*', 
Tepetm, repcv ; ^apvs, fiapua, ^apv ; jSouAeucras, fiovXevaaaa, $ov\edaay ' ri^fls, 



i 75.] ACCENTUATION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 92 

Remark 1. In adjectives in -os, -77, -ou, or -05, -a, -oy, the Fem., on accounl 
of the length of the final syllable {77, d), must be a Paroxytone, when the Masc. 
is a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. av^puirivosy ay^pMiriur], a.v^p6- 
irivovj i\(v^€poSy i\€V^€pd, eKev^epoy^ KOv<pos, K0v<p7], KOv<poy] anrovdcuoSf (Tirov- 
5oid, airovSauov ; but, when the final syllable in the declension is short, it again 
takes the accentuation of the Masc, i. e. it becomes again a Proparoxytone, or 
a Properispomenon, e. g. av^pdiriyai, i\€V^€pai, Kov<paiy (rirov^aiai, like ay^pdiiri' 
yoi, i\€vdepoi, Kov(poi, <rirovdatot. Hence the difference between 'P^Stot, AvKiai 
{yvyouKcs), as adjectives, and 'Po5 fa 1, Au/cfo<, as substantives, according to 
§ 45, 6. 

2. Participles accent the same syllable in the Neuter Nom. as in the Masc, 
when the nature of the syllable permits, e. g. 

iraiSevuy, iratSevoy rifx-fjaayf rinrjcov 

<pi\wy, <pi\ovv \iiru>y, Xiiroy. 

Bem. 2. Yet Adjectives sometimes deviate from this rule, see § 65, 5. 

3. Contracts in -ovs, -tJ, -ovy, from -eoy, -ed, -fov, 60s, -61], or 6a, -6ov (except 
the Nom. and Ace Dual Masc and Neuter, which arc Oxytones, § 49, 3), are 
Perispomena through all the Cases and Numbers, though the uncontracted 
forms of those in -coy are Proparoxytones, e. g. apyvpfos = apyvpovs, apyvpeor 
= apyvpovy. On contracted compounds in -00s, -oov, e. g. ^tiyovs, tdyovy, see 
S 49, 3. 

4. Barytone feminines of adjectives and participles, whose Masc. is of the 
third declension, arc Perispomena [§ 45, 6 (b)] iu the Gen. ^l., but all the 
other Cases retain the accent of the Masc, e. g. 

fiapvs, -e?a, -u Gren. PL fiapfuv, fiapfiwy 

;i^apiejs, -letrcra, -Uy " ;^ap»eWa>»', x*P*'<^<^'^*' 

fifKas, fjifKcuya, /MfKay " fiiXdvuy, fjLf\aiv<t>v 

"Kcis, iraaa, way " ■ndvTuVy iraffuy 

rv<p^€lst -u(ra, -fy " Tvip^fyroty, Tv<p^€ lawu 

Tv\\/as, rinpaffa, rv^ay " rxj^ayruy, rvy^aa iay; but, 

i.vbpuiriyosy -iyj], -lyoy " i v ,^ /> w tt f 1/ a» v, as Masc, F., and N. 

i\€vb€pos, -(pa, -epoy *' ^ Ac u,^€ pwv, as Masc, F., and N. 

rirKr6/x(yoSy -fyri, -fyoy " t u x t /* c i/ « y, as Masc, F., and N. 

Hem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosyllable irus, and of monosyllabic 
participles in the Gen. and Dat., see § 65, 2 (c). 

Rem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative of compound adjectives, 
the following things are to be noted : — 

(a) Those in -oy, when the last part is formed of a substantive or adjective, 
follow the general rule [§ 30, 1, (c)], and are Proparoxytones, e. g. <pi\^ 
TfKyos (from TfKvov), irayKOKot (from kokos). But if the last part ia 
formed of a verb, then adjectives with a long penult, are Oxytones, e. g. 
y^vxowofiTT6s, nf\(nroi6s, S(iy(i}Tr6s, dS-rry6s ; but those with a short penult, 
arc commonly Paroxytones, if they have an active sense, but if a passive, 
Proparoxytones, e. g. 

Ki^o&6\os, one castinq stones ; \i^6$o\os, cast doum by stones ; 

pi7]rpoKr6vos, matricide ; ^■r}Tp6KTovoSy slain hi/ a mother ; 

^poTp6<pos, nourishing wild beasts : ^p6Tpo(f>os, no irished by wild lie itis. 

Words compounded with prepositions, a privative and intensive, tit and 



94 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [^ 76. 

8w, and a^i, ayav, &p*, apri, ipi, vf^i, (a, ^av, and 7ro\v, are always Pro 
paroxytones, and hence exceptions to the rule respecting words with a 

short penult. , . a -^^.u 

(\)) Verbal adjectives in -r6s remain Oxy tones, even m compounds, if they 
liave three endings, but are Proparoxytones, if they have but two. See 

(c) All comp^ounds in -ir\U, -p<^h -^P'^l* -<^<?'^» are Oxytones. 



SnMMABY OP THE ADJECTIVE AND PaBTICIPLE EnDINGB. 



$76. I. Adjectives and Participles of three 

Endings. 



L -ost 



•ov\ 



-OS, -o, -ov: 



Nom. 


aya^os, 


Gen. 


aya^oVf 


Nom. 


6ydoo5, 


Gen. PI. 


oydooov. 


Nom. 


ypa(p6/x€vos, 


Gen. PL 


ypa(poix4vaVi 


Nom. 


hiKaios, 


Gen. 


SiKaioVf 


Gen. PL 


diKaiwVf 


Nom. 


iX^pos, 


Gen. 


dx^pov, 


Nom. 


a^pSos, 


Gen. 


a^p6ovy 


Gen. PL 


a^p6a}V, 



ayd^Ji 


aya^6v, good, 


aya^TJSt 


\yaSfov 


oySSi], 


6ySoov, eighth, 


6yS6wVf 


6y56wy { § 75, 4.) 


ypcKpofieyrii 


ypaxpofievov 


ypa<pOfieva)Pi 


ypa<pon4v(i}v 


diKaid, 


Z'lKaiov, just, 


SiKaidSi 


SiKalov 


SiKaiuv, 


SiKalav 


ix^pa, 


iX^P^^i hostile. 


iX^pas, 


ix^pov 


a^pod, 


a8rp6ov,fuU, 


a^pSdSf 


a^poov 


a^p6(i}Uf 


a^pouv. 



Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Fem. ends in a, when pre- 
ceded by t or p, § 43, 1. Still, adjectives in -oos have •6a in the Pem., when p 
precedes o, otherwise, -6rj, e. g. a^p6a, yet 6y567]. On the accentuation of 
adjectives in -os, -rj (d), -oy, see § 75. 

Adjectives in -eos, -4 a, -eov, which denote the material, e. g. xP^^^^'^y 
golden; apyvpeos, silver; Kepdneos, earthen; and multiplicative adjectives in 
-6 5, -6 rj, -6 V, e. g. airX6os, single ; SnrxSos, double, are contracted. On the 
accentuation of those in -eos, -ea, -eov, see § 75, 3, and on the contraction of 
those in -eo into -a, -orj into -ij, and -6a into -a, see § 9, II. 



Xpvff-eosy 


Xpv(r-ea, 


Xpic-eov 


Xpvff-ovs, 


Xpv(r-Tj, 


Xpvo'-ovy 


ip4-eos. 


epe-ed, 


ipi-eov 


ipe-ovs. 


ipe-a, ^ 


ipe-ovv 


apyvp-eos, 


apyvp-ea, 


apyvp-€OV 


apyvp-ovs, 


apyvp-a, 


apyvp-ovv 


Snr\-6o5, 


dnr\-6r], 


5nr\-6ov 


Snr\-ovs, 


5nr\-rj, 


5nr\-ovy. 



Remark 1. Contraction is seldom omitted in Attic classic prose, not unfre- 
quently in the Tragedians, e. g. xpi^o-eo, Xen. Ag. 5, 5 ; yet d ,^ p <J o s, -({ d, -6ov, 
crowded, is rarely found contracted; St/c poos, -6 a, -6ov, two-pronged, is com- 
monly contracted in the Masc. and Neut., ^iKpovs, SiKpovv, but in the Pen- the 
nncontracted form is usual, rj diKp6a; 5 7 So os is always uncontracted. 

II. -ts, -eTd, -t: Nom. y\vKvs, yKvKcia, yXvKi, sweet, 
Gen. yXvKfos, yXvKelas, yXvKcos 

Gen. PL yXvKeuv, yXvKsiwv, yXvKiwv (§ 75, 4.) 



} 76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. 95 

The declension of the Masc. is like irrjxvs, though with the common genitives 
in -eos, -ewv ; the declension of the Neut. is like 6.<rTv, yet always uncontracted in 
the PL (-eo). The only deviations from the regular accentuation are, i]fua-vs, 
r]fxl<r€M, ^fiia-v, half; ^\vs, ^^\eia, ^\v, female ; irpeV^Sus, old (used only in the 
Masc), and some poetic forms. ©ijAus is sometimes used as feminine in Homer 
and in the Tragedians. 

Rem. 2. The adjective 7} /n t er u s, in the Attic writers, has both the contracted 
and uncontracted forms in the Ace. PL, Tj/xia-eis and Tj/jLia-eas : also the Neut. 
ri^lffca is found in several passages in Demosthenes in the contracted form 
^/lio-rj. Sometimes the Ionic Fem. form -ea occurs, e. g. irKaria, X. R. Equ. 1, 
14. (in all MSS.) rjniaeas, PL Menon,- 83, c. in the best MSS. 

IIJ. -vs, -vffai -tv. Nom. SetKvvs, SeiKuvtra, SeiKvvv, shoimng, 

Gen. SeiKviuTOs, deiKyv(rr]s, SciKvvmos 

Gen. PL SeiKuvvruv, SeiKvv(ruy, deiKviyruv (^ 75,4.) 

Nom. ((>V5, (pvcra, <pvv, produced, 

Gen. (pvuTos, <pv(T7is, (pvvTos [^ 65, 2 (c).] 

Gen. PL (pvyruv, (pvauv, (pvvra>v. 

So the Pres. and second Aor. Act. participles of verbs in -fii. For the de- 
clension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d). 

IV. -e t s, -6 cr <r a, -€ V : Nom. x«f *^'^> X«P^f ''■<''«> X«P'f »'> lovely, 

G«n. x^p'^^f^^^i x°^^^^'^''l^i X^P'^'''''''^ 

G^n. PL x'V*'""'^''* x^'P'^^^'^^^i x°'P'^^*^^^' 

Tor the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), the only difference 
being that the Dat. PL ends in -€<rj, not -€«<n, e. g. xap'fo"'. — The Masc. and 
Neut. is in the Nom. a Paroxytone, in the Fem. a Proparoxytone ; yet the 
ancient grammarians prescribe that the Neut. of x<V^^'^ should be accented on 
the antepenult, hence xap*e»/. 

Rem. 3. Some of the adjectives in -^e is, -^ e o- c o, -7} c »/, and -0 ets, -6t^' 
<ra, -6e y, admit contraction, e. g. 

Nom. rifi-fi-eis, Tifj.'ff-effaa, rifirj-ey, honored^ 

Gren. TlflTJVTOS, TLIJ.T}(TaT]S, Tifjirivros 

Nom. /u€\iT(^-6ts, fi'e\tT6-€(T(ra, ij.€kn6-fv, honeyed, 
Gen. yLfXnovvTOs, fi€\iTOva(rr}s , fieKirovyros. 

V. -elsy -eTo-o, -4y: Nom. Acic^eis, A€t<^de?o'o, Xci^eV, relictus, 

Gen. \€i(p^euTos, \ei(p^€i(rr}s, \€i<pbevTos 

Gen. PL XeKp^fyTuu, \€L<p^€icruy, Aei(^cW«v 

Nom. Ti^eis, ri^€7(ra, ri^fu, placing, 

Gen. Ti^evTOS, ri^eiarjs, Tt^euros. 

For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), and also in the Dat 
PL, e. g. rvcp^eltri. So likewise the first and second Aor. Pass. Participle, and 
the Pres. and second Aor. Active Part, of Ti3i7/it and '/tj/ij, e. g. ic/y, UTaa, IcV, 

VI. -d s, -aiya, -ay : Nom. fieXas, fi4\aiva, ix4\av, black, 

Gen. fiihavos, fi€\alyT]s, iJ.f\S.vos 

Gen. PL fjLfXaviov, nfXaivwy, n€\ayioy. 

In the same manner only rdxas, rdXaiya, raXav, unhappy, the feminine Voc. 
of which has also toAcu'. For the declension of the Masc, and Neut., see ^ 54 
(d), with Rem. 6. 



96 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [$ 76. 

VTI. -aSf -o<ra, -au: Nom. nas, iraffa, irav, all, every, 
Gen. irayrSs, Trd(rr}€, iravros 

Gen. PL Trdurwy, Tracwv, irdvTwu. 

In the same manner only the compounds of iras, e. g. anas (oirdtra, oirov), 
trjixiras, irponas, etc. ; these compounds have a short a in the Neut., in dac- 
tylic and anapestic verse. See § 54 (d), for the declension of the Masc. and 
Neut., and § 65, 2 (c), for the accentuation of the simple adjective in the Gen. 
and Dat. PI. and Dual. 

Vm. -aSf -a era, -ay: Nom. Xeti|/ds, \ei\pdcra, Xeirpav, having lefi^ 
Gen. \€iy\ioa/TOS, Aei^da'rfs, \ei\pavTos 

Gen. PI. Kei^j/avTcoy, Xei\pa(r&v, \ei\^dvT(i}v. 

So the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Pres. and second Aor. Act. Part, of 
trrtjfii: ia-rds, -aaa, -dv] ffrds, -a(ra, -dv. For the declension, see § 54 (d). 

IX. -Tjy, -eiva, -ei/: Nom. rcpriv, repeiya, repev {'poetic), smooth, 

Gen. repevos, repeiyrjs, repevos 

Gen. PI. repeuau, repeivwy, repevuy. 

No other adjective is thus declined. For the declension, see § 55, 1. 

X. -0 i s, -0 V or a , -6 V : Nom. Sidovs, SiBovcra, Bidoy, giving, 

Gen. 5iS6yTos, diSovcn^s, SiSofTos 
Gen. PI. diSSyrwv, SiSovawy, diSSyray. 

Thus only the Part. Pres. and the second Aor. Act. (5o<5y, dovaa, 5Jv, (Jen. 
'i6yros, Souo-Tjs, Gen. PI. Fem. 5ov(ruy) of verbs in -w^t. 

XI. -ct> y, -0 c a, -Sy: Nom. eK^^y, eKoGtro, eK6y, willing, 

Gen. €K6yTos, kKOvcr-qs, eK6yT0S 

Gen, PI. €K6yTuy, kKovawy, kK6yrwy. 

Thus only the compound oe'/cwj', commonly i.K<ay, &K-ov<ra, uKoy. For the 
declension, see § 54 (d). 

XII. -« y,-ov(Ta,-oy: Nom. XelTray, Xeiirovara, \e7iroy, leaving. 

Gen. AetTTovTOs, Xenroixrrjs, Xeiiroyros 

Gen. PI. \enr6yTwy, Kenrovauy, XenrSyrcoy. 

_ So also the Pres., Fut., and second Aor. Act. Part., the last, however, with a 
different accentuation : -dy, -ova-a, -6v, e. g. Kiirdiv, -ova-a, -6y. For the declen- 
sion, see § 54 (d). In the same manner, the Present participles of contract 
verbs in -dw, -ew, and -6w, e. g. 

Nom. Tt/iSv, -Qa-a, -wy Nom. <pi\uy, -ova-a, -ody 

Gen. TifiuvTos, -c^o-tjs, 'Uvtos Gen. PI. ^iXovyruy, -ovffuy, -oiyrwv. 

Gen. PL Tifid>yTwy, -wo-wv, -dyTay. Nom. jukt^-wj/, -ovaa, -ody 

Gen. PL fiKr^ovyrav, -ovawy, -ovyray. 

The Fut. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs is declined like <pi\wv, <piXov(ra, <piXodv, 
<jren. <piXovyTos, etc., e. g. cTTrepSiy, -odaa, -ovy (formed from (nrep^wy, etc.), from 
irveipUf to sow. 

XIII. -d>s -v7a -OS -.Nom. reTv<p(is, reTV((>v7a, T€TV(p6s, having struck, 

Gen. rerucpoTos, Tervcpvlas, rervcpoTOS 

Gen. PI. TCTvcpoTcoy, T€TV((>viwy, reTv<p6Ta}y. 

On the form ^ards, -«<ro, iffrds and -65, etc., see below, § 193, Eem. 2 and 3. 



^ 7V.J 



ADJECTIVES. PARADIGMS. 



97 



XIV. The adjectives, fieyas, fxcyaXT], fieya, great^ iroXvs, iroW-fiy 
« o \ V, much, are irregular in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. of the Masc. and Neut. 
SJag. I the other parts are regular : but even iroW6v instead of ttoKw or ttoA-u, 
occurs in the Attic poets; Aesch. S. 824, uses the Voc. /xeyaXe; Trpaos, 
irpaeTa, irpaov^ soft, is also in'egular ; it has, throughout the Fem., in the 
PI. and l)ual Neut., as also in the Gen. PI. Masc, and sometimes, also, in the 
other Cases of the Masc. PL, a form like irpavsy -eta, -v (comp. y\vKvSy -ewe, -u), 
which occurs in the Dialects. See the Paradigm. 



$ 77. Paradigms. 



S.N. 


aya^-os 


aya^-'fl 


aya^-ov, good 


<pi\l-05 


(pi\L-d 


<^iA£-oi/,lovely 


G. 


dya^-oD 


aya^-T]S 


aya^-ov 


(piXi-Qv 


<pi\i-ds 


<p'Xi-Qv 


D. 


ayoL^-i^ 


aya^-f) 


aya^-cp 


(pl\l-Cp 


(piki-a 


(piXl-cp 


A. 


aya^-6v 


a.ya^--i]V 


aya^-6v 


(piXi-oy 


(pi\i-dv 


<pi\l-(A 


V. 


ayci^-e 
aya^-ol 


aya^-'i] 
ayoAt-ai 


dyad-oV 
aya^-d 


(pl\l-€ 


(pi\l-d 


<pl\i ov 


P.N. 


<pl\i-oi. 


<pi\i-ai 


<pi\i-a 


G. 


aya^-S>v 


ayoA-wv 


aya^-uv 


(piki-cay 


<f>i\l-cou 


(piXi-wv 


D. 


aya^-ols 


aya^-ais 


aya^o7s 


(pi\i-ois 


(pikl-ais 


<pl\i-0l5 


A. 


ayaSt-Qvs 


aya^-ds 


aya^-d 


<plXl-0V5 


<pi\i-ds 


(pi\i-a 


V. 


aya^-oi 


ayaSr-ai 


aya^-d 


(pi\i-oi 


<plki-ai 


<pl\i-a 


Dual. 


aya^-(x> 


ayoA-k 


aya^-ci 


(piXi-o) 


(pi\i-d 


(piXi-o) 




aya^-o'iu 


aya^-ouv 


aya^-0.7}/. 


(piXi-oiu 


(piXi-aiv 


(piXi-oiu. 


S. N. \y\vKvs 


y\vKf:7a 


yXvKv, sweet 


wpaos 


'7rpae7a 


irpaov, soft 


G. \y\vK4-05 


yXvKeids 


yKvK4-05 


■npdov 


■jrpaeids 


irpaov 


D. j7A.uk 6? 


y\vKeia, 


yKvKU 


irpao) 


Trpaeia 


Trpacp 


A. \y\vKvu 


yXvKeiav 


yXvKv 


■Tpaov 


TTpaciav 


irpaou 


V. yKvKV 


y\vK€7a 


yXvKv 


Trpaos{c) 


irpaeia 


irpaov 


P. N. y\vKe7s 


y\vKf:7ai 


yXvKea 


Trpaoi, TTp 


a€7s 'irpae7ai irpaea 


G. yXvK^uv 


yXvKciuv 


y\vK4ei>u 


vpaewv 


TTpaeiOiV Trpaecop 


D. y\vK(<n[v) yXvKiiais 


y\VK€(Tl{v) 


irpaois, TTp 


aecTi IT pae 


iais Tc pa4a i\ 


A. yXvKus 


yXvKeids 


y\vK€a 


irpaovs, TTp 


ae IS irpae 


ids TT pa4a 1 


V. 


y\vK€7s 


y\vK(7ai 


yXvK^a 


irpaoi, IT p 


ae7s '7rpae7ai irpada 1 


Dual. 


yXvKee 


y\vK((d 


yXvKce 


irpdu) 


irpaeid 


irpdo} 1 


yKvKioiv 


y\vKeiaiv 


yXvK^oiv 


irpdoiv 


Trpaeiaiv rrpdoiu. 1 


S.N. 


XapUis 


Xaplecrcra 


Xo-pi^v 


K^icp'^eis 


\€i(pi^e7aa 


\€i(p^4u 


G. 


Xaptet'Toy 


XapL€(T<rr]s 


Xapievros 


KfKp^fVTOS 


\€l(p^el(T7]S 


X€l(p^€J/TOS 


D. 


Xo.pievTi 


X<ipi((T<Tri 


XO-pl^VTl 


XCKp^fVTl 


\ei<p^ei(rT} 


XeKp^euTi 


A. 


XaplevTU 


Xapiecrcrav 


X^piei/ 


A-et^^vra 


\ei<p^e7(rau 


\€l(p^6V 


V. 


Xopiiv 


Xapifcrara 


Xa-pi-^v 


Xeicp^els 


XtL(p^€7(Ta 


\ei<p^4v 


P.N. 


Xapievres 


Xapiecra-ai 


Xapifvra 


\ei(p^€vrfs 


\€i<p^€7crai 


X€l<p^€VTa 


G. 


Xcpi^moiv 


XOLpi((T<Tu>v xctp'f *"'"&>;' 


\€l(p^€VTCVy 


KeKp^eicrwu Aeicp^ej/Tcov | 


D. 


Xapie(Ti{v) 


Xapiea-aais x«P'fO'*{»') 


\€i<p^c7(Ti(r 


\€i(p^ei(rais 


\€i<p^e7(ri{u) 


A. 


Xaplcirras 


Xapte(T(ras 


Xapt^iura 


\€l(p^€l'ro:S 


\€i(pSreLcrds 


\ei(p^4uTa 


V. 


Xapiemes 


Xapiecr<rai 


XO-pieuTa 


\ei<j>^4v^€S 


\€L(p^€7(raL 


\€i(p^evra 


Dual. 


XO-piivre 


Xapi^o'crd 


Xapievre 


\€i(p^4ure 


\€l<p^€l(Td 


\€i(p^euTe 




Xaptevroiu 


Xapt^o'Caiv xapte»n-oii/. I 


\€i(p^€inoiv 


KeKp^eiaaiP 


' \€l(p^€VTOlI/. 



98 



ADJECTIVES. TARADIGMS. 



[U7 



Xpvcreos 


Xpvffea 


Xpvffeov, golden 


airXovs 
airXovs 


airXoT) 
airXri 


a'Kx6ov, single 
aTrXovv 


Xpvffovs 


Xpva-ii 


Xpvffovv 


Vt II 1 y^yj t' J 


£ f 


« ■* / 


Xpvcreov 


Xpvffeas 


Xpvffeov 


a-KXoov 
airXov 


airTs^ris 
a-rrXTJs 


oTrXoov 
airXov 


Xpvffou 


Xpva-Tjs 


XpVCTOV 




c / 


anX6cf 
cfirXcf 

arrxSov 
atrXovv 


XpV(Ti(p 

Xpvcrv 


Xpvcrec^ 
Xpvcv 


Xpvcrew 
Xpva-(f 


airXoca 
aiTX(^ 


aTrXoT] 
airX'p 


Xpvcreov 
Xpvffovv 


Xpvcreay 
Xpva-TJv 


Xpva-ovv 


airXSov 
airXovv 


airX6r}v 
airXTJv 


doubtful 


Xpv<T4a 
Xpvo-rj- 


Xpxxfeov 
Xpvffovv 


doubtful 


airXS-r} 
ottAt) 


airXSov 
airXovv 


Xpv(Teoi 
XpvcoT 


Xpvffeai 
Xpvcai 


Xpixfeo- 
Xpva'n 


airXdoi 
airXo7 


airXoai 
airXcCi 


aTrX6a 
airXa 


Xpvfficov 
Xpvcrciv 


Xpvffeuv 
Xpvawv 


Xpvffewv 
Xpvcrwv 


OTrXSav 
aTrXS)V 


airXScav 
airXav 


airX6a>v 
airXcov 


XpixTeois 
XpyfTOLS 


Xpvcreais 
Xpvcais 


Xpv(r4ois 
XpvffoTs 


anx6ois 
carXols 


a'rrX6ais 
a7r\ats 


a-rrXoois 
arrXols 


Xpvffeovs 


Xpva-eds 


Xpvcrea. 


airXSovs 


airXSas 


airX6a 


Xpvorovs 


Xpvffas 


xpva'a 


cfirXovs 


airXas 


airXa 


Xpvcreoi 


Xp^Ceai 


xpvcrea 


airXooi 


aTTX6ai 


a-rrXSa 


Xpvo'ol 


Xpvaai 


xpva'a 


avXoi 


aTrXo- 


a-TrXa 


Xpvffew 


Xpvared 


Xpva'eio 


aTrX6(o 


a7rA.o'a 


airXoca 


Xputrw 


Xpva'a 


XpvcS) 


airXci 


a7rA.a 


airXo} 


Xpv(r4oLu 


Xpvcreaiv 


Xpvareoiv 


atrXSoiv 


awXaaiv 


a.trX6oiv 


XpvTotv 


XpVffOLV 


Xpv(To7v 


airXolv 


airXoAV 


airXoiv 


apyvpeos 


apyvpea 


apyvpeov, silver 


Terv(pws 


TeTV(pv7a 


T€TV(p6s, having 


apyvpovs 


apyvpa 


apyvpovv 


TeTV(p6T0S 


TeTvcpvias 

f 


rero<p6Tos [struck. 


5 / 


» / 


5 ■ / 


rervcpoTL 
TervcpSra 


rervmvia 


apyvpeov 


apyvpeas 

5 « 


apyvpeov 


rervcpvTav 


1 

T erv<p6s 


apyvpov 


apyvpas 


apyvpov 


apyvpea 


apyvpet} 


apyvpea 


rervcpSres 


TeTV(pviat 


rervcpSra 


apyvpcp 


apyvpa 


apyvp^ 


Terv(p6T(i)p 


TeTV(pVlUV 


rervcpoToov 


5 / 


■> / 


' ' 


rervcpScri 

1. / _ 


TeTV(pvlais 


reTvcpocn 
TeTv<p6ra 


apyvpeov 


apyvpeav 


apyvpeov 


apyvpovv 


apyvpav 


apyvpovv 


reTV(poTas 


reTvcpvias 


apyvpee 


apyvpea 


apyvpeov 


TCTvcpSre 


TeTvcpvia 


rervcpSre 




apyvpa. . 


apyvpovv 


Terv(p6T0iv Tervcpviaiv 


rervcpSroiv 


TTOXVS 


iroXXri 


TToX-u, much 


ixeyas 


IxeydXri 


fi e 7 a, great 


TTOWOV 


iroXXrjs 


iroXXou 


fieyaXov 


/xeydXrjs 


fieydXov 


iroW^ 


TTOXX^ 


'iroXX(f 


fj-eydXca 


fxeydx-p 


fieydXti) 


TTOXVV 


iroXXriv 


TT oXii 


fxeyav 


fieydXriv 


fxey a 


TTOXV 

TToWoi 


iroXXi] 
"TToXXai 


iroXv 

TTOXXd 


fieya 


fxeydXr) 


fx eya 


fieydXoi 


fieydXai 


HeydXa 


iroXXoov 


TTOXXWV 


iroXXcov 


fieydXav 


fieydXoov 


fxeydXotv 


TToXXols 


TToXXa7s 


TroXXo7s 


fieydXois 


/j-eydXaLS 


fjLeydXois 


TTOXXOVS 


noXXds 


iroXXa 


fieydXovs 


fieydXas 


fieydXa 


TTOXXoi 


iroXXai 


TTOXXd 


fxeydXoi 


[xeydXai 


fieydXa 








fieydXa 


fJLeydXa 


fxeydXw 








fieyaXoiv 


fieydXaiv 


fxeydXoiv 



♦ 78.] 



ADJECTIVES OP TWO ENDINGS. 



99 



ue\as 


fieXaiva 


ficXav, black 


iras 


vaaa 


Tray, all 


fi€\a.t/os 


/jLeXalirrjs 


fxeXdvos 


Travr6s 


Trdcrris 


irayrSs 


fxeXavi 


fxeXaiyr] 


fieXaui 


■Kayri 


irda-p 


iravri 


fieXava 


fieKaivav 


ix4xav 


irdvTa 


iraaav 


Tray 


fieXav 


fx4\aiva 


ficXav 


iras 


iraffa 


Tray 


fxiXavfiS 


fjL€\aivau 


fieXava 


irdyrcs 


•jraffca 


Trdyra 


IxeXduMv 


jx^Xaiviov 


fxeXdvoty 


irdyrwv 


iraauy 


Trdyrwv 


lj.4Xa<Ti 


fieXaivais 


fj-eXaffi 


iracri 


Trdcrous 


Tract 


/xcXavas 


fieXaiuas 


fieXava 


TTdvTas 


irdcas 


Tcayra 


fjLe\av€S 


fieXaivai 


fiiXava 


irdvres 


iraffou 


Travra 


fjLe\ave 


fieXaiva 


fieXave 


Trdyre 


irdcrd 


Trdyre 


fieXdvoLV 


/xeXaivaiv 


fieXduoiv. 


TtdyroLv 


■trdaaiv 


Trdyroiv. 


arks 


(TTCLCa 


ffToiv, standing 


Xiiruy 


Xiirovtra 


Xnr6y, leaving 


crrdvTos 


<TTdcrr}s 


ardyros 


Xiir6yT05 


Xiirova-fis 


XiTToyros 


arduTi 


ffrdei^ 


crrdyri 


Xnr6yTi 


XlTTOVCTT} 


XnrSyri 


ffravra 


araaav 


ardv 


XinSyra 


Xnrovtrav 


Xnr6y 


<rrds 


araffa 


ardv 


Xnrojy 


XiTTovffa 


Xnr6v 


ardures 


aracrai 


ardvra 


XiirSm-es 


XiTTOvaai 


Xnr6yra 


a-rdin-cov 


araffSiv 


ffrdvTuv 


Xnr6yT<t}y 


Xnrov(Tu>y 


Xnr6yT(i)y 


CTaailv) 


crdffais 


a7a.cri{v) 


Xnrov(n{y) 


XiTTovcraLS 


Xnrov<ri{y) 


aratnas 


crrdads 


arduTa 


Xnr6yTas 


XiTTovaas 


XnrSyra 


aravres 


(TTaaai 


ardvra 


XiTToyres 


Xiirovaai 


XiirSyra 


trravTc 


(Trdaa 


(TTdyre 


Xnr6yr€ 


XiTTovad 


XiirSvTf 


(TTduTOlV 


(rrdaaiv 


(Trdmoiv. 


Xnr6yT0iy 


Xiirovcraiy 


Xnr6vT0iv. 


(pavuv 


(pafovaa 


(pavovVj about to 


^fvyvvi 


^€vyyv(Ta 


^ev7>/vv, joining 


(pavQvvros 


(pavovcnjs 


(pavovuTos [show 


^fvyyvyros 


(evyyv(Trjs 


^ixryyvvTOS 


(pavovvri 


(paVOVCTT) 


(pavovyri 


Cfvyyvyri 


^€vyyv(rp 


^(xryvvyri 


(pavovvTa 


(pavovady 


(pavovvra 


^evyyvm-a 


(fvyyvffay 


^evyvvv 


(pauwu 


(pauovad 


(pavovv 


^evyyvs 


^evyyvaa 


(fvyyvy 


ipavovims 


(pauovcrai 


(papovvra 


Cfvyyvyrfs 


^fvyyvaai 


C^vyyvyra 


(pavovvruiv 


(pavovacav 


(pavovin-(j)V 


Cfvyyvyruy (fvyyv(Tu>y 


(^eiryyvyTcoy 


(pavovcTi 


(pavovaais 


ipavovai 


^evyyvai 


(evyyvaais 


(^€uyyv(ri 


(pavovyras 


(pavovffds 


(payovyras 


^evyyvyras 


^fvyyv<Tas 


^fvyyvyra 


(pavovmes 


<pavov(Tai 


<payodirra 


^evyyvyres 


^(iryyvaai 


((vyyvyra 


(pauovpre 


<pavov(Td 


<pavovyre 


^firyyvyre 


(evyyvard 


^cvyyvyre 


<pavovvToiv 


(pavovaaiv 


(payovyroiy. 


^fvyyvyroiy ^evyyvauiy 


^(vyyvyroiy. 



Remark. All participles in -us are declined like XcKp^ds (see § 76, V.) ; all 
participles in -us, like htiKyvs (see § 76, III.) ; all participles in -as, like a-rds (see 
^ 76, VIII.): the Pres. Fut. and second Aor. Part. Active, like XnrcLy (§ 76, 
XII.) ; the Fut. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs, like arrepuiy (§ 76, XII.) 

§ 78. II. Adjectives of two Endings. 

Adjectives in -09 of two endings are declined like aya$6<s, 
except that they have no separate form for the feminine, the 
same form being used for the masculine and feminine. 



Life. 



100 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. [i 78 



■os,-ov\ 6ri &\oyos, rh &\oyov, irratiotuil 
To this class belong, 



fa) A few simple adjectives without particular denrative endings, e. g. 6 ^ 
BdpBapo,, not Greek; \dfipos, vehement; '^^lepos, gentle; XoiSopos, calumniating; 
Ti^acrSs, mild; x^po-oy, unfruitful; ^(rvxos, silent; Sairauos, extravagant; ew\os, 

^^(b) Sost simple adjectives with the derivative-endings -los and -clos, and 
'luos e. o-.Sfi awT-hpios, saving; 6 v fia(ri\€ios, regal; 6 v yud>pifios, recognizable; 

(c) All compounds, e. g. 6 rj d\oyos, rh &\oyov, irrational; 6 t] apy6s (instead 
of aepySs), inactive (but apy6s, -ri, -6v, bright) ; 6 tj irdyKaXos, very fair (but Ka\6s, 
-^ -6u); or] TrdWeuKos, very white (but \€Vk6s, -tj, -6v) ; ^eo-rrvevaTos, -ov, divindy 
inspired (but ttv^vcttos, -i?, -6v)\ adjectives compounded with adjectives in 
-k6s, which then become Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 ^ ^evZaTriKos^ not pure Attic, 
but {'AttikSs, -^, -6v) 7] fiiffoirepaiKos (but UipffiKSs, -i], -6u). 

Exceptions are adjectives derived from compound verbs with the deriva- 
tive-endings -k6s, which remain Oxytones; those in -re as, which remain 
Paroxytones, e. g. iiriSeiKTiKos, -i], -6u, from iTriSeiKuvfn ; those in -t<Js- vary 
between two and three endings, e. g. au6KT6sy -fj, -6u (from oi/ex«), and ayeicrSsf 
'6v, see Lobeck, ad S. Aj. 1296. Paralipp. p. 482, sq. Poppo ad Th. 2, 41, 4. 
But when compounds in -t6s, -r-fi, -t6v, are again compounded, they have but 
two endings, and are Proparoxytones, e. g. ^ ^ aKaToaKevaa-ros. 

Remark 1. Comparatives and Superlatives have three endings, even when 
the Positive has but two, though there are some rare exceptions, e. g. airopdrc 
pos 7) A^i//(s, Thu. 5, 110. Svsififio\<i)TaTos 7) AoKpis, Id. 3, 110. 

H. -ovs, -ovv] 6 7] evuovs, rh evvovv, benevolent. 

Adjectives with these endings are, 

(a) Those compounded with the contracted substantives vovs and ir\oCy, and 
hence in the Masc. and Fem. are declined like these, but in the Neuter like 
harovv (§ 47), yet the Neuter PL in -oa does not admit contraction, consequently 
TO ivvoa. On the accentuation, see § 49, 3. 

Rem. 2. Attic writers sometimes omit the contraction in the PL, e. g. koko- 
v6oi5 X. Cy. 8. 2, 1. Kpv^iv6ovs X. Ag. 11,5. Usvooi X. H. 2. 1, 2. 

(b) Such as are compounded with the substantive Trovy, e. g. 67} iroXuxour, 
rb TToKvTrovv, and are inflected like it, but in the Ace. Sing., even as Oihlirovs 
[§ 71, B. (b)], are partly of the' contract second Dec. and partly of the third, 
e. g. Gen. ttoKvttoBos and iroKinrov ; Ace. iroXviroda and iroAvirouv, etc. 

Rem. 3. In several adjectives of this kind, e. g. iirovy, fipaSinrovs, Slrovst 
aunrrSTrovs, the inflection does not follow the second Dec. 

III. -cos, -co f] 6 71 '/A.6c«js, t^ iXe«»', compassionate. ^ 

Adjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Dec. (M^). 

Rem. 4. The Ace. commonly ends in -av, but in a number of compound 
words, it ends in -w (§ 48, Rem. 1), e. g. a^iSxpew, audTrkeu, &y7jp<u (in respect to 
the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7), eViTrAew, inrepxpeo). 

Rem. 5. There are three endings to the simple adjective : — 

UXews, -TTXe'a, tv\4u)v, full, Gen. TrAe'w, TrXe'as, ir\e'aj, PL -jrXcw, irXe'oi, ic\U\ the 
compounds are either of two endings, e. g. 6 i) audnKews, rh avaTrX^wy, Pl.'ot cu 
cKTrXeo) {tTnre7s eKTrkew X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. ^kttXcw rpdireCai X. Hier. 1. IS), to ^kttXh* 
X. Cy. 3, 1, 28. 1, 6, 7, and even the Norn. PL ir\4w, of the simple adjective 
18 not seldom used for the Masc. and Fern., or they have (yet more seldom) 



jf 78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 101 

three endings, e. g. avdirXews, avairXea (PI. Phaedon 83, d.), avdirXeoov. Eur. 
Ale. 730, has irXeov, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So like* 
wise compounds, seldom in the Sing., e. g. to (fxivKiov^ Soph., oftener in tha 
PL, e. g. l/iTTA-eoi PI. Rp. 6. 505, c. and very frequently in the Neuter, e. g. 
e«irAea X. Cy. 6. 2, 7, and 8. wepiVAea 6. 2, 33. Also froni t'Aews, Plato Phaedon 
95, a. has '/Xea as Neut. PI. 

Rem. 6. 'O t) aus, rh o-S>v^ salvus, is formed from the old word 2A02 by 
contraction. In addition to the Nom. aus, auv, this word forms only the Ace. 
Sing, awv, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. auov. The form aa 
(from (Toa), occurs as Fem. Sing, in Eurip. Fr. 629. (Dind.) and as Neut. PI. in 
Plat. Critias, 111, c. in the best MSS. The PI. consists of forms from trws of 
the second Dec. and of forms from the lengthened a-uos, namely : — 

PI. N. ol at am (from aS>ts)^ and ol awoi, at (rcoaif N. awa, rarely ca. 
A. robs Toy crus (from ercDas), and robs arwovs, N. aHa, rarely ca. 

The Singular forms of crwos are very rare in the Attic writers, e. g. auos, X. 
An. 3. 1, 32. 

Rem. 7. The compounds of Kfpas and yeXas are partly like the Attic 
second Dec, partly lake the third Dec, e. g. 6 i] xP^^^>^^P^^i """^ xp^^^'^^P^*'^ 
Gen. ;^pu(rd/cepa> and xP^^^oKfpcoros ; 6 •^ (piXoyeXws, Th (piXoy^Kuv, Gen. <piK6y(\(i} 
and (^iKoy^KwTos ] ^ovKepus, Gen. fiovKepo) and fiovKepuros, so fVKfpus. The 
adjective Svsepus follows the third Dec only, e. g. dvsfpasros, etc. Forms like 
the Common second Dec. originate from forms of the Attic second Dec, e. g. 
5lK€poy, trfjKepoi, &K€pa. On the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7. 

IV. -ay. -ov; N. i ^ aaxppuv, rh ffuxppov, prudent, 
G. ToC Trjs rod auxppovos (according to § 55, 1). 

Rem. 8. From 6 tj irluVf/at, comes also the Fem. form trUipa, even in prose 
writers; so also irpScppaa-aa from 6 r) irp6<pp<i)y, occurs in the poets. 

Rem. 9. Here belong, also, the Comparatives in -wv, -ovj -twvy -lov; but in 
respect to the declension of these it is to be noted, that, after the rejection of 
K, they are contracted in the Ace. Sing., and in the Nom., Ace, and Voc. PI. 
See the Paradigms, § 79. In the Attic ANTiters, the uncontractcd forms in -ova, 
-oves, -ovas, frequently occur, e. g. ficl^oya, ixdrToya, KoWioya, iXdrTovis, 
Kaxiovis, fjLfi^ovfSy fifXriovfS, irXdovcs, ^TTOj/as, fifXTlovas, iXdrrouas, X. Cy. 5. 2, 
36. 7. 5, 83. 2. 1, 23. 2. 1, 13. 5. 2, 36. Hell. 6. 5, 52. Cy. 7. 5, 70. On the accen- 
tuation, see § 65, 5. 

V. -ij s, -e s ; N. (S ^ aXrj^s, rh a\r]bfSj trtie, 

G. rov rijs rov aXrj^eos, aXrj^ovs (^ 59). 

On the contraction of -4a into -o (instead of -rj), where a vowel precedes, see 
^ 59, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 10. Compounds in -(rrjs (from ^ros, Gen. tVoyy), are either of two 
endings, e. g, ■jropeiW x'Aut^, PI. Rp. 10. 615, a. TrepjJSoj rfj xtAjfTe?, Phacd. 249, 
a., or they take a particular Fem. form, namely, -tris. Gen. -eTiSoy, e. g. 
iirrfrr}!, F. firrtris] rpioKovrovKibtav a-irovZwv, Th. 1, 87. 

Rem. 11. Simple adjectives in -tjs are Oxytoncs, except ir\i]py]s, irXajpej, 
full. On the accentuation of the Voc. and of the Neuter, see § 65, 5, and on 
the accentuation of the Gen. PI. ^ 59, Rem. 4. 

VI. -17 V, -6 »' ; N. i ^ &^^17>', Ti> i^^ei/ 

G. rov TTjs rov 6.p^ivos (§ 55, 1). No other word like this. 

* 

VII. -o>p, -op ; N. 6 •^ airdrup, rh Jiirarop, fatherless, 

G. ToC rris rov airdropos (§ 55, I). In like manner onLr 

afivrwp, &fjLr}rop. 

9* 



102 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 



[U9 



Vin. 'IS. -I ; (a) N. 6 ^ 'idpis, rh %*, knowing, 

G.rov TTJs rod Wpios (§ 63, Rem. 5). 

In like manner, only yrjffns, temperate, and rpScpis, nourished. In addition to 
the form in -los, these adjectives have another in -iSos, but more rare, and only 
poetic, e. g. XdpiSa, %t5ey. 

(b) l^.dv ivxapis, rh e^xaph agreeable, 
G. rod T^s rod evxdp^ros. 

Here belong the compounds of x<^P'^> '^'^'rpis, IXirty, <pp6vrLs, which are 
declined like the simples, e. g. et/e\7rts, ^^eXiri, Gen. eveKTriSos ; (pL\6irarpiSy Gen. 
(piXoirdrpiSos ; the Acc. ends according to § 53, 3, in -iv, e. g. fUeAiriv, eHxap^v, 
but compounds of ttJajs, when they refer to persons, are inflected in the Attic 
dialect in -idos, e. g. (piX6TroXis, Gen. -Sos, yet in tbi Acc, (piKSiroMv and -iSo; 
still, as epithets of cities, etc., they are inflected like Tr6his, e. g. KoXAiiroAxs, 
SiKaiS-rroXis, etc.. Gen. /caAAiTrtJAews, etc. 

IX. -i/s, -V] (a) N. 6 ^ ^Sawpw, rb &SaKpv, tearless. 

So compounds of Sa/cpu ; yet these inflect only the Acc. Sing, like the third 
Dec, e. g. ■&daKpvu, ISTeut. &daKpv. The other Cases are supplied by aSoKpOrosy 
-oy, Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec. 

(b) N. 6 -^ SiVrjxvs, rh StTTTjxy, two ells long, 
G. TOW rrjs rod dnrfjx^os. 

Here belong the compounds of tttjxvs ; the declension is like ykvKvs, yXvici 
(^§ 76, II. and 77), except that the Neuter PL in -ea is contracted into -77, like 
JSurrri, e. g. StTrvjXTj. 

X 'ovs, -ov, IS. b 7] fjt.ov6Sovs, rh fiovSdoy, one-toothed, 
G. rod rrjs rod fjLov6Sovros. 

So the remaining compounds of oSovs. For the Dec, see § 54 (d). 







§ 79. Paradigms. 






S.N. 


eudo^os 


^vdo^ov 


Slirovs 




Siirovv 


G. 


evSolou 


ivS6^ov 




5i7ro5oy 




D. 


ivdS^o} 


ivdo^cp 




SlTToSt 




A. 


ej/5o^oj/ 


evSo^ov 


SiTToSa and Siirovy 


iiirovy 


V. 


evBo^e 


^uSo^ou 


Siirov 




Slirouy 


P.N. 


cvdo^oi 


€pSo^a 


S^TToSey 




SiiroSa 


G. 


iyd6^(i}V 


ivS6^cov 




SnrSSvy 




D. 


iySS^ois 


evSo^ois 




Siirocri 




A. 


ivSd^ovs 


evdo^ovs 


, diTTodas 




StiroSo 


V. 


euBo^oi 


eydo^a 


S'lToSes 




SiToSa 


Dual. 


ivdo^w 


ivdo^w 




SiTToSe 






ivBS^oiv 


iuSo^oiv. 




SnrSSotv. 





§79.] 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 



103 



S.N. 


fVTrk{o-os)ovs eijTr\{o-0v)ovv 


tXeojy 


'lAeaov 


G. 


eihrXott 




IXeu 


D. 


eihrXcf} 




' VXeoj 


A, 


cvttXovv 




Xkewv 


V. 


doubtful 


TAewy 


%\^(av 


P.N. 


ihrXoi €vir\oa 


tXeqp 


?Aeft) 


G. 


iihrXuv 




%\i(t}V 


D. 


eihrXois 




fXews 


A. 


eihrXovs evirXoa 


J\€U5 


TAco) 


V. 


e^TrXot €U7rA.oo 


t\eco 


'iKca 


Dual. 


eijTr\(i) 




T\e<y 




evirkoip. 




IK^wv. 


S.N. 


exiSaiiJ.oiV etSaifMoy 


e'xi^fw 


^x^tov 


pL^i^wy lJ-^7(oy 


G. 


evSaifiovos 


ix^i 


oyos 


fieiCovos 


D. 


evSai/xovi 


ix^i 


oyi 


ud(oyi 


A. 


fv5aifj.ova ^HSoufioy 


^Xi^^o''tt-{a) 


cx^ioj/ 


fifi^ot^ ixfl^o) pLci^oy 


V. 


iHSaifwy 


tx^^o" 


fl€7(0U 


P.N. 


fvBalfioves edSaifioya 


dx^i'Oyfi 


^x^'^of^o- 


fiel^oves fifiCoya 






ix^tovs 


iX^iw 


piel^ovs M^^C*^ 


G. 


evSaifi6vo3V 


iX^i 


6yuv 


IJ.ei^6ya)v 


D. 


€vSaijxo(Ti{v) 


cX^io(ri{y) 


HeiCo<ri{v) 


A. 


evSaifiovas iuhaifiova 


eX^^oyas 


iX^ioya 


fjLfiCoyas fifiCoya 






iX^lovs 


^X^lca 


fi(l(ous fifiCe^ 


V. 


ivZai^ioviS fvBcdfioya 


like the N 


ominative. 


like the Nominative. 


Dual. 


fvSalnove 


ix^l 


0V€ 


lielCove 




fvhaiyiivoiv. 


4x^i 


6voty. 


fiei(6you/. 


S.N. 


a\T}i^s aK^}^is 


vyi-ns 


t 1 


G. 


aK7}^(f-os)ovs 


1 


r)'j(«-os)oCy 


D. 


aXri^{4-'i)f7 




^7t(c-t)cr 


A. 


oA7j3{ 4-a ) Tj oAT/i^e's 


^7* {4-a) 


a' \rfi4s 


V. 


oATj^f'y 


1 


jyifs 


P.N. 


lLkri^{4-(s)€7s iL\Tjb{€-a)ri 


vyi(4-€s)€'i 


5 vyi{4-a)a* 


G. 


aKri^{f-u)v)uy^ 




\rYi{4-uy)uv 


D. 


dA7j^6<n(v) 


1 


jyi4<Ti{y) 


A. 


aXri^{e-as)f7s aATj^(€-a)^ 


vyi{4-as)f'i 


V vyi{4-a)a 


V. 


like the Nominative. 


like t 


Jic Nominative. 


DuuL 


aKi]^{f-f)Ti 


\ 


>yi(€-€)7J 




a.Kr]^{€-oiy)o7y. 




\jyi{4-oiv)o7y. 


S.N. 


tUxttpiS eCxapi 


a-KOLTUp 


6.iraTop 


.G. 


iVX^plTOS 


( 


xiraropos 


D. 


fvxapiTi 


( 


iTrdropi 


A. 


€ux<fptTo and ivx^ptv et'X'V* 


kira.ropa 


iiroTop 


V. 


iijXapi. 




iwarop 


P.N. 


evx^pires (vxo-ptra 


airJiTopfs 


airdropa 


G. 


iVXOLpiTtDV 




iirarSpwy 


D. 


fvxapKTi 


{ 


xirdropai 


A. 


€vXOLpnas ivxo-pt^oi 


atrdTopas 


airdropa 


V. 


eitXoipiTfS €vx<iptTa 


airdTopfs 


avaTopa 


Dual. 


tiixd-piTe 


I 


i.TrdTop€ 




evxoLpir 


oiv 

'^9. Kom. 4. 


4 


iTrarSpoiy, 


' but /I 


■VVT,b4-C^V = ffVVT]bu>V, k 


« « 59. "Rom. 1. ^ 



104 



ADJECTIVES OP ONE ENHING. 



[$6( 



§ 80. Ill Adjectives of one Ending. 

Adjectives of one ending have no separate form for the Neu 
ter, partly because their meaning is of such a nature that the> 
generally occur in connection with persons, and partly because 
their formation admits of no separate neuter form. In poetry. 
however, these adjectives sometimes occur in those Cases in 
which the Neut. form is like that of the Masc. and Fern., i. e 
in the Gen. and Dat., even in connection with neuter substan- 
tives, e. g, ixavtdcriv Xvcra-i^fJiarriv, Eur. Or. 264. cv TrivTjTL o-w/ixxTC, la 
EL 375. They very seldom take a separate form for the Neut, 
e. g. hrrjkvsi iiriQXvSa e^vea. Her. 8, 73 ; a derivative a-ijective is 
commonly used, where the neuter is to be denoted. 



Endings. 
I. -aSf Gen. -ov; 6 fxoviasy Gen. fiovlov, single (Paroxjtone). 
II. -as, Gen. -auros: 6 t] h.Kdp.as, Gen. -avros, unwearied (Paroxytone). 
in. -dsf Gen. -dSos: 67} <pvy6.s. Gen. <pvydSos, fugitive (Oxytone). 

IV. -ap, Gen. -apos: only ndKap, though the Fern, form fitUcupa is sometimes 
found. 

V. -r] 5, Gen. -ov: 6 e.^eXojn-fjs, Gen. 4^e\oirrov, voluntary. 

Some of these adjectives take, in connection with Fem, substantives, a sepa- 
rate Fem. form in -is (Gen. -tSos), e. g. eua>Trr]s, Fem. fvuiris, fair-looking. They 
are Paroxytones, except e^eKovrrjs, eKoyrfjs, and vfipiarris. 

VI. -7JS, Gen. -tjtos: 6 tj apyTjs, Gen. apyJjTos, ichite. 

So all compounds in -^vtjs, -S^i^y, -fi^s, -irX-fis, and -Kfx-fis, and soi: 
adjectives, e.g. yvfivrjs, naked; x^p^vs, needy; irivris, }x>or ; 7r\a*Tjs, . 
etc. 

VU. -i]v. Gen. -^ j/os : by} airr-fiv, Gen. airrTivosy unfeathered. In like manner 

no other, 

Vin. -(is, Gen. -utos: 6 tj ayvcas, Gen. ayvuros, utiknown. 

So all compounds in -^pds, -yvds, and -xpds, and also aTrrds, Jirm. 

IX. -15, Gen. -iSos: 67} avd?ucis, Gen. avdXKiSos, potcerless. 



le 



These adjectives after the omission of a feminine substantive to v, 
belong, are Uke those in -ds, -ddos, e. g. i, 'EWds (sc. 7^), used as su 
e. g. 7j war pis ( sc. 77) ) , fatherland. 

X. -vs. Gen. -vSos: orj ve-qAvs, Gen. ve-fiKvSos, one lately come. 
In like manner only a few other compounds. 



^7 

3, 



^ gl ] COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. 105 

XL -{, Gren. -yos, -Kosy -^os : 6 rj Spiraf, Gren. -0701, rapacious. 

6 7} ^A.t|, " -Hkos, equal. 
6 7} fiuyij^f " -^X^^i one-hoofed. 

XII. -tf', Gren. 'iros'- 6 V cdyi\i\pj Gen. -tiros, high, 

Xin. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. fiiraiy, childless ; fuucpS' 
X^'pt long-handed; aifT6x^ip, done with one^s own hand; fxajcpaluv, long-lived; 
uaKpavxWy long-necked ; XevKouriris, having a white shield. The declension of such 
adjectives is like that of the substantives, e. g. iwxpavx^vos. On the compounds 
of vovsy however, comp. § 78, IL (b). 

$ 81. Comparison of Adjectives. T^" 

1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to 
an object in different degrees : — 

(a) When the quality belongs to one object in a higher 
degree than to another, the form is called the Comparative, 
e. g. Plato was more learned than Xenophon. 

(b) When the quaUty in the highest degree belongs to an 
object, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was 
the MOST learned of the disciples of Socrates. 

(c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple 
meaning without aiiy comparison, is called the Positive, 
e. g. Plato was learned. 

2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com- 
parison ; the participle does not admit it, except in a few 
rare cases, where the participle has the meaning of an 
adjective, e. g. €pp<Diievo<i, -eaTepc^, -eararof;. 

3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the 
Comparative and Superlative. The first, and much the 
most common, is -repofi^ -Tcpd, -Tcpov, for the Compara- 
tive, and -TttTo?, -TaT77, -rarov, for the Superlative; the 
second is '{if)(ov, -(Z)oj/, or -(ov, -oi/, for the Comparative, 
and - (t) 0-T0 9, - (t) cm?, -{tjarov, for the Superlative. The 
t is the union-vowel. 

4. The first class of terminations is appended to the stem 
of the adjective by the connecting syllables o (o)), ai, t9, e?; 
hence the general rule : In most adje-ctives^ the usual end' 
ing-s are appended to the stem by means of the connecting 
syllable. 



106 



ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OP COMPARISON. 



[^82 



Remark. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix ^laXXov (magis) and fidKicrra (maxime) to 
the Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, which, for the sake 
of euphony, have no Comparative form. 

§ 82. A. First Form of Comparison. 

Comparative, -repos, -Tepd, -repov; 
Superlative, -raros, -raTTj, -rarov. 

These endings are appended to the stem of the adjective; 
the stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second 
pec, and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec. 

I. Adjectives in -os, -■>; (-a), -ov. 

(a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to 
the stem by means of the union -vowel o or a> ; the union -vowel 
is o, when a syllable long by nature or by position (^ 27, 3), pre- 
cedes, but 0), when a short syllable precedes, — o> being then 
used to prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables, 
e.g. 

Com. KOV<P'6-T€pOS) 

" l(rxvp-6-T€poSf 

" \€TrT-6-T€pOSf 

" (r<poZp-6-TcpoSy 
" TriKp-6-r€poSf 
" ffo(p-a>-TepoSy 

a^L-u-repos, 



Kov(p-oSf light, 
iffxvp-^s, strong^ 
XeiTT-Ss, thin, 
<r(po5p-6sj vehement, 
iriKp-6s, hitter, 
<ro<p-6s, wise, 
iX^p-6s, Jirm, 
&^l-os, worthy, 



up 


. Kov<P'6-r or OS, -77, -oiff 




Iffx^p-^ccTos, 




A,eirT-<^TaTor, 




ffcpoip-S-^aroSy 




iriKp-6-TaroSf 




ao<f>-^^aTOSf 




iX^p-ti^aTOSf 




a^-w-TOToj. 



Eemark 1. A mute and liquid here always make a syllable long by posi- 
tion, though the Attic poets, on account of the verse, sometimes consider such 
syllable as short, e. g. ebTCKvdraros from dhcKyos, Eur. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.), 
SvsiroTfidcTepa, Id. Ph. 1367. 

(b) Contracts in -cos = -ovs and -oos = -ovs are contracted also 
it the forms of Comparison ; the first contract c and a> the union- 
vowel into (o; the last assume the union-syUable cs and contract 
in with the preceding 0, e. g. 

iropcpip-^os = Trop<pvp-ovs hn\-6os = orX-ovj 

iropcpvp-ecirepos = Trop<l>vp-<i-r€pos Lir\o-4(r-rfpos = krK-ois-r^pos 

^opct>vp.,ciTaTos = iTop<pvp-<i>-Ta.ros k^\o-4cr-TaTos = iirX-o,J<r-TaTOf. 

Here belong also contracts of two endings in -ovs and -ouv, e. g d?K^i =- 

^u-ovs, Neut. eiiy.ooy = ,iiu.ovy, Com. d,yo.4<rT,pos = .iyois-r.pos, Sup. ^^ 

iff-raros =» tvu-ova-raros. 



^S2.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 107 

Bem. 2. Adjectives in -oos take also the uncontracted forms of the Compara- 
tive and Superlative in -owrepos, -ouyraros^ e. g. ivKvoumpoi, X. K. Equ. 1, 10. 

iVXpOUTCpOSy X. O. 10, 11. 

(c) The following adjectives in -a* os: yepaios, old; TraXat- 
09, ancient; Trcpatos, on the oilier side; cr;(oXaros, at leisure^ 
assume -xipo^ and -raros Avithout a union-vowel, e. g. 

7€pat-<iy, Com. ycpod-Tqjo^, Sup. yepai-Taros, 

iraXai-os-t " iraXal-repos, " iroAoi-TOTOS. 

Rem. 3. TlaKaiSs and trxoA^aloy have also the usual forms of Compari- 
60n ; irakoudrepos, ffxo\ou6T€po5y SO also yepai^ifposy Ajitiph. 4, p. 125, 6. 

(d) The following adjectives in -os: cvStos, calm; ^orv^^os, 
quiet; 18109, peculiar; 10-09, equal; /x€o-0 9, middle; op ^p 10 9, 
early ; 01/^109, late; TrapaTrk-qa-Lo^y similar; and irptliio^, in tlie 
morning, assume the union-syllable at, the Comparative and 
Superlative thus becoming like the preceding words in -aio9, 
e. g. 

fjLur-os, Com. fua-ai-rfposy Sup. ftfcr-ai-raroSy 

tSl-OSy '* iSl-al-T(pOSy *' iSi-Ou'-TOTOJ. 

Rem. 4. Sometimes also the common form is found, e. g. rjcrvxuTfposy 
T)<rvx<i^oTos ] <ptKwr(posy ^iXtHnaeros are the usual fonns in the Attic writers. 
Here belong also the adverbial forms wpiaialrepoyy vpuHcuTfroy from irpwios ; thus 
in Plato; likewise irpwirfpoy and wputTara; thus always, as it seems, in Thu. 
(Popp. ad 7, 19, 1), also in Xen. Anab. 3. 4, 1. trpvi-rtpoy according to the best 
MSS. (on the contrary -rpiclcdraray Cy. 8. 8, 9). The adjective <f>l\os has 
three forms: (pikdrtpos seldom (e. g. Xen. C. 3. 11, 18.), and ^lAalraror, 
t^tXalrtpos seldom in prose (e. g. Xen. An. 1. 9, 29, though one good Ms. has 
^i\u)T(pov), and (^iXa/raror seldom in prose (e.g. Xen. H. 7.3,8.), <pl\Tfpos 
poetic, and ^/Atotoj very frequent ; the Comparative is tisually expressed by 
fuiWou <l>l\os. In addition to these three forms, also the Superlative ^l\urros 
(as in Homer, the Comparative <f>ikio3y) is found in Attic poetry. 

Rem. 5. The two adjectives, fiiaoi, middle, and vtosy young, have a special 
Superlative form, fitaarosy ytaros] but this is in use only when a series 
of objects is to be made prominent, pLtirttros denoting the very middle of the 
series, and y^aros the last or most remote, whereas fjL«ralTccTos expresses the 
idea of the middle in general, and y^tvraros retains the primary signification 
of the adjective, young, new. In prose, ytaros is used only in reference to the 
tones of music {ytaros <f>d6yyos)] and then the Feminine is contracted, i^ttj, 
tlie lowest line or string. 

(e) Two adjectives in -09: ipptofxivo'Sf strong, and aKpdros, 
unmixed, append the union-syllable €9 to the stem, e g. cppw/xcv- 



108 



ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [^82. 



^(T-T€poSy Ippi^ixcv-id-rarosy aKpar-ecr-Tepos, aKpaT-ea-raTos. So also 
atSotos has alSoL-ecr-Taros in the superlative. 

Rem. 6. Turther, the adjectives, &<l>^oyos, rich; ffirovSalos, zeahus; and 
^ffii^vos, glad, sometimes take the above form, as a^bov4<rr(pos, -icraros, 
together with the common form, -c^repos, -draros. From ^.afifvos is formed 
ifffM^uc^repos, and the adVerbial neuter, ao-^ei/o^Tara and a<r/i*j/-e(r-ToTa.— Several 
other adjectives also have this fonnation, yet for the most part only in poetry, 
e.g. etCwpos, unmixed (of wine) ; rjdvixos, sweet; iTriiredos, fat (iiriirf^firrepos, 
X. H. 7. 4, 13), and all contracts in -ovs; comp. (b). The forms in -farfpos, 
-iaraToSy belong properly to adjectives in -77s and -uv. 

(f) The following adjectives in -os: XaAo5, talJcative ; fiovo- 
<l>dyosy eating alone; 6i{/ocf>dyo?, dainty; and irroixosy poor, 
drop 05, and append the syllable 15, e. g. XdX-09, Com, XaX-ur- 
reposy Sup. AaA-tcr-raTOS ; ttt^xos has also Sup. Trrwxoraros. 

Eem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -tjy, Gen. -ov. 

II. Adjectives in -rjs, Gen. -ov, and i/^ev8-/js, -c's. Gen. -co?, drop 
-iy?, and append the syllable -19, e.g. KXhrr-rj^ (Gen. -ov), tJiievish, 
Com. KXemr-Lcr-Tepos, Sup. /c\c7rT-u7-TaTos ; ipcvS'Car-Tepo^, \l/evS-UT- 

TttTOS. 

Exceptions. "t^puTT-^s, -ov, insolent, has vfipt<rr6rfpos, X. An. 5. 8, 3, vfipitrr6- 
raros, X. An. 5. 8, 22. C. 1. 2, 12. From uKpar-fis (Gen. -e'oy) is the Com. oic/Hx- 

Tf<rTepos, to distinguish it from aKparftrraToSf No. (e). 

III. Adjectives of the third Declension. Tlie Comparison- 
endings are appended to the stem of the adjectives, either 
directly or by inserting the syllable -es (also -w). 

(1) Those in -vs, -eta, -v, 779, -c? (Gen. -eo9=-of9), o^ 

-av, and the word p^aKap, happy, append the endings of Com- 
parison directly to the pure stem, wliich appears in the Neuter 
form, e. g. 

•yXvKvs, Neut. -V — y\vKv-n-fpo5 yXvKv^aroi 

a\v^s, Neut. -es — oXTj^eV-rcpoy aAij^eV-Tcrroy 

A*e^«y> Neut. -au — fieXdv-Tcpos fifXav^ecros 

TaXas, Neut. -av — ToXdv-repos raXiiy-raTos 

fiaKap, — fiaKap-Tfpos fuucdp-raros. 

Eem. 8. The adjectives 7,dis, raxis, and toXvs are compared in -iww tmi 
•»y. See § 83, 1. 

(2) Adjectives m -wv, -ov (Gen. -0V09), assmne -C9, e. g. 

evdai[xwu, Neut. eiiSaifiov, happy. 

Com. €v5ai(xoy-e(r-repos. Sap. evSai/iOK-^-roroi. 



I 



5 83.] ADJECTIVES. SECOND FORM OF COMPARISON. 109 

(3) Adjectives in -$ sometimes assume -e?, sometimes -ts, 

e.g. 

i^Al|, Gen. cu^X«/f-oy, groiving old, SpTa|, Gen. SipTrary-os, rapax, 
Com. k<pr)KiK-(<X-repoSj Com. apTray-iff-repoSt 

Sup. iup7j\iK-4<r-TaTOs, Sup. apvay-(^-Tccros. 

(4) Adjectives in -cis, -ev, whose stem ends in vt, append the 
Comparison-endings directly to the stem, the last t being 
changed into a; and the preceding v being then dropped (^ 20, 2). 

XapiftSf -itVf Gen. x°f'^^'^'°^i pleasant. 

Com. xaf>^«o^"^<poy» Sup. x^f ^**''^'*''"o^* 

(5) The compounds of x*^'^ assimie w, e. g. 

Mxofi^t Gen. iirixdpiT-os, pleasant. 

Com. iirixapiT-tif-r«poSt Sup. iirixoiptr o^oroy. 

'Ax«/>io'Te/)^» in Homer, comes from kxapif-^tpos ; comp. No. U). 

♦ 83. B. Second Form of Comparison, 

Comparative, -i'cdv, Neut -Zov, or -cov, Neut. -ov. 
Superlative, -loros, 'Ca-rrjy -kttov. 

BsMARK 1. On the quantity of i in -Ivyj -toy, see ^ 28, 1 ; on the declension, 
4 78, Rem. 9; and on the accent, ^ 65, 5 (a). 

This form of Comparison includes, 

L Some adjectives in -v9, which drop -v? and append 'Ujy, 
etc.; this usually apphes only to rjSv^, sivect, and raxv% swift 
(the other form of these adjectives in -vrcpo?, -vraT09, is some- 
times used, but not by Attic writers). Ta^v? has in the 
Comparative ddUrawv (Att Sdrrajv)^ Neut. ^oo-o-oi' (^aTTOK). 
Comp. H 21, 3, and 17, 6. Ta^i^wv is found only among the 
later writers. Thus, 

rjS-vs, Com. rfS-toty^ Neut. %8-So0, Sup. IJ8-«rToj, -17, -cy. 

rax-vs, " d<iff<Tetyf Att. 3((TTo»y, Ncut. dcurcrov, Att. ^ottov, Sup. rdxi<rros 

Rem. 2. The other adjectives in -^», as Pa^vs^ deep; ffapvs, heavy; fipa- 
8ur, slow; fipax^s, short; ykvKvsj sweet; Sa<rvSf Oiick ; (vp6s, wide; i^uT, 
sfiarv ; irptafivsy old; iici/j, swiji, hare the form in -vrfpos, -vraros (^ 82, 
ni.j ; in Attic poetry, however, single examples of these adjectives arc found 
with the other form, e. g. fip<ixi<rroSf trptafiurrosj &Ki<rros. 

II. Tlie following adjectives in -pos: alcrxpo^tbase ; ix^po^, 
hostile; KvBposy Juynorable; and oLKTpos, ivretched (but always 

:o 



110 ADJECTIVES ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. [^ 84. 

oiKT/3OT€p05 in the Comparative), — the ending -pos here also 
being dropped, e. g. alamos, Com. aiax-i^ov, Neut ata-x-lov, Sup. 
atcr^-icTTos. 

Bem. 3. OtKTKTTOs, KvSiuv, Kidurros, are poetic. Besides this form, in -iwv, 
etc., which is preferred by the Attic writers, the above adjectives have also, 
though seldom, the other form in -dreposy -6rarosy e. g. €Xi&^p<^TaTo^ ; but always, 
in prose, ottcrpSraTos 



§ 84. Anomalous Forms of Comparison. 



Positive. 
aya^6sj good^ 



2. K(uc6sj bad, 

3. Kd\6sf beautiful, 

4. a}y.y€iv6sf painful, 

5. fiaKp6$y long, 

6. fiiKpSs, small, 

7. 6\(yos,few, 

8. fiiyas, great, 

9. TToKvs, much, 

10. fx^dios, easy, 

11. iriiroav, ripe, 

12. iriwVffat, 



Comparative. 
afieiuuv, Neut. &f*€ivov 

{fi4\Tepos, Poet.) 
Hpeia-a-OfV, Att. Kpeirruv 

((peprepos, Poet.) 

T^Ctrwr, Att. f^TTWV 

KoAAtwy 
aA.76tj'<JT6poy 

fiaKporepos 

{fidcrffwy, Poet.) 

fxiKpSrepos 

ixdffcrwv, Att. iKarruv 

irXe(c»»', or 7r\4a)V 

ireirairepos 
'tTi6rcpos 



Superlative. 
&pi(Tros 
fieAriaros 
{$e\raros, Poet.) 

KpOTlffrOS 
\cp(TTOS 

{(pipraros, <f>cpi<nts, Poet.) 

KaKlffTOS 

XfipKrTos 
Adv. ^Ki<rra 
Kd?J>Li(rTos 
oKyeiyoraTOS 
&\yiaT05 

fiaKpOTOTOS 

fUKpOTOTOS 
i\dxi<TT05 

hxiyurros 
fiiyiffros 

pamos 
veirairaros 

TriSTOTOS. 



Eemakk I. The Superlative ^aroy (from>^y, the god of war), and the 
Comp. a/teWv, have particularly the idea of braven/, boldness; fieXrlwy, like the 
Latm melior, signifies better, in a moral sense, though by no means confined to 
that ; \cpa>u IS mostly used in such phrases as \^6u 4<rri, it is better, and \v<rros 
mostly m the Voc. & x^Vre. The poetic Superlative <p4p^crros is found in 
riato, m the exclamation 5 <p4ptar. ! most worthy ! The irregular forms of 
liiKpds, xiz ixdtrtrcou, ixdxicrros, express both the idea of smallness and fewness 
[oKtyos]', but f^eiwu generally expresses the idea of fewness, seldom that of 
mallness;^ the regular forms of f...p6s, viz. ^..pSr.pos, -oVaro., always retain 
their ongmal idea of .maZ^.e.., and also 6?.iy^<rros that of fewness, though iMyos 
often signifies small. > & ^ 



♦ 84.] ADJJECTIVES. — ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. 11' 

Rem. 2. The use of the longer and shorter form of the Comparative TrAe/wi/, 
n-Aewj', should be particularly noted. The neuter ttk4ov is more frequent than 
TrAeToj', especially when it is used adverbially ; irXiovos and vXeiovos, irhiovt 
and it\eioyii Ace. ir\4a), irKiova, and jrKeioD, are used indiscriminately ; PL Nom. 
and Ace, usually -n-Xdovs, also TrXetores and irKciovas (but not irXiovs) ; irKclco 
is much more frequent than irAew ; '7r\et6va}v and TrXeioai are more frequent than 
rKfSywv and Tr\4o<Ti, Finally, the shortened form of the Neut. Sing, irx^iv 
(formed from irX^'iov), but limited to such phrases as irXiiu ^ ixvpioi, should be 
mentioned as a special Atticism. 

Several adjectives, which express the idea of an order or 
series, have only the Comparative and Superlative forms, 
because, on account of their signification, 'Jiey cannot be used 
absolutely, but only in comparison. An adVerb of place is 
usually the root of these forms of Comparison, e. g. 

^from Trpci), Trpo'Tepovfprior), irpuTos (primus ),^rs<. 

" Uvu), ay an epos (superior), avdoraros (supremus). 

" vTTcp), inreprcpos (superior), higher, inrepraros, Poet. vTraros (supremus). 

" inro'i). varepos (posterior), later, varaTos (postremus), last. 

" ^f), ea-xaros (extremus), outermost. 

" irXriaiov, prope), {irXTjaios, Homeric), ■nXtjo'iairepos, or irXricrUffTfpos 
(proprior), nearer, irXTja-ialrarosy -effraros (proximus), nearest. 
( " irp6cru),far, vpoffcaT epos, farther, irpoadoTaTos, farthest. 

Eem. 3. Other adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, which are* 
also derived from adverbs, have no Positive form of the adjective, e. g. ijpefia, 
quietly, ijpefjieffTepos, i)p€/x4(rraros ; irpotpyoVf useful, irpovpyiodrepos, more useful^ 
•npovpyiaiTaros. 

Rem. 4. Comparatives and Superlatives are also formed from substantives. 
Here two cases are to be distinguished : (a) when the substantive, both in form 
and signification, is the Positive from which the Comparative and Superlative 
may be formed, i. e. when the substantive can be considered as an adjective, 
e. g. ^ovXos, slave, hovX6T(poSy more slavish; — (b) when the substantive, in 
respect to the signification, is not really the Positive, but only in respect to the 
form can be considered as the basis of the Comparative and Superlative, the 
proper Positive form having been lost, (comp. Kpana-Tos from the Epic Kparvs, 
^A-e^xio-Tos from the Epic ixiyx'fis.) Numerous examples of the last kind may 
be found in poetry, particularly in Epic. See § 216, Rem. 2. 

Rem. 5. For the sake of greater emphasis, the Comparative and Superla- 
tive are sometimes compared, e. g. ^ax"-'''"^ (Superl.), eVxaTc^repos, 60-xot«6to- 
ros ; so Trpdn-iffTos from irpSnos. This is frequent in the Comic writers, seldom 
in Homer and the Tragedians, §till more seldom in prose. 



112 



COMPARISON OF ADVEEB8. 



[^85. 



^ 85. Comparison of Adverbs. 

1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, when compared, have 
commonly no independent adverbial ending ; the Comparative 
is expressed by the Ace. Sing, neuter of the Comparative 
adjective, and the Superlative by the Ace. Pi. neuter of the 
Superlative, e. g. 



G0^5)S 


from cro<p65) 


Com 


.'(ro(bd>r(pov 


Sup 


. (TixpdfTaTa 


ffacpm 


' " aracp-fis) 




(Ta<p4(rTepov 




acupfarara 


Xapt^J^Tcos 1 


" x«P^«'^) 




Xapi^o'Tcpou 




Xapt^fO^on-a 


fvdaifAWws 


" fevBalfxay) 




evSaifioyfO'Ttpov 




fvSaifioyeoTaTa 


ala-xpSis 


" at(rxp6s) 




atffxiov 




tda-x^orra 


7}5e0i)S 


{ « ^5,5.) 




?lSiov 




^JSmtto 


rax^os 


[ « rax^s) 




^a<r<rov, TTov 




rdxio^To, 



Eemark 1. The Singular of the Comparative is used, because only two 
objects are compared, and it is afl&rmed that one of these is better, etc. than 
the other ; but the Plural of the Superlative, because the object compared is 
the best, etc. of many others. 

Rem. 2. But sometimes these adverbs also retain in the Comparative the 
adverbial ending of the Positive -ws-, e. g. xa^fTorre'pws, ii\r}^«arepws, nox^po- 
TepwSf KuWiovas, especially /xci^SvoiSy etc. The Neuter Singular is seldom used 
in the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetry. 



2. All original adverbs in 



-0), e. g. av(i)f KOTO), c^o), arWf etc., 
retain the ending -w regularly in the Comparative, and almost 
uniformly in the Superlative, e. g. 



&va>, above, 
Kdrwy below, 



Com. avuTepci) 

KOTUTfpw 



Sup. avwrirtt 
KccTearirm. 



In like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending 
•w in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. 



ayxoy* near, 
irepd, ultra, 
rr]\ov, far, 
eKds, far, 



Com. ayxor4p(if 
irepcuTepw 

TTjXoTepft) 

€Ka<rT(pu 
iyyirrepoa 



Sup. ayx'"''*''''* 

Sup. wanting 

TTjXOTOTW 

(Kcurrdrot 
iyyvrdxoi and 
iyyvTara 
fyyiara (rarely). 



W 86, 87-1 



THE pro:mouns cyo), cru, ou. 



113 



CHAPTER III. 



The Pronoun. 



$ 86. Nature and Division of Pronouns. 

1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea 
of an object, but only the relation of an object to the 
speaker ; i. e. they show whether the object is the speaker 
himself (the first person), or the person or thing addressed 
(the second person), or the person or thing spoken of (the 
third person), e. g. / (the teacher) give to thee (the scholar) 
it (the book). 

2. All pronouns are divided into five principal classes : 
(1) Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrog- 
ative, (5) Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again di- 
vided, according to their signification and form, into (a) 
Substantive, (b) Adjective, and (c) Adverbial Pronouns, 
e. g. €70) rairra hroir)(Ta\ (a) /, thoti^ he^ she^ it; (b) my^ thy^ 

Ms; (c) here^ there^ thus. 

I. Pehsonal Pronouns. 

A. Substantive Personal Pronouns. 

^ 87. The simple cyw, ego^ <rv, tu, ov, sui. 



Noin. iyd), I 

Gcxi. fjLov (fiov), ^y^v, of me 

Dat. fxoi (/iO(), ifjLol, to me 

Arc- ^f (yuc), 4fji4, me 

N. A. I vd), ice both, us both 
'G. D. y^^y of us both, to us 
both 



Nona, vi^fi^t »pc 

Gen. rji^oivy of us 

Dat. ^/uij/, to us 

Ace. T)fiaSy us 



Singular. 
(TV, tfiou 

aov (arov), of thee 
<rol (<roi), to thee 
ert ((Tc), the^ 

Dual. 

a^y you both 
a<fx^y, of you both, 
I to you bi)th 

Plural. 
fi^cTj, y« (0) 
vfiiav, of you (u) 
vfiiVy to you (u) 
vfMis, you {v) 

10* 



wanting 

ou (ou), of himself, etc. 
of (ol), ' '/', etc. 

« (if), hi ,, etc 

a<p<Dey Ace. (Poet.), them both 
fftpcoly {<r<pu>ty), of them both, 
to them both 



(r<^€?j, Nent. <r<p€a (Poet.), ((r<^€«) 
(r<puy, of them [if^^y 

ff^l(Ti(y) {<T<pi<Ti[v]), to them 
ffipus, Neut. (T<p(a ((r</>€a), them. 




114 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS ifiaVTOV, <T€aVTOV, caVTOV. [§ 88. 

Kemark 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, 
witliout any mark of accent. Comp. H 33 (b), and 35, 3. On the accentuation 
and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see § 302, Rem. 3. The Vocative 
is here, as in the following paradigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it is 
always like the Nominative. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer, 
often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms ifie^eVf a-e^ev, e^ev: these 
foi-ms always retain their accent, except when e^ey is not used as a reflexive 
(stii), but as a pronoun of the third person {ejus). Comp. § 35, 3 (b). 

Rem. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PL of ov ha^ in Attic poetry also the form 
vlv {yiu) signifying him, her, it, PI. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 868. 1331, instead of 
ainovs and avrds. See the Dialects, § 217. 

Rem. 4. The oblique Cases of ^/ie?s and v/xeTsi when not emphatic, some- 
times undergo a certain inclination among the poets, being written in the fol- 
lowing manner: ^fj.au vixav, ^fjiiv vixiv, or ?i/mv vfuv; still, this inclination 
cannot take place if a Paroxytone precedes. The shorter form of the pronoun 
of the third Pers. is used in the Dat. and Ace. PI. by the poets (also by the 
Attic writers}, e. g. Dat. <r(pl (or a-cpiv) instead of (r^i(ri{y)., to them, Ace. ir(p4 
instead of <T^as, them. Both forms, a<pl and c(piv, though sellom, are used by 
the poets as the Dat. Sing. ; the form (r<|)€, on the contrary, is used much more 
frequently as the Ace. Sing, instead of ain6py -V> -<^> also as reflexive instead 
of eavT6v. 



§ 88. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns, ifxavTov, acavrov, 

iavTov . 



I. 



G. 


ifJMVTOV, -TJS, of 




myself 


D. 


e/iauT^, -i}, to 




myself 


A. 


ifiavrSu, -"fip, 




myself 


G. 


TjfjLwv avraVf of 




ourselves 


D. 


T}fi7v avTols, -a7s. 




to ourselves 


A. 


Vfias avTovs, -ds. 




ourselves 



Singular. 
(TeavTov, -^s, or 
cravTov, -rjs, of thyself 
(reavT(fi, i}, or 
aravT^, f, to thyself 
areavrSv, --qv, or 
(Tavr6v, -S]v, thysdf 

Plural. 

vfxSiv ovtZv, of your- 
selves 

vfuy avTciis, -ais, to 
yourselves 

v/xas avTovs, -ds, 
yourselves 



eavTov, -rjs, or 

avTov, -rjs, of himself, of herself 
kavrcf, -fj, or [itself 

avrcp, --p, to himself, to herself, to 
kavr&u, -^v, -6, or \itself 

avTovy -^Vy -6, himself, herself. 



eairrcov or avrwv, or 
(Tcpwy avTuv, of themselves 
kavTois -cus, or avTo7s -a2s, or 
(r<pi(Tiv avTots -cus, to themselves 
eavrovs, -ds, -d, or avrovs, -ds, 

-d, or 
<r(pas avrovs, -ds, c^ca cdnd, 

themselves. 



^^ 89-91.] RECIPROCAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 115 



§ 89. (c) Reciprocal Pronouns. 

To express reciprocal relation, the Greek has a special pro- 
nominal form, which is made by the coalescence of oAAot oAAwv, 
oAAoi oAAoig, oAAot oAAovs, into one word. From the nature of 
the relation, this word can have no Singular. 



Plural Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



oAA^A.wj', of one another 
oAATjXojy, -cits, -ois 
oAAtjA-Ous, -as, -a 



Dual a\Xr}\oiv, -aiv, -oiv 
dAATjAoiJ/, -aiv, -oiv 
iAAi7A&>, -d, -«. 



§ 90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns. 

Personal pronouns, having the form of adjectives, are called 
Possessive pronouns, since they express possession. They are 
formed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns : — 

4lJi6sy -"f], •6vy mens, -a, -um, from i/xov ; 7)fi4rfpos, -re'pd, -repov, noster, -tra, -trum^ 

from TjfiSiv ; 
<r(Js, -4], -6v, tuns, -a, -urn, from <rov : vfiereposy -repd, -repoVf vester, -tra, -trum, 

from vfiwv ; 
atpcrepos, -repd, -repov, suus, -a, -urn, from <r<p(iv (used in speaking of many ; 

when single persons or things are spoken of, Att. prose always uses the 

Gen. louTov, -ris). The Epic form, 8s, ^, 2j/, sums, -a, -urn, also occurs in 

the Tragedians, though seldom. 



§ 91. II. Demonstrative Pronouns. 











Singular. 










the 




hie 


haee 


hoc 


ipse 


ipsa 


ipsum 


Nom. 


6 


^ r6 


OVTOS 


aUTTJ 


rovTO 


ovtSs 


avTt] 


q.vt6 


Geo. 


rov 


TTJS TOV 


TOVTOV 


TttVTTJS 


TOVTOV 


avTov 


OLT7JS 


avTOv 


Dat. 


T^ 


Tj7 r(f 


TOVTO) 


ravrri 


TOVTCO 


avT^ 


avT^ 


avT^ 


Ace. 


t6v 


T-fjy t6 


Tovrov 


ravTTjv 


TOVTO 


uvtSu 


avT-qv 


ainS 










Plural. 








Nom. 


ol 


at rd 


OVTOl 


OVTOt 


TOVTa 


avToi 


ainal 


avToi 


Gen. 


TWV 


Twv robv 


rovTuv 


TOVTUV 


TOVTO)V 


avTU)U 


avTcou 


avTUiU 


Dat. 


Tols 


rais ro7s 


TOVTOIS 


ravrais 


TOVTOIS 


avTols 


avTois 


avToli 


Ace. 


TOVS 


TOS TO, 


TOVTOVS 


ravras 
Dual 


TOVTa 


avTovs 


avTas 


avToi, 


N.A. 


rd) 


(rd) rd, 


TOVTU) 


(raurd) 


TOVTU 


avToi 


avTa 


9 / 

avTCi) 


G.D. 


Toiv 


Toiv rolv 


TOVTOIV 


rainaiy 


TOVTOIV 


avTotu 


avTouu 


avTolv. 



1. The pronoun ovtos is composed of the article 6, tj, t6, and the pronoun 
avr^s; where the article has o, a, or oi, they combine with the first syllable 
of ainSs and make ov; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the 



110 



RELATIVE PRONOUN. 



[$92 



first syllable of avros. Hence the first syllable of ovtos ends in ov where the 
article has o, «, or oi ; elsewhere in av. The same rule holds when ainSs is 
compounded with an adjective pronoun, e. g. roaovTos (from roaos and outJs). 

Exiunples : 6 avrSs = outos, ^ avr-fi — avrri, rh avr6 = rovro ; rod ahrov = 
roxnov, ti> out^s = toutt??, etc. ; so toVos avT6s = tocoDto^, 7 oVrj out^ = toc- 
ouTTj, TcJcroj/ avrS = roffovro, r6<Tov avrov = roaovrov, etc. 

2. Like 5, ^, t({ is declined, '6he, iJSe, rcJSe, roCSe, r^sSe, PI. o?5e, a'/Se, rctSe ; 
Like OVTOS are declined, too-oStos, Tocravrr], ro(rovro{v), tantus, -a, -um, roiov- 
Tos, ToiavTrj, TOLovro{v), talis, -e, TrjKiKodros, rrjXiKavrr], t7j\ikovto{v), sogreat, 
so old; it is to be noted, that the neuter Sing., besides the form in o has 
also the common form in oj/ ; 
Like avTos is • declined, e/ceTj/os, iKelvr], iKe7vo, he, she, it, SaAos, &W% 2(AAo, 
alius, alia, aliud, the neuter Sing, here also ending in o. 

Eemakk 1. The neuter form in o seems to hare rejected a S, as may be 
inferred from the Latin, is, ea, id, ille, -a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud. — On the Dua|. 
forms, rd, Ta7u, raira, rairaiv, see § 241, Rem. 10 (b). — Listead of iKeTvoSf thftl 
Ionic K€7vos is also used in Attic poetry ; this word occurs somewhat frequently 
in Attic prose, but always after a long vowel or diphthong ; nence Aphaeresis 
(§ 14, 5) must be assumed here, as ^ '/ceiVws, PI. Rp. 2. 370, a. 



J 



I 





Singular. 


Plural. 




Nom. 


roffovros ro(rg.vTr] To<rovTo{v) 


roffovTot rocavrai 


Tocavra 


Gen. 


TOffOVTOV TOCaVTTJS TOffOVTOV 


roffOVTOOV TO(TOVTb>V 


Tocroinwv 


Dat. 


TocrovTco TOffavrri Toaovrca 


Toaovrois roffainrais 


roaovTois 


Ace 


1 TOffovTov roffairnv ro(rovro{v) 


Toffovrovs roffavras 


Toaavra 




Dual. 






K A. 


roffovTw Toffavra toctovto) 






G.D. 


roffovTOLV roffavraiv Tocrovroiv. 





Rem. 2. The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ 10) with aiirSs and forms 
one word, viz. avT6s (instead oi 6 avrSs, idem), avr-f], ravr6, usually tou- 
r6v (instead of rb aM), ravrov^ butTTjs aiirris, ravr^, ravr'p (to distinguish 
it from TavTT), this), but rhv avrov, tV out^v, aiiroi, avrai, ravrd (instead of 
TO avTd, to distinguish it from toOto, haec), but tuv avrtov, rois avrols, etc. 



§ 92. in. Relative Pronou 



N. 







Singular. 






Plural. 






Dual. 




Nom. 


Ss 


^ 


g 


o'l 


at 


& 


& 


& 


s> 


Gen. 
Dat. 


oi, 


V^ 
? 


ol 


oh 


wv 
aXs 


1- 
wv 

oTs 


oTv 

OIV 


alp 

CUV 


oTv 
oTv 


Ace. 


Hy 


^v 


'6 


oSs 


Us 


s. 


& 


& 


&. 



4 93.1 



INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS., 



117 



§ 93. IV. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns. 

The Indefinite and InteiTOgative Pronouns are denoted 
by the same form, but are distinguished by the accent and 
position, the Indefinite being encHtic (§ 33) and placed after 
some word or words, the Interrogative being always accented 
and placed before. 

"Remark 1. When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question, 
the relative 5 is placed before their stem, which, however (except in the case 
of fisris), is not inflected, e. g. SnoioSf 6ir6<T0Sf oirSrepos, etc. 



Sing. N. 


tIs, some one N. rl, some thing 


ris ; quis ? 


rl; quid?] 


G. 


riv6s, or rov 




TtVos, or ToD 1 


D. 


Tij/ly or T^ 




TiVi, or T^J 




A. 


Tivd N. t\ 


riva. 


rl 


Plur. N. 


Tives N. riyd and Stto 


Tiues 


rlua 


G. 


TivcHv 




Tivasv 




D. 


Ti(ri{v) 




tI<tl{u) 




A. 


Tivds N. Tivd and &rra 


rivas 


riva 


Dual N. A. 


riv€ 




rive 




G. and D. 


rivo7v 




rivoiv. 




N. 


^STiSy whoever ^tis '6 ri 


o'irives alrives ariva, 


or Sirra 


a. 


OVTIVOS, or StOU ^STIVOS 


uvTivwv (rarely Stuu) 




D. 


^Tivi, or OTca frivi 


otsTi(ri{v) (rarely '6Toi(n[u] ) aTsTi<n{v) oTsri(ri{y)\ 


A. 


6vTtva ¥ivTiua '6 ri 


ovsrivas asrivas ariva., 


or arra 




Dual N. A. &Tiv€^ 


iTive, G. D. oTvTivoiVi oStnivotv. 





Rem. 2. The form &rra not enclitic (Ion. &(r<ra) is often used instead of nvd 
in connection with adjectives, e. g. deiva &rra, fiiKpa &rra^ or placed first, e. g. 
^v ykp S)j &rra roidSe, PL Phaedon. 60, e. On the accent of uyrivuv, otm-ivoiv, 
atvrivoiv^ see § 34, Rem. 1. The shorter forms, Stou, 'drw, etc. are used by the 
dramatists almost always ; '6tov^ '6rca are also used by the orators ; but Stwj/, 
'6roori{v) are very rare in prose. The negative coinpounds of rls, viz. o^ns, 
oUri, ii-{]ris, fi-fiTh ^0 one, nothing, inflect the simple rls merely, e. g. ovrtvos, 
oih-tves, etc. These forms are poetic ; instead of them, prose writers use ovSeis, 
firfBeis ; only oihi and fi-^jri are used in prose with the adverbial meaning, in no 
respect, not at all, and in the phrase, ofiri ye Sr} {fi^ri ye S^), let alone then, much 
less. 



Sing. N. 


5 T] rh Se7va, some one, 


some thing 


Plur. 01 Selves 


G. 


rov rrjs rov Servos 




ruv Seivwv 


D. 


r(S rfj rcf} Selui 




wanting 


A. 


rhv rrju rh Se7ua 




rovs SeTyas. 



Rem. 3. AeTva is also used indeclinably, though seldom, e. g. rod r^ rdp 
de7ya. 



118 



CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



1*94 



§ 94. Correlative Pronouns. 

Under Correlative Pronouns are included all those which 
express a mutual relation (correlation) to each other, so that if 
one implies a question, the other with a corresponding form 
contains the answer. 

1. This mutual relation is either a general or a definite one. The general 
correlation is expressed hyrls; ri,- who? what? rls,T\,some one, some thing; 
856, ovros, he, this ; iKtlvos, that one ; ovSels, no one ; '6 s, who, which, etc. Here 
the fonns of the correlatives do not correspond with each other, except in the 
case of rls. For example, if a question is asked tj tIs, the answer may be by 
rls, bSe, ovTos, etc. 

2. The definite correlation has four different forms, viz. the Interrogative, 
Indefinite, Demonstrative, and Kelative. This fourfold correlation belongs both 
to adjective and adverbial pronouns. All the four forms come from the same 
root, but they are distinguished, partly by a different accent, partly by a differ- 
ent initial ; the Interrogative begin with tt, the Indefinite have the same form, 
though with a different accent, the Demonstrative begin with r, and the 
Relative with the Spiritus Asper. The indirect interrogatives, as shown above, 
§ 93, Eem. 1, place the relative 6 before the initial ir. 

3. Correlative adjective pronouns express relations of quantity and qucdity ; 
correlative adverbial pronouns, the relations of place, time, and manner, or 
condition. 



(a) Adjective Correlatives. 



Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Relat. and De- 
pend. Inten-og. 


■n6(Tos, -77, -ov ; 
how great? how 
much ? quan- 
tus? 


tto<t6s, -i], -6v, 
of a certain 
size, or number, 
aliquantus 


Toffos, -7], -ov, so great, so 

much, tantus 
ToerJcrSe, ro<T-f}Be, Toa'6vSe 
TocrovTos, -aVTTI, -ovTo(v) 


Soros, -7], -ov and 
dirSaos, -t], -ov, 
as great, as 
much, quantus 


iroios, -d. -ov ; 
of what kind? 
qualis ? 


TTods, -d, -6v, of 
a certain kind 


To7os, -d, -ov, of such a 

kind, talis 
roi6sS€, ToidSe, roiSvSe 
roiovTos, -avTt], -ovro{v) 


oTos, -d, -ov and 
oTToTos. -a, -ov, 

of wliat hjul, 
qualis 


TTTjA-t/coy, -7j, -ov ; 
how great? how 
old? 


wanting 


T7)\iKos, -77, -ov, so great, so 
Tr]\iK6s5e, -^8e, -oVSe [old 
rr}XiKovTos,-avTr}, -ovto{v) 


r}\(Kos, 11, -ov and 

6Tn}\iKos, -77, -ov, 

as great, as old. 



Remark 1. The simple forms tJo-os and to7os are seldom used in Attic 
prose ; rSaos and ro7os are found in the phrase, roTos =fj to7os, PL Phaedr. 271, 

d, and elsewhere ; rScos koI toVos (PL ib.) ; 4k rixrov (so long time since), PI. 
Leg. 642, at end ; rStrip with a Comparative, corresponding to tbe relative Bata. 

e. g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. 



♦ 95.] 



LENGTHENING OP THE PRONOUN. 



(b) Adverbial Correlatives. 



119 



Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Relative. 


Indirect 
Interrog. 


vov ; where ? 

ubi? 
■ir6^€v; whence? 

unde? 
voT; whither? 

quo? 


irov, somewhere, 

alicubi 
iro^cv, from some 

place, alicunde 
TToi, to some place, 

aliquo 


wanting (hie, 

ibi) 
wanting (hinc, 

inde) 
wanting (eo) 


ov, where, 

ubi 
'6^ev, whence, 

unde 
of, whither, 

quo 


oirov, where. 
ubi 

ivhence,\in6.e 
iiroi,whither. 
quo 


ir6re ; when ? 
quando 1 

irr}ulKa ; quo 
temporis punc- 
to? quoti ho- 
rsL? 


TTore, some time, 
aliquando 

wanting 


t6t€, then, turn 

TTfvi- "I hoc 
kSSs 1 ipso 
TTqvi- \ tcm- 
Kovra J pore 


'6r€, when, 
quum 

riviKa, when, 
quo ipso 
tempore 


when, 

quando 
dirriviKa, 
when, quo 
ipso tem- 
pore 


tt5)s ; how? 
irrj ; whither ? 
how? 


TTcas, some how 
TT^, to some place, 
thither, in some way 


ovT(t}{s) wSe, so 
rfjSe ( hither, 
ravrr] \ or here 


us, now 
^, tvhere, 
whither 


oircas, how 
whither. 



Rem. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there (hie, ibi), wanting in 
the Common language, are supplied by iurav^a, iv^dde^ and the idea of hence, 
thence (hinc, inde), by iv^fvSe, ivrev^ev; eu^a and ey^ev in the old and poetic 
language have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a 
relative sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. ev^a /xev — €v^a Se, hie, illic, 
fv^ev Koi ev^ev, hinc, illinc, and when the signification of place is changed to 
that of time, e. g. iv^a Keyei, then he says, ev^eVf thereupon. The forms rds, thus, 
rfiy hither, here, are poetic ; &s (instead of ovrws), is also for the most part 
poetic ; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e. g. koI &s, vel 
sic, ouS* ()U7}S') &s, ne sic quidem, and in comparisons, us — Ss, ut — sic, PI. Rp. 
7. 530, d. Prot. 326, d. ; also &s ovv, so then, Th. 3, 37. 



§ 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun. 

Some small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving 
a particular turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word. 
They are the following : — 

(a) The enclitic ye is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second 
person, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with 
others, e. g. e7&>76, I for my part. The pronoun iyco then draws back its accent 
in the Nom. and Dat. e. g. €70; ye, i/xovye, efio lye, ^H-^y^i cvye. As ye can be 
joined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not 
fonn one word with the pronoun, e. g. ovr6s ye. 

(b) The particles S^ (most commonly Si^Trore), and oZv, are appended to 
relatives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to o(tos, in 
order to make the meaning general or indefinite, i. e. to extend it to everything 
embraced in the object denoted by the pronoun, e. g. bsris^i], osrisSrjTroTe, Ssris- 
Srfirorovv, dsrisovv, 7}risovv, driovv, whoever it be, I know not ivho, nescio quis, qui» 
cunque (Gen. ouriuosovu or Srovovu, Tjsrivosovv, Dat. cpnviovv or bruovv, etc.) ; — 
ivoaos^T], bn-oaosovv, otrosSifjTroTe, quantuscunque ; — oirrjKiKosovv, however greats 
hov) old soever ; so also usTrtpovv [comp. (d)]. 



120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [$ 96. 

(c) The siiffix 56 is joined with some demonstratives for the purpose of 
strengthening their dcnionsti*ative relation, e. g. '6Se, 7}5e, rSSe ; Toi6sSe ; Toa6s- 
l( ; rr)\iK6sif, from lolos, rSffos, ttjA^kos, wliich change their accent after Se is 
oppcndod {§ 34, llcni. 3). 

(d) The enclitic vfpis appended to all relatives, in order to strengthen the 
reference to a demonstrative, and thus to connect the relative more closely with 
its antecedent ; hence it denotes, even who, which, the very man, who, etc. e. g. 
ii-Kfp, ^ir€p, hirfp (Gen. ovirep, etc.) ; offosTrep, olSsirep (Gen. Scrovirep, o'lovirep, etc.) j 
i^ivfp, S^etnrep. 

(c) The inseparable demonstrative f, is appended to demonstratives and some 
few adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative sense. It takes the 
acute accent (which yet, according to § 31, 1., is changed into tlie grave in con- 
nected discourse) and absorbs every short vowel immediately preceding it, and 
also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs : — 

ovTofft, this here (hicce, celui-ci), avr^t, tovtx, ^ 

Gen. rovrovf, TouTTjcrr, Dat. rovr^f, ravr'^t, PI. ovroii, avraif, tuvti] 

dU, rjSf, ToSt from '65e ; wSf from wSe ; oiiruai from oiircos ; 

iyrev^evt from ivrev^ey ; iu^aSf from iy^dde ; pvvf from pvv ; Sevpl from Sevpo, 



CHAPTER IV. 
The Numerals. 

§ 96. Nature and Division of Numerals. 

1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity. 
They are divided into the following classes, according to their 
signification : — 

(a) Cardinals, which express a definite number absolutely, 
and answer the question, hmjo many ? e. g. one, two, three. The 
first four Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (StaKoVtot) 
to 10,000 (jxvpioL) and their compounds, are declined; but all the 
others are indeclinable. The thousands are expressed by 
adverbial Numerals, e. g. rpisxtAioi, 3000. 

(b) Ordinals, which denote a series, and answer the question, 
which one in the series? All have the three endings of adjec- 
tives, -09, -r), -ov, except Se^Vcpo?, which has -o?, -a, -ov. All up 
to 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -ros and have the accent as near 
as possible to the beginning of the word. From 20 upwards 
they end in -aT6<;. 

Kemark 1. Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a series, are expressed by 
the Neut. Sing, or PL, with or without the article, but sometimes also with the 
adverbial ending -«., e. g. npciro,, rh '^pSirou, nrpS,ra, rk -rrpccra, ^p6ro,s. 



§ 96.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. 121 

(c) Numeral adverbs, virhich express how often, or how many 
times anything has happened, and which answer the question, 
hmv many times ? They are formed, except the first thi-ee, from 
the ordinals with the ending -aKts, e. g. irevraKisj Jive times 
(^ 98). 

(d) Multiples, which show the number of parts of which 
a whole is composed, and answer the question, how many fold? 
All are compounded of irXovs, and are adjectives of thi'ee end- 
ings, -ovs, -Tfy 'ovv {^ 76, I, and 77). 

airKovs, -Ti, -ovv, single; ^nrXovs {2), rpiirXovs (3), T€Tpa7rA.oOs, (4), Trej'TOTrA.oys 
(5), 6|o7rA.oi5s (6), kirrairXovs (7), o/ctottAoSs (8), ivvaTrXovs (9J, Se/cairA-oys (10), 
kKaTovratrXovs (100), xtXtairAoCs (1000), ixvpiairKovs (10,000). 

Rem. 2. The adverbial Multiples in answer to the question, how many 
fold ? or into how many parts ? are formed from the Cardinals with the ending 
"Xa or -XV and -x^s, e. g. irivraxo-i Trevraxv, rrevraxctis. 

(e) Proportionals, which denote ^proportion, and answer the 
question, how many times more ? All are compounded with the 
endings -TrXao-tos, -id, -lov (more seldom -TrXaortW, -ov, e. g. Ikotov- 
TaTrXaaicov, -op') : — 

SiirAoo'toy, twice as much (as another which is taken as an unit), rpiirXda-ios 
(3), T€TpaTr\d(rios (4), TrevTarrXaffios (5), e^airXdaios (6), eTrrairXdcrios (7), OKTa- 
irXdcLos (8), evvaTrXdffios (9), 5e/ca7rA.o(rtos (10), kKarovrairXdo'ios (100), x'^'o- 
)rX({<rios (1000), fivpioirXdffios (10,000). 

(f ) Substantive Numerals, which express the abstract idea 
of r^imber. Except the first, all are formed from the Cardinals 
witn the ending -as. Gen. -dSos : — 

7] fjLovds (from (xSvos, only), more seldom ^ kvds, unity ; ^vds, duality; rpids (3). 
rerpds (4), irevrds or ire fx-irrds (5), e|as ^6), c^Bofxds (7), oySoas (8), ivveds (9). 
$6Kas (10), eiKas (20), rpiaKds (30), TerrapaKovrds (40), ircurvKOf/rds (50), e/ca- 
Toyras (100), xtAtos (1000), /iuptoy (10,000), Suo fivpidSes (20,000). 

Eem. 3. In addition to the Numerals mentioned above, there is still another 
class, which does not, like those, express a definite number, but either an 
indefinite number or an indefinite quantity, e. g. evioi, some ; Trdures, all ; iroX- 
>Qt, many (§ 77); oXiyot, few ; oXi-yov, oXlya, a little; ovSels, no one; owSeV, 
tiothing, etc. 

2. Numerals, like pronouns, are divided, according to theii 
signification and form, into Substantive, Adjective, and Adver- 
bial Numerals, e. g. rpets ^X%v ; 6 TptVos dw^p ; rpts. 

11 



122 



NUMERALS. 



[H 97, 98 



^ 97. Numeral Signs. 

1. Tlie Numeral Signs are tlie twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, to 
which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e, Bad, or the Digamma F, of 
St?, r ; the last character is taken from the figure r, which is a mutilated form 
of the Digamma, but which has only an accidental resemblance to the abbre- 
viation of <r (s-) and t (§ 1, Kem. 2); — Koirva, 5) as the sign for 90; — 2a/iir7, 
*^ , as the sign for 900. 

2. The first eight letters, i. e. from ato ^ with the Bad or St?, denote the 
units ; the following eight, i. e. from t to ir with the KSirira, the tens ; the last 
eight, i. e. from p to w with the So/att?, the hundreds. 

3. Up to 999, the letters as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark 
placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral 
signs, only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but 
the letters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, o' = 1, ^o = 
1000, i' = 10, ,t = 10,000, ,€t//;tj8' = 5742, ,a«/tj8' = 1842, p' = 100, j> = 
100,000. 





§ 98. Frin 


cipal Cla 


sses of Numerals. 




Cardinals. 




Ordinals. 


lo' 


eh, fiid, %v 




irpoiros, -rj, -ov, primus, -a, -Tim 


2)3' 


Uo 


■ 


Seirepos, -o, -ov 


sy 


rpus, rpla 




rplroSf -7], -ov 


4S' 


rerrapes, -a, or 


reffCapeSy -a 


TerapTos, -7}, -ov 


5 6' 


ireyre 




vefjiiTTOs, -77, -ov 


Br' 


H 




eKToSy -r), -ov 


U' 


firrd 




€0So{ios, -rj, -ov 


8V 


okt6 




^ySoos, -7}, -ov 


93 


ivvia 




ivaros, -77, -ov 


10 t' 


UKa 




deKuros, -jj, -ov 


11 m' 


cVSe/ca 




evdcKaros, -77, -ov 


,.12t)8' 


Sc^Se/ci; 




SaScKOTOs, -77, -ov 


13 t-^ 


Tpeis {rpla) Kol 5e/ca* 


rplros, -77, -ov Kol 5e/coTos, -77- -ov' 


14 i5' 


TirTapes[a) koX Se'/ca* 


rirapros, -77, -ov Kol Sckotos, -77, -ov 


15 je' 


irej/TeKotSe/fa 




vefiTTTOS, -77, -ov Kol SeKUTOs, -77, -ov 


16 ir' 


c/c/caiSe/co 




€/cTos, -77, -ov Kol Se/caroy, -77, -ov 


17 *C' 


kirraKalhiKa 




€j85o/ioy, -77, -ov Kal Sckutos, -77, -oi' 


IStrj' 


oKTUKaiScKa 




S7S00S, -77, -ov Koi Se'/caTos, -77, -ov 


19 i^ 


ii/veaKaiScKa 




ivaros, -77, -ov Kai SeKaros, -77, -ov 


20 k' 


€iKoai{v) 




6JK00-T0S, -1^, -6v 



' The rare Attic form rpisKaideKa is indeclinable. 
' The non-Attic form nffaapaKaiSeKa is indeclinable. 
The forms given from the 13th to the 19th are preferable to Tpis/coiScicaTos, 
TfTTopcucaiS^^/caTos, irevTeKaiSeKaros, etc. 



^98.] 



NUMERALS. 



123 



21 
30 

40 

50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

100 

200 

300 

400 

C^O 

600 

(700 

800 

900 

(lOOO 

2000 

3000 

(;4000 

5000 

6000 

7000 

8000 

9000 

10,000 

20,000 

100,000 

1,000,000 

8,000,000 



CardAnals 

\' rpioLKOvra 

fi' nrrapaLKovra 

i/ iretrrrjKoma 

o' efidofi-fiKovra 

i/ 6y5oT)KOVTa 

5' iyev^KOPra 

p' €Kar6v 

</ SioKSffioi, -cUy -a 

t' TpidK6<rioi, -at, -a 

i/ TerpaK6(riot, -at, -a 

^' veyroLKSffiott -«, -a 

x! . e^oLKoffioi, -at, -a 

r^i' e'nTdK6aioiy -aiy -a 

fa oKrco.K6at.oiy -ot, -a 

'^' kwd-Koaioiy -at, -a 

,i3 Zis-)(iKioiy -ot, -a 

/7 rpisxi^ioiy -aiy -a 

J8 riTpdKisxiXioiy -aiy -o 

^6 irevTOKtyx/Xtot, -at, -a 

^r e^oKtsx^A-tot, -aiy -a 

^^ iirraKisxi^toh '«*» "<* 

^17 OKTCtKtSX'^tOt, -at, -o 

^ ivydKisxi\toty -oUy -a 

^t fivpioiy -ot, -a 

^K disfxvpioi, -CUy -a 

fi ScKaKisfivpioiy -aiy -a 

ifi eKaTouroKis/xvpioiy -aty -a 

Kfi SiaKO(riaKisfx.vpioiy -at, -a 



Ordinals. 
fiKOffrhsy -^y -hvy vpuros, -17, -op 
TpidJco<Tr6sy -"fly •6v 
TerrapaKOffrSsy --fly -6v 
TTivniKoarSsy -^, -6u 
f^aKocrroSy -"fly -&v 
ifiSofifiKoo'roSy -4iy -6v 
oydortKoarSs, -^, •6u 
iveyijKOffTSs, -^, -6v 
fKaroffTSs, -i\y -6v 
5idKO(rioffr6s, -^, -6v 
TpiaKOffioffrSs, -ill -ov 
rerpaKoaioffrSs, -Vj, -6y 
TtivraKoaioarSsi -^, -6v 

f^aKOfflOffTSs, -7j, -&v 

kirraKoo'ioffTSs, -^, -oy 
OKraKoarioffrSs, -^, -oy 
iyvaKo<Tio<rT6sy -^, -6y 
Xt^ioffrSs, -fi, -oy 
5tsx'A.to(rT<Jy, -^, -6y 
Tpisxt^^o<TT6s, -^, -6y 
T€TpaKi5Xi^o<rT6s, -^, -6y 
v€yTaKisxi^iOffT6s, -rj, -6v 
€|oKtsxtAtO(rT(Js, -^, -6v 

CTTTOKtSXtA.tOO'TtJs, -^, -6v 

6KTaKisxi^i'OffT6s, -^, -6y 
iyyoKisx^^ioc'T^s, -"fi, -6y 
fivpioarSsf -ill '^v 
disixvpioffrSs, -^, -Sy 
SeKaKisfivpioffTos, -^, -6y 
€KaToyraKiSfivpioar6s, -"fj, -Sy 
SiaKOffiaKisfivpioffrSs, -^, -6y. 



1 S,ira^y once 

2 Sisy twice 

3 rpfs 

4 rerpaKis 

5 Tr€j/T(t/cis 

6 €|aKty 

7 kirriKis 

8 oKrdKis 

9 iyyeduetSy ivaKis 

10 S^kiLkis 

11 iySeKdKis 

12 SwSeKciKis 



Numeral Adverbs. 

13 rpisKaiZeKdKis 50 

14 rerrapesKaidcKfiKis 60 

15 veyrekaiSeKaKis 70 

16 eKKaiSeKaKts 80 

17 evraKatSeKaKis 90 

18 OKTW/CatScKClKlf 100 

19 iyyeaKaiSeKaKis 200 

20 elKoaaKis 300 

21 CtKOO-ClKtS OTTOI 1000 

22 elKoadids Sis 2000 
30 TptaKoyTcC/fts 10,000 
40 TvrrapaKovriKis 20,000 



ireyrriKoyrd.Kis 

k^7]K0Vrd.KlS 

kfiSofxriKovTd.Kti 

OyZoTlKOVTtXKlS 

ivcyriKOvrdKis 

cKaroyrdKis 

SiaKOtTidKis 

rpiaKoaidKis 

Xi^idKis 

Sisx^^^dKis 

fivpiaKis 

SlSflvpiiiKlS. 



124 



REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. [^ 99 



^ 99. Remarks. 

1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, U, etc., used by later writers, are 
j€KOTp«s, Neut. liKarpia, SeKaTerrapes, -a, SeKaTreVre, etc. 

2 yiioioi, 10,000, when Paroxytone {fivpioi), signifies innumerable. 

3 In compound numerals, the smaller number either precedes the larger, 
and then always with Kui, or it follows the larger, usually with kuI, sometimes 
without it. The first order corresponds with the usage in English, e. g. Jive 
and twenty; the second only in part, e. g. twenty-Jive, e. g. 

25 : ireirre Kol elKoaiiv), or eUoffi Koi irevre, 
345 : nevre Kal rerrapdKovTa Ka\ rpiaKSffioif or rpituc. rerr. Koi ir. 

The same holds of the Ordinals, e. g. 

ve/JLTTTOs Kol eiKOCTrSs, or elKOffrhs Kot irefXTnos. 

4. The tens compounded with 8 or 9 are frequently expressed in the form of 
subtraction, by means of the participle of Se7v, to want, which agrees with th« 
larger number, e. g. 

49 : rreyr^Koma hhs Seovra irri^, undequinquaginta anni, 
48 : irevriiKOVTa 5vo7v Zeovra cttj, duodequinquaginta anni, 
39 : v^es jjuas Ziovaai reTrapdKovTa^ undequadraginta naves. 

So with the Ordinals, e. g. 

49 : hhs Sewj/ TrevTTjKOCTbs av^p, undequinquagesimus vir. 

5. Fractions are usually expressed by fiepos or fjLo7pa. These wqrds, as 
denominators of the fraction, are put in the Gen., depending on the numeral 
which denotes the numerator. If they are expressed as denominators, they are 
understood with the numeral denoting the numerator; if they are expressed 
as numerators, they are understood with the numeral denoting the denominator, 
e. g. -^ is Tuv irevre (lepav rh Bvo [fieprj], or ruv triine \}i€puv\ rh. hvo fi^pr], two 
parts of the Jive; | is ruv okt2i> fioipuv ai irivre [jtioTpot], or twv okt^ \}ioip5)v\ al 
iio fiolpai. But one half is expressed by compounds with 7]fii, e. g. r]fxiBap€iK6vy 
half a daric ; so in the PL rpla, irevre rjfxiZapeiKa., a daric and a half two darics 
and a Jialf — Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with fxoptov or fiepos^ 
e. g. rpiTr\n6piov or rp'nov fXfpos = J, irefjiirroy fjLepos = j', a, mixed number is 
also expressed by rj/xi preceded by a numeral, e. g. ireWe rj/xiSapeiKd = 2^ darics, 
also by inl prefixed to an ordinal, e. g. eTrlrpiTov = 1 J, iiriirefnrTov = 1-|. 

6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with <Tvy are equivalent to the Latin 
distributives, e. g. avyBvo (bini), two together, two at a time, each two, (rvyrpea 
(temi), arifiireyTi (quini), etc. 



* Fifty years, wanting one. 



{ 100.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE ADVERB. 

7. Declension of the first four Numerals : — 



125 



Nom. 


€15 


fiia eV 


bvo 


Gen. 


€v6s 


ftias €y6s 


SvoTu (very seldom Sveiv) 


Dat. 


kvi 


fiia fvi 


Svo7v (Suo-tM Ionic and Th. 8, 101.) 


Ace. 




fiiav ev 


ovo 


Nom. 


Tpc7s 


Neut. rpla 


rerrapes, or reffa-apes Neut. rirrapa 


Gen. 


Tpiav 




T€TTdp(aV 


Dat. 


Tpi(ri(v) 




reTTapcrilu) 


Ace. 


Tp€lS 


Neut. rpia 


r4rrapas Neut. rirrapa 



Kemark. Like efs are also declined ohbeis and /xijSefy, no one ; like efs too 
they have the irregular accent, e. g. ovSels, ou5e/ito, ov5eV, Gen. ov5ev6s, ovSe- 
fjLicis, Dat. ovSeui, ovdefj-i^, etc. ; but in the PI. ovSeves {fnjSeves), -eVwf, -e<n{v), 
•evas. Comp. further, § 65, 3 (c). The form Svo;, instead of 5uo, seems to be 
foreign to the Attic dialect. Avo is often used as indeclinable in all the Cases. 
"AfKpw, both, is declined like Svo, Gen. and Dat. a{A<poiv, Ace. &/x(pa. 



CHAPTER V. 



The Adverb. 



§ 100. Nature and division of the Adverb. 

Adverbs (§§38 and 314) are indeclinable words, denoting 
the relations of place, time, manner, modality, intensity, ajid 
repetition. They are formed either from essential words 
(§ 38, 3), viz. Substantives, Adjectives, Participles, or from 
formal words, viz. Pronouns and Numerals, or they are 
primitive words, e. g. ou, {jltj, Kal, ^r^v, ^, av, etc. 

(a) Adverbs of place, e. g. ovpav6^eVy coelitus, travraxni ubivis; 
(Td) Adverbs of time, e. g. vvKTosp, noctu, vvv^ nunc; 

(c) Adverbs of manner, e. g. koXSjs, ovto}{s) \ 

(d) Adverbs of modality, which, e. g. vai and ov[k), express an affirmation and 
negation, or e, g. }xi\v, rol, ^, ^ fxi]v, St?, itrws, ttov, &v, iravrus, etc. which 
express certainty, dejiniteness, uncertainty, conditionality ; 

(e) Adverbs of intensity and frequency, e. g. /xoAo, ttcCku, itoXJ;, oVoj/, etc. rpis, 
three times; aZ^is, again; iroWaKis, often. 

11* 



126 



FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 



[UOl 



^ 101. Formation of Adverbs. 

1. Most Adverbs axe formed from adjectives by the ending 
-COS. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the adjective ; 
hence, as the stem of adjectives of the third Dec. appears in the 
Gen., and as adjectives in the Gen. PL are accented Hke 
adverbs, the following rule for the formation of adverbs from 
adjectives may be given: — 

Owm^e -wv, the ending of the adjective in the Gen. Fl, into -co?. 



e.g. 








<pi\-os, lovely, Gen. H 


. <pl\-WJ/ 


Adv. <pi\-as 


KaK-6s, fair, 


(( 


KoK-Siv 


KoK-m 


Kaipi-os, timely, 


(( 


Kaipi-oav 


Kaipi-ws 


aTr\{6-os)ovs, simple. 


(( 


air\{6-<i»v)(l»v 


07rA{o-«s)«* 


tiv[o-os)ovs, benevolent, 


(C 


[€vv6-uv) eivoiv 


{fxfvS-ws) eiiuces 


ttSs, a//, TTavrSs, 


(C 


iravr-uv 


vduT-us 


ffdlxppwy, prudent, 


(( 


ff<a<pp6v-(av 


ffOKppSv-WS 


Xapi^is, pleasant, 


(C 


Xapi^vr-otv 


Xapievr-(i)s 


rax^s, swift. 


- (C 


rax^-diV 


TOXf-WS 


fieyas, great. 


(( 


fxeydK-MV 


fiiydx-us 


iiKrj^s, true, 


(( 


aKi\^{i-<av)wv 


a,\ri^{4-a}s)as 


ovi/^^s, accustomed, 


C( 


{avvq^i-fcv) avvii^wv 


(<ruv?j^e-«5) avvfj^ws. 



Eemark 1. On the accent of compounds in -^^cos, and of the compound 
avrdpKuSf see § 59, Rem. 4, also on the accent of ewus, instead of ewws, § 49, 
3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see § 85. 

2. In addition to the adverbs with the ending -ws, there are 
many which have the endings of the Gen., Dat., or Ace. 

(a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -r]<s and -ou, 
e. g. e^s, icfie$rj<s, in order; eiaTrivrjs, suddenly ; ttov, ahcubi; ttov, 
ubi ? oTTov, ov, ubi ; avrov, ibi ; ovSapLov, nowhere. 

(b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative^ ending, occurs 
in the following adverbs, 

(o) In adverbs with the ending -?, e. g. ^pi, in the morning, comp. ■^p, spring, 
awpt, unseasonahlij ; ewTjTi (Dor. eVaTj), aeK-nri^ ckovti, acKovrt; in adverbs 
of manner in -ei and -f, from adjectives in -qs and -tjs, and almost exclu- 
sively in adverbs compounded of a privatfve and iras or avrSs, e. g. 
TTwopnei and navopfit On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar, 
Tart I, § .363 (^8). 



* The Locative Case, is one which denotes the place where. 



f 102.] CLASSES OP THE VERB. 127 

(^) In local adverbs in -o?, commonly derived from substantives of the sec- 
ond Dec, e. g. ^I<T^fj.o7 from 'la^fMSs, tlv^o7 from Uv^di, Mcy apo7 {rh 
Meyapa)^ Tleipaioc, KiKvyi/oi from 7] KiKVPva), oiy Hiroi, quo, whither, oXkoi, 
domi, from oIkos, 

Eem, 2. Adverbs in -oT, derived from substantives, denote an indefinite 
where, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction whither ^ 
yet sometimes the indefinite where. 

(7) In local adverbs in -ot. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. 
Xa/J-aii humi, ird\ai. To this form corresponds th^e PI. locative form 
-71 a- 1 (v), or where i precedes, -daiv, derived from substantives of the first 
Dec. 5 this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but 
was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, S-fifirj- 
(ri{v) from 0^)8at, *Ad^v7j<n{v) from 'A^uai, UKaTaiaai{v) from IlAaTotai: 
Hepycur'nari{i/) from Uepyaa^, 'OAu/*7rtd(rt(j') from 'O^vfiiria. 

(S) In adverbs in 17 and -d, e. g. SaAtj, erepr), ve^rj, on foot ; Kpv(prj, \d^pd, 
ci/CTj, temere; ovSafirj, Srinoffia, publice; Koiyrj, in oommon ; iSia, privatim; 
KOfiiST}, diligenter ; also tttj, oirg, irdarni, % ttj, t^Sc, tovttj, etc. ; tj and a com- 
monly have an Iota subscript. 

(c) The Ace. ending occurs in the following forms, 

(a) In the endings -mv and -ai', e.g. vpdriv, fmKpiu^far; ircpav and treprjv^ 

trans (but v4pa, uUra), etc.; so also of substantives, e. g. SUtjv, instar; 

axpiiiv {acme), scarcely ; Bupedv, gratis, 
{fi) In the ending -ov, e. g. SripSu, diu; (T^fitpov, hodie; afjpiov, to-morrow, 
{y) In the endings -Soy, -Sriy, -5a (adverljs of manner), e. g. avroa-x^^Sy, 

cominus ; ^c'ScJi', linroTpoxd-STjv, aTroaraSd. 
(5) In some substantive forms in the Ace. of the third Dec, e. g. x*^P«'j fo^ 

the sake of; irpofiKa, gratuitously. 



f 



CHAPTER VL 

The Verb. 

Nattire and Division op the Verb. 

$ 102. Classes of the Verb. 

1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af- 
firmed of a subject, e. g. the father writes, the rose blooms, 
the boy sleeps, God is loved. 

2. Verbs are divided into the following classes : — 

(1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub- 
ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. <ypd(j)Wy to write; 
^aXkco, to bloom (comp. § 248) ; 

(2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action 
that the subject performs on itself, the subject being. 



128 VERBS. TENSES. [^ 103 

therefore, both agent and object, e. g. /SovXevo/jiac, 1 

advise myself^ I deliberate ; 
(3) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sulT- 

ject receives from another object, e. g. rvTrTOfiai vtto 

Ttv6<;, I am sjnitten by some one. 
3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are 
called Deponent. They have either a reflexive or intransi- 
tive meaning. They are divided into Middle Deponents, 
which have a middle form for their Aorist and Futm-e, e. g. 
')(apL^oixat, gratificofyA-OX. i'^aptadf^rjv, Fut. '^apLovfiat] and 
into Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for 
their Aorist, but commonly a middle form for their Fut., 
e. g. iv^v/jLeofMat, mecum reputo, Aor. ive^v/nif^Tjv, mecum 
reputavi, Fut. iv^vfiriaoiJbai, mecum reputabo. Comp. § 197. 

k 103. The Tenses. 

1. The Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb. 
The Greek has the following Tenses : — 

I. (1) Present, /3ouXei;&), I advise^ \ 

(2) Perfect, ^efiovXevKa, I have advised; j 
II. (3) Imperfect, ifiovXevov, I was advising", 

(4) Pluperfect, ijSejSovXevKeiv, I had advised, 

(5) Aorist, i^ovXevaa, I advised (indefinite) ; 
III. (6) Future, fiovXevaco, I shall or will advise, 

(7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid- 
dle form), /Se/SovXevaofjLai, I shall have advised my- 
self, or / shall have been advised. 

2. All the Tenses may be divided into, 

a. Principal tenses : Present, Perfect, and Future; 

b. Historical tenses: Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. 

Remark. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Pluperf. Act., two for 
tlie simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass., and Mid. Aorist ; these 
two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses ; i. e. the 
first Perfect is a primary tense, the second Peifect a secondary tense, etc. 
Still, only a very few verbs have both forms; most verbs construct the above 
tenses with one or the other form, but not with both. No verb has aU the 



^ 104, 105.] VERBS. MODES. — PARTICIPIALS. 12SJ 

tenses. Pure verbs (§ 108, 5) form, with very few exceptions, only the primary 
tenses. Mute and liquid verbs (§ 108, 5) may form both the primary and 
secondary tenses, but no verb has all the forms in use. The Fut. Perf., which 
is found in but few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom 
found in verbs which have the temporal augment (§ 121), e. g. aip4w, to take^ 
^p^lcrofjLai, PI. Prot. 338, c, aTifxaw, to dishonor^ ririix^xrofMiif Dem. 19, 284. 



$ 104. The Modes, 

The Modes denote the manner iri which the action of 
the verb is represented, whether as a direct affirmation, a 
condition, or a command, etc. (comp. § 258, seq.) The 
Greek has the following Modes : — 

I. The Indicative, which makes a direct affirmation, e. g 
the rose blooms, bloomed, will bloom. 

II. The Subjunctive, which expresses what is merely 
conceived, or conditional. The Subjunctive of the his- 
torical tenses is called the Optative. Comp. ypdcpoifMo with 
scribere7n* 

Kemark. See § 257, 2 (a), (b), and Eem. 1, for the manner in which the 
Aorist may use both forms of the Subj., and how the Future may have an 
Optative. 

III. The Imperative, which expresses a command, e. g. 
^ovXeve, advise. 

> 

§ 105. Participials (^Infinitive and Participle^j 

Besides the modes, the verb has two forms, which, aa 
they partake both of the nature of the verb and also of 
the nature of the substantive and adjective, are called 
Participials ; — 

(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial, 
e. g. e^eXft) ^ovXeveiv, I wish to advise, and to fiovXevecv, 
the advising-. 

(b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g. 
fiovXevcov avr]p, a counsellor. 

Remark. These two participials may be called verbum ivfinitum ; the rfr 
maiuing forms of the verb, verbum finitunu 



130 VERBS. — STEM, AUGMENT, AND REDUPLICATION. [H 106-109 

$ 106. The Persons and Numbers. 

The personal forms of the verb show whether the sub- 
ject of the verb be the speaker himself (J, we^ first person) ; 
or a person or thing addressed (thou^ you^ second person) ; or 
a person or thing spoken of (Ae, she^ it, third person). They 
also show the relation of number : Singular, Dual, and 
Plural (comp. § 41, 1), e. g. jSovKevco, J, the speaker, advise; 
/8ouXeu€t9, thou, the person addressed, advisest; fiovXevec, he^ 
she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; fiovXeverov, 
ye two, the persons addressed, advise ; /SovXevovac, they, the 
persons spoken of, advise. 

Remark 1. The student will at once observe that the ending, or personal 
forms of the Greek verb, determines the person and number without the subject 
being expressed. So in Latin. But in English, as the verb is not varied so 
as to indicate the person and number of itself, the subject must be expressed. 

Rem. 2. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual throughout the 
Act., and none for the Pass. Aorists ; in these instances it is expressed by the 
form of the first Pers. PL 

$ 107. Conjugation. 

Conjugation is the inflection of the verb in its Persons, 
Numbers, Modes, Tenses, and Voices. The Greek has 
two forms of conjugation, that in -co, which includes much 
the larger number of verbs, e. g. fiovXev-to, and the older, 
original conjugation in -/it, e. g. Larrj-fii, to station. 



Conjugation op Verbs in 



-w. 



n08. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication. — Char- 
acteristic. 

1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the 
ground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by 
which the relations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted. 
The stem is found in most verbs in -w by cutting off the ending 
of the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. pov\e6'u>, A^y-w, rpl/S-io. 



W 109, no.] VERBS. INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENDINGS. 131 

2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings 
to the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. ^ovX^v-o), 
/3ov\€v-(ro)j (3ov\€v-(TOfjiaiy OX are prefixed to the stem, and are 
then called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. i-jSovXevovy I was 
advising ; /8e-)8ovAevKa, I have advised. For a change in the stem 
of many verbs, e. g. Tphr-m, re-T/ao^-a, i-TpaTr-rjv, see ^ 140. 

3. The Augment is e prefixed to the stem of vetbs which 
begin with a consonant, e. g. i-fiovXevaa, I advised; but in 
verbs which begin with a vowel, it consists in lengthening the 
first stem-vowel, a and c into tj (and in some cases into «), i and 
V into I and v, and o into w. The Augment implies past time, 
and hence belongs to all the historical tenses (Imperfect, 
Aorist, and Pluperfect) ; but it is confined to the Indicative. 

4. Reduplication consists in repeating the first stem-conso- 
nant with €, when the stem begins with a consonant ; but when 
the stem begins with a vowel, the RedupHcation is the same as 
the augment, e. g. jSe-l^ovXevKa, I have advised; 'iKcrcvKa, I have 
supplicated, from "ikctcv-o). The RedupHcation denotes the com- 
pletion of the action, and hence belongs to the Perfect, Pluper- 
fect, and Future Perfect For a fuller view of the Augmenl 
and Reduplication, see M19, sq. 

5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -co is cut ofl. 
is called the verb- characteristic, or merely the characteristic, 
because, according to this, verbs in -co are divided into difierent 
classes ; according as the characteristic is a vowel, a mute, or 
a liquid, verbs are divided into pure, mute, and hquid verbs, e. g 
^ovXev-o), TLfxd-io (pure verbs), Tpt/?-<o (mute), ^atV-to (liquid). 

§ 109. Inflection- endings. 

In the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation 
of tense, mode, and person, there are three difierent elements : 
the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal- 
ending, e. g. y3ovX€v-cr-o-/>tat. 

$ 110. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings. 

1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands 
next after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark 



132 VERBS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [^111. 

of the tense. In pure verbs, k is the tense-characteristic of the* 
!Pcrf and Pkip. Ind. Act., e. g. 

0e-fiov\€v-K-a i-fie-fiov\ei-K-€tv ; 

the characteristic of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
tlie Fut. Perf is a, e. g. 

Pov\ev-(r-(i> ^ovMv-cr-ofjuu fie-fiovXei-ff-ofuu 

the characteristic of the first Aor. Pass, is 5; the first Fut. 
Pass, has, besides the tense-characteristic <r, the ending of the 
first Aor. Pass, -^rj, thus, 

The primary tenses only (§ 103, Rem.) have a tense-charac- 
teristic. 

2. The tense -characteristic, together with the ending follow- 
ing, is called the tense-ending. Thus, e. g. in the form ySov- 
Xevo-ft), cr is the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable 
o-o) is the tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb, 
together with the tense-characteristic and the augment or 
reduplication, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in l^ov- 
Xcvcr-a, i^ovXeva- is the tense-stem of the first Aor. Act. 



$ 111. (b) Personal-endings and Mode-vowels. 

The personal-ending denotes the person of the verb, and 
takes a difierent form according to the different persons and 
numbers; the mode-vowel connects the tense-stem and the 
personal-ending, and takes a different form according to the 
different modes, e. g. 

1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. M. fiov\ei-o-fmi Subj. PouX^i-u-fuu 

3 " " « Put. " fiov\ei-<r-e-Tat Opt. fiovKei-fr-oi-ro 

1 « PL " Pres. « fiov\ev-6-fjie^a Subj. )8ouAeu-c6-)iie^a 

2 " " " " " )8ouAe.5-6-(r^6 « ^ov\e{>-r,-(rSre 

1 " Sing. « A. I. « 4fiov\ev-(r-d-f^7iy " ^ov\ei-(r-u-fiai 

^ " " " " " ifiov\Gv-(r-a-TO Opt. fiov\eu-(r-ai-TO. 

Remark. In the above forms, )8ou\eu is the verb-stem, and ^vXev, ySouAeuc, 
and ifiovXeviT are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Put., and first Aor. 
Mid. ; the endings -^at, -rat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels o, 
«, €, o£, 7/ o, ai, are the mode-vowels. The mode-vowels e and o of the Indie 
are lengthened into ij and w in the Subj. 



H 112, 113.] MODE-VOWELS. ^PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



133 





« 112. 


Summary of 


the 


Mode-vowels. 






Indicative. 


Subj. 


Opt. 


Impr. 


Inf. 


Part. 


Person. 


Pres. and Put. 
Active. 


Impf., A. II. A. and 
M. and Prs.and P.M. 


Act. Mid. 










S. 1. 


(0 







a> 


CO 


ot 


— 


et, 6 


CO, 


2. 


fi 




€ 


?7 


V 


01 


6 






3. 


€1 




€ 


?? 


V 


01 


e 






D. 1. 


— 









<a 


01 


- 






2. 


€ 




e 


■n 


V 


01 


e 






3. 


C 




€ 


V 


V 


01 


c 






P. 1. 










0) 


(t) 


01 


- 






2. 


6 




e 


v 


V 


ot 


6 






3. 










0) 


CO 


01 


6 








Indicative. 


Optative. 


Impr. 


Infinitive. 


Person. 


Plpf. 


A. I. M. 


A. I. A. and 
Pf. A. 


A. L A. 
and M. 


A. LA. and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 
a 


S. 1. 


61 


a 


a 


ai 


— 


2. 
3. 


ei 
ei 


a 
a 


a 

e 


ai 


a 
a 






D. 1. 


- 


a 


- 


ai 


- 


Participle. 


2. 

3. 

P. 1. 


ei 

€1 
61 


a 
a 
a 


a 
a 
a 


ai 
ai 
ai 


a 
a 


A. I. A. and M. 
and P£ A. 


2. 


€( 


a 


a 


ai 


a 


a 


3. 


(«)€ 


w 

a 


a 


ai 


a 





$ 113. Personal-endings 


of Verbs in -w. 


I. Active Form. 


II. Middle Form. \ 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
the Princ. tenses. 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
the Hist, tenses. 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
the Princ. tenses. 


B. Ind. and Opt. 

the Hist, tenses. 


Sing. 1. 

2. 

3. 
Dual 1. 

2. 

3. 
Plur. 1. 

2. 

3. 


TOV 
TOV 

fiev 

T€ 

{vTi) <ri{v) 


J/, Opt. fjt,i 

5 
TOV 

rriv 
fiev 

T6 

v, ffav 


flat 
ffai 
Tat 
ixe^ov 

ff^OV 
ff^OV 

ffSte 

vrai (aToi) 


lJ.r,v 

ffOy 

TO 

fie^ov 
ffhov 

ff^TJV 

fjLe^a 

VTO (oTo) 


C. Imperative. 


C. Imperative. 


Sing. 2. 
Dual 2. 
Plur. 2. 


3. TCO 
TOV 3. TCOV 
T€ 3. TCOffaV 


Sing. 2. { 0-0 ) 3. ff^co 

Dual 2. ff^ov 3. a^cov 

Plur. 2. a^e 3. ff^coffav^ ff^otr 


D. Infinitive. 


D. Infinitive. 


V Pres., Put., and Aor. II. 

vai Peif. Act. and Aor. I. and II. Pass. 

t Aor. I. 


ff^ai 


E. Participle. 


E. Participle. 


Stem j/T, mth exception of the Perf., 
whose stem ends in -ot. 


fievos, fJi-evriy fxevov ; 
fievos, iueKrj, fievov, Perf. 



12 



134 PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [$ 114. 

Remark. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and are 
80 closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but are 
united together, e. g. fiov\evff-T]s, instead of iSouAcuo'-Tj-ts, jSouAev-??, instead of 
fiouA.ej5-6-at (a and € coalescing and i being subscribed). 

$ 114. Difference between the Personai-endings in 
the Principal and the Historical Tenses. 

1. The difference between the Principal and Historical tenses is important. 
The Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Put.) form the second and third Pers. 
Dual with the same ending -ox/, e. g. jSouXeu-e-TOj/ /SouXeu-e-rov ; fiov\€v-e-<r^ov 
^ov\ei-€-a^ov ] the Historical tenses also form the second Pers. Dual in -oi^, 
but the third in -riv, e. g. 

2. The Principal tenses form the third Pers. PI. Act. in -(ri{v), from -vn, 
'Vffiy and the Mid. in -yrai ; the Historical tenses in the Active, in -v, and Mid., 
in 'vro^ e. g. 

fiov\€v-o-y(rt = fiov\iv-ov<ri{y) i$ov\€x/-o-y 
6ov\e6-o-vrai 40ov\ev-o-vTo. 

Eemark. In fiov\€vovai the v is dropped, and as a compensation the o pre- 
ceding it is lengthened ; so also in the Put. Act. Comp. 116, 5. 

3. The Principal tenses in the Sing. Mid. end in -fiauy -<raij t<u ; the Histori- 
cal in 'fiTjVt 'ffo, -TO, e. g. 

fiov\€{>-o-fiai i$ov\€v-6-n'r]y 

j8ouA.€i5-e-<rat = ^ovXiv-rj, i$ov\€v-e-ff o = ifiov\€v-ov 

i8ou\€t5-6-ra< ifiovKev-e-r o. 

4. The Personal-endings of the Subj. in the Principal tenses are like those 
of the Ind. in the same tenses ; the Opt. are like those of the Ind. of the Hii- 
torical tenses ; 

Subj. Pov\euri-TOP 
" fiov\ev7]-<T^oy 
" fiov\ev(D-<r I (y) 
" fiovKevwyrai 
*' fiov\ev(i>-fiat 
" j8oi/A.ev-j7 
" fiovKevTj-rat 
2 and 3 Du. « Impf.^^o v\€t5€-T oy.-^-rrjy Opt. /So v\6uot-T o y, -oi-r ij r 

ifiov\€ie-(r^oy, '^'Or^Tjy " fiov\€voi-(r^oy, -oi-obiiP 
3 PI. « " i^i\€vo-y « PovXeioL-ey 

4fi0V\€60-yTO «« fi0V\€V0l-VT0 

iSing." '^ mov\,v6-t,r,y « fiov\,vol-fiv y 

2 " « "(^^ou\ei5e-o-o) €'^ou\€.J-ov '' ($ov\e6oi-iro) fiov\^oi-o 



2 and 3 Du. Ini. Pr. fiovKeie-rop 




fiov\ev€-ff^op 


3 PL « 


" /3ow\ei5ou-<rt{ /) 




fiov\eio-vra 


1 Sing. « 


" $ov\^vo'fiai 


2 '• « 


" fiovXei-j) 


3 " « 


" fiovXeie-rai 



i 115.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -(i>. 135 

$ 115, Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -co. 
Pbelimikabt Eemabks. 

1. Since pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses {§ 103, Rem.) these 
tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs and one liquid 
verb {rpifi-ojy Kelir-u, stem Ain, <pait/-w, *AN), so as to exhibit a full Conju- 
gation. 

2. In learning the table, we are to note, 

(1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending, 
(b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense^stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) 
Augment, or Reduplication. 

(2) The s/x7C€<f forms, e. g. /3oii\€u-€ TO »/, ^ovAtu-rj t o v, third Pers. Du. Ind. 
and Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the difference between the Historical 
tenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses. 

(3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are 
distinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g. 
pov\€v<ra>, 1. Sing. Ind. Fut. Act. or 1. Sing. Subj. I. Aor. Act.; fiovXtvaaif 
2. Sing. Imp. I. Aor. Mid., fiov\ev<Tai, 3, Sing. Opt. I. Aor. Act., fiov\€v<T0Uf 
Inf I. Aor. Act. 

(4) The accentuation (^ 118) should be learned with the form. The follow- 
ing general rule will suffice for beginners : 27/e accent of the verb is as far from 
the end as the fnal syllable will permit. Those forms, whose accentuation 
deviates from this rule, are indicated by a dagger (t). 

(5) "When the Paradigm is thus thoroughly learned, the pupil may first 
resolve the forms either of fiovXfvw, or any pure verb, into their elements, i. e. 
Personal-ending, Mode- rowel, etc. ; observing this order, \iz. fiovKtvcru is, (1) 
first Pers., (2) Sing., (3| Ind., (4) Fut., (5) Act., (6) from fiov\(vw, to advise; 
then he may arrange the elementary parts of the form, and in the following 
order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment, or Reduplication, (3) Tense-characteristic, 
(4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel, (7) Per 
sonal ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Personal-ending. E. g. 
What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised himself using the 
Aor. of the Pres., fiov\fv-w, to advise ? Answer : The Verb-stem is /SovAeu-, 
Augment, 4, thus ifiovXfv ; the Tense-characteristic of the first Aor. Mid. is <r, 
thus Tense-stem is i-fiov\€v-(r ; the Mode-vowel of the first Aor, Ind. Mid. is a ; 
thus, 4-fiov\ev-<r-a ; the Personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing, of an Historical 
tense of the Mid. is to ; thus, i-fiov\ev-a-a-ro. 

Remark. By making himself familiar with the above elements, the pupil 
c«n construct from the root any form of the verb he may wish. 



136 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN 



-0), 



[i U5. 



Tenses. 



Present, 

Tense- 
stem: 
fiovAev- 



Imperfect, 

Tense- 
stem: 
e-j8ouAev- 



Per/ect Z, 

Tense- 
stem: 
/3e-j8ou\eu-/c 



Pluper- 
fect L, 

Tense- 
stem : 

8ov\ev-K- 



Perf. 11. 
Plpf. 11. 

Aorist Z, 

Tense- 

stem: 

i-^ovXev-ff- 



Aorist IL, 
e-AiTT- 

Future^ 
fiovXev-ff- 



m 



id ® 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P,l. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 

P. 1. 
2. 
3. 



D 



S. 1. 
2. 
3. 
2. 







s. 


1. 




2. 




3, 


D 


.2. 




3. 


P. 


1. 




2. 




3. 


S. 


1. 




2. 


s. 


1. 



Indicative. 



^ov\ei)-a,^ I advise, 
fiov\€v-eis, thou advisest, 
fiov\€i-€i, he, she, it advises, 
fiov\€v-erov, ye two advise, 
fiovXev-eroy, they two advise, 
^ovX^v-ofiev, we advise, 
ySouAeu-ere,* you advise, 
fiov\e6-ov<ri{j/), they advise, 



fiovK^v-o),* I may advise, 

fiovXei-Tis ^ 

)8ouAeu-77* 

fiovXev-rjToy 

fiov\ev-T) Toy 

^ovXev-ufiey 

fiov\ev-r]Te 

Pov\ev-a>(ri{v) 



i-^ovXev-oy,* I was advising, 
i-^ovXev-es, thou wast advising, 
i-fiovXev-e{y), he, she, it was adv. 
i-fiovXe6-eToy, ye two were adv. 
i-fiovX€v-€T7]y, they two were adv. 
€-fiovXev-ofi€v, we were advising, 
i-^ovXev-ere, you were advising, 
i-fiovXev-ou,* they were advising, 



fie-^ovXev-K-a, I have advised, 
^e-fiovXev-K-as, thou hast adv'd, 
fie-0ovXev-K-€{y),* he, she, it has a 
^e-^ovXev-K-aroy, ye two have a. 
)8e-j8ov\eu-/c-a ray, they two have 

advised, 
fie-fiovXev-K-afxev, we have adv^d, 
^-fiovXev-K-aTe, you have adv^d, 
jSe-jSoi/Aeu-K-d c i (v), they have a. 



i-fie-$ovXev-K-eiy, I had advised, 
i-fie-fiovXev-K-€is, thou hadst adv. 
i-fie-fiovXcv-K-ei, he, she, it had ad. 
i-^e-fiovXev-K-eiToy, ye two had 

advised, 
i-fie-fiovXev-K-e iTt] y,they two had 

advised, 
i-fii-^ovXcv-K-eifiev, we had adv 
i-fie-fiovXev-K-ene, you had adv. 
e-j8e-/3ouA€u K-eaay, they had a 



6-i 



Tri-^r)v-a,^ I appear, 
-Tre-^Tjv-etj',^ / appeared, 

-fiovXev-cr-a, I advised (indef.), 
-fiovXev-ff-as, thou advisedst, 
^ovXev-cr-e{v), he, she, it adv'd, 
^ovXev-(T-aToy, ye two advised, 
^ovX^v-cr-dr-qv, they two adv'd, 
fiovXev-ff-afiey, we advised, 
^ovXev-<r-aT€, you advised, 
^ovXev-a-a v, they advised. 



Subjunctive 
of the Principal tenses. 



$e-fiovX€v-K-u,Imayhavea. 
$€-^ouXev-K-r)s 
^e-0ovXev-K-T} 
)8 e-)3oi» Ae u-K-T/TO V 
^€-fiovXev-K-7] Toy 

^e-fiovXev-K-cofjiey 

fi€-$ovXev-K-rjTe 

fie-fiovXcv-K-oxrtly) 



"Ke-cjyfty-cOf I may appear. 



fiovXev-a-u,* I may advise, 

'0ovXfv-(r-T}s 

$ovXev-<r-T} * 

)8ouAeu-<r-77Toi' 

$ovXev-(r-r} Toy 

^ovXev-cr-ufiey 

jSouAev-a-TTTe 

jSouAe v-<r-a>(n ( V ) 



e-Xiir-oy, Ileft, 

e-AiTT-es, etc. declined like Impf. 
Ind. 



j8ouA€u-<r-a),* / shall advise, 
like the Indie. Pres. 



A(7r-w, etc., like the Subj. 
Pres. 



' The inflection of the 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, is like that of the 1st Perf. 






$ 115.] PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -0). 



137 



Modes. 1 


Participials. 1 




Optative 
i. e. Snbj. of Historical tenses. 


Imperative. 


Infin. 


Particip. 






|8ovX6y-€, advise, 
fiovXcv-eria, let him ad. 
fiov\ev-€Toy,ye two ad. 
fiovKev-fTwy, let them 

both advise, 
/3ouA.€u-eTe,* do ye ad. 
fiovXev-fTwaay, usually 


fiovXev- 

eiy, 

to 
advise. 


8ov\€v-cay 
BovKev-ovaa 
Bov\e£-oy^ 
G.)8ou> ev-oyros 

fiovXev-ovarjs, 

advising, 




fiovXev-Syruy,* let them a. | 




fiov\€v-oifjLi, I might advise, 

fiov\ev-ois 

fiov\€v-oi 

fiovKev-oiTov 

fi0V\€V-0lT7JV 

P0V\€V-0lljLfy 

fi0V\€V-0LT€ 

fiovXev-0 1 e y 












[fi€-$ov\€VK-€,*] etc., 
like the Imp. Pres. 
yet only a few Per- 
fects, and such as 
have the meaning 
of the Pres., form 


\ev- 

K-eVat,t 

to have 

advised, 


^€-fiovX€v-K-v7d\ 

fie-fiovX(v-K-6s'\ 

G. -k-6tos, -k- 

vlas, having 

advised, 






an Imperative. 








fie-fiovKfi-K-oifii, I mig. have a. 
fic-fiov\evK-ots 

0€-$OV\€V-K-Ol 

fie-fiov\({t-K-oiTOV 










/8e-/3ouA.€u-K-o /t Tj V 


• 








fi€-fiov\fV-K-Olfl€V 

)8€-/3ouAeu-K-ojTe 










irf-<p^y-oifii, I might appear. 


ire-ifyrjy-e, appear. 


ye-yai,'\ 


wc-^v-jist 




fiovXfv-a-aifii, I might advise, 
0ov\€v-<r-aii, or -eias 
fiov\fv-<r-ai,* or -€i€{v) 
fiov\ev-(r-aiTov 
^ov\ev-a-alrT} V 
^ovKfv-ff-aifify 

fiov\€v-(T-a ley, OT -eiav 


fiovKev-<r-ov, advise, 
/3ouAeu-<r-aTftj 
fiov\€v-<r-aToy 
$ov\ev-(r-dTwv 

fiov\€v-<r-ar€ 
fiov\ev-(r-dTCt}(ray, usua 


Aev- 
a-oi,*t 

to 
advise, 


0ovX€v-(r-ds 
fiovXev-<T-dffa 
^ovXev-ff-dv^ 
Genitive : 
^ovXev-tT-ayros 
fiovXev-a-dar\s, 
having advised, 




ly -adyrcDy* 1 




kItt-oi/xi, etc., like the Opt. 
Impf. 


\it-€, etc., like the 
Imp. Pres. 


XlTT- 

e7yy t 


Xiir-doyfOvaa, 6yX 
G. 6yTos, ouCTjs, 




$ov\ev-(T-oiiJ.i, I would advise, 
1 like the Opt. Impf. . 




fiOV\€V- 

<r-eiy. 


fiovXev-<r-(oy, 
etc. like Pr. Pt. 




2 The inflection of the 2d Pluperf. 


is like that of the Ist Plapei 


rf., both in the Ind. and Opt. | 



12* 



138 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAK VERBS IN -Ci>. 



tU15 



Tenses. 



Present^ 

Tense- 
stem: 



Imperfect, 

Tense- 
stem: 



Perfect, 

Tense- 
stem: 
fie-fiov\ev 



Pluperfect, 

Tense- 
stem: 

^ovKev- 



Aorist L, 

Tense- 
stem: 



Aorist 11. 



Future, 



Put. Per/., 



g § S 

55 ^ 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2, 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l, 

2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 



S. 1. 



S.l. 



The 



Indicative. 



^ovXev-ofiai, I deliberate, or am 



fiov\ev-r} * 
/3ov\ev-erai 

fi0V\€V-6/JL€^0U 

fiov\€!L)-€<r^oy 
fiov\e6-€ <r ^ jr 
fiovXev-Sfxe^a 
fiovXev-ear^e * 
fiovXev-ovrai 



[advised, 



€-, 



e-, 



6- 



■fiov\€v-6fJLr]Vy 
■fiov\ev-o V 
■fiov\€v-eTO 
■fiovKev-S/xe^ov 
^ov\€^-e(r^oy 

fiovXev-opTO 



was ddiber- 
[ating, 



$e-fiov\€v-fjL a t, I have deliberated, 

fi€-fiov\ev-<rai 

j8e-)8ouA.eu-T a t 

^e-fiov\ev-fxe^a 
j8e-)8ouA.eu-i/Tot 



i-fi€-fiov\ev-fi r]v, 1 had deliber- 



6-i 



e-, 



•j8e-j8ouA.ei;-(ro 
■fie-fiov\ev-T 
•jSe-^ouAeu-ytteS^ov 
■fie-fiov\€v-<r^ov 

•j8e-)8ouAeu-/ie3^o 

■fi€-fiov\ev-vro 



[ated, 



6- 



e- 



fiovKev-(T-dfjii]v, I deliberated, 
fiovXev-ff-w [(indefinite) 

■)30/A\€U-(r-OT0 

j8ouA€u-(r-a<ri&^o»' 

)8ou\eu-<r-ci(r3-7ji' 

■)8ou\eu-(r-0|UeiS^a 

jSouAeu-o'-oo'S^e 

fiov\€v-(r-avTo 



i-KiTT-Sfiriv, I remained, like Ind. 
Imperf. 



^ov\ev-<T-oficu, I shall deliberate, 
like Pres. Indie. 



^€-^ou\€v-a-ofi.ai, I shall have de- 
liberated, like Pres. Indie. 



Subjunctive 
of the Principal tenses. 



fiov\cv-<a fx a ly I may de- 



fiovKev-rj * 

fiov\ev-T}Tai 

fiov\ev-d!>iJ.€^oy 

fiovXev rfff^ov 

fiov\€v-7](r^e 
0ov\fv-ct/VTai 



[liberatey 



P€-$ov\€v-fifuos, i, I may 
fif-$ovXev-fi€yos 171 [have 
fie-fiov\ru-fi4vos ^ [delib- 
[erated. 
Be-Pov\€v-fi(va) ?irov 

Be-fiov\ev-fifyoi ifity 
fiffiovkev-fieyoi ^e 
fie-^vXfv-fieyoi 2xTi 



$ov\fv-cr-w fiai, I may de- 
/3ouAey-<r-T7 * [libaratA, 
fiovKev-ff-j) rai 
$ov\eu-<r-<afifd^oy 
fiov\(v-(r-Tjabor 
fiov\€v-(r-Tf aboy 
Bov\€v-(r-cl)fi(ba 
fiov\(v-<r-rjorb€ 
$ov\cv-(T'<i} yrai 



\iv-(Dfxau, I may rejnain, 
like Pres. Subj. 



♦ 115.] 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -CO. 



139 





VIODES . 1 


Participials. 1 




Optative 
i. e. Subj. of Hist, tenses. 


Imperative. 


Infin. 


Particip. 








fiov\€v- 


fiov\€u-6ix(yos 
fiovKexJ-o/icvq 






/3ouAev-ou, deliberatCy 


fa^ai, 






/3ouA.eu-eV<3-a> 


to deliber- 
ate, 


fiov\ev-6fjL€voy, 
deliberating, 






$ov\(v-e<r^oy 










fiov\€v-4a^u}y * 










fiov\€v-€(r^u(ray, usually 








fiovKev-ea^tDy * | 




fiovXeu-olfxri y, I might 










fiov\e{>-oio [deliberate, 










fiovKeij-o I T 










fiov\(v-olixf^ov 










fiov\fv-oi<r^ov 










fiovKfj-o i <r ^ ri y 










fiovKfv-oifMf^a 










fiov\€v-oiadf 










fiov\ev-o I y r 














/36-)8ouAeu- 


$€fiov\€v-fi4yos^ 






fif-Pov\€v-<ro, deliberate. 


<r(^oi,t to 


fiffiovKfv-fifyT) 






fi€-fiov\€v-(rdu) 


have delib- 
erated, 


/8«j8ouA6y-/i€- 
yoy,^ having 






fif-fiov\fif-a^oy 




deliberated, 






^(-fiovKfv-a^wy * 








fi€-fiov\€v-/xeyos elfrji/, / 


/3€-/3oi;A€t'^-(r,^a><rai', usual 








y &e-fiov\ev-a^wy ♦ | 












fic-fiov\fv-fi(yo5 fJris\rni't 
fif-fiov\fv-fi€yos ftr) \de- 


















[liberate. 










fif-$Ov\(V-fJL€VQ} ffrfToy 










fif-fiovXcv-fi(y<i3 el-f]Trjy 










0€-fiov\€v-fji.4yoi firj/xfy 










0€-fiov\€V-ljLfyOl efT7T6 










$€-fiov\€v-fi(yo. (Xr)<Tay 
fiov\€v-<r-a inv, I might 












/SouAcu- 


0ov\fv-a-dfjLeyos 




fiov\fv-a-a 1 [deliberate, 


$ov\€v-<T-ai,* deliberate, 


ar-aa-^ou. 


fiov\€v-(r-aix4yT} 




fiov\(v-a-a I T 


fiov\fv-(r-dadu 


to deliber- 


fiov\ev-<T-dfjLfyoy 




fiovXev-a-oufif^oy 




ate, 


having deliber- 




Pov\€v-a-ou<T^oy 


$ov\€v-(T-a(rboy 




ated, 




fiov\€v-a--a l(T^r}y 


fiov\iv-<r-<iab<i)y * 








fiov\€v-a--aifi€^a 










fiov\fv-<r-ai(r^€ 
$ovX€v-<r'aivTO 
Knr-oifn]v,Iinight remain, 


fiov\fv-(r-d<T^tM)(ray, usual 








ly fiov\(v-<T-<i<Tb<i>y* 1 




\iirov,'\ -cViJfc, like Pres. 


\nT-4(Tbai\ 


Knr-6fXiyos, -o- 




like Opt. Impf. 
fiov\(v-a-oifir)y,I m. have 


Imp. 




fieyjj, -6fjL€yoy 






fiovKev- 


fiov\ev-ar-6fj.f- 


t 


deliberatedXikeOpt.lmp. 






yos, -7], -oy 
$€-Pov\cv-(r-6- 


fie-$ov\€v-(r-olnriy, Ish''d 






deliberate, like Opt. Imp. 




tr-ea^ai \ /jlcvos, -tj, -oy. J 



140 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [$116 



Tenses. 


Numbers 

and 
Persons. 


The 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive 
of the Principal teases. 




Aorist /., 

Tense- 
stem : 

i-fi0V\€V-^- 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 

S. 1. 
2. 


i-fiov\ev-^-r]u, I was advised. 

e-)8ouAeu-3-77Toy 

e-j8ouAeu-3-7jTe 


^ov\tv-^-a>, I might have 
0ov\€v-^-ps [been advised. 

fiovXev-^-riTov 
fiovXev-^-T] TOV 
fiovXev-^-wfiev 

^OVX€V-^-T}T€* 

fiovXev-^-uailv) 




Future I. 


^ovXiv-^-(T-o[jLai, I shall he adv. 
l3ovAev-^-f}-(r-v, etc., like the 
Ind. Pres.'Mid. 






Aorist II. 


S. 1. 
2. 

S. 1. 
2. 


i-rpi^-riu, I was rubbed, 
i-Tpifi-r}s, etc., like the first 
Aor. Ind. Pass. 


rpifi-w, Imay have been mb'd, 
Tpi^-f)s, etc., like the first 
Aor. Subj. Pass. 




Fut. U. 


Tpi^-^-cr-ofxai, I shall be rubbed, 
TpLfi-T]-(T-ri, etc., like the first 
Put. Ind. Pass. 






Verbal Adjectives : ^ovXcv-r6s, -^, -6v, advised, 





^ 116. Remarks on the Inflection- endings. 

1. The personal-endings of verbs in -u are apocopated forms, as may be 
shown from the older conjugation in -fii, and in part from the dialects {§ 220, 
1); thus, -fii in the first Pers. Sing. Ind. and Subj. Act. and -ri in the third 
Pers. have disappeared, e. g. fiovXev-u instead of fiovXev-o-fii or fiovXev-ufu, 
PovXev-€i instead of ^ovXev-e-n (by the dropping of -fii in fiovXev-o-fii, the o is 
lengthened into a, and by the dropping of -rt in fiovXfv-e-ri, e is lengthened 
into ei) ; in the first Pers. Sing, first Aor. Ind. Act., v has disappeared, e. g. 
ifiovXevaa instead of ilSovXevaav ] in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Act., except 
the first Aor., -^i has disappeared, e. g. fiovXeve instead of fiovXev-e-^i ; but the 
first Aor. Imp. Act. has a different ending -ov, e. g. fiovXev-a-ov. 

2. The second Pers. Sing. Act. has the ending -o-^a in the Common lan- 
guage in the following forms only : — 

oJ<r^a, nosti, from the Perf. oTBa; ^dei<rSta and ^5v<r^a, Plpf. of olSui 
i<p-n<r^a, Impf. fiom 0,,/./, to say; ^cba, Impf. from «>/, to be ; ^^icS^a, 
Impf from e?/xj, to go. 

3. There is no special form for the first Pers. Dual Act., or for the first 
and second Aor. Pass.; the first Pers. m. is used for this purpose. Comp. 
^ 106, Rem. 2. r t- f 

4. The original form of the first Pers. PI. Act. is -^e. (not -^.v). Coma, 
the Dialects, §220 6, and the Latin ending -mus, e. g. yp^i^-o-^.s, scnh-umus. 

5. The ongmal form of the third Pers. PI. Act. of the Principal tenses was 



§ 116.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 141 



SIVE 





Modes. 


Participials. | 




Optative 
i, e. Subj. of the Hist, tenses. 


Imperative. 


Infin. 


Participle. 




^ov\ev-^-iltji»y I might be 
fiov\ev-d-€i7i5 [advised, 

$ov\ev-&-eir]ix(v and -eifiey 
fiov\ev-h-€ir}T€ and -eire 


^ov\€v-^-trn, be thou ad- 
fiov\€v-b-i)ru [vised, 

Pov\ev-^-7iTu<ray 


fiovAev- 

to be ad- 
vised, 


&ov\cv-^-e7crd\ 
ySouXeu-i^eVt 

Genitive : 
fiov\€v-^-4yTOS 
fiov\€v-^-ei(rr)s, 

being advised. 




6ov\ev-^-a-oiiJ.T]y, I should 
be advised, etc., like the 
Irapf. Opt. Mid. 




$0V\€V- 


fieyos, -7], -ov 




rpifi-cir}v, I might be rubbed, 
rpifi-eiris, etc., like the first 
Aor. Opt. Pass. 


rpl$-T}^i, --ffTw, etc., like 
the first Aor. Imp. Pass. 


rpifi- 
rjyai 


Tpij8-e/s,t etc., 
like first Aor. 
Part. Pass. 




rpifi-T]-<T-oifi'nv, I should be 
rubbed, etc., like the first 
Fut. Opt. Pass. 


Tpt^T]- 


Tpi$-r)-a-6(jL€yos, 
-V, -oy 


fiovKev-reos, -rta, -reov, to be advised. j 



-vTi; when t was changed into c, v was dropped (§ 20, 2), e. g. fiovXfvoyri = 
fiovXevoyffi = fiovXevovtri. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel pre- 
ceding the V, see § 20, Rem. 2. 

6. In the first Pers. Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use, together with the 
form in -ftj/, a forai in -17, which arises from the Ionic ending of the Plup. -co, 
e. g. ifiefiov\€VK-T} instead of -K-eiy. The mode-vowel et in the third Pers. PI. 
is commonly shortened into e, e. g. ifiefiovXiv-K-e-aay instead of ifiefiovKiv-K- 
ft-aay. 

7. The first Pers. Sing. Opt. Act. has the ending -fii in verbs in -u, e. g. 
irotScu-a fxi, Traideva-ai-fjii] but the ending -rjy in the first and second Aor. Pass., 
according to the analogy of verbs in -fxi. This rj remains tlirough all the per- 
sons and numbers, tly>ugh it is often dropped in the Dual and PL, especially 
in the third Pers. PI. and then, etij/iej/ = eT/iei/, cfr/re = cTtc, eirjaay = eieu, e. g 
iraidev^dTjfiey and iraiSevi^eT/Liei', fiyTja^eirrre and -S^frre, (pavelrja-ay X. H. 6. 5, 
25., irpoKpi^d-naay Ibid. 34., 'iTcfx<p^i'n]<Tav Th. 1, 38, and (more frequently) 

8. The Attic Optative endings -tjj', -ijy, -r/, etc., and the third Pers. PI. -ev 
(rarer -r)<Tav) which appropriately belong to verbs in -/xi, are used with verbs in 
•<», in the following cases : — 

(a) Most commonly in the Imperf. Opt. of contract verbs, e. g. nixtf-qv, 
(piXolrju, ixKr^oiTfy ] , 

(b) In all Futures in -a>, e. g. (pawoirjy Soph. Aj. 313., ipoirj Xen. Cy. 3. 1, 
14, from the Fut. <pavio, ipco ; 

(c) Somewhat often in the second Plup., e. g. iKTre(pevyol7jy S. 0. R. 840., 
xpoe\rj\v^oir}s X. Cy. 2. 4, 17., irfiroidoir} Ar. Acharn. 940; 



142 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [§ 116- 

(d) In the second Aor. cxo^V^ uniformly {ecrxov from ex») > still, not gen- 
erally in compounds, e. g. irapiffxoip-i- 

9. The forms of the first Aor. Opt. Act. in -ems, -etc (v), -eiav, instead of 
-ajs, -an, -aiv, have passed from the -a:olic Opt. in -eio, -ctos, etc., into com- 
mon use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic writers more fre- 
quently than the regular forms, e. g. iSouAeucr-etas, -et6(y), -eiay. 

Kemark. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends, 
among the Attic writers, in -t)V instead of -ov, e. g. elireTrjv PI. Symp. 189, c, 
iireSTju-na-dTrjy Euthyd. 273, e., ijffrrjv 294, e., iXey€TT]v L, 705, d., iKoivwmrjad- 
TTji/ lb. 753, a. On the Dialects, see § 220, 9. 

10. The Middle endings -o*ot and -<rOf when immediately preceded by a 
mode-vowel, drop cr (§ 25, 1), and then coalesce, except in the Opt., with the 
mode-vowel, e. g. 

/3ou\€i5-e-crat BovXev-e-ai = fiov\ev--p 

fiovXev-rj-ffai 8ov\ev-7)-ai = /SouAcv-t; 

fiov\€v-oi-(ro fiov\ev-oi-o 

ifiovKei-e-ffo ifiov\€V-e-o = e)8ouA.6<5-ou 

ifiov\€v<T-a-ffo ifiovXevff-a-o = cj8ouA,eu<r-<w. 

1^1. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Put. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers 
^ a subordinate ending in -et, together with the ending -t;, e. g. fiov\ev-ri and 
-et, Pov\ev(T-ri and -et, )8ej8pu\ev<r-7; and -et, )8ouA.ei;^<r-77 and -et, rpifirjcrri, and -et, 
TTotp and -e?, 6\f and -et. This form in -et passed from the Attic conversational 
language, into the written language ; hence it is the regular form in the Come- 
dies of Aristophanes, but is avoided by the tragedians. Also Thucydides 
and Xenophon use it ; other writers, as Plato and the orators, employ both 
forms ; yet three verbs always take the form -et, namely, 

fioiXofiai fiovXei (but Subj. fioiXri) 

dtojxai oUi (but Subj. aitri) 

6\l/ofiat Put. iypei, 

12. Together with the endings of the third Pers. PL Imperative Act. and 
Pass. -(Twaauy -Aruffavy -a^wa-av, the abbreviated forms -Svrcoy, -JLvruVy 
-ff^wv, are used; and since they are employed very frequently by Attic 
writers, they are called Attic forms. These abbreviated Imperatives of the 
Active Voice are like the Gen. PI. of the Participle of each tense respectively, 
except the Peifect ; and the Middle form -ar^uv is like the third Pers. Dual, 
e.g. 

Pres. Act. fiovXeveraxrav and PovKevdvruv 

Perf. " ireiroi^irwaav " ireTrotS^Jj/Twj' (Gen. Part. ireirot^^t^Twy) 

Aor. I. " ^ovKivffdTUffav " fiovXevffdpTccv 

Pres. Mid. fiovXevicr^acav " fiovKevecr^cov 

Aor. *' aKerpda-^wa-av " ffKe^da-^wv. 
The Aor. Pass, ending -ivtwv or -iirtav, abridged from -^Taxraj/, is found in 
PI. Legg. 856, d. veficp^evTuv, and lb. 737, e. Siavefi-q^Tuv (according to several 
MSS.). 



^ 117.] VERBS. ATTie FUTURE. 143 

13. Besides the simple form of the Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. Act., a 
periphrasis, formed by the Perf. Part, and the Subj. or Opt. of thai {to 6e), 5, 
^ftjj/, is very frequent, e. g. 7r€irat5euKc«>s 5, educaverim ; ireTrcuSevKciis e'irju, educa- 
vtssem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a 
simple completed action ; comp. PL Hipp. M. 302, a. 6i /ce/c /a ijKcis rt, ^ reTpcc 
u4vos, ft imrKt\yfiivos, ^ fiAA' briovv rrenov^iiss kKaripos tj/xuv eTrj, ov KoX afi<p6- 
Tfpoi o5 Tovro ireirSy^oiixev] examples of the simple forms are, a,'ir€i\'n<pri, PL 
Rp. 614, a., ilX'i]<pa><Tiv Polit. 269, c, iixvenTWKOL X. An. 5. 7, 26., RaraX^XoliToiev 
X. H. 3. 2, 8., airoKcxccp^KOt ib. 5, 23., vTnjper'ffKOi ib. 5. 2, 3., ir^Troi^KOi Th. 8, 
108., isfie^K-ffKoiev ib. 2, 48. — The Imp. Perf. does not often occur in the Act., 
e. g. 7e7«j/€, Eur. Or. 1220. 

14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to the 
tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. and 
Opt. (mth few exceptions, which will be further treated below, § 154, 9), 
but must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and 
flyai, e. g. ireiraiSev/xevos &, e^Tji/, educatxis sim, essem, 

15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends in 
-vrai, -VTO, e. g. fiefiovXevvrai, i^efiovKevvro ; but in mute and liquid verbs, this 
formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person 
periphrastically, by means of the Perf Part, and et<rl{v), sunt, ^<rav, erant ; the^ 
older and middle Attic writers, however, sometimes use the Ionic forms -aroi, 
-oTo (instead of -rrcu, -vro) ; the a of these endings is aspirated after the 
Kappa and Pi-mutes, and hence changes the preceding smooth Kappa or Pi- 
mute into the corresponding rough (comp. § 144) ; but this a is not aspirated 
after the Tau-mutes ; thus, 

rpifi-oty to rub, Perf. ri-Tpi/x-fiai 3 'P.Terpl(paTai (for TfTpifivrai) Pip. ir€Tpl<paTO 
ir\eK-(i)j to twine, ir4-ir\ey-fJMi 
rdrT-o), to arrange, ri-ray-fiai 
X(j}pi^-(i}, to separate, K€-x<*ipio-HMi 
<p^eip"V, to destroy, €-<pdap-(jicu 

16. The two Aorists Pass, follow the analogy of verbs in -/tt, and hence are 
not treated here. 



4 117. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic 

Future. 

1. When one of the short vowels o, e, I, in the Put. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
in -{Tw, -ffofiai, from stems of two or more syllables, precedes <r, certain verbs, 
after dropping c, take the circumflexed ending -cD, -ovfmi ; because it was fre- 
quently used by the Attic writers instead of the regular form, this is called 
the Attic Future, e. g. ixdw (usually iXaiyco), to drive, i\d-<r-(a, Put. Att. i\u, -oty, 
•qt, -Stov, -ufievj -are, -Si(ri{y) ; T€\e«, to finish, T€\€-<r-w, Put. Att. reAeS, -eTs, -€?, 
'iiroVy -ov/xev, -elre, -ov<Ti{v); reXe-ff-ofxai {reKeofjLai), reAoC/xat, -e?, -errot, etc.; 
KouiCwj to carry. Put. KOfii-<r-Wy Put. Att. Ko/uwy -ms, -tet, -leiTov^ -lovfisvy -letre, 



ireirAcxareu ( " v4ir\€Kvrai) 


cireirAe'xctTO 


reraxo-Tai ( " rerayvrai) 


irerdxaTO 


/C€X«p^SaTat( " K€X«^pi5j^oi) 


4K€X(^pi^o.TO 


i<l>^dpa.Tai ( " i(()^apvrou) 


e^cfpoTO. 



144 VERBS. ACCENTUATION. [^ 118. 

iov<ri{v) ; KoyLiovfxai, -«€?, -teTTot, -loifxe^ov, etc. This Fut. is inflected like the 
forms of contract verbs. 

2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the Ind., Inf , and Part. ; never in 
the Opt., thus, re\co, reXelv, reAcDj/ ; but TeXeffoifii. The verbs which have this 
form are the following: (a) i\dw {i\a6vw), to drive; reAea*, to finish; /coAew, 
to call; and, though seldom, aAew, to grind;— (b) all verbs in -t'^w (character. 
5^ 5 _ (c) a few verbs in -c^C«> very generally fiifidCc '■, — (d) of verbs in -m, all 
\n-6.vvvfn. and also afjt,<pi4vvviJLi,toclothe{afjL(j)i(o, -leTs, etc.). A few exceptions 
to this Fut. are found even in the Attic dialect, e. g. iKdtra) X. Cy. 1. 4, 20., e\d- 
ffovras X. An. 7. 7, 55., reXea-ova-iu Cy. 8. 6, 3., KoXeffeis 2. 3, 22., j/ofxiaovcri 3. 
], 27. (according to the best MSS.) rl/rjcpiffecr^e, Isae. de Cleonym. hered. § 51. 



§ 118. Accentuation of the Verb. 

1. Primary Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word 
^ towards the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. 

jSoi^Aewe, fiovXevofiai, fiov\€V(roVf iravaov, rvxpov, but fiovXeveis, fiovXeveiy. On 
the ending -at, see § 29, E. 6. 

2. This law holds good in compounds, e. g. <j>epe 'irp6scf)€pe, (pevye eKcpcvye, 
X^Tire oTTt^AetTre ; also in words in the Subj., when they are not contracted, e. gr 
«aTa(rx«, Kardcrxv^i Kcnda'X'^lJ'-^Vi iirlffira, iiriffirps (but avafiuy airoffTSof Sta5«, 
■na.pa.ZS>, ava^wfA^v, etc., on account of the contraction, avafidoo, avafida/jLeu, etc.). 
Still, this rule has the following exceptions : (a) the accent cannot go back 
beyond the syllable of the preceding word, which before the composition, had 
the accent, e. g. air6Bos {aird the preceding word being accented on the ultimate), 
ffufj-irpois, iiriffx^s, iirides (not 6,Trodos, (Tvfnrpoes, eTrjtrxes, cTrtSes) ; (b) the accent 
cannot go back of the first two words of the compound, as in the examples 
just quoted, and also trwe'/cSos, TrapevSes (not avveKdos, but like e/cSos; not 
Trdpeu^es, but like ev^es) ; (c) the accent cannot go back of an existing augment 
(this holds of the Impf., Aor., and Plup. as well as of the Perf.), e. g. irposeTxov 
like elxoj', Trapeffxov like taxov, ^i/qyov like ?iyov, i^rjv like ^u (not irpSseix^'^t 
irdpeffxov, e^-nyov, e^r/j/) ; so also iTposrJKOj. like fjKOV, aireipyov like eJpyov, but 
Imp. 6.ir€ipye, also a<p7KTai, acplKTo, like f/cTai, Tkto. 

Exceptions to the Primary Law. 

3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms : — 

(a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut. 
Sing. Part, of the same tense as acute, e. g. XnreTu (from Awreetj/), Xnrcay, -6v] 
and in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, etVe, 
^A^€, evpe, Xa^e, and i5e (but in composition, iirenre, OTrJAajSe, &ireX^€, etside). 

(b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex, e. g. Xafiov, Stov (from 
TifS^rj/xi). 

Remark 1. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor. 
Act. draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law, e. g. 
(K^aXe, e^cA^c, gkSos, eKdon, airSSos, a.Tr6doTe, /ueraSos, fj-erdSoTi (yet not &Tro5o5f 



J 118.] VERBS. ACCENTUATION. 145 

fitToSos, see No. 2), but iK^oKuv, iK^aXdv, e/c\t7re?j/, i^eX^dv, etc. But in the 
Imp. Sing, second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -w, the circumflex remains on the 
ultimate in compounds also, e. g. iKfiaXov, a<piKOv, iKKiirov, iiriXa^ov, d<^eA.ou, 
iyeyeyKov ; so in verbs in -/xt, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla- 
bic preposition, e. g. irpoSou, iv^ov, acpov ; yet the accent is drawn back, when 
the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. aTr65ov, Kard^ov, 
airS^ov ; but in the Dual and PL of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all 
cases drawn back, e. g. iK^dXea-^e, oTroAajSetrS^e, irp6So<r^ef ey^ia^e, &<pe<r^€f 

(c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -s (Gen. -ros), con- 
sequently in all active Participles of verbs in -fii, as well as in those of the iirst 
and second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass, of all verbs, e. g. jSejSow- 
\€VK(t>s (Gren. -Stos), 'iT€<p7}vdos (Gen. -otos), fiovXev^eis {Gen. -eyros), rwrels (Gen. 
•tyros), Iffrds (Gen. -dyros), ri^eis (Gen. -4yTos), SiSovs (Gen. -Svtos), Seixyis 
(Gen. -{lyros), Bicurrdsf iK^eis, irpodovsf Gen. dicurrdyros, iK^eyros, Trpo86yTos» 

Kem. 2. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep- 
tion, e. g. iraiSiiaaSy Gen. iraiSevaayros. 

(d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass, as circumflex, e. g. 
BovXev^w, Tpifiu (cS being contracted from -ecu). 

4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : — 

(a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of first Aor. Act. and second Aor. 
Mid. ; also in all infinitives in -yai, hence in all active infinitives according to 
the formation in -fii, as well as in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass, and 
of the first and second Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. rerixp^ai, ^e^ovXeva^cUf 
T6Ti/t7j(r3'Ot, ire^tA7jO'(^aJ, fie/xior^uff^ai] — (pvXd^ai, fiovXevaai, rifiriffcu, (piX'^aaiy 
iuff^utrcUj — Xiirea^ai, iK^ec^ai, SiaB6ff^ai] — lardvai, ri^eyai, 5iB6yaiy SeiKyvycUf 
ar^vait iK<rrr)you, ^e7you, iK^e7you, dovyaif fieraBovyai, : — ^ovXev^yai, rpifiTJyai ; 
>— fiefiovXevKcycUy XeXoiirfyai. 

(b) In the Participle Perf. Mid. or Pass., e. g. fiePovXevfxeyos, -fieyri, -fiiyov, 
rerturjixeyoSy Tre<piXrjiJ.4yos. 

(c) As circumflex in the Dual and Plu. of the first and second Aor. Subj. 
Pass., e. g. fiovXev^wfiey. 

Kem. 3. The three corresponding forms of the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp. 
first Aor. Mid., and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist 
of three or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished 
from one another by the accent, in the following manner : — 

Inf. 1st Aor. A. )8ou\6i}<roj, Imp. 1st Aor. M. PovX^vtrai, Opt. 1st Aor. A. PovXeva-ai, 
irotTJcai, TToiriffoUf iroi-fjffai. 

But when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf. 
first Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt., fiLrst Aor. Act., e. g 
<t>vXd4cu ; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. tpvXa^ai. 

13 



146 VERBS. SYLLABIC AUGMENT. [^§ 119, 120. 



* 119. Further view of the Augment and Redu- 
plication. 

1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication 
{k 108, 3), it is necessary to treat them more particularly. 

2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses (the 
Impf , Plup., and Aor.) take the augment, but retain it only in 
the Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal. 

k 120. (a) Syllabic Augment, 

1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem 
begins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing ci to the 
stem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the 
Plup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, and 
hence this augment is called the syllabic augment, e. g. /3ov- 
Aev«j), Impf. i-/3ovX€vov, Aor. c-jSovXevo-a, Plup. i-/3e-/^vX€VK€Lv. 

2. If the stem begins with p, this letter is doubled when the 
augment is prefixed (§ 23, 3), e. g. pltttod, to throw, Impf. eppurrov, 
Aor. 'dppLxj/aj Perf. epptcfia. Plup. eppL<f)€cv. 

Eemaek 1. The three verbs fiovXofiai, to vnU ; Svvafiai, tobe able; and 
ueWu, to be about to do, to intend, among the Attic writers take r;, instead of e, 
for the augment ; still, this is found more among the later than the earlier 
Attic writers, e. g. ifiov\riSn)y and rjfiovX-fjStnv ; ihwafi-qv and Tfivvikfi-nv, iSvirf)^v 
and ijSvvi^v (Taut always iBwdaSniu) ; e/ieAAov and ^{jl^KKov. The Aorist is 
very seldom VeAA7j(ro (comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26). 

Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers, the augment € is often omitted in the 
Pluperfect ; in compounds, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; in sim- 
pFes, when a vowel which is not to be elided precedes, e. g. ava$e$T]Kei, X. An. 
5, 2, 15 ; KaToZ^Zpaixi]KC(rav, X. H. 5. 3, 1 ; KaraXeXenrro, X. Cy. 4. 1, 9 ; Ktfra 
TreiTTciKei, Th. 4, 90 ; ai arvv^Kai yeyeyr^vTO, X. Cy. 3. 2, 24 (according to the 
best MSS.) ; but in the Impf. and Aorists, the syllabic augment is omitted 



Accordmg to analogy, we may suppose that € is prefixed to all verbs in the 
augmented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or consonant. If the 
verb begins with a consonant, € appears as an additional svllable. e. g. l-irpar- 
Toi/, but if with a vowel, e is assimilated with that vowel and lengthens it, if it 
is not already long, e. g. 6.ya}, Impf. ^ayou = ^yoy ; e'^e'Xoj, Impf e'e^eXov = fj^e- 
Xou ; oiceWw, Impf 46k€\\ou = &Ke\\ov. K the word beains A\-ith a long vowel, 
It absorbs 6, e.g. -^Xt^o-Kw, Impf. i-fiXacXKou = i^XaaKou ; ii^iCw, Im-pf. iciSuCoy = 
&^iQ)y When the verb begins with e, the augment € is sometimes contracted 
With this into €t, e. g. dxovy instead of ^x^y. 



H 121, 121.] VERBS. TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 



147 



only in the lyric parts of the tragedies, and here not often ; in the dramatic 
portions it is rarely omitted, and only in the speeches of the messengers {p-qaeis 
4'y7€A.t*coi) ; also at the beginning and middle of the trimeter, and likewise at the 
beginning of a sentence, and even in these cases but seldom. The Impf. 
XPV^t which, together with ixpv^t is used in prose, is an exception. 



$ 121. (b) Temporal Augment. 

The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins 
with a vowel ; it consists in lengthening the first stem -vowel. 
This is caUed the temporal augment because it increases the 
time, e. g. 



a becomes 


»?, e.g. 


''a.yu 


Impf. ^yov 


Perf. ?ixa 


Plup. ^X«*»' 


c 


»?, " 


i\-irtCa 


u 


1j\iri(ov 


" ^Airi/ca 


u 


i]\TrlKUV 


r 


h " 


*lKfT€V(a 


n 


'iKerevov 


" 'iKtrevKa 


u 


'iKerevKeiy 


" 


«, » 


6fil\€W 


cc 


uyilKovv 


" ufxlk-nKa 


u 


wfj.iX'fjKfiy 


c « 


V, » 


'vfiplCoo 


(( 


"v^piCov 


" "vfipiKa 


(( 


'vfipLKiiy 


OL " 


V^ " 


alpcu 


u 


flpovi/ 


" ^pTjKa 


(C 


rip^Kfiv 


ou " 


„u, " 


av\4cD 


(( 


7}ij\0Vlf 


" 7ii\r]Ka 


(( 


T]V\'f)K€iy 


ot " 


V, " 


oIktI^w 


(( 


^tcTi(oy 


" ^KTIKU 


(( 


ifKrUeiy. 



Remark. Verbs which .begin with tj, f, u, a», oVf and €t, do not admit the 
augment, e. g. rirrdofxaiy to be overcome, Impf rirrdix-ny, Perf ?irrijfiai, Plup. 
TjTTTjfiriv ] 'iirSu, to press, Aor. "'tTroxro; 'vtry6<D, to lull to sleep, Aor. "uTrvoxra ; 
»<^6A€w, to benefit, Impf. u<pi\iov', ovri^u^to vx)und, Impf. oina^ov; 6)f/c«, 
to yield, Impf. cTkov, Aor. clfa; ctKo^w, to liken, is an exception, which among 
the Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented, e. g. clf/co^ov, eiKaaa, ^^Kaaixai, 
seldom fiKaCov (e. g. Th. 6, 92. fJKaCoyy in the best MSS.), ^/caao, rlKaa-fiai. 
Also those verbs whose stem begins with cu, are usually without an augment, 
e. g. etjxonai, to supplicate, fvxofMTjy, more rarely i]vx^y^w^ l^ut Perf lilyiiai (not 
iZyfjiou) ; fvpiffKUy to find, in good prose, always omits the augment. 



§ 122. Remarks on the Augment. 

I. Verbs beginning with a followed by a vowel, have d instead of 17, e. g. 
'dt«, (poet.), to perceive, Impf. "aiov; but those beginning with d, ou, and 01 fol- 
lowed by a vowel, do not admit the augment, e. g. 'oTjS/^onioi, to Aaue an un- 
pleasant sensation, Impf 'dTjSi^OjUT?*' ; avaivw, to dry, Impf. aiaivov; olaKiCu, to 
steer, Impf oldKi(ov ; also audxiaKO}, to destroy, though no vowel follows d, has 
ovoAoxro, avaXuKa, as well as avrjAwcro, airfiXwKa. But the poetic aei'Sw (prose 
^5«), to smgr, and ato-o-cu (Att. ^o-cw), to 7*usA, take the augment, e.g. ^€i5oj/ (prose 
pSo;/), ij'i^a (Att. 77|a) ; o5^o/iaj, to believe, ifSfjirjyf etc. does not belong here, since 
the following ox, is not a part of the stem. 



148 VERBS. REDUPLICATION. [f 123 

2. Some verbs also beginning with oi and followed by a consonant, do not 
take the augment, e.g. oiKovpiw, to guard the house, Aor. olKovfni<ra ; otviCu^ to 
smdlofwine, Impf. olyiCov, olv6co,to intoxicate, Perf. Mid. or Pass, olywfieifos 
and <fvo)fi.ivos ; oltrrpdu, to make furious, Aor. olarpriaa, 

3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with e, have €t instead of t] for the 
augment, viz. eaw, to permit, Impf. efwi', Aor. etoura; i^i(u), to accustom, (to 
which belongs also eta^a, to He accustomed, from the Epic e^w) ; fttra, poetic 
Aor. (stem 'EA), to place (in prose only, Part. Aor. Mid. iora^ievos and fla-dfieyos, 
establishing, founding) ; ehiffcrwyto mnd; %\K(a,to draw; Aor. ttkKvaa (stem 
'EAKT) ; cTAoj', to take, Aor. (stem *EA) of oupeoj; txofiai, to follow ; 4pyd- 
(ofiaiftowork; epvu, kptrv^Wyto creep,to go; ear idw, to entertain ; tx*^*^ 
have (on the Epic etfiai, see § 230). 

4. The six following verbs take the syUabic, instead of the temporal, 
augment : — 

&yyvfii, to break, Aor. €o|o, etc. (^ 187, 1). 

aA-fcKo/Aot^capior, Perf. €&\ci)Ka and ^A«Ka, captns sum (§ 161, 1). 

avSdvwy to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. lcu/5ai/o)/, Perf. IdSo, Aor. IdSor 

(§ 230.) 
ovpeWf mingere, ioipovv, iovpr]Ka, 
w^iuy to push, i^^ow, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. Siw^ovyrOf 

Th. 2, 84; ^^alff^Tjo-tu', X. H. 4. 3, 12 ; &^€i, PI. Charm. 155, c). 
wy4ofxaif to buy, Impf. iuyovfiiju {uvovfi-qvy Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. ^ 4; i^et- 

vovvTO, Aeschin. c. Ctes. c. 33; avruviiTo, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. iwyrjad- 

HT]v (see however § 179, 6.), Perf. idyriiiai. 

5. The verb I op to^cd, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second 
syllable, Impf. ^dipraCou. The same is true of the following forms of the 
Plup.n.: — 

■ EIKil, second Perf. eoiKo, lam like, Plup. itpKeiy. 
eXirofiai, to hope, second Perf eoAiro, I hope, Plup. idXxeiy.} 
EPrfl, to do, second Perf. eopya, Plup. idpyeiy. ) ^ 

6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the 
same time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transferred to the e of 
the augment : — 

opdw, to see, Impf edpwv, Perf. edpouca, edtpofiat. 

ayoiycojto open, Impf aveuyov, Aor. avew^a (Inf. ovoZfoi), etc. 

a^iaKOfiaiytobe taken, Aor. ea\ay (Inf. aXuvai, a), and 7ika>y. 



§ 123. Reduplication. 

1. Reduplication (H08, 4) is the repeating the first conso- 
nant of the stem with c. Tliis imphes a completed action, and 
hence is p refixed to the Perf.,i e. g. Xe'-AvKo, to the Fut. Perf, 

P.U^'^'wl' ^\ "^ay say that the first letter of aU verbs is repeated in the 
ren., wnetner the verb begins with a vowel or a consonant. When the conso- 



1 



f 123.] 



VERBS. 



REDUPLICATION. 



149 



e. g. K€'KO(rix-q(TOfX(u (from Koa-fiiw), and to the Plup., which, as an 
historical tense, takes also the augment c before the redupUca- 
tion, e. g. i-^e-(3ovXevK€Lv. This remains in all the modes, as 
well as in the Inf and Part. 

2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem 
begins with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid ; but 
verbs beginning with p, yv, yX, ^X,' take only the simple aug- 
ment, except fSXaTTTU} )8cy8Xa<^a, /3A.acr</>'>y/xca) ySeySXao-j^Tj/u-T/Ka, and 
/SXooravw ^i^XaxrrqKa and l^XaxrrqKay e. g. 



A.j;«, to loose, 
^u, to sacrifice, 
<j)vT(v<a, to plant, 
Xoptvu, to dance, 
ypd<pu, to icrite, 
K\iy<t), to bend down, 
Kpivu, to judge, 
•KVfoiy to breathe, 
b\auy to bruise, 
{^iirru, to throw, 
yvwpl^u), to make known, 
fiKoKfiw, to be slothful, 
yXv^t to carve, 



Perf. \(-\vKa 



T6-^KO (§21, 2.) 
ire-ipvr^vKa (§ 21, 2.) 
Kf-x6pfVKa (§21, 2.) 
yf-ypa<pa 

K€-K\lKa 
Kf-KplKa 
TTe-TTVeUKO 

T6-^AoKa (§ 21, 2.) 
^pP^pa (§ 23, 3.) 
i-yt/upiKa 



Plup. i-\€-\VK€lV 

" i-Trf-<pvr€VKfU^ 

" i-K€-XOpfVK€iy 

" i-y€-ypd<p(iy 

*' 4-Ke-K\lK(iy 

" 4-Ki-ltpiKflV 

" i-TTf-irvevKfty 

" i-Tf-d\dK€iy 

" 4^l>l<puy 

" i-yvupiK€iv 

" i-fi\aK6muy 

" 4-y\v<p€iy. 



3. Besides the verbs just mentioned beginning with p, yv, ySA, 
yX, the reduplication is not used, when the stem begins with a 
double consonant or with two single consonants, which are not 
a mute and hquid, or with three consonants, e. g. 



^7j\({«, to emulate. 


Perf. i-Ci\\b,Ka 


Plup. i-Cr}\aiK(iy 


IcvJcD, to entertain, 


t( 


i-^4vtDKa 


tt 


i-^fyuKfiv 


tf<£AAa>, to sing. 


(( 


t-^oKKa 


« 


i-ipd\K(iy 


(Tirdpo), to sow. 


" 


t-c-KopKa 


i( 


i-(ma.pKiiv 


KTi(o), to Imild, 


(( 


t-KTiKa 


cc 


i-KTiKiiy 


irrv<r<Tu, tofM, 


(( 


t-trrvxa- 


u 


i-irrvxfiy 


(TTparriyeWf to be a 


general, " 


i-<rrpar-fiyT]Ka 


u 


i-a-TparrtyiiKfiy 



nant is repeated, c is joined with it in order to vocalize it. If the verb begins 
with a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the initial vowel is 
short, and thus form a long vowel ; but if the initial vowel is long, it absorbs 
the other, e. g. 

6y<i>, Perf. properly &ax°' = ^X°- 

" " itytpKa = ijyfpKa 

" " 6oiKT)Ka = (fKrjKa. 

Sometimes when the verb begins with €, the double e, instead of coalescing 
into -1), is contracted into -ci, e. g. idu, Perf. eJfcufo, instead of ijoKa. 

* "Words beginning with these letters are excepted on account of the diffi- 
culty of repeating them. 

13* 



dye loco f 

olKCWy 



150 VERBS. ATTIO EEDUPLICATION. [^ 124 

Remark 1. The two verbs mfiyfia-Kta (stem MNA), to remind, and Krdo- 
v.ai, to acquire, though their stem begins with two consonants, which are not a 
mute and a liquid, still take the reduplication, [ie-fivvfJMi, K€-KTT)fmi, i-fie-fiirfifirjv^ 
i-Ke-KT-fj/x-nu. The regular form iKrrinai^ is Ionic, but it is found also in Aesch. 
Prom. 792, and in Plato with Ke-KTriixai; likewise in Th. 2, 62. ■n-pore/cTTj/LteVa 
(as according to the MSS. it must probably be read, though elsewhere, Th. 
always uses KCKT-nfiai). Perfects f )rmed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seem- 
ing exceptions to the rules of reduplication, e. g. SeS/xrjKa, Hirraficu, etc. (§§22, 
and 16, 8.) 

4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this 
liquid, but take et for the augment : — 

Xafifidvcoy to take, Perf, ei\r}(pa Plup. €l\-fi<p€iv 

\ayxd.va, to obtain, " €?X7jx« " etA^x^"' 

\4yw, (TuAAeyw, to aillect, . " <rvuel\oxa, ffwelXcyfiou " (rvvfi\6xfiy 
'PEXl, to say, " elprjKa " etfrfiKeiu 

fieipoixai, to obtain, " iiixaprai (with rough breathing), it isfaied. 

Rem. 2. The regular reduplication is sometimes found in the Attic poets, 
e. g. XeX-fififxe^a, ^vWeXeyfievoSj also in Xen. eTrjAeAey/ueVoi. occurs, Cy. 3. 3, 41 
(Altorf, aireiX^yfi&oi), and e/cAeAex<^«*> H. 1. 6, 16.—-Aia\4yoiJ.ai, to converse, 
has Perf. di,ei\eyfiai, though the simple Ae7«, in the sense of to say, always 
takes the regular reduplication, AeAey^ot, dictus sum (Perf. Act wanting) 



§ 124. Attic Reduplication. 

1. Several verbs, beginning with a, e, or o, repeat, in the Perf. 
and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of 
the stem This is called the Attic Reduphcation Tlie Plup. 
then veiy rarely takes an additional augment ; e. g. SuopwpvKTo, 
X. An. 7. 8, 14 ; so rjK-r]K6€Lv, but sometimes oKT^Koai/. 

2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have this reduphca- 
tion, are the following : — 

(a) Those whose second stem-syllable is short by nature : — 

oAew, -«, to grind, ifi^a,^ .£, to vomit, 

(oA-i^A€«ro) oA-i]A6(r/*ot in-fjixcKa ifi-fifiefffuu 

(aA-7jAe/c6tj/) aX-TjXea-firiu ifi-rtixeKeiv ifx-nnffffi-nv 

ap6co, -w, to plough, ixdai (e'Aauvco), to drive, 

{ap-fjpoKo) ap-fjpo/xai eA-7)Aa/ca eA-^Aajuoi 

{ap-np6Keiv) ap-rjp6fi.r]v eA-jjAoKetj/ e'A-iyAti/tTjv 

'OMOn, 6fj.vv(ii, to swear, 'OAEH, 6\\vfii, to destroy, 

Ofi-dnoKa ofi-(i)fio<Tfiai oK-dX^Ka Perf. 11. 6\-a)\a ('OAn) 

dfi-u)fi6Kuv 6fi-afi6(Tfi'nv oA-wAeKeti; Plup. II. oA-tiAeu' 



♦ 125.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS. 151 

i\4yx(^i to conviitce, opirTtt), to dig^ 

{iX-^KiyX") i^-'fl^^y^'OU. op-d}pvxa. op-cipxryficu and &pvyfjuxi 

(^A.-TjXeyx^"') eA--7?Ae7)LC7jv op-upvx^'-V 6p-(i)pvyfMT]v and wpvyfirjv. 

Further: eAfo-o-o), to wind^ (^A-^XiXo), i\-i]\iyijmi (the rough breathing be- 
ing rejected), and in good usage among later writers, ctXtyyuot ; S^w ('OAfl), 
to smeZZ, 55-ft>5a ; (p4pu) {'ENEKCi.) ^ to carnf^ iu'-fivoxa, iv^veyixai] i<r^i<u ('EAXl), 
to eat^ iS-'fiSoKou, iS-riSefffmi-^ ^7"> to lead, Perf. usually ^x«5 u'/rjoxa (instead ' 
of 07-^70x09 so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the 
Atticists as not Attic, though in Lysias 5 but Perf. Mid. or Pass, always ^7/nat. 

(b) Those wliich in the second stem-syllable have a vowel 
long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduphcation 
(except epctiSco) : — 

i\ci^», to anoint, Ilkovw^ to hear, 

iX-TjA-tc^cj^ a.\-i]\lpiix.T]U ij K-f} k6 e iv fjKOVfffJc/jv 

'EAETOn, epxa^iou, to cone, ip^iSw, to prop, 

i\--fi\v^a i p'-qpuKa 4p--f]pn<riKU 

i\-Tj\v^en/ i p-7]p^iK(iv 4p-ripd(Tfj.'qv 

iiyfipco, to collect, iyelpw, to wake, 

iy-4fyfpKa ay--fiy(pfiat ( iy-ijy tpKa ) iy- -fiye p /lai 

h.y-r]y4pKUV i.y-r]y(piJ.7p> ( iy-rjyfpK€iu) iy-7jy 4 pfiri y. 

So from iyupw comes the second Perf. iyp^opa (on account of euphony 
instead of ^7-^770^0), Itvake, second Plup. Act. iyprrySpciv, I awoke. 

Remark 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not found 
in good Attic prose. 

Rem. 2. The verb Hywy to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and ( 
0€pa>, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication ; here, however, the 
reduplicated vowel takes the temporal augment, and that only in the Ind., and 
the vowel of the stem remains pure : — 

Hyu, to lead, Aor. II. I^y-ayoy, Inf. ayay€7u, Aor. II. Mid. T)yay6fir\v ; 
(pep 03, to carry (stem 'EFK), Aor. II. i}v-€yKov, Inf. iy-eyKuUf Aor. L ^v-eyKa^ 
Inf. ip-eyKou, Aor. Pass. 7]v-4x^v, In£ iv-tx^^f"- 



$ 125. Augment and Reduplication in Compound 

Words. 

1 First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the 
augment and reduplication between the preposition and the 
verb ; the final vowel of prepositions, except Trepi and Trpo, is 
ehded [H3, 2, (a)] ; Trpo frequently combines with the augment 
by means of Crasis {k 10), and becomes tt/dov; Ik before the 
syllabic augment is changed to c^ (M5, 3 ) ; and ev and <rvv 



152 



VERBS. REMARKS. 



[$ 126. 



resume their v which had been assimilated {§ 18, 2), or changed 
(^ 19, 3), or dropped (20, 2), e. g. 

OTro-j8o\Aa), to throw from, Im. hir-efiaXKov Pf. aTro-$4^\vKa Pip. oir-c^e^X^Kictr 
nepi-fidWu, to throw around, irepi-efia^Aou irepi-fie^KvKa vepi-ifieMKfiP 

I irpo-efiaWou 



TrpovfiaWov 
i^-4^aXKov 

iy-eyiyuS/xriv 
iv-4fiaXKov 



irpo-fi€P\r]Ka 
Trpo-fi€fi\r]Ka 

ffvv-eiKoxa 
ffvy-e^fiKpa 
iy-yeyoya 

(rvu-effKfvoKa 



vpo-i^(fi\r}Kfiy 
vpoiiPefiK-fiKeiy 

avv-ei\6x^iv 
avv-€ppi<f>€iy 
iy-eyeyoufiv 

CVV-iCKivijCflV. 



b vpo-fidWo), to throw before, 

iK-fid\Xa}, to throw out, 

(rv\-\4ya, to collect together, 

ffvp-piirTco, to throw together, 
J iy-yiyuo/jMif to be in, 
wf ili-fidXhi)}, to throw in, 
f- cu-CKeuet^w, to pack up, 

2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with Sv<s, take the aug 
ment and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem 
of the simple verb begins with a consonant or with t] or (a; (b) 

'" but in the middle, when the stem of the simple verb begins 
with a vowel, except rj or w, e. g. 

' Svs-rvx^w, to be unfortunate, 4-Svs-ruxovv 5e-5vs-Tux7j/fa i-S^-ivsTux^Keiy 
I dvs-oyireco, to make ashamed, i-Bvs-dyirovv he-Svs-anrriKa 4-Se-dvs-unrf)K€iv 
Zvs-ap^ffriw^ to be displeased, Sus-Tjpeorouy Svs-rjpearTjKU ivs-TtpfffrfiKfiy. 

Remark 1. Verbs compounded with 65 may take the augment and redupli- 
cation at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit them at the 
beginning, and euepyerew usually in the middle, e. g. 

ev-Tvx4(o, to be fortunate, Impf. Tjv-Tvxeou, but commonly ev^ix^oy 

ev-ux^ouai, to feast well, " ev-uxeSfnjv 

€u-6p7eTcw, to do good, " €v-r]py4r€0Vf but commonly ev-epyfreoVf Perf. 

€u-7jp7eT7j/co, but commonly cu-epyeTTjKo. 

3. Third Rule. All other compoimds take the augment and 
reduplication at the beginning, e. g. 

tiv^o\oy4(a, to relab)) iixv^oXSyeop u€-fiv^x6yrjKa 

ot/co5ofie&>, to build, ^KoSSfieov yKo5<^/x7jKa. 

Thus irappricftdCoiMai (from -rrapprfa-la, and this from vay aod ()vffis), to speak 
openly, Aor. i-nrap^riaiaadfiriUy Perf. ire-ira/J^Tjafoo-jiuu. 

Rem. 2. 'OSoiroiew has the Perf. &i(meiroiri<r^ai, X. An. 5. 3, 1. Lycurg. c. 

Leocr. § 139, has 'nnroT€Tp6((yr}Key. 






j 126. Remarks. 

1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment 
in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- 
tion : — 



} 126.] VERBS. REMARKS. 153 

AnirfxofMUy to clothe one^s self, Impf. iifiweixSixrfv,^ or a/xireiX' Aor. 7ifi,-Ke<Tx6fn]v* 
av4xofuu, to endure (not avfX''>)i^'' ^veixonw " i)ve(Tx6fM-qy 

aix<piyvo€w, to be uncertain^ " iiix<p(yy6ovv and iffKpiyvSovv 

ayop^Soiy to raise up^ " ijywp^ovv Perf. ^vup^uKa " ^vwphwatt 

tyox^^ofy to molest, " tivwx^ow " T^yux^Vto- " ^voix^'')^^ 

napoiyfu, to riot, " 4Trap<pyovy " ircTrop^j/TjKa *' iirapcfyrjffa. 

2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not 
compounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, 
viz. 

Hiairdu) (from SiaiTayfood), (a) to feed, (b) to be a judge, Impf iSirlrwy and 
Si^Ttoy, Aor. ^SijjTTjo-a and StpTTjera ; Perf. ScSjjfTTjKa ; Impf. Mid. Sirirdixrfy 

BioKoyfo), to serve (from SioKoyos, servant), Impf. iSirindyovy and Sir^KSyovyf 
Perf. SeSirjKdyrjKa 

afjL<pi(T^-nr4co (from AM4>I2BHTH5), to dispute, Impf. iif^«T$r]Tovy and i]fi<pur- 

fiT]TOVy. 

3. Exceptions to the first rule. Several verbs compounded with prepositions, 
take the augment before the preposition, since they have nearly the same 
signification as the simple verbs, e. g. 

iifi<piyyo(u {yocu)), to be uncertain, Impf. ijfupiyydovy, or i]fi<(>fyy6ovy (No. 1) 

kfjLcpifyyvfxi, to clothe, Aor. T]fi(pi((ra, Perf. ijfKpUafiai 

iiriffrafxai, to know, Impf. ^irtCTO/UTjf 

iupl7)fii, to dismiss, " itplovy and i}<plovy, or r}<p'eiy [diK9 

Hci^iCo, to set, " iKd^iCoy (old Att. also Ka^7(oy), Pf KeKi- 

Ka^e(ofiai, to ait, " iKCl^((6^l■nyalld Ko^fC (without Aug.) 

Kd^/xai, to sit, " iKCL^^iqv and Ka^ixr)y 

Ko^fvSu, to sleep, •' iKd^fvSoy, seldom ko^vSov. 

4. Those verbs are apparently an exception to the first rule, which are not 
formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by deriva- 
tion from a word already compounded, e. g. 

iyayriovfiai^ to oppose one's self to (from ivayrios) Impf. T]vayrioitir)v 

kyriZiK^w, to defend at law ( " kyrlZiKos) '* i)ynZiKOvy scndi ^vrkhiKOVV 

iLyrifio\4cD, to hit uix>n ( " iin-<)3o\^) " Tjyrifi6\ovy 

iniropau, to fjiti It htj traffic ( " i/xiropij) " iffiiropwy 

ifATr€S6(i), to estaUish ( " ifiirtSos) '' i}fjLir(Sovy. 

5. Many verbs, however, which apparently are formed only by derivation, are 
treated, even by the best classical writers, as if they were compounded of a 
simple verb and a preposition. Thus, ■wapavo^i.fu, iraprjySfjMvy and irapfySnovy, 
'irapriv6fj.r}<ra, Perf. irapay€v6fnjKa, although it is not from -napd and ayo/xfu or 
yofifo), which two verbs are not in use, but from the compound irapdyofios ; so 
further, iyxfip<'> (from 'ErXEIP02), to take in hand, Impf. iy^x^lpovy; iirt^v 
fi(<D (from 'Eni0TMO2), todesire, Impf iirf^vnow ; iv^vfM^ojjiai, Aor. ivtbvfi^- 
^y, Perf. 4yri^vfi-qfiai; KaTTjyopfu) (from KaTrjyopos), to accuse, Impf. KaTr\y6- 
povy, Perf. Karriy6pT]Ka', ir po^vfiovfiai (from Trp6^nos), to desire earnestly^ 
Impf. irpov^vfiovfiTjy and irpo^fiovfi-qy ; so iyKUfiid^eiy, irpo<^7jT«i5ct>', iytdpt^eiVf 
iKK\r}<Ti<i((iy, inroTrrfvay, 4irirr}iiifiy, 4ix<payi^(iy, avvfpyuy, etc. 

* So PI. Phaed. 87, 6, according to most and the best MSS. 

• Eur. Med. 1128, and Aristoph. Thesm. 165. 



154 VE7.BS IN -o>. DERIVATION OF TENSES. [H 127, 128 



Formation of the Tenses op Verbs in -». 

( 127. Division of Verbs in -w according to the 

Characteristic. 

Verbs in -o) are divided into two principal classes, accord* 
ing to the difference of the characteristic (§ 108, 5) : — 

I. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel ; these arc* 
again divided into two classes : — 

A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, 
except a, e, o, e. g. TraiBev-co, to educate ; Xu-o), to loose ; 

B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is a, e, or o, e. g. 
TLfjid-w, to honor ; (piXi-co, to love ; fiLcr^o-co, to let out 
for hire. 

II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; 
these are again divided into two classes : — 

A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine 
mutes, e. g. Xelir-oi), to leave ; 7r\eK-(o, to twine ; Trel^-ay, 
to persuade ; 

B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four 
liquids, X, fx, v, p, e. g. ar/yeW-co, to announce ; vifi-cj, 
tq divide ; ^atV-w, to show ; <f>^eCp-(Oy to destroy. 

Remark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act., 
all verbs are divided into : — 

(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not 
accented, e. g. \u-w, •kx4k-w, etc. ; 

(b) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers. ; these 
are consequently contract verbs, e. g. t*/a«, <pi7^^ /ua^A. 

§ 128. Derivation of Tenses. 

All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men- 
tioned above (§ 113), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only have 
a distinct tense-characteristic (§ 110); this is always wanting in the Pres. 
and Impf., the mode-vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the 
Pres. and Impf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, e. g. 
TtJTTT-w (pure stem TTH), kfxapr-dvc (pure stem 'AMAPT) ; the Secondary tenses 
never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without 
the tense-characteristic ; yet, in certain cases (§ 140), they admit a change of 



\ 129.] FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 155 

the stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from a common stem, 
may be distinguished from each other and classed by themselves. Tenses, 
included in such a class, may be said to be derived from one another. The 
principal classes are the three following : — 

I. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. These are the Pres. and 
Impf. Act., Mid., or Pass,, e. g, 

(pure stem TTII) tutt-t-co rinr-r-oficu 

n. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary 
tenses, e. g. 

(a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., e. g. (7r€-<^pa5-/co) Tr4-<ppaKa, i-ire-<ppi- #7— i' 

(b) Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These do not have the tense-charac- 
teristic; from the Perf. ISIid. or Pass, the Put. Perf. is formed by 
rejecting -fxai and annexing -aoixcu, e. g. Tc-TV(x-ficu (instead of Termr- 
fJMi), irf-rvfi/jLTiVy rdTvtpofiai (instead of r^rvTraofuu). The Perf. has 
a short vowel, but the Put. Act. and Mid. a long vowel, e. g. Auew, 
AeAvfca, XeA.v/t«u, Auao?, Avcro/iou, Sew, SeSrjKa, SeSejuat, Srjao), SrjaofMU ; 
so the Put. Perf. has a long vowel, e. g. XeXiaofiai, Si^a-o/xai ; 

(c) First Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. rvxpco Tw\iofmt 

t-rxf^a 4-Tv^dfi7iv ; 

(d) First Aor. and first Fut. Pass., e. g. i-rv<p-^v Tvcp-^arofxai. 

III. Tenses, which are formed from the pure stem without a tense-character- 
istic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem- vowel. These 
are the Secondary tenses, e. g. 

(a) The second Perf. and second Plup. Act. e. g. re-riJir-o, i-re-rvir-eiv ; 

(b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. e-\ad^-ovy i-\a^-6fiT]v from Aov' 
^dvo> (pure stem AA0) ; 

(c) Tha second Aor. and second Fut. Pass., e. g. ^-tStt-t/v, TCir-^<ro/wu. 

§ 129. I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs. 

1. In pure verbs, both Barytoned and Perispomena, the 
tense-endings are commonly appended to the unchanged char- 
acteristic of the verb, e. g. /3ov\€v-o-o), /Sefiovkiv-Ka. Pure verbs 
commonly form no Secondary tenses, but only the Primary 
tenses; the Perf. with k (ko), the Fut. and Aor. with o- and 3 
(o-o), era, 3r]v, ^Tjcro-zxat). Pure verbs, however, are subject to the 
following regular change in the stem : — 

2. The short characteristic vowel of the Pres. and Impf, is 
lengthened in the other tenses, viz. 

2 into r, e. g. ixrjvfw, to be angry, ixTjvt-a-o), 4-fi-iivTaa, etc. 

a " Vf " Kci)\v-(i) (u commonly long), to hinder, KaXv-aa>, Kc-KdiKvuatf etc 



156 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [§ 130 

c into 7j, e. g. </)tA.e-w {<pt\S>), to love, (piX-fi-ffu, ire-KpiKri-Ka, etc. 

" a>, " {xiaSro-ta {fii(r^a>), to let out for hire, fjuff^do-ffw, fie-fxiffdw-Ka, etc. 

a " 7j, " TiiM-a (rifiw), to honor, Tt^^?-<rw, re-rifiTi-Kaf etc. 

Eemakk 1. a is lengthened into o, when e, t, or p precedes it [comp. § 43, 
I, (a)], e. g. 

^d-», to permit, ed-cw, efatra, 6?a/fa, eta/xai, €i<l^r)V', effria-Wy to entertain, kaiit- 
cw ; (pcopa-w, to steal, <pa>pa-(T(a ; but iyyvd-u, to give as a pledge, iyyv-i^trw ; fioaat, 
to call out, fi(yf](rofjm, ifionffa (like 07S077). 

The two following imitate those in -eda, -»(£«, -pdooj viz. 
aXoa-Wyto strike, to thresh, old Att. Fut. a\oa-<ra> ; but usually oAo^cw; 
d.Kpo&-ofiai, to hear, Fut. aKpo&ffo/aai, Aoe ijKpodtrifnty (like a^poa). 

Bem. 2. The verbs xpda, to give an oracle; xP^'^F-^-h to use; and rirpdv 
to bore, though p precedeSj lengthen 0. into tj, e. g. xpvo'oju.ai, rpiiaw. 

k 130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs with 
a short Characteristic-vowel. 

The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule {h 129, 2) re- 
tain the short characteristic-vowel, either in formings all the 
tenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a 
o- in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and first Aor, Pass., and in the 
tenses derived from these, and also in the verbal adjectives ; 
such verbs are designated by : Pass, with cr. 

(a) -iu>. 

Xpfca, to sting, Put. xP^'^'^t ■^'^' «XP'<^«) I'lf- XP^'^°'-^- Pass, with <r; (but xP^'^y 
to anoint, Fut. xp^^^i ^^r. exp^ara, Inf. xp''''«'> Aor. Mid. exp^dfirtv ; Perf. 
Mid. or Pass. /cexpt-<r-/teu, Kexp'io-^ai', Aor. Pass. ixP^-a-^v; verbal adj. 
Xpto-Tos). 

Remark 1. iircdw, to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here (§ 230), 
The poetie otw is found only in the Pres. and Impf. ("diov, ^ 122, 1). 

(b) -iJ«. 

1. 'ArucD (also old Ait.avvToa) to complete, Put. aw(r«; Aor. ^yvffa, Pasa, 
with ff. 

ftpuoj (also old Att. op^Tcej), to draw water. Put. apiffw] Aw. ijpvffo. Pass, 

with ff. 
ftua>(u), to close, e, g. the eyes, Put. fivffw, Aor. €/tC<ra; but Perf. pUftvKOj to bs 

closed, to be silent. 
vrva{v), to spit, Put. irTvffw; Aor. eirrvaa. Pass, with ff {hrrv-ff-^v), verbal 

adj. TTTV-ff-TSs. 

2. The following dissyllables in -vw lengthen the short characteristic-vowel 
In the Put and Aor. Act. and Mid. and in Put. Perf. Mid., and 5u« also in the 
Perf. and Plup. Act. j but they resume the short vowel in the Perf. and Plup. 



♦ 130.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 157 

Act. (except 5u«), Mid. or Pass., in the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in verbal 
adjectives : — 

Z^Ufto torap up, Fut. hvffw Aor. eSuca Perf. ScJuaco ScSu/kcu Aor Pass. 4Sv^y 
^{>Wt to sacrifice, " ^ffw " t^vaa " re^Ka re^ixai " " irv^v 
A<J«, to loose, " hvffw " (\v(ra " \4\vKa \e\vficu " " eAudTjr. 

Hem. 2. The doubtful vowel u is commonly used as long in the Pres. and 
Impf. by the Attic poets ; but in prose it must be considered as short j hence to 
be accented fiiJe, urt/e, AtJc, etc., and not /ttSe, htCc, AOc, etc. 

(C) -OM. 

TfXdw, to laugh, Fut yeXaaofuu (seldom y^XcUrw) ) Aor. ^cAcuro. Pass. 

with <r. 
i\du} (usually i\avyu>), to drive, Fut. i\&<T(i> (Att. iXu), etc. See § 158, 3. 
3Xe£w, to bruise, ^X&act, etc. Pass, with <r (Ter^Ao-c-fiat, i^\6.-<T-^v). 
KXdo), to break, KK&au, etc. Pass, with <r (KiKXa-rr-ficu, iK\d,-a-^v). 
Xa\da), to loosen, xoX^w, etc. Pass, with o* {ixa^d-(r-^v). 
Z ay. dot (usually 5a/iciC«), domo, Aor. dSdfiaaa. Pass, with <r. 
•Kepdw, to transport, to sell, Fut. vepaurw, Aor. ^Te'pd<ro; Perf. ireir^poKa (but 

■K€pd(o, to pass over, Intrans., Fut. irepiffu ; Aor. ^ircpeuro). These seven 

verb^. have a liquid before the characteristic-vowel a. 
ffirdtOt to draw, airado), etc. Pass, with or {iffird-ff-^v). 
cxdd), to loose, to open, trxacw, etc. 

(d) -6». 

1. AlSeofiai, to reverence. See § 166, 1. 

iiKfOfiatf to heal, aKeaofiai, ^kco-o/lct/v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ffKc-<r-/«ii ; Aor. Pass. 

i A e«, <o ^'nc?, to beat, dA6-(r-«, Att., yet seldom iA«D ; Aor. ^Acera; Perf. Mid. or 

Pass. aX-fiKefffKu {^ 117, 2, and 124, 2). 
kpnita, to suffice, etc. Pass, with <r. 
4fi4u, to vomit, Fut. ifxfirw, etc.; Perf. Act. i^ffi/xeKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ifiiinfff' 

fxai (§ 124, 2). 
few, to 602/ (usually intrans., and ^ivwtu, usually trans.). Pass, with <r. 
|e«, to scrape. Pass with «r. — tcA ^«, to accomplish. Pass, with <r (§ 117, 2). 
rpeu, to tremble, -6(r», etc.; verbal adj. rpe-tr-rSs. — X**** '^ /wm^- See § 154, 

Rem. 1. 

2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: — 
alvfo) (in Attic prose 4iraiyfv), to praise, Fut. alviffu ; Aor. fiviffa; Perf. fjueKaj 

Aor. Pass, fjve^y, Fut. Pass. cwVei^o-o^nai ; verb. adj. cuyfT6s, -rcoy; but 

Perf Mid. or Pass, ^vrfucu. 
aip4w, to choose, Aor. Pass, ^pfdtjv; also ripii^v, alpija-w, fjpTjKu, fjprjixau 
yan€w, to marry, Fut. yaniw] Aor. iynfM; Perf YcyctfCTjKo; Aor. Pass, eyafxii^v 

{I vxis taken to wife). 
dfw, to bind, S^fia-u, eSTja-a^ iSriadfjirjv ; but SdSeKo, 8e5e/*ai, iS4^v, Fut. Perf. 

SeSriaofmi is commonly used for Ss^crofiat (the latter is used by Dem. and 

later writers). 

14 



158 VERBS. — AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH <T. [} 131. 

KU\4(v, to call, Fut. KoXiffo), Att. koKS) (§ 117,2); Aor. ^KciXeera; Perf. Act 
K^KXvKa] Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKKrifiaif Jam called; Put. Perf. KeK\-{](rofua, 
I shall be called; Aor. Pass. iKA-fi^y; Put. Tass. K\v^<rofiai ^ Fut. Alid. 
KoXovfmi ; Aor. Mid. iKa\€(rdixr]v. 

iro»4a>, to desire, iro^ea-ofxai, Lys. 8, 18, PI. Phaed. 97, a. ; iirS^effa, Isoc. 4, 122. 19, 
17; elsewhere, iro^a-a, iir6^(ra] Perf. Act. veirS^KW, imrS^fjMi \ Aor. 

Pass, ivo^eff^v* 
Kovew, laboro, Fut. irovfiffci}, etc. {to work) ; iroviffw {to he in pain) ; Perf. ir€ir<J- 
yjjKtt in both senses; Mid. and Pass, always have ??, e. g. ivoyrjadfjLrjv and 
irroyfi^v, Perf. ireirSyrifiau 

(e) -o«. 

Af «J«, «o |9?oM5ri^, Fut. oi,p6(r60j Aor ^po<ra; Perf. Mid. or Pass, afyfipofica (§ 124, 
2) ; Aor. Pass. rjpS^Vr, 



§ 131. Formation of the Aor. and Fut, Pass., and 
the Perf.i Pluperf. Mid. or Pass, with cr, 

1. Pure verbs, which retain the short characteristic-vowel in 
forming the tenses, in the Aor, and Fut Pass, and in the Perf. 
and Plup. Mid. or Pass, (also in the verb, adj.), unite the tense- 
endings &rjv, {Aai, etc. to the tense -forms by inserting o- 130), 
e g. 

Te\€-<r-^(rOjWot i-re-reXf-ff-firjy. 

2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have 
a long characteristic-vowel in the stem, or lengthen the short 
characteristic-vowel of the stem in forming the tenses, have the 
same formation, viz. 

aKoiwfto hear, Aor. Pass, '^/co^-or-^i/, Fut. Pass, axov-ff-^a-ofiai, Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. ^Kou-<r-/tot, Plup, riKoii-xr-jxriv, iva{>a>,to kindle; /C6\€i5«, to command; 
the Deponent StoTopoKeAevo/iai, to arouse; Kvaia, Kvf]oa, to scratch {K^Kyau-a-'ficuy 
KcKvri-ff-fiat, iKval-(T-Srt]V, iKvfj-ar-^v) ; Kv\fo),to roll; Aeuw, to stone {i\ev-ff-^v, 
Perf. seems to be wanting) ; |t}«, to scrape; iralu, to strike; va\alu,to wresde 
{ivaXai-tr-^rjv) ; ir\€«, to sail; vpiu), to saw ; Trralo), to strike against, to stum- 
ble; ^aia (poetic), to destroy; <relw, to shake; Sa>, to rain, Aor. Pass. v-<r-^y, 
I was rained upon, Perf. Pass. S-<r-juot {€(^u-(r-/xeVoy, X. Yen. 9, 5), Fut. Sa-ofuu 
(instead of i-<r-^-cr-o/iot) ; <pp4uy to send (only in compounds, e. g. «to-«^., 
4K(p., to lead in), Fut. (pp'ffa-a, etc., Mid. <f>p^(rofiai, Aor. Pass, itppri-a-^v ; x<^«» *<* 
heap up (K6x«-o--/ioi, ixd-or-^p) ; xpf^«, ^ give an oracle {Kexpri-ff-ficu, ixp^v 
dvv, ^ 129, Rem. 2) ; xpfw, to anoint [§ 130, (a)] ; rl/aiw, to touch {fi>au-(x-ijuu, 
Hippocr.). 



f 131.] VERBS. -—AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH (T. 159 

3. The following vary between the regular 'formation and 
that with o- : — ^ 

7 e i5 «, to cause to taste, Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Perf. Mid. or Pass, yey^vfiai (Eurip.); 

but Aor. Pass, probably iy^v-c^v. Comp. 7€i;/<a, but ytv-a-^eoi/. 
Bpdw^ to do, Put. Spdawf etc.; Perf. S^Spwca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. diBpafiai and 

SeSpa-a-fxai (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. iSpda^v (Th.). Verbal adjective Spa-ff-ros, 

Spa-ff-T^os, 

d^pavo), to break in pieces, Perf. Mid. or Pass, rf^pav-ff-fiai (Plat, re^pavfiai) ; 

Aor. Pass, i^pav-ff-driy. Verbal adjective ^pav-a-rSs. 
KhaloDf Att. K\ia)y to weep, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKAav/xai and KCKXav-a-ficu. 
K\elu, to shut, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KtKKftfjuu commonly, KiKXei-a-fiat Aristoph.; 

K^KKri/jLai Tragedians, Thu., sometimes PI., rarely Xen. ; Aor. Pass. iK\cl- 

a-dTjv, Attic ^kKt^-(t-^u (Th.) ; Put. Pass. KAet-<r-,&^(ro/uu. Verbal adjective 

fcAci-ff-rrfs, K\T)-<r-T6s. 
Ko\ovuj to maim, Perf. Mid. or Pass. K€K6\ovfjuu and KfKoKov-a-ixau ; Aor. 

Pass. ^KoXov-a-^v and ^KoXoidjiv. 
K pov CO, to strike upon, Verf. Mid. or Pass. Kt/cpou/iai and (seldom) KCKpova-iuu 

(X. H. 7. 4, 26) ; Aor. Pass. iKpo{fa-^v. 
vtw, to heap up, Put. vii<ra>y etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, vci/tj/wu {yfyrj-tr-fxcu doubt- 
ful) ; but Aor. Pass, ivii-cr-^v CArrian). Verbal adjective vrtr6s. 
veu (collateral form yijdw),to spin, Perf. Mid. or Pass. viin)-<T-nai', but Aor. 

Pass. iirf)^v. Verbal adjective intr6s. 
y^iw, to rub, Perf. Mid. or Pass, fi^^iat and ?»^-<r-/Mu; Aor. Pass, ^i/^^v and 

i}^-<r-^y (instead of which the Attic writers use (rlrqyfuu, f\\r{ix^y from 

ff}Xo>) 

4. The following verbs assume o- in the Aor. Pass., but not 
in the Perf : — 

fiifiyi}ffKa> (MNA-n), to remind, Pf. fiefiyrifiat, I remember, A. P. ifitrfi-a-bTiv 
irvcu, to blow, X(irvvfmi (poet.) ivytv-a-^y 

XpdofjLca (xf«/««)) utor, KtxpVfJMi ixp^'^'^^ 

itavot, to cause to cease, tojinish, xeVou/io* iirav-or-^y 

and iirav^riv, iroi/.^<ro/ta . Ion. and Th. Verbal adjective irav-tr-rios. 

5. The follouang verbs, though they retain the short charac- 
teristic-vowel in the Perf and Aor. Pass., do not assume <r : — 

Ixm, Stva, \vu [^ 130 (b), 2], iXiLoy [§ 130 (c)], alyiu, aiptu, Uu [Hj 130 (d), 2], 
iLp6u> [S 130 (e)], xe« [§ 154, Rem. 1], <rcu«, to excite (§ 230) 



160 



tJNCONTRACTED AND CONTRACT VERBS. 



132-134. 



Paradigms op Puke Vbbbb. 

A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs. 

§ 132. (a) without a- in the Mid. and Pass. 



Ki^xiiw, to hinder. ACTIVE. | 


Pres. 


k(d\v-o) Perf. 


Ke-K^-\v-Ka 


Put. 


KwKt-crw 


Aor. 


i-K(i>\v-(ra 


MIDDLE. 1 


Pres. 


KW\t-OlJLai 


Perf. 


Kf-K<ll)\v-fiai 


Put. 


KuXv-aoficu 1 Aor.' 


i-KvKO-cd- 


PASSIVE. 1 


Aor. 


i-KwXv-difiv 


Put. 


Ktt\v-^(rofJuu. 1 



§ 133. (b) with <r in the Mid. and Pass. (\ 131). 



Perf. S.l. 


K€-K4\ev-<r-fiai 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Mid. -2. 


Ke-KcXev-ffai 


Ki-KfkfV-ffO 


Kf-KfXiV-C^XU 


or 3. 


/C6-KeAeu-(r-Tot 


Ke-Kf\€v-a^w 


Participle. 


Pass. 1. 


K€-Ke\€v-(r'/xf^ov 




Ind. D.2. 


K€-K€\eV-a^OV 


K€-Kf\(V-<r^V 


Kf'Ke\(v-<T-fi(ros 


3. 


Ke-Kc\ev-(r^ov 


Kf-KfXfv-ff^uy 


Subjunctive. 


P. 1. 


K€-K€\€V-<T-IJ.e^a 




K(-Kf\ev-<r-fi(yos 2> 


2. 


/ce-KcAeu-flrd^e 


/CC-*t€\€U-0'(^e 




3. 


K€-Ke\€v-<r-fji.€voi cl<rl{v) 


Ke-KeXfi-a^ffoi 


/ or K(-K(\ev-ffbuv'\ 


Plupf. „ , 
Mid. or ^- l- 


i-Ke-Ke\€v-(r-firjv D. i-K€-Ke\€6-<r-fJLi^ov P. 


i-K€-Kf\ru-<r-nfba 


Pass. i' 


e-Ke-K4\€v-cro " i-Kf-K4\€v-c^oy " 


i-K(-K€\fV-<rb€ 


Ind. ^• 


i-K€-K4\ev-Cr-T0 " i-K€-Kf\(V-<r^V " 


K(-K(\fv-<T-fi(yoi ^ffay 


Opt. 


K€-Ke\€V-<r-fJL4v05 iXr\v 




Aorist Pass. 


e-K€Kev-(r-^v Future Pass. k(\ 


fv-ff-^aofitu. 



B. Contract Pure Verbs. 

$ 134. Preliminary Remarks. 

1. The characteristic of contract pure verbs is either a, €, or o {S 127) ; the^e 
are contracted with the mode-vowel following. The contraction, which is made 
according to the rules stated above (§ 9, 1.), belongs only to the Pres. and 
Impf. Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses only is the characteristic- 
vowel followed by another vowel. The Paragogic v in the third Pers. Sing. 
Impf Act. disappears in the contraction. On the tense-formation, see H 
129-131. 



? 134.] PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 16J 

2. The contract forms of verbs in -(£« in the Indicative and Subjunctive are 
the same ; contracts in -6(0 have the same form for the second and third Pers. 
Sing, in the Indie. Opt. and Subj. viz. -o7s, -o7. 

3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -cL», which, in onr editions of the 
classics, is more commonly written with«an Iota Subscript, is without that letter 
in the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -a*y, e. g. rifiay, not rifi^y. 

4. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina- 
tion of the uncontracted form is the last syllable in the parenthesis, and the 
syllable after the parenthesis is the termination of the contracted form, e. g. 
rtfi{<i-w)u = rifidw, ri/iu, rifi(d-fiv)ay = ri^idfiv, rifia.y\ but if more than one 
syllabic follows the parenthesis, the syllabic, or syllables, after the last hyphen 
is the common ending of the contract and uncontracted forms, the uncontracted 
word embracing all the letters of the form except the vowel after the parea- 
thesis ; the contract, all without the parcnthesiji 



u* 



162 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[^ 135 



§ 135. Paradig^ns of 



ACTIVE. 


» 1 
lit 

0* 

Indioa- 

tive, 


S s 

a g s 
3 * s 


Present. 


Characteristic a. 


Characteristic €. 


Characteristic o. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Ti^(a-w)«, to honor, 

Tifi{d-e)a-70V 

rifJ.{d-€)a-Tov 

Tiix(d-o)co-fJ.€V 

Tifj.{d-e)a-T€ 

Tiix{d-ov)co-(n{v) 


^tA{€-et)et 
0tX(c-e)€?-Toi/ 
^tA(e-o)oC-^€V 
^tA{€-ou)oy-<rt(i') 


•iiad{6-(i})a>, to let, 
fit(T^{6-fis)o7s 

fll(T^{6-e)0V-T0V 
HUT^(6-0)0V-fJi€V 

fii<T^{6^v)ov-<ri{y) 


Sub- 
junc- 
tive, 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


TifJL{d-a>)c!} 

Tiix{d-T)s)as 

riiJ.{d-ri)§ 

rifi{d-ri)a-TOU 

Tl[J.{d-7f)a-T0V 

Tt/i(a-w)(i-/iev 

rifi(d-r})a-Te 

TiiJ.{d-ai)co-(ri{v) 


- 1-H 

3 

1 


^iA(e-w)ctf 

<J!>tA(€-T7s)^J 

«j>t\(e-T7)7; 

<pi\{4-'n)ri-rov 
<pi\[4-ri)ri-Toy 
<pi\{4-w)uf-fi€y 

<jt)(\(e-«)(i-(Tj(i') 


fii(T^(^s)o7s 

Hie ^{6-ri)M-Toy 
fji.<r^(6-7i)a>-roy 
pit(r^{6'u)o)-fifv 
4u<r(^( <J-rj)«-Tc 
fii(r^{6-co)ci-<ri(y) 


Impera- 
tive, 


S.2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 2. 

3. 


Tlix{a-e)a 

Tifi(a-4)d-T(i} 

ri/ji{d-e)a-TOV 

Tifi{a-4)d-T(i}v 

ri(x(d-€)a-T€ 

riix{a-4)d-Tw(Tav, or 

7ilJ,(a-6)w-inct>u 


(pi\{e-€)€t 
<pi\((-4)€l-r6o 
<pi\(4-()(7-rov 
<pi\(€-4)€i-r{i}y 

(pl\{4-()€7-T€ 

(pi\(e-4)€l-ro><ray or 
<pi\(€-6)ov-vrb)y 

<pi\(4-eiy)fti' 


IJU(rb{o-4)ov-r(i) 
/it<r^( 6-f )ov-Toy 
fu(r^(o-4)ov-T(Dy 

Hi(T^{ 0-4 ) ov-rtacay 
or iJU(Tb(o-6)ov-yTwy 


Infin. 




Tifx(d-eiv)av 


fii<r^(6'fiy)ovy 


Partici- 
ple, 


Nom. 
Gen. 


Tiix(d-(i}v)wv 

Ti/i{d-ov)oi}-(ra 

rifJL{d-ov)Siv 

ri[jL{d-o)u-vT05 

Ti(jL(a-ov)w-<Tris 


</)iA( 6-0)1/) oil' 

<pi\{4-ov)ov-(ra 

<pi\{4-ov)ovy 

(pi\{4-o)ov-yros 

(pi\(f-ov)ov-<njs 


fiicrb^{6-<i)y)wy 

fu<Tb(6-ov)ov-a'a 

fU(T^(6-ov)ovy 

fllff^(6-0)0V-VT0S 

fu<rb{o-ov)ov-(nts. 


Imperfect. 


Indica- 
tive, 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


irliJL{a-ov)(av 
iTlix{a-es)as 
eTt;it(o-e)a 

iTifjL{d-e)a-Tov 
iTtn(a-4)d-Tr)v 

iTlfi(d-o)w-[i€U 

iTifA,{d-e)a-Te 
iTifJi,(a-oy)a}v 


i(pi\(e-ov)ovv 
6<^(A(e-e)ct 

€^tA(€-€)er-TOI' 
i<pl\((-4)fi-TTJV 

i(pi\(4-o)ov-fiev 

i<pl\{4-€)€7-T€ 

,i<plK(e-ov)ovv 


4fju<r^{o-oy)ovy 
ifjLl(r^(o-e5)ovs 
ilM(r^{o-e)ov 

ifu<r^( 6-e ) ov^oy 
4fua-^{o-4)ov-rriy 
itii(Tb(6-o)ov-fi€y 

ifjiia^(o-ov)ovy 



k 135.] 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



163 



Contract Verbs. 





MIDDLE. 




Present. 




Characteristic, o. 


Characteristic c. 


Characteristic o. 




rifi(d-o)u-fJMi 


^jA( «-o)oD-/xax 


fll<T^(6-0)0V-ljLai 




rifjL(d'T]}^ 


<f>i\{4-i^)fi 


Ht(r^(6--p)oi 




TJ/x((£-€)a-Tai 


<t>i\((-()(T-Tat 


fn<r^{6-€)ov-Tai 




TifjL(a-6)u-fji(boy 


<Pl\ ( €-0 ) OU-/X€d^OV 


fiia^{o-6)ov-ix(^oy 




Tifi{d-()a-a^ov 


<pi\((-()(7-<r^oy 


/u(r3-( o'-cjoC-trdov 




TtfjL{d-f)a-(r^ot> 


<pi\{f-()c7-<Tdoy 


fJH<rd(6-()ov-crboy 




Tifi{a-6}(i-fifda 


ipi\(f-6)ov-fi(da 


tu<rd{o-6)ov-ti(da 




Tifi{d-()a-(r^e 


<piK{(-f)(7-ffd€ 


fn<r.^(<J-€)ou-o'3« 




Tifi(d-o)u-yTcu 


<f>i\(«-o)ov-yrcu 


/ii<r^(6-o)ov-yTcu 








<Pl\((-w)o^fJLCU 


fjii<rd(6-w)ci>-fuu 




riix{d-T))q. 




<plk{(-p)T) 


tinTd(6-yi)o7 




riiJL(d-r})a-Tcu 




<pi\((-r})yj-rai 


fU(Td{6-rj)a>-rai 




rifi{a-w) at-fifbov 




^i\{f-u)u-fi(doy 


fii<rb(o-(i>)u-fifboy 




rifi{d-rj)a-<T^oy 


fo 


<pi\(f-r))ri-adoy 


fuad(6-rf )ii-aboy 




Tifji{d-rt)a-<rdoy 




<pi\{4-ri)ri-<Tdoy 


/juod(6-r] )u-<r^oy 




Tin{a-c!i)u>-/j,f^a 


» 


<fn\{(-w)(i>-utda 


fil<T^( 0-w)ci>-flf^ 




rifjL{d-ri)a-<Tdf 


5' 


^iA(<'-7j)7j-(r3« 


fiiab(6-rj)(ii}-a^€ 




rtfi{d-w)ci-vrcu 




^i\(t-w)»-yrai 


fiur^(6'v)v-yrcu 




TifJi(d-ov)w 


^i\{f-ov)ov 


fii(r^(6-ou)ov 




Tifi{a-t)d abxi> 


^n\(t-4)(i-(rb<ii 


fii<T^(0't j ov-<T^a> 




rifi{d-f)a.c^oy 


^i\(4-t)t7-ffdoy 


fua^( 6-t )ov-<T^oy 




rift(a-()d-<rbwy 


^i\{t-4)fl-adoiy 


fuffd(o-4)oi^-arduy 




TiiJL{d-«)a-<rd( 


<f>iK(4-t)t7-ad« 


fAiad(6-()ov-<rdt 




Tifi{a-«)d-<Tdu)<Tay, or 


<pi\{f-f)fl-iTb<i><ray, Of 


fjiiad(o-()ov-(r^eo<ray, or 




riiJ.(a-t]d-(Td<M>y 


(pi\{e-t)fi-<Tdwy 


fiier^{n-()ov-advy 




Ti/x{<i-«)a-<ri^ou 


tf'. 0.1 

pt\(t-6 jov-fityos 




Ttn{a-6)<t>-n(vo$ 


fiiafi(u-6 )ov-fi(yos 




Tifji{a-o)<i>-n(yri 


<fn\(*-o)ov-n4yTf 


fiur^(o-o)ov-fi(yrj 




TKu(a-6)<»ffji«yoy 


<f>iX{f-6)ov-fi«yoy 


fiiad{o^)ov-fifyoy 




Ttfi{a-o)<D-tityov 


<pi\{f-o)ov-fjLtyov 


fuab(o-o)oi/-fji(yov 




rifi{a-o)(i>-fi(yrft 


«pi\((-o )ovfi4yrii 


fiitrb ( 0-0 )oi/-/x«'n7r. 




Imperfect. 






^TI/x(o-({)w-/ll7J»' 


4^i\{*-6)ov-fX7iy 


4fiiad{o-6)ov-fiijy 




4r^|x(d^ov)w 


4^i\((-ov)ov 


4fLiad{6-ov)ov 




^T»/i(«(-e)a-TO 


4<pt\{4-()(7-TO 


4fjiia-d{6'f)ov-7o 




iTi/x{a-6)u-fi(doy 


f(pi\{ (-6)ov-fi(boy 


4ni<Td {o-6) ov-fit^op 




iTin{d-()a-(r^oy 


4^iX(4-f)t7-aboy 


4fiKT^( 6-( )ov-a^oy 




iTiiJ.(a-4)d-a^v 


i<piK(f4)fi-<Tdjjy 


4fi.tcb{o-4)ov-<rb7iy 




t Ti^.( u-6 ) al-/,tCi^a 


4<t>i\(f-6)ov-fx(i^a 


4fn<rb{ 0-6 ) ov-fif^a 




irtfi^d f )a-<rdc 


iifnK{4-f}(7-a^( 


4fjLiad{6-()ov-<rdf 




irtfAik o)(v-yro 


4<pi\(4-o)ov-yro 


4fii<T^{6-o)ov-yro 



164 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[f 136. 




§ 136. With short Vowel 



Tenses. 



Present, 

Imperfect, 

Perfect, 

Pluperfect, 

Future, 

Aorist, 



Aorist, 



ACTIVE. 



Characteristic o. 



<nr{d-(a)a, to draWy 
e(rir(a-ov)a>v 

i<Tira.K€iv 

ffiraffO) 

i(nra.<ra 



e<rird-<r-^r]v 



Characteristic 6. 



T€A.(€-«)cD, tocom- 
^€A.( i-ov)ovv\pl€te, 

T€TeA.€Ka 

eTeTeXc/ceu/ 

TeAw 

eTe\€(ro 



Characteristic o. 



ap{ i-w )w,to plough, 

1^p(o-oy)ovy 

ap-r\poKa 

ap-r)p6K(tv 

ap6cu 

fjpoffa 



PAS 



ire\4-a-^r}v | 7)p6^y 



Verbal adjectives : (nra-tr-Tfos, -reo, -tcW 



♦ 136.] 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



165 



a 
1 

1 


ImpeTfect. 


Characteristic a. 


Characteristic c. 


Characteristic o. 




Tifi(a-oi)(^-fi7\y 

rifji(d-oi)<f-o 

rifi[d-oi)(j)-TO 

rifi{a-ol)tf-fjLf^oy 

rifi(d-oi)^-<T^oy 

riiJ.{a-oi}<p-(r^y 

Ti/4(<£-o»)y-(ri^€ 
Tifi(d-oi)^-yTO 


^i\{f-oi)oi-yLi\y 

(piK{4-oi)o7-o 

<pi\{4-oi)o7-TO 

<(>i\{€-ol)oi-ti€^oy 

<fn\{4-oi)o7-(r^oy 

<pi\{f-oi)ol-a^y 

(pi\(f-oi)oi-tifba 

<l>i\(4-oi)o7-(rl^f 

tpi\{4-oi)o7-yTO 


fu<r^{o-oi)ol-firjy 

fU(T^{6-Ol)o7-0 

fU(r.^(d-oi)o?-TO 
fiia^i o-ol)oi-fif^oy 
fjua^ ( 6-01 ) o7-ado» 
/u<r^{o-oi)oi-<r^y 
fu<Td( o-oi)oi-fiida 
fiia^l 6-oi)o7-<rd€ 
fjiUTd(6-oi)o7-yro 






■ 






Ttrifirifuu 


■Wt<fti\j)fUU 


fjLffda^wficu 




irtTifiiffirjy 
iir«p(i)pd^r}y 


iti^Oj\fi.r\y 


^HfHia^ufiriy 




rtfi-fttrofMcu ^piffofioi 


^iX'i)aofuu 


tmrbtaMroficu 




iTip.ri<rdfiriy i^paurdfirjy 


i<pi\r}ad^rfy 


ifua^wadtmy 




rtTifA'f}aofuu iTf^pAcro^icu, irt<pi\4\ffOfiau 


fif/jLta^wa-ofiat 


SIVE. 


1 Future, | rtfiri^ffofuu ^pd^ffo^uu J ^iXrt^cofuu \ fuabxa^aofuu 


<pi\rf-r(os, -Tt'o, -T(oy, fiKTbu-Tfos, -rtUt -riov. 



in forming the Tenses. 



MIDDLE. 



Characteristic 



<nr(<i-o)a>-/iai 

i<Tir{a-6)<M>-firiy 

Hffira-a-fiai 

4(nrd-<r-fir}y 

<nra.(Tonai 

4(nraad^iriy 



Characteristic 



T€>» (-o)ov-HCU 

4Tf\{e-6)ov-fn)y 

r(T4\f-<r-fiai 

irtr(K4-<r-lii\y 

TfXOVfdXU 

IrtKiadfiny 



Characteristic o. 



ap(6-o)ov-^i 

r)p(o-6)ov-fXT]y 

kp-'{}fH>fiau 

ap-rip6nT]y 

ap6aofjMi 

Tfpoadfii]y 



s I V ]•: . 


1 Future, | <rTa-<r-d^(ro/tai | r«X.f-<r-^'fjaofiai 


apo^ffofuu 1 


re\(-(r-r(os, -4a., -4oy^ ipo-r4os, -4a^ -toy. 1 



166 REMARKS ON THE CONJ. OF CONTRACT VERBS. [^ 137 

Remark. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. Pass, with <r, see §§ 130. 
131 ; on the omission of the <r in afyftpofiai, ripo^^, see § 131, 5 ; and on the Attifc 
Reduplication in ap-hpojxai, see k 124, 2. The further inflection of effira-a-fiai, 
i<rird-<r-H7]v, TereKe-ff-fiai, iT€Te\4-<T-fir]v, is like that of K€K4\€v-(r-fx.ai, § 133. On 
the Attic Fut., reKeffu = reAw, -eTs, etc., reXearof^ai = Te\ovfiai, rcAp [e*], 
etc., see § 117. 

$ 137. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract 

Verbs. 

1. The Attic dialect omits contraction only in the cases mentioned under 
4 9. Rem. 3 ; but verbs in -e« with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. ■jrA.ew, to sail, ■jrveWf 
to blow, ^4w, to i-un, etc. are uniformly uncontracted, except in the syllable -« 
(from -eei or -ee), e. g. 

Act. Pr. Ind. TrXew, ir\e7s, irKet, ir\eofi€V, ttXcztc, 'ir\4ov(ri{v), 

Subj. irAeco, TrAeps, ttAct;, irXeafiey, TrAeijre, 7rAe«(rt(j'), 

Imp. TrAe?. Inf. irAeli'. Part. TrAewv. 
Impf. Ind. cTTAeor, eirXeis, cTrAet, iirKeofieUf eirAeTTe, cTrAeoi'. 

Opt. irXeoifii, ir\4ots, etc. 
Mid. Pr. Ind. irXcofiai, ttAct?, irAerrot, irAecJ/ieS-ov, 7rA€ro'3^oj', etc. 

Inf. irAeia^ai. Taxt. v\e 6 fieyos. Impf. iir\€ 6 firj v. 

2. The verb Sea;, to bind, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu- 
larly in compounds, e. g. rh Sovy, rod Sovyros, diaSovfiai, KareSovy, But Se?, it 
is necessary, and Seofjiai, to need, follow the analogy of verbs in -ew, with a 
monosyllabic stem, e. g. tJ> 5eoj/, Seofiai, BeTir^ai; uncontracted forms of deofiai 
occur, instead of those contracted into -e i, e. g. Seerot, Seea-^ai, iSeero, Xen., 
and sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging here are uncontracted, e. g. 
iTTAcej/, X. H. 6. 2, 27 ; irAeet, Th. 4, 28 5 ffvvix^ev, PI. Rp. 379, e. 

3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general rules, e. g. 

(a) -oe, -act, -07;, are contracted into -?? and -p, instead of into -a and -9, e. g. 
C(<i- w^ «, to live, Cys, -0, -^tov, -^^re, Inf. ^j/. Imp. Cv, Impf. eCwK, -tjj, 
-?j, -TjTcr/, -^TTjj/, -Tjre; — iret »'(«£-«) u, to hunger, Inf. iretj'^j/, etc. ; — St»|'- 
({{-w)<«, to thirst, Si^pijs, etc. Inf. Sti//ij>/; — Ky(d-)w, to scratch, Inf. Kyrjy; 
— (TfM{d-o) a, to smear, Inf. fffirjy] — ^{d-a) «, to rub, Inf. ^^j'j — xp («-<>) 
w-fiai, to use, xpVi XPVTai, xpvo'^at] so airoxpoifiai, to have enough, 
OTToxp^o'S^at ; — a'ir6xpV (abridged from airoxpp), «i suffices, Inf airoxfynvy 
Impf avexpr] ] — % P (<^ ■ '^l «» ^0 5'^^'^ an oracle, to prophesy, XPV^> XPV^ ?CPW' 
b) -00 and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -«, instead of into -ov, and 
-(^77 into -(f, instead of into -o7, e. g. ^t7((^-«)w, to freeze, Inf ^i7wj' 
(Aristoph., but ^t7oCi/, X. Cy. 5. 1, 11), Part. G. ^lywyros (Aristoph., but 
^lyoiyrwy, X. H. 4. 5, 4), and [ny&aa (Simon, de muUer. 26), Subj. ^ly^ 
(PI. Gorg. 517, d.), Opt. piyt^n (Hippocr.). 

Remark 1. The Ionic verb iBp6<a,to sweat, corresponds in respect to con- 
traction with piy6w, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning: ihpSiffi^ 
^p4Wt IBpSxxa, ISptoyres, 



$ 138.] FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF IMPURE VERBS. 167 

4. The following things are to be noted on the nse of the Attic forms of the 
Opt. in -riv (§ 116, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person, 
of verbs in -ew and -6uf the form in -olrjv is far more in use than the common 
form, and in verbs in -du it is used almost exclusively ; but in the Dual and 
PI. the common form is more in use. The third Pers. PL has always the 
shorter form, except that Aeschin., 2, § 108, Bekk., uses SoKolrja-av. 

5. The verb \ovu), to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac- 
tion in all the forms of the Impf Act. and of the Pres. and Impf Mid., which 
have -6 or -o in the ending, e. g. €\ov instead of eAoue. i\ov/x€v instead of i\oi- 
ofiev, Mid. Kov/xai (Xoex, Aristoph. Nub. 835. according to MSS.), \ovrai, etc., 
Imp. \ovy Inf. \ov<r^aiy Impf. eXov/xTji', 4\ovy 4\ovto, etc., as if from the stem 
AOEn ; still, uncontracted forms are found, e. g. Xovofiaif iKovovro (Xen.). 

Rem. 2. On the change of the accent in contraction, see § 30, 2. 



n.FORMATION OF THE TeNSES OF ImFUBE VbRBS. 

$ 138. General Remarks. 
Pure and Impure Stem. — Theme. 

1. Impure verbs (^ 127, II.) undergo a variety of changes in 
the stem. In the first place, the stem of the verb is strength- 
ened : — 

(a) Either by an additional consonant, e. g. t^it-t-w, stem TTII ; Kpo^-w, stem 
KPAr ; (ppdCuy stem *PAA ; and even by inserting an entii-e syllable, e. g. 
afiapr-dv-Uy Stem 'AMAPT ; 

(b) Or by lengthening the stem-vowel, e. g. ^e^y-w, stem *Yr; \^.^-«, stem 
AA0 ; r-i]K-(a, stem TAK ; 

(c) Or secondly there is a change of the stem-vowel in some of the tenses ; 
this change may be called a Variation (§ 16, 6), e. g. fcA.e7rT-«, €-/cXoir-ij»', 
K4-K\o<p-a ; comp. Eng. ring, rang, rung. 

2. The original and simple stem is to be distinguished from 
the strengthened stem ; the first is called the pure stem, the 
last, the impure. The Pres. and Impf. commonly contain the 
impure stem ; the Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and 
specially the second Aor., contain the pure stem ; the remaining 
tenses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, e. g. 

"Pres. T&Tr-T-w, to strike, Aor. II. Pass. e-TuTr-T?;/ 'Eut. Act. rinpot} (rinr-aw) 
" \dir-w, to leave, " Act. ^-KXtr-ov " " Xci^w (X^iir-ffw) 

" crcpdC'O, to kill, " Pass. ^-(r<|)a7-'>7V " " cr^d^w {(Ttpdy-trw) 

" <palv-a), to show, " " « - ^ a »/ - tjv " Mid. <p a v-ou/iou 

*• <p^elp-Wy to dest7-oy, " " 4-<f>^a.p-7}p " Act. ^;^ep-». 



-V 



168 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM; [i 139 

3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres. 
tense in use, another Present is assumed ; this assumed Pres. 
may be termed the Theme (-^c/xa), and is printed in capitals, 
to distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use ; thus, e. g. fjtcvfa 
is the Pres. in use, ^YVil is the assumed Pres., or the Thtme, 
designed merely to form the second Aor., €-<f>vy-ov. 



$ 139. Strengthening of the Stem. 

! 1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso- 
nant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g. 

rinrrw (twx) , to strike, Aor. XL Pass, i-rtv-riif 

rdrru {ray), to arrange, " " i-rAy-tiP 

Kp<i(w (Kpay),to en/, '* Act. f-Kpay-ow, 

2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and 
Impf ; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g. 

Pres. rvwru Impf. (rmrroy Aor. II. Pass, frvrrjr Fut. rvifw (nJrerw). 

Remark 1. The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. w in Tm-n is called 
the pure characteristic ; that of the impure stem, e. g. «t in t^wt-*, the impure 
characteristic 

3. The stem of many verbs is strengthened also by length- 
ening the short stem-vowel in tlie Pres. and Impf ; this short 
rowel reappears in the second Aor., and in hquid verbs, in the 
Fut Thus, 

a is changed into rj In mute verbs, 

a " cu in liquid verbs, 

« " ct in liquid verbs, 

I " ei in mute verbs, 

I " i in mute and liquid verbs, 

H " in mute and liquid verbs, 

" eu in mute verbs, 

Rem. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf. Ind. and 
Opt. from the same modes of the second Aor. ; likewise the Pres, Subj. and 
Impf from the same modes of the second Aor., e. g. txpa^ov fg / wryor, Kp^C**^* 
tcpdyoifii, KpdCv Kpdyw, icpd^f Kpdye]^- l\fivoy tXJirof, Xfivotfu xAr^yu, x.'»» 
}dxo», XeTre AJfire. 



c-g 


. (r-Xd^-or) X4fim 


u 


(^ar-i) ^altm 


(( 


i^btp-m) ^flpm 


i( 


(f-XiT-or) \fl*m 


i( 


{i-rpt$-Jip) rptfim 


It 


(^-^piy-Hr) fp6y^ 


u 


(i-^vy-ow) ^vym. 



(( 


u 


i-TpAtp-rjv 


t( 


u 


4-<TT pS.(l>-r]y 


(( 


(I 


i-fip&x-vy 


it 


C( 


i-S&p-rjy 


({ 


(( 


i-<rr&\-riv 


(t 


i( 


i-airdp-ijy 


(( 


t( 


i-(f>bi,p-7jy 


i( 


Act. 


i-rafi-ov. 



^ 140.] VERBS. CHANGE OP THE STEM-VOWEL. 169 

$ 140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel. 

1. The change or variation of the stem- vowel [k 13S, 1 (c)], 
occurs only in the Secondary tenses, with the exception of a 
few first Perfects. 

2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem, 
and with c as a stem-vowel, take the vaiiahle a in the second 
Aor., e. g. 

rpeir-Uy to turn, Aor. 11. Act. e-rpair-ov 

K\iiT-T-Uy to steal, " Pass. ^-kAStt-tji' 

rpe<p-(i), to nourish, 

(TTpf(p-u, to turn, 

fipex-w, to wet, 

Up-o), to flay, 

arreW-u, to send, 

<nr(ip-(D, to sow, 

<p^iip-w, to destroy, 

Tffiy-u, to cut. 

The second Aor. erafiov (from rtfiyct, to cut), is very rare in Attic prose (Th. 1. ' 
81. rdfjicofiev) ; regular ?T€/iov ; the second Aor. 4$p(xw (from /Spf'xw, to wet), is 
poetic and late ; common form ifipfx^f- The first Act Pass, irpfcp^v (from 
TpeVo)), ibp(<p^u ({T.rp€<pu), i<rrpf<p^v (fr. aTpftfxa), belong more to poetry than 
prose ; iK\4<p^y (fr. KKf-rrru) Ionic and Eur. Or. 1575 {K\e<pdeis). Afpte, <nrcfpa), 
and ip^elpu, have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not occur in polysyl- 
lables, e. g. f)Yyf\oy, T/77eATj»', &(p(\oy, riy(p6fn]v. 

Remark 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second 
Aor. Act., e. g. (Tpcirov (Impf.), irpuKov (Aor. II.), in some verbs of this class 
(2, above), whose secon d Aor. A ct, is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur 
in the second Aor. Pass.^Tjiecause that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf., 
see § 141, Rem., e. g. /3 A e'lr a>, to see, Impf. t-fiXttr-ov, second Aor. Pass, i-fikeir- 
1JV (first Aor. Pass, is wanting); \fyu, to collect (in compounds), second Aor. 
Pass. Kore-Xeyriu, ffvyeXfyrjv (more seldom Aor. I. awektx^t^'j H^^^X^'^] ^^'^^^^ 
the meaning to say, always iXcx^*')] so also Xtir-u, to peal, i-Xiir-r\v (first 
Aor. Pass, wanting); ttAck-w, /o 6rq/V/, usually i-irXdK-rjv, but also i-irx4K-7)v 
Plat, (first Aor. Pass. ^nXtx^t't Aesch. Eum. 259) ; <px4y-u, to bum, i-<pX(y-r)v 
(more seldom i<px4x^v) ; if'cyw, to censure, ^-i^ey-^jv, first Aor. Pass, wanting. 

Rem. 2. The verb itA^ttw, to strike, when uncompounded, retains the tj 
in the second Aor. and second Put. Pass., but when compounded, it takes the 
variable d; thus, ^-irXrry-Tji/, irXTtyfiaofiat, i^e-vXay-rju, Kare-irXay-rju, iK-TrXdyfj' 
aofiai] CT\irus, to make rotten, and t^k«, to melt (trans.), also have the variable o; 
hence Perf. (ria-qira, I am rotten, second Aor. Pass, iaairnv, second Fut. Pass. 
<Tairi\<Toimi ; Fut. ri^^a>, Aor. €Ttj|o; second Perf. t^ttiku, Tarn melted; second Aor. 
Pass, iraicnv, also first Aor. Pass. ^t^X'^*'. 1*1- '^^^- 61- b., Eur. Supp. 1033. 

15 



170 VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. [f 14D. 

3. Liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with € for a 
fstem-vowel, take the variable a, not only in the second Aor., but 

also in the first Perf. Act., in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and the 
; first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

<rT€AA.a>, to send, Tut. <TTe\-S) Tf. c-ardK-Ka e-ffToX-fuu Aor. *-<rn£\-J^r 
tp^eipu, to destroy, Fut. <p^ep-Se Pf. e-<p^ap-Ka f<p^ap-fmi. 

The first Aor. Pass. i<rToi\^v is poetic ; the first Aor. Pass, of Sepv, mnlptt, 
(p^elpo) is not in use ; but instead of it the second Aor. Pass., thus, iSAprjVy 
ia-n-dpyrjVy icp^dpiju. The variable a does not occur in polysyllables, e. g. 
^'77eA/fa, ^yyeh^v from ayyiXXu, ayfiyepfiai, ^4p^v from ayelpw. Comp. 
No. 1. 

4. Mute verbs, which have c in the final stem-syllable of the 
Pres., take the variable o in the second Perf ; but those which 
have «, take ot; liquid-verbs, which have c or « in this syllable, 
take o, e. g. 

SepKOfjuti (poet.), to see, Se^opjca Sfp*** ^oflay, Seiopa 

rpe^u, to nourish, TeTpo<f>a iyflpw, to wake, 4yp^op», I awoke, 

Ke'nro), to leave, \e\onra tfrrfipui, to sow, ^cnropa 

vel^a, to persuade, iriiroi^af I trust, <(>^eipcDy to destroy, i<l>^opa poetic, (ec^opica, 
prose). 

f Eem. 3. Here are classed the following: anomalous second Perfs. ; ^^ 

j (Epic), e^oo^a instead of el^a, to be tcont, dat^fpcu, tlc^wSy Plup. uti^fiy; — 

I 'EIAXi, video, oUa, I know; — 'EIKXl, eoiKa, to be like, to appear, Plup. 4(pK€iy; — 

cAttw (poet.), to cause to hope, coXira, I hope. Plup. iuXvfip, I hoped ; — 'EPm, to 

do, eopya, Plup. icapyeiv j — pijy-wfii, to break, t/J^oryo, I am broken (but on <Hprm, 

see Riem. 2). 

5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf also, 
contrary to the rule in No. 1. 

K\4vTa>, to steal, first Perf. k e/c\o^o, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. KfK\€/ifiai (very 
I rare and only poet. K^KKafifjuxi). 

I \4yca, to collect, first Perf. avvelKoxa, i^(l\oxa]hut Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
avvd\€yi.tcu. 
vcfiTTw, to send, first Verf. v 4 v a fi<f> a] but Perf. ^lid. or Pass, verffifimi. 
Tpfirco, to turn, first Perf. T4Tpo<pa (like the second Perf. of rp4<lm, to nourish) j 
and r4Tpcupa ; still, this last form is rare ; the more usual form is rirpo^ 
The variable a in the Perf. Act. is not found elsewhere, and is probably 
here used only to distinguish it from rerpoc^ Perf. of Tp4<f>ci. 

6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem, and 
with € for a stem-vowel, lilve Hqiiid verbs (Xo. 3), take the 
variable a in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still, the a is not foujid in 
the first Aor. Pass., as is the case in hquid verbs, e. g. 



♦ 141.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. 171 

<rrp(<f>Ut to turn, f*f. Mid. or Pass, ta-rpafifiai, but first Aor. Pass. i<rTp4<p^r 
rpeKUytotumj " " rerpafifiaij " " irptip^y 

Tp4<l>a), to nourish, " " Tt^pafinai, " " i!^p4<p^v. 

On K\firrWf see No. 5. 



$ 141. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses. 

1. The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting the , 
tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-endings {-oVf j 
'6firjVf -tiv^ -ijiTOfuu, -a, and -fiy) immediately to the pure characteristic of the 
verb, e. g. €-AJir-oj', second Aor., but ^-irai5ei/-o--a, first Aor. ; partly, in being 
formed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem (except the Perf. which 
prefers a long vowel, see No. 2), e. g. Xelvw, t-Klir-ovy <p(vyu t'<pvy-ov\ and 
partly, in taking the ranoWc vowel, e. g. (Trpt'^w 4-arpd<P'r)y CTpdi^ -^tro/ieu, 
but i-ffrpf<^^v (^ 140, 2). 

2. The second Perf. either lengthens the short stem-vowel I into i, d into tj, 
and, when it stands after other vowels or p, into d, e. g. 

Kp<i(w, to cry out, second Aor, t-Kpay-ov second Perf. nt-Kpay-a 
<ppi(r<Tw, to shudder, stem : tPIK (I) " iri-<pplK-a 

bdWWf to bloom, Fut. ;^dA.-u» " Te-,^\-a; 

80, vc't^va, XfKrjba from ♦AN-«, AA9-« ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- 
thong of the Pres., e. g. irf<pfvya from <^6i>y» (but second Aor. Act. ^<^D7o»'), 
T«TTjKo, fftoypra from t^k«, a-fprw (but second Aor. Pass, irijajv, iatmiv, see 

4 140, Rem. 2) ; a short vowel occurs only in the cases referred to in ^ 124, and 

5 140, 4. 

Remark. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. could not be distinguished 
from the Impf , or at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., since this last form 
has a different ending from the Impf, and could not be mistaken for it, e. g. 

ypi/fxa Impf typwpov A. I. typa^a A. II. Act. want. A. 11. P. ^yputp-nv (A. I. P. does 

not occur in classical writers). 
KKtyct " tK\lyov *' I^KXIya " " A. II. P. ^KAfioji/ ( A. I. P. eVAi- 

bijy in Aristoph). 
\^6x« " Hvxoy " ^v^a " " '♦ ^^'i^X'?''. I^'a^- {^hv^ 

Aristoph. Nub. 152 [with the variation '^x*^*^'] ^^^ often iu the later writers j 
A. I. i^vx^y, Plat.). 

3. The following points, also, are to be noted : (a) There is no verb which, 
together with the second Aorist, forms the three first Aorists; (b) There is no 
verb which has in use at the same time the second Aor. Act. and Mid. and the 
second Aor. Pass. ; but all verbs, which form the second Aor. have either the 
second Aor. Act. and Mid. only, or the second Aor. Pass. only. A single 
exception, in regard to both the particulars specified, is seen in the verb Tpeirw^ 
to turn, which has three first Aorists together with three second Aorists : irpairov 
(Ion.), iTpa.v6fXT)v, iTpimfy, €rp(\l^a (the common form in Attic), drpeypdnriy 
(transitive, e. g. rpr^sur^ax *is <t>vyi)y, to put tofligld), iTpi<pbi]y (used more by the 



172 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. [\ 142 

poets, see § 140, 2) ; but in compounds, e. g. i-iriTpe<p^vaif Antiph. 4. 126, 4 
127, 5). 

There are but few exceptions to the statement under (b), since the second 
Aor. Act. and Mid. and the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly 
in the poet, dialect, e. g. ervvoy Eur., and irvirriv ; iKXirov and 4?d:Tn]v ; e\ci(l>^Vy 
and veiy seldom i\nr6/xr]u. 

4. It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms ; where this is the case, the two 
forms are used under certain conditions, namely : — 

(a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, i. e. 
the first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransitive. The 
same is true of the two forms of the Perf., where they are constructed from the 
same verb. See § 249, 2. 

(b) The two forms of the Aor. belong either to different dialects, or differ- 
ent periods, or to different species of literature, prose or poetry. Still, in some 
verbs, both forms occur even in prose, e. g. aTrrjWdx^v, and usually lirTjAAaTTj*', 
B\a(p^mi and ^Kafirivaiy both for ex. in Thuc. Several verbs in p3etry have a 
second Aor. Act., which in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. tcrflvwy 
to kill, Aor. prose, eKxeivay poet. %K7avov and ^ktciv, 

(c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms 
of one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in this 
way each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen under 
the verbs ri^fjn and SiSajju. 



A. Formation of the Tenses of Mute-Vekbb. 

§ 142. Classes of Mute Verbs. 

Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three 
I classes, according to their characteristic ; in each of these 
' classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. and 
Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure charac- 
teristic (§ 139, Kem. 1) : — 

1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (ft tt, (j) pure 

characteristic; ttt ([§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 
e. g. 

(a) Pure characteristic : 7re/x7r-a), to send ; rpl^-o), to 
rub ; rypd(j)-o), to write ; 

(b) Impure characteristic : tuttt-q), to strike (pure char- 
acteristic TT, pure stem TTTl) ; fixdirr-coy to injure 
(ft BAAB) ; /StW-o), to hurl (</>, 'PI^). 

2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute {k, 7, x 



» J43.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 173 

pure characteristic ; aa or Attic tt [§ 24, 1] impure 
characteristic), e. g. 

(a) Pure characteristic: ifKeK-iOj to weave; cuy-co, to 
lead; Tevy^w, to prepare; 

(b) Impure characteristic: (pplacr-co, Att. <j>pLrr-Q), to 
shudder (pure characteristic k, pure stem ^PIK) ; 
rdo-cr-co, Att. rdrT-co, to arrange (7, TAT) ; ^ijacr-co, 
Att. /37?TT-e», to cough (x, BHX), 

3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (r, S, ^, 
pure characteristic ; ^ [§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 

(a) Pure characteristic: dvvT-(a,to complete; aS-w, to \ 
sing ; Tret^-o), to persuade ; 

(b) Impure characteristic : <f)pd^-co, to say (pure charac- ^ 
tvistic S, pure stem ^PAA), 

§ 143. Remarks on the Characteristic. 

1. The following mute verbs in -irrcu and -o-o-w (-ttw) form the Secondary 
tenses, especially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic : — 

ir: kA-cttt-oj, to steal; K6Trr-u, to cut; TtJirr-o), to strike (second Aor. Passive 

i-K\air-riu, etc.). • 
/8: fi\dxr-ci}, to injure, and Kpinrr-os, to conceal (second Aor. Pass. i-^\a$-t]v 

and 4fi\d<p^v, i- Kpvfi-r]y and iKpixp^v). 
<p : fidTTT-ci), to tinge; ^dirr-w, to bury; bpvTrr-<a^ to break; ^dirr-w^ to sew to- 

gether ; pi-rrT-co, to cast; c/caTTT-w, to dig (second Aor. Pass. i-^a<p-rtv^ 

i-T a<p-T]v, i-r pv<p-T\u, ip-^a.<p-7\v, i p- pf(p-T}v and 6/}^i^i^rjj/, i-aKo.^- 

■nv). 

k: <ppi<ra-(i}, to shudder (second Perf. tr4-<f>plK-a). 

y: a70\.d(Tff<t}, to change (second Aor. Pass. aKXay-rivaij first Aor." Pass. 
aKXax^r\vai, poetic). ^d(T<Tu, to knead (fiay-rivai). opvffao), to dig {opvy-rjvai 
and opvx^i'O't), 7rA^<rtra), to strike {i-ir\'fiy-7]i/, e^e-TrXdy-Tjv), Trpdaau, Att. 
irpcLTTu, to do (TTe-TTpdy- a),<r<pdC<i} (Attic mostly ©"(^ottw), to kill {i-(T<pdy- 
nv, rarely, and never in Attic prose, iatpdx^v), rda-aw, to arrange {Tdyels, 
Eur., elsewhere eToxi^"), <ppda<r(a, to hedge round {i<ppdy-r]u and i<ppdx^v)- 

2. Two verbs strengthen the pure characteristic k by t, like verbs with the 
impure characteristic ttt : — 

ire/cT-w (commonly ireKTeco, also ■Trff/co)), to shear, to comb, Put. 7re|&j, etc. , 
still, Keipeiv is commonly used for ircKTeiu with the meaning to shear, and 
KT€ui^€iv and ^aivfiu with the meaning to comb ; 

tIkt-oj (formed from ti-t4k-(o), to beget. Put. rt^ofiai, second Aor. Act. 
iT€KOV, second Perf. reroKa, 

3. The following verbs in -ffo-u, -ttu have a Tau-mute, not a Kappa- 
mute, for the pure characteristics apfx6TT<a (non-Attic apix6C<a), to Jit, Put. 
-6<T{a; — fixirTO), to take honey, Put. -iaw; — kpd<T(T(o (non-Attic fipdCu), to 
shake; — ipeaao), to row, Put. -eVw; — vdffffa), to scatter, Put. -aora> ; — vXda- 
<r«, to form, Put. -ocw ; — tt t / <r ir «, to husk, Put. -iffw ; — and Poet, ifidcrffa, to 

15* 



174 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OP MUTE VERBS. |} 144 

whip, Ynt. -da-o) J KVilxrffw, to sleep, "Fnt. -dxra ', K e v ff a- w, to looh,'FvLt. \€v<ra)\ 
KiffffOfiai (poetic, especially Horn., also Kiroixai),to pray, Aor. cAtera/xTyj/, 
iXirSfx-nv; vla-ffofiai, veiffff ofiai, to go, Fut. veicrofiai', Kop6<rffu, to equip 
( Epic Perf. Ke-K6pv^ -fiai ). 

Here are classed derivatives in -dirrw. At^t^TTw, to hunger ; ovetpdrrwy 
to dream ; iirvdiTra), to be sleepy. 

4. The following verbs in -o-cw vary between the two formations : vd(r<Ta>y 
to press together, Fut. vd^a, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, vevacfiai ; verbal Adj. ycurrSs ; 
— a(\>v(T<T(t) (Poet.), to draw, JFut. -i;|«, Aor. ^<pv(ra, r)({>v(rdfn}v. 

5. Of verbs in - ^w, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly S, 
there are only a few primitives, e. g. e^o jtt at, Poet., Ko^e^ofjiai, prose, / seof 
myself, '{(w, commonly ko3-iX«> to seat; <rxtC<^> to separate; x^C«» alvum 
dejicere ; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -dCa> and most in 
-/^w, e. g. iMCo}, elKdCtDf etc. 

6. Verbs in - (a, whose pure characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly y, 
are mostly Onomatopoetics, i. e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense ; 
the greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e. g. aid C«, to groan, Fut. 
alalia ', aKaXd^a, to shout (ou5o|a(ri3-ai, to spea^, Aor. wanting in Her.); ypt^u, 
to grunt; Ko'iC^i ^^ squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fut. Koi^w; Kpd^a, to 
sa'eam, Aor. eKpayov] Kpdo^^, to caw, to croak; fxaffriCco, to whip; oSci^o;, to 
scratch ; oifj.6 ^w, to lament, Fut. olfjL^^ofj.ai ; 6Ko\v ^tu, to cry out, to shout ; pv<r- 
rd^ot), to drag about; ard^a and araXd^Uy to trickle; arevd^o), to sigh, 
a'n]pl^()3, to make firm; ffrl^w, to mark, to prick; cvpi^w, to whistle (Fut. 
ffupi^ofiai, etc.; ffvplffu, etc., later, and not Attic) : <r<pdC(» (Attic mostly <r^dr- 
7w), to kill ; <T<pv ^ai, to throb ; rpi ^w, to chirp {rerplya, Ion. and poet.) ; <pXv Cu, 
to bubble, and the Poet, fi d (w, to prate, Fut. fid^u, third Pers. Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. jSejSaKToi ; fiptC^^y to slumber {fip7^ai); S ai(o}, to divide, to kill ; iXeXi^w, 
to whirl, to tumble; ivapl^ay spolio ; ^ e^w, to do (eopya). 

7. The following verbs in - (w vary between the two modes of formation : 
fia<rrd(<ii3,to lift up, to suppoH, Fut. -dcca, etc., Aor. ifiaardx^y ; — Surrd Ca, 
to doubt, dia-Tdarw, from which the verbal Subst. Siffray/xos and 5i<rra(ris; — vva- 
T d ^«, to nod, to sleep, Fut. -da-co, Aor. evvaraea, in the later writers wcrd^o), 
etc., e. g. Plut. Brut. 36;^ — irat^w, to jest, Fut. irai^ovfjLai and nal^ofxai, Aor. 
Att. eiraia-a (in later writers irrai^a, ir4iraixa), Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. ireiraiaiMi 
(in later writers ireiraiy/jLai, itraix^y) ] verbal Adj. iraia-rcos ; — apird Ca, to rob, 
Att. apitd(rQp.ai, ripiraffa, etc. (but in the Epic and Common language ap-rrd^co and 
-darw, etc., second Aor. Pass. r}pTrdYnv) ; — fii Cw, to moan, has fi. 5, 20. iire/xv^av, 
but in Hippocr. e/xvarey. 

8. The following verbs in -^w have 77 for a pure characteristic : K\<£^ft>, to 
sound, to cry, Perf. Ke-KXayy-a, Fut. KXdy^u, Aor. eKXay^a; — irXdCo (poet.) to 
cause to wander, Fut. irXdy^a^ etc. Aor. Pass, iirxdyx^i' ; — ffaXTti^w^to blow a 
trumpet, Fut. -iy^a, etc. (later also -f<r«, etc.) 

$ 144. Formation of the Tenses. 

Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and 
Mid. with the tense-characteristic o-, and the first Perf. and 
first Plup. Act. with the aspirated i endings -a and -elv, when 
the characteristic is a Pi or Kappa-mute; but with the 



The Perf Act. of all verbs properly ends in /co, but where k is preceded by 
a Pi or Kappa -mute, that mute combines with k and is changed into the cor- 
respondmg rough. On the contrary, a Tau-mute before k is dropped, e. g. 
T€TV7r/co = rirvipa ; irfirpdyKa = veirpdxa, but veireiKa instead of xeireif^Ko. 



k 144.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. 175 

endings -/ca, -Kecv, when the characteristic is a Tau-mute ; 
though the Tau-mute is omitted before k (§ 17, 5). 

Remark 1. For the change of a Tau-mute into <r, before fi in the Perf Mid. 
or Pass, see § 19, 1 ; for the change of a Tau-mute into <r before t, see § 17, 5, 
but this <r is omitted before c of the personal-endings, e. g. ircVeto'iuoi, -ctcu, 
^((ppcurfiai, -ffTou. ; but second Pers. TreTrei-o'oi, v4(ppa-(rai instead of 7re7ret<r-<r<u, 
trefpcur-cau The vowels o, t, w are short in verbs which have a Tau-mute as a 
characteristic before endings with the tense-chara«teristic <r and k {-ku, -Keiy), 
e. g. <ppdC<ih (ppatrwj ecppaffa, irccppaKa ; irXdcrcuy to Jbrm, Tr\a<r<a ; vo/xf^cw, to thinkj 
4y6fu<ra ; K\v(a}, to wash, K\v<ru, etc ; in like manner, short vowels remain short, 
e. g. apfidC'^^ YipfxoKa. 

Eem. 2. On the changes which the mutes undergo by the addition of the j 
endings beginning with <r, ^, )u, or r, and before the aspirated endings -o, -€tV,l 
see §^ 17, 2 and 3, 19, 1. 20, 1 ; on the lengthening of -e into -et before o* of 
verbs in -eySo) or -ev^a, e. g. a-irevS-o}, Put. {<nreV5-<rw) (Tireia-u, Aor. (ia-imca^ 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. ea-'rreia-fjLai, see § 20, 2 5 on the omission of o- in endings 
beginning with a^, e. g. K€Kpv(p^ai instead of Ke/fpui^i^t {K^Kpvcpa^ai), irenXex- 
^ai instead of ireirKe^^ai, see § 25, 3 ; on the endings of the third Pers. PI. 
Perf and Plup. Mid. or Pass., -arai and -a to instead of -yraiy -vro, see §^18, 
1 and 116, 15 ; on the Ifariable vowel in the Secondary tenses, and in some first 
Perfects and Perfects Mid. or Pass^ see § 140 ; on the Att. Put. of verbs in 
-d((o, and -f^w, e. g. fiifid^u), Put. fitfido-w, /3ti8«, -^s, -^, •wrov^ -wfieUf etc., KOfdC<** 
Fut. KOfjtt&ce, KOfiiw, -tely, etc., see § 117. 

Eem. 3. "When /* precedes a Pi-mute, which is the characteristic of th« 
verb, e. g- in irtfiir-a, the /* is rejected in the Perf Mid- or Pass, before endings 
beginning with fi] thus, irefiv-co, to send, ire-ire fj.-fj.ai (instead of ire-irefnr-fjjcu, ire- 
irefifx-fjxu), ir4ir€fj.\pai, ireircjUiTTat, etc., Inf. ireirffx(p^ai, Part, ireirefxfjivos ; so 
ndfiTTT-w, to bend down, Ke-Kafx-fxai (instead of Ke-KafJ-ir-fiaiy K4-Kafj.fx-fj.ai). Also 
when two gammas would stand before /u, one 7 is omitted, e. g. c<piyy-(t)^ to tie, 
t-fftpiy-fioi -(instead of €-<r(^i77-/Mn), 6<r0tyfai, ta^vyKTau, etc., Inf i<r<piyx^ctiy 
Part. i<T<f>iyfi4yo5 ; so i^eXeyxo), to convince, i^€\-{i\eyfj.ai (instead of i^eK-fiXeyxf^ait 
i^eX-fiyyfiat), i^eXriXey^aij etc. Both the jj. and y are here dropped to prevent 
the concurrence of three consonants 



176 



PARADIGMS OP MUTE VERBS. 



f$ 143 



Paradigms OF Mute Vekbs. 
^ 145. A- Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Pi-mute 

(a) Pure Characteristic, )3, tt, <p (Put. -^ft>). 

* rpT^o), to rub. 



ACTIVE. 



Ind. rptfi-o) Subj. rpifi-<a Imp. TpIjS-e Inf. rpifi-eiy Part, rpifi-wy 

Ind. ^-rpl^-ov Opt. Tpf^-oifxi 

Ind. (Te-Tpr/3-o) r4-rpl(p-a Subj. T€-rpf<p-co Imp. not used. Inf. re- 

rpl^-eyat Part. T€-rpi(p-(t)s 
Ind. (e-Te-Tfir)8-eiV) i-T€-rpi(j)-eiu Opt. re-TpT<p-oifjLi 
Ind. (Tpij8-(r«) Tpi\p(a Opt. Tpi\l/oifj.i Inf. ipi^eiv .Part, rpli^aiv 
Ind. €-TpL^a Subj. rpixl/u Opt. rplypaifiai Imp. Tp7\\/ov Inf. rf'i^cu 

Part. Tpti/^as. 



Pres. 
Impf. 
Perf. 

Plup. 
Put. 
Aor. I. 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. 
Impf. 



Ind. Tpifi-ofiai Subj. Tpifi-wfxai Imp. rpifi-ov Inf. rpifi-ea^ai Part. 
Ind. i-rpllS-ofj.rjv Opt. rpl^-oifx-riv 



Perf. 



Ind. 1 


S. 


1. 




2. 




3. 


D 


1. 




2. 




3. 


P. 


1. 




2. 




3. 



{re-rpifi-ixai) 

re-rpifM-fxai 

Te-Tpi^pat 

Te-rpiTT-Tai 

T€-TpifjL-ixe^ov 

ri-rpi<p-^op 

re-rpKp-^ov 

re-TpifJL-fjie^a 

T4-Tpi(p-^€ 

Te-Tpiu-fxevoi et(ri{v) 
or Te-Tpi(p-a.Tai 



Imperative. ^ 
(re-Tpj^S-co) 
Te-Tpi»^o 
Te-Tpi(p-^a> 

Te-Tpicp-^ou 

TC-Tpi(p-^(VV 
T€-Tpi(p-^e 

r€-Tpi(p-^Q}(rav 
or re-Tpi<p-^a}V 



Infinitive. 
(re-TpT^B-id^cu) 

Participle. 
Te-rpifi-fxevoSy -r;, -oy 

Subjunctive. 
re-rpifi-fieyos 5 



Plup. 
Ind. 

Opt. 



S. 1. 
2. 
3. 



i-Te-Tpifi-fiTiV D. i-Te-Tpifi-fie^ov 
i-Te-Tpiypo e-Te rpicp-^ou 

i-re-rpiir-TO i-Te-Tpicp-^rfV 

Te-TpiyL-fxivos e'lrju 



P. i-re-Tplfi-fie^a 
i-Te-Tpi<p-^€ 
re-Tpi/x-^evoi r^cav 

[or i-T€-Tpi(p-a.TO 



Put. 
Aor. I. 

P.Pf. 



Aor. I. 

Put. I. 

AIL 

P.IL 



Ind. rplypofiai Opt. Tpi\polfj.'r)v Inf. Tpii|/e(r.^ai Part. rpv^Sfx^vos 

Ind. i-rpi^dfirju Subj. TptT|/W|Uai Opt. TpL\l/aliJLr}v Imp. rpT^/'eu Inf. 

rplxl/aa^ai Part. Tptij/a/xej/os 
Ind. Te-Tpt;|/o/iat Opt. T^-Tpi-^oiyi'r]v Inf. re-TpfTfea-S-cu Part. Tc-Tpiif'cJ- 



PASSIVE. 



Ind. {i-Tpi^-Stvv) i-Tpl(p-^v Subj. rpi<p-^(a Opt. Tpi<f>-^ei-nv Inf. 

Tpi(p-Strjvai Imp. Tpicp-SrrjTi Part, rpi^-^eis, (instead of I. Aor. 

Pass., commonly II. Aor. Pass.) 
Ind. rpi<p-h7\<rofj.ai Opt. rpKp-^aolpi-qv Inf. Tpi<p-^ae<r^cu Part, rpt^ 

Ind. i-Tpffi-nv Subj. rptyS-w Opt. rpt^-^i-qv Imp. rptp-TjSn Inf. Tp^iS- 

i]j/ai Part, rpf^-eis 
Ind. Tp'i^-'fja-ofiai Opt. rptfi-rjaoifXT]}/ Inf. Tp1fi-f]ae(r^ai Part. rpjiS- 



Verbal adjective: (Tpii8-T({s) rptTr-rc^s, -^, -Jj/, TpiTr-reos, -eo, -e'ov. 



♦^ 146, 147.] PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



177 



^ 146. (b) Impure Characteristic, irr in Pres. and Impf. (Put. -pw). 

K^TTTaf to cut. 



>aa 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. [ PASSIVE. 


Pres. 


KOTTT-W 


KOTTT-O/iCU 


Perf. I. 


(K€-K<nr-a) K4-K0<p-a 


Ke-Koix-fMi, like re-Tpi/ifiai 


Perf. n. 


Ke-Koir-a (Horn.) 




A. I. i-K6(p-^v 


Put. 


{Kotr-ffw) Ko;|/ft> 


K6\\/ofxai 


P. I. KO(t>-^aofiai 


Aor. I. 


e-Koi|/a 


4-K0\l/dfx.riv 


A. II. i-KSir-T^y 


Put. Pf. 




K€-K6\\/oixai 


P. n. Koir-T](roiJMi 


Verbal adjective : kott-tos, -V;, -6y, Koir-rios, -reo, -r4ov. 1 




Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 


KifX 


ir-T-«, to bend down {KeKaiX'/xai for KeKafi/jL-fiou, § 144, Rem. 3). 


Ind. 


S. 1. 


K€KafjLfJ.ai 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 




2. 


KiKa/jLypai 


KfKafi^O 


KCKdfKp^ai 




3. 
D. 1. 


KfKafnrrai 

KfKd^lfli^OV 


KeKdfKp^u) 


Participle. 




2. 


KfKa/JLp^Ot/ 


KiKdfxcpbwv / Subjunctive. 




3. 


KeKa/jLcp^ov 




P. 1. 


K€K(iflfJ.€^a 




KeKafijJLfyos & 1 




2. 


K€Kafi(p^e 


/ceVa/x03^6 






3. 


K€KafXfi4yoi elal{v) 


KCKdii<p^(i)<rav, oi Ke/f«£/Lt^id^w»/] 1 


Verbal adjective : KaninrSsy -i], -6v, KafXTTTfos, -r^a, -reoy. 1 



'$ 147. B. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Kappa* 

mute (y, K, x)' 

(a) Pure Characteristic, 7, ac, %. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and 

Impf., (Tffy Att. TT, rarer ^. 

ir\//c-ctf, ^0 weave. Put. -|a>. rao-cw, Att. tottco, ^0 arrange. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 
Perf. 

Put. 
F.Pf. 


(rre-'TrKeK-a) 
^ / . ' 
7r6-irAeX"« 
(7r\^K-orctf) 7rA.e|« 


irKfK-ofiai 
{ire-irXeK-fiai) 
ire-irKey-fiai 
irXe^oixai 


rd(T(r-a) 
{re-Tay-a) 
Tt-Tox-a 
{rdy-cro}) rd^w 


rdtrff-ofuu 

Ti-rayfiai 

rd^of-LOX 

re-rd^oaou 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 
Put. I. 
A. II. 
F. II. 


trXix-^O'OfJLai 
4-Tr\dK-T)V and i-irX4K-T]v 
'jr\aK-'f}(TOfiai 


(i-rdy-^v) i-rdx-^v 

rax-^VCOfKU 
i-rdy-rjv 
ray-'fia'ofj.ai 


Verbal adjective : 7rAe/cT<Js, -17, -6v ; irXcK-reos, -Tea, -reW ; tuktSs, raKrios. 



1T8 



PARADIGMS OP MUTE VERBS. 



[^ 148. 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 


1 


tSo-o-cw, to arrange, and o-cptyyw (§ 144, Rem. 3), to bind. j 


Ind. S. 1. 


r^rayixai 


i(r<piynai 


Imperative. j 


2. 


TfTO^ai 


€(r<piy^ai 


TCTO^O 


€<r<piy^o 


3. 


reroKTai 


(orcpiyKTai 


rerax^(a 


ia<piyx^6o 


D.l. 


rerdy/Me^ov 


iacpiyfxe^ov 






2. 


rerax^ou 


€(r<piyx^oy 


terax^ov 


etrtpiyx^oy 


3. 


rirax^ov 


ecripiyx^ov 


rerdx^ojy 


iff(piyX^(i3V 


P. 1. 


Tcrdyix^^a 


icrcpiyfi^^a 






2. 


retax^e 


i(r(piyx^^ 


rerax^e 


e(r<piyX^€ 


3. 


Terayfieuoi et<ri{v), 


i<f(piyfi4uoi €l(ri{f) 


rerdx^d'O'av, 


i<r<f>iyx^(>>(rayi 




or reraxo-Tat 




or Terdx^uy 


or ia<l>iyx^(i>y 


Inf. rerdx^cu 


^a<piyX^0Li Part, rerayfievos 


ia-ipiy/xevos. 



Remark. The student will observe particularly the changes which take 
place in the inflection of the Perf. Pass, of these verbs : rerpifi'/xai (instead of 
TeTpiP-fiai), iS before ^ being changed into /* ; Terpi^pat (instead of TfTpiir'aai)^ 
IT and <r forming ip; rerpiir-Tai, the characteristic it remaining unchanged ; 
rerpicp'^oy (instead of rerpiir-^ov), the characteristic v being changed into <p, to 
be of the same order as the 3^ following (§ 17, 2) ; so others similar. In like 
manner, ritwyiiai : T^Ta|ot (instead of riray-aai), y and a forming | ; riraicrat 
(instead of rirayrai)^ y being changed into k, to be of the same order as the 
T following 5 rirax^ov (instead of TiraySroy), y being changed to correspond 
with &. 



-X-i 



k 148. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau- 

mute (8, T, ^). 

(a) Pure Characteristic, 5, t, d^. (b) Impure Characteristic in Pres. and Impf, 

^, rarer cv. — Put. <rw. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 

Impf. 
Perf. 

Plup. 
Put. 

Aor. I. 
P.Pf. 


to deceive, 
e-ypevS-oy 
[e-rpevd-Ka) 


^€vS-ofiai, 

to lie. 
i-rpevd-SfJLTjy 
{e-ipevd-fiai) 

(»|/€uS-(ro/««) 

i-^ev-a-dfiriv 
i-ypev-ffofiai 


(ppdCfc. 
to say, 
e-<ppaC-oy 
(^(-(ppaS-Ka) 
ire-tppd-Ka 
i-ir€-<ppa-K€iv 
{(ppdS-ffu) 
(ppa-aco 
%-<ppa.-a(X 


ippdC-onai, 
to think, 
4-<PpaC-6n7jy 
{■K4-<(>paS-ijLat) 
7r4'<ppa(r-fiai 
4-iri-<Ppd(T-}irjv 
{<ppdS-(rofjuu) 

<ppd-(TOIJMl 

4(ppa-<rdii'ny 
ire-ippd-a-ofJLCu 


PASSIVE. 1 


Aor. I. 
Put. I. 


(i-^evS-^y) i-ypeitr-^y 

^€V(r-^(rofxai 


{i-<PpdS-^v) i-<ppd(r-bT)y 

<Ppaa-^i(TOfJLCu 


Verbal Adj. : (t^euS-re'oj) ^^vtr-rios, -r4a, -r4oy ; ippcux-rios, -rU, -reoy, \ 



i 149.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 



179 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 



Ind. S. 1. 


^^ifir-fJLeu 


2. 


t\l/€v-crai 


3. 


ej^cu<r-Tai 


D. 1. 


iy\ifi(T-ix€^ov 


2. 


f\f/€V-0 ^ov 


3. 


t\(/€V-O^OV 


P. 1. 


^€vff-fie^a 


2. 


€\pexj-a-^e 


3. 


eTl/€V<r-/ji.euoi elarl{y) 



Imperative. 
i\l/(v-a^ea<rav, or 



€\ /ey 



Infinitive. 

Participle. 
4-\l/€var-fi4yoSy -77, -ov 

Subjunctive. 
i-\p€V(r-fievos 2>. 



Remark. Sti^co, to save, has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, areaw-fuu from <rc^ 
^Attic), and aea-uxrfiai, but Aor. iadlt^Vj verbal Adj. awareos. 



§ 149. FOEMATION OP THE TeNSES OP LiQUID VeKBS. 

1. Liquid verbs (§ 127, II. B.) form the Fut. Act. and 
Mid. and the first Aor, Act. and Mid. without the tense- 
characteristic a (§20, 3) but the Perf. Act. with the tense- 
characteristic K, e, g. 

ffipdWot (stem 2*AA.), Fut <r<^oA-ft), first Aor. e-a-cp-nX-Uy Perf. e-o-^oA-Ko, 

Remark 1. The endings of the Put. in liquid verbs, namely, -cD, -ovfrnij are 
formed by contraction from -c<ra>, -fao/xai after the rejection of o- (§ 20, 3). The 
inflection of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -€« in the 
Pres. Act. and Mid.: <^iA-«, <pi\-ovfiai (§ 135) ; <r is omitted in the Put. of liquid 
verbs, to prevent the harshness occasioned by the combination of that letter with 
the preceding liquid. The Fut. Perf. is wanting in liquid verbs. 

2. The Present tense of Liquid verbs, with the exception 
of a few whose stem-vowel is €, is strengthened, either by- 
doubling the characteristic \, or by inserting the liquid v 
after the characteristic ; also, by lengthening the short stem- 
vowel, as in all verbs in -fvo), -vvco, -vpo), or by changing it 
into a diphthong (§ 16, 3), e. g. a(j)aX-\-a), Te/z.-i/-<», Kpiv-co, 
djjLvv-co, KTew-cj, (paiv-ci) (stems X^AA, TEM, KPIJV(t), 
'AMTN(v), KTEN, ^AN) ; but /xeVo), vifi-co with a pure 
stem. 

3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from 
the pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened 
in the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. acpdW-ca 
(X^AA), Fut. cr(^aX-w, second Aor. Pass, i-acpdk-rjv, first 
Perf. Act. €-<r(f>a\-Ka, first Aor. Act. €-a<f>'q\'Cu The second 
Aorists Act. and Mid. rarely occur, and scarcely at £dl in 



180 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS, [} 14? 

prose ; on the contrary, the second Aor. Pass, is more in use 
than the first Aor. ; the first Aor. is wholly wantiiig in many 
verbs. 

4. In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the 
ground-form of the stem is not borrowed, as in the case 
of mute verbs, from the second Aor., but 'from the Fut., 
since only a few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act, 
and Mid. 

5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as 
the stem-vowel of the Fut. is d, e, I, or v before the ending o). 
In the first Aor. Act. and Mid. d is lengthened into ??, € into 
€t, I into Ij V into v (§ 16, 3). Thus : — 

X, I. Class with a in the Future. 

Pres. Fut. A«^. 

(r<pdw-(i), to deceive, c'<pa\-(a i-a<pr\X-a 

Koifiv-a, to lalxjr, KafM-ovfiou wanting 

reKfiaip-a, to point out, TeK/xap-w i-rcKfx-qp-a 

<palv-03, to show, tpau-u t-cprjv-a. 

11. Class with c in the Future. 

jtieVw, to remain, fiev-ui e-fieiv-a 

hrfyiKK-u, to announce, ayye\-w ^yyciX-a 

r€fxv-a, to cut, rffx-u wanting 

v4fi-o}, to divide, v^fi-Ci t-vcin-a 

KTeiv-w, to kill, kt€v-u e-/CTetv-a 

tfieip-w, to desire, Ififp-u ifieip-a 

in. Class with » in the Future. 
riW-a, to pluck, TtA-w ^-rlA-a 

Kptu-w, to separate, KpXv-w %-Kplv-a. 

IV. Class with v in the Future. 
avp-ca, to draw, trvp-a %-(rvp-a 

afiiu-w, to defend, kfivv-u ijfivv-a. 

_ Eem. 2. The following verbs in -aivw of the first class take d in the Aor. 
instead of ??, namely, jo-xwij/cu, to make emaciated (t(rx»'dj/a, Icrxvavcu) ; KepSaiyety 
to gain (iKepMva, KepSauai) ; KoiXaivw, to hollow out {iKoiXdva, KOiXavai) ; XevtcaLyet. 
to whiten; opyaiyw, to enrage; ^ir^Traiva}, to ripen; also all verbs in -paivw, e. g. 
7repaiJ/w,^Fut. TvepavS), Aor. iirepaua, Inf. -rrepavai (except TerpaiVw, to bore, irfTfrf 
va, rerpriyai), and all in -laiyu, e. g. Tnaiua, to make fat, i-rrlava, viavou (except 
uiaivw, to stain, fiirivai, rarely ^jawj). — The verbs trnfxalvca, to give a signal, and 
Ko^aipa), to purify, have both arifiwai (Avhich is usual anions tlie Attic writers), 
KaSirripai, and (rrjfxavai, KoStapai. Also aXpa, to raise, and SXxo/toi, to leap, are 
formed with a : dpai, aXaa^ai, but in the Ind. the a is changed into tj on account 
of the augment, e. g. ^pa, TjXdfxriu (second Aor. rj\6fji-nv is not used in the Ind. 
and very rarely elsewhere). Comp. on a, § 16, 7 (a) 



f 149.J FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 181 

6. The first Peif. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v 
(according to § 19, 3), must end in -7/ca, e. g. /jLe/juiay-Ko^ 
Plut. (from /jbcaLvo) instead of fMe-fiiav-Ko), ire<f)ajyKa^ Dinarch. 
(from (palvco), Trapco^vyKa, Polyb. (from Trapo^vvco, to excite^* 
But the form in -jKa is found only among later writers. The 
best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by dropping the 
V, e. g. KeKpiKa, KeicKlica from Kpivco, kKlvco (so also KeKephaKa, 
among later WTiters, also KeKepBar/Ka, but KeKepBrjKa, Dem. 
56, 30. from Kephaivw) ; or also, as in kt€ivo), by using the 
form of the second Perf., e. g. aTre/crova, in the sense of the 
first Perf. (^e/crcvyKa, eKraKa, from the time of Maenander), 
or, as in the case of verbs in -ivco, by not forming any Perf., 
as, e. g. in fievco, by forming it from a new theme, as fMefii- 
vr)Ka from MENESl, 

7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v 
drop that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act, but 
also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, and in the first 
Aor. Pass. : — 

Kpfyuy to separate, KfKpiKa KiKpifxxu iKptbrjy 

K\ivw, to bend down, KtKKiKa KeKKlfiai iK\t^v (the 2d Aor, 4K\tyrjv is rare). 

TXuy«, to uxishy (ir(ir\ma) irivXvfjuu ivKvdriv (Hippoc.) 

Rem. 3. Telvw, to stretch, and KTeivw, to kill, form the above-mentioned tenses 
from new themes, viz. TAfl, KTANfl, KTAfl, thus : — 

TCTOKO TfTOLfiai iro^v 

tKTuKa (and eitrayKa) eKT&fiai ^kt^^u [iKrdv^v among the later writers); 

yet the forms of KTeivco here presented, are not Attic. The Attic writers use 
iKTova as the Perf. Act. (see No. 6), and instead of cKra^iai and iKrd^v, sub- 
stitute Tf^vrjKa and aire^avov in passive phrases with vir6 and the Gen., or 
ayvpriixai and avrjpe^v, without a preposition. 

Kem. 4. Kpifca, K\lv(i), rrXvuw, and KTeluw, among the poets, often retain v in 
the first Aor. Pass, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. iKkiv^Vf 
iwXvu^u; in prose, these forms seem to be doubtful, yet Kar€K\iu^ is found in 
X. Hell. 4. 1, 30, in all the copies. 

8. On the formation of the Perf. Mid., the following 
points should be noted : — 

Verbs in -alpu and uj/a>, usually drop the v before the endings beginning with 
fi, and insert <r to strengthen the syllable, e. g. <paiy-a) trecpa-ff-fjuu ire-<pd-(r-fjLf^a\ 
vcpaivo} u^acr/xot ; fxepaivo> [Me/AdpacTfjLai (Luc.) 5 (njfialuti} (Ttarnxaayiai ; trepaivu ireiri' 
paafxai ; paiv<a tppacixai ; iraxyvw ireTrdxvffiJLat ; ^Suj/co 7}Su(r/io< ; Keinvvo} AeAeV- 
rvafuxi] o^vyu Ht^vafjioi ] ^\vuu> Tcd^Awr/nou (Luc); iriaifxa ireiriouriMU ] rpaxvvv 

16 



182 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



:^ 150. 



rer pdxvfTfxai (Luc.) ; hvfialvo/xai \e\vixafffi4yoi elcri{v); fualvot fiffilafffxat ; but 
some verbs of this kind assimilate the v to the following fi, e. g. ^ripaiv-ai, 
i^-flpafi-fiai instead of i^-ftpavfiai (also €|^pcwr/*at), irapo^wu, irapci^vfifiou, odaxw-o* 
^irxvufnat (Homer) ; a very few verbs drop y among the later writers, without 
substituting a strengthening <r; the vowel, however, is made long, e. g. rpaxw-w^ 
to make rough, re-rpdxv-fiai also TeTpdxva-fuu and reTpdxvfMfiai. It is evident that 
in the personal-endings, except those beginning with /tt, the y remains, e. g. 
V€(l>a(r-/iaii •K4<pav-vai, ire-<l>avrai, i^^pafi-fiai, -avarai, 'avrai, fjax^finou, -vvccuy 
-vvTai, -ifi'fie^oy (see ipaiy-a> and ^r^palywy § 151) ; still, it is to be noted that the 
form of the second Pers. Sing., in -yffou, is rare ; instead of it the Part, with 
rt is used, e. g. ire<paa-fi4yo5 ef, etc. 

Eem. 5. On the omission of <r in endings beginning with o-^, s<,« 4 25, 3 ; 
on the variable a, in the first Perf. Act. and Mid. and in the first Aor. Pass., and 
also in the second Aorists of liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and the 
stem-vowel e, see § 140, 3 ; on the Perf. of aytlpwy and iydpw with Att. Redup., 
see § 124, 2 (b). 

9. In the second Perf. (which, however, belongs only to 
a few verbs) the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is 
lengthened, as in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with e 
in the Fut, which take the variable o (§ 140, 4), e. g. <f>aiv-(o, 
first Aor. e-^v-a^ second Perf. 7re-(jyr]v-a', but airelp-a), Fut. 
cirep-S), second Perf. e-airop-cu 

Bem. 6. Second Aorists Act. and Mid. are rare in liquid verbs, e. g. efiaXov^ 
i0a\6fjir]v, eKOLvoyj iVTapov (doubtful in prose) from $dWut koxvw, m-cupw, icrel- 
vw ; Aorists are also formed from some irregular verbs ; a few verbs, also, have 
a second Aor. Pass., e. g. those with monosyllabic stems, as Sepw, iSdprjVy ^€^ 
pUf orreAAw, <paiyuj puaivwy KXivWy etc. 



h 150. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs. 

oTfyiXXwy to announce. 



ACTIVE 



Pres. a-yy4\Kw Perf. I. ¥iyycK-Ka Perf. 11. l-«^op-«, perdidi, from ^pSt^ip-^ 



Fut. Ind 



Aor. T. 

Aor. II. 

(rare) 



S 



D, 



ayy^K-Si 

ayyeX-etrov 

077€\-erT€ 



Opt. ayyf\o7fu 
d776\o7s 
ayy^Ko'i 
ayyiXoTrov 
ayyeKolrTjy 
aYye^oifjLey 

ayycXoTey 



or d77eA.o^77J' 
" ayyeXoljjs 

" iyycXolrrroy 

*' O77€A0t^T7JI' 

" ayyeXolrifiey 

" 0776X0177x6 

d77eA.or€V 



Inf. d77fX6?y Part. ayyeXuv, -ovaa, -ovy 



iJYy^i\-a, ayyeiXw, aYyelXaifxi, 67761X01', i77eTXai, d77€^\as 
Ind. ^77eA.-o»' Subj. o776'\w Opt. a77€\ot;tu Imp. itrycAc 
InfoTTeXeTr Part. aYyeXciy, -ovffa, -6v. 



♦ 151.] 



PARADIGMS OF LtQtflD VERBS. 



183 



MIDDLE. 1 


Pcrf. Ind. 


S. 1. 


¥tyy^\-fxai 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 




2. 


^77€A.-<rat 


^yyek-cro 


•^776A-i^ai 




3. 


^77€A-Tat 


riyy4\-^a> 


Participle. 




D. 1. 


•^77eA-/te3^«i' 




^ry7€A.-/Li€Voy 




2. 


^77eA.-i&^o»' 


ijyy^^-^oy 


Subjunctive. 




3. 


^yytA-iS-oi/ 


iryy4\-^wy 


iryy^^-ft'^yos 5 




P. 1. 


^JTyeA-ztcei^a 








2. 


^77eA.-d^€ 


ijYyiX-^f 






3. 


ijYyiK-fjiivoi €t<n'(i') 


^77eA,^ctf(roi', or rfYy4\-^wv] 


Plup. Ind. 


ijyy4\ 


-/UTJV, -ao^ -TOy -flCfS-Oy, 


'dovy -i^v, -jnedo, -i^€, 7iYY^^4voi ^crav 


Fut. Ind. 


S. 1. 


A77e\-oDjtMU 


Opt. dTyeA-o^/UTji/ [ Infinitive. 




2. 


d77€A-^, or -€i 


i77€A-oro 


•y7eA.-er(r3^at 




3. 


a77€\-errca 


i77€\-orTo 


Participle. 




D. 1. 


oyyeA-ou^ei^oj/ 


ayycA-oifie^ou 


dyycA.-ow^evos 




2. 


&77€A.-er(rd^o*> 


iLyyeK-oia^dov 






3. 


ayye\-c7(r^otf 


kyy€\-ol(T^v 






P. 1. 


oyyeA-ou/uei^a 


aYYf\-oliu.€da 






2. 


077e\-er<rd^6 


ayy€\-o7a^e 






3. 


077€\-oi5ktcu 


orfyiK-oivro 




Aor I. 


Ind. i}yy ciK-dfirjv, etc. 


1 


Aor. n. 


Ind. riyy(\-6fir]v Subj. ayyeK-ufiai Opt. ajy(\olfir]U Imp. 


(rare) 


ikyye\-ov Inf. ayye\-e(r^ai Part. iLyyf\-6/JL€V0S. 


Verbal adjective : ayyeK-reos, -rca, -t4ov. 1 



V 



^ 151. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the 
stem-vowel of the Future. 

(a) with & in the Future: <T(pd\\w, fnllo; (palyw, to sAow, Mid. 

to appear. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Pcrf. I. 
Perf. II. 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 



(r<pdw-(a 
f-(r<pr]\-a 



MIDDLE. 



fftfxiW-oficu 

<T(pa\ovfiai 
wanting 



ACTIVE. 



(ire-tpay-Ka) 



MIDDLE. 



ir(-<fnfv-a, 1 appear, 
(f>av-u 



<paiv-o/j.ai 
x4-<pa(r-fxai 



<pay-ovfiou ' 



* I shall appear, a.iro<p., I shall affirm. * Prose iirec^., it xvas affirmed by me. 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 
Fut. I. 
Aor. II. 
Fut. II. 



i-<r<pd\-^v (poet.) 
(r(pa\-^-f](TOnai (poet.) 

i-(r<p&\-r}u 
cr(paK-{i<rofiat 



i-<pdy-^v, I appeared, 

<pou/-^<rofxai 
i-(p&u-rfy, I appeared, 

<pav-4\<rofJLai, [ will appear. 



Verbal adjective : (r<^aX-Teoj, -reo, -rfou, <f>av-rfos. 



184 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VEEBS. 



[^ 152, 153 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 
^aiu'Ujtoshow; ^t] palu-w, to dry, a.ni relu-w {^ 149, Eem. 3), to sfretcA. 


lud. S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D. 1. 

2. 

3, 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


ire-cpour-fiai 

7re-(pav-(rai 

ire-ipau-rai 

7r€-(pd(r-/J.fbov 

ire-<pav-bov 

7r4-<pav-bov 

Tre-ipda-fx^ba 

iri-cpav-be 

ire-cpacr-fieuot. eiVt(i/) 


i-^-fjpafi-fjLOU 

4-\i]pav-<Taj. 

i-^ijpav-Tcu 

4-^7ipdfJL-fj.ebov 

4-^7]pay-boy 

4-\r]pav-hov 

4-^ripdfJ.-fJ-fba 

4-\i]pav-b€ 

4-\r}pafx-ix4voi i\<Ti(v) 


re-rd-fuu 
rt-TCL-cax 

re-ri-ficbov 

Ti-ra-abov 

re-ra-ffdov 

Tf-T&-fji€ba 

Tf-ra-abe 
Tf-ra-yrou 


Imp. S. 2. 

3. 

D.2. 

3. 

P. 2. 

3. 


[iri-cpav-ao) 
ire-cpdv-bw 
Tr4<pav-bov 
Tre-cpdu-bwv 
ire-<pav-b€ 
Tre-<pdy-bucrav, or 
Tre-(pdu-bav 


{4-^7ipav-(To) 
4-^ripdu-bco 
4-\i]pav-bov 

i-^7)pdv-b(DV 

4-\-npau-be 
4-^r]pdv-b(D<ray, or 
4-^7)pdu-b(i)y 


r4 Td-<ro 

r€-rd-aboa 

re-ra-aboh 

n-rd-cbtcv 

rc-^a-abc 

r('rd-<rbti)(Tay, Of 

Tt-rd-abuv 


Inf. 


ire-cpdy-bai 


4-^t\pdv-h<u 


Tcrd-abai 


Part. 


ire-cpaa-fxepos 


e-^T]pafi-^euos 


re-rd-fifyos 



5 152. (b) with € in the Future: 'Ifielp-w (Ion. and Poet.), to 
desire, and ariWu, to send. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 
Perf. I. 
Put. 
Aor. I. 


Ififip-O) 
'Ifiep-Ka 
Ifxip-S) 
'IfjLfip-a 


Ifxeip-ofxau 
'ififp-fiat 
ifxep-ouficu 
tlj.eip-dfj.r}y 


ar4w-w 
f-a-ToX-Ka 

e-(rrfi\-a 


<rr4w-ofiat 
f-areiK-fJuu 

<m\-ovfuu 
i-arfiX-dfiTfy 


PASSIVE. 1 


Aor. I. 
Put. I. 


lfi4p-^v 
llxcp-bi](TO(xai 


4-(TTd\-^y A. II. i-irriX-Tiv 
<rTa\-^<rofmi F. II. a-ToK-^ffofjuu 


Verbal Adj. t/xep-ros, -^, -6y, i/xep-reosy -r4a, -r4ov, araX-ros, (rraX.-r4os. 
Remark. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, is like ^€X-/iax. 



§ 153. (c) "With i and v in the Future, 
(o) t(aa-co, to pluck; ffvptoy to draw; ^Xuv-w, to defile. 



Pres. 

Perf. 

Put. 
Aor, 1. 
A. I. P. 
P. I. P. 



riKK-ofiat 
re-TiX-Ka 

T4-Tl\-fJLaL 

TiA-w r'lX-ov/xai 
e-TtA-a 4-Ti\-d^i]y 
e-TiK-brjy 

ri\-bT](TofjLat 



ffvp-Ci} 

cvp-ofiai 
a-ffvp-Ka 
c4-(Tvp-pMi 

cvp-u (ri'p-ovficu 
e-avp-a 4-<Tvp-dfiriy 

4-(TVp-bT]V 

cvp-^aofxai 



Aor. 11. and Put. II. P. i-(rtp-r,y, ai-p-fxrofiou 



fio\vy-ct 
fioKvy-OfUU 

fie-fi6\va-fiau 

fjio\vy-u fjLoXiy'Ov/Juu 
4-fi6\vya 4-fxoKvv-dti'r\v 

4-fJt.0kVV-dT}V 

fioKvy-dijcofuu 



Verbal Adj. ti\-t6s, nX-reos, avp-rSs, (rvp-T4o5, fioXvy-rSs, no\vv-r4os. 
Remark 1. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of r4Ti\-,iai, (r4-<rvp- 
fiat, is like ^77eA-/xat, and that of fie- fi6\v(r-fjiai like ir4-<paff-fuuy that of paxw/i" 
ixai (from atVxw-a>, to shame), like 4-^-f,paiJ.-iMii. 



^ 154.] PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS 



185 



()8) K?dy-u, to bend down; ir\vv-Uy to loash, with y dropped (§ 149, 7). 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Perf. 
Put. 
Aor. I. 



KXiV-(0 

KKty-w 
i-KXlv-a 



MIDDLE. 



KXtv-ofxax 
Kc-KKl-fxai 
KXtv-ovixai 
i-KKiv-a.fxr]v 



ACTIVE. 



TTf-KKv-Ka 

ir\vv-u 
e-TrKvv-a 



MIDDLE. 



irXvy-ofiai 
■ir4-Tr\v-fjLai 
irXvy-ov/JLai 
i-irXvy-dfJL-qv 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 
Aor. II. 



4-K\f-^U Put. I. /fAl-i^O-O/iOi 

i-KXiv-i\v Put. II. KAiV-7;(ro/xat 



i-irXv'^v irXv-^aoficu 



Verbal Adj. kM-tSs^ -^, -6^^ K\i-r4os, -ria, -reov, ir\u-TJs, xAu-reos. 
Hem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. k4-k\X-imii and ire-TrXO- 
fiw. is like re-To-fWH, and corresponds with that of pure verbs. 



-k=- 



k 154. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of 
single Verbs, both Pure and Impure. 

1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle 
form, e. g, aKovin, I hear, Fiit. aKovcro/xat, I shall hear, Aor. -^'^ovcro, 
Iheard. See k 198. 

2. The following verbs in -aico or -atu and -cw, whose stem 
ended originally in -av ' and -cv (aF, iF), resume the v in the 
Aorist and Future (^ 25, 2) : — 

Kcdw (old Attic icdw seldom, and without contraction), to hum, Put. Katxru; Aor. 

e/couco; Perf. KeKavKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KfKoy/xai ; Aor. Pass, c/cau^i/; 

Put. Pass. Kav^crofiai; verbal Adj. /caucTeos, kuvctos, KavT6s] but second 

Aor. Act. iK&riVy I burned, Intrans., in the Ion. and later writers. 
K\al(o {kKOu seldom, and \N'ithout contraction), to weep, KXavffoixai or KXavaovfjLcu 

(No. 3), KXaixrw late ; first Aor. Act. t/cXai/o-a, etc. ; Perf. Pass. KfKXavfiou ; 

Aor. Pass. iKXava^v late. See § 166, 18. 
^€(1), to run, Put. ^eixTo/iai or ^€v(rovfiat (No. 3), ^tvau late; the other tenses 

are wanting. See rp4x<», ^ 167, 5. 
V(Q}, to swim, Put. vivffoiiai or j/euo'oiJ/nat (No. 3) ; Aor. ci/eutra; Perf. veVeu/fo. 
jrAe'ft), <o saiV, Put. TrAeworo/xoi, usually irAeucroC/xot (No. 3) ; Aor. eirAeuo-o; Perf. 

ireirAev/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. TrcTrAevor/icu ; Aor. Pass. ^irAcyc.^j' ; verbal 

Adj. XA€U(rT60S. 

' The u in the Put. of these verbs is occasioned by the reappearance of th© 
Digamma {F) softened into the vowel v. Tbe Digamma would regularly 
stand in the Pres. before the personal-ending <w, l)ut is omitted where it comes 
between two vowels : it appears, however, in tbe Put., as it there stands before 
the consonant <r. This is analogous to the disappearance, in the Pres., of some 
aspirate, perhaps h (comp. velio), in the Latin verbs flue, struo, and tbe reap- 
pearance of the same in the Perf. before s, with which it combines and forms x, 

16* 



186 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [^ 154. 

iryew, to blow, Fut. irye^ffofiai or vyeva-odfuu (No. 3); AoT. f-wvewra; Pert 

TreWeu/ca ; late Fut. we^o-w, and Aor. Pass. iTri/eia^y. 
pew, to Jlow^ Fut. piiffofxai ; Aor. eppcvcra ; both forms extremely rare in the 

Attic, which uses instead of them pxrfjffofjuut ^ppvr^v (§ 192, 7), and so also 

the Perf. ip^irjKa. 

Eemak« 1. The verb x*® (x^^f^* X*'^'")' ^° P^^ <^> differs from the pre- 
ceding verbs: Fut. xe«; Fut. Mid. x^^l^^ (see No. 4); Aor. €x«i, Subj. xe». 
Inf. xf«'> Inap. x«<"'» X^'^'^^1 e^^i -^o^- -^^d- ^X"^/*'?" (see No. 7); Perf. Act 
Kex^Ka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. K4x^imi\ Aor. Pass, ^x^"? ^'it. Perf. xv^<ro;Mu 
(§ 223, R. 2). The forms with ew belong only to the Epic; Fut. x«'^»j ^or. 
€X€va. 

3. The circuniflexed Fut. in -ov/Aai which properly belongs to 
liquid verbs only, is used by the Doric WTiters with other verbs 
also, whose Future would regularly be in -o-w or -a-ofiau, e. g. 
rvij/Wj -elsy '€L, 'ovfxev, -etrc, -ovvrai ; Tuij/ov^iy etc. ; this is called the 
Doric Fut. and is in common use in the following verbs, yet 
only in the Middle form, with the signification of the Fut 
Act. : — 

(peiy-b), tojlee^ Fut. ^tev^ovfuu and <l>tv^ofuu 

iral^-a, to sport, " xai^ov^uu " "wai^ofuu 

XeC-«» alvum exonerare, " x*<''<'^'/"" 

ir{irT-«, to fall, " -wfcovfuu (nETG) 

irvp^duouai, to inquire, " trtvffovfuu, usually -rewrafjuu, 

and also in those mentioned under No. 2 : KKaiu, «-A.«w, rvtw, i4w, 

4. Future without the tense-characteristic. The Fut. of the 
following verbs, being without the Fut. characteristic <r, and 
having the inflection of the Present, takes entirely tlie form of 
a Present, viz. : — 

?5-«, Epic, usually eV^fw, to eat, Fut. n-ofuu; irlvw (nin), to drink; Fut. «-i- 
ofiai ; x€», to pour out, Fut. x^'w, Xf 'J, X^h etc. ; Fut. Mid. x^ofuu (see Rem. 1 ). 

5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs 
in 'ovfxai without o- : — 

fidx-ofiai, tojight, Fut. fiax-ovficu (formed from the Ion. fmX'f<rofuu). 
e^ofiai ('EAn), to sit, Fut. {iS-ovfiai) Ko^eS-ovfuu. 

6. The Fut. Perf of the following verbs has an Act form: — 

bviiffKu, to die, Perf. r4^Ka, lam dead, Fut. Perf. Tebv4)^w or -lo^uu, I shall 
be dead ; 

IffTTifii, to station, Perf. eo-Tjj/co, / stand, Fut. Perf. ear^ot or -iotuut I skaU 



♦ 155,] VERBS. SYNCOPE. 187 

dand. 'E<rT^|« and redvii^o) are old Attic ; k<rri\^otuu and Te,^|o/«u are 
only in the Attic, X. Cy. 6. 2, 17. 

7. The three following verbs, though not liquid, form the 
first Aor. according to the analogy of the second Aor., \\'ithout 
the tense-characteristic a : — 

fheiy (second Aor.), to say, first Aor. cTir-a; tptpw (*ErKfl), to bear, first Aor. 
fjyeyi^a (second Aor. IjyfyKoy) ; x<«i ^X*<* (see Rem. 1). 

Rem. 2. In the second Aor. iirtvovj from nET-a> (irlirr-w), to fall, the c is 
not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the t having here been 
changed into <r (Dor. timov). The first Aor. tinaa, is late ; in Eurip. Ale. 471 
and Troad. 294, the readings are not sufficiently confirmed. 

8. The following pure and impure- verbs form the Perf Subj. 
and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass, without the aid of the auxiliary 
€^u\ the impiu"e verbs by assuming an € as their characteristic 
in forming the tenses, become analogous to pure verbs : — 

Kri-onai^ I obtain, Perf. KtKrrifuu, I possess, Sul»j. Kftcru/juu, -ij, -^toi ; Plup. 
iKfKr-finrjy, I fX)ssfsstJ. Opt. Kffcnjfirjy, Kftcnjo, k(kt^to or K(Kr(fnir]y, -tfo, 

/Aifiy^aKfn (MNAH), to remind, Perf. fifnyrjfjxu, I remember, Subj. fiffiywfuu, -p, 

-rireu ; Plup. ifitfiy^ntfy, Opt. fiffiyrifir^y, -fjo, -pro or fxffiyp^nrjyf -yo, -^ro, and 

in X. An. I. 7, 5. ntfxvoio (in all the MSS.). 
fidWw, to throw (BAA), Perf. /3€^Atj/«u, second Pers. PI. Perf. Subj. Sio^e- 

$\ri<r^«, Andoc. p. 22. ^ 24. 
Ka\4(i>, to name, Perf. KtKXi^^uu, I am named; Plup. lK(K\-{iyLi\v, Opt. KtKXpurjyf 

-fjo, -TJro, 

Rem. 3. ^Krerfi^cbou may be found in PI. Rp, 564, c ; at present, however, 
the right reading is itcrfrfi^fffadoy, according to most MSS. 



$ 155. Syncope. 

1. A few verbs, in some forms, suffer Syncope (§ 16, S). 
E. g. the following words in prose : — 

iTfTOfuu, to fly, Aor. iirr6yir]y, irrftrbai, Fut. irr^aoficu (c syncopated). 

iyeipm, to wake, second Aor. riyp6fjiriy (also the Inf. (ypforbcu with the accent 
of the Pres.), I aivoke (Vyep^", I v^as awake), («« or » syncopated.) 

tpxonai, to go, second Aor. ^\^oy^ Inf iKbeTy, etc., from 'EAET0CI (u synco- 
pated), (^ 167, 2.) 

tifuUf to suppose, instead of oiofuu, vf^V instead of (f6yki\v. 



188 VERBS. METATHESIS. [$ 156 

2. This Syncope occurs most frequently after the redu« 
plication ; thus, e. g. 

a. In the Present: 
ylyuofxai, to become, instead of yi-yevofxai, stem TENXl. 
fii/xvo}, to remain, Poet., instead of (xi-fj.4vw. 

TriiTTw, to fall, instead of iri-ireTO), stem llETCi, 

7rnrpd(TK<i} from irepdco. ^ 

b. In the Perfect: 

ireTdvuvfii, to spreaa ovt, Tr4irTaiJt.ai] ireirT«/co (from HETO), to fall. 

$ 156. Metathesis. 

f 1. Metathesis (§ 22) occurs in the formation of the tenses 
of several verbs, most frequently in the Perf., Plup., first 
Aor. Pass., and first Fut. Pass, (seldom in the second Aor. 
Act), sometimes also in the Pres., both for the sake of an 
easier or more euphonic form, and, in poetry, for the sake 
of making a syllable long by position. 

2. In the Common language, the following verbs are 
subject to Metathesis : — 

fid\\w,to throw, Put. jSaAw (jSaAA^^j Aristoph. Vesp. 222); Aor. e$aXop', 
Aor. Mid. i^axSfj.rju ; BAA: Perf. jSe'iSATj/co; Perf. Mid. or Pass. fiefiKi)- 
fiai] AoY.'PsiSS. ifi\7)^T]v; Put. Pass. i8A77^<ro;uoi ; Put. Perf. )36)3AVo.t«t'- 

Safidw, usually Sojua^o;, to tame, Put. dafxaa-co; Aor. iSdfiaffa] AMA: Perf. 545- 
lxi\Ka; Perf Mid. or Pass. SeSfj-Tj/xai ; Aor. Pass, id/iij^'ny, ildfi-riv. 

54(j.(o, to build {mostly Poet, and Ion.) ; Aor. Act. eSeifia ; Aor. Mid. e5ei/io/i7jy ; 
AME: Perf. SeBfx-nKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SiSfiijuai. 

Sfvi](TKas,to die, Aor. imi^avov; Perf. Te^vrjKa. 

^pcixTKw, to leap, Aoi*. e^opov. 

Ka\4a, to call (Poet. KiKK-fiaKa, like ^vfia-Ku), Put. ko\«; Perf. /ce/cXijKo. 

Kdfivw, laboro, Aor. eKafiow, Perf. KeKfiriKa. 

(T/ceAAw, o-zceAeoj, to make dry, second Aor. %(TK\-nv) Perf. €<r/cXijKa; Put. 
a/cATjco/iot. 

T^ixvu, to cut; Aor. irc(iov\ Perf. r4Tfji.r]Ka. 

r^-flffofittii Iwill bear; Aor. erA^jv; Perf. rerArj/co, from the stem TAAA. 

Remark, When the stem of the verb is dissyllabic, then the vowel, trans- 
posed by Metathesis coalesces with the following vowel; (a) In inflection: — 

Kepd'vuvfii (Poet. Kepd-a), to mingle; Put. Kepaaa ; Perf. IVIid. or Pass. Kc/cpd 

/lai instead of K^-Kp4a-ixai; Aor. Pass. ^Kpab-qv. 
vivpdffKWytoseU (instead of tnirepda-Kw^ TrnrpedffKO)), from vepoLcc (hencc Put 



157, 158, "• VERBS IN -a> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 



183 



vepaffu) ', Perf. ■JTC'Trpd/ca, flreTpd/tto. ; Aor. Pass. iTrpad^Tjy] Fut. Perf. 

ireiTfxio'o/tat. 
ffTope-yvv/jLi, to strow ; secondary form ffTpdJvvvfii (instead oi arp^6vwij.i)\ 

"Exxi. ff r p di (T w \ Aor. IcTpwo-a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. €(rrpo)uai; Aor. 

Pass, iarpu^rjv. 
ireXd^ca, appropinquo, to bring to, ireXd^a), irXoL^u; Aor. Pass. eTreA.ao'i^v ; 

Poet. Att. iirxd^rjv] second Aor. Att. ^irAd/trji'; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

Att. v4ir\a fiat, 
(b) The same holds also in the stem of the verb ^parru, to disturb (formed 
from rapdrTUj TpadTTw), an Attic form of rapdaffw ; Aor. e^pa^a. 



{ 157. Verbs in -o> with the Stem of the Present 

strengthened. 

1. It has already been seen {kk 138-140), that the stem of 
many verbs is strengthened in the Present ; but tliis strength- 
ening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the 
modes of strengthening aheady mentioned, by t {tttj kt), a- (cro-, 
^), and by lengthening the stem- vowel, there are others, which 
will now be specified. 

Remark. All the forms which are assumed for the sake of constructing the 
tenses in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 138, 3). The abbreviations, D. M., 
signify Deponent Middle, and D. P., Deponent Passive (§ 102, 3). The fj. i, placed 
in parenthesis, shows that the form standing before it, is analogous to the con- 
jugation in -fjLi, to be treated below. See § 191. 



M58. I. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the 
Pres. and Imp/, by inserting v before the ending. 

Peeliminart Remark. 'Qaivu lengthens the stem-vowel a into ai ; €Aavj/a>, 
a into av ', hvvw and irivcay v and I into and r. 

1. BatVo), to go (BA-), Fut. ySTJo-o/xat; Perf piji-qKa {k 194, 2); 
second Aor. tj^-qv (jxl, § 191); the Pass, occurs in compounds, 
e. g. ava^aiVOfxaL, dva^c/?a/x,at, 7rapa^€)8a/xat, ave^a^rjv, TrapejSaSrpf 
[H 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, ySaros, fSarios. 

Remark. First Aor. Act. I/Stjo-o, and Put. /3i^(r«, are transitive, / brought^ 
vnll bring, and belong only to the poetic, Ionic, and later writers 

2. Svv(x), to go in, to go under, to put on. The unstrengthened 
verb Sua) (KareBvo)) has in the Pres., in the Fut Svao) and first 
Aor. Act. eSuo-a, a transitive signification, to wrap up, to immerse, 



t90 VERBS IN -0> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [\ 158. 

to sink; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, dTroSeSvKo/;) Aor. 
Pass. iSv^rjv; Fut. Pass. Sv^a-ofxat [$ 130 (b),2].. But the Mid. 
BvofjLai, BeSvfxai, Sva-ofxaL, iBvadfjiTjv, signifies to wrap up one's self, to 
go into, or under, to clothe one's self; likewise the Perf. Se'Svxa 
and the Aor. ISw (/xt, ^ 191), have an intransitive signification, 
like hvofiai. Verbal adjectives, hvT6<iy hvrios. 

3. eXawo), to drive (secondary form cXtu, -as, etc. poetic, yet 
also in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. a-jriXa, Imp.) ; Fut. eXoo-w (in later writers, 
though also X. An. 7. 7, 56. cAao-ovras), commonly Att. IXw, -as, 
-a. Inf. eAav (^ 117); Aor. -^Aao-a; Peif. eX^Xa/ca; Mid. to drive 
frmn me, Aor. rjXaadfxrjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. iX-qXajxax ; Inf. cXi^- 
Xao-^at [^ 124, 2 (a)] ; Aor. Pass. rfXa^riv [a in the tense-forma- 
tion, k 130 (c) ; without <r, f 131, 5]. — Verbal adjectives, eXaros, 
IXarios (X. Hipparch. 2, 7). 

4. S^vyctf and ^vu (poet.), to rage, Fut. j^cw, etc. ; second Aor. Part, ^ififvos 
{fii), raging. 

5. TTiVw, io drink, Fut. irtofxai ($ 154, 4), among the later 
writers Tnovfjiai, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. Trteto-^e ; second Aor. 
arXov, Inf Trteiv, Part. Trtwv, Imp. ttl&l ($ 191), poet., and seldom 
prose TTte ; IIG- Perf iriTnoKa ; Perf Mid. or Pass. TrcVo/xai ; Aor. 
Pass, eTTo^v, Fut. Pass. 7ro^>jo-o/xat [^^ 130 (c), and 131, 5J. 
Verbal adjectives, ttotos, Troreos. 

6. rtv(i>, to pay, to expiate, Fut. tictw; Aor. erlcra; Perf. Act. 
rerlKo.', Perf Mid. or Pass. Tmc/xat, Aor. Pass. ItMtjv {k 131). 
Mid. rtvofxaL, to get pay from, to avenge, to punish, Tio-o/Aat, cTicra- 
fxrjv. Verbal Adj. rtoreov. In the Pres. and Impf the penult is 
long in Epic, short in Attic ; in the other tenses, it is long in all 
the poets. 

Tlu, to honor, rtffu, irlcra, rerinaiy Poet. 

7. <f>S^dv(o, to anticipate, Fut. ^5^o-oju,at, more rarely ^^ao-w, e g. 
X. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first. Aor. I^^aora, and (in prose more 
seldom) second Aor. etfi'^rjv (fii, § 191) ; Perf €<^^aKa. In Pres, 
and Impf. d in Epic, a in Attic. 

8. (/)3-/j/« (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. PL Phaedr. 246, e. 
Symp 211, a.), to perish (seldom to consume), Fut. <j>^f(rou and Aor. e^Itra, trans. 
to consume. — Intrans., Fut. p^ia-ofxai ; Perf. e^jywou, ecp^tvrai ; Plup. and second 
Aor. i<(>^ffjLT]v, Subj. (p^ia/xai, Opt. ^^IfiTjv, (p^Tro, Imp. <p^ia^. Inf. <^(<r3^eu. 



$ 159.] VERBS IN -<u WITH STEENGTHENED STEM. 191 

Part. 4>^iix€vost e. g. X. Cy. 8. 7, 18. roti ^t/xej/ow, <Ae <feacf (/tt, ^ 192). Verbal 
adjective, (t>^w6s. 
Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a consonant : — 

9. 8a/cvo>, to bite, Aor. eSaKov ; Fut. 8?^^ofiat (late StJ^w) ; Perf. 
Aor. SeSiyxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SiSrjyfMaL; Aor. Mid. i&qidfxrjv 
( Hippoc.) ; Aor. Pass. iS-^x^V^ 5 ^^t- Pass. 8r})(3T]<rojxaL, 

10. Kafxvoi, to labor, to be weary, Aor. cKa/xov; Fut. Kafiovfxai'f 
Perf. K€K[xrjKa (§ 156, 2). 

11. Tijxvoiy to cut, Fut. Tc/xoi; Aor. h-eixov (era/xot/, ^ 140, 2) ; 
Perf. ThfXTjKa (^ 156, 2) ; Mid. ^ cw^ for one's self (something) ; 
Aor. Mid. irefiofiTjv; Perf Mid. or Pass. TeV/xTy/xat (Subj. ririuia-- 
^ov, § 154, Rem. 3); Aor. Pass. ct/om}^7^v; Fut. Perf TCT/ATJo-o/xat. 
Verbal Adj. rfirp-os, rfiririo^. 

$ 159. II. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable vt 
before the ending. 

1. Pv-v€(o,to stop icp, Fut. l3v<T<j); Aor. l/3vo-a; Perf Mid. or Pass. 
)8€^v(r/xat; Aor. Mid. i(3v<rdiJL'qv ; Aor. Pass. if^xKr^riv {k 131). 

Pres. i8ua>, not used by the Attic writers. 

2. LK-viofiai (the simple is seldom used in prose, e. g. Th. 5, ) 
40. PI. Phaedr. 276, d., the compound being generally used/ 
instead of it), d^tKvco/xcu, to come, Fut. d(f>L$o/xaL ; Aor. dcJHKofnfjv, 
d<fiLK€(T^aL ; Perf. dcfHyfxcu, d(f)Lx^o-L ', Plup. dffytyfJirjVy d<^lKTO. Verb. 

Adj. tKT09. 

3. Kvv-€io, to kiss, Fut. Kva-oi: Aor. €Kvcra [^ 130 (b)]. But Trpos- 
Ktn/€o), to worship, Fut. TrposKwiJo-w ; Aor. irposiKvvqcra (also poetic 
7rpos€Ki;cra, Inf. 7rposKvo-at). 

4. vmcrx-vloiMaL (vTrLa-x-ofxaL Ion.), strengthened form of v7rej(o/>tai, 
properly, ^o AoZc:? cwe*5 self under, to promise, Aor. vTrearx'OfJirjVj Imp. 
V7ro(7;(ov ; but Fut. v7rocr^o"o/xat ; Perf vTrco^/xat. So, d/XTncrxyov^ 
fiai or djXTrexofjicu, to clothe (from d/i,7re;(a>, io surround), Impf. d/iTrci- 
;(ov, Fut. dfxcfii^o}, Aor. T^fnrurxoVf dfXTrur)(€LVi Fut. d^t^i^ofiai'y Aor. 
rifji.7nxr\6fjir)v and rj/jLTreaxpfJirjv (026, 1). 



192 VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [§ 160. 

^ 160. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable av, 
more rarely atv, before the ending. 

a. a,v or aiv is inserted without any change. 

Preliminary Eemark. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a 
fcfireefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second 
Aor. from the pure stem, the Put. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of a 
pure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into tj ; hence 
the Put. and Perf are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -ew. — The a in 
the ending -av<a is also short in Epic (except in the three verbs, iKavu}, <pSfdvwy 
and Kixdvco) ; but long in iKdvca in Attic. 

X. alaS^-av-ofxai (seldom ato-^o/>tat), tO perceive, Aor. 'QO-^-ofirjv, 
ala^€(rS^aL ', Perf. rfr^-qixai', Fnt. aio-«^^(ro/xat ; verb. Adj. aui^rp-6^. 
2. a/xapxavw, to miss, Aor. rjfxapTOV (late rjixdpTTjaa) ; Fut. a/xap- 

TT^ao/xaL (ajjiapTrja-d), only in Alexandrine Greek) ; Perf. rjixapr-qKa; 
Perf Pass, rjfxdprrjfxai', Aor. Pass. rjfiapr-^Srjv (X. An. 5 9, 21. 
Vect. 4, 37). Verb. Adj. dfiapTrp-iov. 
-^ 3. aTTC^^avo/Aat, to be hated, Aor. dirqy^^opiypf (poet. r])(&6iJ.7]v) ', 
Inf. d7rix^€a^aL with irregular accent ; Fut. dTrex^-qcrojxaL ; Perf 
air-qx^riixaiy I am hated. 

4. avidvco (and av^w), to increase, Fut. av^o-w; Aor. rpj^aa; 
Perf TjvirjKa ; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf. -qv^ixaL ; Fut. av^]- 
(TOfxai and av^S-qorojjiaL ; Aor. tjv^Stjv. 

5. (SXaarTavoi, to sprout, Aor. cySAaorov (later ipXdaTTjaa) ; Fut. 
/3Xao-T^o-a) ; Perf i/SXda-rrjKa and ^e^XdcTTYjKa (^ 123, 2). 

6. BapS-dvoi, commonly in composition, KaroS., to sleep, Aor. 
KariBapSov ( KaraSap^erra, Aristoph. Plut. 300) ; Fut. KaTa&xp5ijo-o- 
fxat; Perf. KaraSeddpSrjKa. 

7. lldvio and Ka^i^dvw, secondary form of t^w, Ko^t^w. See 
$ 166, 16. 

8. KXayydvoi, used of dogs, a secondary form of kXo^o), /o c;"y 
OW^, Fut. Kkdy^oi {K€K\dyiofiaL, Aiistopli. Vesp. 930) ; Aor. eK-Xay^o, 
acXayov, Eur. Ipll. T. 1062; Perf KeKXayya (old form KexX-qya). 

9. oiSavw, oiSatVo) (also otSaco, ocSeco), to swell, Fut oIStJo-o); Perf. 

10. oA.ta-.9^av(o (6A.to--^aa'a> used by later writers), to slip, Aor. 
wXto-^ov; Fut. oAio-^T^ao) ; Perf wAtV^Ka (first Aor. oiXiaSrja-a 
later). 



♦ 160.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 193 

11. oo-^patvo/xat, to smelly Aor. cja-cfypofiyjv', Fut. 6a-<^pricroiJXU. 

Pres. o<T(ppa.cbai. was a rare Attic form ; Aor. a)<T<Pfni<Td[jir]v and oaippav^vou 
late. 

12. o^XtcTKavo) (rare Inf. o^Xetv, Part. ocfiXotv), to be liable to a 
fine, to incur punishment (the double strengthening wtk and av 
is to be noted) ; Aor. w<f>\ov (axfyXyjara, Lys. 13, 65. and by later 
writers) ; Fut. 6<f>\T^<T(D ; Perf. w<f)\r]Ka ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
^(fiXrjfJUiL. 

b. av is appended to the pure stem, and v is inserted before 
,the Characteristic-consonant. 

Preliminaey Remark. The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem 
is changed into a long one, in inflection. The v is subject to the usual changes 
before the Pi and Kappa-mutes (§ 19, 3). 

13. Ipvyyavui (mstead of ipv-v-yavoi), TUCto, Aor. ripvyov J lut 
Ipcv^oyLai. 

14. 5iyyttV(o, to touch, Aor. tBtXyoV, Fut. ^tiofxai. 

15. Xay^avw, to obtain by lot, Aor. e\a;^ov; Fut. X^^o/xai; Perf. 
€LX.r)xa (rarely XeXoyx* from AEPX-, comp. TrcVov^a, tto^clv, ttcv- 
i^os) ; Perf Mid. or Pass. elXyjyfJi^L (023, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iXrJx^rjv, 
Verbal Adj. Xr^KTcos. 

16. Xafjif3avo}y to take, Aor. tXapov, Imp. XdjSe and Attic Xa/?€( 
[Hi 8, 3 (a)]; Fut. X#o/xat; Perf etX>7</)a; Perf Mid. or Pass. I 
€L\r)fxiJM.L (H23, 4), (XiXrjfxaL Aesch. Ag. 876) ; Aor. Mid. iXaPofxrjv;] 
Aor. Pass. cXtJ^^t/v ; Fut. Pass. Xr;^^Tjo-o/Aat. Verbal Adj. XT^Trro'^' 

17. Xav-^avo) (poet, and also Zi. O. 7, 31, also XtJ^w), to be con- 
cealcdy Aor. eXa^o»' (I. Aor. eXrycra late in simple words) ; Fut. 
Xt/o-o); Perf XeXiy^o, J a?/i concealed; Mid. Xav^avo/xat (Ion. and 
poet, also XrjSojxaL), in prose cTrtX. (seldom cttX.), to forget, Fut. 
X-qa-OfxaL; Perf XiX-qa-yLai (^ 131) ; Aor. cXo^o/XT^v; Fut. Perf XeX?}- 
<ro/xai, Eur. Ale. 1981. 

18. Xi/A7rav(o, rare secondary form of Xclttw. 

19. fxav^dvwy to learn, Aor. l/xa^oi/; Fut. fiaS-^crofiaL] Perf. 
fi€fxd^Ka. — The a remains short, and the Fut. and Perf are 
formed from the stem MA0E, according to No. a. Verb. Adj 
fia3rp-6<Sy /JLa^yp-ios. 

20. TrvvSavoaaiy to inquire, to perceive, Aor. lirv%ixr)v ; Perf. ttc- 

17 



194 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [j 161 

irva-fiaL, TrcTrucrat, etc. (§ 131); Fut 7revcro/xm (very jarely vevfrov- 
fiai, § 154, 3). Verb. Adj. Treva-ros, TrevaT€o<;. 

21. Tvyxavo), to happen, Aor. ervxav, Fut. reviofiou (TEYX-) ; 
Perf. TeruxqKO' (TYXE- according to No. a). The transitive of 
this verb is the, poetic revx^, paro. 

22. <f>vyyavio, secondary form of </)evyo), to flee, Fut. <l>€viofjuu 
and -iodfiat 154, 3) ; Aor. €<^vyov ; Perf 7r€<j>€vya. Verb. Adj. 

, fjiCVKTo^j -reos. 
^i 23. xavSavo), ^0 hold, contain (spoken of vessels), Aor. e)(a3ov ; 
Perf with a Pres. signification K^x^vha', Fut. xdcxoijuax (stem 
XENA-, comp. hra^ovj Trciicrofuxt). 

k 161. IV. Fer65, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by annexing the two conso- 
nants, (TK or the syllable \,(tk. 

5/c is annexed, when the stem-characteristic is a vowel, and utk, when it is a 
consonant ; Kv-taK(o and xp'7-^o'f o/"" ^re exceptions. Most verbs, whose pare 
stem ends with a consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of 
pure verbs, in -aa>, -eco, and -6(i}, e. g. evp-laKu, Fut. ivpif-aco from 'ETPE- j ofiffkUr- 
Kb), Fut. ayL^Ka-aoi from 'AMBAO-. Some of these verbs, in the Pres. and Impf., 
take a reduplication also, which consists in repeating the first consonant of the 
stem with i, and may be called the improper reduplication. Most of these verbs 
correspond to the Latin Inchoatives in sco : yi-YvwaKoi, T]$dtTKw, yrjpdtTKct. 

1. oA-to-K-o/xat, to be taken, to be conquered, with tliis meaning, is 
used as the Pass, of ai/jcto, Inipf rjXia-KOfirjv; CAA.O-) Fut aXtoao/uu ; 
second Aor. -^Xwv, Att. tiXtov and ^Xwv (fit, ^ 192, 9), Itras taken ; 
Perf. ^\(i)Ka, and Att. coXwKa and tjXwkcl, I have been taken (Aug., 
§ 122, 4 and 6). The Active is supphed by alpeLv, signifj'ing, to 
take captive, to conquer. Verb. Adj. aXwrd?. Xen. uses both 
coXcov and -^Xwv, An. 4, 4. 21. ; Tliu. only eoAxuv and caXwKa ; Plato 
also only caAcoKa. 

2. d/xjSAio-Ko) (seldom afxfSXoo}), to miscarry (*AArBAO-), Fut 
a/x^Xwo-o) ; Aor. ^fx/SXaio-a ; Perf ^/x^AxoKa ; Perf Pass. ^fipXwfiai ; 
Aor. Pass. rjfxpXw^v. 

3. dvajSiwo-Ko/xat, (a) to recall to life, (b) to live again, Aor. 
dve/Siwo-a/xT^v, I recalled to life; but second Aor. avcftiojv (/it, $ 19*2, 
10), J lived again. 

4. avaXLo-KOi (also dvdXoo)), ifo Spend, to consume, Impf. aat'jXurKop 
(avdXovv without Aug.) ; Fut dvdAtuo-o) ; Aor. aWjXuxra and avor 



♦ 161.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 195 

Xoxro, KarrjvdXxiXTa ; Perf. am^XcoKa and dvdXoiKa ; Perf. IVIid. or Pass. 
ain^\(Dfjuu and avdXuyfUiL ; Aor. ovcLXw-^Tyv, dvT^Xw^v ; Flit. Pass. 
avaXtJi>&'q<TOfiai. Thu. and the Tragedians preferred the unaiig- 
mented forms ; Plato and the orators, the augmented. 

5. opco-KO), to please, Fut d/DcVw; Aor. i^pco-a [^ 130 (d)] ; (Perf. 
apnqp€Ka in Sext. Emp. ;) Mid. with Accusative, to appease, to 
satisfy, Fut. dpta-ofxaty Aesch. Suppl. 654 ; Perf. IVIid. or Pass. ^p€a- 
fjua; Aor. Pass. rjpia-^Vj Soph. Ant. 500. Verbal Adj opcoTos. 

6. ^L^puxTKuif to eat (Fut. Att. ISofuu from co-^uo, second Aor 
txt>ayov), Perf ^/SpoiKa; Part. /Jc^ptis (^ 194) ; Perf Mid. or Pass 
pippuijjMx (Aor. Pass. €fipu>&rjv, and Fut. Pass, ^pco^yjo-o/xat non 
Attic ; instead, the forms of cV^wo are used). 

7. ytyuA<TKto (mostly Poet.), to call, to mal-e htoum, Fut. yeywyii<ru; Aoi 
iy(yuinfi<ra; Perf. yiytDvay with a Present sig:nification ; — further, ytyuvtiTto^ 
Xen., yfyueviivf Poet., seldom prose, e. g. PL Hipp. M. 292, d, from the Prim. 

rarflNEn. ^ 

8. yrjpda-KU} (or yrjpaui), senesco, to grow old, Fut. yrjpdcroixai (sel- 
dom yrjpacTo) Plato) ; Aor. iyrjpaxra (ill Aesch. Suppl. 901., Trans. 
to cause to grow old), Inf yrjpcurai (instead of it yrjpavai, from an 
old second Aor. iyripay, was preferred by the Attics, fit, ^ 192, 1) ; 
Perf yeytjpoKOj lam old. 

9. yiyyuHTKoj (yawKO)), cog fiasco, to know (PNO-), Fut. yvtoa-o- 
ftm] second Aor. iyvtov (ju, ♦ 191); Perf iyvioKa; Perf Mid. or 
Pass, tyvtoa-fiax (^ 131); Aor. Pass, eyvwa^v, Fut. Pass. yvuxrSij' 
aofuu. Verbal Adj. yvoxrro? (old form yyunos), yvoxrrios. 

10. StSpttOTKu), to run away (only in compounds, e. g. aTroS., oc8., 
Sia3.), Fut. Spao-ofuu; Perf StSpdica; second Aor. iZpav (/xt, ^ If 2, 

11. €vp((TK(Dy to fiiul, second Aor. crpov; Imp. cvpc [^ 118, 3 
(a)]; CEYPE-) Fut cvpijo-w; Perf tv^Ka\ Perf Mid. or Pass. 
evprjfiai; Aor. PasS. evpiSrjv [^ 130 (d)] ; Fut. Pass. il'prjSyaofJiat', 
Mid. /o obtain, Aor. npofxrjv (Aug. ^ 121, Rem.). Verbal Adj. 
cvpero9, cvptfTto^. 

12. r]fta(TK(i}y pubesco, to become marriageable, Fut. rjfii^cro}; Aor. 
rj^ija-a ; Perf rjftrjKa (r}/3d<ji, to be young, but avTy/Jdw, ^ become 
young again). 

13. ^'7/<TKo>, commonly dTro-^o-Kco, to ^/e (Metathesis, ^ 156, 
2), (0AN-) Aor. d7r<^a»'ov (Poet tSavov\ ^avwv', ol ^avoWcs, the 



196 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [i 161 

dead, axso in prose) ; Fut. aTroSavovfiai (Poet. Savovfuu) ; Perf. 
re-^vTjKa (not dTrore^i/r^/ca) both in prose and poetry, tc'^o/io' 
(§ 194), etc., Inf. Tc^mmt; Fut. Perf. t€^|(o (^ 154, 6), and 
among later writers rc-^^lo/xat, / shall be dead. Verbal Adj. 
»9i/?yT09, mortal. 

14. SpuxTKOi (§ 156, 2), ^0 spring, to leap, Aor. c^opov; Fut. 
S^opovfiai ; Perf. ri^opa. 

15. Ikda-KOfjiaL, to propitiate, Fut. t\ao-o/>uu; Aor. L IXoo-a/xTi'; Aor. 
Pass. tAaor-^Tyv. 

16. /xc^vcTKO), ^0 intoxicate, Fut. /ac-^vo-w; Aor. c/xt^vo-a. But 
/xe^uo), ^0 6e intoxicated (only Pres. and Impf ), borrows its tenses 
from the Passive, e. g. ifxe^vaS-qv (^ 131). 

w 17. fXLfiv^aKU), to remind (MNA-), Fut fun^o) ; Aor. Ifiinrja-a ; Mid. 
^0 remind one's self, to remember, also to mention ; Perf. fji€fivrjiuuj 
memini, I remember, I am mhulful (Redup. k 123, Rem. 1), 
Subj. jxcjxvCjfJiaiy -17, -rJTOL (j 154, 6), Imp. pL€p.vr)ao\ Plup. €fJL€fun^' 
fxrjv, I remembered, Opt. fxejxv^fnjv, -^o, -^yro, or /i€/xi^/xt;v, -u»o, -^ro 
(^ 154, 8); Fut. Perf ficfxvi^o/jLaLy Is/tall be viimlful (among the 
Tragedians also, / will onoition) ; Aor. ifivrjcrSrjVf I reryicmbered 
(ifjivr](rdixr}v Poet.) ; Fut. /uivTyo-^r/ao/iat, / shall remember (d?ro/UT7- 
crofxaiy Th. 1, 137). 

18. TrdoT^u) (formed from tto^o-ko), by transferring the aspiration 
of ^ to k), to expeiience a soisation, to suffer, Aor. Iva^ov , 
(HEN©-) Fut. TTctcro/xat; Perf. TritrovSa. Verbal Adj. vaJ^oi. 

19. TTtTrtcTKw, to give to dmdc, Fut. ttio-cu; Aor. €7rl<ra. 

20. TTiTrpdo-Ka), ^0 5c//, rare in Pres. Act. (Fut. and Aor. in the 
Oommoii language expressed by aTroSoicropu, d7rc8o/«;v); Perf. 
iriirpaKa (^ 156, Rem.) ; Perf IVIid. or Pass. -jriTrpapuax (Llf. v^irpaar- 
.^at, often instead of the Aor. ) ; Aor. hrpdJ^ ; Fut. Perf irtrpa.- 
aofxai in the sense of the simple Fut. TrpaJ^ijcropjaL, wliich is rare 
and not Ati;ic. Verbal Adj. Trpdro's, Trpdrcos. 

21. OTeplaKO) (seldom orcpco), dTrocrripowTa^t Isoc. 12, 243, 
according to the Ms. Urb.), to deprive of, Fut. oT«pi}otu; Aor. 
iariprjcra ] Perf icrriprjKa] IVIid. and Pass. OTcpi'o-KO/im, artpovfuu^ 
privor; but (Tripop.aiy lam deprived, Fut. ariprjcropnuj rarer artp/rf- 
Srjaroixat ( ttTrooTepcicr^e, Andoc. Myst. 149); Perf. €aT€p7jfxxu; Aor. 
coTcpTJ^r/v. The simple occurs most frequently in tlie middle 
form ; in the Act., tlie compound dTroarepla-Kw is more firequent 



♦♦ 162, 163.] VERBS IN -Q> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 197 

22. TLTpoiaK(i)j to woufid, Fut. rpiocrw ; Aor. trpina-a ; Perf. IMid. 
or Pass. T€Tp<i)fJL(Uy Inf. reTpwa-Sax, Part. Terpoifxevos ; Aor. erfHo&Tjv ; 
Fut. TfHoS^-qo-ofUU and rpoxToyuOii. Verbal Adj. rporros. 

23. <f>dcrKiOy to say, to think (Ind. and Lnp. very rare), Lnpf. 
<L<j>axTKOv; Fut. €f>T]cr(i}; Aor. i<f>rj(xa. — (Pass. l<^>axTKcrOi S. Ph. 111). 

2-1. x^i^*^* to gape (XAN-, among the later wTiters xcuvw), Aor. 
c^oj/oK ; Fut. )(avovfixu ; Perf. K€)(qva, to staiul open. 

Remakk. In li^AffKw, doc-no, the k belonf:^ing to the stem i> m n. ufjthened 
by <T prefixed ; hence the k remains in fonnin;r the tenses, Fut. SjSo^w ; Aor. IZl- 
ia^a : l\rf'. SdiSaxa ; Perf. Miil. or Tiiss. ifHSayfuu ; Aor. Pass. iSiddx^y' 
Verb. Adj. SiiaKT6s, -rios. The same usaj:e is fouml in the Kpii- 'and poetic 
verbs, cJ^vku, kkwTKu, KatTKu. See ^ 230. 

♦ 162. V. Verbs which have a Secondary Form Z7t -^w. 

Several verbs, particularly in poetry, have secondary forms in -dw, e. g. 
^kcyt^fty, poetic (instead of ^Ktytir), to bum; ^ytptdoyrat and i}(p4- 
boyrai. Epic, instead of iLytlpoyrcu and iu'ipoyrcu. Here belong also the end- 
ings -a^ov and -^oifu of the Impf., and -xi^tiy of the Pres. Inf , which arc used 
even in Aitic prose, e. g. oAt^w, to ward ojf, tnigie Inf. dAKcL^ciK (stem *AAK); 
i^i/fw, to vxird off, OfivyiL^fiy, Impf. Iffxvya^oy ; — iiuKv, to pursue, StuKO^ctr, 
Impf. iiiJfKo^oy, aUo prose ; — (ficw, to yield, Impf. fUa^y, (i«rc(doi/u ] — ftpyttt 
to thut up, Impf. and Aor. (tpyo^or\ — (x*** '<^ ftave, ax*^«iy (in Homer (rxe3<cty 
as Aor V 



♦ 163. VI. Verbs, tchose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by prefixing a Reduplication. 

The redaplicnt- • •- •■• ~ •"- the first consonant of the root with 

the vowel I. In i ^ ^ cts, there are also verbs, which take 

the Attic reduplication, i. e. they repeat the first two letters of the root ; see 
ixax^C"^! kwwplcTKtt^ kpaplvKt, ^ 230. 

1. Pi.pauCuif to make go, to convey, Fut. Att. PtPC), -^9, -a (still 
also ^i^turui, X. An. 4, 8. 8. 5. 2, 10). Verbal Adj. /Jt^oor^o?. 

2. yiyvopju (yiyopLox) instead of ytytvopxu (♦ 155, 2), to become, 
to be, (FEN-) Aor. iytyofirjv (late Attic lycvi^Syjv) ; Fut. yevrjaopjxi 
(PI. Parm. 141, e. ytyrjarrax, Jiet, and moreover -ycvc^Tjo-crcu, efficie- 
tur) ; Perf yeycn^^ttu, I have become, foetus sum, exstiti, and yiyova 
with a present signification, I am, implying lam by birth; eycvo- 
^rpf and yirfova are aLso used as preterites of c^t, to be. 

3. 7ri7rra> (instead of TriTrerw, k 155, 2), to fall, Il-ip. TrtTrrc; 
(HET-) Fut TTco-or/ioi (k 151,3); Aor. hrifxov (very seldom first 

17* 



198 VERBS IN -O) WITH STEENGTHENED STEM. [{^ 164, 164 

Aor. £7r6o-a), § 154, Rem. 2 ; Perf. iriTrroxa with irregular variable 
vowel (Part. TrcTrro)?, TrcTmoros, Poet ^ 194, 5). 

4. Ttr/Dtto), to 5we, Fut. T/)T}a-a>; Aor. erp-qa-a. More usual the 
secondary form rerpaivoi, Fut. Terpavai; Aor. ereTprjva (^ 149, Pwem. 
2) ; Perf. rerprjKa, rerp-qixai. Verbal Adj. rp7p-6s. 

Several verbs of class IV (^ 161) belong here, as yiyvdxTKWy and several verbi 
in -fii, as 5i5a>/it. 

^ 164. VII. Verbs, whose Pw e Stem-vowel a is 
strengthened in the Pres. and Imp/, by i. 

Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic : aycdofuuj to be t*- 
dv/nant; Sow, to divide and bum ; fialofuu, to rage ; valttf to dicell. See \ 230. 

§ 165. VIII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes c in the 

Pres. and Imp/. 

1. yayMccj, to marry (of the man), Perf yeyafnjKa: but Fut 
yajxu>; Aor. eyrj/jiay y^/xat (lyafx-qcra first in Mcnander, then in 
Lucian. ; ya/xr^o-ctas with the better reading ya/xT/o-cicis in X. Cy. 
8. 4, 20). Mid. ya/xov/xat (with the Dat.), to marry (of the 
woman, nubo), Fut. ya/xov/xat; Aor. eyijixafirp^ ; Perf. yeyd^-qfuu. 
Pass, in matrimonium ducor, Aor. eya/iT/^T/r, etc. [i 130 (d), 2]. 

2. yrjSeo), Poet., unially Perf yeyrjSa (also prose), to rejoice, 
Fut. yyjSijao). 

3. SoKco), to 5CC7W, vidcor, to think, Fut. 8o^ (8o*o}<rci> poet) ; 
Aor. eSo^a (cSo'KT^o-a Poet) ; Aor. Pass. KaTa8o;^^€i9, Antiph. 2. 116, 
2; Perf. Mid. or Pass. St'Soy/xai (StSo'/o^/Aai, Ionic and Eurip.), 
visus sum. 

4. KTinrea} (Poet.), to resound, Fut. -^<r«, etc.; second Aor. Ilicrvror (Epic and 
6. 0. C. 1450) ; first Aor. iKTxnrriffa (ib. 1606). 

5. fiapTvpeixif to bear witness, Fut. /xaprvpi/o-a), etc. But ftofripo' 
fiai, Dep. Mid. to ca/Z (W icit7icsscs. 

6. ivpeoi, to shear, to shave, IVIid. ^vpofxat ; Aor. i^vpofirp' ; but 
Perf. i^vprjfxai. 

7. to^eo), to push, Impf. cfo^ovr; Fut. (oo-o) and co^ijotu; Aor. 
cojcra, wo-at ; Perf. ecoKa late, Plut. ; Fut. IVIid. wcrop.ai ; Aor. ctixrd- 
^rjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Iwcr/xat ; Aor. Pass, cioa&ijv ; Fut Pass. 
too-^ijo-o/iat (Aug. § 122, 4). Verbal Adj. uxtt6s» -tcos. 



X 



i 166.] VERBS IN -O) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 199 

♦ 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and 
Impf.y but which assume a?i € in forming the 
tenses. 

This change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -few, partly from 
necessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is f , y^ ; partly for the 
sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction 
of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is (tk, x^ 5 *^^^ partly from mere 
choice or the desire of euphony, as in verbs whose characteristic is 5, t, Qy X, 
P> '■'i f f X> *> *"> *» "*• The € is changed into ij in inflection. Exceptions : 

1. aiSofxaij to fed shame, to fear (Pres. and Impf old poetic, in the Common 
language atitofuu), Impf aii6firit' without Aug.; Fut. oiJeVo/tox and •■fiaonai 
{iircuS€<rb^<rofuuy Eur. Iph. A. 889) ; Perf. i/jif <th«vos, Dcm. Aristocr. 646, 1 ; 
Aor. iJ8((re(fi7ji' (with Ace), as a law-term in Attic prose, signifj-ing to pardon a 
tuppliant ; but also in poetry, signifying to be asJuuHed of to fear ; but in this 
sense riitar^v is commonly used. 

2. ak€$w, to ward offl Act seldom in prose, X. Cy. 4. 3. 2, dXc'^- 
ciy; Flit. aXi$ijcr(a (Aor. i^Xc^iyo-o, lloiii.) ; Mid. to tvard off from 
ones self Fut. dLXt^iJao/xat (dXe^o/tot as Fut. of *AAEK- is rare, 
e. g. S. Or. 171. 539. X. An. 7. 7, 3) ; Aor. yMdfxrjv (I'lkc^adfxrjv, 
Horn, and X. Aii. 1. 3, 6. in all the best MSS.) (Inf. second 
Aor. aXtcdScLv, used by the Trag., ^ 162.) 

3. av$ut, to increase ; see av$at^, ^ 160, 4. 

4. dxSofiai, to be vexed, Fut. dxSitrofjuu, and in prose usually 
Ax^^frSridopju (both with the same signification); Aor. rjxSia-Srjv 
(H31). 

5. ft6<TKu), to feed, Fut. fioa-Kifo-u) ; Aor. cfioa-Krjau ; INlid. luliaus. 
to feed, to eat. Verbal Adj. ySoro?, Poatcrp-toq. 

6. povXofwx, to Irish (second Pors. puvkci, ^ 116, 11), Fut. ySou- 
Xrja-ofJMi; Peril pipovXrjyuai \ Aor. ipovXrjSrjv and -tipovXySTjv (Aug., 
4 120, Rem. 1). 

7. 8€<u, to want, to need, usually Impers. Set, it is iranting, it is 
necessary {k 137, 2), Subj. So;, Part. Uov, Inf. Sc^; Impf. cSa, Opt 
Scoi; Fut S<7jo-<t; Aor. €S«7/o-€( i') ; Perf. Sc8o7K€(v') ; INIid. Sco/xat, ^a 
7ieed, Fut. So/o-o/xcu; Aor. i^jSrjv\ Perf. 8cS€7//i.<u. 

6. l^iXiii and ^c\<o, to will, Impf y^tXov and l^fXov; Fut 
£^€A.7/<ra> and ^cA»}o-w; Aor. -^SiXTjcra and i^iXya-a; Perf only 



200 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 166 

9. €tXa), ctXXo), lAXo), also ciXeo), to press, to shut up, Fut. ciAt/o-w, 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. €iAr;/xat ; Aor. Pass. elXrj^rp^. 

10. IAkw, ^0 ^raw, Put. cX^w (which is preferred to the other 
form cAkvo-co from 'EAKYfi) ; Aor. ctXKvo-a (§ 122, 3), cXxwo* 
(more common than cTA^a) ; Perf etX/crKa; INIid. to draw to one's 
self, eXKvaofxaL, elXKvo-dfxriv ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf Mid 
or Pass, only el\KvaSr]v, cAKuo-^TJo-o/xai, elkKvafxai. 

11. 'EIPOMAI, Aor. rjpofJirp^, I inquired, ipeaSai, efxofxai, tf>oifirjv, 
ipov, ip6iJievo<s ; Fut. iprjcrofjiaL. Tlie other tenses are supplied by 
ipo)Tav; but the Aor. ripdyrqa-a is rejected. 

12. Ippo), to go forth, Fut. Ipp-qaw, Aor. rjpprja-a; Perf ijpprjKa. 

13. cvSw, commonly ko^cvSw, ^o ^/^cp, Fut. ko^cvSt/o-w ; Aor. rare 
and late; Perf wanting (Aug., §) 121, Rem. and 126, 3). Verb. 
Adj. KaS^ev^rqriov. 

14. e)((u, to have, to Iiold, Jmipf. c'xo? 122, 3); Aor. arxov 
(instead of c-cre^ov), Inf (rx^^v, Imp. (rxc?, Tropao^c? according to 
verbs in /xt (in composition also (rx^, as Kardcrxf, Tropao^c), Subj. 
0^(0), -yg, Trapdo-xw, irapdcrxo^f CtC, Opt. axoLrjv {fit, ^ 1^2, Rem.), 
but in compounds Trapdarxotftt, etc., Part, o^w*' ; Fut. c^w and 
o-x^frw; Perf ecrxqKa; Aor. Mid. eaxofj^rp^t Subj. axwfuuj Opt. oxo*- 
/XT^v, Imp. orxou, Trapdcrxpv, Inf. crx^cr^ai, To^acr\icrS(u, Part. <rxoft<vo5 ; 
Fut. €^o/xat and (rxr]CToixaL ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Icrxqiim ; Aor. Pass. 
icrx^^yjv (not used in good Attic). Verbal Adj. cxtos, and oflener 
poetic (tx€t6<;, -t€o<;. 

15. €1/^(0, to cook, Fut. o/o}o-o> (Fut. Mid. ci/ajcro/xai. Plat. Rp. 372, 
c.) ; Aor. rj^rja-a; Aor. Pass. r]{Jn]Sr)v ', Perf. IMid. or Pass, iffn/jfjuu. 
Verbal Adj. €cli&6<;, or ei/'T/ros, ci/^t/tcos. 

16. t^w (Plat. Symp. 196, 6), commonly Ka^i'^u), /o ifo/, to «/, 
Impf iKd^ilov, old Attic Ko^r^ov; Fut. ko^uL (117, 2); Aor. 
iKdTia-a, old Attic Ko^ro-a (§ 120, 3) ; (Perf KcxoL^tKa;) iVIid. /^eai 
myself Fut. Ka^t^-^o-o/xat ; Aor. kKaBL(jdp.rjVy I seated for myself I 
caused to sit. But Ko^c^o/xat, I seat myself I sit, Impf iKaBttpfxyjv \ 
Fut. Ka«^c8ov/xat. 

17. KT^So), ^0 ?w«Z;e aitiious (Act. only Epic), Fut. K»/8i}(ru) ; Perf 
KeKrjBa, I am a7ixious ; Mid. KtjBofxaL, to be afixious, in prose only 
Pres. and Impf; in Aesch. S. 138, is found Imp. Aor. Md. 
KrjSecrai. 

18. KAato), to weep (KXa<o seldom, and without contraction;, 



♦ 166.J VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 201 

Fut. KAavtro/Aat ( KXavo-ov/xm, $ 154, 2, in Aiistoph.), rarer (in 
DeiD.) KXjourjcrii), 01 KXdrj(Ttii] Aor. wXavaa] iKXava-dfJLrjv, S. Tracll. 
153; Perf. KcxAav/Acu, and later KCKAavcr/iai (^ 131, 3). Comp. 
^ 154, 2. Fut. Perf. Kc/cXauo-erat, Aristoph. Nub. 1440. Verbal 
Adj. KXavtrros and KXauro?, KXavoTios. 

19. fxaxofj-axy to ^g Jit, Fut. fiaxovfjuLL, ^ 154, 5 (Epic and late 
prose fui)(i]aofji(u) ; Aor. l^\icrafji.-qv ; Perf. fjie^d)(i]fxcu ; Aor. Pass. 
ifjLa)(ta-^7jv late. Verbal Adj. /ia;^crcos and /xa^^cos. 

20. /xcAAtu, ^o intend, to be about to do, hence i?o delay, Lnpf. 
c/AcAAoi/ and ^/xcWov ; Fut. /xcAA^w ; Aor. ifxiWtjaa ; Pass. ^eAAe<r- 
^at, to 6e J7M^ o^ delayed. (Aug., $ 120, Rem. 1.) Verbal Adj. 
/acXt/tcov. 

21. fteXct yuoi, cume mihi est, t^ concerns me, I lay it to heart 
(rarely personal /xtAxo), Fut. /-icX^ci; Aor. €/AeA.>/o-c(i/) ; Perf. 
fi€fiiXrjK€(v) ; Mid. fjifXofiau, commonly iirLfiiXofiai (and CTri/xeXov/Aai, 
but Lif. probably iinfiiXia-Sau) ; Fut. cVi/xcXT/o-o/xat (sometimes 
CTrifitXrjSrja-ufjLai) ; Pi'rf. iTnfi€ficX.rjfjiaL ', Aor. cttc/xcAtJ^v. Verbal 

Adj. CTTl/XtXT/TCOK. 

The componnds, e. p. /lero^/Xf i, pomitet, are used as irapcrsonals only ; sel- 
dom fjL(rafi(\ofjuu, tu niK'nl (Thuc), Aor. /uTf/i«AT)i^v (late); fi(fir)\u>s, caring W 

22. /AvC<^, to «/cZ:, Fut. /xv(^T/o-o>, etc. 

23. o^u), to jww//, i. e. to f mi/ a;i o^<?r, Fut. o^tJo-w ; Aor. w^T/o-a 
(Perf o&o&i with the meaning of tlie Pres. in Homer and the 
later writers, ♦ 124, 2). 

24. olofixu and oTfjuUf to think, second Pers. out {k 116, 11); 
Impf (Mfirjv and f^ip^ ', Fut. oiija-ofjuai ; Aor. torjStjVf oiTjSrjvai ; Perf. 
wanting. (Aug., ♦ 122, 1.) Verbal Adj. oiT^rco?. 

The abbreviated forms, olfiat, ^firfy, are used in prose a.s a mere paren- 
thetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence arc often employed in an 
ironical sense; oXofiai, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is a 
governing verb ; still, this dilfereace of usage is not fully obsen ed even by the 
best Attic writers. 

25. oLxofiaiy I am gone, huve gone (\vith sense of Perf), abii^ 
Impf ioxofjLTjv (sense of Aor., also Plup.), I went away, had gone, 
Fut olxT^aofiai ; Perf toxrjfiai, commonly as a compound, e. g 
irapia)(rjfi(Uj X. An. 2. 4, 1. in the best MSS., Ion. and Att. Poet 




202 VERBS IN -Q> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [^ 166 

(HxwKa (so originate, otxa, ot/c-wxa, otx-w/ca, comp. the Epic oK^xa 
from ^w, ^230). 

26. 6<^e6Aa), to awe, debeo, I ought, must, Fut oi^etXTyo-o) ; Aor. 
&<^€iXrj(xa ; Perf. uxjaiXriKa ; second Aor. un^cKov, -C9, -€(v) (first and 
second Pers. PL not used), in forms expressing a w'w/i, utinam. 

27. Trato), ^0 5M/^e, Fut. Tratcro) ( Att. secondary form TraiTJo-w in 
Aristoph.) ; Aor. eTrauj-a; Perf TreVatKa (the simple late); Aor. 
Mid. iTraurdfjLrjv; Pass, with o- (M31. 2) ; yet instead of ircTrcuir- 
yxat and iTrata-S-qv, lirXrpfqv and TriirXrjyiJicu were commonly used 
Verbal Adj. Trato-reos. 

28. Tre/oSo), usually TrepSo/xat, emittcre Jlatum, Aor. iirapSov ; Fut 
trapSr^o-o/xat ; Perf. iriwopha (^ 140, 4). 

29. TreroyLiat, ^0 y?y, Fut. (TrcTqcrofxaL, Aristoph.) commonly 7m;- 
(ro/x.at ; Aor. commonly in prose and in the Comic writers, cttto- 
/x.Tyi', TTTecT'S^at (rarer iTrrdfiTjv ; tirrqvy ttto), irralrjVy Trr^aiy Trras, poet. 
and in the later writers (^ 192, 2) ; Perf TrtTrorr^/xot (Aristoph.). 
— Syncope (>? 155, 1). 

' 30. o-KeAAo) (or o-KeXeto), ^o d//?/, Aor. co-kXt/v (^ 192, 4), and Perf 
€a-KXr]Ka, and Fut. cTKXrjaofjiaL, intrans. io dry up, to icUJicr. — Met- 
athesis, § 156, 2. 

31. TVTTTO), to strike, Fut. Attic rvTrnjait) (tvt/^o). Homer); (Aor. 
I. hvTrrqcra late; Irvi/^a, Hom. ; Aor. IL trvTTovy Eur. Ion. 779; for 
the Aor. of this word, the Attics use cTraro^a, t-raura ;) (Perf. 
r€TV7rTr)Ka, Pollux) ; Fut. Mid. rvTrrqcrofiaLy Aristoph. Kub. 1382. 
Pass, blows icill he injiicted; Perf Tcn'/x/icu, Aesch. (Tcrvmy/iOi 
late) ; Aor. Pass, irinrqv {iTVTmqSrjv late). Verbal Adj. rvrnp-io^, 

32. )(aLpo}f to rejoice, Fut. ^(aLpTjcru) (xopi/cro/xat late) ; Aor. €\afrrj¥ 
(fii, ^ 192, 8); Perf KcxdprjKa (Aristoph. and Herod.), I have 
rejoiced, and KcxdprjixaL (poet.), I am glad. Verbal Adj. \apr6^. 

Remark 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -<u'o» 15 i60), 
and inricxv^oiiai, of those in § 159. 

Rem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed {S 149, 6) ; still, 
t ley form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. 

fiivci, to remain, Put. /ifv«; Aor. ifx^iva] Perf. fiffierjiKeu Verbal Adj. 

fjicverSs, ix€V€r4os. 
p4/x(D, to divide, Fut. ve/jui', Aor. llvfifjM] Perf. ycvefirjKa; Aor. Pass. ^r€- 

fiil^'tjv. — Mid. v^fiofxat. Put. vefiovficu; Aor. iy^ifidfirip ] Perf. Mid. of 

Pass. v€y4fjir}(jLai. Verbal Adj. vc/hijtcos. 



♦ 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FEOM 1 IPF£RENT ROOTS. 203 

\ 167. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different 
Roots, and which are classed together only in 
respect to Significatio7i. 

1. atpcco, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Lnpf. ^pow; Fut 
cup^d); Perf. ^pT/Ka; Aor. (from 'EA) cIXov, cActj/; Aor. Pass. 
iJpc^iyv; Fut. Pass. cupc^Tjcroftai \k 130 (d)]. — !Mid. to choose, Aor. 
ctXd/x7;v; Fut. aipTJo-o/Aoi ; Perf. IVIid. or Pass. ^pTy/xai; Fut. Perf. 
jjpT/cro^ai, PI. Prot.*338, b. Verbal Adj. oipcTo?, -Tio<i, 

2. ipxo^iat, to go, to come (only the Indie, of the Pres. in use in 
Attic, the remaining modes and the participials being borrowed 
from ci/tit (^ 181) ; thus, ^pxofixu, Iw, t^t, Uvai, uox'), Lnipf. rjpxofjirjv, 
commonly ^cti/ and ya. Opt. loi^i; Fut. cT/xi, Isludl go (t/^w, I shall 
cowc); — (*E.VEY0-) Perf Ik^kvBa [k 124,^ (b)J ; Fut. iXetaofjLon 
almost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also Lys. p. 
165, Ul; Aor. 5X^ov,'a5o>, iXdotfii, Ikdi f^ 118, 3 (a)], ikSelvy 
iX^wv. Verbal Adj. /xctcXcvotc'oi'. 

"Epxofiiu has in common the signification of to come and to go ; the idea of 
coming commonly l)elong8 to the form from 4\^uy, and the idea a/going to that 
of cffii. But in compounds, each of these three verbs expresses both ideas, and' 
only the preposition limits it to the one or to the other signification. 

3. ia-Sut}, to eal, Impf rja-Siov; (©Sw, Ep.) Fut cSo/xat, ($ 154, 4) ; 
Perf iSrjSoKa ; Aor. €<f>ayov, <^y€iv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. i8rjS€crfiaLf 
(4 124), 2; Aor. Pass. itScV^v. Verbal Adj. iScarros, tScorco?. 

4. opdju), to see, Impf liopiuv; Perf. iwpajca (Poet, also copd/ca, 
Aug., ^ 122, 6) ; Aor. (from *IA-) clSoi', idoj, iSot/xt, i^c, ^ 118, 3 (a), 
lB€iv, iSi^v. (On the second Perf olSa, / kfwiv, see ^ 195.) Fut 
(from 'on) oif/ofiai (2. Pers. o(/^€^ Hl6, 11). — ]Mid. or Pass. 6pw- 
fuu', Perf. IVLd. or Pass, iwpafiaiy or w^fxat, a»«/^at, etc. ; Lif a><^^cu; 
Aor. Mid. ciSo/ii/v, iScV^cu, iSoC (and witli the meaning ecce, t8ov)i 
as a simple only Poet; Aor. Pass. w<l>3rjv, 6<f>S7Jvax; Fut o</)^7jcr- 

Ofiai. Verbal Adj. opdros and otttos, dTrrt'o?. 

5. Tpi\uiy to rtni, (APEM-) Fut. Spa/xoD/xat; Aor. iSpa/xov; Perf 
ScSptipT/Ka; Perf Mid. or Pass. iTnBiBpdfirjfiaL (X. O. 15. 1). Verb. 

Adj. Sp€KTfOV. 

I^pflofiai, H^pt^a, rare and poet. — Second Perf. only Epic Seipofm (APEMn). 

6. <f>€p(jj (oidy Pres. and Impf), to bear, fOI-) Fut. ouroi (Aor. 
Imp. olb-c, oiVero), brifig, in Aristoph., see $ 230, under ^cpw) ; — 



204 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -/U. [$ 168 

fEPKO, or 'ENEPKO) Aor. II. rjveyKov (rarer Aor. L ^e)Kai), -es, 
-e(v), -o/ACV, -€Te, -ov (and -a/ACV, -are, -av), {k 124, Pwem. 2), Opt 
eveyKOLfxij etc. (rarer -at/xt, etc.), Inf. eveyKctv, Part. iveyKwv (rarer 
cvey/cas), Imp. ej/cyKc, -erw, etc. (and -arw, etc.) ; — CENEK-) Perf. 
eu^voxa {§ 124, 2) ; Mid. to carry off, carry away, win. Put. oto-o- 
uat; Perf. Mid. or Pass. cvTJvcy/xat (-ylat, -yta-ax, or cvtJvcktcu) ; Aor. 
Mid. rjveyKafX7]v, eueyKai, -acr^ai, -afxcvoS] Pass, (a) tO be borne, 
carried, (b) to bear one's self, to hasten; Aor. Pass. rjvix-^\ Fut 
h/ex^rj(ToiiaL (rarer otcr-^T^o-o/xat). Verb. Adj. oiotos, oioT€09 (Poet. 

7. <^77/xt (^ 178), ^0 5<2?/, Impf €<f)rjv A\ath the meaning of the 
Aor. also (fxivai and <f)d^ (§ 178, Pvem. 2); — CEII-) Aor. cSrov, 
ctTTco, ciVoi/xt, C67re [^ 118, 3 (a)], (the other forms of the Imp. are 
rarely or never used, compound TrpoctTrc), etTrcii/, €hru)v (first Aor. 
eiTra, not very frequent in Attic WTiters, more frequent ciTra^ 
very frequent enraTe, rarely ctTrav, Imp. €iTrov rarely, very frequent 
ciTTctTw, ctTrarov, eiTrarwv, and always ciTrarc ; all other forms "wnnt- 
ing in the Att). From the Epic Pres. cl^, come Fut. c/xi, Perf. 
ctpr/Ka, Perf Mid. or Pass. cipT^/ouit (^ 123, 4);~CPE-.) Aor. Pass. 
€ppr]^r]v {Ippi^v appears not to be Attic), piy^'cu, pry^ct?; Fut. 
Pass. pr).^rjaojxaL and eip-qaofxaL. — jNIid. only in compounds, Fut 
airepovfiaL, and first Aor. dTrctVao-^ai, to deny, to be wearied out, to 
give up, like afruiruv. Verbal Adj. prp-6<s, prjrto^. 

Instead of the Pres. (pvfiit other words are sometimes used, particularly in 
composition. Compare awayopevu), I forbid, afrf7Tov, I forbade ; iyriKry^f I 
contradict, aureitroi/, I contradicted, the compounds of ciVcTv in the Aor. being 
more frequent than airrjy6p€v(ra and aj/Tc'\e|ou So, ayopfvtt riva KtucwSy I speak 
ill of one, but avril-nov kukw^. 

§ 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -/ii. 

1. Verbs in -fit, the number of which is small, differ from 
those in -co, principally in taking different personal-endings 
in the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act. 
and Mid. ; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind. 
of the above tenses. The formation of the remaining 

* The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sinjr- Indie, when 
the next word begins with a consonant ; also in the persons of the Imp. which 
have o ; hence eveyKey but iveyKdju. 



i 169.] DIVISION OF VERBS IN -/Al. 203 

tenses is like that of verbs in -w, with a few exceptions. Li 
omitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those 
in -dco, -ico, and -oco. 

2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -/jll with a mono- 
syllabic stem, take a reduplication (§ 163) ; this consists in 
repeating the first consonant of the stem wdth c, when the 
stem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid; 
but, when the stem begins with or, ttt, or with an aspirated 
vowel, c with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem. 
These verbs are the following : — 

2TA t-OTTj-^i nPA wi-fi-itfji-fu 

XPA KJ-xpi7-M* -^E {iiSrj-fu) 5i8(a(ri{v) 

BA {fii-fi-n-fii) $i$<is eE rt-drj-fu 

HTA tirra-ncu 'E l-rj-fu 

HAA irl-fi-ir\ri-fn AO Si-Sw-fU, 

Remark. Most verbs in -fii do not follow this conju;;ation throughout in 
the three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, 
ribriiUy to put ; Vm\fu^ to place ; 8i8«/u, to givt^ and Tt;/*!, to send, have this 
conjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the 
conjugation in -w, together with several forms of the inflection in -fu. See 
^ 172, Rem. 8 

$ 1G9. Division of Verbs in -/xt. 

Verbs in -/x^ are divided into two principal classes : — 

1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. 
The stem of verbs of this class ends : — 

(a) in a, e. g. t-ff-n^-iu^ to place^ Stem 2TA- 

' (b) " €, " ri-dij-fu, to put, " eE- 

(c) " o, " 8f-««-/u, to ^i»«, " AO- 

(d) " I, " tlfUytogo, " 'I- 

(e) " <r, " eift/, instead of iff id, to be, " *E2-. 

2. Such as annex to their stems the syllable -wv or -in), 
and then append to this syllable the personal-endings. The 
Btem of verbs of this class ends : — 

A. In one of the four vowels, a, e, t, o, and assumes -wij 

(a) in o, e. g. ffKihd-wv-fjUy to scatter^ Stem 2KEAA- 

(b) " «, " Kopi-vvv-tii, to satisfy, " KOPE- 

(c) *' J, only rl-vvv-m, to atone, " TI- 

(d) " o, e. g. <rrpu>-vyv-iMy to spread out^ " 3TP0-. 

18 



t06 VERBS IN -fLL STEM OF THE PRES. STRENGTHENED. [^ 170 

B. In a consonant, and assumes -z/u. 

(a) in a mute, e. g. SeiK-yv-fit, to shoWj Stem AEIK- 

(b) " liquid, " ofi-vv-fxi, to swear, " 'OM-. 
Eemark 1. When a diphthong precedes the final consonant of the stem 

that consonant is omitted before the -w, except it be a Kappa-mute, e. g. 
a^-vvfiai Stem 'AlP (comp. aip-a>, &p-vviJ.ou) 
dai-vvfjLi *' A AIT (comp. Sais, Sair-Ss) 

Kai-pv(jiai " KAIA from KAA (comp. Perf. KfKaS-/jxUy KiKcuTfuu) 
KTci-yvixi " KTEIN from KTEN (Fut. KTcy-w) ] but 
Seltc-yv/jLiy e'lpy-vvfUj ^evy-yOfMi, o'ly-yvfii. 

Rem. 2. Verbs of the second class, — those in -Ofu, — form only the Pres. 
and Impf. like verbs in fii, and even in these tenses, only a part of the forms 
are in -vfii, the others in -uw; in the Sing. Impf the forms in -v» are predomi- 
nant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf Opt., these are the regular forms. 
The verb crPe-uyv-fii, from the stem 2BE-, is the only verb of this class which 
forms the second Aor., namely, cafirtv ; several verbs in -«, form their second 
Aor. according to the analogy of these verbs, e. g. Svw, tZvy. 

§ 170. Characteristic-vowel and Strengthening of 
the Stem of the Present. 

1. In verbs of the first class, the short characteristic -vowel 
of the stem, a, c, o, is lengthened in the Pres., Impf., and 
second Aor. Act. : — 

a and e into 77, and into u. 
Still, in verbs in -c and -o this lengthening extends only to the 
Ind. Sing, of these three tenses ; but in verbs in -a, to the Dual 
and PL Ind. also, and likewise to the entire Imp. and the 
second Aor. Inf Act. In the second Aor. Inf Act of verbs in 
-e and -o, € is lengthened into ct, and o into ov, e. g. ^ci-veu, Sov- 
vat. But in the same tenses of the Mid., the short character- 
istic-vowel remains tlnroughout. 

2. Verbs in -i3/Ai, whose stems end in a vowel, and hence 
annex -vw, retain the short characteristic-vowel, except those 
whose stem ends in -o, e. g. crrpo)-wvfiL (2TP0-) ; but verbs 
whose stems end in a consonant, and hence annex -w, are 
strengthened in the stem of the Pres. by lengthening the stem 
vowel, namely, 

a becomes 7;, as in irffy-vvfUy second Aor. Pass. hr&y-Tfy 
a " cuy " oX-vvfuu instead of ipw/«u, stem 'AP, *AIP 
€ " ct, " SfU-vvni, stem AEK, hence Ion. ^f{a 
» " fVf " ^€vy-yvfUf second Aor. j'^ass. 4Cvy-ny. 



ff 171, 17?.] VERBS IN -/mt.— PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 207 

$ 171. Mode-vowels. 

1. The Ind. Pres., Impf., and second Aor. do not take the 
mode- vowel {k 168, 1), and hence the personal-endings are 
9 ' "^exed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g. 

t-trra- fifv i'Tl-^f-fiey €'5o-fi€y 

t-(rrd-fieda i-ri-b4-iJ.€^a i-SS'/xc^a. 

2. Tlie Siibj. has the mode-vowels m and rj, as in verbs in -o>; 
but these vowels coalesce witli the characteristic-vowel and 
form one syllable ; this coalescence differs from the contraction 
of verbs in -w, as follows : — 

dri and cti; coalesce into rj and ^ (not, as in contracts in -dwf into a and f ), op 
coalesces into ^ (not, as in contracts in -609, into 01), e. g. 

i-(rrd-« = l-aru i-CTa-pj = i'lrr^s i-<rrd-ri-rcu ^ I-ottj-tou 

ard-oi = aTu (tto-tjj = arijs 

Remark 1. This form of the Subj. of Xar-nfii and ridrifu is like the Subj. 
of the two Aorihts Pass, of all verbs, e. g. tu^«, -fjj, -p, etc., rmr-w, -py, -p, 
from rvK-TUy ara-^w, -pi, -p, from T<mj/ii. 

Rem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -Ofu is like that of verbs in -u«, e. g. itucyvu^ 
-<Jpr, etc. 

3. The Impf and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel t, 
which is annexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms 
a diphthong, e. g. 

Impf. Opt. A. l-<rra-t-fiv = l-rred-riv Aor. II. A. <rrcd-riv Impf. M. l-aTal-fjirj:r 
ri-bf-iffp = ri-^ti-rir dd-rfv ri-^fl-firiy 

Si-So-i-rfy = SiSol-riy Soi-rjy it-ioi-firjy. 

Rem. 3. The Opt. of verbs in -€ (rl^fii) is like the Aorists Opt. Tass. of 
all verbs, e. g. «rra-d«f-i}»', Tu<^-d«(-ijv, rvw-d-jfy. 

Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -u^i, like the Subj. Pres., follows the 
fcrm in -«, e. g. S^iKyvoifii. The few exceptions will be considered below. 

♦ 172. Personal-endings. 

1. Tlie following are the personal endings for the Act. : — 
(a) For the Indicative Present, 



Sing. 1. 
2. 

a. 



•fi I J-<rT7}-fi t 

-s (properly -tn) X-<rrrj-s 

-<ri{y) (properly -ri) X-<mj-<ri{y) 



208 



VERBS IN -/Xt. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



[\ 172. 



Dual 2. -Tov %-<rra-Tov 

3 .rrov t-ffra-Toy 

Plur. 1. -fJifv (properly -fits) l-ara-ixey 

2. -re T-<rTo-T6 

3. [-i/o-t(»')] (properly -yrt) [t-ffTa-tni T-«rTa-<ri( r )]. 

The ending of the third Pers. PI. -p(ri{v) is changed into -dai{y), and thei 
is contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dia- 
lect admits contraction only in the stems ending in -a, thus : — 

from i-ffra-vfft is formed l-crToffi {l-<rra-din) 

" rl-^e-vffi " Ti-^e7(ri Att. ri-bi-axn 

« Zi-Zo-vffi " 5t-5ov(rt " Zi-U-wri 

Remark 1. The uncontracted form in -ea<r*, -6affiy -vd(r», is the only one 
used in Attic prose, though it also occurs in the Ionic dialect ; the contracted 
form in -eTo-t, -oZffi, -vffi, is the usual form in the Ionic writers, reir seldom in 
the Attic poets. But from V (stem 'E), to send, this Attic form 'imti (con- 
tracted from i-e-do-t) always occiurs. 

(b) The personal-endings of the Subj. Pres. and second 
Aor. do not differ from those of verbs in -w. 

(c) The following are used for the Impf. and second Aor. 
Ind.: — 

Sing. 1. -V Impf. l-cmj-r i-rl-^y 

2. -5 l-cmi-s i-ri-^s 

3. - T-OTTJ i^l-dii 
Dual 2. -TOK A. n. (-(rrrj-Toy H-^t-roy 

3. -T7ji/ i-(rri]-T^v i-bf-njp 

Plur. 1. -fify (properly -ju€s) i-<Trr\'tiiv f-^-fity 

2. -re €-(rT7j-T« ?-(^«-tc 

3. -<ray ll-arrj-cay t-^f-<ray. 

Rem. 2. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs is like the second 
Aor. earriv, e. g. eTuTr-Tjv, i-ara-^Vf -tjs, -tj, -i|tov, -ip^y, -^tuyt "if'* -V"*'* 

(d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf and second Aor. 
(except the first Pers. Sing.) differ from those of the Opt of 
the historical tenses of verbs in -tu, only in being preceded by 
-q ; comp. the endings of jSovXevoi/xt, (SovXeva-aifxi, etc. "with tliose 
of 

ffral-rjv, i-arTcd-rjv ^d-r)v ri-^ei-rjy SoZ-ijm Si-ioi-rjv. 
Rem. 3. In the Dual and PL Impf Opt., the -tj is commonly rejected in the 
Attic dialect, and the ending of the third Pers. PI. -Tjaay is almost alwnys 

Bhortened into -evy e. g. 

ri^ei-r)ix€V = ri^eifisy i(rrcd-riT€ = toTtuTt 



} 172.] 



VERBS IN -fit. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



209 



The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs, e. g. -Kou^ev^flijfxiv =» 
ircuBfv^-ufiev (wholly like ri^drju). — On the contrary, in the second Aor. Opt. 
Act. of To-TTj/tii, Tii^T?/ii, SiSwjjUy the abbreviated fonns are very rare, except the 
third Pers. PL, which is commonly abridged. 

Rem. 4. The forms SiSc^v and Stfijy also occur, 
(e) Tlie endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are: — 



Sing. 2. 


-Sn 


{1-<rra-^t) 


{rl-^cSn) 


{U-lo-Sn) 


3. 


-T« 


l-<TTd-ru 


ri-^4-rw 


Si-56-ru 


Dii:il 2. 


-TOJ/ 


X-ffra-rov 


rl-^e-Toy 


Si-So-Toy 


3. 


-TbtV 


i-crrd-Tuy 


Ti-d4-rcDV 


Si-56-ruy 


Plural 2. 


-T« 


X-ara-re 


ri-df-T€ 


5j-5o-t€ 


3. 


"Twaav 


i-ard-Toxray 


ri-^i-roxTov 


Si-S6-T(i>(ray 






or i-ffrdyruy 


ri-^4vru)V 


Si-56yT(i)y. 



Rem. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. rejects the ending -^i, and, as a 
compensation, lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into 77, e into 
ci, o into ovj V into 0, 

T-ord-di becomes 1-<rrri ri-^f-^i becomes rl-^fi 

Sl-So-^t " Sl-Sov SdK-yi-di SfUyv, 

The ending -bi is retained in the Pres. only in a very few verbs, e. g. <pd^i 
from <p7jfjt.l, ttr^i from ei>i/» ^* from tJfUy and some others ; it also occurs in cer- 
tain Perfects of verbs in -ct, e. g. rt^ya^i. 

In the second Aor. of rl^/ju^ Tfj/ii, and 8t8»/Lu, the ending bi is softened into 
;; thus, dt-di becomes btSt i-^i = ?}, io-^i =■ 86s ; but in the second Aor. of 
ImifUj the ending -di is retained ; thus, <rr^-di ; also in the two Aorists Pass, 
of all verbs, e. g. ri^-di, »eu8«u^Ti (insteiul of ircuSf v^Tj-di, § 21, Rem. 3). la 
compounds of rrij^i and firi^i, tlie tiidiiig -jjdi is often abbreviated into d, in 
the poet, dialect, e. g. wapdtrrdy dirJo-Td, Tp6$d, Kocri^a. 

(f ) Tlie ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -vtu. 
This is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic- vowel ; 
but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel (a being 
lengthened into t;, c into ct, o into ov, ^ 170, 1) ; thus, 

Pres. l-ariL-vai ri-^t-vtu 8i'i6-yai itiK-yv-vtu 

Second Aor. (tt^-koi ^tl-vai 8ov-van. 

Rem. 6. The Inf. Pass. Aorista of all verbs arc like or^voi, c. g. rxmrj-yai, 
Bov\(v^-y<u. 

(g) Tlie endings of the Res. and second Aor. participle are 
-vTs, -vTo-o, -VT, which are joii ed to the characteristic-vowel 
according to the common rules ; thus, 

i-crd-yrs = l-aris, «-oTo<ro, l-ffriv 
Ti-d4-yTS =■■ Ti-^elsy •€i<ra, -4y 
9i-S6-yrs = 5t-8oi5j, -ovaay -6v 
ifiK-yv-yrs = Sfuc-ydst -vaUf -ty. 

18* 



oris, OTaffaf artv 
^(is, 3€r<ro, ^ey 
8oisy -ovaaf •6v 



210 VERBS IN fXl. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [f 173. 

Rem. 7. The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like th« 
Part. Ti3-6ts, or ^ds, e. g. rtm-eis, -eTa-a, -eV, fiovXev^-eis. 

2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs 
in -0), except that uniformly, in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and 
almost always in the Impf Ind. and in the Imp., the personal- 
endings retain their full form, -arat and -a-o. Still, the following 
points are to be noted : — 

(a) The second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -a (as To-ttj/u, Svvc^mi), is only -curcu 
in Attic prose ; the contracted form is found, from the earliest period, only 
in the poetic dialect, e. g. iiri<rra from ivlaTafmi in Aesch., Svyrj (from the Ionic 
ending -eat) instead of Svi^a, in Soph, and Eurip. — In the second Pers. Imp. 
and in the Impf., '/o-tcd seems to be only poetic ; but, iiri<rra}, ^wio-tcd, Suvw, 
ijdvvco, are the regular fonns in good prose, and the uncontracted forms 
scarcely occur except in the poets and later writers. 

(b) In verbs in -e, the contract forms in the Imp. Pres. arc poetic and rare, and 
in the Indie. Impf. not at all in use; thus, Impf. iri^fcro, Imp. ri^ea-o {ri^ov} ; in 
the second Aor., both of verbs in -e and -o, the contract are the regular forms, 
e. g. Indie, eiS-ov, Imp. ^ov; eSov, 5ov. In verbs in -o also, the uncontracted 
forms seem to be the usual ones in the Impf and Imp.: iSlSoao, 5tSo<ro. 

(c) The contracted fonns are uniformly employed throughout the Subj. ; in 
the Opt., as in verbs in -co, the a is always omitted, yet the form remains 
uncontracted. 

Rem. 8. The Sing. Impf. Act. of rlSn)fxi, is iri^v, 2 Pers. iri^eis, 3. iri^u 
(from TI0Eri), iri^eis and ^Tt.^6t being more frequent than irldrjSy irl^: on 
'i-nfii, see § 180; the Sing. Impf Act. of SiSo>/u is always iSlSovy (fr. AIAOfi), 
ihiSovs, etc. (X. An. 5. 8, 4. is to be read iSlSovs instead of iSlSus, according to 
the best MSS.) In verbs in -vfxi, the forms in -vco arc usual throughout the Pres. 
and Impf., especially in third Pers. PI. Indie. Act., e. g. ZfiKyvov<ri(y), and 
the only forms in the Pres. Subj. and Impf, Opt., e. g. Sfucvvw, ofivvu, ovfifuy- 
via, together with SdKWfjn, ofiw^i, cvfi^iyw^Li. — In Attic poetr}\ there arc also 
contracted forms of Ti^fii and 'l-nfii in the second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. 
Ind. Act., e. g. Ti,^ers, U7s, ri^ei, Ui. — But the ^Middle admits the formation in 
-T^w only in the Subj. and Opt. 

FOKMATION OF THE TeNSES. 

§ 17o. I. First Class of Verbs ifi -hl, 

1. In forming the tenses of the Act, the short characteristic- 
vowel is lengthened, both in the Fut. and first Aor. IMid., 
namely, a into rj, e into rj ; also in the Perf. Act. of riSrifu and 
hjfii, € is lengthened into et, and o into o> ; but in the remaining 
tenses of the Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short charac- 
teristic-vowel is retained, with the exception of the Perf. and 
Plup. Mid. and Pass, of Tt^7//xt and ltj/xl, where the « of tho 
Perf. Act. (re^et/ca, Te-^ei/xat, ei/ca, ct/xai) is retained. 

2. The first Aor. Act and Mid. of ri^/xt, IrjfjUy and StSw/xi, haa 
K for the characteristic of the tense, not o- ; tlius, 



♦ 174.] VERBS IN -/it. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 2ll 

The forms of the first Aor. Act e&rjKa, ^ko, and tSwKa, however, 

are usual only in the Ind., and generally only in the Sing. ; in 

the other persons, the Attic writers commonly used the forms 

of the second Aor. ; in the other modes and the participials, 

the forms of the second Aor. were always used. 

Examples of the first Aor. in the PI. Ind. are: i^Kofxey, X. C. 4. 2, 15, 
ii^Kafify, X. Att. 3. 2, 5. 0. 9, 9. 10. ^SwKare, Antiph. 138, 77. cScdkco', X. Cy. 
4. 6, 12. rdTjKOj/, H. 2. 3, 20. aiprJKov, Cy. 4. 5, 14. 

Also the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of tC^ixl, Irj^i, and 
SiSwfUy are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ; 
•qKaL/xrjv from Irjfu occurs, though but seldom. On the contrary, 
the forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act. of riSrjfxLj l-qy^i^ and 8i8u)/xt 
(IB-qv, Tjv, cBoji/), are not in use. 

3. The verb loTrjfiL forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like 
verbs in -a>, with the tense-characteristic o-, e. g. e-arrj-a-a, i-arrj- 
(T-dfxyjv. The second Aor. Mid. icrrdfXTjv is not used. Some 
other verbs, however, have a second Aor. Mid., e. g. iTrrdiJiTjv, 
CTrpta/xiyv. 

Kemark I. The second Aor. and the second Fut. Pass, are wanting in these 
verbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in To-ttj/h, the Fut. Perf. of which is €<rT'^|a> 
and €<rT^|o/nai, (j 154, 6. 

Kkm. 2. On the meaning of the verb 1<rrtifii, the following things are to be 
noted: the Pres., Impf., Fut., and first Aor. Act. have a Trans, meaning, to 
piace ; on the contrary, tlic second Aor., the Perf. and Plup., Act. and the Fut. 
Perf., have a reflexive or Intrans. meaning, to place one's self] to stand, namely, 
t<rrr\v, I phiced mi/self, or / stood ; (ffrriKa (with present signification), / have 
placed mifse/f, I stand, sto ; ((rriiKdy, staUiin ; ((Tttj^w, ia-rri^ofMau, stabo (4<^f(rT^|a>, 
I shnh xcithdraw). The Mid. denotes either to place for one s self] to erect^ to stand, 
y>nsistere, or to place one's self; Pass, to be placed. "EerrTj/ca and ((rrriKdy usually 
take the place also of the forms cVto/uu and itrraifiriy, which occur but rarely. 

} 174. IL Second Class of Verbs in -pn. 

There is no difficuhy in forming the tenses of verbs of the 
second class {k 169, 2). All the tenses are formed from the 
stem, after rejecting the ending -vrv/xi, or -vxpn. Verbs in -o, 
wliich in the Pres. liave lengthened the o into o>, retain the w 
through all the tenses, e. g. (rrpdi-wv-pny t^ui-wv-pn^ pdi-wv-pny Fut. 
arpd)-(Tio, etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form- 
ing some of the tenses, assume a Theme ending in a vowel, 
e. g. 6p.-vv-p.L, Aor. w/i-o-o-a, from 'OMOO. The second Aor. and 
the second Fut. Pass, occur only in a few verbs, e. g. ^€vy-vv-/ic 
See * 182 



212 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/Xt. 



[$ 175. 



§ 175. Paradigms of 



ACTIVE. j 




CO 

a 




imbers 

and 

rsons. 


2TA- to p/ace. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to show. 






^ 














^^" 


S. 1. 


'i-(TT7l-fJLl 


ri-^-fit 


di-Sa-fjii 


SfiK-yv-fit ' 








2. 


'l-a-TTj-s 


Tl-^-S 


Bi-Su-s 


Se'iK-yv-s 








3. 


'l-<Tr'f]-(n{v) 


Ti-i^-(rt(y) 


Sl-5u>-(ri{y) 


S€iK-vv-iri{y) 






iW 


D.l. 








■ 






■S 


2. 


'[-<rra-Tov 


ri-^€-Tov 


Sl-So^ov 


JeJK-VlJ-TOV 






.y 


3. 


'i-ara-rov 


ri-^i-rov 


Si-5o-Toy 


Sc/lC-I'V-TOJ' 






'« 
^ 


P. 1. 


'l-(TTa-fjLev 


Ti-^€-/X€V 


Si-So-/j.€y 


SfiK-yv-fiey 






2. 


'/-(TTd-Te 


Ti-^c-Te 


5t-5o-T€ 


S(iK-yv-T€ 








3. 


t-(rTa-ai{v) 


Ti-^4-d<n{v) 


SL-S6-d(Ti{y) 


5(iK-yv-6uTi(y) 










(from la-Td-affi) 


and ri-^e7ai{y) 


and bi-Zov<ri{v) 


and 86t*c-ia)<ri(F) 






S. 1. 


i (TTCO 


ri-^u) 


Si-Su 


SeiK-yif-u 








2. 


t-a-TTJ-s 


Tl-^-S 


Si-St^-s 


SeiK-yv-r)S 








3. 


l-arr^ 


Tl-^ 


5t-5y 


etc. 






D.l. 














^ 

s 


2. 


l-ffTTJ-rOJ/ 


ri-^-Tov 


Si-iu-Toy 






H 




3. 


i-crrrj-TOi/ 


Tl-^-TOV 


5i-Sa>-Toy 






f^ 


P. 1. 


i-arw-fjLcv 


ri-^w-fxev 


Si-Su-^ey 










2. 


i-CTTTJ-TC 


Ti-^-re 


5t-5a>-Te 










3. 


l-(TTa>-(n{v) 


Ti-^cc-(Ti{v) 


Si-Su-(n(y) 








S. 2. 


'i-crt] ^ 


Tl-^6i* 


«(-5oy« 


Sei/t-Ku * 










(from 'IffTo^i) 


(from T^e^t) 


(from 5i5o,^») 


(from SfUyv^i) 






^ 


3. 


i-cra-ra 


Tl-^4-TW 


5j-8d-Ta> 


SeiK-vv-^w 






c 


D.2. 


'{-(TTOL-TOV 


Tl-^€-rov 


5i-5o-Toi' 


SfiK-yii-roy 






1 


3. 


i-CTTa-TWU 


Ti-^e-Tuy 


Si-do-Tuy 


SfLK-yv-Twy 






P. 2. 


'/-(TTd-Te 


Tl-^e-re 


5i-5o-T€ 


S(iK-yv-T( 






3. 


l-ara-rwaav 


Tl-^4-TQ}<TaV 


Si-Sd-Twtrcu' 


SfiK-yv-Tonreo' 










and l-ffTduTwy 


and ri-b4vruy 


and Si-S6yTuy 


and BfiK-yvyretr 




In/in. 


l-ffToi-uai 


ri-^e-yai 


Si-Sd-vou 


SfiK-yv-ycu 




Part. 


l-ards, Sco, S>/ 


Ti-3e(y, eTo-o, tV 


5i-5ous, ovira, 6y 


S(iK-yvs, vacL, tv 






G. dvTOS 


G. 4yro5 


G. din-os 


G. VVTOS 

i^fU-yvy 








S. 1. 


'i-<TTTl-V 


i-ri-bTjy 


i-Si-Sovy ' 








2. 


'l-a-TTj-s 


i-ri-^eis^ 


e-Sf-Sous* 


4-^lK-trvs 








3. 


'i-(TTri 


i-rl-^ei^ 


^-5^5ou ' 


i-SfU-VV 








D.l. 
















2. 


'l-crrd-Tov 


i-ri-^e-rov 


€-5/-5o-TOV 


i-iflK-yv-Toy 






1 


3. 


l-cTTa-Trjv 


i-Ti-^e-n]v 


^-St-Sd-TTJf 


i-S(iK-yv-rriy 






^ 


P. 1. 


'l-ara-fiev 


i-Tl-^e-fjL€y 


e-5i-So-fi€y 


i-^fltc-yv-fify 




"H 




2. 


'i-ard-Ti 


e-T^^e-Te 


e-S/-5o-T6 


i-ScU-vv-rf 








3. 


'l-a-Ta-aav 


i-rl-^e-aav 


€-5i-So-(7'av 


i-i(lK-yif-(rctP 






S. 1. 


i-aral-7]V 


Ti-^el-r)y 


5t-5o/-7j;' 


SfiK-yv-oifu 






2. 


l-arai-Tis 


Ti-^ei-T]S 


5i-5ot-7;y 


SuK-l-V-OiS 






J 


3. 


t-(TTal-7] 


Ti-^eZ-Tj 


Si-Soi-t] 


etc 






D.l. 














1 


2. 


i-(rra7-Tou * 


Tl-^€7-T0V * 


Si-5o7-roy * 








^ 


3. 


t-aral-Triv 


ri-^ei-Ti]y 


5i-Sol-rr]v 










P. 1. 


i-ffTai-jxev 


Ti-^e7-iJ.€y 


5i-So7-n€u 










2. 


l-(TTcu-re 


Tt-3-e?-Te 


Sl-So7-T€ 










3. 


i-(rTai-ev 


Ti-S-er-ej' 
peciallv SeiKyvov 


Sj-Sot-ev 
(Tilv). Also Imi 






^Ad 


id SeiKp 


v-o), -eis, etc., es 


>f. cSeiKKuov, -ifSy 


-ve(v), 


and the Part, usually S 


iiKvv-uv, -ovcra, - 


ov (« 172. Rem. i 


5). M lT2.Rem. 



♦ 175.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fll. 

Verbs in -fjn. 



213 





MIDDLE. 1 




-i'l'A- to place. 


eE- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to show. 




%-<na-fiai 


ri-^f-ficu 


Si-So'fiai 


5€iK-yV-/MU 




l-ara-ffcu 


rl-^e-(rou 


Si'So-crcu 


SfU-yv-crat 




l-ara-rcu 


rl-^f-rai 


Si-So-rai 


deiK-yv-Tai 




i-ffTi-fie^ov 


ri-^t-fie^ov 


5i-S6-/iebov 


SeiK-yi-fifbov 




X-ffTa-a^ov 


Ti-^e-a^oy 


Sl-So-aboy 


SfiK-yv-aboy 




%-<na-a^ov 


i^-^f-(T^oy 


Si-So-aboy 


BfLK-yv-aboy 




l-<rT&-fji.(^a 


Ti-d4-fjLe^a 


Si-S6-iJ.cba 


SeiK-yv-fifba 




^-(rra-<r^€ 


ri-^f-a^f 


Si-So-crbe 


S(lK-yv-<rb€ 




X-ffra-vreu 


rl-df-yrcu 


di-So-yrcu 


SelK-yxf-yrou 




l-a-TM-ficu * 


ri-^u-fiai 


5i-Su)-fuu 


SeiK-yv-uf/xai 




i-ari} 


ti-3t7 


5<-5y 


SeiK-yv-T) 




[-(TTrj-rai 


rt-^-rcu 


5i-5a>-Ta* 


etc. 




i-<Tru)-^i^ov 


7i-^u>-fi(dor 


Si-Su-fK^oy 






i-arri-abov 


rt-^-adoy 


5t-5a>-(r3oj/ 






i-arri-abov 


Ti-^-aboy 


Si-SQ-ffboy 






i-aru-fiiba 


ri-^u-fif^a 


Bi-Su-fifba 






l-arrj-abt 


ri-drj-a^f 


Sl-SuMT^t 






l-ffTU-VTCU 


ri-dbf-yrau 


SiSit-yrcu 






T-o'Td-(ro uuii 


r'i-b (-<To and 


5i-5o-<ro and 


SfU-yv-<ro 




X-OTW 


ri-bou 


ii-Sou 






t-CTTa-o-r^ 


Tl-bi-<T^ 


Si-S6-(rbw 


SfiK-yv-ab<ii 




7-iTTa-adoy 


ri-^f-aboy 


ii-So-ffboy 


Se'iK-yifffboy 




i-<na (T^wv 


Ti-b(-ffd(Dy 


Si-S6-0bu>y 


iiiK-vv-aduy 




X fffa-a^e 


ri-i^t-ffdf 


Sl'-So-flTi^f 


Sf'iK-yv-abf 




i-CT^-a^wffav and 


ri-^( abuxray and 


5i-S6-<Tbcfaav and 


SeiK-yv-aboxrav 




i-(n(i-<Tdwv 


ri-^t a^wy 


St-i6-(Tb<ay 


and SfiK-yv-abuy 




X-ara-abau 


Ti-d4-fi(yos, 1}, oy 


Si-So-abcu 
Si-66-/ieyoSf tj, oy 


5(iK-yv-<rbcu 




/-<rri-/i€»'or, »j, ov 


SfiK-yt-fifyos, 7], 
oy 




1 ^ni.-fJL7\V 


4-Ti-^4-firiy 


4-9t-S6-fir]y 


4-S€iK-yv-fjLrfy 




1-<rro.-<ro and J-oTct 


i-rl-^e-ffo 


4-il-So-(ro 


4-SfiK-yv-<To 




t-ard-To 


i-ri-b(-ro 


4-S'i-5o-ro 


4-S(lK-inj-T0 




l-<ni.-a(bo0 


i-ri-d(-^i(doy 


4-Si-S6-/ifboy 


4-SfiK-yv-pi,eboy 




X-(Tra-<T^ov 


i-ri-bf-aboy 


4-5l-So-(Tdoy 


4-SeiK-yv-<Tbov 




l-(Tr6.-<Tby\v 


i ri-b(-aby\v 


4-Si-S6-(rl^y 


4-S(tK-yv-cr^y 




i-(rT&-fi(^a 


i-Ti-bf-fiiba 


4-5i-S6-ij,(i^a 


4-B(iK-yv-fXfba 




l-ara-a-de 


4-Tl-b(-<rb( 


4-Si-So-<Tbc 


4-SfiK-yv-(rbf 




X-ara-vTo 


4-rl-bi-vro 


4-Si-So-yro 


4-SfiK-yv-vTO 




i-a-Tod-firiy' 


Tl-dol-fiT}y ' 


Si-boi'uriy ' 


SetK-yv-oifivy 




i-(TTOU-0 


ri-bol-o 


Si-So7-o 


SfiK-yv-oio, 




i-trrai-TO 


Ti-do7-ro 


Si-So7-ro 


etc. 




i-<rTai-fif^ov 


Ti-boi-fj.(boy 


ti-iol-fifboy 






i-ffroL-a^ov 


Ti-boT-adoy 


Si-So7-<rboy 






l-tnai-ffbnv 


Ti-boi-abTiy 


SiSol-cbrfy 






l-tTTai-fif^a 


ri-boi-/j.(ba 


Si-Soi-fi(!^a 






i-aTa7-(r^e 


Ti-bo7-(Tbe 


Si-Bo7-(Tbe 






l-iTTCU-yTO 


ri-bo1-vro 


Si-So7-yTo 




5. *(i 112, Rem. 8. 


M 172, Rem. 3. 


* On the irreg. ac 


cent of 4iri<napuu^ 


etc., see 4 17G, 1. « 


On the accent in 4 


TTio-Toio, etc. see § 1' 


76,1. '§176,2 






214 



PARADIGMS OP VERBS IN -/it. 



[* 175. 



ACTIVE. 



^ ri 

a a ° 

S c3 is 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



S.2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 2. 

3. 



In/in. 



Part. 



Future. 



Aorist I. 



Perfect. 



Pluperfect. 



Fut. Perf. 



2TA- to place. 



e-<TT7i-v, I stood, 

€-ffTT]-S 

e-ffrri 
(E-<rr7)'T0v 

i-ffT'fj-TTIU 

e-ffTTj-fieu 

e-crrj-Te 

e-CTTi^-ffav 



aTTJs 
(rrrj-rov 

(TTTJ-TOV 

CTToH-fxev 



<TTai-r]v 

ffTcd-TJS 
CTOl-TJ 

ffral-TfTov ' 

CTat-rjTTjy 

arai-TJixev 

<Trou-€V 



CTTJ-TCi) 
(T T ^ -TOV 

(Tri) -Tcav 

0" T 7j -Tcoaav 
and (TTovrajv 



CTTJ-J/ai 



(rrds, Scro, (Jj/ 
Gen. (TTiivros 



aTrj-trcD 



e-ffTTja-a, I 

[placed, 



e-a-TTj-Ka,^ sto, 



k-(rri)-Keiv and 
el-(rT7i-K€iv 



0E- to jtjui. 



(r-^-j/) ^ A. I. 
(e-,dT?-sj > used 
(^-^) ) for it 

€-^€-rou 






5«' 

Su-TOV 
Sw-TOV 






^4-roo 
^4-ruv 
b4-Tu>cav and 



^i'i-vai 



^cls, eTca, eV 
Gen. ^fVTos 



^-(TtD 



AO- to ^rtre. 



(f-5«-y) ) A. I. 
(e-5a>-s) > used 
(€-5co) ) for it 

i-ho-rov 
4-S6-rr)v 
e-5o-/iev 
c-So-T« 



Sol-rjs 
Sol-rj 

5o/-1JT01' ' 

Soi-rin€y 

5o^7/T€ 



80s (5d^0* 

5(J-T0I' 

St^rcixrav and 
S6tn-uy 



Sov-you 



Sows, ovacL, 6y 
Grcn. Sdyros 



Sd>-<ru 



-Bw 



Ka 



Instead of these forms, the 2d Aor. i« 
used in the Dual, PI. Ind. and In the 
other Modes and Participials, f 173, 2 



Tc-^ei-Ka 



5c'- 5 



at-Ka 



i-re-^ei-Keiy \ i-Be-Sti-Keiy 



k-(TT-}]^a> old Att.j wanting. 



wantino:. 



AEIK- to show. 



wanting. 



$(/{» 



i-ift^a 



Sf'-JfiXa 



^-^e-Jefx***' 



wantinsr- 



PAS 



Aor. L 



i-ara-^y 



i-T4-^y' 



e-S6-bTjv 



i-9€lx-^y 



' The compounds, e. g. ctTrooTcD, iK^w, 5jo5<i, have the same accenruation as 
the simples, e. g. aTroo-T&Jcri, iK^rov, SiaScofiey. ' See § 172, Rem. 3. ' In 
composition, irapd(rTTi^i, Trapda-Ta ; aTr6crTri^i, aTr6(rrcL, ^ 1 72, Rem. 5. * In 
composition, irepi^es, ev^es; ctTTcJSos, €kSos\ -jrepf^eTe, e\-5<>T€, ^118, Rem. 1. 
'See ^ 176, 3. * ire^v and TebTjcrofjuu instead of e^tdijK and ^c^<rouai. 



* 175.] 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fJLl. 



215 





MIDDLE. 1 




2TA- to place. 


eE- to puf . 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to show. 




( i-crd-fjLt^y does 


^-id^e'-yuTji' 


€-56-fir)y 






not occur, but 


€-^ou (from li^etro) 


6-5ou (from iioao) 






i-TTTa-fir^y 


«-^e-To 


€-5o-TO 






i-vpid-firjy) 


^-^e-zie^o" 


i-S6-fiebov 








c-^€-(r,^ov 


f-So-<rboy 


wanting. 






^.^€-<rdT7v 


4-S6-<TbTiy 










i-So-fifba 








^-So-abf 








t-bf-vro 


e-So-yro 






{(TT(i>'fiat does not 


bw-fJUU^ 


Ott^UAi 






occur, but wplu- 


^ 


Sep 






fuu, -p, irrax, 


J&TJ-TOi 


5&>-TO* 






etc) 


bd-fifboy 

^■<rboy 

^-aboy 

bdt-fjieba 

brj-ab( 

bu-yrau 


S(i>-fieboy 

hw-ffboy 

Sw-ffboy 

Su>-fi(ba 

Sw-abe 

iu-yrat 






{cyai-fxriy does not 


boi-fxr}y * 


Sol-fxrjy ** 






occur, but xpial- 


bo7-o 


So7-o 






/iTJf, -atO -(«T0, 


boiTO 


5or-TO 






etc.) 


boi-fifbop 
boi-<Tboy 
bolabrjy 
bol-iJLfba 

bo7-<Tbf 


Sol-/j.(boy 
So7-<Tboy 
Sol-ffb-rjy 
iol-pifba 

So7-<Tb€ 

So7-yTO 






{ard-iTOf or <rr« 


_. , um bfffo)* 


iov (from i6<ro) ' 






does not occur, 


bf-<rbw 


S6-ab(D 






but TTpia-ao, or 


bf-abov 


S6-aboy 






■roia)) 


b(-<rbu)y 
bf-abe 

bf-trbaxray and 
bt'ffbaty 


So-ab'uy 
h6-cbf 

S6-<rba)(Tay and 
S6-(rb<i}y 






{(rrd-trbcu) irpl<ur. 
{(Trd-fJifvos) irpla- 


b«-abai 


S6-erbau 






bt'Htyoi, -71, -ov 


S6-fi€yos, -7j, -oy 






fifyos 










(rHi-ffofuu 


bii-ffofieu 


h<i>-aofiai 


Sfi^OpLOl 




i'<rrt)-<rdtir]v 


{4-bTj-Kd-firiy) 


(i-hw-Kd-irqv) 


i-Sfi^dfitfy 






Instead of these forms, the second Aor. Mid. is 








used by the Attic writers, S 173, 2. 






f-crra-fiaiA T.'J. R.2. 


T*'- d^ € < -fUU 


S4-6o-ucu 


Sf-Sfiy-uat 
i-Se-Sely-firiy 




i-(rrd-iJLrjy, ^ 173, 


i-^f-bfi-firjy 


i-Sf'SS-fjLTiy 




Rem. 2. 










wantinj;. 


wantint^. 


wanting. 


SIVE. 1 




Fut. 1. 1 crra-diitrofjuu | Te-^tro/jLau ' | So-^jo-o/jlcu 1 Seix-^o'Ofiai 1 


^ 21, 2. ' Also in composition, fv^wficu, -rj, -rircu, etc., kiro^ufxai, -^, -rjrcuj 


etc., ^kSuimii, -(f, -wrat, etc., airoSufiaij -tp, -wrau, etc. " See ^ 176, 2. 'In 


composition. Kardbov, airSbov] ircplSou, a-rrSSov] Kardbca-^e, TreplSoa-^c] ^y^etr- 


d«, irp6So<Tbe : but iy^ov, dsdod ; irpoSov, 4ySov, ^ \\S, Rem. 1. '" § 154, 6, and 


^ 173, Kcm. 2. 



216 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -fU. [H 176, 177. 



§ 176. Remarks on the Paradigms. 

1. The verbs St^voynot, tohe able; eTriVra^ot, to know, and xp^fiofuu, tohang^ 
have a different accentuation from '(a-rafiai, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., 
namely, Subj. Svycofiai, iiriaTcciiai, -rj, --qrai, -riabov, -Tja^e, -utrrai] Opt. Svycufir]y, 
iiriaraifxr]}/, -aio, -airo, -aia^ovy -oua^e, -cuyro] so also oyal/xTiy, -ouo, -euro (§ 177, 
4), and iirpidfiiriu (§ 179, 6). 

2. The foi-ms of the Opt. Mid. Impf. and second Aor. in -oi, viz. tiJ^Z/it?*', 
d-o/uTji y were preferred to those in -€t, viz. ribelfirjv, -^70, -tiTo, etc., biLfir\v, -do^ 
'€7ro, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples ; tlms. ivboiurtv 
{iv^eiu7]u), iy^o7o {iy^€7o), etc.; 60 also in compounds of Soifirjv, e. g. SiaJoi'uTjK, 
diado7o, etc. 

3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. : e-o-Td-TOK, e-oro-uo', 
e-o-Td-re, e-(rTd-(rt(j'), see § 193. 

4. Verbs in -v/xi, as has been seen, form the Subj. and Opt. like verbs in -w. 
Still, there are some examples where these modes follow the analogy of verbs 
in-/ii: Uttos fj-rj SiatTKeSavvvrai (instead of -utttoi), PI. Phaedon. 77, b. if^X^rrrf 
re Kal Treyvvro (from -viro, instead of -vojto), Ibid. 118, a. 

5. In the later ^vriters, e. g. Polybius, a Perf and Plup. are found with the 
Trans, meaning, Z Aaye p/acea, namely, etrrdKa, c(rrd[«c6iy. 

SUMMAET OF VeKBS IN -fil. 

1. Verbs in -fii which annex the Personal-endings immediately 

to the Stem-vowel. 

§ 177. (a) Verbs in -a (l-arrj-^i; 2TA-): 

1. Ki-)(p7]-ixi, to lend, to bcstoiv (XPA-), Inf. Kt)(paraiy Fut yprftruij 
Aor. £)(pyj(Ta. Mid. to borrow, Fut. )(pi^ofxai. (Aor. ixprjcrofirjv in 
this sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem 

belong : — 

2. XP'h^ i^ ^s necessary, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. xfiV* I^- XPVi'oi^ 
Part, (rb) XP«'^»' (usually only Nom. and Ace); Impf. ixF^y, or xpV' (with 
irregular accent), Opt. xp^^V (h*om XPE-) ; Fut. xp^trrcu in Soph, (but not 
XP^o-et), 

Inf. XPVv, airoxprjv, in Eurip., by contraction from XP^^^*- 

3. arrSxpVi it suffices, sufficit; the following also arc formed regularly firom 
XPAn : a7roxpcD(rj(i/), Inf airoxpw] Part, avoxpus, -wca, -wy ; Impf awexpv ; Fut. 
oTToxpTjo-ei ; Aor. airexpno'^iy), etc. Mid. anoxpufjuu, to abuse, abutor, or amsumOy 
Inf. onroxpTjo-i^ai, is inflected like xpo-opnu, § 129, Rem. 2. 

4. ovLvrjfit (with Attic redupUcatiou instead of 6v6vr)fn), to ben- 
^fiy ('ONA-) Inf. ovivavat; Lnpf Act. wanting, ci</»e\ow being 
used for it ; Fut. ovtJo-w ; Aor. wn^o-a, Lif «5n}o-<u (for it ovrjvai, like 
o-njvat, in PL Rp. 600, d.). Mid. ovtVajucu, to get benefit, be beuf- 
fitted, Fut. ovYjcroixai; Aor. u)in]fjLt]v (^thvd^rjv later, but also in Eur. 
wvaa^e), --qao, -rp-o, etc., Lnp. 6\n)ao, Part, onz/xcios (Hom.), Opt. 
ovaifxrjv, -ato, -airo (§ 176, 1), Inf ovao-^cu ; Aor. Pass. wv^Syp^ rarer 



♦ 178.] 



SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -/Al. 



217 



instead of divqfirjv. The remaining forms are supplied by 

6. TrL-fx-7r\.r)-fj.Ly tO Jill, (ELAA-) Inf. Trt/XTrXarat ; Impf. iTrL/XTrXrjv ; 

Fut. TrAT/cro) ; Perf. iriirX-qKa ; Aor. iirX-qcra ; jNIid. to fiU for one's 

lelf TTLfiTrXafiat, Inf. 7rt/x7rXacr^(U ; Impf. eTnfXTrXdixrjv ] Aor. eTrXrja-a.- 

^jLTjv; Fut, TrXrjcroyiax; Perf. oVIid. or Pass. TrcVAiycr/Aat ; Aor. Pass. 

€TrXrj(T^v (jt 131); Fut. Pass. TrXTja-S-qaofjuLL (^ 131); second Aor. 

iTrXrjfirjVf Poet. Verb. Adj. ttXt^otcos. 

The fi in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted 
in composition, when /* precedes the reduplication, e. g. ifiTrlirXjifiau, but iveirin- 
irKd^irjy. Contrary to this rule, however, forms with and without /x arc both 
used by the poets, according to the necessities of the verse. 

6. TTLfiTrprifiL, to burn, Trans,, in all respects like rrLinrXrjfXL : irp-j- 
<ra), i7rpr)(Ta, TriTrprqKO, 7rt7rprf(TfiaXf iTrpT^aSrjv, TrprjaSya-ofiaLf imrprp^opxu. 

7. TAH-MI, to endure, Pres. and Impf wanting (instead of 
them vTrofievQ), av€^OfxaL) ; Aor. izXtjVf (tXu),) rXairjv, tXtjSl, rXdis 
(rXflura) ; Fut rXi^o/xat ; Perf TcVXT^Ka. Verbal Adj. tXt/toV (Iu 
Attic prose this verb is rare.) 

8. 4>rj-fiCt to say (stem *A-), has the follo\ving formation : — 

♦ 178. 



Pnsnit. A C T 1 V E . Imperfect. \ 


Indi- S, I. 


^id' 


Indi- ! S. 1. 


Kifniy 


cativc i 2. 


'h' 


cative 


2. 


f<fnjs, usuallv ?<^T)(r3a 




3. 


ipri<ri{y) 




3. 


Hiprj [(§116,2), 




D.2. 


(fk&Toy 




D.2. 


dtpOLTOV 




3. 


<pdT6y 




3. 


i<p6.Triy 




P. 1. 


<(>dfi«y 




P. 1. 


(4>dfjLty 




2. 


tp&Tt 




2, 


((pare 


Subj. 


3, 


<pCUTl{v) 




3. 


l<pdffav 


^f <^J» <^P. tpTtroy, pwfjL«y, 


Opt. j tpcdrfy, <padr]i, <f>airi, ipalriroy 




^nrt, <pu<n(y) 


and <f>cuToy, ^ai^yxTji' and 


Imp. 


«^^ or <^t {<rvtii>o^i), <l>&Tw, 




^Kurriy, (pairj^ifv and <pa7- 


1 ^Tov, <p&T<t)Vy ^Tc, <;>4Ta>- 




Hfv, <pairjT( and <(>curf, (pa7(y 


1 aav and ^Jjntiv 


Fut. 


<p'f}(TU 


Inf. ipiivfu 


Aor. 


l^<pr}aa. 


Part. (<^e(s, <^aa, <p<iy 




G, (pdin-os, ^({(TTjr) 






MIDDLE. 


Perf. Imp, ir*tK£<r3cii (PI, Tim. 72, d.), let it be said. Impf. Ind. ttpcuno, Lvs. 


Fr:iL,-m, 3, [X, Cv, 6, 1, 21, is a false reading] ; Inf. <f>aa^aiy Acsch, Pcrs. 


687, in chorus. l*art, <p<ifi(yoi (rare), ajjinniuy. 

Verbal adjective. ^arSs, tparfoT. 



' In composition: iLyrlcpTj^i, <Tvfi<prifx.i, a.yri(pri<Tt(v). (rvfj.<p-ncri{y), Qtc, hut ayri' 
^s (accent on ultimate), aufitprji, ami Subj. ayrKpu, ayri(pr}s, etc, 

19 



218 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN -/Xt. [^ 179. 

Kemark 1. In the second person (j>-^St both the accentuation and the Iota 
subscript are contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the 
Pres. Ind. (except cp'ps), see § 33, a. 

Eem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to sa^ in general, (h) to affirm^ 
(aio) to assert, to assure, etc. The Fut. ^/(ro, and Aor. c^tro, have only the 
last signification. The Part. <pds is not used in Attic prose ; still, i^ PL Ale 2, 
139, c. fdvres. 

Eem. 3. "With <f)7}iJ.i the verb ^/At, inqiuxm, may be compared, which, like 
inquam, is used in the spirited repetition of what had been said ; the imperfect 
^y^ ^ is used in the phrases ^y 5* iydo, said /, tJ 5* Ssy said he, to describe a con- 
versation. 



§ 179. The following Deponents also belong here. 

, 1 . aya/xat, to wonder, Impf. -^afXTrp/ ; Aor. rpfo^^rjv (^^yaa-dfirpf. 
Epic and Dem. 18, 204) ; Fut. dydaofjMi. Verbal Adj. dyourros. 

2. SvvafxaL, to be able, second Pers. 8vvao-ai [3i'»t; from the Ion. 
8weai, tragic and later, ^ 172, 2, (a)], Subj. Svvw/xot {k 176, 1), Imp. 
hvva(TO, Inf. hvvaa-^ai. Part. 8vva/xevos ; Impf. iSvvdfirjv and rjSwdfxrp^f 
second Pers. eSww (not ihvvaao, ^ 172, 2), Opt Swcu/it/v, Svvaio 
(^ 176, 1) ; Fut. Svvi^aojxaL ', Aor. i^vvrjSTp^, r^xnnq^rp/ and ihwaucrBTpf 
(not :78wao-^7;v), the last Ion. and in Xen. (Aug., k 120, Kem. 
1) ; Perf. ScSu'viy/u-at. Verbal Adj. Swaros, aZ>/€ Jmd /?05«A/e. 

3. eTTto-ra/xat (like lora/u-ai), ?o knoio, (properly, to stand upon 
something, to be distinguished from i<f>CcrTafuu), second Pers. 

'» i-n-Lo-Taa-aL (cTrtora seldom and only Poet.), Subj. CTruTTWfjLOU (II 176, 
1), Imp. hriara) [seldom and only in the poets and later \niters, 
iTTLCTTaa-o, ^ 172, 2 (b)] ; Impf. rprurraLiJirjr, jpricrrto [seldom and 
only in the poets and later writers, rpriaraa-o, k 172, 2 (b)]. Opt 
CTrto-rat/Aryv, iirLaraLO (^ 176, 1) ; Fut. cttuttt/o-o/xxu ; Aoi. rprumrj^'. 
(Aug, § 126, 3.) Verbal Adj. hrurrrrro^. 

4. €pa/xat, to love (in the Pres. and Impf. only jwetic, in prose 
ipdo) is used instead of it) ; Aor. rjpda^jv, I loved; Fut ipaaStf- 
o-o/xai, I shall love. [Pass, cpw/xat (from Ipdu)), I sJiall be lot'ed.] 
Verbal Adj. cpaoros. 

b. Kpe/xa/^at, to hang, be suspended, pendeo^ Subj. Kpifiwfuu 
(^ 176, 1), Part. Kpc/xa/xcvos ; Impf iKpcfidfjirp^, Ojit Kp€fiaifirfVy -cuo, 
-aiTo Q 176, 1), (Arist. Vesp. 298, Kpe^to-^c, comp. fidpvofuu, 
$ 230, and ixefxvoLfxrjVy $ 154, 8); Aor. iKpcfida-Siiv ; Fut Piiss 



♦ 180.] 



VERBS IN 'flU 



21^ 



KpefiacrSi^ofjuou, I shall be hung ; Fut. Mid. Kpefjuja-o/xcU) pendeho 
I slhoU hang. 

6. TrpuurSoL, to buy, iirpidfjLrjv, second Pers. cTrptiu) (an Aor, IVIid., 
and found only in this tense, which the Attic writers employ 
instead of the Aor. of toveo/xot, viz. iiinnrjcrdfx.rjvy wliich is not used 
by them, ^ 122, 4), Subj. Trpiw/Aat (^ 176, 1); Opt /rpiaijxrjVy -cuo, 
-aiTo (^ 176, 1); Imp. Trpwo; Part. Trpta/xcvos. 



^ 180. (b) Verbs i?i -c (TC-Sr)-p.i, 0E-) 

*I-rj-p,L (stem *E-), to setid. INIany fonns of this vierb are foimd 
only in composition. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 



Impf. 



Pcrf. 
Aor. II. 



Ind. Trj^i, Ttjs, %r)<Ti{v) ; Icto*'; Tc/ucv, Terc, la<Ti{v) \i(i<Ti{v)\f 

Subj. t'ctf, l^Sy i^\ irjroy] iufitv, IrfTf, iu<Ti[v) \ oufnOl), iupi^s, &^(^, 

etc. 
Imp. T«j, ItrWf etc. — Inf. Uyat. — Part. Ids, U7ffa, Uv. 



Ind. Xovy (from 'lEfl), iupiovy (rarer ii^lovy, rare Uiy, wpoUiy, i)<pUw), 
If IS, 1(1, iuplfi (rarer i}<pi(i)] Xtroy, Ur-ny; T</xci', trr*, Tt<ra*', 
i/pUaay (rarer ri<pU(r(iy). 

Opt. Ulrjy (second Pers. PI. iupioirt, Plat.j third Pers. PI. iupiouy, 
X. H. 6. 4, 3). 



«r*fa. — Plup «Tjcftv. — Fut. V«. — Aor. I. ^tra (^ 173, 2). 

Ind. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (^ 173, 2); Dual (Troy, iuptTroy, 

uTT}y ; I'lur. «tfi(y, Ka^tifify, flrf, iwiirt, taav, commonly 

(Iffav, iuptiaay. 
Subj. w, ^s, iuf>u>, a(p^s, etc. 
Opt. fXrfy, (Xrfs, drj ; (troy, iupdroy, tXrriv] (Tfjify, iupd/jifv, drf, a<p(7- 

rt, (Uy, it.tpfUy, 
Imp. ts, &<p(s, (Tw ; (Toy, iptrov, (ruy\ trt, &<p(rf, truaav and fvruiv. 
Inf. tlyau, wipiiycu. — P. rff, (lea, a<f>(7<ra, «y, iupty. Gen. tyros, ('l(rrii, 

inptyros. 



Remark 1. On the Aug. of iuplrifu, see ^ 126, 3. 

Rem. 2. The form of the Impf Ttjv is very doubtful, and the forms tr}s, T?) 
arc very rare. The form Tciv has the ending of the Plup., like the Impf of €/^<, 
to go; it is Att. and lon^ a secondary form of tow. 



220 



VERBS IN -flL. 



[M81 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. 



Impf. 



Aor. n. 



Ind. '/e^ot, 'iecrai, 'ierai, etc.— Subj. tw^oi, a<piu^i(u, i^, &4pt^y etc. 
Imp. 'le<ro, or 'lov. — Inf. iW^at. — Part. Ufievos, -77, -oy. 



Uixfiv, Uffo, etc. — Opt. Ulfirjv, Att. iolfivv, loioy a/ptotoy etc. 



Ind. €[fi7iv 

efffOy acpelao 
ttro, a<pe7T0 
t'ifie^a, etc. 



Subj. S>ficu, acpwfjuu, ^, cupf, ^tox, cuprirou 
Opt. trpooifjL-qVy -o7o, -oiTo, -oifjueda, -ola^f, 

-oivro {irpoelTO, irpofTa^f, irpofivTO 

are rarer forms) 
Imp. oZ (cu/xjG, irpooD), second Pers. PI. 

fffbf {&(pf(r^€, irp6ea^€), fcrbw, etc.). 
Inf. tVd^cu. -T" Part, f^tyos, -77, -ov. . 



Perf. efyttot, j«€(^er/xot ; Inf ^Xff^ai, fif^€7<T^at. — Plup. flfiriw, ftao, cu^cmto, etc, 
— Fut. Ifiaofiai. — Aor. I. rjKdfirjv (rare, § 173, 2). 



PASSIVE 



A. I. e'l^v, P. €&f/j/at, etc. — Fut. k^aoym. — Verb. Adj. kr6st trios (iuiprros). 



Kem. 3. Besides the two verbs tI^/jli and Ttj^, only the following dialectic 
verbs belong here, viz., 'AH-MI, AI-AH-MI (AE), (though SiS(aai{y), from the 
last is found in X.) ; S/^Tj^ot and AIH-MI. 



§ 181. (c) Verbs in -i, onli/ cT/xi ('!)» ^o go. 

Preliminary Kemark. The verbs cT/xi, to ^, and tl/ii, to beware pre- 
sented together (though the last, on account of its stem 'E2, does not belong 
here), in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of the two 
verbs in their formation. 





PRESENT. 




Ind. S. 1. 


elfil, to be 


Subj. S 


Ind.l. 


cT/iu, to go 


Subj. Xm 


2. 


el 


V 


2. 


eT 


Xvi 


3. 


iarl{y) 


I 


3. 


er«n(v) 


^ 


D. 2. 


iarSv 


rjTov 


D.2. 


Xtov 


XrfTov 


3. 


iarrSv 


^TOV 


3. 


irov 


XrfTov 


P. 1. 


i<Tfx4u 


difxev 


P. 1. 


tfjify 


Xttfify 


2. 


eVre 


^T, 


2. 


Xt€ 


ttfTt 


3. 


ei(Ti{v) 


£<n(v) 


3. 
Imp. 


iaffi{y) 


I«Mn(r) 


Imp. S. 2. 


XtrSri 


Inf. elj/ou 


C^(, irpSsi^i 


Inf. I4ptu 


3. 


€(TT(a 






(sold. irp6sfi) 




D. 2. 


effTov 


Part. &v, oZaa, 


3. 


frotf 


Part. Wr, iov- 


3. 


e<TT(i)V 


tv 


D.2. 


Irovy irp6stTOv 


(roy liv 


P. 2. 


earre 


G. ovTos, o{i(rr]s 


3. 


Xruv 


Gen. l&tnosy 


3. 


^ffTccffav 


(irapwy, irapov- 


P. 2. 


Tt€, irpostTf 


loXHTt^S. 




(rare eo-Tooz/; 


(Ta, Trap6v, 3. 


Xroiffay^ or 


(■rapuiiv, iropi- 




&vra)v, Plat. 


G. irapSyros) 


lovTotv {Xtoiv 


ovcoy irapiSy, 




Legg.879,b.) 




Aesch.E.32.) 


G. TO^KTOS). 



♦ 181.] 



VERBS IN 



-/At. 



221 



IMPERFECT. 



Ind. 



S. 1. 


V, Ivxis 


2. 


^<rS^a (^ 116, 2) 


3. 


^u (from ^e-v) 


D.2. 


^(TTOv (-fnov) 


3. 


fjffrrjv {ijrrjy) 


P. 1. 


9i<rfi€y 


2. 


^T€ {^(TTC) 


3. 


•jjcoy 



Opt. 



eTrji' 



Ind. 



S. 1. 



^eiy or po, / leent 
■ffeis and ■^eia^a 



??6i 



■pfiTovy us'ly ^To»' 
pefnji', " pTTji/ 
rjeiufy, *' ^M^ 
77€iT€, pre 

fiiffav {^aav poci.l 



Opt. 



Xoifii or 

tots 
Xoi 

XOITOV 

lolr-qv 
toiuev 
tone 



fivs 2. 

cfTj 3. 

(•irjToy D. 2. 

eiirrrjy 3. 

efTj/ici/ (seldom cTjue;/) P. 1. 

efiTTc (seld. poet, eire) 2. 

fX-qtrav and e7ev 3. _ 

Put. ^(TOfuu, IshaUlm, fc-p, or ?<r€<, loTaz, etc. — Opt. (ffoi/njy. — Inf. faeff^ai 
— Part. iaSixevos. — Verbal Adj. i(rr(oy, avyfarioy. 

Middle Form : Pres. Ufiait 1«reu or trj, Urcu, etc., Imp. U<roj Inf. Uff^at, 
Part. Ufifyos: the Impf. Iffj-rfy, Uao, etc., sifrnifying to hasten, ou{j:lit 
pnjhahly to be written with the rou<xh breathing, whicli is strongly 
confirmed by the manuscripts, aad to be referred to Ttj/h. — Verbal Adj. 
IrSt, iTfoy, rarer Ir-nrfoy. 



Remark 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of e</i/» 'o ^ (except the second 

Per-, tl). ^ci '^^ .33 fa). Tt ' ' Mt is on the preposition, as far back 

as tho ^'tii«ral nilr> uf . ■ . g. iropfj/Lii, irapd, irdpccrrily), etc. 

Imp. frdpiadi, ^vyia^i] but iraf)7Jv on account of the temporal augment, xapftrrcu 
on account of the omission of e (wapffffTcu), irapfTycu like infinitives with the 
ending -yat, irapu^ -pi, -p, etc., iraptlrf^ irapftfy, on account of the contraction; 
the a<<eiiti! '" the Part, in compound words should he particularly noted, 

e. g. irapu^v, ~ , i, itap6yy Gcu. irap6y70i (so also irapiuv. Gen. ■woLpioyros). 

Rem. 2. The compounds of fT/u, to go, follow the same rules as those of 
f i'/J, to be ; hence several fonns of these two verbs are the same in compounds, 
c. tr. iripufu, irdpfi, and irdpfiffi{y) (the last being third Pers. Sing, of eZ/ii and 
third Pers. PI. of tlfd) ; but Inf. wapitycUy Part, -wapiwy.' 

Rem. 3. The form «?« v, esto, be it so! good! shortened from efp and strcngth- 
eind by a !», must ' ' > ' ' om thr ' 1 form «hy instead of 

tt-rrap of the third 1 . — A si mi, yet critically to be 

ted, of the third Pers. Juip. firw instead of co-tcu, is found once in PI. Rp. 
;;i.l. c, with the varking reading (a-ru. — The form of the fii'st Pers. Impf. is 
often ^, among the Attic poets, and sometimes also in Plato ; the form ^/xtjv is 
T 7. 34, X. Cy. 6. 1, 9). — The form of the ' T^ rs. Impf ^s is 

untly in the later writers, and rarely in 1\ os of the Attic 

j>oets. — The Dual forms with <r are j)rcfcrred to those without <r; on the con- 
trary, JfTf is preferred to ^m (Aristoph.). 

Rem. 4. The form of the third Pers. ?^In" Tmpf. ^(ly instead of pti, from 
«7/Lu, sometimes occurs, even before coi -, Ar. Plut. 696. irporptiy (in 

^' <) ; PI. Crit. p. 114. d. (in the best .>i^^.j ; ^uy, PI. Crit. 117, e.' (in the 

SS.) ; irpoTjW, PI. Tim. 43, 6 ; ky^tiy, ib. 60, *c ; ixT^cij/, ib. 76, b. 

Rem. 5. The Ind. Pres. of cTau, to go, has regularly in the Attic prose- 
writers the meaning of the Fnt. I shall or trill go or come : hence the Pres. is 
supplied by l^pxofuu (^ 167, 2) ; the Tjif. and Part, have likewise a Pres. and 
Fat. meaning. 



19* 



222 



VERBS IN -/U. 



'i 182. 



II. Verbs in -fit which annex the Syllable yyv or yO to the 
Stem-TOwel and append to this the Personal-endings. 

^ 182. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Stem 
ends with a, c, o, or with a Consonant. 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, e, or o. 



Voice. 


Tenses. 


a. Stem in a. 


b. Stem in e. 


c. Stem in o (•). 


Act. 


Pres. 


(TKeSd-yyv'fu ' 


Kop4-yyO-fii ' 


(rrpiifvvv-fii * 




Impf. 


i-CTKeSd-vvv-y ' 


i-Kop4-yvv-y ' 


i-arpd-yyv-y ' 




Perf. 


^-(T/ceSa-KO 


At€-KO/?e-*ca 


t-(rTp<D-Ka 




Plup. 


i-ffKeSa-Keiy 


i-K6-/iope-/c€ti' 


i-<TTpU-KflV 




Put. 


Att. or/ceSft), -OS, -a 


Kope-ao), 

Att. /fOpcD, -€i$, -€t 


crpdt-cu 




Aor. 
Pres. 


i-o-KeSd-cra 


i-K6pi-aa 


(t-arptc-aa 


Mid. 


(TKeSd-yyv-fiai 


Kop4-yyv-fuu 


Crpof-yyv-fUU 




Impf. 


i-CTKeSa-yyv-firjy 


6-Kopf-yyv-fj.Tjv 


4-<JTp<a-vyv-firjy 




Perf. 


i-ffKfSa-cr-fxai 


Ke-K6pf-(T-fUU 


i-iTTpto-yiax 




Plup. 


i-(rKeSd-<T-/j.r]y 


i-Kt-Kopf-<r-fn]v 


i-iTTpw-nfjv 




Put. 




Kope-ff-Ofiau 






Aor. 




i-Kop€-(r-dfir]y 






r. Pf. 

Aor. 




Kf-Hop(-<r-Ofiai 




Pass. 


i-(rKiSd-(r-^y 


i-Kopi-a-^y 


4-<rrpdt-^v 




Put. 


(rKiia-(T-^-f}(roficu 


Kopf-a-^orofjLcu 


trrpet-^^oficu 


Verbal Adj. 


(T/ceSa-a-TfJs 


Kopt-ff-rSs 


irrp«f-T6s 




(r/ceSa-c-Teos 


K0p('<T-T(05 

- Kopf-yvvo), f-Kopt-yy 


vrpm^toi. 
voy — <rrp«t-yv(mf i- 


* And (TKeSa 


•yyucOf iffK^hd-vvvov — 


(TTpw-vvvov (u a 


Iways short). 







B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant. 



Pres. 


6\-\v-fj.i,^ perdo, 


oK-\v-fjLai, pcrco. 


6pi-yv-fii ' 


Sfi-yv-fuu 


Impf. 


&X-\v-y * 


wX-Xv-ixrjy 


Hifi-yv-y ' 


wfi-yv-fiiiy 


Perf. I. 


o\-c6\€-Ka ('OAEn), perdidi, 


OfjL'UfjLO-Ka 


i/t-tifjLo-fuu 




§ 124, 2. 


('OMOn) 




Perf, II. 


S\-b)\-a, perii, 


^ 124, 2. 




EJ'^P-i 


6\-Q}\4-K€iv, perdideram, 


0fl'0fJL6-KCiy 


ifi-tefti-fiiiv 


Plup. II. 


6\-(!>\-eiv, perieram, 






Put. 


6\-S), -CIS, -it 


o\-ovfxai, -6* 


ofi-ovfjueUt •** 




Aor. I. 


&Xe-a-a 


A. II. u\-6u.-nv 


SsfjM-ffa 


ufu>-<rdfjiiiv 






A. I. P. icfii-ff-. 


brfv (ct oeui^y) 






Kv-ov — ofjivv-u, L 


F. I. P. OfUMT-Si 

L>^in»-oy (always 




1 


And oWv-co, &X 



Remark. "OWvfii comes by assimilation from 6\-yvfju (§18, Rem.). For an 
example of a stem-ending with a mute, see itlKyvfu above, under the para- 
digms (§ 175). The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of Sfxyvfu is ofutfuxTfifros. The 
remaining forms of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the a among the Attic 
writers, e. g. 6fid>ixoTai, ofiwfioTo. 



♦ 183.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -/Xl. 223 

Summary of the Verbs belonging here. 

The Stem ends, 
A. In a Vowel and assumes -vvO, 

§ 183. (a) Verbs whose Stem ends m a. 

1. K€pd-vvv-fiL (poetic secondary^ fonn Ktpvatu, KLpvrjixL] Epic and 
poet. Kcpcicj), to mix, Fut. Kcpao-w, Att Kcpoi; Aor. cK^oo-a; Perf. 
KCKpaKa ; IMid. to mix for one's self, Aor. iKepacrdfirjv ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. K€Kpafxcu ^KiKipaxTpJu^ Anacr. 29, 13 ; Illf". KeKepaxr^ai, Luc. 
Dial. Meretr. 4, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iKpdSrjv, Att also iKepda-Srp^ 
(Metathesis, $ 156, Rem.). 

2. Kp€fid-vvv-pLLy to iuingf Fut. Kpejxacroi, Att. KpefiCj ; Aor. cKpe/xa- 
<ra ; Mid. or Pass. Kpc/xcwaaJ/xcu, ?o /da;<j^ o?t€'5 ^e^ or ic /iw/i^" (but 
KpcfjMfuuj to hang, M79, 5) ; (Perf. Mid. or Pass. KiKpiixapuan iu 
later writers;) Fut Pass, fcpc/xour^iycro/tai ; Aor. iKpe^da^TjVf I teas 
hung, or I hung. 

3. irerd-yvv-fxt, to spread out, to open, Fut 7reTacra>, Att. TTCToi; 
Aor. cTTcrtura (Perf Act TrcTrcVaKo, Diod.) ; Perf Mid. or Pass. 
vcTrrdfjuu (^ 155, 2) (TrcTrcTcur/Aoi, nou- Attic and Luc.) ; Aor. Pass. 

CTTCTCUT'^Tyr. 

4. o'K€8a-vrv-/i.t, to scatter, Fut o-Kc&to-tu, Att. o-icc&x) ; Aor. co-kc* 
8<(ra; Perf Mid. or Pass. iaKiSaafiai; Aor. Pass. co-KcSaa^v. 

^ 184. (1)) Verbs whose Stem ends in c. 

PsELiMiNART Kemark. Tlic vcrbs tyyvfitf fffityrvfu, and also (tl^yvv/u- 
(^ 186), do not properly belong here, since their stem oripinally ended in or, 'E2- 
(comp. ves-tire), 2BE2- (comp. Ii<r0«r-ros), Zn3-(comp. (oKr-r-fip, (uxr-rpov, ^6<t- 
T17J, (axr-rit) ; but by the omission of the <r, they become analogous to verbs in 
-t and -0. 

1. €-vvv-fjLLy to clothe, in prose dfi<f>L€wvixLy Impf dix<f>uwvv with- 
out Aug.; Fut a/ufHiaruiy Att dfx<f>iC}; Aor. ly/i^uo-a; Perf Act 
wanting ; Perf Mid. or Pass. rifji<f>U(Tfjuu, ^/x<^i'co-at, rjfX(f>uaTaL, etc., 
Inf r}fi(i>ua&aL ] Fut Mid afi<fiU(TOfxai. (Aug. ^^ 126, 3. and 230.) 
The vowel of the Prep, is not elided in the Common language, 
hence also l-mlacuT^aL, X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. 

2. ^c-n^-/xt, to boil. Trans., Fut. ^cVw ; Aor. e^co-a ; Perf Mid. 
or Pass. €li(rpxu; Aor. Pass. l^ta-Srjv. — (^eto, on the contrary, is 
usually intransitive). 



^524 SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN ^l. [H 185-187 

3. Kopi-wv-iJii, to satiate, Fut. Kopecrw, Att. Kopoi; Aor. c/copeo-ai 
Aor. Mid. eKopao-dixrjv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKop^afiai; Aor. Pass 
iKopiaS^rjv, 

4. o-^e-wv-fXL, to extinguish, Put. cr^eVw ; first Aor. l<T^wa^ I 
extinguished; second Aor. ta-prjv, I ceased to burn; Perf. (a-^rjKo, 
Ihavs ceased to burn. — Mid. crj^iwvfxai, to cease to burn, intrans. 
Put. cr/S-^o-o/xai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ea/Sea-fixiL ; Aor. Pass. cVySc'cr- 
Sr]v; Fut. Pass. a-pea-^-^crofiaL. No other verb in -wfn has a 
second Aor. Act. (^ 191, 2). 

5. a-Topi-wv-p,L, to spread out (shortened form oTopn}//.t, Poet, 
and X. Cy. 8. 8, 16), Fut. ctto/dcW, Att. a-TopCj; Aor. corrdpccra; 
Mid. to spread out for one's self. The other tenses are formed 
from o-TpwyyvfiL; ioTpwa-dixrjV ; earptofjiaL, la^puiSrjVy arporro^ (non- 
Att. ia-Topeo-fJiaL, kcrropia-^rjVy and iarop-qS^rjv) . See § 182. 

§ 185. (c) Verbs whose Stem ends in i. 

ri-vpv-fii (TI-), to pay, to expiate, Mid. ri-wv-nm, to get pay, to punish, to avenge^ 
secondary Epic form of tiVw and riuoficu. — In Attic poetry, the Mid. is often 

found, and with one v, rfyvfiai. 

§ 186. (d) Verbs in o, with the o lengthened into ta. 

1. ^(o-wv-fiij to gird, Fut. ^u>croj ; Perf c^wko, Paus. ; Aor. e^axm ; 
Mid. to gird one's self, Aor. Mid. c^oxra/xT/v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
i.t,Qicrp.ai {k 131). 

2. p(a-vvv-p.ij to strengthen, Fut. pdxrw; Aor. cppuxra; Perf Mid. 
or Pass. eppoi[xaLy Imp. ^piocro, vale, fareiceU, Lif. Ippuxi^tu ; Aor. 
Pass. ippwaSrjv (^ 131); Fut. Pass. fHjxrS-qaopxu. 

3. arpoi-wv-fjiL 182), to spread out, Fut. arpuxTO); Aor. ejTpii>- 
a-a, etc. See aTopeyirv-jXL (^ 184, 5). 

4. ■xpw-wv-p.L, to color, Fut. xp<^o"w ; Aor. txp<o(ra ; Perf Mid. of 
Pass. Kexp(acrfjiai ; Aor. Pass. ixpwaSrjv. 

B. Verbs whose Stem 3nds in a Consonant and assumes -yv. 

1 187. (a) In a Mute. 

1. ay-vv- ixL, to break, Fut. diio; Aor. cola, Inf d^ai (Part. Lys. 

100, 5. Karea^avTcs with the Aug.) ; second Perf cdya, I am 

broken; Mid. to break for one's self Aor. ia^apirjv; Aor. Pass. 
iayrjv (Aug., ^ 122,4). 



( 187.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -fU. 226 

2. 8€LK'VV' fiL, see § 175. 

3. €Lpy-vv-fiL (or €Lpy(j}), to shut in, Fut. ctp^o); Aor. clp^a, In£ 
ctplat, Part. Ip^as (PI. Polit. 285, b.), v€pUp$avT€^ (Th. 5, 11), 
^vcp^avTos (PI. Rp. 5. 461, b), Siibj. Kcu9etp^9 (\vith the variation 
Ka^ep$rj<;), PL Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass. €rp;(^v; Perf. elpy/xcu, 
( But €(/>ya), €Lp$ui, cTp^o, €Lp)(&r]Vj to shut out, etc.) 

4. ^€T^-n}-/>ti, to Join together, Fut. ^ev^; Aor. t^cv^a; Mid. ^o 
yom to Of for OTie's self, Fut. ^ev^ofxai ; Aor. i^cv^dp-rpf ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass l^c/xy/xou ; Aor. Pass, c^cv^-^, and more frequently 

5. fjuy-vv'fjLL, to mix (fxfayoi, secondary form), Fut. /w.ti^a); Aor. 
c/xl^a, /xt^at; Perf /xcV^X^ (Folyb.) ; Perf Mid. or Pass, /xc/xty/xat, 
fjL€fU)(3aL; Aor. Pass. ifxi^Sriv, and c/uyj/v; Fut. Pass. p.Lx^i)(Tojxxu\ 
Fut. Perf p.ip.i^opM.1. 

6. oly-^a)-/A^ usually as a compound: (Tlie Attic use of the 
form olyvvpn. is not certain) avoiyvipny StxyiyvvfiL (but instead, 
ai/oiyco, 8to4yu>, are more frequently used in the Pres. and dv'eoryov 
always in the Impf), to open, Fut. dvoL$w', Aor. dvew^a, dvot^at (in 
X. Hell. T^voLyov, T^vot^a, signifying to jnit to sea, to iveigh anc/ior) ; 
first Perf aviutxch I have opened; second Perf aviiitya, I stand 
open, instead of which Att. aviwy fim; Impf Mid. av€(iry6fxrjv ] Aor. 
Pass. av€tox;^r]v, droi;(^7/i'at. (Aug. { 122, 6.) Verb. Adj. avoLKrios. 

7. oftopy-vv-jxi, to wipe 0^ Fut. d/xop^w; Aor. wfxop^a] Mid. to 
wipe off from one's self; Fut oixop^opxu ; Aor. wp.op$dp.rjv ; Aor. 

Pass. o}fJMp)(Sr]V. 

I 8. irrjy-vv-ixiy to fix, fasten, freeze, Fut. tttJ^w; Aor. hr^ia.; first 
Perf TTCTT-rjxa, I have fastened ; second Perf irtrrrjya, I standfast, 
am frozen ; Mid. in^r/vx'fiai, I stick fast ; Perf TriTnjyfxaL, I stand 
fast ; Aor. Pass, iirdyrjv (more seldom €in^x.&Tjv) ; second Fut. 
Pass. Trayiyo-o/xai. Verbal Adj. TrrjKTO^. 

9. prjy-vv'fUf to Tend, Fut. prj^; Aor. tpprj^a; second Perf 
i^pujya, I am rent (^ 140, Rem. 3); Aor. Mid. ippTjidfxrjv ; Aor. 
Pass, ippdyyjv {ipp'^X'^^ rare) ; second Fut. payT^cro/xai. 

10. <f>pdyvv-fXL (commonly <f>pd(Tau}, ^pdma, k 143, 1), to break, 
Impf t>pdyvC-v (Thuc. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. </)pd^a;; Aor. 
€ff>pa$a', Perf Mid. or Pass. Trt^pay/xat ; Aor. Pass. €(f>pdx^rjf 
(i<t>pa.yrfv first used among the later writers). 



226 VERBS. — icet/Attt AxsD rjfUU, [§H88, 189 

5 188. (b) Verbs whose Stem ends in a Liquid. 

1. &p'yv-fjLai (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondary form of aipc 
(lai, and used only in particular phrases, to obtain, to acquire, namely, a reward, 
spoils, etc. Impf. ^pviJ/iTji/. The remaining forms come from a^pofuu. 

2. Krd-vv-^i, commonly written KTiwvfXL in the MSS., tojyr^ to 
death, Att. prose secondary form of KretVw, is used in the Pres. 
and Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. 
The V of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong {k 169, 
Rem. 1). 

3. oX-Xv-ixL (instead of oX-w/xt), to destroy. See k 182, B. In 
prose, only in compounds. 

4. ofx-vv-ixi, to sioear. See § 182, B. 

5. op-i/v-fit (poet), to rouse {§ 230). 

6. (TTop-vv-fJii, to spread out. See oropma'/u, J 184, 5. 

^ 189. Inflection of the two forms of the Perf. icei/xat 

and rjfxaL. 

Preliminary Remark. The two forms of the Perf. Ktlnai and ^/xoi, 
are so essentially different, in their formation, from the other verbs in -fu, that 
they require to be treated by themselves. 

a. Kct/xai, to lie. 

KctjMat, properly, I have laid myself down, hence I lie doicn; 
then Pass. I have been laid down, I am hjiytg down (e. g. dvouca- 
/biai, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, crvyKiLTOLL, it has been agreed 
upon, compositum est, constat, but oT;n-€^ctTai viro to'09, it lias 
been agreed by some one) ; tliis verb is a Perf ^Wthout reduplica- 
tion, from the stem KEI- (contracted from KEE-). 

Per/. Ind. KcTfmi, /ceTaai, Keirai, Kel/xe^a, Kua^c, Kfurrea ] 

Subj. KdcDfiai, Kej7, /ceTjTot, etc. 

Imp. Kficro, Kela^Wy etc.; — Inf. Kuar^cu; — Part. KtlfKyos. 
Impf. Ind. iKelfiT]}/, €K€L<To, cKeiro, third Pers. PI. iKfuno. 

Opt. Keoljxriv, k4oio, KeoiTO, etc. 
Fut, Keiffofxai. 

Compounds itydKeiy.ai, KaTaKfifiai, KardKeiffcut etc. ; — Inf Koreucua^tu J — Imp 



H 190, 191.] VERBS IN -0> WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -/>Cl. 2'?1 

$ 190. b. 'S/Attt, to sit. 

1. *H/«xt, properly, I liave seated myself, I have been seated^ 
hence, / sil (Ion. and poetic, also used of inaiiimate objects, 
instead of iSpu/Aat, / lixive been fixed^ established) ; tliis verb is 
a Perf. of the poet. Aor. Act. euro, to set^ to estahlish. The stem 
is 'HA- (comp. rfr-rax instead of ^S-tcm, according to k 17, 5, and 
the Lat. sed-eo). 

Remark 1. The active Aorist-forms of tXaa are dialectic (§ 230) and poet., 
but the IVDd. signifying tu erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, ciVo^Tji/; 
Part, uadfifyos (Th. 3, 58, iaadfievos) ; Imp. (<raiy (<racu {((peaa-cu) ] Fut. poetic 
iaofjiou, eaffofjuu {i<pi<T(Tonai). The defective forms of this verb are supplied bj 



Perf. 



Ind. ^/Mu, ^<Teu^ ^(TTcu, ^fiiba^ ^(TiS-f , i\vTcu ; 

Imp. ^iTo, ^(T^oiy etc. ; — Inf ^o-dtu ; — Part, fj/tevas. 



Plup. 

2. In prose, the compound Ka^/;/xat is commonly used instead 
of the simple. Tlie inflection of the compound differs from the 
simple in never taking a in the tliird Pers. Sing., and in the 
Plup., only when it has the temporal Augment : — 

Perf. xd^ijuii, KO^Tjtrtu, Ka.^7jToj, etc.; — Subj. ica^w/iaj, »fa^7» ko^- 

Tou, etc. ; — Imp. Ki^ao^ etc. j — Inf Ka^ai^(u\ — Part, ko^ 

flfVOS. 

Pimp. iKcA^firiv and Ko^nrjv, itcd^ao and ^o^iro, (Ki^riro and 

Ka^rjtrTOj etc.; — Opt. Ko^olfirjv, KodoTo, KeL^oiT©, etc. 

Rem. 2. The Opt. forms : Ko^firfv, -ijo^ -V'^o, etc. are doubtful. — The 
defective forms of ^fiau are supplied bv (((cr^au, or "((a^ai (prose Ka^((«T^cuy 

Verbs in -«, which follow the analogy of Verbs in -fit, in forming 

THE SECOND AOR. ACT. AND MiD., THE PrES. AND PeKF. AcT. 

^ 191. L Second Aor. Act. and Mid. ^ 

1. Several verbs with the characteristic a, c, o, v, form a 
second Aor. Act. and (though rarely) a second Aor. Mid., ac- 
cording to the analogy of verbs in -/ai, — tliis tense being without 
the mode-vowel, and appending the personal-endings to tlie 
stem. But all the remaining forms of these verbs are like 
verbs in -w. 

2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the 
modes and participials is like that of the second Aor. Act. of 



228 



VERBS IN -CO WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -fU. [$ 191. 



verbs in -/xc. The characteristic- vowel, with some exceptions, 
IS lengthened, as in eo-Trjv, viz. a and c into rj, o into w, t and v 
into I and v. This lengthened vowel remains, as in taTrjVj 
throughout the Ind., Imp., and Inf. The third Pers. PL in -rja-av 
(Char, a) and -vaav shortens the vowel, when the poets use tlie 
abridged form in -v, instead of -crav, e. g. e/3ttv, ISvv. Tlie Subj., 
Opt., and Part, with some exceptions, wliich will be noticed in 
the following tables, are hke verbs in -/x,t, e. g. jSairp/ (arairp'), 
or/Seirjv (S^Ci-qv), yvotrjv (^Sotrjv), yvovs (dor?). The Imp., like ottjSlj 
in the second Pers. Sing., takes the ending -^^ and the stem- 
vowel remains long through all the persons ; in compounds of 
jSatvo), prjS^L is also shortened into /3d, e. g. Kara/Jo, Trpofia, cis/^d, 
efijSd, iTTi/Sd instead of KarajS-q^i, etc. 



Modes 


a. Characteris. a 


b. Characteris. e 


c. Characteris. o 


d. Character. 6 


and 


BA-n, $aLV(a, 


2BE-n, afievuvui, 


TNO-n, yiyyda- 


e--«, 


Persons. 


logo. 


to extint/uish. 


Kw, to know. 


/o irra/) up. 


Ind. S. 1. 


c-jStj-z/, / vseid^ 


eafiriv, I ceased to 


iyvwv, I knetff, 


cJi'K, / If er«/ in 


2. 


Uri-s 


eafiijs [burn, 


(yuws 


I^Oj [or under, 


3. 


t-^-n 


^afi-n 


tyvQ} 


no 


D. 2. 


e-firi-TOV 


€(Tfir]TOV 


c-yt/urrov 


Ihinov 


3. 


e-^T)-Tr]v 


ia$-i]Tr}v 


iyvwTT)v 


ihvTTjy 


P. 1. 


€-l3r]-iJ.ev 


tafiri^iv 


eyyufxfi' 


notify 


2. 


H-n-Tc 


ecr^TjTe 


€7vaTe 


fSiTe 


3. 


i-^r}-(Tav 


i<rfi-q<rav 


(yywffoy 


fSviray 




(Poet, ^^av) 




(Poet, tyywy) 


(Poet. IXtr) 


Subj. S. 


fiS>, fifis, fifj ^ 


a-pu, f)s, ij ' 


yi-u, yvffs, yv<f ' 


8v«, py, »j * 


D. 


tSrJTOu 


afiriTov 


yvtHroy 


ivrjroy 


P. 


/3&)uej/, TJTCy 


cfiwixfv, TJre, 


yvififv, uTfj 


ivcofifyy 




a>cn{v) 


a)(Ti[v) 


<ii>0t(v) 


17T€, •<n(»') 


Opt. S. 1. 


fiairjv 


(rfielT}u 


yvoir\v * 




2. 


^ai-qs 


afie'iT]! 


yvoir\s 




3. 
D.2. 


ficdrj 


(rfielr) 


yvolri 




fiaL7]T0v et oilTOV 


afid-qrov et i7rov 


yyoirjroy Ct curof. 




3. 

P. 1. 

2. 


l3aiT}Tr]v et aiTTjv 


(yfi(iT]Tr}u ct eiTTji/ 


yyoi-fjrrjy et ofnir 




^ai-nfiev et aijx^v 


(rfiilT]ixev et fliJifv 


yyolr}fi(y et oljuc*' 




fiairjTe Ct aTre 


afiiirfTi et etre 


yyoirrrf ct oTtc 




3. 


fiaieu (seldom 


afieleu 


7^0461' (rarely 




Imp. S. 
D. 1. 
P. 2. 


jSaiTjcraj/) 




7»'oiTj<rai') 




firi^i, ■f)T(o^ 


(r$ri^i, -fiTOD^ 


7»'«i^t, c^« ' 


80^1, ^«' 


PrJToi/, rjTCtiv 


O-ySjJTOf, ^TWV 


7i'&>Toi', dnwv 


SvTOV, wT»r 


fitiTe 


(r/SrjTe 


yvcire 


5Dtc 


3. 


^■qrwcrav and 


fffirjTuxrau and 


yyunutrav and 


SuTOMTor et 


Inf. 
Part. 


^avrwv 


afifVTwv 


7j/JKrwi' 


8uKr«r 


fids, uffa, av 


(rfirjuai 


•yvwveu 

7^0 vs, oD<ra, 6y 


ivyat 

8i^r, r><ra, i/r 




G. fidvros 


, avafifjs, etc.; otto 


G. 7»'rfvT0S 

(T/Sw : Sicryfw : ova 


G. Svyros. 


* Compo 


unds, 6. g. auafiS) 


2 Aeschyl. Snppl. 230 (21 


5) crvyyvcpr] ] but i 


n the Mid. form <r 


VTTVorro. 


^ Compounds, e. g. avdfi-n'r 


bi, dj/a)87]T€ ; aTo'cry 


37j'^t : Sidyyu>di ; dj 


oSi'^i. 



^ 192, 193.) VERBS IN -<Ji LIKE VERBS IN -/Xl. 229 

Semark. The Opt. form Sirnv (instead of Svlriy) is not found in the Attic 
dialect, but in the Epic (^ 227). 

^ 192. Summary of Verbs with a second Aor . like 

Verbs in -/xi. 

Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form : — 

1. 8i5po<r/c«, to run aroay (^ 161, lOy Aor. (APA-) (Sp&y, -as, -d, -d/iiev, -drf, 
•dtray {tSpdv Poet.), Subj. 8pcS, Spas, Spa. Sparoy, Spw/xey, Spare, Spw(Ti{v), Opt. 
Spairji/, Imp. Spa^i, -oltw, Inf. Spavai, Part. Spks, -aaa, -ay, Gon. Spdyros. 

2. Wto/xou, tofi/ (§ 166. 29), Aor. (IITA-) firrrjy. Inf. Trrrjyai, Part. xtSs ; Aor. 
Mid. ivTOfjiriy, irraabai. 

3. irplaabai, see ^ 179, 6. 

4. ffKfKKot or <TKf\eVf to dry, second Aor. (2KAA-) ^tTKhriy, to wither, Intrans., 
Inf. (rKXTJyai, Opt. (TKKairiv. 

5. ^a-Kci>, to come before, to anticipate {M58, 7), Aor. tip^v, <f>^]yat, «^dy, 
^a>, <f>dalrjy. 

6. Kalw, to bum, Trans. (§ 154, 2), Aor. (KAE-) ^jccCijv, / burned, Intrans. ; but 
first Aor. tKavaa, Trans. 

7. f>iu>, lujlow {§ 154, 2), Aor. ('PTE-) i^fivny, I flowed. 

8. x«>^P«. 'o rejoice (§ 166, 32), Aor. (XAPE-) ix^v. 

9. aXicKOfiat, to be taken, Aor. ('AAO-) f/Awv and IdAwv (^ 16', 1), oAwvot, 
oAw, -<fs, -y, etc., oXoItji', oXovy (always a, except in the Ind.). 

10. /3<(>«, fo //er, Aor. ifilosy, Subj. /Siw, -^j, -^, etc.. Opt. fiitpy\v (not fiioirjyy 
as yvoiriv, to distinguish it from the Opt. Impf /Sjo/tji'), Inf fiiuyai. Part. /3jous 
[oD<ra, oCf] ; but the cases of fiiovs are supplied by the first Aor. Part, fiiaxras. 
Thus: hyffiivy, I returned to life, from kya$id>(TKOtiM (§ 161, 3). The Pres. and 
Impf of $i6u> arc but little used by the Attic wTiters; for these tenses, they em- 
ploy (w ; besides these tenses, only the Put. C^trtiy was in good use among Attic 
writers ; the remaining tenses were borrowed from $i6a> ; thus, Pres. (w ; Impf. 
((wy (§ 137, 3) ; Put. fiiwaofuu, more rarely C^<r«; Aor. i$lwif (X. O. 4, 18, has 
also ifiluKTfy) ; Perf. fiffiiwKa] Pcrf. ^lid. or Pass, fitfiiwrai, Part. /3€/3<ci>fi«Voy. 

11. <pvu (0 or 0), to produce, second Aor. (<pvy, Intrans., to be produced, be bom, b« 
naturally, ipvyai, ipts, Subj. ^<;« (Opt. w^anting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first 
Aor. i<piiffa, TrtLus. I produced ; Fut. iptkrv, Trans./ will produce. The Perf. 
Tf <pCKa, I am produced, also has an intransitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid. 
^{tofjLoi ; Fut. tptffofjLoi. 

'Remauk. Here also belong the forms <rx«y and <rxo^vy of the second 
Aor. I[ax(>'^ from IVa*, to have (^ 166, 14), and irli^i of the second Aor. iirioy 
from x»V«, to drink (§ 158, 5). 

$ 193. 11. Perfect and Pluperfect. 

Tlie Attic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few Per- 
fects of pure verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. AI-O, to 

20 



230 



VERBS IN -O) LIKE VERBS IN -/At. 



[k 193 



/ear, Se^St-a, then rejecting the mode-vowel, in the Dual and PL 
Ind. Perf. and Plup., and to some extent in the Inf., e. g. 8c-St- 
fiev instead of 8e-St-a-/>t€v. In this v^ay, these forms of the Perf 
and Plup. become wholly analogous to the Pres. and Impf of 
verbs in -fjn, e. g. t-oTa-fxev. The stem- vowel remains short, e. g. 
8e8i/x,cv, r€TXa/jL€Uj rerXavai ; but in the third Pers. PI. Perf, the 
mode-vowel a is not rejected, e. g. Sc-St-dcn; with verbs in -cut), 
however, a is contracted with the stem- vowel, e. g. Tc-rXa-tJUn = 
Tc-rA,a-o"t. 

Rkmabk 1. Except the forms of Ain and TtrrTj/Ai, all the Perfects of this 
kind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing. 
Be'Sto is not Attic. 

Rem. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only 
wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -^i in the second Pers. Sing., it is 
wholly analogous to the forms in -fit. So the Inf. Both append their termi- 
nations to the short stem-vowel; $e5i€t/au is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and 
the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is a, are formed like verbs in -/m, since 
the Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem-vowel with the termination, 
and the Opt. Plup. ends in -ai-nv, e. g. co-ref-w, earw, -^y, etc., r«TXjilriy. The 
Part, of verbs in -da contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -ds and -^j, 
e. g. earaJis = caTcoy, i(TTa-6$ = kcT^s and k<rr6sy and also have a peculiar 
feminine form in -wtro, e. g. kcTTSxra ; all the Cases retain the «», e. g. €«rriToj, 
l<rTc6(rrjs, etc. 

Rem. 3. The form resolved by c is retained in some participles, in the Ionic 
dialect, e. g. Ictcc^s, standing firm ; so from tc^vtiko^ rtbvfdis Cnever rtdvus) 
together with Te^j/rjKcis, is retained in the Attic dialect also. In these forms, 
CO remains in all the Cases, e. g. 

ctrrec^y, kcrewaa., ecrrccis, Gen. loTe&n-oy, -d)<rt\s. 
Te^yfdos, Tf^viuxraf Te^yfus, Gen. rt^yf&ros, -dxnis. 

'B^firjKa and rerXTjKa never have this form of the participle. 





Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


PerfecL 


PluperfecL 


Ind. S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 


Se-SX-a 

de-St-as 

Se-5i-e(i/) 

Se-Sj-Toj/ 

S4-St-Toy 

Se-^^.-fiey 

S4-SX-T€ 

Se-Sf-da'i{v) 


iBe^eiy 

iSfSXroy 
iSe^rrjy 
iScSXfisv 

4d4SXarav (^5e5/c<rai') 


'E-2TA-A . 
«-<rro-TOi' 

l-OTO-TOV 

e-o~rd-T€ 
€-<rra-<ri{y) 


cerroTor 

(orrirriP 

ftrrofiey 

f<rraT€ 

firraaar 


Imp. 
Subj. 


Se-m-^i, SeStTw, etc. 
Sc-Sl-o), -jiSj -J?, etc. 


f-<rra-di, etc., 3 Pers. PL 
fOTciTaHrou' and -dyr^w 


Inf. 
Part. 


Se-Si-eVoi 

Se-Si-cijy, -um, -65 ^ G*n. -^os 


e-OTa-vcu 

f'trrus, -axTOy -6s (-<6s1) 
Gen. -arros, -^xttis 


Subj. Pf. 
Opt.Plup. 


eCTw, f}s, -i], etc. 

eo'To^Tjj', Dual fOTalriTov and -oTtoj', PL tcrairjfiry and •o^ucv, 
etc., third Pers. PI. co-Talev. 



H 194, 195.] VERBS WITH A PERF. LIKE VERBS IN 'fXL. 231 

Bem. 4. The Opt. Plup. third Pers. Sing. SfSi^l-n, PI. Phaedr. 2.51, a. is re- 
stored according to traces in the MSS. The Plup. ofta-TTj/xi, in this form never 
takes the strengthened augment €t. — The Imp. Perf. co-rd^i, etc., and the Opt. 
Plup. earaiTjr, etc., are poetic only. But the Inf. Io-toj/ou is in constant use ; 
yet fffTTjKfycu is very seldom 5 also the Part, cards, -axray is far more frequent 
than eo-TTjjcc^y, -v7a ; the neuter f(m)K6s, on the contrary, is more frequent than 
iaros. Instead of the Ind. Sing. Perf., Plup., and Part, of $e5jo, the forms 
of SeSoiKa are more frequent ; besides the Indie. Perf. and Plup., particularly 
in the Sing., the Inf. and Part, were used. 



^ 194. Summary of Verbs with a Perfect like Verbs 

in -fit. 

Besides the two verbs above, the following have this form of the Perfect : — 

1. ylyvofjMi, to become, TErAA (stem TA) : Perf. (Sing, yfyoya, -as, -e), yeya 
H€V, yfydre, yey6MTi{y), Inf. yeydfity (Epic), Part, yeyus, ycyucra, y(yus, Gen 
yeyunos. 

2. fiaiuea, to go, Perf. fi($rjKa, BEBAA : PI. $($a.fjify, -are, 'MTi(y), third Pcrs. 
PI. Subj. ^nfi(fiu(Xi(y) (PI. Phaedr. 225, e), Inf 0(fi&vu, Part. iSt/SoSs (X. Hell. 
7. 2, 3), $e$v7a {fiffiuaa, PI. Phaedr. 254, b), fiffius, Gcu. fitfiiiyTos ; Plup. ^^4- 
fidficy, -aT€, -daay. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic and dia- 
lectic (§ 230). 

3. ^yi]<TK<i}, to die, rt^yriKa, TE0NAA : PI. Tf^yafifv, Tf^are, rf^a<rt(y), Imp. 
Tf ^ya^i. Part. re^vrjKiifS, Tf^vrjKvla, re^yrjKSs, or rc^ycws, rfbvtwora (Lys. and 
Dera.), n^ytSs, Inf rct^dvoi (Aesch. rtbyaycu from rcdvoeVcu) ; Plup. eVe'i^i/d- 
aav. Opt. r(bvaii\v. 

4. TAAfl, to bear, Perf. rtrX-nKa, TETAAA: Dual rirXarov, PI. Tfrkofifv, 
TrrAoTf, TCT\a<Ti{y), Imp. T€TXd3i, -irw, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. r€T\&ycu, but 
Part. rerKriKus \ Plup. ^Tt'rXd/iCJ/, irirXdrf, irfTXaxrav, Dual irtTKaroy, ^TerXi* 
rify. Opt. r(rKadT)V. 

5. Here belong the two participles of, 

fiifipw<rK» (§ 161, 6), to eat, Perf. fi($pwKa, poetic Pt^pws, Gen. -utos, 
iriirru (^ 163, 3), to fall, irrirrwica, Att. Poet, irnrrws (comp. § 230). 

Kemabk. There are also found, in imitation of Homer, KfKpayfiey and 
the Imp. KfKpax^i, from the Perf. KtKpdya (from Kpd(w, to cry otit) ; also the 
Imp. irtiTda^i, from irtiroi^a, to trust (from irfi^w, to persuade), is found in 
Aesch. Eum. 602. See ^ 230. The Perfects oVia and l^oiKa require a distinct 
consideration. 



^ 195. OTSa and toLKa. 

1. 075(x, Perf from 'EIAii (second Aor. cTSov, / saw, Inf. iSeTy, videre) 
properly / have seen, hence / know; for the syllable o7, see ^ 140, 4; for the 
change of 8 into <r in Xaroy, etc., see ^ 1 7, 5 ; for the change of I into v in 
iffiuvf see § 19, 1. Its inflection is as follows: — 



232 



OTSa AND couca. 



[♦ 196. 



PERFECT 



Ind. S. 1. 
2. 
3. 
3. 
1. 
2. 
3. 



D.2 
P 



olSa 

0?S€(|') 
XffTOPi XffTOV 

tcrre 
Xffa.(n{v) 



Subj. €i5w Imp. 

ei^s tiT^t Inf. 

6t57jTO»', -riTov taroVf laruv 

etdwixey Part. 

etSai(rj(j') Xaruicav 



-6s 



PLUPERFECT 



Iml. S. 1. 
2. 
3. 



TJSeiv^ Dual PI. pJcificy (Poet. ^(T/ifv) 

^5ets and -eto-S^a ^ 775€JToi', Poet. T^o-Toi/ ^iciTf ( " poTt) 
i7Sei{i/) 7?5etTTji', " rjarrjv rilicrav ( " pcco') 



Opt. Sing. etSefTjj/, -tjs, -tj ; Dual elSfl-qTOv, -^W] PI. flSfi-qfify (seldom ctStx- 

;iiej/), eiSetTjre, etSeTci/ (seldom fi5ciTj(rcu/). 
Put. daofxai (Ion. €<5V'«'j though Isocr. cvvit.i4)<r(is), I shall know or 

experience ; sometimes also ctSeVeu, etSeS, €(8€^77k, haTC the same 

meaning. — Verbal Adj. iffriov. 



Suj'otSo, compounded of oT5o, Z am conscious, Inf. <n;vc(5(Vcu, Imp. avnabij 

Subj. cruvetSw, etc. 

M 116, 2, oWas scarcely occurs in Attic. 

' First person fjdij, second rfSria-^a, third iJJh?, are considered as Attic 
forms ; yet rjSeiv, fi5€i<r^a (also p5ets), pSci, are found in the best Attic wri- 
ters. OtSafxev, olSore, oWa(Ti(y), instead of Xayifv^ etc., are rarely found in 
the Attic writers. Comp. X. An. 2. 4, 6. Antiph. p. 115, 3. P'l. Ale. 141, 
e. Eur. Suppl. 1047. A. 0. 20, 14. oTBas occurs in X. C 4. 6, 6. The 
shortening of the et into € in the Dual and PI. of the Opt. pSc/ic*', is poetic 
and rare. S. 0. T. 1232. 



Remark. The Perfect, I have knoicn^ is expressed by tyimKa^ and the Aoriflt, 
1 knew, by iyvav. 

2. "EoiKo, lam like, I seem, Perf. of 'EIKQ (of this the Impf. fUf, is used in 
Homer), poetic eT/ca instead of foiKu, ctVci^cu instead of ^ouccVox, and (instead 
of iolKa(Ti) the anomalous Att. third Pers. PI. €r{a<ri, even in prose (Plat), Part. 
4oiKd!)5, in the Attic writers only in the sense of like ; Att. cucwr and tuctpm 
(instead of eozKcis, iotKevai) commonly in the dramatists, only in the sense of 
probable, likely, right; hence especially in the neuter cutrfy, as «j tuiis, a* i$ 
natural; Plup. ic^Keiv (§ 122, 5), Fut. et^tD {At.). 

Here belongs the abridged form toiyntvy among the Tragedians, instead of 
iolKUfiei/; comp. fo-uei/. The poetic Md. forms fjl^au (Eur. Ale. 1065), second 
Pers. Sing. Perf., and IjCkto, third Pers. Sing. Plup., are constructed according 
to the same analogy. 

§ 196. III. Present and Imperfect, 

There are also some Present and Imperfect forms, mostly in the Epic dialect, 
which, according to the analogy of verbs in .^,. take the personal-ending* 
without the mode-vowel. See § 230, under Slv^, raviw, ipvvy <rdJ«, I8», f^pm' 
•Ittoi (§ 166, 24), of the Common language, belongs here. 



♦ 197.] DEPONENT PASSIVES. 233 

$ 197. Summary of the Deponent Passives 

102, 2, 3). 

"AyafjLou, to wonder^ Zvudfiai, to he able, Kp€fia/xai, to hang, 

alSfofiai, to reverence, Svsapeo'rfOfuu, to be dissat- Aot5op€0/ucu, to revile, 

a\<iofiai, to wander, isjied, fmlyoncu, to be mad, 

a/jLiWdoixcu, to contend, iyayriSofiai, to resist, (ifrafLfXafiai, to regret^ 

ain-i6ofjiai (Poct.) adversor, iv^fi4o/xcUf to lag to heart, fjLvffarrofjuu, to loathe, 
aTTovoiOfiai, to he distracted, iwvofOficUt to consider, pefiecdofiai (Poet.), to bi 

i.Trop(Ofiaiy to be perplexed, iirifif\ofjLau and -io^iai, to justly indignant, 
apiffTOKpaTfOfiou, to liave an take care, otofuu, to suppose, 

aristocracy, iTriyofofiat, to rejiect upon, dXjyapx^ojiou, to have an 

apvdofiai, to re/use iirl<rrafjLau, to know, oiigarchy, 

6.x^oiMu, to be displeased, tpofuu (Poet), to love, trfipdofxai, to try, 

fiovKoficu, to wish, (v^vfifOfjLcu, to be happy, Trpo^vfxioyLcu, to desire, 

fipvxdofxxu, to roar, €v\afi(Ofiai, to be cautious, trpoyofoficu, to foresee, 

ifoncu, to want, fvvo^ioyuou, bonis legibus ffi^ofuu, to reverence (Aor. 

SfpKOfiai (Poet.), to see, utor, , icftp^y, PI. Phacdr. 

irjIxoKpaTfOfiai, to have a fifiropfoficu, to be opulent, 254, b). 

dttnorrury, ^Sofiat, to rejoice, KpiXorififo/xai, to be ambi' 

StaXtyonai, to converse, d^pofuu (Poet.), to become tious, 
Siayofofjuu, to think, hot, inroroirtoixcu, to conjecture. 

Remark 1. The Aor. of several verbs have a Mid. as well as a Pass, form, 

e. p. av\l(ofjMi, to h>> ■ * •' .n, to revile; bptyofjuau, to strive after; irpay/xa' 

riitottai, to carry on rarer); <piXo<ppoviOfiau, to treat kindly. Also 

several of the above verbs iKloiifr here, yet they more seldom have a middle 
Aorist, e. p. &y<miu, Aor. Mid. iij Dem. alSfOfuu, see ^ 166, 1, ofiiWtioncu, Aor. 
Mid. in later writers, apyionat in Ilerod. Aescli. and in later writers, hia\4yofuu 
in non- Attic writers, f-wiyofofxcu in later writers, XoiSoptofMai, Aor. Mid. in Isae. 
6, 59, iTfipdofiai often in Tim., Tpoyoto/iai, Kur. Hipp, (ji^'.i. Pans. 4. 20, 1. <pi\o- 
Tifjifofiai in Isoc. and Aristid. — Several of the aliove list of verbs have a mid- 
dle as well as a Passive fonn in the Fut. : cuifoficu, fj 166, 1, ix^ofiai, ^ 166, 4. 
SicLKtyo/juu, to converse with, SiaXt^ofuu and rarer 5ta\€X'^fo/iO"> Siavofofuu, to 
think, 4irifx(Koficu, fj IGG, 21. irpv^ u, to desire. 7r po^fiT](TOfxai and rarer irpo^- 

fir]^(Tofiau. lioth JJSo^cu, to r^j 1 the poetic Upofuu, to love, have a passive 

form for their Fut.: ri<rd^<rofjuu, ipaa^aonat, ^ 179, 4. 

Rem. 2. All the other Deponents arc Middle Deponents, or are used only 
in the Pres. and Impf. 

Rkm. 3. Amonj.: th* ^ > lont Passives, are very many Active verbs, which 
in the Mid. express a n or intransitive action, but have a Passive form 

for their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Future, e. g. <po$e(a, 
tcrreo, to terrify ; <(>o$rid^yai and <po&-i]<Tf<rbcu, timere, to fear. Here belong all 
verbs in -alyfiy and -vvfiy, derived fmm substantives and adjectives, almost 
all in -ovy, and most in -l^ay, e. g. fixppalyfiy, to gladden, fvtppay^yai, eu(ppa- 
yucr^ai, and fv<ppavbT)a(ebai, to be joyful, to be happy ; tmraiyny, to make ripe, 
irrKov^vau, irfTTaviitrbou, maturescere, to ripen; ouVx »'»'«<»'» to shame, al<rxvv^\yai, 
alcx^yfic^ai (rarer euVxuv^o'ca'.^cu), to feel shame ; ^\arrovy, to make less, cAot- 
TCrt^voj, iWaTTwaetrbou, to be inferior, to be conquered ; xoAoCi/, to make angry, 
XoKco^jycu, xoAwtTfcrdai, succensere, to be angry; fxaXaKi^ay, to make effeminate, 
^laXoKKT^yfu (rarer /laXtucfo-ao-i^ou), fuiKaKiuobat, to make one's self effeminate, to 

20* 



?34 



ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE. 



[§ 19a 



be effeminate ; opyiCeiPf to make angry, opyia^vai, oprfielabou^ and opyur^aea^tUf 
succensere, to be angry ; there are very many others also, of which only those 
most in use will be mentioned here : — 

"Ay^iv (from amyeiv, come, dmxS^^mt and avayayiffhai, signifying to he carried 
to sea, in mare provehi, but Put. ayd^eaStai), ayelpeiv, ayvvyai, a^poi(€iy, alvx^v^iVy 
auiav, ttifpeiv, aWdrreiy {a\Xay^(rofx.ai, often also aWd^ecr^cu) , apfw(civ, a<TXo\uVj 
av^dveiu, a(paj/iCett/ ; — jSaAAetj/ ; — Sairavav, Sianav : — iyi(fiu, iirdyeiv {rjTretx- 
^u), ea-Tiay, €u«x^"' 5 — V'^'ray (F. -^Trrf^ijaroaai and rarer rrrTTjao/jLai) : — ISpieiy] 
— Kiveiv, K\lyeiy, Koip.ay, KOfii^eiy {KOfiKT^yai, to travel, but KOjiiaaa^cu, sibi recu- 
perare, to recover for one^s self), Kplvfiy, KvXiySeiy; — Xeynv^ Aetireii', Aveiv, 
KvTTety; — fjt.e^v<rK€iy, fxtyyvyai, fii/ULyrjaKeiy ; — opeyeiy {opex^yoUf and rarer 
ope^axr^ai), Spfiav, ox^^v ; — irei^eiy (Fut. irei<Top.ai, IxciU obey, but ircKT^aoficu, I 
will be persuaded), Trriyvvvai, wXayay, irXcKciy, TrXrjTTeiy, iroAiTeveiv (also TroAixeu- 
(rarr^ai), iroyeveiy, — pryyyvyai, ^wyyvyai; — ffeieiy, aijirciy {(raTnjyau, ffox^o-etrd^cu), 
(TKcSayyvvai, cnray, ffireipay, airdpeiv, ffreXXeiv ((TToATji/at, <na}J}<T((r^cu). (np4(pit¥ 
{<TTpa(p?iyai, ffrpacpriffea^xai), ccpdWeiy {(T<pa\riyai, <r<pa\'f}(r(abai, seldom (r<pa\et<T- 
^ai), ado^eiy {(Tw^yai, to save one's self but adxraxTbau, to save for one's self, sibi 
servare) ; — rapdrreiy, repireiy, rpeireiy {TpaTrrjyai, to turn one's self to turn, rp^iaa- 
^ai,to put to flight), rpi(puv\ — tpaiyeiy {(payTJycu, (pcu^a-fo-^cu and (pavdc^ai, to 
appear, but (pay^rjyai, to be shown), (payrd^eiy {(payTaa^aeerbai), tpepeiy (eyex^- 
vai, oXffitT^ai and iyex^(r€<r^ai, rarer ola-^a-o/xaL). (pbtiptiy ((p^aprjyau. <f>^apii<rea- 
^ai [(p^epiTff^ai, Ion. and poet.J, (pofieiy {(pofirjata-^cu and <i>ofi7j^<Tfcrbcu) ; — if/cu- 
Seiy {^peva^rjyai, ^evcr^crofiaif to deceive one's self be deceived, but i//ev(rco-,^ou, il>€v- 
craff^aif to lie) ; — X^"'« 



^ 198. Summary of the Active Verbs most in use with 
a Middle Future, § 154, 1. 



"Aidd) (dfSw), to sing, 
cLKOxxa, to hear, 
aXaXd^o)^ to shout, 
afiaprdva>, to miss, 
airavTdwy to meet, 
airoXawi), to enjoy, 
aptrd^Q}, to seize, 
fiaSl^co, to go, 
PalvcD, to go, 
Bi6a)y to live, 
jSAeVftj, to see, 
fiodaif to cry out, 
yeXdco, to laugh, 
yripdffKO), to grow old, 
yiyydxTKOJ, to know 
SdKyo), to bite, 
dap^dya, to sleep, 
Seiffai, to fear, 
Siairdu, to live, 
SidpdffKoa, to run away, 
Sic^KO), to pursue, 
eyKccfud^a^ to priise. 



flfii, to be, 
iiraiyeo), to praise, 
iff^lwy to eat, 
^avfid^o), to wonder, 
j^ew, to run, 

br]pd(i), ^p€v<i)f to hunt, 
biyydvoa, to touch, 
^yf](TKWf to die, 
^pdcTKO}, to leapj 
Kd/xvu, to labor J 
K\aia, to weep, 
/cAeTTTw, to steal, 
Kcofid^cD, to revel, 
Xayxdyu, to obtain, 
Xaiifidyu, to take, 
XiXJJ-dw, to lick, 
fiay^dya, to learn, 
via, to swim, 
yevco, to nod, 
oTSa, to know, 
olfKa^w, to lament, 
^AoAu^w, to hold. 



iixwpLi, to svcear, 

hpdu, to see, 

ovp4tt)y urinam redere^ 

"Kcd^Wi to sport, 

irdax^t fo suffer 

irrjScLw, to leap, 

TlvWf to drink, 

vlirreet tofall^ 

xXfw, to sail, 

xvea>t to blow (but avfi 

vytvffce), 
irylycty to strangle, 
iro^iw, to desire^ 
vposKvyfUj to reverence^ 
^e<i>, to flow, 
Po<pio), to gulp down, 
ffiydtt), to be silent, 
(Tiuirdo}, to be silent, 
CKdnrrw, to mock, 
tnrovSdCo), to be zealous^ 
avpiTTOi, to whistle, etc^ 
tUctw, to produce^ 



i 199.] PREPOSITIONS AND CONJLNCTIONS. 235 

rp4x<io, to run, rwi^a^w, to rail at, xiaKO), to gape, 

rpdiyw, to gnaw, (pevyw, to flee, X^C^i to ease one's self, 

Tvyx^v^j to obtain, <p^dvu, to come before, ;t&)pea>, to contain. 

Remark. Some have both the Active and Middle form for the Future ; the 
Middle, however, is preferred, e. g. aSw (a<ra» non-Attic), apiro^w, /3t(Jw, y-qpa- 
((r/c)a>, /SAcVw, Skokw, iyKwixid^u, iirau'ea), ^av/jLoi^u), KXeinw, po<p4w^ aKwirrca, 
riKTw, x'^pf «• — 077paaj, ^p^vta, KoXd^w are also used with the middle form. 
The following compounds of x^P^f" have an Active and Middle form in the 
Fut. : diro-, <Tvy- vposx^ifp^O] hut ava- and irpox<^p^<» have only the Active form. 



CHAPTER Vn. 

$ 199. Prepositions and Conjunctions. 

Besides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral, 
Adverb, and Verb, there are also the two following parts of 
speech, viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms of 
these notliing need be said ; hence these parts of speech are 
treated in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary. 



PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS 



PARTICULARLY OF THE EPIC DIALECT. 



A. ORTHOGRAPHY. 

♦ 200. Digamma, or Labial Breathing F. 

1. The Greek lan^age had originally, in addition to the Spiritus Asper ( ') 
and the Lingual Breathing c, a Labial Breathing,* the sound of which corre- 
sponds nearly to the Eng./, or the Latin v. In accordance with its form {F)^ 
which is like one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma (double 
Gamma) ; and as the iEolians retained it longer than the other Grecian tribes, 
it is called the .£olic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the alphabet, namely, 
between « and ^, and is named BaD. Comp. ^§ 26, 1 and 25, 2. 

2. This character disappeared very early ; but its sound was in some cases 
changed, in some of the dialects, into the smooth Labial ;3, e. g. /3to, vis, Fls 
(later fj); in other instances, it was softened into the vowel u, and, after other 
vowels, coalesced with these, and formed the diphthongs au, «y, tjv, ov, uv^ e. g. 
yavs {vdFs), navis, x^'^ (x*^**) ■^ck)l., $ovs {$6Fs), Wis, bOs, Gen. Wn's; in 
others still, it was changed into a mere gentle breathing, which at the beginning 
of a word is denoted by the Spiritus Lenis, but in the middle of a word and 
before p is not indicated, e. g. /Yi, t'i*», is ; 6FiSt ovis^ 6is ; ciXew, volvo ; Fp6Sovy 
p6Soy, etc. ; it was also changed, in the )>cginning of some words, into a sharp 
breathing, which is denoted by the Spiritus Asper, e.g. l<nr€poj, vesperus; ivwfiiy 
ir stio. 

3. In the Homeric poems, no character denoting the breathing F any longer 
exists ; but it is very clear that, in the time of Homer, many words were 
sounded with the Digumma, e. g. Ayvvfit, iya^, aviffffoi, w'Scb/w, ^op, rer, the 

' " The Vau, or Digamma, an important agent in early Greek orthography, 
loss, however, a principal than a subsidiary letter, retained much of its previous 
character of vowel-consonant, or, in the* technical language of the Oriental 
schools, of quiescible letter. It was chiefly used as a liquid guttural, or aspirate, 
somewhat akin to our English i/A, to impart emphasis to the initial vowel of 
words, and possessed the power, with certain limitations, of creating metrical po- 
sition. But these vague and indefinite properties, were not such as to entitle it to 
R regular or liabitual place in the uritten texts of the popular Epic poems. It 
was retained by the Boeotian states in monumental inscriptions till the 145 
Olvmpiad."' — Mure's Hist, of the Language and Literature of Greece, rol. i, p. 85; 
vol. iii, p. 513. 



238 DIALECTS. [^ 201 

forms of 'EI An, video; eoiKa, ^Koai, viginti; ef/io, vestis; flxe7v (comp. vocare)^ 
fKn^os, 'dvvvfiif vestio ; k6s and Ss, sums ; ov, sui ; ot, sibi ; f<nr€pos, vesperus ; oIkos, 
vicus; olvos, vinum, etc. ; this is obvious from the following facts : (a) words that 
have the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. irph e^eu (= -irph Fe^ev) ; — (b) hence 
also a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before a diganunated word, cannot 
be elided, e. g. \iirey Se e {= 54 Fe), avh eo (= oTrb Feo) ; -^ (c) the paragogic p 
(§ 15) is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. 5o?€ ol (= Scut 
j^oi) ; — (d) oif instead of ovk or ovx> is found before the Digamma, e. g. tVel 
oij 13-eV iffTi x^P^'^f^" {— off F€^€]/)\ — (e) in compounds, neither Elision 
nor Crasis occurs, e. g. Siaeiire/xev {= SioFcnrefxtv), aayiis (= oFayfis); — (f ) a 
digammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, 
e. g. yap e^ey (where the p and the Digamma belonging to €^fy make a long 
by position) ; — (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the 
Digamma, e. g. KdWet re rrix^av Kal etfuuri (= koI Fdfjuuri), XL 7, 392. 



^201. Interchange of Vowels. 

Peeliminaet Remark. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of vow- 
els, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, but are 
uniformly limited to certain words and forms. 

1. The three vowels, e, 0, o, called (§ 140, 2 and 4) variable vowels (rp*^, 
Terpoc^a, iTpd(prjv) undergo various changes in the dialects : — 

a is used instead of e (Ion.), e. g. rpanus, Ta/j-vw, fxeya^os instead of rpiiruy 
r4fivu, fi4ye^os ; so also Doric rptupca, (rKuip6s, "Apra/us instead of rp((p«e, 
a-Kiepos, "ApTcfjiis ; and in several particles, e. g. 5«a, T<^»ea, ir<i«a instead of 
Sre, rSre, ttStc. 

€ instead of o in the Ionic dialect, when followed by a Liquid, e. g. riaafpts^ 
epffrjv, rieXos, fiepe^pov (Ion.) instead of reo-o-opcy, Jour, ip<rriv,a male, vaXoSt 
glass, ^apaSfpov, gulf; also in many verbs in -cU, e. g. <poir4<t), 6p4u (Ion.), 
instead of ^oiTi.a>, 6pd<a. 

€ instead of o (Doric), e. g. efiSfixriKoyra instead of €$5ofi-f}KoyTa. 

a instead of (Ion.), in a^^wSelv instead of opfxaSuy. 

2. The following cases are to be noted in addition: — 

The long o is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in par- 
ticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. e. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians, 
e. g. afiepa, Kairos, a56s, Aafidr-np. The older and the later Ionic have softened 
this grave d into tj. The Attic uses both the Doric a and the softened tj, (§ 16, 
7). Comp. Dor. afi^pa. Ion. rjfxepa, Att. 7)n4pa (with the Ion. n and Doric o) ; Ion. 
ao<piTj, Dor. and Att. (ro(^(o ; Ion. ddprj^, Dor. and Att. ^tSpof. — So, also, in 
the diphthong ou, among the Ionic writers a is changed into jj : vrivs, ypvvsy 
instead of pads, ypavs] likewise in the diphthong cu in the Dat. PI. of the first 
Dec, ris and 7?(rt (Ion.) instead of cus and aiai. — Still, in certain "•.,-,1^. the 
Dorians retain the 17, as the lonians do the d. 

V instead of ei ( JEolic and Doric), e. g. ffafirjoy, ttjvos, h^rjcL, so the Infinitive. 
e. g. Xa^TJy, KaXTJy, instead of (rvfieTov, Kclyos, o|€?o, Xo^SciV, KoXfTy. 

ai instead of €t (Doric), e. g. (p^aipw instead of <p^«lpo>. 



^ 202, 203.] CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 239 

V often instead of o (-ZEolic), e. g. a'v<j>6si oyvfia instead of tro<p6sy oyofia, so in 
Homer &yvpis instead of ayopd ; and in the Common language, ^vwyvixosy iravif 
yvpis, etc. 

u instead of ov before a Liquid and <r, and at the end of a word in the termi- 
nations of the second Dec, and in the stem of several words; — oi instead of 
ou before the breathing <r in the third Pers. PL ot<rt(v) instead of ov<ri{v), and in 
the participle ending -oia-a instead of -ovtra, and in Molira and 'Ap4^oiaa instead 
of Moy<ra, and 'Pipibovtra ; the above use of w instead of ov is Dor., yet not in 
Pindar ; the use of ot instead of ov is ^olic and Pindaric, e. g. 

Ti i<pdfiw instead of rov 4<pi}Pov, &/ (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of ovi/j 
Su\os instead of SoOAos, wpaySs instead of ovpaj/6s, $u>s instead of jSoDs; — r{nr- 
roiai(v) instead oi rinrTovai{v), Tinrroiaa instead oi rvirrovaa, (pL\ioi<Ti[v) instead 
of <pi\QvaiVj i[xoiffa instead of fx°^^°- 

Some other instances will be considered below, in treating of the Declensions 
and Conjugations. 

§ 202. Interchange of Consonants. 

The change of consonants in the diflferent dialects is according to the two 
following laws : — 

Coordinate consonants (§ 5, Rem. 4) interchange with each other; and cog- 
nate consonants (^ 5, Rem. 1) interchange with each other. 

k 203. L Interchange of coordinate Consonants. 

A. The Mutes : (a) The smooth Mutes x and k. The interrogative and 
indefinite pronouns, iris, ir<^€, iro?oy, 6irotoy, etc., are in Ion. /c«s, Kt^re, etc. 

K instead of t : x<{t«, iroT«, |t€, t<Jt€, iirore, iAAore, are in Dor. irc^Ka, iro«c{, 
Ska T6Ka, &Tr6Ka (Poet. biroKKo), &AAoKa ; so Sko (shortened from S/ccuca) instead 
of trav. On the contrary, t instead of k : Trjyos Dor. instead of KuyoSj iKilvos. 

IT instead of t (./Eol. and Dor.), e. g. irt/iirc instead of irtWe. 

(b) The Medials /3 and 7, e. g. /SA^x*" (-^^t.), penny-royal, is in Ion. yXrix<fyy 
fi\(<papoyy eye-lash, is y\i<papov. 

5 instead of 7 (Dor.), e. g. 8a instead of 7^ ; hence Arju-fjTrjp instead of 
Trjfi-firrtp. 

S instead of /B (Dor.), 65f\6s instead of 6fifk6s. 

(c) The Aspirates 3^ and 0, e. g. I^p, beast, b\av, bxlfifiy, ovbap, udder, are 
in Dor. <^p, <p\av, <p\lfi(iv, oZtpap (uber) ; (fyftp and <p\ifiuv also in Homer. 

X instead of b: "tb/M is in Dor. txH^t ^^^ 6pyibos, etc. (from Upvis) is 6pyixos, 
etc. 

B. The Liquids : (a) The Liquids interchange with one another : v instead 
of A before ;^ and t, often in the Dor. dialect, e. g. ^y^oy, fifyriaros (Dor.) 
instead of ^A/^oi/, )3eAT«rToy; also (Ion. and Att. ) irAeu/iwi/, pulmo, instead of 
TyfVfiwy, Xlrpoy instead of virpoy. 

p is rarely used instead of A, e. g. Kplfiavos^ oven, Att., instead of KXifiavos. 



240 DIALECTS. [♦ 204. 

(b) The Liquid p and the breathing <r in the later and often in the middle 
Attic : fip instead of the Ion. and old Attic p<r, e. g. &p<rT}v and i^pTjy, a nude / 
KSpffrj and k6^^t], back; but pp remains where the augment is used, and in com- 
position. 

^204. II. Interchange of cognate Consonants. 

(a) The Palatals 7 and k, e. g. Kvatp^is^ fuller^ is preferred by the Att. writers 
to the other form, ypa^eis. 

K and X ill SeKOfiai (Ion.) instead of Sexofiau 

(b) The Linguals ^ and t, e. g. aZris (Ion. and Epic) instead of aSd^tr, again. 

Eemark. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to 
the other, occurs, e.g. Ki^<i>v (Ion.) instead of x'TaJi/, ^ciSaOra, A/c, eV^eOrci', hinc, 
(Ion.), instead of iurav^a, iyrev^ev; Kv^prj (Ion.) instead of x^P°^P^- 

<r and t, e. g. noretSav, tir^rovy e^Kari, tu, r4 (Dor.) instead of Iloo'eiSwi', l»e- 
(Tov, eXKotriy <rv, ae. The Attic forms tcDtA.oi', beet ; rr\\iay sieve (from (r^w), 
rvp^f] (from ffvpu), turba ; T-rj/jLepoy, to-day, and TtJTes, this year (the two last only 
in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers aiifupoy^ <rriT«s)j 
are in the Ion. and Common language o-eDrXoi', (njXioy a-vpfirj. 

<r<r and tt. Instead of aff, employed in the older and the later Ionic, in old 
Attic and in most other dialects, — the new and often also the middle Attic 
in most words uses tt, e. g. rdffaw, yXuaaa; but Att. t<£tt«, yKurra. (But 
when a-o" results from composition, it remains unchanged.) Yet the Ionic 
forms prevail, not only in the older Attic writers, but are also found in other 
authors, some words always having aa, e. g. ir<itT<rot, to scatter; »-Hj<r<r«#, to 
crouch; fivff<ros, a deep; irTiaau, to husk; irruao-cu, to /old; fipdaactt to sJtaJce ; 
irr^a-ffu, to cower; ipeaau (ipeTTw is rejected), etc. 

<r and v in the Dor. verb-ending -fies, e. g. rvwrofits (instead of the common 
form TviTTOfiev, see § 220, 6) ; also alfs Dor. instead of aicV. 

0-5 instead of ( (JEol., so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g. 
ficXiffSerai, fxiaZav instead of pL^Xi^fToiy fif^wy or fid^wyy not at the beginning of 
words, nor if Sr precedes, or <r follows, e. g. /iox>&iCo»^«. i-ri<p^Co^<ra. 

^and tt, a-vplrreiVy app.6miy (Att.) instead of avpl^ttyy apfi6(€iv. 
Here belong : — 

I and or and acr, e. g. ^vv (Epic and old Attic) instead of avy ; St^ds and rpt^Ss 
(Ion.) instead of Stcro-Js, Tpiaa-Ss ; /c\ci| Dor. instead of kXcus (jcAcIt) ; even in the 
Put. and Aorists, the Dorians, and also Homer, in several verbs use { instead 
of (T, see § 223, 5. 

(c) The Labials ^ and tt, —the first Att., the last Ion., — e. g. atr<p<ipayos Att., 
aa-rrdpayos Ion. So -ffiol. and Dor. ir, instead of <p, e. g. ofiwl (-£ol.) instead of 
afitpl ; hence in the Common language. a/iTre'xetv, etc. 

fi and IT, e. g. ireSd (iEol. and Dor.) instead of fierd, 

(d) The double consonants | and \p, and the two single consonants of which 
they are formed, though transposed, in the ^ol. dialect, e. g. tricfVos, rrdXtt 
instead of ^eVos, ypaXlsy yet only at the beginning of a word. So ff<^ and f , 
e. g. t|/€ Dor. instead of a-<pe. 



♦ 205. j CONTRACTION AND DIAERESIS. 



24] 



Change op the Vowels. 
$ 205. Contraction. — Diaeresis. 

1. In the Dialects, the foUowing contractions, which differ from those men- 
tioned in § 9, are to be noted: €o and ^ov, sometimes also oo and oe are con- 
tracted into €i; in Dor. and Ion. — not, as comraonlv, into ov; so oo, aov, and 
oou (Ion.) are contracted into €u — not, as usual, into a, and ov, e. g. ^^eCfrom 
<pi\4ov = <f>i\ov; TTAeCvey from TrAe'o^/es ; irWpedmes from irk-npSoyres = n\npo^ 
Tfj; dSiKolev from iSiKoioe = iSiKaiov; elpcir.vy from ,lpJ>Taou = upcirco^ - y^. 
\ev<Ta from yekdovca = yeX^aa; SiKcuivai from SiKaiooVai = SiKaioVai. But 
commonly the Dorians contracted o€ into a; (instead of ov), e. g. rvpSem-a = 
Tup<DvTo instead of rvpodtn-a, piyiHiv instead of {>iyovy. 

2. Ao, ooi/, and cuw are contracted in the Doric dialect into d (instead of <w), 
namely, in verbs in -(£«, in genitives in -oo and -a«,/, in substantives in -fL^v, 
Gen. -(£oi/or, and in proper names in -Aooy, e. g. <^v<ra^cs, xoAa^i,- 76Aav from* 
<pv(TdoyTfs, xa^dovai, y(\dwy] — Tay Kopay from rdwy Kopdwy = rail/ Kopu>u;-~ 
nocruSa^, -avos, Att. HocrciJi./, -«./os ; — Mcvf'Ady, 'ApK^frfAdy, Gen. -a, Tdt. -a. 

3. A€ and a«i are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into t, and ri 
instead of d and ^, in verbs, e. g. iipoiri^. <poirfi5 instead of ^<poira, dioiras. Seo 
4 222.111.(1). ' 

4. The AtUc dialect is the o of the other dialects, particularly of the 
later Ionic; since, while the otU. ....:ccts often avoid contraction, and the later 
Ionic commonly, the Attic almost always admits it The tendency of the later 
Ionic towards uncontracted syllables is so great, that it even resolves the long 
sounds (which are never resolved in the other dialects) into their simple ele- 
ments, e. g. <pi\(fai instead of tpiXi}, which had been contracted from <pt\(T}. 
Epic poetry often uses, indiscriminately, contracted and uncontracted form's, 
according to the necessity of the verse, e. g. adKwy and luca>y. 

5. On the contrary, it is a special peculiarity of the Ionic dialect, that while 
it dcli<,'hts to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits them, where 
the Attic dialect docs not, e. g. ip6s (r), Iptis, iptiaaadai Ion., instead of UpSs, 
etc., and especially the contraction of orj into u, particularly in the verbs fiouy 
and youy, c g. r^oxra, rvoxra (ayyuxrcurKty Hom. from iyi/otw), iyytvuKa instead 
of ifioTiaa, iv6T)<Ta, iyv(v67\Ka ; so oyZ^Kovra ill Homer, instead of oy^oiiKoyra. 

6. The opposite of contraction is Diaeresis (5»a//>€a<s), the separation of a 
diphthong into its vowels. Diaeresis is specially used in the jY.oI. dialect. 
The use of it in Homer, also, is not rare ; most frequently, in such words as 
separate the two vowels by means of the Digamraa, namely, ai in -ndXs : av in 
4i>T^^, breath (from &/Vi); di)o-TaA«or, dirty; d in ^cr/cw, to make like, Hhto, 
filer ou, ^KTrjy; cu very often in the adverb id (= cJ, weU), e. g. ib Kpiyas. IOktI- 
luyos ; when ^ v, p, or a follows id in compounds then they are doubled, e. g. 
dv^ifKiris, iiyyTjTos, it^^oos, i6<T<r€\fxos ', oi in 6is {6Fis, ovis], 6iofKu (comp. opi- 
nor), 6icrT6sy &i^a, £ii^ay (fix)m oXyyvfu). 

21 



245^ DIALECTS. [i 206. 

$ 206. Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Paragogic, 

Hiatus. 

1. In particular instances the Dialects differ from the laws of Crasis stated in 
^§10 and 11 ; namely, in the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc, the o of 
the Article coalesces with d and forms «, and with ot and forms «, e. g. rh &ya\- 
ua = r&ya\fia ; so roihrj^es, twut-J, wvfjp, wvdpes, Zy^pamoL, cpir6\oi, from rh 0^.77- 
&es rh avrS, 6 avfjp, ol &udpeSj ot &v^poeTroi, 01 anrSXoi. In Herodot. OCCUr, Sipiaros, 
a}vr6s, SaAoz, with the smooth instead of the rough breathing (from 6 ipicrros, 
6 avrSs, ol &?J^oi) ; Homer uses Crasis seldom, namely, only in Hpurros, wvrSs, 
rdXKa, ov/xSs {instead of & iiJ.6s), roijueKUf oweKa (instead of ov tytKa) ; Kayd is 
doubtful. 

2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are : r&\yeos, t&vtqu instead of rod &\ycos, 
r^ &UTpw ; so and e = w, at and c = 77, e. g. 6 c\a<pos = &\a(pos, 6 i^ = w|, koI 
4k = K7]Ky Koi elire = k^tc, koL idv or ijv = K^v, which last is also Ion. 

3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ov, in the ]Masc. and Neut. of 
the Art. and in eVepos, e. g. ovreposy rovrepov. 

4. The use of Synizesis (§ 12) is very frequent in the Homeric poems: — 

(a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following combination of 
vowels (the vowels over which the line is placed being pronounced as one 

syllable, whether consisting of two or more vowels) : ca, €o, coi, tas] €•, 

€01, €ov ; €w, €Ci> ; e.- g. CTTjiS^ea, ^/*eos, dreol, xp^f'^o'^^i Tcdveorre ; much rarer 

in a€, m, tai, itj, iri, to, 6. g. ae^Xevav, Tr6\ias, ir6\ios] 00 only in 

[^ySooi/; vol only in BaKpvoi<ri] rji in $77(0(0, Srjiwv, ijiioKri, ffta ; 

(b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels : ij a, 1) c, ij if , 

7j 6J, rj ov, rj 01 ; ei ov; » a, <u ov ; the first word is either ff, ^, 5^, fi-fj, and 
iirei, or a word with the inflection-endings, tj, «, e. g. fj, ov, Sij cupveiiraros, 
u^ &W01, eiXaTrlvTj ije ydfios, ac^iarop ov^ 'vt6v. 

5. Elision (§§13 and 14) is found very often in Homer, particularly as fol- 
lows : — 

(a) The o is elided in the PI. Neut. and the Ace. Sing, of the third Dec, 
rarely in the Aor. ending -aa, e. g. &Xcif ifii Od. /*, 200 ; commonly in 
the particle &pa\ 

(b) The € in e/ie, /ne, (re, etc. ; in the Voc. of the second Dec, in the Dual of 
the third Dec, in endings of the verb, and in particles, e. g. 5e, tc, t^c, 
etc. (but never in iB4). 

(c) The I in the Dat. PL of the third Dec. ; much rarer in the Dat. Sing^ 
and only when it could not be mistaken for the Ace, e. g. xa*P« St ry 
tpviSir* 'OSuo-eus, H. /c, 277; in S^jut, (J;*^, and <r<^<; in adverbs of place in 
-^t, except those derived from substantives ^ in iUofft ; finally, in all end- 
ings of the verb; 

(d) The in air6, vttS (but never in 7rp<J), in Svo, in the Neut. of pronounj 
(except r6), and in all endings of the verb ; 



♦ 207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OP -V^OWELS. 243 

(e) The oi in endings of the verb ficu, tcu, a^cu {<rat only in ^tr* 6KiyrrT€\4a>y, 
n. 0, 245, and at in the Norn, of the first Dec. in 6^u oSwot, D. A, 272) ; 

(f ) The 01 in fiot, to me, and in the particle, toi. 

6. The y paragogic (^ 15) is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e. g. trav 
eA€|a. 

7. The Hiatus (§ 8) is admitted by Homer in the following cases : — 

(a) In long vowels or diphthongs either in the Arsis of the verse, e. g. 
ain-t^e \ a '05u [ a^i ; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel or 
diphthong is considered short, e. g. otKoi i \ aay ; 

(b) When the vowel does not admit Elision, or but rarely, e. g. irouSl dfivvev ; 

(c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark, e. g. oAA' &ya, fi 
fiffxovis y€ ; 

(d) In the Fem. Caesura (i. e. the caesura succeeding a short syllable) after 
the first short syllable of the third foot ; — as this caesura here divides the 
line into two parts, it is opposed to the close connection which would 
arise from eliding the final vowel, e. g. 

Kfiy^ 1 5« rpv<pd \ \eia \\ &fi | etnrcTO \ x^'P^ Ta I X^h^ ^- 7> 376. 
tS>v 01 I ef iye | yoirro \\ i \ v\ fifyd \ pouri ye \ ve'i^A.?;, II. «, 270 ; 

(e) In the metrical Diaeresis,' after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g. 

tyx^^ I 'iSo^eK^oy ayavov AevKoXlSao, H. /i, 117. 

v4fj.rf/ou iir 'ArpflSjj ^Ayafiffivovt \ oZKov "Oyeipoy, H. j9, 6. Comp. f, 422 J 

(f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. ScVSpc* ei^oAAcv ; 
^) Sometimes in proper names ; 

(h) Words, which have the digarama occasion no Hiatus (^ 203, 3), e. g. 

ov I 56 oftj 1 irouSas ^ I aCKfy (= ou5e Fovs). 

^ 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Vowels. 

1 . The follo\N'ing vowels are lengthened : — 

A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into cu ; this occurs in cueros, aUi, ayai' 
o/tou, instead of atrSs, etc.; so also irapcd (also Karcu$aTal), in the tragedians 
Sial, and analogous to these, vwcd, instead of irapd, Sid, {nr6. 

& into 7j in Homer, in i^fpf^oyrai, ityept^ovrat, i,yffji6fis in the Arsis, conse- 
quently on account of the metre. 

d into oM before «r (JEol.) in the Ace. PI. of the first Dec. ; also in fi4\aus and 
rd\aus instead of /xeXdr, rdXas, rats instead of ris, KaXa7s instead of koaCis ; in 
Pindar, in the first Aor. Act. Part., e. g. r{np(us, -euco instead of -as, -d<ra; but 
always iras. 

Av into (vv (Ion.) in rpavna, bavfxa and its derivatives : rpdvfia, ^rt«>^)/ia, 
^<nvfjLd(<u ; and in pronouns compounded with aiirSs into wv, e, g. ewvrov, <re«w- 
rov. ifjLfwvroy instead of tavrov, etc. ; so also r<avT6 instead of raurS. 

E into 6« in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. elyeK^ 
(also in Attic prose), KeiySs, (elyos, (TTeiy6s, elpardu. Homer lengthens e int^ 

* Metrical Diaeresis, is where a word and a foot end togethei. 



244 . DIALECTS. [§ 207. 

€( according to the necessities of the verse, in other words, also, which in Ionic 
prose have e, e. g. etv, inrelp, -n-upas, end, (ppeiara (from <ppeap, a well) ; also beforo 
vowels in adjectives in -eos, e. g. xp'^o'^'oy '■> i^i substantives and pronouns, e. g. 
(TTreroy, eVeto ; in verbs in -ea>, e. g. reXela, iruiiw, also in iXws instead of €«j, 
unfiY; sometimes also in the Augment and Reduplication, e. g. ilhi)Kov^a, fioi- 
Kv7ai, SetSio, SetSexaTcw. 

E into 7} (Hom. and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -cur, e. g. ficuriXevs, 
Gen. -Tjos, etc.; further {also Ion.), in adjectives in -etos, e. g. ficunXiiios, royal; 
likewise in single words, e. g. KXrfis, K\r)i5o5 (Ion.), etc., instead of K\fis, and 
in very many substantives in a of Dec. I., e. g. oATj^tTj instead of aXri^eia. 

H sometimes into at ( JSol.), e. g. bvalaKU) instead of bvi)<rK(i). 

O into 01 (Ion. and Hom.) before a vowel in several words, e. g. irotTy, xoiTyetr, 
XpotT?, pot^, etc. ; in the Gen. of the second Dec. in Homer, e. g. bioio instead 
of i^eoG, and in (poiuios, xopoiTinrlr], 6Sonr6piov, ayKoiyT)<n{v), and rryyolTja-fiv). 

O is changed into ov (Ion. and Hom.) before a Liq. or Sigma, still only in • 
certain number of words ; and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into o>, e. g. 

KSpos Ion. Kovpos Dor. Kupos ii6vos Ion. fiovvos 

Svofia " oivofxa " Hvofia "OKvfnros " OCKvfiTos ; 

also in the oblique cases of 56pv and yow. — But substantives, which have the 
variable vowel o, cannot be thus lengthened, e. g. ir6vos from treyofuu, 56fios from 

O into ft) in Homer, on account of the verse, in Aid>w<rosy KrjTweis, rpctx^t 
wwTciofjLai (and also npoxo-oi^ vordoficu). 

T into ov often (Dor.), e. g. dovydrrjp instead of dvydrrip. In Homer, in 
flk-flXov^a. 

2. The Epic dialect can resolve contracted syllables, when necessary, 
namely, d into aa, a into cm ; tj into e»j, firi, rprf ; w into o<i>, «o, oxv ; parricularly 
in the inflection of verbs, e. g. dpdas instead of ipas, Kpimfop instead of Kp^vowy 
6p6a> instead of 5pw, yeXiaovres instead of y^Xuvres, ri^uxaca instead of rj^Aca 
also <j>6(i}s instead of (pSis, light (from <pdos), and proper names in -<f>wy, e. g. 
Arjfio^ocav. 

3. Another mode of lengthenitig a vowel in the Epic dialect is by resolving 
an original Digamma or a Spiritus Asper into a vowel, e. g. c^ktjXos and €Kr}\os 
{FcKTjXos), odpos instead of 'dposy bound; ovXos instead of o\os, ijiKios instead of 
^\ios; eia-os instead of ?o-os ; elKlaa-a) instead of iXiaau (comp. volvo), rjws instead 
of cW. In the Ionic, and sometimes in the Epic dialect, the w (contracted 
from ao and ow), is resolved by c, e. g. (Ik4tw) i/crrcoj instead of btirouay xuAew 
instead of TrvXdwv. 

4. The following vowels are shortened : — 

At into d before a vowel, often in the JEol. dialect, e. g. apxaost 'AXk&os 
instead of apxaTos, ^A\Ka7os ; in Homer, in erdpos, Irdlpij, erapiC^f^ai' 

El into e before liquids (Ion. and in Horn.), in the forms x^P^^f X^P^y ivorsx 
X^ip, hand, so also Att. x^po*""* X^P<^^] also (Ion. and Dor.) before a vowel, in 
Proparoxytones in -eios, and in Properispomena in -cla ; in Homer, only in a 
few Fern, adjectives in -wy, e. g. 



1207. 1 LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 245 

ivirijSfoSf -€77, '^ov Ion. instead of -«or ixeo instead of wKe7a from ukvs 
TcAeoy, -en, -€oy " " -uos /Sa^erj " fia^eTa ** $a^s 

€vp4ri from, eu^u; " " -cTa Scwrerj '" Socrera " Sotrvsj 

60 also in Horn. 'Epfiea instead of 'Epuda] also ei in Ion. is shortened into e, 
when two consonants ftllow which make the vowel long by position, e. g. 
inr65€^is instead of dxoSet^ts, ixi^uv instead of fiuCtai/, Kpeaawy instead of KpelcF' 
(Twy; finally (Doric) in forms of the verb, e. g. oet'Ses instead of aeiScis. 

REitABK 1. In the ^ol. dialect, et before a liquid is very often shortened 
into €, and the Liq. is doubled, e. g. Krevvw, a-irepfxa, wreAAci, instead of KTflyw, 

H is changed into e in Horn, in apytri, apytTa, from apyfjs, -tjtos, shining, and 
in the Subj. ending -ere instead of -tjt€ ; also -ofiev instead of -a>/xe»/, e. g. etSeTCf 
doffp^'l^ofify. 

0( into often in the Dor. and ^Eol. dialects, e. g. iro« instead of iroiu. 

Ov into o in Horn, in the compounds of touj, e. g. aeWSiros, apri-Kos ; often 
in Theocritus in the Ace. PI. of the second Dec, e. g. rus \lkos instead of tout 
\6kovs', also JEol. /3(JAA(z instead of fiovXii] so too in Horn. $6\erauy fi6\€a^ 
firom fiov\oucu. 

5. On the Ionic-Attic interchange of the vowels, see § 16, 5. 

6. The use of Syncope (§ 16, 8) is frequent in Uomcr, particularly in forms 
of the verb, as will be seen below ; he also has rfirre instead of r/xore, yKcucTo- 
<l>dyos instead of yaXcucTOipdyos. 

7. Apocope (airoK(rrfj) is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
beginning with a consonant. It is employed by the Epic and Doric poets, 
sometimes also by the Ionic, and in a few single forms even by Attic prose 
writers. It occurs with the prepositions, e. g. ayd, Kardy vapdy rarely with air6 
and inrS, and with the (Epic) conjunction 6.pa. The accent is then thrown 
back; 6.y before /3, ir, <Py pi, is changed into 6.yL (^ 19, 3), e.g. &/i /3ajfior<ri, 
itfifioiiyfiy, tifi. TrdXayosy &/x <p6yoyy d/x/ic'w; the t in kiit is always assimilated 
to the following consonant, except that the corresponding smooth mute stands 
before a rough mute (§ 17, 4), e. g. Ka8 Svyofuy, icoir <pa\apa, kcuc Ke<pa\T}Sy Kay 
y6yv] examples of air6 and inr6 are, ainrf/ijfej, u)3/3aAAeiv (Hom.); examples 
from Attic prose, afi^rrjSy afifiokdsy X. Cy. 4, 5, 46. 7. 5, 12, i/iTr&my, 

Rem. 2. In the concurrence of three consonants, assimilation is omitted, and 
the tinal consonant of the preposition is rejected, e. g. KOKTovf, Kdax^^^> afiyd- 
afiy instead of iceucirrcu'e, Kdaax^^f, afifMydati. 

S. Prothcsis (^ 16, 10) occurs in Homer, in currfpoirfi {aTcpoirf)), e'^eXw (i^eXeu), 
tKflyos {Kuyos), ^pvofiai {fivofuu)] Homer also often resolves the i^into the vowel 
«, namely, efpoTj, ecSfo, ic'iKoari, tlaos. (eiiroy, ^cASo/uu, ifpfieyos. 

9. Sometimes, for the sake of the metre. Homer inserts €, e. g. aS€\<pe6s, 
K(yf6s, instead of ahf\<p6s, Kfvos; so also in the Gen. PI. Fem. aifTeuy, Trpuyritav. 
To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound 
words an »j in place of the short vowel, e. g. Tayr]\ey4os, eWj^SoAos, e7r7j€Taj'(^s, 
oAiyijTcAcw, i?\Miprj^6\os, instead of rawX., eVi'/S., ivier., 6\tyov., i^xupofi6\os, 

21* 



246 DIALECTS. [§ 208. 

An I is inserted in Homer after oi in ofjLo'uos instead of Bfwiosj and in the Dual 
•otiv instead of -oiu. 

10. The later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts t before a long vowel : (a) in 
some genitives of substantives and Fem. pronouns before a, and in oZros, roi- 
ovTos, and avrSs before long inflection-endings, e. g. oj/Spfuy, xv^^ov, ^KeivtW, 
ToureW, avriwu, avTew ; (b) in some forms of the verb before a long vowel, e. g. 
la-Teaai, Swew/iiai, Sweovrai, (c) some verbs in -« have forms as if from -4a>, 
e. g. fidWco <rvfjL^aX\e6fi€yos, vTrepjSoAAeeii' ; irte'^w irif^evfifvos (also in Hom. 
meCevv instead of i-me^eov) ; also ei|/ee, eVei'xee, dt^Aee, from ^to, cVcx», ^Xov ; 
finally, the three following forms of the Perf. in -€« instead of -e : oix^Kecy 

§ 208. Change of Consonants. 

1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough breathing has no effect on the preceding 
smooth mute, e. g. ott' ov, iTr-fj/xcpos, ovk Saius, etc. 

2. In the Hom., Ion., and Dor. dialects, a 5 or ^ remains before ;* in certain 
words and phrases (contrary to ^ 19, 1), e. g. 65/*^ instead of otrfirj, tifity. opxv^ 
fiSs, iireiri^ijLev, KeKopv^aeyos ; also in the Hom. dialect, the v remains before <r 
(contrary to § 20, 2) in avcrds, avax^^^^iVy irav<rviii) instead of itaffax^lTi \ 
finally % before /it (§ 19, Rem. 1) io kKaxM-fvos, acute. 

3. The Metathesis (^ 22) of p often occurs in Hon;^. and in other poets, e. g. 
KpaSiri instead of Kophia, heart, Kaprepos and KpdrtpoSf strong, tcdprurros, fidpSurros 
(from fipaSvs, slow) ; also in the second Aorists ixpa^ovy thpa^ovy ^Spcucoy (from 
Trep^a, to destroy, Sap^dvu, to sleep, StpKOficu, to see); here belongs also lififiporoy 
instead of ^ixparov (= rifxapTov, according to § 24, 2). 

4. Homer doubles a consonant (comp. ^ 23, Rem.) after a short voweL 
according to the necessities of the verse in the follov>'ing cases : — 

(a) The liquids and Sigma on the addition of the augment, mostly when 
there are three successive short syllables, e, g. txXa$ov, ffi^ia^yy frreof, 
effffeva ; 

(b) In compounds also, the liquids and Sigma are doubled, e. g. vf6\Xoxrros 
(from j/eos and \ovw) ; aiifx.opos, ^iXo/njuefSTjs ; ayr4<p€\os, ivvyrp-os] ficM^ 
poos ; ivcraeXixos ; 

(c) In the inflection of the Dat. in -<rj, and of the Fut. and Aor., e. g. yficvaaiy 
ddfiaffai ] KoX^aaa., 6fj.6crffat, ^pdaao/MU, i^eiyiaffa; 

(d) In the middle of several words, e. g. Sca-ovy T6<rffovy owlcau, 'rp6ar<r>», 
fieffaos, ve/teVcra, vefiea-arj^eis, ^vaa-ayScis. 

Homer doubles the mute ir in Interrogative pronouns which begin with Sir, e. g. 
oTTTTus, etc.; — K in Tr4\€KKov, ireAeKKaw; — t in Stti, Sttco, Srrfv; — 5 in (SScxre, 
Tre piddelo'aa'a, aSSees, &5S7]v, 

Remark. The doubling of p, which always takes place in the Common 
language when the augment is prefixed, and in compounds when a short vowel 
precedes, may be omitted in the Epic dialect, according to the necessities of th6 
verse, e. g. epeCov from p4C<o, xp^f^opvros. For the same reason, one of the 
tonsonants, which is elsewhere doubled, is omitted in the Epic dialect, though 




4 209.] QUANTITY. 247 

rarely, e. g. *05u(reus, *Axi^evs, ipdpvyos, instead of 'OSycrtreys, AxtAAcus, 
ipdpvyyos. 

5. Homer often places a consonant before a short syllable, to make it long 
by position, namely, a k in v^wfivos^ tLwoLXafivoSy ISpvy^, afiyvy^, vir€fiyf}iJ.vKe ; 
a T after x in irroXe/ioj, TrrtJAis, irrohU^pov ; a 3- after x ^ x^^'-M'^'^s, Six^d^ 
rpix^o., rerpax^f^j and after A. or p in fiaXbcucos, iypTjy^p^curi' 5 or he places a 7 
before 5 in iplySomros, iySoirmjcre, and a <r before fi and k in <TyiiKp6s (also Att. 
^ 24, 4), aKcSJu'yvfj.i (comp. KiSinj/jLi), Cfioyepus (comp. fxoycpus), <r/u.e/)SaAeos. 
Here belongs also the Epic prefix of ^ (= k, according to § 24. 3), before /Spo- 
res in composition, so as to strengthen the long syllable and give fulness to the 
word, e. g. AfifiporoSt repi^lfifiporos, and in af^pourir] instead of a<pcuTlT}. 

$ 209. Quantity. 

Frelimixaby Remark. Only a few general rules will be given here ; the 
quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned from 
rules previously given, or by obsen'ation. 

1 . A syllable which has the vowels e or 0, followed by another vowel or a 
single consonant, is short by nature, e. g. r^jcdy, d^eds, /3di?. 

2. A syllable which has the vowel tj or «, or a diphthong, is long by nature; 
so all contracted and circuraflexed syllables are long by nature, e. g. "ijpus, 
ovpav6s^ 6.KWV (instead of atKwv), irlfid (from ^rf/xdc), irar, crlros^ ^^xoSy vvv. 

3. A syllable wliich has a doubtful vorwel (a, », w), followed by another vowel 
or a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position, e. g. *«/- 
BovTfs., Saifioyti], <^ii7, f^XVy <P^os, apytpfos. 

4. A syllable which has a sliort or doubtful vowel followed by two consonants 
or a double consonant, is long by position ; e. g. iidadcu, iKaro/xfivy Se^aa^cu, 

Exceptions to No. 3. 

(a) a of nouns of the first Dec, which have the Gen. in -as, is long in all the 
Cases in which it occurs, e. g. vntpd, <pi\la, -as, -f , -d*', etc. (Comp. § 45.) 

(b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec, is long, e. g. Nom. Sing. 
kfaiyd, Dual Aca/vd. 

(c) a is long in the Gen. Sing, in -ao and Gen. PI. in -cLjv, e. g. 'Ar/je/Jdo, 
ayopAuy. 

(d) the ending -as of the first Dec is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing., 
and in the Ace. PL, e. g. Nom. rafilds, Gen. aKias, Ace. PI. S6^ds. 

(e) a of masculine and feminine participles in -as is long ; so also other words 
in -as where yr or y have been dropped, e. g. aKovads {dKowrayrs), d«cojJ- 
<rd<ra, 'ktt&s, $0.s^ ylyds {yiyayrs). fifKds {fifXtivs). 

(f ) a in the third Pers. PI. Perf. Ind. Act., e. g. mv<pd<Ti. 

(g) u is long in the Sing, of the Prcs. and Impf Ind. Act. of verbs in -u/a, 
also in the masculine and feminine Sing, of the participle; e. g. Sct/cvO/u, 
i^fUyvy^ SciKyis, SeiKyvtra. — Other exceptions maj be learned by obser* 
vatiou. 



248 DIALECTS. ' [^ 209 

5 In Epic poetry, a mute and a liquid (§ 27, Rem 2) commonly make a 
syllable long by position ; the vowel is shortened, for the most part, only when 
the form cannot otherwise be suited to the verse, e. g. reixe(r"nr\^Ta. 

6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position : (a) 
when it ends with a consonant, and the following word begins with a conso- 
nant, e. g. KaSn I (xou Tpw I as; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a 
short vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with 
two single consonants, which arc not a mute and liquid, e. g. aSfirt | ttjv, %y | 
ovira V I TTo ^vyhu | fjyayeu | di/^p, II. K, 293. But a mute and a liquid in this 
case, always make the syllable in the Arsis long ; on the contrary, the syllable 
in the Thesis, may be either long or short according to the necessities of the 
verse ; e. g. /JL-fi [xoi \ Sup" ipa \ to. Trp6(pe \ pe XP" I f^^i}^ 'A<ppo \ Sittjs, II. 7, 64 ; 
on the contrai-y, in the Thesis, ahrap '6 \ irK-rjalov \ karii \ kci, II. 8, 329 ; but 
^v^pa. 1 Srvrirhv i \ Sura, ira. \ Xai ire \ irpco^ievov \ oUaj), II. ir, 441. 

Rem. 2. In the names ^Kafxavlpos, Zukw^s. ZcAcjo, even <r« and ( do not 
make a syllable long by position in Homer j so also eir \ end <tk4 \ irapvoy^ Od. 
e, 237, occurs. 

7. A long vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, in Homer, commonly 
becomes short before a word beginning with a vowel, when it is in the Thesis, 
but it remains long when it is in the ^Vi'sis, or when the follomng word has the 
digamma, e. g. ^j/xeV/; ] iv fiev \ ^fcrcriv, II. a, 358. vTfs, & \ fiey Kreo | tov, 6 5* 
&p' I EvpvTOV 1 ^AKTopi 1 uvos, II. fi, 621. avrap 6 | fyvv \ ^viv 4 \ yl <pp«al \ <p^vri 
\a4v T6 {^(Tiv = -Ftjo-jc). But sometimes a long vowel in the Thesis is not short- 
ened before words which do not have the digamma, especially in the fourth foot 
of an Hexameter, e. g. t^ fii} \ fj.oi irare \ pas iro^* 6 | fioi^ | fy^eo | Ti/tp, H. 5, 
410, and before a punctuation-mark, c. g. Ke7abai, | a\A' iird \ fiuyoy, II. «, 685. 

8. A long vowel or a diphthong in the middle of a word before another 
vowel is but seldom shortened by the poets, and for the most part, in certain 
words and forms; thus, e. g. in Homer, ivar} ('"'"), ifjuraios ("""'), oTos {"), fit- 
fiXTjai ("""); and often in the Iambuses of the Attic dramatists, e. g. oTos, toios, 
ToiovTos, TotdsSe, oUi (from o^oiiai), iroiuy ] and always before the demonstrative 
i in pronouns, e. g. rovrovi, avrau. 

9. In Epic poetry, a short syllable in the Arsis is usually considered long, 
if it stands at the beginning of a word, e. g. iunriSos | 'oucd/ia | tov irvp, II. e, 4 ; 
or at the end, in which case it is followed either by a liquid (X, /i, f, p), or a o" 
or 5, the sound of which is easily doubled in pronunciation, or by a word with 
the digamma, e. g. Kal TreSi j d Aw | reCrro, II. /t. 283. .^oTe | pd V (= ^V)» 
H. X, 226. 

Rem. 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same 
word, according as it is or is not, in the Arsis, e. g.^Apcj^A | pes fiporo \ ?<oty4; 
— &vSp5S "l I (Tacriv and trKuova \ ''laaaiv, 

10. Kot unfrequently in Homer, from the mere necessities of the verse, 
n, short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between 
170 long sj'llables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest with 
I. 3. g. eo-,^' uTTo 1 Self | 7j, II. t, 73, peri irpo | Stvfxx \ i)(ri. J\. j8, 588 ; this is rarely 
tlio case at the end of a word, e. g. iri»/«/d' | payyoKe \ tjv, Od. p, 198. rp 8* ^ | 
uhv Top I yo) B?^oav \ puivls \ iaTe<t>(i I vam 11. \. 3»> 




♦$210,211.] FIRST DECLENSION. 249 



B. DIALECTIC FORMS. 

$210. Homeric Suffix <j>i. (<I>lv). 

1. In the Homeric dialect there is, besides the Case-inflections, a Suffix (pi{v), 
which propedy and originally denotes the indefinite u'?tere, like the local Dat. 
(see the Syntax) ; it is also used to express other relations of the Dat., as the 
Dat. of the instrument, and with prepositions (such as in Lat. govern the Abl.), 
it expresses those relations of the Gen. which in Latin would be denoted by 
the Abl. 

2. The Suffix <pt is found with substantives of all the declensions, and is 
always annexed to the unchanged stem of the word : — 

I. Declension only in the Singular: (a) Dat. i.yf\-n-<pi, i^Aofrj^ (in the 
herd), dvprjtpiy before or rcitfiont the door (in several ancient editions r)<pi is 
incorrectly written with an Iota Subs. r)<pi) ; (b) Gen. (Lat. Abl.) airh 
vfvpr}<piy IdWeii' [to shoot an arrow from the string), 4^ fvvi}(pi b^op^Ty [to spring 
from bed), KparepT]<pi filv<ph H. <l>, 501 (with great force), &fi r]o7 (paivoixtyr]' 
<piy, Od. 8, 407 {as soon as the morning dawned). 
II, Declension both Singular and Plural. All these forms, without respect to 
the accent of the Nom., are paroxytone {-otpiv) : (a) Dat. SaKpv6<piv {with 
tears), /x-narup ardXavros df6<piu {an adviser equal to the gods) ; — (b) Geni- 
tive (Abl.) airh or ix ■iraa<xaX6<piv {to take from the pin), in df6<l>ti/ {through 
tl ' ). an 6<TTf6<piy {from the bones). , 

III. y "n almost exclusively in the PI. *iy is here used with not a largo 

number of neuter substantives in -oi (Gen. -coj), also with KorvKriSaiy and 
ravsy c. g. wphs KOTv\rfioy6<pi{y) (with the union-vowel o), to the anns, yav- 
(pi{y) {at the ships) ; in words in -or, the ending -or must always be restored 
to its original form -es, since <pi is always annexed to the pure stem ; thus, 
Kx«o'<^«(»')i trvy 6xf<T<Pi{y), kot^ op«r<pi{y), airh, 5ti, iK (rri]^e<r<pi{y). 

$211. First Declension. 

1. (a) The Epic and Ionic writers use tj instead of the original long a (which 
the Dorians use) through all the Cases of the Sing., e. g. ti/*4, -oj, -qi, -av 
(Dor.) ; ao<pir}, -7?s, -rj, -rjy, ^vprj, -ijj, yfriylrjs, -t), -■i)v (Epic and Ion.) ; so Jlriv^- 
AoiretTjs, IlTji/eAoireiTj, from IlT/i'tAoircta, <Pp^Tprj, BopcT}S, Bopdr), BoptTjv. 

Exceptions in Homer are S^d, goddess, -as, -a, -iv, Nai/<rj/cad, ♦c/d, also Alyelds, 
Avydds, 'Epfiflas, and some other proper names in -as pure. The Voc. of yvfi<pri 
is vv^Kpa instead of yv^Kfrn, H- 7, 130. Od. 5, 743. 

(b) In substantives in -fia and -oia, derived from adjectives in -t/s and -ovs, as 
also in some other feminines. the short a in Attic is also changed into ij in 
Ionic, e. g. aXrj^flTi, ayoiScjTj, finrXoirj, Kulaar] instead of aX-fj^na, ivaiSfia, 
ct^Aoia, Kyicad, 

(c) The -^ol. and some other dialects have -d instead of -17s, as the Masc. 
ending in the Nom. Sing., like the Latin. The Epic also uses this form, accord- 



250 DIALECTS [i 212 

Ing to the necessities of the verse, in a great number of words, particularly in 
-rd, e. g. tTTTTi^Td, ot'xM'/Ta, Kvavoxaira, yecpfX-nyepera, linrr}\(iTa^ nrrrlfri, cwptJord. 
The Voc. retains the ending -a in all these words. 

2. The Gen. Sing, of masculines in -tjs and -as originally ended in -do , -a« 
was then contracted into -a (Dor. into -d). In Hom. both the uncontracted 
and contracted form is found; he also resolves the -», originating from 
•oo, by means of e (comp § 207, 3) ; it is further to be remarked, that the -• 
in respect to accent is considered short {§ 29, Rem. 7) and the c is always pro- 
nounced with the Synizesis; -e<» becomes -« when a vowel or p precedes (still 
AtVetew, II. €, 534). Thus there occur in Homer, 'Epfiflas, Gen. 'Epfjulao and 
'Epfieio)', Bop4-ns, Gen. Bopedo and Boptw. 'ArpelS-ns, 'ArpefSdo, and 'ATp€t5«tf, 
lK4Tao and t/ceTea ; iv/jL/jLeXiw, 'Aaiw. In Homer, then, the Gen. endings of nouns 
in -as or -tjs, are -oo, -w, or -ea» (not -ov). The Gen. ending -c», becomes, in 
the Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. iroKlrew, *ArpeiSea>. 

3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of masculines in -r}s is commonly formed in the 
Ion. dialect like the third Dec, e. g. rhu 5e<nr<^eo, roiis Se<rK6rfas from 86<nr<(T7jj, 
-ov, MtATtaSea from MiKriddj^s, -ov. 

4. The Gen. PL of all the endings was originally in -doef ; -degr was after- 
wards contracted into -u>v (Dor. in -ay). Homer uses both the uncontracted and 
contracted forms, e. g. ^tawv and ^eoiv, irapeiduy and rapfiuy. He can also, 
as in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -£iy originating from 
'dcoy^ the ending thus becomes -cW, which is commonly pronounced with 
Synizesis, e. g. wKiwv, ^pewy, ayopfuv. The Gen. ending -tety becomes in the 
Ion. writers, the common form, e. g. Movafcay, rififwy. 

5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -cuai(y) ; this ending is foimd in the Dor. 
writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers ; in the Ion. 
writers, -at<rt was changed into •■p<n{y) and -py; and in the Att. and Common 
language, -aiai was shortened in -cus. In Homer, the Dat. PI. ends in -pcri, -pi, 
and -ots, yet the last is found only in ^ecus and iucraus. 

6. The Ace. PI., in JEol., ends in -cus (as in the second Dec in -ws instead 
of -ovs)^ and in Dor. in -as (as in the second Dec. in -os instead of -ovs), e. g. 
Ta7s Tt/ioty (^ol.) instead of rhs rinds (but Dat. PL rifiauri) ; vatras Kovoat 
(Dor.) instead of irdcrds Kovpds. 

$ 212. Second Declension. 

1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -Xoor are changed in the Dor. dialect 
into -\a.5 (Gen. d, Dat. f ), e. g. McveAdy instead of MtvfXaos, 'Suc6\d.s. 'AoKftri- 
\as. 

2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that in -oio ; 
^he tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -oio. Theocritus haa 
the Dor. ending -w and -oio. 

3. Genitive Sing, and PL Some genitives are formed according to the 
analogy of the first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -os 
with the ending -ew in the Gen. Sing., e. g. Bdrrcu instead of B^irrov, Kpol<rfmy 
K\eofifip6T€a>, Me/iiSAwipeft), and some Masc common nouns with the ending 



I» 



k 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 251 

-*W in the Gen. PL, e. g. ite<r<T4wv\ (b) The ending -omv instead of tie Ion. 
-4wv belongs to the Dor. (comp. alyav instead of cuyao>v from al^, ^ 213, 5). 

4. The Gren. and Dat Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouy instead of -oim^ 
e. g. &fu>itv instead of &ijuhv (^ 207, 9). 

5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in-ot0-i(v). This forni,»as well as the 
abridged form in -<hs is found in Homer and in all the poets, and in Ion. prose 

6. The Ace. PL ends, in the Dor. writers (except Pindar) in -as and in -os 
(like -aj in the first Dec, ^ 211, 6), e. g. rus t6fia)s, y6/xoSt so also rws \ay6s, the 
Glares; JEoL in -ets, e, g. xaavaXois instead of -ouy. 

7. Attic Declension. The Gen. Sing, in the Epic dialect ends in -ao, instead 
of -«, in IVrivtKeito (II. (, 489 ; though most MSS. have riTjveXeoto) from IItji/c- 
Xcws, and in Tlcrewo from ncrews. — In yakwsy sister-in-law^ "A^vs and K«s, the 
ftf originating by contraction, is resolved; in the Epic dialect, by means of o; 
hence yoXt^y, 'A^rfwr, Kows, Gen. -<Ja>. On the words ytKus, ISpcis, efxes, see 
4 213, 7. 

8. Contracted forms of the second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, yovs only 
Od. ic, 240 (elsewhere v6os), x^^t^P^vsy II. A., 493 (but f, 138. x^Wp/^ooy) and 
XfifJM^^oi, II. 5, 452. also ndy^ovs, Tldj'bov, Tlav^^. Homer docs not contract 
other words; in words in -eor, -€oi/, he either lengthens the c into « (§ 207, 1), 
or employs SjTmesis, as the measure requires. 



L 



♦ 213. Third Declension, 



1. In the Dor. uialect the long a here also takes the place of 17, e. g. udy, 
fidySs instead of /x^k, /iriy^St ctc.,''£AAdi', 'EAAdycy, irotfiiy instead of irM/t^t', Gen. 
"tyos, yt6Tds, -droi instead of I'trfnjr, -ifTor. 

At^p, d^, ^fi^Sy and all names of persons in -rfip, are exceptions to this 
Dor. usage. 

2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, ij commonly takes the place 
of the long a, as also elsewhere, e. g. ^pi}{, ofv^, tpr)^ instead of bwpd^, *<P«{« 

3. The Dat. PI. in the Epic dialect, end*, according to the necessities of the 
measure, in -aiiv), -a«ri(r), -€flri(i'), and -(vviiy). The ground-form is -€<Ti(y) 
and the strengthene<l form is -«<r<ri(»'). This ending is always annexed, like 
the other Case-endings, to the pure stem, e.g. Kvy-f<T(ri (from Kva>y, Gen. Kvy6s), 
v(Kv-«r<n (from ytKvs, -v-os). The ending -«or»(i') is found in Homer only in 
Xvfaiv, oU<ri, x*'P*<^'» ^^^ kvixr-fffiy (from fivof, 6,vaKT-os). In Neuters, which 
have a radical <r in tlie Norn., the c is omitted when it stands between two 
vowels (^25, 1), c. g. ^e'-wro-i (instead of i-wta-taai from rh Utros), Sfird-eiTviy 
(from rh Sfiras). In stems in -av^ -ev, -ou («if, (F, oF), the u (F) must be 
omitted, according to ^ 25, 2 ; thus, ^6t<r<Tt instead of $6F-«T<Tt, linrf)-ea<ri 
instead of iinrf)F-«Tai. The ending -ctri is annexed almost exclusively to 
stems which end in a vowel, c. g. rtKv-aat from ytKvs -v-os ; but also tpi-aai 
from Ipis {-iSos) and commonly -roairl from wovs {iro5-6s). The Dat. form in 
-cuTi never admits the doubling of <r, — The ground-form -€<r< is very common 
in the Dor. poets and prose-writers ; also the Ionic prose has this form fre 
qucntly in stems ending in -k, e. g. fi-f]y'tai. 



252 DIALECTS. [i 213 

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect, ends in -oiiv (as in the 
second Dec, § 212, 4), e. g. iroSoliu, -Zeip-f}uouv. 

5. The Gen. PI. in the Ion. dialect often ends in -eccv, e. g. Xnvf<^v, aySpevw 
(§ 207, 10). Theocritus has tuu alyav (instead of t«i/ alyuv) from ^ olj, a goat^ 
after the analogy of the first Dec. 

6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Ace. Sing, of words in -vs (stem v) 
in a instead of y, e. g. evpea -kovtov, ix^vcl, v4a from vavs. 

7. The words yeXcas, laughter; I5p(as, stveat ; epws, foye. which properly belong 
to the third Dec, in Homer follow the Attic second Dec. in some of the Cases, 
e g. ISpw, ldp(p instead of ISpcora and ISpcori; yeKu and yiXwv^ 7cAa, instead of 
yiXwTa and yeAwrt, ip(a instead of ip(jaTt. 

8. Words in -is,' Gen. -tSoy. The Ilom., Ion., and Dor. dialects often 
inflect these substantives, particularly proper names, in -ioj, e. g. fifiyios, Horn., 
®€fj.ios, Herod., Qerios, Dat. ©eVf, Horn. Those ending in -tr, -iSos, in the Epic 
dialect have the Dat. only in -t instead of -Si. Substantives in -i?ts, -TjtJoi, 
are sometimes contracted in the inflection, by the poets, e. g. xaprits, irappios 
(instead of -n-aprjiSos), Nr)pr}is, Nrj/jpSes. See § 54 (c). 

9. The Neut. ods, wtos, ear, is in Dor. is, wtoj, etc., and in Horn, odas. Gen 
ovaros, PI. ovara] the Neuters, ariap, fat; oZ^ap, udder, and icfipajt^ end, havo 
-aros in the Gen., namely, (rreaTos, oClbaroL, irctparo, utifafft. In the words 
repoy, wepoy, Kpeas, the Epic writers reject t, e. g. ripcua.^ -auv, -JLfaat(9)\ Ktptf. 
Dat.; PL Kepa, Kcpdcov, -de<r<Ti{p), and -atri{v) ; PI. Kpta, Kpduy, Kpfwr, and Kp«tiy, 
Kp4a(ri{v). Among the Ionic writers these words, like 0p4ras, etc. (^ 61, Rem. 
1), often change the o into e, e. g. Kfpfos, icfpfo, Ktpdocv, rk r^pteu, Kp4(a<n(r). 
See § 54 (c). 

10. In the words irarrjp, ixiirrip, etc., Homer either retains or rejects the c 
through alt the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. iydpos and 
avdp6s, auepi and avdpl, etc., but only aySpuy. avhpdci and -4<r<n; yturrfip, yar- 
repos, -4pi, and yaarpos, yacTTpl, yaarfpa, yacrrfpfs:, Ay\}i-Tj-rt\p, -rtrtpoSy and -rrrpos, 
ArifiTiTepa] ^vydrrip, -repos, and -rp6s. etc., <^u7aT^pc<r<ri(i'). but bvyarptiy ; fi-frfiP 
and TTOTTjp, -Tepos, and -rp6s. etc. See ^ 55, 2. 

11. In Homer, the word lx<i>p, hlood of the gods, has in the Ace. <x'*' msicad of 
Ix^po-i ^wd Kvicewu, 6, mixed drink, has in the Arc. kvk(u «)r «fi'rf<<i. See (f 56, 
Eem. 1. 

12. In -auy, -ews, -ous. Of ypavs, there are found in Homer only the Nom. 
yp7]vs and yprivs. Dat. YpTjf and the Voc. ypriv and yptft. In the Ion. dialect, 
also, the long a is changed to rj ; thus. Gen. ypr)6s. PI. 7p^€r ; this also appears 
in vavs,navis, see the Anomalies. — The word $ovs is regularly declined in 
Her., hence Nom. PI. )3o'es, Ace. fiovs ; in the Ace. PI. Homer uses both $6as 
and pods. On the Epic Dat. $6€<t(tu see No. 3. In Doric, the Nora, is /Wi, 
Ace. fiwu, Ace. PL fiws. This form of the Ace. Sing., occurs also in the IL % 
238, in the sense of bidPs hide, a shield made of bulTs hide. See ^ 57- 



' The student may consult the first part of the Grammar, where similar 
words are declined ; references to the particular section ynll be given at the end 

of the paragraphs here. 



^ 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 253 

13. In common nonns in -euy, and in the proper name 'AxiAAeuy, 77 is used in 
the Epic dialect, instead of €, in all the forms which omit v {F) of the stem, 
this is done to compensate by the length of the Towel for the Emitted v (F); 
thus, $(uri\evSi Voc. -eC; Dat. PI. -svai (except apitrrrieffai{v) from apia-Tevs), but 
0a(Ti\^os, -Tji, -TJd, -rifSf -rjuiy, -rjas. Yet the long a in the Ace. -cu, -fas of the 
Attic dialect, again becomes short. Among the proper names, the following 
are to be specially noted : 'OSv<r<rfvs, Gen. 'Odvaarios or 'OSvarrios and 'OSi/tro-coy, 
also *05v<revs (Od. 0, 398), Dat. 'OSva-rjt and 'OSvarcT, Ace. 'OSvairrja and 'OSvc- 
of'a, also 'OSvarj (Od. t, 136) ; TlriKevs, nrjKrjos and T1t}\4os, nT;X7j» and IlTjAer, 
IlTjA^a; the others, as 'Arpcus, TvSeuy, generally retain the -c and contract -eos 
in the Gen. by Synizesis, and sometimes -ta in the Ace, into -rj; thus, TvScor, 
-ft, -ea, and -ij. — In the Ion. of Herodotus, the inflection with rj in common 
nouns is very doubtful ; in proper names, the c is regular, e. g. Ilepo-eoy, AwpieeSf 
^wKfuif, AloKtai. 

14. In -Tjj and -€j, Gen. -«or. In Homer, the Gen. Sing, remains uncon- 
tracted. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, both the uncontracted form -€ey, and 
the contracted form -«is is used for the Nom. PI. The Gen. PI. remains uncon- 
tracted (except when a vowel precedes the ending -tuy, e. g. (axprji^*' from 
^axprjtW) ; so also the Ace. PI. ending -(as. "Afnjs has in Homer "Aprjoj and 
"Apfosy "April or "A/jp, "Apci, "Aptj and "Apriv, II. €, 909,'*A/)ey and "Apts (^ 209, 
Kern. 3). See ^ 59. 

15. In pro[>er names in -kAtjj, the Epic dialect contracts cc into »?, e. g. 
HpoucAtTji, -k\tios (insieatl of #cA«coj), -jji, -rja, Voc. 'HpcUAtu; but in adjectives 

in -tTjj it varies between -ti and »j, e. g. ayaxKrfis, Gen. d7cucA^os, but i'vKKfTas 
(Ace. PI.) from ^D»cA«^t, i'v^{>ft\Sy Gen. dofifitios. The Ion. and Dor. writers, and 
sometimes the poets for the sake of the verse, reject an « in these words, e. g. 
U(piK\tos, -/T, etc.; so also in Homer, ivsK\f&, II. /3, 115, and vwfpSf'a, II. p, 330. 

16. In (a) -o»r. Gen. -ctos. In Homer, the contracted forms, ^pw Dat., and 
MjVw Acc. occur. — (b) -«j and -«•, Gen. -4oy. Words of this kind even in the 
Epic and Ion. writers, as well as in the Attic, always have the contracted form, 
except xp«^J and its compounds, e. g. xpo^^y XP"^* XP^^ — The Ion. dialect fre- 
quently forms the Acc. Sing, in -ovv instead of -», e. g. 'I^, 'loO*', ^wj, i]ouv. — 

The .^Eol. Gen. Sing, ends in -o»r, c. g.oISwr, 2aT^s instead of oiSoDy, 2oir<^oCT, 
thus, in Moschus, ras 'Ax^s. See ^ 60. 

17. In (a) -ar, Gen. -aos. In Homer, the Dat. Sing, is cither uncontracted 
or contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yfipat and -y^/pa, 
SfV^, <r(Af . But the Nom. and Acc. PI. is always contracted, e. g. SeVa. — On 
those in -as, Gen. -«oj, see § 61 (a), and Rem. 1. 

(b) In -oy, Gen. -tos. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the 
verse, has sometimes the uncontracted and sometimes the contract forms, 
except in the Gen. PL, which is always uncontracted. The Gen. SiHg. is also 
uncontracted, except in some substantives which contract -toy, as in the Dor., 
into -fvs ; thus, 'Eptfitvs, ^dpacvsy ytytus, ddfxfifvs, btpcvs ; Dat. Sing, dtpei and 
btpii, KdWei and KoWfi. Nom. and Acc. Plurals in -co, commonly remain 
uncontracted, but they must be pronounced with Synizesis, i. e. as one syllable, 
e. g. vc/fcea, iSeAca, — The Ion. dialect is like the Epic. — In oTre'oy, K\eos, 5cos, 

22 



254 DIALECTS. [$ 21'!. 

Xpeoj, the Epic dialect lengthens c, sometimes into ct, sometimes into ri ; thus. 
Gen. (Tireiovs, Dat. o-Tr^i', Ace. <r7reoj and <rire7os, Gen. PL (nre(«i', Dat. aT4a(n{v) 
and o-7nfj60-(r((i') ; XP^'"^ ^^^ XP^^°^> ''^^" ^^*^ wAcra. 

18. In -IS, Gen. -ioy; -vs, Gen. -Ooy. The Epic dialect contracts those in 
-US, in the Dat. Sing., e. g. oiCvi, ir\€^7, vckvij the Ace. PI. appears with tho 
contracted or uncontracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse, 
though more usually contracted, e. g. ix^vs instead of Ix^as, Spds ; ytKvas is 
Rlways uncontracted ; the Nom. PI. never suffers contraction, but is pronounced 
with Synizesis. The Dat. PI. ends in -vacri and -u€<r<rt (dissyllable), e.g. ix^wr- 
tetv and lx^'(>i<^o'iv. See § 62. 

19. In -Xs and -?, Gen. -toy, Att. -ews; -vs and -C, Gen. 'vos, Att. -««y: — 

(a) The words in -Is, Att. Gen, -e«y, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, retain i 
of the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing. aZways suffer contrac- 
tion, and usually in the Ace. PL in the Ionic writers, and -sometimes also in 
Homer (-tt = -t, -las = -rs), e. g. ttSKis, ir6Kios, ir6\T, ir6\iv, Tr6?^€S, iroXiwv, irSkuri, 
v6\ias, and v6Kis. In the Dat. Sing, however, the ending -€t and -u is found 
in Homer, e. g. irScre'i and irSffei from Tr6<ris ; in some words, the i of the stem is 
changed into e in other Cases also, e. g. iTr<i?^€i5 instead of iiraX^ias, iird\ieai{y)y 
especially in ir6\i5, which, moreover, according to the necessities of the verse, 
can lengthen 6 into t] ; thus, Gen. 7ro'\toy, TroXeos, and v6\r)os, Dat. x6\€i, ir^Act, 
and irdXrji, Nom. PL 7r<JAeey and ttJatjcs, Gen. iro\ioov, Dat. vo\U<r<rL, Ace. ir6\uay 
rr6\eis, nrSKrias', from ois, ovis, Dat. PL iU(r<ri{y), ot€(ri{y), 6fari{v). See ^ 63. 

(b) The words in -vs, whose Gen. in the Attic ends in -6«y, in the Ionic 
make the Gen. in -eos, e. g. wfix^os, except cyxcAus, Gen. -vos ; in the Dat. Sing^ 
both the contracted and uncontracted forms are found in Homer, e. g. dpfl, 
rr-fjxei, irXareT. In the Nom. PL, the form can be either contracted or uncon- 
tracted ; in the Ace. PI., the uncontracted form in -cos is regular, which, when 
the verse requires, can be pronounced as a monosyllable, e. g. ircAcKcor (tri- 
syllable). 

^ 214:. Anomalous and Defective Words. — 3Ietaplasts. 

1. T6vv {rh,Jcnee) and S6pv [rh, spear, § 68, 1), are declined in Homer as 
follows : — 

Sing. yoimros and yovv65 dovparos and 5ovp6s Bovpari and iovpl 

"PI. 'Nora, yovvara " yovua Soupora " 5oDpo — Dual 5ovp€ 

Gen. yoivtov Sovpay 

Dat. yo{>ya(ri{y) and yoiv€<r(ri{y) 5ovpaai(y) and 5ovpear<ri{y). 
The form yovyaa-a-i (II. t, 488, p, 451, 569) has critically little authority. 

2. The following forms of Kdpa (rb, head, § 68, 6) are found in the Homeric 
dialect : — 

Sing. Nom. Kdpri Gen. Kdprjros KopTjaros Kpar6s mpdaeros 

Dat. KdpTrri Kapriari Kparl Kpdceri 

Acc. Kdpn {Thv KpaTo, Od. ,^, 92, and ixl xdp, II. t, 392). 



yr,'v 


Dor. vavs 


yfos 


vai6s (also Trag.) 




vod 


yHi 


vavv and va,v 




Foe 




vaaiiv 


yces 


VMS 


ViilV 


vaSiv 



k 215.] ADJECTIVES. 255 

PI. Nom. KipSL Kofyfiara ; secondary form Kaprjva 
Gren. Kp6.Twv " Kofyfjvwy 

Dat. Kpa<ri{y) 
Ace. Kpdara " Kapr^va 

3. Aaos (6, s<one, Horn., instead of ^Jas)^ Gen. aSos, Dat. Aai", Ace. Aoav, Gren. 
PI. Kdcou, Dat. A(£e<r<rt(i'). 

4. Meis {6, month) ^ Gen. firjuos, Ion., instead of /i'<ji/, -(Jy, but also in Plato. 

5. NaCs [r], ship) is inflected in the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects as 
follows : — 

S. Nom. Ep. and Ion. vifvs 

Gren. yrj6s (also Tragic) 

Dat. yrii 

Ace. yija 

D. Nom. Ace. Voc. tnjf 

Gen. and Dat. veo7y 
P. Nom. inics 

Gren. yTjuv {yavipi only Ep.) vdv 

Dat. K7ji;a'((i/au<^tonlyEp.) i^6(r<rt(i'), i'6'€<r<rt(i') »'auo'/(i') 

Ace. i^as yeas yaas. 

6. "Opvij (4 ^, iiVd), Gen. opyl^-os, Doric tJpvrx-os» etc. (^ 203). 

7. Xttp {rj, hand), Ion. x^P^^^ X^P^i X^P^ Dual x*'|P*i X^P<'"' (poet, also x<*P<'»*')» 
PI. x^P^^i X^P*") X*P<''^('') (x*^P*<'''(*')) ^^^ -^^^^(v) in Homer), x^V**^* 

Remark 1. Metaplasm (^ 72) occurs in Homer in the following words: 
AA/cV/, ^, strength, Dat. dA#cf (from Nora. *AAE) ; 'AfSrjs, -ou, i, Gen. iii'Soy, Dat. 
UliSi (*AI2); "'AvTi0e(TT?y, -oo, i, Ace. "Ain-Kparria ('ANTI+ATETS) ; luicf}, tj, pur- 
suit, Ace. iw/ca ('IflH) ; vafxtyri, jj, battle, Dat. ixTfuvi (vafxis) ; — narpoKAoy, Gen. 
naTp<i/cAou and -kAtjos, Ace. -kAov and -KKrja, Voc. -icAfjs (nATPOKAH2) ; i-vSpd- 
voSoy. rh, slave, Dat. PI. iiyipav6S(aai{y) ; •npSscoiroy, rh, face, PI. irposctfiroTo, 
irposuira<n ; vhi, d, son, has from 'TIET2 and 'TI2 the following forms : Gen. 
vifos and vTos, Dat. vl(7 and uTt, Ace. vUa and ufa ; Dual vU ; Nom. PI. wVes and 
v/frr and ufey, Dat. vidcri. Ace. wleaj and vtas ; — OlSiirovs, Gen. Ol5irr68ao 
(•OIAinOAH2). 

Rem. 2. The following are defective in Homer : \itI Dat. and tA aTto, /j>jen ; 
Aly and \7y = AcW and Acokto ; fidcm and f^dany = fidanyi and -a ; o"Ttx<^y» 
(ttIx^s, arlxois, row ; 6<T(re, rw, Nom. and Ace. Dual, both eucs ; 6<p(\os, advantage, 
and ijSoj, pleasure, in the Nom. only ; T^pa, something pleasing, and S(fias,fo}'m, in 
the Ace. only ; ^A€<Js, infatuated, Voc. rjAe and fjAf e ; finallv, Sw, /cp?, iA<^i, aa 
Nom. and Aec. Sing., from which come the forms Swfia, house, Kpi^, barley^ 
6x<piToy, dried barley. 

§215. Adjectives. 

1. Some adjectives in -vs, -eta, -u, have sometimes in the Homeric dialect, 
the feminine form -ca or -ctj ; viz. uKia (instead of wKela), fia^fa (instead of 
pa^ua) ; Gen. jSou^eTjj (and /Bou^efrjs) , Ace. /3a<&eV ; so also in Herodotus, -ea, 
seldom -eio, e. g. fia^ea, -frj and -cTo, fiapfa, evpea, i^vs, -^o and -eTo, 3^A€o (from 
^Aus), riixlaea. 

Remark. In Epic and Doric poetry, some adjectives of this kind, and also 
some in -Jet J and -■^cis, are of the common gender, i. e. they have but one 



256 DIALECTS. [^ 21& 

termination for tlie Masc. and Fern., e. g. "Hpr] ^ (vs iovtra, H. t, 97 ; so ^5wj 
avrfi^i, Od. fi, 309, and the irregular iroXvs : voXi/v i<p' xrypi]v, H. k, 27 ; so ^/xa- 
&({ets, dj/(^6/i(^6ts, hpyiySeis, Troi-fjeis, agreeing with feminine substantives. — The 
Epic ei'v or ijvs, Neut. i}v (iif and e§ only as an adverb), wants the feminine 
form ; in II. o>, 528, is found Sdipwv oTa diSwa-i KaKuv, erepos Se idwv (so. Sdopwv), 
therefore idcau as the Gen, PL Neut., unless perhaps from Sdopuy the cognate 
SoVewj/ is to be supplied for idav to agree with, as in Swrripes idoov sc. Soaewv ; 
the Gen. Sing, is irjos. 

2. Adjectives in -fjeis, -"^eaa-a, -rjeyf are often found in Homer in the contracted 
form -fis, -Tja-ffa, -rjv, e. g. rifi^s (and riix-fjeis), Tifirjyra', those in -(^eis, •6ea(raf 
'6ev, contract -oe into -eu, e. g. ireSia Xcarevyra. 

3. In the Epic dialect, iroXvs is regularly inflected in the masculine and 
neuter, viz. Nom. iroXvs and ttovXvs, Neut. ttoAv, with the secondary forms 
'froW6s, iroWSv, Gen. ■TroA.eos, Acc. iroKvp and ■jtouA.uj/, iroA.u and iroAA<Ji' ; Nom. 
PI. 7roA.6€S and TroA-Cts, Gen. iroXewv, Dat. iro\eVt{i'), '7roA.eV(ri(v), and iro\€e«r(rt(v), 
Acc. TToAeay and -iroK^ls. — The Ionic dialect inflects TfoXX6s, -^j, -<iy, regularly 
throughout. 

4. Compound Adj. in -oy (comp. ^ 78, 1.) often have in Hom. a feminine ending, 
viz. -Tj, e. g. a^avdrr], acySeVrTj, iroXvcpSpfir), api(7)\r) (but also api(ri\oi ovyo/, XL 
X, 27), a,fj.(piPp6rr], ayxtdx-q, ^pyvpoire^ay a.fj,<pipvrr\ ; on the contrary, KXvr6s as a 
feminine is found in II. ^, 742. Od. e, 422, from the simple k\vt6s, -ii, •6v. Also 
the ending -os of the superlative is sometimes found as feminine, c. g. oXo^totos 
65fi-fi, Od. S, 442. KUTh irp^ritrTov ottcctt^i/, H. Cer. 157. Comp. ^ 78, Rem. 1. 

5. Compound adjectives in -irovs, -ttouv, Gen. -rro^os, in the Epic dialect, can 
shorten -ttovs into -ttos, e. g.^Ipts deAAcJxoy, II. .^, 409. rpl-iros, II. %, 443. 

6. 'Eplrjpcs fi'om ipiripos, ipucrdpfxares and -as from ipvcrdpfiaros, are examples 
of Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. 

$216. Comparison. 

1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -(arepos and -dnaTos are used for the sake 
of the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is long, e. g. 
6i(vp(iT€pos, oiCvpciraTos, KaKo^eivuTfpos, Xapcararos. — 'AytTjpc^y, frou6/esom«, has 
the Comparative avn/jp^arepov, Od. ^8, 190, and 6.xapis, disagreeable, axapi<rrfpos, 
Od. V, 392. Comp. § 82, Rem. 6. Adjectives in -vs and -pos, in the Homeric 
dialect; form the Comparative and Superlative in -Iwv, -tov, and -i<rros, -77, -ay, 
sometimes also regularly,- e. g. iXax^s, little, ixdxi<TTos, yXvKvs yXvKiav, )3a.&vj, 
fid^ia-Tos, KvSpSs, Kvdia-Tos, oiKrpSs oIktictos and olKTp6TaTos, iraxvs irdxi^rroSf 
vpifffivs irpicr^iffros, oukvs iaKiCTOs. 

2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under ^ 84, the 
following Epic and dialectic forms require to be noticed : — 

ay a^ 6s., Comp. apeiwv, Xaftwv, Xwirepos (Ion. Kpeaawy^ Dor. Kd^fxtv), Sup. 

KapTlffTOS. 

KaK6s, KUKcirepos, x^^porepos, x^pe/wi/, x^pfC^Tepos (Dor. x^PV<^^f Io°- «o"(r«v), 
Sup. ^KLo-Tos (II. \p, 531, A\ith the variation tJKiaros, which Spitzner prefers). 

oXiyos, Comp. 6xi(cav {oXlCoves ^aav, populi suberant statura minores, II. «r, 
519); niTjW, Bion, 5, 10. 

p-nlihios, Ion., Comp. prfiT^pos (Ion. priiwv), Sup. p-ritraros and ^{jiaros. . 

fipaSvs, slow, Comp. ^pdcrcrav. Sup. fidpSKxros (by Metathesis). 

jiaKp6st ^9-, fjuitra-cov] — irax^Sf thick, irdaawv. 



i 217.] 



PRONOUNS. 



257 



Kemark 1. The positive XEPH2 ix^PVh X^PV-y X^PV^^t X^PVa) found in 
Homer, and belonging to x«pf 'w* always has the signitication of the Compara* 
tive, less, baser, weaker. The PI. ir\4es and (Ace.) 7r\eas are found in Homer 
from the Comp. itAccoj/. 

Rem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
in many instances, are derived from Substantives ; some of these forms have 
been transferred to the Common language: 6 fiaaiKevs fiaa-iXevrepos ; rh 
KepSos, fjain, KepSiou, more lucrative, K^pSicTTos; rh &,\yos, pain, oKyiuv, more 
painful, iLKyiaios ; rh plyos, cold, plyiou, colder, more dreadful, plyicTos ; rh kt]' 
5 OS, care, KrjSuTTos, most dear ; 6 t] kv(i)v, dog, Kvyrepos, more shaineless, Kvyraros. 



§ 217. Pbonouns. 



I.S.N. 


iyu, and ( before a vow- 


av Epic; rv Dor. and 






el) iyciv Epic ; eyw 


JEol. ; rvvT] Epic 






and iywu yEolic 






G. 


e/ico, ifiev, /xeO (fiev) 


TcO Dor.; <t4o (creo), 


CO (eo), eu (eu) Epic 




Epic and Ion. 


<T€v (creu), Ep. and Ion. 


and Ion. 




^fjL(7o Epic 


a^lo and r^olo Epic 


fto Ep.; ee?© later Ep. 




ififdcy Epic 


(Tf^ev Epic 


ci^ej/ (e,^€v) Epic 




^/ieCs, ifiovs Doric 


TeCs, TcoOy Dor. 


eovs Dor. 


D. 


ifioiffiol (fjLOi),ffx.oi ^61. 


aoi Epic 






ijiiv Doric 


Tu/ Dor. ; Tell/ Dor. et 


Jfi/ Dor. (usually or- 






Ep. (usually Orthot.) 


thotone) 






Toi {toi) Ep. and Ion. 


toil, of (o/JEp. (Reflex.) 


A. 


^/te, 1x4 {fMf) Epic 


a4 (<re) Ep. ; re Dor. 


€6, € (e) (as Neut.ll. 






TiJ (tu) Dor. 


o, 236.) 






t/v in Theocritus 


viv (viv) Dor. (and Att. 

poet.) (him, her, it) 
{xiv (ixiv) Ion. (him, her, 

it; seldom PI.) 
crcpf Dor. et Att. poet. 


D.N. 


vwX 




ff<P<t>iv {(TtpOiiv) 






G.D. 


vCi)Xv 


•Epic 


(r</>b)i, (r<^a» 


•Epic 


C<P<i}iu, <T<pii)lV ^ 


A. 


viu'iy v(i> . 




atpGii, a<p(i> 




a<pu(, a(p(i}€ > Epic 








a<pu), C(p(a ) 


P.N. 


^fiets Epic ; ■^jLiees Ion. 


v/jLcls Ep. ; L'/nees Ion. 






a/ue's Dor. ; di/x/uey Epic 


ufj.es Dor. ; f//x/xe$ Ep. 




G. 


T]fi4o}v Ion. and Epic 


vfifoii/ Ion. and Epic 


<r<p4wv (<r<p€0)v) Ion. 




T]ixiluv Epic 


vfi.fl(ay Epic 


and Epic 




OLfxyiiuv 2Eolic ; o^tDv 


vfi/xduy 2Eo\. 


<r(p(i}y Epic 




Doric 




(T<p€iu>v Epic 


D. 


rifjilv, T]HiVf r]fiiv Epic 


vfiiy, vixiv, vfilv Epic 






6.fi.(xi{v) -lEol. and Ep. : 


(/yLi/xi(i') Epic 


<r(^t (ct^O Ion.; <r(/)^ 




o/xTv and afiiv Dor. 




fft(j/), [o-</)i(ri(f)].o-<^/j/, 




d/i)U.e'(ri()') ^ol. 




(<r4><j'),(r<^^ ((T^O Ep.; 
&a<pi JEol. 


A 


T)ii4as Ion. and Epic 


y^ucoy Epic and Ion. 


(T<p€as (<r<p€as) Ion. 








and Epic 




^/uay, ^/lAoy Epic 


vfxas, vfxds Epic 


(T<pas, (T<puas Epic 




&/i/ie Epic ; a/xe Dor. 


(jfifie Epic ; v/we Dor. 


((r</)e)Epic(Il.T,265.) 
&a<pe iEol. 

those written without 


Remark. The forms susce 


ptible of inclination are 


an accent. 





22* 



258 DIALECTS. [^ 218L 

2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns, i/rnvrov, creouTov, etc^ aro 
never found in Homer; instead of them, he writes the personal pronouns and 
the pronoun avros separate, e. g. l/t' ainSy, ifiol ain^, t/ieO avr^s, I auT-fjyy <X 
ahrri. When the pronoun avT6s stands first, it signifies himself, herself, itself 
even. But the Ion. writers use the compound forms ifieuvrovy a-ewmovy euvrovf 
etc. Comp. § 207, 1. 

3. Possessive pronouns : reSs, --fi, -6v Dor. and Epic, instead of (r6s ; kos. -it. 
-6v, and '6s, % '6v, suus, Epic ; afiSs, -^, -6v Dor. and Epic, &ixfios, afifierepos ..Sk>l^ 
instead of 7}/xerepos ; vwirepos, of us both, Epic ; vfi6s, --fj, -6v Dor. and Epic, 
Hufxos Mo\., instead of vfierepos ; fffcatrepos, of you both, II. a, 216 ; (r<p6s, -^, •6y 
JEol. and Epic, instead of <r(p4Tepos. 

4. Demonstrative pronouns : (a) 6 ri ro (Dor. o instead of r)) ; Gen. t« Dor., 
ToTo and rev Epic, ras Dor. ; Dat. ra Dor. ; Ace. rdv Dor. ; PL rol and red Dor. 
and Epic ; Gen. rdwu Epic, rav Dor. ; Dat. ro7(n, raurij r^tri, and tjJs Epic ; 
Ace. Tt6s, r6s Dor. 

(b) 356 : Epic Dat. PI. To7sd€(ri and To7sSe(r<ri instead of roisSf] Epic Dat. 
roicrlSe instead of ro7sSe is found also in the Tragedians. 

(c) of/Tos and avT6s: an e stands before the long inflection-endings in the 
Ion. dialect (§ 207, 10), e. g. rovreov, tovtctjs, Tovrew, roureovs, avrerj, avrfoty. 

(d) iKeivos is written in Ion. and also in Att. poetry Kelyos, -^ol. kjjvos, Dor. 
rrjvos. 

(e) On the Ion. forms winSs, rwvrS instead of 6 avr6s, rh avrS, see §§ 206, 1, 
and 207, 1. 

5. Relative pronouns: 8 Dor. and Horn., instead of Ss; oTo Ion. and Epic; 
Sou Epic seldom, ctjs II. tt, 208 ; §<ri and ps instead of ofy. Besides 8s, t}, the 
other forms of the pronouns are supplied, in the Dor. dialect, by the forms of 
the article, e. g. t6 instead of 8, rod instead of ov, rrjs instead of ris, etc. The 
Epic dialect uses both forms promiscuously, according to the necessities of the 
verse. In the Ion. dialect also, the forms of the article are frequently used 
instead of the relative. 

6. Indefinite and interrogative pronouns: (a) r\s,rl: Gen. reo {reo) Epic 
and Ion., reO (reu) Epic, Ion., and Dor., Dat. reo* {reu), rip {rtf) Epic and Ion. ; 
PI. tffffa. Neut., birTrot icrffa, Od. t, 218, Gen. Teuy (rewv) Epic and Ion., Dat. 
reoia-i Epic and Ion. (roTa-i, S. Trach. 984). 

(b) rls, tI : Gen. reo Epic and Ion., rev Epic, Ion., and Dor., rfa> Ion. 



(c) '6sTis: Nom. STts,Neut.STt, Stti Ep. 
Gen. cfreu Ep. and Ion.,oT€o. 

Sttco, 8tt€v Epic. 
Dat. Brecj), Stco Ep. and Ion. 
Ace. 'Sriya Epic, Neut. grt. 

Urn Epic. 



Neut. PI. iriya Hiad. 
Breuy Epic and Ion. 

brioicri Epic and Ion., &Teri<ri Her. 
Sriyas Epic, Neut. Sinya and S<r<ro Epic. 



§818. The Numerals. 

The .ffiol. and secondary form of /jiia is la, Hvs, fp, tav ; also iy, H. C 422, i9 
instead of ivl. Aio and Sua are indeclinable in Homer ; the secondary formt 



f 219.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 259 

are Soid (indecl.), Soioly Soicd, Soidy Dat. SotoTy, SoioTa^y Ace. Soidi (indecL), Soioisj 
•dsf -d. — Hiffvpfs, -a ^o\. and Epic, instead of reVo-opes, -a. — AvwS^Ka and 5vo* 
KalSeKU Epic, also SuScKa. — 'Eet/cocrt Epic, instead of (Xkoci. — 'OyZuKoma and 
iwfiKovra Epic, instead of oydo-qKoyra, ivetnjKoyTo. 'EyvedxiT^oi and SeKdxt\oi 
Epic, instead of iyvcucisxi^^oi and fivpioi. The endings -aKovra and -cucSaioi in 
tlie Epic and Ion. become --fiKovra, -r]K6cnoi. The Epic forms of the ordinals 
are rpWaros, rerparos, efiSofiuTos, 6yS6aTos, tvarosy and iXvaros. 

The Ve rb. 

$219. Augment. — Reduplication. 

1. All the poets, except the Attic, may reject the augment, according to the 
necessities of the verse, c. g. ADae, (miKavro, biaav, dparo, cAe. The Ion. 
prose, as well as the Epic dialect, may omit the temporal augment ; it may also 
omit it in the Perf^ e. g. ififmiy (pyaa^iai, olK-nfxai, which is done by the Epic 
writers only in 6.vwya and epxarai from eXpyco. 

2. On the omission of the Epic dialect to double the p when the augment is 
prefixed, e. g. (pf^as, and on the doubling the liquids, e. g. eo-trcua, see ^ 208, 
4, and Rem. 

3. a in the Dor. writers is changed into d by the augment, and ai suflfers no 
change, e. g. iyov instead of ^yoy, cdpfov instead of ffptoy. 

4. Verbs which have the Digamma, in Homer take the syllabic augment, 
according to the rule, e. g. aySdyaiy to please, Impf. tdySayov, Aor. eaSoy , — cfSo- 
fjuu, videor, iturd/xrjy, also in the participle itiadfifyos. On account of the verse, 
the e seems to be lengthened in floiKvTa, cCoSe (tFaSf) from ayddya}. 

5. In Homer, the verbs olyoxofw and ay^dyu, take at the same time both the 
syllabic and temporal augment, viz. duyoxoa, D. 5, 3, yet more frequently tpvo- 
x6(i ; ("fiy^ayf and ^yZaye. 

6. The reduplication of p is found in Homer, in ^epinru/jLfyos, from f>inr6o>f to 
make dirty. On the contrary, the Epic and poetic Perfects, t/ifiopa from fxdpoficu 
and (ffa-vfjLai from (rewa», are formed according to the analogy of those beginning 
with p, i. e. by Metathesis ; hence Hfifiopuy etc., instead of ixt/xopa. — The Epic 
and Ion. Pcrf. of Hrdofiai is Hkttiiicu. A strengthened reduplication is found in 
the Horn, forms SeiSexarat and SftSttcro. 

7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the 
reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simple 
augment € is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. Kctjufw, to grow weary, Subj. Aor. 
KfKdfiw; KfXofiai, to (xmmaiid, iKiKX6fxi\y ; kXvw, to hear, Aor. Imp. KCK\v^iy 
KfKkvre] \ayxdvuy to obtain, \4\axoy ; Xa/JL^dyw, to receive, A.eAa)3eV3^ot ; 
Kaybdvw, lat€0,to escape notice, \4\a^oy ; ir t lb o), to persuade, irciriboy, imnb6- 
HW, ripTTO), to delight, TfTpairSfirjy ] rvyxdyw, to obtain. rervKeTy, rcTVKeo-^ai ; 
*ENn, to vntrder, firapyoy, 'n4<pvoy\ <ppdC<>>y to say, to she-*' . «-€<ppaSoy, iirecppaSoy. 
Aorists with the Att. reduplication (comj). § 124, Rem. 2) commonly take the 
augment: 'APn, to Jit, ijp-apoy; 'AXflj to grieve, 1]K-axoy ', oAe'loi, to ward offy 
ijK-€i\Koyy oAoAjceij/ ; tpvvuiyto excite, &p-opov \ iylirTWyto chide, iy-hLvov. Two 



260 DIALECTS. [§ 220. 

verbs in the Aor. take the reduplication in the middle of the word : viz. iyirrtt, 
iiv-firairep, and epu/cw, to restrain, iipv-KUKoy, ipvKcuceeiy. Comp. the Presents, 
dviyr]fii, arirdWw, oirnrTeva. 

8. In the Dialects, there are still other forms of the Perf. and Plup. with the 
Att. reduplication (§ 124) ; thus, e. g. aip4w, to take, Ion. ap-aiprjKa, ap-alprffuu; 
aX do IX a I, to wander. Epic Perf. with a Pres. signification oA-cUtj/ioi ; *APO 
(apapla-Kw), to Jit, Poet. &p-dpa, I Jit, (Intrans.), Ion. ipvpa; 'AXQ (eucax»C«), ^ 
grieve, Epic and Ion. aK-'f]X^f^^^i aK-dxnH^tj 'ENEKG {(pfpu), to carry, Ion. 4y- 
'fji/eiyfiai ; ipelirwy to demolish, Poet, ip-^piira, Epic ip-4pi7rTo; ipl(wf to contend^ 
Epic ip-^pi(r/xai. 

§220. Personal-endings and Mode-vowel s. 

1. Eirst Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -fii of the first Pars. Sing^ is 
found in the Epic dialect in several subjunctiTt*, e. g. tcreiyuixi, aydywfu, ti/x«»/u, 
'Iko)Ixi, i^iXwiJLi, iSwfjLi. Comp. ^ 116, 1. 

2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the JEol and Ep. 
dialect, the lengthened form -a^a is found (§ 116, 2). In the Ind., this 
belongs almost exclusively to the conjugation in -/u, e. g. ri^<r^, <t>^a!^ 
SiSoia-^a, naprja-^a. In Homer, this ending is frequent in the Subj.. e. g. i^iXr/ff- 
^a, eXirr}(r^a, more seldom in the Opt., e. g. /cAo/oto-i^o, $d\oi<T^a. 

3. Instead of the ending -eis, the Dor. frequently has the old form -ts, eg. 
TUTTTes instead of Tinrreis ; so in Theocritus avpiahts = avpl(eis. 

4. Third Pers. Sing. Act. In the Epic dialect, the Subj. sometimes has the 
ending -at (arising from -ri) appended to the usual ending of lbs Subj., c g. 
e^e\r)(Ti{v), &yri(n, aXd\Kri<n; the Opt. only in irapa^)^alri0-i. 

5. Instead of the ending -et in the Pres. Ind. of the Dor. dialect, the form -ij 
is used, though seldom, e. g. 5i5eur/oj instead of 5t5<urit€t. In the second and 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Act., Theocritus uses the endings -ijj, -rj instead of -oi, 
-€, e. g. TT€ir6v^s, oiruirr} instead of Trfirov^as, uxanr*. 

6. First Pers. PL Act. The Dor. dialect has retained the original ending 
-fies, e. g. TUTTTO/ies instead of Txnrrotnv (^ 204). 

7. The third Pers. PL Act. of the principal tenses, in the Dor. dialect, ends 
throughout in -j/ti, e. g. rxnrrovri (instead of rvTrrowri), Tu+orT^ rvwrttrti 
(instead of rvmuxri), rerixpavTi, iTraiviovri, i^airaruyri. In the ./EoL and Dof., 
this ending in the P^es. and Put. is -oia-i instead of -ovcij e. g. irtonry(Oi<Ti{p), 
yaloi<ri{v). 

8. Personal endings of the Plup. Act. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, the 
following forms occur : — 

First Pers. Sing., -ea the only Epic and Ion. form (-77 old Att.^ ni6, 6), e. g. 
^re^TjTTea, jfSeo, ■n-eiroidea instead of frediTXfu', etc. 
Second " " -eas, e. g. eVe^Treas, Od. eo, 90, instead of ^feH»ciJ. 
Third " " -€«(»'), e. g. iyey6v€€, KoraAeXoiVfe, ififfipwKffy (not Horn.). 
Second » PL -ian, e. g. <rvv7)SeaT€y Her. 9, 58. 

Remark 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in -«», as well as the same 
Pers. of the Impf. in -€*, is foimd in Homer before a vowel with the r paragogic; 



220.] PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 261 

thus, e(rTr}K€iy, II. «^, 691. ^ffiK-f]KiiVy B. e, 661. ^, 270. |, 412. SeSetiry^/cej*', Od. 
p, 359 ; — ^o-*c€tv, 11. 7, 388. 

9. The second and third Pers. Dual of th^e historical tenses are sometimes 
exchanged for each other. Thus in Homer, the forms -rov and -a^ov (second 
Pers, Dual) stand instead of -rriv and -a^y (third Pers. Dual), e. g. Stwiceroi', 
11. Kf 364. KojpvaiTfroVy II. c, 583, dwpvaaia^oy, H. y, 301. On this inter- 
charge in Attic, see § 116, Rem. 

10. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj., Impf. Ind. and Opt. Mid. or 
Pass., the first Aor, Mid, Ind,, after dropping <r, remain uncontracted in the 
Ion. and often in the Epic dialect, e. g. iirireWfai ; Homer ises either these 
forms, e.g. \«ivecu, AxAoucat, ouplKTjcu, ipvaaeaUy iiravprjcUy inre'fiaao, iyeiyao, or 
the contract forms, -p (from -tai), -eu (from -€o), -a> (from -ao), e. g. 6>rA.cv, tpx^v^ 
<Pp<i((Vy ^Kpffun. When the characteristic of the verb is e, it is very frequently 
omitted in the Ion. dialect, before -«u and -«o, e. g. <f>i\(cu instead of ^(Accch, 
<(>i\(o instead of ^lAceo ; so in Homer, iK\f\ II. «, 202, yet with the variation 
^/cAe' from K\iofuu. Comp. § 222, B (3). — The ending -eo in Homer is 
lengthened into -€to, e. g. tptio, <nr(7o, and the ending -c'eoi is contracted into 
-c«u, in verbs in -«&>, e. g. fiv^ucu, ydcu. Homer sometimes drops <r in the 
second Pers. Sing, Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, also, viz. /i*€/ivTjeu (and /xc'/ivp), 
BffiKriai, tffffvo. 

11. The Dual endings -nji', -<r;&Tjv, and first Pers. Sing, -/irji', in the Doric 
arc, -Tdv, -abavy -fidv (§ 201, 2), e. g. i^pcurdfidy. In the later Doric, the 
change of ri into d is found, though seldom, even in the Aor. Pass., e, g. irinrdM 
instead of ^twxtjv. 

12. Tlie personal-endings -^c^ov, -/ic^a, in Epic, as well as in Doric, Ionic, 
and Attic poetry, often have the original forms -fifffboy, -fifaba, e. g, rinrrofiftr' 
&oy, Tinrr6fifaba. 

13. The third Pers, PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and Epic 
dialect, ver}' generally ends in -arat, -oto, instead of -yrcu, -yro, e. g. ircire/- 
derrai, ir«irovoTcu, i0(&ov\(varo, i<Tra\a.ro\ ver}' often also the third Pers. PI. 
Opt. Mid. or Pass, is -oiaruy -aiaro^ instead of -oivro, -atyro, e. g. Tinrroiaro 
instead of rinrroiyroj apuffcdaro (Homeric), instead of apriaouyro. Also the 
ending -oyro, in the Ion. dialect, has this change, though the o before y becomes 
«, e, g. ifiovXiaro instead of ifiovKoyro. In verbs in -du and -cw, the ri in the 
ending of the Perf and Plup. -TjKreu, -tjvto, is shortened in the Ionic into «, e. g. 
OiKforcu instead of ^Kriyrcu from ot/cc'w, irtrififaro instead of irerifiriyro from 
Ti/iio;. Also instead of -ayrtuy the Ionic dialect has -taroi (instead of -oarai), 
e, g. xeirrt'ttTcu instead of xiTrrayrau. 'AiriKaTcu, in Herodotus, from the Perf, 
iupiyfiai (Pres. d<piKyfo^{u) is the only cxamjilc in which the rule stated § 116, 
5, is not observed. 

Rem. 2. Two Perf. and Plup. forms are found in Homer with the ending 
•Sarat, -Saro, from verbs whose characteristic is not 5, viz. iXavvu (e'Aow) 
4\ri\a/jLai (Krj\d.5aro, Od. tj. 86, and ixaxfC'" oJtrfX^H^ eucrjxf'SoTcu, 11. p, 637 ; the 
8 sceuis to he merely euphonic ; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not 
wholly settled : the forms i^^aZaToi and (^(xxSaro (from ftalyw) must be derived 
from the stem PAZIl (comp. f>dcaar«, Od. v, 150). 



262 DIALECTS. [$ 220. 

14. The third Pers. PL Aor. Pass, -rjffav is abridged into -ev, in the Doric, 
and also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. rpdnpev instead of irpd- 
(Pncav. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Common language 
(§ 116, 7), e. g. Tv<p^€7ev instead of rvcp^eirjorav. 

15. The third Pers. PI. Imp. Act, in -raxrav, and Mid. or Pass, in (r^ua-ca/, is 
abridged in the Ionic and Doric dialect (always in Homer) into -tnut/ and -a^uv 
(§ 116, 12), e. g. TvirTovrwv instead of rinrTeraffaVy ireJroi^Svru)!/ instead of TrcTrot- 
^^Tuffav, rvTrTecr^wy instead of rxmria^caffav. 

16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. (a and ij, are very frequently 
shortened in the Epic dialect into o and e, according to the necessities of the 
verse, e. g. tofxev instead of jfw/ie;/; (p^iSfietr^a instead of -difie^a] arpecpercu 
instead of -tjtoi (§ 207, 4). 

17. The first Aor. Opt. Act., in the ^olic dialect ends in -eia, -eias, -«€, etc., 
third Pers. PL -eiaVf instead of -ai/Mi, -ais, -ouy etc., third Pers. PL -cuey. See 
§ 116, 9. 

18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf Act. is -fxevat, and with 
the mode-vowel, -efxevatf which is found in the Epic, Doric, and -Slolic dialects. 
This form is sometimes shortened into -fxev {-enev) by dropping ax, sometimes 
into -vaihj syncopating ^ue (e/ie). But in the Epic dialect, the ending -eiv also 
is found, formed from -e/^ej/, and in contract verbs, and in the second Aor., also 
the endings -eeiv and -eiu. The Pres., Put., and second Aor. take the mode- 
vowel e and the ending -/tev, hence -ejuei/, e. g. rvTrr-i-jxiVy rml/efievy etireftev. — • 
Verbs in - a « and - e «, as they contract the characteristic-vowel a and the 
mode-vowel e of the Inf. ending -e/jLivai, have the form --fj/xevai, e. g. y<yf)ij.€i/cu 
(yodw), <pi\^fji.€vai (</)£\e&>), (pop^fievai {(popeco). — With the ending -^fievat corre- 
sponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. rvTrrifjLevou instead of Tvin}yau, aoXXiff 
^fj.evai ; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged form in 
-rjixevf e. g. Tvjrrjfieu. — In the Pres. of verbs in -fit, the ending -ficv and -iievtu is 
appended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the second Aor. Act., to 
the pure stem, e. g. ri^4-fjLep, ri^e-ixevai, iffrd-fievj lard-fxf:V0Uj Si56-n€v, 5t5J-^evax, 
SeiKvi-fiev, deiKVV-fJievai] ^e-fiey, ^e-fieuai^ So-fiev, S6-fj.evcu] SO also in Perfects 
derived immediately from the stem of the verb, e. g. re^vdfiev, $€$duev. The 
following are exceptions, viz. ri^fievai, 11. <//, 83 (with which the forms of the 
Pres. Part. Mid. Ti^/ievos, nixhiJ^^vos, correspond), StSoGvai, H. «, 425, also the 
Inf second Aor. Act. of verbs in -o and -v, which also retain the long vowel 
(§ 191, 2), e. g. ffT-fj-fieyai, fi-ft-fievai, 5v-nevai, instead of (rrrjvai, Svvai. 

19. Besides the forms in -efjLevai and -efiev, the Doric dialect has one in -6i» 
abridged from these, e. g. &y€}/ instead of dyeiv; Put. apfx6<r€v instead of apfx6- 
a-eiv ; second Aor. tSeV instead of tSeTj/, Xafiev instead of \afieiy, etc: In the 
Doric of Theocritus, the Mol. Inf. ending -rjy is foimd, e. g. x°^PVv, second 
Aor. Aa)8?>, instead of xa'pefj AajSeTi/. 

20. The Inf ending of the Aor. Pass, -^/xeyai, -v/uLev, is abridged into -tjv in 
the Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. fie^va^v instead 
of -^riuai. The Inf ending of the Perf. Act. varies between - 77 y and -eiv ia 
the Doric and JEoUc writers, e. g. re^eup^K-nv, yfydyeiy instead of re^ewprjKfratt 



^ 221, 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS 263 

21. Participle. The JEolic dialect has the diphthong oi instead of ov before 
r in participles, and at instead of d, e. g. Timruv^ Tvirroiaa, rvtrTov^ ^jifioi<ra, 
Xnro7<ra instead of -ovaa] rvrpais, -aicra, instead of tj^os, -dco {^ 201, 2. and 
207, 1). The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o into u in the oblique 
cases, e. g. ftefjuMTos, ir^<pvSiras. — The Perf. Act. Part., in the Doric dialect, 
sometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. TretppUovTes instead of ireippiKSr^s. 



$ 221. Epic and Ionic Iterative form. 

1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in 
imitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf and Aor. form with the 
endmg -tr/co*', to denote an action often repeated, or continued. This is called 
the Iterative form. It is regularly without the augment. 

2. It is generally found only in the Sing, and in the third Pei«. PI. Ind. of 
the Impf and Aor., and is inflected like the Impf ; for in the Impf and 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -<tkov^ -CKis, (tk€{v), -a-KSfirju, -<rKov{€o, ew), 
-ffKeroj preceded by the union-vowel e, are used instead of -oi/, -ofirjv, and in the 
first Aor. Act. and Mid. the endings -aaKov^ -aarKSfx-qv are used instead of -a, 
-dfxriv, e. g. 

(a) Impf. Sivev-ecTKOv, deh-eaKes, '4ir-e(rK€(v), -jreX-eaKero, ^o<TK-4aKOVTO. In 
verbs in -euw, -aiffKov is abridged into -oo-kou, which, according to the necessities 
of the verse, can be again lengthened into -daxTKov, e. g. viKaarKofiev, vcucrdaff' 
Kov. Verbs in -ew have -eeffKou and -effKov, e. g. KoXe-ecKe, jSouKoXeetr/ce ; oXxv^^f- 
Kov^ iT<D\4<TKeroy KoAeV/fcTo ; when the verse requires, -eea-Kov can be lengthened 
into -eUffKov, e. g. veiK^UffKov; verbs in -6q) do not have this Iterative form 
among the older authors ; verbs in -fn omit the mode-vowel here also, e. g. 
Ti^e-ffKov, SiSo-(TKov, SeUyv-a-Kou ; in some verbs the ending -oxtkov has taken the 
place of -eaKov, e. g. pinr-curKOU, Kpimr-aaKov^ from ^jttto), /cpuirroj. 

( ) Second Aor. '4\-((rKe, fid\-e(rK€, (pvy-arKe ; in verbs in -fit, without a mode- 
vowel, e.g. (TTd-(rK€ (= effTui), Trapefid<TK€ (^ •7rape)37j), 56aK€, Sixtkc; also an 
Iterative form of the second Aor. Pass, is found, viz. (pdyea-Ke instead of i^dv-q^ 
II. X, 64. Od. /I, 241, 242. 

(c) First Aor. ihda-affKev, avd-fja-aa-Kev, Hxr-affKe, fivrjff-dffKeTO, ayvda-aVKe 
(instead of ayvorjaaaKi from ayvo4w). 



§ 222. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. 

I. The Epic dialect. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -aa>, -ew, -Jo, are subject 
to contraction, but by no means so generally as in the Attic. The contraction 
is made according to the general rules, with a few exceptions, as will be seen in 
the following remarks. 

A. Verbs in -c£w. (1) In these verbs, the uncoptracted form occurs only in 
certain words and forms, e. g. irepaou, KaTeaKiaop, vaierdova-i ; always in vAa«, and 
in verbs which have a long o for their characteristic, or whose stem is a. mono- 
syllable, e. g. it\f/&uv, ireiviutf, expae, ixp'^^'^^ (from xpau, to attack) 



264 DIALECTS. [$ 222. 

(2) In some words, a is changed into e, viz. jxevoiveov from fievoipoua, ijvrfo^ 
from dvTciw, SfiSKKeov from 6/io/cAow. Comp. § 201, 1. 

(3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, the contracted syllable 
is resolved, as often as the measure requires it ; this is done by inserting a simi- 
lar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed 
by contraction ; in this way, a is resolved into do or do, and « into o« or au 
(§ 207, 2). The short vowel is used here, when the syllable preceding the 
contracted one is short, e. g. {6pw) 6p6(a ; but if this syllable is long, the long 
vowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. rj^diaxra. The resolution does 
not take place with the vowel d before a personal-ending beginning with t, 
e. g. opa-rai, 6pa-To. Thus : — 

(opdeis) Spas Spaces {Spdco) bpa 6p6a> 

(Spdecr^ai) opacr^ai opaaa^ai {dpdovffa) opwcra 6p6(o<ra 

(fjLsvoivdei) fievoiv^ fjt,evoivoL(f, {fiodovcn) fioSxri fioSaxri 

{iarjs) i^s iaq,s {6pdoi/xi) op^fMi dp6q>fii 

{fivdea^ai) fu/aar^at fivaa<r^ai (Sp&ovai) Spaa Spdoaxrt. 

Eemark 1. In Od. ^, 343, the form Hprjai (from opdeai) occurs instead of the 
dprjai, which Eustath. cites. In the following Dual forms, oe is contracted into 
7] : Trposavd'f)TT]v, (rvX-ffrrju, (rvvavr-fiTTju, (l>oiT7)Tr\v instead of -ottji/ ; so also in the, 
two verbs in -ea>, d/xapTriTi^v, aTreihrjTTiv instead of -eirrju. 

4. When vr comes after a contracted vowel, a short vowel may be inserted 
between vr and such a contracted syllable, e. g. Tjfiwovra instead of ^)8aJi/To, 
yeXdovreSf (Mvciovro ; in the Opt. also, the protracted -aoi instead of -u is found 
in Tj^dooiiJLi (instead of rj^dpifMi = rj^cfifii). The following are anomalous forms : 
vaierdcaa-a (instead of -6a<Ta), (row, second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pers. 
Sing, Impf Act. from ZSAH, to save. 

Rem, 2. On the Inf in -i]ij.evai of verbs in -da and -ew, see § 220, 18, and on 
the Epic-Ionic contraction of o-q into a, see § 205, 5. 

B. Verbsin-6ft>. To this conjugation belong also all Futures in -ea and 
-iofxai, all second Persons in -eo, -eot, and -iiaii second Aor. Inf. Act. in -eeiv, 
and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -e« and -eiw. 

( 1 ) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which e is followed by the 
vowels tw, w, 7], ri, 01, and ov, e. g. ^iXeoofiev, (pi\4oifii, etc. ; yet such uncontracted 
forms must commonly be read with Synizesis. In other instances, the contrac- 
tion is either omitted according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. (piXeei, epew 
Put., oTpvveovffa Put., PaXeeiv second Aor. Act., Trea-eea-^ai Put. IVIid., [ivy4w<ri 
second Aor. Subj. Pass. ; or contraction takes place, and then, when eo is con- 
tracted, it becomes eu (§ 205, 1), e. g. alp^ifi-qv, ourew, yivev ; except aveppiirrow 
and iTrSp^ovv. 

(2) Sometimes the open e is lengthened into ei (§ 207, 1), e. g. ereXeUro, 
ereAetoj/, 'irXeieiv, OKveica ; — 5a/ieiw instead of SafiS>, pny^iri instead of pny^ 
(second Aor. Subj. Pass.). 

(3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. or Pass., two Epsilons 
coming together are either contracted, as in the third Pers., e. g. fiu^c-eai 
= jxv^eiai, like ^ui&^etToi, y«at, like yerrot, or one e is elided, e. g. fiv^eau, 



} 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 265 

vuKeai. This elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and Ionic writers, 
in the second Pers. Impf. and Imp. Pres. Mid. or Pass., e. g. (po^do, aKeo, oiVeo, 
i^Tjyeo, In such cases, the accent is on the penult, whether the word ends with 
-eai or -eo (§ 220, 10). 

Rem. 3. On the irregular contraction in the Dual, see Rem. 1 ; on the Inf, 
in -^fieuaif see-§ 220, 18. 

C. Verbs in -6ci}. These verbs follow either the common mles of contrac- 
tion, e g. yovvovfiai, yovyova^ai, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into 
a>, and then the forms of verbs in -oca resemble those of verbs in -doj, e. g. 
iSpdoi/ra, iSpdjovara, imvcaouras (comp. rjficaovTa, 4 above) ; or they become Avholly 
analogous to verbs in -dou, since they resolve -ova-i (third Pers. PI. Pres.) into 
-6 (Off I, -ovvro into -6wvto, and -ol^v into -6u>ev, and consequently suppose a 
contraction like that of verbs in -ooj : [a.p6ovffi) apodffi apocoffi (comp. dpScoffi), 
{Sr}i6ouTo) Srj'iovuTO 5r]i6a}VTO (comp. opSwvTo), {Sri'i6oiev) Sr^.w hrj'iSwcv (comp. 
dp6cfi€v). But this resolution into -6q} or -coo is confined to such forms as admit 
it in verbs in -dw ; hence, e. g. the Pres. apo7s, apo7, apovre, and the Inf. apovv, do 
not admit this resolution. 

II. Ionic dialect. (1) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in -dca and -6(t> suffer 
contraction ; verbs in -ecu commonly omit it, except the contraction of -eo and 
-eov into -eu, which frequently occurs (^ 205, 1), e. g. (piKevfiev instead of (piXdo- 
fiet/ = (pi\ovfj.cu, 4<pi\€vv instead of i<pi\€ot/ = i^iXovv^ 9iAeG instead of cpiXiov 
= <piXov. 

(2) The uncontracted forms exhibited in the table (§ 135) of the second 
Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass, in -e'7;, -dri, -op, -e'ov, -dov^ -6ov, e. g. 
(f>i\eT)y rifidr), fiia^Sr}, (pi\4ov, rifidov^ /xiff^6ov, etc., are found in no dialect, and 
are presented merely to explain the contraction. For even the Ionic writers 
use here the contracted forms of verbs in -dco and -600, e. g. n/xa, fiiff^oT, TLfj-w, 
fxiff^ov, etc. ; but of verbs in -e'&>, as also in barytone verbs, they do not use the 
endings -77, -on, but -eot, -eo, e. g. TuirT-eot, irinrT-eo, <pi\4-eai, e^iA.e-eo. — On the 
elision of e in the ending -e'eo, see above. No. 1, B (3). 

(3) Verbs in -dco follow the common rules of contraction; but in the uncon- 
tracted form, the o is changed into e, e. g. Speco, opeo/j-ev instead of opdco, XP"'''«*» 
Xpdotnai instead of xpt^erot, etc. Comp. § 201, 1. 

(4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into ica (§ 207, 3), 
e. g. xP^t^vTOLii iKTiuyro, dpecovres, ireipecofievos instead of (xpdourai) xP^^'^°-'^i 
etc. 

(5) The change of the a into e, as in bpica, explains the usage among the Ion. 
writers of sometimes contracting ao and aov, and also eo and eoi' in verbs in 
-4a), into -eu (§ 205, 1), e. g. elpcorevu instead of elpcoraov, yehevaa instead of 
yeXdovaa, ayairevt/Tcs instead of ayairdovres. So also in the Doric dialect, e. g 
yeXevvTi instead of yeXdovffi. This contraction into eu instead of ov is often 
found even in verbs in -oco, e. g. diKaievffi instead of {SikuiSovcti) diKaiovcri, 
SiKaievv instead of BiKaiovv, iSiKaiew, ffrecpavevvrai from arecpavoca. 

(6) In Ionic prose, the Epic resolution is found but seldom in verbs in -da^ 
e. g. Ko/xScoffi, T}yop6covTo, Her. 

23 



266 DIALECTS. [$ 223 

m, Doric dialect. (1) Contrary to the common usage of the Doric, ae and 
at I are contracted into v and -p (§ 205, 3), e. g. rifi^re instead of Tifui(:Te = 
Tt/iSrc, (poLT-fjs instead of (poiras, opTJv instead of dpav. The Inf. is written 
without an i subscript, as the uncontracted fonn originally ended in -aw 
Comp. also II. 5, also § 134, 3. 

(2) The Inf. of verbs in -ea has a double form, either the abridged form in 
-4v iQStead of -€7v, e. g. iroiev instead of Troieiv, or according to the analogy of 
verbs in -dw, a form in -7]u (from -ctjj'), e. g. (piXrju instead of <pi\4siv = <pi\€iv, 
KocTfiyy instead of Kotr^eTi/, (ppoyrjv instead of (ppove7y. 

(3) In the Doric and -S^olic dialects, -ao, -aov, and -aco are contracted .nto d 
(§ 205, 2), e. g. Treivaixes instead of Treiua/xev {ireiv6.oiJt.ei/), Treivavri instead of 
Ttiv{d.-ov)5}-(Xi., yeKav instead of 76A{a-«^)&>i/, (jyvaavres instead of <pvff{d'o)6i-vres. 

Rem. 4. On the contraction into -ev instead of -ou, see § 205, 1. — A striking 
peculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by The- 
ocritus, is, that it frequently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs in -ew. 
e. g. eirSyaffa instead of iiT6vri<Ta from vcoveu, e<pi\a(ra instead of i(pi\r)<Ta from 
<pi\e(i}. 

^ 223. Formation of the Tenses. 

1. Besides the verbs mentioned (§ 130), the following also in the Homeric 
dialect retain the short characteristic- vowel in forming the tenses, viz. Korew, to 
have a grudge ; vemeoo, to quarrel ; Tavvw, to stretch ; epvw, to draw. On the con- 
trary, eiraivew, to approve, has eif^VTjffa. 

2. In the Eut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which retain the 
short characteristic- vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same tenses of verbs 
in -^w, -(Tffo) (-TT&j), the o- can be doubled in the ending, in Homer and other 
non-Attic poets {§ 208, 4), e. g. eyeKacrae, KOTecrcajxevos, 6fi6(raai, irdwa-ffe, 
diKdcrcrai, KSfxiCffe. 

3. The form of the Attic Fut. (§ 117) occurs in the Homeric dialect in verbs 
in -'l(oi}, e. g. KTepioucri, ayXa'ieia^ai, together with the common Futures dp/jLia-a-o- 
fiev, Koirpiffffoyres, Kovi(r(rov(ri{v). From verbs in -ew, -a«, -vco, Horn, forms 
Futures which are similar to the present of these words, viz. in verbs in -ew, he 
often uses the ending -ew instead of -effco, e. g. Kopeei, H. ^, 379. Kopeeis, II. v, 
831. fiax^ovrai, II. ^8, 366 ; — in verbs in - aw, after dropping <r, he places before 
the vowel formed by contraction, a corresponding short vowel, e. g. avriSa, 
i\6caai, Safjida] — in verbs in -ixa, epvovai and ravvovffi are found. 

4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in - ^co take | instead of cr in those tenses 
whose characteristic is c, i. e. in the Fut. and Aor., e. g. St/ca^oj, 5tKa|(£, eS'iKo^a, 
instead of SiKdau, idiKaara. But the other tenses of verbs with the pure charac- 
teristic S, follow the regular formation, e. g. eBiKda-^v, not iSiKax^v.' This 
peculiarity of the Doric appears even in certain verbs in -aw, which, in forming 
the tenses, retain the short o, and in this respect ■ are analogous to those in -^w, 
which likewise have a short vowel, e. g. yexdw, iyeXa^a instead of iy4\aoa, yet 
not viKdw, viKOL^w, but yiKda-M (Att. viKiiaca). In Doric poetry, the regular form 
of all these words can be used, according to the necessities of the metre. 

f . The following verbs in -^w have, in Homer and the Ionic dialect, | instead 



^ 223. J FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 267 

of <r, through the whole formation, viz. afipordCw, to ivander ; a\airdCu, to 
empty, Fut. aKaird^w, etc. (so also Xenoph. An. 1. 1, 29) ; Sj/o7roA.(^«, to shake; 
5 o t ^«, to divide, to put to death ; iyyvaXi^w^to give ; iuapi^a, to spoil a dead 
enemy ; ^ pvXXi ^w, to break in pieces ; fxepuripl ^a>, to reflect ; ireXe fii ^a», to 
sJiake ; iro\ef^i ^a>, to contend; arv(pcXi ^w, to smite. % 

6. Liquid verbs in-aiw, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the 
ending -aua instead of -t^va (§ 149, Rem. 2), have d in the Doric, and rj in the 
Epic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of 
all periods, form the Eut. and first Aor. with the ending -ffw and -<ro, viz. 
K4\Xa)y to land {K€\<rai, comp. Kevcrai from Kevrea, to goad) ; elXw, to crowd 
together (iXaai) ; Kvpa, to meet, to fall upon; apapicrKw ('AP-fi), toflt (^pcra, dpaai) ; 
ip-vv^i, to excite {opera}, S>p(ra) ; Siaep^elpco, to destroy (Siacp^epffai in Homer) 5 
Kelpo), to shave (cKepaa in Homer, but first Aor. IVIid. iKupajxriv) ; (pvpu, to mix, to 
knead {(pvpffo}, etpvpara, 7re<^vpcro/uai, Epic and old poetic; second Aor. Pass. 
itpvpTjv in Lucian, who also has the poetic Perf. irfcpvpfiai, while in prose, the 
verb <l>vpdw, icpvpaaa, ire^vpa/xai, etc., is used). The Opt. oepeWeieVf Od. j8, 334. 
H. IT, 651, is formed according to the usage of the .^Eolic. 

7. To verbs which form the Fut. without the tense-characteristic <r {§ 154, 4) 
belong the following forms of the Epic dialect : fieofxai or fieiofiai, second Pers. 
Pep, I shall live, perhaps from fiaivw, to go, to live, also from AAA, to know, to 
learn, and KEIfl {Kclfiai, to lie down), S73&J, Srj^is, S-fjofiev, S-ficre {I shall view, find), 
and Kilo} or «€«, Kcic/xeu, Keiwu, k^uv. 

8. To verbs which form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic <r 
(§ 154, 7) belong the following forms of the Epic and poetic dialect: xc'"? ^0 
pour out, €x^"°' (Homer; Att. exea) ; crevu, to shake, cacreva and iaffevdij.'nv 
(Homer), aXfo/xai and aAeuo/uat, to avoid, rjAeuaro, etc. (§ 230) ; Kaica, to burn, 
€Kr]a, (Kcia Epic, eKea Tragic (§ 230). 

9. To verbs which have an active form for the Fut. Perf. (§ 154, 6), belongs 
also the Epic Kexapvo''^ (with Kexaprja-o/jMi), I shall be joyful, from x^^'^P^' 

10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the first 
Aor. (§ 154, 7) is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, e.g. fiaiuw, to go, 
4$-f}(r€To, Imp. p-fiaco ; Svofiai, to plunge, id v a era. Imp. Svaeo, Part. Suaofxei/os ] 
&yei), to lead, &^€Tf, alc/xev ; iKueoixai, to come, T^ov, i\4yfxr]u, I laid myself down 
to sleep, Imp. Xe|o, A.e|eo ; opvvfii, excito, Imp. optreo, opccv; <p4po}, to bear, 
olffe {olae is also Att.), o'iaeTe, olff^Tu, olffovrtov, olaeixev, ola-ffievai] aeiSu, to 
sing, Imp. aelffeo. 

11. Several s^ in Homer, are fonned by a Metathesis of the 
consonant'- make a dactyle, e. g. eSpcucou instead of eSapKov 
(fro- ir4p^co), ^Spa^oy (from Sap^dvw), fjfi^poToy 

). For the same reason Homer syncopates 

rom aye pea^ai (ayelpw, to collect) ; eypero, 

. (with the accent of the Pres.), iypo/xevos from 

u/ce) ; TrT6iA.r]v, iirT6fir]v, irricr^ai, irrouevos {ireTO/xai, to 

.KKiTo, KCKhSfievos {KeXofxai, to summon, excite) ; irecpvov, e-rretpvop 

ul). 

iS. the first Aor. Pass. Homer inserts a y, aceording to the necessities of 



268 ^ DIALECTS. [$ 223 

the verse, not only as other poets (§ 149, Rem. 4) in KpivcD and K\ifw {Siokpiv- 
i^?jT6, Kpiv^els, iK\iv^), but also in ISpvu, to establish^ and iryeoo, to blow {idpw^v 
and iSpu^j/, afiTTi/vt/^r]). 

13. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs 
as in the tewse-formation assume an € (§ 166) or are subject to Metathesis 
(§ 156, 2), e. g. x«^P<» KexdprjKa (from XAIPE-n), fidWw $4^\r)Ka (from BAA). 
Except these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to 
intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs 
and in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the k in certain persons 
and modes, and regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms become analo- 
gous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen a and e into 
»7, e. g. fiePaprjds^ burdened (from BAPEJl), KeKopr]ci>s, satisfied (from Kope-yyvfii), 
/ce/coTTjcos, enraged (from /coreo)), rernqcis, troubled (from TIEH), rerArjcis, enduring 
(from TAAXl), KeKacprjds, gasping for breath (from KA*En), KeK/nrjas, wearied (from 
Ka/xyco), ireTTTjcis (from irT-f)<rff(a, to shrink through Jear), re^vrjcis, KeKTrjOTi, Kexa- 
DTjCiis (from xoipw) ; — or they retain, though more seldom, the stem-vowel without 
change, e. g. fie^ados (from fiaiuw, BAH), eKy€yav7a (from yiyvofxai, TAH), SeSdws 
(from 5t5a(r/cw, AAfl), ire<pvvia (from <|)uw), kvTacas (from 'i<TT7]fii, STAH), fj-e/iaws 
(with [i€fia.d)s and fMefxaSres from MAii). The accented o of the oblique cases 
can, in the first instance, according to the necessities of the verse, be lengthened 
into oj, hence re^vrioros and -cDtos, re^yrjoTa and -wto, K6K/i7j<^Ta and -wto ; but 
when the Nom. has a short penult, u is always used (except in i<TTa6Tos), e. g. 
PefiauTos. The ending -c6^, formed by contraction, is resolved by e in TreTTTewTa 
(from ttiVtw), re^yewri, and according to the necessities of the verse, e can be 
lengthened into et, e. g. re^veiwros. The feminine form -co a a is found only in 
^e^caffa, Od. u, 14 ; in some feminine forms, the antepenult, which properly would 
be long, is shortened on account of the verse, e. g. apapvia (Fem. of ap-qp^s from 
apapla-Kw), ficfiaKvia (of fi€/ji.7]K^s, from fji.r}Kdofj.ai), re^aXvia (of rei^Acus, from 
^dWca), Xe\dKv7a (of AcAtj/cc^s, from KaffKu), 'ireirdS)v7a (from Trd(TX(o)- 

Remark 1. The form resolved by f, in the Ionic dialect, has become the 
permanent one with some participles, e. g. iaredos ; so re^vedos (never Tc^vcas) 
and Te^vr)Kdt)s from re^i/r^Ka, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms, 
the a remains through all the cases, e. g. 

ecTTedos, kaT^axrd.^ earecis. Gen. k<TT€UTOS^ -dlxnjs 
re^t/edos, re^veaca, re^j/edos, Gen. re? -vros, -dxT-qs. 

BefirjKa and reVATj/ca never have these forms. Co Rem. 3. 

14. Some verbs, which in the stem of th- "-^hthong fu, 

shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect intr ^ and 

in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

Trei^ofiaii to asJc, it 4 ir v ff fx a i '-, arevco, to shah.^^ 
/tot, first Aor. Pass, ifforv^rjv; revxo (poet.;, ^ 
ir^x^V f^'i (j>eiyci>, to Jlee, Yerf. irecpvyfi^vos. 

Rem. 2. Xe« (formed from x^^^^ X^"5<»)) to pour out, follows u 
these verbs, in the forms k^x^ku, Ke'xu/xot, ix^^f 5 these forms have o^ 
ferred to the Common language also (§ 154, Rem. 1). Contrary to the an^ 



^ 224. CONJUGATION IN -fXt. 269 

just stated, the v is long in the Homeric form irdirvvfiai from irvew {irycFo)), to 
blow. 

Rem. 3. In Homer, Od. o-, 238, the third Pers. Opt. Plup. AeAGro instead of 
\e\viTo is found, according to the analogy of ■jrrjyi'vTo^ Saivvro. 

Eem. 4. The Homeric Perfects aKaxh^-euos, aXaKrjfievos, ap-npe/xevos, i\T}\d/j.e- 
yos. aK6.xy\(T^a.h o-KaKiria^aiy have the accentuation of the Pres. 

k 224. Conjugation in -fn. 

1. On the lengthened form of the second Pers. ri^-qcrba, didoKrl^a, see § 220, 
2; on the Iterative forms in -(t/coj/, see § 221 ; on the Inf forms in -[xevai, -/xev, 
see § 220, 18. 

2. In the Epic, Ion,, and Dor. writers, some verbs in -jul in the second and 
third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf , frequently have the contracted forms of verbs 
in -eca and -6(o (§ 172, Rem. 8), e. g. n^us, n^e?, 5i5o7s, SiSoT, iriS^ei, iSiSovs, 
iSiSov, 'Ui ; — contracted forms of tirrTj^t are very rare, e. g. lo-rq, instead of 
'/(TTTjo-i, Her. 4, 103. In the second Aor. Opt. Mid. the Ionic writers have the 
resolved form bcoifx-qv, as if from ©Efl, e. g. irpos^eoiro, irpos^eoKx^e. 

3. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -vfjn form an Opt., not only in the Mid., as 
sometimes in Attic writers, e. g. daivvTo, II. w, 665. (comp. AeACro, § 223, Rem. 
3), from Saiyvfiai, but also in the Act., e. g. e/fSO/iev (instead of iKSvi-n/xeu) from 
e/c5ua>, <pDr] (instead of (pvlrj) from ^vw] so (p^To, <P^2to Opt. of i^StiyL-qv from 

4. The third Pers. PI. Impf and second Aor. in -c-a-av, -Tf-aav, -o-aav, -w-ffav 
-v-cav, are abridged in the Epic and Dor. dialects into -ei/, -oj/, -oy, -vr, e. g. 
erti&ej/ instead of cTt^etroi', ei^ej/, «^cV instead of ei^eo-a;/ ; ea-rau, <nav instead of 
icxT-qaav, <pbav instead of ^(p^aay, e)8oj/, fidy instead of e^rjaav] eSidoy, diSov 
instead of iSiSoa-av. eSoj/, Soy instead of eSocrot' ; ^(pvy instead of e(pvcray. 

5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. Act. has in Hom. the common form 
tffTT}, but H. i, 202. Ko^icTa ; Trort^et in Theoc. instead of irori^es or 7rp6s^€s 
from TIOEfl. — In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and second Aor. Mid. Imp., 
Homer rejects the a and admits the uncontracted form even when it could be 
contracted, e. g. Saiyvo, fxapyao, (pdo, avy^fo, ey^fo. — In the Ion. dialect, the fii-st 
a of the ending -o<rot, second Pers. Mid. or Pass., is changed into e, after the 
rejection of the a, e. g. iirla-reai, Svyeai, instead of eTrio-Tao-at, dvyaaat] hence 
the conti-acted forms itricrTr] in the Ion. poets, and also Svyri (§ 172, 2) in the 
Tragedians. 

6. The short stem-vowel is sometimes lengthened before personal-endings 
beginning with fi and y, according to the demand of the measure, e. g. ri^/xe- 
yos ; SiSovyai ; so also StSwS^i, 'lArj^i instead of "\a^i. 

7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending -<rt 
(§ 220, 4), e. g. 8cf(ri and St^Tjo-t (instead of S^), fiiblriffi. 

8. The contracted Subj. of verbs with the characteristic a and €, is sometimes 
resolved by € in the second Aor., Epic dialect, and regularly in the Ion. 

(a) Verbs in -o (ta-TTj/ij) : — 

{i(TTd-\ 'iTToi Ion. tcre-w, la-re-rjs, IffTe-ufx-cy, -e'-Tyre, -e-ojci 
(<rT(£-) OTu " ari-u, are-ris, aTe-ufiey., etc. 

23*' 



1 



270 



DIALECTS. 



H 224 



Remark 1. So also in Herod.: irpo^armTe and eareacri, ia-redos, instead of 
•daai, -adis, Gen. effrewTos, Neut. earecis, Fern. kaTeuxra. So also in the Att 
Te3^vecis (with ri^vT}K(!}s)y re^vew(Ta, re^yews, Gen. Te^veuTos. 

(b) Verbs in e (riSTj/xt) : — 

Tii9-(S Ion. Tii^-e-co, Ti^4-T)s, Ti^i-oifxiv, -e-Tjre, -i-affi 
Ti^UfMai " Ti^€-(afiai, Ti^e-rjj etc. 

i&« " ^e-w, ^e-r)s, ^e-cofxeVy etc. 
^ciixai " ^e-ufiai, etc. 

Rem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs are like the 
verb r/i^Tj/ii, e. g. 

tuttS, -rjs Ion. rvireca, -er7s, -4(a(j.ev, -eTjre 

Sa/xoi, -fjs " dafiew, -erjs, -ew/xe;/, -eTjre 
eujoe^-w, -7?s " eiipe^eoo, -e'ps, etc. 

(c) Verbs in o (Si5a>/it) ; the contracted second Aor. Subj. is -esolved in 
Homer by means of w, e. g. Sc^wct instead of ScDeri. 

9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according to 
the nature of the verse : — 





Contracted, 


Resolved and lengthened forms, 




Sing. 1. 


arw 


CTettf, (TTe/w, fieiofjLai 




2. 


arfis 


(TT-firfS 




3. 


CrTT] 


CT7]r}, ifi^^T), <pi]rj, (p^i]ri 




Dual. 


crrrtTov 


TTap(TT7]eT0V 




Plur. 1. 


(rrw/xeu 


arewfiev (dissyllable) ardofMeVy KaTafieiofiev | 


2. 


ffriiTe 


(TTTjeTe 




3. 


ctS><xl[u) 


(TTeaaiiv), TrepicTT-fiwcri, H. p, 95. 




Sing. 1. 


SfS> 


&e&>, 3-eta>, dafxeico 




2. 


Sri}S 


S-e??s, Sffijis, and ^eiris 




3. 


Sf'fi 


^erj, iS-T)?;, avi'jri, and /xe^eir) 




Dual. 


^rjrou 


^eierov 




Plur. 1. 


3-(i/iej/ 


S^eajjuej/, i^eio/xej/ 




2. 


^Vre 


da/j-eiere 




3. 


Srwat{v) 


^4(»)ai{v), ^da}<n{u) 




Sing. 1. 


Sq} 






2. 


S(ps 






3. 


S^ 


Sci>r)(n{v) and Scij? 




Plur. 1. 


dwfiev 


Scio^ei' 




2. 


Sure 






3. 


$w(n{v) 


5c«;co(ri(»/) 





Rem. 3. The resolution by means of e is found in verbs with the stem- 
vowels a or e; the e is commonly lengthened, (a) into ei before an o sound; 
(b) into 7) before tj in verbs with the stem-vowel o; (c) sometimes into et, some- 
times into 7j before 7;, in verbs with the stem-vowel e. Verbs with the stem- 
vowel are resolved by a. 

10. The Imj^f iri^-nv, or commonly iTi^ovu, has in the Ion. the form irt^ea 
(like irerixpea lon. instead of irerixpeLu, § 220, 8), eri^-ees, -ee, etc. 

11. In Homer, a shortened foi-m of the first Aor. icrriaav^ is found, namely, 
ea-Taaav, they placed, II. /a, 56. Od. 7, 182, c, 307 ; also eo-TTjre (with the variation 
ecTTTjTe), 11. 5, 243, 246, instead of eVraTC (IcrT^/coTe). 



f^225, 226.3 CONJUGATION IN -/At. Et/U, TO BE. ^Et/Xl, TO GO. 271 

12. In the third Pers. PL Mid, or Pass, the v before the personal-endings -to* 
and -TO is regularly changed, by the Ion. writers, into a (§ 220, 13), e. g. 

Ti(3-eaTot, SiSJoToi, iSeiKvvaTo Ion., instead of TiiS-eyrot, etc. 

But when an a precedes the v, the a is changed into e, and v into o, e. g. IcniaTai 
Ion., instead of '/cToj/Tat, lareaTo Ion., instead of 'icrravTo. 

13. The third Pers. Sing, in the Doric is -n, e. g. 'lo-totl, rl^n, SlSwri, Set/c- 
j/uTt, and the third Pers. PI. ends in -vri, e. g. la-TauTi, rt^ivri^ Sidouri^ Z^ikvvvti. 

14. The foi-ms of the first Aor. Mid. €^7]Kdfir]u and iSco Kafir}!/ and the Part. 
^Kcifxeyos are found in the Ion. and Dor. writers ; on the contrary, the Att. 
writers use here also, the forms of the second Aor. Mid. The remaining 
Modes, as also the Part. ScoKa/jLci/os, are not found. 

1 5. From SiSufj-i^ Homer has a reduplicated Put. Sidiatrofiev and SiSuxreiy. 



$225- El/At CE:S-), to be. 



PEESENT 



S. 1. 
2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 
3. 



Indicative, 
ififil -^ol., instead of i<r-ij.i 
iffai Epic, also Eur. Hel. 1250. 

e?s Ion. 
ivTi Dor. 

et/i€F Epic and Ion. 
eVre regular 
ea.<TL{u) Epic and Ion., hrl Dor. 



Inf. €fj.euai, ifjLfxevai^ ^H-^^i ^fifi^y Epic 
^/xeu or "^/JieSj flfieu or eJfies Dor. 



Subjunctive. 

1. eco Ep. and Ion. fieTeiw Ep. 

2. cTjs Ion. 

3. e77, ci70-i(i'), ^(Ti(j/), et^p Epic, erj 
Ep. and Ion. 

PI. iojfx^v., cTjTe, ewo-f Ep. and Ion. 



Imperative. 
S. 2. eco-o Mo\. and Epic 
P. 3. i6i/rwu Ion. 



Participle. 
idv, iova-a, lov Ep. and Ion. 



IMPERFECT. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



Indicative. 
ia (comp. erii^ea), ^a, eo»/, e<TKO»' Epic and Ion. 
i-r](yba Epic, eaj Ion. 

€77*/ Ep. and Ion. •^tjj/, ^ej/, eo-/ce(i/), Ep., ^s Dor. 
¥i<Tr-r]v Epic 

^U6i/ or ■^^es, eT/ie;/ or eZyites Dor. 
eare Ion. 

etrav (eTrecaf ) Epic and Ion. 5 eJf rro (instead of 
^vTo) Od. u, 106. 



Optative. 
€01 Epic and Ion. 



eots 



eTre Epic 
ehv Epic 



Fu^ icroyMi and ea-aro/xai, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the verse, 
2. iCTeai. 3. ecerai, icelrai. 



§ 226. ET/tt ('I-), ^o ^0. 

Prgs. /«<?. S. 2. eTor3« Epic, €?s Ion. a^hZj;- Sing. 2. Pers. r77o-,^a Epic 

Inf. ^fievai, Xix^v Epic 

iing/] Ind S. 1. ■^ia (and ^^tv) Epic and Ion., ^iW Epic 

2. f;tes (and ^ets), Ifes Epic 

3. ^ie (and jf€i) Epic and Ion., •^i-e(»'} Epic, ^e{v), U{v) Epic 



272 DIALECTS. [^ 227 

p. 1. ■po/Jiey 

S. ^'iov Epic, ^Xffav and ^aav Epic and Ion., laav Epic 
D. 3. 'ir-f]v Epic 
Opt. S. 3. 1.01 Epic, ie/y? II. T, 209. (eV and e5f7? H. o, 82. «, 139. Od. |, 496 

come from ei^tit). 
Fut. and JLor. iliic?. eio-o/iot, eio-aro, third Pers. Dual ieiffda^v, II. o, 544. 



Verbs in -o), which in the Pees., Perf., and second Aoe. Act. and 
Mid., follow the analogy of Verbs in -/it. 

§ 227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 

In addition, to the Aor. forms mentioned (§^ 191, 192), the poetic and 
especially the Epic dialect has the following : — 

A. The Characteristic is a Vowel. 

(a) Stem- Vowel o (e/STjy, BA-) : 

fidWw, to throw, Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, %^Kt]v) ^vjxfiXTjTrjVy Od. ^, 15, 
luf ^v/xfiX-n/jLeuai (instead of -vvat), II. </), 578 ; Epic second Aor. Mid. (e)3A^- 
firjv) i^K-qTo, ^vfxP^\7}UTo, II. |, 27, Inf. fiXrja^cu, Part. fi\T\fievoSy Subj. ^vfi^X-rf 
rai, fi\i}erai (instead of P\r]7]Tai), Od. p, 472, Opt. /SAelo (from BAE-, comp. 
irLfj.iv\riiJ.i), II. V, 288. Hence the Fut. ^X-iicroiiai. 

yrjpdw, or y-qpaaKoo, to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing, iyfipd, H. p, 197, 
KaTcyrjpd, Herod. 6, 72, Inf. (Att.) yripavai, Part. (Epic) yrjpds. The d in 
iyi]pa, etc. is used instead of ri on account of the preceding p. See St5/)(£<rK«, 
§ 192, I. 

Krduca, to hill, Epic and poet, second Aor. Act. (KTA-) cktolu retains the short 
vowel ; thus, e/crd/ie;/, e/cTdre, third Pers. PI. also efcrav instead of e/cTdo-eu/, 
Subj. KTw (first Pers. PI. KTiUfj-ev Epic), Opt. KTai-qv, Inf Kravax, (Epic /cT(£/i€i/, 
KTa/^ei/ai), Part, /eras; Epic second Aor. JNIid. with Pass, sense, aTre/craTo, 
KTacrS-at, KaraKrajxevos. 

oifTao}, to wound, Epic second Aor. Act. ovTa third Pers. Sing., Inf. ohrd/xevauy 
ovrd/xeu (the a remains short as in XsTdi/) ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ovrdfievos, 
wounded. 

ireAa^o}, to approach, Epic second Aor. Mid. iirXinxriv, (Att. cVAo/iTji'), ttA^to, 
TvXrivTa. 

TrXii^di {irifi'KX'qixi), to fill, Y^^io, second Aor. Mid. ^nX-qTO and ttAtJto, iirX-qi/rOf 
also in Aiistoph., who uses the following forms also : Imp. xAtjco, Part. 4fnrXri- 
/xeuos, Opt. i/xirX-^iJii]!/ with the variation iixirXeifxTqi'y as xp^'^V from x/'''7(aa)) and 
ySAeiO from ifiX^fi-nv (BAA-). 

TTTTjo-o-o), to shrink with fear, Epic second Aor. Act. (IITA-) (eTTTTji/) KararrrfiTriP 
third Pers. Dual. 

(p^dvot), to come hefi)re, Epic second Aor. Mid. (p^dfievos. 

Remark. From efirju {fialuco) are found in Homer the forms /SarTjv (third 
Pers. Dual) and vnep^dacw (third Pers. PI.) with tlie short stem-voweL 



♦ 227.^ * VERBS IN -a> LIKE VERBS IN -fJLL. 273 

(b) Stem- Vowel e {eafi-nu, 2BE-): 

AAn. Epic, stem of StScto-Kw, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) idd-rjUf I learned^ 
Subj. Sow, Epic Saeluf Inf. Sarjvai, Epic Saiifievai. 

(c) Stem-Vowel i: 

ipZi-vw, to consume and to vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. i(p^f/x7]u, <{>^i<r^ai, (p^l- 
fjt.€i/os, (p^ia^ca, (pM^fxai^ Opt. (p^r/jLTjV) (p^Tro. 

(d) Stem-VoAvel o {iyvwv, TNO-) : 

fiifipwaKu, to eat, Epic second Aor. Act. ^fipuu. See § 161, 6. 
ir\w(a (Epic and Ion. secondary form of TrAe'w), to sail, Epic second Aor. Act. 
iir\(t3V, eirXwixepy Part. 'ir\<as, Gen. ttAw^/tos. 

(e) Stem-VoAvel v {eSvv): 

K\vu (poet.), to hear. Epic Imp. second Aor. Act. KAGi^t, /f\Dre; and kckKv^i, 

KeK\vTe (§ 219, 7). 
Avw, to loose, Epic secondAor. Mid. \vro, Aiuro. 
irj/eetf, to breathe, Epic second Aor. Mid. (riNT-, from ttv4Fw, nue^ico) &fjLTrpvTo 

instead of aueirvvro, to breathe again, 
aevu, to shake. Epic second Aor. Mid. iaavfiriv, I strove, eaffvo, avro. 
X^o, to pour out. Epic second Aor. Mid. (XT-, from x^^"> X^'^'^) X^^^y x'^M^*'"^* 



B. The Characteristic is a Consonant. 

EWofj-ai, to leap. Epic and second Aor. Mid. a\(ro, SAto, iird\fjL€V05, i'irid\/x€vosj 

Subj. &\7}Tai. 
hpapiffKu ('AP-), to Jit, Epic 6.p^ivos^ fitted, 
yivTo, to take. Epic, from Fe\To, the Digamma being changed into' y and the 

radical \ before t into v (^ 203, B). 
ylyvoixai, to become, poet, eyeuro, y4mo. 
S^X^fiai, to take, Epic eSe/cro, Inf. Sex^ai, Imp. Se|o. The first Pers. Sing. 

iSey/xr^v and the Part. S4yiJ.€vos have, like the Perf. ScBeyixai, the meaning to 

expect, await. 
4K€\i((i>, to whirl, Epic eAeAt/cro. 

iKueofxai, to come. Epic Tkto, 'Ik/jlcvos and Ikji^vos, favorable. 
AEXn, to lie down, Epic 4\4yixr}u, eAe/cro, to lay one's self down (same sense as 

iKe^dfj-rfv), Imp. Ae|o. — Ae^a), to collect, to choose, to count, Od. <, 335. i\4yix7iv, 

I counted myself, Od. S, 451. Ae/cro apiStix6v, he counted the number, 
uiaiyco, to soil, Epic fiidv^v (third Pers. Dual, instead of ipudv-abiiv). 
ula-yo) {/iiiyvv/u), to mix. Epic ix'ikto. 

bpvvo} (opyvfjLi), to excite. Epic Spro, Inf. op^ai, Imp. opo-o, ifpceo, Part. 6pfxeyo5, 
ir<iAA«, to brandish. Epic irdXro, he sprang. 

irep^cDy to destroy, perdo. Homer uses irep^at instead of irep^-a^cu, 
IIHrXi {vfjywfu), to fiXf Epic ttijkto, KariTtTiKTO, 



274 DIALECTS. ' [i 228. 

§ 228. (2) Per/, and Plup. Act. {Comp, ^k 193, 194). 

(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel. 

yiyyofiai, to become; TEFAA, Stem FA: Perf. (Sing, yeyoya, -as, -f) Epic and 
poet, yeyufiev, -are, -ad.(n{v)^ Inf. Epic yiydfjL^v, Part. poet, yeyciis, yeyuaa, 
ycydss. Gen. y^ywTos ; — Plup. Epic iKy^ydrriu. 

Baivco, to go^ Perf. ^4firjKa, BEBAA: Epic and poet. PI. ^SejSd/iej/, -are, -a(n[y), and 
/8e)3ad(rt(j/) ; third Pers. PI. Subj. ifjLfiefiwa-i (PI. Phaed. 252, e), Inf. fiefiduou. 
Part. Epic ^efiacis (also Attic prose fiefidis^ Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 3), -v7a'(fiePa(ra, 
PI. Phaed. 254, b). Gen. fiefiauros (Att. y8e;8aiTos) ; — Plup. e')3e;3d/t€v, -are, 
-daaj'. 

S'eiSw, to fear; besides the forms mentioned (§ 193), the following Epic forms 
are to be noted : S^iSi/xev, SeldLTc ; Inf. Sei8i/iev instead of SeSteVat ; Imp. 
SeiSi3-t, Seldney — Plup. eSeiSt/uei/, eSeiSttraj/. 

£pXoiJ.ai, to come, Perf Epic elK-fiKov^a instead of i\7]\v^a, PI. €ikij\ov^u.€v. 

bvT](TK(a, to die, Perf. r4^vi]Ka, TE0NAA : PL rehvajxcv, ri^vare, rebva(n{v), Imp. 
Ti^vaSn, Part. re^vriKcjs, Ti^vr]Kv1a, Tebvi\K6s or renews (T6i5^i/ea>(ra. Demosth. 
40, 24), rei^j/ecos (Epic re^frjus, -utos, -tjStos), Inf. rei^vavat (Aesch. tcSt/ovow 
from re^ua^vai, Epic Te^vdfxev, -d/xcvai) : Plup. ir^^vacrav, Opt. Ti^i/alrjU. 

TAAn, to endure (second Aor. ctAtji/), Perf. T€T\r]Ka, TETAAA: Dual TeVXaToy; 
PL TeTAct/Aej', TeTAdre, TeTAa(rt(i'), Imp. TerAcu^t, -otw, etc., Subj. wanting, 
Inf TcrAavai (Epic TerAa/xej/), but Part. Epic tctAtjws ; Plup. Dual irerkuToy, 
^reTKa.T7}v, PL ir€T\a,fxey, eTeTAdre, iTeT\a<ray, Opt. TerAa/Tji/. 

MAH, fo sfn'ye, Perf. ficfjioya; MEMAA : Epic /ue/id/iei/, -utoj/, -are, -ad(ri(F), Imp. 
fxefxarce, Part, fie/xads. Gen. /le/xdcDTos and fiefidSros, third Pers. Pi. Plup. 
/U€/Ad(rav. 

Here belong the two participles of 

BifipdxrKw, to eat (second Aor. efipwv), Perf. fiefipwKa, poet. Pe^pws, Gen. -drros; 
irfvrTO), to y«^^) 7r€7rTa»/ca, Epic TreTrrewy, Att. poet. TreirTws. 

(b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. 

It is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of 
the stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with t, the t is changed 
into ^, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g. 

irei'(d^cD, to persuade, irewoi^a, to trust, Epic Plup. eTreVj^^uey, Imp. in Aeschyl 
Eum. 602, Treireia^i (instead of TreTriO-i^i). 

Remark. Thus the Epic form Treiroa-^e. stem TIEN© with the i-ariable o 
(nON0), instead of TreTroVi^are from Trdax^'i fi'Om TreTroV^are by dropping the 
connecting vowel a, comes ireirou^e; and hence as a Tau-mute before another 
Tau-mute is changed into o- (§ 17, 5, comp. 'id-re = "ia-re), TrrrovidTc becomes 
treirai/a-^e, and as y is dropped before tr, ireTroa-Te ; finally, this form, as has been 
seen, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form {^e) and so became weroa^e. 



Per/. Tnd. S. 
D.2. 



KeKpdya, -as, -e{v) (/cpa^o), to bawl) Plup. iKeKp&yeiv, -eis, -a 
K€Kpd.yarov KeKpax^oy iKCKpdyetroy iKfKpax^oy 



3. KeKpSLyaroy KCKpax^oy iKfKpayfiTrjv iK€Kpdx^> 



♦ 229.] VERBS IN -CO LIKE VERDS IN -fU. 275 

P. 1* K€Kpd.yafi€y KCKpayfiey €K€Kp(iy€iiJ.€v iKSKpayfiey 

2. KCKpSLyare KCKpax^^ iKCKpayeire eKeKpax^e 

3. KeKpS.yd(Ti{v) €KeKpdyei<TaVf -€(Tav 
Imp. K4Kpax^h -dx^ci}, •oi'X^^i 6tc. Inf. K^Kpayivai. Part. KeKpayus, 

So the Epic Perf. &u6iyya with the sense of the Pres. I command, ^vayas, S^uaye, 
PI. 6.vo}yiJi€v: Imp. ^vorye and iyax^h di/ftryeTO) and avdox^of, audoyere and 
dvioX^f] Subj. avdayy^ Inf. avceyefiev ; Plup. T]vuyca, riytayei ; Opt. avwyois. 

4yeip(i}y to aivaken, Perf. iyp-f^yopa (stem 'EFEP with the variable e), I am aivake; 
from this, Homer has the forms: Imp. iyp-fjyop^e instead of iypi]y6paT€, Inf 
iyprjySp^ai (as if from iypriyopfiou) and iyp7rY6p^a<n(v) instead of iypiqySpa- 
tri(v) third Pers. PL 

ol5o, I know, the regular forms oXBaney, oJfSare, o'[5cutl{v) are found hut rarely in 
the Ion. and Att. writers (^ 195, 1), second Pers. olZas in Horn, and lou 
(rarely Att. § 195, 1). The form '[B-/xev is Epic^ Ion., and Doric. Inf id/j-evcu 
and tSfieif Epic, Subj. i5c« Epic instead of elSu (Ion. eiSew), Part. iSi/ia Epic 
and elSvia, 

Plup. 1. Pers. Sing. ^5ea (hence the Att. fjSri) Epic instead of ^Seip 

2. " *' 7}€i5eis and rtflSr]s Epic instead of -pSets 

3. " " f?€(5e< and rjdSr], j;5€e(i'), Epic instead of fjSei] — ^etSe, 

Herod. 
3. " PI. la-av Epic instead of f}5e<rav, 
Fut. cjSVjo-o) Epic and also eXao/jMi, 

eoiKUy lam like. Epic, ^iktov (Dual), iticn]v (Plup. Dual); hence in Plup. Mid. 
or Pass. ei'/cTo, 



$229. (3) Present and Imj^erfect. 

Finally, there are certain forms of the Pres. and Impf. mostly in the Epic 
dialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -jjli^ take the personal-endings with- 
out the Mode-vowel. Tims : — 

ctruw, to complete, in Theocritus: Impf 6.trv-(ifs (instead of fj^o/txev), &vv-ro (instead 

of rtvviTo). 
Tavvoo, to stretch, to span, H. p, 393. rdyii-rou (instead of ravverou). 
epvco, to draw, (pmou, etpvro, tpvro^ tpvao, ^vc^ai (§ 230). 
o-euoj, to shake, Epic Pres. ceCrcu and (by variation) o-oCtoj, Imp. cov(to and 

abridged aov, rrova^f, (toikt^u {to move one's self, to hasten). The Imp. has 

passed into the common colloquial language. 
fSo}^ commonly ia^lco, to eat, Epic, Inf eS/xeyau 
^cp», to carry, Epic Imp. <p4pTf instead of <p4peT€, 



276 DIALECTS. [§ 23D 



4 230. Alphabetical List of Verbs in the Dialecta 
to be specially noted, 

kA.u> {aFda), to hurt, to deceive; Horn. 3-i?»'at; the Att. Tragedians use tha 
has the following forms : Aor. aaaa following forms : aWw and ia-aw, 
and acra ; Pres. Mid. aarai, Aor. aaad- jJla, a^ai and ^|a, a^ai. 
fji-qv, Aor. Pass, ada-^riy. Verb. Adj. aico (Ep.), to hear, only Pres. and Impf 
uutSs (a-daros). ouou. Comp. iirdio). 

ayalofxai, Epic and Ion. prose (§ 164) oKaxtX&j (Epic), to trouble, stem 'AXfl, 
and ay do fj-ai (Yjp.), to be anfjry at, &nd second Aor. fjKaxov, Fut. aKaxh<r(o, 
in the Pres. Epic also to. (grudge, to first Aor. rjKdxvo-a ; Mid aKaxKotuu^ 
envy. Put. aydao/xat ; Aor. riyaadiuLrju. dxa/xou or dxwixai, to be sad, Aor. 

aydpca, to collect, ILync second Aor. Mid. riKax6fJi.w (§219, 7) ; Perf. aK-fixefmi 
ayepovTo,'PiXXt. aypofieuos (§22.3, 11); (§ 219, 8, comp. apripeixai, opwpefiai) 
Plup. aynyiparo ; Aor. Pass, ayepbr], and aKdxvH-at, third Pers. PI. oktjxc- 
third Pers. PI. dyep^e;/; Epic Pres. Sarai (§ 220, Rem. 2) and a/cTjxcoTOi, 
Tiyepi^ofiai (§ 162). Part. aKTJxefifvos and aKaxvt^^''OS, Inf. 

ayvoicti, to be ignorant, 'E\). Aor. T]yvoii]<T€ uKaxv^^ai (§ 223, Rem. 4); Plup. 
(§ 207, I), dyudjaaa-KC (§ 205, 5). Epic dKaxfiaro. 

dyyvfii, to break, Aor. Epic ■^la instead aKdxp-ei/os (Epic), sliarpened, ytointed, 
of ea|a ; third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass. from 'AKfi, acuo, instead of aKaypuvos 
dyev Epic instead of idyrjaav. (H 19, Rem. 1, and 208, 2). The x 

&yci}, to lead, Epic second Aor. Imp. comes from the Perf. Act. 
6|eT6, Inf dl4fj.€vai, d|€jufv (§ 223, aKTjSeai, to neglect, Aor. aKTjSecefv). 
10) ; first Aor. Mid. d^aa^e, d^avro. d\doiJ.ai, to wander about, Ep. Perf. ahd- 

oeiSco (prose aSw), to sing. Epic second Atj^uoi (^ 219, 8), aKahrjixiyos, a\d\r}<T- 
Aor. Imp. aeia-fo (§ 223, 10). ^ &ot (§ 223, Rem. 4). 

aeipca (prose atpco), to raise, Epic first oASaiVoj, ?o 7«ai-e increase, Epic Aor. 
Aor. Act. diipa, Mid. deipdiuLrjv, Pass. ^'A.5a»'e(v). 

a4p^r}v ; Epic second Aor. Mid. apc$- dXe^cc, to keep off, Epic second Aor. 
/ir;v from oLipw; Epic Plup. Sw/jto ^KoKkov (§ 219, 7), (from 'AAKXl), 
instead of i\pTO with the variable a\a\Ke7i/. d\a\K(t)u ; Tut. a\aKKT}ara>. 
vowel, and transposition of the aug- d\€Ofj.ai and aKevoficu (Epic), to shun, 
ment ; Epic Pres. rjepe'^o^at (§ 162). Aor. rjKevduTjv, Subj. aX^Tp-ai, Opt. 

'AHMI, ('AE-,) to blow; in Homer, are: ahiaiTo, Imp. oA-ea/r^rV, Inf aK^vaxrhcu 
Part, aeis, deVros ; third Pers. Sing. and dA-eW^ai (§ 223. 8). 
Impf dt), del, Sidei ('AEH) ; in the dA^V'f'^, dAj^iV/cw (Ion. prose), to heal, 
other forms, the rj remains contrary Put. d\^6|a>, etc. 
to the analogy of Ti,^,ut (§ 22-4, 6): dKiTaii'w (Epic and poet.), to sin, Fut. 
dr\Tov, drjuai, drj/xei/ai ; JMid. and Pass. dAirTjcw ; Aor. fjXiTov, aXtrSfi-qv, dAt- 
drjfiai, to blow, v6jj.ei/os koL dri/xevos, TfV^ai ; Perf dAtTTjyuefos, s//j/h/ (§ 223, 
drenched ivitli rain and beaten with the Rem. 4). 
xoind ; Impf INIid. dr}To. dxxojjiai, to spring. Epic second Aor. 

oBofiaL and aldeofxai in Homer, to 6e Mid. oAo-o, etc."(§ 227, B). 

ashamed, to respect. Epic aiS-fjaofjLai, aXuKTeai, to be in trouble, Epic Perf. dXec- 
■pSea^v and ■pSeardju.riv. XvKTrj/xai (§ 219, 8). 

aXuvfxi (Ep.), to take (instead of oipvu.uai, aKvaKca (Ep.), to escape, SlKv^u, ijXv^a. 
§ 169, Rem. 1), only Pros, and Impf dX(paiuw (Ep.), tojind, Sec. Aor. aX<pe7u. 

alp4co, to take. Ion. Perf dpaipr\Ka, dpal- d/jLapTdvca, to miss. Epic Aor. ^jfifiporop 
pv,uai (§ 219, 8); Epic second Aor. (^ 223. 11. and 208. 3). 
Mid. yevTo instead of eXero (§ 227, dfiirXaKicTKco (Ep. and poet.), to err, Fut. 
B ) . duTrXaK7](Tci} ; Aor. ¥ijxirXaKOV. 

kiacra}, Epic (d, but virat^ei, II. </), 126 ; duSduaj (Ep.. jioct.. and Ion.), to please., 
i) ivistead of dVcrco, to rwsA, Ep. forms : Impf idvdavov (Herod.). c-fjvS. and 
^i|a. Subj. dt^o), Part, at^as ■. Aor. 5};/5. (Ep.); Aor. eaSov (Herod.), aSoir 
Puss, ■^ix'^'' (^1=^0 i'^ ^^^^Oi Iiif- o^'X- (Ep.); Inf. aSeTv] Perf. edSa; Fut 



i 230.J LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 277 

oSV«. — Aug., § 219, 4, 5. In The- Mid. Trans., to lead, e0-n<ra, ifirjffd- 

ocritus edSe ; Ep. Aor. eijoSov (§§219, fiTjv ; second Aor. Mid. i^riaeTo, Imp. 

4, and 207, 3). iTri^-fjaeo (§ 223, 10). Ep. secondaiy 

iLyfivo^e, to spring up, Ep. Perf. with form : fii^da^cou, to stalk, strength- 

Att. Reduplication and the variable ened secondary form from ySoiVw ; 

m 219, a, and 140, 4), from also /SijSa, )3t;8wj/Ta, )8i)3co(ra and (from 

*ANE0a BIBHMI) jStiSas ; finally, Imp. /3a(r/ce, 

iiindcc, to meet, Epic ^vreov [§ 222. A and Inf. i-mfiaaKefiev. 

(2)J ; <TvvavrT\Tr]v (§ 222, Rem. 1). jSoAAw, to throw, Ep. second Aor. ejSATjj/, 
avvw, to complete, Epic Impf. in Theoc. ifi\r]/ji.7]v [§ 227, A (a)], Put. ^Xrjaro- 

dyiJ/jLES, dviiTo (§ 229). fiat] Ep. Perf. fi^fioXrjfiai (used of the 

&vu>ya (Ep. and poet. Perf.), to command, mind) ; but ^4^Kt]ixai (of the body). 

6.vMyfjLeu, Imp. &i/(ax^i, etc. (§ 228); fiapeco {Ep.), to be heart/, fiefiapnus {^ 223y 

PIup. T}v(vyea (§ 220, 8). In certain 13). 

forms this Perf. is changed into the fie^pcv^ois (Ep.), to eat, instead of j8t- 

in flection of the Pres., e. g. third PpuiaKois. 

Pers. Sing, avdyei, Impf. ij^aryot/ and fieofiai and fieio/JLai, I icill go, icill live, 

6.v(t>yov; Put. dvw|a> ; Aor. ijvu^a. Ep. Put. jSe'j;, fifSfj-^a^a (§ ?23, 7). 

inravpau (Epic), to take away, Impf fiido/xai (Ep.) instead of ^ ti^ofxai, to 

aTT-nvpuu, -as, -a ; first Aor. Act. Part. force, i^LTjaaro, ^f^i-rjKe. 

airovpas : first Aor. Mid. airrjiipaTo, PifipwaKU}, to eat, Ep. Aor. (Ppuy [§ 227, 

Part. aTroupa/xej/os. A (d)]; Perf Part, fie^pws, -wtos 

k-rra(pi(TK(o (Ep.), to deceive, Fut. arracpri- (§ 228). 

(TO), second Aor. Act. i]Tra<pov, Opt. fiXcUxxKci} (Ep. and poet.), to go, instead 

Mid. airdcpoiTO. of ixXuxtkco (§ 18, 3), Aor. t^ioXoVy 

i.Tr€i\(ci} (Ep), to threaten, aTretA^TTji/ fioKeTy, /xoAciy (also X. An. 7. 1,33, 

(§ 222, Rem. 1). fidKua-if) ; Perf jLi6V;3Aw/fa( instead of 

av6(pff€, an Ep. Aor., he hurried off, /xf/xeKuKa] ; Fnt. fioXov/jLat. 

Subj. airofptrrj. Opt. aTroepcreif. fiodu), to cry out, Ep. Aor. efiwaa instead 

fiiTTw, to join io, Ep. Aor. Pass, kdcp^, of i^6r]<Ta (§ 205, 5). 

fell on. ^QvXojxai, to will, Ep. ^6\frai, $6\c(r^« 

hpapia-KO) (Ep.), toft, stem APH, first (§ 207, 4), irpo^efiovXa, I prefer. 

Aor. ^pa-a, apaai {^ 223, a) ; first Aor. fipvxdofiai, to roar, Ep, Perf. fiffipOxa^ 

Pass, kpdfv instead of ijpShfiaav ; sec- with the sense of the Pres. 

ond Aor. ijpapov (§ 219, 7; also In- TafifO), to many, Ep. Fut. yajueu; Ep. 

trans, to be adapted, to please), more Fut. yafMeaa-erai, II. *, 394, ic ill give in 

usual than the first Aor. ; Perf. dpd- marriage. 

pa (Ion. 6.pr\pa) (§ 219. S),Iamftted, yduifiai (Ep.), to be glad, ydwrai] Fut. 

Intrans., Ep. apa.pv7a (§ 223, 13), Perf. yayvaaerai. 

Mid. or Pass. api]peixai, apr}p(f.ifvos FACl, Ep. Perf., y4yafi€v, to have become, 

(§ 223, Rem. 4) ; Aor. &p/x€yos, adapted etc. (§ 228). 

{i 227, B). yiywva Ep and poet. Perf. with the 

*APAn, apdofiai, to pray. Epic second sense of the Pres. ^o cr^ oh?; in Ilom., 

Aor. ap-fiixevai, Od. Xi 322. third Pel's. Sing, yeywye (also with 

&pvvfj.aL, to gain (§ 188, 1 ). the sense of the Aor.), Part, yeycavws, 

'An, Ep., (a) to bloiv, see Stj/xj ; (b) to Jnf.yeyuyfjj.ey-jl'lvip.dyeyuyfi. From 

sleep, Aor. &e(ra, &(raixev; (c) to satis- the Perf. a Pres. has been formed of 
fy (also Intrans. to be satisfed). Inf. which there are in Horn.: Inf. 7'e7w- 

"d/iicvai instead of affifyai; Fut. ficw; Vf7v, Impf. iyey<louevy. 

Aor. &{ra, &<xaa^ai. Verb. Adj. 6otos, yeiyofiai (Ep.), to be born, to be produced , 

aros. Aor. Mid. to beget, to bear, Subj. yd- 

Baivo), to icalk. to go, Ep. fomis: Perf. yeai instead of yeiyrjai. 

fiffia/jLey, etc. (§ 228); second Aor. ycyro, to seize (§ 227, B). 

Dual fidrr^v, third Pers. PI. (nrep^a- ynpdco, to grow old, second Aor. iyfipa, 

aav (§ 227, Rem.), third Pers PI. etc. [§ 227, A (a)]. 

t^av, fidv (§ 224, 4), Inf. fi-n/xeyai, yoaw (poet.), to zfa«7, Ep. third Pers. PL 

Subj. besides fiai, etc. : fieiu, ^riri, j8ei- Aor. y6ov. 

«^6v (§ 224, 9) ; first Aor. Act. and AoiVu/xt (Ep.), to entertain, to feed (in 

24 



278 DIALECTS. [^ 230. 

stead of Sair-wfii, § 169, Eem. 1), ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild 
Fut. daicrco ; Mid. halvvfjLai, to feast, to beast), in the following forms : Jexa- 
consume, second Pers. Sing. Impf. Ind. rai instead of SexoVrat (§ 220, 13), 
Baiuv {Saiuvo instead of idaivvcro, II. /t, 147, Perf. dedey/xcu with the 
4 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. Sai- sense of the Pres., Put. 5e5e|o;uax, 
pvTo instead of -vito, third Pers. PL excipiam, second Aor. Mid. th^KTo^ 
Sam/aro ; Aor. 4Sai(rdfji.r]v. etc. (§ 227, B) ; Perf. Mid. SeSoKrjfic- 

Baio), Ep., (a) to divide (^ 164), Put. vos, awaiting, lurking, II. o, 730. 
Sda-ofxaL; Aor. (also prose) 4Sa(rdfj.7iv ] Seiio) (instead of SeFto), Ep. instead of 
Yerf. F&s8.54Sa(rfJLai,amdivided,broken, Sew, to rt-anf, from which come eSfvrj- 
SeSatora: ; (b) to 6ur«, to infiame, Perf. ce, Ae ic<inted, STtcev, he was in want 
SeSrje, he burnt; Mid. to burn, blaze, of; Mid. Sevofiai, to be wanting, Fut. 
Intrans., second Aor. Subj. SdrjTai. Seirncrofiai. 

Sa/xudca and Sd/xurjixi, Ep. secondary AIAHMI (AE-), Ep. and older Ionic- 
form of Safxdw, to subdue, from Att. (Xen.), secondary form of Sew, 
which come third Pers. Sing. Pres. to bind, 5idea<n (Xen. An. 5. 8, 24) ; 
Sa/jLva; third Pers. Sing. Impf. iSd/j-va Impf. S/Stj instead of iSidtf, II. A., 105. 
and Bdfjiva, Sa/xj/aa/ce ; second Pers. dlCrf/xai (Ep. and Ion.), to seek; it re- 
Sing. Pres. Mid. Sa/xva; — ddfivrjai, tains the 77 (contrary to ^ 170, 1, 
ddfiuafj-ai, etc. comp. 'AHMI): eSt'^T/ro, ef'^Tjrro, 5t- 

5opi3-aj/w, to s^gep, Epic Aor. eSpa^oy C-na-^cu, Si(-ffiJ.evos (in Herocl.) ; Si(ri<u 
(§ 223, 11). (Horn.), Si'^ecu (Theoc) ; Fut. SiC^itro- 

Sareo/xaij Ep. secondary form, used in ^ai : Aor. iSi^-qtrd^oiv. 

the Pres. and Impf., from Saio/xaiy to AIHMI (AIE-), of the Act. only ivSUa-cuf 
divide. (tliird Pers. PI. Impf), D. <r', 584, they 

AAH (Ep. and poet.), (a) to teach (:= drove away ; Mid., to 7naX;e o»je rwn, to 
StSda-Ku), {h) to learn {^ SiSdaKo/jLai) ', viake free, oftener to scare, to chase 
to (a) belong the Ep. second Aor. (specially with the Inf.), SUvrau, II. 
hiZae (Horn.), eSae (Theoc. and y\>, 475, hUabai, H, /x, 304, Subj. 
Apoll.); to (b) SeSacos (Hom.), SeSo- t'L-qrai, lioDvrai, Opt. Zioiro (comp. 
otri (in other authors) ; Ep. second TiboiTo). 

Aor. Act. eSarjj/, / /earned [§ 227, A 5iw (Ep.), to ^ee, S^e, Seftte, 5/oj/, I fled. 
(b)], from which Ep. Sar)<rofj.ai, SeSarj- Sovrrew (Ep.), to sound, Perf. ScSoiwrcJros ; 
ffo, SeSaTj/ieVos. From the Perf. a Aor. dSovinja-a and eySoujrTjtro (from 
new Ep. Pres. has been formed, SeSd- TAOTn-, comp. tutttw and KTinrfw). 
a<T^ai, Inf. Here belongs also the Svyafxai, to be able, second Pers. Ion. 
Ep. Fut. S-f)u} {I shall find, meet with), Svueai ; Aor. Ep. iSwda^v and iSvvjf 
drieis, Sr)Ofi€v, Here (§ 223, 7). odnnv (^ 179, 2). 

BeuTo (Ep.), it seemed, Aor. Soda-ffaro, Svw, to go in, to irrap up, Ep. Sv/xevai in- 
third Pers. Sing. Subj. Soda-aerai stead of SCj/a; from cSi/k ; Ep. second 
(instead of -ajrat). Aor. Mid. SvaeTo, Swrfo, Sv<r6nfvos 

SeiSw, to fear, the Pres. occurs only in (§ 223, 10). 

the first Pers., Fut. Seiaofiai ; Aor. 'Eyeipw, to awake, Ep. Aor. fypero, he 
eSeitra, Ep. eSdeia-a (as is probable aii-oAe, etc. (§ 223, 11) ; Ep. forms of 
originally eSFcKTa), Perf. Ep. SeiSoi/ca Perf. iyprryopa are iypvyop^e, etc, 
instead of SeSot/co, and BeiSia Ep. (^ 228). From the Perf. has been 
instead of 545La (§ 228). formed the Pres. iyprryopoay, uxitch- 

SeiKyvfii, to show. Ion. (AEK) Se|w, eSe^a, ing, Od. v, 6, as if from iypTjyopdac. 
etc.; Mid. 5et/f;/ii^at in the Ep. dialect cSw and eo-^oj (Ep.), to eat (= ia^iu), 
has also the sense, to (/reef, to welcome, Inf. eB/j-evou (§ 229) ; Impf. eSov and 
to drink to; so also in the Perf. 8ei- edea-Koy; Perf eSTjSws; Perf. Mid. or 
SeyfjLai with the sense of the Pres., Pass. e'STjSoTou. 

SeiSe'xaTot third Pers. PI. ; Plup. M- 'E@n, from which come the Ep. g^v, 
Se/cTo, to icelcome, BeiSexaro, ivont, accustomed, and the Perf. cIm^ 

BfpKOfjLai, to see, Ep. second Aor. eSpducoy (§ 140, Rem. 3). 

(§ 223, 11). 'EIAn, 'lAn, Aor. elSor, /satr, Ep. rSoF, 

8exo/xot, to receit^e, Ion. Se/co^uat; in Hom. Inf. iSeciy, Subj. JSw/u; Ep. Prea 
this rerb signifies also, to to^, er«/>- Mid. eJfSercu, if see;/is, €i5d/i€Kar, op- 



♦ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 279 

pearing, making like; Fut. ela-o/jLai ; iueira) or ivviiro} (Ep.), to say, to tell^ 

first Aor. fl<Tdfxr\v and hiaafx-np, elad- Impf. with the sense of the Aor. 

fievos and ieitrd/jLet/os (§ 219, 4) ; sec- eyeirov, evveiroy, Aor. evia-jrov (comp. 

ond Aor. ib6fjLr]v, I saw. eorTrd/XT]}/ from 'iiro/xai). Imp. evterTrey, 

.EIKH, third Pers. Sing. Impf. fl/fe, it Subj. ivlairu, Opt. iv'^nroLfjn, Inf. eVtc- 

appeared^ II. tr, 520 ; Perf. eoi/co, Jam Trerj/, Fut. ^viy\i<t} and evL<TiT7]<T(a. 

like, Ep. third Fers. Dual cif/croj/ and eHjco^o, Ep. Perf". from 'ENGH or 'EN- 

Plup. itKT7)y (§ 228), Part. ioiKus and E0n with the sense of the Pres. and 

II. $, 254. elKus, dKvta and II. <r, 418. Impf, ineyrjyoSte, to sit on, II. j8, 219. 

ejoi«y?at ; Ep. Plup. Mid. ^iVcro and. to lie on, H. Cer. 280. Comp. a.vi]vo- 

^iKTo, it tvas like. ^e above. 

flKvw (Ep.), to cover, envelop, elXvaco, iyiirTCD (Ep.), to chide, second Aor. eV 

etKvfiai, third Pers. PI. (Ixtarai: from 4vIttov, riv-iirairiv (§ 219, 7). 

^Avftj comes Aor. Pass.- f'A.i/tri^i'. 'dvuvixi, to clothe, Ep. and Ion. e7j/UjUt; 

dfAo), to press, to drive, from which in Ep. Fut. kcraw ; Aor. eaaa and eVo, 

Hom. only elxdfifvos ; in the same ktrad^iriv, k^craaro, eaaa-^ai ; Perf. 

author, €<A.ea>, (c'lKfov; the rest are fl/xai, eftroi (and eVo-at), efrat, etc., 

from 'EA, e. g. eAtraj', Inf. fAo-at and d/xfyos: second Pers. Plup. eWo, 

4e\crai, Part. cAcras (§ 223, 6) ; eeA/xat, third Pers «(rTo and eea-To, third Pers. 

^€A/i€j/os; second Aor. Pass. ^ciAtj;/ Dual eo-i^;, third Pers. PI. e'/aro ; — 

(from tAAw), third Pers. PI. &\ey, on efVo-aro, eetrTo, cofnp. §'219, 4. 

aXrjyai and aX-fjfjLfyai, aKels. eoiKa, I am like, § 228. Comp. 'EIKfl. 

flfii, to be, § 225. eVatco, to understand, Aor. (ir4]'i<ra (I), 

e7/ii, fo <7o, § 226. ^ Herod, and Apollon. (§ 130, Rem. 1) ; 

(tpyu, to shut out, Ep. Impf. epya^ov tlie poet, atw is found only in Pres. 

(§ 162). Comp. epyco. and Impf. 

fXpofxai. (J^p. and Ion.), to ask, Impf iTravpla-KOfiai (Ep. and poet.), /o receive 

(ipSfirjy ] Fut. ilp'{](ToyLai ; second Aor. advantage or injury from a thing, Aor. 

^jpS/jL-qy, Sul)j. fpwfxc^a. Opt. fpoiro, JiT7}vp6fji.T]y, iiravpea^ai (ih'St Aor. iir-qv 

Inf iptabai in llom. witli the accent pdfirjy, in Aoschyl. and in the later 

of the Pres.; — Ep. secondary forms tfciters) ; Fut. iTravp-ficro/xou. Of the 

of the Pres. (a) iptofiai. ipffo-^at; Act. in the sense to touch, to injure, 

Impf. ipfoyro] (b) ipeu, Subj. ipeu- Homer uses, second Aor. Subj. ^7rai5- 

fifv, Opt. ipioifx^y, Part. 4p4<i>y. pr], Inf. iiravpuy, iwavpffiey. 

'EIPTMI, see ipvu. iiriaTatuu, to know, second Pers. ivlarrf, 

(tpa>, Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a Ion. poet. 

row, to string, first Aor. i^dpas, exse- eirw, as a simple, in Act. only Ep. in 

rens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf. Mid. or the sense tractoaliquid, to take care of 

Pass, iep^iai, iep/ifyos (in Herod, ^p (II. (, 321); generally used as a 

fx.4yos), Plup. fepTo. compound, e. p. irepi4irw, ZUttw, etc., 

ffpo), to say, Pres. only Ep., Fut. ipw, second Aor. Act. (4<rtroy instead of 

Ep. 4p4(t}. ((r-eiroy, in Homer 4n4ariroy, iirnnrfTu, 

(Tea, Ep. Aor., I placed, from the stem iirta-nuy ; Fut. '4\pu, Ep. i(p4^fts ; Mid. 

'EA- (comp. sed-eo). Opt. &.v4<raifii, also as a simple, generally signifying 

Imp. 4l<Toy, Part. '4<Tas {av4^ayr€s ; to follow ; Impf. Ep. kTT6jxy]y instead 

vTTiiaas, Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf. 4<p4(T- of fM/jLrjy ; Fut. ^ofiai ; second Aor. 

vai: Aor. Mid. ecrdnrjy and i4<raaT0, Mid. k<nr6^T]v, (nr4a^ai, crirov {iirKT- 

Tart. 4(p((rcrdiJ.(yos(ller. \, G6. ficrdfie- xoD); Ep. forms: (nre7o, e(nr4(r^(v, 

yoi), Imp. i(pfcraai; ¥ut. (<p4(T<rf(T^ai. Subj. ecnra^/xat, Opt. c(nroi/xr)v, Inf 

i\avyu, to drive, Pres. e'Aao*, Ep. 4\6(i} ; 4<nr4<rbai arid (nrecrStai, Part. kaiT6jx€- 

Impf. Ep. ihtav ; Put. Ep. 4\6u<rt yos. Herodot. has from TrepUiro) also 

instead of cXwat; Ep. Perf. ^ArjAa- '7Tepie<p^ivai and irepieipea^ai instead 

fifyos (§ 223, Rem. 4). third Pers. of ■>rfpie(p^(ri(r^ai. 

Sing. Plup. (K-nXddaTo (§ 220, Rem. €^70, commonly i4pya3, Ep., instead of 

2); Ion. Perf. iXi'jKaafiai and Aor. (rpyu, to shut' in and shut out, v-'ith the 

Pass. 7]Kd(T^y. . secondary forms iepyvvfxi, ipyd^w, 

4\f\iC<o, to whirl, Ep. second Aor.'Mid. ifpyd^u, Aor. ep|o; Perf. Mid. or 

ik4MKTo (§ 227, B). Pass. eepyiML, third Pers. PI. 4pxaTai^ 



280 DIALECTS. [{ 23^ 

third Pers. PI. Plup. iepxaro and Attic Redup.) ; Ep. Plnp. ivt&xaro, 

ipXo-To ; Aor. Pass, epx'^ety- ^^^V ^^^ chsed, II. /i, 340. 

^/jSw and p4^<a (Ep.), to do, Fut. pe^a>, ''Hfiai, to sit, earai, earo (Ion.), and eta- 

Aor. eppe^a and epe|a, or ep^w, ep^a ; rot, ci'oto Ep., instead of ijvrcu, ^vro. 

Perf. eopya, Plup. iwpyeiu (^ 140, ^^^vo (Ep.), to sink, Perf. inr€fj.yi}fivKf. to 

Rem. 3), Perf. Mid. or Pass. iepy/i4- let the head sink, II. x» 491. The 

uos, Aor. Pass, pex'^^^^) hx^V^a^- above form has the Att. reduplication 

ipeiSw, to prop, Ep. Perf. iorjpedaTai e/i-^/uu/ce (^ 219, 8), and is strength- 

(§ 219, 8). ened by v (§ 208, 5). 

ipeiTTw (poet, and prose), to throw down, Qepofiai (Ep.), to warm one's self, Fut. 

Ep. Plup. epepiTTTO (§ 219, 8). ^ep(rofxai (§ 223, 6); Aor. ^(^epTjy, 

4pi5aiua> (Ep.), tojifjht, Aor. Mid. ipiZi)- Subj. ^(peco. 

(TaaSiai. ^\eu) (Ep. and poet.), to sprout, Fut. 

ipiCco, to fight, Ep. ipiCofJUU, Perf. Mid. ^r]X-f]<rw, etc. ; Perf. re^Xa {rcStaXvia 

ipripL(Tixai (^ 219, 8). Ep. § 223, 13) ; second Aor. l^oAoi/. 

f ppu}, to wander about, ^]). Aor. epffat, to 0Hnn (Ep.), to stun, Perf. Te.*77Tro; 

hurry away (§ 223, 6). Plup. eVe^/Treo; second Aor. (from 

ipv^aiuu) (poet.), to redden,'F\it. ipv^a-co. TA4>n) iTd<poy. 

ipvKO), to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act. ^v-fiaKco, to die, Perf. Ti^vt^Ko^ PI. rtdva' 

TfpvKaKOV, ipvKaKceiv (§ 219, 7). fici/, etc. (§ 228). 

cpuco and elpvQ} (Ion. and Ep.), to draw, bpdixTKU) (Ep., Ion., and poet.), to spring, 

Fut. ipvaru) {era) and Ep. ipvovai; Aor. tuopov \ ¥ut. ^opovfuu.'Ep. ^op4- 

Aor. epicro ((TO-) and f'tpiJaa; Fut. o/iou : Perf. Tc,d^opa. See § 161, 14. 

'Mid. ipvao/jLai and Ep. epvea-^cu; Aor. 'I5p(^ft> (Ion.), to sw&it, iSp&<ri, iSpuyres, 

fpiiad/j-rfv (ccr) and elpv(rdij.r]v, Perf. IhpSxTa. lhp(fi]v (^ 137, Rem. 1). 

Pass, third Pers. PI. clpvarai, II. |, TTy/xt, to send (Ep. and Ion.). Aor. eijico: 

7.5, and Plup. fXpwTo, II. tr, 69. etpti- Fut. t^o-w, but Od. c, 265, dvcVci ; in 

oTo, II. 0, 654 (of ships drawn to the Ep. and Ion. dialects, there are 

land, V long in the Arsis); Plup. several forms from the theme 'in, 

Mid. etpvro {(pdayauou, had draivn the e. g. avUi instead of i.yirj(rt Her., 

sword, V long in the Arsis), 0&. Xi ^vyiov instead of ^vyUtray Ilom., ^/ic- 

90. — Secondly, the Mid. in Horn. t/cto and ^e^ert^fVor Herod., instead 

and poet, takes the sense to save, to of ne^ifTo, fxf^dfifyos. 

shelter (from danger) ; in this sense iKyeo^iai, to cotKe, Ep. Pres. tcu and 

there are the following forms : epOa-o, Impf iKoy; Ep. Aor. t^oy (^ 223, 10) 

iipvro and epvro, which are to be and "ikto. etc. (§ 227, B). 

regarded as syncopated forms of the 'lAHMl (instead of 'lAA). to be merciful 

Impf — The two following Mid. Of the Act. only the Ep. Imp. tXrt^i, 

secondary forms have also the sense be merciful (in addresses to the gods) 

of to c/uard: (a) Ep. 'El^TMI, Inf. instead' of T\ddt (^ 224, 6), as in 

elpvixevai, Hes. 0pp. 816, Mid. to Thcoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. iKritcTjat : 

guard, eXpvarai instead of ("ipwrai, Plup. Opt. Ep. i\-f]Koi ; Mid. poet. 

Inf. epvcr^at, clpva-^ai; — (b) Ep., "Kaficu, to appease. 

poet, and, though very rare, Attic laa/j-i (Dor.), to know, t<r7is,J<rdTi,i4rafuy., 

prose pvofxai. Inf. ^va^ai instead of Part, ttras. 

pvea-^ai; Impf third Pers. Sing. Kaiyvfxai (Ep.) instead of koISwocu 

ipvroy teas icatched, Hesiod. Th. 304, (§ 169, Rem. 1) from the stem KAA. 

third Pers. PI. puar' instead of cpwoi'- to ejccel, Perf. KCKourfuu; Plup. (Kt- 

ro {they protected) ; Aor. ippv<Ta.ixT)v Koia-firjy. 

and Ep. (ivaafxriv (but II. o, 29. pvaoi- koIco, to burn, Ep. Aor. cjoja (Trag. 

ixr^y). e/c€o), Subj. tcfjojxfy instead of -wucy, 

tpXojJLai^ to go, Ep. Perf. elK-ftKov^a, first Opt. third Pers. Sing, jr^tu, third 

Pers. PI. €l\r]\ov^iJ.fy ] Epic Aor. Pers. PI. /c^cuev, Inf. jc^at (in the 

^\v^ov. Odyss. also kc7cu, Keiofiey. jcetarres) ; 

?X<»> fo have, Ep. Aor. eo'xei-^oi', (rx^^ov Aor. Mid. itajd^rty, tcridfjifyos (in the 

and e(Txov {\ 162); Ep. Perf. oxw^a Odyss. Kcia/xcvos, Kflamo); second 

(for ti/cwxo, K and x being trans- Aor. Act. iKar^y \l bunied, Introns.), 

posed, and the word having the Inf. Karjfuyai, 



$ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 281 

Kaixv<D, to iceary one's self, Ep. KeKfiijcis, KXa^io, to sound, Ep. Perf. with the sense 
-wTos, -6tos {§ 223, 13), Ep. second of the Pres. K^KX-nya, KCKkrryus, PI. 
Aor. Subj. /c€Kaft(y (§ 219, 7). K€K\r}yoin-es (as if from KeKK-nycc) ] 

Kei/xaiy to lie, in Horn. Keovrai, as if from Aor. eKkdyou. 

KiOjxtu ; Ep. and Ion. Kferai, Keecrdai; /cAeia>, to shut, Ep. and Ion., KXnico, Aor. 
second Pers. Sing. Kclaai and /ce?oj, iKX-ifiaa (r), Khtficai ; Perf. Mid. or 
third Pers. PI. KeTyrai and Ep. Kcia- Pass. K€K\r]i^cu (third Pers. Pi. /ce/cAe- 
Tcu and (Ion.) Kcarai, Snhj. Keufiai, aroi instead of /ce/cA-Tjaraj) : Aor. Pass, 
third Pers. Sing, /cf/rot ; Impf. Kfaro iK\r}i(r^i/ ; from the Ion. kAtj/w come 
and Kciaro Ep. instead of eKdmo ; the forms often fonnd in the Att. 
«€V#C€To ; Ep. Fut. Keiu), «cw, Kelaiv, writers, viz. kKvco, e/cAT^tro, K€K\riixai. 
Ketav, Keif lieu. KAe'co (Ep.), to celebrate, of which only 

Ke'ipcv, to shear off, cut off, Ep. Kepaca, /cAe'o^at, Impf. iK\eo instead of e/cAeeo 
eKfpaa (^ 223. 6), hut eKeipd/jL-nv. (§ 220. 10). 

KeWu, to drive, Ep. eweAtra (§ 223, 6). /cAyoj (Ep.), ^o ?iear. Imp. /cAve. KKvere ; 

KeKofuu (Ep. and poet.), to wrj/^, Fut. second Aor. Imp. KAO^^t, kADtc; and 
KeKTjcroficu, first Aor. ^/ceArjca/xTji/ ; KfKXvbi, KeKXvre [§227, A (e)] ; the 
second Aor. iKeK\6fn]v, etc. (§ 223, Impf eKXvou is used instead of the 
11). Ind. Pres. 

Ketneui (Ep.), to prirh. sflmnh, Aon Kdirro). to s^r/Xre, second Vevi. KeKOira in 
Kfvaou (§ 223. 6). Horn., instead of KeKo<pa. 

KfpdvvvpLi. to mix, Ej). /ce/joa- (/cepoirras) Kopevvvfiu to satisfij, Ep. Fut. Kopeco and 
and KepaicM) (Imp. /ctpajt). KipvoM [Kip- Kopeau, Perf. KeK6pT)ficu, to wliich the 
i/oy, Impf. eKipva) and Kipinfj/j-i (Imi)f Part. KeKoprjus (§ 223, 13) in respect 
iKipin], Kipyds) ; Ejj. Mid. Kepuvrai (us to its meanintr belongs. 
if from Kepa/xau) ; Impf Kep6wvro Ep. Koreu) and Koreofiai (Ep.), to 6e angry, 
instead of iKepwvro from Kepdw. first Aor. Part. Koreaas ; Perf. Part. 

K6p5oiVa>. to //o/h, in Ion. and later wri- KeKor-qwi (§ 223, 13) ; Mid. Fut. Kore- 
ters : 4K(p5r}(Ta; KfpSrjaeff^au and icep- a-ofiai (a-ff); Aor. iKoreffdixrjv (era), 
dcweofify in Herod. Kpd^co, to Unci, cry out, poet. I'erf. KeKpd- 

Kev^u (Ep.), to coucea/, Fut. icevau, AoT. ya, KiKpayfiev, etc. (§ 228) ; Fut. k6- 
^Kct/aa ; IVrf. KfKfuda ; second Aor. Kpd^ofxai, Aristoph. 
e/cCdof, <ct)3oj/, Subj. KfKvdo) (§ 219, Kpaifw ( Kp. and poet.), to complete, ac- 
7); Mid. only Pres. and Impf. cotn])lish, Ion. commonly Kpaiaivco, 

hiiBw, to make anxious, in the Act. only Impf. iKpcdcuvov; Ep. Fut. Kpaveu; 
Ej). Fut. Ki/Si^o-a) ; Perf. /ce/crjSa, / <///« Aor. eKprjva and Ep. iKp4)r\va, Imp. 
anxious ; Ep. Fut. Perf. KeKaS-fitrofiai, Kpnvov and Ep. Kpr}r}voy, Inf KpT\vai 
11. ,^, 3.')3. and Ep. /cpjfji'at ; Ep. Perf. Pass. 

Kihvafxai. Ep. SCOOndnry form of (r/cfSa*" K^Kpaavrai (Va\x. KeKpatnai) ; Ep. Fut. 
yvfiai, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf. Mid. Kpayeofiai. 

Kiyvfi-ai (Kp.) instead o( Kiveontu. to stir Kteiva}, to kill, Ep. Fut. tcrevew (Ep. 
on^'s self] to be niond. Pass. Kiyvfxeyos. Part, /cravt'ovra, >faToucTa»'€Oi;(rj(j') and 

Kipydo) and Kipyrj/xi, Ep. secondary form Karaxrayeeabe with the variable a; 
of Kepcivi/O/it, to /«<>, from which comes Aor. Ep. and poet. I'/ctqj/oj'; Ep. 
the Part. Kipyds, Impf. iKipva and second Aor. Act. cKray, etc. [§ 227, 
ifjpjoj. A (a)]; first Aor. Pass, third Pers. 

icixiyu) and ictx^i^oM*" (^d^- ""^^ po^^); 1*1- ^fra^ey Ep., instead of e/cret^- 
to reach, meet with, Aor. e/cix"*'! Put. (rov. 

KixvtTOfiai, other forms not found in Kupeu, rarely K^po) (Ep, and poet.), to 
the Att. poets; but Ep. Impf iKlxa- ^fi'id, to reach, Aor. eKvpaa (§ 223, 6), 
yoy, second Pers. iKixfis (from and more seldom ^jcvpTjrra, Fut. /cwp(r» 
KIXE-) ; second Aor. Subj kix<^ and and more seldom Kvp-naco; Perf. KeKv- 
KiXf'i<^- Opt. Kixdv^, Inf KlXV^o^^ pr]Ka. 

Part. Kix^is and Mid. /c<xV«»'oy> Aor. l^yxdyc}, to partake, Ion. Fut. xd^oixai; 
Mid. 4Kix-h<raTo. Ep. Aor. Subj. AeAoxw (§ 219, 7), 

Ww (Ep.), to (/o. only Pres. and Impf. Trans, to make paiiaker in the phrase 
The Part. Kiwy is 'accented like lay ; ,&ai/oiTa in;p(is, to give the dead the 
Aor. fiereKia^oy (§ 162). ^onor of Jire, i. 6. 7na^e Aim partaker 

24* 



282 DIALECTS. [^ 230 

of; Perl Kihoyxa Ep., instead of MAXl (Ep.), to strive for, Perf. with the 

eJ!X77xa [Od. A, 304. Xe\6yxo.(Ti\. sense of the Pres., in Sing, ficfiova 

AAZTMAI {= AaCofj-ai, to take), Epic (comp. yeyova with TEFAA), /ac/iotov, 

i\dCvTO. [x4iia{x.eu, etc. (^ 228). 

Kafi^auo), to receive, Ion. \diJ.\pofjLai, \e\d- fieipofiai (poet.), to obtain, Ep. enfiope 

firjKa, AeAct/i/xoi, \e\dfx(p^ai, i\dix(pSrr}v, third Pers. Sing. Perf. (and II. a, 

XafjLirrios] also Dor. AeAajSTj/ca, but 278), third Pers. Sing, second Aor. 

XeXaiifiai, XeXacp^ai] in Di'amatists Act. (Augment, § 219, 6): Perf. Pass. 

AeATjyUjuaiJ Ep. Aor. AeAaySeVd^ai (§ 219, el/xaprai. it is determined (§ 123, 4). 

7). ^eAw, commonly Impers. fieKei, it con- 

Kav^dva, Ep. oftener \^^co, to be hidden, cerns, Hay it to heart, Ep. Perf. /x€/iTj- 

concealed ; Ep. second Aor. Act. Ae, Part. /ixejUTjAcis: Ep. Perf. Mid. /xeV 

Subj. \€\d^a) and Mid. AeAo^o'/urj;' )3AeTot and Plup. /ieu^SAero instead of 

(§ 219, 7); Perf. Mid. KeXda/JLui ; in iJ.efi-f)\T)Tai, e/xe/iTjATjTo, conip. /8Awa- 

Theoc. \a(r^riij.€v {^^ ATjo-i^yjvoi) in- /cw; yet these forms were more 

stead of Ao^-eV^^at •, i-mK-n^co and properly considered as a Pres. and 

iKX-fi^w, to cause to forget, Ep. Aor. Impf * 

eTreATjcra; iK\4\a^oy. fievoivdw, fievoiueoy, ^ 222, I, A (2). 

\dcrK(o (Ep. and poet.), Aor. eAdjcoj/; /u7j/cao/iai, to W^af, Ep. Perf /ue/tTj/ca with 

Ep. Perf. AeATjKo (poet. AeAd/ca and the sense of the Pres., /ic^tcucwMi 

€/cAeAoKa even in Demos.) with the (§ 223, 13); Aor. /icuc&Jr; itom the 

sense of the Pres. ; Ep. Part, AcAtj- ^^erf. the Impf. ifxefn^Kov is formed. 

Kds, \€\aKu7a (§ 223, 13) ; Fut. AaxT)- /itaiVoj, to sto/«, Ep. second Aor. fjudv- 

(TOfxai; first Aor. poet. eAaKrjco, Ep. bT)v (§ 227, B). 

Aor. Mid. \e\dKovro (§ 219, 7). fiiyvv/jn, to 7nix, Ep. Aor. (iLkto (§ 227, 

AEXn (Ep.), to cause to lie down, eAe|a, B). 

i\c^d/j.r}v, I laid myself doicn, I lai/, I /jLVKdoinai, to roar, Ep. fiffiVKo^ Aor. 

rested, Ep. Aor. iKey/x-nv, etc. ( § 227, B ). ffivKoy. 

KovoD, to wash, Ep. Aoew, Aoue'co, Impf. Na/w, Ep. and poet., to tftrc//. first Aor. 

i\ov€oy, eX6eov; Aor. Inf Kodcrcrou, cyaa-aa, I caused to dwell; Mid. with 

Part. Aoecrcras; second Aor. Act. Pass. Aor., to settle down: vdaaoficuy 

ekoou, third Pers. Sing. A<^6 Od. k a-n-evacrcrdii-nv, ivd(rbT\v. 

361, \6ov; Mid. Pres. Inf Xov^abai v€ik4w (Ep.. poet., and Ion.), to quarrel^ 

and KovtT^ai; Fut. Mid. KoicraojjLai'^ Fut. veiK^aw , Aor. iyeUcaa (§ 223, 

Aor. Mid. Inf Koecraaa-^ai ; Part. 1). 

Xoeaa-djjL^vos ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. vi(u>, to wash, Pres. and Impf : the other 

AeAoy/xot. tenses are formed from ylvTO), which 

\vci), to loose, Ep. second Aor. Mid. among the later writers came to be 

Auto, Aui/To [§ 227, A (e)] ; Ep. Plup. used in the Pres. and Impf al-^o; 

Opt. AeAuTo (§ 224, 3). thus, Fut. yixf^u, Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

Maivofiai, to rave {iKfjLalvo), to make veyi/jL/jLai, poet.; Aor. Pass. ivip^Vf 

raving, also Aor. efj.r}va, Arist. ; doubt- Hippocr. 

ful X. H. 3. 4, 8) ; second Perf inc/nj- vicroro^ai (Ep.), to go, Fut. vlaofuu (the 

j'tt (Sojjh.), / am ravnig (Theoc. 10, form veiVcro/uu is rejected). 

31, ixejxdvriiiai) ; the Fut. is ixayovfiai '0AT250MAI (Ep.), Aor. a>Sv<rdfir}y, to 

in Herod, {fiayfja-oixai in the later be angry. oSuadixfyos ; Perf. o5wSi;c/mu 

writers). with tile sense of the Pres. (§219. S). 

fiaiofxai (Ep.), to seek, Fut. (xdcroixcu olda, to know. 4 228. 

(eVi^atrtreTaj) ; Aor. ifiatTdixrjv. o^ofxai, to think; Ep. oXw, 6i<t>, otoiuu, 

fxay^dyw, to learn, Fut. in Theoc. /xa^€v- uUixtiv, ototro ; Aor. !Mid. oto-a/xiji/ ; 

/ua£ (like (jiaxovfxai). Aor. Pass. u3tabT\v. oitr^els. 

(idpyafiai. (Ep.), to Jight, only Pres. and 6yofMai (Ep. and Ion.), to l>laine, 6yo<Tau, 

Impf, like Svya/iai, but Opt. fiapvol- tliird Pers. PI. oyoyrcu. Imp. Svotro ; 

fjLr}y, Od. A, 513. Impf. a)v6urfy. Opt. ovoifn)v, 6yQiT0\ 

udxo,uaL, to contend. Epic fiax^ovrcuj Fut. ovoaofxcu : Aor. wyo<jdu.r]v and 

/iaxerrat, fiax^oiTo, fiax^oiuro, Part. avoa^y ; Ep. ouKco-id-e (comp. ouAiiu- 

;uaxej(^yuej/os and ixax^ovfj-eyos ; Ep. cyos), H. w, 241, instead of iy^tr^t 

Fut. iJ.ax'fio'oixou and nax^cro/jLcu; Aor. and this instead of 5»'<w.^€ from 'ON-; 

inax^(Tdyi.iilv. Ep. Aor. Mid. d^varo. 



^ 230.] 



LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 283 



opditi, to see. Ion. 8p€coy Epic 6p6(a, Impf. first Aor. eirepa-a (§ 223, 6) ; second 

iopeov] Ep. second Pcrs. Sing. Pres. Aor. ^Trpa^ou {^ 223,11); Ep. second 

Mid. (JpTjat, third Pers. Sing. Impf. Aor. Mid. Inf. Trep^ot (§ 227, B). 

6priTo ; Ion. Perf. oirwira. v^To/xai^ to fly, second Aor. iirrSix-qu, etc. 

•OPEFNTMI, from Avhich Ep. opeyvvs, (§ 223, 11). 

stretcliinfj out ; opeyco, to stretch; Mid. irevkto/j.ai (poet, instead of irvv^duoi.Lai), 

to stretch one's self, to reach after, Ep. Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt. imrvStoL- 

Perf. Mid. opup^yfjiaiy third Pers. PI. to; Perf. TreTrvafxai (§ 223, 14). 

opcopexarai (§ 219, 8), Plup. third iretpvov, eirecpt^oy, ^p. second Aor. Act. 

Pers. PI. opccptxaro. of *ENn, to kill (§ 219, 7). ]*;irt. irecp- 

ipvviii (poet.), to excite, Fut. opffv, Aor. vuv with iiTCgular accentuation; Ep. 

&p<Ta (^ 233, 6); Ep. Perf Intrans. Perf Pass. irecpaTai, irecpda^ai ; Fut. 

upapa (§ 219, 8), Suhj. opdoprj, Plup. Perf Trefriaoixai (comp. SeSTjcroMa* 

opwpei and wpupei] Ep. Aor. d/pope;' ; from SeSe/xai). 

i\Iid. opvO/xau, to rouse one's self, to stir, irf^yvvfiai, to flx, Ep. Aor. tt^kto, /care- 

Ep. Fut. bpilrou, Aor. upSfxrin -^ Ep. tttikto (§ 227, B). 

Aor. Mid. S}pTo, etc. (§ 227, E) ; Ep. 7rtA»/a/iat, Eq. secondary'' fomi of TreAa^w, 

Perf opwpeTcu, Subj. opupTjrai {{. 219, to draw near, only Pres. and Impf. 

8). irlfiirX.TjfjLi, to flll^ Ep. Aor. Mid. ttAtjto, 

h(T(ppalvofjiai, to smell, Ion. Ao?. Mid. etc. [§ 227, A (a)]. 

o(r(\>pavro. iriirrci}, to Jail, Ep. ireTTTedis (§ 228). 

ourdaj, to wound, Ep. Aor. o//../, etc. Trnvdca and Trirmfjixi, Ep. secondary form 

[^ 227, A (a)]. of irirdvvv^L, to spread out, from 

6<p€i\(a, to owe, be under ohligalni.. cur/ht, which come Impf. irirva instead of 

inust. Ion., poet, (except ir. t\iti dra- iirlrva, and Part. Tnrvds. 

matic dialogues of Att. •tniUit), and irX-fjcra-ct, to strike, Ep. second Aor. Act. 

in late prose u<pf\ou, -€,, -c, Ep. e7r€7rA7j7oi/, 7re7r\Tj7oi' and 7re7rA7}7({;a7jv 

i!i<pc\Xou, 6(pfWou, in io/i/ii which (§ 219, 7). 

e.\pi-css a ivish. irKuw (Ion.), to sail, Ep. second Aor. 

6<(>(W<i> (Ep), to increast, only Pres., Act. (irXuv, etc. U 227, A (d)]. 

Impf. and Opt. Aor. o^/AAttej/, Od. irytw, to Imat/ie, in Hom. Perf. iriirvvixai 

/8, 334. (§ 223, Rem. 2). to be animated, intel- 

UdWu, to sihake, Y^p. scccAvl Aor. Act. liijent ; second Aor. Act. Imp. Sjutt- 

a.nTmra\(i)v (§^ 207, 7. and 219. 7) and vv(, second Aor. Mid. 6.^iTv\no [\ 227, 

soi-ond Aor. Mid. irdKro (^ 227, B). A (e)] ; Aor. Pass. apLirvvv^ instead 

irdax'^j '"^ SK.tf'-r, Ep. Perf. Part, ireira- of auirvvbir) (§ 223, 12). 

^uiri, as if from Trerro^a ; Ep. Perf. trrT)<Taco, to crouch, shrink from fear, AoT. 

TTfTToo-^c (^ 228, Rem.). tvTij^a; second Aor. KaTa-maKoiv, 

naTfo/jLai (Ion.), to taste, to cat, Aor. Aeschyl. Eum. 247; Perf. tTTTT/xa, 

fTTuo-a/iTji/ ; Perf. iTfvacrfxai. Part. Ep. ireirTTjciy, uros (§ 223, 13); 

irdbu), to persuiub', second Aor. Act. Ep. second Aor. KaTaTrTi\Ti\v [§ 227, 

eiTi^ou, Aor. Mid. iTTi^6(xt)p, only poet. A (a)]. 

in the Att. Avriters (-ki^ov is a false Paivw, to sprinkle, regular Aor. ippava\ 

reading in Plat. Phaed. p. 117, a); Perf Mid. or Pass, tppaajxai. In 

Ep second Aor. Act. irf-nihov, Sul)j. Hom. ip^dSarai (§ 220, Rem. 2). 

•Kerri^u), Opt. VfTfii^OLixi. Inf. nein^uu, {ff^oo, see epSw. 

Part. ireTTt^wv, Imp. irfTri^e (^ 219,7); f>iy(u} (Ep. and poet.), to shudder, Fut. 

second Aor. Mid. iiri^ofxriv, to trust, fnyrfaw ; Aor. ippiynaa ; Perf. Ep. 

Opt. Tr€7rt,^oJTo ; from tlie second Aor. tpplya. 

come TTi^a J), to be ohedieut.ireTTi^ffu, 2aoa), (ricco and troo) (Epic), to save 

$3 be con ci need, -m^j-ai, obedient: on (= aw^ta) ] from aaSu Fut. aacixra} , 

^TTfV^i^^ei/ and 7reVct<rr*t (see § 228). Imp. Pres. Act. craw [§ 222, I, A 

w'\dC(u, to draw near (Trag. ■n-cAci^a, (4)]; third Pers. Sing. Impf. Act. 

irAdda>),Fut.Tr€A'i(ra;. I'oct. sometimes adov and adw instead of iadoe ; Aor. 

■KfKu; Ep. Aor. Pa-^s. eireKdTd-ni/, iTdwaa: Put. ISIid. aaw(Top.ai, Aor. 

poet. iS'.t. *7r\d>rji, Mid. Fp. eVATjiUT;*', Pass. tVaw^*' -, from ffaiaj Part, aw- 

etc., Aft. jTTAd'iTjK [« 227. A (a)); oi/Tes and Impf <T(a€(rKov; from o-(^« 

El>. I^srf. ir(TrATjMf»"JS. Att. TreirAd/iioi. Suhj. Prcs. aSri, crcJps, fl-dwo-i. 

cepa^w (poet.), t'y destioy, Fut. Trepaw. atvu (poct.), to put in violent motion, 



284 DIALECTS. P 230- 

Mid. to haste, Ep. Aor. icff^va and (pelSofiai, to spare, Ep. second Aor. Mid. 

ffeva, ia-a-evd/xTiu a.nd crevd/xTjv (§ 223, TretpiSoliuLT]'^. 7re<^i5€V^at (§ 219, 7), 

8); Perf. ea-a-vjULai (§223, 14); Plup. from ^eioo/iat comes 7re<^t5Vo/««. 

i(r(rv/j.7iu ; second Aor. Mid. icrcrifx-qv, <pepw, to carry, (pepre Ep. instead of 

etc. [§ 227, A (e)]; Aor. Pass, eo-cru- (pepere (§ 229): Ion. and Ep. forms 

^7}y Soph., i^eavhrr]v Hom. — On the are : Aor. ^veiKa, ivelKai., etc., jjueiKd- 

Ep. aevTUL, (TovTai, etc., see § 229. firji/ ; Perf. eu-fiveiyfj.ai ; Aor. Pass. 

jr/ciSj/a/iai, to scaler, Ep. secondary form 7]ueix^w': — Ep. second Aor. Imp. 

of cr/ceSawy^at, only Pres. and Impf. olae, Inf ola-e/uLej/ (§ 223, 10); first 

crrepeco, to rob, first Aor. Inf. aiepiaai Aor. avScrai, Herod. 1, 157 (comp. 

Ep. instead of crepria-ai. 6, 66. avdi'iaros instead of avoCaTos). 

(TTvyeQ}, to fear, to hate, Ep. second Aor. (pexryu, to flee, Ep. irecpxryfievos, escapttk 

iarvyov; first Aor. ^arv^a, Trans., to (§ 223, 14). 

make fearful. <f)^dv(o, to come before, anticipate, Epic 

TAm, Epic second Aor. reraydvf (p^d/xeuos [§ 227, A (a)]. 

seizing. (p^eipw, to destroy. Ion. Fut. Siaip^ap^oficu 

TAAAn, to endure, Ep. Aor. irdKaaa, instead of (pSraprja-ofxai ; Aor. Siacp^ep- 

Subj. TaXda-aa}; second Aor. ctAtjv cai (§ 223, 6). 

{§ 191, 4); Perf rerATj/ca, T^rXa/xeu (pbiuw, to vanish, and Ep. ^bfoo, to con- 

[\ 228), ~Fnt.T\T]<Top.ai. sume, and sometimes to vanish, perish 

ravvoi (poet.), to stretch, Ep. rdvvTai (Ep. first Pers. long), Fut. <pbt<T(a; 

(§229). Aor. ecpSrla-a; Mid. to perish, Fut- 

rapdaaw, to disturb, Ep. second Perf. ^^ia-ofiai ; Perf. €(p^^ifj.ai ; Plup. e^t- 

TeTprixo-, I ciTn disturbed. fxrjv: Ep. Aor. i(pStifvi]v, etc. [§227, 

TEMXl, to reach, overtake, Ep. Aor. ^tct- A (c)] ; Ep. Aor. Pass, third Pers. PL 

^oj/ (§ 219, 7). aTr4(pSft^cv. 

repTTO}, to delight, Ep. irdp^^rju, iTdpir-qv, (piXtco, to love, Ep. Aor. ipixd/xrjy {<pl- 

irpdirrju, Subj. first Pers. PL rpaTreio- \wuTaiy (p7\ai). 

fiej/ ; second Aor. Mid. erpaTrJ^Tjj/ and cppd^co, to speak, Ep. Aor. irecppaSov 

reTapirSfxriP {^ 2\9, 7). (§219,7). 

revxo} (poet.), to make ready, to obtain, (pipw, to /:neac?, in prose, forms its tenses 

Fut. Tev|w ; Aoi". €Tev|o, Perf. Ep. from (pvpdcc, e. g. <pvpd(To}, etc., Aor. 

reTevx(t>s, having obtained; Fut. Mid. Pass. i<pvpd^y]v. Plat. Theaet. 147, c. 

Tiv^ofiai; Aor. Mid. Tew|ao-,d^at ; Perf. (but icpvpb-rjv, Aesch. Ag. 714); yet 

rervyixai (§ 223, 14), third Pers. PL Perf. 'rr4<pvpiJ.aL, and in Aristoph. ire- 

Ep. TeTcvxaTai, Inf. rervx^ai ; Plup. (pvpa/xac ; Fut. Perf. ireipvpaea^au 

irervyix-qv, third Pers. PL Ep. eVerei;- Pind., Epic and poet, (pvpaco, etc. 

Xaro; Aor. Pass, irvx^v; Fut. Perf. (§ 223, 6). 

T6Teu|0(Uai ; — Ep. second Aor. Teru- (pvca, to produce, Perf. irec^D/ca, Ep. third 

/cetj/, TervKOZ/TD, TeTu/ceVid-ai (§ 219, 7). Pers. PL Trf^vatn, Part, xe^uwras, 

TIEn, Ep. Perf. Act. T6Tt77c6s, -Sros, Tre(pvv7a (§ 223, 13); Irapf Ep. eire- 

anxious, and Perf. Mid. I am anxious, <pvKov. 

second Pers. Dual mi-qaSyov, Part. Xa^o^uat (Ep.), to refrea<,yje/</, Aor. Mid. 

reriTjixeuos. k^koSovto (§ 219. 7); Aor. Act. K6Ka- 

Tlvvv^ai, Ep. secondary form of rlvo/xat. Sou and Fut. KeKaS-ficrco, Trans., to de- 

to punish; in Att. poetry with one prive of rob. 

V, rtuvfiaL (§185). X«^P'^» '^ rejoice, Ep. Fut. /f6xap^<ra>, 

TixT)yw, Ep. secondary form of refivw, K^xapvo'ofjiai ; first Aor. Mid. xvparo ; 

to cMf, first Aor, r/j.'fi^as ; Aor. Pass. second Aor. Kex°''P<>^^'^y Kex'^poiaro 

third Pers. PL T^ayej/. (§ 219, 7); Kexapv'^s (§ 223, 13); 

rp€<poi>, to nourish, Ep. second Aor. Perf. KexapH-^yos, Ear.; Verb. Adj. 

eTpa<pov, I nourished, Perf. rerpocpa, x^-P"^^^' 

Intrans.; Aor. Pass. irpd<pT]v, thii-d x«*'5aj/co (Ep.), to hold, to contain, Aor 

Pers. PL rpdcpev. exaSov : Perf with the sense of the 

^aiva, to show, iip. (paeiucov, enlightening ; Pres. /ce'xaj/Sa; Fut. x^'^^'OA""* (comp 

Ep. Aor. Pass, ecpadvb-qv; Perf. Mid. eTrad^oz/, Tre/cro/xou). 

or Pass. Trecpafffiai, thii'd Pers. Sing. x^''«'> '^ jdoh;- o»^, Ep., Fut. x^"^® 5 Aor. 

v4<pavrai ; Fut. m^-hffopuu ; second ex^ "" 5 second Aor. Mid. x^^y X^h*' 

Aor. <t>dve(TKeu, 11. A, 64. vos [§ 227, A (e)]. 



* ?.3l.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285 

SECTION III. 

FORMATION OF WORDS. 

{ 231. Primitive words. — Stems. — Derivatives. 

1. Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- 
ance with certain laws. 

2. Those words, from which other words are derved, but which are them- 
selves underived, are called primitives (vocabula pnmitiva). Primitive words 
are either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or 
pronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. 
T^e</)-ft>, yp<i<p-(i), <^ep-a), Xey-u, \l^-os : Ka\-6s ; e/i-e. 

3. The roots, i. e. the forms which remain, after the rejection of the inflection- 
endings, are all monosyllabic. Still, the roots do not always appear pure in 
the primitives, but often with a strengthened form, e.g. SaK-v-w, iK-t^t-onai, 
av^-dv-(i), rv{y)x-f^'^-<^f aK-laK-Ofiou, iri-Trpd-ffKcu. Comp. §§ 139, and 157, 1 
Yet these strengthened forms extend only to the Pres. and Impf. 

4. Words which are derived (vocabula derivata) from primitive words, are : — 

(a) Either Stems, i. e. such words as are formed from primitives by merely 
assuming another inflection-ending, which is without any special signification. 
To these indefinite endings belong several of the third Dec, e. g. the gender- 
sign s {6 ywi//, r] it>\p, T] firi^, T] iTTuI, r] vau-Sy 6 tj fiov-s, 6 t] iroT-s, instead of irorS-s; 
in many words the ^ is omitted, see § 52, 1) ; the endings -is {rj (nrdu-is, icant^ 
7] i\ir-is), and -vs (6 (rrdx-vs, ?; jVx-i5s) ", also the endings of the first and sec- 
ond declensions, e. g. -tj, -o, -os, -ov (Wk-tj, \vit-t], piC-a, ttKovt-os, v6(t-os, (>6S-ov) ; 
finally, several adjective-endings, e. g. -os, -tj, -ou {(plK-osy -??, -ov), -vs, -eTo, -</ 
{y\vK-vs, -ela, -u), etc.; 

(b) or Derivatives, i. e. such words as are formed either from primitives, 
or itova. stems, by assuming a special derivation-syllable with a special ' sig- 
nification, e. g. xP^<'''0-<^, to make golden, to gild ; prj-rup, orator ; ypa(p-iK6s, skillect 
i'n painting. 

5. The root is often lengthened in dcri^^tion (§ 16, 3), e. g. Arji^-rj (from 
ha^-€7v), x'hv (from xa»'-€"') ; or it takes the variable vowel (§ 16, 6), e.g. rpitp- 
oa, Tpo<p-4}, Tpo<p-6s, Tp6(p-iiios, Tpa(p-ep6s. A Strengthening consonant (§§ 139, 
1, and 157, seq.) may also be added; or the final consonant A. be doubled, e. g. 
KdWos from koXSs ; some stems also take a reduplication, e. g. ott-wtt-'^, eS-cuS-ij, 
ay-ury-os, ^l-iTvcp-os (from 2E«i»-n, comp. (ro<p-6s). Other changes also may be 
made in the root, as has been shown in § 16. 

6. The change of e into o (seldom into o) and of et into oi (§ 16, 6) requires 

' By comparing the examples under (a) and (b), it will be seen that the 
terminations of the former are not significant, while those of the latter are. 



286 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 232 

special attention. It occurs, (a) in Oxy tones of the first Dec, in ^ and d. of 
more than one syllable, e. g. rpoip-ifj nourishment (from Tp4<p-u>) ; fwy-^, a remain' 
ing (from fieu-u) ; <pop-d, a carrying (from <p4p-o}) ; a.\oi<p-{], salve (from aA.ei<^ 
ft,) 5 — (1)) in dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec, which denote what is 
done, or the result of an action, e. g. \6yo5, word (from \4y-u}) ; (pov-os, murder 
(from *EN-n, comp. eirecppov) ; vofios, a law (from ve/x-o))] — (c) in dissyllabic 
Oxytones of the second Dec. in -fiSs, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the 
second Dec. in -6s^ which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have 
a substantive meaning, e. g. TrKox-fJ^os, plait of hair (from TrAe/c-cu) ; o-toA.-/io's, 
garment (from o-reAA-cu) ; irofjLTr-Ss, attendant (from, ire/jiir-a)) ; <ro^oy, ir/se (from 
2E*-n, sopzo) ; Tpo<p-6s, nourishing, nourisher (from Tp4<p-a)\ — (d) in monosyl- 
labic substantives of the third Dec, e. g. 0Ao|, Jiame (from (p\4y-o}) ; 8op|, 
antelope (from SepK-o/xai)] — (e) in oxytose substantives in -eus and adjectives 
in -cis, which, however, have sometimes a substantive sense, e. g. Tpo<p-€vs, nour- 
isher (from rpe(p-to) ; <rirop-ds, scattered (from anrep-e7v) ; \oy-ds, chosen (from 
Key-w) ; Spofi-ds, running (from APEM-n, comp. dpafi-eTv) : — (f ) in all derivatives 
of the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -ofMos. adjectives in -ifios, verbs 
in -aw, -eft), -6(1}, -evw, -iC'*', e.g. irAc^/c-o/xos ; Tp6<p-i^os\ (p^oy-ew (from <p^6y-os)y 
dwfi-dco (from SSfi-os, and this from 5efi-w), etc. 

Remark. The change of e into a (comp. § 16, 6) is found only in a few old 
poetic derivatives, e. g. Tpa<p-ep6s. 

Rem. 2. Words derived from verbs are called t;er6aZs; those derived from; 
substantives or adjectives, denominatives. 



A. Debivation. 

$ 232. I. Verbs. 

1. All derivative verbs end \r\ -<{«, -€«, -1 03, -6 a), -vw, -euw, -e{^a>, -IC^t 
-6^0, -vC(^] -aivw, -vvu, -alpw, -elpo). All these verbs must be considered 
as denominatives ; for though the stem-substantive for several verbs of this 
kind is not in use. yet the analogy of the other verbs requires that a substan 
tive should be assumed as the stem of these also. Many of those derivative 
verbs, especially many in -ea> and -aw, supply the place of obsolete primitives, 
e. g. (pi\4a}, Ti/xda. — On the formation and signification of derivative verbs the 
following points are to be noted : — 

(a) Verbs in -dco and -d^w, which are mostly derived from substantives of 
the first Dec, and those in -i(o) which are derived from substantives and 
adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since 
they denote either a condition or the exercise of agency or activity, e. g. roAj^t*, 
to be bold, from r6\iJia, boldness; xoXaw, to be angry, from x"^^* 9^> yoda, to 
weep, from y6os ; St/ca^w, to judge, from SI/ctj ; eATr/^w, to hope, from dXiris ; Spi^etf 
to limit, from Spos ; otV/^oj, to beg, from ai'Trjs, beggar ; sometimes those in -dm 
denote fulness, abundance, e. g. xo^'i&'j to ^e full of bile, have much bile. — Verbs 
in -c£^w and -I Co formed from proper names, express the effort to resemble 
single individuals or whole nations, in custom, nature, language, sentiment 



^ 233.] DERIVATION OF VERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. 287 

Such verbs are called Imitative verbs, e. g. 5a>pid(w, to be a Dorian, i. e. to speak 
or think as a Dorian, Aupievs ; eWrivi^w, to personate the custom or language of a 
Greek, to be a Greek in custom, etc. ; ij.r]di(w, to be a Mede in sentiment. 

Remark 1 . Verbs in -i((i) often signify to make something into that which 
the root denotes. See (c). 

Rem. 2. Verbs in -6(0) and -v(w are very rare, e. g. apudCoo, to Jit ; epTru^w, to 
creep. — By the ending -0.^03 also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition 
or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb ; these are called 
Frequentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. fn-n-Ta^u}, to throw to and fro, jacto, from 
piinai.jacio ; anvd^uj, to sigh much and deeply, from o-reW, to sigh ; fiKci^Q), properly, 
to liken again and again, to compare on all sides ; hence to infer, conjecture. 

(b) Verbs in -6« and -iva are derived from substantives and adjectives of 
all declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primitive, for 
the most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, the practising of 
that which is signified by the primitive ; but they are sometimes transitive also. 
When the stem ends in -cy, which is the case, e. g. in adjectives in -rjs, -es, the 
cy is omitted, and when it ends in -fv, the €v is omitted before the ending -evu, 
e. g. <pi\f<i). to be a friend, to love, from <pl\os, drvxew. to be unfortunate, from 
arvx'f}s (stem iirvx^s), evSaifiopfu, to be prosperous, from evSai/jLO}!/ (stem evdaiiiou), 
ayopevQ), to speak in public, from ayopd, market, Koafieco, to adorn, from K6(rfioSi 
ficuTiXevo), to be a king, from fia<ri\€vs. 

(c) Verbs in -<ici>, which are mostly derived from substantives and adjectives 
of the second Dec, those in -alvu>, which are commonly derived from adjec- 
tives, more rarely from substantives, and those in -vvo), from adjectives only, 
generally denote the making or transforming something into that which the primitive 
word signijies ; in like manner several in -l(w, see Rem. 1, e. g. xp^^^^^i '^ 
make golden, to gild, from XP"*^^^^ 5rjAda>, to make evident, from 5f/Xos, ayvl^w, to 
make pure, from ayt/6s, nXoxni^o}, to make rich, to enrich, from irXovros, KoiKaivo), 
to make hollow, from KolAoy, \evKadvo), to make white, from AeuK^y, fiapvvw, to 
burden, from $apvs. 

Rem. 3. From the Fut. of several verbs, are formed verbs in -o-e/w, which 
denote a desire for that which the primitive ux>rd signifies : these are called 
Dcsiderative verbs, c. g. ycKcuTfio), to desire to laugh, from yeXdu, to laugh, ttoXc- 
/xriaeiu, to desire to engage in war, from iroX«/u/^a), TrapaBuxTflw, to be inclined to sur- 
render. There are also other Desidcrativcs in -da> and -law, e. g. ^avarduj to 
wish to die, fia^rtda), to wish to Iteconie a disciple. 

Rem. 4. Some verbs in -o-ko) have an incejitice sense (Iteginning to be), and are 
called Inceptive or Inchoative verbs, e. g. yjipdaKw, to begin to be old, to grow old; 
ytvf idaKWy to begin to have a beard ; rjfidtTKw, pubesco. 

k 233. 11. Substantives. 

Substantives are derived: — 
1 From verbs and substantives, and express — 

a. A concrete idea, i. e. the idea of an active person (concrete nouns) : 
fa) With the endings -ivs (Gen. -€o»s) for the Masc, -ctd or -i<raa for the 
Fem.; -ttjs [-e'rTjy. -6tvs, -tr-ns, -wrris] (Gen. -ou) (mostly Paroxytones), -r-f]p 
and -ratp (Paroxytones) for the Ma*c., -rpid. (Proparoxytones), -rpis^ -rty, 



288 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 233. 

and -IS (Gen. -idos), -reipd (Proparoxytone) for the Fem. ; -wv for the Masc, 
-aiva for the Fern.; -<us for the Masc, -wis and -uiyr] for the Fem., e. g. 
Upevs, priest, Fem. Upeia, from Up6s ; ouAtjttjs and -f]p, Jlute-player, Fem- auA.^ 
rpia, av\7)Tpis, from auAew ; crwr^p, deliverer, auTfipay from crw^w ; iroXirriSf 
citizen, ttoXItis, from ttoXls ; pvTcap, orator, from 'PE-G ; ^epdvcow, servant, ^epd- 
iraiva, from ^4pa\\/ ; olKerrjSf a slave, from o?kos ; 577/i<^7js, one o/" ^ people, from 
S^^os ; ottxIttis, a hoplite, from SirXov ; a-TpaTicarrjs, a soldier, from <rrpaTia. 

(3) With the ending -(^s (Gen. -oC), seldom, and only from verbs with the 
variable vowel [§ 231, 6 (c)], e. g. TT0fjiir6s, attendant, from vefnro); 6 tj rpocpos, 
nourisher, nurse, from rpi^a ; apcDy6s, an ally, from aprryu. 

b. They express the abstract idea of action, i. e. action or energy apart from 
the person who manifests it. These are abstract nouns : — 

(a) From verbs : 

(a) with the endings -a- is (Gen. -ffecos) and (more seldom) -aria, substantives 
which denote the transitive or active idea of the verb, e. g. irpa^is, actio, an acting 
from irpoLTTO} ; irolrjcris, a making, from iroiew ; hoKijicurla, a proving, from SoKtfid^u ; 

()3) with the ending -fi6s (Gen. -ov), such as denote the intransitive idea of 
the verb, e. g. oSvp/jiSs, weeping, from hZvpojiai ; 

(7) with the ending -fia, such as denote the effect or result of the transitive 
action of the verb, e. g. irpayfjui, something done, nyrjfiay monumentum, xolri/jLOy^ the 
thing made or done ; 

(S) with the endings -/iTj, -rj, -a (all for the most part Oxytones), and (from 
verbs in -euw), -e(a, such as denote sometimes a transitive relation, and some- 
times the effect of that relation, e. g. TOfi-q, a cutting, from refiya ; ootS^, song, 
from aeiSco, (p^opd, destruction ; iraiSeia, education ; 

(e) with the endings -OS (Gen. -ov), -ros (Gen. -rov) and -os (Gen. -ous) 
such as denote, generally, an intransitive relation, also a transitive, and partly 
the effect of the action of the verb, e. g. \6yos, word, from Aryw ; ic«»cur<Jj, 
lamentation ; rh ktiSos, care. 

(b) From adjectives (and substantives, which are sometimes used in an 
attributive sense) : — 

(a) with the endings -td, from adjectives in -as, and some in the third Dec, 
e. g. <ro(pla, wisdom (from <ro<p6s) ; ivSoufiovla, happiness (from (vlcdfioov. Gen. 
-ov-os) ; 

()3) -id. (Propai-oxy tones) from adjectives in -rjsand -ovs, whose stem ends in 
6 and 0, with which the i of the ending coalesces and forms €i and 01 (rims -eia, 
•Old), e. g. aX-n^eia, truth (from dX-q^Sy Gcn. -e-os), eti/oia, benevolence (from 
evuo-oSy eijvovs) ; 

(7) -avvri mostly from adjectives in -wif (Gen. -ovos) and -os, e. g. <roKf>po- 
a"uin], modesty (from adxppavy Gen. -ov-os) ; 5iKaio-<rvyri, justice (from BIkouos) ; 

(5) -Trjs, Gen. -TTjTos (commonly Paroxytones) from adjectives in -os and 

* Nouns derived from the first Pers. Perf. Pass, denote the result of the action 
of the verb, e. g. (evp-niiai). evpTj/xo, the thing found, the discovery : those from the 
second Pers., the abstract act, e.g. (euprjtrai). cvpeais, the act ofjiuding; tliose 
from the third Pers,, the agent or doer, e. g (evp-ffTou), eiiperfis, the discoverer. 



§ 233.] DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 289 

-us, e. g. iV^TT/y, Gen. -orrjTos, equality (from iaos) ; irax^TTis, tliickness (from 
vaxvs) ; 

(e) -«s, Grcn. -60S = -ovsj from adjectives in -vs and -tjs, and such as have 
the forms of comparison in -iwv and -iaros, e. g. raxos, to, Gen. rdxovs, swift- 
ness (from rax^s). i/zeGSos, r6. Gen. -ovSj falsehood (from \^ev5ris), oUcrxos- rS^ 
baseness (from alaxp^s., ajVx'w) ; 

{Q -ds, -dSos (only in abstract numeral substantives) e. g. •^ f/.ovds, unity; 
Svds, duality ; rpids, a triad. 

Remark 1. In abstracts in -rla, wliich express both a transitive ard intran- 
sitive relation, from compounds in -ros and -ttjs (Gen. -ou), the t is commonly 
changed into a, e. g. a^AoAerja and -aia (a^Ao,^eTTjs), a^avaaia (o^dvaTos), aKa- 
^apaia. 6^u^\(\pla. etc. So also with adjectives in -los, e. g. MiX-ijaios (MiA-tjtos), 
iviav<Tios (iviavT6s). Comp. ^ 17, 6, and 234, Rem. 2. 

Rem. 2. The older Attic poetry sometimes makes the o long in the endings 
-€ta and -Old, e. g. avaiSeid, irpovola. 

2. From substantives alone, the follovring "lasses denoting the names of 
persons and things, are derived : — 

(a) Gentile nouns, i. c. the names of persons derived from their country, in 
-€us (Fem. -IS, -iSos), -frrjs (Fcm. -irts), -dxTjs (Fem. -Stjs), -j7T7js, -c^Ittjs, e. g. 
Aupifvs {a Dorian, one from Dons), Awpls, 'S.vfiapiTrjs, -7ti5, ^TrapTi6.rr]s, 'Aiyiirfj- 
T7JS, 'HTTfipwTTjs. Comp. (j 234, 3 (g), etc. 

(li) Patronymics, Le. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, with 
the endings -iSrjs (Fem. -is. Gen. -iSos) ; also -i&Sr^s^ ; but substantives of the 
first Dec. in -tjs and -as, and many of the second and third Dec. whose stem 
ends in i, and some others, have -oStjs (Fem. -ds, Gen. -dSos) ; these endings are 
appended to the stem, and where the stem ends in €, this € and i of the ending 
-iSrjs combine and form a diphthong, as in nrjXe^STjs, e. g. npiafi-iSrjs, Fem. Upiafi-ls 
from Upia/x-os, UTjXiiSris from riijAfus, Gen. riTjXe-cos, KeKpoTriBrjs from KeKpoxp, 
Gen. -oTT-os, Tlay^oiS-qs from Tldy^oos, -ovs ] Tf\(ifiwi/-id5r]s from TeXafxwu, Alued- 
Stjs from AiVt'as, &«TTidSi}s, Fem. Qfan-ds from Qfanos. 

(c) Diminutives (frequently with the accompanying idea of contempt) with 
the endings -ioi/ which is the most usual, -&pioy [-ouriot/] (seldom) and some 
few with the endings -vWioy, -vKKls, -vbpiov, -xxpiov {-d<piov) (which 

belong mostly to the language of the common people and to comedy) ; Is 

(Gen. -(80s and -T5os), -ihiov (formed from -is); — -i<rKos, -Ickti (-Io-kiov, 
i-^vT), -ixviov) ; — -tScus (but only of the young of animals), e. \^. p-apaKiov. youth, 
from /tieTpol -ok-os, iraiS-iov, a little child, from iraTs, ircuB-6s ; — iraiS-dpiou ; -dcriov 
instead of -dpiov only in Kopdaiov (from K6pa, young woman) on account of the 
preceding p \ pLfipax-vXXiov, ajcav^-vWis from tSMov^a, thorn, yricr-vSpiov, islet ; 
^(i}v-<piov, little animal; xp^<^'<^'P^ov from xp^^^^^] — irivajc-is, little tablet, from 
fiva^; o^a|is, little ivarjon ; vrjff-tSiov, islet, from tnja-os ; KpeoLhiov (instead of 
-<fSioy) from Kpeas, olKiSiov (instead of otKi-iSiov) from olKia; — vtavi-aKos, u^avi- 
<r>oj from vicwias; -iaKiov seldom, e. g. KorvXicrKiov from kotuAtj ; -ix^ri, 

' This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patronymic ending is 
long, otherwise the word would not be adapted to hexameter verse, since ono 
Btiort syllable would stand between two long syllables ; thus, ni]\T}tdfi5. 

25 



290 FORMATION OF WORDS. [i 234 

-(xvtop only in vo\lxvr}, "koSXx^iw from 7r({At5, /cuA^x*^) Kv?axvtop from kv\i^^ 
— Xay-iSevs, young hare, from \aydis ; cter-iSeuy, yowig eagle, from aero's. 

(d) Designations of place, with the endings -lov (in connection with the 
preceding vowels -aiov, -eiou, -^ov) and -€ioy, which denote the abode of the 
person designated by the primitive word, or a place consecrated to a divinity 
or hero ; -(ou (Gen. -uyos), seldom -ecov, and -covid, which denote the residence 
of persons or a place filled with plants, e, g. ifyyaaTTjp-iov, workshop, from fpyaur- 
T-fip, and so others in -r-fipioy from -r-fip or -ttjs ; sometimes also this ending is 
used with reference to vessels, e. g. Tror-fjpiov, drinking vessel; KovpcTov, barber'$ 
shop, from Kovpevs, -e-ccs (several in -lou [-eiov] have another signification, e. g. 
rpo((>e7ov, wages of a nurse, from rpo<p€vs) ; &r](Teiov from Qrjaevs, -e'-ovs, 'A^vcuoyf 
Movcelouj — avSpdi/ and yvvaiKcav, apartments for men and women; linrdv, stable 
for horses ; po5<av and ^oSaivid^ bed of roses ; irepurrepedv and irepi<rTep<iif, dove- 
cote. 

(e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing 
some object, with the endings -rpov and -rpo, e. g. {uorpo, curry-comb ; TUkue- 
rpov, tuition-money ; Xovrpov, ivater for washing ; Kovrpov, bath ; also to designate 
place, e. g. opxvo'Tpo-i dancing-room, instead of the ending -ri^piov. 

§ 234. III. Adjectives. 

1. From verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings : — 

(a) With the ending -ost which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These 
adjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from 
which they are derived, e. g. (i)av6s, brilliant, from <paipo) ; \onr6s, the remainder; 
the verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. kokSs. 

(b) With the endings -ik6s, -"fi, -oV, and -i/xos, -ov, -ifios,-rj, -ov or 
-a-ifios, -ov, which denote ability, ftness, aptness. Of these, those in -ik6s have 
a transitive signification, tliosc in -ifios both a transitive and passive, e. g. 
ypa(p-iK6s, ft or able to paint ; Tp6(l>-ifios, nutritive; idi-<rifjLOSf cumble. 

(c) A few with the ending -v6s, -tj, -6v with an intransitive or passive 
signification, e. g. Set-vJs, //-///^(/"h/ (AEin), <r€fx-y6s, honored, honorable (o-e/So/iot), 
aTvy-i/6s, hated, hateful (STTrn), -jro^iivSs (ttoi^cw), desired. 

(d) A few with the ending -\(Js with a transitive signification, -wKSsy -■^, 
-<J*/ and (from verbs in -aw) -t]\6s, -tj, -(^v with a transitive and intransitive 
signification, e. g. 5ei-\6s, timid; eKiray-\os (instead of iKiF\ay\6s from €»nrX^- 
(Td), frightful ; (f)€id-a}\6s, sparing; (TLy'n\6s, silent; aTraTr)\6s, deceitful. 

(e) With the ending -apds, -a, -6v (from verbs in -du and -alyu) with an 
intransitive signification, e. g. xa^apwi slack ; fudp6sy stained; also in ip^ovep6sy 
eiivious ; vo<r'np6s, diseased ; olicrpSs, pitiable. 

(f) With the ending -ficoy, -/xoy (Gen. -ovos) with an intransitive significa- 
tion, e. g. fjLyii-fjiwv, mindful, memor (MNAH), vo-qnuv, intelligent (yodu). 

(g) With the ending -?? s, -es (Gen. -eoy), e. g. v\-f)pr)s, plenus. 

(h) With the ending -ds (Gen. -dSos) with a transitive, intransitive, or pas- 
sive signification, e. g. ^op-cls, bearing {<pepa) ; Spo/Lu(v, running (APEMfl) j Xoryds, 
eho$en [\4y<a). 



♦ 234.] DERIVATION OP ADJECTIVES. 291 

(i) With the endings 'r6s, -rrit -tov, and -r4os, -re a, - t eo v (verbal 
adjectives) ; those in -tJs denote either a completed action like the Perf. Pass. 
Part., e. g. Xck-tSs (from Xcyw), dictus; or the idea of possibility = English 
termination -t/e, which is their usual signification, e. g. Spa-ros, capable of being 
seen, visible. In their formation, most of these follow either an existing or an 
assumed Perf. Pass., e. g. 

ri/xd-U T€-TJyH7J-Tat Tt/iTJ-T<Js 

<p(i}pa-(i> ^^-(pupd-rai (pwpd-reos 

<l>i\(-(a tre-cpiK-q-Tai <pi\r]-T6s 

irXeK-u ir€-v\€K-rai nrXeK-rSsy -reos 

Xey-w \f-\eK-Tcu Xck-tos 

ariK-\-o) (-(TTaX-rcu araX-Tios 

T6lV-« (TA-H) T6-Td-TCU Ta-TCOS 

Sl-Su-fjLi (AO-fl) 5e-5o-Teu So-ros, -Tfos. 

Remark 1. Very many verbal adjectives, however, follow the analogy of 
other fonns of the verb, not according to any dctinite rule, but take precisely 
such a form as suited the ear of the Greeks. Thus, for example, a considerable 
numlK'r followed the form of the first Aor. Pass., e. g. cupt'-w, TJpe-^T^v, alpf-rSs ; 
irav-io, 4-irav-(T-^i/, vav-(r-r6s, -tcos; xP^'^H^^y ^'XP^'^'^^i XPV-o"'''^5f -reos; 
arpfip-o), i-(Trp(<p-^Vy <Trp(ir-T6s ; rpfTr-u, i-Tp4(p-^v, rpfv-reos ; Tpecp-u, i-^pe<p- 
3i7»'i bpfTT-^fOS ; X-(TTri-^Liy i(Tra-bT]v, <TTa-r6s, -rtos ; iiraivf-u), i-rrpi/f-^i/y eirajve- 
r6s ; — some the fonu of the second Aor. Act., e. g. tx'*'* c-trxc-Toj/, ax^-Tos ; 
aipfoj', (l\f-rov, €\€-T<is ; Ttj/ij, c-tov (commonly tTroy), a<p-f-T(os, iv-f-r6s] ri^ri- 
fii, i-^f-Tov, ^(-T6sy -Tfos] — some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. ^eVw, /ieV- 
fTou, Hfvf-r6s, -Tfos] tlfjii,t-Tov, i-T€os; so inr-dxe-ros from 'ETXE-TON (evxo 
put)] Svva-T6s {Swoficu)] ^rifii, <pa-T6vy ^■t6s. 

2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives : — 

By the ending -ioj (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem 
-cuos, -fjos, -oios, -yor, -vios) and -ik6s (which, when v precedes, becomes -k6s 
and when «, often -0x6^). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean 
ings. They frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea, 
often also in a very general manner, that Avhich proceeds from an object and is 
connected with it or related to it, e. g. ovpdy-ios, heavenly, pertaimng to heaven ; 
Ko^dp-ios, cleanly (but Ka^ap65, clean); iKevbtpioSf frank; liberal, liberalis (but 
i\(v^fpos, liber) ; ayopcuos, belonging to the market-place {ayopd) ; biptios, summer- 
like {^(pos, -e-o$), alSolos (aiSwy, -6-05), rjp^oi and rjpcoos ; Tpiwfjx^ios ] Sov\ik6s', 
bTiKvK6s, yMviax6$. 

Rem. 2. In some words the ending -oTos also -loios occurs, e. g. x^P'J'a'oy, 
CKoratos and aKOTiauos. In several words the ending -aios (^ 17, 6) is used in- 
stead of -r-Los, e. g. <piKor-()(no% {<piX6Tr)s, -ttros), kKovaios (Ikuv, -6vtos). 

3. Adjectives are formed from substantives alone : — 

(a) With the ending -€ jo s (mostly Paroxytones), which are formed from 
words denoting persons, especially from proper names ; but in respect to their 
signification they are like adjectives in -iK6sf e. g. avZpuoSy belonging to a man^ 
matily, yvvouKelos, i.f^p(inrfios, 'Ofiiipfios. 



292 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 235. 

(b) With the endings -eos = -ovs and -Xvos, which denote the material 
of which anything is made, like the English ending -en, e. g. x/Jwo-'foj = xp^ 
aovSf golden; x'^^'^^^^ =^ x°^'^o^*> ^<^2:en; ^v\-ivoSy ivooden; (Tkvtivos, made of 
leather, leMhern. 

(c) With the ending -Xv65 (seldom -lv6s), derived from substantives. These 
express certain relations of time ; sometimes, also, an abundance or fulness, 
e. g. k(nrep-iv6s, vespertinus ; xi^f<''-"'<^^> hesternus; optiuSsy mountainous {opoSf Gren. 
-e-os). 

(d) With the endings -6ts, Gen. -evros (always preceded by a vowel, tj, 
when the substantive from which the Adj. is formed, is of the first Dec, and o, 
when it is the first or second); -p6s, -€p6s, --npos, -a\eos, which denote 
fulness or abundance, e. g. v\^-ei5, woody ; irvpo-eis, fiery ; cdax'P^s, base ; vos- 
€p6s, and vocr-rfpos, unhealthy ; fxafi-aXeos, strong. Exceptions to those in -tis, 
are SevSp-ffeis from SeuSpof, x'^P^^'s from x^P'^* 

(e) With the ending --ftp los, which have the transitive sense of verbal sub- 
stantives in -r]p and -rjs, e. g. auT-qpios, preserving, that preserves. 

(f) With the ending -cUStj s, Neut. -wSes (formed from •o-€iZ'i)s from elSos, 
form, quality). These adjectives denote a quality or resemblance, but often 
also a fulness or abundance, e. g. (pXoyuh-ris, resembling Jiame, fiery ; irotdiSriSt 
abounding in grass, grassy. 

(g) With the endings -los (Fem. -td), -kSs, -ik6s (Fem. -icn, -iK-fi). •riv6s 
(Fem. -7]v'h)-> and when t or p precedes, -av6s (Fem. -avi\), -7vos (Fem. -Ivri) \ 
these are Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substantives, 
particularly those in -7j«/(Js, -avSs^ -ti^os, which are formed only from names 
of cities and countries out of Greece, e. g. Koplvb-ios. -la. 'A^vcuos, -a/a, Xios 
(instead of -itos from Xios), 'Apye7os ({roTa''Ap-yos, -€-os) ; AoKcSaifioy-iKos] Kv^uc- 
7iv6s, -7}vri {Kv^iKos), '2,ap5i-av6s, -ayr] {'S.dpdeis, lon. Gen. -i-uy), 'AyKvpay6s 
{"AyKvpa), TapavT-7vos, -ivrj (Topas, -avr-os). 

§ 235. IV. Adverbs. 

1 . Adverbs are formed from verbs : — 

With the endings -St;*' or, when the primitive has the variable o,-dBriy, 
which denote mode or manner, e. g. Kpv^h-nv, secretly {Kpinnw) ; ypdfi-Sriy, by 
writing, scribendo [ypdcpu) ; o-irop-dSriv, scatteredly, sparsim. 

2. From verbs and substantives : — 

With the ending -d6u or -a56y, --qdov (mostly from substantives). These 
also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g. 
a.va<^avh6vy openly, aperte ; SiaKpiSov, distinctly: fiorpv56y, grape-like^ in clusters 
{p6Tpv5), l\aB6v, in troops, catervatim ; ay e\rid6y, in herds, gregatim ; KvyrfSoy^ 
like a dog. 

3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the 
three relations of place, viz., whence, whither, and ichere, by the endings -■^€»', -Se 
(-<re), and -3-j, e. g. ovpav6-biy,from heaven; oifpav6y-Se, into or to heaven, ovpay6- 
S-i, in heaven; &Wo-^ev, from another place, aliunde, fiAAo-ce, to another place, alio, 
&Wo-^i, at another place, alibi. — Eules in respect to the accent of those in ^e9 



J 23G.] DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 293 

and -^i: (a) Dissyllables are either Paroxytones or Propeiispomena, e. g, 
Trp6a^€i/y yrj^fVf ad^i; (b) polysyllables are Paroxytones, when the penult is 
short by nature, e g. AeafiS^eu from AeV/Sos, Kvirpo^ev from Kvirpos, ovpavo^euy 
ovpai/6bi from ovpav6s; exceptions: oXko^cu, o'(ko^i, evdo^fv, euSo^i, iroivTo^ev, 
&\Xo^€u, eKocTo^ey^ and some poetic Avords ; (c) polysyllables whose penult is 
long by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. eyroa^ey^ oTria^ey ; 
(d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the 
primitive was a Barytone, e. g. e^u^ev (el'"), kr^pw^^v {'4Tcpos). ^ ASrr]vt\^iv 
('Ai^i'ot); but Properispomena, when the primitive was an Oxytone, e. g. 
nvb(ii)bfv (rivi^w), Qpiribiv [Qpia). On the accent of those in -5e (-ere), see § 34, 
Kem. S. 

Remark 1. "Words of the first Dec. retain their a or tj before -;^€»'; those 
of the second, tlieir o ; and those of tlie third, the o of the Gen. ending, e. g. 
'OAu^iTT^cu^ei', 27rapT7j-i^6i/, oiKo-biVy 6.K\o-dev ; but the vowels a, tj, and o are 
often exchanged with each other, e. g. I>i(6-^ev from f>iCa; M€yap6^€y from 
Meyapa, rd. 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -a>, and also others, append the endings to the un- 
changed vowels, e. g. iuca-^ey, KOLTw^eVy €|a>-3ev, ^Kel-^ev, iyyv-d^i, ev^o-^ey, 
fvSo-^i. Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen o into a>, e. g. 
ifjLcpoTfpw-dfv. In some of the al)ove forms, u can be shortened into o in poetry, 
and then rejected entirely, e. g. t^o-bey, rrpoa-^ey (instead of t^co^fVy -rrpocw^ey), 
and in imitation of Doric usage, <r is often omitted before .^, e. g. oTrt^ej/, ckto- 
^ey (instead of ovia^ey, ttcroabiy). 

Rem. 3. The ending -5e is commonly appended to substantives only, and to 
the unchanged form of the Ace, e. g. aAaSe, to or into the sea (fiXs), riy.^wSe (from 
Uv^w), oUSuSf only Epic, elsewhere oUaSe (from the stem 'OIH), as (pvyaSe (from 
♦ YE) instead of (pvynySe which is not in use, 'EKtvalydSf). In jironouns and 
adverbs, -(re is appended instead of -Sc, e. g. iK(7-a(, iAAoce, eTep&?(re, ouSo^wJcre, 
Tr}\6a(; more seldom in substantives, e. g. o?/co(re. — In plural substantives in 
-OS, <t5( becomes ^f, c. g. 'Ai^vajfe, &7}$a^( ; but some substantives in the singu- 
lar, also, follow this analogy, e. g. 'OAi/jlittjo^** ; so the poetic adverbs, ^vpa^e, 
to the door,foras, foa^e, x^M^C^i '^ the ground, httrnum (from the obsolete sub- 
stantives, cpo, XOM«» f'fth). 

Rem. 4. Instead of -Sc or -o-c, the Epic dialect has -Sts also, e. g. xaM^^Stj 
instead of xo/^^C^- ^AAi/5is instead of ^AAoo-c. and o]f/caSi$, domttm. 

Rem. 5. Several pronominal forms with the usual suthx, have, between the 
stem and the suffix, the syllal)le ax, which is to be accounted for by the ending 
■cLKis coming before the aspirated relative, e. g. 7roAA-ox-<^'^e»' (from iroWdKis 
and o^ev), irayT-ax-oae ; this occurs also in most pronominal adverbs of place 
in -T], -ov, -01, e. g. oAA-ox-oVj alibi, iroAA-ox-ov, vayr-ax-Vi toAA-ox-^j irayT-ax-o7. 

§ 236. B. CoMrouNDS. 

1. Every compound consists of two words, one of which explains 4hc other 
more definitely. The explanatory word usually stands first, e. g. yav-fxaxia, 
sea-Jight, as is usual in English in composite words. The word which is explained 
by the other, shows to what class of words the compound belongs, i. e. whether 
it is a substantive or verb, etc. ; thus, e. g. yav-fiaxia is a substantive, yav-fiax^'if 
a verb, yav-fidxos an adjective. 

BjiMARK 1. The explanatory word takes the second place in the compound 
but seldom, and mostly in poetic words, e. g. Seia-iSainuy, i. e. Seiaas robs Sae 

25* 



294 FORMATION OF WORDS. [^ 237 

2. Both words stand either in an attributive relation to each other ( = a substan- 
tive qualified by an adjective or by another substantive in the Gen.), e. g. Kax' 
€^ia(= KttK^ e^is, bad condition) ; ffKiaypatpia (= (TKias ypa<pi}), painting in light and 
shade; 'nrir-ovpis (= 'linrov ovpd), horse-tailed; or in an objective relation (= a 
verb, adjective, or substantive with the Case of a substantive in the relation of 
an object, or with an adverb in the same relation), e. g. ImroTpotpelv (= Xinrovs 
rp4<p€iu)^ 'nnroTp6((>os 'j vavfMax^^y (i- e. vaval fidx^o'^cu), yav/ixixos, vavpMxio.'^ 
euTvxerj', cvTvx'^s ; auKTrduai, avdcrraTos. avdffTcuTis. 

3. The verb can be compounded with prepositions only, e. g. oiro-, eV-, avri-^ 
ir/io-, e/t-, ^lo--^ Kara-, irapa-, irpoff-fiaiveiu ; comp. § 237, 5 ; the substantive and 
adjective, either with substantives and adjectives, or with prepositions, or with 
separable and inseparable adverbs and prefixes, e. g. <ra)fjiaTo-<pv\a^, rfiv-K6yos ; 
vepi-ffTacris, Sid-KevKos ; €u-tvx^s, av-airios ; the adverb, with prepositions only, 
e. g. ir€pi-<TTaS6y. 

Rem. 2. All other compounds are formed by derivation from words pre- 
viously compounded, e. g. ev-rvx^^i^ and €v-Tvx<tis from eu-rux^s. 

Rem. 3. (a) Separable adverbs are suc?i as are used alone, as well as in 
composition, e. g. ed, well; ir\i]v, except ; a/jLo, at the same time; &yx^, near; &pTi, 
now. recently ; &yau (aya-), very; irdKiv, again; irdXai, long since; Sis from bvo, 
bis, or the same as Sixoi dis, separately ; iray, wholly ; fVTvxf^fi evrvx'hs, prosperous ; 
irKriiJiixe\-f]5 (ttAtjj', /neXos), violating Jiartnony ; ■jrATj/i/xeXeii/, ir\ffifiiKr}(ris ; hfiarpo- 
Xciw, to run together, a/xaTpox'ta ; ayx^^are^y, to go near to ; ayxt^dXouraos, mari 
propinquus ; apTi^aA.V)S, now blooming ; ayaxri^fv^s, aydpf>oos, aydyyicpos. veiy snowy; 
iroA.t/uiSXao'Tos, that buds again ; TraXaicpvTos. planted long since ; Stsx^Aiot, two thou- 
sand ; Sicp^oyyos, having a double sound ; iTdvcro<pos, all-wise. 

(b) Inseparable adverbs are such as are used only in composition. They are 
as follows : — 

(a) ^/Lii-, half, semi, e. g. T}ixi<p\€KTos, half-burned, semiustus. 

(fi) Svs- expresses difficulty, adversity, or aversion, and is often the antith- 
esis of e5, e. g. dvsTvxf'iy and evrvx^^y^ SvsSat/jLovia, misfortune ; 

(y) a Privative (usually au- before a vowel) has the force of the Latin in. and 
expresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, e. g. 
&<TO(pos, tinwise ; arifiia, dishonor ; &irais, childless ; avairios, innocens. 

(S) a Collective and Intensive, like the Latin con in composition, expresses com- 
munity, equality, or a collective idea, and hence also intensity, e. g. (commu- 
nity, especially in the names of kindred and companions) a5€K<f>6s. brother^ 
from Se\<pvs, wo7nb; (equality) aTd\avros, of the same tceight ; innhos, even ; 
(in a collective sense) kSfp6os, collected {^peo}, ^peoncu. to cry aloud), doAAi^s, 
collected (from oA^s or a.\r}s). aydpo}, ayeKr} ; (intensity) areirfis, intent, in- 
tentus ; &<rKios, very sliady ; &fipofios, maJcing a loud noise. 

Rem. 4. The Euphonic a (§ 16, 10) must be distinguished from the Collec- 
tive a, e. g. (TTdxvs and 6.(rTaxvs, an ear of grain; a-Tcpoir-q and aareporr}, lightning. 



§ 237. Formation of Coynpounds. 

1. "Wlien the first part of the compound is a verb (§ 236, Rem. 1), the pure 
(sometimes also the strengthened) stem of the verb remains unchanged, if the 
following word begins >vith a vowel, e. g. tpfp-avy-ffs, trei^-apxfu' ; or the final 
vowels €, 0, 1, also the syllables ai, etr, eo-i. ao. are annexed to the stem of the 
verb, if the following word begins with a consonant ; a also is aimexed when 



§ 237.] FORMATION OF COMPOUNDS. 295 

the following word begins with a vowel, e. g. dcuc-i-^/xos^ \t7r-o-To/cT7jy and Xcnr 
o-T(£/CT7jy, T€(nr-i-Kepavvos^ iy€p-(ri-y€\(i)S^ (pep-ea-fiios^ TafjL-e<rl-xp<>'S., ^KK-eai-ireirXos^ 
fu^ofidpfiapos {= fJLvy-ao-fi.)^ fiiy^ounris (= piir-<r-aavis), TrXrj^nnros (== trXTjy-a- 
tmros). 

2. When the first part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the 
declension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, e. g. (first 
Dec.) yiKr]-<p6pos, ayopa-vS/xos ] (second Dec.) \oyo-ypd(pos, i<r--fiix€pos (by Elision), 
KaKovpyos (by Crasis), Aixyco^SoAos {\ay(t)s) ; (third Dec.) aorrv-yofios, 7)5v-x6yo5i 
fiov-(pop06si vav-fiaxia | irvp-<p6pos, fieXay-xo^ia, irav-qyvpis ; in some, the uniou- 
vowel is annexed to the stem, e. g. (ra)/aoT-o-^vAo|, <f>vat-o-\6yos, Sabovxos ( by 
Crasis, instead of 5a5-<^exos) ; in neuters in -os. Gen. -e-qs, the e is elided before 
o, e. g. |«^o-(^poy, or the declension-stem in -es [§ 31, (b)] is retained, e. g. 
T€\€s-<p6pos ; so also in other neuters, e. g. K€pas-fi6\os, <p(t}s-<p6pos. 

Remark 1. In the first Dec, however, the union-vowel o is often found 
instead of the declension-stem, e. g. 5i«-o-7po(|)oy (Siictj), \oyx-o-<p6pos \ so also 
the ending 17 or -a is annexed even to words of the second and thh-d Dec, e. g. 
&ayoT7j-^(Jpoy, affiTibT]-<p6po5\ neuters in -or (Gen. -tos, PI. -tj) frequently vary 
between the and 17, e. g. ^i(po<p6pos and ^i(pri(f>6pos, aKevocpSpos and crKcuTjcpopos. 

Rem. 2. In some words of the tiiird Dec, more seldom of the tirst and 
second, t is annexed to the pure stem, as a union-vowel, e. g. irvpiiryovs, alyi- 
fiSrrjs'j fiv(rTnr6\os {fivcTT-i^s), fivplirvovs. In several words a euphonic o- {a-i) is 
inserted, e. g. fioyo-<T-T6Kos, ^co-cr-ex'^/'ia, together with the regular ^eoex^p'^ay 
vav-ffl-Tropos, 

3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes 
take place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of 
consonant*. 

4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the 
words beginning with d, 6, o, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels 
(if the last part of the compound is a simple) into tj and «, e. g. (o) ev'ni/efjLos 
from iyfuoSy (rTpan\y6s from 6,ywy €v7]vwp from airffp] (c) Svst'ipeTfxos from iper- 
fi6s, hvs-r\\aros from iKavvo) j (0) a.viM)<pfK-S]S from H^tkos, rcavuKi^pos from ^AAuyut, 
av(j}vvyiQS from tvofia. 

5. In relation to the end of the word, the follo>\-ing points should be noted : — 

A. In the Greek language, as has been seen (^ 236, 3), a verb can be com- 
pounded only with prepositions ; but if it is necessary to compound a verb with 
another part of speech, this is never done immediately, but by means of a 
derivation from a compound word either actually existing or assumed. Then 
the derivative-ending, commonly -ea>, is regularly appended to this compound 
word : e. g. from Xinrovs rp4(p€iv, to keep horses, the derivative is not liriroTpe^^iv, 
but by means of the comj)ound substantive ltnroTp6<posj it is iinroTpo<p(w ; so 
&co(re)8€a> from bfocefi-fis, vavfiax^^v from vavfiaxos, eurux*"' from evrvxvs. 

B. The compound is an adjective or noun: — 

a. The second part is derived from a verb, and has the following endings : 
(o) Most frequently -os, -ov^ e. g. ^porpScpos, nourishing wild beasts, ^Tjpdrpo- 

<^s, nourished by uild beasts. See ) 75, Rem. 4- 
(/3) -7JS (-TTjs) or -as (Gen. -ou), -rjp {-rrip), -Twp, commonly used as 

substantives with a transitive signification, e. g. evepyerrjs, benefactor; 

yojjJideTr]!, legislator; fxvpoTrwXrjs, opvt^oi^'ipas, vaiSokeTwp , 



296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237 

(7) -Tjy, -€s, commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, c. g 
(S-eo^tA-^y, beloved of God; evfia^-fis, quick to ham, docilis ; einrp^TrijSy 
becoming ; 

(5) -J (-|), e. g. \l/evd6iJ.apTvs from MAPTTH, vofiocpvKa^. 

b. Or the second part is a substantive : — 

(a) An attributive relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
first containing a more definite explanation of the last. The substantive 
rernains unchanged. The first part is an adverb or preposition, sometimes also 
a substantive or adjective, e. g. 6iJ.65ov\os, a fellow-slave ; fiovKifios, excessive hun- 
ger, bulimy ; aKpoiroXis, citadel. 

(b) An objective relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
last denoting the object of the first. This division includes a large number of 
adjectives, the first part of which consists either of a verb, or, though more 
seldom, of an adjective, of a separable or inseparable adverb, or of a preposi- 
tion used as an adverb, e. g. Sei<ndalfj.a>i/ = 6 rovs Sa't^oyas delaas, iTrixcupfKcucos 
= 6 rols KaKois iirixa'^pcov, KaKoSai/jLcov = 6 KaKbv Saifj-ova ex(^v, Svsfpws, one wlio 
has an unhappy love, ey^eos = 6 rhv b^hv iv eavr^ exwv, &iroiKOS = 6 airh tov 
oXkov &v, &irais = 6 ttcuSos ovk ex<wi'. In all these examples the form of the sub- 
stantive remains unchanged,' where the substantive has a form which is appro- 
priate for the JNIasc. or Fem. of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the 
substantive assumes a corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -05 (Gren. -ou), -cus 
(Gen, -00), -7)5 (Gen. -ovs), -is (Gen. -tdos), -up and (when it ends in -v) -s, e. g. 
CvvdeiTTvos {Seliryoy), a fellow-guest, ev^vSiKOS (5t/rjj), &Tifios {ti/jlti), SfX'flf'^pos 
{rjfj-epa), (piKoxp^fJ-o-'^ os [xpriixa, xp'^(^°-'''°-)i ^(^to/xos {arS/xa), evyews (71)), having a 
fertile soil; X^iirSyeus {vavs), one who deserts the ship ; avaxpeX-ns (rh 6(p€\os), 6.vaX- 
Kis (oA-KT)), oxprj/iojj', aSuKpvs, Gen. -vos {rh Soucpv). 

c. Or the second part is an adjective : — 

The adjective retains its foiTn, except that those in -vs commonly take the 
ending -tjs ; the first part consists either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g. 
acrrvyiirwv, near the city, urbi vicinus ; irducro^os or ird{T<ro<f)os, -oy, very wise; ap6- 
fioios, -ov, unlike ; 7rp6dT}\os, -op, otjStjs from 7}Sv5, iroSoJ/cTjy from ukvs. 

• Eor example, Seia-iSaiixav is an adjective of two endings, the ending -oew 
being both Masc. and Fem., therefore the substantive Scu/xuv is not changed in 
composition ; but avvSenrpos takes a regular adjective termination, as the sub- 
stantive 5uiryop has neither a Masc. nor Fem. ending. 



SYNTAX. 



SECTION I. 

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 



CHAPTER I. 

Parts of a Simple SentencCc 

J 238. Nature of a Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. 

1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the ex- 
pression of a thought in words, e. g. To poBov ^aXkei] 6 
av^pojiro^ ^vi]t6<; ianv. The conceptions of the mind are 
related both to each other and to the speaker. The con- 
ceptions or ideas themselves are expressed by Essential 
words (§ 38, 4) 5 their relations to each other, partly by 
inflection and partly by Forjnal words. 

Thus, e. g. in the sentence Th KdKhv (>65ov ^dw-ei iv t^ tov Trarp-hs /f^ir-o>, 
there are five essential words : /ca\<Jy, ftSSov, .^aAActv, irariip^ ktjitos ] their rela- 
tions to each other are expressed partly by their inflection and partly by the 
Formal words t6, ivy ry, rod. 

2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a sub- 
ject and a predicate. The subject is that, of which some- 
thing is affirmed ; the predicate that, which is affirmed of the 
subject, e. g. in the sentences, to poSov ^dWec — 6 dv^pco7ro<i 
^lAi^To? ianv, to pohov and 6 dv^pco7ro<; are the subjects, ^d\- 
\€i and ^mjTOf; ianv, the predicates. 

3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the 
sentence ; the subject is subordinate to it and can be 



298 SYNTAX. f$ 235 

expressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g 
BlBay-fii, (/) g-ive. 

4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a 
/ substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an 

% adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb 
^ which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article ; a 
ll preposition with its Case ; an infinitive ; finally, every word, 
^""letter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con- 
sidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com- 
monly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The 
subject is in the Nom. 

Th ^6Soy ^dWei. — 'Eyii) yp(i<po>, ff h yp<L(J)eis. — Tpe«s ^?<bov, — 'O (ro<phs (if 
haifioiv iarL-^ Ot <p^oj/ov j/res /^icoGrrai.— Oi irdKai dj/Speto* ijcoi'.— Oi irepl 
Mi\T idSrf u KaXws ifiax^o'avTo. — X. Cv. 8. 3, 42. Oirroi ovtws T]dv iari rh 
*X ^ **' XP^A"*''''*' *^* "'''"Z'^'' "^^ avofidWe^v. — Th SiSdc k€ iv'koXSu iaTiu. 
' — X. R. L. 9, 2. eVeTot rp aper'p ad^cff^ ai els rhv irhdw ■xjp6vov (jmXXov, ^ 
T^ KUKia. — Th €t avi'SffffiSs icTiv, — Tit ^ra fMucpSv iariv. — Th yvSibi crcow 
rhv KaX6v iffriv. ' . 

Remark 1. In the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive, the 
.subject is in the Ace, as will be seen § 307, 3. In indefinite and distributive 
designations of number, the subject is expressed by a preposition {els, iff pi, Kard) 
' with its Case, e. g. Els rerrapas ^A^ov, as many as four came (with round num» 
bers 6ty also signifies about, at most). X. Cy. 8. 3, 9. fcrraaav Trpanov fj.cv ruy 
Bopv(p6pci}u els rerpuKisx'^^^ovs {alx>nt four thousand stood), tuirpocbev Sc t«f 
TTuA.wj' els reffffapas, 5iyx*^"" ^^ cKarepw^ey ray irv\Qy. X- H. 6. 5, 10. 
(<pxryov els AaKeSaifioya Tu>y irepl ^Tdtrnriroy TeyeaTtiy ire pi oktukoct iov s. 
So Ka3-' eKdffTovs, each one singly, one by one, singuli ; Kara edyrjj singulae gentes. 

5. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by 
any special word : — 

(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun and is not particularly emphatic, 
e. g. Tpd<po}, ypa<pei5i ypd<pei ; 

(b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro- 
priately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one. the subject 
being, as it were, implied in the predicate. Thus, olvoxoevei in Hom. 
sc. 6 olvox6os, the cup-bearer pours out the mne ; ^iei in Her. sc. 6 dvr^ip. 
X. An. 3. 4, 36. eirel eyiyvcaiTKOV avrovs oi "EAAijves ^ovXofievovs awievai koI 
ZiayyeWofievovs, eK-fipv^e (sc. 6 /o)pu|) ToTs^EWrja-nrapcuTKei^our^cu. So 
trrifxaiyei rp ffd\ir lyyt, 4(rd\ir ly^e y, SC. 6 <raA.irocT7js (the signal is 
[uxis] given by the trumpet). So we must explain words which denote the 
state of the weather or the phenomena of nature ; as S 6 1, it rains ; vl^ei^ 
it snows, fipoyr^, affrpdirr e i, sc. 6 Zevs. Th. 4, 52. I o* € i (r 6, there was 
an earthquake. X. Cy. 4. 5, 5, ffvffKord^ei, it is dark; 

(c) The subject is easily supplied from the context ; thus, in designations of 
time, e. g. ^y iyyvs fi\iov Svafiwy (sci rj rjixepa). ^Hv afi<p\ ayopatf irKif^owrea 
and the like ; irapex^i f^iy sc. Kaip6sy it is time^ it is allouxd, one can = licety 



h 



k 'onfA ^ SUBJECT. PREDICATE. COPULa 299 

6i (^ Ser. 3, 73. rjfuv vape^ei avcuTwccuT^ai ttJv apxw- In i^^ way the 
W4JV i .^€<Js is yery frequently omitted in certain phrases, e. g. Kpoar-:)' 
fiai*'% I, SC. 6 ^€6s ; Trpoxf^p^^ H^oi (sc. ra irpdyixaTa), things prosper to ms, 
Isucceai, comp. Th. 1, 109. In such expressions as ^aai, A e 7 o u <r i, etc.. 
the sutject ^v^pwiroi is regularly omitted, as it is readily apparent 5 

(d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some -word of the sentence. Her. 
9, 8. rhv ^Icr^fibv er elx^ov kcu (T<pi fiv irphs TeAei", SC rh relxo^t ^^^^ 
vxilled the Isthmits, and the [tcall] was, etc. X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. irop^vaoixcx 
€v^vs Trpbs TO fia<ri\€ la, koI ^v /iihv a.vSti(TrT]Tai, sc. 6 Pa<Tt\evs. So also 
Other Cases as well as the Nom. are thus supplied, e. g. PI. L. 8C4, d. 
iraiSia xP^'h^^^^y ovd4y irot tuv to iovtwv (sc iraiSeav) oiacpepuv ; 

(e) With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing 
a general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun tIs is sometimes 
omitted. PI. Criton. 49, c. otjre dyraSt/feTj/ Se?, oijre KaKus iroiuy ovhiva 
ay^pwTTcaVy ovS* tiv Stiovu it da xv vtv avrwv, not even if any one should 
suffer from thein ; so often -with the Inf. ; but if a participle stands in 
connection with the Inf, e. g. Eur. M. 1018. Koxxpus <p4p^iv xp^ ^vi]rhv 
6pra (TvfA.(popds, the participle must be considered as the subject. 

Rem. 2. Such expressions as Se?, xpVt 5o/ce7, irpe-rei, 6|co-Ti{j/), ivSexerai {it is 
possible), KoAaJs, eS exft, exEt \6yov {consentaneum est), K^yerai {it is said), etc., 
the Greek language always aonsiders as personal, the following Inf. or substan- 
tive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs. 

6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad- 
jective pronoun or numeral, or a substantive with the 
Formal word ehai ; ehac, in this relation, is usually called 
the copula^ since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. 
with the subject, and forms one thought, e. g. 

Tb fioSov (&-aA\ei. — 'O Af^puiijs ^y tit 6s icrriv. — 'A^dvaroi elcny ot 
dfol. — 'H apfT^ KaXi] icTTiv. — 'Aya^r] Trapai<pa(ris itTTiu eraioou^^ — Kvpos - ' ' ' *" 
^v fiaa i\cvs. — TovTo TO wpayfid iari rdSe. — Si* ^a^a irdyruu trpcoTos, 
— Ol &vdpes ^(Tay T pel s. 

Rem. 3. The finite verb denotes both the thing affirmed (id quod pracdicatur) I • 
and the relation of the affirmation to the subject and speaker ; the relation to 
the subject, is denoted b}" the personal-endings of the verb ; the relation to the 
speaker, bv its Modes and Tenses ; e. g. the ending of the verb A67a> sliows 
that its subject is in the first person, and its being in the Ind. mode Pres. tense, 
indicates that the speaker asserts something directly, at the present time. But 
if the predicate is expressed by an adjective or substantive with elvai, the 
aflirmation is denoted by the adjective or substantive, and its relation to the 
speaker by eJyou, e. g. evhaipuav ilfj-i = (vSaifioye-Wf (uSaifiwy e? = evSatfiovc-eis, 
tvSal^ovfs (taovrai = cvSaiixoy^-aova-iy, though there is a difference between the 
two modes of expression. 

Rem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish between the use of cTrot, as a Formal 
and as an Essential word ; in the former relation, it is merely a copula, con- 
necting the sulyect with the substantive or adjective, etc. (§ 238, 6); in the 
latter, it has the idea of being or existence, being in a certain condition, etc., e. g. 
ftTTi ^eSs = ^€6s eariy &y {there is a God, God exists), as in Her. 3, 108. tov 
dfiov 7] irpoyoiTj iarl iovtra cocpTj, ^< - Cf-^J ',t' t^ * 



\ 



300 SYNTAX. [« 239 

Rem. 5. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple idea 
expressed by the verb, is resolved into the participle and copula eluai. This 
mode of expression, hqwever, is more usual in poetiy, though it is found also 
in prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. Hem. 3. Eur. C. 381. ir«s 5 toXoI- 
TTtop', ^re irdarxo VT €S rdSe] Id. H. 117. -^v (Tirevdufu. Her. 3, 99. airap- 
veo/xeuS s iari. Id. 9, 51. t) yrjcros iffri airh rod ^Affcairov 5e/co araSlovs 
air dxovcra. PL L. 860, e. e< ravTU ourus exoyrd iariv. Dem. 01. 3. 
(v. 1.) 11, 7. TOUT oLv iyvooKdres ^(Tau, they would f^uxve been convinced of these 
things. 

Rem. 6. The copula el vat is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in 
the Ind. Pres. ; eluai is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but 
properly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : — 

(a) In general propositions, obsen^ations, and proverbs. Eur. 0. 330. 6 fieyas 
()\lios ov [xiuijxos eV fiporois. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. CTpaTLo. yap r) p:^(TTri (o5os) 
raxj'O'T'n ; 

(b) Very often with verbal adjectives in •t4os, as also with other expres- 
sions denoting ??ecess«Vy and r/^f?/, c. g. dvci 7 kt;, xP^^^i ^efiis, €Ik6s, 
also with Kaipos, u>pa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3, 129, 70. rjfjLii/ y xmep Tfjy 
iAev^epias ay wv icrr iov. Id. Cor. 296, 205. arifxias — iv dovXevovfrri rp 
Tr6\ei (pepeiv dvdyKT)\ 

(c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. %Toifios, irpS^vfios, oT6st€, Svva- 
t6s, paSiou, xaAeTTOj/, STjXov, &^iov, etc. PI. Phaedr. 252, a. (tj 
\pvxh) SouAeueij/ eroifxT). Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. iyu ird<TX'^i-v briovv eroi' 
fios. X. C. 1, 1, 5. StjAov odu, 'OTi ovK &»' {2a>«-/>aTrjs) irpoeKeyfy, ei fjirj 
iiriarevev dATj^eucrcii/. Comp. ib- 2, 34. Here belong also the expressions 
^avfj-aarhv oaou, it is very iconderful {= mirum quantum)^ afii\xavov o<tov, it 
is quite impossible^ inconceivable (= iinmane quantum), see ^ 332, Rem. 10. 
On ovh(:\s osris ov (== nemo non), see § 332, Rem. 12. 

Rem. 7. The Ind. Impf. is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschin. Ctes. § 71, »^f 
iu ix4(Ta) (sc. ?iv) Koi irapriiJ.eu rfj ixTTepaia els r^v 4Kk\r)(riav] the Ind. Prcs. also is 
not very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. oTrSre. iirei (comp. X. C. 1, 46) ; 
on the contrary, very frequently after ori and us (that), e. g. X. C. 1. 2. 52. 
x4yo3v, COS ovZeu o<peXos. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted after the rela- 
tive hs &u, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, e. wy tiv airrols 
Xp^ia (sc. 77). The ellipsis of the Opt. when &u belongs to it is more frequent, 
e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. rls yap 6.y, ecpaaav, cod ye iKovuTepos ireTaai (sc. erij) ; Ib. 2. 
3, 2. ^v fjLev TjixeTs uiKcofiey, d?j\ou, on o'l re TroXefxioi av Tjixerepoi (sc. eXrftTav). The 
ellipsis of the Imp. is very rare, e. g. S. O. C. 1480. "Kaos, S> SaliuLwv. X. An. 3. 
3, 14. rdis odt/ ^eo7s X"/"^ (^C eVrw), on ov trhv ttoAAj? p<^H-V^ cL\Ad <tw oKiyois 
^A/9-oj/. The participle is very often omitted, especially after verba intelligendi 
and declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. 5rj\6y ye, on (pav\os (sc. Hv) (pavod/Mu, but else- 
where also, e. g. X. C 2. 3, 15. dro-rra \eyeis Kal ovda/xuis -rrphs aov (sc. 6vTa). et 
mdlo modo tibi conrenientia ; even in such cases as Th. 4. 135. x^^f^^^os reXemiav- 
ros Kal irphs cap ijSri (sc. 6i/tos). The Inf. is often omitted after SoKely^ rjyeia-- 
3^at, vofii(eiv and the like, e. g. Th. 7, 60. $ov\evTea eS6Kei. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. 
ainSj/Ta fie iKe\ev<ras ro7s ffTpariiyiKo'is (sc. eivai) vofju^ojxeyois avSpdcri diaXeyear- 

^239. Comparison. — Attribute and Object. 

1. ^Iien the predicate belongs to the subject in a liigher or 
lower degree than to another object, this relation is denoted by 
ihe Comparative, e. g. *0 ira-nip jxeCluiv ia-riv, -^ 6 vlos. — *0 



$239.] COMPARISON. ATTRIBUTE AI^D OBJECT. 301 

aofftos fiaWov \aLp€L rrj ap^Trj, •^ rots ;j(/07;/xacrtv. And when the 
predicate belongs to the subject in the liighest or lowest 
degree, as respects all other objects compared, the Superlative 
is used, and commonly takes mth it a partitive Genitive, e. g. 
^cj/cpa-n;? Trarrwv 'EAA-^vojv cro^wraTOS ^v. — O o"o<j!>os Travrwv 

Eemark 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in 
the following ways ; (3,) by erz, still, even, etiam, e. g. fiei^wu en, still greater ; 
(b) by jxaKp^, 0X1761?, iroXA^, erf iroAA&j, otro), tocouto); ixeya, 
oKlyov, iroKv, oaov, t (ro C t 0, which show ho^y inuch more or less of the' 
quality expressed by the adjective is intended, e. g. iroWc^ f^^'^C^^, multo major,t 
far greater, IT \\ (p en ixei^oves, multo majores etiam ; (c) sometimes by^aA- 
Kov. Her. 1, 32. fxaWov oA^iwrepos iari {far). 

Rem. 2. The Superlative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the 
following ways : (a) hy Kal, vel, even, e. g. «at fxAxicrra^ vel maxime, very greatly 
indeed; (b) by words denoting measure or the degree of difference, viz. iroWcp, 
fxaKptfy iroKv, tt a p a iroXv, oaw, r ocr ovt oj, e. g, ttoW^ &pi(XT0S, multo 
maestatttissimus, tJie best by far ; fiaKp^ &pL<rros, huge praestantissimus ; (c) even 
by the Superlative: fidxiarra {ir\e7(TTov and fiay larov j oet.), e. g. S. 
O. C. 743. irKflffToy av^pcitTruv KOLKiaros. Th, 7, 42. iid\i<r "a tuvoTaros'., 
(d) by the relative: a>s' [oirus). oti and ^, olos (§ 343, Rem. 2), e. g. ws I 
Tax'^To, quam celerrime^ on fxdKiaray p dpiarov, e. g. JPl. Apol. 23, a. iroWal 
fiev ctTrc'x'S^e'ai /xoi yeySuouri Kal olai xoAeTrwroTow KoX fiapvTarai. X. An. 4. 8, 
2. x^^P^oj/ oJov x'^^^^'^TOToi' ; (e) by els, unus, e. g. Her. 6, 127. ■^A.d^e 2/lhi/- ' 
SvpiSris '2,vfiapiTi]i, ts irrl TrXelar oy 5^ xXi^iis els av^ip a-rrlKeTo, X. An. 1. 
9, 22. Sujpa trXelara cfs 76 dv^p Siv ixdfifiavf, he received the inost gifts, at least 
considering the fact that he uxis but a single individual (C. Tusc. 2. 26, 64. amplitu- 
dinem animi unam esse omnium rem pulcherrimam) ; (f ) a peculiar mode of' 
strengthening the Superlative, is by joining iu to Is with it, in which case the 
Superlative must be repeated, e. g. 'O "Epcas iv rols trpe<r ^vraT6s ian 
(i. e. iv To7s irpeff^xnaTois olffi). the oldest among those iclio are very old. Her. 7, 
137. Toimi fxoi iv rolai ^ e i6t ar ov (paiferou yevfabai. PI. Svmp. 173, b. 
"XuiKpaTovs epaar^s 2)u iy rols fidKiara rwv t6t€. The construction with the 
Fern, is found only in Thuc, e. g. 3. 81. {(rTdais) iu to7s TrpwTTj iyfuero. lb. 
17. iu To7s 7r\e7aTai vrjes. In such instances, to7s must be considered 
as Neut. In like manner, the expression o/j-oLa (oyuoTa Ion.) to7s Avas used 
with the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. ae^ovrai Se 'kpd^ioi iriaTis dvbpwiroiu dfio7a 
T o7(T I /xd \ I (TT a (sc. cffiofjLevois), like those tvho respect very inuch, lit qui maxime. 
Th. 1, 25. xP^JAto''''""' Su^'a^fi otnes kot iK^ivov rhv ■)(^p6vov OfMOia r o7s 'EWrjvwv 
irKovfT lurdrois. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive 
with, it, e. g. 'Aya^wv linrfwy KpdrKrros, the best among the good horsemen = the 
very best. 

Rem. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by 
negative adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, preceded by ov {Litdtes)^ 
instead of positive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e. g. ovx riKiara, 
not the kast^ especially, ov ndKitrros, ovk ixdx'^f^'^os, stronger than fxd- 
Xiara, ^(Ktkttos, jxiyicTTos. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, e. g. 
oiix ^'cio'Ta, dWa /xaAtCTa. 

' 'Cis, Zti are not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some 
part of SuvaiJ.ai understood, and in that way may be said to give intensity to 
the Superlative. Sometimes Svyafj.ai is expressed, e. g. e,eyo(pa>v dviaraTM. 
iaToAfjieyos itrl -rrSXefiOv us iSvyaro KahXio'ra. 

26 



302 6YNTAX. '^ 240 

2, A sentence consisting of a subject and pieoicate may be 

extended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly. 

/ The word or words which define the subject more fuilyj is 

^ called an attribitte, or attributive. The subject is more exactly 

/described, therefore, (a) by the addition of an adjective (attrib- 

i4itivei adjective), e. g. ro KaXov poSov, (b) by the Gen. of a 

substantive (attributive Gen.), e. g. o tov ySao-tXcws lajTros, 

^ regis hortus (=regius hortus) ; (c) by a substantive in the same 

Case as the word which is more definitely described, e. g. 

Kvpo?, 6 ^ao-tXcus. The explanatory word is here said to be in 

apposition with the word explained, and may be called an 

appositive of that word. The predicate (wliich is termed the 

/ object), is more exactly described, (a) by a Case of a substan- 

"l- tive; (b) by a preposition with a substantive; (c) 'ry the Inf., 

*^(d) by an adverb, e. g. 'O o-o^os T-qv aperrjv do-Kci. IlepI t^s 

TrarpCSo'; //.a^^o/AcJa. 'A7rt€vat cTrt^v/xai. KaXu>$ ypacjiwi, 

^ 240. Agreement. 
• 
1. The finite verb agrees with the subject in Person and 

Number; the adjective, participle, pronoun, and numeral, in 

Gender, Number, and Case. The substantive, as a predicate, 

agrees with the subject only in Case ; in Gender, Number, and 

Case, only when it denotes a person, and hence either has a 

particular form for the Masc. and Fern., or is of common gender. 

The same principle applies to substantives in apposition {k 266, 

1). But when the substantive denotes a thing, it agrees with 

the subject only in Case, e. g. 

'E-yw ypd<f>(»y <rv ypdpeis, ovros ypdtpei. — 'O Hv^ponros d^yrfros i<my. — 'H aperii 
KoX'^ i<niv. — T^ irpayfjLa aX<r^6v icrriv. — Ot "EAATjvey iroXfp.iKunaToi ^ffay. — 
*0 KoXhs irats, tj (ro(p)) ywi]y rh fiiKphv t4kvov. — 'E7€veVi^»' rw &vSp€ tovtco 
{Kpnias KoL 'AXKifiiddTjs) <pv<rei <piXoTi]xoTa.TU) Trdirruv ^ A^yaluv, X. C. 1. 2, 14. 
■ — Kvpos ■^y fiafft\cvs. — To/j-vpts ^y fia(rl\fia. — Kvpos, 6 /ScwiXeuy, 'r6fxvpis, i] fiaal 
Keia. On the contrary, Ti}v dvyaT4pa, Sfiv6y ri KdWos koI /acye- 
^os, i^dyay wSe elvey {his daughter a vxmder in beauty and size), X. Cy. 5. 2, 7. 

* When the adjective merely ascribes some quality to the substantive with 
which it agrees, it is called an attributive adjective, but when it belongs to the 
predicate and is used in describing what is said of the subject, it is called a 
predicative adjective, e. g. in the expi-ession 6 aya^hs av7)p {the good man), aycf 
^6s is attributive, but in 6 ay^p iam aya^6s (the man is good), it is predicative. 



♦ 240.] AGREEMENT. 303 

2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the 
subject as above stated, when the following and other similar 
verbs, which do not of themselves express a complete predicate 
sense, have chiefly the force of the copula : ^ 

(a) The verb •v-rrdpx^Lv, to be the cause of, to he, to exist ; 

(b) Verbs signifying to become, to increase, to groiv, e. g. yiyvo- 
fxat, e(f)w, av$dvofJiai ; 

(c) The verbs /xcVw, to remain, and Karctmyv, to be established, 
appointed, to stand; 

(d) Verbs signifying to seem, appea^ shoiv one^s self, e. g. 
eoLKa, <^aiVo/u.at, BrjXovfjiat ] 

(e) Verbs signifying to be named, e. g. KoAoO/xat, ovo/xa^o/w-ai, 
XeyofjLaLf d/<ovu), to be called (like audire) ; 

(f) Verbs signifying to be appointed to something, to be chosen^ 
to be named, e. g. alpovfxaL, dTroSiLKvufiat ; 

(g) Verbs signif}ang to be regarded as something, to be recog- 
nized as so77iething, to be sujyposed, e. g. vo/nt^o/xat, Kplvo- 
fxai, vTroXafjL/SdvofxaL ; 

(h) Verbs signifying to be given as somethi?ig, to be received as 
something, to be abandoned, cast off, and the like, e. g. 

Kvpo; ^yivfTo $a(Ti\fVs ruu Tlfpcrwv. — Toinois 6 ^i\i-mros fiiyas rjv^-fj^rj 
(Dcm.). — 'AXKt^idbrfi TJpt^T] (TJpaTrjyos. — *AktI <pi\uy koI ^evuv vvv kSAok^s 
Kai ^(o7s ix^P^^ aKovov<r ly {audiunt), they hear themselves called Jiatterers, etc. ^ 
Dem. Cor. 241. 

Eemark 1. When the verbs mentioned under (e), (f ), (g), (h), have the 
active form, they take two accusatives (^ 280, 4). 

Rem. 2. Several of the verbs above named, are also joined with adverbs, 
but they then express a complete predicate sense ; e.g. "Xwk partes -^v {lived) del 
<rbv Tois yfots. KaKus, kukus iffriy (it is well, etc.). Advus fcray iv 
<pv\aKfj<n oi BafivKcavioi (diligenter versabantur in custodia)^ Her. 3, 152. 
Mdrrji/ uuai, to be in vain. Elvai, as well as the verbs yiy ye ar^ai and irfcpv 
Kfyai, is very often connected with adverbs of place and degree, of which 
the corresponding adjective-forms are not in use, as 5/x«> X^P^^t eKds, fiuK- 
pdy, 'rr6^p<i>y 4yy{>s, ir\7jo"(ov, ifiov, a\is, /xaWoy, fidXiara, e g. 
lolat^Pi^vaiuv (rrpaTrjyo7ai iylyoyro Si'^a al yycofxai (sententiae iw rftVersaa 
paHes discedebant), Her. 6, 109. 

3. Wlien a Demonstrative, Relative, or Interrogative pronoun, 
either as a subject or predicate, is connected with a substantive 
by the copula cTvat, or one of the verbs mentioned in No. 2, 
the Greek commonly, as the Latin regularly, put the pronoun 
by means of attraction, in the same gender and number with 






304 SYNTAX. [^ 241 

the substantive to which it belongs. So too, when the pronoun 
is in the Ace. and depends on a verb of naming, e. g. 

Ovt65 iarriv 6 ayfjp. — ASttj iarl iri]'/)] koX apx^ vdurwv rwv Koucuy. — 
OijToi Si] ^A^7]vaiol ye SiK7]y avr^v KaXovcriv, aWa ypa<piiv, PL Eutjrphr. 
princ. — Hapa rwv trpoyeyevrifiivwv uav^ducTe • avrr] yap apiffTt] SiSacKa- 
A. I a, X. Cy. 8. 7, 24. — T t s eVrt ir 77 7 ^ ttjs apexes ; — Tldvr es ovroi v6fioi 
flcriu, ovs rh ttAtjS'OS <rvi/e?iL^hy Koi SoKifidcrav ^ypaipe, X. C. 1. 2, 42. — 'Eciy m 
(pi\os fioi yeuS/xeuos eS Trotetj' i^iK'p, ovtos /xoi filos icrl (this is my means of 
life, hie mihi est victus) 3. 11, 4. 

Rem. 3. Yet the Greeks not unfrequcntly put *he pronoun in the Neut. 
Sing., e. g. "Eari de rovro Tvpapvis, F\. Kp. 344, a, where in Lat. it -would 
be. Est autem /lacc tyrannis. Tovr6 ianv t] 5 txai o(ruv 77, ib. 432, b. Tovto 
TTTjyi] Kal apxv Kiv-fja-eus, Phacdr. 245, c. The Neut. PI. is sometimes used 
instead of the Neut. Sing. "Eyiuye (p7)ij.l ravra juev <p\vapia5 eluai, X. An. 
1. 3, 18. See § 241, Rem. 3. The neuter pronoun denotes the nature of an o!»ject ; 
on the contrary, the pronoun that agiees with a noun, denotes the quality of the 
object. Hence there are cases where the two forms of expression cannot be 
interchanged, e. g. Ti eVrt <pb6vos: quid est invidia? {what is its nature f) 
and T t s ia-Ti (p^Suos ,- quae est invidia ? {what is envy ?) The neuter demon- 
strative is also always used, when it is more fully explained by a word in appo- 
sition, e.g. Oil rovT Tjv evSaifwyia, ws toiK^, kukov airaWayi}, PI. Gorg. 47b, C 

^241. Exceptions to the general rules oj Agreement. 

1. The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree 
with the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Coustnictio 
Kara <jvv€(tlv). Hence, after a collective noun in the Singular, 
when it is used of persons, as well as after the names of cities 
and countries, used for the itiJiabitants, and also with abstracts 
which stand for concretes, the Plural is used, and such a gender 
as belongs to the persons denoted by these words. 

Her. 9, 23. rb irXri^os iirefioribriarav. Th. 4, 32. 6 &Wos trrparhs 
air 4 fiaivov. 5, 60. rh &t p ar 6ire5ov h.viX^P°^^' 2, 21. vayrl rp6ret 
aurfpe^KTTO 7] Tr6\is kcu rbf TlepiKXea ev opyfi flxor. With attributive adjec- 
tives, this constniction is rare and only poetic, e. g. H. x> ^■^- </>^^« rtKvov (Hec- 
tor) ; but it is very common in prose with a Part, which stands in a remoter 
attributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. hr\ r)]v •ir6Kiv iir4ir\eoy iv xoAAi? rapaxV 
Kal (l)6fi(f) 6 yras. X. Cy. 7. 3, 8. S> aya^] Kcd ttio-ttJ ypvx'hi oXxV ^^ o x o A t - 
•K(t3V n]fias. X. H. 1. 4, 13. 6 iK rov dareos ox^os i]bpolabr) irphs ras vavSy 
^avfid^ovTes Kal I5e7y fiov\6 fiivoi rhv 'AXKi^idSriv. It is very frequent 
with the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. <pevyei is KepKvpav ws avruv (sc. KepKvpcJ, 
uv) €vepycTT}s. 4, 15. es r^v ^irdpr-nv us riyyfX^ to yry(yrifi4ya xepl IlvAoy, 
(So^ey avTo7s (sc. to7s ^TrapridTais). X. Cy. 3. 3, 14. cvyKoXicas ttov rh trrpa- 
ri(i>T iKhy €\e|e irphs avrovs roidSe. Also with the relative pronoun ,• see on 
adjective-sentences, § 332, 5. 



$241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 305 

Remakk 1. When the subject is expressed by the Neut. article t6 or t j{ in ' 
connection with a substantive in the Gen. PI., the predicate is commonly in the 
PL, being conformed to the attributive genitive ; the predicative adjective or par- 
ticiple takes the gender of the attributive genitive. S. Ph. 497. to t&u SiukS- 
voav rhu o'^kuS' ^irciyov arSXoy {iJTreiyoi/ ^yhich. has the Neut. PI. rd for its 
subject would regularly have been in the Sing, according to No. 4, but is con- 
formed to the plurality in SiaKSuwv). PI. Rp. 8. 563, c. rh tuu ^-npiwp 
iKiv^epdrepd iarw (the Sing, eo-rfj/ is used on account of the Neut. PI. 
i\€v^€pwT€pa, according to No. 4, while iKev^epuyrepa is conformed to the idea 
of ^pia contained in ^piwu). 

Rem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following : 
When a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. PI. 
expresses periplirastically a substantive idea, as \f/vx^ Tetpeo-mo, the Participle 
which stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case 
with the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., 
which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. \, 90. ^?^e S' cttI 
1^/vx.V ©TjiSoiou T (ipeaiao XP^'^^^^ aKrimpov ex^wj/, the shade of the Tlieban 
Teiresias came, havirifj a golden sceptre (here Ixw agrees in number with ^vxh^ 
but in gender witli Tfipfo-iao). 11. /8, 459, opvi^wv •mm^vSiv €^vea ttoA-Ao, 
tv^a. KoL fy^a iroTuyrai ayaWd/xeuai irTepvyioraiv. 

2. "Wlien the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi- 
nite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is 
put in the Neut. Sing. A\athout reference to the gender and 
number of the subject. 

(The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the 
pronoun t1, or the substantives xp^M<^> irpoTAtOj are connected with the 
adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the 
article tJie). 

11.^, 204. oifK ayabhy ToKvKoipavif} (a multiplicity of rulers is not a gooa 
thing): fts Koipavos taroj. Eur. 0.760. hnvhv oi iroWoi., KUKOvpyovs orav 
^X*'0't irpoffTOLTas. Id. M. 329. vK^v yhp reKvcov (pLOiye (plKrarov irt^Ais. Id. H. 
F. 1295. Oi /ii6To^oXal Kvir-rip6v. Her. 3, 82. ^ fMOvvapxiv KpariCTov [a 
monarchy is the best thing, or viost desirable). PI. Rp. 2. 364, a. Ka\hv uhu t] 
<r (D <f> p a vv If re koX S iKaioffivrjy xaA.ex^i/ fiivroi koI inliroyov. Also 
in abbreviated adjective sentences, e. g. Her. 3, 108. -f] \4aiva, ihv lax^p<^ 
rarov kolL ^paavraroVf 07ra| fV tQ filco Tlicrei eV. PI. Rp. 4, 420, c. oi 
6<p^a\fi.oif KdWio-T ov 6v, ovk oarpdo) ivcxX-nXifififvoi elaiv. Her. 3, 53. 
rvpayvls XP^t*-^ c^aXip6v. PI. Th. 122, b. avfj.fiov\T} iephv XP^^"' D^m. 
01. 1. 21, 12. iiras nfv \iyos, &*/ avf to irpdyfjLaTa, fidraiSy ri (paiyerai koI 
K ty6y. 

3. When the subject is an Inf. or an entire sentence, the ■ 
Greeks usually put the predicative adjective in the Neut. PL 
instead of the Sing., where the EngHsh uses the pronoun it, 
e. g. it is pleasant to see the sun. Tliis occurs most frequently 
with verbal adjectives in -t6^ and -tc'o?; with those in reos 
and many in -tos, the Inf. is implied in the word itself, e- g. 

26* 



v^ 



306 SYNTAX, [§ 241 

d/xwTca icTTL TLviy some one is to be helped; irixna. cart rots <f>LXx>is, 
friends are to be trusted. 

Her. 1, 91. t))v Tmrpufiiw^v noipav aSvvard icrri [it is impossible) airo<pvy4€iy 
KoL ^e^. 3, 83. 5^A.o, '6ti Set €va ye riua rj/xeav ficuriAea yevecr^ai. Th. 1, 86. 
otis oil trapaSoT e a rots 'A^valois iarlv, ovSh koH Xoyois SiaKptrea, aAAa 
T iiiwprJT ea iv rdxei. 4, 1. a86vara ^y iv r(p irapovri. rohs AoKpovs a/xih- 

Rem. 3. In like manner, the Greek very often uses the PL ravra, rtfSe 
(sometimes also e/c6?^o), to express an idea in its whole extent or in the most 
general manner, the plural bringing before the mind all the particulars involved 
in the idea. Th. 6, 77. ovk "laves rdde elaiv, ou5' 'EWris-n-SyTioi, oAAo AwpiTJSf 
it (this) is not lonians, etc. Aeschin. Ctes. p. 55. ovk ecm r avra apx'f) {this is 
not an office). Id. Leg, p. 50. toCt' co-tij/ d irpoSoTTjs, this is the traitor. PI. 
Phaedon. 62, d. 6 avSriros &y^pay7ros tcCx' "hy olrj^eirj t avra, (pevKTeoy eJyou avh 
Tov S€<nr6rov. In the English these plurals are generally translated by the 
singular, as this, that ,^ , , 

4. The subject in the Neut. PL is connected with a verb in 
the Sing., inasmuch as a plurality of objects in the neuter, was 
regarded by the Greeks as one connected whole, the individual- 
ity being lost sight of. 

Tot ^wa Tpix^*-' — '^°- '"'pdyfiard iari KoXd. X. Ven. 12, 11 a-vy r^ 
irJ\€i (rJJ^eToi koI awSxXvTai ra oiK€ta kKaxrrov. Eur. M. 618. icaicou 70^ 
f.r'ayZphs Sup' oyrioriy ovk exe*. 

Rem. 4. Also in adverbial participial phrases, a neuter plural is joined with 
a participle in the singular, e. g.Z6^av ravra, quum haec visa, decreta essent. 
X. An. 4. 1, 13. S6^ay Se toGto, iK'f}pv^ay ovtco iroieiy, when these things had 
been agreed upon, orders were given, etc. Yet, X. H. 3. 2, 19. So^ayra 5e rav- 
T a Kot irepay^eyra, ra jxey aTpaTevjxara airTJK^ey. 

Rem. 5. There are some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; most 
of them may be referred to the following cases : — 

(a) When the subject in the Neut. PI. denotes persons or living creatures, 
the verb is very often put in the PI. in accordance with the Constnictio 
Kara ffvyeffiy. Th. 4, 88. to re A. 77 {the magistrates) rS>v AoKeStfioylwy 
ofj,6<r ayr a BpaaiSay i^eTre fj.\pay. 7, 57. roadSe fierk 'Adriyalay 
e^y-q iffrpdrevoy. PLIjSLch.. 180, e. ra fjieipdKia Sia\€y6fi€y 01 

^^,. , '-iirifiefiyr] yr ai 2w/fpoTous Kol a<p6Spa iiraiyovciy. 

(b) When the objects contained in the plural are to be represented individih 
ally rather than collectively, or when the idea of plurality composed of 
several parts (which may also have relation to diiferent times and places) 
is to be made prominent,' e. g. X. An. 1. 7, 17. ravrri rfj rip-epa ovk inax^- 
ffaro Pa<Ti\€vs, aAA' inroxci'povvTcav (payepa "ficray /col Xinrav koX ay^pcitnu'v 
iX^V "ToWd {many tracks here and there). Cy. 5. 1, 14. to fi.ox^vpii 
ay^pd>Tria iraxruv, oTfiai, rwy iiri^fnuv oKpaTrj e<rri, K&Treira epwra o t t « - 

* It will often, therefore, depend upon the view in the speaker's mind, whether 
the Sing, or PL is to be used- 






f241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 307 

& VI a I, the singvlar ia-ri is used here because mankind is referred to as a 
class, but the plural cuViaJin-at, to denote tliat each individual blames love, the 
charge being made too, in a different manner and at different times. Th. 5, 
26. e|w (praeter) roxnuv irphs rhv MavriviKhv Koi 'ETridavpiou ttoAc/jlov koI 4s 
&Wa afKpoTepois afiapTT] fiar a iyeyoyro, mistakes of each of the two, at 
various points and times. X. An. 1. 4, 4. ^ffav 5e ravra 5vo Tcixv- 

^c) The non-Attic poets from Homer down, very often use the PI. simply on 
account of the metre. 

Rem. 6. The plural subject, masculine or feminine, is connected in the poets, 
though rarely, jvith a verb in the Sing. Find. 01. 11. (10.) princ. /xeKi'ya.pv^s 
vfjLvo. wrrepwy apxau \6yuv t4\\€t ai. This construction is very limited in 
prose-writers ; it occurs with eerr j and ^v, but only at the beginning of a sen- 
tence (comp. il est cent usages), which then assume the character of impersonal 
expressions. Her. 1, 26. ean koI fieTo^v ttjs re TroAotTjs 'jr6\ios Kol tov vtjou eirrh 
j'ToiSioi. PI. Rp. 5, 462, e. eari koI iv reus 6XKais ■noX^aiu 6.pxovT4s re koX Srifxas. 
In like manner the Greeks regularly say eo-rtj/, o'l, sunt, qui. See § 331, Rem. 
4. The construction mentioned § 242, Rem. 2, is very dilFerent from this. 

5. A subject in the Dual, as well as two subjects in the Sin- 
gular, very often have a predicate in the PL, e. g. Avw arparu. 
av €)(<!) pr](Tav. Tiov avTOJV Scovrat kol rj yvvrj kol 6 avrjp. The 
rule seems to be, that when the affirmation is made of each of 
the two separately, the Dual is used, but when of both together, 
the Plural, e. g. Mtvws kuI AvKovpyo'; vd/x,ovs t^^r-qv {each 
gave laws) ; rihovq o-ol koI kvirr} iv rg ttoAci ^acriX^vcr^TOV. 

Rem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of, 
but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected, 
e. g. tt6Z(, x^^P^y ^^> o^ ^"^'^ ^'^ ^^'^ conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal 
relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. 

Rem. 8. The Dual very often interchanges with the PI., especially in par- 
ticiples, e.g. II. A., 621. toI S' ISpu a TT e \|/ u X »' T o x'Ttii'wv ardyr € Trorliryoiriv. 
PI. Euthyd. 273, d. ^YcAa (TOT 7j J/ 6,fji<f>u> fi\4\\/avr es els aWiiXco. 

Rem. 9. A subject in the PI. sometimes has a verb in the Dual, when two 
objects mutually connected, or two pairs, are spoken of, e. g. II. 5, 432, sqq. ws 
6' '6t€ x.f'M*^^'" TTOTa/uoi, kot' opf <T(pi p 4oyT € s, is /xiayayKctay cvfifiaK- 
\€Toy ofipifjioy vSup, . . &s ruy fi\ffyofx4v(t>y ydyero'iaxv ^e <p6^os re (two streams 
running on opposite sides are compared with two hostile parties). II. d, 185, 
sqq. "Edv^e re koI <rv n65apy€y /col AI^wj/ Aa/xirc re S7e, yvy /jloi ri)y KO/xiS^y airo- 
riyeroy, — 191. oAA' 4<po ^lapr elr oy koX (TirevSeToy (two pairs). 

Rem. 10. The following points also are to be noted in respect to the 
Dual: — 

(a) A substantive in the PI. is very often connected with the Duals Svca, 
Svo, but seldom with Svo7y. 11. e, 10. Svu vUes. II. i, 4. ^ye/xoi 
Svo. Aesch. Ag. 1395. 5vo7y olfiuyixaaiy. PI. Soph. 244, b. Trpos- 
XP<>>ti^voL hvo7y oySfiaa ly. PI. Rep. 614, c. Svo X'^o'/uaTO e'xo/we- 
vu a\\rj\ IV ] 

(b) The Duals rdi, roly, TdtiSe, ToTvSe, toi/tw, tovtolv, avTU, avToTv, &, oTv, in 
prose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. e. they are of common 
gender), e. g. &fi<pw tw TroAee — Tca yvvaiKc — 6,ix<p(» rovTW rib T]fi4pa — ro7p 
ytvfaeoiv — tovtu rii} r^xva — tovtoiv ro7v kivi](x4oiv — to; 6hw. The Pem, 



^ 



308 SYNTAX. [§241 

form of the article t <£, is extKemely rare, e. g. rit 8* odv KSpa^ S. Ant, 
769 ; oftener the form ralv, X. H. 6, 4. 17. PI. Tim. 79, d; so e/c Toij/Se 
5* ovffaiv TTap^ivoLv, S. O. C. 445, Tout a occurs Av. Pac. 847, but 
TavTaivis more frequent, Q.g.ravTaiv ix6vaiv, S. 0. C 859 ; e'/c t a v - 
rat J/, 1149: rairaiv Se Tar^/ hia^i]Kaiv, Isae. 5, 15. Awto, S. Ant. 
570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also 
in the Dual are used as of common gender ; the participle but seldom. 
PI. Phaedr. 237, d. r}fji.S}v iu e/cacrTO) Svo tiv4 itnov IS 4 a &pxovT€ /col 
, &youre, oTv kirofxe^a — • rovrco 5e k. t. \. 

4^ 

6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the 
subject by ctvat or any other verb having the character of a 
copula (§ 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction, 
as commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive. 

Her. 3, 60. t^ firiKos rov opvyfiaros Ittto araZioi eicri. 2, 15. at &rjficu 
AXyvirr OS e/caAeero. Th. 3, 112. icrrhv Svco \6<p(o if 'iSofi^irrj ur^Xd. 
4, 102. rh X'^P'-^^ rovTO, (iirep vpST^pou 'Evyea oSol iKaXovvTO. Isocr. 
Paneg. 51, h. iari apxtK^'^To.ra ruu i^vuiy koI p.syio'ras Swcurreias exovra 
:$,Kv^ai Kal QpaKes Koi Uepcrai. So also in the participial construction, e. g. Th. 
5,4. KaTaKaixfiavovcn Ka\ fipiKiyuias, hv epvfia iv t^ Aeovrivr}. PI. L. 735, 6. 
Tovs /M^yiffTa 4^r]ixapTt]K6Tas, auidrous 5e ovras, fxeylaTrjv Se ovtrav fi\d0r}y 
irSXews, airaWoLTTeiv e^co^cu (instead of ovras). So also Her. 3, 108. 7] \4aiva, 
ihv Iffx^poTUTOu Kal ^pacTvrarov, aira^ iv t&3 )3tw tlktu eV, instead of 
4ov<Ta. Comp. No. 2. A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences 
denoting comparison, e. g. tu>v koivwv ti &pa Sievoov/xTju, wv ovZ\v cv fiS.Woy, 1j 
ris &\Aos ex^h ^^' Theaet. 209. a. (exet here agreeing Avith tis instead of (tv). 
In Latin this is much more frequent. 

7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly 
takes the gender of the subject, more rarely that of the partitive 
Gen. 

II. <p, 253. {alcTov) '6s^' oifxa KapriarSs re /col ^kicttos TTerrqvuiv. x> 
139. KlpKOS, i\a<pp6raros ireTer}ywy. Her. 4, 85. 6 IISvtos ireAayeW 
airdvTwv tt4(j)vk€ ^(avfiaffKoTaros. Menandr. p. 193. (Mein.) yocay x«^«" 
TTciraTOS (p^6yos. X. C. 4. 7, 7. 6 l^Kios rhy Tvdyra xp<^voy iravruy Xa^i.'irp6' 
raros tov SLafj.4y€i. PI. Tim. 29, a. 6 KSafxos KaWiffTOS ray yeyoyorcoy, 
Plutarch. Consol. 102. c. rj Autttj x"^^'''"'^'''"'^'? ira^wy. On the contrary, 
Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. ffvfifiovXos aya^hs xP'?<''*/*'^''"aTo»' kolL rvpayyiK<i' 
raroy airdyrwy Krr] /xdr wy ecrrl (the Superlative here taking the gender 
of the partitive Gen. Krrjfxdruy). 

Rem. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the 
Mas c. form may be used, referring to words denoting females; (in this and 
other similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles 
than to the general idea to be expressed,) e. g. 'S,vveX7]\v^a<TLy ws i/xe KaraXeXei/x- 
IJt,4yai a5e\(pal re Kal dSeAc^tSot koX averpial roaavrai, wsr' clyai 4v rp olKia reaaa' 
pesKaiSeKu r ovs 4\ev^4povs {free 7ne7i), X. C. 2. 7, 2. 'H (rreipos ovaa fw(rx<*5 
OVK aye^erai rlKr ovras &K\ovSf ovk exovcr' avri] r4Kya^ she cannot endure 



^ 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 309 

that other persons (Masc.) should bring forth young. Eur. Andr. 711. So also the 
tragic poets use the Masc, when a woman speaks of herself in the PL, e. g. 
S. El. 391 (Electra says of herself) rrea-ov/ie,^', et xPVj trarpl rifitapovfievoi. 

Rem. 12. Sometimes the first Pers. PL, or the Pers. pronoun first Pers. PI 
is used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., the speaker representing 
his own views and actions as common to others. This usage, which is very 
frequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the Coramcfn language. 
*n 'AA.Ktj8ta5i7, Kol rjneTs T7]\iKovroi ovt^s Zeivoi to roiaina ^/uev (I also ivas at 
that age sharp in these matters). X. C. 1. 2, 46. "'E.vvoia. tto^' iiixlv iyeveTo {the 
thought once occurred to me), Cy. 1. 1, 1. Uepl fieu oZy ruv irpax^^vT<^v eV t^ 
jrap6irn ravr' efx"/***' «"■«»'• Among the poets, particularly the Tragedians, 
this use of the PL is more frequent, and a transition from the Sing, to the PL 
often occurs, e. g. Eur. H. F. 858. "HKiov fiaprvpSfifo-^a Spwa', t Spav ov 
/SovAo/xoi. Hipp. 244. alSov fjLc^a yap to \f\eyn4va fioi. 

Rem. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek kas several 
peculiar idioms : — 

(a) The Imp. Sing, ctire and some others, which denote an exhortation or 
animating call, e. g. ^76, <p t'pe, tSe, is frequently connected in the Attic 
writers with a Voc. PL, or with several vocatives, e. g. PL Euthyd. 283, 
b. eiVe fioi, S) 'S.wKparis re KaX vfxiis ol SaAoj. Dem. Chers. 108, 74. ciVe 

(b) In an address directed to several persons, the predicate in the PL often 
refers to a Voc. which denotes only one of the persons addressed; this is 
done for the purpose of making the principal person prominent. Od. ^9, 
310. 'Ai/t(i/o', oCttus tffTiv vTr(p<pid\oi(Ti ^lf^' vpilv haivvabai. jx, 82. vi\a 
IbvvfTf, (paiSifi 'OSuffo-cO. X. II. 4. 1, 11. fr, €<^tj, vfie7s, S 
'H piirniia, Kod S iSda Kfre ainhy fiovK-q^yai airfp rjfjLfTs ' 01 piv 5^ avaa- 
rivres ihiZa/TKov. An interchange of the Sing, and PL often occurs 
among the Tragedians, when the chorus is either addressed by others, or 
speaks of itself the poet having in mind, at one moment, the whole 
chorus, at anotlier their leader, e. g. S. O. C. 167. ^ilvoi, ftTj 5t)t' aZiK-tt- 
bu) (TO I iriardaas. 

(c) The second Pers. Imp. instead of the third, is sometimes connected with 
the indefinite pronoun tij or iras tis, or even with a substantive and 
tIs; this idiom, which is not common, occurs mostly in the Attic dia- 
logue, e. g. Ar. Av. 1186. x^P^* (instead of x^^pf^TOj) hcvpo iras inrr^pe- 
rrjs {every servant come hither): T6^eve (instead of to^(v(T(d) iras ris 
{every one use his bow). Hence, also, the transition from the third Pers. to 
the second, e. g. Eur. Bacch. 327. (34.5.) ffTdx^T co tis ws to-xos, f\bwv 
$€ bdKOvs TOvsS', Xv oluyooKOTTfT, pLOX^ols rpiaivov Kavdr pf<^ ov tixiraKiv, 
Kol — nib € s. Comp. Larger Grammar, § 430, 2 (7). 



^242. Agreement when there are several subjects. 

1. Wlien there are two or more subjects connected together, 
there is a double relation to be distinguished : — 

(a) The subjects are regarded as expressing multitude, and 
the predicate is referred to all the subjects equally; then 
the predicate is in the Plural, and when there are but two 
subjects, in the Dual or even in the Plural (comp. ^241, 



310 SYNTAX. [§ 242 

5) ; the gender of the predicative adjective is determined 
according to the following rules : — 

(a) With words of hke gender denoting persons, the 
adjective has the same gender; with words of dif- 
ferent gender denoting persons, the gender of the 
adjective is conformed to the mascuhne subject, 
rather than to the feminine or neuter, and to the 
feminine rather than the neuter; in both cases the 
adjective and verb are plural. 

()8) With words of like gender denoting things, the 
adjective is either in the same gender and in the 
plural, or is in the neuter plural; with words of 
different gender denoting things, the adjective is in 
the neuter plural. 

(y) When words denoting persons and things stand in 
connection, the adjective is plural and takes the 
gender of the words denoting persons, when the 
persons are to be considered as the more prominent 
idea, or the things are to be viewed personally ; but 
when both are to be viewed merely as things, the 
adjective is in the neuter plural. 

Kal X^i^y] 5e Kal a^v {xia /cal ^vsKoXia KoiX fiavia itoXKolkis ttoXKoIs Zih 
ri]V Tov crdixaros Kax^^^^o-v els r^v Zidvoiau i fjLiriirTov<rtVf X. C. 3. 12, 6. ^coKpd- 
T€t 6fxi\r}Th yevofjLcva) Kpirlas re kcu 'AXKifiidStj s irXeTcna Kcuca t^v 
•!r6Xiv eirotT/trc^Tijj', ib. 1. 2, 12. 'YipaKXr^s koL Qr^aevs fi6voi tuv irpoye- 
yevr}fievuv iiirhp rod filov tov tuv av^pdiiruv a^Xjjral Kar e(Tri](Tav, Isocr. 
Pan. 212. Kal ri yvv)} /col 5 av^p aya^oi elaiVy PL Men. 73. Ai 54 irov 
rjfier epai r' &Xo xo i Kal vfjiria rcKva etar ivl fieydpois ttot iS eyfjLevaif 
II. )8, 137. 'D.S €?Se irarepa re koI fj.r]repa Koi aS eX<povs Kal tt]u eavTov 
yvvalKa otXM'*^*^''"*"'^ yeyevi\fievovs, iSdKpvcey, X. Cy. 3. 1, 7. 'H 
opy^ Ka\ 7} acrvveffia el<rl KUKai. — SaS/ioros KdxXos Kol tax"^ SeiX^ koI 
KaK^ ^vpoiKovvr a ir peirovra <^af j/erot, PL Menex. 246, e. "Evyeveiai re 
Kal Svvd/xe IS koI r i/xal SrjXd eariv ay aha otna, PL ''^H;' t] ay op a Kal rh 
IT pvravfj'iov Tlaplai Xihtii i) a kt] /xeva, Her. 3, 57. Alhot re Kal irXivhoi 
Kol |vAa Kal Kepa/xos ardKrcos e pp ififieva ovSev xp'h'^^f'-d iOTiv^ X. C. 
3. 1, 7. *H Ti5x'? fo^ ^IXiw OS ?^crav rwv epyau Kvpioi, Aesch. 'H koA.- 
Xiarr] -jroXirela re Koi 6 KdXXiffros ayi) p Xo nra hv Tffuv etr] SteA^erp, 
rvpavvis re Kal rvpavvos, PL Rp. 562, a. 

(b) Each subject is considered separately and by itself; then 
the predicate is confined to one of the subjects and 



4 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311 

agrees with it. This construction is also used when one 
of the subjects is to be represented as more prominent 
than the others. There are here three positions of the 
predicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the 
subjects ; (c) after the first subject. 

PI. Lys. 207, d. <pi\€7 ae 6 irar^p koI rj fiiir-qp. Her. 5, 21. ctircro a<pi 
Koi ;t 1^ yii o T a Kol ^epdiToyres Kol t) vacra ttoKK)] irapcurKev^. X. R. Ath. 1 , 2. 
01 treuTiTes Kol 6 SijfjLOS irXiov exe*. PI- Symp. 109, C. at Tt/xol axnoiis /coi Ta 
ie pa TO TTopa. tuv av^punruv T]<pavi^€ro. Th. 8, 63. ot iv ry MtA.^T6» /col 6 
'AffTvoxos . . . 4^oip(rr]<r€. Th. 3, 5. MeAeos^ AaKwy a<p iKVc7rtLi koI 
'EpneiwvSas Qrjficuos. X. An. 2. 2, 1. ♦oA.Ti'OS ^ x ^ ''" o '^ <** Oi (ri/v ouT(p. 

Remark 1. Sometimes the verb, though it follows different subjects, agrees 
with the first subject, the remaining subjects being then represented as subor- 
dinate, e. g. X. An. 1. 10, \. fiaa- i\€v s Se /col oi avu avT(f S lu kuv elsTrlir- 
T6t. So also with the attributive adjective, e. g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. lirTo o/8o- 
Xovs Kol T]iJ.io^6\Lov 'Attikovs (the adjective here agreeing with 6fio\ovs 
rather than T]iJiio$6\iov). Th. 8, 63. 'AcTTyoxos iiri^fro rhv "^.t pofi^ixi^V 
' Kal r as uav s air €\r}\v^6r a. 

Rem. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the 
PI. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as 
making up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. PI. S. 188, b. koI iraxvai 
Kttl x^^^'Co''^ f^^^ i pvtri fiai iK irXeoye^ias Kal OKoafxlas irepl ^AA7]A.a Twy roioi*- 
Tcav ylyuerai ipwTiKuy. 

Rem. 3. When the subjects are connected by ^ — ij, aut — atit,Kai — *co/, 
et — et, oijTf — otfTf, ueque — ncqite, the predicate agrees with the subject 
standing nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself, 
e. g. ^ ovTos, f) ^Kfivos oAtj^t) \ 4 y € I, aut hie, aut ille vera dicit ; but when the 
subjects arc not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as 
expressing plurality, the predicate is in the PL, e.g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. & 
Artfjuxpuy fi Q7]pnriri5T)S exo"""** 

Rem. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive 
nearest to it, e. g. 'A/xipoTepois oi avrol UpKoi koI ^v fxfjLaxia- KareVrTj, Th. 
But wlicre perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with 
each substantive, e.g. irdyrcs ivSpes koI iraaai yvyalKcs; or the con- 
structions stated under No. 1 are observed, e.g. 'H p a k A tj s koI Qrj<revs n6voi. 

rioT^p KoX /LlTJTTjp KoX a^i\(po\ Ol'xMO^'i'TOt 7 € 7 € VTJ /i € V », CtC. ScB 

examples under No. 1. 

2. When several subjects of difierent persons have a com- 
mon predicate, the verb (which is commonly plural) is in the 
first person rather than the second or third, and in the second 
rather than the third. 

*E7cl> Ka\ (TV ypdcpo/xeyy ego et tu scribhnus. — 'E7«i; koi iKe7yos ypd<pofj.€y, ego et ille 
scribimus — '£70) koI <tv kcu iKe7vos ypdcpOfjLcv, ego et tu et ille scribimus. — Si* Kal 
4Ke7yo5 ypa<f>€T€, tu et ille scribitis. — '£761; Koi iKf7yoi ypdcpofiey. — 2u /col iK€7yot 
ypdfpere. — 'HiJ.f7s Kcd iKciyoi ypdipofjuv. — 'T/iiets Kot iKiivos ypdcpsre. 

Rem. 5. Sometimes also for the sake of a more forcible contrast, the person 
of the verb agrees with the subject nearest to it, e. g. X. C. 4. 4, 7. irepi roi 



312 SYNTAX. [$243. 

SiKalov Trduu olfiai vvv ex^'*' f tTeu', trphs & ovtc av ovt hv &Wos ovSels Si- 
vaiT auTenre7y. PI. Phaedon. 77, d. Sficus Se fioi SoKeis av re Kai 'Sififjiias 
TjSecos hu /cat rovroy SiairpayixaTevcracr^ai (pertractare) rhv Xo'^ov. X. An. 2. 1, 
1 8. (T u T6 yap "EAAtjj/ el Koi rjixels.- Comp. Rem. 4. 



} 243. Hemarks on certain Peculiarities in the use- 

of Number. 

1 . The Sing, has sometimes a collectiye sense and takes the place of the 
Pi.; thus in the poets: SdKpvov, uktIs, (rraydv, (rrdx^s, harvest, etc. ; 
in prose: Kvfia, itr^'fis (like vestis), \l^os, irAit/^oSf ^fiireXos, t} tV- 
w s, cavalry , rj a a iris, a body of troops, etc. 

2. Entire nations, that live under a monarchical government, are sometimes 
designated in prose, by the Sing., e. g. 6 lie pa-Tjs, the Persians, 6 ^Apdfiios, 
6 AvS6s, 6 'Affo-vpios, etc. This rarely occurs in respect to nations that 
have a free government, e.g. Thy "EXXTjva <piKov irpos^ea^ai, Her. 1, 69. Also 
the words <TTpaTi<i)T7]s, TroKe/xios and the like, are sometimes used in the Sing, 
instead of the PI. 

3. The PI. properly belongs only to common nouns, not to proper names, nor 
to the names of materials, nor to abstracts ; still, even such nouns in certain rela- 
tions take the PI., namely, when they express the idea of a common noun : — 

(1) Proper names: (a) to denote several individuals of the same name, e. g. 
8t5o KoTuAoi ; (b) to denote persons that possess the nature or the qualities 
of the individual named, e. g. PL Theaet. 169, b. oi 'Hpa/cAees re koL ©t;- 
aee s, men like Hercules and Theseus. 

(2) Names of materials occur not seldom in the PL, since either the single 
parts, which make up the material, or the different kinds of a given material, 
are contemplated, e. g. aA.es, salt; t\i d fx a^ o i, sand; irvpol /col Kpi^ai; &ve- 
{JLOS Kol vSara, olvoi ttoAvt e\eis, olyoi iraKaiol; |uAo kcu aI^os, 
etc. 

(3) Abstracts in the plural have a concrete signification, since the plural is 
used when the separate kinds or circumstances or relations of the abstract idea, 
are denoted, or the manifestation of the abstract action, as repeated in different 
places or times ; hence also when the abstract idea relates to several persons, 
e.g. Herod. 7, 158. v/uu fieyaAai a)<pe\iai re koI itravpeffeis yey6vcuTi. 3, 
40. efxoX at (Tal fxeydXai €UTi;%iat ovk apecrKovai. So ex^Vi inimicitiae ; ard- 
<reis, seditiones ; (pixiai, raXaLirwpiai, aerumnae ; ^dvaroi, mortes ; r^/vxv 
Kol ^dXiTT), ^vfiol, animi; <f>6fioiy (ppoviiaeiSy reflections; airex^ctat, 
avSpiai, brave deeds; vyieiai /cc: eve^iai rwv (rtofidrav, like valetudines, 
etc. ; TricrreiSf testimonia ; evvoias Sovvai, to show ads of kindness ; x « P ' t e s, 
presents; in many cases, the PL denotes a plurality of parts, e. g. 'ttAoOto/, 
treasures, divitiae {ir\ovros, riches, abstract) ; yd/xoi, nuptiae; vvKres, the hours 
or watches of the night, horae nocturnae ; ra<pal, funera, etc. So, e. g. in Eng- 
lish, How long these nights are ? when one night is meant. 

»y^/ Remark. The Greeks commonly use the PL of Abstracts as well as Con- 
cretes, when they refer to a PL Adj.," the idea contained in the abstract term 



^ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 313 

being then applicable to several persons, e. g. kokoI ras rpvxas; koXoI rh 
au (xaT a\ ^.picnoi ras (pvaeis] koX rais yvdo/xais koX to Is acofiaai 
a<paW6iJL^voi, X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. 

4. When neuter adjectives, pronouns, and numerals are used as substantives, 
the Greek, like the Latin, always employs the PL, when several individual 
things, individual relations or circumstances, a whole which is represented as 
consisting of single parts, are to be understood by these words : the English often 
uses the singular here, as this, that (ToCra, eKelva). Comp. § 241, Eem. 3. The 
Sing, of adjectives used substantively is put in the Neut., when an abstract idea, 
■ a whole as such, is to be expressed, e. g. rb kuXov, the beautiful in the abstract, 
rh KaKov, the had. The PI., on the contraiy, denotes a concrete idea, i. e. the 
different parts, classes or conditions which are implied in the abstract, e. g. rk 
KoXd, res pulchrae ; to kokc^, ma/a, the evil deeds, things, etc. 

§244. The Article. 

l.lThe subject as well as every substantive, takes the 

article, when the speaker wishes to represent an object as 

a definite one, and to distinguish it from other objects of the 

same kind. 1 { The substantive without the article denotes 

either an indefinite individual, or it represents an abstract 

idea in the most general manner, without any limitation.) 

yXv^patros: (a) a man, as an individual, i. e. some one of the race of men; 
(b) man, a man, as a species; 6 dv^puiros: (a.) the man, as an individual, the 
man whom I have in view and consider as an individual distinguished from 
other men ; (b) the man, as a class or species, as I think of him as something 
definite and limited in respect to his entire nature or constitution ; ^70 Ao, 
milk, Th ya\a, the milk (as a particular substance) ; <ro^la, wisdom, rj (to^/a, 
the wisdom {viewed as a definite property or particular kind oficisdom) ; <pi\o(TO(piaf 
philosophy i7i general, t] <pi\o(To<pia, as a ].Ktrticular science or a particular branch of 
philosophy. (When the Inf. is to be considered as an abstract substantive, it has ; 
the article, e. g. rh ypd<p€iy. But the abstract noun takes the article whenj 
it expresses a concrete idea,) e. g. rj ardcis, the (particular) sedition; rh 
irpay/xa, the (particular) deed; hence also the PI. at a-rda-eis, ra irpdy- 
fiara. 

Remark 1. From what has been said, it follows: (a) That the substantive, 
as the subject of a sentence, may stand with or without the article, according 
as it is intended to be represented, either as a definite or an indefinite object ;J 
Mb) on the contrary, that the substantive, as a predicate, must be generally wiHi- 
out the article, since the pi-cdicate does not denote a definite individual, but only 
the abstract idea of a quality in general. ^ Her. 1, 103. vv^ ri 7]ix4pa iyeuero, the 
day became night. Isocr. Nicocl. 28, a. \6yos a\T}^r]s Koi uSfiifx-os Kot SiKaios ^vxvt 
aya^ris Koi niffTTis €tdw\6u ecTTi. (But when the predicate denotes a def.iiiic, 
a before-mentioned, or a well-known object (No. 6), it of course takrs the 
article. } Her. 1. 68. awe^dWero rhv "Opear-nv tovtov ehai, he concluded that 
this was the Orestes, namely, the one before-mentioned. 5,77. ol S' lTnro^6Tai 
iKoXiovTo ol Trax^fS, the nch bore the name of (before-mentioned) iirito^drai. lu 

27 



3 14 SYNTAX. [♦ 244 

passages like X. Cy. 3. 3, 4. 6 fihv ravra dxwv irapfi\\ajirev • 6 Si ^Apfuvtos avft,- 
voot/TTffjLTre Koi 01 &Woi irdyres iv^parKOi, avaxa\ovin-(s rhy fvepyfTTjVj rhp 
&vSpa Toy ayaii^ov. An. 6. 6, 7. oi St liWoi ol ■trap6vT(s ruv arpimtt^vw 
iiri^dpoiiffi i3aAA€»/ rhv Af^iinrov, aya 'rs rhv tt poZirtiy^ tl. !o 

denotes, that the ideas expressed hy r, honest man. traitor, i. i 

definite action either before named, or well-known.— (When the \ 
Buperhitive or a substantive with a superlative, the article is not u»i<i , , , 

the Enpjlish, Iiowever, uses it here. Ot 4>euri;AjTai cto-t 'woyr\p6raTOi i. -V^ 

♦col ah LKur ar o I (tlic I '. Dcm. 25, 2. 'Ai^pl iroXy jcoto^^ 4pya- 

<ria KparlffTi] i<nl y 6,8. Comp. ^ 241, 7. 

2/ Hence the article is used to denote the whole compas.- ^ . 
the idea, everything wliich can be included under the term 
used ; one object is here considered as a representative of the 
whole class. 

*0 tivbpwiroi bvrrrds icriy men (i. e. all men) u mortaL Xf^'i mnh ^^*y- 
yfffbau rhy f>r\ropa koX rhv ififioyt Aesch. Ctes. 16. 'H iy^ptla koX^ 
iariy, i. c. everything which is understood bj the idea <^ iu^ptla. Tk 7^Aa 

r]Sv iffTiy. 

I^F.M. 2. ' ^'"' denotinjf 

merely a el;. :igai.shed 

from the othtrs, a- it nut d what man, the Greek 

omits the article ; h .. , — ^_tos in U; 

Rem. 3. Common nouns somctini'^': nmn tht-* .nrtirlo. where, nrrnrdinir tn th-^ 
statement in No. 1, it wouhl In 
denotinL' ^ '■ -' •" ' Oie like. ■ 
or is sui from tl 



I staniives arc unite*!, i' 

»'•/'■■ and child, hor^ae aui. . 

> > i-n common nonns arc. 
I doiinite from tlu ' 

■} ~ . of' a jnirtimuu i 

J '■ / >/(i, etc. ; other i 
' often omitted also with w». 

only in connection with p' 

TTfpl r)Klov SvfffiaT, ucra 'lAi 
/natund when a 
taction, or the ni 
I sitions, e. g. ^crtr^eu dtovi, to (<»/«« jr in poiis. *t- .y, to c o me 

supfter, to a Jiost, X. C 1. 3, 6. 'E^' Xttov iVnu, h .- ,. ,. . ^ = . ^iftpor f^itra. 

(i. e. nd frnandutH). X. Cy. 1. 2. 9. Tl6r«poy fwiarofifyoy rjrtoxf^ M fev"> o j 
"roy, I) ju^ iwiordfieyoy {ad veJtatdvm), X. C. 1. I, 9. *Evl Simp Itm 
). Her. 3. U 

EM. 4. (The names of the arts and sciences, of the rirtues and rices, oftra 

omit th- " " - ^»'ll- 

known -; . . " ■'^- s^ 

Tldyra fity o6y tftoiyt ioKfi rck «caAa ncai rci a'^a^a ko-^ o^, ovx ^v*'''^ ^ 

ffu'<ppo(rvyrf. X. C. 1. 2, 23. 'Ewd ovy to. r* SiKoia k^ :u AXXa nKi rt r«} 
^70^^ irdfTa apfTTJ xpolrrrrai, STfAoy clreu, Sti koI StKa^ovvy^ Ktu n &AAi) vafm. 
iiptr^ aoipia irri, 'i. 9, 5. 'E■rtffT^|n1^ &pa ffwpla irrlr^ 4. 6, 7. MiU.irr« 7^ 




f 244.J THE ARTICLE. 315 

€fiffir)\i]K€i airrcp iiririKriSy Cy. 8. 3, 25. (The omission of the article is natural 
also, when an abstract is to be rcpresentea active])/, ^.g.'Eu (piXoaotpla (w<riy^ 
in philosophizing (in philosophando) , PI. Phaed. GSi'c. ^ut where a paVticular 
art or science, etc. is to be distinguished from another, the article is used,)e. g. 
i] pfliopLKT], T) api^fjLirriKT]. The substantives fi4yf^os, irXTj^os, vypos, €?- 
pos, jSa^oy, yct/os and the like, are very often found in the Ace. or Dat. 
without the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression, ) 

■ ^. iroTafihs KvSyos tvofia, eipos Svo itKibpoiv, tico plethra wide, X.. An. 1. 
2, 23. 

3. The article is very often used with common nouns to 
denote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is 
due to it. 

X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. 'Eyofil(f ydp, d fKcurros rh fiipos h^ifirauvov iro(j^<€, t^ ZKov 
auT(f KoXus ^x*'" (jxirtem, cui praeest ; centuriam suam). 8. 3, 3. vflfias St tovtuv 
{ruv (TToXuiv) rh fifpos (Kdaro} rStv jjy«fi6ywy, iKfKfvaty ainovs roinois Koafxilv 
rovs avranf <plKovs {partem debitam). An. 7. 6, 23. iXkd, (pal-rrre Sv, ISfj rii 
4y4xvpa r6re \a$(7v, us /liTjSc d i^ovXtro iZvvarro tiv ravra i^aTraray (t?ie meas- 
ures requisite to rjuard against deception). 5. 6, 34. ol <npariurrai r}V(l\ovy avrtf 
tl \-f]^oyrai atroSiSpdiTKoyTa, 2ti rijy SIktjv iiri^aoify {the due, deserved pun- 
iihment). 

4. Hence the article very often takes the place of the posses- 
sive pronoun, when it is connected "with such substantives as 
naturally belong to a particular person, mentioned in the sen- 
tence. In such cases, the English uses the possessive pronoun. 

Oiyoyils Tck rtKya artpyovaiy {parents love TIIEIR children). 'O a-Tparrjyhs 
rovs ar par iwras M robs iroKtfjilovs 6,yft {leads llis soldiers). Kvp6s re 
Karairqi-ff(ras iiirh r ov apfiar o s rhy ^u puKa 4y4Sv koI hyafihs iirl rhv 
lirirov ra vaXrh, fis rhs x**P*5 fXafif, X. An. 1. 8, 3. 

5. As the article may make one object prominent, by indi- 
vidualizing it and presenting it apart from others, it is often 
used, when an object is to be represented in a distnbutivc rela- 
tion to the predicate of the sentence. 

TlposaurovfTi 5e }iiahhv b Kvpos xnriax^dTai Sdceiy ayrl SapfiKov rpla fjfiiSapeiKii 
rov fir]yhs r^ vrpar idirri {singulis mensibus singulis militihus, three half- 
Darics a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the jwund), X. An. 1. 3, 21. 
(comp. 5. 6, 23.) AapfiKhy tKoaros otffd rov firjyhs vfiuy {each of you sJiall 
have a Dane each month), 7. 6, 7. 'O 8e avyf^iabds rhv iva T^ujxhv kv\ oy\iu 
rpovffiireiy, Sre n^} irapflrj voWd, Svyaur tiy iAutrws t^* evl XP^^^°^ {singula pani3 
fntstra, to dip each morsel into the different sauces), Id. C 3. 14, 6. 

6. The article is properly and originally a demonstrative 
pronoun, and is still often used in a demonstrative sense. Tliis 



316 SYNTAX. [♦ 244. 

is particularly the case in Homer, where the article almost uui- 
formly has a pronominal relation. Comp. $ 247. 

i The simplest use of the article as a demonstrative, is as follows : An object 
not before described or referred to, when it is first mentioned as an indefinite 
individual, does not take the article ; but when it is repeated, it takes the article, 
because it has been already referred to and is knownJ e. g. Elhov &ySpa • 6 Sk 
api)p jxoi. iKi^ev. Hence the article is also used when the speaker points to an 
object, e. g. ^4pe fioi, & irai, rh ^ ifixioy (tlte book = this or that hook). , In this 
relation, the article may be used with material nouns/e. g. Ao'y ftoi t^ yaKa {the 
milk, which liad been pointed out) ; (and even when a part only of the material is 
referred to, the article is employed, though material nouns elsewhere are always 
without tlM|. article, as they contain no idea of individuality) e. g. Uivu> rov 
olvov (of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or things 
known and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun i//c,^e. f^. & KoXhs roT;, 
that beautiful boij ; tliis is very frequent with proper names. See No. 7. "Ore 
e,4p^r}S aytipas rrjv ayapl ^firiroy (T t par thv ^X^iv i-wX r^y 'LWaZa {that 
numberless host), X. An. 3. 2, 13. 

7. Personal proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in them- 
selves denote merely indi\'iduals, do not take the article. But 
they take it, when they have been already mentioned, and 
are afterwards referred to (No. 6) ; or even when they have not 
been before named, if it is intended to designate them as Well- 
known and distinguished (No. 6). Plural names of nations, 
and also the names of countries, districts, aivl 0^«ti\-als, are 
both with and ^vithout the article. 

2«/cpaTT7s €</>77. So also where an adjective is joined with a proper name, 
e.g. iro<phs 'StDKpdTTiSy the wise Socrates. ^Eyl$cri(ray Brt^aloi AaKfSatfio- 
vlovs. 'A$po K6iJ.a5 oh rovr iirolr]<T(Vy iX\' ^ircl ificovf Kvpoy Iv KiXikIo. 
tvra, avaaTp(\pas 4k ^oivlK-qs irapa fioffiXta ain^Aai/vei', X. An. 1.4, 5. Ku- 
poy 5e fieTaiTfixireTai {Aape7os) .. ava^alyti ovy 6 KvpoSy X. An. 1. 1. 2. 'Axk 
rov ^IXiffaov Xtyerat 6 Bopeas rijy ^flpd^vtay accural, 1*1. Phaedr. 229, b 
Y^as well-known names). 

U-^ Rkm. 5. (When a noim in apposition, accompanied by the article, follows 
ir a personal proper name, the proper -name does not take the article, e. g. 

ACr KpoTtros, 6 rwy AvStHu fiaciX^vs. But yet when the article is used, e. g. 

"' 6 Kpo7(Tos, 6 Tuy AvScoy ^curiXevs, it has a demonstrati^ . aiid design 

nates the proper name as one already mentioned or k ^he noun 

in apposition is accompanied by the article, when it ser>-es to distin- 
guish the person or thing mentioned from others of the same kiyd. or 
when the person or thing named is to be pointed out as one known) e. g. 
Soj/fpaTTjs, 6 <pi\o<ro<pos \ 2a'fcpoT7)y, 6 ^Ab7)ya7os, Socnttes. 
At/itiiian : X^ipiaotpos, 6 AaK^SaiaSi'ios ; on tlie contrary. : 
tion does not take the article, when it expivsses meri'ly an ;i > 

live, e. g. Her. 1, 1. 'UpoSoros 'AAiKopvoao-eus, Herodotus ofHi... .,...., 
1, 1. QovKvSiBrii 'A^yaios, Thucydides an Athenian, or o/* Athens. KXt . 
'Opxofiiytost Cleanor of Orchomenus, X. An. 3. 2, 4. \The names of rivers are 



♦ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 317 

commonly placed as n' - between the article and the word irorofiosj e. g 

d'AXvi TroTOfjAs {the m . i. .,,>). Her. 1, 72. o 'AxcAyos iroTafi6s, Th. 2. 102 
^irl rhv 'iapov irorafLoy, ^tI rhv Ilvpafiov Trorafi6yy X. An. 1.4. 1. c'lrl rhu Ev<ppd' 
rrjy T 11. irpbs rhy ^Apd^r]y xorafioy, 19. Examples like the following 

arc ): Ulom : ivl t^ troTOfxif Kcucinrdpei, Th. 7, 80. ^irl rhu iroTOfiJ)*- tJ>i» 

^Epiy(6yy ih. 82. Sometimes the article is wantin^r •• eirl "^apov troTCLfioy (accord- 
inj;^ to the best MSfS.), X. An. 1.4, 1 ; ^irl "ApTrcuroy irorafx6y (according to tho 
b<-t MSS.) ib. 4. 7. 18: toto/x^t IfXiyovs, 5. 3, 8. rPhe names of mountains, 
i- also phiced between the article and the noun, wlien 

li: ^ r or, at least, of the same declension as the nouns to 

wIjIc h they belonp, viz. 7^, lurpof, vpos, k^coj, etc., e. g. M tV 2o\iry€icu' Kdifir^v^ 
Th. 4. 4.3 ; rh lovviov txpoy, i\ ©ctnrpanrlj 7^, r] A^Aos vr,<ros] tov '2.K6pi^pov opovs, 
Th. li, '.Mi; TOV ATmou 6povi, Th. 2. 96 (6 Af/xos) ; 7) B6\0r} AZ/xvtj, Th. 1, 58. 4, 
!(».■]; i) M<V8tj irdAr<j, T' 1. ^ But if the «render (or declension) is not tlio 

»iume, they mu>i Ik- rc;_ .is in apposition with the nouns to which they 

■ long, and arc placed U-forc or after them)e. g. ry 6pti rf rfpay(i<f, Th. 4, 7o'; 
T~ ' :.' rh Kvyhs <r-^A"». ^- 105: ttJi"!???! toD ipovSt 108; i] A-fiKvhos rh <ppov' 
p. 13 ; T^ X«fpioy al 'Eyyta iSot, 1, 100 ; tjjv ir6Kty roits Tapaovs, X. An. 1. 

'2, 2h. 1 he article is seldom omitted, e. g. awh 'A^-npaiy w6\ew5, Th. 2, 97. 

8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, 
they regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng- 
lish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as t/ie 
L'ooil; or a substantive, as die sj)eaker (= tJte one speaking) ; or 
rt'sulves the participle by he who, they who, that which (= to the 
ImX. it, fpii). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the 
participles. 

'O ffo^s, t/i' wts€ {mart), a tnsc [matt), oi ayaboi, ol xaxoi, ol StKa^oi-rts {those 
who JHfitjr), the jttdge$ ; ol Xtyerrcf, the oraton; rh kya^iy, rh KaX6y, rh KoXd, 6 
fiov\6fxtiof, ijuifis ; 6 rvx<^*'t whoefrr happen*. 'O vAciirra w^*\wv rh Koivhv 
ufy'i<rrw» rm£t¥ Utovrat. 'O vA«r<rra cv^c A^trar rh k. fi. r. h^iovrat. 'O irAct- 
ara w^cA^trwy r. K. fi. r. aliwdrjatrat. — 'O kptriiy fx*^*' vKourti fity tinvp 
^IKwv toAAwk, vAoirrcr 8i iral iXKwv fiovKofiiytty ytyttrdau koI fi fi*y wpdrruy fx<* 
rovs <Tuyy\<r^i\<ro^iyovs, ihy 8« ti cr^taAp, ov artav'i^ti rwy $or}!^r) <r6y- 
rmv, X. An. 7. 7. 42. IJut when the ailjectivcs and participles are designed to 
\press only a part of a whole, the article id omitted, c. g. i^oda/, (jood men ; 
;>tKoco^vyr*s, lu^itrrts ; KtMxk xai alffxp^ f-wpa^tr. 

9. Participles also t^ke the article, when definite individuals 
^re sp(»ken of, in the sense of tJiose, who; a participle with the 

irticlc is very often appended to a preceding substantive, in the 
I'orm of apposition, in order to give prominence to the attribu- 
tive meaning, somewhat in the sense of eurji, cam, id dico, qui, 
^uae, <juo<l, or et is quiilem, f/ui. 

" Her. 9. 70. wp^ot hriXdoy Ttytrirat is rh t«7xo$, »cal tV <r»nji^i' rov MapSoylou 
owToi fcoM oi h lapirdcayrfs { ami these are tht y tluit rubUd, etc. ). X. C. 2. 6, 1 8. 
•u fjL6yoy ol iiiuncu rovro iroiovaiy, oAAa icoi ir6\fis ai rwy re KoXwy fidXitna 
iwtfitkovfityai, Kol to auffxpo. ^Kiara wposiffifvai -roKXtUis xoXefiiKUi 

27» 



318 SYNTAX. [i 24-7. 

^X^vo't irphs aW-ffXas. 3. 5, 4. BoiojtoI fiey, ot irp6(T^(v oh^ V rp eavrwK toX 
/jLuvres 'A^rjualoLS &ucv AaKedai/j-oviwu re «oi ruu &Wwy TleKanrovvTitriwv ayriTArt 
T€<r^ai, vvv aiTiiKovcnv ahroX ko^' cavrovs efj-fiaXuv els rT]v 'ArriK-fiy. 

10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more 
seldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixincr 
the article. In like manner a preposition with its Case may be 
made to express an adjective or substantive meaning. 

'H &UCA) irSXis, the upper city. 'O /ueTa|i/ rtJiros, tfie intervening place. Ot iy^dS 
&vbpuTTOL or ot ivbdZe. 'O vvv ficuriXfvs. Ol TrdKcu ao<po\ &vSp€S. Oi t<Jt€, tJi* 
men of that time. 'H avpiou (sc. ijfxfpa). 'H ^^aKpjjjs yardcTTacns. 'O dei, an im- 
mortal. So T^ and to. vvv^ now, i. c. at the present time; rh irdXcu, formerly, in tlt^ 
former time ; rh irpiv, rh avTiKa, immediately. Ol irdvu rSav crrpaTicoTwVf the best ot 
the soldiers. Th Kapra y\ivx(JS. 'H 6.yav afieKfia. 'O bfioXoyovfiivois iovKos. Th 
6, 80. TT]v aKiuZvvus ZovK^lav. So also rh irdixirav and rh irapdiray, ormiino, r} 
Kdpra, rh TrapoKoXv used adverbially. Even : 'H ruv yetpvpav o it SidXiMTts, tlu 
not destroying of the bridges. 'O -Kphs rovs nepcas ir6Kffxos. Oi irtpl ^HXoco^iat^^ 
\the philosophers. Oi iv &(rr(i. 'H ^v Xtpfiov^atp rvpawls. 

11. The neuter article to, may be placed before every word 
or part of speech, ^vhen the word is not considered in relation 
to its meaning, but is used only as a form of speech, or when 
a preceding word is repeated, \Wthout regard to the stnictnre 
of the sentence in which it is repeated. The Greek, by prefix- 
ing the article, may give even to whole plurases the form and 
meaning of an adjective or substantive. 

Th TUTTTO), rh rirrrras. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. Vfie7s, 2> tivZpts 'A^vcuoi • rb 8* 
vfxfls orav fliru, t?;^ Tr6\iv Ae'^w. PI. Rp. 352, d. oi/ irfpl rod i-rtrux^vros (de ft 
levi) 6 K6yos [i(Triv),hXKhTrip\ rov ivriva Tp6irov xph Cv*'- 

L<^ ^ 245. Position of the Article. 



W 



1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by 
intervening particles, e. g. /xcV, Se, yc, tc, yap, 8tJ ; by the indefinite 
pronoun rts (in Herodotus very often), and by aiTos caiTov. 

Ihv ixev &vdpa, r}jv 8e yvva7Ka. TThen a prcposirion stands before the article, 
the prose-writers say either : -n-phs Se rhv &vSpa, or irphs rhv &vSpa Sc, but not wp6j 
rhv Sc &vipa. — Tuv ris Tlepffecov, Her. 1, S5. Tols currhs avrov irtjfuun ^apvyfrtu^ 
Aeschyl. Ag. 845. 

2. Wlicn several substantives are connected by kou or tc — 
Kut, there are two Cases: (1) the article is repeated with, each; 
then tlie separate ideas expressed by the substantives ore con- 



♦ 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 31t^ 

sidered independent of each other, or they stand in contrast • 
or (2) the article is ivot repeated; then tlie sepaiate ideas aid 
considered as forming one single conception. 

JLuKparris irayra rfyctro bcovs 6i5cV(u, rd re \€y6fjit:va Kol irpan6n(va Kat rh 
riyfj fiovK€v6fjL(ya (the first two memlx?rs form a whole, hut tlie last is contrasted 
with them), X. C. 1. 1, 19. A/ PaZtovpylat koI ^*c tov irapaxpVH^ r^Soyai^ 2. 1, 20. 
Al ^■wififXfiat rwy KoXwy t€ Kaya^wy (pyuy, ib. Ta t€ av^x(p4(>otrra Kol /ccxof *<^' 
ficVa, 2. 2, 5. Oi trrparrtyoi fol Xoxnyoi., An. 7. 3, 21. Th iieyaXoirfKeires n koI 
iKfvdfptoy Kot rh ravtiySv t« tctd ai^Kfi^fpoy (here the first t\^o and also the 
last two form one sin^'le conception). X. C. 3. 10, 5. Toys aypoi/s roi/s iavrov koX 
oiKiUi, Th. 2. l."3. O/ ToUt's Tf Kcu •)'vvaiKfs f«o manv MSS.). PI. Ivp. 557. c. 

3. V\ acii a huiijiiunuvu iiavuig uic arucie luis aiiriuuuve j 

f^xplctivcs joined with it, viz., an adjective, partici}»le, adjec- 

ive pronoun or numeral, a sub.stantive in the Gen., an adverb 

•r pre|X)sitiou with itii Case {$ 244, 10), then tJie article has a 

liil'ercnt position according to the idea to be oxnrp5;.«;pd. a.s will 

; »e seen from the two following cases : — 

(a) Tin' attributive is joined with its substantive to express 
a single idea, as t/ic inse man — tJte sage, and is designed to 
contrast tlic object denoted by its substantive with other objects ^ 
)f the same kind. In this case, the attributive stands either' 
Im ; ween the article and the substantive, or after tlie substantive ' 
with the article rei>eated ; or the substantive stands first without ' 
Ue article, and the attributive Ibllows * with the article. 

O kya^hs ayiip or 6 i^p 6 aTOi^^f or hfiip 6 ctToJ^os (in contrast with the bad 

-iian). ^ i. 1. Ol wKovaiot iro\tTm or ol woXirai oi ir\o6ffiot {in contT&&t xvith 

oor citiii II-; O ifihs war-fip or 6 weer^p 6 4ti6t. 0» rp^lx ii^pts or ol &vSpn ol rpus. 

I ) ruy 'AJ^yaitt/y St'/ioi or 6 irjfios 6 rvv *A^nyalw (the Athenians in contrast with 

another people). Ol yvy iydpttwoi or •/ ijfdpttwot ol vvv. 'O v^% rovs Tlfpcras 

'6\*tios or 6 w6\tfios 6 wp6s rovs Tltpffos (literally the aijuinst tJu; Persiam uxir, i. c. 

■'.rf the Peniatu, in contrast ^^-iih other wars). *Awh IbaXouTcrjs rr]s 

.w^.'u.r. . ^yurrls ri ht Xtpporffff^ 'H iy taXafuyt wfSbs rhv Uipariv yavfiaxicLt the in 



' Wlum* the attrihntive expletive con»i«t« of several words, or where the 
<-^ ■■ ■ ' <1 after its 

K the article 

and i\-< substantive; Bueh expl ivolved the idea of some such phrase as. / 

f " ■., e. p- ■» ' ' "^ ' "" '~ ' TOW jreSlov rov irapa *r^y 

h J worai ,] those above, ctc). IIei« 

miAifxou^ 1 V intip wtiiov. . -t Ktj/TptTTjK, etc., X. An. 4. .3, J 

T^jToj ;i.„_ . .. .... ./^K, . . . <J inrip - ., _ ,.i KaraXr]<i>bf:i<Tr\s (pvKoKVS rris 

pvttrhi vKh rwy ibtUyroty^ here 6 inrtp and what follows qualifies the word /uur- 
ris, X. An. 4. 2, 14. 



w 



320 SYNTAX. [^ 245 

Salamis against the Persian sea-fight^ i, e. the searfigJd in Salamis against, etc. Tbess 
last examples show that a substantive with its Case has an adjcetiTe force. 

Remark 1. In the first position {6 aya^'bs av-np), the emphasis is on the 
attributive, e. g. Ae? TrotSetas koivwuuv rh ^rjKv yevos t]^iiv rtf roov ap^dywy 
{yevei), PI, L. 805, (1. But in the second position {6 ayjjp 6 a.ya^6s), the idea 
expressed by the substantive is represented as a definite one or one already 
mentioned, or is contrasted with tliat of another substantive ; in the third posi- 
tion (aurjp 6 aya^6s), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as in- 
definite, but in contrast with another. Ti dicupepfi iu^panros oKparrfs btiplov 
TOv d/cpoTecrT({Tou, X. C. 4. 5, 11. 'H apiTTj crvviaTi pikv hfo7sy ffvvfO'Tt ^t 
av^ pcloTT IS 7o7s aya^o7s,2.\,32. Th 6.pi<TTov ou tovs v6/jlovs icrrlv lax^ 
€iu, 6.K\' 'avZpa rhu fjura (ppou-fjcTfcos fiaa iKikov, PI. P. 294. a. AioiKovtnau cd 
fieu TvpauviSes koI oXiyapx'-o-t Tots Tpdirr'5 tujv i<pe<rrr]K6TcoVyalSf 
irdXeis [republics) al drj fio ic par ov fie vat moit v6yLOis ro7s Kfififvois, 
Aeschin. 3,6. Th 'nnriKhv rh iKeivcai/ (sc. rwv ^Ku^wy) ovtw fmxf'''cuj Th 
5e dTrXir iichu t6 ye tuv 'E\Kr]vuu,us iyw K4yo}, PI. Lach. 191. b. 'Eyw 
ixkv oiiv iictivovs tovs avdpas (pTjfil ou fjopov Tuiy cr w fidr uv rwy rififTtptty 
iraTepas eluai, aWa Koi ttjs i\(vi^cpias rrjs t( ijfieT ( pas koI ^vfiwdyruy, 
Tuy eV TTjSe t?7 rjTreipct', Pi. Mcnex. 240, e. Aif^tpxoyrcu rds re trv fjopopas rat 
iK rod TToKefxov r ov irphs aWriKov s i)fjuy y eyf yr{ fit yas Kod ras oKf>f- 
\fiasTasiKrrisaTparfiasrTis iir iKf7vov ^co/ic ko J, Isocr. Pan _ 
43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in the same sentence, e. j:. Tar /i«-; a - 
\as TjBovas koI to. aya^a to /xeyaAa?; irfi^u Kcd tj Koprtpla kcu oi iy 
Ty Kaip^ 'ir6uoi KOiL KivSuyoi irapexovTou {great jtlcasuns and adcuntaqcs), X. Cy. 3« 
3, 8. riws 7roT6 7; 6. K par OS S iKaio avyrj irphs aSiKlay r^y iKparoy 
^ ix^i ; PL Kp. 555, a. Then the second position docs not differ from the first. 

^y Rem. 2. With a verbal substantive, the attributive ' ' 

tion and its Case, is often phu-ed after its substantive wi 

tlie article. So also, when an attributive exphuiation conic* Inriwceu the arii .• 
and tlie substantive : 'H <TvyK0fj.iS^ ck ru>y aypuy is rh i<m/, Th. 2, 52. 'H i-vy 
vjULfrtpa opy^ is MirvXrivaiovs^ 3. 44. Trjs rwy yvyaiKwy <pi\ias vphs roi/s 6*S(>as, 
X. Ilicr. 3, 4. Also the more definite cxi)kiivcs of an Inf. Part, or a'' 
frequently are not phiced between tlie article and these wonls: Tijy c 
TOVS apyvplov r<^ fiovKo/jLivw iranKovyras (rocpKrras aTOKa\oi>aiy, X. C. 1. b. 13 
(instead of rovs rV co(piay . . . iruKovyras, in mi.I. r to make prominfi' '1"^ idea 
in T7JI/ ao<piay). 

(b) The attributive is joined with its substantive not to 
express a single idea, but is to be regarded as the predicate of 
an abridged subordinate clause ; then the attributive is not con- 
trasted with another object of the same khid, but witli itself; it 
being designed to show that the object to wliich tlie attributive 
belongs, is to be considered, in respect to a certain property, by 
itself, \vithout reference to another. In this case the adjective 
without the article is placed either after the article and the 
substantive, or before the article and substantive. 

'O ay^p d.ya^6s or aya^hs 6 ay^py a good man (= aya^hs £v, the man m&o 
is good, inasmuch as, becatise, if fie is good). Oi iy^panroi f£i<Tov<ri rhy irSpa jco- 
K6y or KaKhy rhy &v5pa, tJiey hate the bad man, i. c. thejf hate the bkui, inasmuch 
as, because, if he is Imd. (On the contrary, rhy Koichy &ySpa or rhy &v5pa rh» 
KoxSyt tlie bad man^ in distinction from the good ; hence, robs n^y aya^ci>s ay- 



•^ 






^'-«:^ 



I 



I 




5 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 321 

^p^ovs ayawifMfUj robs S( kokovs futrovfiey.) 'O /ScuriAfuy ■fjSfws xop'Cf**" '''o^f 
woXirous ay abo IS, pood citizenSy i. e. if or because they are good (on the contrary, 
rois aya^o7s -koKItcus or rois xoAiTcus rois aya^oTSf good citizetis, in distinction 

*|jrom bad citizens). 'O ^«hs ttjk ^vxh^ npar ia ri^v t^J iv^pwiry «yf<pvatv (a 
$oul, <u it is the most exceUent), X. C. 1. 4, 13. Oi vKh rov r]\lov Kara\a^v6fieyoi 
TO xp*^/**"^" ficXdyrtpa ^x*"^*" (^ biacker sh'n ; the blackness of the skin is 
the consequence of the KaraXdfjiTrfa-dcu inrh rod r]\lov), 4. 7, 7. *Ey4irpTj(rdy tc ras 
ffKTjyas 4 piifiovs #foi ra XPVH^'^"' SiTjpirao'cu' (yujti deseria erant), Th. 1, 49. 'A^icS 

ll(po«fu/oj robs bfpd-woyras ifioX ftkv &.<pboya rit iirtrifSfta TrapaCKevd^eiy, ainovs 5h 
H7}ityhs rovrcey ixrfabai (= firre aina iSup^oya cikcu), X. C. 2. 1, 9. 

Rem. 3. (if a sub-itantive havinp the article has a Gen. or a preposition and 

Case coir • ! with it, the pf' • under (a) occurs, only when the sub- 

itive wi: n. etr. f<inn« m • with another object of the same kind, \ 

p. 6 riy '. ^/wk (the Atheiiians in contrast 

Vithanotlu: , , ..,. ....,-- . . . . .... Ut:\i.,c. ^.OifK aXKorpiov rtyfTrat 

tJycu 6 'Ad riyaltty iri nos rhi^ Siffiaitty St/ pi or, kyapu^iy4]CK(raj. 5( kcu rh.s 
r w y ir i ' " ' ob s &r\ fiaiovs n pay 6y ovs (VfpyfciaSf 

J)« !i: '17 i'^h rity iy r ij iwdprr^ tcAwv, X. 

Aii the article, is placed either before 

<" antive denotes only a part of that 

ive; the en en on the jroveniinp substantive, ; 

t _ .. r 'A^Ko-ui' Lt d:,fj.os, t' ' rhe nobles. 

I! I |»:»rt!Tiv.- nvd not a; vc is used; 

1 in contnist with another people, but 
. .vd with another part of the same, viz., ) 
Totn 0i\o<To^la or t; ^i\o<ro^la rj ^uKpdrous^ 

J , . . - , ^ or 

J^Kpdrovs T] if)t\t*<To<fia^ i. e. the riiiLOSoriiT of' i>ocmtrs and not something 
v\-t' of hi>. e. j;. hi)» life. *ftnr«p o Ik las r it Kdr atdt y (dotnus ittjimas jtartes) 
icr x'jp^rrara tlyat Su, o^w koI rwy w pd^ t vy riit i.px^f ""^ rhs vTod^^- 
(Tcir dAi7dt?f Kol iiKcdas tlycu wporffH' 

i*o<Tty, us 5o«t«r 'Abr}yaltityr^w\\', , 

I'i M 'ion. 90, h. Th clBor rov wati6s (contrasted with roOyoua rov irat' 
iojj, i 1. Lysid. 204, e. 

Hi M 1 When tlic genitive of the substantive pronouns is ti'^'"' ''"^tead of 
t'; : • the n*flcxives iutunov, <r«owToC, etc. are placed a- : to (a),, 

"iial 

-nb- 

stantive with the articUv p. ^. 6 wariip ftov or ^ov 6 warifp, 6 varijp cou or <rov 6 

woT^p, 6 var^p avrov (aio-^t) or abrov (awriji) 6 »crr^p, my, t/iy. his (ejus) father^ 

6 froT^p r\uiy, vyMv^ »'V»'i avrvy^ «»r r\uwy, vuity^ »^»'» tu'ruy S war4)p, our, your^ 

But when ll; ve has tivc- joined 

Mu:. :. , 'iins can stand «■ sabsta .ittributivc,) 

e. ff. 'H rcUoi i\iiiiy ^ixTis. \l\\ the Sin;:, and Dual, the enclitic forms are always 

r • liese nev - ' • -' ' *■ - -ntcncc; but in connected dis- 

hev rni h has the article. (The Gen. 

have the poition of (a), e.g. 

t, :„.;_. ,. , :_ .,^ . - _ .,^ _ - _. ,.. Aov). T^ aXXi\Ku)v (bvoia. Thai 

demonstratives are sometimes aUo found without the article after the sul)stan- 
tivi- with the article, e. p. O* kyayKoloi Udyov, Isae. 9. 10. Ti Upa iKtlyov, ih. 
36. Toil war pits rovrwy, IC 3. Tp yby C/3p«i rovrov, Dem. 4, 3. 

Rem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest 
with the adjectives ^Kpos^ tiitros, taxaros. When the position mentioned 



322 SYNTAX. [^ 24'5. 

under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attributive forms a contrast with 
other objects of the same kind, e. g. r) fiear] it6kis or troKis t] fiear], the. middle a/y, 
in contrast with other cities ; t) ecrx^TV u^aost the most remote island, in contrast 
with other islands. 'Es rh icxaTov epu/xa rrjs vi)<Tov (in contrast with other ipv- 
jucMTi), Th. 4, 35. When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) 
occurs, the substantive is contrasted with itself, the attributive then only defin- 
ing it more fully. In this last case, we usually translate these adjectives into 
English by sul)stantives, and the substantives with which they agree as though 
they were in the genitive, e. g. iirX rep opei &Kpa) or en 6.Kp<a r<p opei, on the top 
of the mountain (properly on tlie mountain where it is the highest) : iy fifori rfj 
n6\ei (seldom ev Tp iroAfi /jLeo-ri), in the middle of the city; iv iax^'Hi "^V y^^^V 
or iv vi\(TU) rfj iaxdry, on the border of the island. 'Ei/ fxeaois rols troKe^juoa 
aire^ave, X. H. 5. 4, 33. Kari fiiaov rhv kvkKov, Cy. 2. 2, 3. Oi Ufpaai wepl 
^Kpais Tois X^P^^ X*^P''5"5 baaeias cxovcrty, 8. 8, 17. 

Rem. 6. In like manner, the word /xSvos has the position mentioned under 
(a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its sub<tantive, e. g. 
6 fiSuos TTttis, the OXLY son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b), 
when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g. 'O roTj fiSvos or 
fxSuos 6 Trots irai^eif the boy plays alone {without coniftany). Vlomiv ra/y aydfxiTuv 
{yXwTTai/) ivoiri<Tav (ol deal) olav apbpovv ttjc (pwy^y, i. e. ij ruy avbp. yKa>Tra 
fx6ur] iariv^ %v i-Kol-qaav olav k. t. A., they made tlie human tongue only^ capable of 
articulating sounds, X. C. 1 . 4, 1 2. 

Rem. 7. | When a substantive has two or more ati *. one of which 

limits the other (§ 2G4, 2). one position may be as an Ei,^ g. Oi AAAoi 470- 

^ol 6.v^pwnoi, the ot Iter good men ; or the linnting attributive with the article tit: ' r 
stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or ;!ic 
limited attwibutive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive fol- 
lows with the article and substantive. 'O vavTixhs 6 rS»y B " ' owy trr i 
r 6 s. Al &K\ai al Kara rh (rufia i]5 oyal, the other IxKi ires. V]. 1. 

565, d. 'Ej/ TOis &\\ois To7s ipiois x'^P^<"'» Lys- 281. ( VVlien 6 &\Xor is 
joined with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repe:'.'- -^ 
e. g. rSAAa rh iroKiTiKd, X. Ilicr. 9, 5. Ol 6x\oi ol traparvyx^oyrfs, X. ^\ 
11.) 'H ovx riKKTTa fiKd^paaa 7} \ i/JLuSr} s ySffos, Th. 1, 23. 'Er rp tov 
Aths T'p fxeyicmj eoprfj, Th. 1, 126. 'Es airrhv rhy 4ir\ t^J ardfiart rov Kififvos 
Thv erepov Trvpyoy, 8, 90. 'Ej/ rfj apxada rfj 7] fi,(T 4 pa ^ctyp, PI. Cratyl. 
398, b. Th iy 'ApKadla rh rov Aihs 'tfp6y, Rp. 565, d. (The limiting 
attributive can also stand between the substantive and the limited attributive j 
in this case the article is used before each of the t' •-. g. ri tc^xI 

TO (avTuy ret /uoKp^ OTreTeXfo-oy, Th. 1. 108. (Bu: is omitted with 

a limiting demonstrative standing between the substantive and the limited 
J attributive, e. g. Tijy tovtov rairr-qyl r^y i&ou/luuttJjk K6<^aA'^i', PI. S}Tnp. 213. e.) 
I Finally, if the limiting attributive with the article is placed first, the limited 
* substantive and its attributive follow, both without the article, e. g. Tlphs rh.s 
ndpoi^e (TV iJLCpopas evSai/xoyas, Eur. Ilel. 476. Ta\os iyw ttjs iv f*axv 
^vfifio\ris fiapflaSy Ar. Acharn. 1210. 'Atrh rwy iy rfj EvpiltTTi ir6\fvp 
'EA.A7J v/5aj»', X. H. 4. 3, 15. Tks xnrh Trj Qp^icp olxovaas iroXfij 'EAXi}y(- 
80s, 4. 8, 26. 



4 



Rem. 8. When an attributive participle has a more definite expletive belong- 
ing to it, their relative position is as follows : — 

(a) 'O Trphs rhv ir6\eiJ.oy alpf^els <tt partly 6s. 

(b) 'O (rTpoTTJ7bs 6 irphs rhy x6K(fioy aipt^els. 

When there are two of these more definite expletives, one stands either 
»fter the substantive or after the participle, e. g. TV irpj>s EH^vKoy yfyofitytiy 
wiariv vfiTy, Aeschin. 3, 25. Twk ko^' u.oas irnrpaypieyoiy koXmv tj^ ir6\ft, 
Dem. 18, 95. Tf^s yvv xmapxov<n\s avr^ Swet^ews, 4, 4. T^s vop' iSftwy thn^ 
Xa{)aas avrtp rifuis, 20, 83. 



i 246.) ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323 



i 



(c) 'O aipeatij irphs rhy 'ir6\efjLoy (T t p ar -qy 6 s. T)]v vvdpxovaav ttj 
■r6\€i Svyatiiu, Dcni. 8, 10. 

(d) 'O alpf^fls arparriyhs trpin rhy iroKcfiov. T7)r TTposovcav aho^- 
iav T<f xpaypLOTif Dem. 6, 8. 

(e) 'O irphs rhy »r (Trparriyhs a I p € ^ € i s (this position is most fi-e- 
quent, when ti ciple has two more detiuite expletives). Tos inrh 
rovTou 0Ka<r<prj fiias e I pij (x 4 y as, IS, 126. Al irph rod (TTOfiaros yrjes 
V av fiaxod 'y^h Th. 7, 23. T^ itphs \i^vr\v fiepo s r €t pafJLfify o y, 58. 
When there are two or more explanatory words belonging to the partici- 
ple, th "1 between the artirle and the substantive, e. g. 
T i) y T' ■ . V*' f *" So^ay wxapx<"'^*"'> l^em. IS, 9S ; or 
they are so b .that one is placed either before the participle or 
after it, e. jr. <^. m*^ rovrov kSyoi r6rf ^ifbeyrfs, Dem. 18, 35. 
TavTTjv r^jy airh roii T6irov a<T<piK€ lay virapxouaay rfj ircJAet, 19, 84. 

RjM. 9. When a participle n^ed substantively has predicative expletives 
ioin* it, these are placed u the article and the participle. Thus, 

for c. ,..c, »/>dT«poj, »p«Toi, ._ . 1.^-i, CoToTos {lie came Jir^t, etc.), Inicomes : 

6 wp6rfpos (vpwTor, ucrrcpor, vtrraros) i.<piK6fi€yos (he who came 
jir\t}] ijitcy afiofiriyfi liecfjiues : 6 iKo>y anaprdyuy] a*'0 " Wrox: 6 

aySptiot yofjil(6fi(yos\ airrits aSiK(7: 6 avrhs aSiKwy (' uinj of 

his OU71 accord); roioirds iariy: i r oiovros &y', fi6yos icriy: 6 fioyos &y. 

■\Vi . t, ti... ,....,i;. .»;v.. .vi.i.i.v >'-;^ts of an adjective and substantive, the a 

s Iter the j)arlieiple, e.g. irpalToy Teray- » \ 

fityos ra^iapx.*' {^ *'^^ ^*^ ^^''*^ P^^^'^^'^^^J^^^^'^'*^*''^^*'*)' ^ 

♦ 2Jr). Use of the Article with Pronouns and Numer- 
als , icith and trithout a Substantive. 

1. Tiic article i.> .>unn lum > n>c'd witii ^.v tsonal substantive 
|}ronouns in the Ace, either when the j)ersonali/tf is to be made 
prominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre- 
quent, wlien a person previouslv mentioned is referred to. On 

i I iroto9, see \ 344, KeuL 3. 

Tiv iavrhv 8^1 xiy^y iA\a vtfiy^s Kol iyKmfitJi(«nf {his important person), Fl. 
Phaedr. . Atvpo 8^, ^ 8* 8t, fvdit iifiin^. Tlol^ f^V iyw, \4yus, koI wapk 

rlyas roits Vfkas'{i. C. iicci2 Wr«f tlelv «&roi, ots K4y*it Vf^')y !*'• L}'*- 203, b. 

2. The article is used with a substantive which has a pos- 
sessive pronoun belonj^ing to it, or tlie Gen, of a personal or 

eriexive pronoun (♦ 245, Rem. 4), when the object is considered 
as a definite one or as relating cxchmcchj to possession; the 
jKissessive is placed between the article and the substantive 
[♦ 245. 3 (a)|. 

'O itkhs rccT-hp, 6 (rhs Kiyos^ fAy word (a definite or particular one), 6 (fihs TraTr, 
tiiy son (a definite one of .«icveral, or even the only one) ; also 6 \6yos (tov; rh» 
VfavTov itcertpa. or rly wartpa rhy fftaurov ;(on the contrary, the article is omitted 
when it is to be denoted, tliat the object named belongs to the possessor in 

•mmon with others of the same kind, or when the substantive with the posses- 



324 SYNTAX. [§ 246 

give is a predicate or in apposition '. i/xhs a5f\(p6s or a5i\<p6s fiov^ a brot/ier of 
wine (it not beinj^ determined which): i^Jibs trais or jtoTs hov. oVtos i<TTL(v) 
a.5e\(phs (t6s or ade\(p6s uov \ oZtos, aSeXcphs (/jl6s or a5e\:p6s fwu. 

3. A substantive to which one of the demonstrative pronouns 
ovTo?, oSc, eKcti/os, and even avros, ipse, is joined, regularly 
has the article. As these pronouns are not considered as at- 
tributives, but either as substantives (he, iJie nian), or are taken 
in a predicative sense {the man, wJio is Icerc), they stand either 
before the article and the substantive, wliich is tlicn in apjx)si- 
tion with the pronoun, or after the article and substantive [corap. 
♦ 245, 3 (1j)]; thus: — 

ovros 6 ay-fip or 6 at/yp ovtos (not 6 olrros ayijp), 
^JSe 7] ypiofxr) or tj yvun-T) tjSc (not t) ^Se yvwixr)), 
iKilvos & avrip or <5 aur^p (Kf7vos (not 6 int^yos ayi)p), 

(avrhs 6 ^axriXivs or 6 $cun\«hs ainos (but 6 ainhs fieurtXtvs [seldom (6) fiafff 
\cvs 6 avrSs] signifies idem rex, the same king). ) 

Remark 1. The substantive docs not take the article : — 

(a) When the pronoun is used as the snl ' ' *' i- me 
predicate (!) 244, livm. 1), c. g. avrri i(n. '•"- of 
a vum), 1*1. ^Ii-n. 71, e. Avrrj tffru iVoki) aitoKu 'is 
auTtj nfyl(rTrt d^ Tols"EWriaiy iyeyfro (tJiis tras i.. -. . i !i. 

I, 1 ; hence a distinction must l>e made between rovr^ rf iiHacKaXm 
Xpci»/Tat (/' ' ■ this teacher), and To' '* '' ■ '.- "' ' '*<i$ 
man Join '. TfKfiripiw tovtu < -ri 
reKfiypioy, if ixpyro), X. C. 1. 2, 49. TavT-qy yt - 

auTTj fCTii/ ri yywfxr}, 5jv ^X*)* •'^'^' 2. 2, 12. (If. :.. , . ...^ 

substantive is to be represented as a definite object or one before-men- 
tioned, it takes the artirle.^e. j;. 'Orore {l^Kodrjis) n ri k6yv iit^ioi, 8Ji 
Twy ij.d\i(rTa SixoKoyovfxfywv iirnpfvfro, voulivr raiTriy rify oa^xiAtiaM 
tlvai \6yov (banc esse firman. viz. such a mode 

as had been clearly shown by , .\. . . .„. ...... ,. ,.. . . 4. 6, 15. 

(b) When the substantive is a proper name, e. p^. ovros, ^Ktiyos, axrrhs ^imtpd- 
TTjs. Ev^vSrjixos ovroal, X. C. 4. 2, 3. Hucupirou roinov, Svmp. 2, 3. 
XapixldTjs ouToal, 2, 19. Abrhy Mtywya, An. 1. 5. l."3 ;(or when a common 
name is used instead of a proper name) e. jr. Avrov fi<KriKt^%, An. 1. 7, 

II. ^T.itX yr\v T'l]vhf t]X^ofxfy (with the \ i M t Th. 2, 
74. ^The article occurs but seldom, and ; th a den. force. 
Ti ZriT iKfiyoy Thy QaKyy davfjuiCofity ] Ar. Nub. 181. T^rSf rir 
'Iirir^Tji' /x6Teire)ui^<£|ue,^a, Her. 5, 91. Corap. 8, 27. 

(c) ^^lien the idea of an object is to be expressed absnfutely, the sahstantiro 
witliout the article is joined with the pronoun avT6s. Comp. 4 244, 1. 
A I' T ^ S((nroT(ia avrys iovKdas, PI. Parn ^. d. Awt^j hrurrff' 
fir}s ov fifTfxofjify, 134, b. Ovk avrov S«tz /"^ov, S i<rrt SctfT^nys, 
iKciyov SovK6s 4<mv, 133, d. 

(d) AVhen ovros di/^p is used to denote emotion, c-:- -n or con- 
tempt, instead of the pronoun <rv. Ovr o<t\ ayifp ... ■^V i 'cycir; 
EjVe fj.01, S> 2a>KpaTey, ovk euo"x»''»TJ oy6,uara ^pfvvy ; ( = ' v (kml 
you cmsc f) PI. Gorj;. 4S9. b. Ovk ol^ firra A '^ "I rs, a,\.\ &X\mt 
riyh iptLroL, 2. Ovros av^p ovx inrouiya . ^ jf(Ht,ok 
eon you tiot bear to be bentjitedf lb. 505, c 



♦ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 32d 

(e) In passages like Ovroi, ots Sparf, fidpPapoi iroXtfiidnepoi rjfuv l^ffovrcu, X. 
An. 1.6. 16, the relative clause supplies the place of the article. But 
there are few passaj^es like: ♦«'p€ Xafiuiy x*'''"*'*^ M^** Tovrovai and the 
followinjr Toc j5« xiTwyas, X. Cy. 8. 3, 6, where the demonstrative is 
used like a ihirtic {that v nts out) adverb {here, there). The poets 

very often omit the artitk ....^ic the prose-\%Titers must use it.,- 

Tir.yx. 2. When t' — noun ovroi or iKuvoi belonj^ to a substantive having 
the ;i: ; le and an ;' e, then these pronouns are often placed between the 

attributive and ' uuitive, c. p. Ai ruw T\(\oirowJi<Tiw avrai it)€J, Th. 8. 

80. 'H OTfinn ai : ., -ju5, X. An. 4. 2, 6. 'O Aifivs iKfiwos AeW, Ad. H. A. 
7, 48. So S'twrhs ovros ir4A«/ioj, Luc. de hist, conscr. c. 14. So also with tho 
;.' ' ' " (^ 24.'i. T ;i; likewise with iras, SAo^ , C. g. 4 

a ■ oiwv iru' w6Xts. 

4. A substantive with which toioCtos, toiosSc, roa-ovi qs, 
TiyXiKovTos, are joined, takes the article placed according to 

♦ 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these, 
is to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before 
mentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects 
previously named. 

*Ap* oSr Sv^uio rhf rotovror ifitftrrop ^Aor yofJ(fw ; (i. C. talem, tpialis antea 
de»crif)tuM ai), X. Cj. 5. 5, 3S. TUt hp efo A toioStos iufiip Sicup^ftpot robs 
wiout (i. e. talin rir, qmtdrm deacn'jmimHM SocnUem)^ C. 1.2, 8. Twr ro<rovrc»p 
Kol roiourmp ieymbMi' hpMf Ktl VM iXAott 'AJ^ro/oit fxo*^<' X<^»' (>" relation 
to ^N hat precedes), Dcm. Cor. 327, 305. 'Opmf rov$ rriKtKovrovs «pv\dT- 
royrat fid\irra rkf yw^Mas (rrUltnf; to the preceding yfpoi^, but at the same 
time dcii.'Tiatinj; the whole class of the ytpmtol), X. R L. 1, 7. So also when 
t 6 Totoirroj, rk roiavra. On the contrary, the article must 

I. .1 ;. I ;. ;M.i,.r...:f,» • anyone of those who an- of ^m 1i a 

II. a oi/K ky iiraiyoiris. 

6. U hi li ird«, raiT*?, oko^ belong to a sub*;tantivp. tho 
following cases must be distinguished: — 

(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered 
as altogether a general one, the article is not used. 

I - n«' '-^f'afwof (seldom i^bprnwos »«f ), evay man (i e. every one to whom 
I llho i :e man licloDgs ; wirr^t Ar.&pw»<M, all men. So also SKri ir6\is, a 

I KrBOL£ city, *iKiS «Xn, a »r*ofc ClTT. Then vat in the Rinpular sij^nifies each^ 
I flwy. Ilaj may often be translated by mere, or utter, e. g. 'O 'Epws iv irdtrr) kvap- 
■ yl^ «al kycitltf C«'. I'l- Kp- S'*. »• nabn-o 470^ Kol KoXa enrfpydCoyrai, Polit. 

284, a. 

(p) When the substantive to which irS?, Trdn-c? belong, is to 

be considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes 
I *the article, which is placed according to * 245, 3 (a). Here ttSs, 

rcuTc? are emphatic. 

i 
I 

i 



• 



326 SYNTAX. [\ 246 

'H tiao'a 7^, the WHOLE earth ; ol irdmes iroXirax, aU citisens without exception. 
This usage is more seldom than that under (a). This construction occurs also 
with 8 A. s, but it is still rarer than with irSr, e. g. ri 6\7i ir6\is, ir6\is t] SA.77, the 
WHOLE city. Here the singular ttSs always has the sense of whole. Utipwrbai, 
(xp^) Koivrj <r<i>^iiv ttjv it a tray 2(/ceA(aF, Th- 4, 61. "ESofcv oarroHs ov rovs 
vap6vTas fiSyoy aTroKTf7vou, aXXa K(d rovs Siirayras M it v\Tiyalovs, 3, 36. Ti 
^\ov audyKT} ra trdyTa /i ep?; e/ycu, PI. Thcaet. 204, a. ^Ay^pdiroKTi yap ro7t 
Truer I Koivhv TOv^afiapTdueiyy S. Ant. 1023. 'EKfiyws ^i <paiy(rcu, Sirircp rh rov 
rrposdirov fjt.6pia ex^t "trphs rh i\oy irp6sa)iroy, PL Prot. 329, e. Hence it 
signifies, m all. Hep-irovcri x'^^ouy rovs irdvras SirKiras, a Otousand hop- 
lites IN ALL. 2vv«7rA7jpc6i&T7<raj/ vti^s ai Tatrai 6fKa fjui\i<rra koX cxaroi/, Th. 3, 66. 

(y) When the words ttu?, Tratn-c?, intended merely a£ a more 
definite explanation, without any .special emphasis, belong to a 
word denoting a definite object and hence having the article, they 
are then placed according to ^ 245, 3 (b). Tliis is by far the 
most frequent use of Tras, irdvTc<;. The word 0X09 also is usually 
constructed in the same manner, in connection wath a substan- 
tive and the article. 

ol (TTpariurai flKov rh trr par 6"^ (hov Sixar or iray rh ar par 6v«9or, 
01 err par lurai irdvrts or irdvrts ol <rrpariwrai Ka\ats inax^irarro, 
Aicb r}]y ir6Kiv i\iiy or hik iKr\y rijy r6Kiy I simply tJtrmigh the whgk 
city, whorcas 5»et tV SAtjk irdKiy, throiofh the whoLK city), ^lafimirovci tdyrts 
fis rh Bu^aKTiov oi ar par lurai, X. An. 7. 1, 7. Li inrh r^s 'EAActSor 
wdffrfs i^tots ^ir' iffrp ^vnd^ta^ai^ r^y 'LXXdHa wtiparioy *l wifly^ X. C 2. 
1,28. 

6. Wlien cKooTos, caclu, every, belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, as ^vith Tras in the sense of each, every, when 
the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general 
one ; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be 
made prominent, it takes the article which is always placed 
according to k 245, 3 (b). 

Karh r^y rifi4pay €Kd(Trr}y, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or «ra&* i Kdariiy riir 
^H^paVy every singie day, but ovk 6\lya (OtI ko^' iKdarriy ti fit pay {quotidte^ 
each day, every day, general) roiavra ipay re koI OKovftv, X. C. 4. 2, 12. *A 
iKdorrr) tjKikI^ xposreroKrai irouiv, Sirjyrjf'^SfjLe^tL, X. Ct. 1. 2, 5. Tiipcwowr' 
rai inrh SfVa avSpoey, ots Aixrayhpos KaT4<m}<r(y iv fKd<rrri ir^A ci, H. 3. 5. 13} 
but "O ri h-y iy r ■p yfj € Kda-rrj Kokhy fj aya^hv jf , nfur^jaorrat, in eirry simgU 
latid, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal ijyffioiy n^v ^y i S^nriJnjs tKdarTjs ryjs •ixlaSt An. 
7. 4, 14. 

7. AMicii cKttTtpo?, each of tiro, a/x(^ and o/x^orcpo^, bofh^ 
belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here 



If 



♦ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327 

only two krunan, therefore definite objects can be spoken o2. 
The article is here placed according to k 245, 3 (b). 

*E»l rSt¥ wXtvpAy c ir arc'pwv, X. An. 3.2, 36, or iirl tKar 4p<itv rur 
rKfvpuy. Ta 2/Ta ikn<p6r « pa or afi(p6T t pa rb. ira. 'Afi<poiy rolv 
X*po'tp or ro7v x^P""^^ kfk^olv. K<l&* ixar tpoy rhy isir\oiiy Th. 
4,14 T<f wtI €jeaT«>y, X- Ven. 5, 32. 

6. In respect to the pronoun avros and the indefinite pronouns 
or numerals aXXo?) cTcpos, iroXv?, 7rXct'o>v, 7rX€to"T09, the 
following points are to be observed : — 

fa) 'O auT^f gi^itic-^ the same, idem^ e. g. 6 airrhs iy^pontoSf idem homo; rab 
T 6, tJi- same; but 4 iifdpmwps avT6t or tunht 6 iybpvTos, homo ipse. 

(ij; 'AAX«t ao/iiu, anotker, ia contrast will {)>$« {ain6s) ; d JtAAof = reliquu^ 
Ote other ; oi iWoi = rtliqui, certeri, the rwt, C g. i^ iAAn "EAXor, rdiijua Graeciu 
the reat of Greece, in contrast with some part before namcil ; oi &xXoi iybpanroi 
the other men or the othert, in relation to definite individuals. ''A 'ApioTe koI o. 

iWot $voi ^f jUffav ^IXoi, ^' ' cuui the rest. But 'O VKovs iitf<phn\ fur 

iKKmy, Gius a p ptond with • \ contrast with himself; — Ircpor = one 

of two (it not beings determined which), or it forms a contrast with 6 ainis and 
otes differmea or camtraM; — i lr«pof » the other, i. e. the definite one of 

o, e. g. ^ fr/^ X«^ ^ *^*V»f XPi^a* > • ^ ' ^ * /» « • io rtf> ■.«. 

1'-^ The following ca«ec of voAvi, woXKol are to . , i (a) 

\\% . roAuf, voAAdl belong to a suMtantive without the article, as voAvs irdi^or, 
troAA^ mtov^, veX^f A^f, voAAol L^prnwoL, an object is denoted as au indefi* 
!iit«* one, e.g. IloAirr ixovcm wiyow AtfAfif t^i tow f»Tor J^/ai irtpx^i^o* 
[Kj'-infiwmchtoH).V^ "PI,,..-?.- •>4l, b. rioAAo) Ardpovroi roi; irAoirroi; 6pi' 
7fKTai (many hmh, . ut if the object is represented as dennite, or 

one preriouslr mentioned or known, the article is used with the substantive, 
and woKvt is then placed : (I) as an attributive between the article and the sub* 
r e, •. g. f voA A^ rvoi/8^ rh kk^f^^ma Vb*1* «r<8/oy (magnwn^ illud, de quo 

u ddium, thai grmt maL, of which I Aom jpofan), PI- Thaedr. 248, b. 'tiy vtpi 

rhy voxbw K6yoy iwot«7To'\raicrr6pas {mtdtum ilium aermimem, e tcnpris ejus 
aatis axinitum), 270, a. *Zy rmtt voAAaif yty^ffivi {among the man^f genera- 
tiont mattiomedU Phacdon. 88, a; •/ voAAol iydpttwoi signifies either the 
^....^ «^ ^...w/ «r a midtitmde of men belonging togethrr in i.nposition to the parts 
also ol veAAo(, the manjf, the i , the populace, plebs, 

or even the moet, tha imajority (in contrast with the separate indivianals), e. g. 
•0«ro •/ ixiyoi robs woKkobt n^i wflomrrts, kkXh Kparovrrts yp^viri {what th« 
few prexribe to the wtany [the majority] not by permasion but byfurct), X. C.l . 2, 45 , 
rh woXC^ the greaUr part, c. g. Tir woKtfilmy rh n*y woKv (ntyfyy fitpos 5* ow- 
riy irhtrra roU Korit rk Sicpa {mo$t of the enemy remained), X An. 4. 0, 24. What 
Is true of the Positive, is true also of the Comparative and Sui>crlative. 'Eav 
f/Aowi I) iriXiy i^ptKuy 8/tj, wortptft r, -rKtlwy ffxof^h rovrwy fir«/i(A€?(r^a<, 
r^ i,s 4yi> yOp, l> t<^ ij <rw fMKapi(*is «.cut«/x«kv (the ;:rcater leisure, considered 
as a ddiaiic ihmg, or as a definite whole), X. C. I. 6, 9. Ei iiiiov, iirl rointf 



OJ I 



228 SYNTAX. [♦ 246. 

hyiSiSov, Svcas ifw) iovs fi^tov fi^ iLiroholri vfiiv rh ir\€7ov. An. 7. 6, 16. "E-rerui 
rp aperfi (TM^ea^ai els rhv irKtiw XP°^°^ fj^XKov, ^ t^ Kcuct^, R. L. 9, 2: of 
irKiiovs or Th trxiov signifies the majority in opposition to the minority ( ol ixda- 
tfous), therefore a definite whole; o/ irAfTtrToi, the most, rh xKfiaroffthegreaUM 
part, also to be considered as a definite whole. — Or, (2) toAuj is joined with 
the substantive having the article, and is placed according to § 245, 3 (b) ; 
'iro\vs is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. 'Evfl ku>pa iroAAa rk 
Kpea (when he saw the flesh tfiat it was much, the flesh in great abundance), X Cy 
1.3,6. :£,(f>i(ri TO Wb. r a &irop a ^v/jLfiffirtKSra (SC. ipu>yrfs),Th. 1^52. 11 oA- 
\^v r^v alrlav dxov (they had censure in great abundance, L e. voere very 
severely censured), 6, 46. 
^ ((l)'O\i'Y0i,few,(i.g.h\iyoi 6.vbpunroi\ ol ixlyot^ the fl!W, i. e. cither tho 
few mentioned, or to be considered as a definite whole, viz., emphatically tha 
Oli(/archy, considered as a whole, in opposition to ol iroAAof, e.g. TlpHrfifis 
ol M-f]\ioi irphs fify rh irXrj^os ovk f/yayoy, iy ie raus hpxous Kol toTj oXiyois 
Kfyeiy ^KtKfvoy, Th. 5, 84 ; but when only an indefinite idea is expressed by the 
word 6\iyos, the article is omitted, e. g. TlpoSo^rcu r^y wokiy in^ ixiymr {Inf 
oligarclis, not by the Oligarchs). 

9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is 
indefmite, e. g. rpets ai'8p€9 rjXBov ; but the substantive takes the 
article wliich is placed : (a) according to ^ 245, 3 (a), when U|^ 
substantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea 
of a united ichole ; hence also, when the number of objects is to 
be represented as a sum-total, after the prepositions <Sfi^ »^>4 
CIS, virip ; but the article is here used most frequently, when a 
preceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing iiith it, 
and without the article, is referred to. 

Oi rSiv fiaffiXtwy olyox^oi SiS6<uri rois rpiffl SaKTvXois 6xovrT«$ r^ 
; <pid\riy ^irith the three flngers, i. e. the three generally used), X. Cy. I. 3, 8. ""Hr, 
8tc ^t'^^uto, atx<p\ ra v 4 yt-ff Koy^a irri {he had reached abottt the mam of 
fifty years), ^. An. 2. 6, 15. 'Iinr«ry €<s Toi>j f er pa.KisxiXiovs ovrcA^ 
yovTo aifT(f, kcu to^Stui els rovs fivpiovs, Cy. 3. 2. 3. To7s Ktpmiftdwu rm9 
etnoffi veSiv ov vapovauv (referring to the preceding words of ILtptcypatM 
eXKOffi vavffXv avrovs Tpey^dfieyoiy Th. 1, 49). 

(13) But the article is placed according to ^ 245, 3 (b), when 
tlie numeral without any emphasis, is joined with the definite 
object, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu- 
meral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. *Efiaxf<rayro 
ol /xcra ricpucXcovs oirXirai ;)(tXtoi or ;(tXiot ol fiera U. ojrXiTOi, tht 
}ioj)liics with Pericles, a tJiousand in number, fougtU, 



I 



ft 




^ 247. 1 ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 329 

Rem. 3. The article is frequently omitted with substantives which have an 
ordinal numljer joined with them, as the ordinal in a measure supplies the place 
'<-■. Tplroy iros rf xoKcfiof irf kfvra (he died the third year)^ Th. 
;up. 3. 25, 88. 

The Article as a Demonstrative and Relative 
K- Pronoun. 

I ■ 1 . The article 6 r^ r6 had originallj the sense both of a demonstrative and 
■ ^lativc 

» 2. In : . imeric po«ms, the pronoun & if r6 has almost wholly the sense 
both of a -;i tantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an 
Ibject, and represents it as kno^-n or already ppokci Lnf. or brin]p> it bgibfejiie 
l lind of jhfl«J>C*gri e. g. 11. a, \2. 6 (he) yip ^A^c boiis ivl y^as 'Axcuwy. 29. 
wh" (^) ^ 'T^ ^^ Kv0t0. Od. «r, 74. ov ydp yuoi btyus iarl KOfit(ffjL(v ov^ airoxifi' 
«<(y irZpa r6p (that man), Si k« dcoTaiy a-rix^^ox fiojcdptaaiy. Ilcnce, in 
mer, the substantive is found in very manj paggages without the article, 
ere later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it, Comp. II. a, 12 seq. 

th PI. Kp. 393, e. Yet there are, in V evident traces of an approxima- 

>n or agreement of this ftpparent an !i the real article, which was not 

lly developed before the time of the Attic writers. Thus in Homer, as in 
the Attic writers, it gives the force of substantives to adjectives and paniciples, 
e 'J. 6 ipur-r <^»s, 6 yipaiis; f^o also, rh wply^ rh wp6ab*y (prius) \ it is 

fiuu'l if! ■• ^^'''' ■'■ -"' >• 'utivc and an attributive adjective or adverb, 

ll,. ai;: ^cu the article and 6ut>i>tantive, e. g. Twy vpo- 

I hdpmv 4rimy, 11. A« 691. T&r 8«^&r 7n«r f , S36. Ol fy*pdt b*ol {. 274. Th ahy y*pas 
a, 185. Tk ffhv lUyot «, 207 ; so it b used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. A, 298. 
*al A^r «rbr r^y Tvyiapdov vnpdMotruf. Od. (, 61. iytutrts ol y4oi\ further, 
^Krrvyts ai wtfi M^^r, 11. X, S35. 'Apipiy riy rArt i, 55*J. TitU ol AoKtoio, Od. w, 
497 ; also with the demonstrative, oi mvytt a2B« r, 372 ; it also lakes the ph\ce 
>{ the posaessive pronoun, e. g. IL \, 142. yvy ftiy 8^ row rarp^f iuucta riatrt 
aJ.it : /urAcr), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. o, 218. 

i-fK'j-j^t.zx. rz rtvx«'t iratpot^ r^ ^Xaiwf (the rc^ta belonging to the ship). 

3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent in all 
tlie post-Homeric writers (^ 244,6); but as a demonstrative substantive pronoun, * 
it was p uses, throogh every per ' the language; thus: — 

(a) T ... ^ tke amtrary), ^trf fn , ;.v at the beginning of af 

S( 1 h iiiy (is qmUtem), 6 8< (U autem), ol S4 (ii autem) very fre- 

Bquently at the beginning of a sentence; wph rov (v p or ov), formerly ; 
often iral rrfr, Tijr, rf mm, et mm, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. 
X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. Ka\ rhy Ktktvveu Sowmu. In connection with Koi, the 
Greek says in the Xom. : iroi «f, md f, ml oT (4 334), but in the Ace. koI, 
T^r, iroi rfiy ] seldom r6 7 «, u/ quidem, r ^, ideo, and the like. . 

(b) In such phrases as, r&y jral T6y, rh ical r6,this man andthat man, this | 
tJiimj ami '' ■ ' ra Kal ri, vorio^bona et mala. 

I (c) It is used ... iy lK?fore a sentence introduced by 8 J, 8<roy or ofoj, 

which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjective, of 

28« 



330 «;yntax. p 24« 

especially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato. 
PI. Phaedon. 75, b. opeyerai rovH i<TTiv 1<tov ( = tov Xtrov ovtoj), he reaches 
after thai which is equal. Prot. 320, d. c'k yns koI irvphs fju^cunts Kai tup 
'6<ra irvpl Kot 777 Kipduvvrai. Soph. 241, e. cTre fUfirtfiATcoyf etre ^xtyTcuTfjui- 
rap aitTwu fj Kcd irepl nx*'^^ ruv, iff at irepl ravrd clfft. 
(d) In such phrases as, 6 /ieV — 6 b4, ol fieu — ol Se^ the one — tJie other, 
gome, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. els fifv rovs vfipi^oyres, to7j St iovKevov- 
T€s, treating some with contempt, and being slaves to other$. Very frequently 
T^ fi4v — ri 5e, TO fifv — Ttt 5e, partly — partly, rfj /i4y — rp 8c, 
on one side — on the other side. 
4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative 6 rj to, is frequently used in 
place of the relative. II. a, 125. aAAa ra fitv iro\iwv i^(irp<Lbofi(Vf rk itSaartu 
(qiuie ex urbibus pracdati suraus, ea sunt distributa). The relative use was 
transferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric writers abo; so the Tragel 
take this liberty, though very rarely. Her. 3, 81. Ti fiiy 'Oroi^jr «»»•«, X«Xfx«y«» 
KOL/xol Toura * to 5' is rh irX^-^os &yufy( <p(p(iv rh KpaioSy yvw firfs ttjj kplaryit 
ruiipTTiKi. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part IL ^ 482. 



^248. Classes of Verbs. 

In relation to the subject, the predicate can be expressed' 
in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, 
which are indicated by different forms : — 

(1) The subject appears as active^ e. g. 'O ttcm? ypd<f>€i, 
TO dv^o(; ^dWet. — But the active form has a two-fold 
signification : — 

(a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is 
directed, is in the Ace, and therefore apj^ears ^s pas- 
sive or as receiving- the action, e. g. Tutttcd tov ttcuBcl, 
rypd(f)o) rrjv eTnaToXi^v, — Transitive verb. 

(y3) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the 
subject, as To dv^o<; ^dWec, or when the verb has an 
"object in the Gren. or Dat, or is constructed with a 
preposition, e. g. ^ETrt^vpo) r?}^ dp€Tyj<;, xat'po) ry ao 
^aEi^o) €69 T7]v TToXiv, — lutransitive verb. 

(2) Or the subject performs an action which is confined 
to, or is reflected upon itself, e. g. TinrrofjLaij I strike my- 
self ; ^ovXevofMai, I advise myself, or I deliberate ; tvttto- 
(xac T7)v K€(f>a\}]Vy I strike my own head ; KaTcurrf>€(f>ofjuu rijv 
771/, I subjugate the land far myself ; dfivvofuu tois TroXefU' 



4 249.] CLASSES OF VERBS. ACTIVE FORM. 33i 

ow, I keep off the enemy from myself, — INIidcUe or Reflex- 
ive verb. 

r " ' " ■ \ " ■ ■ b_v two or T- '■ ts 

Oil . . . tAfi'oi^ai, tit' . ch 

Other, ii is called a reciprocal action, and the verb, — Keciprocal verb. 

(3) Or the subject appears as receiving the action, i. e. 
the action is performed upon the subject, e. g. 01 o-TpaTicorai 
\rrro rcov TroKe/iicop iSiw^ijaav, were pursued, — Passi^e verb. 

IRkm. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the 
G: - only ; >es: the Fut. and Aor. All the other passive forms 

arc .i.vii^ated by li.v^ ..*..., since the passive action was considered as a reflexive 
one. 

Remarks oh the Classes of Vi:i:ns. 
♦ 249. A. Active Form. 

1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion^ 
besides a tran.sitive siirnilicalion, have an intransitive or reflex- 
ive sense. (So in 1" !i, as he lemls, the birds move, Vie car- 
riage breaks, Uie snotc melts, wliich have also a transitive sense ; , 
80 the Lat. vertere, mutare, dechnare, etc.) 

'Ax^pcy voTo^t itfiiKKnt is riip Xlfi^Vf Th. 1,46. 'H B6K0ri Klfuni m ri - 
9i¥ i% ddXaaeay, 4. I<>:J. 'tyybs ^yf ol 'ZXXif^ts (comp. to draw near), X. 
An. 4. 2, 15. So aUo ik^dytip, to go back, to withdraw; iiiyttw, perstare, to 
oon/iNM^, are found in proM.*. — 'EAavrtiv or ikavvtiv Twtry (X. An. 1.8, 1), 
to ride ; «-pojtXavr«ir, adetfuiiatt, to ride vp to. — Many compounds of fidWtty, 

•^. infiAkKti¥ And tl$fidKK9ir, to fall into, to emptt/ (of A Ti\er); infiiK- 
A* ly, to spring forih, to ptU forth (of plants, etc.) ; fitrafidkKtty (like mutare), 
iia$dKKtty,tocro$$ocer; wpes$dKKtty ripi, to male an attticLupon; avfi- 
(iiKXfiw ruf{,mamu eomterert, to engage in combat with; iwt$dKKttp, to fall 
upon; iwipfiaKkttv, to exceed, to be prominent. — Kkiytty and it« com- 
pounds, e. ^. i-rucklyttp, to incline to nmeUkiag ; krottkit^etp, declinare. — Tptwt i v, 
like vtrtrrr ; i-wiry"" ^ permittere, to entrdU one's self to. — Irpt^tiy (like 
mtUart) and its ci U. — n r a / ti r, to strike against, to stumble ; wporrraifiu, 

as ftrydkms wposi-rranray, thry suffired a tottd shiptcreck (Her. 6, 95). 'AiraA- 
kdiTTfiy, togetoff, escape. — C< • ! s of 8 1 8 rf r a i, as Mi^Syai, to dischanje 

ittetf (o( % stream); iwiiiMyeu, ;■/- nrr. fo incretisr, adinnce. — Compounds of 
I4yat, e. p. kyttyat, to rrlax, U rrmias: i<ptivat (<c. iavrhv) 1<tx*^PV 7»^<^"''* (*^^dul- 
gereY V\. Rp. 388. e. Com|K>unds of iiicyiy^ ynyyvvai, as aufifilayfiv, 
commisctri ; wposfityyvyai, to fvjht with, als** «/ e.g. wpostpii^ay ry 

T«(x«'i '^'*>- 3. 22. Alptty, to get under irt/y, »♦/ ""i i"i -uijjs, to Wi'ujh anchor), 
also compounds, e. p. oi $dp$apoi iir^por ^ic r^s Ai}kov (to set sail), Her. 6, 99 ; 
iyraiptiy (sc. x«V") '^"'^ '<> 7'!/''' •'•*'^> ^ uitlistand. — ivyd-miy, manus aw 



332 SYNTAX. ^ [^249. 

serere. — "Exetv, to land; ex^^v tiv6s {desistere), Th. 1, 112; ^x^iv with adverbs, 
as eS, Ka\S)s, KaKus, like bene, male fiabere ; cxc" ati<pi ri, in cdiqua re occupatum 
esse; Trposex^iv (sc. vovv), attendere, to give one^s attention to, or appellare, to land; 
irpoex^ii/, praestare ; iTrex^iv, se sustinere, or expectare, in mente fiabere, e. g. hrti- 
Xov arpaTeiea-^ai. ; Korexeiv, se retinere, also to land; irapf'xeti', e. g. rp fwvanc^f 
musicae se dare ; aTre'xeti', to be distant from ; avrex^iv, resistere. — Tlpirr €iy with 
adverbs, e. g. eS, KanSis, or with the Ace. of adjectives, e. g. icaAet, Koxd, to fare 
well or ill. — Aiarpifieiv (consumere), versari, to employ one's self — Compoands 
of <p4peiu, as hia<p4pfiVy to be different, differre; inrep<p(p€iv (eminere) irKovrcc. — 
'AvaXaix^dveiv, refici, recreari. — O t k c T v, administrari, e. g. ir6\is oIk(7 {the 
state is managed), Plat. — TeXfvrav, to end, to die. — Karop^o vy, to succeed. — 
NiKciv, to prevail, e. g. iviKu t] x^'P'^*' '"''«''' yvoofi^wv (like vincit sententia), Her. 
6, 109. 'EWeiir eiy, officio suo decsse ; aTroAefiret*', to remain behind, *tc. 

2. Several active verbs "with a transitive signification, which 

form both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive, but in the 

second Aor. an intransitive sense : — 

8ua>, to wrap up, first Aor. fBOtruy I urrapped up, second Aor. Owr, I vent m, 
XffTrjfjLt, to plac( (aTr]<Ta, I placedy " (rrriv, I stood, 

<pv(i), to produce, " (<pv<Ta, I produced, " i<pvi>. I was produced, 

ff/ceWcD, to make dry, " {taKr\\aj poet. / make dry), " ^<rKAify, / withered. 

So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
form both Perfects, have in the first Perf a transitive, but in the 
second an intransitive sense : — 

iydpo), to unke, first Pf iyfiytpKa, I have awakened, sec'd Pf. f/p^yopo, lam awabt, 
iWvfjLi, perdo, " oKwKeKa, perdidi, " tKttXoj perii, 

irei^a, to persuade, " ireveiKa, I have persuaded, '' wirot^aj I trust., 
iivolyw, to open, " &i/ea'xa, / have opened, " kyft^ya, I stand open 

(f, 187.6), 
vpdTTO}, to do, " TTivpaxo-i J ^(ive done^ '• -riwpaya (8C. eJ), / 

fart wed. 

Moreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do 

not form a first Perf, have an intransitive sense : — 

6.yvviii, to break, second Pf feya, lam broken., 
p-nyvvij.1, to tear, '• ip^xaya, I am torn, 

T-f^KQ}, to smelt (iron), " Tenjuro, lam smelted, 

irfiyyvfjn, to fasten, " iriirrtya^ I am fastened^ 

ff^u, to make rotten, " ffe<nrra, I am rotten^ 

<f>alvo), to show, " Tfipifrat I appear. 

Remark 1. The Vnss. a \ la KOfx a i, to U- taken, h&s an : form in the 

Perf and Aor., viz., (d\wKa, I have been taken, edKwy, I u . ( ^ 161, 1 ). 

3. Intransitive active verbs are sometimes used in the p}ace 
of the passive. 



♦ 250.] CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 333 

This is particularly the case with ir(£(rx€*>', Iff ITT 6 tv, </>€V76i J/, € 5, Ko- 
Kws cLKovfiy, bvqiTKfiVf more seldom rfXivrav. These active verbs 
with inrh and the Gen. are very commonly used instead of the passive of such 
verbs as aZiKiiv^ pi-wmv or ^oAAeti', StwKeiv, /erfiVeij/ ; ^vrivKftv in certain forms 
is always so used (§ 161, 13). Me7aAa ireertfvTa [eversa. were destroyed by) 
VfyffYfiaTa vvh rjffaoi/uy. Her. 7, 1 8. Afiv6T€poy 4v6fii^oy elycu kokws inrh Twy 
wokiTcoy itKovftv {audire, they thought it worse to be evil spoken of by the citizens)^ 
ff KaXusvwfprrjs ir6\fois aiTobyijaKeiyf Jsocr.'P&TieQ. 56,77. So 4 KiriirT fiy vx6 
rivos., expelli ab aliquo ; very often <p(vy(iy vir6 Tiyos,fugari ab aliquo, to be put 
tojlifjht by some one, or in a judicial sense, accusatum esse ab aliquo, e. g. atrePeias 
^evytty vwS Ttvos, to be accused by some one of impiety. Ev, koxws tt a r x « 
vir6 (Tov, I am benejited, injured by you. 'EtcXcwttjo-ov v 'Abrjyalwy 
linter/ecti sunt), Her. 6, 92. 

Rem. 2. It will be seen (^ 279, Rem. 5) that intransitive active /erbs are 
f'^quently used in poetrj' in a transitive sense, e. g. iLarpdirrtiy <r(\as, ^aivny 
irdSa. 

Rem. 3. The transitive active is not unfrequently used, when the subject 
does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be performed by another; 
yet this usage is admissible, only when it is evident from the context or from 
the nature of ' ■ = • ■ ;,.pj ^qq% not itself perform the action. X. 

An.l.4.1<>.K ' Ko^f KaX^a. ^oaiKfia Ka.T i Kav a tv, caused 

to be ' So Irequently arroKTfiyfiy, ^dirrny, oiKoSo^ifTy and similar exam- 

ples ; o;. w. ulso iiicuTKfty, -rouStvfty (comp. Tl. Trot. 320, a. 324, d. Meuon. 94, b). 

{250. B. MirJfUr Form. 

1. Tlie Mid. denotes an ;u uuji, wiueu is performed by the 
subject, and is ngn^in reflected upon it or is confined to it. Two 
cases are here to be distinguished : — 

(a) The Mid. denotes, first and most frequently, an action 
which the subject performs upon an object witliin its own 
phere, i. e. upon an object belon^ng to the subject, connected 
with it, or standing m any near relation to it. In Englisli, this 
relation of the Middle voice is expressed by a possessive pro- 
noun, or by the preposition to or for with a personal pronoun. 

TvwTofULi, iTv\i><iur)y t^jk KftpaXTiy^ I strilx, I struck my own head {rvwrfiy «., to 
strike the head of anotfier) ; kovacurdat robs irttSar, to wash one's own feet {\oveiu t. 
w., to uxisli the feet of another) ; oTroKpin^atrdcu rk iavrov, to conceal one's own 
affairs; ir(pip^]^aabtu x'TcDvo, suam vestem, to nnd one's own garment {-irfpi^ftrj^ai, 
alius, that of anothtr) ; »apa<rx<Vd<u ti, to give someUdng from one's own means, to 
furnish of one's self, as yavst hence also to sliow, e. g. tCyoiay "Koptx^obai (on tlio 
contrary xapix^iy riy\ irpayfiaTa, <t>6$oyy etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some 
one) ; — axo5<i{curdaI ti, e. g. tpyov, - ' : . Ivvafj-iv, to show one's own work; etc. ; 
iirarYytiKac2>cu ti, to promise; in a n ^ ^1 relation : yflfiaa-^al ti, ahquid inter 
se partiri, to divide something teith each other, so fitplaaa^ai ; — iroi-naac^ai ti, to do 



334 SYNTAX. [^ 250. 

or make something for one^s self, e. g. elfyfivrjy, (Tirovdds (irote«', to do or accomplish), 
voirjcraa^ai irSAe/MOV, to carry on war ; errt/teAetov, to use care ; &,yecr^cu yvvcuKa, to 
take a wife for one's self, to marry ; kXetr^ai ri, sibi sumere, hence to choose, prefer; 
dpaa-^ai ri, to take up for one^s self, to lay on one^s self {aXp^iv ri, to take up something 
in order to lay it upon another) ; alr-fjoraff^al ri^ to ask for one's self {ahelv, to ask) ; 
irpd^cur^ai xp^A^aTci riva, sibi ab aliquo pecuniam exigere ; /xia^oxraa-^ai, conducere, to 
hire for one^s seif (hnt fjuc^axrai, locare, to let out) ; fieTaireiJAl/acr^ai, to cause to come 
to one's self, to send for ; KaracTpii^aa^ai, KarahovKdicraxTbai yrju, sibi subjicere ter- 
ram ; avapriicracr^ai riua, sibi devincire, to make dependent on one's selfi avoKvcraa-^al 
rivat to free for one^sself to ransom; iropiaao'^ai n, sibi aliquid comparare {Tropi(eiv 
ri Tivi, alii aliquid comparare), KOfx.la'ao'^ai, 6 g. UhaTaieis iraTdas Kai yvua7Kas 
iKKiKOfjkiff (xepot ^<rav is ras 'A^vas, Th. 2, 78; KTrjcraabai, TrapaarK€vd<ra<r- 
^al ri, sibi comparare ; ^ea^ai and ypatpaa-^ai vSfxovs are used of one who makes 
laws for himself, or of a law-giver, who is himself, also, subject to the laws 
which he has made for others ; on the contraiy, ^^Ivai and ypdy\iat v6fiov are used 
of one who is not subject to the law which he has made, or generally of one 
who gives laws to others, without expressing any further relation, e. g. "Exots 
%v elire?}/, Sri oi ^.v^ptairoi rovs aypdcpovs vS/xovs e^evro] 'Eyu fiev ^eovs olfuu 
-Tohs vSftovs Toirovs to7s av^puirois ^eTvai, X. C. 4. 4, 19; — afivycur^ai robs xoAe- 
filovs, propulsare a se hostes, hence to defend one's self against any one {aixvveiVy 
properly to ward off, then to help) ; Ti/xwpria-aa-^ai n, to revenge one's self on some 
one, to punish him {Tifxwpeiv rivi, to help one) : rp^i^aa^ai, to put to flight; aTrciaour- 
J^at KUKd, a se propulsare mala ; airoirefjApaa-^al riva, a se dimittere ; airoffilaaxTbai 
ri, a se depellere ; irapaiT-iiaaa^ai, deprecari; Sia^ea-^ai, aTrod6a^ai, to sell; airo- 
rp4\\/a(r^ai, arrofiaXecr^ai, airoKpovaaa^ai. Several Deponent IMiddle verbs also 
belong here (§ 102, 3). 

(b) The Middle denotes, second, but much more seldom, an 
action which the subject performs immediately on itself, so that 
the subject is at the same time, also, the object of the action. 
The English here uses the active verb ^vith the Ace. of the 
reflexive pronoun, e. g. rvTrro/xat, I strike myself; irvij/aiJi-qv, I 
struck myself. Here belong particularly the following verbs: — 

^Airdy^ai rivd, to strangle some one; air dy^aa^ai, to strangle one^s self; 
ri^a<T^ai, KSypacr^ai, to strike one's self; Kv\pa<T^ai, to bend one's self 
down; o'lKlcraa-^ai, migrare; eTrijSoAecrS-ot, to apply or devote one's self to 
something ; irapaffKevdcraa'^ai, se parare ; rd^aa^ai, to place one's self in 
order of battle, e. g. ovTa fx\v KepKvpcuoi ird^avr a, Th. 1, 48 : [but also tofr or 
establish for one's self according to No. (a), e. g. rd^aa-^ai <p6po>, to agree to pay 
tribute;] rrpos^4<r^ai, se adjungere, to agree with; 'la-raa^ai (crr^vcu, iirrdvcu) 
and its compounds, to place one's self [but also according to No. (a), sibi potiere, 
to place for one's self, e. g. TpSiraiov] ; dpfilaraa-^ai, Ku^op /xia-aa-^ai, to lana 
(comp. Th. 4, 15): KVKXacraa-^ai, to encircle (comp. Th. 5, 72), but kvkXu^^- 
vai, to form a circle or place one's self in a circle; rpatrea-^ai [not TpSpcur^cut 
■ee No. (a)], to turn one's sdf[Th.. 5. 29, 73) ; iyyviiaacr^ai^ topiedgeones self. 



^250.] CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 336 

7rai<ra<r^ai, to cease (from rrava), to cause to cease) ; del^acr^at, to show one's 
self; particularly verbs which express an action performed by the subject upon 
hi^ own body, e. g. Kova aa^ai, viypaa^ai, a\ei\pa(r^ai, xP'o'ao'i^aj, 
(wffaff^ai, yv/Mvaaacr^ai, Ka\v\l/aff^ai, ko fffji^ffaff^at, ajU^teVoa- 
^ai, iySvffaa^ai, iKSvaaa^aiy Keipacr^ai, air ofjt.6p^a(T^ai, se abster 
gere; airofiv^aa-^ai, se emungere ; airoyprjo-aa^aii se ahstergere; are<pa- 
ydxraa^ai; (TTeiXaa^ai, to get ready, to Jit one's self out; also some few 
verbs which in the Mid. express internal, mental action, e.g. <pv\d^a<T^ai, to 
be on one's guard, to be cautious (but (pvKaTTeiv rivd, to guard some one) ] rj/rjtpl- 
(Taa^aijto determine or decree by vote (but rprj(plCeiv, to put the vote) ; fiovKev- 
eaabai, to deliberate, to advise one's self {hnt )8ou\euetj/ rivi, to advise some one) ; 
yfixraa^aif to taste (yeveiVj to cause to tast-e, to give a taste of) ; t ificop^car'- 
^ai, to avenge; the reciprocals ^taKaraXvaaa^ai iTp6s riva, to be reconciled 
to any one ; <Tvv^4a-^ai, to bind one's self to agree with any one ; aTreiaraa^ai, 
to make a treaty, peace with; airoo'x^o'^a.iy to restrain one's self, to abstain 
from; several compounds of 7riiJ.i, e.g. i<pic<T^ai, to strive; ixplea^ai, to 
yield, be remiss ; fxe^iea-^aiy to neglect, be remiss ; aurnr oi-qaaa-^ai rivosy to 
strive for something; avr iXafiea^ai riv6s, to lay hold of something. Here 
belong, also, most Deponent j\Dddle verbs (§ 197, Rem. 2). 

Remark 1. This immediate reflexive relation is expressed also: (&) by middle 
verbs with a Pass. Aor.. e. g. ZiaXv^iv, to separate, hidkv^rivai, Sia^vtrea^ai, to 
separate one's self discedere (see § 197, Rem. 3); (b) by the active form, e.g. 
fierafiaWfiv, to cliange one's self {see § 249. 1) ; (c) by the active form with the 
Ace. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. iiraipeli/ kavrSu, avaprav eavrSu, to attach one's 
self to, to make one's self depend on any one ; airoKpinmiv ka\n6v, ^hiC^iv kavT6v, 
irapiX^Lv (ia\rr6v, airoKveiv eavrov, to free one's self, airoacpaTTeiy kairrou, aTroKTei- 
vfiv kavT6v ; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass. ; thus, ^-naiveiffbai, 
k-JTOKTiiviahai, airoa-cpaTTfaf^ai, laudari. interfici, jugular i ab alio, and has for its 
Aor. and Put. a Pass. form. / Sometimes the active form with the reflexive 
pronoun is used, even wlien tfV verb has a middle form. This mode of expres- 
sion is very natural in antithesis or contrast! e. g. 'E^pevev airh Imrov, dirSre 
yvixvatrai kavt 6v re KviX revs tirirov s, IS.. All. 1. 2, 7. 

Rem. 2. The Mid. in the same manner as the Act. (§ 249, Rem. 3), can be 
used, when the subject does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be 
done by another. There is this difference, however, in the two cases, that in 
the ^lid. the action always refers, in some way, to the subject.] 'O irarrjp tous 
ira?Sas eS<5a|aT0 (e7roi5eu<raTo), which signifies either, the father Educated the chil- 
dren for himself, or, if it is dear from the context, he caused them to be educated 
(as X.C. 1. 6,'^2 ; on the contrar}-, SiSda-Keiy, TraiSevny are used without referring 
back to the subject. § 249, Rem. 3) ; Kelpaa-^ai, to shave one's self or to get shaved. 
'Apyc7oi (r<peci}y flK6uas TToir](rdfj.evoi (haviiig caused to be made) avc^eaau is 
Ae\(povs, Her. I, 31. Uau(ravlas rpdweCap nep<TiKr]v irapeTiSreTO {caused to be 'set 
before him), Th. 1, 130. Oi AaKeSaifioyLOi K-npvKa ir^^v^^avT^s tovs v^Kpovs Zi^KO- 
filffavT {caused to be removed), 4, 38. 

Rem. 3. The reflexive relation of the middle to the subject, is often so 
slight, that in our mode of considering it, it almost disappears, and sometimes 
consists only in a very gentle intimation, that the action will be completed to 
the advantage or disadvantage of the subject, e. g. II. o, 409. ovre irore Tpwes 
AcLvauv ihvvain-o <pd\ayyas ^rf^dfievoi {in suum commodum) KXiairitTi jxiyitfx^uai. 
^ence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the middle, particularly 
in antitheses, in order to bring out emphatically the reflexive sense which 
exists in the middle only in a general and indefinite manner,)e. g. Heyo^wF 



/ 



336 SYNTAX. [i 251. 

/3ouA.6i5eTot eavT(^ ovofia Kcd. Zvvafiiv Trepnroi'f}<raa'^ai (to gain a name and 
power for himself ) X. An. 5. 6, 17. 'ETredei^avro ras avrwv aperds, Isocr. 
Paneg. 58, 85. 'Va^vfiov avro7s kut e(rT-f]<xavT o tov fiioi/, 6-3, 108. Tr}y 
ifiavTov yvdfxriy utt ocpaiv 6 fxe yos. Id. ^ermut. 309, 22. 

E.EM. 4. In many verbs, the active and Mid. appear to have a similar sig- 
nification ; but on a closer investigation, the difference in the meaning is 
obvious ; the active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without any 
accessary idea ; the middle, on the other hand, expresses the same action in 
relation to the subject, or subjectively. Hence, the middle is employed when 
the literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. 5lolk€7i/ of an outward 
arrangement, dLoiKeicr^at. of mental ; Spi^eiy literally, 6pi(€(r^ai figuratively ; 
ffra^fiau only in a literal sense, to measure, but ara^fxaffbai also in a figurative 
signification, to weigh or measure in one's mind, aliquid secum perpendere ; aKoiriiv\ 
to look at something, aKoir^Tcr^ai, to look mentally, to consider ; so in derivative/ 
verbs in -ewoj and -evo/xai, the active form is used absolutely, to be in a certain 
state ; the middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part of that which is 
indicated by the root, to show one's self as such, to have the tendency or habit, to act 
as such, e. g. irovnp^vu}, to be bad, irovr^pevo/iai, to demean one's self badly ; iroXt- 
revco, to be a citizen, iroXiTtvofxai, to live and act as a citizen ; Tafxidu, to be a 
manager, rafiievofMai, to conduct busi)iess, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical 
sense, e. g. tovs vd/xovs : a-rpaTevco, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or 
a state, crTpaTevofiai, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. ^Derivatives 
in -i^ofjiai correspond in sense to those in -tvoiuu, e. g. aaTet^ofiai, to demean my- 
self as a citizen ; x«P'f»'''''C<'/^«*> '<' o^i *" ^'^ agreeable manner. Still, derivatives 
in -i^w, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. Supi^w, to demean myself or 
to speak like a Dorian. 

Kem. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a catisative sense, in the 
middle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed 
with an Ace, e. g. cpo^qcrai, to cause to fear, (po^rjcraa^at, to fear ; alax^vau, to 
make ashamed, alaxwelaSrai, to be ashamed, to feel shame ; Tropevaau, to cause to 
go, to convey, irop^vaaabai, to go; Trepaiaxrai, to cause to pass over, irepcudoaeer^auy 
to pass over ; Koifxrjaai, to cause to sleep, lull to sleep, KoifjiT^aaar^ai, to sleep ; vavacu., 
to cause to cease, iravaaa^ai, to cease; ir\dy^ai, to cause to wander, ir\dy^€a-^cu, 
to wander, etc. 

Rem. 6. The middle fonn, as already stated (§ 248, Rem. 1 ), is often used 

to express reciprocal actions. This is particularly the case with verbs signify- 
ing to contend, vie with, converse icith. embrace, salute, to make an agreement or com- 
pact, e. g. fidx^o-^ai, to fight with ; a/iLWacr^cu, to contend with ; aywvi^etr^cu., to 
strive; dia\4y€(T^ai, to converse ivith : cKTird^^cTbai, to salute; ravra (rvvrL^er' 
mutually to agree on these points ; (rnovSas a-rreySsa^M or iroKla^ai, to make a : 
{airovdas iroieiv signifying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not 
strictly reciprocal, but where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily sup- 
poses two persons or two parties, as in questions and answers, e. g. trwbiLveabaj. 
and epea^ai, to inquire; airoKpiu€(r^ai and aTrafiei^sa-^cu, to answer; (rvfj.^ov\ev- 
for^ai, to consult with one, ask his advice, and ayaKoivov(T^ai, to consult one (aycucoivovv 
being especially used of consulting oracles). 

§ 251. C. The Passive. 

1. From the reflexive signification of the jNIiddle, the Passive 
is derived. Here the subject receives the action from another 
upon itself, — permits the action to be performed upon itself 
Hence the subject always appears as a passive or suffemi^ 
object. 



♦ 251.] CLASSES OF VERBS. THE PASSIVE. 337 

MauTTiyovfiaif (tiixiov/jlcu (inrS rivos), I receive bloivs, punishment, I let myseJf be 
struck, punished = I am struck, punished (by some one) ; $KdirTOfj.ai, adiKovfiai, 
I suffer injury, injustice; diSda-KOfiai, I let myself he instructed, I receive instruction, 
I learn, hence xm6 nvosyfrom some one = doceor ah aliquo; -n-d^o/xai, I persuade 
myself, or / permit myself to he persuaded, inr6 tivos, by some one = / am per- 
suaded. 

2. Yet, there are but two tenses, the Fut. and the Aor., which 
have special forms to express the passive sense of an action ; 
the remaining tenses are expressed by the Mid. 

3. Hence the following rule : The Fut. and Aor. Mid. have 
a reflexive (or intransitive) sense only; but all the other tenses 
of the Mid. serve at the same time for the Passive also. 

Remark 1 . Still, the Fut. Mid. has sometimes a Pass, sense also. The reason 
of this may be foimd in a great measure in the shorter form of this Fut. compared 
with that of the Fut. Pass. This passive use of the Fut. Mid. is found most 
frequently with Pure verbs ; much more seldom with Mute verbs, and very sel- 
dom witli Liquid verbs (probably not at all in Attic prose), j MacmycixreTai, 
<rr pe fikdcr tT ai, SfSTjcerai, iKKav^cnrai Twcp^aXjJLW, reXevToiy irdvra kuk^ 
va^ojv OLi'curKtvSvKfv^afTai, PI. K)). 361, C. Tt; twu xPVf^o^'''^^^ (nrdvei K(a\v- 
(Tovrai, Tb. 1. 142. "Hj^ tij ^ov\ri^ KaKhs yevea^ai, KoXaa^TiaeraL tt} Trpeirovar] 
^riixia' oi 5t ayai^ol r i ixr] a ovt ai rols nposriKov(Tiv &^\ois ttjs apeTrjs (hut the 
brave shall be honond with the bejittimj rewards of valor), 2, 87. Ilept tuv (rcpere- 
pceu (ppovpiuv, us iTTifiovXevaofievuv, troWaKis vpay/jLaTa elxoy, X. C. 6, 1, 
10. El p^6fie^a {includemur). X. 2\.n. 6. 6AG. "H yi] ev <pv\d^ erai inrh ruv 
^povpovvruv, OvK ay voovyrcs, Sri eveSpevaoivTO vnh twv iro\€/j.ici}v, H. 7 . 2, 
18. Very commonly d 5<k7J o- o /.tat, ip^o/xai (from fipx'«'> ""/^^'"o), )SAa»/'o- 
/xai, ^ p(\i/oiJLai. So always a.\wao/j.ai. Some verbs have both forms 
of the future, as, e. g. b}<f>€\(7i/, (rmiovu, arepuy, <po^ui/, dyeiv ; then the Mid. 
form seems to denote a condition, the Pass, an action received. But in very 
many instanrc.«, the Pass, sense is only apparent, e. g. 'H ttJAjs ^pax^a ria^^lcra 
fifydXa Crjfi ucTfTai, shall sitjftr great loss therefor, in contrast with ^pax^a 
7)ir^., Th. 3. 40. 2oD ^wyros, fie\Tiov bpi^ovT at KoX waid eixr oyrai (they 
shall grow up better and educate t/ieinselves), PI. Crito. 54, a. 

T?e:m. 2. The use of the Mid. Aor. instead of the Pass, is, in all instances, 
only apparent; so Od. ^, 35. Kovpw 5e Sixa koI irevrriKOUTa Kpivdcr^cou Kara 
St]ixov, meaps, let them select for themselves (on the contrary, 48. Kovpco Sh Kptv- 
^fyre Svu k. trevr., the selected). lies. Sc. 173. Kdirpoi doioi air ov pdjxcuoi \j/v- 
xds, they had deprived each other of life. PI. Phaedr. 244, e. tcS op^us fxaueuri koI 
ic ar o (T X ^ e 1/ a>, " i;j Jine frenzy " and in ecstasy. 

Rem. 3. It has been shown, § 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. § 250, Rem. I), that 
the Aor. Pass, of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a 
reflexive and intransitive action, e. g. ^ovKofiai, I will, e^ov\i]Sr-nv, I willed; 
(ixppaiuca, T gladden, cheer, fiicppalvoixai, I am glad, eh <p pdvStT)v, I was glad. In 
a few verbs, the Pass. Fut. is used in the same way, e. g. ^5o/iat, / rejoice, 
liahr^v, I rejoiced, Tjabrjo-o/jLai, I shall rejoice. See § 197, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 4. The author or cause of the passive condition or state is generally 
expressed by the Prep. vn6 with the Gen., e. g. 0/ (rrpaTicoTai virh twv iroK- 
s^iwy iSia>xSh](rav. Instead of inro, irpSs with the Gen. is used, when at the 
same time a strong and direct influence of a person, or of a thing viewed as a 
person, is to be expressed, e. g. 'ArifxdCecr^ai, aSiKe7cr^ai Trp6s rivos. Bavav * 

29 




'A 



338 SYNTAX. (} 251. 

n ] (TiKal rexvai cIkStojs aSo^ovvrai irphs tS}V TrJAewv, X. O. 4, 2; also vapd 
J with the Gen. is used, when the author is at the same time to be represented as 
the person from near whom, or from whose vicinity, or through whose means 
internal or outward, the action has proceeded : hence used specially with xf/n- 
irecr^ai, dido(r^ai, uxpeXela^ou, avWdyecr^ai, \4ye(T^aiy buLoKoyeiabai, crr]iJiadv((Tbau, 
iiriSeiKuvcrSfai (demonstrari), e.g. 'O ayyeXos iir 4 fi<p^7) Trap a ^acr iKfcas (sent 
both by and from near the king). 'H {x^yiaTT) eiirvxia tovtw r^ avSpl rapa 
^eay S ed or ai, IToAAa xp^^/uara Kvpco irapa rSi>v (piXcou trvveiXeyfifua 
?IV. Ta hwpa ir e /jltt erai ir apa rod ^ acr i\ev ovt o s. Her. 7. 1 06. To. irapa 
rS)V ^ewu a"r] fxaiv 6 /xev a, ^. Cy. I. i').^. Tlapa iravrosv Sao \oye7r ai^ 
An. 1. 9, 1. OJ/uot yap fie irapa aov aocplas irKrjpcoi&'fjaeal^ai, PL Symp. 
' 175, e. ^'Ek is still stronger than 7ropo,used especially with verbs of giving; yet 
it is seldom used by the Attic writers,^, g. 'E/ceiVa> outtj tj x^P°- ^'« Pa<ri\4u3s 
4 561^71, X. H. 3. 1, 6: in Her., however, ck is very often used instead of vvo 
rf simply. (The use of vir6v,'ith the Dat. is almost wholly poetic^, g. Sa^^voi 
-^■vir6 T tvi; in Attic prose only in certain connections, e.g.vlhs viro ry itarpl 
Te^pafi/xewos, PI. Rp- 558, d. Tiry^avet virh iraiSor pl$ri aya^^ •jreireuSei/- 
fi4vos, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by pereons, but 
by things, the Dat. is commonly used {^ Lat. Ablative), e. g. 'H ir6\is roWals 
(rvu(popa7s inie^eTO, the city was distressed by ' — "" 

usage corresponds with that of the Latin, the . 

verb being put in the Abl. with the preposition a or a6, the involuntary agent 
in the Abl. without a preposition. 

Rem. 5. The Dat. of persons, however, is very often used, particularly with 
the Pcrf. tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The Pass, has in such 

instances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. '•■ '■ *' - r-on by 

whom the action was performed, or for whom it wjis p . le ixo 

with the Gen. denotes merely the author of the ' .utiun, the Dat., at the 

same time, denotes that this action stands in i i lo the author, e. g. "Hs 

fi 1 iTp6Tepov 5e5r}\uTai, i. c. as the thing has been be/ore pointed out 6y me, and for 
me now stands as pointed out, Her. 6, 123. 

4. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that the Act, not merely 
>( of tiansitive verbs with the Ace, may be changed into the per- 
sonal Pass., Hke the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive 
i verbs with the Gen. and Dat. 

^^ovoviiai \nr6 rivos (from <p^oveiv rivt^ inridere alicrii), i. c. I tr- — ■ ■-- 
envy from some one, am envied (in Latin, on the contrary, invidetur 
aliquo). X. Conv. 4, 29. Kpc7rr6v 4<m iria-r ev ea-^ai inrh ttjs irarpiSos fuiWor, f; 
air i(rT€7(T^iti (from iriaTevciv and airi<rTe7v rivt), I am trusted, lam d 
Th. 1, 82. -^^ters vw ^A^ualccu 4ir i^ovXe v6 fie^a (iiri$ov\ev€iy rivi). ii :. 

3. 417, b. Kol iirifiouXcvowTes, /cat iiri$ov\€v6fj.€voi Sid^ovffi Trayra t^v p.;. 
8. 551, a. aaKeirai S?/ rh del rifiufievov, atie\e7T ai Se rh aTifxa^6fjLeyo¥. X. S. 

4, 31. oi'K6Tt air € i\ ov fia I, aW^ ij^T) aireiKu &Wois. So apx^V>"^'i tparii' 
bijvai, Tiycfiovev^Tivai, Karacppovif^rivai xnr6 tivos (from ipx^i*, tcpa- 
Tiiv, rjy^uoyeveiv, Kara(ppov€7v rivos), iir ix^ ipV^V*'<^^ (from i-x-ixeiocTy riyi). 
On KSiTTOi-iai tV Ke(paX-i]v, iiriTpeirofiai rijv (pvXaicfjyy see § 281, 3. 

' RE>r. 6. The Greek may form a Pass, from other iutransitives also, yet, for 

the most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Xeut. p 
or a Part, used as a Xeut. substantive.Ve. g. Kol uiKph aaaoTii^eyra {r i 

peccata), K. An. 5. 8, 20. 'Atv x^'lS^euTw^l (nrum injiiiciter gestarum), Dun. 
Cor. 298, 212. 'EttI tovtois iyw a\r]^€vofi€vois Si'Sayti/ <rot t)ji' ifxvv S^ti'a* 



'' ^ 



'1 



^ 252, 253.] TENSES and modes. 339 

(ea conditioner ut haec vere dicantur), X. Cy. 4. 6, 10. 'Ev h\ av^pi iroWwj/ hpe- 
rks KiySvu€V€(T^ai (in periculum vocari), Th. 2, 35. Ov ^c^Biov rh virh iroAAw;^ 
KivZvv€v^4vra u^' euhs firi^ivau, Lys. 5, 112, 



$252. Reinarks 07i the JDepo7ients. 

It has been seen above {§ 102, 3) that Deponents are simply verbs which 
occur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. with a Pass. Aor.. and have a 
reflexive or intransitive signification ; and, also, that they are divided into Mid. 
or Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. The 
reflexive sense of many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, in our i 
mode of regarding them, merely transitive verbs, e. g. Sexofiai n, I take (namely, 
to myself) something, iprya^oyLcd ri, fiid^ofiai tjvo, etc. Such Deponents are often 
used in a Pass, sense, particularly in the Pcrf and in the Pass. Aor Examples 
of the Prcs., Impf , and Fut. in a Pass, sense are very rare, and are found only 
in such Deponents as have in single examples an active form, e. g. jSto^eo-^a*, 
wyda^cu. ' 

TV6.vra. inrdpyaffTai t<^ dec?, PI. L. 710, d. Mfixifirtfifvos (ad imitatio* 
nem expressus, made like), Her. 2, 78. E5 ivre^vfiTifieyov (well-considered), PI. 
Crat. 404, a. N^ej ovk ixp'hcr^'n<r<^*' (adhibitae sunt), Her. 7, 144. 

HemaAk. Several Deponents have both a Mid. and Pass. Aor.; the Pass, 
form has then a Pass, sense, e. g. iic^dfirivy ejccepi, iSex^V^t exceptus sum; 
ifiiaaan-qy, coSqi, i ^itkabriv., coactus sum; i KTr}(rdnr}v, mihi comparavi, 
Ikt ^)bri y, CO' III (I u\is (juiued) ; 6\o<pv pa^^ai, to lament, 6\o- 

^vpbTJyatf t< d; olk ta aa bai, to heal, aK^a^riyat, to be healed; 

kroKpiyaff^aiy to reply. inroKpibrjyat, to be separated. In a few verbs only 
are both Aorists used without distinction of meaning (§ 197, Rem. 1). 



$253. Tenses arid Modes of the Verb. 

(a) Tenses denote the relation of time expressed by the 
predicate, this being designated either as Present, Future, or 
Past, e. g. the rose bloojns, will bloom, bloomed; 

(b) Modes denote the relation of what is affirmed in the predi- 
catc to the subject; this relation being denoted either as an ' 
actual fact,\s a conception or representation, or as a direct 

3 expression of the \vill. The mode which expresses a fact, as 
the rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that wliich denotes a 
conception, as the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive ; that which 
denotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, as 
give. 






340 SYNTAX. [H 254, 255 

$ 254. A. More Particular View of the Tenses. 

1. The tenses are divided, according to their form and mean- 
ing, into two classes : (a) into Principal tenses, which, both in 
the Ind. and Subj., always denote something present or future; 

I (b) into Historical tenses, which in Ihe Ind. always denote 
'« something past, in the Optative, sometliing present or future. 

2. The Principal tenses are : — 

(a) The Present: (a) Indicative, e.g. yp<i<poftfVy scribimus ; {$) Subjunctive, 
e. g. 'Ypd<pufi(v, scrilximns ; 

(b) The Perfect: (o) Indicative, e.g. yeypdtpanevy acn'psimus ; {$) Subjunc- 
tive, e. g. yeypdcpu^KVy scripserimus ; 

{e\ The Future Indicative, e. g. ypdx^tofievj scribemus, ire shall tcrite; Subjunc- 
tive wanting ; 

(d) The Future Perfect Indicative, e. g. $($ov\(v<TOfuUf I shall have advi$ed 
myself , or I shall have been advised; Subjunctive wanting. 

The Subj. Aor. also belongs here, e. g. ypd^ot^ scripserim or taibam. See 
S 257, 1 (a). 

3. The Historical tenses are : — 

(a) The Aorist : (a) Indicative, e.g. typ<v^>a^ I urote; (fi) Optative, e.g. 
ypdipai/jLi, I might write, or I might have written; 

(b) The Imperfect : (o) Indicative, e. g. Hypatftoy, scribebam ; {$) Optative, 
e. g. ypdipoi/JLi, scriberem ; 

(c) The Pluperfect: (o) Indicative, e. g. fyeyfKu^civ, scn/jfcrajii ; (3) Optative, 
e. g. yeypd<f>oifxi, scripsissem ; 

(d) Tlic Optative of the simple Future, e. g. ypdi^^oiui^ J tcould tr ' " 
the Fut. Perf., e. g. fiffiovKfvaoifjLijy, I uvuJd have deliberated, or I -v...^ ..... c 
been advised, when in narration (and consequently in reference to the 
past), the representation of a future action, or of one to be completed at 
a future time, is to be expressed, e. g. 6 &yy(\os I^Xfyty, trt ol woktfuoi 
viKTjaoifv, the viessetifjer said, that the enemy would conquer ; {Xryey, Sri 
irdm-a inrh rov OTparrjyov cu )3e/3ovA.€iy(roiro, he said that everfthint) 
WOULD be well planned by die general. 

^255. (a) Principal Tenses: Presefit, Perfect^ Future, 

1. The Present Indicative represents the action as taking 
place in time present to the speaker. Tlie Present is often 
used, in the narration of past events, for the purpose of a more 
vi\dd and grapliic representation ; past time is then viewed as 
present. Tliis is called the Historical Present 



J 



j 



? 255 I PRINCIPAL TENSES. 34] 

Taunjv rijy ritppov /3<wt\euy fxiyas iroi€7 avrl, ipvfiaTos, eVetS)? irvvSrdvera. 
Kvpov vp(Kf\avyotnaj X. An. 1. 7, 16. ^Hi/ ris UpiafiiSwv ved^aros UoXvSoopos, 
*E/f a/3»ji Tcus, 5v ^»c Tpolas ifiol irarjjp Sidwai Upiaixos iv SSfiois rpecpeiy, Eur. 
Hec. 1116. ^ The Hist. Pres. is sometimes used even in passages which in them- 
selves, aside from adverbs like ir ore, ird\ai (poet. Trdpos), are considered as 
involving past time,|e. g. Zuvr' clsoKovaas iroTSa, hv iKaw^ei ttotc, Eur. El. 
419. 

T\! >tvr{K 1. An action is often viewed by the language as present, which 
).. l<in-~, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in 
its results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu- 
larly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g. a«o uw, 7ri;v,^a»/o/ioi, ala-^d-) 
yofxai, yiyywtTKw, ^avd dyw j(\ikc Lat. (j»t//o. r/V/eo. etc., and Kng. fo hear, 
to see, to J when the object of these verbs is to be represented 

as still c , resent; (b) <p€vyw, I have piven mi/sclf to jiiyht, and^ 

I am now a . hence to live in exile; vikv and Kparw (I am a victor, 

hence /w • ' rr tUfxai {lam vanquishtJ, have been vanquished), aSiKw 

{lam ill done tironf/), ylyp ofiai (I am descendt d ), i^lc] (c) in 

poetry: <povt vw (I am a miirdi nr^have murdered, e. g. S. Ant. 1174), hvi]<TKa) 
{lam detid, have diid, S. El. 113), t(kt«, ytyyw {I am a father or mother, Eur. 
Ion. .356. Her. 209), etc. This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials j 
of the I'res. as \\ " to the Im|if. QifiiaroKXta ovk aKoveis &v5pa aya^hy 
ytyoy^ia; PI. ti' ., c. Tldyn'a ir v y^ ay 6 ^( yo s 6 Kpo7aos €7re^7re e's 'S.ndp- 

rr\v a'f^fKovi, Ilrr. 1, tiy. Tj 8*': ai/ inuyo aKr,Koas, on Mvaol Kol UialSai iv t^ 
/3<uriA(a'S X'^Pf tcarixoy^*^ ipvfiva. wdw X'^P^^ Svyayrai (iiv i\€v^(poi ; — Kai tovto ■ 
y*, (<p7f, i.Kovw, hast thou hnird? clkovu, i/fs, J have kiiown of it. X. C. 3. 5, 26. 
Awayyt\(7f 'Apiaiv, 5ti i}fit7s yt ytKwfify $auTi\fa, Kai, us 6paTf, ovSels rifiiv 
tri ixax^Ttu, An. 2. 1.4. Twk y iKwyr wv (<ttI koI ra eavruy aw^nv koi la 7u>y 
flTTwfjL* ytty Ao/i/Sdyftr, 3. 2, 39. Aaplov koI UapvadriSos iraTbts ylyvovrai 
Ivo, 1. 1, 1. 

Rem. 2. OfxoMa* a" J ^««». with Prcs. forms, are often translated in Eng. 
by Perfects, namely, otx^l^^h I ^<Jt'« dt parted, and t^kw, I have come; yet 
oVx<>Ma<< prujiirly means, / am tn>in\ and ^ku, I am here {adsum), e.g. M^ 
XvTrot\ oTi 'Apdciras of x «''<»» <«'* "f^^^^ iroKfu'tovs, that Arasjias is gone, has 
.' (= trunsfu(jit) to the rmmtf, X. Cy. 6. 1, 4.'). "Hkw ytKpwy Kev^/J.cl)i>a 

x~ o >u wvKas Knrwy, Fmi- TT.-. 1 'Tfiui fi6Kis a<piKi'(-7(r^f, ottoi ^/ue?s xaAot 

ffKo n« y, X. Cy. 1 . 3, 4. 

Rem. 3. But the language often considers an action as present, which is not 
yet a -- '■ ' ' 'nt is citlier artuallt/ begun, or is begun in our mind, or pur- , 
j^s4' : 1 i<j virtuiillv fntiin"'. though considered as present. Com- j /. O *- 

|, ; • ' (/(,, I intend to rjo, and the like. This ' 

Ii- .ii ^ : .... I .irtici]»ials of the Pres. and the Impf. y^^ 

1 . fiallv holds"of the Pres. of e f^ i, which, in the Ind. has regularly the mean- i ' -/^ 

if the' Fut., / shall qo : the Subj. includes a Fut. meaning in itseU" {§ 257, 
i; w. 4) ; but the Inf aiid Part, have l)Oth a Pres. and Fut. meaning. "Ett eiro 
td T€ vi^y tvra iy r<f ira^aStiVy ^pla SlSufil aoi, Koi &\\a nayrodaTra (rv\- 
Kt^u,, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 {iiSwfii,! odW). "E/caffWr ris InfiSt^y ^(vocpwvra 
vwoar^yat i^y apxvy (persuaderc studelxtt), X. An. 6. 1, 19. m-rvKr^vaLOi eirl 
M-iidufiyay its itpo^iZofiiyr)y iarpdrfvcav (putantcs parari ibi proditionem), 
Th. 3. 18. h\ like manner oficn the Pres. Part, after verbs of motion, e. g. H 

/({to (for ike purpose 




KfvdCfTo i,s iiwiodffa ndXiy irphs rhy HySpa, i5e7TO ainTJs 6 'AffTvayns KaraXvizuy 
xhy KDpoK, X. Cy. 1. 3, 13. 

29* 



342 SYNTAX. [^ 255. 

Rem. 4. ( But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indir-ated 
as present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker 
the action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when be is so firmly 
convinced of its occurrence, tbat it appears alread}' present, e. g. 'Ev fui fiaxjf 
rifuSe T7fu x^P"'-^ ir po s KTcia^ e kou iKclurjv fiuWov i Kfvbe poire {you gain, 
vjill gain, and free), Th. 4, 95. *Hi/ ^ainjs cv, iraus '65' i K<pfvyf i fwpoy ' aov 3* 
ov ^€\ov<Tris Kar^avitt', rouSe kt^vu, Eur. Audr. 381. 



^ 



2. The Perfect (Indicative) represents a past action in time 
present to the speaker ; the action appears as already accom- 
pUshed at the present time. Hence the Perf. represents not 
only a past action, but its present effects or results. 

r4ypa(pa r^v iiricno\i]v, I HAVE WRiTTEjf the letter, the letter is NOW WBiT- 
TEN, whether written now, or some time ago ; the writing is the past act, the 
letter is the result still present. 'H iroKis J^Kriffrai, thecilifWAS built (in past 
time), is now built, and there it now stands built. ^Acrrvdyrji ruy iv M'^Jou irijrrtgt 
Sc(nr6Tr}v favrhy tt eiroir] k( y, X. Cv. 1. 3, HB. Otiity i<m Kfp^aXfdtrepov rot 
viKav 6 yap Kparuiy afj-a irovra (TvyiipiraKfy Kol tow iySpas, Kcd ras yvreutcaSf 
4. 2, 26. 

Rem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into clo«e connecrinn with the 

present, the Grceks in many Perfects r< 
completion, than its result as exhibited at ^ 

used the Pcif., in order to indicate a present condition or stale that v 
sioncd by the completion of the action. As such a use of the Perf-^^ * 
belong to the English, we translate many Greek Perfects by our Pn 
the present condition is more prominent than the jMist act ; the Plujtl". of »uch 
verbs is then translated by our Imi)f., e. f:. rt^yriKa (I have died), lam dead 
(Eur. Ale. 557. rebvaa- ly oi davoyra, those who died, are dead)] itfirrtifuu (I 
have acquired), I jmsscss; rf^av/xcuca (1 have been wondi "•■ -' ,' • •; astonisfir^ : 
fie^ovKfvfiai (I have taken counsel with mvsclf ), / a»/i ; iri^va 1 

have shown myself), I appear ; olda, novi (I have sec 'jXo (I f: 

blossomed), / bloom; irfiroiba (I have convinced n ; $t$riKa I 

have taken steps), / am q:>ing; /xe/xyrifuu, memini (I have called to mind), / 
mindful, or remember; KfkXrtucu (I have been named), / am called, etc, Tlie 
Pres. and Impf of many verbs, especially such as express the idoa of to mund. 
to call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. 
to take entirely the place of the l*res. and Impf., e. g. KtKpaya, 
I am a crier ; /xc/uwko, / roar. 

Rem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state 
produced by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. ^ di .^a 
KeK\€i<rrai, the door has been shut, and it is now shut. So particularjv t' e 
third Pers. Sing. Perf Imp. Pass, is often used, when one would ' 

emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain tixod and pi 
condition, i. e. not only that the action should be pertormed. 

that the result should continue, e. g. rh ayKvpiov au'«nrda^(», i ,. 

drawn un and remain so ; KeKelcf^co, reliiptum esto. It-t it remain }wr .- rrrci- 

pdcr^w, let it Iw tried ; pvv he roino reTo\u.i\<Tb(a elireiv. Si ' ' ' ' itio 

obliqua, X. II. 5. 4, 7. ^^lovre^ 5e elirov, t)]v bvpav KeK\e'. .md 

remain shut. 

Rem. 7. The Perf is used with special emphasis. :' future 

occurrence of these being athrmed Nnth the same d' > ss and 

as if they had already taken place. II. o, l2S.Bi4(p^opas! ifou art ^osf, wiU be 



4 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 343 

lost. So i{\«Ao, like perii, interii, actum est de me, it's all over with me^ will 6e, 
etc. PI. Phaed. 80, d. ^7 ^xh o.-KaXKanofi4v7] rod awnaros, ev^hs d tair€(pv(rr}- 
rat Kol air6\(M>\ey. 

r ' 3. The Future ( Judicative) denotes an action as future in re- 
lation to the present time of the speaker. The Greeks veiy 
often use the Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an 
Hist, tense, to express that uiiich shall^ should, must, or caii he, 
wliere the Latin employs the Subj. ; the other forms of the 
Fut., particularly the Part., are also so used. 

fi6fiovs vvof^au Sfi TOiovrevs, hi wv ro7s fiev aya^o7s evrlfios koI iXev^epos 6 Pios 
wapa<rK(vacrd-l}<rfrai (should be obtained), to7s Se kokoTs raneiyds t€ koL a.\- 
y€ty6s Kol iifiiunos & aiwv iir avaKfiatr ai (should be iiu])osc<l upon them), X. Cy. 
3. 3, 52. O* fis rijv $curi\iKT)y rtxt^y Teu5€i;<i/i€i'ot ri Zia<p4pov(Ti rSiu i^ afdyKr)5 
Koxoira^ovinuy, rf yt Wfiy^aovfft Kal 8it|/);0-o vo't koI ^lywaovcr i koI 07- 
pviryt'iffovai {i/ they m< r, etc.), C. 2. 1, 17. "ESo^c t(^ Stj/z^ TpiaKOura 

6.y^:—- ' ' ''T^cu, oi rovs tot aovs ^vyypd^povai, ko^' ots ttoXit fixrovai 

(u I draw uj> l>tus. j to iihich they should live), 11. 3. 2, 3. A^ 

4. Tlie second person of the Fut Ind. is often used to express 
coil inlands, exhortations, admonitions, entreaties, and, in con- 
nection with the n»'irative ov, prohibitions; here tlie accomplish- 
ment of what is allirmed is not demanded, as is the case in the 
Imp., but is led to the choice of the person addressed, and is 
oiilv (xpccte^l. Thi.s cUllers cliielly from the Imp. only in being 
a 1 1 form of expression. On the contrary, the Fut. is used 

with the negative ov, interrop^ativcly, when, in a strong and 
indi^'^nant tone, the accomplishment of the action is expected 
necessarili/. 

"Op a oZv KoL iTTi-^'MtoO Kar<8«ry, i6v tws irp6T(pos i/xov "iS-ps, Kal fioi (p pa- 
ct is (you tciil cv ite it to tne =■ communicate), PI. Rp. 432, c. "Hs oZv 
woi-fiatre «ca2 irtld€ad4 fiot {you will do thus, etc. = do tJius), Prot. 338, a. 
Ov Spdfffis toiJto, ' ' not do this, as I hope =^ do it not ; butou Spdcreis 

rovTo : iri'' '' ' c w.,,.' = do tL Ou iravffri \4ywv ; non desines diccref 

instoa.i ..( ,. PI. Synip. in. ov Trfpififvus; in'lt tfiou not wait? Dem. 

Phil. 2, 72. ov <pv\d^«ad\ ?4»jv, Situs fih B((nr6Tr}i> evprjTe ; But when in this 
manner, a negative command is to be expressed, the negative fi-f) is to be used 
with ow ; and when tn " nccs of this kind, one with an iiifirmativc meaniug 

and the other with a h _ j. follow each other, ov stands in the first sentence, 

ii^ in the last. Ov ^t/ <pKvapi]<T(is ; Ov fi^ XaX-h^eis, oAA' i.Ko\ovSrv <t e is 
ipLol, Ar. Kub. 505 (instead of /it; <t>\vdpei, fih AoAfi, oAA' o/coAou^et!. PL Sjmp. 
175, a. VIC oZy KaKeis ainhy koI fi^ aip-f]<reis. 



344 SYNTAX. [^ 256 

5. The Future Perfect (Indicative) represents 2. future action 
as jpast (completed) in relation tp another future action ; hence 
a future prior to another future. Such an action is future "with 
reference to the present, past with reference to another future. 

Kat rolai fie /jli^ct ai ia^\k KaKolaiv [the good shall have been mixed with evU), 
Hes. Op. 177. 'H iroXiTela reKews k€ KOtr fi-fja er ai, ihv d roiovros avTrjy hrur- 
KOTTTJ (pvXa^ 6 rovTwv iirKTT-ffiMQy, PL Rp. 506, a. As the Greek Perf. frequently 
denotes the present condition or result of a completed action, so the Put. Perf. 
frequently denotes the future condition or result of a completed action. Hence 
the Put. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated by the present tense 
of other verbs (see Rem. 5), must be translated by the simple Put., e. g. fiffiyv- 
(Tofxai, meminero {I shall have reminded myself), I shall he mindful, shall remember 
(but fjiVT](rojxaiy I shall remind mi/self) ; K€KTr)<TOfiai [I shall have acquired), I shaU 
possess (but KTr](rofj.ai, I shall acquire), etc. 

Rem. 8. The Put. Perf, like the Peif. (Rem. 7), is used instead of the sim- 
ple Put., to expi-ess a tiling emphatically. Here as in the Perf. used for tho 
Put., the speaker looks upon the action as already accomplished ; hence the 
Put. Perf. often denotes the rapidity and certaintif of the action, the process 
or progress being left wholly out of view, e. g. *pd^€, koI ircxpo^frat (and it 
shall be [certainly, immediately] done), Ar. Plut. 1127; <pi\os rjixiy oitSfls 
\e\€l\p€rai (no friend will [certainly] be left us), X. An. 2. 4, 5. So also in 
the Inf. Avoiv 1) Tpiwu T^fitpuiv ravra irfTrpd^effbat, Dcm. 19, 74. In the Act. 
the periphrasis fiefiovKivKoos ta-ofiai is found. 

Rem. 9. The Put. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in 

subordinate clauses introduced by 8ti and us (that), by c < " ' ' " "-i, 

and by fisT6 (so Mfl/). all with the liid. In all other sul" c 

Aor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf) is used instead of it, in connection with a 
conjunction compounded of &y, as idy, indy, iirfiSdv, &ray, xply ir, (sr' iy, ts 
&v, etc., e. g. 'Eay rovTO \4 ^tj s (si hoc dixeris), a^iapTi^arf. 



§256. (h) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect ^ and 

Pluperfect. 

1. The Aorist (Ind.) e:^presses past tinie, in a wholly indefi- 
nite manner, with no other relation, e. g. cypai/^o. Iterate, Krpos 
iroXXoL ^^VT] evLKr]cr€v. It thus stands in contrast with the other 
tenses which express past time ; still, so far as it indicates past 
time indefinitely, it mav be used instead of either of these 
tenses. 

2. Both the Impf and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as 
past, but always as having relation to anotlier past action. But 
the Iinpf expresses the action as contcmpoi'aiy \vitli tliis other 
past action ; the Plup. expresses tlie action as already past 
before tliis other past action. 



♦ 256. J HISTORICAL TENSES. 345 

'Ey ^ (TV firaiCfs, eyu typatpov, while you were playing, I icas itriting. *Ot« 
iYY^i ?l<rav ol ^dp^i^oi, orEAATjves ifidxoyro. "Ore ol ^dp^apoi eTreATjAiJ. 
3 €(ra I/, ot^EAATj/zer indxovro. Tc^tc (or eV ravrri rfj fiaxv) ol "EW-nves 
&a^pa\funara ifidxovro. 'EiraSi) ol '^EAATj.'cy ive\-n\vSfe(rav, ol TroAeVjot 
iireirfcpfvyftray. "Ore ol avfj-uaxoi iTrXrfff la^oy, ol 'A^j/a?ot rovs Uepa-as 
(VfviKi]Ki(Tav. 'Y.yiypdcpiiv r))v iiritTToXw, I had written the letter [before 
the friend came). 

Remark 1. It is to be noted that the Greeks freely use the Aor. instead of 




crav. The Aor. is often employed even instead of the Peif., when the relation 
of the past time to the present need not be expressed emphatically. 

3. Heuce the Aorist (Ind.) is used in liistorical narrations, in 
order to indicate the principal events, wliile the Liipf. (Ind.) is 
used to denote the accomi)anying circumstances. The Aor. 
narrates, the Impf. describes. Hence in the narration of past 
events, the Aor., which introduces the principal facts, is very 
often interchanged with the linpf , wliich describes and paints ; 
often, also, with the Ilist. Pres., which, like the Aor., relates the 
principal* events, and places them vividly in the present ; not 
seldom, also, with tlie Plup., sometimes with the Perf By this 
interchange of the tenses, the narration has the greatest hveli' 
ueas of representation, and the finest shades of expression. 

*H^M)J 5* 'EcBi^fwr eTtrt '^Jajy iptuv iir\ ycuay^ ttJ/xos irupKai^ i napalveroj 
Tavaaro 8c ^k6^ {the f re ujx>n the funeral pile began to uUite, and the flame 
Cfascd), II. »^, 228. Tovs wtKrcurrai iS f ^avro ol ^dp^apoi Kol 4 yidx^vTO' 
iirtX 8* iyyvs Tjcray ol AirA?Teu, ir pdirorr o • koX ol ireAToOTol fv^vs (Xirovro 
(the barbarians withstood the peltasts and continued to fight with them; but when the 
lioplites drew near, they /led, and immediately the peltitsts set out i'l pursuit), X. An. 
•">. 4, 24. Evy(0r} ry aiotcfirw Kol 4^airiyrfS 6.ix<poT4po}bfv rovs 'A^valovs bopv^t]' 
■Sfyvoi • Kol rh fikv tifwyvfioy Ktpas avrwy, Sir«p 5}j kcu ir poK^X'^P'^'^^h ^v^vs 
CLirop^ayiy f^vyt • koL & Bpa<r/5ar, inrox<''povyros ijSrj airrov, 4irnrapiwy t^ Sf^ia, 
T IT p u<T K«r ai' KCU TitaSvra avrhv ol fxty 'A^va7oi ovk ala^dvovTai, ol Se 
irkrfcioy ipayrfi air-qy ty k ay ' koI 6 fiiu K\(uv, ws rh irpuroy oif 8 leuocTro 
fityfiy, ti^vs (pfvywy, Kol Kara\rj(pd(\s inrh yivpKiylovTTfXTCurrov, avo^y^crKef ol 
ih airrov Ivtrrpatpfyrfs (SrATrai i\iivyoyro k. t. A., Th. 5, 10. 'O jxky TrSXifj-os 
kirdyruy rfftas Twy dprffifytay air * <r r fpi] Kf • koX ydp roi irfVfaTfpovs TreirotTjAce, 
Ka\ woAAous KiySivovi irofifyfiy ifydyKaat, Kol irphs robs "EAArjvas Sia^e fi\7j- 
Kf Kol irdyra rp6iroy TfraKaiiTQtprfKfv fifias, Isocr. Pac. 163, a. (The 
Perfects denote the result, the Aorist the event.) 

Kem. 2. Inasmuch as the Aor. Ind. represents a past action independently 
and fthsclutcly. uncon lectcd with any other past time, while the Impf. Ind. 
represents a past action as always connected with another past action, beings 



346 SYNTAX. f^ 256. 

consequently, employed in exhibiting an action in its duration and progress^ and 
hence used in description ; accordingly the Aor. expresses a jnoment or point of 
time, while the Impf., denotes duration or continuance. The Aor, therefore 
describes a momentary action or a single action ; the action, however, described 
by the Aor. may be a continued or protracted one, but the writer in using the 
Aor. presents no such view of it, communicating merely the fact of the occur- 
rence. The Impf., on the other hand, describes an action in its continuance 
and progress, — not merely a single act, but a series of acts. It often depends on 
the choice of the writer whether the Impf. or Aor. is used. An action graphi- 
cally presented in its duration and progress by the Impf., can be stated histor- 
ically as a mere past act, by the Aor. And so, many actions stated in the Aor. 
might be more vividly described by the Impf., if the writer wished it. 

4, On the use of the Impf. and Aor. Ind., the folloAving things 
are to be noted : — 

! (a)(The Impf. appears sometimes to stand instead of the Pres, since an 

I action which continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in which 

Mt occurred, or was known to the speaker.^ Kvpos i^fXauuti — 4irl rhy XdXor 

iroTaiJ.6i/, ovra rh eZpos ir\4^pov, Tr\iipri 5' Ix^vwu fifydXcoy koI irpofoav^ ots oi ivpoi 

^eoits iyofit^ov koI a^iKfTy ouk etwy [which the Syrians CONSIDER as gods^ 

namely, as I then saw), X. An. 1. 4, 9. ^Atp'iKovro trphs rh MTjSt'ar KoXovfjuvop 

ruxos ' — iTrelxe S^ BafivKiiiyos oh ttoAu, 2. 4, 12. Tp he nrpwrri rifj-tpa iupiKoyro 

iir\ rhy iroTaix6v, 8s upi^c Tf)V t« ruy MaKpwyuy [xo!>pav] koI rijy Tuy 'S.KXf^ivSiyy 

4. 8, 1. 'Arap, S> eralpefS.p' qv rSif ^y rh ScVSpor, itp' Sxtp ^«y Vfias ; PI. Phaedr. 

230, a. OvK Ap' ayabhs to ttoXitiko. TltpiKKris ^ y ^k tovtov tov \6yov (namely, 

when he so appeared to us, consequently = ovk iip aya^Ss iany, «y itpaiytro^ 

he is not therefore distinguished, as he then seemed to be), Gorg. 516, d.-^Frora the 

idea of duration or continuance contained in the Impf. several other relations orig* 

\inate: (o) The beginning of an action, e. g. ivd iyyvs iytyoyro, i^awlyris ol fih 

\avTC6y iro^fvoy, some of them began to shoot their aiTOWS ; — ()8) habit or custom^ 

le. g. avrhv o'lirep npSs^ey irposeKvyovy^ Koi t<Jt€ irposfKvyri<ray, tJiose vcho xcere 

^before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it tlien also; — (y) wish, endeavor or 

\attempt, C. g. irpSnos KXeapxos rovs airrov (TTpaTiwras i fiid^fro Ifyau^ Clearchxu 

\endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance. J 

(b)(The Aor. is often used in genei-al propositions which express a fact bor- 
rowed from experience, and hence what is customary ; here a single fact which 
has been observed to be true in many instances, but not established as universal, 
is stated to be generally true, — the truth frequently observed in regard to a 
single event, is considered as holding in the case of other similar events. ^ In 
such cases the Aor. is usually translated into English by the present, or by the 
verb is loont, is accustomed, with the Inf. H. p, 177. aXtl re Aths $cpfl<r<reey v6os 
alyioxoto, Ssre koI &XKiiJ.oy &ySpa <po^f7, koX acpflXero yliofy ^tSi'wj (icho 
inspires the brave 7}ian with fear, and bears off the victory). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. at fiiy 
yhp irXeicrTai ir6\€is irposrdTrov<ri to7s roXlrcus fx^ K\4irr€iv, /i^ apirdCeiy, Koi ToAAa 
T^ roiavra wsavrus' ijy S4 ris rovreny ri vapa^alyr), ^rf/jdas avrois iv4^f<ra9 
{tcere accustotned to impose a penalty upo7i them). Dem. 01. 1(2). 20, 9. Srar i$t 
ir\€oyf^las Kol Troyrjplas riSy &S'K(p ovtos (4»{At7nros), t(rxv<rT7, i} irpwTti vpi^xurn 



I 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 347 

Rem. 3. (When the idea of being wont to do, as found in the Aor., is to be 
made prominent, or when a native habit is to be expressed, the Greek uses the 
verbs <pi\eiv and id4\fiv^ Her. 7. 10, 5. (piheei yap 6 behs ra virepexouTa irdi/ra 
KO\oveiy. 157.T^ ev ^ov\ev^ein-i 7rpijyfj.aTi reAeuT^ ws rh iiriirau XPW'^II e^-eAet 
iiriyivia^ai. 

(c)/Hence in poetry, the Aor. is often used in comparisons, instead of the 
Pres., since comparisons contain facts that are known and founded on often 
repeated experience. \ E. 7, 33 — 36. us 8* gre tIs re SpaKopra iSwu iroKlvopcros 
Airco-TTj otjpeos iv ^■t)a<TriS^ inr6 re rpSfios eA.\a)3e yv7a, 6.\p r dj/ex wpTjcev, 
2)-XJ>6s T6 fiiv fl\e irapfids • &s aims ko^' o/xikou eSv Tpcowu aycpwx'^v (sc. Hdpis). 
U. IT, 482. ¥ipnr( 5', if 5t€ tu Zpvs ^piirej/. 

(d)(The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or 
emphatic expression of a decision or determination, ■which has respect, indeed, 
to the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been 
previously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans- 
lates sudi Aorists, in a vcrj' imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong 
especially verbs expressing strong feeling or passion,\j. g. aireirTva-a {I do 
abhor), iyf\aaa(l cannot help laughiwj), iir'pt/ecraf ^fjLco^a, i^avfiacra, 
uxufMoauy ^a^rjy, S. Phil. 1434. & 5' h.u Kafi-ps av aKv\a TovSe rod arparov, 
76^U3V ifuiv fiyrjfjida, irpihs irvpcw ifirjy KSfiiC^ ' Koi <To\ ravr\ 'AxjAXews t4kvov, tto- 
p^yecroy this I counsel tliee, (his I have counselled thee. Eur. Med. 223. XPV 5e 
^yoy fi.(y K(Lprti xpoiX'^P^^" (*^ accommodarc) ir6\€i ovS" atrrhy Tjyecr', Hsris 
aif^ddrjs 7t7a»r iriKphs iroAtTcuj iffrly apLO^ias viro [ncc lando, nee nnqiiani laudaoi). 
Hec. 1276. Polym. : koI <ri\y y kydyiai irouBa Kacrdvlpay Stavilv. Hecuba: oTreTr- 
T i;<ro, this thought I do abhor = a t/iottght which I have abhorred. 

(ejUVith like cflect the Aor. is often used by Attic writers, apparently instead 
of the Pres. in urgent appeal* or commands, expressed in the form of a question 
introduced by t/ oly oh or rl ov. The speaker wishes, as it were, to see the 
desired action already accomplished.^ X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. t( ovy, i<pr] 6 Kvpos, ov /coi 
<ri>>» Hyapuy l^\€^is fioi (qnin igitur inihi recenscs ? why hast thou not yet told me of 
0ie fonts? in^*nid of tell me forthwith !) 5. 4, 37. rl odv, ^(pr], & TaSara, 
oux^ "^o Mf" "'Xl <^fAeuf^ ^X^po- iirolriaat (why therefore have you not made 
the walls strong In/ a guard f = at once make tliem, etc.) ; PI. Phaedon. 86, d. el ovy 
ris vfiuy finropunfpos ifiov, ri oifK aireKpivaro; {is quani celerrime respondeat, 
kt him answer at once). (The Pres. is also so used; yet the expression is then 
far weaker, )e. g. T( o^Vy ij 5' hs, ovk ipwT^s; (stronger than ipura, but 
weaker than Ti oly ovk ijpur-nffas or ijpov;) PI. Lysid. 211, d. Tt ody ov 
aKoiroO/if V, X. C. 3. 1, 10. 

(f )^he Aor., like the Perf. (^ 255, Rem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi- 
dently considers a future event as already taken placed 11.5, 160 — 162. e^Trep 
yep Tf Kol uvtIk 'OKvixirios ovk iTiKeaaey, 6k t€ koI o^e Te\e7, ow re ^e7aA^ 
iiirfTKray <rvy <T<pfj<Tiy Ke(pa\Tiai yvyai^i re ml rcKeco-ffiP {then have they paid a 
heavy penalty, then shall thnj pay). Eur. Med. 78. 0.^(^x6 fie cb" &p, et KUKhv 
irposoi(roiJL€v ytoy va\ai<p [then we shall perish, if etc.). 

(g) /i'he Aorist is very often used in all its foiTOS to denote the coming into a 
condition ; this the Ind. alwjys represents naturally in the past. ) Boo-iAciJw, / 



■) 



348 SYNTAX. [^257. 

am a king, ifiaa-lKevaa (not I was a king, but) I came to be a king, was made a 
king, fiaa- i\ev(raSf having been made king, rex f actus. BovXivu, I am a senaiot 
(X. C. 1. 2, 35), PovXevaaSf liaving been ■made a senator^ senator f actus (ib. 1. 1, 
18). Sou arTparrjyfjaayTos, te duce facto (ib. 3. 5, 1). 'Io-x^«», lam strong, 
Icxuiras, having become or been made strong, potens /actus (Th. 1, 3). Avyr)- 
^€ is, potentiam nactus. ^Aa-bevTJffaif to have become sick, in rnorbum incidisse, 
Kvpos 7iyd<T^7} avrdu (KAeapxo'')> ^ ■^^' !• 1> 9' Cf/rus came to admire him, ejus 
admiratione captus est. 



$257. Subordinate Modes. 

1. As the Aorist Indicative expresses a past action as inde- 
pendent and completed, having no relation to another past ac- 
tion ; while the Imperfect, always representing a past action in 
relation to another past, and being used in describing and paint- 
ing, presents the action in its duratio7i and ^>/-oore&y, so the 
same distinction holds in regard to the subordinate modes of 
the Aorist and Present : ^ Tlie subordinate modes of the Aor. 
(Subj. Opt. and Lnpr.) together with the Infinitive and Partici- 
ple, are used, when the speaker wishes to represent the action 
by itself, as completed ; the subordinate modes of the Present 
together with the Lifinitive and Participle, and also the Imper- 
fect Opt. are used, when the speaker, considering the perform- 
ance of the action, wishes to represent it xiescriptiirli/ in iXs dura- 
tion and 2^f'ogress. In this way the following modes stand in 
contrast with each other ; 

(a) The Subjunctive and Optative Aorist with the Subjunctive Present and the 
Optative Imperfect, e. g. ^vywfifv and (pfvyuf/xfy, let us JUa. "With 
^ (pvyajxiv , the idea of fleeing itseU" is urged and is had in mind; with 
^^ ^€u'7a)/i€ J/, I rather have reference to the performance and progress of 

>^ the action ; the Aor. expresses the action with more energy, as it denotes 

an instantaneous, momentary act. The same distinction exists in all 
the following examples. )Ti. iroi-nawfi.fy and irouifify ,• what shall we dof 
Ae'yto, lya fid^ris and lya fiav^dyris , tit discos; ^Keyov, um ftd^ois 
and tj/a /xay^dyoiSy ut disceres. The Greek Subj. always refers to the 
future, and hence is never used, as in Latin, of the present and past, e. g. 
Laudat puerum, quod diligens sit or fucrit, because he is or has been. In 
subordinate clauses with hs ^, tav, STav, etc. [§260. (a)],lthe Su!»j. Aor. 
corresponds with Latin Fut. Perf. (§255, Rem. 9)^ 'Ecky toDto Xe^py, 
ajj-apT-tiari {si hoc dices or quotiescuuque hoc diets, errabis). 'Eoj' toTt- 



* The subordinate modes of the Imperf. are supplied by those of the Pref 



( 257.] SUBOEDINATE MODES. 349 

Ac ^ p s , afioprija-p {si hoc dixeris, if you shall have said). Comp. the exam* 
pies under ^§ 333, 3. 337, 6. 339, 2, U. (b). The Impf. and Aor. Opt. has 
the sense of the present or future in clauses which express a supposi- 
tion, conjecture, or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly^mth ^j/, 
in hypothetical clauses with el; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses 
denoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses, 
particidarly in deliberative questions. N ToGto ^otSiwy ti,y yiyvono or 
ytvoiroy this might easily be done. See ^ 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. El 
rovTo \fyois or Xe^fias, afxapTavo is or aiidprois dy, if you 
ghould say this, you would err. See § 339, II, (a). Et^e tovto ylyvoiro 
or yfvoiTOf titat this might be! See ^ 259, 3. (b). "EXeyov, 7m 
fiay^dyois or fxd^otSf ut disceres. See§ 330,2. Tis roiavra viro\afi- 
fidyoi or vwo\d$oi; tcho would sup]x>se such things ? See § 259, 3, (e). 
Oi/K e?X''*'» ^'''<" TpfirolfiT^ y or Tpavolfiriy^I knew not what I should 
do. Sec ^ 259, 2. i The following case also belongs here : When the 
8ul>ordinatc clauses in §§ 333, 3. 337, 6. and 339, II, (b), arc made to 
depend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without &v takes the place of 
the Subj. with ts Hj/^ drav^ iwf tSdy, iaa^, etc, the Opt. has a future sense. 
Ohs iuf Xhu! rk KoXh. iirnr\h(voyras., rifirjaw (quos videro). "Etpijy otis 
XSotfii rii KoXdi iwirrjifvoyras, rtfiiitrfiy (quos mMrtw essem). 'EireiShy 
<rv 0ov\ri SuiXtyfabaif ffol SiaXf^o/juu {si or quotiescunque yj's). *E</)t;i', 
iiTfiSri av /SouAoio iiaXfy f (t^cu, aol Sia\f^((Tbai {si or quotiescunque 
vtlhs, of the future). In other kinds of clauses, the Opt. of the Impf and 
Aor. has ajxjst sense, so that it corresponds with the Ind. of each of these 
tenses. jTiaaatpdpyris Sif&aXf rhy Kvpoy, ics iirifiovKtvoi oury {that he 
teas plotting against him). "EAe^eu', 5ti Kvpos atro^dyoi {that C. was 
dead). 'Oirrfrc ot "EAArjKfj toIj Tokffilots i-trlony or iTTiXboifv, airi- 
ipfvyoy, quotiescunque impetum faciebant). *Ayafiiovs (\€yfy, a iKcl 
tSoi {what he had there aeen^ a dependent question). Comp. No. 2, (b). 

(b) The Imperative Aorist with the Imperative Presentee, g. ^vye and 
^ < C •) • Jiee. a6s and Sliov fioi -rh Bi0\ioy, give. Mr) bopv$e7T€, S> &u5p€S 
'A^V^'oioi, dAA' ^nfxfiyare fioty oJs iSfi)^y v/iuy, p.^ bopvfiuw i(p' oh hy 
\4ya) (tiie principal fact is here ippelyarf. the more deliiiite explanation 
dopv$t7T«) VI. A\K>1. 30, c. "EirtiSay arayia aKOvavTe, KplyaTe, p^ Trp6- 
rtpoy irpo\au$dy«r€. Dem. Ph. 1. 44, 14. 'AAA', 2> Sw/cparer, eTi Kol 
yvy ^po\ irtidov koI au^-nri PI. CritO 44, b (= ipol ireibSpeyos (rii^Tt, 
i. e. by a process of persuasion, save yourself). In precepts respecting 
the rules of life, etc. the Pres. is the natural and usual tense. Tabs pev 
dfovs (pofiovyTovs Sk yoyfls rlpa, robs Se (pl\ovs alffxvyou, ro7s 
8i y6pois ird^ov, Isocr. Demon. 16. Comp. § 259, 4. 

(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Prosent,'' e. g. 'E^eAw cp vye7y 
and ipfvyay, I icish to Jiee. :iKay6s elpi ttoi tj (rot and iroLelyru 
('H y«apyla) pa^fTy re pdari) i^Kfi elyai koI tjSjVtt? ipyd^eff^ai, X. 
Gee. 6, 9. A'tprrwT€p6y i<m koKus ano^ayely,^ Cvy alffXP^s, Isocr. 
Pan. 93. Ob rh pi] A a /3 e Iv ri aya^k oStu, ye xoAcTriJj', Ssirep rh Kafi6vra 

30 



S5U SYNTAX. [* -257. 

f repij^TJvai kvTrrjpSv,^. Cj.7. 5, 82. KeXeva <T€ Soupai and Siidvat 
fxoi rh fii^Xlov. KaX4(Tas 6 Kvpos * Apda-irrju MriSov, rovroy iKeKfvae Siacpv- 
Kd^ai cwT(f riiv re yvvalKa koX ttju <TKr]vf]y, X. Cy. 5. 1, 2, with which 
compare in 3. following: ravrrjv oZv iKcKfvaey 6 Kvpos 5ia(^vA<irre(r 
rhv 'Apda-mjy, ews hy ai/rhs xdfir) {to continue to guardy the subordinate 
clause necessarily implying duration in ZiwpvXdmiy). (In the oratio obliqna 
after verbs of saying and thinking, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. is frequently 
used to denote what is past; then the Inf Aor^ like the Ind. Aor., is used to 
denote the principal events, the Inf. Pres., like the Ind. Impf , to denote the 
accompanying subordinate circumstancesT'ie. g. 'A^ycuoi \4yov<n, iiKaius 
4 ^eXdaai (tous TlfXatryovs)' KaroiKTffieyovs ykp rovs HeXatryovs inrh rif 
^Tfiriaa(p iv^ivny Spfiewfjieyous, i.S iKeety riSt' tpoiray yap aufl rks 
<r(f)erepas Sfvyartpas re kcu robs sroISas i-r' vBwp ' ov ykp eJycu rovroy rhy 
XP^vov ffcpitri KM olKfras ' Skcos 5e eX^otey avrcu, rovs TlfXMryovs irwh Sfipios 
fiiaa^ai crcptas k. r. \. {Oratio recta: 4 ^ri\daafi.ty' oi yiip IlcXxuryx)) 
TjSiKovy rdSe- i<poira)yj etc.) Her. 6, 137. The Inf. Aor. has a 
past relation only after verbs of saying or thinking, and in the construction 
of the Ace. with the Infinitive with the article^ *Eyrav^ Xfyerai 
'AirSWwy iK^eTp ai Mapavay Kol rh Stpfxa Kpt fidvai 4y r^ &yrp<ff 2L. 
An. 1. 2, 8 {cutem detraxisse — susjtendiisi, to liave Jiayed, and hung up). 
Comp. No. 2, (c). Qavnaarhy <paiyfrau. fiot rh "rfur^riyal riyaSt ^* 
'ZwKpdrrfs rovs yfovs Sif^tipey., X. C. 1. 2, 1 (fjersuasum esse quibtudamj 
that certain individuals had been persuaded). Th ficSffiiay rSav ■w6\*«y 
aXuyai TroKiopKia, fiiyi<rr6y iari (njixetoy rov iik rovrovs ir fta-^4 yras 
roifs *«K€os ravra TrodtTr, Dem. 19,61. (But when by the Ace 
with the Inf. with the article, a purpose is expressed, the Inf. Aor. has 
naturally something of a future relation^ c. g. 'Eir(^xV>^r rod iiidc- 
KaK6y fxol riva. yey 4<r^ai y I took care that I might have some one as a 
teacher, X. C. 4. 2, 4.) In all other cases the Inf. Aor. has the relation of 
present time. 

(d) The Participle of the Aorist with the Participle of the Present; comp. 
Aa^e tpvyuff vitli Xdv^ave <pfvywy. HtpierKatoy Soi/ftov, fiovK6/jL(yot ^n^nu 
air iK6fj.fvoi 4s rh &,(rrv {wishing to come into the ''■'" <^-"ier) Her. 6, 115. 
Tovs ay^pwTTovs \r](Toixiy ^iriire<r<^>'T€$( trill secreti, . , X. An. 7. 3. 43. 

In all such examples the Aor. does not express the relation of past time, 
but merely the action of the verb taken by itself; the time is denoted by 
the finite verb with which the Part, is connected ; the Aor. Part^ there- 
fore, denotes only that the subordinate action (expressed by the Part.) is 
contemporaneous with the principal action (expressed by the verb). Yet 
it is to be observed, that the Aor. Part, is commonlv used to desijmate 
past time, e. g. TaDr' dirwy airt'jSTj = ravr dxt kou aw($ri. — It may be 
added here as a general principle, that while the Aor. Part, generally 
denotes past time, the subordinate modes of the Aor. and Present, of 
themselves denote no relation of time, the Aor^ however, desi^ating a 
momeiitari/, the Pres. a cotitinued action. 



/^ 



♦ 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 



361 



2. The subordinate modes and participials of the Aonst, form 
a contrast also with the subordinate modes and participials of 
the Perfect and Pluperfect ; the former denote an action abso^ 
lutehj, as past or completed ; the latter, on the contrary, in rela- 
tion to the subject of the finite verb ; by this relation the sub- 
ordinate idea of the duraXion of the residt of what is denoted by 
the verb, is naturally derived. In tliis way the following forms 
sumd in contrast with each other : 

(a) The Subjunctive Aorist with the Subjunctive Perfect, e. g. 'E^*' a-Ko>laX 
y«yot prat, iiovaiy (iK«7<Tt), Ky^«y «foi/<n rii imr-ffSeia {if a treaty shall 
have been made), X. A. 2. 3, 6. "Or iv yviispifxov {kvuv Ur,), oo-Trci^eTat, kUv 
firfitr wdlrroTf irr' cu/rov aya^hy vfir6y^^ (whonisoeier he rcco'jnizcs, he 
yr«t«, even if he shall have received no favor from him), PI. Rp. 376, a. 

A»'cx«0'3« rwy aWorplwy, ly axnpaXftntpoy robs o'(kcvs tous vn^Ttpovs ai/rup 
KfKTrjadt, Uoc. Nic. 49. ( Comp. ^ 255, Rem. 5.) It has already been 
stated No. 1. (a) that the Greek Subj. always refers to the future. 

(b) The Optative Aorist with the Optative Pluperfect, e. g. Ol 'Ij/5oI eAe^oi/, 
5ti vt^}^tit <r«pas 6 'lySwy /ScurtAcvr {had sent), X. Cy. 2. 4, 6. "ESe^rac, 
fi^ \{rrra ris &rwfp Kv<r\y rinuy i fiircirTwKoi {that some madness had 
fallen ujM>n us, the effects still continuing), X. An. 5. 7, 26. 'AynalAaos 

4Scf)-^ rris wSKfwi iuf>*7vau ainhy tovttjs t^j ffTparrfyias, \(yuy, on rw irarpl 
aOrov woWii vwripfTrjtcoi i) riiy Mayriy^vy ir6Kis iy rols vphs Mtaai^yTiy 
ToKffiots, II. 5. 2, 3. In what instances the Opt. Aor. is used of the 
present or future, and in what of the past, has been stated in No. 1, (a). 

^c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Perfect ; comp. ano^ayiTy with 
TtbyifKfyai. Tlarrpbs Kvpos Kiytrau yfyfff^ai KafjL$va(u, Ilf pauy fia(Ti' 
X^ws X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. AtytTou 6,yipa riyh rwy Mr]Swy i KtreirKT] x^<tt 
woKi/y 8^ riya xp^^^*' ^""t ^V niWn rod Kvpov {stood or continued amazed), 
ib. 1.4, 27. Comp. ^ 255, Rem. 6. 

(d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle ; comp. airobauwy with 
TfbyytKwSy Plut. Aom. Paul c 36. extr. Utpfffhs fiiy tx^i koI viviKt)- 
fi4yos (even tltough vatn/uislicd, in the condition of one vanquished) robs 
wauBas, Alfil\ios Ji rovs turrov (sc. wcuSas) ytK-(f<ras airffiaXey = y€ylKT]TM 
lt.iy — ixti 8€ — , iv'iK7\<Tf fity — dirf'/SoAc 8«. Perseus even though conquered 
stili has his childrAi ; Aemilius in his otherwise successful uxir, lost his. 4M 

Remark 1. From the above explanation, it is evident why the Aor., though 
an Historical tense, has besides an Opt. a Subj. also; the Aor. Subj. stands in 
contrast, on the one hand, with the Subj. Pres. ; on the other, with the Subj. 
Pcrf. The Greek Put. bivs no Subj. as in Latin (e. p:. Gaudet, quod pater vew 
Uirux sit), Inrcausc the Greek Subj. of itself denotes future time. But the Aor. 
has an Opt., which stands in dependent sentences after an historical tense, and 




352 SYNTAX. [^ 258. 

koti aya^h X-ii^oivro [where they would receive). X. Cy. 8. i, 43. hrifif\(iv 
'6-Koai jxiire iffiroi, ft^re ^.ttoto'i irore ta o ivt o . (But eVi/ieAcTTai, ottus . . ... itroP' 
Tot). X. An. 4. 1, 25. e(^7j elvot &Kpoi/, h el fjL-f] tis tt p OKaTaKi]\\i o n o , aivvarop 

/^irea^aL TrapeA^cT*'. ( Oratio recta : ei ■jrpoKaToX'fj^eTai, aSvyaroy tcreu irapi?^{iy.\ 
Rem. 2. Verbs of willing, refusing, delaying, entreating, persuading, com- 
manding, forbidding, hindering, of being able, and unable, expecting (-rpos- 
JioKw, iiriSo^Ss eljxi, €ik6s (any, it is likely, to he expected), when tli ' :e to a 

future object, are sometimes sConnected with the Fut. Inf., some:. uh the 

Pres., sometimes with the Aor. The Put. Inf. is used, when the idea oi futurity is 
to be made specially prominent, e. g. a condition continuing in the future ; the 
Inf. Pres., to denote a continuing or permanent condition, the idea of futurity, 
evident of itself, .being left out of sight; this Inf. is also used to denote the 
immediate occurrence of the action ; the Inf. Aor., when the idea of the action 
itself is made prominent. In English all three forms of the Inf., when the subject 
of the Inf. is the same as that of the governing verb, are translated bv the Pres. 
Inf.: MeAAw ypd\pe iv,'Ypd<(>€ lu , ypd\^fat (I am nou; about to icnte, intending 
to write). 'ASvy ar ol eltriv ^TTijueXeTr e a € a^ai { unable to become and continue 
careful), X. Oec. 12, 12. 'A.hvvaroi flcriy us iirifiiKfiay rwy kot' ayphv tprfxtv 
naioeiic (T^ai, ib. 12, 15. 'ASuvaroi rffjuy ^ (Toy rat Tairnjj/ ttji' ^-rifjUKfuw 
S iSax^V'^O'^y ib. 12, 13. 'Aj/o/3ciA.A6Toi iroyfjat ly to SfoiTa, Dera.31, 9. 
'A^yaioi ave fidWovr o rh irav /H7jx«»''^0'«<''^«'» Hcr. 6, 58. *EAx(^ei 
paSlws vuas i ^air arij <Te ly, Dcm. 860, 54 (he hopes to deceive you). *EXir (Say 
7rap6;teTat rjfjLus fvdai^ovas iro iTi<r ai, PI. Symp. 193. d. (he qives hope that he 
will make us happy). With verbs of willing or bci- :. Inf. is more 

seldom than the Aor. or Pres. After verbs of - . _, , .. ing, swearing, 
thinking, the above threefold construction (Inf. Fut., Pres., Aor.) is used, but the 
Inf. Aor. regularly expresses something /xi^/ (see No. 1). seldom what is future, 
e. g. Oi l\\aTair\s i y6 /juaay 4iri^(nfyoi }>tfSiws k paTrjffai, Th. 2, 3, (se victore» 
fore). 'AirSKpiyai, & ^Ay6paT€ ' ov yhp olfial ce t^apyoy ytytffdai, i ^KUKTior 
'A^yalwy airdyrwy itroirjaas, Lys. Agor. § 32 (credo te uegaturum). After verba 
\ of saying, thinking, hoping, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. with iv, is often used in 
\ nearly the same sense as the Inf. Put. without 6.v. See ^ 260, (5), (a). 

f 258. B. A more particular View of the Modes. 

The Indicative, the Subjunctive (Optative) and the Im- 
perative Modes [\ 253, (b)], are distinguished as lb]lo^\'s: 

(a) The Indicative expresses a direct assertion, an actual fact 

Th ^65ov ^d\\€ I. 'O irarijp yfypa<pf rijy iTriaTo\i\v. Oi woXifuoi 
iT€(f>vy oy. Ol ttoKTtcu tovs TroXf/xiovs yiK-fjaovtrir. 

(b) The Subjunctive denotes a supposition, conception, or 
representation. The Subj. of the Hist, tenses is called the 

* <<3ptative. 

"Iwfiey ! eamxis! — T/ iroieDfiev ,- quid faciamus f tchat shall ux do? Ovk fx*» 
Sttoi r pdirwfiaiy nescio, quo me vertam. Owk e7x<'»'» ^<" r pawolfiiiPy nesde' 
bam, quo me verterem. A67aj, Xv (iSfjs, dico, ut scias, in order that you may knom 
it. "EXe^a, 1y elSelt]!, dixi, ut scires, in order that you might know it 

(c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the 
will, being used in commands," entreaties, etc 



? 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353 

Tfxi^ov and ypd^e^ rente. BpaSewy fiev (piXos ylyvov, yev6fj.evo5 Se ireipS) SiajLie* 
yfiy, Is. Dem. 7. rpa^dro) and ypa<peT(i}, let him write {§ 257, 1. b). The com- 
mand expressed by the Imp. is not always to be understood as a strong com- 
mand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp. 

Remark. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to 
the mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i.e. theynever 
show the actual condition of an action; the Ind., in itself, does not denote 
something actual ; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible ; nor the Imp., 
-onu'thing necessary; the language represents these ideas by special expres- 
H"'i-s. e. g. aXri^us, Ji/vacr^ou, Se?, xp^u <^tc. The modes express subjective rela- 
tions solely, i. e. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he 
conceives of an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an | 

act of supposition or coni ■ ", or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses 

an artti.nl ]torfoption ; it i' what the speaker conceiA'Cs and represents 

as a 't, or a conception; even the future, 

whit: . „ ^Micd, can be conceived by the speaker 

as a reality, and hence is expressed by the Fut. Ind. The Subj. expresses 
a ption ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a 

. '/. whothfr it ha-j nn actual oljcctive existence, or is a mere mental 

( '• ; it denotes what the speaker conceives 

a;. . . , hLthcr it he an actual objective necessity 

or not. 

\ 259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im- 
perative. 

1. Tlie Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as 
well as the Sub. Aor.alway relates io future XixQ.e [k 257, 1, (a)], 
and is used in Principal clauses : 

(a) In the first Pers. Sing, and PI. in exhortations' and warn- 
ings, where the Eiig. uses let, let us, with the infinitive ; the 
negative is here /xt}. 

(b) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in deliberative 2 questions, 
when the speaker deliberates with himself what he is to do, 
what it is best to do ; here also the negative is yxv/. 

"luHfv, eamus! let us go, suppose we go! Mrj tw^Kv. *'A7€ ((ptpe, ta) Xwfiev. 
*(p( XStD {come noir, let me see), Her. 7, 103. *«'p« 817, ^ 5' os, ireipaStu Trphs 
vp.as airoXoyijaaa^at, VI Thacdon. G3, b. Such an exhortation is very often ex- 
pressed in the form of a question preceded by fiov\€i; yet in this case, the 
subjunctive is a subordinate clause dependent on &ov\€i, e. g. BouAet oZv, 5vo 
fTSjj dwfj.(v wft^ovs : (do you then wish tJutt we propose two kinds of persuasions =■ 
Ut Its projiose), VI Gorg. 454, e. Tt iroiufiew; quid faciamus? what shall we 
do? Eixwn€v, ^ ffiyufify; Eur. Ion. 771. In no7 t is (ppoyridos €\!^ri; &, 



> This use of the Subj. is called Conjunctivas adhortativus. 
• Conjunctivus deliherativus. 



30* 



354 SYNTAX. [« 259 

0. C. 170, tIs is used instead of the first Pers., where shall one go? {= iroi e\^ot 
or eX^wfiey, like iroi (ppeySiy eA^w; 310). Mt; epwfjiai; sJudl 1 not ask? X. C 1. 
2, 36. "0<Ta 01 oXiyoi rovs iroAAous fi^ ireicravres, aAAa Kparovyres ypd<pov<ri, x(^- 
epov fiiav (ptafievy fj fi^ (pSiyL^v ilyai; 45. So also in indirect discourse^ 
and in all persons. Ovx ex<w, ^irot rpdirw/jL^t/ (I know not, whither I shall turn 
myself, what I shall do). Ovk e^ovaiu iKuvoi, (hroi <pvyu<ri, X. An. 2.4, 20. Ovk 

>* ol5' €t Sa (rb eKTrafxa), Ida not know whether I shall give the cup, Cj. § 8. 4, 16. 

Remark 1. In the second and third Pers. the exhortation takes the form 
of a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Imp. or Opt. Od. Xt "7. 
eX^CDfieyd^ aua &ctv, fiorj 5' StKiaTa yeyoiro. Yet there are also passages 
in which the second Pers. Subj. stands in connection with &y€ and <pepe instead 
of the Imp., e. g. *ep', & t4kvop, vvv koI t)> tt^s vi]<rov fid^r) s, S. Ph. 300. 

Rem. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with /x^ to express a prohibi- 
tion, e. g. fii} yp(i\pT)s, ne scripseris, do not write, see No. 5. 

Rem. 3. A wish is very seldom expressed by ef^e with the Subj. instead of 
the Opt. Ei'(d-' al^epos &va irTWKaSes o^urSyov 5ia irveu/xaros eKwal fi {o si 
aves me sursum in aefherem per auras strident>:S capiard), S. Ph. 1094 (without varia- 
tion). Comp. EJfid^e Tiv\s (vyaX SiKcuuy vfifyaiuy iy "Apyei <pay&<ri TtKyoitTiy 
Eur. Suppl. 1028. Et^" — aXax^oy €?5os ayrl tov koXoG \dfiw (in some MSS. 
T^fieiy), Hel. 262. 

Rem. 4. In the third place, the Subjunctive is somewhat frequently u-cu ni 
principal clauses, in the Epic language, instead of the Fut. Ind., tliough with a 
slight difference of meaning. Both exi)ress a present conception of 
action; but the Fut. Ind. represents what is still in the future as ^/ 
certain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represents what is future as 
merely a concession or admission of something expected. 11. Ct 459. - 
iroTe Tis eliirricriy (and one MAY say, it may be expected or concedfd that nw 
say). II. 7j, 197. ou yap ris fie fiirj ye fKuy aeKoyra BirfTai (o«< e 

away = I will not udinit that one will, etc.). o, 262. ov yap irw ti t^ai. 

oitSe 1dci3fiai(nai do I expect that I sli^l see such men, tutr am 1 to see; oOSf 
6^oixai, would mean, I certainly sJiall not see). Od. ^, 201. ovk ttrb* o&ros euTjp 
ticphs fiporSs, ovSk y€yi]Tai. ir, 437. ovk tab' ovtos cunjp. ovS' (atTfrau onSt 
yeyr]Tai (nor is it to be expected that he will be). T' 
with ovde fx-i) in the Attic ^vl•iters, is wholly anaii_, 
stated. See under § 318, 6. 

2. The Opt. Liipf. and Aor. is also used iu principal sen- 
tences, to denote deliberative qitestio?is (i. e. such as express 
doubt and propriety), but differs from the Subj. in such ques- 
tions in referring to past time. 

Theocr. 27, 24. iroWoi ft ijxvwovTO, y6ov 5* i^ibv oihis taSe ' — kqI rf, tpiXos, 
(> e^aifii; ydfioi ir\Tf^ov<nv avias, i. e. quid FACEREH ? sc. turn, quum miiiti hm/v 
tias 7neas ambiebant, sed eorum nullns mihi placebat, what could I then do ? The 
deliberative Opt. is very frequently used in indirect questions, in relation to an 
historical tense in the principal clause. 'Eir^pero 6 Seu^Tjs rhy iroISa, ct ircuafiey 
m.vr6v, X. An. 7. 4, 10 {whether he shou^ put him to death). Oi 'EiriSdfirtoi »c/i- 
i^aiTcs 4s Ae\<povs rhy ^ehy iir-qpovTo, ei TrapaSoTey Kopiy^iois rj)*' x<Uiy, TIl 

1, 25 {whether they should surrender the city). 



♦ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 355 

Rem. 5, In the principle given in No. 2, the act of supposition or conception 
belongs to the past, and this is the common use of the Opt. (the Subj. of the 
historical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, where the 
act of supposition or conception is a present one. When a present conception is 
expressed by the subjunctive, e. g. tuficv, eamm, ri eXnufMev .- quid dicamiis ? 
then the realization of the conception may be assumed or expected from the 4 
present point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by the | 
Opt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places himself back, as it 
were, out of the present and the vivid connection, which exists between the 
present and the actual accomplishment, and represents the conception as one 
separate from his present point of time. Hence a present conception expressed 
in this way, very- naturally suggests the subordinate idea of uncertainty. Thence 
arises the following use : 

3. The Opt. Aor. and Impf. (Subj. of the historical tenses), f^*^'' 
is used, in principal clauses, of present or future time in the 
following cases : 

(a) To express, in a general manner, a supposition, a present 
or future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, presumption 
or admission. The prose -writers here commonly use the modal 
adverb dv with the Opt., ^ 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very 
frequently use the Opt. without dv. A negation is here ex- 
pressed by ov (ovk). 

*0 5« ainh ovry ai'6fioioy (Jt} Kol Zia<popov, <rxo\^ yt ttov rtf 6XKu) Zfioiov ^ <pl\op 
ytyoiTO {that would saircily be like or friendly to another., as one would readily 
admit), PI. Lysid. 214, d. ' Kiro\o^tvr\% 5« t^s ^^xn^ t^t ^Stj t^v <pv(nv t^s 
iuabfvdai iv lif iKyvoi rh awna koI raxv trairey Sioixoiro {animo exstincto 
turn vera corpus imbecillitatem suam ostendat et intercidat, it is natural to suppose or 
auume, tJuit the body uxtuld give signs of weakness), Phaed. 87, e. ^ 

(b) To express a wish. A negation is here expressed by/xr?. 

11. Xi 304. fiTj fiay aavovSl yt Kol oicAetws iLiroKoifi-nv, may 1 not perish! S. 
Aj. 550. S> ircu, yfvoio Trarphs « uti/x eVrtpoy, ra 5' 6X\' OfiOios ! kou y4voi av ov 
KaK6iy may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other things like him! then 
you would not be wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. *A\A', & Zev fieytCTe, Xafieii/ fioi 
yivoiro axn6v^ its 4yu /Soi/Xo/icu, may I be able to take him. The wish is com- 
monly introduced by ef^e, d yap (in the poets also by ei alone). Od. y, 205. 
c< ykp i/jLol rofftr-fiySf ^(ol hiiyaixiv irapabflt y! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. et yap 
yfyoiTo! (In ])OCtry is is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. us 
air6\o IT TTayKOKus ! ) 

Rem. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be 
realized, the Ind. of the histurical tenses is used, e. g. Er^f rodro iyiyueTo ! 
e»€ TovTo 4yfy(T0 ! utinam hue factum esset ! that this were done, or had been 
done I So & <p € A € 5 yp^ai ! that you laid written ! ( but I know that you have 
not). X. An. 2. 1, 4. oAA' &<pfK€ fi^y Kdpos Cv" ! that Cyrus were still alive I 
(bat I know that he is not). Also d^f, e* yap, us d}<pe\ov, es, e{y) with 




356 SYNTAX-. [} 259. 

the Inf., particularly in poetry. On the wish expressed by -rus &y with the Opt, 
see § 260, 2, (4), (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, see 
Eem. 3. 

(c) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the_j 
form of a wish. ™ 

Od. I, 408. rdxiCTTd fxoi eySoy ^raipoi flev, let my companions come within. IL 
/c^pul Tis ol '^TToiTo yepaLTepos, let some herald follow. Arist. Vesp. 1431. 
epSoi Tis V '^Kaarros eldelrj rix^v. X. An. 3. 2, 37. €t /lev oZv &AAoY ti5 
fi4\Tiou dps, &K\oos e X e T w • ct 5e firj, Xfipl<ro<po5 fiku Tiyo7ro. 

(d) The Optative is used to express a desire, wish, and 
inchnation, in a general manner, without expecting the realiza- 
tion. A negation is here expressed by /atJ. 

Theocr. 8, 20. ravrav (tV (rvpiyya) Kar^einv {1 uxndd he willing OX desire • 
to place)' TO Serai Trarphs ov KaTo^aw. Her. 7, 11. ti)i yap ftrir iK Aaptiov 
yeyos^dos, fx^ rifx(i}pf](Ta.^ivos 'AStjvcu'oi/s, / should not be descended Jrom Darius, i 
unless, etc. 

(e) In direct questions the Opt. is used, when a mere admis- 
sion or supposition is expressed. ' 

(a) In Homer the interrogative clause then forms, in a measure, the protasis \ 
to the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex- 
pressed by the question. II. 5, 93, seq. ?) (>d vv fioi n t/>^oio, AvkiLopos vl* 
Sai<ppoy ; T\al7]S Kev MfveXdu) iiriwpoffiep raxvy lOf, xa<rt Se Kf Tptitaci X'V'^ 
Kol KvSos &poio, will you now listen to me, i. e. if you will, you would dare, etc (the 
same as ef li /xoi irl^oio, tAoitjs Key, etc.). Here -wldoio, etc. is the in- 
terrogative clause containing the condition, and tAo/tji, etc. the conditioned 
clause depending on the preceding. When the question has two members, the 
fii-st, expressed by the Opt. >vithout &v, contains the condition, the last, ex- 
pressed by the Opt. with &v, contains the conditioned clause. H. f , 191. tj ^ 
yv fioi T rl^oio, (plKov tckos, otti /cev cfrw, r}4 kcv itpy^traio Kor€<r<rafi€yrf r6yt 
^vjjL^ ; will you be persuaded by me, — or will you refuse 9 (/3) In the Attic writers, 
the Opt. is also used in a question without reference to a conditioned clause. 
These questions, however, always imply a negative. Aesch. Choeph. iXX' 
virepToXfiov av^phs <pp6in)fia ris \4yoi; icho could describe? — no one, i. c. ■' " 
can you supjwse could desci'ibe f S. Ant. 604. rcdy, Zeu, Svvourty tIs cb^pwr i , 
fiaala Kar dax^i; u'ho could restrain? i.e. who can be supposed to restrain? 
Arist. Phit. 438. &va^ "AvoWoy koI ^eoi, iro7 ris <f>vyotf where could one fly f 
Dem. Phorm. 921, 1. koX Zcra ^i\v cJirc ^cra rfjy aXr)^€las. /i)) xj"}*^^ Te«f/*iypr«» * & 
S' e\//6U(raT0 rh varepov, 7ri(rT6Tfpa toO^' vwoXd^oir f eJycu ; haec f<os tTfiora 
eristimaturos quis putet ! PI. Ep. 437, b. ap o5v — irdyra ra rotavra rwv iycurrlmf 
aKKT\\ois ^elris; can you co)isider all such things to be opposite to eocA other f i. e. 
can I assume that you, etc. 



^ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 357 



Rem. 7. The deliberative Opt. (No. 2) differs from this. 

Eem. 8. All the cases mentioned under (a) (b) (c) (d) (e), are to be regarded 
as elliptical sentences, which ha^-e originated from a conditional sentence like 
«f Tt ?x<"^> Jo^Tjy &y [^ 339, n, (a)], if you had, you ivould give. 

(4) The following points in addition are to be observed 
respecting the Imp., [$ 258, 1, (c)] : Though the Imp. always 
refers to time present to the speaker, yet the Greek has several 
Imp. forms, viz., a Pres., Perf , and Aor. Tliese forms, how- 
ever, do not express a different relation of time, but only the 
different condition or circumstances of the predicate. The dif- 
ference between the Imp. Aor. ypd\f/ov and the Pres. ypa^c, has 
been explained, § 257, 1, (1j). The Liip. Perf has always the 
sense of the Pres., u-ith the accompanying idea of the perma- 
nence or continuance of the result, e. g. fiefivqa-o, memento, be 
mirulful, remember ; rj ^>pa Kc/cXcto-^w, let the door be shut 
(and remain shut).- See ^ 255, Rem. 5. 

5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with /xtJ (ne), the 
Greek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp. ; 
but instead of the Aor. Imp., the Aor. Subjunctive is used. 

Mh ypd<p( or /*)) ypdyl/jis (but neither firj y pdcprjs, nor fi^ yp<i\pov). M)j 
ypatptrw or fiij •ypcf^'p, n* scribito (but neither fi^ ypd<pT], nor fxi] ypa\l/dTci)). 
Mif fioi i-yriKfyf or fiii fioi ayriKf^T) s, do not speak against me (but 
neither /i)) ij^iA^T^r nor /i)j oi/T^Ae^oi'). Isoc. Dem. 24. MTjSeVa (pl\ou iroiov 
irp\y tiy i({Tdtrpt, irws $e«xpV^(u To7y irp6T(pov <pl\ois. 36, 29. firjSevl aviKpopas 
hvtihiarjs' Koiy^ yap ri rvxv koI rh ntWou aSparoy. Th. 3, 39. Ko\a(TbT]TW(Tav 
8i KcH vvy a^iui ttjj ahiKias, koI fxi) ro7s fifv 6\lyois tj aWia irposrc^^, rhu Si 
Srin.ov air o\v<rrfT f. 

Rem. 9. Ye; sometimes in the Epic poets, though very seldom in other 
poets, fi-fj is found with the second Ters. of the Aor. Imp., e. g. II. 5, 410. rcfj 
H^ HOI learfpas -ko^' bfioir, tyStfo bvfiv- The third Pers. is frequently found 
cvrn in the Attic prose writers. X. Cy. 8. 7, 26. /urjStls tSe'rw. 

G. The third Pers. Imp. is very often used (the second more 
seldom), to denote that the speaker admits or grants sometliiug, 
the correctness or incorrectness of which depends upon himself. 
This is called the cnncmsive Imp. 

Oi5t«9 ^x«t<w, ws av KiyiLS {admit that it is as you say), P. Syrap. 201, c 
'EoiKfTw Sv(v ^I'l'X^) ^vixcpvrcf Svydfifi inroirr4pov (evyovs re koI r)vi6xov (grxnt 
Oiat the soul is like, etc.), Phaedr. 246, a. Aeyerw irepl^ainov, &s HKtuTTOS 
ytyydxTKti {admit that each one speaks of it), Th. 2, 48. 



358 SYNTAX. [$ 260 

Rem. 10. In the interrogative formula of the Attic poets: ola^ % Zpatroy, 
—'ola^' d)s TToiriffov ; {do you know what you are to do ?), the Imperative is to be 
explained as a transition, easy to the Greeks, from the indirect to the direct 
form of speech. It is also explained by considering it the same as Zpwrovy 
otcSf o ; do, — do you know wfiat? The formula is a softer mode of expression 
than the Imp. dpaaov or ttoitjo-oi/. The use of the third Pers. Imp., not only 
in dependent questions, but also in other subordinate sentences, is according to 
the same analogy. Her. 1, 89. vvu Siv ■jrotTjtroi/ «5e, fX roi apfffKfi. to iyio \4yw 
Kdriaov TCtiV 5opv(p6pwv iirl Trdcrriai rrjci irvKriai <pvKa.KOvs o* \ey6vTut> — , fis 
<r(()€a (sc. XP'^M'*''''*) OLvayKaiojs €X^* Se/corei/i^i/ai ry At'/ [oi \fy6vruv = icai 
ovroi \ey6vT(av, who sfiould say, or and let them say). Th. 4, 92. ScZ^eu, 
'6ri — KaTdc^waav, they might obtain ! 

Rem. 11. On the transition of the third Pers. Imp. to the second, see k 241, 
Rem. 13, (c) ; on the use of the Fut. instead of the Imp., see § 255, 4, and on 
the Opt. with &v in the sense of the Imp., § 260, 2, (4) (b). 



$260. The Modes in connection with the Modal 

Adverb av (kc, kIv). 

1. The Modal adverb av (Epic Ke(v), Doric *ca, Kav), denotes the 
relation of a conditioning expression or sentence to a condi- 
tioned one ; indicating that the predicate of the sentence to 
which it belongs, is conditioned by anotlier thought either ex- 
pressed or to be supplied. By the particle av, the realization 
of the predicate is made to depend upon the realization of 
another predicate. Therefore, where a predicate is accom- 
panied by av, the predicate is represented as cofuiilioned by 
another thought ; av always refers to a condition. 

2. A complete view of the use of av cannot be presented 
except in connection with conditional sentences. Yet, as it 
is used in all kinds of sentences, it is necessary to explain 
its construction here. It is connected : 

(1) With the Fut. Ind. The predicate expressed by the 
Fut. Ind., seems to the speaker, at the time then present, 
always to depend on conditiotis and circutnstances. ^Tienever 
this idea of dependence is to be made specially prominent, av 
(Epic Ke) can be joined \vith the Fut ; yet this construction is 
rare in the Attic dialect. 

Od. p, 540. €i S' 'OSvaevs e\^oi — , aJ^pd Ke avy ^ irouS) $ias aworltrtrat 
oi/Spw;/, he icouJd punish. H. |, 267. oAA* tdr\ 4yat pc k4 toi Xapireov filop 
6ir\oT€pd(cy dtoffo) 6irvi4fi€vai,dabo,scil.sitihilubuerit. X. Cy. 6. 1,45. w/3pi<rr})ro8r 
vo/xl^wv avT6v, cZ olS* Stj Jifffievos tiv irphs &vSpay otos trv eJ, araWayfiatrai 
(so the MSS.). 7. 5, 91. Stoj' Se kou aicr^ccyrcu Tjfias ^ySov ivras, iroA.i» iy ^ti fioAAor^ 
% vOv, dLxpfMi ^<rovr at vrh tov itcireir\TJx^eu (&v is wanting in only two MSS.). 



♦ 260.] MODAL ADVERB av. 359 

Hemare: 1. "With the Pres. and Perf. Ind., &u is not used. For that which 
the speaker expresses as a present object, cannot at the same time be expressed 
as somethinjT, the realization of which is dependent on another thought. In 
tl '-S where 6.y is found with the Pres. or Perf. Ind., either the*'reading 

i- , le. or 6.1/ must be referred to another verb of the sentence, e. g. Ovk 

0/5' hv ft TTfiaaifjii (instead of €* irfiacufii &v). Eur. Med. 937 ; so often pofxiCco &u, 
olfuu &y and the like followed by an Inf , where &v belongs to the Inf ; or it is 
to be considered as an elliptical mode of expression, as in X. S. 4, 37. iyu Sh 
ovTw TToAAa ex^, ^s fx6\is aina koI €70) & v ai/rhs eiipiaKU), I have so many things 
that I uith dilficulty find them, indeed if I should seek for them myself I should not 
Jind thrill. Nor is ii^ used with the Imp. For what the speaker expresses as 

his ii; • ^'ste will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The 

few I referred to in proof of the use of &y with the Imp., are all, criti- 

:illy couaidcred^ questionable and prove nothing. 

(2) "Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses: the 
Aor., Impf. and Plup. : 

(a) To denote tliat sometliing might take place under a cer- 
tain condition, but did not take place, because the condi- 
tion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed 
]jy ei with the Ind. of the historical tenses. 

Ei toOto f\tyts {t\«^as)t ri fidprave s (IJfxoprej) Av, i. e. if you said this, 
you rvere wrong, or if yon had said this, you u-oidd have been tcrong, but now I know 
•' ■ » you did not say it, consequently you are not wrong; 'Lat. si hoc dixisses, 
^es (at non dixisii ; ergo non erra.«ti). Ef ri ftxofi^>'y iSiSofj.ey 
{KSofify) iy^ if wv had anything, we would give it to you, or if we had had any- 
. we would have given it to you ; si quid habuissemus, dedissemus. Also with- 
out an antecedent clause, c. g. ix^P^^ ^y Uietatus fuisses (scil. si hoc vidisses). 

Rem. 2. Here iH-long also the t^ ' -ns, (f6yL7\v &v, tyvo) ns iv, 

■ffrrbfTo Tjj&K, <P(t6 Tii iv, and tin- in L.auu. piitares,crederes,diceres, 

res, you (out) uxfuJd thiuL; or you (one) uoidd have thought. Here ci 

, ». KAtytv. «i (U(y. fl iSvyaro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent 

es. are to be supjdicd. "Evda 5tj tyvw tis ttv roiis dfiorlfjLOvs TrerraiSevfie- 

» . ' * Ml Tcri ridire.t, f' might sir. were he present). X. Cy. 3.3, 

7'. h c; - . t yv<i> *is iv, 0(T ,_ : t^Tj rh <pi\(7a^ai &pxouTa imh rwv apxc/Jie- 

ictv, 7, 1, 38. L^vs ffiiy rovrots finrqi-fierayrfs (Is rhy inf\hv darroy, ^ S>s tis fer 

<p(To, nfTtupovs i^€K6fit(rcLy Tov aud^as (celerius. quam quis crederet), An. 1. 5, 8. 

"Ewf fipdxrbri 5' &y ris K0j<(7ya iSuiy (one might be encouraged if he saw those 

things), Ag. 1, 27 

Kkm. .1. With the Tnd. of the historical tenses, &y is often omitted. Then 
thi- >iir.iker has no rclVrcnce, in his representation, to the condition contained 
in the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action expressed in the 
apodosis or conclusion could not be completed, but he emphatically represents 




MTjv yvyif vfuy kclXw tovs avyfiS6Tas. The ellipsis of &y is most frequent m 
expressions which denote the idea of necessitv. dutv, reasonableness, possibili- 
tv, libertv. and inclination, c. g. xpvy,^Sfi. '&4>f\oy] with verbal adjectives 
ia r4os] 'with irposvKf, Kaiphs ^ v, eUhs ^v, Ka\hy ^v, aiffxpov iiv^ 



360 SYNTAX. f^ 260. 

&^iov ^v, KaKws elxc, €|f/j/, vvy^px^v, efieWev, l^ovXonrjv. Lvs. 
123,3. XP^*' ^^ <^^> etTrep ^a^a XRV^ToSy iroKv fia?0^ui/ fj.r]vuTT]y ye^ea^cu ' yvv 54 
aov TO ^pya ^avepa yey ei/r]Tai k. t. \., yoa ouglit or ^ci'/ o^^z/Af to have been 
{oportebatj. X. C 2. 7, 10. et /xeu toIvvv ala-xpof ri ^fieXXov ipydaour^cu, ^dva' 
TOP auT avTov irpoai per 4 ov ?iv' vvv 8' & fikv SoKei KoWicTTa kcu vpeiruSearfpa 
yvuai^ly eluai. eTTiVrai'Tot, ojs eoiKe k. r. A., mors praeferenda erat. So also with 
the Inf, X. C. 1. 3, 3. ovre yap ^€o7s e<f>r} KaKias ex ft", €» toTs ti€yd\(ut 
^ucriais fiaTO^ov ^ rats aynKpals txo-i'pov y for he said it would not be proper for the 
gods ^ if etc. Very often without an antecedent sentence, e. g. alaxp^v ^v 
ravra iroiilv, turpe erat, it would be base, icould have been; i^rjy rain a irotfip 
licebat, it would be lawful ; KaXws €?x*' Comp. with the above the use of the 
Ind. in Latin, where the Subj. mifrht have been expected, in such ex' ns as 

aequum, justum, rectum est, it would be proper, longum est, it would be and 

the participle in das in the conclusion of a conditional clause, as Si Romae 
Cn. Pompeius privatus esset, tamen is erat deligexdus. 

^ Rem. 4. In all the above expressions, however, iv can be used ; so also in 
Latin, the Subj. is sometimes found instead of the Ind. Dem. Phil. 1. 40, 1. 
€t yap 6K Tov irpo€\-q\vb6TOS XP^''^^ '''^ Scovra ovroi <Tvv(fiov\fv(ray, ovScy & y 
vfjias vvv 6 Set fiovK^vea^ai. So also in Lat. the Subj. is used instead of the 
Ind. 

Rem. 5. The Pres. tense of xp^» Se?, irposriKei, koXus ex"» etc., is used of 
things which can yet take place. Comp. jtossum commemorare, which implies 
that I still can do the act, and poteram commemorare, which implies that I 
cannot do it. 

Rem. 6. "Av is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. 
of an historical tense of the verb KivSuvvftv, to be in dangtr, to seem, - 
the verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected win, ,,, 
did not take place ; for what is only in danger of occurring, actuaUif does not 
occur. Th. 3, 74. t) Tr6\is i k iv5vy€v<r e vaaa Sia<p'J ' " " - '-.(to 

T^ (pKoyl iiriipopos is avrriv, the w/iole citiJ was or ,.j^r 

ojf destruction, if Acschin. c. Ctcs. 515, R. ei /xij Spofitp fi6\is (^«puyoufy fis 
A€\(povs, iKivSvyevaafJiev aTro\4(r^ou. So if in the apodosis, 6\iyoyy 
fiiKpov, rdxct, nearly, almost, arc joined with the Ind. of a historical tense 
in the concluding clause ; for what only nearly takes place, actually docs 
not take place, hence the Ind. without dv is appropriate in both these* cases. 
Plat. Synip. p. 198, C e7a>7e ivbvfxovfieyos, on airrhs ovx oI6s t' (ffo^uu ou5' ^yyvs 
rovTcov ovSfV KoXbu flTTcTv, vTT^ oj.ax'^t^s oXlyov air o5 pas V X * M *? »'> f'^ '"7 **X<"'» 
I had almost fled for sluime, if Without a protasis, e. g. X, Cy. 1. 4, 8. ireu rtts 
SiaTrr}5wv auTuy 6 'linros irlirTd eh yovara, Kol fitKpov KOKfTyoy 4^fT pax'h ^ ^' 
(Tf y. Comp. the Lat. prope {jxiene) cecidi, 1 came near fallinrj. 

(p) To denote that an action takes place (i> ixj»euicd), in 
certain cases, and under certain circumstances. The his- 
torical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the 
Impf. The condition under wliich the action is repeated, 
is expressed by a subordinate clause with et, ore, etc. and 
the Opt. ; the condition, however, is often omitted. 

ETir^y &y, he icas accustomed to say, he tcould say as often as this or that happened, 
as often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6, 13. e i S4 ris eurr^ w(pi rou 
ayTi\4yoi, iiri Ti]y vir6^eaiv iirayTjyey tiv irdyra rhy \iy0yy as o/ien as 
one conti-adicted hinu he taouM {he icas accustomed to) carry back the whole armmtefd 
to the original pwposition. 1.3, 4. ci S4ri SJ|ei€v airrf (^enKpdrei) <rriujurt<r- 



-^ 2G0.] MODAL ADVERB av. 



361 



S^anrap^rQv ^cQv, iirrov &;/ iirela^Tj iraph. rh arifjiaivSjJL^va iroirifrai, ?, err:. 
auihv evei^ey 65ov Aa^eli/ rjyc/iSi'a Tu(p\hv — avrl ^K^ttovtos. An. 2. 3, 11. ^X th 
avTcp SoKolv r&y irphs toVto rerayfievwy fiXuKeveiy, iiraieu &v, he xvould beat 
him. 1. 5, 2. oi uev ouoi, eVei ti$ ^kLkoi, trpoSpa^uSuTes av eaTacrav, as often as 
any one pursued t/iem, they xcould stop (tlie Plup. having- the sense of tlie Impf. 
4 255, Rem. 3). 3. 4, 22., dir6Te Se bidaxoL^v at ir\evpal tov ir\ai(riov, rh fiiffov 

3. With the Subjunctive, to represent the future conception, 
wliich the Greek expresses by the Sub. [J 2o7, 1, (a)], as co7i- 
ditiomU, and depending on circumstances. The following cases 
are to be distinguished : 

(a) The dcliheralive Subj. [^ 159, 1, (b)], takes av, though but 
seldom in direct, more frequently in indhect questions, when 
a condition is to be referred to. 

Tt itot' &K oZv Kiyw^fv; {icfiat shall tee therefore soy, if the thing is sol) 
etc, n. L. 653, c. ^7u> Tap rovro, 2) IlpoTaySpa, ouk wfirjy SiSuKrhy eJyai, aol Se 
\4yoyri oifK ^X" 8ira>j &k airiaru (i. c. fl (ru \(y€is), I knoiv not howl could 
disbelieve it, if you say so^ Prot. 319, b. *Ay S" av i]/xe7s viKUfxey, \€\v/ieyr]s tt/s 
yc^n'/pas ovx 'iiovaiv iitfiyoi, Sirov tiy (^uyoxrt v, X. An. 2. 4, 20. El de aoi fx.^ 
SoKti, (rK(if(u, 4ky (i. O. ct h.y) t6S€ <toi fjuiWoy apfCK'p. C 4. 4, 12. 

(b) Tlic Subj., whicli is • ''■ -ed in the Homeric languaf2:e instead of the 
Fut. Ind. (^ '2')'J, liem. 4), i- , utly foun<l with ay, wliich is to be explained 
iu the same manner &a with the Fut. Ind. [No. 2, (1 )]. El 5e kc fi}} Swcoaiy, iyilf 
S« K(y axrrhs cXw/iat 11. o, 137, then I myself will {icithout doubt) talce it, less 
direct than the Fut. Ovk &y roi xp«^o'MP tcl^apis, II. 7, 54. 

(c) In subordinate clauses. In tliis case, av usually stands 
with the conjunction of the subordinate clause, or combines 

with tlic conjunction and forms one word. 

t 

In this way originate idy (from el &y), irrdy (from ind 6.y), orav (from ore i.y), 
ivSray (from &w6Te Ay), irply liy, Ky^^ &y, S^i &y, ov &y, ottov &y, oT 6.v, oiroi &y, § 

&y, Sttjj 6.y, S^ty 6.y, 6v6^€y &,- Ctc , ts &y (v ■ '^ or si quis),olo5 &y, Sirolos &y, 

5<ros h>, dnoaos &y, ctc. In all these cxji -^, a possible assumption is de- 

noted ; it is assumed that something: is possible in the future ; the future occur- 
rence of it depends upon the assumption of the speaker, i. e. the speaker 
a.<ssumcs and expects that it will be, e. g. iay tovto \iyris, if you say, shall say 
this (viz. according to my assumption, or as I expect you will), afiapTiio-r], you 
>rill he wrong. 

(4) With the Opt., but not Avith the Opt Fut. 
(a) The Opt. with tkv must always be considered as the principal clause of a 
couditional sentence, even if the condition is omitted, e. g. el n exois, Sotrjs ^j/, 

31 



'M\2 SYNTAX. \S 260, 

if you had anything, you would give it (you may perhaps have something, and 
thm you may give it to me). The Attic writers in particular, use this mode 
of expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of 
anything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation 
and modesty. A negation is here expressed by ov{k). Her, 3, 82. kvtpibs kvhs, 
rod apicTOv (i. e. €t Hpurros etr]) oi/dev ifieivov hv (pay^lii, nothing vmvdd seem 
better than. 7, 184. &v5pes tuv elev iv avrolcri reaaepfs fxvpidSfs koI ftKoai^ thf.re 
11.' ly have been two hundred and forty thousand men. 5, 9. yevo iro S' hu irai/ iv 
T<S fiaKptp xP^^Vi ^^^ might happen. X. Cy. 1, 2, 11. hripuvns ovk h.v apiar^i- 
aaieu, while hunting they tvould not breakfast = tfiey do not breakfast. 13. 
cVctSai/ TO TrefTe koI (Xko<tiv cttj StaTeAeVaxTtc, fXriaav )U€V tiv ovroi Tr\e76y t« 
yeyovdres rj Tr€UTr)KovTa err) airh yeveas. PI. Gorg. 502, d. Arfjxriyopla iLpa rls 
icrriy T] TTOLTjTiK'f). Call, ^aiyercu. Socr. Ovkovv rj ^rfTopiKT} Sr]firiyopla hv tiff. 
By the Opt. with tiv, Homer [§ 339, 3, (a) (/3)] and Herodotus often denote a 
supposition respecting something that is past. Her. 9, 71. toDto fity koI <p^6ya> 
tiu € tiro ley, they might havp said these things from envy. 1, 2. eiritray S" h* 
oZroi KprjTes, these might have been Cretans. 

Rem. 7. If the Opt. is used without 6.V, as § 259, 3, (a), the action is ex- 
pressed with greater emphasis and definiteness, since the s[>eaker has no refer- 
ence to the conditioning circumstances, which mi_' ')f 
the thing conceived. Comp. ^eta ^^6$ y 4^f\wi ^ «, 
the propitious deity, I think, can save, Od. 7, 231, and aauxrat iy^ COCLD, 
MIGHT save, if he wished. Hence the omission of &y in the freer 1::" ■" ■ ' ■ of 
poetry, is far more frequent than in prose, which has more regard to ..A 
relation of the things described. 

Qi) So also the Opt. is used with av, as a more modest and 
mild expression of a command or request, since the thing de- 
sired is represented as dependent on the will of the person 
addressed and is thereby made conditional. Here also a nega- 
tion is expressed by ov{k). 

PI. Phaedr. 227, c. \(yois &y instead of \(ye (properly, you may speaL, ifym 
choose). Tim. 19, o. clkovoit i?v IjSr) to ficrh ravra irtpl rris ToXtTtlaSy you 
might hear then, instead of hear then. S. El. 1491. x^po'^ ^» yo" might go. IL 
j8, 250. with a degree of irony, Qfpclr' — Jfcxfo — .' ov ykp iyu ado ^/xl x^P**^ 
repoy fiporhy &Woy e/xfifyai — * T(j5 ovk hy fiouriXrjas aya ar6fi tx»^ iyopfv- 
ois, Kai (reply oyelSed re it po<p e poiSy ydcrroy re <f>v\d<r(ro is! instead of ^^J 
ay6peve, etc., you should not harangue, nor be heaping up reproaches, etc. In the form 
of a question, X. Hier. 1, 1. ap" &y fioi 4^€\-fi(raiSy 2 'Upctp^ 5iirr6<rcurdeu, h 
uKhs fldevou (re fi4\Tioy i/xov ; icould you be inclined, viz., if I should ask yow. With 
oy in the form of a question, H. e, 456. ov k hy 5)j tovS* &v5pa fidxris ipinrai* 
IJ.eT€\^(ay ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. 
In a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, J\. w, 263. ovk 4* 8^ 
fioi a/j-a^av i(f>oir\l(r(T aire rdxi<rTa, ravrd r€ trdyr drt^fiTf^ tra xp^fftt- 
/16V 6So7o ; uH)uId you not get ready the chariot, if I commanded it ? 



^ 260.] MODAL ADVERB av. 



363 



(c) The Optative with av has the same force in interrogative 
as in other sentences, and may commonly be translated by the 
auxiliaries can, could, icould. 

n. «, 367. ef Ti'r <re iSoito . . , riy %.v 5^ rot v6os ctrj; how xvould you then feelJ 
II. T, 90. oAAa tI k€v ^ e | o t ^ i ; what could I do? S. Ph. 1393. ri Srjr hy Tj/xeTs 
Spwfify; Dem. Phil. 1, p. 43, 10. XcyeTai ti Kaiv6v\ yevoiTO yhp&vri Kaivd- 
rtpoy, fi MeoceSwj/ ayjjp 'A^vadovs KaTairoXe^iuv ,- can there be any siranger news 
than — ? 

Rem. 8. Comp. iroT ns <p(vy€i ,- whither does one flee ? Arist. Plut. 438. tto? 
Tis <^iryoj ; whither mai/ one flee ? (more definite than with &u). Eur. Or. 598. 
iro7 Tis 6.V <pvyoi; whither would one flee ? whither could one flee? where in the. 
world could lie flee ? S. Aj. 403. xo? ris olv (pvyri ; whither shall one flee or is one 
to flee f 

(d) The Dramatists, particularly, often express a wish, in the 
form of a question, by Trois and the Optative with av, it being 
asked how something 7?iight, could, icould take place under a 
given condition. 

Soph. Aj. 338. jD Zfil, — irtDj hy rhv cufivKuTarov . . oXeacras T€\os ^dyoifxi 
Ka\n6s: how might, cmdJ, would I die? instead of, tliat I might die! Eur. Ale. 
8G7. irws hy 6\oifiriy; PI. Eutliyd. 275, c. irus h.y koXws aoi Sirjyna-al' 
fi-qy ; how can I appropriatdy describe to you f that I could ! 

Rkm. 9. But tl " 'f, as the expression of a wish, does not take 

the runditionin^' :i _ .3,(b)]. U. (, 281 . Sis k4 oi ai^i yala x'^'^oi 

is not properly ex as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus (&s = 

ovTws) the earth shomi, iw ,i open fl)r him. 

(5) The Inf and Part, take av (kc), when the finite verb, which 
stands instead of the Lif and Part., would take it : 

(n) The Inf. with &y after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently tlie Inf. 
Pres. and Aor. witli Sw, instead of the Ind. Prcs. and Aor. with &y, or instead of 
the Opt. Impf. and Aor. with Hlv in direct discourse; the same principle holds 
when the Inf is used as a substantive. The Inf. Per/, with &y instead of the 
Ind. and Opt. Plup. with &.y, is more seldom. The Inf. Fut. with fiv is rare in 
Attic; instead of it the Inf Aor. or even the Pres. with 6.v is commonly used. 

E? Tl «Txei', tipn^, 8o Oy at 6.y ( Oratio recta : d ri elxov, eSwKa &v), he said^that 
if he had anything, he would have given it, dixit, se, si quid habuisset, daturumfuisse. 
Ef ri ^xot, t(p7), hovyou 6.y {Or. recta : tin cx<"i"'> ^oo/j/ i.y), dixit, se, si quid haberet, 
daturum, esse. '£70; loKu^fKaKistiv Kara riis yris KaraSuvai r'lSioy, ^ 6(p^^- 
yai ovru TatrfiySs, X. Cy. 5. 5, 9 (Or. recta: SeKaKis ty airo^Avoiixi 7]^iov, ij 
6<p^fl-ny), methinks I would rather sink ten times beneath the ewth, than to be seen in 
this humble condition. 'Hyoufxai . . ouk hv aKpirovs avrovs aiT(a\o\4vai, aKXh 
r^y trpos-i\KOV(Tay Slia]y SeS w k eyai, JjVS. 27. 8 {Or. recta : ovk tiv airoXciXe- 
<ray — 4i(Sw Keaay &y). Ol/xat ykp oifK tiy axapi(TTws fJLOi e^eiy, I think you 
would not be untlianJcful to me, if I entreated the king, etc., ( Or. recta : ovk hv dx«- 



364 SYNTAX. [* 261 

piaroos fxoi exoire or (rxolff'^i 1*1* not cjotre, see No. 4). "Oau ykp neiCm 
SivafjLiv ex" 7) apx'hi Toaovra fxaXKov h.v riy{](TaTo avrrjv /col Karair\-f)^€iif roi/s 
iroX/ras, R, L. 8, 3. Uois exets ■Jrpbs t^ i^4\fiv tiv Uvai &K\rjros iirl SeTxvov; 
(the same as TTois ex^is vphs rovro Sn i^eKois tiy Uvai 6.k\tjtos iirl Sf7vyoy',) 
Pi. Symp. 174, b. Et ovu \eyoi.fjLi, eZ ol5', '6ti 5T)^i7]y op fTy &v /xe <pcu7jSj PI 
R. 350, e. 

Rem. 10. In Latin the conditioned Inf. is expressed as follows : 

ypdcjieiv &y = scriptitrum esse, yeypaxpevai &v = scriptiirum /uisse, 
ypdxpai dv = (a) scripturum fuisse, or (b) as Pres., scripturum esse, 
ypaxpeiu &v = scripturum fore. 

(b) The Participle with &u after verba sentiendi, or when the Participle takes 
the place of an adverbial subordinate clause. The same principles hold here 
fts with the Inf. The Fiit. Part, with 6.y is rare in Attic Greek (the reading is 
commonly doubtful when it occurs) : instead of the Fut. Part., the Aor. or 
even the Pres. with &y, is generally used. 

Her. 7, 15. evpia-Kw 5c uSe ii,y yiv6fifya ravra, d \d0ois t)jv ifi}]v aKfirfiw 
(reperio, sic haec futura esse, si swnas vestes irieas). X. C 2. 2, 3. at voActs 
^Tri To7s fxiyiffTois aSiK-fifiaat ^T)piiay ^dyarov trfTroiriKoariy, ws ovk h.y fifl^oyos kcucov 
^6$cp T^y a^iKiay nav a oyr € s (existimantes se non gravioris mali metu injuriam 
COERCITUROS FORE, thinking that they could deter from crime by the fear of no 
greater evil). Th. 6,38. ovre Syra, oCrf h.y yfy6ficva Xoyoiroiovira _i. e. & 
o{jT€ icTiy, oirr &i/ y 4 y o n Oy they fabricate what neither is nor tcill be). Isocr. 
Phil. 133. "Ev "(ff^i fiTiSfy &y ^€ rovruy iirix^tp'h'J' o-vr d ere xd^eiy^ el SvyaOT' 
relay ix6voy koL irKouroy ku>puv e^ ainwy yeyr]a6p.fyoy (= Sri iir ex^'^PV^ "'■ i»')> 
PI. Phil. 52, C. StajceKpifie^a X^P^^ ''^^■^ '''^ Ko^apas T}hoyas fco] r^r ax^^^" ojta&dp' 
Tovs op^cos hy A6X'^<^o"«y(= Kol ai (rxf5i>v ajcddofnoi op^ois hy A«X'^«***')« 
So, also, with the case absolute : X. An. 5. 2, 8. 4<rKoirf7To, T6r«poy efTj Kpitrrov 
^irdyeiy Kol robs Sia$e&r)K6Ta5y ^ Kal tovs 6ir\iTas iiafii^d^ay, us k\6yTos kw 
70V xf^p^ov (= vofil^uyy Sti rh x^P^oy aKoir} 6,y). 



§ 261. Position ajid Repetition of av. "Av without a 

Verb. 

1. With the combination mentioned in 260. (3). c, as %s iv, icpiv iy, small 
particles like 5e', re, fieV, ydp, sometimes come between, e. g. ts 5" iy. 

2. As 6.y represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined 
with the predicate, e. g. \4yoifii Hy, e\eyoy &y ; yet it commonly follows that 
member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PI. Crito. 53, c. 
Kcd OVK otei &(T XV 1^0*' &'' <pave7(Tbcu rh tov 'S.cDKpdrovs trpaypuOL. Hcncc it IS 
regularly joined to such words also as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to 
negative adverbs and interrogatives, e. g. ovk &y, ov^ iv, ofVor* S*-, ov^iwvr ir, 
etc. — rls dv, ri &y, rl 5* &v, ri StJt' &y, xcDs &y, vcis yap if, op' Aj', etc.; — also 
to adverbs of place, time, manner, and other adverbs, which, in various ways 
modify the expression contained in the predicate and define it more exactly, 



♦ 262.] ATTRIBUTIVE CONSTRUCTION. 365 

e. g. iyrad^a 6v, t6t Si/, €iK6Tu>s &v, 'Caws &v, ri^ &v, fidXiar &v, ^Kiar' &v, fi6\is 
&y, axo^V ^"j ^<f5«a>y &v, {)a<TT &y, toxio-t' &u, <r<p6Sp &y, 7j54ws &v, k&v (instead 
of Kcd 6.y, etiam, vd), etc. 

Remark 1. In certain constructions, the Sv belonging to the Opt. is re- 
moved from the dependent clause, and joined with the principal clause • this 
is particularly the case in the phrase, ovk oJS' &;/ cl. PI, Tim. 26, b. 4y^ ydp, 
ft fify x^*^ iJKOuaa, ovk h.u o/5a el ^vvaifi-qv arravra eV fiyT]iJLr} ird\ii/ Aoj8€?j'. 

Re3I. 2. In certain parenthetic sentences, the &y belonging to the Opt. is 
placed first: thus particularly, &y tis eXiroi, (pairj. PL Phaed. 87, a. ri oiu {,) htf 
<j>alri 6 \6yos ( , ) tri airi<rT(7s ; 

3. "Av is very often repeated in the same sentence {k4 very seldom). The 
reason of this is two-fold : 

(a) It is used o»ce at the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in 
the outlet, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case, 
when the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, or 
when several words precede the conditioned verb to which &if belongs. &st* 
lipf €1 ffbfyos Xdfioifu SijXw tratfi* &v of* a\rro7s tppovSi, S. El. 333. 

(b) The second reason is a rhetorical one. "hv is joined with the word 
which requires to be made emphatic. If the rhetorical emphasis belongs to 
several words in one sentence, iv can be repeated with each. Byt besides this, 
Av can be again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs. 
PI. Apol. 35, d. ffa^ijiis y^p iy, ci trtl^oifit v/jms, ^fovs tiy SiSacr/cot/ti fi^ 
ffyfla^au vnas tlycu. Eur. T road. 1244. iL.<f>aye7s &v ovres ovk h-y vfiyrj^eTfiep 
fty Movcats. 

Rem. 3. Homer sometimes joins the weaker k€ with &v, in order to make 
the conditionality or contingcnt-y still more prominent. II. v, 127, sq. iVrovro 
^dXxryyts . . , fts oCt' &y k<v "Aprfs ov6aanro fi(T(\^a)y, othe k 'A^yairj. 

4. "Ay is ver}' frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a 
Tcrb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; thus especially 
its iy, S)sir«p iy «», xis yap &.y, vus 5* ovk &y, Ssirep 6.V and the 
like. ^o0ovfx€yos, Stsirfp h.y d vols (i. e. wjirtp ty (pofioiTO, d TTa7s elfTj), PL 
Gorg. 479, a. 



CHAPTER n. 
§262. The Attributive Construction. 

Attributives sen^e to explain more definitely the idea 
contained in the substantive to which they belong, e. g. 
TO Ka\6v pohov, 6 fjLeya<; iral^. The attributive may be; 

a. An adjective or participle, e. g. to Ka\ov poSov, to 

^ dWov dv^o<i ; 

31* 



366 SYNTAX. [§ 263 

b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol rod BivSpov 
KapiTOi ; 

c. A substantive with a preposition, e. g. rj tt po<: rrjp 
TToXcv o3o9 ; 

d. An adverb, e. g. ol vvv av^pwiroi ; 

e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kpo^o?, 6 ySacrtXeu?. 



k 263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to which the 
Attributive belongs. 

When the substantive which is to be mow fully explained by the attribntiTe, 
contains a general idea, or one which can be easily supplied from the context, 
or is indicated by some word of the sentence, or, by frequent usage in a particu- 
lar connection, may be supposed to be known, then the substantive, as the 
less important member in the attributive relation, is often omitted, and the 
adjective or participle becomes a substantive. Substantives which are often 
omitted with attributive adjectives, are : if^ponrosy Hv^pwirot, ayiip, iyBp^s, *yw^, 
yvya7K€S, xpVI^O'i XP^P-''-'^°-> '"'P'^yfJUi, irpdyfiara, VfifpoL, yrj, X'^P<*i f^^P<h i3<Jj, X^^P* 
yvd/xT], \pti(pos, rix^'Hi irSKe^ios, etc. ; those omitted with the attributive genitive are : 
irariipy firjTrip, vlos, ira7s, bvyoLTfjp, adf\<p6s, airfjp (husfxtnd), yvtrfi (wife), oikio, 
oIkos, x'^poj yv (/««t/)- The substantive is omitted with the following classes 
of words : 

a. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle. 

(a) Such as denote persons : ol ^yr}Tol, mortahs; ol ao<poly ol yfiydfiefoi (instead 
of youeTs) : ol exoi^es, the ricJi ; ol (pvKaTTovres {(pvKoKes) ; ol Swca^'oKTes, judjes : 
ol Keyoi^Tfs, orators, etc. 

{)8) Such as denote namesof things : (a) appellatives : rh ijfi4repa (,xM/'"W«)« **• 
nostrae; to. ijxa., res meae, evenjthing tchich relates to me ; ra KoXd, res puJchrae ; rk 
KaKd, mala (§ 243, 4), t) varepaia, f] iiriovaa, r] irpdrrr), Sfvrepa, etc. {r}fjifpa) : ij 
iroXcfila {x(*>pa), the enemy^s country ; rj <pi\ia, a friendly country; ^ oiKovfxfvri (y^), 
the inhabited earth ; rj AvvSpos {yv)i o. desert ; tj fv^fTa {6S6s) ; r^y raxl<rrj]r, qwim 
celerrime; r^v'(<r7]v (noTpav) airoSiSovou ] -f] ireirpconfini {fio7pa); rj Se^to, ^ apurrfpd 
ix^^p)'i V viKuxra {yvwur}) : t^v eVarr/oJ/ (\l/ri(pov) rl^fcr^ou] t) ^rjTopiicrt (rfx*^)- 

(b) Abstracts: rh KaX6v, rh aya^6v, or Taya^6v, the htautiful, Oie good; rh 
cvTvx^Si good fortune ; rh avaia^rovy want of feeling ; rh Kow6y^jhe commoi- 
tcealth (e. g. ra>v 'S.afiluv) ; rb ^apcovv, confidence. 

(c) Collective nouns denoting persons: tJ> ivavrioy, th(: twinj : to i-ittjvooj', 
the subjects. Adjectives in - ik6v especially belong here, e. g. rh iroKtrtKovy tht 
citizens: rh 6irKiTiK6y, the heavy armed; rh oiKfriKSy^ the servants; rh 'LXXriyixSy, 
rh ^ap^apiK6v, rh lTnriK6vy etc. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often 
used to denote a number, collection, or scries of single events, e. g. ra Tpviud.^ 
the Trojanioar ; ra 'EAAtji/z/co, the Grecian history: rk vavriKa. uand n\jr. but iil?o 
naval ajfairs. 



k 264..] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 357 

b. The attributive genitive also is used without the governing substantive, 
e. g. 'AAe|av5pos, 6 *i\iTnrov {vl6s), Mo7a rj "ArXavTos {^vydTrjp) ; then with the 
prepositions eV, ets and e'/c with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, e. o- 
4v qfSou {oUa) elvai; ets aSou (oIkov) eA^eTj/ ; ejs SiSao-JcaAwv (poirav, to go to the 
Vacher's ; els nxdravos (ponau, ireinretu, to go or send to Plato's ; ck Si5aaKd?.cov 
6.iraXXdTTicbau^ PI. Protag. 326, c. to leave school; fh rjjy Kvpov (yriv) eA,^eu'; 
rk rris Tvxvs, the events offoiiune; ra ttjs Tr6\€us, the affairs of state ; to. rod 
voKffiov^ the wfiole extent of the war ; to. 'A^vaitav <ppoveiv, ah Athenitnsium par- 
tibus stare; rk t^j offyrjs, rii rris ifnreiplas, rh twv im^v/uLiuy (that which pertains 
to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.) ; rh ruv Trai5(oy,the custom ofboijs; 
rh Twu aXieuv, 

c. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e.g. ol vvv, ol totc. oi 
ndXcu, oi ivbdSf (iybpunroi), ra oHkoi [irpdyixaTa), res domesticae, t] e^rjs, {rj/xepa), 
the following day, etc. 

d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition 
jy which it is governed, e. g. ol ko^' vfmi, ol i<p'ijuwy, our contemporaries ; — ol 
i.fi(pi or irepi riva^ c. g. TlKaruya, signifies (a) a person with his companions, 
followers, or scholars ; ol a/xtpl TleKTiaTparov., Pisistratus and his t'oops ; ol afi<pl 
©oA^v, Tholes and other philosophers of his school ; '^Apa Key f is r^v rS>v biav 
Kpicrtv, V ol irepl Ke k porra Si' apfrrjv iKpivav, which Cecrops and his tribunal 
on account of their excdUnrf, dtcidul, X. C 3. 5, 10. — (b) more seldom the com- 
panions, followers, or scholars alone, without the person named. — Further, ot 
cvv Tjvi, ol furd rivost '^« followers, etc. of any one ; ol inrS rii/i, the subjects of 
any one ; ol airo riyos, asseclae, or disceiuiants of one ; ol eV iiiTTei ; ot TrepX (piXoao- 
<plav ; ol Xfpl T^i> drtpay; ol a.fi<pl rhy v6\efioVf etc.; — to vapd tivos, intelligence 
resjyecting any une, or commands of any one ; — rh kot* ipLe, rh eV e'/ie, as far as in 
my jxiwer, as far as in me lies. 

k 264. a. Attnbutive Adjective. 

1. The attribiitiv*e adjective (participle, adjective pronoun 
and numeral), expresses a quality wliich belongs to an object, 
as the beautiful and blooming rose On the agreement of the 
adjective with the word which it defines, see k 240. 

Kemark 1. The participles A€7(Jjuevor and KcLKovfievos SlTQ used, where the 
Latin ! / dicitur dicunt, vacant, etc., and the^ English the 

phrax /. as it i> d, etc., e. g. AaxeSaifiSyioi rhv iephv KaKov- 

fifvot' TToKffiov iarpdrevaav ( tlit Sacred urn; as it is colled, or the so-called Sacred 
war), Th. 1, 11 i>. S/coTTwv, Hirws 6 KaKovfievos vrrh ruv (ro(pi(TTWv K6afios ecj^v 
{the Koa fLos as it is ctdlcd by the sophists), X. C. 1. 1, 11. 

Ri;.M. 2. It has already been stated (§ 245, Rem. 5), that the adjectiv >s 
&Kpos, fifo-os, iaxaros, must in certain cases be translated into English })y 
substanti>-es. 

Rem. 3. Maty personal nouns which denote an emplojTnent, station or 
«ge, are treated as adjectives, and tlie word aui\p is joined with them, it tJ.e 
man is to be considered in relation to his employment, station or age ; bat 



< 



itrr, 



.juo SYNTAX. [^ 261. 

the word av^p is omitted, if the man is considered as merely performing 
the duties of a pai'ticular office or employment. Thus avrjp fidm-is signifies a 
man who is by profession a prophet, and fxavris without iyrip, a man who, for 
the time being, acts as a prophet ; thus av/jp 0a<Ti\evs, av7)p rvpawos, ayrjp iroi- 
p.^u, avrjp pr]T(ap, avr)p Trpeafivrrjs, av'op veav'ias, ypavs yuuri, etc. ; also in the 
respectful form of address among the Attic orators and historians, e. g. i^Spfs 
Si/coo-rai, &udpes arpaTiarai. So likewise with national names, e. g. avrip 'Adrj- 
va7os, 'AfiSrjpLTrjs. Tliis usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger 
Grammar, Part II. § 477. 

2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub- 
stantive, the relation is two-fold. The relation is : (a) coordhiate, 
when each adjective is equally a more full explanation of the 
substantive ; then the adjectives are commonly connected by 
Kttt, re — Kttt; where there are several adjectives, the con- 
nective is used only before the last ; (b) subordinate , when a 
substantive with one of the adjectives forms, as it were, a 
single idea, and is more defhiitely defined by another adjective. 
Li this case there is no connective between the two adjec- 
tives. The su])ordinate relation occurs particularly when pro- 
nouns, uumerals, adjectives of time, place, and material are 
joined with other adjectives. 

2a)K;f-«T77S o.ya^})s KoiX aocphs ai/i]p ^u. HoWol aya^ol iifSpes or iroWol 
aya^o\ Koi (Totpol &ySpes. lloWa KoKa tpya. 'O 4 fihs krcupos co^s. 
OvTc: 6 ai>T]p ayab6s. TpeTy a7ad^ot 6.v5pfs. Th 7tpa>rov koX^v irpayfuu 
Od. I, 322, sq. Icrrhs vr)hs ieiKoaSpoio /xe \aiyT}s. 

iEEM. 4. The numeral iroWol is used in Greek, like multi in 
generally in the coordinate relation, and in this way the idea of plu:.. ... 
made emphatic, while the Erf^lish commonly uses the sul)Oi-dinate. e. g. woWk 
Koi Ka\a fpya, nitilta et praeclura facinora. The Greek and Latin is many and 
noble deeds, the English commonly many noble deeds. 

Rem. 5. In the Greek, the attributive adjective ven' frequently takes the 

force of a substantive, and the suhv;tantivc to which the adjective properlv 
belongs, is put in the attributive genitive. Here the followiug ca:ses are to 
" be distinguished : 

a. The substantive stands with the plm-al adjective which takes ' lei 

**^ of the substantive, e. g. oi xP'n<TTo\ rSiv ai/bpwwwi/ : to. crvovSaua ruif ir. , 

* b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut, 
Sing., sometimes also in the Xcut. PI. Th. 1. 118, oi 'A^valot M /itya 
ix^pfiffo-v Svi/dfiecos (= eVl jx^yaK-qv hvvapnv)^ had attained a hiqk deqref. of 
poicer. Thus many phrases with Trav, e. g. fls iray kukov {in 
ailamitntis) a<piKU€7a-^ai\ iv ivavrX KaKov clvai; exs vav irpofK-fiKv^e u 
JMoreover, tlie Neut. pronoun is very frequently joined with the -c- 

cially in prose. Th. 1, 49. ^wfTrcarov es toOto aydyK-qSy tu ... ur' 

necessity. X. An. 1. 7, 5. eV toiovtu} tov kivSvvqv. Uem. Ph. 1,51. tls 
Tov^' i/jSpecos i\.-(]\v^€y. 

e. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sing, which 
takes the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in the 



/ 



f 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 369 

Neut., e. g. ri xoWri r^s IleAoirovj/^o-ou instead of rh iroAu rrjs IT. The word 
l^UKTvs is most frequently used in this manner, often also woXvs, vK^luv 
irKeiaros and other superlatives, e. g. 6 ^/xiavs tov xp6vov;iTrl ry 7,ixi(reici 
Trjs yrjs. X. Cy. 4. 5, 1. irf/iirere tov ffhov rhv ^fiicvv, ruv '&pT(ou tovs 
rifiiafis. Th. 7, 3. rrjy irKelarrtiv rris (TTparias ira/)eTo|e : so -rroW^ t^j 
Xu>paSy Thy irKeTcrrov tov xP^vov. Th. 1, 2. ttis yns t} ap I ^tti oei rhs fi-CTa- 
fioKas Twy oliajTSpuv elx**'* 

3. The Greek, like the Latin, frequently uses the attributive '2^ 
adjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only 
in reference to the predicate. In this way the designations 
of place, time, number, also a reason, condition, and manner 
can be expressed by adjjectives, which agree with a substan- 
tive in gender, number, and case. 

a. Adjectives of place and order. Od. 0, 146. f^e nvxoiTaTos aUl in- 
stead of iy nvxoiTdT(f>. Also, irpwros^ irpdTfpos (of two), vototoj, vcrTepos (of 
two), fifffos, TfKfirrtuos, w\dyios, ^fTfupos, &KpoSy ^vpa7os, ^a\d(Tarios, etc. S 
Ant. 785. <poiTas vir(pir6yT los instead of wircp Thy irSyToy. Th. 1, 134 tve 
fi^ viraidpios ToKaiirwpolrjj that he might not suffer in the open air. Here belong 
also wor, fKaffToSf iKdrtpos, &iJ.<f>w, in<p6T€poSf etc. ^ 246, 5, 6 and 7. 

b. Adjectives of time, e. g. o\^ios, tp^pios^ fco^iy6s^ kairtpios^ yvx^os, fifffoyvKTtos, 
^(piy6s, X'^'C^y* ^ap^y^s^ X*'/**?'"*^** ctc, especially those in -a? o s, e. g. SeuTepoTos, 
rpiToios, etc., xp^*'^of {({ft^'' o, long time), etc. II. a, 497. ijeplti 5' aye^Tj fxeyay 
ovpav6y instead of ^pi, she icent early. X. An. 4. 1, 5. itkot lalovs SieX^^ly 
rh -KfSloy, to pass through the }>Iain in the dark. TtTapTalos, irffxirTaTos a(pl- 
K«To, he came on the fourtJi, Jiflh day ; xp^vtos -ffT^iy, after a long time. 

c. Adjectives of manner and other relations, e. g. o^vs, Tax^s, at<pviSios, 
PpaSvs, inr6(nroyios, iairoyioSy SpKios ; iKuy, id€\ovffio5f &k(dv, 6.okvos, i^eXoyT-fis 
fl<rvxos] trvxy^^t xoAuj, i^p6oSt trvKySs, ardyios, n6yoSj e. g. 6ir6<Tiroy5o i aTrps- 
aay = tnrh airoyScus, they wend away wider a truce. Th. 1, 63. Tohs yeKpovs 
viro<rir6y?iovs dirt'Socrcu' to7s TloTiSaudTais, they gave up the dead under the truce. 

\> 

Rem. 6. But when the qualifying words cannot at the same time express 

a quality of the subject or object, but belong solely to the predicate, the 
adverb must be u- ' Ka\ws dfSety, you sing beautifully {not Kohhs Aieis, 

for the person who - autifuUy, is not necessarily beautiful). When the 

Greeks expressed such designations of place and time, as properly belong to the 
predicate, by adjectives, it is to be explained as resulting from their vivid mode 
of conception. For example, kairfpios ijA^e, vespertinus venit, he came (as it 
were) enveloped by the evening. 

Rem. 7. The distinction between irpu>Tos {irp6T€pos, va-Tepos, ixxTa- 
Toy), irpdiT-qy (irporepav, vtrrfpav, uo" t<£t7J v), and irpwroy {irp6Te- 
poy. voTTfpoy, vffTaToy or SffTora), ti6vo5, jx^yvv and fiSvovT^y 
^xjo-toAV ^7P«ii'«5 appears when the sentence is analyzed; irpwTos, fj.6vos 
mean, / am the Jirst, the last, the only one of all who has written this letter, like 
PRI M us scripsi ; ir p do Trjy, vaTdTrjy, fi6yt\v Tijy iiruTToK^y eypaypa, this letter 
UYijs the jirst, the last, the only one I have uritten; the adverbs irpwTov, irpoT^pov^ 
etc., on the contrary, are used in stating several actions of the same subject, in 
tiie order in which they occurred, e. g. 'O iroTs irpwToy fih T^y imaToK'^f 



/ 



370 SYNTAX. [H 2G5, 266 

l^ypa^ev^ eTTeffo eirottre*', vCTara Sh a-rr-pei] or irpwrov, Saratov, for the 
first, last time; so the adverb ^lovov places the predicate in opposition to 
another predicate, ii6vov eypa^l/a rrjv t-Ki<TroKi]v, I liave only imtten the UtUXt 
(not sent it). 



\ 265. Attributive Genitive. 

The attributive genitive will be considered in treating the 
genitive, k 275, Rem. 5. 

k 266, c. Apposition. 

• 

1. A substantive is said to be in apposition, when it is put 
in the same Case with another substantive or with a substan- 
tive personal pronoun, and even ^vith a personal pronoun impUed 
in a verb, for the sake of defining these words more fully ; if 
the appositive denotes a person, it is also put in the same gen- 
der and number, as the word wliich it defines, comp. ^240, 1. 
An appositive referring to two or more substantives is put in 
the phiral, when it is a common noun. 

Kvpos, 6 $acri\(vs. T6/j.vpis, ri fia<Ti\fia. 'tiKflvos, & $aa i\fv s. X. Cy 
5.2, 7. T^u ^vyardpa, Seiuov ri kclKKos kcu fify (bo s, 4^dywy wSf clxtv. Th. 
1, 1.37. Q€iJ.i<TTOK\rjs ifiKw irapa ae, I, Tliemistodes, have come. Luc D. D. 
24,2. 6 Se Maias r^s ^PltXcu/tos Siuk ov ovfiai airrols (instead of iyit 6 
Malas so. vi6s). 

2. When a substantive is in apposition with a possessive 
pronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive pronouns 
take the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns. 

'E/Ltbs (= iixov) rod ab\lov ^ios, the life of me, icrctched, eu^Aiou being here in 
opposition with iiji6s. Ta/xa (= to ifj.d) rov Sv<rrrtyov Kojcdy the evils of ww-, xm- 
happy one! 2)/ rr^s KaWia-rrjs fvfioptpla, thy gracefulness, most beavttftd one! 
In English, as the examples show, such a Gen. with the possessive may be 
often expressed by an exclamation, e. g. 'EAea/pcu rhy chy rov abxlov $loPj 1 
pity thy life, wretched one ! or by an accessary clause, e. g. I pity thy life, thou who 
art so miserable. So too the Gen. is put in apposition with adjectives which stand 
in the place of the attributive Gen. PI. Ap. 29, d. *Ab-nwaios iip w6X(ts 
ryjs ficyiffrrjs (instead of 'A^yuv, iroXews), ■v6\(qis being here in apposi- 
tion with 'A^va7os which is equivalent to 'AbTjvuv. On the expressions 6 
77/LieT6pos, vfi^Tcpos, c<p4r€pos aiirwy vari]p, see the remarks on the pronoaiu. 

Remark 1. On the ellipsis of the words vlos, xoTy, bvydrripj yvvi}, etc. in 
apposition, see § 263 ; on the use of the article in apposition, see § 244. Rem. 6. 
In the phrases 6voiJui iarl fioi, iyo/ia ri^fd {rlbeficd) rivi and the Uke, the name 



V ^00. J APPOSITION. 372 

itself, as an appositive, is put in the same Case, e. g.''Ovofxd iari fioi 'Ayd^ap 
iii>i name is Ayathon. 'O ircus ekeyeu ovq^lu ^hcu iavrcf 'Ayd^eva. 'Eyrav^a ^i 
TTOAis fifyoKrjj uvofia 5' avr^ Kopawrv, X. An. 1. 5,4. ib. 2. 4, 13 and 25. Tou-n? 
TV ^vpotKlcf idefie^a v6\iv bvofia, PI. Rp. 369, c. (to this community ice gavc 
the name city, called it a city). "Appirhris koL 57]fjL0TiKhs iKT^,(raTo tV ^affiKiKwrd 
rrjy koI ^lOTarnp v post]y o piav, rhu AiKaiov, Pint. Ar. 2. {received thi 
surname, the Just). (The Gen. also is used in the same phrase : ^wkIwv e/cT?VoTo 
ri}v rov Xpri<rrov Trposrryopiay, Plut. Ph. 10. The Nom. also occurs. 
'Aj/r/p yevSfifvos irposel\-n(pe t^v tuv irovripuv Koiv^v iwuvvalav <rvKod>di/TV s 
Aesch. f. 1. ^ 27.) See 269, Rem. 3. 

Rem. 2. A substantive in the Nom. or Ace. sometimes stands in appositioi 
with the whole sentence ; in the Nom., when the appositive expresses a judo^- 
niriu on the w! ' itence ; in the Ace, when the appositive denotes a tliinj 
a. ronipli>]ied. .. . a purpose, or oltjcct, e. o;. Eur. Or. 496. eVei yap i^ewvcv 

<Tfu 'Aya/xffiywv /3toj/, irKtiyds ^iryarphs rrjs f/xris (caesus a filia mea) vir'kp Kapa. 
— afo-xiCTOv ipyovl II. «, 735. ^ -ris 'Axaiwj/ (avrhv) ^i\^ei xf'P^s eAco)- 
iiirh irvpyov, Kvyphv uKe^pop. Eur. Or. 11U5. "EKiiniv KTovoj/icv, Mei/eAee 
}ixnTi]v iriKpoLV (i. e. 5rr€ (Ivai Xvitriv -niKpiv). Aesch. Ag. 225. ctAtj ^vriju 
yin<T-jai i^iryaTp6s, iroXfuuy apcoydv (wjt€ flvcu apwydu). In like manner !'. 
Part, or adjective is sometimes added as a clause in apposition to a whole sen- 
tence, c. g. rie^ci {'Aw6Wwv) 'Opi<nr\v firrrtp, ^ a<p' 4ydvaT0, KTe7vai, irphi 
9VX iiravras (C K\f lav ^4pov (a deed that briiii/s no Jlime)^ Eur. Or. 3C. 
Kal 5^ ■wap(7T(u (solutum est) coffxaf <toI fifp ou <pi\oy !Suppl. 1070. 

Rkm. 3. The Inf. also ' ics used as a clause in apposition with nf 

word, especially with dt; and relative pronouns, so as to definrf 

more exactly an idea heturu exprt'ssed in a general manner. Ou yap eV; 
rovT(f) KO^TOi 6 SiKo/TT'fiSt irl Tfp /car axap^ Cc''^<z' Ta SUaia PI. Apol. 
35, c, tite judf/e docs not sit /or this, viz., for the purjHjse of compromising justice for 
fai-or. *A 8)j itporrfraxreu rij fiayTucpy iir la kott flv rovs ^Epwras Kal iar- 
ptvfiy, Symp. 1 88, c. 

>. With a substantive, expressing the idea of ^/wra/zYy, one 
substantive or even several substances denoting the parts of 
that phiraUty or whole, are ofltcn put in apposition, instead ol 
being in the Gen. according to the natural construction. This 
may be called distributive or partitive apposition. Here belong 
especially the words cKacrro?, kKortpo^y Tra? {every one), ol jx^v — 
Ol Bi, ttAAos oAAov {alius aliu?n, one this, anotJier that, one another, 
or mutually), oAXos oAAo^cv {alius aliunde, one frorti one place, 
another from another, or one on one side, another on another). The 
subject, wliich denotes the plurality or whole, may be implied in 
the verb. This kind of apposition is used when the whole is to 
be expressed with the greater emphasis, while with the Gen 
the parts are to be made more prominent. 

Od. a, 424. 59j rSrt KaxKiiotms i^av oU6vhe eKaffros {in suam quisque 

domum sese coiUulerwit, they went each one to his own house). Her. 3, 158. efiepoi 

iv -rp fwvTou Ttt^t eKaaros {in suo quisque ordine manserunt). Th. 1, 89. olKiai 

' fitv TToWal (= rwu oikiwv voWal) iTrfWTwKeaav, oXiyai Se inpirjffav. X. 

6, 1. iv rah ^LKKats ir6\fffi twv kavrod tKaffros Kal -rraiSuy Kol oUiTwy kcA 



372 SYNTAX. [§ 267. 

XP^j/Uarwz/ &pxov(r IV {sids quisque liberis imperant). Cy.3.1,3. SieSiSpatr/coii 
^577 iKacTTOS iirl to, eavTov, fiovKofx^voL ra outu eKirodwy iroii^abai. C. 2. 7, 1. 
rhs air pi as ye toov (piXwv rhs jxhv di oryvoiav iimpaTO {XiaKpan^s) yvtjofiri 
OLKela^ai, ras Se 5i' ej/Seiov SiddaKuu Kara hvvaixiv aWiiXots i-rrapKelv. PL 
Charm. 153, 6. fcai Aie as eJSou elsiSyTa e| aTrpos5oKr]Tov, ev^us ir6ppot)^ev t] aird- 
CovTo &Wos &Wo^€v {they welcomed me one from one place, another from 
another). Still, in this case the verb sometimes agrees, not with the appropri- 
ate subject, but with the Avords 'iKacrros, iras. X. An. 1.8, 9. Ttaures ovtoi Karh 
€^yr] iu Tr\ai<riQ} wXTjpei avbpuiTwu eKaffrov %bvos iiropev ero. The parti- 
tive appositive is often accompanied by a participle. X. Cy. 3. 1,25. eyiot 
ipofiovfievoi, fx}} \7](p^eyTes airo^ducocriv , virh rod <p6^ov irpoaTro^urjcrKovo'iy, ol juey 
p nrrovvT e s eavrovs, 01 5e anayxo /J-^p 01, 01 5e airoffipaTr 6 ^lev i. 
Her. 3, 82. ahrhs eicaa'ros 13 ov\6 ixevo s Kopucpa7os eluat yvufxricri re piKcii/y 
is ex^ea jxeydXa aWiiXoiai aviKv eourai. Here belong those passages, in 
which, after the principal subject, there is another subject in the Nom. with a 
Part, connected with it ; the latter subject, however, making a part of the prin- 
cipal subject. Th. 4, 73. {ol 'A^7]va7oi) riavxo-Cov, Xoyi^ofievoi kou ot 
iKeiucou (Tt parrjyol (jl^ avriiraXov eluai (rcpicri rhv Kivhvvov, the Athenians kept 
tilence, since even their generals, namely, of the Athenians, supposed that, etc. 

Kem. 4. In the same manner in poetiy, especially in Epic, but very seldom 
in prose, two objects (commonly in the Ace.) are joined to one verb ; the first 
of these denotes the entire thing, the other, that part of it to which the action 
of the verb is particularly directed, both being in the same Case. This figure 
may be called cxvi^"- ku^' oKov Ka\ /iepos, i. e. a construction by which 
the part is put in apposition with the whole, instead of the word denoting the 
whole being in the Gen. and governed by the word denoting the part. If the 
whole expresses a plurality, a distributive apposition may take place. HolSv 
(T€ eTTos (pvyev epKos o^6vrwv, Od. a, 64, xvJiat a word escaped thee ^ thy lips! 
where ep/cos the part is in apposition with o-c, the whole. Tpwoy 5c rpofios 
alvhs vTTTjXv^e yv7a e /coct v, II. u, 44. 'Axai^oTcriv 5e /xeya cr^eyos ejj.^aX'' 
iKaara} KapSlr] &W7]ktou TroKefxi^eiv ijde fidx^o'^ai, II. |, 152, sq. 



^ 



CHAPTER in. 

§ 267. The Objective Construction. 

As the attributive construction (§ 262) serves to define 
the subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so 
the objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or 
define it more fully. By object, is to be understood here 
everything which, as it were, stands over against {objectum 
est) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com- 
plement of the predicate and defines it more fully: 



^ 268.] THE CASES. 



373 



the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini- 
tive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. 

Remark. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate 
necessarily requires an object, e. g. 'ETr^^y^w ttjj operTjs. Boixofxai ypdcbew. 
The object dejines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily 
required, e. g. Th f>6Sou au^u ev t^ K-fjiro}. The predicate is thus defined by 
the specifications of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument. 

§268. I. The Cases, 

1. All the relations, which the Greek denotes by the 
Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid- 
ered relations of space. 

2. The action of a verb, with which the substantive 
object is connected, is contemplated under the idea of 
motion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in 
a three-fold cispect : first, as that from which the action 
of the verb proceeds ; secondly, as that towards which 
the action of the verb tends ; thirdly, as that bi/ or with 
which the action of the verb takes place. In this way 
three Cases originate : the Genitive, denoting the motion 
or direction whence^ the Accusative, whither, and the Da- 
tive, where. 

3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- 
ner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) 
denotes the time from which an action is conceived as 
proceeding ; the Ace (the whither-case), the time to which, 
or over which the action is conceived as moving ; and the 
Dat. (the where-case) the time in which an action is con- 
ceived as existing. 

4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as 
relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the 
author), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action 
from an object (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the con- 
sequence), as a motion toivards an object (Accusative) ; 
the means (the instrument), as the resting of an action 
with or in an object (Dative). 

32 



374 SYNTAX. [^ 269, 270 



$ 269 Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative 

1. The Nom. and Voc, so far as they do not express objective relations 
cannot be considered as Cases ; the Nom. is the form for the subject, and the 
Voc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person 
or a thing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined 
to the subject by the copula eTyat, is expressed, as in other languages, accord 
ing to the laws of agreement, by the nominative 5 and even the objective rela 
tion of an effect or result with the verbs mentioned in § 240, 2, is viewed in the 
Greek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominatire. 

Remark 1. "With the verbs oyofid^eiv, ovond^cabou and the like, the Inf. elyot 
is often added to the Nom. or Ace, and thus in some degree the relation of 
the effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. tos oi/o/xd^ova-i ArjKioi fJyai 
'Tircpoxv^ Te nal AaoSiKrif. 5, 99. arparriyohs &Wovs air45i^i (instead of aTre- 
6ei|6) MihTjaicoi/ eluai. 

Eem. 2. On elyai, and ylyve<r^ai with an abstract word, see ^ 284, 3 (9). 

Rem. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an c" ' 
independent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in ^ 2tr 
1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1, 199. VLvXirra &k 
Ka\4ovcri tV ' A.<ppodirijv ^Aaavpioi, the Assi/rians call Aphrodite, Mylitta. 

2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Yoc. in a direc t sum- 
mons or call ; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana- 
tory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu- 
larly the following instances : 

(a) OvTos either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name, 
is oftel used when one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there ! heus tu : PL 
Symp. 172, a. & ^a\Tj pevs, c<^, ovros 'AiroA.A<J5»poy, ov rtpififyfiSy 
which means, see I this is that Apollodorus, the Phalerean, who comes there ! 

(b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi- 
tive to a call or direct address. 

PL Symp. 218, b. oi Se olKeraiy Kcd ft ris &AAos iffrl 0($r]\6s re ko} aypo7- 
Kos, Trv\as irduv fieyaKas rois uxrlv iiri^eff^f (the same as, vfieis Se, oiKrrcu ivT(s). 
X. Cy. 4. 5, 17. X^i fikv oZv (Tu, €^, 6 -trpefffivTaros (instead of «ru, hs tl »/>•)• 



^ 270. (1) Genitive. 

Tlie Gen. is the Whence-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
local relation, the object or the point from wliich the action of 
the verb proceeds, e. g. ct/cciv oSov, cedere via, to withdraw from 
the way ; (b) in a causal relation, the gi-ound, origin, or author, 
in general, the object, which calls forth, produces, excites, occa- 
sions the action of the verb, e. g. hridvfuo tt/s opcr^ (* 268); 
ap€Trj<s is here the object wliich call^ /ort/t, etc. the desire ex 
pressed by cttu^/aw. 



^ 271. J LOCAL RELATION OF THE GENITIVE. 375 

^271. A. Local Relation. 

1. The use of the Gen. expressing purely heal motion is 
rare and only poetic, e. g. Et /a^ rovSe Trcto-avres Xoyw ayoivro 
vrj(Tov {ab insula ahducerent) S. Ph. 613; this relation is com- 
monly indicated by prepositions with the Gen., e. g. airo, from, 
€K, out of, trap df from near aii object, etc. 

2. But the Gen. very often expresses the relation of separa- 
tion, namely, with verbs denoting removal, separation, loosing, 
abstaining, desisti?ig, ceasing, freeing, depriving, differing from, 
missing, deviating from. Genitive of separation. 

Prose words of this kind are : ■trapax<»p€'iv, vTrox^peTi/, eXKeiv gnd inreiK^iv, 
viravlarofr^cu and i^i<na<rbai, vo<T<pl^fiif, ;^a)p/^etj/, SLopi^eiu] acpieyai, a<pU(r^ai, 
hLTr(x.^iv, d7r€';i^€<r3ow, iravfiv, iravia^au, kwXvuv, ip-qrveii', fXpyeiv, \vetv, e\€v^epovv, 
CLiraWaTTfiy, (TTtpdy, ai rog-T fpfly artpetrbai, ;(TjpoDi/, ipr)/jiovv, Biacpfpeiv, afxapra' 
yfty, e<pa.?\X«r^ai, i|/«v5€(r3a(, etc. ; Sie'xed' and oTrexeiv, to be distant, etc. 

Her. 2, 80. oi yt^fpoi ainiuv Tolffi vpfafiirrepoKTi arvin-vyxdvovres etKOvffi 
rrjs Siov {withdraw from the way). X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. viroxo^p^'iv toG ttc 
8»ou {to retire from the jtlain). Hier. 7, 2. iropaxwyf'^'' oSov. Symp. 4, 31. 
viraviarayrai S4 fioi ^Stj koI ^aKwy koI 65uy i^icTayTai ol Tr\ov(Tiot 
{rise up from their seats and turn aside from the road). Vectig. 4, 46. oTrtx** 
Tuy iipyvp eluty rj iyyvrara ir6Kis M4yapa iro\v Tr\e7ov twv irfvraKocricify era- 
ilwy {is distant from the silver mines). PI. Menex. 246, e. iirierTiifiri x^P^Co' 
fieyrj d iKaio avyrfs {knowledge apart from justice). Uavoixai x^^°^ (^ 
cease from anger). Au&>, diroWaTTcu riva. Kan civ {I free one from evils). 
Her.3, 81. yy<afir}s Trjs apl(rrr]s r] fid p t r} k c {he has mistaken the best view) . 
5,62. Tvpdwwy ^\ei;^cp«^jj<rai/. X. Hier. 7, 3. Soke? fioi tovtw Zia<p4- 
ofiy ay^p rwy &\\uv C««»'» t(j; ti^tjs op^yea^ai {to differ from other ani- 
mals).— r}, tvSofMai, <T<pci\\ofiai iXirlho's, Sc^tTjs, tvxvs {to be cheated, 
to be deprived of hope, etc.). 'A<^(7j/x/ Tiva Trjs air i as. 'AirotTTepw Tiya 
Tuy ayabuy. Trjs fia<ri\flas i<rT c pri fxai. Comp. ^ 280, Kem. 3. 

Remark 1. Many of these verbs are often constructed also with the prcpo- 
sition airS, e. g. ^Aei/^epoDj/, airaWaTTeiy anS (of persons, as iKev^epovy rriv 
'EWdia airh Tuy MV/Swv), \veiy, (tpyny, andpyeiy, 4pr]TV€iy. 

3. In like manner, the Gen. of separation is joined with ad- 
jectives, adverbs, and substantives wliich express the same idea as 
the above verbs, e. g. iXevScpo^, /oioVo?, Ka^apo?, kcvos, tp^os, yvfivo^, 
6p<fxiv6^, ,/.iXo9 — 8ta</>opo9, (LUorpio9 (with the D^t, disificlined), 
aAXoro9, crepos; with many adjectives compounded of a priva- 
tive ; with dv€V, X<^P^^> 7rX.i]V, €^0), €Kas, Slxo-, TTcpav, etc. 



S76 SYNTAX. [H 272, 273. 

S. El. 387. at 8€ crdpKCS at Ktval <pp€vwv hr/aKyMT kyopas wriv (bodies without 
minds). Her. 3, 147. aira^ijs kokwv (without suffering evils, I e. free from). 
Th. 1, 28. <pl\ovs TToiela-^ai trepovs rSbv vvv ovrwv (to make friends other 
than, different from the present ones). X. C. 4. 4, 25. •jrorepoi' rovs dfohs rryv t^ 
SiKaia vofio^eTelv, ^ &\\a ray SiKaiuv. Cy. 3. 3, 55. airaiSfvTos fiov 
(TiKTis (uneducated in music). So &rifio5 ixalvuy. A6ffis, iXtv^tpia 
KaKwv. Her. 6, 103. TTcpTjj' r^y bZov (on the other aide of the way). Dem 
Phil. 1 . 49, 34. rov Trctcrx*''' ahroX kokws e | » yeyfiffeabe. 

4. Here belong verbs of beginning and originating, e. g 
i ftft » KpX^o-'^a.t, apxeiv, xnrdpx^tv, Karapx^f-y, c|ap;)(€iv. 

"Apx^fT ^al Tiuosy e.g. rod tto Ac /now, means simplj to 6c^m something, 
without any other relation: Suy toTs ^eolj ipx^ <^^ftt Xph ''atrrhs Hpyov (to 
begin every work with the gods) ; but tpx^^v, virapx^n', Kar ipx^^v have a 
relation to ofhers beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso- 
lutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before ethers, to begin first^ 
hence to be the cause or author: Tovs 4^(\oyras <pvyris Apx^^y iroAu Kptirroy 
ffvv ro7s rroXffilois rarTo/uLfvovs, fj iv rfj rjfifrdpa rd^fi, bpav (it is better to see those 
disposed to begin the fiiglu [set the example offiigld] in tlie enemies^ ranks than in 
ours), X. An. 3. 2, 17. 'H rjl^fpa rots "EXAtjci fifyiXuv KaKwv ip{«« («ri3 
begin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2, 12. 'Tircfpx***' a5iit«»' tpyttVj 
* thipy^ffias. 

Rem. 2. "Apx^tr^ai ^ttJ nvos (or vob4v) means, to proceed from a thing 
and to begin with it, e. g. 6.px^<r^a4. ouri rwv crroix^lwv, to begin with the first prin- 
ciples. 

k212. B. Causal Relation. 

The Gen. in the causal relation signifies, also, an outgoings 
but not, as in the local relation, a mere outward relation, but an 
inward and actii** one, since it expresses the object by whose 
inward power the action of the subject is called forth Eind 
produced. 

4 273. (a) The active Genitive , or the Genitive as thi 
general expression of Cause. 

1. Tlie active Genitive stands in the first place, as the Gen. 
of origin or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to 
originate from, spring front, produce from, he produced from^ 
e. g. ytyvcor^at, ^veiv, <f>vvaL, cii/at. Genitive of origin or author. 

Her. 3, 81. kplarotv avZpwv oiKhs &.pi(rTa fiovXevnaru ytyrtv^at (it is 
rtasonaJble that the best designs should originate with, from the be$t Men, the hfipm* 



I 



^ :^/u.J CAUSAL GENITIVE. 377 

being active in, o; the cause of the result). X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. irarphs fj.h SJ| 
Xtyercu 6 Kvpos yeveff^ai Kafifivtrov, Utpawt/ fiaaiXius (to he the son of 
C'ainhijs(s)' 6 Se Kafi0var]s oinos rov TlepaeiSuv y^vovs f)v [sprung from the raci 
of Pcraidae)' /xTjrpbs 5e dfioAoyelrai MavSdvrjs yevea^ai. PL Menex. 
239, a. fxias fir)Tphs irdyres aScXipol (pvvT e s. Attributive Gen. : 'O rov 
fiaffiXfus vios, i. e. 6 (^k) tov fiaaiXews y^yvrt^eh vl6s. To rwy av^pdcircoy 
TTpdyyuaTCL. 

Eemark 1. Commonly the preposition ^»c, more seldom otto, is connected 
with the genitive. 

2. Tlie active Genitive stands,, in the second place, as that 
object which has gained another, made its own and possesses 
it; the Gen. therefore denotes the owner or possessor. Tliis 
Gen. stands : (a) with the verbs ctmt, yevco-^at (to belong to), 
TTouiaSai, to ?72ohc one's oxen; (b) with the adjectives iSios (also 
with Dat.), oocttos (with Dat., inclined), Upo's, KvpLo<i. Possessive 
Genitive. 

Antiph. 5. 140. 92. rh fitv aKovaiov h.fia.pri)^a ttjs tvxvs 4<rr(, rh Se 
iKovaiov rrfs yywfxris (an invoiuntary fault belongs to fortune, a voluntary one 
to our own will). Lys. Agor. 135, 64. iytviro 6 Evfidprfs oZtos U ikokXcovs 
(belonged to i\7coc7e«, was his slat^). Th. 5, 5. iyiyeTo Mcaa-nm] AoKpwy riva 
Xp6vov i' ' ' to tfte Locrians). Trjs avrrjs yvufnjs elyai (ejusdem seiite/Uiae esse). 
'EavTou u.._ ,''j be ones own master). Dem. Phil. 142, 7. ^y vfjiwy aitruy 
idf\r)trriTf yfwfff^ai {to be your own masters), non ex aliis pendere. Also elyai 
Tij/oj, alicujus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, to belong to some one, to be earnestly 
devoted to something, e. g. (7vai ♦iXimroy ; fJyai tov fifXrlarov (studere rebus optimis). 
X. Ages. 1, 33. r^y 'A<riay iavrwy iroiovyrat (they bring A. under their 
jfower). Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. t) if6\is ^juiv Kvpia yivop.eyr\ roiovruy aya- 
duy ovK 4<pd6yri<Te ro7s &\\ois (having become the possessor of such advantages). X. 
An. 4. 5, 35. i}Kovir«y avrhy (rhy Imroy) Uphy fhai rov 'HXlov (sacred to 
tJiaun). 5.3, 13. 6 Uphs x^^pos t^j 'AprefiiSos. Dem. 01.1. 26,28. oi 
Kii'Qvyoi ruiv i <f>fffr riK6 Tu>y (ducum) tSioi, fiia^hs S' ovk tariv, 2.32,16. 
Toi'TTjs Kvptos TTis x^^po^ yf yijtTfTou. In th£ attributive relation: 'O 
rov fiaffiKfws Kiriros. 'H :Swk par ovs aper-f}. Uarrjp ^ eoirroXefiov. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. is connected with Xfy^y, <pdvai, vo^iCeiv, rjyela^ai, Kpiuety, 
iyiroXoM/3<{v€j»'. as it is with (hai. Dem. 01. 2. 34, 21. 5i/coi oy ttoA/to v Kpiyu 
rr,v rwv irpayndruy awTrjpiay ayrl rris iy r<f Xtydy xap'TOS alpeTa^ai. 

(c) Hence the Gen. with cTi/at denotes also: (a) the charac- 
tcristic, peculiarity, habit, etc. of a person or thing, the charac- 
teristic, peculiarity, etc., being commonly expressed by an Inf. ; 
{(i) a property or quality, viz., price, measure, number, time, space, 
etc., also what is requisite for a tiling. Genitive of quahty. 

32* 



i 



378 SYNTAX. [^ 273. 

*ApB p6s iarivaya^oveZ iroieti/ rohs (piXovs. In English this Gen. is 
translated in various ways, e. g. it is the business, rnanner, custom, peculiarity, duty^ 
mark of a brave man ; it becomes a brave man ; it bespeaks a brave man ; a brave 
man is wont, and the like. Dem. Phil. 1, 54. KaKovpyov iffrl Kpi^ivr a-ro- 
^aveiu, (T T parriy ov 5e fxax^iJ-^vov rols TroKefiiois {it is the characteristic of a 
criminal to die being sentenced, but of a general to die figlding, etc.). 01. 1. 18. 2. 
effTi rav aiff xp^^ (Neut.), /u.aAAoi' Se tuv a ( c x * o't a? j/, 'jr6\cu}y, wv ^fifv 
TTOTC Kvpioi, (paiviffStai Trpoie/ieuovs. Chers. 102, 48. 5oKe7 ravra kcu Sairdi'ris 
fjLeydXr] s Kal tc 6v cav tc o\X(t)U koX irpay fian i as el yai ( this seems to be 
the mark of great expense, much labor). Ai^hob. 1. 814, 4. e/ie %trr iTwv ov-ra 
(of seven years, i. e. seven years old). X. An. 7. 4, 16. "^.tXavhs MoKea-nos, iruv 
OKrw KalSeKU &v, trrjixalveL r-p aaKiriyyi. 1. 4, 11. & Y.v<ppan)S irorafibs rh 
(ip6s ioTTi rerrdpcov (Trad lav (of four stadia in width = four stadia wide). 
Attributive Gen.: SeKa ^xpuv x^P'^^'^t I'*^*^- 2, 35 (a place of [costing] ten 
minae). The Gen. is but seldom used to denote other qualitie?, e. g. t^s airr^s 
yud!>fM7}s elvai, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. ( AXKifiidSris) &\- 
\oT€ dWcou carl x6y<au, PI. Gorg. 482, a {is of different words at different times, 
uses different words, etc). 

Rem. 3. Here belong also the expressions r^ycia^ai, iroieTtr^cu, l^etvou xo\- 
\ov, irKelaTov, 6\lyov, i Kax^o-''' ov, etc. {to consider of great importance, 
etc.), the worth of a thing being considered as a property Usually, however, 
the preposition Trept is joined with the Gen. 

3. The active Genitive stands, in the third place, as that ob- 
ject which embraces one or more other objects as parts belong- 
ing to it; the Gen. represents the whole in relation to its 
parts. Genitive of the whole, or the partitive GoTiitive. Tliis 
Gen. stands : 

(a) With the verbs, etvai and yiyvea-Bai (to belong to, to be 
of the number of, to be numbered amwig) ; Ti^cVai, rt^co-^^ai, 
7rot€to-^at, rjyelcrSaL {to reckon or number atiwng), and with 
many others. 

Tjw. ,65. KoX avjhs ¥i^eKs tS>v (x^v^vtwv ^1 v a i, to he one of those remain-' 
ing. X. An. 1. 2, 3. ^v kclL 6 ^wKparr}! ri^y ajx(pl MiKrjroy <rr parevofifvur 
{was among tJiose ivho carried on tear around Miletus, orpaTevoueywy here denoting 
the whole, of which Socrates is a part). Cy. 1.2. 15. ot tiy aZ iv rdls reKeiois 
{audpoicri) Siaycyuyrai aveTrl\7)irToi, ovroi ruy y( pairepuy ylyyoyrai {are 
reckoned among the elders). Dem. Phil. 3. 122, 43. tj ZeKeid iart rrjs *A<r/ay 
{belongs to Asia, is a part of). Plat. Phaed. 68. d. rhv ^dvarov frYOvyrau Trdyrcs ol 
ttAA.ox Twy fX€yi(rT(i}y KUKciv eJvai {among the greatest evih). Pl.Rp.3"6,e. 
uo ucr iKT^ s S\ fJiroy, rl^7]s \6yovs ; ad musicam refersne sermonesf Phileb. 
60, d. (pp6vr}(iiy koI uXtji^ Z6^ay t^s outtjs (Seas r id^efiai { I consider prudenci 
and true glory as of the same nature, ad eandem ideam refero). Ep. 8. 567. e. iro»- 
eTff^ai Tiva rS>v dopv<p6p(i>y. Her. 7, 6. KaTe\€yf ruv XPV^ H-^" ('•■ 



f 273.] PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 375 

citabat vaticinwrum sc. partem). So Tcfiveiv yrjs {devastare terrae, sc. partem) 
iviBalviiv TTis T^s, to set foot upon. 

Eem. 4. With the partitive and attributive Gen., two cases are to be distin- 
guished : the Gen. denotes the whole either as a plurality in relation to the indi- 
vi'^ual parts, as TloXXoX tSsv avStpumwu : or as a unity in relation to a certain 
qrantity, c. g. neVre Tokavra apyvplov. This last partitive Gen. may be called 
ti". Gen. of quantity. Both these genitives occur very frequently : 

'a) With substantives, e. g, ^rayoves vdaros (vSaros expressing tho whole, 
and <TTay6v€s the parts); au^iaros fJ-^pos ■, if with the name of a place, 
the country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country 
as denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually before the name 
of the place denoting the part, e. g. 'O a-Tparhs acpUero ttjs 'At tiktjs 
(s Oly6r}i/ (into Oenoe, a part or city of Attica)^ Th. 2, 18 (never is ttjs 
"ATTJKTjy Olv6r\v). 

(b) With substantive atljectivcs, in the positive, comparative, and superlative, 
when it expresses the highest degree ; with substantive pronouns and 
numerals : oi xpri<rTo\ tuv af^puiruv, ol e5 (ppovovures tuv av^pwiruv [the 
use/itl, well <JisiMj<eJ ]Kirt of men) : — iroWoi, 6\iyoi, Ttves, Tr\eloves, TrKelaroi 
rwv au^pdinav (tiiany, feu\ some, etc. among or of men). In addition comp. 
above, \ 264, Kern. 5. On the contrary, oi ^i/tjtoI au^puiroi, since the 
property of mortality belongs to the race ; iroWol or oKiya dv^ponroi ex- 
presses a whole consisting of many or few (a great or small number of 
men ) ; iroAAol or 6\iyoi av^pwtrwy denotes the many or few as a part of 
the whole ; so rptTs T]fi(7s ij/iei/, i. e. we were three in all. there icere three of ■ 
us ; rpf7s ijfiuy 9i<roLU, i. c. there were three of us {three out of our whole num- 
ber) there ; 

(c) With adverbs : (a) of place, e. g. iroC, ttow, tttj, v6^iv, oZ, ii, ovSafiov, nav- 
TOXJ?, ''■'^pA'*'; *"i<^l Trpoffu {further), etc. Her. 2, 43. ouSo/utj AlyvTT ov 
I ■ in Fyyp')- PI. Hp. 3. 40.3, e. eiSeVoj, '6itov yi\$ eVxi {where 
I,, hi). 'EvToOdo TTJS r]\iKias {at this age) ; ivravda tov \6yov 
{to this ftoint in the discourse or argument). 'OpuTf, otirpoeK-riXv^ev aacXyelas 
(what a degree of ins(jience he has reached, quo iiitemperaniiae progressus sit), 
l)eni. Tlavraxov Trj 5 7fjs, ubivis terra rum. ndp^w <To<pias i\av- 
viiv ur r]Kiiv {to advance farther in wisdom). — {)8) of time, e.g. oi|/€ 
T^s T]Hf pas, rov xp^*">^f "^ V s r]\iKias {late in the day, late in life). 
Tpls TTis vfifpas. TloWaKis Tfjs r]fj.4pas. 

Rem. 5. Bv means of an al»l)reviation of the expression (comp. § 323, Eeni. 
6), the i)artitive Gen. stands also with a superlative which belongs Jo the predi- 
cate. Her. 7, 70. oi ^k rns Aj/Sutjs Albioires ov\6raTOV Tplx(aH-a €Xov(ri wdv- 
rwv avbpwTT(av (properly instead of ovK6TaTOV twv rpix^tiaroiu & irivr^s 
iiv^pwiroi ^xovo''*')- 5^- C'y.3.1,25. ir avr uv^t wv Zf:ivu3V 6 (pofios fxaKia-Ta. 
KaTawA.TjTTci Tas y^ux^s- 

(b) With words which signify: (a) to take part in, partici- 
pate in, share i?l, e. g. /u-crexciv, /Acrccrrt ftot, StSoVat, /xera8t8oi/at, 
TrposStdoi'at, 8ta8i8ovai, KOivoiv^lv, KOLVodcT&at, eTrapKUV (to give a share 
of), o^Vcpyo?, a/xoipo9, etc.; Kotvo? and to-o?, which commonly, 
however, govern the Dat. ; — ((3)to touch (both physically and 
inteUectually), to lay hold of, to he in connection ivith, to border on 
C. g. ^lyyavcu', i/^aucii/, a7rrco-^ai, 8paTT€<r^at ; XafifSdvea^at, nera-, 
<rvXXap.l3dv€Lv, i-n-cavTiXafxfidi'ea^ai; avvatpea^ai; exeo-^at (to ad- 



«» 



i- 



380 SYNTAX. \^^ 273, 

here to, he next to, to border on), avr-, TrepiexecrScUf "yA/j^co-^cu; 
k-rnxoipLos, dSeXc^os (seldom with Dat.), SiaSo^os (often also with 
Dat.), e^s, i(f>€$rj<; (more rarely with Dat.), Trpocr^ev, c/ATrpoo-^cv, 
oTTLo-^eu, iJL€Taiv, and many other adverbs ; — (y) to acquire an*? 
attain, e. g. Tvy^aveti/ (to acquire and hit), Aay;)(av€tv, c|^-, i<f)LKV€l' 
cr^ai, KXr]povofjL€Lv (with Gen. of the thing, ^o inherit; with Gen. 
of the person, ifo 6e the heir of some one ; with Ace. of the 
thing and Gen. of the person, to inherit something from one), 
7rpo'5rJK€L (ixoL Tivos, I havc to do vAth sojnething, have part in) ; 
— (S) to strive to acquire something, e. g. opeyea-SaL, i<f>Ua^(u, 
avTiiroLucr^ai, ivrpeirecrSaL (to turn one's self to something, to give 
heed to, to respect); aroxo-^^o-'^oLL (to aim at sometJiing). Most 
of the words included under this rule have a partitive idea. 
Besides the Gen. several of the above verbs take also a Dat 

Dem. 24, 49. ro7s inovaiu afxapTdvovcn fifTeari ffvyyvufn)! {those who err 
unwillingly obtain pardon ) . PI. Pol. 322, a. ^ 6,v^pw7ros ^elas ^cTfVx* fxolpas 
{participated in divine destiny). X.R. L. 1,9. tov fiey y4vovs kcu r^s ivvd- 
ueus Ko ivwvova, rS>v Se XP'OH-'^'^ '^^ ou/c avr iir o lovvr ai (who share 
in the same origin and power, but do not lay claim to their property). Cyr. 7. 5, 78 
sq. ^dXirov s fiev Koi \f/v xov s Kal air cav kclL iror Cov koI virvov aydypcTf 
Koi To7s dov\ois ficraS iS6vai, iroXe fiiKri s 5* 4 ir la t -fi fx ri s icaJ fi(\4rr}s 
oh ixeraSoreov {to share heat, cold, etc.). C. 1. 2, 60. lonKpanis waciv atp^ovus 
iirr]pKii. ruu ^avrou {shared his effects tcith). Cy. 1.3, 7. rwy Kpiwv Zia- 
SiS6vai To7s ^eparrevTois {to distribute the flesh among the servants). PI. Phaedr. 
238, b. TO T air (DP aSe\id {honim similia). Hel. 4. 4, 6. {6^i6y i<m) rtev 
ye KaWi <TT av Kal fi eyl /r uv ayab^tov 6 pey ofi4 vov s oficxaiKora- 
Trjs TeAeuTTjs tvx^7v {that they, desiring to obtain the most noble and i-al- 
uable acquisition, should meet a most honorable death). 4. 8, 18. ^y 6 QepcaySpos 
ov fjL6vov av\T}T^s aya^6s, aWa koL oXktJs avrfiroii'iTO {ad Jbrtitudinem eni- 
tebatar). Th. 1, 8. i(piefxeyoi tS)v KepSuy ol i/o-trovs inrf/xfyoy r^y rStP 
KpeicraSywy SovXeiay {the inferiors deMrous of gain, etc.). Cy. 1.2,3. iroyrfpov 
Tiuos ^ otcrxpou epyov icpiea^ai. 3.3, 10. iTrcuyov<ri Kcd acnrd^oyTcu oi 
roiovToi {avfiixaxoi) tovs dfiolovs, vofii^ovrcs <rvy e pyovs ainovs fJyxu tov koi- 
vov ay a^ov {thinking that they are coadjutors in the common interest). PI. Symp. 
181,c. u)8pea>s ^./xoipos {tcithout sharing in insolence). Menex. 241, c. ^pyor 
Kotyhv AaKeSaifioylcDy re Kcd 'A^Tjyaiwv {common to the Laced., etc., like 
commuiiis alicujus rei). "Attt o/xai rris x^^P<^^' Her. 1, 93. Xifjuni cxeTai 
rod <Ti]ixaTos ixeyd\ii {borders on). 3, 72. %pyov ^x<^M^'^<* (opus aggredia- 
mur). Hcpi^xofJ-al tivos {cupide aliquidamplector). Th. 1,140. rrjs yywfx.r\s 
T7)s auT/js ^xofiai {I hold to the same opinion). 4, 10. &ySp€S oi ^vyapdfieyoi 
TovSe TOV KivZvvov {who have taken part in tJiis danger). PI. Rp. 2,362. a. 
kh^^fias ixiifJi-eyoy {cum veritate conjunctum). Dem. 01. 1 , § 20, tws 4<rrl rm- 



♦ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 381 

p6s, arri\dP€(r^€ tS>v irpayfidruv (capessere). Isocr. Nicocl. 22, b, C iireiSh 
bv-nrov atafiaros ervx^s, abavdrov 5e ^vxvs, ireipS) ttjs y^vxvs aStd- 
varou /nrfiniqv KaToXiircTt/ {since you obtained a mortal body, but an immortal soul), 
Tuyxdvfiu, Xayxdyeiy xpVf-druy, evrvxias — rvx(7v reAeuTTjs, ovSfxaTos, etc. X 
C. 2. 1, 20. ai Sia Kapreplas eVt/ieAeiat [studia assidua) r wv KaXuv re Kaya- 
dciv ipyuv i^iKVilffbai iroiovaiy ( make them attain noble and illustrious deeds ) . 
Isocr. Paneg. 80, 187. ovk i<piKvoviiai rov ficyebovs ruv irpayfidTotv 
(nan assequor). P. Crit. 52, c. oUt iKciuovs rovs \6yovs alcrx^vr,, ovrs rj/nSiv, 
■ruvv6ij.uvj ivrpevT) {neither do you respect us, the laivs). X. C. 4. 5, 11. 
SoK6(y fioi \eyeiu, a>s aySpl ^ttovi tuv 5ta toZ crdfxaTos i]Sovuu irdfiirav ovSefiias 
iper^s TTposi^K^i {that no virtue belongs to a man who is a slave to bodily pleas- 
ures). Dera. in Aristocr. 690, 14. oSrot KXTjpovofiovffi ttjs vficrepas 
96^715 Kol Twy v{i€T4p(i)y ayabuy. PI. Gcorg. 465, a. rod r]S4os aro- 
xd^erai &y€v tov fiekriaTov. 

Rem. 6. With verbs expressing participation; sometimes the word denoting 
a part stands in the Ace, e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. ol rvpawoi tuv fxeyla-ruy ayoubav 
vKf'iffTa ^€Texoi/<ri. An. 7. 8, 11. Iva /nrj ficTadoley rh fiepos xpVf^d- 
rcty. According to the analogy of verbs of touching, verbs of entreating and 
supplicating, are connected with the Gen., which denotes the person or thing, by 
whom or by which one entreats or supplicates, e. g. Xiaaea-^ai, iKereveiy, iKuela-- 
boL, since the suppliant, touching the knee or the image of the divinity, utters 
his prayer. Od. /3, 68. Kiaaofiai rj/nfj/ Zrjvhs 'OKv/jLiriov rjSe Qefxia-ros {I supplicate 
Zeus). So Xlaaeabcu waTpits, roK-nuy. Comp. 11. k, 454 sq. 6 fiey fiiy efieWt 
ytyciov x^^P^ '"'c^X^^V o-i^id/xfyos \iaa€<r^ai. 

Rem. 7. The poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among which 
are those mentioned under (b) ; so any verb may govern the Gen., when it? 
action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part only. II. rj, 56. /xea-- 
ffov Sovphs f\uy {having seized the middle of the spear). Od. 7, 439. Modus' 
ayfrrjy Kfpdwy {took by the horns). II. a, 197. ^ay^rjs Se Ko/xris cXe 
llriKduya. In phrases, like \a0(7y yovyuy, airrea^al riva yeyelov, etc., the knee 
and beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person who touches and 
lays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, also, in poetry : 

(a) Verbs denoting both physical and intellectual tasting, grasping, reaching 
to, and hence of striving after an object, e. g. iirifiai ecr^ at (TKOTreKov, 
5up<nyy y6<rrov {to seek the rock, gijls^ a return). 

(b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a hasty motion towards 
an object, and then metaphorically are used to express an intellectual 
effort, and longing, e. g. ^ireiyea^ai, 6pfj.?i<r^ai, eTn^SaAAeo-f^at, dird'ia-a-eiu 
{rushing upon something, etc.). II. r, 142. i-rre iy6 fi€y6s Trep "Aprjos 
{hastening to, desiring the contest). 11.^, 488. wpfirj^t] 5' 'AKafxayros 
{he rushed ujxm Acamas). II. ^, 68. fi'i)ris yvv iydpuy iTri0a\\6 u^yos 
IJifT6iriab€y fiifiyerw. 

(c) Verbs signifying to take aim, e. g. roleieiy, aKoyriCeiy (in prose with els, 
and with the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Ace). II. p, 304. "Ektup 
5* aSr' Afoi'Tos aKSyriffe Sovpl (paeiyep {aimed at Ajax). II. ^, 855. 
^ s 6.p ayuyyei To^tve ly. 

Rem. 8. According to the analogv of the above-named verbs of aiming and 
striving, so we find koto x^oyhs ofifxara irriiai {to fasten the eyes upon the ground); 
ir\(7y eVi 2a/xoi;, to sail towards Samos, as if setting out for it (on the contrary, 
M 2dfjioy, to Samos). — The Gen. of aim accurs in the attributive relation, e. g. 
with iS6s, y6<rros r6irov tiv6s {way, return to a place). 



382 * SYNTAX. [^ 273 

Eem. 9. There also being here : (a) the adverbs ev^ (Ion. l^), straight 
forward to something, ixexph to, up to; — (b) verbs of meeting and approaching, 
which, however, in prose, are commonly connected with the Dat. ; — (c) also 
adjectives and adverbs of meeting, approaching, nearness, e. g. avrios, ewamios 
(though in Attic, only with the meaning contrarins, opposed to), irapairKri<rioSy 
which, hoAvever, are oftener joined* with the Dat. ; avriov, ivavriov (before, in 
' the presence of) ; eyyvs and irArjcriov with the Gen. of local nearness, but in a 
I metaphorical sense with the Dat. Her. 6, 95. exov (dirigebant) ras veas l^v 
I rod 'EWt] sir 6 vTov Ka\ ttjs &pr]tKT]5 {directly to the Hellespont). 2, 34. 
7] AtyviTTOS TTjs 6 pe ivrj s KiXiKias ixaXicrrd ktj aurlt) Keercu {lies opposite to 
Cilicia). Dem. Ph.3. 117, 27. TrK-qcriov Qrfficav Kcd 'XStrivav {near TJiebes).' 

^ 4. In the fourth place, the active Genitive denotes the place 
where, and the time when, an action nappens. The action or 
even* belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceeds in 
a measure from them, and is produced by them ; hence the time 
and place are considered as causing or producing the action, or 
at least as the necessary condition of it. 

(a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic. 

II. p, 372. vi<^os S* oh (paivero irdcrri s yair} s, ovS' opiojv {not a cloud appeared 
on the plain, nor on the mountains). H. j, 219. avrhs 5' avriov r^ev 'O5v(ro"^oy 
^eioio rolxov rod erepoio {by the other wall). Hence, especially, in Epic 
poetry, with verbs of going and motion, the space or way upon which the going 
or the motion takes place, and to which, as it were, this action belongs, stands 
in the Gen., e. g. II. )8, 801. epxovrai ireSloio {go through the plain). x> 23. 
^eeii/ ire Si 10. v, 64. TreSfoto SiuKeiv opveov {to pursue over the plain). So 
the prose, Uvai rod TrpSaou {to go over the forward way, to go forward). 

Rem. 10. In this way are to be explained the adverbs of place, ov,Trov, ovov, 
aifTov, ovSafxov, aAAaxoD, etc. ; and on the same principle also it is to be ex- 
plained that adverbs of place with the suffix ^ev stand apparently instead of 
adverbs of place with the suffix ,^t, e. g. euSo^ev, 677^1^6^, rr)\6d€yy e*cTO(r,^€v, 
e. g. II. p, 582. "EKTopa S" iyyv^ev larraix^vos iarpuveu 'AttoAAwv. 

(b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose. 
Also the space of time ivithiv, ivhich sometliing happens, as pro- 
ducing the action, or the condition of it, may be expressed by 
the Gen. The Gen. expresses time indefinitehj , denoting merely 
the period luithin which or in the course of which the action takes 
place, while the Dat. expresses definite time, a point of time. 

"kv^ ^dWei rov eapos, the spring is conceived as producing the flowers, and 
hence as the cause of them. Thus ^^povs, in the smnmer time ; x^^f^^^os, in the trm- 
ter ; rjiiepas, in the daytime, in the course of the day, by day ; vvKr6s, by night : SelKriSf 
orrcipas] as Eng. of a morning, he did it of a fine morning ; also fiwos, i^^r month, 
montldy : iuiavrov, yearly, etc.; with attributives, e. g. rod ain-od, rod irporcpod, ckJuT' 
rov, erous, the same, the former year, etc. ; -tjs outtjs rjjiepas, on the sajne day ; tt/t 
4iriov<rris vvKr6s : "^ou iiriyiyvofievov ^epovt " avrrjs rrjs rjfitpaSf in the course of this dan 



♦ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 383 

(but Dat. rairr] rfj 7)(x.4pa, in that day). Hence the adverbial expressions apxns, at 
the beginning, and tov Xonrov, for the future. Her. 4, 48. "icnpos Xtros ael avrhs kiav-fS 
pUi KotX ^epovs Koi x^'M^^'os {always flows equal to itself in summer and 
winter). 6, 12. rov \onrov fxr} ireiSfw/xe^a avrov. PI. Phaed. ^9, d. i^7]\^ofxev 
rod Setr/jLUTTjpiov k(nr4pas [at evening). Oh fxaKpov x9^vov, avxvov, noWov, 
irAeiVrou, 6\iyov xP^^ov {in, within a short, long time) ; iroWuu ri/xepwu, iroov 
{within many days, years), etc, Her. 3, 134. ravra oXiyov xpovov earai 
TcAeu/xej/o. X. An. 1. 7, 18. jSowiXeus ov /xax^'iTai Se/ca Tjfifpuu. PI. Symp, 
172, C. -TToWaJy iruv 'Ayd^uu iy^dSe ovk eVtSeSTj/irjKev. 

Ee3i. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be explained, e. g. f 
TOV Kvpov fiaff i\€ V ovT a 5 TroAAa re zeal /caAa ^pya inrh rSiv Tlcpaup iirpoix^- ( 

Rem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define the relation of time more 
exactly, e. g. e/c ttoAAoO xp<^'"'u, a<p' eairfpas, eVi Kvpov, Cyri aetate, Sta -ttoWov 
Xp6vov, iyrSs or ecw iroWov xpovov, Comp. the remarks on the prepositions. 

Rem. 13. The Gen. as well as the Acc. denotes continued or -protracted time, 
but with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time within any part of which 
the action may take place *, whereas the Acc. of time implies that the action is 
in proprress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g. ravrtju r^v ^/xe- 
pav avTov r)v\i(iTO, he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the 
Gen. the meaning: would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that 
day, he encamped there. ' Comp. § 279, 6, in regard to ,the diflferencp between 
the Gen. and Acc. of time and place. iiC-Tt^ XoU^^ i>, i*-\" - „_._ -"^ ''"■'■'- 

■3. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which 
anything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the 
source from wliich something is drawn; the material being 
viewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen. 
stands : 

(a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like. 

Her. 5, 82. xa^«oD iroieovrai to ayaX/iaro {are made of bronze). 2, 138. 
iarpaixivT] iffrl 6Shs Xl^ov {is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. epvfxa avrS^i ^v 
Xl^wu XoydSrjv Tre-rroi-nfievov. In the attributive relation : cKirwfia ^v\ov 
{a drinking cup \jnade\ of wood) ; Tpdir^^a apyvpiov, arecpavos vaKiv^av. 

Rem. 14. This relation is very often expressed by the Dat. also, and more 
definitely by the prepositions ef and airS, also 5ta with the Gen. 

(b) With words o? fulness and want, e. g. -n-XySeiv, irXypovv, 
wt/ATrXavat, yc/xctv, ySpt^etv ; vdaacLV, aaTT€tv, iVTropeiv, etc. ; aTropeiv, 
irevea^ai, Setcr^at, Sci, airavL^iLV, XPV^ ^^^- 5 '^^^o<s, TrXr)prj<i, p,€(TTO<;f 
irXovaios, 8acrv9, etc. ; 7revr]<;, tvSoys; aXt? (satis). 

X. Symp. 4, 64. aeaayficvos irXovrov t)]V ^vxt)v €<rofxaL {shall be satisfied 
with riches). PI. Apol, 26, d. to. "Ava^aySpov /3i/3Aio yefj-ei rovrwv rcov \6- 
yuv {are full of these sayings). EvTrope7t/, caropelv, TrhecrSrai, (nraviC^iu Twt> 
XpVt^o-Tov {to abound in, to be destitute of means). X. Cy. 3. 1, 3. SLa^edfTuy 
Kol ihavy6vTwy rh ireSioy fi€(rT6v {full of persons running about). An. 2. 4, 



384 SYNTAX. [^ 273. 

14. Saffvs SevSpuv {thickly set with trees). An. 1. 2, 7. wapdSeuros neyctSj 
ay pi (DV ^r}piuv irX-fjprjs '{full of wild animals). 1. 4, 19. ivravba ^aatf 
KUfj-ai TToWal fi€<rral <riTov Koi oXvov. In the attributive relation, e. g. 
^4iras oXvov (a goblet of [filled with] wine). 

(c) With verbs signifying to eat, to drink, to taste, to cause to 
taste, to enjoy, to satisfy one's self, and in the figiurative sense to 
have the enjoyment, use, and advantage of something; icrSUiv, 
KJiayciv, evoixeia-^ai, TrcveLv, yevctv, yevecr-^at, KopiaaxrSai ; ajroXavuv ; 
ea-TLOLv (to entertain), etc. 

'TSiCr^iiiu Kpeuv {to eat of flesh) ; Kopiaaabai (popfiTJs {to satisfy one's 
sdf with food) , iriveiv oXvov {to drink of wine). X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. kviryKti aroi 
av oyevear^ai r ovrwy rcov vavr oZair dv PpcDfidrwv {to taste the various 
kinds of food). 1. 3, 10. koI ri Si), & Kvpe, raWa fjufJiovfJLevos rhv'!ZdKav, ovk aire^^ 6- 
<pT](Tas Tov 0^ V ov J {ivhy did younot gulp downthewim?). C.4. 3, ll.airoKavf ly 
irdvTwv T wv aya^wv {to enjoy all good things) ; but airo\avf ly t lySs Tt, e.g. 
ayct^d or kuku, to receive good or evil from some one. K. C. 4, 3, 10. Ti &AAo ^wok , 
alyuv T€ Koi oiwv koi t S> v 6.\\o3V ^ucop t oaavTa aya^h airoXavet, 
Hffa &v^p(i}Troi ; {what other animal receives so many advantages from goats, etc., as 
man?). Tevea-^ai rifiTJs {to taste, enjoy honor)] yeveiy riyi, rifi^s {to 
cause one to taste or enjoy honor). 

Rem. 15. The Ace. stands with verbs of eating and drinking: (a) when the 
substance is represented as consumed wholly or in a great quantity; or fb) 
when the common means of nutriment is indicated, that which everyone tak. -. 
Od. i, 347. KvkKu^, T7), Trie olvou, imX (pdyes ai/S po^iea Kpea {drink wi.w:, 
since you eat human Jlesh). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ovk Skit lo/xai airrhs rhv oXvoy. 
1.3, 6. Kp4a ye cvcoxov {enjoy your meat). 6. 2, 28. i;5otx fiifuynivr^v af\ 
r)]v fid^ap ia^lei {always eats maizf). Ibid, /icra Sf rhv &7tov iha> otvoy 
^TT nrlvuifjLCU, oiiSev fie'ioF exovcra rj ^pvxv avairavcTfrai (spoken of a habit). So 

\i<r^leiv /cpe'o and Kpeoij/, -rriueiv ofj/of and otuov. Hence ir/vci*' oTvoi/ is said 
of those whose usual drink is wine, but iriveiv oXvov, is to take a drink of icim. to 

\dri)7k some of the wine. Hence th« Gen. with verbs of eating and drinking has 

la partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or driok of sotneUung. PL 

jSymp. 176, c. iroXvv irlveiv oJvov. 

(d) With verbs signifying to s?n€ll, emit an odor of somethings 
etc. ; Trvcti/, o^ctv, TTpo^^dXXeLV. 

"O^eiv iwv {to smell violets); fivpov vueTv {to emit the smell of myrrh)] 
vpos fidWe tp fjLvpov, iruelu rpdyov, o(fiv Kpo fxvtav. Ar. Han. 341 . 
&s TjSv fxoi vposeiryevcre x^ipei uv Kpeuv {so sweet uxis the smeU of swine's 
flesh to me). 

Rem. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the 
material, e. g. airoaTiKfie iv oXe'KpaTOS, {vckvos) irvphs fi( i\t<ra ( ae r. 
Xovetr^ai ivp^elos iroTafioTo. See Larger Grammar, II. § 527, Rem. 

(e) With expressions of reme})ibe?ing andforgetling: fiifivija-' 
Kojaai, to remember, jxifjorqcrKoi (rtva tlvo<s}, to remind one of some' 



$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 385 

thing, fivTjfjuiiVy d/xn^/xwv, c7rt\av^avo/xai, to forget ; hence also with 
Xa^pa, \a&pLu}<;, and Kpv<f>a ; also with expressions of being ac- 
quainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperienc e, 
of ability, dexterity or skill in anything, e. g. eixTrcLpos, ctTreipo?, 
iTnoTrjfJuiiVy iTna-TOifievo';, dveTrto-r^/x-cov, Tpt)3(uv, cnryyvw/xwv, dSai^?, d-Trat- 
ScT/ro?, 18lu)ttj<; ; aTrctpoj?, ^evco? ej((o ; with adj ectives in - 1 k o s (derived 
from transitiye verbs) which denote skill, aptness, etc.; also with 
-iTiipojfULL, to make trial of something. 

X. C. 2. 1, 33. Ol yepodrfpoi 7)5 f us rwv IT a\ a I wu irpd^eav fji.4fx.i/7]urat 
{remember the past achievements). Antiph. II. o, 7. 'H iiri^vfiia rrjs rijxap'ias 
ifivflfiova Tuv Kivhvvwv Ka^larrj avT6v {rendered him forgetful of dangers). 
X. 0. 16, 8. Tl6^€U oiy $ov\fi ip^wfial ae rrjs y e w pylas vtrofxiixvricrKeiv 
{to remind you of husbandry). Cy. 8. 3, 3. Tou <pd6yov iireXeKrtffTo {had 
forgotten envy). Attributive: fivriH-Vi f<V^ rtou kukcov. {M 4 fx y t] fi a I ri, to 
keep something in mind.) "E/nreipoi or iw i ar-f] fiu y elfA rTJs rexvvs {I 
am acquainted with the art). 'AvalSevros operfjs, fiovaiKT} s {ignorant of 
virtue, music). Her. 2, 49. rrjs ^vcrias ravT7}s ovk ctSoi^S', aAA' e fiir e i pos 
{not ignorant of tfuit sacrifice, but acquainted ivith it). X. Cy. 6. I, 37. crvyyyca- 
fiwy rS)v ayb puitrlvwy ir pay jxar wy {^xirdoning, 7iot knowing, human errors). 
— 'Aire i pa>s ix^ ^^ touttjj t^j t ( x" V s {to be unacquainted with this art). 
' At ir eipu fia I yyd)fii)s (/ make trial of an opinion). With the poets this 
use of the Gen. is still more extensive. II. 0. 411. rixToyos, ts pd re trdarjs e3 
«i8p <ro<pirjs {who is well acquainted ivith all skill). X. 3. 1, 6. Tropacr/ceua- 
trr iKh V T uy fls rhy TroKffioy rhy ffrparTfyhy elvai XPV ko-^ ir opitrriKhv rwv 
itrirn^elojy rois arpariwrcus {skilful in preparing what is necessary for war, and 
capable of providing provisions). PI. Euthyphr. 3, c. 5 iSaCKaXiKhs rrjs avrov 
ffo<pias {able to teach his own learning). PI. L. 643, a. reXeios rrjs rod rrpAyfia- 
Toy ip€T^s (as it were, showing one^s seJf perfect in a thing). Attributive: ejttTret- 
pia TTJy yewfierplaSy etc. 

(f) With the words of sensation and perception : dKovetv, 
OLKp oacr^ai, aia^dv ccr-^ai, 6(r(f)paLve(T ^at. 

*Akovw rwv \6yu}y, ^opvfiov {I hear the words, the tumult). X. H. 4. 4, 
4 rrjs Kpavyrjs fjaboyro {they perceived the cry). An. 1. 1, 8. fiaaiXevs 
yns irphs iavrhy imPovXrjs ovk r}<r^dyero {did not perceive the plot). C. 2. 
1,24. rlywv 6(r(p pivofievos rja^eiris ; {what things would you desire to smell?). 
AKoveiy SUtji {to hear a case at law); alcr ^dy ecrSfai rjSoyuy, oaiirjsy 
bopv $ov, fiorf^e las. 

Rem. 17. The attributive Gen. has a much wider signification, e. g. ayeWia 
rrjs Xlov, de Ohio {tidings of or concerning Chios) ; ip(orri(ris riuos (a question about 
something), like the Latin quaestio alicujus rei instead of de aliqua re. 

Rem. 18. 'AKoieiy, iiir aKoieiy, k or a/co u e <»/ often take the Gen. also 
in the sense of to obey, and according to this analogy it eiSrecSrai (seldom m 
Attic) and kmibe^v; so also kot^kooj, irriiKoos, take the Gen., more 

33 



386 SYNTAX. [$ 273. 

Beldom the Dat. Her, 3, 62. irpoayopevei rjfiiv 2/iep5tos 0a(ri\ijos a.Ko6- 
eiv (commands us to obey king Smerdis). 101. Aapeiov fiaaiXrjos oviofui 
i IT -ff K over a V (they obeyed king Darius nowhere). 1.126. vvy 2>v ifieo im^ofi^ 
vol yiyecr^c i\evSrepoi (now therefore obeying me, he free). So Th. 7, 73. 

Rem. 19. The above verbs have the following constmctions : (a) Gen. of 
the thing, as in the examples given. The Gen. denotes the material as a xchole^ 
of which one perceives, as it were, single parts, or the sense, the purport of which 
one perceives mentally. AlabdvoyLai Kpavyris (I perceive, as a were, the single 
tones of the cry) ; X. H. 4. 8, 19. alabea^ai ttjs fiori^fias [I observe something 
of the help); — (b) u:lcc. of the thing; then it is denoted that one perceives 
the whole thing with his seases, or the thing in its totality. Th. 2, 94. 'Q.s 
fa^ovTo T7]v fioTj^eiau (when they observed the help apjyroaching = saw tcith 
their eyes = edipcov). The Ace. of the person seldom stands with alc^dyea^ai ; 
when it does, the verb has the sense of etSeVcu (to know). X. Svmp. 4, 36. 
Alcr^duofxai rvpavvov s t ivds, ol ovrw ireiuuxri XPVI^"'''^^ (^ know some kings). — 
/ (c) Gen. of the person, which represents the person, as it were, as the swirce, from 
( which the perception is derived. '"Akovw 'S.oiKpirovs (I hear Socrates, i. e. the 
words of Socrates). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. Ovk aKpoufxevoL rov ^Sovtos wfiyvfrt 
^deiu &pi(TTa (not hearing the voice of the singer). Her. 1, 80. is oa ^pavro rd- 
X^fra Tuv KafiyXuv ol "nriroi koX eldoy ainas orrlcu av4<rrpf(pov (as soon as the 
horses got scent of the camels ). So ff vvltjfjii (to undersix^id), with the Gen. of a 
person, e. g. Her. 1, 47. koI Koxpov cvviripj. «a2 ov <pwvfvvTos ajcova (I under' 
stand a mute) ; but \vith the Ace. of the thing, e. g. X. Cv. 1. 6, 2. 5t* kppLUP^tav 
7QLS Tchv biuv o" V /J. ^ V \l a s avyiiifxi (I undcr>' ■ of the gods). The 

verb at (Ti^cii/e (Ti^at is not constructed with i , /i. of the pergon. — 

/ (d) Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing: "HKOvaa Swxparoi;; rovrof rhp 
' koyou (audivi e Socrate hunc sermonem, I heard Oiis conversation from Socrates). 
So also tI xc^f'""^'' fja^aou Tov/xoi) filov ; (what have you perceived disa- 
greeable in my manner of life?) X. C. 1. 6, 4. 'Svvlyjfii <rov Thy \6yoy. — (e) 
I Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen., or with a subordinate clause 
which takes the place of the Ace. of the thing. 'Akovu l^uKpdrovs 5ia\e- 
yofx.4vov (I hear Socrates reasoning, nearly the same as okovo) 'S^Kpdrovs tiaJ<»- 
yov). X. H. 4. 2, 19. AaKi^aiii6vioi ovk ■pcr^dvoyro vpo s i6vr u y ruy -roKe- 
jxioiv (did not perceive the enemy approaching, no Av\\ iho. ^: -crdoyoKTo riLy 

iroKefjilwv ttjv trpSsoSoy). The person is sometimes also c* d in the parti- 

ciple, e.g. Th. 5, 73. rjabouTo Teix*C<^ *''''<«"' (ff^^y perceived them building the 
ivall, instead of ■^abovro avrwy TeiX'C^ >'''''**' 0^ 8tj TCix^C"'*'')- X- An. 
1. 10, 4. fia(Ti\evs ^Kovae Ti(r(Ta<pfpyovs, Sri ol "EWrjyfs viK^ev (heard 
from Tissaphernes that the Greeks were conquering, like IjKovfff Tiaacuptpyovs r^y 
ruv 'EKK'qvujy viKrfv). C. 4. 4,13. ovk cdcbdyofiai aov^ dvoioy y6fupuoy ^ iroioy 
SIkuiou \eyei5 (I do 7iot compreliend you, wfiat you call according to law or according 
to justice). 

Kem. 20. Likewise the Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing, or the Gen. of 
the person with a participle in the Gen. or with a subordinate clause standing in 
the place of the Ace. [Comp. (d) and (e) Rem. 19j, is used with verbs of seeing, 
hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing ; of judging, examining, atid say- 
ing; of admiring, praising, blaming : Spay, d^eao-j^ai, (r«coT67y, usroroeTr, 4y- 
tO€ty,yiyyu>aKeiyt 67rf(rTa<r3oj, ciSevoi, iy^vfitla^ait etc.; rvy^d- 
yca^ai, fiay^dye ly, Kplveiy, elcrei^etv, \4y€iyy StjX oGi', etc. : a«"»- 
Se'xeo-^ai (to receive the opinion of one. to agree in opinion with one); 6.ya*rbai^ 
^avfxdC^iy, eirotveTv, /x4fx<l>€<r^ai, \l/4y€iv. The Gen. denotes the ob- 
ject (commonly a person) in respeet to which one perceives, sees, obserres, 
knows, judges something, some action, external indication, or some single cii^ 



4 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 387 

cumstance, etc. ; or of whom one learns, hears, aflanns something ; or in whom 
one admires, praises, or censures something. 

X. C. 1. 1, 12. Upwrov fieu ai/ruv (2&J/c/?aTT)s) eV/ct^Trei, ■7r6T€pd irort 
vofiiaavr€S Uavus 1)Sti Taubputriva cl54vai tpxovrai iirl rh nepl tolovtuu (ppou 
ri((iy, ^ Ttt p.y avbpuyima irapeWes, to hal^l6v^a Se (TKOirovvTes, Tjyovurai rk 
irpos^Koin-a Tpamiv [he first considered in respect to them whether, etc.). An. 3. 1, 
19. hiabiwpavos avruy, oa-rjv x^9°-v Ka\ olau exoieu {attentively con- 
sidering with respect to them, what a country they hclB). Cy. 7. 2, 18. eyvw koI 
fid\a ii.Tona c fiou iroiovvros (he perceived in respect to me, that I was doing an 
absurd thing, or e7»/u) ifiovy 'on &TOTra iToioir}u). PL Gorg. 463, d. Sp' oZv hu 
fid^ois airoKpivafifvov ; (instead of 5p odi/ &.v [jlov nd^ois, & airoKpivofxai , 
will you then understand my answer, i. e. learn from me what I answer ?). 465, e. A e- 
yovr6s fiov fipaxfi ovk ifidy^avfs (you did not understand me when I spoke 
briefly). The Gen. of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c. cjf juou fiav^dveis 
instead of d fwv fjuw^duas, h Xeyu (if you comprehend me, understand what 1 
say). Th. 4. 6. itrvbovr o rr\s TlvXov kot€ tXTj/u/uei'rjs, instead of eiruS-. 
T^s TlvKov, Zri KaT(iKr)fxyi(vr\ ^v (when they learned that Pylus was captured). 5, 83. 
fjff^oyTO T€ < X ' C^*'''' '*'*'» instead of ■p<r^. avrHv, 2tj reixiCoi^y (learned re- 
specting them that they were building the icalls, i. e. learned that they were building, 
etc.). X. C. 3. 6, 16. ivbvyiov ruv &AAwi/, irt^Tepo aoi ZoKOv<nv iirX toIs 
roioOrois iitadvov fjuaXXov if \\f6yov Tiryxdvfiv (observe respecting the others, whether). 
('EyH^vpLf 7<r^a i with the CJen. of the thinu, for example rris wpas, X. Ven. 8, 6., 
rwy rSwuv, ib. 9, 4, signifies to have a regard for something, and belongs to § 174, 1 
(b) ; 4y^vfi(7a^ai with the Ace. of the tiling signifies to reflect upon, consider 
something, aliquid secum reputare.) Pi. Protag. 324, c. oTroSe'xox'Tat ot <ro2 
iroAiTai Kol x <> ^ *"' ^ ' **'^ <T Kvr or 6p.ov ffv fifiovKtvoyr os ra iroXiriKd 
{receive the ojnnion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6, 76. &ya<r^ai rod 
'Epatrlyov ov Tcpo^ihovr os rovs iroXirrras (to admire Erasinus because he did 
not betray the citizens). Th. 1, 84. t^ ^paSv kcu /xeAAov, h p.4fX(povT at (idXiara 
rinwy, fii] eu<rx«i»'«<^^< (f^'' u'hich they chiefly complain of us). X. Cy. 3. 1, 15. et 
tiyaff at r ov trar p6s, fi S<ra fie fio vKfvrat, 1^ 8aa nr 4ir pax^t irdyv aoi 
avfi$ou\(v<M> rovroy ij.i^f7abau (if you admire my father either for the measures he 
has dtristd. etc.). Ages. 2, 7. rdB' avrov 6.yaf^ai, tri irapecKevdaaTO (1 ad- 
mire this in him). 8. 4. iyu Kcd tovto itraivo} 'Ayrta iXdov, rh nphs rh 
itpttrKfiy To7s *EAAi7<rtv uir«pii(7v ti^v fiaaiXfos ^fuiay { I praise Agcsilaus for this 
also). PI. Men. 95, c. Fopylov fidXiara ravra iyaixai (I particularly ad- 
mire this in (lorgias. or Gorgias for this). Thcaet. 161, b. '6 Sou/ua^w tow 
kraipov, rile ia-riy (what I admire in a companion is this). Criton 43, h. crov 
ird\ai bav fjid(w, al<r^ay6fJi€yoi, ws r)S(us Ka^€vSeis. Rp. 383, a. ir6x\a 
'O/x^pou iiraiyovvr f s &\Ka tovto ovk iTTcuv(a6nc^a ( though we praise 
many other things in Homer). 

Rem. 21. In themselves, the above verbs take the Ace, e. g. &pu Tiva or ti, 
OKffwS) Tiya or TI, iircuyiiy ^tyu), tif/jxpofiai, Ayafial Tiva or Tt. 



• 



k 274. (b) Causal Genitive. 

The second division of the causal genitive includes the geni- 
tive, wliich expresses the cause or occasion, i. e. the object, 
which calls forth or occasions the action of the subject. This 
genitive stands : 

1. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the 

mind {verba affectuum), viz. : 




388 SYNTAX. [§ 274 

.-^vjla' I ■ ' ■ ' (a) Desire and longing for : eTrL^v/xeiv, ipav, ipomKii-q €X€lv oi 
SittKeto-^at ; BlxI/^Vj TreLvrjv ; 

(b) Care for, concern for, and the contrary : iinfifXeuTSau, 
€f>povTL^€LV, KT^SccT-^ai, TTepLopaaS^ai, irpoopav, vTrepopav {^to despise) ^ 
irpovoeiv, fieXei, /xcra/xcAet, afxiXitv, oAtycopcti/, ^ctiSccr^ai, ev-^/xcur^cu 
(^0 ^ave a regard for, k 273, Rem. 20) ; 

(c) Pain, grief pity : oXo^upecr^cu, ttcvSlkios ^x^^*' > ^^^Ii/ 
and oiKreLpcLv (with the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the 
thing); 

(d) Anger and indignation: 6pyl^€a&aL (with the Dat. of the 
person and the Gen. of the thing), xoXeTrCjs <f>ipiLv\ 

(e) Envy : <I>%v€lv (with the Dat. of the person and the GeiL 
of the thing), C7ri</)^wa>9 3taKCto-.^at ; 

(f) Admiration, praise, hlame ; SavpA^iLv and ayaxrSai (with 
the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes 
also with the Gen. of the tiling and the Gen. of the person, 
which is governed by that thing, see Rem. 2) (rjXovvy evSaifw- 
vLt,€iv, liraLveLv, fxefxtftecrSaL (all with the Acc. of tlie person and 
the Gen. of the thing). 

PI. Rp. 403, a. 6 op^hs ipus Tr4<pvKe kochIov t€ koI kuKov <r(6^p6ws rt 
Kol fxovcriKus ipav (to love ichat is well ordered and beatitiful). 438, a. oiHtis 
TTOTOV iir i^ufie?, aWa XP'O^^'^ ov ttotov, koX oh airov^ oKXh XP^^''' ^^ 
fflrov rrdtnfs yap &pa ru>v ayabdv iir ibv fiov<r tv {no one desires drinh, 
hut wholesome drink, etc.). S}Tnp. 181, b. oi <pav\oi rww avbpwrrwy ruv or w fid- 
Twv jxaWov, ^ tS)v y\/vx^v ipucriv {love their bodies more than their soub). 
186, b. rh av6^oiQV avo (xoiuv iir ibvfiit koI 4p^ {desires and loves ioAa< is 
unlike). 216, d. 2a>/cpaTTjs ipwr ikus Stc^Kctrat ruy KaXStv {is very Jbtid 
of the beautiful). X. Cy. 3. 3, 12. (KCpoy) KOKilvovs 4irolri<rev ipotriKois ?X<*» 
rov ijSrj •jroteTv ri {made them desirous of doing something). X- O. 13, 9 
ireivuei tov ixmlvov ovx ^rrov tviai ruy (pvataiv, f) &\Xeu rur airvp rt 
Koi TTOTcDv {thirst for praise not lesf tJuin others for food and drink). Attribu- 
tive, e. g. epwy, iiri^v/jiia apfTrjs {amor, cupiditas virtutis, love^ desire for virhte). 
Th. 6. 14. /fjjSecTi^^at rr^s iro \e w s {to be anxious about the cittf). Her. 3, 151. 
iTro\i6pK€€ {BaSv\u}viovs) <p p ovt i ^o vt as ovScy t»js woXiopKlrjs {having 
no concern about the sieg^). 3, 159. tov cItov ir poo pay {to have a care for^ 
to pi'ovide food). X. Symp. 8, 33. oi y^6yov a<ppoyr ktt fly ibtCifi-fyoi ouk 
aWxvvovrai alaxp^v ri iroieiy {those accustomed to be indifferent to censure). 
X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. Tlepauy yS/xoi {&pxovrai) rod Koiyov aya^ov iwtfit' 
Kovfifyoi {having a regard for the public good). M4\fi not nyos {1 
have a care for something, some one). PI. Crito, 44, c. ri rifuy rris tAv rokXm* 
S6^r]5 n4\ei; iwhi/ do tve care for the opinion of the multitude f). 5. 1,21. 




5 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 



389 



Tufipva irdpdffofiau noiuu fi-fproTe fxer afif Xtj <rai Tr]5 irphs ifih 65oG {that 
Gobryas shall not repent of his journey to me). Id. C. 1 . 2, 9. i tt 6 p o p a v eVofe* 
Tuv Ka^eardrav v6fiwy tovs <xvv6irras (made his associates despise the ex- 
isting laws). Th. 4, 124. BpaaiSas tt}s McvSris w e p lopdo fxe vos {solicitous 
about Mende). X. H. 5. 4, 1. ^toi oihe twv aaefiovvrui/, ovre rS>v h.v6(na 
iroiovvrcoy o/i€\oy<ri {are regardless neither of the wicked nor the profane). 
Cy. 8. 7, 15. favTou Kr}5erai 6 irpouowi/ oSeA<^oy {he who takes thought 
for a brother is anxious for himself). X. Ag. 7, 1. 'Arn<rl\aos, ^irou 4^ro r^/v 
vaTpiSa ri ix^iXiiCiiv^ ov XRVI^o-ruv 4<p€i5eTo {did not spare his wealth). 
Attributive, e. g. <ppoyTh twv iralZuv {cura liberorum, care for children). So 
iinfi(\i}s Tivos {caring for something). X. Cy. 5. 4, 32. 6 Kvpos aKovaas rod 
fify ird^ovs dpKTfipfv avr6v {pitied him on account of his suffering). 5. 2, 7. 
tV ^vyaTfpa, irtf^iKus cxoucroj/ rov a.Sc\<pov Te^vTjKOTOSfi^dyoip 
HSf fliTfy {grieving for her dead brother). Symp. 4, 37. rovrovs otKrefpcw r^s 
iyav x«^**"^* y6(rov {I pity them on account of the disease). Attributive, e. gr\ 
iJiyos (TodptDy {de amicis, for, on account of friends) ; moreover with adjectives ' 
also (though only in poetr}-), and especially with exclamations with or without 
interjections. Eur. Or. 413. otfioi Siwy fxuy, oh eKawo/xai rdXas! {alas the -^^^'^'^ 
vexations !). X. Cy. 3, 1,39. 0<G rod aySpSs {Oh what a man!)'. PI. Ep. 
509, C. "AxoAAoy, Satfioylas virf p fi o\ri s! X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. t ^ s rixv^, rh^ 
ifi^ yyy K\T\^4yra Sfvpo rvxf'iy - ( ill fortune, that lam called hither at this time !)l 
Lys. c. Pinion. 187, 11. KO-ifo-TriKf ri t^os SiKaiov iraaiv av^pdnrois., twv avrwy 
iiS iKfi /xdrwy ftdXtirra o pyl^tabai ro7s ftdXia-ra Swanfuois, ^rj aSiKfTy, to7s 
ie •K(vr)<Tiy ^ a^vvdrois T<f awfiari (rifyyywurjy ^X*'*'» ^** '''^ Tjyela^ai 6.Koyra5 avrovs 
afjLopTdvfiv {to be angry on account of the same wivngs). ( In poetry, the Gen. is much 
more frequent with verbs expressing anger, e. g. II. |, 266. 'HpaKXTJos ircp ixu- 
(raro, jratihs (o7o { uns angry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. a, 69. {UoafiSdccy) 
KvKKanros »f«x<^^**''''«'»^*' o<pda\fjLov a\du<rfy {is angry on account of the Cyclops). 
S. Antig. 1177. irorpl firfylaas (powou (having been angry with the father on 
account of the murder). Eur, Or. 749. t<rw5 <roi. dvyarcpos dv /Movfieyos). At- 
tritiutive, e. g. x^^os riy6s (ira alicujus instead of de aliquo, anger on account of 
some jxrson or Oiing) *doyf7y riyi rrjs <To<pias {to envy one on account of his 
wisdom). Th. 1, 75. Hl^ioI ifffify apxvs ye h^ ^x^fiiv toTs "EXAtjo-j {x^ orSas dyav 
iirt<pb6y(iis SiaK(7adai {it is not Just that we should be so much envied by the 
Greeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, fieyaipu, e. g. Aesch. 
Prom. 627. ov nfy alpto toC5«' aoi 5a>p7;/«iTos {I do not envy you because of 
this gift). Attributive, e. g. <p^6yos riy6s {envy on account of something). X. Cy. 
2. 3, 21. Tovroy oZv h Kvpos aya<rb(\s t^ s re tr pa6r'nT0S koL ttjs SiSatr- 
KaXlas Koi rris iirifjifKdas, indXfffe Kal ravrw t V rd^iu eVl rh S(7Truou avv 
TV raiidpxtf {having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.). 
Symp. 4, 45. C^jAcS « rov ir \ a 6rov {I envy you on account of your wealth). 
pi. Symp. 194, e. Jo/coCcn Trdvns robs avStpd^-novs eblaiiiouiC^iv rS>v aya- 
day,' S>y 6 ^(hs avro7s aXrtos {to consider men happy on account of the good things, 
which, etc.). Ion. 530, b. iro?^dKis ye 4C'h^^<ra v/J-as rols ^a^|/a,So^s t t) s 
r«x»'i?*. Dem. Cor. 296, 204. Ws oi/c &i/ aydaairo ruv avBpav iKeivu* 

33* 



( 



390 SYNTAX. \k 274 

T^y h.perT]s; (who would not admire the valor oj" those men ?). Lys. Simon. 1 00^ 
44. ^av/xd (^(1) (idhiffra tovtov rris Z lavoias {I admire his purpose). Id. 
Eratosth. 124,41. i^avfiacra ttjs T6\/jiT]s tS>v XiySvTwv. So with ad- 
jectives, e. g. PI. Phaedon. 58, e.. evhaiymv fxoi 6 air^p i<paivero koI toS 
Tp6irov Koi Tuv K6y(i)y, tbs oSecDs /cal yevvaius ireKevra (the man seemed to 
be happy on account of his habits and remarks). 

Kemakk 1. The Gen. with the above verbs is often governed by preposi- 
tions, especially ire pi, e.g. iinfxe\f7(T^ai, (ppovri^uv vepl tivos. Some vei'bs 
which denote a state or an aflFection of the mind, do not govern the Gren.; thus 
iro^e7v (to long for, to feel the want of), always governs the Ace, and so' 
(pi\e7v, ayuTTuv, ct 4 pyeiy (to love) ; the last two also in the sense of to 6c 
contented with, take the Dat, ( = Lat. Abl.). Several of the above verbs have also 
different constructions ; then they commoi ly express different ideas, e. g. 
(ppoyrri(eiv riv 6s or TrepI t ivos, X. C 1.1, 11. 4. 7, 6. to be anxious for 
something, but (ppovri^eiv t i, scrutari, investigare ; — irpovoetc, ir poo paw 
ri (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand); vir e po pav rt and rtvosy 
despicere, in the same sense. In poetry, /xtAej sometimes takes for its subject 
a noun denoting a thing, in the Nom. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. 
pronoun in the Nom. The verb is then used personally: MeA^o-ovo-tv 8* 
dfjLol iTTTTOi, II. AC, 481. TouTo fifif oZv ^ € <p /i e A ^ (T 6 1, PI. Phacdr. 238, d- 

Rem. 2.* The verbs bavfjid(( iv and &ya<r^ai have the following con- 
structions: (a) the Ace. of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, when the 
wonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole 
nature of a person or thing, e. g. ^avfid^ui rhv aTparnySy (I ad ral) ; 

^av/Ma^o) T^y aocplay (I admire the wisdom) ; — (1») the Gen.of ti ^ .id the 

Ace. of the thing, when one admires something in a person ( Rem. 20), e. g. 
^avfid^u 'SdJKpdrovs r^y aocplay (I admire the trisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of 
Socrates) ; — (c) the Ace. oftlie person and (fte (Jen. of the thing, when one admires 
'•y^a person on account of some quality, e. g. id^aufux^.'iu ^.taKparr] rrjs coc ' ' Vr- 

/Socrates on account of his wisdom), see 1, (f) ; — (d) seldom Gen. oj ud 

\the Gen. of the person depending upon it, when I wonder at the quality of a per- 
son, or admire the quality of a person, e. g. ^avfidCu :Z(i)KpdTovs r^s awf>las {I 
^ admire the wisdom of Socrates), see 1, (f ) ; — (e) the Ace. of the person, and in- 
stead of the Gen of the thing, a preposition, commonly i-wi with '" ' . e. g. 
bav(xd^<i} 'Zumpdri] iirl rrj cro(pi(j. (1 admire Socrates for, on account of ijm). 

2. With verbs signifying to requite, to revenge, to accuse and 
condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as the cause 
of the requital, revenge, etc. Thus \vith ripxapCvu^ax (with tJie 
Ace. of the 'person and the Gen. of the tiling), also with judicial 
verbs of accusing and coiuletnnwg, e. g. atrtao-^ou, hrairvajcrBaiy 8uo- 
K€LV, clsaycLVi irrrdycLV, ypa^ccr^at, irpo^KoXiiaSaL (all tcitJi the Acc. of 
the person dnd the Gen. of the thijlg), hre^Uvaty eyKaXelVf (Truricrpr' 
Tco-^at (all three zcith the Dat. of the person and t/ie Gen. of the 
tiling) ; ffiivyuv {to be accused) ; Sixa^civ, Kplviiv, alptlvy to convict 
( all three ivith the Acc. of the person and the Gen. of the thing)^ 
and oAwvat, to be coiivicted. 

Her. 3, 145. tovs iiriKovpovs TifKap-fiao /lai t^s iy^dSe airl^ios (wiU pun- 
ish the allies on account of the invasion of this latid). (Seldom TifUBpcTr riri 



♦ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 39j 

Tiyos, as X. Cy. 4. 6, 8. r i/xupiiffeiv troi rod iraiShs inria-xvovuai, I avenge 
you for [the murder of] your son.) ^EiratTia<T^ai nva (p6vov[to accuse one of 
murder). Her.. 6, 104. (M/XTioSeo) ol e'x^poi e^iw^av rvpavvldos ttjs ip 
Xepaoyriffoo (prosecuted Miltiades for tyranny ). 'Eire^iivai tivI (povov [to pros- 
ecute one for murder). Tpd<pea^ai nva irapav6n(fiv [to indict one for illegal 
measures). *ei;76ii' KKovris^ <\) 6 vov, acn^ il as {to he accused of Iheft., etc.). 
Kplv€(T^ai a<re0elas. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. Uep<Tai SiKaCovcri Kal iyKXTj/xa- 
Tos, ov evfKa ^.v^pamoi pnoovtn fxkv aWr}\ovs ixdhiara, SiKaCovTat, 5e f//ci(7Ta, 
axa^io-Tta J {condemn as a crime, ingratitude). C. 1. 2, 49. Kara. vSjxov (elecTTt) 
jrapavolas f\6yrt koI rhi/ irorepa Sfjaai {it is lauful for one convicting his 
father of madness). Dem. Apbob. 846. 4Trt(TKT)Trre(r^al rivi tS>v ^evSo- 
fj.apTvpii>y {to prosecute one for false icitness). 861, 58. (pevyeiv i^evSo- 
fxaprvp tuv vr6 riyos. 'Akuwai kKotttis {to be convicted of thejl). 

Rem. 3. Also the punishment for guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen. is to 
be considered as the Gren. of price (^ 275, 3), e. g. ^avdrov Kpiveiu, Kpiuecr^ai^ 
ZidtiKeiv {to sentence, be sentenced to death). Sometimes the prepositions Tr^pi and 
<v€/ca are joined with the verb, e. g. SiwKfiy Tivk irepl (p6vov : and avri with 
Ti^uuptiffbai. 'EyKa\t7y besides the above, has the following constructions : (a) 
the Dat. of jicrsou and Ace. of thing, ^o charge something upon somq one; — 
(b) the Dat. of person followed by a clause with Sn or by the Inf. ; — (c) the 
Dat. of person alone, to accuse [ff 284, 3. (6)] ; — (d) the Ace. of thing alone, 
to bring o.t a rhnrge. Karrfyop(7y, to accuse, is construed : (a) with Gen. of per- 
son, s< ■ )th Hard and Gen. ; — (b) with Gen. of person, and Ace. of 
thing,' ^ tig to one's cJuirge ; — (c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, 
sometimes with rfpl and Gen. of thing ; — (d) with Ace. of thing alone. 

3. Finally the Gen. of cause is also used in the following 
instances : 

.(a) With Tov fiii and the infinitive. See ^ 308, 2, (b). 
(b) With the adverbs eS, KaKus, fierplws, and the like, also with &Sf 
rut, 5x«y, ^, iirvt ouras, wSt, usavrus, connected with the verbs 
^X*'*' a"<l ?»ef ly, sometimes also with ehai and other intransitive verbs, the 
object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. KaXws 
ix<» "ToSuy {1 am well in respect to my feel). Her. 6, 116. 'A^va7oi, ws tto- 
ti>y tlxoy, Tdxurra ifiori^foy 4s rh iaru {as they were able with respect to tJieir 
feet, Leas quickly as their feet ux>uld carry them). 5, 62. xp^M"''"^'' ^^ r)K0V' 
T€S {well off for, to have a plenty of, means). So e5, koXws, nerpiws ex^iv ^iov^ 
<pptywy, yiyovsy Svydfifots {to be well off as to the means of living). Oi "EW-ni/es 
ovTvs flxoy dfjLoyolas irphs oW-qKovs. X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. oiiTw TpSirox, 
^X * * 5 (you are thus in respect to circumstances, you are in such circumstances). H. 
4.5, 15. us rdxovs (Ka<rTos elxf {<^s ^^^^ was able in respect to swiftness, oi 
quickly as each was able). 



^ 



392 SYNTAX. [^275. 

§ 275. (c) Genitive denoting certain Mutual 

Relations. 

The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by 
which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation 
of the ruler to the subject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a 
subject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the 
one may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of 
the other. Hence the Gen. is used : 

1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub- 
jection, inferiority : ap)(€Lv, Kparelv, SeaTro^uv, Tvpawilv, Tvpawev^w, 
OTpaTrjyclv, cTrtTpoTrcuctv, CTrurraTCtv, ^aaiXcvetv, Tyye/xovcveiv, rfyiurSax, 
etc.; with the adjectives cyKparrJ?, uKpaT?;? ; — also with Trpoc^ctv, 
av€)((.LV, Trepulvai, TrepiyLyvcaSai, TrpocrraTCtv, VTrtp^oAXcti/, vrrcpc^cptiK, 
Trpcoreuctv, Trpea-fSeveLV, TrpOKpivew, TrpoTLfiav, 7r\€ov€KTtlVf etc. ; — rp-ra- 
aSai, vb-repetv, voTipi^ctv, iXarrovaSaL, fieiova^ai, /Li«ov€*cTct»/, vcnepov 
cTvat, TfTOva €ti/at, etc. 

Her. 7, 97. rov vavriKov 4<rrpaT-f}yeoy dtSe {these had the command of 
the naval forces). 3,15. 4ir it p oirtve ly AlyviTTov (to be the governor of 
E(]ypt). Th. 1, 69. & \6yos rod tpyov iKpairfi {the report exceeded the 
thing itself). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. ipxovr f s /x4v diri Kcd ol ^ovk6\oi riev fioiPt 
KoX ol iiriTocpop^ol Tuv Jvrrcov, koI trdtnres 5c ol KoXovfievoi vofif7s, wv tuf iiri9- 
raTu<ri ^a> at v €Ik6tus tiy 6.p xovr e s r ovt ccy voixi^oivro {all those called 
herdsmen might properly be considered the commanders of tliose animals of which they 
have the rule). 1. 2, 8. {ol Ilfpocu robs ircuBas) SiSdoKovatv iyKparels eh'tu 
yao'Tphs Kol tr or ov {teach them to be iruisters of their belly, etc^ temperate in 
eating and drinking). 4.1, 14. i/jLol Se SokcI rrjs fieylart} s rjiovrjs voXb 
fidMora ffvfjLcpfpfiy iyKparrj clvcu (to be master of able to control the greatest pleaS' 
ure). 5. 1, 14. ra ixox^pa av^pu>iria iraouy, oiyMiy rS>v iiribvfJuSi y aKpar^ 
iari (depi'aved men are subject to, not able to control aU their passions). Her. 6, 61. 
KoA.\tcrT6U(r€i rh iraiBloy waffewy r S>y iy 'Sirdprr) yvvaiKwy { will surpass 
all the Spartan women in beauty). Th. 1, 81. rois SirXois avrwy Kcd ry wX'ff^u 
iirepipe poficv (are superior to them in arms, etc.). X. Ag. 5,2. 'AyricrL^jios 
r]ye7ro &pxovri irposrjKciv ov ixaX-cucla, oAA^ Koprtplif ruy iBiwTwy -repifiyai 
(that the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. relx** «■«" 
oieycvov abrov (you excelled him in despatch). PI. Gorg. 475, b. aK€\l>wfif^a, 
dipa Kvirri vire p ^dWf i rh aSiKcly rov a S t k e 7 Ci^a t. xal aXyovai fioWoy oi 
aSiKOvyres, tj ol aSiKov/ievoi (the Acc. is more usual with inr€p$ai\\€iy). L. 752, 
e. irpecfieve ly r&y iroWuy voXtwy (to take the preceaence of many 
cities). So also aycx^o'^al riyos usually with a participle.ro endu7e., per- 
mit, properly to hold one's self up over one). PI. Apol. 31, b. ay4xf<r^i^i rd* 
otK^luy afif\ovn4ywy {to permit domestic ajfairs to be ne^ected) . tk< ^^4- a 



^ 275.] GENITIVE CASE. 



393 



oi/K avex^rai rov iiAAo X^yovros. 'HrTciar^ai tS>v iiriSn/fiiwu {to be sub- 
ject to one's desires). Dem. Cor. 308, 244. oiSafiov ^tt7j,^6U airriK^ou t«v 
rapa *i\iinrov irpc'tr^ecwj/ {being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C. 
1. 3, 3. 2a>KpaTr?s Sfvffias ^vuu fUKpas aTrh /jLiKpwv ovSh TiyeTro neiod(rSrai rSiv 
d TT 6 -KoKKSiv Kol fi^yaXuv iroT^Ka /col /te^oAa ^vovtuv {did not think that he tms 
inferior to those making many great sacrifices, etc.). Hier. 4, 1. ix^ydhov aya- 
bod IX € 10 yfKT €7 {comes short of a great good). 'To-repe?*/ Trjs fidxvs {to come 
after the battle), 'rtrrfpi^eiy ruv KaipHv {to be behind opportunities, to fail 
tousethem). "tar (piC^iv twv %pyo)v. X. Hier. 1 , 1 8. tout*? t^ 6U(^po<ruv77 t^s 
iXirihos iJ.fioi/( KTova I rvpavvoi tuv ISiutwv. 2, 1. /JLciove KTOvvras 
Koi. airwy koI ttotuv koX o^^wv {comir<^ short of food^ etc.). 

Remark 1. 'Hyenoveveiv and rjydcr^ai in the sense of to go before, 
to show the way, with 6S6y expressed or understood, govern the Dat. ; k par e^v in 
the sense of to conquer, regularly governs the Ace., but in the sense of to be 
vu^ter of pUiri, to rule, have the command of the Gen., e. g. KpareTu tovs tto- 
f^ilovs (vincere) ; Kpariiv rf/s x<^po-^i t^s it J Aew s, Twy ivavriwv^ rSav 
iir tdv/iiuyy r ov 6povs (all in Xen.). 

Rem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually put in the 
Dat., but is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. Iv rivi, eh n, Kara, ri, 4irl 
rivi. — With iirraadcu vir6 is often joined with the Gen., e.g. Th. 1, 62. ri 
arparSireSoy tj a a ar o virh r uy 'A^r^vaiuy. 

2. The Comparative aud adjectives in the positive with the 
force of the Comparative, e. g. numerals in -ao-tos and -ttXovs; 
Scvrepo^, TTtpLTToSi etc., take the object by which the comparison 
is expressed in the Gen. Genitive of Comparison. 

X. An. 7. 7, 41. ovTify yonl^u) avZpX KaWlov elycu KTri/xa ouSe KafiirpoT epov 
kptrris >fal Z iKaioffvvris /col yfvvai6T-t]Tos {I do not think that man has 
any possession more beautiful than virtue, etc.). X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ov Srfirov rhy 
&f>X<"^* Twi/ i,pxofifvcty T ovr\p6r epoy vposrjKei eiuai {it does not become a 
commander to he more base than his subjects). Eur. Med. 965. XP^^^^ ^^ Kpeicr- 
avv fivplwv \6yuy 0poro7s {is better than a myriad of words). Her. 7, 48. 
rh 'Z)^r]yiKhy (rrpdTfVfJM <paiy€rai iro\Kav\T](T lov taeabai rov rifierepov 
{that the army will l>€ much more numerous than ours). 8. 137. SnrKricrios iyeyero 
ainhs iwvrov {he was twice as great as before). 6,120. va-repoi aTriKOfxeyot 
T^j crvfjLfioXrjs IfiflpovTo Znws bcfiaaor^ai tovs M-nSovs {though they came later 
than the battle, after the battle). Ov^evhs hevTepos {second to, inferior to no one). 
Ovhfvhs Sarepos. Ta>y apKovvTwv irepirrh. KTT\aa<T^ai {to acquire more 
than enough). 

Rem. 3. Sometimes the object of comparison is denoted, like a space-rela- 
tion, by irpd and iivri with the Gen., or by vapd and irp6s with the Ace. See 
prepositions. 

3. With verbs of buying and selling, e. g. ^vcla-^ai, ayopd^ici/, 
irplaarSaj^ KraaSaL, 7rapa\ap/3dv€LV ; TrwA-eiv, aTroStSoor^at, 7repi8i8oo--^at, 
fitSoVai ; — also with verbs of exclmnging and bartering, e. g. 



394 SYNTAX. [J 274 

aXX.dTT€tv, aXXoLTTea-^aiy 8ux/x€t^c<T^at, Xveiv, etc. ; — with, verbs of 
valuing, e. g. rL/xav, rt/xacr^at, Troieta^at, a^tovj/, d^toCcr-^ot, and with 
the adjective a|tos. Genitive of price. 

Her. 5, 6. {ol Qp'fiiKes) atviovTai ras yvvtuKas irctpk rSiv yov4uy xpVh^'''^* 
ft.€yd\wu (buy their wives at a great price). X. C- 2. 1,20. ruy ir 6yt»y iruKov 
a IV T]fxiv irdvTa raydd^ oi ^eoi (sell all good things to us for toils). Cy. 3. 1, 36 
<rv be, Sj TiypdfT}, Ki^ov jxoi, ir6<rov tiy irpiaio, wsre rijy yvycuKa a-roXafieTw 
{what would you pay to regain your wife). 'Eya* fiey, c<^, S> Kvpe, nhy rrjt ^vxvi 
V piaifiTiv, &ST€ /f/j7roT€ Aarpevaai ravTTiy (/ u>ould buy her at the expense of my 
life). II. Cf 236. Tei^xf' li/xe ifi ey, x/'i'O'fo X*^''*''^''? fKarS^i^oi ivvfafioioay (uxw 
exchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 37. kou av 5e, 2) 'Apfityify 
airdyov Trjy T€ yvyalKa Kou avrovs TToiSas jxriSey avruy Karad fi s {nulla re pre 
lis deposita^ having paid nothing for them). Oi aya^ol olSfyhs iw KfpSovs r^y 
rf/s irarpidos iKev^cplau ay raWd^aivTo {the good would exchange the freedom 
of their country for no gain). 11. A, 514. Irjrphs yap ayrjp ToKKwy avr d^ios 
&\\(ay {is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. 6 AvK6<ppwy ovSi ay a- 
Kpifftos 'Jj{/w(r€ rhy <p^povTa rriy ayyfXlr^y {thought the one who brought the 
message not worthy of an examination). 6, 112. ifuLxoyro k^ltes \6yov {worthy 
of praise). 'A^iovv nva t i/jirjs {to cortsider worthy of honor). X- Cy. 2. 2, 17. 
^7»'y€ ovSev kvKTUTipov yofil^o) ru>y iy avbptinrois (Jyai rov rUty Xfftay T6y Tf 
KaKhy RoL ayd^hy a^iovtr^ai. TifjMy riyi riyos and riyd riyos, e. g. 5 c « o t o - 
hdyrwy, rov baydrov {to fine one ten talents, to sentence one to death, to con- 
eider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., used of the accuser: riuaa^al 
riyi apyvplov, ^aydr ov, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one ; com- 
monly, however, d'lKT^v is here supplied. 

Hem. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usaallj 
considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by avrl with the Gen. 

Rem. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. ^ 262, b.) expresses a 

much greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with' verbs. For where two 

objects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutoal 

relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems 

united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the 

I rule : When two substantives are connected with each other, the > e which 

i completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in th As ad- 

* jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive, 

many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are 

derived, take the Ace, e. g. Kparlarov irarphs 'EW-qywy Tpa<peis {sprung from, 

like natus alicujus), S. Ph. 3. 

Rem. 6. The attributive genitive is called the Subjective, the Objective, 
or Passive genitive, according to the mode in which it originates in the sen- 
tence : 

(a) It is called the Subjective Gen., when it originates from the subject of 
the sentence or from a Gen. depending on cTkoi and ylyyeab^at. It always de- 
notes something active (instead of passive), the cause, author, hence also the 
possessor, the whole in relation to its parts, e. g. ol rod S4ySpov Kofnroi (arising 
from rh SeySpoy <pfp(i Kapirovs), the frtiits of the tree, the fruits which the tree 
produces. Th ttjs <ro<f>las KdWos (arising from ^ <ro<pla rapfx^^ itdXXos or 
t} ao<pia Ka\'ii iariy or KdWos iffrl t^s <ro<f>las)t the beauty of wisdom^ tk» 



^\ 276, 277.'^ ACcuflATivE case. 395 

beaut ij which icisdom causes. Ta rod 'Ofiripov irotrifiaTa. .'0 rod Paai\4us 
vl6s. 'H Tov aubphs cperf}. 

{h) It is called the Objective or Causative Gen., when it originates from tha 
object of the sentence, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of an intransi- 
tive verb, e. g. ■^ ttjs a- (pi as 4-iri^vfiia, the desire for wisdom (eViiS^u/xw rrjs 
<ro<pias, the <ro(pias being the cause of the iTn^vfiu)] 6 ttjs operas epojs, vir- 
tutis amor, the loce of or for virtue {ipw rris aper^s) ', eiji/oid tij/os-, good-will 
toioards one {efjvovs etfjl rivi) ] iTrifj.4\iia rSiv ir t\e fiiKwv epyav, cura rerum 
bellicarum {iirifieXovfiai tuu voKf/jLiKuu ipywu). 'H tcou n\aT aie cov iiria-rpa- 
Tela instead of irphs tovs n., the expedition against the Plataeans. Th. 1, 108. 
iu avo^dafi rijs yrjs instead of iirl rrjs yris, in disembarking on the land. 

(c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object 
of transitive verbs in the Ace, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of a 
transitive verb, and so denotes the thing atfected or caused by the ti-ansitive 
action, e. g. ■^ r ijs iroXfws ktIctis (from Kri^ei TT]yir6\iv), thecity being that which 
<s jx)sstssrd. 'O T^s i iricTT o\ri s ypa<pfvs (from ypd<p€L 4TrL(TToK7]v), the e7rt<r- 
ro\-f) being the object acted upon. 'H rwv KaKu>v 4pywv irpa^is. 

m 

Rem. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives expressing dif- 
ferent relations. Her. 6, 2. 'IffTioToy uire'Si/ce rSiv 'Iwvtoy r^v r]y€/xoulT]v tov 
wphs Aapuoy ir9\4fiov the command of the lonians in the war against Darius. 

4 276. (2) Accusative. 

The Ace. is the WJtitJier-case, and hence denotes: (a) in the 
local relation, the goal, hniit, or point to which the action of the 
verb is directed, e. g. ucttu /xoXetv, to go to the city ; — (b) in the 
causal relation, the effect, consequence, object produced; also 
the object put by the action in o-jjo^sive condition, i. e. tlie object 
on which the action is performed, 

§ 277. A. Local Relation. 

The Ace. in its local relation (Ace. of local termination), denotes the local 
limit, place, or object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Ace. is 
used with wrbs of motion, going, coming, etc ^ yet this usage is found only in 
the poets, especially in Homer. Od. 7, 162. oi fief a-Ko<TTp4^aines efiav v4as 
iifi<pi(Kl<rtTas (they vcent to Uie ships). II. o, 317. Kvl<r(n\ 5" evpavhv f/ce {arose to 
heaven). Od. a, 1 76. iroXKoX Xaav av4pes w^repoy Sw (came to our house). S. 0. T, 
35. &<rrv KaSfxehy /loXuy. Eur. Med. 7. Vlr]5eM irvpyovs yvs eirKewr' 'IwA/cfos. 

Rkmakk. In prose, and usuallv also in poetry, a preposition is joined with 
the Ace, which defines still more definitely the relation mdicated by the Ace, 
e. g. els, in, into. &>s, to, Kari, downwards, kyd, uvwards, iirep, over, 4ir. upon, irepl 
and au<pl, around, roundabout, fierd, into the midst, after, rrp6s,Jp, into the presence 
of rood, near to, {nr6, under, e. g. Uuai 4s t^ ^6\iy, irpoeX^e^v ^s^ rhv ^^acriXea, 
iepl7rif.<plThy^6Kiy^aiyeiy-4nl rhy ^p6yoy aya^aiueiy-- eXSfe^y /.era Tpwas 
— ttiai irapa fiaai\4a — i4yai ityits "OKvfuroy — leyai inrh yaiau. 



396 SYNTAX. [♦ 276 

B. Causal Relation. 
§ 278. (a) Accusative denoting Effect, 
l.The Accusative denoting effect is used as in other lan- 
guages, e. g. ypd<f>o} iTTunoX-qv. The original and simplest form 
of the Ace. of eifect (of the object produced), is where a verb, 
It .^^ S"<^^- either transitive or Hrt»BBwre, takes the Ace. of an abstract 
substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or 
has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pro- 
noun or an attributive clause commonly belongs to the Ace. 
This is often called the Cognate Accusative. 

PL Symp. 181, b. ovrJs icTiv (6 € pa s), tv oi <pav?^i Jbv aySfpanrcev ipwa ip 
(which had men love). PI. L. 680, e. fiac iKiiav trcu wy iiKcuoTdrrjy /Sacrt- 
\€v 6 fi€ vol {ruling a kingdom). Prot. 325, c. iirtp,(\ovyrai trdtrav ivi/xe- 
Aetoj' [they care for im'th all care, bestow all care upon). Dem. Aph. 845.4 
Seofiai v/xwu SiKalav Se-qaiv. X. An. 1. 3, 15. crrpaTrjy^jaoyTa ifii 
ravTrjy riju err parr] yiau (to be general of this command, army). 6. 3, 6. c u t <J - 
XTjo'oi' TovTo rh euTux'?M« (xcere fortunate in this good fortune, obtained this 
advantage). Id. H. 7^ 1,5. ■jrA.cto-Toi/y koL ficyla-rovs &ya>vas ^yuvivfitvoi 
Kara baKarrau cAax'O'Ta ixkv arrornvxi^Kare, irXflffra St KaTcop^uKctre (having 
contended in the greatest contests ) . Andoc. M yst. 5.31. apa ad/u. fy oi rhs ficyia- 
ras apas v/xly. So KoXas irpd^cis irpdrreiv ; (pya^fobai tpyov Ka\6v ; JStpx^^ Suceday 
apxvv, otVxpo'' dov\elay 5ov\evfiy ] fityav irSKffwyiroXffxfiv] x^^^*' *^^'** ^^***^*^- 
'EKSrifious cTTpareias i^-peaay (like t^oSoy i^ityai). Th. 1, 112. Acucfitufi^ 
yioi rhv Uphv KaXovfxfvov ir 6K(fxoy i <n par ev cr ay (like <rrpaT(iay arftatrivtip). 
So '6pK0vs ojjLvvyaiy aabeufly y6(T0v, ^v ^ioy. X. Hier. 6, 7. xo7oy 8t rtya Zvyov 
iKoinu. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can 
be used, e. g. 'O oiKeTos ijfiiv trSKf/xos ovrus iiroKf firi^ri (our intestine tear 
was so warred, so managed), Pi. Menex. 243, e. KaXcu vpd^fis "rpdrrowTau 
So also with adjectives, e. g. KaKoi iraaav KaKiav, PI. Kp. 490, d. In certain 
phrases, such as (pvXaK^s (pvKdrrfiv, excubias agere^ <p6pov (<p6povs) (pfpeiy^ tribu- 
turn solvei-e, iro/jLtr^v irofiireiy, pompam ducere, the substantive can stand without 
an adjective, because here the substantive is used in a special and pregnant 
sense. 

2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the 
verb, or of a similar signification "vvith it, an attribute of such 
cognate substantive, can also be used ; in this case, the verb 
frequently has a pregiiant sense, since it contains, at tlie same 
time, an additional idea. - •> 

Ni/ca>' fidxv*' = vIktiv fidxvs (to conquer a battle, i. e. to vrin a battle) ; so 
O \vfnr la ( = '0\vfnriujy yltcqy) y iKay (to conquer in the Olympic games), Th. 1, 
126. Nik ay y av fiax^tis = yiKrjv yavfiaxiuy (to gain a naval victary)^ 7, 66, 



M 



♦ 278.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 39-7 

viKav yvditiTiv, sententiam vincere, viKav hiK-nv (to carry one's opinion, one's 
suit, triumphantly); like Si/ia ^cjv is: rit iwiylKia (Upd or ^ifuiTa)^ eiayy4' 
\ia, Siafiariipia, yev4^\ia, to AvKuia, ydfiovs ^veiv (to offer a 
sacrijice on account 0/ victory, a festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate the victory, etc. 
hy a sacrijice)] rh UtpaiKhv wpxelro (danced the Persian dance), X. An. 
6. 1, 10;TaCTo (avv^-fffxaTa) avy^efitvoi (having made these agreements) -y 
ravra (= SpKovs Tovruy) 6n6<rai/T€s (having taken these oaths) ] rapdrreiu 
»oA.€/toi/ = rdpayfia iroXffxov (to stir up war, turhando bellum concitare, as it is 
said, bellum miscere), PI. Rp. 567. a. Passively, ir6\f/ji.os irphs tous 'Afi<pi<rae7s 
irapdx^V, Dem. Cor. 277, 151. 

3. The following constructions, likewise, mostly confined to 
poetry, deserve special notice ; in these, also, instead of the 
substantive from the same stem as the verb or with a kindied 
signification, the attributive of such kindred substantive is put 
in the Accusative : 

(a) Verbs signifying to shine, to bum, to flow, to pour, to shoot or spring forth, 
e. g. iiffr pdirr f ly yopyarnhy a4\as = aa-TpaTrT)v yop. aeXaos (to lighten a 
fearfully bright ligfu, i. e. casting a briglu and terriflc liglU), Aesch. Pr. 356 ; 
ddKK« ly $loy (germinating, producing the means of life), Pcrs. 61 7. 'Epf/x- 
yhy alfx (Stvaa (I jjourtd out black blood), S. Aj. 376. Sro^e iv SaKpva, 
oT/Aa, KdfxTTf I V fffXas, (>«1v yd\a (all confiued to poetry). 

(b) Verbs which express sound, laughter, panting, and smelling ; here, instead of 
the substantive, commonly an adjective merely, or even a pronoun is used, 
e.g. <pb tyytabai atr^tyts, ra'K(iy6y = <^o77bi' aa^ey^, etc. (to sound 
feeUe, etc.); ^8u (= rjivy ytKura) yf\ay (to laugh heartily) ; ijSv irveTv (to 
breathe swtetly) ; (itvfa irydoyrfs 'Axcuol breathing spirit); "Apeo Trytiy 
(Maitem spirare) ; 6(fiy r)iv: dfpivdy re koI \iyvphy uittjx** (^ roiros) 
T^ rwy rtrrlywy x^PV (resounds summer, etc., with a summer-like and shrill 
sound, comp. Lat. aestivum sonat, vox hominem [= sonum hominis] sonat), 
PI. Phacdr. 230, c. *A v € k (i 7 x « o" < tc aaoAo ffap56viov (burst into a sardonic 
laugfi), Kp. 337, a. 

(c) Verbs signifying to see, to look. Od. t, 446. avs vvp (= Upyixa irvpSs) 6<p' 
da\fio7ai SfSopKtits ( looking flre, flashing flre ) . So fi\€iriiy, 5 epKe- 
ffdai "Aprjy = j8A«V/xo "Aptos (to look war, terror); Spay aKK-hv (to look 
courage or boldness) ; StpK^tr^ai Stiyoy, ofifpSaKfoy, rcucfpa (to look terri- 
bly, etc.); ip6fioy /BAe'irciK (to look fury). II. o, 105. kok 6<r<r6fieyo5 
(looking evil, with a threatening look, comp. Eng. looking daggers), fi, 269. 
ixpf'^oy iJeii., looking foolish. PI. Ion. 535, e. K\aioyrds re koX Seiyhy 
i tifi\ fir yras. 



Remark 1. Bv this use of the Ace. numerous adverbial expressions can be 
explained, the place of the Ace. with its accompanying adjective bemg sup- 
plit-'d either bv a pronoun alone (rodro, T<^5e, TaOro, To5e, t2, ti, ovSev, ^Tjdev, 
I, a, etc.), or by a neuter adjective, e. g. Taura Wir^lff^ai koI tout a xa'P«»' 

34 



398 SYNTAX. [^ 279. 

Tois iroWots {to grieve at the same things, and to rejoice at the same), Dem, Cot' 
323, 292. Qavfiaffra cWA^TTovrat {are vxmderfuUy astonished), PL Symp. 
192, c. To Kp6.ri<rra 1]v^r)(Tai/ {were most flourishing), Th. 1,19. So fiaKphw 
K\aiciv ] rrdvTa evSaifJ-oyelv; uxpeKcly, fiKoLTrreiy, (7]fiiovy U€yd\cL, fiiKpd 
€V€py€Tuy rh fieyiffra, 7]Sv yeXay, fieya or fieydKa ippoyeiy, afiaprdyeifi, 
ScTa^ai, Siaipepeiy Ti, etc. 

Rem. 2. Here also belong such adverbial expressions as : x^^" (^<^^i fof 
the sake of), X'^P^*' ^M^''? <^^'' ("iea, tua, gratia), Su>pfd.y (gratis), dotriyrjy, rpolKOy 
udrTfy {incassum). So also tovto, ravra {therefore), rl {why), 5 {therefore). Eur 
Hec. 13. vediruTos 5' iiy TIpLafiiSuy h Kai fj.e yns vjre^fVffjL^ay. PL Prot. 310, C 
dA,A' auTck ravra yvv fj/cw iruph <r4 {on this very account). 

4. The Ace. denotes also the effect merely ai*ned at, the de- 
sign of the action ; yet almost always with neuter pronouns or 
adjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as 
CIS, TTpo'^i cTTt, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic- 
ular, belong here : 

'Kpri<rbai rivl rt (originating from xpv<''^<*i "rtri xP^lay), to use something 
for something; ird^cty (originating from xel^fiy rtyh. iretffiy), iiraiptiy^ 
iiror pvyf ly, irpoKaKels'^ai, ayayKd^fiy riyd r i, etc. Ovk Ix"> ^ f^ 
XP^'COftat «»Ty. Ti Sij xPV<'^H'f^<t rovru; {for what purpose shall we use 
him, what use shall toe make of him?). Tfj Kpi}yp rk irKfla-rov i^ia ixp^yf* 
{ad res maximi momenii), Th, 2, 15. Ileio-.^Tji'ai r^y iiyaxt^pv*^ t^t to be 
persuaded to a retreat (instead of the usual construction ctj r. a»'ox«p.), ib. 21. 
Tavrd ffe irorpvyu {I excite you to this). 'Atrfpxofuu, irply inrh (rod ti /*<«- 
foe ayayKaa-^TJyai {before I am compelled by you to anything more severe), TL 
Phaedr. 242, a. Tovro ovk ^irei^t rovs ^uKoicas {did not persuade the Pk»- 
caeans of this). Her. 1, 163 ; but iTorpvyciy ds fxaxw- 

Rem. 3. The Ace. of design or purpose, is transferred to the manner accordina 
to or in ichich something takes place. Here the fundamental idea is that of 
striving for an object. Thus rpSwoy, rovrov rhv rp6irov {hunc in modum, in this 
manner), irdyra Tp6irov, riya rpoiroy, Siicqv {in morem, according to the manner of, 
like), o/xoia {in like manner). i-KirriSfs {consiilto). rdxos and Korh rdxos {ceUriter), 
Commonly, however, prepositions are used A^-ith such adverbial expressions. 



$279. (b) Accusative of the suffering Object, i. e. the 
Object upon which the Action is performed. 

Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin, 
take some other Case than the Ace, or are constructed with 
prepositions. 

1. The verbs w^cXctv, ovLvdvat, 6vLvacr&cu, /SXaTrreLV, d8ix€U', cvox" 
Xctv (commonly with Dat.), v^pt^cu', Xv/juuVco-^^ai, Xcu^ao-.9ou, <rt- 
veaSai, XoiSo/actv (to chide) ; evcrefSelv, acre/SiLV ; Xo^^av, cvtSpevctv ; n- 
fiuipeicr^cu ', SepaTrevuv, 8opv<f>op€lVf CTrirpoTrci^tv (to provide urith /I 



♦ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 



399 



TTCl 



guardian); koXokcvciv, ^co-evW (^wtttciv Poet.), irposKwelv ; 
&€Lv; afj.ii[ii(TSax (Poet, respondere), remunerari; <^vAaTTeo-^cu, 
(vXajSilcrScu ; yuti/xctcr^Jat, ^77X0 Dv (io emulate). 

X. C. 1.2, 64. (2«Kp<{T77y) <^»/6pi.s ^I'^epoTrevw^'Touy^cous {evidently 
worshipped the gods). Aesch. Ctes. 618. rls &j/ efTj S^fiayuryhs toiovtos, Sstis rhp 
Hh Srifioy ^UTTfdffat Uyatro, robs 5e Kaipois, iu oTs ?iu adoC^a^ai r^v ir6Xiv, 
iWSoiTo ; (as would be able to flatter the people). UilSmv rh irXriSfos {to persuade 
the multitude ) . X. Hier. 4, 3. oi iroXlrox Sopv<popov(ri fxey a\\T}\ovs &v€v fiia^ou 
{keep guard over each other). R. L. 12, o-neTaa-rpaTOTr^Sevoin-ai yc {01 AoKcSaifjioyioi) 
mV irvKya koL tov trlyta^ai rovs iro\tfiltis Ij/e/ca, koL tov ucpeA^ty tovs 
tplKovs {for the sake 0/ injuring their enemies, aud assisting their friends). C. 4. 3, 
1 5. 4Keiyo Se a^v/jM, 2ti ^01 Soku rhs twk dewv evepycfflas ovS' ttv efs iroTe dv- 
bpuTKojy k^ious xc^o'ik afifififabai. Rer.6,l38.4\6xv<r otv rks rwv 'A^7]vaiwv 
yvyaiKas. Th. 1,32, IlKf Iff t apxoy, rhy AfuviSov, ovra ^acriKea Kcd 
ytoy Iti, ixfrpSwfvty {6 Tlavaayias). X. H. 5. 1, 17. ri i^Sioy, ^ fi-qSeua 
iydpcoTruy KoKaKtvtiy /ix//t( 'E A A. rj »' o, fi-ffTe fidpfiapoy, eHycKa /itiTi^oD; — 
TlposKvytiy fiaffiKea. PI. Kp. 334, b. ox^cAelj/ fxlv robs <pi\ovs {5ok(7) 
ri SiKcuoavnj, fiKdirr tiy 8« robs ix^povs. 'ASiKcly robs <pl\ovSy 
ifipi^eiv robs wa7has. TloXXdKis koX SovKot r ifiwpovyrai robs aSl- 
Kovs StffrSras {take vengeance on their unjust masters). X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. ol 
(pvKoKfs 4\oii6povy avr6y {hut the Depontnt XoiSopeladal riyi, to reproach) . 

Remark 1. Some of the above verbs take a Dative or a preposition with 
its Case: (o) ct^eKtiy riyi but vcr}' seldom, and then in the poets; (^8) 
iiSiKf7y (Is, "wpist ^ii^l fp^ riya'i (7) afff^f'tv ds and irtpl riya\ evtre- 
^fTi/ fU riva^ "ftpi, ^P^i rtya; (5) Kvnaiyeabai tivi frequently; (e) AwySS- 
<ri&o/ Tin sometimes ; {Q b fipi^t ly eJfr nvo often ; {r\) iirirpoTrfvuy tiv6s 
somewhat frequently (§ 275, 1). 'A.p«<rKfty takes the Ace. only in the sense 
of to satisfy, but the Dat. in the sense of to please. 

Rem. 2. Aup(7abai tivI ti {donare alicui aliquid, to present something to 
some one), is the construction in Attic prose, not Swpela^cd nvd tivi {donare 
aliquem aliqua re, to present one with something). 

2. Verbs signifying to do good or evil to any one, by word or 
deed, e. g. (vepytTilv, KaKovpyelv, KaKorroLilv ', ivXoyilv, KaKoXoyelv] 
cv, KaXu)<i, KOKioi XeyetVf ^ittciv, airay opivcLV. 

S. Aj. 1154. iv^pwiTfj fi^ Spa Tobs t c^vtjkJtos k a k & s {do not injure the 
dead). X. Cy. 1. 6, 29. KaKovpytlv robs (piXovs {to harm one's friends). 
ZvtpyfTtly r^y ir ar piSa {to do good to one's country). X. C. 2. 3, 8. irus S' 
hy 4yu ayfTirr-fj^iuy (tr}y aS(\<p^ XP^<^'^«'» 4iri(TTa.p.fv6s yeKalcdXeyeivrhved 
\4yoyTa, Koi cS irotcTv rhy d iroiovvra; rhy (xivroi koX \6ya> Koi epyw 
Tfiptififyoy 4fji( ayiay ovk tiy Svyaifi^v o&r' el> \4y€iy, oik' e5 Troie7y {know- 
ing how to speak well of one who speaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well 
to me ; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one who, etc.) In- 
stead of the adverbs tl and kokus with irou7y, etc., the Greek uses also the cor- 



400 SYNTAX. [$ 279. 

responding adjectives ; hence Ka\a, KaKh. iroie7vy \iy€iv nvi (to do goM 
or evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See § 280. 

3. Verbs signifying to persevere, to await, to wait for, and tkt 
contrary, e. g. fxiveLv (like manere), Trepiftei/eiv, S^app^cv, Kaprepeiv:. 
<f>evy€Lv, a7ro<f>€vy€LVj aTroStS/oacrKetv, SpaTrerevctv. 

M')] ^€vye rhu kIvSvvov [do not flee from danger). Qa^^eTre ^dvarov {fidentt 
animo expectate mortem). X. An. 3. 2, 20. rhs fiev fidxots ^apfieTre {bravely 
stand or' endure the battles). Cy. 5. 5, 42. ejf riv4s ere TijjiSxnv, avTcurirdCov /col evdx^t 
avTois, 'iva ere koX ^appiiffwa iv {that they may confide in you, ut fiducia te 
complectantur). 'O Sovhos aireS pa rhv Secirorrjv {ran away from his master). 
PI. Symp. 216, b. dpairereia) oZv avrhv ko^ (pevyw {I run away from him, 
etc.). Dem. I. Phil. 50, 37. oirwv irpay/xdrcov Kaipol ov fjLevovffi rijv r}fnr^' 
pav fipadvTTJTa {do not wait for your slothfulness). 

Rem. 3. After the analogy of <^ e u 7 e t y, other verbs also, which contain 
the idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn back from, to retreat from, to 
abhor, are constructed with the Ace, though but seldom, e. g. v tt x « p ^ 1 1/ rhv 
ox^ov (to retire from the crowd) ; eKtrrrivai kIuSwov (to shrink from, shun fear) ; 
4 KT p 4ir eff^ a I, vir e kt p eir e c^ai, utt €|epxe<r3-ot, aTrocTT pitpetr^ai. 
®a^f>€7v Tivi signifies to have confidence in something (fidere aliqua re). 

4. Verbs of concealing and being concealed: Xav-^avciv, KpvTv 
Tciv {celare), Kpvima^ai; — also the verbs <j)&dv€Lv (antevertere), 
XetTTctv, cTrtXctTTctv (defcere) ; — verbs or particles of 5z^;eanw^, 
the person or tiling by which one swears being in the Ace. 

PL Rp. 365, d. ^eovs oihe Kav^dveiv, otfre Pid<ra<r^ai 5vuaT6v {to escape 
the notice of , be concealed from the gods). Kpiirreiv rivd ri (to conceal any- 
thing from any one), see § 280. Her. 6, 115. irepUirKwov ^ovyiov fiovxSfieyot 
(p^TJyai Tohs ^A^Tjvaiovs a.TnK6fievoi is rh 6.cnv (wishing to anticipate the 
Athenians). 'ETriXelirei /xe 6 xP'^^o^y V r)P-4pa (fails me). X. An. 1. 5, 6. rh 
ffTpdrevfia 6 (tTtos i-TT 4\iv e. ''Ofj.vvfii irdpras ^eov 5 (I swear by all the 
gods). Hence fid, ov fid, vaL fid, v^ Aia. 

Rem. 4. Also the two impersonal verbs Se? and xPVy i^ the sense of to 
need, are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or person, 
of which or whom one is in need ; this construction, however, belongs only to 
poetry, e. g. Od. a, 124. /xv^a-eai, '6TTe6 <r e XP'h (yo^ w^jYZ tell of ivhat you are 
in need). Aesch. Pr. 86. avrhv ydp ere Set Ilpo fXTf^eus (you yourself need 
Prometheus). Aet with the Dat. of the person belongs to prose and poetry, e. g. 
PI. Menon. 79, b. Set ovv ffoi rr)s avrrjs ipwr-fiaews {you need the same inquiry). 
In the sense of necesse est, opus est, with an infinitive, the Ace. of the person is 
common with both verbs, e. g. Se? (xp'h) o'e ravra iroieTy : the Dat. is much more 
rare, and with xp'h seldom even in poetry. X. C 3.3, 10. el ff 01 Sea i SiSda-Keiv. 
Comp. X. 0. 7, 20. S. Ant. 736. iWcp yhp ^ 'fiol xp'h 7^ tv^S' ^PX^^" 
X^ou6s. 

5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of tJie mind, 
e. g. ff>o^€L(T'^at, Betorai, rpetv', aio^vecr-^at (reve?'e?'i), aiSeLoSai', Svs- 
-)(paCv€Lv ; eK7r\?y7T€(r^at, KaTaTrXi^rrecr^at ; oXo^vpea-S^ai (miserari). 



^ 279.] ACCTTSATIVE CASE. 



401 



X. Cy. 8.1,28. imXKov tovs ai8ovfx4vovs alSovvTairoij/ amiBuv oi 
&u^puiroi {respect the respectful). An. 1. 9, 6. Kvpos &pktov ttotc e'7rt<|)epo- 
fidvvf ovK irp^aev {was not afraid of a hear). Cy. 3.»3, 18. {ol iroXefiioi) 
IxaWov Tin as (pofiii(rovTai, Urai/ a.Kov<rw(riu, on ovx ws (po$ovfjLej/oi Trr-qaao- 
fi€u avTovs oXkol Ko^rj/xeyoi {will fear us, hearing that we shall not crouch with 
fear on account of them). Alffxvvofiai tIv ^e6v {I feel ashamed before the 
god). R. L. 2, 11. alSela-^ai rovs &pxovTa5. Cy. 1. 3, 5. Kal (re, S 
iroTTTre, fxva art 6fievov ravra ra fipd!>(ji.aTa dpa> {I see that yon are dis- 
gusted with, loathe this food). PI. Symp. 1 73, c. rovs eralpovs e A. e «. Dem. 
Cor. 290, 185. KaravXayrivat rhy ^Ixnrirov {to he panic-stricken by 
Philip). In poetry this use of the Ace. is much more extensive. 

Rem. 5. Verbs which express the idea of motion, sometimes take (as transi- 
tive verbs) the Ace. of the thing put in motion by them, as a passive object ; 
this construction is used in poetry, seldom in prose. The following 
verbs especially belong here, fiaiveiv, ataa-eiv, nepau, ttXcTu peireiy, 
(TireuScty, etc. S. Ant. 1158. tvxV kut appeirei rhv evrvxov vra 
{fortune sinks the fortunate man). 'EK^alveiv, iiraiaa-ciy iroSa {to put out 
the foot, move the foot quickly); aiaa-eiy X^P°- {furiously to set or move the 
hand to); ^aaiv, irSSa irepau, all poetic. Th. 6, 39. Ko/ca (nrevSeiv {ac- 
celerare). In this way, verbs expressing sound, in the pregnant sense of putting 
an object in motion and causing it to sou7id, are sometimes constructed with the 
Ace. II. A., 160. Xinroi kcIv^ ^x^o. KpoT dXi^ov ava irToXe/xoio ye(pvpas {rattle 
the chariots, hurry off the chariots with a rattling sound). Her. 6, 58. \4fir}Ta 
KpoT eovff I {rattle the kettle, strike it again a)id again). So also in a pregnant 
sense, the poets say, ^ehv xofeveiv, eXlcraiv {deum chords, saltando cele- 
brare). Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 552. 

6. With verbs of motion, the space or way passed over is put 
in the Ace, these being the objects on which the action of the 
verb is performed; so also the time during which an action 
takes place (in answer to the question, How long?), is put in 
the Ace, as being the object measured by the action; so too 
measure and weight (in answer to the question, How much?), 
are put in the Ace, these also being the objects on which the 
action of the verb is performed. 

Boij/eiv, irepav, '4p7r€ IV, ir o pev effdrai 656 v {to go the way, etc., comp. 
itque reditque viam). Eur. Med. 1067. a\A' efjUt yap 5^ rXriH-opea-Tdrrjif 
65 6 V {will go the way). X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. /x^rt ra Svsfiara Tropevov, dAA^ 
k4\(v4 aoi rovs rjye/xSuas r^v f>a(Tr't]v {6Uv) Tiyela^ai {do not march over 
the difficult places, but command your guides to lead over the easiest road). An. 4. 4, 
1. 4irop€v^i)ffav Zia rris 'Ap/xcvias Tredlov airav Koi Keiovs y7]K6(^ovs 
(marched over a plain, etc.). R. Equ, 8, 10. ^v & fikv (pevyr) iirlrov 'Ittttov irav 
roTa xwpta {per varia loca). Cy. 1.6, 43. &y€iy {arpaTiav) ^ (rrevas fj 
vXarelas SBovs. Dem. I. Phil. 49, 34. &y(ay Kal <pepoou rovs iv\4ovras 8rd- 
Karrav {sailing through thesea). yipovov, rhv xP^^°^^fi^ " ^*"*^' (different 
from XP^'^V) <^^vv XP^^Vi ^^^ % time, gradually), vvKra, T]fi4pav {during the night, day)* 
Her. 6, 127. ii ^ifiapis ^K^ia^i rovrov rhv xp^vov fidXurra {was flourishing 

34* )^^ 




402 SYNTAX. [$ 279. 

during this time). X. An. 4. 5, 24. KoraXafiPdvei r^v ^vyarepa rod Kwfidpxo* 
ivvdrriv Tjfiepav yeyafirjfieinfju {who had been married nine days). Cy. 6. 3, 1 L 
Kal X^^^ ^^ 'f*^ rpiTrjv rjfiepav rh avrh tovto ewpaTTOv. Dem. Phil. 3. 1 16, 23L 
X<rxv<rav S4 ri Kol &r}$aioi rohs T€\evraiovs rovrovarl xp^fovs /teret t^» 
iy AevKTpois fidxw [during these last times). Her. 1, 31. trra^lovs -TrivT^ koI 
rearffepdKoyra SiaKO/JLlffavTes airiKovro is rh lp6v {having passed over forty -five 
stades). 6, 119. airix^iv SsKa /cot 5ir]Koalov5 (rraSiovs {to be distant tuxf 
hundred and ten stades). 6, 135. MiAxtaSTjs atreirAee Ildpoi/ iroXiopK-iiffas re l| 
K(ti eiKOort 7]fi4pas. ''E<p€(roy airex^i^ airh "SidpSeuu rpiav TjfjLepwv oSov. X. C. 
3. 6, 1. ouSeTTw ^iKoffiv erij yeyovdos (like viginti annos natus, twenty years old). 
Here belongs the Ace. with Svvaa^aiy tobe worth. Her. 3, 89. rh Bafiv\6vi.ov 
rdXavrov Sivarai Evfioidas efiSo fx^ kovtu uveas {the Babylonian talent 
is worth [weighs as much as, amounts to] seventy Euboean minae). 

Rem. 6. In poetry, the Ace. of the local object is sometimes used eren with 
verbs denoting rest, e. g. Kela-^ai, arrival, ^crSfai, bdaaeiv, Ka^i^^iv, etc. (instead 
of iv with the Dat., as in prose). Here also the Ace. represents the space as 
the object acted upon, or taken possession of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. {T6irov irposiSeiv 
i^4\eis) Uvriva K€7rai {quemjacens occupatum tenet). Comp. Larger Gram. 
Part n. § 554, Rem. 3. 

Rem. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Ace. to define more 

fully the extension in space and time, viz., avd,from a lower to a higher place, 

e. g. oca TTOTttfjibv irXeiv, ava vvKra ; — Kard, from a higher to a lower place, e. g. 

1 Kara iroTafxhv irKeiv, Kara rhv ^iov ; — afjLcpi and Trepi, round about, e. g. fiaiveiv 

I afx(pl (or irepl) rijv Tr6\i.v, aficpl rhv x^'-l^^^^^ ir^pX to. MTySt/cd ; — vTr6, under, {xj)* 

', ^\iov, virh vvKTa, sub noctem ; — imep, over ; — irapd, near by, along, by the side of, 

\ e. g. Ttapa rhv Ttoraphv iropeve(r^ai, Trap' oXov rhv fiiov ; — eTr:, upon, e. g. iirl vara 

\ hdKd<T(X7]S irXiiv, iirl iroKvv XP^^^^ 'i — ^"*5 through, e. g. Sjo hwixara fiulveiv^ Siii 

viKra ; — fierh. ravra, postea ; — ivphs eawepav, towards evening. 

Rem. 8. Prom this use of the Ace. to denote space, time, and quantity, 
very many adverbial expressions have originated: (a) rrjv raxianiv (dSoV), 
celerrime; ri]v Trpdorrfv, primum ; r)}v ev^^lav , recte, straight forward ; /xaKpdv, far ; 
\&\Xr]v Kal &K\r}v, sometimes here, sometimes there, etc. II. »|/, 116. iroWa S' 6,vav- 
ra, Kdravra, irdpavrd re, 86xM-^d r ■^?^ov {they passed over inany up hills, 
down hills, straight and cross ways ; — (b) a-finepov, to-day ; avpiov, to-morrow ; apxh^t 
T^v apxhv, properly, at first, omnino ; riXos, rh reXevra7ov, finally ; viov, lately ; 
rrpSrepov, irpwrovy rh irparov, rh irpiv, rh avr'iKa, ravvv, rh Trdhai, rh iraKatov, rh 
\onr6vf etc. 5 — (c) TToWd, saepe; ra iroWd, plerumque ; iroXv, fieya, /xeyd\a, fie- 
yiara, oXiyov, fUKpov, fiiKpd, ffvxvd, fxaKpd, "icov, roaovro, irdvra, etc. So also 

firiKOSy V^TJ^OS, 

7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs 
*-< ' and intransitive adjectives of every kind, to explain and define 

their meaning more fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the 
object as acted upon or suffering, since it denotes the object to 
which the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers 
or is directed. This Ace. is used most frequently in specifica- 
tions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace. 
of more definite limitation^ sometimes the Ace. of synecdoche. 



? 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 

Her. 2, 111. Kd^vav rovs 6(p^a\(ji.o^ s (to be pained in or in respect, to the 
eye$). 3, 33. t^s <pp4vas vyiaivew [to be sound in mind). X. C. 1. 6, 6. dAyelv 
Tohs ir65as (to have pain in the feet). 4. 1, 2. ipavephs ^v Sw/cparTjs ov rSiv rii 
<rd)fiara vphs S>pav, aWa twv ras i//ux^^ "^P^^ operV fS 'ir€(pvK6Twv i^iefjLcvos 
(that he vxis not desirous of those well-constituted in body for beauty, but of those well- 
adapted in mind, etc.). PI. Rp. 453, b. $ia(p4pet yvy}) avSphs t^v (pixriu {woman 
differs from man in respect to her nature). 462, d. 6 ^v^pwiros rhv d6.KTv\ov 
aXyu {is pained as to, has a pain in, his finger). Ka\6s iarri ra ofifiara {is 
beautiful as to his eyes, has beautiful eyes). KokJs iari r^jv ^pvx'hf- So aya^6s, 
ffO(f)6s, <pp6vifx.os, xP'hc^l^os, xP'no"r^s, diKaios, etc., with the Ace. 'Aya^hs rex^nv 
Tivd. Her. 3, 4. ^dvrfs koX yua>fj.r}P iKav6s, koI to TroX^fiia &\Kifios ^j/. X. 
Cy 2. 3, 7.av4<TTTi ^epavXas rh ffSifia ovic acpvfjSf koI r))v i^vx^v ovk ayevvci 
avSpl ioiKws. 8.4, 18. Seivhs ravrriv t)]v Texvriv. So bavp.affr'bs rb )it€- 
76(^0 5, rh k6.\Kos {wonderful for his size and beauty, of wonderful size and 
beauty). The English commonly uses prepositions to express the force of this 
Ace, viz. in, in respect to, of; or when it stands with an adjective, the English 
sometimes changes the Ace. of the thing into a personal substantive, and 
makes the adjective as an attributive agree with it, e. g. aya^hs r4xvWi <^ good 
artist, comp. Eng. he is a good shot, i. e. marksman ; or the prepositions of or witk 
are placed before the substantive denoting the thing, and the attributive ad- 
jective is made to agree with that substantive, e. g. yeavias Ka\hs tV ^vx'fji', of 
or rvith a lovely spirit. 

Rem. 9. Sometimes the prepositions els, irfiSs, Kard are joined with the Ace, 
in which case the relation is analogous to an Ace. of space, denoting direction, 
as 5ia<f>4p€iv eXs Ti, e. g. els aperiiv. X. C. 3. 5, 1. ivSo^orepa rj ttSMs els rk 
iro\efjLiKa earai. 'Xoephs irpos ti. — On the Dat. see § 285, (3), (b). 

Rem. 10. From this use of the Ace, many adverbial expressions have orig- 
inated. Thus the expressions of measure : edpos, vypos, /xeye^os, ^d^os, firJKos, 
ttXtj^os, api^fM6y ; also yeyos, wofxa, fj.epos, rb ahu fiepos, Trp6<pa(Tiv, under pretence, 
-rh kKT^bes, yuJiix-qv efiTjv. Her. 6, 83. KXeavSpos yevos ecbv ^lyaXevs ott' 'Ap- 
KaStTjr {being a Phigalian by birth). 7, 109. XifivT] iovcra Tvyxdvei wsel Tpi^Kovra 
ffraSicau t^u ireploSov (in circumference). X. An. 2. 5, 1. /tera ravra a<pl- 
Kovro eirl rhu Zdfiarou iroTafihu rh eZpo s Terrdpwv irXebpav {four plethra in 
width). 4. 2, 2. ol fiev iiropevouTO rh rrXri^os ws Sisx^^^oi {two thousand in 
number). — Moreover rovvavTiov, Tavavria, on the contrary ; raXXa, in respect to 
other things ; rh oXov, omnino ; ap.(p6repa, tovto {ravra) /xeu — rovro {ravra) Se ; 
oifSev, in no respect; r\, in some respect ; TroAAa, irdura, etc. — Th eV e'^e, rovv* 
cVe, roviri ae, rh els ifie, quantum ad me (te), as far as it relates to me, etc. 



f 280. Double Accusative. 

In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the 
Ace. with one verb : — 

1. When, in the construction given under ^ 278, 1, the verb 
has a transitive sense, as <^tA.iW cjuXelu, then the idea of activity 
consisting of the verb and a cognate substantive (with which 



404 SYNTAX. [$ 280. \ 

an adjective usually agrees), being blended into one, may at • 
the same time be extended to a personal object, e. g. ^tX<ii 
liiyaXrjv kJuXlov (== cfuXwi) tov Tratoa. j 

Her. 3, 88. y dixov s r ov s ir pdr ovs iydfxee 6 Aape7o5 Kvpov di>o ^vya' 
repas, "ATotradu re /coi 'ApTvffr (t)VT]v [contracted very honorable marriages 
vnth the two daughters of Cyrus). 154. iwvrhy Kufiarai Xdofiriv avr\Ki(r- 
r ov {maims himself vnth an incurable maiming, maims himself incurably). Th. 8, 
75. &pK(o(ray rohs ar par idras revs fi^yioTTovs o pKovs [made the sol- 
diers take the most solemn oaths). X. Cy. 8. 3, 37. ifih 6 irar^p rriv tuv iraiSwv 
iraiSelav iiraiSeuev (educated me in the education of boys). PI. Apol. 19, a. ; 
MeATjTos fie iypdiparo t^v ypa<p^v ravT-riv. 36, c. eKacTTOv evepye' 
re7y T^v fjL€yi(Trr]v ev epyearlau. Her. 1, 129. SeTTrj/ov t6 (= o) fiiu ^ 
i^oiyiffe. Th. 1, 32. T7)u vav/xaxio-'' av eoxr dfie^ a Kopiv^lovs (like ^ 
ylKTju viKciu), we repelled the Corintliaiis in the naval battle. PL Gorg. 522, 1 
a. iroWa Kot TjSea koL iravToSaira eixtixovu v/ias. Especially with | 
verbs of naming, after the analogy of ovofxa ovofidCeiy nvd'. X. O. 7, 3. /caAow- \ 
a fie rovTO rh ivojxa {they called me this name, by this name). PI. Rp. 471, I 
di. av aKaKovvr es r avr a Th, ov 6 fiar a kavrov s. ' \ 

Remark 1. Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Ace. , 
of a pronoun is frequently used. X. >Cy. 1. 3, 10. tSaXo fiifiovnevos rhp \ 
Sa/cov. An. 5. 7, 6. tovto vfias i^airaTTJaai. This is especially the case mth = 
verbs of praise and blame, of benefit and injury, after the analogy of iyKwfiiov 
iyKWfiidC^iv nvd and the like. Fl. Symp. 221, c. tt o A A o fikv ovv 6.v tis kcu &AAa 
exoi ^(aKpdT7]v iiraiveffai {one could praise Socrates for many other things). J 
Rp. 363, d. T avra S^ koI &Wa Toiavra iyKccfiid^ov a i SiKouotrvvT}v. 
MeyaAa, fiiKpd, TrAeiw, fj-el^u w^cAety, /3 Aoirr ei v, dStKetv Tiva. 

2. Expressions of saying or doing good or evil (which generally ; 
contain an Ace, or its equivalent in an adverb, of the thing said 
or done), take the object to wliich the good or evil is done, in 
the Ace, e. g. dyaS d, KaXd, /caKo, Trotctv, Trpdrrciv, epya^c- 
(rS^ai, Acyctv, €t7retv, etc. nvd (to do good, etc., to some one). | 

X. O. 5, 12. 7} yrj rohs &pi(rTa b epaireiovr as avr^v TrXelara ayabh J 
d J/ T t TT 1 6 t {returns the greatest advantages to those who cultivate it best). Her. 8, | 
61. t6t€ di] 6 @efii(TTOKXir\s Ke7v6v re kolI tovs Kopiv^iovs iroWd 
re Kal /ca/cd e Ae7e {saidmuch evil of him and the Corinthians). X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. 
ovSeTTcoTTOTe iiravovro TroAAd /ca/cd Tjfxas voiovvr es {never ceased to do much 
injury to us). 

Rem. 2. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon or suffering, the Dat. 
is sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvan- 
tage {Dativus commodi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. ri aot Troir](ru><ri\ 
01 fidprvpes ; {quid tui tibi prosint testes'?) X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. irpovKSirei, ri ao 
TToiriaovcriv ol apx^vevoi {consider what your subjects will do for you) ; on the coil' 
trary with a4 {what they will do to you). An. 4. 2, 23. vdvra hroir](rav to is 
avo^avova-iv {showed all honors to the dead). Cy. 7. 2, 27. fjv raind fioi 
TToirja-ps d \eyeis {if you perform for me what you promise). So also in the sense 
of, to do something with some one, as PI. Charm. 157, c. ovk h,v ex^^l^"} 3 rt irotot- 
• 



I 



^ 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 405 

fih or 01. But the Dat. often depends upon the adjective, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243 
5. 5<oTeA.e? irpdrruv koI \4yuv tu fi4\T itrra Tcp Z-f} n(f {continue to do and 



say what is best for the people). 

3. With verbs : (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquir- 
ing, asking: atrcii/, dTratreti/, Trparretv {to demand), el<^pa.TruVy 
vpaTTearSaL ; cpcorav, ipia^ai, e^cra^ctv, to-ropetv, avLaropetv ; — (b) of 
teaching and reminding: SiBda-KeLv, TratSsvcw/, amuijuvT^o-zcetv, vtto- 
Ixifxirqa-Kuv (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more 
usual) ; — (c) of dividing and cutting into parts : Sateo-^at, 8iai- 
p€i»', T€fj.v€Lv, Stave/xeiv, Karavip-uv ; — (d) of depriving and taking 
away : crrcpcLV, dTroo-Tepctv ; o-TepLO-KeLv, a-uXav, a<fiaLpei(TSaL ; — ( e) of 
concealing or hiding from : KpvTrruv (k€v^€lv Poet.) ; — (f ) of put- 
ting on and off, clothing and unclothing, s-urrounding with : kv- 
hv€LVi iKSveiv, dp.<fiL€vvvvaL, TTcptySoAAeo-^at. 

Her. 3, 1. ire/xipas KafifivffTjs is AXyxmrov K-fjpvKa atr ee "Afidcih l^vyarepa 
{asked Amasis for his daughter). 58. avrovs (Karhu rdXavra eirp-rj^av 
{demanded of them a hundred talents). X. C. 1. 2, 60. ovSeva TrdoTrore /Mia^hv 
rrjs avvovffias iir pd^ar o "XuKparris {never demanded a reward of any one for 
his instruction). H. 4.1,21. 'HpnrtrlBas aire? rhv 'Ayr}<rl\al}v bvX'iTas 
re is Sisx^Xlovs koI ireXracrT as &Wovs r oao'uT ov s {asks of Agesilaus 
about two thousand hoplites, etc.). Cy. 6. 2, 35. to, els Tpo(pr]v Seovra i^erd- 
(ere rohs v<p' vfuv { inquire of those under you respecting the things necessary for 
food). Eur. Hipp. 254. ttoAAo SiBda-Kei yap fi 6 noXhs floras {teaches me 
much). Antiph. 5. 131, 14. 6 XP^^*^^ '^"^ ^ ifiircipia rh fi^ Ka\as ^xovra 
4kBiS d<TK€i Tohs avbp<j}-irQvs {teach men what is not proper). Her, 1. 136. 
TTaiSeuovo-t tovs 7ra?Sas rpia fxavva {they teach boys three things only). 6, 
138. y\wcr<rdv re t})v ^Att ik^v kuI TpSrrovs r5>v 'A^valcov iS iSaCKOV 
robs TralSas. X. An. 3. 2, \l. avafivqa-o) vfias Kol r ohs Kiv5vvovs{l will 
remind you of the dangers). Hier. 1,3. vire ij.ur}<rds /xe rk iu t^ 15i(i)tik(^ fiitp. 
Her. 7, 121. r peTs no i pas 6 EeplTjs Saa-d/xevos irdvra rhv ire^hv (Xr pa- 
t6v {having divided all the land army into three divisions). Tefipeiv, S laipeTv ri 
nepVi fioipas {to cut, to divide something into parts). X. Cy. 7. 5, 13. 6 Kvpos t b 
(TT pdrevfjLa KaTeveifie 5wSe/ca /Lteprj {divided the army into twelve parts). 
PI. Polit.283, d. 5ie\a)iX€V aiir^y {r^v fier p-nr iK7]y) 5vo fieprj. X. Cy.4. 
6,4. rhv fiSuov fxoi koI <pi\ov iratSo acpelXero rrju ^^wx^" {deprived my 
only child of life). Eur. Hec. 285. rhv rrdvra 5' oKfiop ^fiap iv fi acpel- 
A€TO. Dem. Aphob. 839, 13. t); »/ TX)it7V oir 0- rep eT ;[ie {robs me of honor). 
Phil. 54, 50. TO rinerepa Tifias aw oa-re pe7 {6 ^IXlttitos). Kpvirra} are rh 
arvxvi^a {I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. oh n^y <pi\ovs 
ye, K&Ti fiaWov ti <l>i\ovs, Kpv-KTeiv Ukoiov ffaSyirdrep, SvsTTpa^las. X. 
Cy. 1. 3, 17. irals fieyas fiiKphu ex^v X'^wva^ erepov iraUa fiiK p 6v, fj.4y av 
ixovra xtTwm, iKSvcras avr6v, rhv fxlv eavTOv eKe^vov i] fx <p i e <r e, rh' Sk 
iKflyov avrhs iv4hv{a large boy stripped another small boy of his large timia and put 



406 SYNTAX. [♦ 280. 

his own tunic on him). Her. 1, 163. relxos irepiffaXeff^ai r^v v6\iv {to 

surround the city with a wall). 

Rem. 3. Several of the above verbs are sometimes otherwise constructed, 
commonly, however, with some diflFerence in the sense expressed; thus, aireip 
r I Trap a r ivos \ epwrau t iv a tt epi r lyos; with verbs of dividing and cut- 
ting into parts, not unfrequently the preposition els, sometimes also Kard, 
is joined with the Ace, e. g. tovs TroXiTas els e^ /xoipas dieTKov ; or the word fjcepos, 
etc., is governed directly by the verb, and the object to be divided is put in the 
Gen., depending on fxepos, etc., e. g. Svo /xoipas AvSmu irdmwv Sie7\ev {he divided all 
the Lydians into two parts) ^ Her. 1, 94; passively, ^ujheKa Hepcrwv <pv\a\ Si-pprii/Tai 
{the Persians are divided into twelve tribes), X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Verbs of depriving 
and taking away, have the following constructions : 

{dJ) o.iro<rrepf7v and a^aipela-^ai with the Aqc. of the thing alone, e, g 
JTws ti.v ovTQS ebeXoi r a aKX6r pia atroaTepeTu ; {how could he be willing to 
take away the things of others ?), X. Ag. 4, 1. XdXa^ai rh koXus eyvuxr- 
ixeva {provisa) koI tt eTToir) fiey a acpa ipovvrai (take away, destroy 
the provisions), 0. 5, 18 ; the Ace. of the person alone is but rarely found; 
thus with a<paipe7(T^ai {to rob, take from), e. g. Andoc. 4. 32, 27. rots 
iroXiTais ovK e| llaov xp^"''*'? o.X\a tovs fxev a<paipovfJi€VoSf rohs 5i 
T{>7rra>y oiiSevhs a^iay t^v Srj/iOKpaTiav a.iro<paivei. 

(b) (TTepeij', aiTocrrepelv^ arepiaKeiVf a<j>aip€'i<r^ai rivd rt very 

often. 

m 

(c) (nepeTv, aTroare pe7v rivd rivos, like spoliare aliquant aliqua re, to 
deprive one of something, sgq ^ 271,2; but a.<paLpe'icr^aL very seldom 
has this construction, and indeed only in the sense of -to restrain, to pre- 
vent. Ol oi^i^ofxevoi cKpaipovvrai ras {xev Kvuas rov evpetv rhy Kayu, 
aiiTovs Se t^s wxpeXeias, X. Ven. 6, 4. 

(d) a<l>aip€7ar^ai, airoffTe pe7v with the Gen. of the person and the Ace. 
of the thing ; thej' then signify to take something from some one, to withdraw 
something from some one. This is a more rare construction. Ot vXeoveKTcu 
rcov dWuv a.<paipovyLev 1 XPV H-c-'^C' ^olvtovs SoKOvai vXovriCfiy 
{taking their property from others, seem to enrich themselves), X. C. 1. 5, 3. 
"Svixfiax'^as a(paipov fieyov rrjs 7r6\eu}S {= ruy itoMtuv) Dem. 
Cor. 232, 22. Ei ri fiovKoyrat eTriT-qdeieiy KoXwy, ovSeyhs oiroorepet 
(to /cyj'rjyeo'ia), X. Ven. 12, 8. "Orrts, /xt; &\\u}y eavrhv airocrr epSiv, 
aa<pa\eias Se7Tai (properly, aliis se subducens, i. e. ab aliis desciscens ; kavrhv 
is here to be considered as the Ace. of the thing), Th. 1, 40. 

Rem. 4. On the double Accusative with the verbs irei^eiy, ivorpvyeivj iiral- 
peiy^ irpoKa\e7(T^ai, avoy/co^etr, see § 278, 4. 

4. An Accusative of the object acted upon, and an Accusa- 
tive of the predicate (which is often an adjective), is used with 
the verbs mentioned under § 240, 2, when they are changed 
from the passive to the active ; hence two Accusatives stand 
with verbs signifying to make, to constitute, e. g. ttoiciv, tlScvol, 
reddere; to choose, to appoint, e. g. aipcto-^at, create, etc.; to consider, 
represent, and regard as something, to declare, to know, e. g. vo/u- 
^€tv, -^eto-^ai, etc. ; to say, to name, to praise, to chide, e. g. Xcyetv, 
ovo/xa^ctv, KoXuv ; to give, to take, to receive, e. g. TrapaXa^eLv Si- 
^co-^ai, etc. ; to produce, to increase, to form, to teach, to educate. 



i 281.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 407 

Kvpos rovs (pi\ovs iirol7]<r€ ir\ov<riov5 {made Ms friends rich). Uai' 
Seieiv Tiva aoipov (to educate one wise, i. e. make wise by education), liofil- 
(fiy.Tiyila^ai riva &vSpa ay a^ 6 v {to think, regard, consider one a goodman). 
Dem. Cor. 5,43. ot eerraXol Kcd @7]$a7oi <pl\ov, eve pyfT-rjVy (Turripa rhy 
*i\nrvov 7]yovvTO. 'OvofidCeiv r iva oro(f>ia-r'f)v {to coil one a sophist), 
Atpeltr^al Tiva <Trpar'i)y6v {to choose one a commander). X. Cy. 5. 2, 14. 
rhv Tw^pvau cvySenrvov TrapeXafiev. Dem. Chers. 106, 66.7r({Ae«s eywy* 
rXovroy rjyovfiai ffv fifxdxovs, iriariv, evvoiav. Andoc. 3. 24, 7. rj 
elfyfjvr] rhv Z^ fxou TU>v*ASn]vai(av vy^-qKhv ^pe /col KariaTqaev Itrx^P^^' 

Rem. 5. On the use of the Inf. eJvai with the Ace, see § 269, Rem. 1. 

k 281. Remarks on the use of the Accusative with the 

Passive. 

I As the Greek considers the passive as a reflexive {§ 251, 1), it follows that, 
on the change of the Act. to the Pass., the Ace. may remain with every transitive 
verb which in the Act. takes an Ace. of a thing as the object acted upon, e. g. 
(Kj7rTou<rt TO, fxeruyira), kSttt ourai to jxerwira, which may mean, either <Aaf 
they strike themselves on the forehead, they strike their forehead, or they let their forehead 
he struck, they are struck on the forehead ; Her. 7, 69. 'Apoi$ioi (eipas iiire^uar' 
fi4u 1 i (TaVy Al^loires Sc irapSaXeas re /col Aeovreos iva/x fie Poi {the Arabians 
were girt with the zeira, but the Ethiopians were clothed with leopard and lion-skins). 

2. Hence, when the verbs mentioned under § 280, 1 and 3, which in the Act. 
govern two accusatives, are changed into the Pass., the Ace. of the person or of 
the object acted upon, is changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing, or tha 
efl^ect remains, (a) Ovros fieyroi d eiraiuSs etm kclK6s, % v av vvv eiraivel vtt 
6.v5pwv a^ioov iria-revea^ai {this is honorable praise by which you are now praised), 
PI. Lach. 181,b. Tpav nana-^els TroWd {sc. rpavnara), {wounded with many 
ivou7ids), Th. 4, 12. "Ovofia rh /xeu irpurov ZdyKKt] ^v inrh twv St/ceAwv K\ri- 
^e'iaa (^ 2t/c€A./o), 6, 4 {ivas called by its flrst name). 'H Kpicris, ^v eKpi^ii 
{to which he was condemned), Lys. Agor. 134, 50. To /xeyiffra rt/t tj&tjvoi, 
S. O. R. 1203. Aea-nhv Svse^T^uvffTov eXKerai Se^eis, Eur. Hipp. 1237. 
So u(p€\e7a^ai, (riixiova^ai fxeydXa, fiKdirrea-^ai ttoAAcC. — (b) MouCt/c^/J' inrh 
AdfiTrpov iraiS ev^els, pT)T op ikt]V Se utt' AvTKpwyros {having been educated 
in music and rhetoric), PI. Menex. 236, a; so SLSax^Vvairex^'n'' ^^ t^'"'* 
{to be taught an art by someone); ipQ>Tr]drjvai r^v yv^in]v inr6 twos {to be 
asked an opinion). Trj /col oiKriaeis to outo fJ-epr] B layefirj^-fiTu {be di- 
vided into the same parts), PL L. 737, e. 'Tirh fiacriKeas ireirp ay p-evos tovs 
<f>6povs {having demanded the tribute), Th. 8, 5. 'A<^oi/76,^7Jj'at, oTroo-Teprj- 
^rjvai T^y oLyX^y inr6 riuos. Kpv^^rjyai r i {celari aliquid). Ileia-^rjyai 
T^v ayaxu>pv<riy{^ 278, 4). 'AfKpieyyvaStai xiroiya occurs only with the mean- 
ing to put a garment on one's self but not//e< myself be clothed by another, the garment 
was put on me by another; but iySvSnjyai x^'rc^ya {to be clothed with a tunic) is in use. 

3 As the Greek may form a personal Pass. (§251, 4), of every intransitive 
verb; whicD has its object in the Gen. or Dat., e. g. o/ie\oGjuoi, ^neX-^^Vy (pSfov 



408 SYNTAX. [H 282, 283. 

ovfjLai, icp^Qvfi^v ; so may it also with such transitive verbs as have, together 
with the Ace. of the thing, a Dat. of the person, the Dat. of the person being 
changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing remaining. Th. 1. 1, 26. oi 
Twv ^A^rfvaiwv iv it er pafieyoi rrjv <pv\aK-fiv {quibus custodia demandaia 
erat, those of the Athenians who had been entrxisted with the guard, from iirirpeirco tivX 
T^u (pyKuK-f^u). 5, 37. ol Kopiv^ioi ravra irre <rra\fie yot aytx^povy 
(having been commanded these things) ; 1, 140. fi ^vyxiop'fi<rcr€y koI &\\o ti fiel- 
^ov evSrvs iirtrax^'fio'^o-^^ (you v)ill be commanded something greater). X. 
An. 2. 6, 1. 01 crrparriyol avoTfi7i^4yres rcfcy /ce^aAcbs ireXevrriffav. 



§ 282. (3) Dative. 

1. The Dat. is the WTiere-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
local relation, the place at or in which the action of the subject 
occurs; — (b) in a causal relation, the object upon which the 
action of the subject shows itself or becomes visible — the ob- 
ject which shares in or is concerned in an action. — This object 
is : (a) a person, or a tiling considered as a person, e. g. fiorjSC} 
TOLs TToAtrats or TTJ TTo'Xei; (13) a thing, or an object considered as 
a thing, e. g. dyaXkofjiaL ry vlktj. In this way the Dat. may be 
treated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded 
as a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the 
third, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or 
instrumental Dat. 

§283. A. Local Dative. 

1. The Dat., as a local object, designates the place in {by, 
near, at) ivhich an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- 
most exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly 
joined with the Dative. 

II. I, 663. ahrap 'Ax'^Aeir eSSe fivxv K\i(Tir]s finrr^icrov (slept tn the comer oj" 
the tent), it, 595. 'EWaSt ot/cio vaiwu (dwelling in houses in Helios), fi, 210. 
Kvfia TToXvcpXoiff^oio baXa(T<n]s alyiaX^ fxeyaKw fipefifrau (roars upon the 
shore). S. Trach. 171. (ecprj) t^v TraXaiau (prjyhv avSrjaad irore A ocSwyi (that t?ie 
beech tree once uttered an oracle at Dodona). Here belong the Locative forms very 
common in prose, viz., Mapo^wvi, 'EXeuo-Tvi, Xlu^o?, 'lo-i^/io?, oXkoi, 'A^kjjo-i, 
ITAaTatSo-i, etc. (at Marathon, etc.) ; also, ravrri, rpSe, here, ^, where. So also, 
Od. 0, 227. Hv\loi(T I /ae'y e^oxa Swfiara vosiuv. 

2. Hence the Dat. is used also with the attributive pronoun 
auT0 9, to express the idea of together wUJi. 



♦ 284.J DATIVE CASE. 409 

Her. 6, 32. ras ir6\ias iveTri/jLirpaarau avT oTor i rola i ipotffi {they burned 
the cities together with the temples — cities, temples and all). X. H. 6. 2, 3.5. ai 
kirh 'S.vpaKovaSiV vfjes airaaat kaKuaau avrots avZpdff iv (the ships were taken 
together with the men). 

3. The local relation is transferred to the time in which some- 
thing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances 
under which something happens. Hence the Dat. denotes the 
time (definite) and circumstances of an action. 

In prose with vufpa, vvkt'i, ixrfvl, eret, eVtauroJ, wpa and the like, in connection 
with attributive demonstratives, ordinals, and adjectives, as irpSrepos, va-Teposy 
4vi(i)y, -KaptX^uv and tlic like. The Dat, therefore usually expresses definite 
time. TpSt t^ i/vktI, ravrri tt} T](ji4pa, iKcivri rp rj/xepa, rtj avr^ 
yvKri, TToWoTs tncri, Tpirco /jltju'l, rij avrfj &pa, toJ iiri6uTi eret, 
iKfivui TCfJ erej, ry varcpu erei, rovrtfi r (f iviavro}, etc. X. An. 
i. 8, 1, rfj irpcuTT] r] fie pa a(p't.KovTo iwl rhi/ iroTa/iJi/ (the first day or on the first 
day). Also S>pa x*'M'i'*'os ('" time of winter), i/ovfirjuia {at the time of new moon) ; 
likewise, Uava^vaiois, AioyvaioiSt rpaywSoTs Kaiyois, at the time of the Panathenaea, 
etc. The preposition iu is joined with the Dat.: (a) when the substantive 
stands without an attributive, e. g. iv rifiepa, eV vvktI, eV ^(pei : often also when 
a demonstrative stands with it, e. g. eV toutw t^ iviavrcf ; (b) usually, when a 
Bpace of time is to be indicated ; hence with substantives in connection with 
cardinals and the adjectives 6\iyos, fipax^s, fxiKpSs, iroA-uy, etc, e. g. Sirjyayov 
iv rpiaXv rjfxfpais (in three days, in the space of three days), Ji.. An. 4. 8, S 
Od, I, 253. hrKfOfify Boperj ai/ffjLw aKpaei K0A.9J (with a good ivind). II. a, 
418. T<f ae KaKf} atar) TtKov iv fieydpoKTiu (under an evil destiny). Her. 6, 139. 
fireau fiof4ri avefitp aimj/jifphv yr^vs i^at/vffr] 4k rr}S v/JLerepTjs 4s r^v rjfiereprjv, 
r6Tf irapaiuaonfu (when a ship shall come with a north wind). 



^ 284. B. The Dative as a Personal Object. 

1. Both the Dat. of the person and of the thing denote an 
object, upon or in which the action of the snbject shows itself 
or becomes visible ; both denote an object which participates 
in, or is concerned in, the action of the subject; accordingly, 
the language regards the Dat. of the person and of the thing 
as the same. The distinction is merely this, that the former is 
a persmial object, or is considered as such, and consequently 
has the power of will ; the latter is a mere thing, or is consid- 
ered as such, and of course without will. As the idea denoted 
by the term where, is intermediate to that denoted by ivhence 
and whifJier, so the Dat. (the Where-case), when it is a person, 

35 



410 SYNTAX. [$284 

stands in contrast with the Ace. {the Whither -case) ; when it 
is a thing, in contrast with the Gen. {the Whence-case). 

2. The Ace. denotes an object effected, accomplished by the 
action of the subject, or the object acted upon; the Dat. of the 
person, on the contrary, denotes an object merely aimed at by 
the action of the subject and sliaring in it; the action of the 
subject is indeed employed on the object and becomes mani- 
fest in it, yet it does not make it a passive object, but the ob- 
ject itself appears in distinction from the subject as active ; 
between the subject and the object a reciprocal action takes 
place. The Gen. denotes the immediate cause ; the Dat. of the 
thing, on the contrary, a mediate, indirect cause (the ground, 
the means, the instrument) ; the Gen. denotes an object as 
calling forth and producing the action of the subject; the Dat 
of the thing, only such an object as exhibits in or upon itself 
the action of the subject. 

Remark 1. In poetry a local limit or oft/«rf is very often considered as a 
person, and is indicated by the Dat. ; this sometimes occurs, though but seldom, 
in prose. II. o, 369. TrSo-t hfiO\<Ti.v Xf*P<»s avro-xojo-cs {raisiny up the hands to 
all tlie gods). So aXp^a^ai, iiraip^ffbai, Sopv rivi. II. e, 709. Xlfiyp K(K\iti4- 
yos Kr}<pi<ri5i {dwelling at the Cephisian lake), tj, 218. irpoKdKicraaTo x^Pt*-V (^ 
challenged to the contest). Th. 1, 13. 'A/xciyoKA^s 2o/xf ois ijX^fv. 3,5. avrois 
Me\eas ha.Ku>v acpiKvelrou. 

Rem. 2. From this use of the Dat., the fact may be explained, why many 
verbs of motion compounded with the prepositions els, rp6s, M, etc, take 
their object in the Dat. ; also why most adverbs with the Dat. (or Locative) in- 
flection [§ 101, 2. (b)], may express both the relation of rest (local Dat.) and 
the direction whither (personal Dat.), e. g. x°-f^°^y humi, humum; so, likewise, the 
adverbs in -n, e. g. &\\t} those in -a>, e. g. &vu, koltw, etc. ; those in -o *, e. g. 
TreSot, humi, humum ; iyrav^oi, hue and hie (but ol, 5irot, to?, always denote the 
direction whither). 

3. Most verbs, wliich take the personal Dat., as the object 
sharing or participating in the action, express the idea of associa- 
tion and union, e. g. StSovat, Trap€)(€iv, vTrur^^vcur^tu, opTTci^ctv r» Ttvi. 
The following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative : — 

(1) Verbs expressing mutual iyitercourse, associating wiOi, mix- 
i7ig with, participation. — Dative of communion, e. g. o/xtXcrr, 
utyviVai, fxCywaSai, kolvovv, KOLvovaSaXy Koivoivctv, 8t-, KaraAAciTTCO' 
(to reconcile), 8t-, KaToXXarrccr^ai (to reconcile one's self to), ^cvov- 
(T^aiy cnrivSea^aL or (rrrovBas Trotetcr^at, irpamiv (agere CUm oliquo)', 
€i7r€tv, Acyetv, SioAeyccr^ai, vo)(€aBaiy KaTopaaSai, etc. ; also adjec- 
tives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express 



♦ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 



411 



a similar idea, e. g. koivo^, (rvWpo<^os, avfJLcfioivos, <rvyya/^s, /Acramos; 
.many other words of a similar signification, compounded with 
avv and /xcra, also with cv, Trpos, and Trapd. 

'Onl\fi ro7s aya&o7s av^pdvois (associate with good men). Her. 3 
131. 6 Ae/xoicf}Sris noXvKpdrd ufiiXtiaf. 6,21. WAicy aZrai nd\i<rTa aX- 
X^XT7<rt i^€iyu^r}(ray (cultivated hospitality u^'th each other). — EUxofiai 
ToTs ^eo7s (I pray to the gods). X.H.2.2, 19. (rire;/5eo-,&o « 'AS^v^aiois (to 
makeatreaty with the Athenians). 3.2,20. aW-fiXois trirovSas ivoiriaav- 
TO (they made treaties with each other). Isocr. Paneg. 42. 9. oi irpa^^is aiirpoye- 
yftnjfieucu Koiyal ir aaiv vix7y Kar(\(i<t>^ffav (common to us all). On the 
Gen. with Koiy6s, see ^ 273, 3, (b). 

(2) Verbs of contending, litigating, vying with, e. g. cpt^eiv, 
udxi(T^cu, TToXc/xeti', ayuiVL^icrSaL (usually Trpos riva), 8tKa^€o-^ai, ap,- 
<f>isPrjT(iVf crraaui^iLv, etc. ; also of going against, encountering 
meeting and approaching, and the contrary, as those of yield- 
ing y e. g. vwodrrivai and v^toroo-^ai ; dLiravraVy {rrravrav, vTravria^civ, 
TrXTyo-to^civ, TrtXA^eLV, iyyt^tLV, etc. ; cucctv, vTrctKctv, ;(w/)£rj/, Trapa^oipiiv, 
etc. ; the adjectives and adverbs -n-X-qaCos, cmn-tos, 7reA.as, etc. 
(seldom cT^yvs). 

OfEKXriyfs aySpdus to7s Utpffais i fxaxfo'ayr o (fought hravdy with ilie 
Persians). Mij «fic€Tc toTj xoKefilois (do not yidd to the enemy). Xp^ 
To7s ix^po7s rris TjfMfTfpas (x(*>p<'-s) ir apax<»pT)0^o-h Isocr. Archid. 118, 13. On 
the Gen., see § 271,2. "ttroarrivai avro7s (Hipaais) 'A^ycuoi roXfi-fj- 
(rayreSf ^yimjeray alrrovs (having dared to encounter them), X. An. 3. 2,11. 'T^/a- 
ratrbai lvfi<popa7sy Th. 2, 61. "Ofioioy dfioicp act 7reAa^€{ (like always 
draws to like), VI. Symp. 195, b. 'l^ovro ayr loi ro7<ri AaKtSai/xoyloiai (encamped 
op}x>site the Lacedaemonians), Her. 6, 77. Tvpavvos &iras ix^P^^ iKev^epiq, koH 
y 6 not 5 iy ayrlos. On the Gen., see § 273, Rem. 9. 

(3) Verbs of commanding, eyttreating, counselling, inciting, en- 
couraging ; oi following, accompanying, serving, obeying and diso- 
beying, trusting and distrusting, e. g. Trpo^raTrciv, hriTdmiv, izapai- 
mv, TrapttKcXcvco-^at, etc. (but KcXcv'ctv with Acc. and Inf ) ; eTreo-^at, 
aKoXov^ctv, 8taSc;j(co-^ai {to succeed to, take the place of) ; ireCSea-- 
^ai; xmaKOviWy dTTtLB^ivy Tricrreveiv, 7r€7rot5evat, etc.; the adjectives 
and adverbs dxoXov^os, (IkoXov^ws, tTro/xcvo)?, StaSo;(OS, e^S, e<f}€^<s. 

X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. TouTwv ay (instead of t) yvy v(x7v irapaKeXeiofiai ovdey 
ro7s BovXoLS irposrdrrw (I enjoin upon the slaves none of these things which 
I now command you). Her. 3, 88. 'Apd^ioi ovSa/ia Kar-fjKovtray iir\ SovXoavyi^ 
Tlepario-i (never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6,14. ivavfidxeou 
iyVKovariitrayTfs rotffi <rTpaT'nyo7(ri (they fought in disobedience to their 



! . % i' 



^ 



412 SYNTAX. [* 284 

commanders). X. Cy. 1. 1, 2. ras aye\as raxnas iSoKovney 6pay fiaXXov 4^f?ij)6ffai 
irfi^nr^ai rots vofi^va iv, ^ rovs av^pciirovs ro7s &pxovffi (more willing 
to obey their shepherds, than men their rulers). 8. 6, 18. r^ Tjfifpty^ ayytKiv 
((l>cur\) rhv vvKTipivhv StoSe'xfO'i^a' [that the night messenger succeeds the one for 
the day). PI. Rp. 400, d. elXoyia 6,pa kcu evapfiotrTia koI fvffX'nyMavvTi koL ivpv'd- 
{Lia fvr}^€l(f aKo\ov^€7. Eur. Andr. 803. Kcuchu KaK<p hiahoxof. PI. 
Phaed. 100, c. <rK6irei 5r) to ef^r ^Keiyois [consider the things next in order 
to those). 

(4) Expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness 
and unlikeness, of agreement and disagreement, e. g. ioucevoj^ 
ofXOLovv, oixoLovcrS^aL, 6imolo<s, 6/xotw9, tcro9, tcr(u?, €fx<f>€pT^ and 7rpos<^€p»^ 
(jdmilar), -jrapaTrXrjcrLO'i, TrapaTrXrycruus, 6 avros (idem), afxa] Bui<f>opo^ 
(discordant, hostile), hiOL^xuvo^; and very many words compounded 

with 6fX.0V, (TVV, fXeTOL, e. g. 6flOVO€LV, 6/XOyA.Ci/JTOS, OfKsiWfUi^f <TVfX.<fHl)V€LVf 

cr6fJi<fKi)vo<s, trwwSos. 

Her. 1, 123. ray ■n-cLd-oi t^s Kupov rija-i cuvtov Sfioiov/ifyos {likening, com- 
paring the sufferings of Cyrus with his own). 6, 23. 6 'Prtylov rvpayyos Sid(popos 
(^v) To7<Ti ZayK\aioi(Ti {was hostile to the Zancleans). X. Cy. 7. 1,2. inr- 
Xifffiivoi irdyres ?iaav oi irepi rhu Kvpoy toTj aitrols t <f Kvptp SrKois {were 
furnished with the same arms as Cyrus). 5. 1,4. Sfioiay ra7s SovKais cT^* 
r^y i<rb^ra {Tldy^eia). 7. 5, 65. 6 fflSijpos ayiaol tovs off^fyels rois icx^' 
po7s iy rep TroXf/jLO) {makes the weak equal to the strong). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13 
Xot^fJroy iariv taovs tovs \6yovs r^ iJ.fy4^€i rwy tpyuy i^^vpuv. Th. 1, 49. 
i) yavfjiax^o- ir f^o fiaxi''i '"' P o a <(> f p r} s (^v). 

Hem. 3. On the Comparatio compendiaria with expressions of likeness and 
similarity, see § 323, Rem. 6. On the Gen. with iyyvs, ■wKi)alov, \ 273, Rem. 9. 
The coordinate copulative particle Kai, is not seldom employed with adjectives 
of likeness and similarity instead of the Dative. Her. 1, 94. AuSol y6ixouri flip 
irapaTr\Ti(rloi<ri x/'^'*"'''"** f<*^ "EAATjves { = ''E\Xr}<Tt or tois 'EW-fjytDy). the 
Lydians and Greeks have similar laws, instead of (he Lydiuns have laws similar to 
the Greeks. So 4y Iftroj, fcra, d/xolois, usavrws, Kara rainh Koi, etc. PI. Ion. 500, 
d. ovx i> 1X0 1 us TrfiroiT)Ka(Ti Kal "Ofirjpos. Comj>. similis ac, atque. There also 
occur, particularly in Attic prose, the particles of comparison, air, S>sir(p with 
Xffos, 6 outJs. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. rhy avrhy rp6Troy, Ststrtp, k. t. X. 

(5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, fitting, 
to please, and the contrary, e. g. irpemLVy op/xdrrciv, Trpo^Kiw (with 
an Inf. following), tt/dcttoktw?, dTrpcTroi?, cuco's ccrnv, cucotcds, apiorKicr 
(avBav€LV Ion.). 

PL Apol. 36, d. tI oZv xpeirei avSp\ ircyrjri; {what then is becoming a poor 
manf). Her. 6, 129. eccvr^ apea-rus opx^ero {he danced pleasing himself ), 
X. Cy. 3. 3, 39. ap 4<r kc ly vfxTy Treipwyrai {they endeavor to please you). 

f 

(6) Verbs signifying to agree with, to assent to, to reproach, to ' 
be angry, to envy, e. g. ofiokoyelv, etc. ; ju-jyxc^eo-^ai (to reproach , 

f 



i 



I 



♦ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 



413 



fi€fi(f>€(rS(u TLva means to blame), XoiSopiiaSai (to reproach), cttiti- 
fiav, eyKoXeiv (tlvl tl), CTriKoAerv (tlvl rt), eVtTrXifrretv, oveiSi^ctv, cvoxXeiv 
(more seldom with the Ace), etc. ; SvfxodaSai, jSpifxovaSaiy xoXe- 
TToiveLVy etc.; <f>%v€i:v (tlvl tivos, ^ 274, 1, more seldom nvt tl), 
PaxTKaLV€Lv (to envy ; f^aaKaivuv rtvo, to slander). The Ace. of 
the thing very often stands with the Dat. of the person. 

Her. 3, 142. iyit t^ (= h) r^viKas 4iriir\-f)<r(ru, avrhs Karh Uva^uv oh 
iroiiaw [what I rebuke in my neighbor I will not do myself). Th. 4, 61. oh to7s 
&pX(ty fiovXofieyois fiffi<pofiai,a?0^aTo7s inroKoveiv kT o ifxor 4po is ov<riv 
{I do not rejJToach those wishing to rule, but, etc.). Dem. 01. 2. 30, 5. i^vdx^fi 
fifilv 6 ^iKnnros (gave trouble to us). X. An. 2. 5, 13. Alyimriovs, oTs nakiara 
vjiiMS vvv yifutTKu TfbvfiCDfifyovs, Ko\dar€a^e {with whom I know you are angry). 
Cy. 1. 4, 9. 6 df7os ahrt^ 4\oidope7ro, tV bpaavT-qra 6pwv [reproached him). 
4. 5, 9. Kva^ipr]s i^pi/xovT o Ty Kvp^p koI to7s MtjSojj t^J KaTa\nr6vra5 
ahrhy tpriixov o'(x^adai (was wroth with Cyrus, etc.). 

(7) Verbs of helping, averting, and being lu^eful, e. g. dpTjyav, 

aL\LVVf.LV, oAt'^CtV, TLfiUtpiLV, l3o7}3€LV, iTTLKOVpfXV, aTToKoryiLCr^aL, \v(TLTt' 

kilv, iTrapKilv, )(paL(TfX€LV and the Uke (but ovtvavat and ox^cActv 
with Ace. i 279, 1.) ; also several verbs compounded with 
<rvv, e. g. (rvp.<f>€p€LV (^conduce re), crvfXTrpamLv, awepyelv, etc., and 
many adjectives of the same and similar significations, and 
the contrary, e. g. ^(pi^orifxo^, ySXa/Jcpo? (but pkaimLv with Ace. 
{ 279, 1.), <^lXo^, i\Bp6<;, TToXip.LO's, etc. 

X. K. L. 4, 5. kpi\^ovai rfj iroKei iraml ff^tvet (they assist the city with all 
their strength). Cy. 3. 3, 67. (au yvvouKfs) iKerevovtri iravras fi^ (pevyew KaTa\nr6v 
Tar, a\A* apivvai koL auToTs, koX tckvois, koI <r<pl<riv auToIs (to de- 
fend them, their children and themselves). 4.3,2. tovtois yap <paaiv aydyKTju 
fhai irpo^nus aKt^fiy (they say it is necessary to defend these). Eur. Or. 922. 
('Opto-TTjj) ifdfKrja'e t ifiwpc7y iraTpi, KOK^y yvyauKa K&beou KaraKravuv 
(wished to help his father). PI. Ap. 28, c. el t ifxcaprja e is UaTp6KXcf> t$ 
(Taipei) Thy <p6yoy (if yon shall avenge the murder of your friend Patroclus, i. e. 
if you shall avenge for him). 

Kem. 4. The words tpiXos, ix^P^^f iroAcVtoy are also nsed as sub- 
stantives, and povem the Gen. X. An. 3. 2, 5. tovs iKelyov e'x'^^to'Touj 
(his bitterest enemies). Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and ad- j 
iectives of all kinds, when the action takes place for the advantage, favor, honor, f 
harm, disadvantage of a person, or an object considered as a person (Dativus 
commodi et incommodi), where the English uses the prepositions to or for. Here 
belong particularly the rites performed in honor of a divinity, e. g. 6pxe7<rSKx.i 
To7s ^eo7s (to dance' in honor of the gods) ; aT((payov(r^ai ^fcS (to crown one's self in 
honor of the gods). Her. 6, 138. 'ApTCfiiSi Spr^y Hyfiv (to keep a feast in honor 
of Diana). The Dative with KKveiy (Poet., especially Epic), is also to be re* 
garded in the same way : k\v^I fioi, listen to me favorably. Here belongs, also, 

35* 



1 



414 SYNTAX. [§ 284. 

the phrase, mostly poetic, Sexea-^ai n rivl, to receive something from some one^ 
since it involves the additional idea that the reception of the thing will be re- 
garded as a relief, as agreeable, etc. to the person. Od. tt, 40. &s ipa <p<atr{}(ras o I 
ISe^aro x<^^it^ov (yx^s {received from him [as a favor to him] the brazen spear). 
See Larger Graram. Part. II. § 597, Rem. 3. 

(8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting with something in a 
person. 

"Tir o?.afiPdv€iu Se^ r^ toiovt<j), Brt evrj^s ris 6,vbp<DTros (sciL ccrrfv), PL 
Rp. 598. d. ''ETe/)a S'ij, a>s coi«e, ro7s ^vXa^iv evpi) Kafify^ 421, e. Qaip<rovirt 
liA,\i(rra iroXcfiioi, '6rap TOty ivavrio is irpdyfiaTa Kol a<rxoA.ios irvy^dvayrai 
{when they perceive troubles and hindrances in those opposed to them), X. Hipp. 5. 8. 

(9) The Dative stands with €(ttC{v) and cio-t(v), to denote 
the person, or tiling considered as a person, tJiat Jias or possesses 
something. The thing possessed stands as the subject in the 
Nom., but the verb is translated by the EngUsh have, etc., and 
the Dat. as the Nom. So also Avith ytyveaSou and vTrdpxtiv (to 
be, exist), also with iSios and oAAorpios. 

Kvpw ^v fxcyaK-q $a<ri\cla ( Ct/rus had a great kingdom ). — To?r ir\ov<rlois 
iroWd vapafxvbid (paaiu eJyai, PI. Rp. 329, e. "^Hffav Kpoitr^ 5uo toTScs, 
Her. 1, 44. When the above verbs are connected with a predicative abstract 
substantive, they may be translated to prove, to serve. Xaipi<pwy 4fiol (rifiia 
fxaWoy, ^ uxpeKe id iariu, X. C. 2. 3, 6. (Ch. mihi detrimento potius est, quam ^ 
emolumento, is an injury, proves an injury rather than a benefit). 

Rem. 5. The possessive Dat., or the Dat. of the possessor, is to be distin- 
guished from the Gen. of the possessor (§ 273, 2). The Dative is used, wlun 
it is asked, what the possession is (what has one ?). and the possession dc-iu'- 
natcd is contrasted with other possessions, e. g. Kvpw ijy ncydXn $aai\iia, 
Cyrus had (amoug other things also) a great kingdom ; the Gen. is used, when it j 
is asked who the possessor is (whose is tliis 1), and the possessor is contrasted 
with other possessors, e. g. K up ou itv nfydxrj ^curiKfia, to Cyrus {and not to 
another) belonged a great kingdom. The Dative describes the person as one to - 
whom the posso;?ion has been imparted, divided, given, and under whose con- 
trol it now is ; the Genitive, as one who has gained possession, fhjm whom the 
possession has proceeded. 

(10) The Dat. is usod universally when an action takes place 
in reference to a person, or a thing considered as a person, so that 
the person in some way shares or participates in it. Here be- 
long the following instances : — 

(a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whose judgment, 
consider-ation, or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a dctinitc 
authority or value ; i. e. the assertion is made in view of the judgment, etc. of 
the person to whom the matter had been submitted. This Dat, therefore show* 
vhen and under ivhat circumstances the assertion is true, e. g. Her. 1, 14. aXiydcT 14 



♦ 284.] 



DATIVE CASE. 



415 



h6ryu xp^fot^-^vep ov KopivS^iuv tov Srjfioaiov i(rrlv 6 ^aavpds {recte aestimanti hit 
thesaurus non est Corinihiacus, in the judgment of one estimating the matter correctly, 
it is not the Corinthian treasury). Th. 2, 49. rh ^u^ey i tt t o ^ eV w awf^a oijK dyal 
dfpfihu iiv [the external pan of the body, when one touched it, in the view of one touching 
it, was not very hot). Here belong especially the Datives ds^dun, i^iSuri, auafidun, 
vwfpfidyri and the like, with local specifications. Her. 6, 33. anh 'luvlris airdKXa(T(r6- 
Heyos 6 vavriKhs (rrparhs ra iv apia-repk i sir\eovT i tov 'EW-qsirSyrov alpee irdura 
{the naval force subjugated all parts of the Hellespont, upon the left as one soils into it, 
or with respect to one saiUng into it). X. Cy. 8. 6, 20. ( Kvpos) \4y€Tai KaToffTp^xxxrSKu 
wdma tA e^io;, gao SupiW elsfiavri oIk^i ^ex/)i ipv^pas ^aXd(r<r-ns (which dwell as 
one enters Syria [from the entrance of S.] to tlie Red Sea) Also the expression us 
<rvy€K6wTt ciVerv, to speak briefly, to say in a word, properly to say it when one 
has brought the whole together into a small compass, has comprehended the ivhole, e. g. 
"Avfv iLpx6yTwy ovi^y h,y ot/Tc Ka\6y, oUre aya^hy yivoiro, ws (xey <rvve\6yrt 
tliTfiy, oifSauQVy X. An. 3. 1, 38. 

(b) So also the Dat of the person often stands in connection with ws, in 
order to show that the thought which is expressed, is not a general one, but 
has its value only according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6, 4. 
6 riL wf pi roi/s dfovs yifiifia flSus op^us &v Vt^^*' eixrefi^s wpiffiiiyos etri (nos- 
tra judicio, in our opinion). S. 0. C. 20. ficutphy ydp, us yfpoyri, irpovcrToK-qs 
SB6y (you went forward a great iray, for an old man, as an old man would vieiu it). 
Ant. 1161. Kpftty yap ^y ^if\uT6s, us ifioi., irore (in my opinion). PI. Soph. 
226, C. raxfioy, &5 i fioi, VKf^iy iirndrrds. Her. 3, 88. ydfiovs tovs Tpcarovs 
iydfxif Ilf p<r J) c I 6 Aapuos {matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con- 
tracted very konoraUe marriages, in the judgment of the Persiaiis). Altogether 
usual in the phrase i^i6s ft fit rty6s rtr., or even without the Gen., &^i6s 
ft fit Tiyi (I am of value in the estimation of some one). X. C. 1. 2, 62. i/iol fiey 
8^ ^uKpdrris roiovTos tay ih6Kft ri/i^t &|io$ ilvcu rp ■ir6K€i fia?>.Xoy, fj Sfavdrou 
{rather merits honor than death, in the estimation, in the view of the city). PI. Symp. 
185, b. ovt6s 4<my b rr\s Ovpavias beov (pus Kcd ovpdvios Kol iroWou &^ios Kcd 
w6Kfi Kcd tSiurais. 

(c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with $ov\ofi4ya), ^So^evw, 
hryJytf, 4\irofi(y<p, i^'^j^fKw, Trposifx^ufvu and the like, in connection with 
verbs, most frequently with tJyan and yiyveirbai. Such a participle gives 
definiteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. lAravrd <roi fiou\ofi€vu 
iariy (if this is to you wishing it, if this is your wish). OwtJj /jloi rjSofieyu 
aTHjmjarev (he met me to my joy). Her. 9, 16. T}5ofieyo ktiv Jifxty at \6yoi ye- 
ySyauri. Th. 6, 46. ry "Nik la irpo sBexopL^ yu ^y ra irepl ruv 'Eyea-raiuy 
[were as \icias exfiected). PI. Rp. 358. d. oAA' opOy et <r oi fiov Kofieyu (sc 
^errlt), S. Kfyu, whether what I say pleases you). 

(d) The Dat. of the personal pronouns, first atid second persons, is often 
used, not because they are really necessary for the general sense, but to show 
that the statement is made in a familiar, humorous, and pleasant manner. This 
is called the Ethical Dat. (Dutivus ethicus). X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. opuy 5^ rhu Kifffiov \ 
roD xdvTOVy iufiKevwM avr^, (l\ey€y (d Kdpos)' ''n fiTJTep, ws koXos fioi 6 vdir 



416 SYNTAX. [^ 284. 

iros (0 mother, how beautiful grandfather is, in mt eyes). 15. fjv Se/ic KaraKiirpr 
ij/^dde, Ka\ fj.d^a} iinreveiv, '6Tav (ikv eV Hcpaais 8), olfiai a oi eKeifovs robs aya^obt 
ra Tre^t/co paZioos viK-ficreiu (to gbatift YOU, / think I shall easily surpass those 
skilled in foot exercises). 

(11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass, (rarely 
with other tenses of the Pass.), to denote the active person or 
ag(Mt. The Pass., in this case, expresses a state or condition, 
and the Dat. represents the author of this condition at the same 
time as the person for whom this condition exists, while by vtto 
with the Gen., the author merely is expressed. 

Her 6, 123. jis [xoi irp6T€pou 5€5-f]\(ar ai {as has been before shown by me). 
Dem. Aphob. 844, 1. Set SnqyTiffaa-^ai rh rovrq> ir eirpayfifva vepl rjuofv [it i» 
necessary to describe what has been done by him). 01. 1. 26, 27. ri ir firpuKr ai 
To7s 'a Wo IS ; {what has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which 
is wanting, may be supplied, e. g. ravrd fwi AtAe/crai {I have said this). 

(12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in 
the Dative with verbal adjectives in -t6<s and -tcos, [^234, 1, (i)], 
both when they are used, like the Latin verbal in -dum, im- 
personally in the Neut. Sing. : -t6v, -reov, or PI. -to, -rca (^ 24 1, 
3.), or when they are used personally, hke the Latin participle 
in -dus ; those derived from transitive verbs, i. e. such as govern 
the Ace, admit both the Impers. and the Pers. construction ; 
but those deri'v sd from intransitive verbs, admit only the im- 
personal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat 
of the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which 
it is derived. 

Th aTpdrevfia eiifir l^er ov ^v itrrav^a to7s tt oXffiio is {could be easily 
attacked by the enemy), ^. An. 3. 4,20. 'Ac/c^jTeoi/ (or -Tf'a) iarl <roi tV 
ap€TT)v {you 7mist practise virtue or virtue must be practised by you). ^Eiri^vfiri' 
t4ov iarl ro7s av^pwirois Trjs aperrjs {there 7nust be a desiring by m«i, men 
7nust desire virtue). 'E-rr ix^ ipvr^ oy ia-rl aoi toJ epyai {you must attempt the 
work). *72/ui 5^ fioTi^vre ov elycu tojs irpdyixounv vfxlv {I say that you must 
render assistance), Dem. 01. 1. 14, 17. KoAao-reov cotI <roi r'bv iybponrop 
{you must punish the man). 'AcKTjrea itrri a-oi ^ af>m^. 'il^cXTjre'o aoiri 
^7r6Kis cVtjV, X. C. 3. 6, 3. So the Deponents (§ 197), e. g. fiifxrireoy forly 
OfxTv Tovs aya^ovs (from fiifxela^ai Tiya) or /jiifn}reoi ciVlv T)fJi7y ol ayo^i 
{you must imitate the good). 

Eem. 6. The verbal adjectives of those verbs whose middle form has a Pa5s. 
as well as a reflexive or intransitive sense, have, likewise, in the impersonal 
Neut. form with iarl, a two-fold signification ; and when an object is joined 
with them, a two-fold construction, e. g.Tei(TT4oy iarhf fifuy aur6v {we must 



^ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 417 

convince htm) from ^.t^ccnud; and ir,i<rr4oy iarh if/Mu to7s y6f.oi5 [we must 
obey the^ laws, obiemperandum est a nobis legibus) from 7r,ibo,.ai tlvi, obtempero 
alicui ; aira\\aKTeoy icriv Jifuu avrhv rov kukov (we must rid him of the evil) 
from a7ra\AorT€iv Tiv^ rov KUKoi; &nd iiraWaKT 4 oy icrly i,fx7y rov ^y^pfirrol 
(we must get rid of the man) from a7raAAc{TTe(r.^at' nyos (to get rid of something). 

Rem. 7. Not unfrequently, however, the verbal adjectives in -re 65, among 
the Attic wnters, take the active person or agent in the Ace. also, as these ver- 
bals have the force of the impersonal verb Se? with the Inf., e. g. PI. Gorg. 
507. d. rhy ^ovXoixevov fvSaifioya ehai (rw<ppo(TvVTfy SiuKreoy Kal a<TKri'' 
reoy (whoever wishes to be happy must seek and practise sobriety). Often, also, 
the construction of verbal adjectives is changed into the Inf ; in this case the 
agent must necessarily stand in the Ace. X. C. 1. 5, 5. ifxol fiky So/ce?. . . c'Aeu- 
tfpcfi aySpl fi/KThy eJyai f^rj rvx^^y Sov\ov roiovrov Sov\t^oyra Sc . . . 
iKtT €Vfty robs deovs k. t. A. 

i 285. C. The Dative of the thing {Instrumental 

Dative). 

1. The Dative of the thing expresses relations which in 
Latin are denoted by the Ablative. The relations expressed 
by this Dat. are : 

(1) The ground, reaso7i, or cause, e. g. (^oySw aTrrik^ov^ ivvou^ 
d^wcto, <^o/?a), vftpu TTouXv rt ; especially with verbs denoting the 
state of the feelings, e. g. ;(atp€tv, ^Sccr^ai, dyaXAco^^at, cTraipco-- 
^at, XvTTfxcrSaiLy avuxcrSai, aXyelv, ck-, KaTa7rXi^TT€(rSaL ; <^av/xd^eiv J 
ikTrL^€i.v ; arrepycw and dyaTraj', opicrKia^aLy apKila^ai (all four : tO 
be content, to he pleased with something); d-yavuKTctv, 8vs;)(cpatV€tj/, 
;(aA.r7ra>9, (icLpiuyi t^iptiVy a^Sia^cu ; alcr)(vvi(T^ai, etc. 

X. C. 1.3, 1. 01 btoX ra7s irapii ruv (vaififardrcey rifials fidXiffTa x«^f ow- 
ir IV (are especially pleased with the honors from the 7nost devout). Her. 478. S lal' 
T p oitia/xws i] p« <r K(T Hkv^ik'p (ttus by no means pleased with the Scythian 
mode of life). Th. 4, 85. davfid^u r^ airoK\el(rei fiov rwy itv\S>v (1 am 
surprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3, 97. i\iri^fiy r -p rvxv 
(to hope in fortune). Uripyw rols irapovaiy (I am content with the present 
things). *Ayairii ro7s iiir dpxov<T ly aya^o7s. Xa\eirws <p€o<t> rois 
irapovffi irpdyfia<ri (I am troubled by the present state of affairs), X. An. 1.3, 3. 
hlffxvvofuu rols iTfirpayfifyois (lam ashamed 071 account of what has been done), 
C. 2. 1,31. PI. IIipp.maj.285. e. (Ik6tu)s aoi x<^^oov(Tiv ol AaKcSainSyioi, &t€ 
iroKXa flS6ri. 'AydWofiai rfj ylKT). TIoWol ayavaKrovat r^ ^a- 
vdro). Avsxfpetift^ ro7s \6yois. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 14. ay avfi a as ro7s 

ircirpayfifyoisria'vxlaycx'hfft' 'I trx "^ «*»'''■'' '^^ ''"'^ /**""'> -^^ ^*^* '^' ^* 
also witli adjectives, e. g. Icx^p^s x^pc^^y rax^s iroaiv, etc. 

Remark 1. The preposition i-nl, on account of at, is very often joined with 
the Dat. ; thus commonly, xcl^c^ws (ptpnv iiri rm, ^at^udCeiv eVt rivi ; Svsx^- 
paiyv usually with the' Ace, § 279, 5; we also find ayairu, arepyw, fia^ews, 
XoAci (Us <p4pt» Ti. 



418 SYNTAX. [^285 

(2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom- 
plished. Hence the Dat. also stands with xp^o-"^at (uti) and 
its compounds, and with voixl^eiv (to be accicstom^d to). 

'BdWeiy Kl^ois {to throw with stones = to throw stones). ^AjcoyriCeiv aixMaTx 
(to hurl with spears = to hurl spears). X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. 6 fifv Inroiceyravpos 
SvoTv d<})^a\fio7v irpoeupaTo Kcd Svoty Utroiv fJKovev iyw Se r irrapffi 
(ifv 6<t>^a\fio7s TeKfxapovixai, r €Tt apffi 5« wa\ irpoa.i<T^<TOfiai' iroAAi 
•yip (paai Kol 'lirirov av^pdnrois to7s 6<pd a\no7s vpoopuvra SriKovv, iroAAa 84 
ro7s uxtI irpooucovovra (n)ixaivfiv {the centaur saw with two eyes, and heard with 
two ears; but I shall see with four eyes, etc.). 18. Trpoyof7v /icV 7* c|« irdyra 
ri] ay^poiirlvT) yv<i>fir], Ta7s Se x^P^^'^ Sir\o<pop^(ru), Siw^ofiai 5e ra Tir- 
ircu, rhu 5* ivavriov h-varpiy^w rfj rod Tttttou Pwfxrj. X. C. 4. 2, 9. cu rtir 
<ro<p(i>v &,vSpwv yyufiai kptr^ nKovri^ovai tous Ke/cTTj^teVouj {enrich with virtue 
those who possess them). Her. 3, 117. oZroi 2iy, olvep tfi-K^poabty iwh^rav 
Xpaff^ai rif vSarj, ovk ?x<'*'T€S avrif XP"<^'^**'> <rvix<pop^ fityiXri hi' 
axp^^vrai {those who before were accustomed to use the water ^ not being able to 
use it, experienced a great inconvenience). Dem. Cor. 277, 150. Keyp irpo<pdafi 
rair'p KaTaxp<^- ^^^ fcar axp^ c^'^at and Staxpvo'^»i in the sense of 
consumere, to kill, as transitive, govern the Ace. Comp. Her. 6, 135 5 Antiph. 1. 
113, 23. With XP'?*'"'^"* 3, a^ond Dat. often stands, by means of attraction, 
or €js with the Ace. or the Ace. of a pronoun or neuter adjective (§ 278, 4), 
to express the design or purpose, e. g. xp*/***^ '^"t iri<rT<p <pi\oa, as in the 
Lat. utor te Jido amico, I have thee for a true friend). X An. 1. 4, 15. vfiip 
iriffTOT drois x P "h <^ ^ "f" <'^ f^ f«i <'^ <f>povpia Kal (Is Xoxoy^a* {u-ill employ 
you as the most faithful both for guards and commanders). Her. 4, 117. <p«ey^ ol 
TiavpofiiTat yopii^ovffi 'SKv^iicp {are accustomed to use the Scythian language). 
Th. 2, 38. d7al<ri koI ^vfflais Sitrriffiois v ofii^ovff i. 

Kem. 2. The Dat. is very often used without <r{)v in military expressions, 
with reference to a retinue or force, in order to represent this as the means bv 
which something takes place ; this usage is found particularly with verbs of 
going and coming. Such Datives are arpar^, <rr6\tf, -wKiibtiy yamTi{w)^ Tinroij, 
aTpariwTais, etc. (In Latin the Abl. without cum., as magno exercitu venire, to 
come with a large army). Her. 5, 99. ol 'A^vaioi airiKfaro cffcocri yriverl {came 
with twenty ships). Th. 1, 102. 'A^ycuoi fjK^oy v\r}^€i ovk dKlytf {with not 
a small nianber). 4. 39. ol lie Kovoyvrjir 10 1 a.vix^P^<^°^ "^ V fTpoTqU in t^s TlvKov. 
X. Cy. 1. 4, 17. avrhs to7s Ttttois irposfXdaas trphs to ruy M-qhwy <ppoupia KatT4- 
fifiy^y {having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. ^ap^a\(vs r}fuy i^ti-rorr* 

01 VoKefJLlOl Koi IVKIK^ KoX IT 6 A T aCT T ( K ^. 

(3) The following relations also maybe considered as the 
m,eans, and are expressed by the Dat. : (a) the material of 
which (= toith which) anytliing is made ; — (b) the rule or 
standard, accorditig to which anytliing is measured, judged of, 
or done; hence the Dat. stands particularly with verbs of 
measuring^ judging ^ inferring, e. g. aradpMjcr^ai, yiyvoio-Kcu', cuca- 



♦ 285.] DATIVE Ci.SE. 



419 



iew, Kpiv€ivy TCKpxt|Oco-^at ; also in general, to express a more deji 
nite limitcUion, to denote in what respect a word is to be taken • 
thus, for example, with verbs signifying to be distinguished, to 
excel, to be strong and powerful, and the contrary ; also with very 
many adjectives (instead of the Ace. of more definite limita- 
tion, k 279, 7); — (c) the measure, by, according to which an 
action is defined or limited, especially wnth comparatives and 
superlatives, as well as with other expressions, which include 
the idea of comparison, in order to denote the degree of 
difference between the objects compared; — finally, (d) the 
way and manner in which anything is done {How ?). 

Her. 3, 57. ^ ayoprj »ca2 rh vpvrajrf)'ioy Tlapio} Kl^:^ 7}(riajix4va {^v) [were decora- 
ted with Parian marble). On the Gen. of the material, see § 273, 5. Her. 2, 2. 
Toiovrxp (rra^firfo-ifxfy 01 vp-fiyfiari {ex tali re judicantes, having judged 
Jrom or 6y sttch a circumstance), 7, 16. rfj <r^ ior^rjn r eKfxaipSfxeyo y (ex 
tua veste judicium faciens). X. Cy. 1. 3,5. rivi 5^ <ru t e K/xaip6fi€yos, & 
wdi, raxna. \eyeis; {judging by what rule, do you say this?). 3. 3, 19. at fidxat 
Kplvayrai fuiWoy rais rpvxc^^s, fj raus Tuy (TcefidTwy puf^iais {are decided 
more by courage^ than strength of body). H. 7. 3, 6. ovroi irdyras au^pdoTrovs 
vtr (p$f fiK-fiKatri Ti^A/up re koI fiiapia {have surpassed all men in daring 
and brutality). C. 2. 7, 7. t<rx'^«i»' to is ou jxaa i [to be strong in body). Cy. 
2. 3, 6. iyii) oirrf xooiv upu rax^Sy »(jre xfp<^**' lirx^P^s. Hence t^ 
iyrif rp iXrjdfia., ry Aifyqs, ry 'lpy<p {according to the nature of, etc.) ^ also yvdo/xr) 
(r<f>a\Tiyau, i^cwr^^vat {to be deceived in opinion), Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. Her. 1, 184. 
^ffxipa/xis y€y(f}<Ti ircj/Tf irp6T(poy iyeyero ttjs HiTWKpios {was before 
Nitocris by five generations). So iroAAy, oAtyw, fiiKp(^, tocovtci), Hcrcf fjiei^wy 
{greater by muck, by little, by so much = much greater, a little greater, so rtmch greater, 
etc.). Her. 6, 89. 6<rr4piaray rjfjifpr) fiff} rrjs (rvyKeifi4yr]s {a day later than 
uns fxed upon, later by a day, etc,). lOG. v6Ki Koyifiri f] 'EWas yeyove aff- 
btyarr ( pr\ {has become weaker by [the loss of] a distinguished city). So with 
Trp6 with the Gen., and fxerd {ajler) with the Ace, e.g. Ae/ca ercai irph rrjs iy 
HaXofuyi ravfjLaxias {before the battle of Salamis by ten years, i. e. ten years before, 
etc.). 'Efij worry ?t€i fifTo. 'l\lov aKwcriv {sixtieth year after the sack of 
Troy). Here belong, also, (vf^^ovy nya x^^^°-^^ ^pO'Xf^'^^^'^"'^"-'''^ i^'^ 
fine one [with] a thousand drachmas, etc.), and the like. Her. 6, 136. 6 Srjfios iCv 
fucoa-f (rhy MiKridSta) kotA tV a5ut(Tj>' veyT-qKoyTa raKdyroiai {Jmed 
kirn fifty talents). Th. 4, 73. t y /8 e A t / tr t w toD SirKiTiKod ^\a<p^rivai {jactu- 
ram facere, to suffer defeat by [the loss of] the best portion of the heavy armed force). 
H. 7, 2. T/xicj fiey KK'ayy^ t iyov^ t iaay, 6pvi^€S S>s {advanced with a noise and 
a cry), X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. {oi y6fj.oi) Trpoordrrouffi fih fiia els oMav TrapUyai {forbid 
to enter a house by force). So bopifiu, Kpavy^, fiorj <ny^ iroieiv ri {to do something 
with a noise, etc.) ; Siio), iinfx.(\fla, S-nnooia (sc. <5Sy), iSia {6S(f), v4(r) {6S^), Koivn 
(<i8^), in common, rip rpSircp roicpSe; Ko^iSp, properly with care, hence, entirely, 



420 SYNTAX. [^ 286 

quite; (TirovSfi, with pains, aegre, scarcely, hardly ; iiAAp, ra{n-py Sixp, duplici modo^ 
e'lK^, frustra. Comp. § 101, 2, (b). 



t 286. II. Substantive Object with Prepositions, or 
the Construction o/ Prepositions. 

1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whith- 
er, where, and the causal relations, which were originally 
considered as local relations, so the prepositions express 
another local relation, viz., the extension or position of 
things in space, — the juxtaposition of things (by the side 
of, over, around, ivith), or the local opposites above and 
below, within and without, before and behind. Prepositions 
therefore denote the relative position of the things described 
by the substantives which they connect ; and the relation 
expressed by them may be called the relation of position. 

2. The Cases connected with the prepositiops, show in 
which of the local relations, whence, whither, where, the 
preposition is to be understood. 

Remark 1. Thus, for example, the preposition irapd denotes merely the 
local relation of near, by the side of, by ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. 
^A3-e IT a pa tov /Sao-iAe'ws, in addition to tlie idea of nearness, it denotes, 
at the same time, the direction whence {he came from near tfie kinrj, de chej: le 
roi)\ in connection with the Ace, e. g. 77 6 1 IT op ^ rhv /Sao-tXeo, at the same 
time, the direction whither {he went ixto the vicinity or presence 0/ the 
king) ; and in connection with the Dat. e. g-., Ictttj iraph T<p dao-iAct, it de- 
notes simply the place where {he stood sear the king). 

3. Prepositions are divided according to their construction : 

(a) into prepositions which govern the Gen.: ayrl, be/ore {ante), hit 6^ from 
{ab, a), e K, out of (ex), irpo, before {pro) \ 

(b) into those which govern the Dat.: iv, in (in with abl.) and vlv, with 

{cum). 

(c) into those which govern the Ace: a yd, up, els, into {in with ace), «y, 
to ; 

(d) into those which govern the Gen. and Ace: Sid, through, Kurd, down 
from {de), virep, over {super), fifrd, tcith ; 

(e) into those which govern the Gen., Dat., and Ace: afi.<pl, about, ivt, 
upon, irapd, by, irepl, arouixd {circa), irp6s, before, and vic6, under 
{sub). 

4. Prepositions are divided according to the relations of posif 
Hon which they denote : 



i 287.] 



PREPOSITIONS. *AvTt, irpo. 



421 



(a) into such as indicate a juxtaposition: vapd and aficpi, near, iirt, at 
and upoTiy (TV u and fierd, with; 

(b) into such as express local opposites : iirl, upon, h.v<i, up, iT4p, over, 
and vir6, under, Kara, doum {under), irp6, ■np6s and kvri, before, in 

front o/and the improper prepositions oiric^^v, after, behind ; eV and 
cij, in, within, and iK, 6|, from, out of; ^id, through, and Trep I, around, 
outside ; u s, to, up to, and air 6, from, away from. i 

5. The relation of position expressed by prepositions is trans- 
ferred to the relations of time and causality, e. g. Ot TroXifuot 
diro t^s TToXews airi<fivyov. 'A^ro vvktos aTr^X^ov (from 
night, immediatehj after the beginning of night). 'Atto ^v/a- 
/xa;(ia9 avrovojjioi (Icnv (from, by virtue of tlie alliance). 

6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, which it 
everywhere retains, even when it is connected with two or 
three Cases ; but it receives various modifications according to 
the different Cases with which it is connected, because the 
local relation varies with each Case. Comp. Rem. 1. The 
fundamental meaning of prepositions is most evident, when 
they express local relations ; it is generally quite evident in those 
of time also ; but in the causal relations, it is often very obscure. 

Rem. 2. Originally all the prepositions were merely adverbs of place. See 
S 300, 1. The prepositions enumerated in No. 3, may be called Proper prepo-;- 
Bitions, inasmuch as during the cultivated period of the language, they either ' 
were not used at all, or but very seldom, as adverbs of place, without a sub- 
stantive ; accordingly, they have the regular functions of prepositions : they 
difl'er from the Improper " prepositions : of these latter, the following classes : 
may be named : (a) both adverbs of place and other adverbs, which, though i 
thev regularly have the functions of adverbs, are sometimes, in connection! 
with a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. anSwpo^eu, &vev, Sixa, a/xa; — (b) ' 
substantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. SUriv, instar, x<»P*''» gratia, cVexa, 
on account of. 



L PREPOSITlbNS WITH THE GeNITIVE ONLY. 

$ 287. (1) 'AvTt and irpo, before. 

1. 'AvTt (Lat. ante, before, in the face of, opposite, etc.), orig- 
inal signification: in the face of (before, over against) (1) in 
a local sense (in prose seldom); (2) in a causal or figurative 
sense : (a) in adjurations, instead of the common word Trpos 
with the Gen.; — (b) with expressions denoting comparison 
(e. g. with the comparative), valuing, weighing, requital; hence 
with words of buying, selling, bartering, value, worth, likeness oi 

36 



t^-6 



^' 



422 SYNTAX. [^ 287 

unlikeness, preference ; — (c) of the cause or ground, when i» 
expresses the idea of making compensation, as in av3i^ ov, dv^' wv, 
for what ? wherefore ? — (d) of substitution, giving an equiva 
lent, etc. 

(1) (T^ x*'P'<"' ^'^'''^) 5a(ri> irirvffi ZiaXenroiffaui fxeyiXaiSy kvb* ^v (.<mfK6rt% 
livSpfS Tt tiv irdffxoicv ^ inrh rwv <pepofi4yet)V Xl^cav, fj inrh rwv KvXxyZovfiivuv \ (6<- 
hind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7, 6. (2) (a) 
'Ai'Ti vaiBotv T w V S e . . . iKerfvofievj SO. o-e {for the sake of as it vcere standing 
te/brc), S. O. C. 1326. (b) {tivKovpyos KaTfipydxraro) iy T'p ir6\ei alptrdtT epov 
tlvai rhv KoXhv ^dyarov ayrl alaxpo^ fiiov (is better than, is preferable to a 
disgraceful life), ^.^.1j. 9, 1. Trji' TcAeurrji/ ayrl ttjs ruy ^uyrwy ffaTtjplas 
ilKKi^ayro (exchanged death for the safety of the living), PI. Menex. 237, a. Uarrip 
viby hLvrX vdyrwy rwy HWay XP'H 1^'^'^ ^v irpoTifjui. So auputr^ad ri ayrl 
riyos, instead of the common nySs. Trjv iKfvbepiay kKoifxriy tiy ayrl wy fx» 
wdyroty {in place of all which I have), "K. An. 1. 7, 3. (d) Aovkos ayrl Sta- 
w6tov {a slave instead of a despot). *Ayrl r}fi4pas ia»| iytyrro, Her. 7, 37. 
*Ayr\ rod fidx^o'^oit xe^etr^at i^iku, X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. 'Arrf is never used 
of time. 

2. lip o, original signification: on the foreside {pro, pra£, be- 
fore, figuratively, in belialf of), (1) local; — (2) of time; (3) 
causal and figurative : (a) in belialf of (for the good, for the 
weal) ; with expressions denoting comparison (hence with the 
Com. degree), valuing, estimation, like djTt, but always with the 
accompanying idea of standiiig before, preference ; hence it is 
used to express preference in general; — (b) of an inward^ 
mental cause, occasion, inducement (only Poet.) : on account of 
prae, e. g. II. p, 667. Trpo Kfto/Boto (prae metu, for fear, on account 
of fear). 

{\) Vliy^a Ti vr^ffos Kiirai "K ph Me7({po0i/, Th. 3, 51. {2) Tlph iin-tpas krriK- 
^oy. (3) ndyres a^i^troval ore vph ainSiy $ov\fV(a-bau {desire you to consult for 
them), X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. Mdx^O'^au, airor^avctv irph Trj s irar plSo s, 5<cuco^w- 
yeveiy ir jh fia<ri\4w5 (fir, in behalf of , one^s country), X. Cy. 8. 8, 4. Aucaio- 
repay ^(itiy Ked KdWioy etyai Tph rod <l>evy€iy re koI awoS iSpda Kfiy vw4- 
X^iv rf irrfXet SIktjv iriyriy hy Torn? {I thought it more just in preference to fleeing, etc.), 
PI. Phaed. 99, a. Tlph troWov Troi-fjaratrl^al n {to esteem before or above muck^ 
i. e. very highly). Tlph voWciy XRVH^'^'^'^^v rin.-^<raxTbaL ti (to value before muck 
wealth). {TovTov) irph vdyroiv xPVf'-'^'^f^'' ««i ir 6vety irpiaifiriy tty ^iXok 
uoi ftyaty X. C. 2. 5, 3. Uph rovrov rf^ydvau hy /ioXAov e\orro {for him), PL 
Symp. 179, a. *Eiraiv€iy r ph SiKaioavyris aBiKiav {to praise injustice befljre, 
rather than, in preference to justice), Ep. 361, e. 

Kemark. The reason that the prepositions ayri and irp6 are not con- 
nected with the Dat, like prepositions of the same meaning in other langaagea, 



f 288.] 



PREPOSITIONS. 'Atto, ^/c. 



423 



bnt with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the 
relation denoted by he/ore^ in front of, not merely as local, but implying action 
a relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions u^ep, TrprfsJ 
8i«{, aiA<pi, Iff pi, fvi, vTr6 with the Gen., since the Gen. represents the 
place as the cause or occasion of the action, and hence likewise, a relation of 
dependence. See S 273, 4. 



$288. (2) 'ATro', from, and i$, ^k, out of. 

Preliminary Remark. These two prepositions denote an outgoing, a rar 
moval, departure, but d w rf denotes a removal from the exterior of an object, while 
iK {« I), always implies a going out from within a place or object ; and in the 
causal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, one more direct. 

1. 'Airo {ab), from, denotes: (1) in a local relation: (a) re- 
moval from a place or object \vith verbs of motion, also of free- 
ing, and the like, e. g. \v€lv, eXevScpovv, also of missing (^ 271, 2), 
hence, utto (tkottov ; then it is transferred to mental failures, as 
in air cAttiSwv, oltto yv(i)/xr]<;, aliter ac sperabam, putabam (as if 
aherrans ah exspectatione, ab opi7iione) ; (b) distance from a 
place or object with verbs of rest; — (2) of time, going out 
from a point of time : from, after ; — (3) causal or figurative : 
(a) of origin, as with cTvai, yCyvea-Sai ; (b) of the whole in rela- 
tion to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it ; (c) of the 
atdkor wnth Pass, verbs instead of vtto (^ 251, Rem. 4), but al- 
ways with the accompanying idea of on the part of; (d) of the 
occasion or cause; (e) of the material; (f) of the means and 
instrument; (g) of conformity. 

(1) (a) *Airb T^j ic6\ws airf<(>vyoy ol iroKeixioi. (b) 'O \6yos ovk arrh 
rov CK otrov IfSo^fv flprier^ju,^. S.2,\0. {Ai TraXaial noKcis) airh ^a\d(rari5 
^oAAov tpKlff^ffow (at a distance from the sea), Th. 1, 7. (2) *Airh Tot/rrjs rris 
i} 1x4 pas, iirb wkt6s, k<p' katrtpas; airh ruv airtav {ajler the meal), 'K.'R 
L. 5, 8. (3) {si)'Airh'A\Knaiuyos Kol aZris McyaK\4o5 eyeyouro Ka\ Ktipra 
Kafi-irpol (very distinguished men spruf^ from), Her. 6, 125. (b) T^s rpiripeis, 
ouTTfp 9iacu/ airr^ iiirh rwv KaraKfi<p^fi(rwv (which he had of those that were 
left), Th. 4, 9. Tiiir^T^jSeipTji (ornaments for the neck, necklaces), Her. 
1, 51. So oi dirb /BowATJy (qui sunt a consiliis, those who belong to the council) ; 
ol kxl n\<{T<wvoj (the pupils of Plato, the Platonics) ; oi airh ttjs 'AkoStj- 
fifar, etc. (c) 'Eirpdx^V »*' aifrwv ovBtu tpyov a^ioKoyov (uxis done by 
them^on the part of ), Th. 1, 17. (d) *Airh hiKcuoffivvs (by, on account of), 
Her. 7,1 64. T^ arrh rwy woXtnluv ip6pic (metu ab hostibus, fear of from the 
enemy), X. Cy. 3. 3, 53. •A<^* Uvtov (from his own impulse), (e) Tpe>€«v rh 
yavTiKhy awh irpos6Swy (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f) 'Airb rS>y ifier^pw, 
ifuy ToKtfu: (*Uuincos) avtifiix'^*' (sociorum vestrorum ope), Dem.Ph. 1.49. 



424 SYNTAX. [^ 288. 

34 ; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. avh a-rSfjMTos, avh yXdnrifs dictiv {by 
hearty hy word of mouth) \ avh airovSrjs (zealously), (g) 'Air' OvA.i utov oCpt- 
os Ka\4ouTai Ov\v/xTrn]uoi (are called from, derive their name from mount Olympus)^ 
Her. 7, 74. 'Awb |u;tt/iox t«s avrSpo/xoi (by virtue of), Th. 7, 57. 

2. 'E^, €K (eo;), owi (j/* (opposite of ev, m), denotes (1) in a 
local relation : (a) removal either from within a place or object, 
or from immediate participation or connection with a place or 
object, with verbs of motion; hence an immediate succession 
of one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest: 
without, beyond (Epic), e. g. ex /JcXeW, extra tehrum factum; — 
(2) of time, immediate outgoing from a point of time; then 
especially the immediate development of one thing from anoth- 
er, an immediate succession of two actions ; — (3) in a causal 
and figurative sense : (a) oi origin; (b) of the whole in relation 
to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the 
accompanying idea of choice and distinction ; (c) of the author 
with passive or intransitive verbs, instead of vtto, almost ex- 
clusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic 
prose ; (d) to denote the occasion or cause ; (e) of the malerial ; 
(f ) of the means and instrument ; (g) of conformity : according 
to, in consequence of, by virtue of after. 

(1) 'E/c T^y -K6\f(i3S airri\^0Vy iK ttjs fiaxv^ t<pvyov [out from the city, 
out from the 6a«Ze, while otTrd would merely signify away from); iK yrjs iyaw 
lji.6.xn<rav {out from the land). PL Polit. 289, e. ol St ir6Kiv ix x6\fces oAX^t- 
rovTfs Karh ^dXaTrav /fol irc(fj {changing from city to city). Apol. 37, d. KoXhs i^ 
fjLot 6 )8ios cIt; &Wr)v i| fi\A.7js ir6\(0}s aij.ei0ofj.fyci) (comp. ex alio loco in alium 
migranti). (2)'E^ juiepas {ex quo dies iUiixit, as soon as it was day) ; ix tov- 
rov (so. xpt^^ow) immediately after this; 4k yvKr6s or ^»c rvKrur; ix »at- 
Say {from very childhood) ;^| bar 4p ov {subsequently) ; ix rod Xotrov. 
Her. 9, 8. i^ 7jfj.4pris is fj/jifprfy ava^aWofieyoi {ex die in diem, delaying from 
day to day, day after day). 1,87. iK 5e aibpli)s re Kcd yrjyefilris avrfipa- 
nev i^airlyrjs vecpea {immediately after fair weather, etc.). Th. 1, 120. ix fi^ 
elp'f}vns iro\€ij.e7y, iK Se voXefiov viXiv {u/ijSTjveu {to go to war after peace^ 
etc.). X. Cy.3. 1, 17. 6 ahs irar^ip iy rpSe ttj /luo ^juc'pa i^ &<ppoyos a^^pmm 
yryivrirai. (3) (a) Elvoi, yiyvecbai e/c rivos {to he descended from some oiw, 
iK indicating more direct descent, while avo may be used of one more remote), 
(b) 'E| *A^r] vaiwv oi Hpurroi {the best of), (c) Her. 3, 62. rh. iyreraXfUpa im 
rov Mdyov {the things commanded by Magus). lb. irpoBeSoa-^cu iK nprj^d<rvfos{to 
be betrayed by), (d) 6, 67. e<peirye A7)ixdpr]Tos iK SiropTTjs iK roiovSe ov</- 
ifos {on account of). So iK irayrhs rov yov {icith all the heart) ; ^ic films 
and the like. Her. 2, 152. iK r^s 6^^/105 rov oveipov (m oonaeqitence of), (g) 



^289.] PREPOSITIONS. — "Ev, (TvV. 425 

PL Criton. 48, b. iK rwv 6ixo\oyov^4v<ov tovto ffK^irriov {in accordance 
with what has been admitted). So ouondCea^ai ^k riyos {to be named after or for 
some one, like virtus ex viro appellata est, is called or takes its name from vir). 
'Ek tov ; why ? 

Remark. The adverbs which, in the character of improper prepositions, take 
the Gen., have been already considered, in treating of the Gen. Besides these 
adverbs, the following substantives, as improper prepositions, take the Gen • 
ii.SiKvy ( 5 6> o s, Poet.), instar ,- — b. x a p t ;/, gratia, for the sake of commonly 
placed after jhe Gen., seldom before it. Instead of the Gen. of the personal 
pronouns 4nov, (rod, etc., the possessive pronoun, as an attributive adjective, is 
regularly used with xap'", e. g. ifi-f,u, o-V xap'*', mea,tua gratia; — c. '4 ye Ka 
(fVf/cey even before consonants, as (UfKa even before vowels in the Attic Avriters, 
eiVfKo and f'/vewci/, Ionic, but not wholly foreign to the Attic dialect, oweKa in 
poetry), causa, gratia. The Gen. more frequently stands before than after eVe/ca. 
It very frequently signifies, with respect to, concerning, in regard to. Her. 3, 85. 
bA.p(Tfe Tovrov €7i/e»ce, with respect to this, be of good courage. It often denotes 
a remote reason, e. g. bi/ virtue of by reason of PI. Rp. 329, b. et yap i)v rovr' 
aXrioVy kh-u iyio ra aina ravra (ircirdy^jj fveKoiyeynpuSji.e. by reason of old 
age; — d. « « tj t t (poetic only), by or according to the will of (a god), Aihs e/cTjrt, 
Homer and Hesiod. In other poets it has the signification of eveKa. 



♦ 289. 2. Prepositions with the Dative only. "Ev 

AND (TVV (^$vv). 

1. *Ev (iVL Poet., €tV and ctVi Epic) denotes that one thing is 
in, upon, by or near another. In general, it indicates an actual 
union or contact with an object, and hence is the opposite of 
Ik. It denotes ( 1 ) in a local relation : (a) the being in, inclosed 
in, encircled, surrounded by ; used with reference to place, cloth- 
ing, persons : in,amongf in the midst o/^and with verbs of speak- 
ing, before, in the presence of {coram) ; then it is transferred to 
the external and internal state or condition in which one is taken, 
or is found, by which he is, as it were, surrounded ; — also to the 
business in which he is engaged, to persons, in whose hands or 
power something is placed; it also denotes (b) the being upon 
something, and (c) the being near a thing, particularly of cities, 
near which (in the territory of which) something took place, 
especially a battle ; — (2) of time (^ 283, 3) ; — (3) in a causal 
and figurative relation: (a) of the meajis wad. instrument ; (b) 
of the maimer ; (c) to denote conformity : according to, in con- 
formity with. 

(1) (a) 'Ei/ Tp 7r<{A6j, iv T^ i/^o-w, Iv 'Sirdprr) tovto iy4v€To. PI. L. 
625, b. ayaTravXai iv to7s v}p7]\o7s SdvSpeaiv elffi ffKiapai. 'Eu ^7r\oi5, 
iy t6^ois SiayuviC^a^ai', iy ^(r^TjTt, iy (TTfipdvois {crowned)] iv rols 

36* 



426 SYNTAX. l\ 289 

kvbp<&Trois (inter). Dem. Chers. 108, 74. Tifi6be6s vot" iKetvos iv vfiTy i^ 
uriy6pri<rev {in our presence). 'Ey iro\c/tc<>, iy tpyv, ev Sairi, iv t^ofitc^ ip 
6pyp thai. PI. Crito. 43, C. koI &Woi 4y roiavrais ^v/Kpopais oXiV- 
KouTai (are taken in, involved in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. iv roiovrois 
voff-fifiaa-iy ix^f^^t/oi. Gorg. 523, b. iv iroo-t? fvSaifiovla oiKeiv (to live m 
the enjoyment of all prosperity). Her. 2, 82. ot iv ir o i -ft or ti yev6fjifvoi (those who 
have been in poetry = poets). Th. 3, 38. ol iv irpdy na<ri (those engaged in 
state affairs — the ministers). X. Cy. 4. 3, 23. ol fiev St] iv rovrois to7s \6- 
yois ^ffav (were engaged in these discourses). PI. Phaed. 59, a. iv ^i\o<ro(plf 
flvai. Ol iv yewpyiais, iv rix^V «'*'«*• Hence various adverbial ex- 
pressions have originated, e. g. ^ v Jfca ilvcu (to be equal) \ iv rjSov^ fioi i<Triv(it 
ia pleasing to me) ; so also with ex^"' ^^<1 TroieTa^cu, e.g.iv Sfiolcc, iv i\a<pp^ 
iroteuTi^at (to esteem equally, to esteem lightly). 'Ej/ ifiol, tv aoi itrri ti (penes rm^ 
te, it is in my power, etc.) ; hence the phrase iv kavrtf cTveu (to be in one^s senses^ 
sui compotem esse) ; (b) iv 6pe<riv, ivXirirois, iv ^p6vots] (c) 'H i v M av- 
rivelc^ fidxv (^^6 battle near). — {2)'Ej' rovrep ry XP*^*'?)^" 4 (^il^ 
during); iv ir4vT€ rj/jLfpais (during, in the space of). — (3) 'OpaVj 8pa<r^euj 
iv 6<pda\nois, Poet, (to see, be seen with the eyes) ; then in other connections 
among the poets, iv wpl Koifiv, iv Zftrfitf Stjo-cu, iv x^p^^ \a$fiv, Horn, 
(to bum with fire, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, iv is used to denote 
the means, in the expressions S-q\ovv, SriXov dvcu, <rrjfialv€tv iv rivi. X. Cy. 1. 
6, 2. Zti fi€v, S> Tra7, ot ^(oi. ac TXcoj re Kod fvfji(ve7s xeuirov<riy koI iv iepo7s Srj- 
X.OV KOi iv ovpavlo IS (rrjtifiois (is evident both by the sacrifices and the signs 
from heaven). 8. 7, 3. iarf fi-fi vare fioi koI iv itpols koI iv ovpaviois 
arjfielo IS koI iv ol<i>vo7s koI iv <p-f] fiais. Si r ixpV" ''oi(7v kcu L ouk ixp^*'- 
*£»' 5/ktj, iv aiuiT'p. Th. 1, 77. iv ro7s S^iolois vofiois rks Kpiaeis 
iroieTv (according to the same laws). So iv fifptt (according to his part, in txtm). 
*Ev ifioi, iv aoi, iv iKeivto (Poet.), ex (according to) meo, tuo, illius judido. 

2. Xvv (^v mostly old Attic) corresponds almost entirely with the 
Latin cum, and the English tcith ; it always expresses the idea of 
union, participation and accompam7?ie?it : (1) in a local relation 
often of an accompaimnent wliich implies help or assistance ; — 
(2) in a causal sense to denote : (a) the means and instrument ; 
(b) the manner ; (c) the measure or rule, by which the action 
of the verb is measured, as it were, or defined ; (d) conformity. 

(1) 'O OTpaTTjybs avv to7s <tt pariurais avex<^pri<Tiv. — 3wi' bf^ (with 
the help of God). 2 u v t t v t ilvai or ylyv^rbai (to be on the side of one^ of one's 
party). 2 w v r iv i ju.oxeo'^ou, to fight in company icith one. to aid one in fighting 
(2) (a) X. Cy. 8. 7, 13. tj KTrjcis avrwv (sc. ttiotuv ^iXttiv) i<m» ov^ofims vi't 
T p iS / a, oAAck ^aXKov crvv r^ €V€py€<ri<f (not by violence^ but rather kindness). 
(b) Tloo'Uvai ahv Kpavyf^ ahv y4\wTi iXbt!^ (with a shout, etc.). X Ct 
8. 1, 15. vdrepa 5' ^7^, £ Kvp€, Afieivov flvai, avv r^ <r^ aya^^ rda rtfutpiat 
roi€7a-baif ti a by rjj try (r]fi.lt}\ (with, for your advantage^ or for your injwry) 



♦290.] PREPOSITIONS. 'Ava, €19, 0)9. 427 

to vote with, in accordance with the law). {d):^vv r^ vSfiu rijv i/^^c^oj/ rl^ia^t. 
Svy T^ SiKaicp. 

Remark. Of the adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong here 
ifia {una cum), and several which are constructed also with the Gen., as has 
been seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat. 



♦ 290. 3. Prepositions with the Acc. only: 'Ava, ets 

AND (1)9. 

1. *Ava {on, up, upon) signifies from a lower to a higher place, 
and is directly opposite to Kara, with the Acc, which signifies 
from a higher to a lower place ; the use of avd is mor^ frequent 
in poetry than in prose. It is used (1) in a local relation : (a) 
to denote a directioji towards a higher object; (b) to denote the 
extension from a lower to a higher point, from bottom to top : 
througJiout, tJirough, both with verbs of motion and rest; — (2) 
in a temporal relation, to denote continuance or 2i period of time : 
per (seldom) ; — (3) in a causal sense to denote manner ; then 
particularly in a distnbutive sense with numerals. 

(1) (a) Od. x» 132. ^ ^IXoi, ovK tiw 8^ ns 6lv optro^vpriv ava&airt (up to 
the lofiy gate). This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the phrases 
kvh. rhv irorafJi6y, ivo ^60 v xA«?i/, up the stream (the opposite of Kara 
woTOfiSy, down the stream); (b) II. i/, 547. {<p\(\p) avk vSna ^fovca Siafnrepes 
{ab infima dorsi parte usque ad cervicem) ; so aya Sufia, aya <TTpaT6v, avb, fxdxWt 
iiva ifuXoy, kvk 6.arv, avh bvfutv (through the house, through the army, etc.), 
all in Homer; Her. 6, 131. koI oStw 'AA/c/ioiwWSai ifiwabTjaav avh r i] v 'E\- 
\diSa (throughout Greece). X. Vect. 5, 10. aya iracrav yriv Kai baXarT av 
(ipi\yT] ivrai. Hier. 7, 9. i.vk trT6fia tx^iv (to have continually in the mouth). 
(2) Her. 8, 123. ayk rhy 'r6\(fioy rovrov (throughout). So ava iraaay 
r^y 1] fit pay, per totum diem (the substantive must here have the article; 
without the article owa iraaay v/xtpay, signifies daily, day by day, ayk irav eros, 
every year, yearly, see No. (3) and § 246, 6), ayk vvktu (per noctem, all night 
through). 7, 10. Avtk XP*^"**" ^^fvpoi rts Hy (in the time). (3) 'Aya Kpdros (with 
all one's might) ; ayh fitpos (by turns) \aya -rray eros (quotannis). X. An. 4, 6, 
^."LKXrivfs iiropvbT\<Tay kTT a ara^novs aya Trej/re irapaffdyyas t^s 7]fi4pas 
(Jive parasangs daily). 

Remark 1. In the Epic and Lyric languages, aud is constructed with the 
Dat. also ; instead of it eV is elsewhere used, e. g. ava tr/d^Trrpw, &ixef, Tafrydpcp 
iiKpw in Homer. So eS5ej 5' aya OKdirru Ai^s aUrSs, Find. 

2. Ei9 (€9 Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form 
of «/, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex- 



428 SYNTAX. [\ 290 

pressed by cv, but always m the direction whither; hence it is 
used of motion into the interior of an object, up to, into the im- 
mediate presence of; in general to denote the reaching a definite 
limit. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a heal limit; (b) a 
limit in quantity : about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense 
of before, in the presence of coram, but with the idea of the di- 
rection whither; — (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till, 
towards; (3) in a causal sense : (a) of a mental aim, object or 
purpose ; (b) of the manner ; with numerals either in the sense 
of about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a 
reference to something : in respect to. 

(1) (a) 'leW ets r^v ir6Kiv; so also of persons with the accompanying 
idea of their habitation or country. PI. Apol. 17, c. ds vfias usUvm, i.e. 
€ty rh SiKuffT'fjpiov eisi4vai. X. An. 4. 7, 1. iirop€6^<ray tis TaSxovs (went 
into the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile 
sense: contra, in. Th. 3, 1. ia-rpdrevaay is rijv 'At t iK-fiy {into, against At- 
tica). With the verbs a-vWeyeiv, avvayeipuv, a\l(fiy and the like, the Greeks 
use els, where we say, to assemble at or in a place. Comp. ^ 300, 3. (b). Th. 
2, 13, Tuu Ilehoirovinf)(rl(i}y ^u\Kfyofx4yo)u tc is rhv 'Itr^fihv Kcd iv SSifi ivruv. 
Comp. 4, 91. 8, 93. So the Latins say: congregari, convenire, etc., in urbem. 
(b) Th.1,74. vav s is tos rer paKoalas. (c) 'E/c da\dtr<rris ds dai\a<r<ray. 
PI. Gorg. 526, b. els Kcd rrdw i?^6yifios ydyovfy els rovs &,Wovs''EKXr}yas, 
^ApiarelSijs {among), (d) Aoyovs iroifla^cu etr rhv S^fiov {to speak before, in 
the presence of the people). PI. Menex. 239, a. ol irccr4p(s iroXAo J?) kou KoKii ?pya 
aTreip-fivavTo fls irdvras avbpwtrovs {before aU, men). (2)'Es ii4\ioy Ka- 
r aSvyra {till sunset), Homer ; hence els kair epav {tcvoards, till evening, proper- 
ly to evening as a boundary) ; so in prose, els ttjv utrrepalay {till the folloaing 
day, on the following day) ; els r plrriy 7} fie pay {till, on). (3 ) (a) 'Expricaro rots 
Xpy\fJ^a(Tiv els r^v ttSKiv {for the city). Ets ri; {for what?); els KepSosT\ 
Spav {to do something for gain), (b) Els Ka\hy ?iKeis {opportune); els rdx^* 
{quickly ) ; els Svyafiiy, according to one's ability ; els e KarSy {about a hundred 
or by hundreds, centeni), especially in the arrangement of soldiers, e. g. €jy Sdo 
{two deep, two by two), (c) QavfjA^eiv," iTraiye7y riva eXs r t {to admire, praise one 
with respect to, on account of something) ; so Sia<pepeiv nyos els aper^jy, tppiyifios, 
evd6Ki/xos ets r t, els irdyra, in every respect; fi\eTreiy, airo0\eireiy els rh 
irpdy fxar a, like vp6s. 

3. *fi? (ad), to, does not like the other prepositions, denote the 
relation of position, but only the direction whiUier ; it is used 
only of persons or of the names of cities, when they stand for 
the inhabitants. 

Th. 4, 79. B/Mur/Seu cupUero &5 UepSlKKav koL tts r^y Xa/jciBucfiP (came U 



♦ 291.J PREPOSITIONS. Ala. 



429 



Perdiccas). Dem. Phil. 1. 54, 48. irp4<rP€i5 irivoiix^ev &>$ j8o<rtA.eo. Th. 8, 
36. f^Kovros is t^v MtXTjTov (ad Milesios). 

Rem. 2. This i>s is to be distinguished from that which stands with els, eVf, 
and irp6s with the Ace. (iy e/s, is e'-n-/, is irpJs Tim). This latter is is not a 
preposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with tht par- 
ticiple, and docs not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup- 
posed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. i:^polC^i is ^ir\ roirovs rb 
ffrpdrfvfia (quasi hs helium illaturus, he collects as if against these). Hence this 
is also stands with the prepositions*goveming other Cases, e. g. Th. 3, 4. 
imcXovv (iroiT\<ravro rwv v(uv is ^irl vavfiaxia [as if for the purpose of fight- 
ing a naval battle). 1, 134. ol Se iroirjadixevoi xoAjfoOs avSpidvras Svo us awrl 
Tlaya-avlov avtbcaay {quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if in the place of Pau- 
sanias). 



4. Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusa- 
tive: Sio, Kara, viripy fxerd. 

§ 291. (1) Aia, through, 

1. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (2) to denote a mo- 
tion extending through a space or object and again coming out : 
through and out again, out of (Homer expresses this relation 
still more distinctly, by uniting the preposition ck or Trpo with 
Suiy e. g. Od. p, 460. SuK /xcyapoto ava^o)p€Lv) ; (b) to denote ex- 
tension through something, but without the accompanying rela- 
tion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen., 
see k 287, Rem.; — (2) of time, to denote the expiration or 
lapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, through 
and out; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote ongin (rare) and the 
author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality (possessive Gen.) 
in connection with ctmt and yiyviaSaL ; (c) the means, both of 
persons and things; (d) mamier ; (e) worth (rare); (f) com- 
parison (rare). 

(1) (a) Her. 7, 8. fxiXXut ihav arpaTlv Siot rris Evpdirijs cVl rijv'EP^dSa. 
2, 26. Sie^cX^iK Sik irdavs Eupciirnr. 7, 105. i^-fiXawe rlu arparhv 
8(& TTis Qp-niK-ns M tV 'EXXtiSa. 3, U5. SioK^as 5ia Trjs yopyipvs 
(having crept out through the prison), (b) Od. n, 335. 5.^: fi'i^ov Idy, dih Tre- 
tlov (per campum). X. Hier. 2, 8. Sti iro\€/tUs -Kop^iteixSrai (to march through 
the enemy's country). Figuratively in the phrases, Sih SiKaioaiyy Uvai [to 
go in the way of justice, to go through justice, i. e. to be just) ; Sik tov SikuIov 
irop,i.a^cu; iih <p6$ov ipx^cbai (<o /ear), Eur. Or. 747. Ai^ <pi\ias ihai 
rtvi [to be friendly to one), X. An. 3. 2, 8. (2) £,C trovs [through, for a year) i 
SA iroKXov, t^aKpov, hxiyov xp^^ov (through, for a long, a short time^ 
also 8i* 0^(701;, hih -KoWov without xP^vov, or St^ x/"^»'ow ^x^« (ha 



430 SYNTAX. P 292. 

came after a long time) ] 5tcb iravrhs rod xp^^ov routdra ovk iytytro {during 
the whole time); Sih, tinipo-s, Bik vvkt6s {through, throughout the day, etc.). 
So also of an action repeated at stated intervals, e.g. Sik rpirov Urovt 
aruvpeo'ay {every third year, tertio quoque anno, alvcays after three years, through 
and out again); 5xo irifxirrov erovs, 5ia Trdyre iruv {every fifth year, 
etc., quinto quoque anno) : Sia rpirris 7ifi4pas. (3) (a) Ata fiauriXfwv irf<pvKios 
{descending from a continued line of kings, owing one^s birth to kings), X- Cy. 7. 2, 
24. ndyra 5t' eavrwy irpdrreabai (<» accomplish everything by themselves) ; 
bi eavTov KTT}<ra<r^ai Ti. (b) Aia <f>6fiov (Ivai, ZC tx^P"^' yiyvfabal tivl, 
Si* ipiZoSy opy^s, aatpaXeias fhat or yiyvfabai {to be in fear, to be Iiostile, 
to be angry with, to be safe), (c) A** tup^aXfiuv bpay {to see with the eyes) 
PL Theaet. 184, C. 'S,K6irfi, airSKpicris vorfpa op^ortpa, ^ dpwfiev, rovro eJyai 6<p^a\* 
fiovs, fi 5 1 ov Spufiey, koI ^ aKSvofiey, 2>Ta, ^ 5 1' oZ ojcovofiiv. (The Dat. denotes 
the means used, hid with the Gen. the active means.) "Exttv nva ii opyris {to 
be angry with) ; Si a x^^P^^ ^X^'*' {^ work upon, to be engaged in, to handle) ; 
also of persons, e. g. '"Eirpa^ay ravra Si Evpvfidxo v, Th. 2, 2. (d) Aik 
ffTrovSrjs, S ih rdxovs voiflu ri (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.). (e) S. O. C. 
584. 5t' ovSfvhs iroif7(T^ai {to consider of no value), (f) Her. 1,25. ^(tjs i^ior 
Siii irdvrwv rStv aya^-nfidrcav {in comparison wilh, among). 

II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation to denote extension 
through a place or object : through, t/iroughout (only poetic) ; — 
(2) of time to denote extension through a period of time, 
throughout ; — (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote the reasott, 
mediation : on account of, ob, propter, by ; (b) of the person by 
whose means something is effected. 

(1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. Sik irSyTioy KVfia 4ir6pfvcas ifiay (waffffav 
{through the waveofthe sea). (2) Aih, vvktu. (3) X. An. 1. 7, 6. ?«m fiky 
7]fjL\y rj apxh V ifaTpcpa irphs fj.fv fi€air]ijSplay fifXP^^ "^ ^^^ tcavfia ov Svvairrtu 
olKcly iy^puvoi {on account of the heat). 4. 5, 15. Sik rks r o i airas oZp 
ikvdyKas vire\flirovr6 tm^s rwy (rrpaTianwy. (b) An. 7. 7, 7. 5i' fj/xas <rv» 
^iots ^X^"^^ r-fiySe r^y X'^P*" i^!/ your means, mediation). Kaucol SoKov/uy flyeu 
Sih TOUT 2 y {hujus culpd). 



$292. (2) Kardj from above, down. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) of motion from 
a higher to a Imver place (desuper, deorsum) ; (b) of a direction 
towards a place or object situated below : doicn to, down upon, 
down under (on the Gen., see k 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest 
in, upoTj. or at a place or object Q 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal 
and figurative sense, to denote the cause or occasion. 



r 



f 



♦ 292.] PREPOSITIONS. — Kara. 



431 



(1) (a) H. o, 44. firj 8c KttT Ov\{,fiiroio Kap-fivav {doum from the heights). 
Her. 8, 53. ippiirrfov kvvrovs Karh tow r^ix^os Kdrw. (b) Her. 7, 6. atpa- 
ylC«rbai Kurh rrjs baXda-a-jis {to disappear doum under the sea). 235. Kara- 
SfSvKfyai Kara rrjs ^aXdaffTis. X. An. 7. l/ 30. ei^xofiai fivpias ifie ye 
Kark yrjs opyvias yeviffbai {to he sunk under the earth). So figuratively of a 
direction to a lower object, as ro^eucii/ Kard riyos, ircdftv Kara rivos, to 
shoot at something, to strike at something (the preposition denoting the direction 
towards the mark, viz., down) -^ Tinmiv Kara K6^f>t]s, on the head (§ 273, 
Rem. 8); (c) Her. 1, 9. Karh. vdrov ycveaStai {to come behind, to be behind). 
Th. 4, 32. Kark vtirov ehai {in the rear). 33. Kark vdrov KoSnaTtiKivai. 
(2) AfV*" f oT(£ Tivos{dicere de aliqua re) ; in this connection, the idea of hos- 
tility especially is expressed by the preposition, e. g. \eyeiv, \6yos Kard rivos 
{against one). X. Apol. 13. xl^cvSfo-^ai KaTaTov^€ov{to say anything falsely 
of or against the God) ; but also in an opposite relation, Dem. Phil., 2. 68, 9. h kcH 
Ii(yiarr6v itrri Kab' vfiuy ^yKu^uoy {in honor of you). Aeschin. Ctes. 60. 
ol Kark At} fioir b f yovs lliraivoi. SKOireTj/ Kard rivos {secundum, in respect 
to). Plat. Phaed. 70, d. ^tj kot* av^ puiruy aK6ir€i fi6vov rovro, oAAa Kod 
leark (6wy xdyrety koI <pvruy. So also in Attic adjurations and oaths, 
e. g. fix^abai, ifiyvycu Kard t iv o j, for example, / c p « v reXeiwy {Th.5,47), 
to swear by unblemished victims (as it were holding the hands over them) ; so i'^w crv 
also (6xf<f^ai Ko^' iKar6/ji0r}Sf Kara $o6s. 

II. In a local and temporal relation, Kara with the Ace. is 
directly opposite to ava, in respect to the point from whence 
the motion of the action begins ; but it agrees with avd in de- 
noting the direction to an object and the extension over it. 
The use of dm is more confined to poetry, but Kara, has no such 
limitation. (1) In a local relation : (a) to denote the direction 
of the action to a lower object; (b) to denote extension from 
above to below, from a higher to a lower object : throughout, 
Hirough, over ; (c) in the historians in the sense of e regione, 
over agaijist, opposite to ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
or duration ; — (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote purpose and 
design ; (b) conformity, and the respect in which anything is con- 
sidered, and hence also a reason: on account of; (c) an indefinite 
measure (about) ; (d) the manner; hence also with the distribu- 
tive specifications of number. 

(1) (a) ^dWeiv Kara yaffripa {to Strike on the abdomen), and the like in 
Homer. Her. 3, 14. Tropj/eo-cu' al irapSrfyoi Kara rovs var 4pas {to the fathers 
sitting) ; then of the course of a stream, Kara p6ov, down the stream (see avd). 
Her. 4, 44. (Scylax cum suis) tirXiov Kark ir or a fihy irphs t}w re Ka\ v\lov ava^ 
ToXks is ^d\a<r<rav. (b) Her. 3, 109. al ex'Svai Karanraffay r^y yvv utrt. 
Kark yriv, Kara ^d\a<r<Tay iroptvea^ai {through, over,by). (c) Th. 2,3a 



432 SYNTAX. [§ 293. 

Keirai 7j K€<f>aWrjpia Karh *A.Kapvavlav [opposite to). (2) Kar^ rhv av- 
rhv xpiJvoj/, Kara, rhv rr pSr epov ir6\efioy {during the same time, etc.) ] 
01 Kurd Tiva (contemporaries of any one). (3) (a) Her. 2, 152. Korek Kriiriv 
iKirXdlxrauTas {having set sail for the purpose of plunder). Th. Karh biav ^k(ip 
{spectatum venisse). Kara r i ; why? wherefore? (b) Kara ySfiov, Kark 
\6yov {ad rationem, pro ratione,in conformity with, according to) ] Karh yy^- 
PLfiV t)iv ifii\v. Her. 2, 3. Karh, rrfv rpo<pT)v ruv iraiScoy rocavra eKeyov 
{in respect to nourishing the boys). Her. 1, 85. Kara rhy Kprfrrjpa ovrws ftrx^- 
Kurd r I {in some respect^ quodammodo ) ; k a t' ovZ 4v, Karatriyr'a {in no, 
every respect) ; Kara rovro {hoc respectu, hence propter hoc) ; Th. 1, 60. Kark 
<pi\lay ainod I ■rr\e7(rroi iK Kopiv^ov (rrpariwrat i^ekovrod ^vveairoyro {on ac- 
count of his friendship). Dem. Chers. 90, 2. ots Kara rohs y6fiovs i<p' vfup 
icriy, 'Srau Pov\r}(rb€, KoXd^dv {to punish according to the laws). Kark ^6aiy 
(secundum naturam) ; Kara Svvafiiy (according to one's ability, to the best ofone^s 
ability); Kara Kpdros (with all one's might), (c) Kark e^-fiKoyra irrj 
(about sixty years); Kark niKp6y (gradually); Kar* 6\lyoyf icark roKv. 
Kark iroWd (by far), (d) Kadr' Tjavxiat' (7"'^%) I Kark rdxos (quickly) 
<Tvvrvx^o-v (casu, by chance); Kara rh Iffx^poy (per vim, violently) 
Kark fie pas (in order, in turn). Her. 6, 79. HiroLvd iari Zvo fiyeai Kar' &yipa 
(viritim, for each man ); Kark K<afias ( vicatim, by villages) ; Kark firjya (sin- 
gulis mensibus, every months monthly); Kab* r]fi4pay, iy ko^ ey (one after the 
other, one by one, i. e. singly) ; Ka^^ k ir r d, septenu 

Remark. Very many verbs compounded with Kard, are constracted with the 
Gen. to denote the person who caused the action, and towards whom it is directed, 
e. g. KaraZiKdC^oy, KarayiyyuxTKU), KaraKpiyb), Karay\rrj<pl^ofiai rivos, to give judgment, 
bring a charge, pass a vote against any one ; Karay\i(vhoixai rivos, to lie against any 
one ; Karay^Ku rivos, to laugh at, to deride one ; Karauppovw rivos., despicio aliquem. 
An Ace. very frequently stands with these, e. g. Karrryopdy ri rivos, to accuse 
one of something, KarayiyvuCKeiv ri (as 6voiay, Kkoirfjy) riyos, Karaxpiyfty riy^s 
^dvaroy, KaradiKd^fiy riyhs ^dvaroy, Karar^-qcpl^ea^^al riyos SfiXlay. 



f 293. (3) *Y7rcp, super ^ over. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote resting^ 
abiding over or above a place or object (^ 267, Rem.) ; — (2) in 
a causal sense : (a) for, for tlie good of; (b) to denote an inter- 
nal, mental cause, instead of the more usual vtto with the Gen ; 
(c) with verbs of entreating, imploring : for tlve sake of some 
one ; (d) to denote cause; in connection with rov and the Inf. 
to denote purpose, wliich by the language is considered as the 
cause; (e) in general to denote in respect to, instead of the 
more usual -rrept with the Gen. 

II. With the Ace. : over, above and beyond, used in relation 
to space and time, and also to measure and number. 



♦ 294.] PREPOSITIONS. McTCt. 435 

L./1) X. C. 3.8,9. 6 ri\iosrov d4povs vnep 7]fiuv Ka\ rwv areyuy xopev 
ififvoi CKiav avruy Traptx^i {passing over us and the houses). Her. 7. 69. 'Apafiiap 
Kcu AlSnoTTwy Tuu vxep Alyvirrov oIkti^^vwv ^px^ 'Ap(TdfM7]s {who dwell above 
^'jypO- "f'rfp 3aAa<ro-rjs oIkuu {properly to dwell beyond the sea, i. e. on, Inj 
the sea). (2) (a) Mox€o-^ai virep t^s varpi^os {to fight in defence of some- 
thing, as if standing over it)\ 6 virep T^s 'EWdSos bavaTos {death in behalf 
of , for Greece) -J -KoKinvfahai, (rrpaT-nyuy vvip tivos {in aliciijus gratiam) \ 
v-Ktp rwy irpayfidTuy ffvovhaCfiVySeSoiKeyai vv4p t i v a s {timere alicui) . (b) 
Ixkp xfybovs {for, because of grief ). (c) H. w, 466. Kai fiiv iirep irarphs 
Aoi firiTtpos i)vK6fioio \laaeo koI t4k€os {entreat him for the sake of his 
father, etc. (d) PI. Symp. 208, d. virep apcrrjs aStaudrov Kot Toiavrrjs 
96^715 (if K\eovs tdvTfs -Kovra -Koiovaiv {on account of , for the sake of imper- 
ishable distinction, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 52,43. vir\p rov /it] '7rabe7v kukus 
tnrh ♦lA/nrou {for the purpose of not suffering evil, etc.). — II. Her. 4, 188. piirre- 
oxMTi v-Ktp rhv S6fioy {over the house). Seldom of mere extension, as toTs 
Spa^l rots vvep 'EW-ffsirovToy oiKovtri {the Tliracians dwelling beyond the 
Htllesj)ont, i. e. on the Htllesjtont) ; vrep r^y rjKiKiay {beyond one's years, 
age)] vwfp Siyafny {beyond one's power); vircp ^ybptairoy {beyond man, 
i. e. beyond what could be expected of him). Her. 5, 64. virep ra reffcrepd 
Kovra Ifrrj {beyond, more than, forty years). 



♦ 291. (1) Mcra, icith. 

I. McTo, allied to /xcVps {in the middle, betiveen) denotes the 
being in the midst of, being among persons or things. With the 
Gen., /xcra denotes an intimate connection, a participation, a 
sharing in (comp. /xcrc^ai/) ; the Gen. denotes the ivhole, of 
wliich the subject of the sentence constitutes a j^c^r^; it conse- 
quently diflers from <tvv with the Dat., wliich merely denotes 
the connection (association) of one object with another, with- 
out the one being considered a part of the other (comp. avvix^iv). 
It is used (1) in a local relation: in the midst, among ; then to 
denote an active participation in aid of some one: ivith; — (2) 
in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote the means or^ 
manner; (b) conformity. 

(1) Eur. Ilec. 209. fierik viKpSay Ktitroixai {to lie among the dead, and one's 
self to be dead). r\. Rp. 359, e. Ko^trbai fit rh t a y &\\o) v. Merd tivos 
fidxftrbau {to figid in active particijxition with one). Dem. Phil. 3. 117, 24. /i era 
T«v ifSiKtjfjifyuy troKf/jLtTy {to jxirtin'pate in carrying on war with those who had 
been injured). Zhou, arriviu fierd nvos {tobeon the side of one) PL Ep. 467. 
e. aoo^ffoyrou, nerk irpf a $vt 4 pay 7)y€fi6va)y eTrSfievoi (they follow the 
older leaders, and as it were, hold fast to them ; wholly different from cTreo-^oi 
uerd riya and avy rivi). (2) (a) Th. 1, 18. furii k lySvvuy ras fieX^raa 

37 



434 SYNTAX. [§ 294. 

voioifievoi (i. e. surrounded by, in the midst of dangers). X. C. 3. 5, 8. ^cr' 
ap € T^ s -irpayreveiv (as it were in an intimate connection with virtue). Dem. PhiL 
3. 130, 74- v/J-^i^ 01 Trpoyovoi tovto rh yepas iKT-iftxavTO ko^ KareXmov fierh iro A- 
\wv Kcd ixeydXcov kivSvvwv. (b) Isocr. Archid. 129, 66. tovs p6fiovs, fi^d'^ 
u V oiKovvr^s evdaifjLouecrTaToi ruv 'EAA^ywi' ^<roi' {agreeably to which, ruu vo/mop 
4x<ifJ-efoi, legihus quasi adhaerentes). PI. Ap, 32, c. /neTa rod t/6fiov koI rov 
5ai Kai ov ^/xrju fiaWov /xe Selt' SiaKivSweveiv, ^ fie^' vfiuv y^vitrbcu fjJtf Z'lKOua 
fiov\cvo^4v<t}v {in conformity with law and justice). 

II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) (Poet.) to de- 
note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- 
ing to be united with a person or thing, in a friendly or hostile 
relation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to 
denote a local extension between two objects, in the prose 
phrase ixera x^^po-^ ex^Lv TL, to have something in hand; — (2) 
(prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and in order: 
after, next to, next in order ; — (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.), 
to denote purpose and conformity. 

(1) 'I/ceV^oi fie TO. Tpwas Koi ^hx^iovs {to come into the midst of the Tr 
and Gr.). II. p, 460. aiaacov S>st cuyinrihs /uero xv^'f-s {among the geese). 
Seldom used of things. II. fi, 37 6. '6s fxe fie r a.irpr]KTovs cpiSas KoXviiKea 
$d\K€i {into the midst of contention). Brjvai fiera 'Nearopa {to go to Nestor, 
properly into a connection with him ) 5 j8^ Se fier' 'iSofievrja, {to goto Idomen. 
to follow after him, properly to go into the engagement or battle with him ), IL 
V, 297. II. V, 492. KaoX €Trov^\ wsel re yuera ktiXov ecnrero /xriXa {behind the 
ram). (2) Me ret rhv rod iraidhs ^dvaTov, X. {after the death). Merck 
ravra {after) ; the Ace. often lias a participle agreeing with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34. 
/U6T& lZ6\b)va olx^ fi€vov {after the departure of Solon). MeS-' Tjfiepav 
{interdiu, in the day time, properly after the break of day), X. An. 4. 6, 12. 
KaKe7yo5 ekafie fier" e/xe Sevrepos {second after me), Cy. 2. 2, 4. U6Xiv (e?xov) 
r^v ir\ov<riaTdT7)v iv t^ 'Atrlif, fie to, Ba^vKuua {the richest next to Babylon), 7. 2, 
11. (3) Od. a, 184. TrXeiv fieTh x^-^*^^^ (<^<^ ^^^ petendum). Eur. Ale. 67. 
'Eupva'^ews ireix^avros 'linreiov ixerh oxtjjuo {for, after a chariot). H. o, 52. 
T(p /ce Hoaeiddccv ye . . . al^a p.era(TTpey^eie p6ov fierh, ffhv Kol i/xhy KTJPf 
{agreeably to, according to, your desire and mine). 

Remark. Mera is constructed with the Dat. only in poetry, particularly in 
the Epic, to denote merely local union or association in place ; in prose, eV and 
avr are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plural, or with tho 
singular of collective nouns ; the words with which it stands may denote per- 
sons, or things considered as such, and the parts or members of animate things, 
e. g. fier' a^audrois, with, among ; /ierct (rrparS ; fiera X^P""') "'<"'■ > y^^'^o'h T^iM^'T* 
XaTs {in the midst of), between, /xerk (ppeaiv, in the mind, uera vnvffi, KVfuuri] /lerA 
wyoiys aueuoiQ, Homer. 



*295.] PREPOSITIONS. — 'A^</)^, Trept'. 



433 



5. Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and 
Accusative: <1/i<^4 Trept, i-n-i, vapd, -n-pos, vt^'. 

^295. (1) 'Aya</>r and ir^pL 

1. The prepositions d/x<^t and ir^pC express nearly the same 
relations of position: around, about; afji<fii, on both sides, Trcpt, 
on all sides; they also agree in their use, though the use of 
afj,<f>L is rarer, and is more Ionic and poetic than -rrepi, which ex- 
presses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gen- 
eral application. 

2. "Ajx<j>C denotes in general the surrounding of something 
(on both sides), the being near and close to something. 

I With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote re- 
moval from that wliich surrounds (Poet.) ; (b) to denote dwell- 
ing or rest around something ($ 287, Rem.), though but seldom; 
— (2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasion or cause : about, 
for, on account of, though but seldom in prose, Trcpt with the 
Gen. being generally used instead of it. 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation (Poet, only), to de- 
note rest around, at, near, among ; — (2) in a causal sense (very 
seldom in prose, indeed not at all in Attic prose) : (a) to denote 
the cause or occasion, as with the Gen., with this difference, 
however, that with the Dat., the relation of causality is con- 
sidered as wholly local; (b) to denote an internal and mental 
reason (Poet.). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation, to denote local 
extension : about, around, on; — (2) to denote time and number 
approximately or indefinitely ; — (3) in a causal and figurative 
sense, to denote a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains, 
and being employed about it. 

1.(1) (a) Eur. Or. 1460. a /i<^ 2 'irop(pvp4wv ir eTr\ a v ^i(pv<rird<rauTes{ from the 
garments which were around the sword), (b) Her. 8, 104. a/xcpl TavTTjs oiKcouai 
rrjs ir6\ios {dwell around this city). (2) Maxea-^ai a^cpl tivos (for, on account 
of some one, or something). X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. fls Kaipbv tiksis, ottws rr^s Siktis o-kov- 
a-r)5 irapuv t^s a/i</)i rod nr arpSs (about, relating to your father). 11. (1) Te- 
\aaoov an (pi ffTn^^traiv (around the breast), II. ^8, 388. 'Ajxcpl KXdSots eCea^at 
(to be surrounded by branches, to sit among). (2) (a) II. tt, 565. a/i<^i vUvi 
KarareStv-n^ri frnx^tr^aL (about, on account of a dead body). II. 7, 157. afi<pl 
yvyaiKl &\y€a irdax^iy. Her. 6,129. 01 fiVV<Trrip€S epiv elxov afi(pl fiova-iKf). 



436 SYNTAX. [^ 295 

62. <poPr]^€\s afitpl rf) yvvaiKl {respecting). 3. 32. af^pl t^ davdra 
avT^s Si(bs Xiy^rai \6yos. (bj 'A/i^l (pSficp (prae metu, for, on account of)\ 
afi<pl ^^fi$ (prae ira). Ill, (1) X. Cj. 6. 2, 11. ((TuAAeycToi) t^ a-Tpdrevfia 
afi(p\ rhv HaKTwXhv ttot afji6v. 2. 4, 16. re^paxa afi<f>l ri Bpia 
{around, on the borders). Hence also of the persons around any one, as in ol 
afjL<pl Tiva, see § 263, d. (2) 'A^(^i rhv x^'M'i'''" {about mnter) ] afi<pl 
Sei\r)V {sub vesperam, about twilight); afx<pl rovs fxvplovs (circiter). (3) 
"Ex^iv a,fj.<pi Tt {to be employed about something), e. g. afi<pl Se7iryoy, afitp^ inrouy, 
apjxaTa. 

3. Ilc/at signifies all round, round, in a circle. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling or 
rest around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and 
even here is very rare ; comp. k 287, Rem. — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense : (a) to denote the cause or occasion, a respect, 
in a great variety of connections : about, concerning, for, on ac- 
count of, in respect to; — (b) to denote a mental cause : for, from, 
on account of, prae, though but seldom; (c) to denote the rela- 
tion of a person or thing to that wliich belongs to them, which, 
as it were, surrounds them and refers to them (Gen. of the 
possessor) ; (d) to denote worth and superiority. 

(1) Od. e, 68. avrov T€Tdvv<TTO irepi (Tireiovs y\a<pvpo7o vfiepis {there 
the vine was stretched around the cave). 130. rhv fiev iywv itrdwaa irtp I Tp6irios 
fiefiawTa. (2) (a) Maxefi^a', d'jroc^ai'cri' irepl T^y irar plSos {for, on account 
of) ; with verbs denoting a physical or mental perception, aKovav, elSfyau, etc., 
with verbs of saying and asking, e. g. \4yeiv Trepi rivos, \6yos irept nvos, with verbs 
of anxiety, fear, and such as express all other affections, e. g. <po$e7(r^ai r^pl 
irarpiSos, imfieMlcr^ai, ^7r<)ue\6to veplrivos {to /ear for one's country). Dem. Phil. 
1,52,43. 7} apxh tov iroX^fxav ycy €i>-qrai irepl rod r ifiup-ffffaffdai ^IXiinroy 
{with respect to talcing vengeance on Philip), (b) Ucpl opyjjs {prae itxi. on ac- 
count of, because of anger), Th. 4, 130. (c) Ta ire pi t ivos {the affairs, fortune, 
circumstances of any one, etc.) ; ol ire pi nvos {those belonging to any one, asso- 
ciated with him, and as it were surrounding him). Dem. Phil. 1. 50. 36. 4v ro7s 
vepl rod iro\e /xov koI rrf rovrov irapaffKevi} 6.raKra atravra (sc. itrrly) {in 
matters piertaining to the war), (d) In the Common language, irepX iroWov, irepl 
v\ielovos, ircpl 7r\el(TTov, irepl 6\lyov, irepl ixdrrovos, irepl eXox^<rroi/, irepl ovSfyhs 
iroi€i(T^ai or ijyc7(r^al ri {to value high, higher, etc.) ; so also xcpl iroWov iaruf 
ijiuy {of great value). 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling 
or rest around or near something, Avith the idea of surrounding 
or encircling it (seldom in Attic prose) ; (2) in a causal sense : 
(a) like d/x.^t with the Dat., but much more frequently ; (b) tc 
denote an exter?ial or interned reason or cause (Poet). 



^ 296.J PREPOSITIONS. — 'Etti. 



437 



(1) Her. 7, 61. irepi r^ai /ccc^aAptrt slxov ridpas. PI. Rp. 359, d. irepl 
rv X«'P* XP^<rovy 5aKT{'\iou tpip^iv. (2) (a) Hldx^c^at irepi rivt (for some- 
thing, some one), (Poet.), in prose especially with verbs of fearing: Th. 1, 60. 
lihi6Tis Trepl T(f x<^piv {fearing for the town). 4, 70. SeiVos wepl nJxo- 
woyvrialois. 6,9. vepl t^ ijxavrov <r<t)fiart oppudu. PI. Phaed. 114. d. 
bappfTiv irept nvi (to he of good courage about something), (b) (Poet.) Ucp\ 
X^pf^aTi, <p6fia}, ff^eviiy oSvyri (prae, for joy, fear, etc., as it were surrounded by 
tJiem). 

Ill With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: around, (a) to de- 
note motion round about something, into tJte circle or vicinity of 
an object (Poet.) ; (b) extension around, in or at, through some- 
thing, with verbs of rest ; — (2) of time and nmnber stated in- 
definitely oi approximately ; — (3) in a causal or figurative sense, 
to denote a 7?ie7ital dAvelling about an object, taking pains with 
it, being employed about it ; also in respect to. 

(1) (a) II. K, 139. iTfpl <pp4vas ij\v^' luyfj, the clamor came round his mind; 
(b) Pier. 3, 61. Kafi$v(rp xpo»"'C<'*''''t Trepl AXyv-jTrov iiravi<Tr4arai &v5pe5 Mo- 
704 (round in Egyjit). 7,131. 6 fikv irtpX Uiepl-qv Sierpifie rifiepas ffvxvds. 
Th. 6, 2. tpKOvv ^oii/iKfS ITfpl -Kaaav rrju ^iKcXiav 6.Kpas re iirl rfj ^a\d(r(rr) 
airo\afi6yT€s Kod ra iiriKflfieya yrjaiSia (in Sicily around on all the coasts). 
Hence ol xcpi riva (those around any one, connected or associated with him) ; at 
irepl n\dTwva (§ 263, d). Comp. afKpi. (2) Th. 3, 89. Trepi tovtovs 
Tovs xp<^*'oi'y (about). Tlepl /xvpiovs (about). (3) Oi irepl fiovcriK^p 
HvTfS, ol ircpl T7ji/ yeufjifTpiav SiaTpl^oyTts, ffirovSd^dv irepi ri (those oc- 
cupied about, with music, etc.). ^A/x€\us ex*"' '"'fp^ riva. X. An. S. 2, 20. 
i^afiaprdyfiu irfpi riva (with respect to). 1. 6, 8. &5ikos irepi riva. C. 1. 1, 
20. (Tu<ppovfiv ITfpl roi/sdfovs. Atirepi Th <rwfj.a r]8oyal] to ire pi t^p 
&per-f]i/ (the essence of virtue, what pertains to it). 

V 

§ 296. (2) "Etti, upon. 

With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote rest upon 
a place or object, bordering on a place, the place being regarded 
as the point of support, that on which the action leans, hence : 
upon, at, 7iear to {k 287, Rem.) ; (b) a direction to a place (^ 273, 
Rem. 8) ; — (2) in a temporal relation to denote the time in or 
during icJiich something takes place {^ 273, Rem. 12) ; — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense : (a) with verbs of saying, sivear- 
ing and affirming before any one (as it were leaning or resting 
on some one) ; (b) to denote the occasion or author, especially 
in the phrase, to he named after some one or some thing; (c) 

37* 



438 SYNTAX. [§ 29a 

conformity, with verbs signifying to examine, to judge, to con- 
sider, to say, and to show; (d) dependence or resting on some- 
thing, a steadfast abiding by {on) something; (e) the manner ; 
(f ) the purpose, which is then considered by the language, as 
the cause, with the verb ra^^rjvai, and the hke, to be set over 
something, and in certain plirases. 

(1) (a) PI. Menex. 246, d. oir' iirl yris, oij^ inrh yrjs. Her. 7, 111. rh 
(iavT-fjiou TovTO icTTi iirl Twv ov pewv t uu v\pT]\oTdTuv, 6. 129. 4tI 
rrjs TpaTre(ris opx'ho'aTO (danced upon the table). 2, 35. ra &x^fa ol fiey 
dudpes eirt tuv KecpaKeoju (popeovai, ai 5e yvvaiKiS iirl rwv Hfiuy. X. 
An. 4. 3, 28. aevocpwu irffii^as iryy^Xov Ke\evfi (avrovs) avTov fjulvau eiri tov 
TTorafiov (at, near the river), (b) Th. 1, 116. irKeTv iirl ^dfiov {to sail /or 
Samos). X. Cy. 7. 2, 1. iirl-^dpdeui^ (pevjfiv. Dera. Phil. 3. 123, 48. ara- 
XapeTj/ iir' oXkov [to return homewards). (2) Her. 6,98. iirl Aapciov 4y4f- 
€To ir\4(a KaKCL Tp 'EAAaSi (in the time of, during the reign of Darius). X- Cy. 1. 
6, 31. iirl tS)V f) /xer e puv it poy 6vu)V. So ^ir' ifiov, 4<p>^ rifiuUf e<p' 
V [jiwv (mea, nostra, vestra memoi-ia, in, within my memory, etc.). The Gen. often 
stands in connection with a participle, but ahvays with the present ; hence M 
often denotes the duration of time, e. g. ^ttI Kvpov $a(ri\fvovros (during 
the reign of Cyrus). (3) (a.) A4yeiu iirl diKacrr uv, iirl fiaprvpoty {be/ore, 
in the presence o/^ properly, resting or leaning upon). Dem. Cor. ^w^tJo-oKro 
iirl Tuv ar paTTfyu V (took an oath in the presence of the generals). Similar to 
the preceding is, Her 9, 11, elirav in opKov (said on oaih^ quasi substralo vel 
supposito jurejurando xining or resting on the oath), (b) KaXilabau iiri r ivos 
(to he called after one). Her. 7, 40. HicraLoi KoXiovrai tinroi iirl to OSc (for this 
reason). 74. iwl AuSoO rod "At vo s eaxov r^y iirwyvfilr}v. Trjy iiruyvfjuay 
iroieltr^ai iirl riyos (to be called, to take a surname from one). 'Etp' tavrov (of 
cne^s own accord, sua sponte) ; ^Tri irpotpdffeajs (simulatione, under pretext). Aiyeiw 
iiri Tiyos (dicere de aliqua re). PI. Charm. 155, d. iirl rod KaKov Ktyup 
iraiSSs. (c) ZrjTeTy ri iirl tivos, Kpiynv'Ti iirl rivos, aKoirely ri cri Tt- 
yos, Keyeiy Tt iiri riv as, €VtSeI|a/ rt iiri t lyos, etc. (to judge something accord' 
ing to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). PI. Rp. 597, b. fiovXei ody, tipTjv, 
iir' avruy rovrwy rhy ynfitfr^y rovroy ^vTTjaw/ifi', ris vor' itrriy ; (visne,ad 
haec ipsa imitatorem istum exigamus?) (d)'l.</)' eavTov^ kavrSiyy iifiwy ah- 
T civ, € avTTJs (by one^s self, separately, of one^s own accord, properly, resting or 
depending on one's self, independent of others). X. An. 2. 4. 10. oj^EAAtji'm 
vcpopwyres Tovs $ap^dpovs avTol i (p" kavruy ix^P*^"" vy^M-^*'o-5 ^X^*^^^ i'^^^^'^^ 
by thetnselves). Her. 5, 98. oiKeoyras tTis ^pvyiris x^pov Tf kcu Kafxijy iv eau- 
T(cy (by themselves). 4, 114. olKiwuev in tjufioy aifruy. Here seems to 
belong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: 'E^' evrfs, 
iirl Tpi&y, TCTrdpay rerdx^cu, arrival, one, two, three men deep or in file, 
properly to be placed or stand on one, the row resting or leaning on one 
etc.). Dem. Phil. 1.42, 7. h-v koL ifxels iirl rrjs rotavrris i^\-fi<ntr€ ytv 
4tr^cu yv^ixi]s (firmiter adhaerere huic ratio7ii). 9. (^iXiirros) ovx ot6s r itrrivf 



\ 296.] PREPOSITIONS. — Etti. 439 

^Xc" ^ KOTto-TpoTTToi, n4v€iv iirl T V T CO V {caunot remain with, satisfied with 
those things which he lias conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. KwXixrair Uv iKehov Trpdr- 
r^iv toCto, e<^' wv e<TTi vvv {quibus nunc studet). So fiei/eiu 4irl avoias. (e) 
Dem. Cor. 230, 17. ovt€ BiKaius, ovt ex* aK-nS^ das ovSenias elp-nfieva 
{stated neither with justice nor in adherence to the truth, as it were, resting on 
truth), (f) Her. 5, 109. iir" ov irdx^ficu (cui rei praefecti sumus) . Dem. Cor. 
266, 118. ivl rov ^ ewpiKov KaTaa-ToSfeis (placed over the theatre-money). 
Hence ad iirl ruv irpay fidr wy [those placed over business, those at the head of 
affairs). 

II. With the Dat., (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the 
tarrying or resting upon, or (b) more frequently, at, hy or near a 
place or object ; — (2) of time (mostly only poetic) ; — (3) in a 
causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote dependence : penes, 
in the power of; — (b) a condition under which something takes 
place ; (c) the purpose, design, or determination ; (d) the goal or 
limit ; (c) the reason, \vith verbs expressing an affection of the 
mind (^ 285, Rem. 1)., 

(1) (a) Th. 1, 56. [TioriZaiarai) oiKOvaiy iir\ rip 'Icr^/i^ ttjs UaXX'fjvrjs. X. 
An. 7. 4, 4. Oi Sp^KfS rir aAa>7re»((5os itrl rois k €<p aXals (popovffi Kal to7s 
ctffi, Kol C^ipas fifXP^ '^'^^ voBu)v hr\ tcov Xinroov exovffiv, wear fox-skin caps on 
their heads and ears, and have cloaks reaching to their feet when upon their horses 
{ivi with the Dat. purely local, but iir\ rwv linrwv, inasmuch as the horses are 
considered as active), (b) Her. 7,89. ol *oiyiK€s rh waXaihv oXk^op cTrt rp 
*Epvdpf} ^a\d<r<rr) (u}x>n, by). So also where one thing is said to be along 
with another, or in addition to it, e. g. ia-yieiu eiri tw a-lrw 6\pov [to eat the 
tn^ov with bread) ; ittX r<^ airtp Tciveiu {to drink icith one's food) ; iirl t fj kv- 
\iKt ifhfiv {to sing over one's cups). Hence, iir\ tovtois (upon, in addition 
to this, i. e. besides) ; finally it is also used to denote a succession of things in 
time and space. Od. »j, 120. iJyx*^ ^""^ oyxf'V yvp<^<^K^'' (pear on pear). X. 
Cy. 2. 3, 7. ii/eo-TTj ^ir' avrtp *(pav\as (after him). ^6vos iirl <p6va (murder 
upon muraar), Eur. (2) 'Exi wktX (II. b, 529), in, during the night, comp. 
4 283, 3, (b). (3) (a) Dem. Chers, 90, 2. €<^' u/ilv eVrt (tovtovs) KoKaC^iv 
{penes vos, it is in your power, tic), (b) 'EttI rovrai, i-rr' ovSeyl (hac, nulla 
conditione, nullo pacto, on this condition, etc.). Her. 3, 83. eTrl tovtco inre^i<XTa- 
(xcu rris apxvs, ir yre vt ovSeyhs v/xeajv ip^o/xai. Hence of price, e. g. iirl 
finr!^^ {on condition of for, a reivard) ; iirl /xeydKois toko is SaueiCear^ai 
{to borrow mt hi(/h interest); iirl irocta (at what price), (c) Her. 1,68. eTri KaK(^ 
kv^pdnrov <rlSr}pos apfvpriTou (in perniciem hominis). So iirl tovtS (hoc con- 
silio. for this jnajyose^ with this design). X. S. 1,5. Upwrayopa ttoXv apyvpioy 
BfSuKai iirl <ro<pi<f (ad discendam sapientiam). PI. Ap. 20, e. j/zeuSerat re 
Ktd ewi Sia$o\^ rp ifi^ Xtyei. Hence oi iirl rals p.r]xava7s (those 
placed over the machines) ; ol iirl to7s irpdy fj. a cri (those intrusted with business); 
irl ry ^etapiK^ &y {charged with the money for the public sJiows). Dem. Cor. 



440 SYNTAX. [^ 297. 

264, 113. (d) A.ey€iv iirl rtvi {to pronounce a eulogy on one); vS/mvs ^ecr^a, 
4 IT I rivi (for). And so ovofidCeiv or koX^Iv ri eiri Ttvi {nomen cdicui impo- 
nere, to call a person or thing something). PL Ep. 470, b. iirl fiev rp rod oiK^iov 
€X3^po crrdcTis KeKATjrat, iirl 5e ttj tov aWorpiov 'ir6\€fjU)S {to hostility at home^ 
the name insurrection was given, i. e. hostility at home was called insurrection^ that 
aI)road, war). Also, against, in a hostile sense. Her. 6, 88. t^ irav nrjxo-viiiTa- 
ff^ai iir Alyiy-fjT-pai {against the Aeginetans). Th. 1, 102. rrjv yeyofieyriv 
iirl r (f M-fidca ^v^ifxaxio-V- (e) TeKav, fiiya (ppouuu, fxalviabau^ ayovcucTeii', etc. 
iiri T ipi {to laugh at, he greatly elated at, etc.). 

III. With the Ace, (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the 
local limit, the direction or motion to or upon a place or object; 
(b) extension over an object: over, upon; — (2) of time : (a) to 
denote the temporal limit (up to, till), also the limit of quantity 
(about) ; (b) extension over a period of time (during) ; — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote purpose, design ; 
(b) conformity, m,anner ; (c) in respect to. 

(1) (a) ^Avafiaiveiv ^<^' lirirov, inl ^p6vov. Fl. Crit.112, e. {ol 'ASri]va2oi) 
iirl IT a a a V E v p d ir rj v Kol 'Aa lau Hard re (TUfidTocy KdWrj koI Karh rriv rSey 
^vx^iv iravTOiav apiT))v i\x6yifioi ?i(rau {over all Europe, etc.). 'Eirl Se^id, ii^ 
apiffrcpd {upon the right, left, to the right, left). (2) (a) *E^' fcrirepav {until 
evening)] (b) eiri voWas rj/jiepas, icp* f]fjiepav. Th. 4, 1. rh 'Priyioy 4irl 
rroKvv xpt^i/ov ia-Tcuria^e {for a long time). 94. ol 6w\7Tai iirl oktw irav rh 
eiparSTre'Sor ird^avro {by eights, eight in Jile). 'EttI fifya, iroXh, irXfoy, fui^w^ 
/xaWov, ixaxp6v, eVl r6(xov, i(p^ Zaov (greatly, especially, muck rather, etc.). Terdx- 
Sfai iirl iroWovs {many in Jile). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. iirl b-f]pav Uvcu {venatum 
ire). 3, 14. iirl vSwp Uvat {aquatum ire). Hence iirl ri; wherefore? In a 
hostile sense, e. g. arparev^trbai iirl AvSovs {u^wn, against the Lydians) ; iXai- 
V€iv iirl Ilepcros; (b) iir Xaa {equally, in the same tcay). Her. 3, 71. tV 
iTTtx^ipV^^^^ Tavr-qu fj.^ ovro) ffvvrdxwe a^ovXws, aW* ivl rh (roxppovftrrepoy 
outV xdfiPave {more according to reflection, more considerately), (c) PI. Rp. 370, 
h. 5ta(lr€pa>y iirl "trpa^iy. Thin i fie {quod ad me attinet). 



$297. (3) Uapd, hy,near.\ 

Ilapa denotes nearness to sometliing: hy tJie sule of, by, near. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation ^vith verbs of going 
and coming, to denote a removal from near a person (Poet, 
also from near a tlimg) ; — (2) in a causal sense, to denote the 
author. 



(1) 'EA.^67j/ trap a r ivosy like the French de chez quelqu'un {from near 
one, from some one). (2) (a) yet almost purely local: Her. 8. 140. 077CA/17 ^(e« 






1297.] PROPOSITIONS.— rtapa. 441 

nap a fia<ri\rios {comes from the king, with the accompanying idea that it was 
done by his direction). So wapd is regularly used of ambassadors, e. g. &yy€\oi, 
irpeafiets trap a. rivos, h.yy4XKeiv irapd Tiuos,rh nap 6. tivos {the commis- 
sion, command, etc., from any one) ; (b) with passive verbs (see § 251, Eem. 4) ; 
(c) with verbs of learning and hearing, e. g. fiauStdu^iv irapd nvos, aKovuu irapd 
Tiuos] (d) nap' eavTov, eavTuv {sua sponte, of one^s oion accord); (e) -w-ith 
verbs of giving and the like, e.g.irap eavrov SiSomi {from himself, i. e. from 
his own resources). 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote chvelling 
or rest near a person (Poet, also near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal 
or figurative sense, to denote the possessor; then also in relation 
to the judgment or opinion of a person. 

(1) "EoTTj irapk rep Pa<Ti\e7. (2) UoWh xP^Moto irapa rtp ^a(ri\ti 
^v. Her. 3, 160. irapa. Aapfiw KpjTp {judice Dario, in the opinion of). 1, 
32. Trap' ifioi (meo judicio, in my opinion). 86. rovs irapa (T(pi(Ti avToTai 
ioKfoyras oK^iovs. Dem, 01. 1. 18, 3. roaovrw ^avixaffrSrepos iraph, iraai vo- 
fii^erai {6 4»/Atinroj). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a 
direction or motion to a person so as to come beside or near 
(Poet., also of a thing) ; (b) a direction or motion near a place 
and by or beyond it: along, along by, by, beyond; (c) extension 
near a place or object (along, per), generally to denote indefi- 
nite nearness (by) \ — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
(during) ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote 
dependence, the possessor (penes) ; (b) a comparison and estima- 
tion ; hence (c) conformity, with verbs of considering, showing, 
and the like ; (d) a reckon or cause (wholly X^^propter, by vir- 
tue of, on account of) 

(1) (a) Her. 1, 36. ^6Kuiv is Alywrrov Mkcto irapk''Afia<riu Koi dr] Koi es 
2ap5ij irapa Kpolffoy. (b) Hapek r^y Ba^vKuva irapUvai {along, near, 
by Babylon). From this have originated various ethical expressions, e. g. iraph 
fioTpav {near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary to fate) ; Trapa 5oV {praeter opin- 
ionem, contrary to expectation) ; vap' i\irlSa, irapct (piaiv, iraph. rh S'lKaioy, irapk rohs 
ZpKOvs, irapa Uvafiiv. (It is the opposite of Kard, e. g. Karh. fiolpav, Uvafxiv, ac-^ 
cording to.) Hence it has also the signification of besides, praeter, e.g. irapk 
ravra {praeter haec) ; (c) Her. 9, 15. irapk rhv 'A<r<.ir6u {along th^ Asopus). 
Dem. 01. 1. 24, 22. ^ r{>xn ^apk irdvr icrX -rk rwv h.v^p<!>^^u irpdyfiara 
(l^er omnes res dominatur). Her. 4, 87. olros KareXdcpSrn -rrapk rhu vi\6v 
(near), ^ri^va^ irapd rxra (and ,rap«£ nui). (2) Uap ^ f.4pay, irapk 
rhy ir6\,tioy {during); irapk r^y ir6<Tiy {inter potandum, while drinking), 
80 also of single points of time, during which something takes place, e. g. 



442 SYNTAX. [^ 298 

jrau' avrhv rhv Kivdwov {in ipso discriminis tempore, in the very moment qf 
danger). (3) (a) Isocr, Archid. 126. wfioKoyelTo traph. tovtov yevtar^ai t^w 
trayrrfpiau avrols {constabat, in hoc its positam esse salutem, tfiat their safety depended 
on him). Her. 8, 140. irvy^duea-^e ttjv vvi/ irap" e/xe iovaav Svyajjuy (is in my 
power, with me), (b) Her. 7, 20. Sisn H-'^tc rhv A(tpiiov ((rT6\ov) rhv iirX 'S.kv^o.s 
Trap a rovrov (sc. rhi^ <rT6\oy) fi-qSey (paivea^ou {in comparison with this). So 
trap' oKlyov iroie7(r^ai ri {to make of little account). IIop' oXlyov., xapa 
fji.iKp.6v, fipax^i nearly, almost, irapa iroKv, by far, vap' ouSej/ ri^iabau^ 
[to make no account of) ; after comparatives and expressions implying compari- 
son, as &Wos, erepos, Zid<popos. Th. 1, 23. riXiov iKKii^ns wkv 6r e pai iraph. 
rh 4k rov irpXv xp^^ov fjLur]fiovev6[i€va {more frequent in comparison with those men- 
tioned in former times). PL Phaed. 93, a. oi/Ze fiTjif ttokIv n, ovSe ri vaax^i'V SA. Ao 
irap h Uv eKeiva ^ iroifj ^ itdaxV' Hence of alternations: VH-tpa trap' rnxtpap 
{one day in distinction from another, day by day, every other day, altemis diehus, also 
•nap' 7)fj.€pav alone). Often with the accompanying idea of preference, prae, 
praeter. X. C. 1.4, 14. iraph r h &\\a C'i''** wsirep ^eoi, ol iy^ponroi 0iorf6- 
ov<rt {in comparison with, beyond, other animals), (c) 'Opu, aKoiru n rap 6.\Ko 
ri {to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it, 
properly, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1. 824,34. vapa rhv \6- 
yov, hv aTTocpepovcriu, eViSei'lw {in conformity icith, properly, holding an object near 
to another.) (d) Dem. 1.43, 14. ov5( ^iKiinros vapa r^y aurou ^ a> fii] y tocov- 
rou iircv^riTai, o (T y irapa r^y ij/xfr 4 pay ifXfKf tay {on account of his oxen 
strength). So iraph tout a, propterea, irap" 8, quapropter. 



$ 298. (4) Hpos, before. 

Up OS (formed from Trpo'), denotes before, in the presence oj. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote a direction 
or motion from the presence of an object, especially from the 
situation of a place ; — (2) in a causal relation, to denote an 
active person, as it were an outgoing from the presence of a 
person exercising power, or of an object considered as a person, 
(a) of derivation ; (b) of a person or thing to whom or wliich 
something belongs {qualiiy, peculiarity) [k 273, 2, (c) (a)] ; (c) 
of til t author or cause* 

(1) Her. 3, 101. oIkIoviti irphs y6rov ayefiov {toward the south, properly 
from the south). Comp. a meridie instead of ad meridiem. 107. -rphs ixcvTifi.- 
fipivs ^Apafiiij iarl {lies towards the south). X. An. 2. 2, 4. hrar^ rf rryovfU- 
vtp, rh fihy viro(vyia ^x***^^^ irphs rod rorafiov {towards, on). (2) (a) vphs 
irar pos, irphs ixr\T p6s {on the father's or mother's side). {\>) Tlphs yvvaixit 
4(TTi {it is the manner of tvomen) ; vphs SiKijs iarlv {it is conformable to justice). 
X. An. 1. 2, 11. ovK ^y irphs rov Kvpov rp6irov, ^xoyra /itJj axoSiSSytu {uxu 
not in accordance with the custom of Cyrus). Antiph. 2. 121, 2. ij fity ^a riv 



k 298 1 PREPOSITIONS. — IIpos. 443 

irpox^eWo)!/ irphs rwv \€y€iv Svvafieyup iariu, tj Se o\^;^€ta irphs tup 
SlKoia Kol 8<rto v pn<rcr6vra}v. Also, thai irp6s tiuos {to stand or be on the 
side of one). Th. 4. 92. xpn TrtfTTcixrauTas rtf St^cf irphs vH-oiv eceo-^at, dfiScre 
XwpJja-oi Tois iToKcfjiiots {trustinfj in God that he will be on our side). Hence PI. 
Hipp. 1, 285, b. SoKus fioi rhv \6yov irphs 6>ou \eyeiv {for my advantage). 
(c) to receive, to have something from some one, then with passive verbs (§251, 
Rem. 4), intransitive {§ 249, 3), and in phrases of a passive sense. Her. 2, 139. 
KCUtSv Ti irphs ^eeov f} irphs av^pdirwy XafJL^dveiv. X. An. 7. C, 33. ex^v 
imnvou TToKvv irphs vyLwv a.ir(iropeu6fj.7}u [having much praise from you). Her, 
1. 61. OLTifJid^ea-^ai irphs Tie i(r ktt par ov. X. An. 1. 9, 20. <pl\ovs d/xoXoyeiTai 
Kvpos irphs irduTuv Kparia-ros Stj yeveaSiai ^epaireveiv {is admitted by all). Oec. 

4, 2. ou ficwavaiKod Kakovixfucu aSo^ovvTai wphs t S>v ir6\eu)v {are held in no esteem 
by the cities). Her. l,73.TaOTa irphs Kva^dpew ira^6vTes {from Cyaxeres). 7, 

5. aTpoTTjXaTcc ^irt ray 'A^i/as, Iva \6yos are exv irphs av^ pciir oov aya^os 
(ut laudcris ab hominibus, as it were, iVi the presence of men). With forms of swear- 
ing and protestatioa, e. g. irphs ^ewy {per deos, properly, bef)re the gods). 

11. With the Dat., to denote dwelling or rest near or b't/ an 
object; also of being busily engaged in or tvith a thing; finally, 
in the sense of besides, in addition to (praeter). 

Th. 2, 79. is fidxv^ Ka^l(rrayrai ot 'A^vatoj irphs aurfj rf} irSXei. £?va(, 
yiyvfor^cu irphs vpdy fiaff i Tiphs rovro), irphs tovtols {praeter ea). 

IIL With the Ace, (1) in a local relation: (a) of the situation 
of a place : towards [where the Gen. also may be used, see No. I, 
(1)]; (b) of the direction to persons, or things considered as 
persons, sometimes also to places, both in a friendly and in 
hostile relation; (c) of extetision; — (2) to denote time indefi- 
nitely ; — (3) causal and figurative : (a) to denote the purpose 
or object ; (b) conformity ; hence (c) the reason or cause (prop- 
ter) ; (d) a comparison, for the most part with the accompanying 
idea of^ sujjeriority or preference (prae, praeter); (e) in respect to. 

{l){a) Tlphs fxf(n)fi.fiplav, wphs e<rirepa« {towards). Th. 2, 55. {v yv) 
irphs neKoir6yyii(roy 6p^ (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. epxoyrai irphs v^ias {to 
us, properly, come before us). 7. 6, 6. u/iels irpwl H^oixev irphs avr ovs. 5. 4, 5. 
Suuru^yai &ov\6fxfda irphs r^y 'E\Aa5o(i.e. irphs robs "EAATji/oy, to go in safety 
to Greece). Aeyeiy, ayopeveiv, i^eTd^eiv ti irpos Tiva [to speak before, to one) \ 
rroydds, av/maxiav iroif^a^ai irp6s Tiya {with one); fMdxf<y^o.h iroKffxeTy irp6s 
riva {against one). These phrases everj'where imply the meaning to come 
into the presence of, before the fac6 of any one ; also, \oyiCf<r^ah (TKe^\>a<TSrai, a-Ko- 
v«7y, iydvfi.e7aS>cu -rphs ^avT6y {secum reputare) ; likewise, {:ZwKpdTr]s^y) 
vphs x«*M«»'« foJ ■^f'pos Ka\ irdvTas ithvovs KapTepLKWTaros {against), 
X. C. 1. 2, 1. (c) ^wKpdTvs ye Kal irphs rohs &\\ovs ay^p<S>irovs K6aao* 



444 SYNTAX. [$ 299 

Tp ir6\ei irapeix^ (aviong other men, etc. the preposition here extending the idea) 
ibid. 61. (2) Jlphs riix4pav (towards daybreak). (3) (a) Dem. Phil. 2. 71, 
23. TravToSoTTo evprifxei/a Tois 'ir6\€(n irphs <pv\a ktiv Kcd auTT^piav (for a guard, 
etc.); (b) Her. 1, 38. irphs r)]V 6\piv ravTrjv rhv ydfiov Tovroy ea-irevaa (in 
accordance unth this view). So Kpiv^iv n irpos t», Ae-yeij/ irphs xapip, irphs 
rh rjSv, irphs rh aya^Sy. Also, irphs filav (violently, against the will), 
irphs cvdyK7}y, irphs T)hov4\v, irphs aKpi^f lav (accurately, in conformity 
with accuracy, etc.). (c) Tlphs ravra (properly, in accordance with this, hence 
for this reason, therefore), (d) X. 3. 5, 4. ^ Tuy 'A^yaicoy 56^a (reraireiywTcu) 
irphs Tovs Boiur ov s (in comparison with the renown of the Boeotians). So 
also to denote an exchange, e. g. PI. Phaed. 69, a. 7}Soyas irphs rtSovhs koI 
\viras irphs \viras Kal <p6^oy irphs <f>6Poy KaToXKarTiff^ai, kolL fifl^u irphs 
ixdrru, iSisirep uo/xicrfxaTa {to exchanye pleasures for pleasures, etc.). (e) 2ko- 
TreTj/, fi\4ireiy irp6s ti (to consider with respect to something); Sicupfptiy irphs 
aperiiy, Kokhs irphs SpSfxoy, irphs ird\i]y, TeKeos irphs apiri^v. 



, k 299. (5) *Y7ro, suh, under. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a mo- 
tion out from a lower j)lace : forth from under, away from under 
(more obvious in the Horn, vttck with Gen.) ; (b) to denote a 
quiet rest under an object ($ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense : (a) to denote the autlior with passive and in- 
transitive verbs (^ 254, Rem. 4) ; (b) an outward or inward 
{mental) occasion, influence; (c) a mere instrumental cause, 
means, manner. 

(1) (a) Od. 1, 140. avTh.0 M. Kparhs Xififvos f>(ii kyXoubv vScep, Kp4\ni uiri 
circlovs (from under the grotto). 17, 5. virh air-fiyijs \vfiy 'mrovs (from under 
the chariot). X. An. 6.4,25. (Hevo^cDc) AojSwv 0ovy virh a/xd^rji tripayuurdfi- 
eyos ifio-fj^ei. (b) II. i^-, 13. e\wy fxiy plif/u is Tdprapov . . . fixi ^d^urrov virh 
X^oy6s ia-Ti fiepebpov (under the earth). 'Tirh yris olKf7y. (2) (a) Kxtiycff- 
^ai vir6 Tivo:, airo^avflv viro riyos (to be slain by one), (b) X. An. 5. 1, 
15. Ae'liTTTTos aire^av^y virh N iKdySpov. 7. 7,23. fieya fioi SoKfi e5 OKOVfiy 
virh av^puiirwy (to hear himself well spoken of by men). 3. 4, 11. airu>\«ray 
r^jy apxhv virh Uep<rS>v MtjSoi (lost the government by the Persians = spoliati 
sunt imperio a P.). 7. 2, 22. ouTiay cx" "'t*^ riyos (= accusor ab aliguo). Her. 
3, 104. virh Tov Kavfiaros oi /uupjUTj/ces d^aye'es ylvovrai irrh yijy (under the in- 
f Hence of the heat, on account of the heat). Th. 2, 85. virh aviixvv #foi uri 
airKoias iySierpi^ev ovk 6\iyoy xP^^'ov (on account of the winds, etc.). 'Tt* 
aydyKifs (from necessity). "Tirh fxe^rfs fialyeff^cu, PI. Tirh plyovs. Her. 
1, 85. virh heovs Koi kukov (pcuv^v ^^h^^ (spoke from fear and grief ). So 
virh xapns, <p^ovov, bpyrjs, aireipias, troKpp o(rv vijs, a<ppo<Tvyi]S, etc 
Ic) Her. 7, 21. Upvaaov virh fiaffrlywy (dug under the /asA, that being the 



♦ 300.] PREPOSITIONS. •Ytto. 



445 



means) ; also of persons : 9, 98. utt b K-hpvKos irporiySpeve {under the help of the 
herald, i. e. praeconis voce) ; particularly of the accompaniment of musical in- 
struments, e. g. Her. 1, 17. iarpaT^i^ro hrh a aKvify wv. So uir' ahXov 
jcopevuvj vvh (pop/xiyyuv, vnh rv/iirdvuvy etc. 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet 
rest under an object ;— (2) causal and figurative : (a) to denote 
the author (almost exclusively poetic, see k 251, Rem. 4) ; (b) 
to denote the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet. ; (c) to 
denote subjection. 

(1) 'Tiri 7^ cTvoi; with mountains, at the foot of e.g. virh Tix(l>\co {at the 
foot of Tmolus). 'Tirh Tip 'T/ir7<r<ry. (2) (a) AaiJ.r>uai vTr6 ri v i, Trlirreiv 
vv6 rivt {to he conquered by one, etc.), Hom. (b) 'Ttt^ ^ap^lrw xopeuetj/, 
vtr' avA^, etc. (to dance to or by the music of the lyre), (c) Uoieii/ ri vtt6 rivi 
{to subject something to one), and voie7<T^ai ri v<p' loury (to subject something to 
one's self sibi suhjicerc). Her. 7, 157. tV 'EAAoSa vir euvrcp iroiriaraabai. Th. 
1,110. Myxnrros vvh fia(ri\e7 iyiviro {icas under the power of the king). "Si. 
Cy. 8. 8, 1. Kvpos Tovs v<p' eavrtf &sirfp eavrov iraTSas irifxa {those subject to 
him). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the 
aim, direction or motion towards and under ; (b) extension under 
an object; — (2) of time: (a) in an indefinite specification of 
time (approach to a point of time) ; (b) extension in time 
(during) ; — (3) causal, to denote subjection. 

(1) (ia) *I(W. iiirh yrjy {to go under). X. An. 1. 10, 14. virh aiirhu {rhy 
\6<poy) <rT4;aQj rh arpdr^vfiairffji'irfi Avkiov. (b) Her. 2, 127. v-ir^cri diK-fifiara 
iwh yrjy {are under the earth). 5. 10. ret virh r^v &pKTov aoiKvra So/ce« 
thou {the parts beneath the north pole). X. An. 7. 4, 5. ii/ Ta7s inrh rh opos k(Io- 
fiats. (2) (a) 'Tir^ yvKxa {sub noctem, towards)] virh t^v irpdr-qv eireX- 
bovaay yvtcTa; so also vk6 ti {aliquatenus, in some measure), (b) Her. 9, 51. 
virh T^v yvKra {during). (3) X. Cy. 1. 5, 3. {6 "Atra-vplwy fia(n\eus) Biairf/x- 
ffi irpos re robs v<p* iavrhv irdyras, Koi irphs Kpoiaov. 6.2. 11. b avAXoyos 
Twy irrh fiaa i\ea fiap^dpuy. 



♦ 300. Remarks on Peculiarities in the use of the 

Prepositions. 

1. The proper prepositions were originally (except ws, to) adverbs of place 
(§ 286, Rem. 2), i. e. they denote the local relation of an action ; in this way 
nearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is also fre- 
quent in Herodotus, but in good Attic prose, only irphs 5e, /col ■irp6si praeterea 

38 



446 SYNTAX. [^ 300 

Od. ^, 40. iroWhy yap airh irKvvol flat v6Kt)os, i, 116 — 118. vricros — reri- 
yvarai u\'f)€<ro'', iv 5' alyes aTreipeariau yeydauriy &ypiai. Also in Her., e. g. 3, 39 
4v 5e 5^ Kot AixT^iovs elAe (among them, i. e. in Us). II. <r, 562. fieKavfs S' aui 
fi6Tpves ?t(Tav [grapes were thereon). Od. i, 184. xepi 5" av\T\ inprfhrt SeSfnjro ku- 
rupvx^ecrari \i^oi(Tiu. a, 66. hs ire pi fikv v6ov iarX ^poruv {he is beyond, i. e. eminent 
above). ^, 44. t<^ yAp ^a ^ehs vepl Swkcv aoiSrii/ {in a special manner, especially). 
B. <r, 529. KT^Ivov 5' ^7ri firfXo^orrfpas (in addition, besides). Also not rare in 
Her., ivl S4 {thereupon, turn); fierh, 54 {postea), Her.; vp6s 76, wphs 5e 
very common from Homer downward, also in Attic poetry and prose. 

Remark 1. Sometimes two prepositions stand together in poetry, most fre- 
quently in Epio, the first of which always has an adverbial meaning, but the sec- 
ond may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive. Aih irp6 
{through and out) : II. p, 393. rdwrai 5e re vaora ()3o6i7j) hik irp6. 'Afi<pl ttc pi 
(round about). Od. A, 608. afKpl irepl (rTri^f(r<riu. 11. <p, 10. ox^cu ^ afiipl 
TT e pi fieydK' iaxou. /3, 305. afKpl ircpl Kp^vrjv. Ilap€K (with the Gen. near 
to, with the Ace. near by, along by), e. g. Od. i, 116. irapex Kinevos. fi, 276. 
dW^ IT ope I tV vviToy 4\avyeT€ vrja fieKaivav. Udpe^ (as a Paroxytone) often 
in Her. with the meaning 6e5ic?es, e. g. 3, 91. irdpe^ tov apyvpiov. "tirtK 
{from under, out from under), in Homer; also Her. 3, 116. \4yfrat v-reK rut 
ypviruv apird^eiy 'Apifiaairovs (sc. rhv XP^'^^")- ^Air ov ph <p4pfiv, H. ir, 669, 679. 
riepl TTph. II. A, 180. ircpl ir ph yhp eyx^i ^fv {around &ui before) . 

Rem. 2. Also the improper prepositions (y^Ka and x «^ P *" f t^^O'igh ^cry 
seldom, are connected with the proper prepositions, as in Eng. on account of for 
the sake of, atrh fioris eycKu {for the cry^s sake). Lys. Evandr. 793. ire pi rS>9 
4v oKiyapx^f} cLp^dm-w tveKiv. 

2. Since prepositions in composition retain their original meaning as ad- 
verbs of place, and as the older language habitually uses the prepositions as 
adverbs of place, it follows of course, that the ancient language often employs 
the simples, and separates the preposition as an adverb from the verb, where 
the Attic writers regularly use the compounds, ^he two following instances 
must be distinguished : — 

(a) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the verb. H. 7, 34. 
iir6 T€ rpSfios ^Wafie yv7a. 7, 135. irapii 5* ^7X*" fuucpk wexijyfy. 5, 
63. 4vl y €y\/ovrai ^col &\Xoi. 5, 161. ?>t re koI 64>e reXti. ^j 108. oSs 
{Xirirovs) iroT* air' Alyelay e\6^iiy (cAeVdttx rird ti, H. ir, 56). 

Rem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression, where 
several sentences follow each other, which constats in using the compound, 
which should stand in each sentence, only in the first, while in the others 
the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. II. y^/, 799. kut a /xev SoXix^kiov fyX"' 
^rJK is aya>ya (p4ptDV, Karh 8* acnriSa koI Tpv<pd\€iay. Often also in Her., 
e. g. 8,33. Kara fiey tKavcr ay Apvfxhy ir6\iVj Kark 5e X.apd5pTjv (where, how- 
ever, the first may be taken as Tmesis. See Rem. 4). 

Rem. 4. In the later periods of the language, and particularly in the Attic 
writers, the prepositions are so closely connected with the verbs, that both 
mingle and form one whole. It is only from this time that there is what may 
be properly called Tmesis, i. e. the separation of a verb, by means of one or 
more intervening words, fix)m the preposition in connection with which it forms 
one whole or one idea. The Tmesis of compound verbs is found somewhat 
often in Her. ; also in Pindar, and in other poets, seldom in the Attic poet5 in 
the UtIc choral songs, and still more seldom in the di.ilogue ; but when it does 
occur, only a particle comes between the two parts of a word, so that the unity 



y^ 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OP PREPOS TIONS. 447 

of the idea is not destroyed. Her. 7, 15. E.>|7,s kud. re fSpaue iK rvs Kolrn. 
.al Wm.. dryeAo.. 8S9kji,^^..^^a..6arpar,y6.. Lr^ph. Aul S 
5 1 &p oXuKaf^ey. The Attic prose remains free from this license, with a few 
special exceptions, e. g. Th. 3, 13^ ^J? I i' ^ kuku,, noi.7u aWohs ^er' 'Adv.aiZ 
dAAa ^vpe\€vSf^povu (so as to make the contrast emphatic). PI Gorcj 520 e 

PI. Phaedr. 23/, a. ^v^ fioi \a$e<r^€ rov fii^ov {take part). 

(b) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the Case of its sub- 
stantive. Here also, throughout Homer, the preposition exhibits its original 
adverbial meaning, and belongs to the verb ; the verb and the adverbial prepo- 
sition together, form one verbal idea, and this, not the preposition alone, gov- 
erns the Case. II. e, 292. toC 5' air}, ^h yXSxrffav rd/xe (Gen. of separation). 
I, 382. irKfloTTa Sofiois iv KT-fifiara Kflrai {lies within the house), o, 266. afi<pl 
5e X'WToi &fA.ois aiaaovrai, on the shoulders about {local Dative), tt, 291. iu 
yap ndrpoKKos <p6^ov y]Kfv aTraaty, he cast fear into all (Dat. of limit or am, 
fj 284, Rem. 1). So the Ace. denoting local aim or object (^ 277). II. S-, 115, 
Tw 5* €15 afjL<poT(pw Atofi-nSfos ipfiara ^Tirrfv {entered the chariot). Ace. of the 
object receiving an action (^ 279): II. /3, 156. 'A^tjj/oitjv "Hp?; irphs /xv^ov 
Uiirfv {addressed f spoke to Athene). 

Rem. 5. In the second case (b). a Tmesis is admitted only when mere par 
I tides, like ix-f^v, St, t€, fid, yap, Up', 5' &pa, come between the preposition and the 
Case of the substantive, — a very frequent usage of the post-Homeric period, 
and even in the Attic writers. Comp. Rem. 4. 

3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly of the Homeric language,] 
that it often connects prepositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which ex-/ 
, press the direction whither ; and, on the other hand, prepositions followed by 
the Ace, with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place 
or object. This construction arises from a blending of two ideas, since the 
speaker cither conceives and expresses, along with the moment of motion, the 
moment of the rest which succeeds ; or along \\\\h. the moment of rest, the moment 
of motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the pregnant Construction. 

(a) The Jtrb of motion involves the idea of the rest which succeeds, when preposi- 
tions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Ace. The moment of 
rest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must then be regarded 
as the predominant one. The principle above stated holds with the following 
prepositions : — 

"With iy, particularly in the Enic language. L. e, 370. ^5* iy yoivaa-i 
wiwre AiuyTfs ST 'A<ppoSiTri (she fell on her knees, and then lay on her knees). Od. 
a, 200. iyu) fiayreixrofiai, u)s iy\ dvfi^ a^dvaroi ^dWovffi. II. A, 743. 
iipiTf S" 4y KovirKTiv {fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, riStevai 
iy x^po'^f like tli'e Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first : 
^s 5* TJ)"Hpo«oi' »fOTf</)U70j', and then o/ 5' 4y tw 'Upalco KarairetpevySres 
iiriftray (those who had fed and were then in the Heraeum). PL Euthyd. 292, e. 
iy Tairri rij kiroplt^ iyiir eirr<i,K€iy. (Caes. B. G. 5, 10. naves in httore 
ejertas esse. Sail. Jug! 5. in amicitia receptus). — A\so v^ith afi<pi and rr^P^ 
with tlie Dat. instead of the Ace. II. \, 17. Kvvf^TSas fxev irpwra irep] Kyfjun- 



Od 



ly ^S^rjKfy (he put the greaves around his legs, so that then they set fast to them). 
d.;&, 434. &fi(pl Tvpl arriaai rpliroSa. With iiri: II. a, 55. t^ yio 



448 SYNTAX. [k 300 

iwl <pp€<r] ;^^/f € ^eo \€vk(&\€Vos "HpTj (like iu <t>pe<r\ ^uucu). With 'wpds' 
Od. t, 284. vea fiey fioi Karea^e HoadSdwv ivofflx^f^y, irphs VfTpycri fia\^v, 
289. (Tvu Se Svu) fji,dp\\/as, wsre CKvXaKas, ttotI yaiji K6vr€. So fidWfit 
irorl ya'iT}. — With yxo', in prose, in the phrases, vtto nvi yiyyetr^ai {to 
come under the power of any one, and continue under his power) ; Troie7y t» vwo 
rivi {alicui aliquid subjicere)] iroida^ai ixp" kavrcp \sibi subjicere, §299,11, 
(2) (C)]. 

Rem. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., without 
doubt, expresses the relation of aim or objext: Xf'P<*5 idWeiv iirl airw, ^kcu $4\os 
eiri rivi, ir^fji^ai ov^ipou iiri rivi, i\avy€iv Ittttovs iir\ yTjvaiu, riTouueff^ai r6^a iirl 
Tivi, aWea-^ai iirl tivi, /xdxfcr^ai. iirl rivt, Ttina^oi cV 6,v^i<Tiv. See § 284, 
Kem. 1. 

(b) The verb expressing rest involves the idea of the motion which precedes, when 
the preposition e I s stands with the Ace, instead of the preposition 4 v with the Dat, 
The moment of the preceding motion must then be regarded as predominant. 

II. 0, 275. i<pdvTi \7s els 6S6y {came into the 7ond and appeared). Her. 4, 
14. ipavrjvai is Tipo K6vpr}(T ov. Eur. Iph. T. 620. oAA* its hydyKTiv Kel' 
fjLe^a {to come into and to be in). Her. 3, 62. 'jrpo777<ipeue (Trks is fi4aor rh 
ivTiToKfxeva (placing himself in the midst and there standing). Very frequent in 
prose is irapeTyai cis rdiroy riyd {to have come to a place, and to be present 
there) ; comp. " he is in church, in town, or on the land," in which the idea of 
previous motion is necessarily supposed. X. An. 1.2, 2. iraprf<Tay els 2<£p- 
5eis {came to Sardis and were there). Her. 8, 60. is r^y 'ZaKafilya vxeK- 
Kenai vfuy reKva re koI yvvaiKes {to carry to Salamis and leave there in safety). 
PI. Rp. 468, a. rhy ^uvtol els rovs iro\€ filovs oA<^vto, i. 6. els roi/s 
iroXefxiovs ireaSyra a\wyai. 

(c) Verbs signifying to hang, to attach to, to suspend, etc., as Kpeyuwyvyai, avap- 
ray, ^k-, Kara-, i.yaSe7y, audirTeiy, oua)pe7<r^ai, are connected with the prepositions 
dTTo and e/c (as in Lat. with ab and ex), in order to express, together with 
the idea of suspending anything to a place, the idea of hanging down from or 
depending from a place. 

Od. 3^, 67. Kad ^ i H IT a<r(ra\6<pi k p e fiaa e y ip6pfiiyya \lyetay {he hung the 
lyre on the peg, so tha^ it then hung down from it). X. H. 4. 4, 10. ncurlfiaxos 
Kar a^Tjffas airh SevSpwy robs tmrovs fiera rwy i^eKoyruy fei ivayrloy rails 
'Apyelois {having fastened the horses to the trees). X. C. 3. 10, 13. dupcutes fK 
roov &ixwy k pe fxdfjie yo i {hanging ujwn the shoxdders and depending from th '■ y 
So ayapray ri ^k rivos. Her. 4. 10. iK rwy ^uffr^) puy <pope7y <pia\as (c 
girdles, so that the bowls hung down). In poetry, this usage is very w;,>... 
extended. See Larger Gi^ammar, 11. § 622, (c). ' 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, as well as prepositions, are sometimes used in a 
pregnant sense : (a) adverbs denoting rest instead of those denoting the direc- 
tion whither. S. Trach. 40. Kelvos S" Sirov (instead of°8irot, quo) /Sc/S^kcv, 
ovSeU oi5e {no one knows where [irhither] he has gone). X. H. 7. 1, 25. 5irow 
^ouKtj^eTey i^e\^e7y. — (b) adverbs expressing the direction irAj/^^r, instead 
of adverbs expressing the relation where. Eur. H F. 74. to? irar^p &ire<rri 
yrjs ; 1157. v o7 KaKuv ipriniav evpw ; {quo me vertam, ui requiem inveniamf). 
Arist. Av. 9. oiroi y^s icr/xey ; {whither [where] are we?). Dem. Chers. 102. 50. 
iTo7 ay aSvo /jLc^a; {quo nos I'ertamus. itt perniciem vitemusf). Phil. 1. 51. 40 
& ir\T]ye\s ael ttJs irXrjyqs ex^Tcu, nhy erepwce irard^ji Tts, ck 6(0*6 elffw al Xf*/P«J- 

(4) A second peculiarity in the construction of prepositions is, when the 
wticle (alone or with a substantive) in connection with a preposition and M 



$ 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OP PREPOSITIONS. 44^ 

Case, has a substantive idea, and when the preposition eV, which expresses tha 
relation where only in the most general manner, should be used, this preposition 
is changed either intc i.ir6 and 4k or into els, attracted, as it were, by the 
verb, expressed or understood, which denotes either the direction whence or 
whither. This construction may be called the attraction of prepositions : 

(a) 'AirS and iK instead of iu, or irapd with the Gen. instead of irapd 
wi^th the pat. Ol 4k rris ayopas iv^pamoi a-n-ecpvyov (instead of ot iv 
rjj o 7 p 9 iv^punroi airjipxryov 4k ttjs ayopas {those IN the agora Jled from it). 
X. II. 4. 6, 4. irdm-fs ot 4k ruu aypwv ^AKapyaves e(pvyoy 4s ra &(mi (in- 
stead of vdvTis oi 4v To7s ay po7s €(pvyov 4k ruv ay pa>v 4s Tct Sctttj). Th. 
1, 18. ol 4k rris SXAt/s 'EAAaSos {rvpavvoi) virh AaKcSaLfioyicov KoreAu- 
d-naav. 3.22. ^tr^ovro ol 4k tuiv irvpyuv <pv\aK€s (the guards VFOiii the 
towers perceived it from the towers). 7, 70. ol airh tS>v KaraaTpajxaTOip 
rols aKoyrlois 4)(fi<!l)vro {those upoy the decks used their darts from the decks). 
Pi. Apol. 32, b. vfJLfTs robs Sexa arpaTrjyovs robs oiiK ape\ofi4vovs rovs 4k 
rrjs yaufiax'ias 4$ov\e<rd€ dL^p6ous Kplvnv {you wished to condemn all at once 
the ten comnuinders ix the naval battle, ivho did not carry off the dead from it). 
rhaed. 109, e. ol 4k rris ^aKdrr-qs Ix^ves ayaKvirroyres {the fish IN 
the sea coming up out of it). Dcm. Phil. 3. 114, 15. rovs 4k ^e^^iov rei- 
Xovs arpariuTas 4 ^4 fia\fv. X. An. 1 . 1 , 5. Ustls 5' &.<piKVo7TO rwv iraph 
fiatriKfus irphs oyro'v (instead of twv Trapa jSafftAe? oyrwv TrapSi ^a(n\4as 
i.(piKyo7To). 

Rem. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of 
place, e. g. 4K(7b(y and KySobtv instead of 4k(7 and eySou. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 15. 
iyyo(7rhy 4Kf7b€y rrSXt/jLoy Sfvpo ^^oyra. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. 'iya ^<T<TOV ra oif/coS« 
Troboij). See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, Rem. 2. 

(b) Eir instead of 4v (far more seldom). Her. 2, \bO. ix^yov ol 4irix<l^pioiy 
us 4s r^y "Xvpriy rifv 4 s Ai/3u7jv 4 kS iSo7 r} hifxyr] ovrrj xmh y^y {empties into 
the Syrtis which is in Lybia). X. H. 1. 7, 29. 'Epa<TiyiSr}s {4Kf\(V€y) eVl rovs 4s 
M ir vX-ffytfy iroKf/jiiovs rijp raxi^<rrr]y irAeiv airayras {against the enemies in 
Mitylen^). 

5. On the repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things are 
to be noted: — 

(a) In a series of coordinate substantives, the preposition is either repeated 
before each single substantive, when each single idea is to be considered sep- -' 
arately and is to be made emphatic, or when the contrast or difference between 3 
the ideas is to be denoted, e. g. PI. Tim. 18, c. Kard re TrShe/xoy kuI Karh. r^v 
tiXXt]v Siatray ; or the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, and 
omitted with the others, when the ideas are meant to express one whole, 
whether they are of the same kind or different, e. g. X. C. 1. 4, 17. we pi rar 
4y^dSe Kol irepl rwv 4v Alyvirrw Kal 4v 'XiKeXia (ppoyriCeiy (instead of 
Kol irepl ray 4v "XiKeXia). 2. I, 6. ayvfivdarus (X^iu rrpSs re ^vxv Kal 
^dKirrj. X. H. 1. 1, 3. aTr6 re ruv vewy Ka\ tt/s yris. PI. Phaed. 99, 

a. ^ wep\ Meyapa fj Bo lurov s. 

(b) When a substantive connected with a preposition, is followed by a rela- 
ative pronoun standing in the same relation with the substantive, the preposition 
in prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently omitted : 
PL Symp. 213, c. ott* 4Kelvov rod xP^^°^i a<p' ov rovrov rjpda^v. X. Hier. 1, 

38* 



450 SYNTAX. [§ 300. 

11. 01 iSiWTOi (cives) ipxovrai els •jrJAets, fey &i/ fiovKwirrw., beofjuirwy ZveKo. X 
S. 4, I. e J/ T(p xP^^Vi V ^H-^" oKouo), (Comp. in Latin Cic. Fin. 4, 20. Zeno negat 
Platouem, si sapiens non sit, eadem esse in catisa, qua tyrannum Dionysiumj. 

(c) The preposition is very often omitted in questions and answers^ e. g. PL 
Soph, 243, d. TTfpl 5e rod yayitxrov re koX apxTfOv trp^rov vvv (TKnrriov. 
Theaet. livo% 877 A^yeis ; X. S. 5, 5. olcr^a olv^ e<fyr}, o<^aX/x»y TtVos fV€Ka 
Se6fxe^a ; ArjXou, e<f>r], Zti tov dpav. 

(d) The preposition is commonly omitted with a word in apposition. X. 
An. 5. 5, 3. 01 "E\\r]V€s cupUoin-o els Kojvcopa, trSXiv 'EWrivlScu Comp. 4. 
8, 22. 5. 3, 2. 6. 2, 1, But when a greater emphasis rests upon the word in ap- 
position, as is particularly the case, when it is used to explain a preceding 
pronoun, then the preposition is regularly repeated. X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. (<piKiaM 
\d$ot5 tLv) trap i Kelywv, olfiai, f(pVy fraph rStv firiSerore xoXffiitcy yeyeyrifie- 
vwv {you might acquire friendship from those who have never been enemies). Pi. 
Prot. 358, b. at iwl roirov irpd^eis avcurcu, ^irl rod aXinrws ^r icol jjSeceSf 
S,p* ov KctKal ; (all the actions pertaining to tJiis, viz., the living without grief, are they 
not praiseworthy ?) ; also in clauses expressing comparison, subjoined by ii, 
(hsTTep, the preposition may be either omitted or repeated. PL Rp. 330, c. 
irep\ rh xp'^ H- <"■''' <"■ <ytrovSd(ov<Tty, us tpyov iavrwy. PL ■rap* 77/xa( tpoir^Sf 
US Tfapi (piKovs. But when the member expressing the comparison pre- 
cedes the other, the preposition stands with the first member only, if the parti- 
cle of comparison is us; but the preposition is repeated, if it is Hsvep. PL 
Rp. 1.4, 14, e. Sei us vepl fir^rphs Kol rpo<pov rrjs x^P"'-^ afivyeir (i. e, wepi 
rrjs x<^P"5)' ■^' Cy. 1. 6, 4. us irphs <pl\ovs 6yras fioi rovs beohs o5t* 
hioLKeiiiai. — PL Phaed. 82, e. (^ ^^xh o.vayK(i^erax) &sirep Si elpynov Si it 
rod aufxaros (TKOTreicbai rh. 6vra. 

6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their suhstauuve, 
or before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. irphs rhr iySpa, vpbs 
rhv <ro(phv &yBpa. But this position is often changed in the following instances : — 

(a) When a particle follows the substantive, as 7*, fiey^ ydp^ /icr ydp^ 8«, oh, 
also fjifv ovy, a5, ko/, etiam, rolyvy^ Itrus, also oT/xoi used as an adverb ; these 
small words often come between the preposition and the substantive, e. g. t'» 
fx^y elp^yp, iy fiey yap elpr^inj. 

(b) The preposition Tp6s in oaths tcai exclamations is separated from its 
substantive. Soph, O. C. 1333. 7rp6s vvv ae Kpi\vvv^ Tobr beiv Sfioyvlat^ 
cuTu TTibeffbou. So in Latin, per te deos ore. ' 

(c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub- 
ject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose, this takes place only with irepl when con 
nccted with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. PL Rp. 469, b. vpwror fut 
avS pairoSia-fiov irepi] it is alsO separated by other words. Her. 6, 101 
rovTov crept efxf\€ -Kept. PL ApoL 19, c. uy iyu ovSikv o6re /ieya oOrt 9um 
ffhv vept iiraiu. See § 31, IV. 



301. 302.] PRONOUNS. 



45J 



CHAPTER IV. 

§301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- 
tribute, and Object. 

The subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expressed 
by pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not 
designed to represent objects or qualities themselves, but 
; when it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either 
to the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to 
another person or thing. 

2. All the rules which have been given on the substan- 
tive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective 
pronouns ; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the 
use of the pronouns. 

^ 302. I. Personal Pronouns. 

The substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the 
JS'om.): cyu), crv, rfiiihy etc., and also the adjective (posses- 
sive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. €fto9 iranqp, are used in 
Greek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic ; 
hence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per- 
spicuity, e. g. Koi crv TttiTa cTrpo^a?. Kat 6 cos Trarrjp ciTre-^avcv. 
*Ey<i> fi€v arriL^L, <ru 8< /xcVc. But where this is not the case 
they are omitted, and the substantive pronouns are expressed 
by the endings of the verb, and the adjective (possessive) pro- 
nouns, by the article prefixed to the substantive, e. g. Vpa(j>w, 
ypd(f)€i^. 'H fi-qrrjp cTttc /xol {my mother). Ot yoms arepyovai 
ra TtKva (their children). 

Remark 1. The distinction between the accented and the enclitic forms of 
im' personal pronouns, e. g. ifioZ and ^ov, etc. (^ 87), lies in the greater or less 
emphasis with which thev are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented 
forms are alwavs emplovVd, for example, in antitheses, e. g. ifiov fxfv /coreye- 
Acurt, ffe if iynjytafy. — the personal jjronouns are often used mstead of the 
reflexive (No. 2). On the use of the Gen. of the substantive instead of the 
adjective (possessive) pronouns, see Rem. 4. On an appositive in the Gen. 
joined with a possessive pronoun, e. g. T^fifrepos avrwu war-np, see § 266, 2. 

Rem. 2. The ad jective personal pronouns more commonly have a subjective or 
active sense, e.g.^/*^ fiovki) (my coutisel, i.e. one which I originate, not one whicH 



452 SYNTAX. [J 302. 

relates to me) but sometimes they take the place of the ohjective Gen. and then 
have an objective or passive sense. Od. \, 201. crhs ttS^os, a desire for the* 
(like Ter. Heaut. II. 3, 66. desiderio xuo instead of tui). X. Cv. 3. 1, 28. * 
tvyoia Koi (pt\i(x rp ffiij {benevolentia et amore mei, from good will and love to me) 

2. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something ab-eady \ 
named, to the Subject or Object, since the person or tiling to 
which the reflexive refers, stands in contrast with itself as an 
object or attribute : — 

(a) In relation to the subject : 'O (To<f)hs lauroC Kparru. 2i/ <rcoi;T^ o^/t- 
Keis. 'O TTois eavrhy iiraiue7. Oi yoyds ayatrwat robs iavruy vcuSas. 
Fyu^i ff i avT 6 V. Ovros & ay^p triyra 5i' kavrov fiffid^Kfy. 'O (TTpamiyhs 
inrh rwy k avr ov aTpaTiuyruy i.irfbayfy. 

(b) In relation to an object of the sentence : X. Cy. 1. 1, 4. Kvpos Si^rrytcc 
Tuv &\\u}y fiacT i\e uy, rwy iipx^'i '>' kavr oiy icrriaafi^ytty. Ar. Nub. 384. 

anh (Tavrov iyu a% SiSd^w ( ix^r tr ti>snm). 

(3) Tlie reflexive pronouns miiy also be used in Greek, as in 
Latin, in the constniction of the Accusative \\'ith the Infinitive 
and of the Participle ; also in such subordinate clauses as stand 
in a close relation to the principal clause, particularly in clauses 
expressing design, and in dependent interrogative clauses, as 
well as in all other subordinate clauses which do not contain 
the sentiment of the speaker, but the sentiment of the subject 
of the principal sentence. Also in this case the reflexivo 
refers cither to the subject or to an object. When the subject 
of the principal clause and the subject of the subordinate 
clause (or of the Inf), are dificrent, the reflexive may refer 
either to the former or to the latter, its particular relerence 
being determined only from the context. In the cases men- 
tioned under this rule, the English often uses the perso/ml 
pronouns hitn, Iter, it, etc. instead of the reflexive. 

'O r vpayy OS yofii^fi rovs iroXlras irrriprrfiy iavr^. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Tir 
i^wy rovrtay ^p|ev {Kvpos) ofi&* kavr^ inoyXwrrw Srrmf, o(ht &AA4a.m5. 
C. 1. 2, 8. iirlarfvf {"XtuKpdrrjs) riev {vi^rrwr iavr^ robs avoi*^afUpmH, 
iirtp avrhs iSoKlfia^fy, fls rhy irdyra fiioy I a vry re ir«d ^AA^^XoiT flXovs ief^t^s 
l^aetr^cu. 52. 6 Kor-ijyopos (<(nj rhy ^mk pdrrfy cuwre£dt>rra tow rMvt, &s adrrhs 
cfq aoipdnaros re iral &XA01;; iKavwraTos iroi^<rau ao^vs, oSra* Surrti^'rai rc^ 
«ouTy (Tuv^KTas, &sre /xnSofJLOv Tap' avrols rovs iWovs ttpsu rp^s iavrir [tn 
cotMpiirison irith him). Th. 2, 92. rck yavdyia, 5<Ta wpi>s rp kauriy {y§) ^, iftt- 
\ovro (= Tck yavdyia ra wpits rp kavru y 717 Syra). Her. 8, 24. Sow 9oi rrfmni 
rod iavrov fja-ay vticpol lir^aifc. Comp. the examples in Rem. 3. 



§ 302,] PRONOUNS. 4r53 

4. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun avro?, 
-y, -6: viz., avTOV, -rjsi avT<a, -y, avTOV, 17V, -o, avrwv, OX even 
those of a demonstrative pronoun, are universally employed, 
when an object does not stand in contrast with itself, but 
with another object, e. g. o Trarrjp avTw (to him, the son) eSwKe 
TO ^LJSkLov, ^rcpyw avrov (Jiini). 'A7rej(o/xat avrov {from him). 
The pronoun avrov, etc. is merely the personal pronoun of the 
third person, but is much weaker than the demonstrative 
dvTo<: ; wherefore, it does not, like ovTo<ij usually stand first in a 
sentence. 

Rem. 3. The personal pronoun S, of, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense 
in the Attic writers (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also the meaning 
of the personal pronoun). But it is regularly employed, only when the reflex- 
ive relation has respect, not to the nearest subject, but to the remoter one. It 
is in general much more freely used than the compound reflexive, since it is 
also employed where the connection with the principal clause is much looser, e. g. 
*0 ripauvos vojxiCei robs iroXlras inrr)p€T€7v 1 (-but not 6 rvpavvos x^-P'^C^'^"-^ O')* 
X. An. 7. 5, 9. 'Hpa/cAe/Sris fhayayuv rovs &,Wovs e-rpaTTjyovs irphs ^k^v^v \4yeip 
iKf\€V€i/ avrovs, Hti ovShu h,v ^rrov <r<pe7s aydyoiev riju (TTpaTidv, ^ aevocpcov 
(SE ducturos esse). Th. 5, 73. ol 'A^ijyaToi w? i^^KXiv^v {6 "kyis) a-nh <r(pwp 
rh arpdrev/ia, ko^' 'f](Tvx(au icrwbTjcrav. 6, 32. ^vyeirevxovTO koI 6 &.\\os, 8/xrA.oy, 
Tuv T6 7roA.(TcDj/ Kol (Y Tis &Wos ((ji/ovs Traprjy ffcpiai. Even after yap, e. g. X. H. 
1. 7, 5. ot arparriyol $paxfo. eKacTOS aireXoyrja'aTO • ov yap npovTe^ri (T^'kt i x6yos 
Kara rhv vS/jlov. But Thucydides and some later writers use it, also, in relation 
to the nearest subject, e. g. Th, 7, 5. d ruXiinros ireixiC^ rols Xi^ois xp^l^^^'^^t 
ots ot 'A^riva7oi irpoirapefidKoyTo ffipiaiv. The forms ol, <r<pi<Ti and a<pas 
have sometimes also the meaning of personal pronouns : oX, him, her (e. g. X. 
Cy. 3. 2, 26) ; (rtpitri, to them (e. g. X. H. 6..5,35) ; <r0as, them, e.g. Th..'>,49), 
when the object to which they refer, is more important in respect to the sense, 
than the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be remarked in relation to the 
use of this pronoun, that in place of it with a reflexive sense, the compound 
reflexive kavTou, -rts, etc. is commonly employed; and in place of it with 
the sense of ihe Pers. pronoun third person, the corresponding forms of awTjJs 
are used by the Attic writers. The form ov [ov) is used in prose only in PI. 
Symp. 174, d. Rp. 617, b. 617, e,; e (e) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 175, a. c. 233, 
b. ; ol occurs far oftener (seldom accented of), ando-^eTy, <T(pa>y, crcpio'iy 
a^as, somewhat often. 

5. In the instances mentioned under No. 3, the con-espond- 
ing forms of avros are very freqitently used instead of the 
reflexive pronoun ; this is always the case where a member of a 
sentence or a suborinate clause is not the expression or senti- 
ment of the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the senti- 
nent of the speaker (writer). 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. (or iroXefiioi) ev^s aip-qaovai t))V \eiav, iireiUv tZcacri rivas eV 
ahrovs i\a6vovras {contra Se). C. 4. 7, 1. TV kavrov yudfiw airecpaiu^ro :S,coK' 
odr-qs irphs robs b^JLiKovuTas out<?. Apol. 33. (Sw/cpaTTjs) eyi/co rov en (w rh 
re^ydvai avrf Kpiirrov iivax. 



V%. 



454 SYNTAX. f$ 302. 

6. In compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun avros eithef 
retains its exclusive force, or loses it, i. e. it is sometimes em- 
phatic, and sometimes not. 

(a) Isocr. Panath. 16, 242. BiKaiSv itrri (()i\ovs fiep 'iroi€7<r^ai tovs Sfxoicos av- 
ro7- re (or (T(^i(Ti re avrols) Kal to7s &W015 xP^M^^'ous, <pofiei(r^ai Se koI 
SeSjeVai rovs irphs cripas fiev avTohs (or eavrovs) olKeiSrara SiaKeifieuov:, 
irphs Se TOVS &\\ovs aWorplcos {se ipsis and se ipsos). Th. 4, 102. iTroiKo->s 
<T<pS)V re avTuv Kal tuv &\\ot)v Thu $ov\6fjt,evou irefvpavres. 1, 60. ire/xTrovaiv 
kavTwv T€ iSieXovrhs koX rav 5tA.\«i/ IleAoiroyprjaiav /xiff^^ veiffavres. 8, 8. e^' 
eavT&u SieuoovvTo &\\cp arSka irXeiv {soli perse). The l^om. avr6s is some- 
times added to strengthen this exclusive or emphatic force (comp. in Lat. Cato 
SE IPSE interemit), e. g. PI. Phaed. 94, e. otre yhp tltf 'Op.'fipo) 6fio\oyo7pi.ev, oVre 
aiiTol 71 1x2 V avTols. — (b) Oi ffTpariwrai irapelxov eavrovs (or a (pa 5 
aifToh 5) avdpeioToijovs {se). Th. 7 , 82. irapeBoaav 01 irdvTes <r<l>as avrois (or 
eavTois) {se). 

Eem. 4. The reflexive possessives are either used alone, e. g. Dem. c. Nicostr. 
4, 1250. T&y xpTj/UctTCtfj/ (Tol tS>v ifxav kIxpvH-'^' C- Nausim. 11, 993. SiKaiSrepoy 
SiiTTOv rh 7] fx ire pa r](xas icriu exet*', ^ tovtovs. c. Boeot. 2, 1010. vfieTs airav- 
res TOVS v/iCT 4 povs -TraTSas ayairaTe. Ot iroKiTui to, cr(p4r€ pa (xd^eiv iireipwu- 
To; or with the addition of the Gen. of avT6s according to § 266, 2; or in- 
stead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexive is 
used ; indeed in Prose, this is uniformly the case with the Sing, {mine, thine, his, 
thus 6 i/xavT ov, ffeavrov, eavrov iraTt'ip, and not 6 ifihs avTov, 6 ahs avrov 
irarrip, which last mode of expression is found only in poetry), and with the 
third Pers. PI., it is more frequent than the possessive : but the possessives are 
commonly used when the pronoun is plural {our, your), except in the third 
Person. Hence as follows : — 

S.Thv i/xavTov {aeavTOVy eavrov) TTttTepa not rhv ifxhv {crhv) avrov v. 

r^v i/xavrov {ffeavrov, eavrov) firjrepa not r^v efx^v {(TT]v) avrov (x. 

rois ifxavrov {(Teavrovj eavrov) \6yois not ro7s efxoTs {(ToTs) avrov A. 

P. rhu rjfxerepov avrwv irareoa very rare rhv efiui/ avrcov v. 

t)]v v/xerepav avrau firfrepa very rare r^v vfx&u avroiu fi. 

Toi Tjfxerepa avrwv a/xapr'fiixaTa very rare to; 7)ix&v avruv a. 

rhv <T(perepov avrSf/ irarepa more frequent rhv eavrwy narepa, but never 

rhv tr<puv avrwv v. 

Here also the Pronoun avr6s either retains its exclusive or emphatic force, or 
loses it: (a) 'O ttois v^piC^i rhy eavrov irarepa (strUM IPSITJS patrem). 'tfxels 
v$pi(ere rovs vfxerepovs avrwv irarepas-fVESTROS IPSORUM patres). Oi 
7ra7Ses vBpi^ovffi rovs e avrwv irarepas (suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. iroWovs 
he Kal vm yvvaiKwv rwv e avrwv rvpdvvovs Siecp^apfxevovs {evp-{}creis) {a SUIS IP- 
SORUM conjugibus). X. An. 6. 1, 29. {vofxi^w) '6sris ev iroKe/xw &v araa-id^ei nphs 
&pX0VTa, rovroV trphs r^v eavrov ffwrripiav (rracnd^^eiv {contra SUAM IPSltrs 
salutem). In order to strengthen the exclusive or emphatic force, the Pronoun 
avrSs is frequently added : avrhs rhv ifxavrov, etc. ; avT6s is also sometimes 
placed between the article and the reflexive of the third Pers., e. g. Aeschin. 
Ctes. 85, 87. KaTa\e\vKe r)]v avrhs avrov hvvaareiav. — (b) Th. 2, 101. 
'2,TparoviKT]v, r^v eavrov dSe\(p-fiv, Sidwcri 2eU(^ (sUAM sororem). Aeschin. 
fals. leg. 30, 40. irphs rrjv fiovX^v rhv adeX<phv rhv e fxavr ov Kal rhv a8eX<piSovr 
Koi rhv larphv e-jrefxipa. Th. 6, 21. iroXv airh rrjs 7} (xerep as avrwv /xeXXc/xep 
w\e7v (a nostra patria). Lysias. riyovvrai ovKeri ro7s ff^trepois avrwv afiop' 



♦ 302.] 



PRONOUNS. 



456 



•rit^i rhv vovv ftias irapi^uv. Her. 5, 87. [xiyovtrty) ^ipcrau iKdffrvy alri^f 
(tuv yvvaiKuv), okt) en] 6 euvTrjs avrip {ubi suus vir esset). X. H. 4. 4 17. oi 
AaK€5aifi6vioi Tuv kavrSiv crvfiiiaxuiv Kari<pp6vovv. ' ' 

Eem. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of Pers Pro- 
nouns refers to the nearest subject, e. g. PI. Lach. 179, c. atridifie^a robs irare- 
pas 7]/xwv, '6riT)fxas fiev elwv rpv<}>av (instead of robs vn^ripovs irartpas or 
Tobs r,[XiTipovs abTuuTT.). Antiph. 1, 114. iyoi S' ifias {m\p rovnarpSsiiov 
Tf^yeuTos aiTOVfuti (instead of vwep tov ifiavrov Trarpos). Th. 4,8. ^Tri tos 
eV Tji K€pKvp(f. vavs (T^uy eTre^ut/^ov (instead of 4ir\ ras iv t. K <r<peT4pai 
auTwy y. or ras eavrwy v,). 

Rem. 6. The pronoun alnhs with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after 
both the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether its 
exclusive power be retained or lost, c. g. {jfiuy avruy, ipTw avTo7s, aipas avrois, S 
v/xdrepos avrwy irariip, etc. In the Attic writers the exceptions to this position 
are extremely few, e. g. X. Cy.^ 6. 2, 25. vdy tA imr-fideia (^/xas) Sc? ets tV 
SShv avaKevd(fa^ai avroTs re r}fi7y, koI 6ir6(rois T^Tpdirocn xp^lJ-f^a. But in 
other writers, also, such exceptions are quite rare, e. g. Her. 5, 91. o-vyYivdoffKo- 
fiey avTo7<Ti fifi.'iv oh iToiT]aa<Ti op^ws. This position is never found with the 
third Pers. PI., consequently never avrobs a (pas instead of a^as ahrovs. 
But when the Pers. pronouns are used without their reflexive force, then a\n6s 
in its exclusive or emphatic sense, may either precede or follow the personal pro- 
'• nm: (a) outoO ip.ov {fJ.ov), avrep i/xol (fioi), avrhy ifie (fie), ai/robs- Tj/aas, etc., 
■ PL Phaed. 91, a. ouTcp ifxol '6ti fidXiara S6^€i ovtods exeiy. Symp. 220, 
ly^ieaaae Kol Tck '6ir\a koI avrhy i fi4. X. C. 2. 9, 2. ijdews y &y (sc. ^p4- 
i'-i rhy &y5pa), e<pr], ei fxi} (l)o^oiiJi.r]y, '6irws jtiTj «r' avroy fie rpajroiTo.— (b) 
;'■ avTOVy ifiol avrcf, ce axn6v, Tj/xwy avruy, etc., e. g. Dem. 01. 3, 36. iri^ev 



7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the 
reciprocal pronoun, in all the persons. '" •■ - - V\x 

Dem. C. Olympiod. 116a r6^' 7)1x7 v avroTs 5taA.e|J/U6,»o. PI. Rp. 621, e. 
StKaLO(Tvyrjv ficra (ppoyriaeus Trdyrl rp6ir(a iirirrjSeva'Ofj.ey, 'lya Kol rjixly avroTs 
(pi\oi difxey, Kal ro7s ^€o7s. Lys. 114. hreiShv ifi7y iyu) fvqyiaoi, vphs vfias au- 
robs rpexpea-^e K&ireira ko^' '4ya eKUffroy vp.7v ahro7s airex^o'eo'^e. X. C. 
3. 5, 16. (p^oyovffiy €avro75 fxaWoy, ^ to7s &Wois ay^pdirois. 

Rem. 7. Both the reciprocal and refleocive pronoun is used when the action 
refers to an object that has been named. Both consequently express a reflexive 
idea, and are related like the species and genus ; since now the genus includes 
the species, so the reflexive may take the place of the reciprocal, in cases 
where it is readily perceived that several persons so perform anything together 
that the action appears as reciprocal. But when the reciprocal is antithetic to 
kavrhv eKaffros, but the reflexive used for the reciprocal, to &\\ovs, it is 
clear that the reciprocal must then necessarily stand, where the antithesis 
eaurhy eKaaros is either expressed or implied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. j^aAAoj/ 
Xa'tpoviriy 4irl to7s aW^Xuy KaKo75, ^ ro75 avruy ISiois ayaSro7s (i- e. ^ etrl 
ro7s aiiTov cKacrros aya^o7s), they rather rejoice in each otker''s evils, than in their 
own good, i. e. than each one in his own. PI. Phaedr. 263, a. aix(pis^v'rovfi(y a\- 
\7'i\ois re Koi 7iH-7y avro7s. On the contrary, it is natural that the reflex- 
ive should be regularly used, where other persons (aWovs), either expressly or 
by implication, are contrasted with the reflexive, e. g. Isocr. Aegin. 387. xtfi 



1 



456 SYNTAX. [$ 303. 

irXfovos Tj/Jtas abrovs riyoifie^a,^ rohs adeKtpoisiwethinkmoreofoursdoes 
than of [others] our brothers), de Pac. oi fxev ( QerraXol ) a(pi<r ip avrols TroXefiov- 
ffiv {inter se, non contra exteros hostes). With the Nom. avroi added, e. g. X. H. 
i. 5, 9. (Set) ffKOTTeiy Sttus twv 'EW-fjfcav firjdeves Icx^pol Siaiv, oAAa iravres aahi- 
vilsi avrol 4y kavTols <TTa<rid^oyTes. So 6fj.o\oye7(T^cUj afJupis^TiTiiabau, 5<- 
ivex^V^o-h ^vavriov ilvai and irpdrTeiv atplcriy aitroTs or eavToZy. Bat 
when neither the one nor the other antithesis exists, then the reflexive and the 
reciprocal are used without distinction, often in the same sentence, merely for 
the sake of variety, e. g. X. C. 2. 6, 20. ((>^oi/ovyres e avrov s fuaovaiv a\A^- 
\ovs. 7, 12. avrl ixpopw/jLcyup eavTas -rjSius dW'^Aas kupuv. 

8. The reflexive pronoun of the third Pers. often takes the 
place of the reflexive of the first and second Person. Tlie re- 
flexive then denotes not a definite person, but only confines the 
•reflexive force to the subject ; hence it has often merely the 
meaning of iSio? ; the particular person, to whom it refers, must 
be clearly denoted by the construction of the sentence. 

X. C. 1.4, 9. ovhi yap ttjv eavr ov [= aeavrov] <tv ye i^ux^'' ^P9^ (^'"* otm sotil ; 
(reauTov is«, false reading). 2. 1, 31. rov 5e irayruy r)Si<rrov oKOvfffJueros iiralvou 
kavr^s [= aavTris] , aHjKoos cT {self praise). Andoc. do myst. cdnhs^ fi 
aiTwWvpu (instead of i^iavT6v). PI. Prot. 312, a. ah 8« ovk iv cuVxwo 
"EKXrivas avi hu (To<pi(Tr)]V irapix^v ; Isocr. Paneg. ii€re\((rafi(v atrraxru 
a (pus aiiTovs. X. H. 1. 7, 19. ^vprjaere a<pas ai/rovs 7}fiapTr{K6ri 
yiara is ^€o!'S. 

Eem. 8. In the Epic language, this usage occurs also with <r<pl<r 
{suits). II. Kj 39S. <tu|iv fiov\€voiT€ fA€rk e<pi<riv (instead of ;i€»r vfuy). 
Od. (, 28. otrroi %y t.^'v e iis yair}s Bvvafiat y\vKep<^fpoy &Wo iifa^cu. 



§ 303. n. The remaining Pronouns. 

1. OvTO?, OVTOJ?, TOlbVTOS, TOOrOVTOS, aud oSc, oiSc, TOl- 

098c, TotrdsSe, are commonly used with tliis distinction, that 
the first four refer to what immediately precedes, the others, to 
what immediately follows. 

Her. 6, 53. toCto (the foregoing) /lev AoKeicundvioi \4yown — t«(8€ (the 
following) Se — fyw ypd<pca. Th. 1, 53. ot /nev 5^ {Koplv^ioi) roiavra iiirw 
— oi Se 'Ai^vatot t » o S € aireKplyayro. 

Remark 1. Still, not seldom ovtos, toiovtos, roirovros, ovto»s 
refer to what follows ; far more seldom 85 6, to 16 she, To<rdy5«, 55c refer 
to what goes before. X. C. 1. 2, 61. Alxas ovoficurrhs frl tovtii^ ytyovt {b§ 
what follows). Th. 2, 34. 55e fifw ^dirTovai (in refei-ence to what prece" V 
But often SSt, wSc, etc., are so used that they represent an object as prest 
it were before our eyes, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 3. 35. iytc Se vyuv fifv irofNuyiwr, woiovs 
Tiviis xph ^^''cit 4v Ty T i y 5 €, alffxvvoiiJLrjv iv ( = in praesexti rertim statu). 
Regularly, however, out as precedes the relative clause, e. g. air 6 s Arrar, 



♦ 303.] PRONOUNS. 45'; 

hv eldes &vSpa. — When ovtos and iKe7vos are used in opposition to each other ' 
the latter refers to what is more remote, the former, to what is nearer, though 1 
the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Latin hie and ille. 

# 

2. Tlie adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry, 
especially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, instead of the 
adverbs here, there, according to § 264, 3. 

Od. a, 76. a^X Ayeb', ^^€?s oTSe rrepicppaCwfie^a iravres [let us HERE deliher- 
iie). 185. irqvs 5e ^oi ^ 5' fCTTj/cev tV aypov v6(T<pi ttSXtJos {stood there in the field). 
Od. (T, 239. ws yvi/'^lpos ^/cetvos i-n-' avXcirjori^vpTiffw riarai {there). Th. I, 53. rj/jLas 
rou rSe irpdrrovs Xa^omes x/'T)(ra(r,^e ws iroKefiiois {nos, qui HIC sumus). PI, Rp. 
327, b. i]p6fi-ny, tirov fXi}. Ovtos, t<pt], vvia^ev irposepx^Tai (here he comes be- 
hind thee). Hence in the Attic poets dv^jp '65 e instead of iy<i, e. g. S. 0. T. 
1464, and oZtos in prose instead of av, e. g. PI. Gorg. 489, b. ovrocrl av^p 
ov Travffertu tpKvaptuu ; instead of <tv ov iravcrr) j 

Rem. 2. In the Epic language, where two sentences, whose subject is not 
doubtful, follow each other, the subject is often repeated in the second by 6' ye 
with a certain emphasis, in order to bring out prominently the identity of the 
subject for both sentences, o. g. 11. /3, 664. ad^a 5e vr\as e7r7j|e, ttoXvv S' 076 
(idemque) Xahv ay flpas /Stj <p(vyu}v (irl Tr6irTov. II. 0, 586. ''AuriXoxos S' ov fiuve, 
^o6s trtp iwv iroXtntarrjs, oAA' y 6.p (rptae. So also in the Epic language and 

f)ariicularly in llcr., far rarer in the Attic writers, when a series of actions fol- 
ow each other, 6 St is u-?cd with reference to the same subject, where we may 
translate 6 5f by, on the contrary, then, etc. Her. 6, 3. tV M^»' yevofiiwrju avrolai 
euTlrjv ov ^dxa (^((pcuvf, & 5* ixtyt a<pi {on the contrary). X. An. 4. 2, 6. ol 8e 
. . . ivravba t^itpov, ws KorfxcvTej t^ iLKpow oi S" Karelxov {iidemque). This 
usage very often occurs in Horn, and Her. in disjunctive clauses:^ — ^ '6ye. 
Od. 3.327. ¥1 rivas in TlvXov 6.^(1 d^uvropas . . . , ^ liye koI ^TrdpTTj^ev. Her. 
2, 173. XcL^oi iu' ^ TOi fiaytis, f; Sye aTr6rrX7]KT0S yfySixei/os. 

3. The use of the pronoun avro's is as follows : — 

(1) A^To? properly means av t6<s, again he, and then self, ipse, 
e. g. o vIo5 auros OF auros 6 vlo'9, the son himself. It can also 
refer to the person impHed in the predicate, e. g. avros a7re(3r). 
So airro tovto or tovt avro, hoc ijjsuni, this itself {not another) 
Wlien used with cKao-ro?, avro's always precedes. Her. 7, 
19. SikuiV auTOS CKao-TO^ to. vpoKCLjxeva Stopa Xapelv. 

(2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of 
the personal pronouns (^ 302, 4). 

(3) In connection \\'ith the article (6 avros), it means the 
same, idem ($ 246, 3). On the position of the article with 
auTo'9 in connection with a substantive, see § 246, 3. 

Rem. 3. Horn, and Her. often use a ^ t J s in the place of the reflexive pro- 
nouns of the three persons. Od. 5, 247. &XXv S" alrhv (mstead ot eaurd^J 

39 



458 SYNTAX. [<i 303. 

(pari KaTaKpvTTTcoi/ ^'i(rK€U. ^, 27. trol Se ydfios ax^^^v iarriv, %ia xph KoXh nh> 
avT^u (instead of craurriv) euvvcrSrai. Her. 7. 10, 1. rh Si uvrolei iviari 
5stv6y, i/xe aoi diKatSu iari (ppd(eiu {quid autem in XOBIS timendum insit). 

Rem. 4. From the exclusive or emphatic force of this pronoun, the following 
specific significations arise : (a) self in coritrast with another, hence alone, solus 
{ipse, non alius) : jxSpqs, on the contrary, in contrast with several. X. An. 4. 7, 11. 
&Wop ovSeva {TrapaKaXecras) X<^pf* avr 6 s {ffoes alone)\ (b) even and self. like ipse, e. g. 
AuT^s '2,o}Kp6.Tris iSaKpvaeu {even Socrates, Socrates himself ) ; so kuI auT<Jy, 
o u S' avTos, vel ipse, ne ipse qxiidem ; (c) self in contrast with foreign aid, of himself, 
etc., sponte, like ipse ; (d) in Homer especially, avr 6 s often forms a contrast with 
another object, expressed or understood, tbis object being different from that de- 
noted by avT6s, as the soul in distinction from the body, or the body in distinction 
from the soul, e. g. 11. a, 4. aurov s Se kkupia rcCxe Kvve<T<nv (made them \Uieir 
bodies, not their souh\ a prey), or a man in distinction from his affairs, or asso- 
ciates, etc. Hence ahros is sometimes used of a lord, ma.tter, e. g. ai/rhs f<pri; 
so also avr 6, id ipsum, often in connection with a following adjective-clause; 
(e) it is used with a proper name and an ordinal from rplros upwards, to de- 
note the number of official associates with the person named, wlio is generally 
the principal one, e.g. Th. 1, 46. Kopiu^iwi/ aTpar-nyhs ^y a^yoKKeiSris -rffiTros 
ovTos {Xeiioclides was the commander of the Corinthians widi four associates). 

4. Tlie indefinite pronoun tU when joined with adjectives^ 
indefijiite numerals, and adverbs, is used like the Latin qiddam^ 
to bring out distinctly the idea expressed by these words, some- 
times making them more, sometimes less emphatic, ^cording 
to the meaning of the word or the connection of the discourse; 
but with pronouns and cardinal numbers, it corresponds to the 
Latin fere {almost, about, sojiiewhat). 

Meyas tis avfjp {some great 7nan),fiiKp6s tjs, was tjs, eKacxTos rts, ovods ris, oAiyoi 
rives, iro76s ris, Tr6(Tos ris, Ppaxv ri, iyyvs ti, axeSSy rt, Trdw ri^vayrdiraiTi Ti, xo\6 
Tt, ovSey ri, -ndXai tj, Siaxf)ep6yrus ri. Afiyriyriva Aryeis Svyofiw r^s aperTjs 
elvai {incredibilein quandam vim, a kind of incredible power). X. C. 1. 1, 1. ^ 
ypa(p^ Kar avrov {^uKparovs) roidSe ris ^y {haec fere, was nearlt/. was for 
substance this). 3. 6, 5. \e^oy, ir6a'ai rives elai (sc. ai irpdsoSoi rfj ir6\ei)f tell 
me about how much the revenues are. So ovrw t i, or oStm, wSe rets {sic, fere, 
nearly thus) ; rpels rives {about three, some three or so). 

Kem. 5. The regular position of the pronoun t I y, as an enclitic, is after the 
word to which it belongs, e. g. avvp ns, Ka\6s ris ayrip. But sometimes, in con- 
nected discourse, it precedes, e. g. ean rolwv r i s exn^brjs \6yQs. On the rela- 
tive and interrogative pronouns, see under adjective and interrogative sentences. 

Rem. 6. The indefinite pronoun oh«', a«i/ ohc, is usu 

(a) by r\s, e. g. Ovk &v tis evpoi &vSpa (TO<pwrepov [ 

(b) by the second Pcrs. Sing. Opt. \\\t\\ dv, and the Ind. of a historiciii tense 
with dv, when it is intended to represent the subject as indefinite, e. g. tpaitis 
&v {dicas, one may, can say); vofil(ois &y {credas. one mipht supfwsf). flSfs 
&v {rideres, one might have seen); rjy-fjcrtD dv { patares. etc.). The Ei" '"-" 
however, frequently translates the second Pers. by you, e. g. you may, can ,- 



M 304 305.] PRONOUNS. 4;5,} 

$304. Prospective and Retrospective Use of the 

Pronoun. 

1. The personal pronoun o5, of, %,filv, and the demonstrative 6, ^, r6, are fre- 
quently used in Homer to direct the attention to a following substantive and 
as it were to prepare for it. II. v, 321. airiKa r^ ^h, eVe.ra kut' 6cp^aKf,&j, 
X«»' ax\vy, Uv^^iSr, 'Ax^KvL II. cp, 249. ha niv iraiaeie TrSuoio, S7op . 
*A X 1 ^ A 7) o. 

2. In the same way, the Neut. of a demonstrative is used to prepare for a 
following substantive, or a following Inf or entire sentence. PI. Apol. 37, a. 
rovTov Tifi^nai, iy Trpvrcu/d^ ff iTi](T ews [lam deemed worthy of this, yiz., a 
maintenance in the Pnjtaneum). X. Cy. 8. 7, 25. W tovtou fiaKapiiirepov, rov 
yV /J-tx^V^a^; (u^hat can be more blessed than this, to mix with the earth ?) ; PI, 
Gorg. 515, e. oAAo rSif /jmi etVe M rointf, ei Xiyovrai 'Kb-qvaloi hih 
UepiK\4a ficXrlovs yeyoyfuai. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. olSey . . . toCto 
KoXus iKiivoSy 3t» ravra fi4v iffriv airavra rh. xti'pia Si^Ao tov tto- 
Xffiov Kflfieva iv /xfcrtp. Comp. § 266, Ecm. 3. 

3. On the contrary', a demonstrative pronoun, particularly avrSs, is fre- 
quently put in the same sentence after a preceding substantive or pronoun, 
partly for the sake of perspicuity, e. g. when between the Case and the verb 
which gox-tms it, there is an unusually long intermediate clause, and partly for 
the sake of rhetorical em]>ha.<tin. Such a pronoun again resumes the preceding 
substantive or pronoun, and either recalls it to the memory, or fixes the atten- 
tion particularly upon it. Her. 3, 63. 6 Z4 not Mdyos, rhv (= hu) Kafifiva-qs 
dirirpoirov ruy oIkiwv oirt'Stlf, ovros ravra iverdXaro {Magos, whom Cambyses 
appointed steward of his domestic affairs, he gave me these commands). Th. 6, 69, 
a I oIkIui rod irpoaxrrfiov iiraX^fis XafiPdvovaai, avrai iiirrjpxoy epvfia. So 
also witli the personal pronouns, in which case the pronoun which resumes a 
preceding one, is regularly an enclitic form. Eur. Phoen. 507. ifMol fxiv, el Koi fxi] 
jfo^' 'LW-fjuuv x^^^''^ rf^pafi^ifb' [educati sumus), oAA' odu ^vyerd fi o i Bokus \4yfiv. 



CHAPTER V. 

The Infinitive and the Participle as an Object 
• and Attribute. 

$ 305. A. The Infinitive. 

The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract 
substantive idea, but differs from the substantive in the fol- 
lowing respects : 

(1) The Inf without the article can be used only as a Nom. 



460 SYNTAX. f^ 306 

(either as a subject, or in connection with lariiv) as 2i predicate), 
and as an object in the Accusative ; 

Subject : "EireTot t^ a/)eT^ O'^C^ a^a i els rhv irXelca xpovov yuaXKov, ^ rp Koxlq 
{to be preserved for a longer time results rather from bravery than cowardice), X. R. 
L. 9, 1. Predicate: T^ Siktjj' ^iZ6vai irdrepov ir({<rx*"' Tt iariv, ^ iroiCiw 
PI. Gorg. 464, d. Object: BouXo/«w ypdcpeiv. See § 306. 

(2) Yet it so far retains the nature of the verb, as 

(a) It denotes, by different forms, the different circumstances 
of the action : duration, completion, futurity, and has active, 
middle, and passive forms. 

Tpai(p€iu, scribere, yfypcupfvcu, scripsisse, ypd>pai, scripsisse or scribere (^ 257), 
ypd\peiy, scripturum esse ; ^ovXdicrdai, to deliberate or be advised, fif$ovKevebcu, 
to have deliberated or have been advised, fiovKftxroff^ai, to have deliberated or to de- 
liberate, $ov\evbrji/ai, to have been advised or to be advised, etc 

(b) It retains the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the 
same Case as its verb, e. g. Tpa.(f>€Lv (.Triarok-qv, liri^pi^lv t^s 
a/3€T^9, ixd)(£cr&aL rots TroXc/xtoi?; 

(c) It has an adverb for its attributive expletive, and not, as 
in the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. KoAtu? 
aTToSaveiv (on the contrary, koXos -^avaro?). 

The Inf will first be considered without the article, and then 
with it. 



§ 306. 1. The Infinitive, as an Object, without the 

Article. 

1. The Inf is used, as the complementary ^ object in the 
Ace, to express something-a/wi^fZ a/ or effected: — 

(a) With verbs oi willing and the contrary (verba voluniatis)^ 
e. g. PoyXofiai, i&e\o), jxiXXio, iTrcSvpui), d^iu>, Sixatul, ^i/rw, TTpoSvfJLOi" 
fxaL, Trpo-^/AOS €6^1, €Tn\€LpQ), —apu)fjiai, /3ovXa'o/uiat, Tropocr/ceuoi^o/xat, 
IXT])(avli)ixaL, ToXfJiu), V7ro/xevo>, eciaSa, etc. — Seo/iai {tO entreat), uccrci'xu, 
Trapatvu), cttitcAAo), Trapoivvoi, ttclSo), or/xySorXo.'tu, vovSeroiy kcXcixh, 
7rpo?rarTa), etc. — coi, a-vy)((DpC}, d/xcXto, etc. — BeBoiKa, tfyo^ovfjuu, 

' The verb'? which take an Infinitive after them, nre usually such as do not 
express a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other con 
struction. to complete the idea. The Inf.. therefore, is the cotn^ement of the 
verb on which it depends. Other verbs take a Participle for their complement 
Bee ^ 309. 



k 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 461 

<f>€vy(o, dvapaXKofxaL, okvw, etc. — (XTrayopevw, KaTe^w, kwXvo), etc. ; — . 
rjavxuLV, irpay^iara, dcrxoXtav, 6)(Xov irap^xoi tlvC, l^ovdlav SiSoVai, and 
the like. 

BouAo/ioi ypd<peiv. 'Eiri^vfiw iropeiea^ai. ToXfxw virofx4v€iv 
rhuKiv^vvov. UapaivSi <roi ypdcpeiv. 'Aj/a/3aAAo^ot ffoL airo Kplvecr^ ai. 
PI. Gorg. 457, e. <po0ovfiai SjeA€7xe«*' <re. Phaed. 98, d. a/teAto t^j d)s 
aXv^us alrias \eyfiy. Dem. 01. 3. 16, 25. rts &»/ auxb;/ hi KuXvaei SeOpo 
^aSiCf"; X. Ag. 1, 7. 'AyrjcriKaos uTreVrTj do-xo\tov aurdJ (ry fia<ri\e7) 
irap4^fiy arpartveiv eVl roi/s "EAAtjvos. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. riffvxUv 
roiovffiy ^Keivt^ vpdrr € ii/, on fiov\eTai. 

Remark 1. On the difterence between the Inf. and the Part, with alaxv- 
veabai, aiSf7adcu, -wtpiopav^ &pxf(T^ai, iravuv, -KavToiov yiyveabai, irapaffK^vd^ea- 
bui, TTfipaTdai, see <j 311. Verbs of prcj^endng and hindering, and the like, liave 
the following constructions: (a) (not veiT frequent) Etpy'co ae airiivai. Ov 
KwKvw <T( a-Kievai. (b) (usually) Etpyw ae fxy anievai according to § 318, 
7: and after a preceding negation: 'Aa-rvdyris, on Stono avrov 6 Kvpos, ovShu 
iSvvaro a»'Tf'x«»»' f^-V oif x"P^C«o''^a'> X. Cy. 1. 4, 2. according to ^ 318, 9. 
(c) Tov ipaiTfTfVfiy lol SftTiroTat rohs oiK^ras) Sea/xoTs aweipyovo-i, X. C. 
2. 1, 16. (d) Has aaKhs Svo 6.ydpas ( ^ fi tov /x^ KaraS vyaiy X. An. 3. 5, 11. 
(e) (seldom) M(?0^onfy roinovs (tpy f iv, & st e p.}) ovyaa^ai ^Adirreiu rj/ias, 
ib. 3. 3, 16. (f) Thy 'ir\(7(TToy o/jliKov tuv ^iKwv elpyoy to p.^ to iyyvs rrjs 
•w6K((ds KfLKovpyfiy, Th. 3, 1. according to § 308, Rem. 1. (g) very fre- 
quently after a preceding negation : Ovk aw elxovro ou5' airh twv (pi\uv rh 
fiij oifx^ ir\foyficr«7y -nap aviuv irfipaabai, X. Cy. 1. 6,32. according to 
\ 318, 9. 

Rem. 2. The verb irfld(iy,to persuade, regularly takes for its object a sub- 
Ktantive-sentencc. expressed by the conjunction ws and a finite verb ; it takes 
the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) more seldom. X. C 1. 1, 1. rroWdKis i^avfiaaa, 
rial TOT* \6yois ^A^vcdovs tirfuray ol ypa\f/dp.€voi 2w/cpaT7jv, ws d^ios etrj 
daydrov rp ir6\(i. 

Rem. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which 
is to l>e done, efiected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction &sTe 
with the Inf governed by verbs of tliis class. Her. 7, 6. aveTr€i<re Eep^eo, 
&sTf woif (ly ravra (to do t/iis). Sometimes, also, in order to make the pur- 
pose or ol>ject more emphatic, Sir«s, us with the Subj., Opt. or Put. Ind., is 
used. So in At'.ic prose, the verbs irpo^vp.f7abai, 5iauoe7ff^ai, fjLTjxayaa-^ai, irapa' 
K(\(v«Tdai, SioKfKfvta^ai, Trapa(TKfvd((a^ai, are connected with bnws and the 
Put. Ind. 

(li) With verbs of thinJcing, supposing, saying, and the con- 
tra ly (verba cogitandi, putancli, et dicendi), e. g. Aoyi^ecr^at, 
rjydarSat, vofit^cLV, l\TrLt,iiv, cvx^cr^atj ^ok^v, Kwhwivnv, etc. — Aeyeiv, 
<fidvai, etc. — apviiaSai (to deiiy), aTnarcLV, etc. 

IJofiiCw anapr(7y (I think [to have erred] that I have erred). 'E\7r/C« 
€VTvx-h<rfiy {I hope to be happy). Auttj v S6^a Ka\a>s 5 o k e? e x e "'• Th. 3 
74. 7, ir6\is iKiv5vv(v<re irfio-a S ia<p^apriyai. Aeyw eldivai radra (1 
gay [to hiow] that 1 know this). 

Rem. 4. On the difference between the Inf. and Part, after the verba 

39* 



462 SYNTAX. [^ 306. 

ii.Kov€iv, elSct/ai, eTtlaTaar^ai, fx-av^dyeiu, yiyvdxTKeiv, yiifivi](TKi(Tbai, irvvd^dyecT^cu, 
ala^dv^a^ai ] SeiKuvyai, cnro(paip€iv, StjAow, ayye^Xew, (paiveabau, ioiKeyaif 866 
§ 311. 

Rem. 5. It will be seen (§ 329), that, after the verbs above mentioned, the 
object may be expressed also by a complete substantive-sentence with us or 5ti. 

(c) After expressions denoting ahility, cause, power, capacity ^ 
ox fitness (verba facultatis), e. g. StVa/Aai, Swaros, 6hvva.To%, otos t 
ei/xt, t^, (^possum) — €<ttlv, Trapco-rtv, e^coTtv, eveariv (Jicet) — ttouo, 
dta-rrpaTTo/jLaL Karepya^oytxat, KarflurKCva^w, etc. — Sctvo? (^powerful., 
capable, fit^i t/cavo?, CTrtr^Sctos, KaK09, ^tt(dv, airios ei/xi, etc.; — after 
verbs of choosing^ appointing, naming, educating, teaching. 

Avuafiai iroieTu ravra. Her. 2, 20. ot ^ttjc/ou 6.yeuoi €i<ri a'lrioi itXtj- 
^veiu rhu TTOTafiSu. 7. 129. avwuv/xous tous &\\ovs el.' at iroiffi. 5, 97. 
(TTpaTrjyhi/ airoS e ^avr e s avTwv elvai MeKoiv^ioy. OT6s r* elfil iroifly 
ravra. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. rls &j/ aov yf iKavure pos TTilaai ; 3, 18. Znv6- 
repos 5 idd(T Ke LP. Ilojw ce ^cAaj/. Ai5a(r«c» Cf ypd<pfiy. 

Kem. 6. On TToieiv with the Part., see ^ 310, 4 (b). 

Rem. 7. The relation of the r<'5?//^ the thinp: fo ' " ' ■ hich i« > ■-■■d 

by the Inf. with these verbs, is sometimes stated 111 oly by a le 

conjunction wstc. PI. Prot. 34S, c. aSv yar oy vfuy, fisre npwTay6pov 
rovSe <ro<purfp6y nya i \4 <rb ai. So often in Plat. iKayhs usrt. X. Ag. 1, 
37. iir olfia iv (sc. Agcsihius), Sisr &yev <pvyT}s Kcd ^aydru-y rks x6\fis iia- 
Te Ae(ro I. 

(d) The Inf is also used after the verb Trc^v/ctVai, after the 
impersonal verbs and phrases 7rpo97;Kct, TrpeVct, crt'/A/Scui'ct, Set, xpVy 
avayKOLov, St'/catov, ux^iXtixov icmv and the like ; after verbs of 
giving, taking, goi?ig, scjiding, and many others ; after adjectives 
of various significations, e. g. a^to?, StKaios (worthy, tcortJt), rjSik, 
paStos, x'^^^'^'^'* ^^^ many others ; after abstract substantives, es- 
pecially in connection ^vith ilvai and yiyv^a-Bax, as dvay/07, cXtti's, 
o-xoXtJ, wpa eoTtv, to express a purpose or determination, a result 
or r^^cf. 

Th. 4, 61. iri<pvKf rb o»'(&^p£c7r€io»' 5to iroinrbs iipx^**' M^** *'"<''' eficoi^oy, ^w- 
AatTcecri^ai Serb eTrtJi/ (;«<?« are 50 coihttitiited as aluxti/s to ride thos- ' \f, 

hilt to guard against those u'ho assail). "HKOfify /xav^dvf ty {ad o.. , ;.). 

Th. 2, 27. TO?s AlyivT]rais oi AoKeSaifiSi'ioi eSotray Qvptay oiKfTy #fo2 r^y y^y 
yefxea-^ai. PI. Apol. 33, b. duoiws koI frXovalco koI ir4yrtri trap 4%^ tfuarrhp 
ipwrav. X. An. ^. 2, 1. rh vjjujcru rov (rrparfi'^iaros utaTcXiirc s-eytxpciy 
fpvXdrreiy rh CTpaTOTreSov. "A | » o s f(rri ^avfidCf<f^cf^^ Her. 4. 53. 
Bopva^evvs irlyeff^ai i)di<rr6s iari {duk'issiinus ad bibendum). 6, 112. T€o»t 
'^v ro7<ri "EAAr/cri Koi rh oHyofia rh MriScov <p6 ^o s aKovaai (a terror to hear). 

RflM. 8. Homer makes the Inf. depend on adjectives also, to express the 
same relation as is denoted by the Ace. o/tnore dejxnite limitation {§ 279, 7). II. *i 



J 306.] INFIxXITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 



463 



437, ^€Uiv y avenoKTii/ o/jloIoi (T-mroi) (equal to the winds in speed), lu a 
similar manner, the Inf. eTrcu in the phrase e/cwj/ elvai, must probably be 
explained (in'/h'iu/ so fur as it depends on my being or nature, as far as depends on 
me, i. c. actually willing). Her. 7, 104. Uuv re eli/ot ovS' hv fiovi^ofiaxeo.fii 
{could I liave my own choice, or so far as concerns me, I would not fight even in 
single comfjat). PI. Phaedr. 252, a. o^ej/ 5^ e Kovtra elvai ovk kiroKeiTreTai. ri 
^vx-ff. This phrase is used but seldom in affinnative sentences. 

Rem. 9. As the poets say ^oC/xa iSeV^ai (a iconder to see), so also in prose, 
the complementary Infinirivc 6pav, elsopau and lSe7v, are sometimes 
joined with verbs of apjttaring and showing one's self. X. Cy. 5, 4, 11. ce iirava- 
d(aar6fi(vos pa, diroi6s tis (palyrj iSeiv 6 Toiaimjv if^xV ex^y (/ carne to see 
what sort of a looking person you are, you, who have such a soul). 

Kem. 10. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, .hat, iastead of the Pass. Inf., it 
commonly uses the Inf. Act. or Mid., with the adjectives mentioned under (c) 
and (d), c. {?. ivvar6s, i^ios, etc., and with substantives e. g. ^av/xa, (pS^os, and 
with verbs of gicing. etc. Such Infinitives, the English translates both actively 
and passively, c. g. TaDro ^aSid (an fia^fTv (these things are easy to learn or be 
learned). KaX6s i<niv iSe7y ( pulchcr est visu, he is beautiful to see or to be seen). 
Th. 1, 38. i^ios ^av ixdcrai. Pi. Phaed. A070S Svi/arhs KaTavorjffai (capable 
of being understood). The active subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all 
' les of this kind, c. g. he is Iteautifnl for us to see. A Dat. is often ex- 

1 with .such an Inf.. e. g. PI. Rp. 599, a. ^a[5<o TroteTi/ ;uV dbori r^v 
a\4)ii(iaiM. So 2a>/fpaTTjs ir a <ri iropfTx^^ eaurhv ipwrau (he yielded himself to 
all to question, i. e. he iKnnitttd all to question him). 

Rkm. 11. From the use of the Inf. after A'crbs of tcilUng, ivishing, entreati-ig, 
and imploring and the like, the following ]>eculiarities in the use of the Inf. Lre 
to l>c explains 1 

a. The Inf i- \try miinently usimI m uio Epic writers instead of the second 
person Imperativi, snmctimcs also instead of the third pirson; instead of the 
s<ri)iid ]»rson, not .«icld(Mii also in other j>octs, and even likewise in Herodotus •♦ 
and ill the Attic jjiosc-writcrs. The Inf. must then be considered as the object * 
depending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. eld^eAe. 
Ilttnce wlien ; ' ' ' ■' < are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as 
they rcfi-r to tl ,ncd in the omitted Imp., are put in the iSTom. 
The Imp. is ul?u olicii iiitvnliaiigcd with the Inf. Od. a, 290, sqq. voar-f]- 
aas 5^ ^ireiTo (plKrji/ 4s trarpiSa ya7av (Xrind re 01 x^ I'C'j fat iirl Krepea ktc- 
pd^ai . . .Kol avfpi iMTjTtpa Souvai (and then having returned to your dear father- 
tuiu' ' '/> a mound. vtc). 1\. $,75. vix(7s S' &X\o^fv HWos e pT}TV€ lu iTreea-ffiv. 
11. ^ -. if 5f . . ot^affa kXtjTSi dvpas l(po7o 56iJ.oio, ireirXou . . ^eTvot 'Ai^tj- 
♦'fltiTjr «iri ■yavvaaiv T]vK6yLOiO. Hor. G, 80. ah Stj fioi Koi to xPVI^o.Ta Se'^aj, Koi raSe 
Ta avfifioKa au^e \a$<Lv ts 8' &!/ ex'^*' toDto avaiTej], tovtw airoSovfai (ei 
redde). Th. 5, 9. av Se, KAtapiSo, ou(pviS'iu>i ras Trv\as avoi^as iircK^eij/ 
Kol iirdyfa^ai ws TaxiCTa ^v/xfJil^ou. 

b. When the Inf. refers to the third Pers., its subject as well as the accom- 
panving expletives of the predicate, are commonly in the Ace. This Ace. 
with the Inf. is to be considcre<l as the object of a verb of icil/ing, which is to 
be supplied, e. g. f^xofiou, S6s, iroiej, or of a verl) denoting ivhat ought to fee, must 
^f'y <•• P- XPV, 8««"; so with wishe.<<, entreaties, precepts and comytacts. II. 17, 179, sq. 
<j8e li TI5 iXirfOKtv, Ihccv els oupavhu evpvw Zev Trctrep, ?i A'lavra Xax^^^^V 
TuB4os vi6y, tf avihu $aaL\va iroKvxpvaoio MvK-fiur,s ! fprant or cause that 
flther Ajax may obtain it bi/ lot. etc.). Aesch. !Siilil)l. ^eol iroK7TaL, p.ri fxe SouXeias 
TUX*'". ^- "^'tm. 6, 11. rhv Se Kw-nysr-qv ^x^vra i^ievai iAacppav 
ia^rira 4vi rh Kvirqyeaioy, rhv 5e apKVWphi/ eirea^ai. 

c. Hence the Inf. is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers., 
in questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. S> $aai\ei), Kdrepoy Keyeiv irphs 



^i> 



464 SYNTAX. [^ 307 

(re Ta voioov Tvyx<i-vOi ^ (fiyav iv n^ irapeSyri XP^^V : (sliall I speak or be si- 
lent?). Od. «•, 431. d SetAoi Tr6&' Xjxeu; ri kokuv t/ietpcTC tovtuv ; (whither to 
^0, i. e. whither are you to yo ?). 

d. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with of ydfj, el^e, as the ex- 
pression of a wish. Od. w, 375, sq. ot yap, ZeD re irdrep . . ^ rolos idy toi 
X^iQiS eu T]ix€Tepoi(ri SS/jlokti, revxe ex^f Sifxoiaiv, icpeardfjie vai Kol afivvtiv 
&vdpas fJt.y7)(TTripas. (instead of e^etTTcuTjj/ k. a^vyoifii). 



^ 307. JSfom., Gen., Dat., and Ace. with the Infinitive. 

1. Most verbs which take the Inf. have, in addition to this 
object, also a personal object, which is pat in the Case that the 
verb requires, e. g. Aco/mat a-ov ISJ^iiv. ]Sv/x)8ovXeva) <roi 
(TO)cf}pov€Lv. 'ETrorpvvto (T€ fJLd)(€a3aL. 

Remark 1. So also weAeueii', which sijjnifies to impel, fa wpe^ hence to 
command (jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and the 
Inf., e. g. Ke\€vw ffe ypd(f>fiu [jubeo te scribere). 

2. When predicative expletives, consisting of adjectives or sub- 
stantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern- 
ing verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by 
attraction in the same case as the personal object, or in the 
Accusative without attraction. 

(a) Gen. with In/. Aeofial aov vpo^vfiov eJvai (I beg you to he xeahus), 

AfOfiai <rov ir pSbvyiOv elyai. X. IL 1. 5, 2. Kvpov 
ibeoyro ws ir pobv ^lordr ov irphs rhy ir6\(fioy yfvdo'^tu 
(befjged C. to be as zealotis as }x>ssible in the war). Her. 6, 
1 00. ^A^riyaio) y ibcr^dTjcray (r<plai fiori^ohs ytveobcu 
[requested tlie Athenians to aid them). If the Gen. is fol- 
lowed by the Inf accompanied by a more definite ex- 
pletive, this expletive is always put in the Ace., e. g. 
Lys. 118. Se'o/iox vfiwy KaTai^rj<pi<Taur^ai QfOfiy^OTOVy i>- 
^viJ.ovfi€vovs, 8<Toi fxoi 6 ayuy i<mv (/ pray you te 
condemn Th., considering}, etc.). Th. \, \20. aySpuy ay a 
^wy i<TTiy, ad iKovfieyovs 4^ €ipi)yris iro\€fi*iy {it is tht 
characteristic of brave men, when injured, to exchange peaa 
for war). 

(b) Dat. with Inf. '2,vfifiov\eva> trot irpo^vfiof flyvu {I advise you to be zeal- 

ous). liVfi^ovKivw (Toi irpo^vnov iJycu. X. An. 2. 1,2. 
^ ^o^€ ToTs Twv 'ExX-qptcy ar parrjy o7s ffviTKfvaaafL' 
fyois h elxoy koI i^oir\i(rafi.4yots wpoUycu. X. 
Hipparch. 7, l.*»rai'Tt irpos^Kti ipx^rri t^poylfitf 
elvai {it becomes even/ rider to be prudent). X. An. 1. 2. 1 
Ecyl^ Vetv irapTiyyei\e \a$6yTa robs Hippos {com 



♦ 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 465 

manded Xenias to come^ having taken men). 7. \, 21. vvv 
tro: €|€<rTj*' ayZpl yei/ea^ai (you can show yourself a man). 
X. Cy. 2. 1, 15. e|eo-T£i/ Vfx7y et )SouAe(r,^e, \a^6vrai 
oirAo fls KivSwou 4fifiaii/€iv. 

{c) Acc. with Inf. 'EiroTpvvw tre ir pd^vfiov ehai. KeXeiw a e TpdS^v 
fiov flvai, 

Hem. 2. The Ace. in the examples under (a) and (b), may be explained by 
considering the object of the governing verb, e. g. deofxai u^uwj/, as being at the 
same time tlic suhject of the Inf., i. e. this object stands in a two-fold relation, 
f.ring l)0th the object of the governing verb, and the subject of the Inf. (see 
Rem. 3), e. g. Afo/uu vfiaiy [v fias] fior}^ov s yey^a^ai (I beg you that you will aid). 

Rem. 3. Verbs which take the simple substantive object, in the Ge?i. or 
A/f.. sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf., this object in the Ace, 
the object of the governing verb and the subject of the Inf. being united in 
one. This construction is used when the whole action of a person and not the 
jiprson himself, is made specially prominent. Lys. Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. Seo- 
juaj oiy vfias (rvyyyu.<ij.rjv ^X*'*' (^ ^*'.7 therefore that you would pardon). Th. 4, 
97. IT po ayo p€va) avrovs iK rov lepov ct.ir tSvras airocpepeff^ai rd acperepa 
avTwi/ (instead of a^roTy aviovaiv airo<f>.), I give orders that they, going out of the teni' 
j»le. should carry their fjf'ecfs irith them. So irapayyeWu, a.irayy4\ka, TrposTdTra, 
iiaKfKfvofial (re airtfyat. X. C. 4. 7, I. ^WKpdrrjs avr dpK i is eV rals irposTjKov' 
trais trpd^tatv avrovs {tovs 6 fiiXovvr as avrw) elfai i-rre /xeXclr o. So also 
the verbs «iirf7v, \4y€ t y, <p pd^f ly, (pwyfTv in the sense of jubere, are con- 
structed with the Ace. and the Inf., in the Attic poets. S.Fh. 101. Keyw o-' iyi) 
5 <{ A o) ♦iAo>fT^T7ji/ \a$f7y. Also ir p o s •{) k e t, -rr p ewei, e^ea-r t, <TVfx$alv€i, 
^v/xtpopoy iffri wiih lAit. ov Ace. tcith Inf. 5 (7, xpv (§ 279, Rem. 4). The 
Arr. is necessark'. when the statement in the sentence does not refer to a 
definite person, but is altogether general in its nature. PI. Ion. 539, e. ovk &v 
■Kpf-rroi y( iir i\tj a ^loy a flvai pay^/tffShy &y5pa {it tcould notbe fitting that 
a i/:'ij'>odist should be furg(tful). 

3. Besides the case already mentioned, the Ace. ivith the L 
I/if. is used in Greek, as in Latin, in the following case also. 
When a subject with its predicate, as 'O dya^os avrjp cvSai/x-ovet, 

is made the object of our thought or will, the subject is put in 
the Ace. {rov dyaSiv aiSpa) and the predicate in the Inf. (evSat- 
fioveiv, e. g. No/xi^(D Tov aya&6v avSpa €vSaLixove2v [Ihdieve 
that the good man is happy). If the predicate is an adjective, 
participle, or substantive with cTmt yCyveaSai, etc. (§ 240, 2), as 
'O dycu9os avrjp evSai/xayv iarCv, then these words also are put in 
the Ace., e. g. No/At^tu t6v dya^ov avSpa evhalixova. cti/at. 

4. But when the subject of the governing verb is at the same 2,. 
time the subject of the Inf also, the subject of the Inf is not 
expressed in Greek, as it is in Latin, by the Ace. of a personal 
pronoun, but is wholly omitted ; and when adjectives or sub- 
stantives stand with the Inf as expletives of the predicate, 
they are put, by attraction, in the Nom. 



4G6 SYNTAX. [k 307 

QXoixai afx-apreiv {I believe I have erred, or that I have erred, credo me errasse) 
OUi afiapTclu {you think that you have erred). Oterot ajxapTilv. OUiuba afiaprfTp 
OXofiai evSaifiwv ihai (I think lam happy, or that lam happy, credo me beatum 
esse). OKei evSalfAUv etvai. Oterai evSaifiooj/ eluai. OlSfii^a tvSaifioyei 
fluai. 'O (rTparrjyhs ecpr] irp6bv fios eluai iTri^QT\^iiv. 

E.EM. 4. If, however, where the subject of the governing verb and of the Inf. 
is the same, the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is particularly 
the case in antitheses, then the Ace. with the Inf. is used, as in Latin, e. g. Her. 
2. 2. 01 AlyvTTTioi ivS/JLi^ou e (o vt ov s Trpdrovs yivfffbai iraurwv apbpwiruv (se, non 
alios homines). 1, 34. Kportros iy6/xi^€ eavrhu dvou iravruv oK^iuTaTov. But 
instead of eavrSv, where there is a contrast between persons, avr6s (=se 
ipsum) is likewise used, by attraction. Her. 7. 1.3fi. He/)^7js ovk epr} bfutlos errea-bau 
AaKeSaifiovioiai' kcIvovs fxku yap avyx^ou ra TrdvTCJV av^punrwy v6^i}jia, b.iroK- 
reivavTas KTipiiKas, avrhs (//>su»i instead of se ipsnni) 5e ravra ob voiiicrfiv. 
Th. 4, 28. K\eW OVK etprf ai/Tos, oAV iKilvov (Nj/cjav) aTpaTrjyelv. So also by 
means of attraction the personal pronouns iydo, av, thjhIs, v/ifts, <r4>cij, are 
joined with the Inf. 'EnofjLuvw <toi . . i? /xijy iyu fiovKeabcu ay /uera aov (airo- 
have7i/)f I swear to yon that I would rather, etc., X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. Et oUtr^e Xa\Kt5- 
4as rT]v 'EWdSa arwcreiy, vfifls 5^ airoSpdcTfa^ai to, npay/xaTa, ovk opdws oif<rd(. 
Dem. Ph. 3, § 74 {if you think that the L'halcidians will save Greece, and tliat 
you will escape the trouble of it, etc.). (Oi iv ^dpLca ttpaaav) ir6\iv apiciy vrdpxay 
'Zdfxou OVK acr^euri . . /col Suva'^ dr epoi flvai a<pe7s . . iropi^eadai to. tViTTjStja 
Tuu iv TTJ ttSKci, Til. 8. 76. — Sometimes the enclitic pronouns are used tntl-.^t 
any special emphasis. PI. Rp. 400. 1). o7^ai ^e aKtiKoevai. — When th' 
verb has an object, and this olycct is at the same time the subject oft:.- ^ - . , 
then the Inf. merely (without the Ace.) is used, but the predicative expletives 
are put in the same case as this object. OuS" hy tovtois iirlarevoy 4 /i- 
u6yois ececTid^ot, X. Cy. 3. 3, 55 (/ ux>uld not even trust these tint thnj will be 
sttadfast). OvhivX av^pdiruiy v<p e i fXTjy tty otjT€ ^(Krioy odd' ' --ov /3 6 - 

P iw K 4 yai, X. C. 4. 8, 6 {to no one would I grant that he had li- r, etc.). 

When the object of the governing verb is also the object of the Inf., this also is 
used only in the first place, but is omitted in the second. 2a>Kpc(T7js, 6<^ 6 
KaT-f]yopos, Tovs irarepas TrpoirriKaKi^eiv iSiSatTKf, Treldwy fxfy rovs avv6yTas 
avTU} ao(pMTepovs w oi€7v rCiiv irarfpajy, X. C. 1. 2, 49 ( persuodens diacipulis suis, se 
EOS sapientiores reddcre patribus). 

5. "Wnicii the governing word is an oblique Case of a parti- 
ciple, the predicative expletives which are connected iWth the 
Inf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that participle. 

PI. Apol. 21, b. ^\^ov iiri riva tuv SoKovyr uy <To<pS>v dyat {veni^nm ad 
aliquem eorwn, qui se sapientes esse opinalHintur). Her. 1. 176. riy yvy Avkimp 
<pafi4yuy a ay di coy fhai ot troWoi €iai iirqKvSes {eorum Lydorum, gui SB 
Xanthios esse dicebant). X. Cy. 6. 1, 34. (KCpos awfytXaaiv) hr\ rH Kpdro- 
VI Tov cpuTos <pd(TKoyri dvai {at the one affirming that he was above the I'li/lu- 
ence of love. 

6. The Ace. icith tJie Inf., like the Lif alone, is used after the 
foUoAving classes of verbs and expressions : (a) of icUling and 
the contrary [k 306, 1, (a)] ; (b) of thinking, hclkving, scupng 
p 306, 1, (b)] ; (c) of causing, c/ioosing, ajypointing, naming 



$ 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 467 

[^ 306, 1, (c)] ; (d) after impersonal verbs and expressions sig-l 
nifying must, ought, slwuld, it hajypens, e. g. M, TrposrjK€L, TrpcVeti 
e^toTtv, CTTieiKcs, KaXov, /caKov (etc.) eortv, crv/xj8atVet. 

'AiTTvdyrjS fiov\6 fX€VOs rhv ttoTSo ws ^Siara d€LTrve7v irpos-fiyayev avrcS 
vamoBaTra ^pujxara, X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. No/x^^« vfxas ifjLol elyai Kal iraTpida Kol 
<pl\ovs Kol a-vfjLu.<ixovs, X. An. 1.3,6. 'E Kir I (a eKeivovs i\^e7v -n-phs ah 
ficiWov, ^ irp«s ifj-f, X. Cv. 2. 4, 15. Thv fiia^hv inr icrxv tiT o avrols oKl- 
^uv r)pi(pwv iKvXivv irap€af<T^ai, X. An. 7, ^,9. Thv jxkv KaXhu kol- 
ya^hv 6.vhpa fvSalfiova eluai (prjixt rhu Koi irovr}phv &^\iov, PL 
Gorg. 407, e. Kpeirrov ( sc. eVri) avi/ iroXXocs oiKovvra aacpaXias apKovvra 
ix^iv, ^ (xovov h lan (i> fifvov to. twu ttoXltosv iiriKivdwus Trdvra Ke kttj a"- 
»ai,X. C. 2. 3. 2. 

Rem. 5. With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, the 
Ace. xcitli the Itif'. is not to be rcfrardcd as the grammatical object, but as the 
yrummatkal stibjtct of the sentence ; but logically., i. e. in respect to the sense, 
the Ace. with the Inf. must even here be regarded as the object, and the im- 
personal expressions as transitive verbs, e.g. Ao/ceT/iot (= yo^/^w) Kvpov 
aofuTUToy yeyfffdai. Thus it can also be explained why the Greeks and Lat- 
ins in quoting a j)hrase, e. g. tvSaifxoya ehai, felicetn esse, fiaaiXea ehm, regem 
esse, use this construction. 

Rem. 6. The Greeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction into 
the personal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the impersonal 
expression personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. By this 
construction, the subject is rendered prominent ; while in the construction of 
this Ace. witli tlic Inf. the whole idea of tiie sentence is made the principal 
thing. This is the case: (a) with X e7«T ai, a yyeWerat, 6 fioXoyelTat 
and the like; (b) with SokcT, it seems; (c) with a-vfifialyn, accidit ; where 
this last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it. while with the 
Ace. and the Inf., it Ibllows the verb; (d) in the phrases SiKaiov, a^iov, 
4irl6o(ov, Svvaruy, afivxavoy, xa^e^'^'' e<rTtf, etc.; (e) in the phrase 
roaovrov 5ea> with the Inf. followed by wyre with the Inf. or Ind. {tantum 
obtst, ut — ut) so Jar is it from, and voWov Sea> with the Inf. 

A4y era I rhy $a<Ti\(a a.Tro<piry€7y and \ e y € t a i 6 fiaaiXevs airocpvye^y. 
X. Cy. 5. 3, 30. 6 'Atravptos ds Tqy X'^P"-^ ip-fiaXXciv ayyeXXerai. Hcr. 
3, 124. iioKfi oi rby tr ar (pa Xou<TdaL /xhy viro tov Aios, xp'^ea^ai 5e vnh 



rov 



at 6 s (I fit (lyai iXtv^tpos. Her. 0, 12. iiriSo^oi ruvrh tovto ■n-eiascrSrai elan. 
I. Cy. b. 4, \9. &^iol y4 iffficy rov yfy^v-nfj-eyov irpayixaTOS tovtov airoXavaai ti 
■ya&lV. I.^ocr. Taneg. 76, 168. roaovrov Seovaiy eAeeTj/, lisre Koi fxaXXoy 



'HXlov. X.An..'V l,'2\.\e\vadai fioi Sok(7 kcu t] i-Keivcoy li^pis koI t? 7]fX€r4pa 
virox^ia. PI. Phaed. 74, a. op' oiy ov Kara iravra. ravra avjj.fiaiv€i ry]v avd- 
fiy-q a IV dvcu fj.(y a<p' d^oiwy ktX. 67, c. Ka^apais ehai ov rovro ^vfifiaiyei. 
~-Ai Kai6s (i fii rovTO irpdmiy instead of hiKaiov iari fie rovro irpaTreiy. A i - 

iLya^i,. _._,.. _ ^. . _, . . . _ _ - 

Xaipovoiy M toTs aXJ^iiXwy KaKo7s (so far are they from pitying, that they rather 
rejoice even, etc.). 

Rem. 7. The personal construction with the verbs Zokc7v, ioiKivai, Xtyea^at 
and the like, extends also to clauses with ws, expressing companson, as is the 
case in Latin with ut videor, ut videris. etc., instead of iit videtur. PI. Rp. 426, b. 
oIk 4TraLyir-ns d, ^<pr,y iy(Ji. Sos toiKas, rS>y roioirw'y aySpwy {yoii do not praise, as 
it seems [instead of as you seem] such men). X. An. 1. 10, 18. -^aau 8 avrai, ^s 
ihiyovro, rerpaK6aiaL Utia^ai {the.'ie chariots ivere four hundred, as it was said). 
6. 3, 25. ol iroXft^toi Sf, Sis y r]iJ.7y i56Kovy, rodro SetVorres aTr^A^ov. 



468 SYNTAX. [§ 30a 

Rem. 8. On the Ace. with the Inf. in exclamations, see ^ 308, Hem. 2, 0« 
Srt and as after verba sentiendi and dicendi, see § 329. 

§ 308. II. Infinitive with the Article. 

1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a 
substantive, and, indeed, is such, since, by means of the article, 
it can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex- 
pressing all the relations, which are indicated by the Cases of 
the substantive with and without prepositions. On the contrary, 
it here also, as in the Inf without the article [k 305, (2)], re- 
tains the nature of a verb. 

(a) Th ypdtpeiv, rh ypdrpai, rh yeypatpeuai, tJ) ypd^etv. (b) Ti iiritTro- 
\^p ypd(peiu, Th Tris aperris iTri^vfj.€7v, rh rols iroKe filo i s fuLxftr^cu. 
(c) T^ Ka\u>s ypdcpeiy, rh Ka\us airobayeiy {honorable deatli). Yet pronouns 
in the Ncut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf., e. g. PlaL 
avTh rh airo^vrjaKfiu. By prefi.xing the article, whole sentences can be 
represented as one extended substantive-idex 

• 

2. Wlien the Inf .whether as a subject or object, has a sub- 
ject of its own and predicative expletives, both the subject and 
expletives, as in the case of the Inf without the article, are put 
in the Ace, because the Lif , even as a subject, is considered 
dependent {^ 307, Rem. 5). When, however, the subject of the 
Inf is not different from the principal subject of the sentence, 
it is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by 
attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the 
sentence, i. e. in the Nom. 

(a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. rh afiaprdyciv ay<rpuTrovs 
ivras ov54u, ol^ai, ^av/xacrrov {that men constituted as they are should err, is nd 
strange) ; here rh afxaprdyeiv which is the subject of itrrl, has av^panrovs for its 
own subject, and oyras as its predicative expletive. 7. 5, 82. ou rh /* i> A o - 
jSeTi'Toi aya^h ovrca ye x^^^^^i usirep rh \a& 6vr a. <tt fprj^^yai \v- 

TTTipSy. 

(b) Genitive : (o) as the object of verbs and adjectives or as an attributive 
of a substantive. X. An. 1. 3, 2. KXfapxos fiiKphv i^(<t>vy€ rod fi^ Karawfr- 
pai^rivat {just escaped being stojjed to death). Cy. 1. 4, 4. «$■ Se TpoTfyer 6 
XP^vos avrhy {rhy Kvpoy) avy rep fnyebei eh upav rov irposTi 0oy yeyeff^ai 
{as time advanced him to the period of [becoming a man] manhood) ; here the Inf 
yeyea^ai, which is used as an object in the Gen., has its predicative expletive 
*ff>6$rifiov in the Ace. 1. 5, 13. ri oZv itrriv i^ rod a\4^aa-dai Sucaiorepov^ % 



♦ 308.] INFINITIVE WITH THE AETlCLE. 



469 



rov To7s iplXois kp-hy^iu KdWcov; C. 1. 2, 55. 2a,«p<£T77s 7rap6KaA« J^./xeA- 
««r^oi Tov ws <ppovifi(i>TaTov cJvai Ka\ u, <p€Xifi(i;>TaT ov. Very fre- 
quently ToO, TOV 1x4) IS used to denote a purpose, object: in order that, in order 
that not [S 274, 3, (a)], since by the language, as is frequently the case, that 
■which calls forth the action, is substituted for that which is to be done, or for 
the result. Th. 1, 4. TAivws rh \r,aTiKhu Ko^p^i i^ ttjs Sta\d(T(rr,s rov rhs 
irpos6Sovs fiaWoi^ Uvai aurcf {in order that his revenues might come in bet- 
ter). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ol ruy ^acriKewv olyoxooi ets tV apiarfpav {o'lvov) iyxed/xe- 
vol KaTapl>o<poda-i, rov Sri, d <pdpfiaKa iyxfoieu, fi^ \va-iTe\e7v avTo7s (in 
order that it may not be well for them, if they mingle poison with it). 6, 40. to C /i^ 
Sia(p€vy€iv rhy Xdyojv 4k tuv Ziktvuv (tkottovs Ka^iaTr)s. (j8) With prepo- 
sitions, e.g. avri, instead of, or in the sense of the Latin tantum abest, ut — ut, 
iKyfrom, in consequence of, fitrd, in connection with, -irpS, for, ire pi, in order that, 
especially tviKa and virep in connection with fi-fi, in order that not, in order 
not; also Jkutv and x«^P^J> without, fjLexpi{s), until. Th. 1, 69. avrl rod 
iiTfKdfiv (invadere) avroX a^ivveabai $ou\e(r^e /xa?^6u iin6vras. X. H. 3. 
4, 12. & 'AyriaiKaos dvTt rov iir\ Kapiav I4vai, ev^vs ravavria aTTO(Trpei\ias 
irrl ^pvyias iiroptvero. Hier. 4, 3. 5opv<popov<riu 4irl rovs KaKOvpyovs virep rod 
firjS e va tu>i/ woXiruy $iai(f> havdrui air o^vrjff kc ly. 

(c) Dative : (a) As the object of single verbs and adjectives, e. g. hTi(rru>, 
r«TT€ua>, toiKa, Bfioios, ayayrlos, very often as the instrumental Dat. X. Ap. 14. 
kKiaroiKTi Ty 4fif r (t ifi^ff ^ai vnh SaifiSycoy [do not believe in my having been 
honored, that I have been honored). PI. Phaed. 7\,c.r(p f tj v iarl ri ivavriov, Sisirep 
rtf iypriyopiyai rh Ko^fvSnv ; (is tliere something opposite to living, as sleeping 
IS to waking). X. Ilicr. 7, 3. 5oKe7 rovrto 5La<p4p€iy ay^p rwv &\\wy (dwu, rw 
Ti/i^j 6p4yf<T^ai {seems to differ from other animals in this, that). {$) With 
prepositions: 4y^ in, 4irl, on the condition that, in order that, because, irpSs, 
besides. PI. Gorg. 456, e. iraptSoffoy iirlr^SiKalas XPV^^"^^ rovrois 
{ro7s SirAoij) irpin rovs iroKffiiovK {they put them [arms] into their hands in order 
that they might use them aright). S. Aj. 554. 4y rip (ppove7v — TjStaTos ^los. 

(d) Accusative : (a) Sometimes as the object of transitive verbs, PI. Gorg. 
522, e. avrh rh kir obvi]<T Ki iv ovhels (po^eirai {no one fears death itself). 
()3) AVith prepositions: ^ir/, eis, Trp6s, in order that, in order to, in relation to, 
Kardfin relation to, vapd, in comparison, especiaWy Sid, on account oj] because 
that. X. C. 1. 2, 1. :S,a}KpdTrjs irphs rh fierplwy de7(r^ai ireiraiSevfieyos {^y) 
{uxis trained to have moderate desires). Cy. 8. 1,3. fiiyiarov aya^hv rh irei^apx^7y 
<paly(Tai els rh Kar air pdrr e ly rk aya^d. With attraction : X. Ven. 12, 
21. 7} dperr) iravraxov irdpecrri Sia rh elyai aStdvaros {on account of its 
being immortal, because it is immortal) ; here a^dvaros is attracted into the 
case of aper-i], instead of being in the Ace. Cy. 1. 4, 3. o Kvpos Sia rh <pi\o- 
uab})s elyai voWa rovs irapSyras ayi^pwra, Kal offa avrhs iiir &\\a>y (sc. d//??- 
oonaTo), Sia rh ayx^yovs elyai raxv aireKpivero {because he was fond of 
learning). 

Remark 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- 
•tructed with an Inf.* merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article rd, 

40 



5 



470 SYNTAX. [^ 309. 

even when they would have their object, if a substantive, in the Gen. The 
addition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressed bv the Inf. 
X. C. 3. 6, 6. rh TrAovcriwTepav Tr)v Tr6\iv iroieiu ava$a\ov /xeba. Th. 3, 1. 
rhv ttXcIo'tov H/xiXou tuu \\/i\a)v elpyou rh /xt] to, eyyvs rrjs '7r6\ews KaKovp- 
yclv [dpyeiv nvd tivos). But when a preposition precedes an Inf, the article 
can never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substan- 
tive. 

Rem. 2. As the Ace. of a substantive, so also the Lif. tenth the Ace. of the 
wticle, is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetrv. 
however, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. X. Cv. 2. 2, 3. iKtlvos 
vavv ayia^ds elire irphs kaxnSv ' T^J rvxns^ rh ifie vvv K\T)bfVTa Sevpa 
rvx^'^y^- (tfiat I have just now been called hither !). Without the article : Aesch. 
Eum. 835. i/xh ira^eii' Tc£5e, (pev^ ifie iraXalotppoua Kara yav oiK€iy, arU- 
rovy <|)6i), fxvaos ! 

Rem. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which 
the article t6 is placed before the Inf. (hcu which stands in connection with an 
adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial 
Accusatives. Sec § 279, Rem. 10. The Inf elyai denotes a state or condition^ 
c. g. rh vvv elvai, the present state, condition, and as an adverbial expression, 
with respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti tempcr'is 
conditione ; rh r-fi/xepov efvai, pro hodiemi diei conditione. X. An. 1. 6. 9. 
T^ KOTck rovTov flu at (so far as he is concerned). H.d. 5, 9 rh fity iir 
iKclvois elvai ayroKuXare {so far as it depends on them). 



$309B. The Participle. 

1. The Participle represents the idea of the verb as an adjective 
idea, and is like the adjective, both in its form and in its attrib- 
utive use ; for it has tluree genders, and the same declension as 
the adjective, and cannot, more than the adjective, be used in- 
dependently, but must always depend upon a substantive,, and 
hence agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. The Par- 
ticiple denotes either an active or passive condition, but the 
adjective, a quality. 

2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective, 
in retaining, like the Inf, the following properties of the verb : 

(a) The participle has different forms to denote the different 
circut7ista?ices of the action : duration, completion, and futunlyt 
e. g. ypd<fi(Dv, lariting, yeypa^cu?, ypanj/a^y one wJio kos icritten, 7/xu/r- 
cov, one icho icill u^rite ($ 257, Rem. 3) ; 

(b) The participle has Act., Mid., and Pass, forms, e. g. ypcu^ 
a?, ypaxf/dp,a'0<i, ypa<^€t?. 

(c) The active and middle (deponent) participle governs the 
same Case as its verb, e. g. ypd<f>u}v cTrto-ToXi^v, hriSx'puliv t^« 
apeTrj^y pia)(6p.€vos TOis TroXe/xiots. 



^ ^10-] 1HE PARTICIPLE. 47 j 

3. The participle is used as follows : 

(a) Either as an immediate attributive qualification of a sub- 
stantive, e. g. o ypd<f>ayv Tracs or 6 7ra?5 6 ypc{<^a>v, the writing 
boy; or m connection with etmi, as a predicate (^ 238, Rem. sj, 
e. g. TO poSov dv^oCv co-Ttv (^/xe ro^e w blooming). 

(b) As the complement of the verb, e. g. 'Opw rhv rralha 
Tpixovra. 

(c) To denote such an attributive qualification of the sub- 
stantive as is expressed in English dv placing the participle 
after the substantive, or by the relative who, tvhich, and the 
verb, e. g. Twyj rts opviv cT^t ko^' iKdarrjv rj^iipav uibv avTQ tUtov 
aav (a hen laying, or which laid an egg daily). 

(d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the 
principal action, e. g. KC-pos yeAJii/ d-K^ {said laughing, or 
laughingly). 

Remark. As the use of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explained 
in §§ 264, 1. and 238, Rem. 7, and as No. (c) has no further difficulty, only the 
usage mentioned under 3, (b) and (d) now remains to be considered. 

{310. 1, r/te Participle as the complement of the verb. 

1. As the participle is an attributive, and consequently ex- 
presses an action as already attached or belonging to an object, 
only those verbs can take a participle for their complement 
which require, as a complement, an action, in the character of 
an attribute, so attached or belonging to an object, that this 
object appears in some action or state. The action or state de- 
noted by the ])articiple is, therefore, usually prior to that denoted 
by the verb with which it is connected, sometimes coincident 

2. The construction is here evident. The Participle agrees 
in Case with the substantive-object of the principal verb, 
this object being in the Case wliich the principal verb re- 
quires. 'Akovoj 2<i>KpaT0vs and rjKOva-d ttctc "^(OKparovs Trepl 
xI>lXo)V SiaXiyojxivov. Xaipo) croL and x^^tpoj o-ot iX&ovri,. 
Opu) dv^poyirov and optu dvS pwirov t pe^ovra. 

3. But when the subject of the principal verb is at the same 
time its object also, as Ot8a {ey^) c/xavrov !^vy)Tov ovra, then the per- 
sonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and 
the participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case 



472 SYNTAX. \i 310. 

as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nora. (Comp. 
$ 307, 4), e. g. oTSa ^vrjTos wv. For more examples, see No. 4. 

Remark 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the 
object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be 
made emphatic. Comp. ^ 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. oi/x, & KpeiTTuy pSet Ht', 
ravra irpovKaAeTro rovs avvSuraSy ciAA' avep eZ fjSei eavrhy ^Tova ovr a^ ravra 
HvpX^' ^1 10. TTepieTdov avrovs y^pa aSvydrovs y €vo fi4 vovs {ttiey permittea 
themselves to become enfeebled by old age). 

Rem. 2. (With avvoida, <rvyyiyu<ii<rKu> ifiavr^, the participle can 
either refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun 
which stands with the verb ; if the participle refers to the subject, it is put in 
the Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat.) e. g. avyoiSa {(rvyyiyvaxTKw) inamcf fZ 
noffiaas or avvoida ifxauTc^ eS iroi-fi<ravri (I am conscious tliat I have done voell). PL 
Apol. 21 , b. tyw ^v V oiha 4 fiavr^ <r o <ph s &v (I am conscious that I am wise). 
22, d. ifxavTCf} ^vvp St iv ovSey iir lar a/j.4v ip. yBnt when the subject is 
not at the same time the object, but is dirterent from the object, then the object 
with its participle is either put in the Dat.j e. g. avyoiid aot tZ iroi^<rajn-i, — 
X. S. 4, 62. ri pi 1 a vy oKT^a toiovtov etpyaafieyoi; (quid me tale commisisse 
scis ?)Ior (though more seldom) the substantive is put in the Dat., but the partici- 
ple in Hhe Acc^ e. g. iyw or o i a-vyoiSa eZwoiriffayTa. X. 0. 3, 7. iy(a cot <r u - 
voiha €7ri fxkv KwixeaSuy ^eay Kol irdvu irpwt aytindpLfvoy^ kolL vdyv puKpay b^hv 
fiaSi^oyr a Koi ific ayairel^oyTa irpo^vfxa> s (rvy^eaT^ou. Also Aoj ddyoo 
i/xavrhy iroiuv r i [I conceal myself doing something^ i. e. / do something secretlu). 
X. An. 6. 3, 22 (ot tTnrcts) e A ad^o V avrovs iir\ r^ \6<fKp yev6p.(yot (reacned 
the height unobserved). — \\Vith ioiKfyai, to appear, to seem, to be like, and 
h/xoioy eJvai, the participle in relation to the subject, sometimes stands in 
the Nom., though more frequently in the Dat., and with ofioioy tlycu, in the Dat. 
almost without an exception^ X. H. 6. 3, 8. ioiKure Tvpayylai piaWoy fi iro- 
kireiais TjdSfifyoi. An. 3. Sf 13. ipLoioi ^aav ^av fxd^ovr ts. PI. Mcnon. 
97, a. ofxoiol i(Tp.iv ovk ophwi u pio\oyrjK6(ri. Rp. 414, c. coiicar, €^, 
oKyovvTi Xiyfiv. See ^ 311, 9. 

4. The verbs and expressions, with which the participle is 
used as a complement, are the following : — 

(a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the 
senses or by the mind, e. g. opavy aKovcti/, flhcvat {to know), cttut* 
Tttcr^at {to know), fxavSaveLv {to perceive), ytyvioa-Ktcv {to k?iow), cv- 
^u/xeio-^at {to coiisidcr), Trvv^dvea-SaL {to perceive), aurSdv€(r&ai, 
pLLfxvi^(rK(a^a.L, iTTLkavS^dveaS^aLy etc. 

Th. 1, 32. TjfifTs adv yaroi Spcofiev 6vt€s ireptyeveVd^cu (ire see that we 
are unable, etc.). 'Opw ere Tpe'xoi'Ta. 'AKoveiy with the Gen. when one 
hears with his own senses, or with the Ace. when one learns bv hearsav. 
X. C. 2. 4, 1. ¥)KQv<Ta 'SwKpdrovs irepl <piXuv S ia\€yoficyov (I heard 
Socrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. ijKovfft rhy Qpatrv- 
fiov\oy irpos lovra (he heard that TTirasybulus was coming). Cy. 1.4,25. 
Kaix$v(Tr)S ij KoviX ey avSphs ^Stj epya Siax^tp^C^f^^*'*'*' rhy Kvpor, 
OlSa ^y-ijThs &v (I know that I am mortal). OlSa &ybpvroy ^y-nrhh 
ovra. Her. 3, 1. S /SaCiAeO, S lafie $\rifieyos inrh 'Afidaios ov fiay^dye is 
{do you not see that you have been deceived?). 40. rjSh -rvy^drfff^ai irSpa 



f 310.] THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OP THE VERB. 473 

4>i\oyKa\$f7voy eS ir p-,',cr a our a, ^. Cy.l. I, 2.&pStpo}Troi iir' oh^4ms ,ua\\o, 
evvifframai, t] tm rovrovs, ots ttv aXabuvTai &pxeiv avruv iTixe ipovvras 
(w/iotn theij knoiv are endecivonnrj to rule them). With the Gen. [§ 273, 5, (e)]. 
4. 4, 11. po-^Tjff-ai oSj/ irwTTOTe /xov ^evSofxa pTv povvros ^ avKocpav- 
rovvT OS. 

(b) Verba dcclarandi, i. e. verbs v^liich signify to declare, to 
shoiu, to make clear, and the like, e. g. SeLKvvvai (to shoiv, to ex- 
hibit), StjXovv, BrjXov TTOLCLV, <fiaLV€LV (to show), (fiaLveaSat (to show 
one's self, apparere), hrjXov and <f)avep6v ehat, iXiy^^tv, iieX^yx^Lv, 
(to prove, to convict), oAto-Kco-^at (to be convicted), ttouIv (to rep- 
resent), €vpL(TK€iv (to Jind), etc. 

PL Phaed. 101, c. ^ ^^xh a^dvaros Waiver ai oltra {the soul appears to be 
immortal). Her. 6, 21. 'A^vaToi StjXov eiroiria-av vircpax^^or^evres rrj 
Mikt'iTov aXuxTfi (made it evident that they were exceedingly grieved on account of the 
capture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 190, d. to7s iroirjTois robs ^eoiis oT6u r eVri 
irojf/o-ai kaX h laXiyo^iivovs kcu <Tvvay(avi^oix4vovs, oTs hy fiov\r]^w- 
aiv (the poets can represent the gods both conveising, etc.). Dem. Aph. 1. 819, 20, 
PaUus i\f-YX^V<^ fTut »//€uS({/Liei'os( will easily be convicted [that he falsifies] 
of falsehood, or if he falsijies). 

Rem. 3. ^[nstcad of the impersonal phrases Sri\6u eVrt, (pauepou ia-ri, (^aiVerot, 
apiKtret, the Greek uses the personal consti-uction (conip. § 307, Eem. 6)^e. g. 
iTJ\6s d" I, <pavf p6 s f I fit, <paivo ij.ai t)]V irarpiSa eS ttoit) aas (I dm evi- 
dent having dune well, i. e. it is evident that I have done ivell for my country). X. 
AtT 2. 6, 23. (TT i pyoiv <pav f phs fitv ?) i/ ov5(va, orw Se (pairj <pi\os eTfot, Tovrta 
l[ySri\ s 4y iy 1/ fT o i ir ifiovXevcuy {he ivas evident loving no one, i. e. it was 
evident that he loved, etc.). PI. Apol. 23, d. kotoStjAo* yiyvovrai irpos- 
voiov fifvot fify (iSfvai, flS6Tes Se ovSeu. 

(c) Verlm affectmun, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or 
state of the mind, e. g. xaipeiv, ^SiaSai, aydXXea-Sat, ayairav (to be 
C07ltenf), ax^^a-SaL, dyavaKTUV, alSeiaSaL and aicrxyveaSat (to be 
ashamed), /AcrajmcXctcr-^ai, /xcra/AeXtt, 6pyL^€(rSai, ^apvvea-^at, pahios, 
j(aXc7rtijs <f>€p€LVy etc. 

X. II. 6. 4, 23. 6 ^(hs iroWaKis X«*Pf ' "^^^^ M^" fiiKpovs /xeyaXovs iroi&v, 
rovs 5e fxfyaXovs yuKpovs {rejoices to make the small great). Hier.8,4. Sia\ey6fX' 
tvoi re ayaK\6ficda to7s irporeTifi-nfievois fioXXov, ^ to7s iic rod tcrou r)/x7v 
ovai {we are proud to converse with those preferred in honor, etc.). Th. 1, 77. adi- 
Kovfjifyoi ol &y;bpwwoi fiaWoy opylCoyrai, fj fiiaC^fieyoi {men are more 
indignant when they are injured than when they suffer violence). 4, 27 {ol "AStrivam) 
MtT€/if\oi/To ray airovhas ov Sc^dfieyoi. 5.35. robs e/c rris yf}(rov Seff- 
Hiiras fi(rcfx4\oyro SLiroSe 5<oK6r e s. Eur. Hipp. 8. rific&fievoi x^^' 
povaiy {ol deol) aySfpuirwu inr6 {rejoice to be honored). Xaipu ffoi iX^Syri 
(I rejoice that you have come). PI. Rp. 475, b. birh fffiiKpoTepwy koL <pav\or4pu>f 
r tfiii) fifyoi ay air u a ly. 

40* 



474 SYNTAX. [^ 3l0t 

(d) Verbs signifying to he satisfied with, to he pleased with, to 
enjoy, to he full of, e. g. ripTrea^ai, c/XTrtTrXacT'^ai, fxearov eivcu, and 
the like. 

Od. a, 369. yvv fikv 5aiv{>fX€voi repTrcS/ied^o {let us delight ourselves in 
feasting). II. », 633. eirel rdpirTjaav is a\\r}\ovs 6p6u)VT€s (when they tfere 
satisfied at looking at each other). S.JO. C. 768. fxeffrhs ^v ^vfiovfievos. 
Eur. Ion. 924. ov roi ahv fiXeiriav ifjLirlirXafjLou it p6suiTov. Her. 7, 146. 
eV eai/ TouTo ^jjev fievo i eoxri TrArjpees. 

(e) Verbs signifying to overlook, to 2^ermit, to endure, to per- 
severe, to continue, also to he weary, to he exhausted, e. g. -^t- 
K(x^- £tg- i(f)opav, TrpoUaS^at {to neglect, tO permit'), avi^a^ax Kopre- 
petv, vTrofxiv€iv, Xnrapilv (perseverare), KafxvcLV, aTrctTretv, etc. 

Her, 7, 1 68. ov irep i ottt 4ri iari tj 'EWas airoWv fievri ( Hellas is not to be 
permitted to he destroyed). 101. e^'EAArji/es uTro/icvcouct x**iP<*^ ^A"*^ avTatt- 
p6fjievoi (will venture to withstand 7ne). 9.45. \nrap4fTf fitv ovrts [con- 
tinue to remain). 3, 65 (u/xiv iina-KriirTw) fiii ire piXSf7v r^v riyf fiowliiif 
adris is Mijiovs ir € p le \^ ovcray {not to permit the hegemony to return again to 
the Medes). Isocr. Archid. 125, 47. aireliroifiey tiv aKOvovris re kcU 
Xiyovns, et irdffas ras roiavras irpd^eis i^erd^oifify {ice should be weary 
of hearing and speaking). An. 5. 1, 2. aireipriKa ijS-n (rv<TK€va(6 /ifvos 
KOi fiaSi^av /coi rp^xuv kou ra SirAo <p4ptav kcX iy rd^et iwv kcu <pv\oucSt.s 
<pv\6.T7 U3V KoX fiaxo p-evos {I am iceary of jxicking up, walking, running, etc.)^ 
Th. 1, 86. Tovs ^v /xixaxovs oh rr t p io\p Ofif^a aS iKOVfif yov s {will not 
permit the allies to be injured). 2. 73. 'A^yaioi (pcuriyy iy ovityX inias rpotff- 
3-ot ad iKovfi4yovs. PI. Gorg. 470, c. /fJj K(Lnris <piKoy ivipa fVfpyfrS»y 
{do not be weary of doing good to a friend). For av€X€(ri^at with the Gen., 
see § 275, 1. 

(f) Verbs signifying to hcgin and cease, cause to cemse,to omit, 
to he remiss, e. g. ap\€a&aLy v7r<xp)(€iv ; vavnv, TravcaSai, Xiyycti', 
StoAAarretv, dTraXA.aTTCCT'^at ; fxiSUaSaty XciVca^ai, cKAetVco', CTrtAct- 
TTCcv, etc. 

Her. 6, 75. K\€Ofx4v7}S irapaXa^oov rhv crlSripoy, Hpx^TO (k tuv Ki^ufwr 
eavrhy Xu ficoiievos {began to mutilate himself). Ilauoj (re aSiKOvyra {I 
cause you to cease doing wrong). II avofjial at aSiKuiy {I cease to do wrong tc 
you). X. O. 1, 23. {at iTTi^vfilai) aiKi^ofi^yai rck erw/uaro ray ay^pwiroty icak 
rhs \^vx^s Kol TOVS otKOvs oijirore Xriyovtr iv, tsr &v ^px*^'*'"'*' o^hrwv {never cease to 
torment). Kal 6.\\a ye Sr) fivpia iir iXeiiru \eyccy {to omit in speaking). 'O 
aya^hs ovk iWelirerai ed iroiiov tovs evepyerovyras kavr6y {does not fail to 
do good to his l^enefactors). PI. Phileb. 26, b. 186, b. Ap^ofiai arh Trjs larpuciis 
\ 670)1/. Menex. 249, b. tovs TeXevrfitrcurras Tifioi<ra ovSerore ^»tXef»«i 
\t) irSXis). 



^ 3 10. J I HE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 475 

(g) Verbs signifying to he fortunate, to distinguish one's self, 
to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, e. g. evrv^etv, vik^v, Kpa- 
rCiVy Tp-raa-Satj ev Trotctv, a/xa/jraveiv, uBlkuv, etc. 

Her. 5, 24. cSeiroiTjo-os air iK6fieyos {you did well in coming, tJiat you 
came). Th. 1, 53. a54«e?Te iroXf/jLOv &pxovT €s koI airovSas KvovTes {you do 
urong in beginning uar, etc.). 2, 71. o u 5 ik o i a -n- o x e Tt e is yrjv t^iv UXaraiiuv 
crpanvovrts. 'Afiaprdveis ravra tt o i cj v {you are in fault in doing this). 
PL Pliaed. 60, c. cS y iiroirjffas avayLv^ff as fxe {you did well in reminding 
me). X. Hicr. 11. 14 «q. irarras {rovs <pi\ovs) ireipw vikuv eu iroiwv ihu 
ykp Tovs <pi\ovs Kpar^s (Z iroiuiv, ov fxr] <roi Uvumai avrcxeiv ol -KoXefjuoi {to 
endeavor to excel all in doing good). An. 2. 3, 23. o&x 7iTTr](r6 fic^a ev 
■rroiov vr f s {we will not l>c infei'ior in acts of kindness). 

(h) The verbs Trcipao-^at (especially in Herodotus), to try 
or attempt someth ing, Trapao-Kcva^ccr-^at (usually with w s and 
the Fut. Part.), and the Ionic phrases ttoXXos ei/xi, lyKct/xat, 
yiyvofjiaij to be urgent about, to laij it to heart, to consider im- 
porta?it. 

Ilcr. 7, 9. i-K f ip-f]b't\v iir fXavv uv eVi tovs &vSpas tovtovs {I attempted to 
march against). V\. Vhilcb. 21, a. iv aol ve ipufie^ a fiaaavi^ovTes raOra 
{let us try to examine titese). Th. 2, 7. oi 'A^vaioi tr ape (rKevd(ovTo ws 
vo\«firi<royrfs {were ftreparing to wage war). AVithoiit ws: 18 {oi UeXoirov- 
trfjaioi) irposfioKas irapfff Ktvd^ovr o ironia6iJ.(Voi. X. H. 4. 1, 41. irapeff- 
Kfvd^fTO ir opeva 6iJLev OS. Her. 7, 158. & Te\<av voWhs iveKeiro 
Xeywy {sjtoke urgently). 9,91. iroWhs tJv Xiaeo /xevos 6 ^eTpos {entreated 
earnestly, was all entreaties). 1, 98. ATjio'/o/s ^v iroWhs xmh iravrhs audphs 
atv(6tifyos {uns much praised). 7. 10, 3. irauToToi iyeuovro :S,Kv^ai 
9(6 fie vol 'luywv Kvcai rhy v6poy {earnestly entreated the lonians to break down 
the bridge). 

(i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use- 
ful, prof table, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to mij mind, and 
the hke. 

Tipi-Kii fjioi aya^(fi tyri and 070^^ elvai {it. is proper for me to he good). 
Th. 1, 118. iir-npunwy rhy d(6y, fl (sc. avToh) tt oXefiova iv &fieivov earai 
{whether it will be better for them to engage in war). PL Alcib. 1, 113, d. (TkottoS- 
<riy, brrorepa avyolaei irpdiaffiy. After these expressions, howeven the 
Inf. is more frequent, since the at .ion of the dependent verb is not considered 
as already attached or hclon-ring to the person, but as first resulting from the 
action implied in the above impersonal expressions. 

(k) Tlie verb e x ^ ' ^> "^ the sense of to be in a condition or state, 
has an active, middle, or deponent participle joined with it, ir 



476 SYNTAX. 310 

order to express the continued condition of the action (similar 
to the Latin aliquid periractatuni habere). 

Her. 3, 65. Sc^Aoj ^x'^^^'- "^'''V (t^'' vy^H-oJ^'^V^) KTrja-dfievoi (properly, 
they have themselves as those who have acquired the hegemony, i. e. they have acquirea 
and still possess, comp. principatum partum habent). X. An. 1. 3, 14. iroWk 
XP'fiy-ara exofJ-ey aj/T] piraKSr es {we have plundered much property and still 
have it). 4. 7, 1. x^p''-°' <^fouf Icrxvpa ol Taoxoi, ev oh Koi to iirnrideia irdyra 
elxoy avaK^KOfiiaixivoi {into ivhich having conveyed all their provisions they 
had them there, or, as this idiom is more commonly expressed in English, into 
which they had conveyed their provisions). Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. Kcd ^epas irpcpriu 
us (pikos els &eTTa\iaj/ i\^^v ^X^* KaraXafid)v. (On the contrary, ex« 
Keyeiv, I can say). 

(1) Finally, the participle is nsed as a complement with the 
following verbs : (a) Tvyx^av{ii, to happen; (/?) A.av-9^ava), to he 
concealed; (y) StarcXo), Staytyvoyaat, Siayco, to continue; 
(8) <f>S^dvo), to come before, to anticipate; (e) olxofiaLy to go 
away, to depart. In English, most of these verbs are often ren- 
dered by an adverb, and the participle connected with them, 
inasmuch as it contains the principal thought, by a finite verb. 

Her. 1, 44. 5 Kpolcos _<povea rod ttoiS^s i\dy^av€ fi6<TKav {Croesus nour- 
ished the murderer of his son unwittingly, without knowing it). A toyw, 
SiareAw, Ziayiyv ojxai KaXa ttoiuv (I ALWAYS, CONTINUALLY do what is 
honorable). 1, 157. e^x^'^° ^evy(iiv {he fled away). 6. o^xo/Mai Ipc piov {1 
carry away). Th. 4, 113. ervxov 6ir\7Tai iv rij ayop^ Ka^evSovre s ws 
irevTTjKouTa {about flfty hoplites were then, just then sleeping in the agora, hap- 
pened to be, were by chance, sleeping). Tvyxd.v<^ is always used, where an event 
has not taken place by our intention or design, but by the accidental coopera- 
tion of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things. In English 
it can sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance; often it 
cannot be translated at all. X. Cy. 1. 3, 12. xa>^-cTi»j/ ^v &Wov <p^d<rai touto 
IT oiri<TavTa {it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him 
in doing it). Her. 4, 136. e<p^7)crav ttoAA^ ol 'Skv^ui rovs Tlepffas ivi t^v y4- 
(pvpav iir ik6 fievoi {anticipated the Persians much in coming to the bridge, cayne 
to the bridge long before the Persians). Also the conjunction irplu ^ (or ^ alone) 
with the Inf. can follow (p^dueiu, e. g. Her, 6, 116. €<p^r](rav airiK6fievoiy 
irplv fj Tovs fiapfidpovs t^k€iv {they arrived before the barbarians came). Ob 
ip^dveiv followed by nai, koX eh^is, may be translated by scarcely — when, nc 
sooner — than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86 {ol Aa/ceSoi/iJwoi) ovk e<p^7iaav irv- 
^6 uevoi rov irepl t^jv ^A.ttik^v TroAe^uov, Kal -KdvTuv Tuy iWcav aixe\7]<rayTcs 
flKov 7]fuv ajxvvovvres {the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the war in Attica, than 
they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in 
the phrase, ovk Uv (p^dvois iroiwv ti {you should do nothing quicker,!, e. 
yoM cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly). X. C 2. 3, 11. ovk to/ <p^dvois 



^311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 477 

\4ywv; (you could not be too quick in speaking = speak quickly). 3. H, i. oU 
&i/ <f>^duoir\ e<pr), aKoXoStovvr e s ; {will you not follow immediately? = 
folbw immediately). ovkUv (pSfdvois irepalvwv ; [= statim reliqua conclude). 

Rem. 4. With XavSfdveiv and <pSrdve,y the relation is sometimes re- 
versed, the participles of these verbs being used as the complement of the 
goveraing verb. ^. Cj. 3. 3, 18. <p^di^oj^T es ^Sy Sjjodfi^v t^,u 4k^Ipcov yfju 
{we ravage their country, anticipating them = we anticipate them in ravaging their 
country). 6. 4, 10. ^ Se A. o 3- o S cr a avrhv arvvecpeiireT o {she followed unknown 
to him). 

Rem. 5. The Part, of the verb eluai, connected with adjectives or sub- 
stantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even 
when ehai is an essential word ; thus after Verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. 
Dem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. 6 tSws cvrpenus vfjiiis {knowing that you are ready). 54, 41. 
iav iv X€^povr\(T(a irv^rjcr^^ ^iKiinrov (sc. ovra, if you should learn that Philip 
is in, etc.); very often with (paiuoixai, not seldom also with Tvyxdvw, 
5 1 a T e A a>, S J o 7 1 7 v o ift a 1, e. g. X. C. 1 . 6, 2. a;/u7r<^STjTos re Koi a^nuv SiaT€\e7s, 



^ 311. Remarks on the interchange of the Participle 

and Infinitive. 

Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the 
Inf., yet with a different meaning. 

1. 'A K V e i J/ with a Part., implies both a direct perception by one's own senses, 
and an indirect one, though ceiiain and well-grounded ; with the Inf , it im- 
plies only an 2Hrf<rert perception obtained by hearsay, e.g. 'Akouw ahrov 
Sia\eyo^€Uov (i. e. ejus sermones auribus meis percipio). Kay.^vff7]s 
iJKOVffe rhy Kvpov auSphs ^St; eypa diax^^pi^C^f^^^'^''' ^^^ §310, 
4, (a). But X. Cy. 1. 3, 1. ISelv iire^vixei 6 'AcrTvdyr}S rhv Kvpov, on ijKOve 
{ex aliis audiverat) KoXhu Kaya^hu avrhu eJvai. 

2.ElS4vai and 4Tr ia-Taa-Srai with the Part., to know; with the Inf. tc 
know how to do something, to be able. OlSa {iTTiarafxai) ^eous a-e^o/j.- 
euos {I know that I honor the gods); but Eur. Hipp. 1009. tiriffrafxai 
Snovs (Tffieiu {I know how to honor the gods, I can honor the gods). S. Aj. 
666. ei(r(5/ieo-3o /lev St€o7s i'lKuv. — Also vofxiCeiv in the sense of 
to be assured, to know (e/SeVat), has a participle connected with it; still this 
occurs very rarely. X. An. 6. 6, 24. u6fx.i(€ 5', iav e^e vw aTroKTcivris . . 
itvSpa Lya!bhi/ aTro kt eiuuv {be assured that, if you slay me, you slay a good 
man). 

3.Mav^dveiv with the Part., to perceive ; with the Inf. to learn. MauStd- 
vo} <ro<phs &!/ {I perceive that I am wise); aocphs elvai {I learn to be 
wise). X. Cy. 4. 1, 18. /xa^-^crovTai ivavr lovir^ai {tols ivoKefiiois). 

A.Ttyvw(TK€iv with the Part, to know, to perceive; with the Inf^to learn, to 
judge, to determine. TiyuwaKu ayaStovs out as rots CTpariwrais rovs 
ayd>i/as{I know. I perceive that the prize-fights are useful, but ^070^0 us 
elvai, I judge that, etc.). X. Apol. 33 (5w«:paT7?s) €7^^ rov eri (w rh 
re^vdvai aina Kpelffffov elvai {judged that it ivas better for him to die 
than to live longer). Isocr. Trap. 361, d. kyvw trav Uaaiwva ifxol -jrapaSovyai 
rhy TToiSa {they concluded to give up, etc.). 

b.AliT^dyea^ai. with a Part, to perceive, to observe, to understand, to learn; 
with the Inf. to think, to imagine {opinari). AlffSrdyofial ae fxeya irap^ 
^(MiXii Svydfieyoy {I perceive that you have great injiuence with the fang) 



478 SYNTAX. [^311 

Th. G, 59. at<rbav6fJi€V0S avrovs /xeya irapa $cun\e7 Aapeia Svvaff^ai 
5, 4. ovKeri eiri tovs 6.\Xovs epx^Tai, aiffbSfievos ovk hv irei^eiv ainovi 
(OPINANS, se lis non esse persuasurum). 

&.Ilvj/^du€<r^aL with a Part, to hear, to perceive; with an Inf. it is used 
with the same difference of meaning as in the case of aKoveiv. Uvv^d- 
vo/xai (re Xeyoura {I hear you saying). Lys. Nicora. 184, 17. irvvbd- 
vofiai re avrhu Xeye iv, ws aae^w KoraXvctiv ras ^vaias (ex ALUS 
audivi). X. H. 1. 4, 11. aviix^i) c'Ti Karaa-KOTrrj tS>v rpiijpuv, &s iirvv^dve- 
TO Ao/ce5ai/iioj/fous avrd^i TrapaffKeva^eiu. Th. 5, 55. nv^ofxe- 
vol rovs AaK eSaifJLOviov s i^effrpareva^ai. 

7. McfiuTJa^ai with a Part, to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf. to con- 
template doing something, to intend, to endeavor. Meixi/rjfiou e5 iroi-ffo-as 
Toi/s TToAiTtts {I remember to have done good) ; ed voirtcrai (I strive, u-iah, to 
do good). X. An. 3. 2, 39. fi e fi vi) <r ^ co avrjp aya^hs eJvai (remember, 
strive, to be a man). Cy. 8. 6, 6 {ol crarpdiTai) '6 tl hv iy t^ y^ exdcTTT] KoXhv 
9} aya^hu ^, fj.eixv'fjcrovTai Kol Sevpo airoir dfiire ly, S. 4, 20. fi e /j. yf) a ■p 
StaKpi^Tiyai irepl tov KaWovs {thou wilt prepare to contend with me). 

8. ^ aivetr^ai with a Part, to appear, apparere, to show orxe^s self; with an Inf. 
to seem, vidkri. 'E<paiy ero KXaiuv {it was evident that he wept, or in 
English we often use the adverb, evidently : he evidently wept ; icpaivero 
K\aieiy {he seemed to weep). X. S. 1, 15. koI afxa \€yu>v ravra airenvTTfTS 
re {6 yeXaiTOTToihs) koI rfj <pwy^ acupus K\aiiiv i<paiy€To [he seemed to 
iveep, but did not weep). 

), 'E 1 K 6 // a t with a Part, in the Nom. to appear ; with a Part, in the Dat. to 
be like (§ 310, Rem. 2) ; with the Inf to seem ; 'Eol Kare rvpavviffi fmWoy, 
fj TToXiTeiais rjSS/xevoi {you appear to enjoy, you evidently enjoy, etc.) (comp. 
No. 8). PI. Rp. 444 J c. ioiKas okvovvti \eyeiy {you are like one in doiit^ 
in speaking = you seem to speak like one in doubt). X. Hier. 7. 1. eoiKcp 
e(pr}, fi4ya ri elvai ^ ri/jL-f} {honor seems to be something important). Cy. 1. 4, 
9. TToiet, Sttojs /SouAet • <tv yap vvv ye rjfiwy eoiKas fiaa i\eifs elyau 

10 'A77€AA«tj' Avith a Part, is used of the annunciation of acfj/a/ events ; 
with an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed. 
Dem. 01. 2. (3). 29, 4. airriyy eX^-q ^iXiinros vfuy ev Qpaicp rpiroy ^ re- 
raprov eras tovtX 'Hpa7oy reTxos TroXiopKuy (a settled fact). X. Cy. I. 
o, 30. 6 'Acavpios els tV X^P°-^ e fi^dWe ly ayyeWerai (whether he 
had made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain). 

11. AeiKuvyai and air o<p ai y e ly with a Part, to shoic, to point out ; with an 
Inf to teach. "ESe i^d ere aZ ikt]<t ayr a {1 should that you had done wrong). 
X. An. 2. 3, 14. atplKQVTO els Ku/ias, o^ey air e5 e i^ay at rjyefi6yes \afjifid- 
veiy TO e-Kirii^eia {where they pointed out to them that they might obtain pro- 
visions). Dcm. Cor. 271, 135. (^ fiov\ii Al<rx'^'^^) f*^ irp oS6Tr)y elyai 
Kal KaK6vovy vfuy air e(f>aiy ey {docuit). But the Inf is like\A-ise used 
with SeiKvyai, when the object of this verb is not to be represented as 
something perceived, but onlv as something possil>le. e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 17. 
KiySuyevaeis e7ri8e?|ai, ah /xev xpVf^'^'^s re koI <(>i\dSe\<pos elyai, eKeTyos 
Se (pavKos Te Kou ovk a^ios evepyeaias. 

12. Ar}\ovy with a Part, to make evident, to show ; with an Inf. to say, to an- 
nounce, to command. A77AW tre ad iKovyra {I make it evident or shots that 
you do icrong). X. Ag. 1,33. KT]pvyjj.aTi eSrjAoi;, robs fiey eKev^epias 
5 e [Jieyov 5 ws irphs avfi^axov avrhy tt ap e7yat {edicit, ut adessent). 

13. noielj/ with a Part, to represent [§ 310, 4, (b)] ; with an Inf (a) to - 
(b) to suppose, to assume. flotcS ere yeXwyra {I represent you lati<r. 
TloiS) <re yeXay {I cause you to laugh). PI. Symp. 174, c. &K\-nTop 
iir oiT}<r ey COfiripos) e\^6yTa rhv M e y e \ e w y hrl rijy boiyrjy {representi 



♦ 311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PAS.TICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 479 




covie to Phasis). 

14. A i <r X y " f <r ^ a t and alSeTa^ai with a Part, to be ashamed on account of 
something which one does ; with an Inf. to he ashamed or afraid to do something 
to abstain from doing something through fear or shame, to be prevented from doing 
something by shame. Al(rxvv o fxai KaKo. ir pdrr ut^ rhy (piXov {lam ashamed 




. , ^ ■ - hvyp(S ynpa irpo- 

Xciiroiv. ^X. S. 8, 33. tovtovs yap tiv ecpT] oUaSfai fidXiara al5e7(r^at. 
aW-fjKovs airoXeitreiv. 35. aldovvrai roiis Trap6i/Tas OTroAe^Tretj/. 
'R.Ij.9, 4.iras &u Tis alaxvv^e'n] rhv KaKhv avaK-qvov irapaXa^elv. 

l5.U€piopav [§ 310, 4, (e)] is sometimes, though seldom, constructed with 
an Inf. also, without any marked diflercnce, as avyxcope7u, iai/, e. g. Th. 4, 48. 
ou5' els lev ai t<pa(Ta.v Kara Svva/iiv ir e pi6\p€ a^ai ovdeua {they said they 
would not pennit any one to enter). 'Eir it peire ly, to permit, is commonly 
connected with an Inf, rarely with a Part. X. An. 1. 2, 19. ravrriu r^v 
Xcipav iirdrpe^pe Siapird(rai rols "EWrjacv { permitted the Greeks to plun- 
der). Isocr. Pac. t] ir6\is avTo7s ovk iir it pe\j/€i tt apa^aiv ov a i Thv 
v6fiov. The verbs ofe'xeo'i^at and invofxeve lu with the meaning of 
auc/ere, are constructed with the Inf. Her. 7, 139. KaTafxeivavTes aveff- 
Xovro Thv iiri6vTa jirl ttjj/ X(*>PVf Se^aa^ai {dared to withstand the enemy 
making an incursion into their country). 

16. "Apx**^"^"* "^'i^^ ^ Part., when it has the meaning to be in the beginning of 
an action (in contrast with the middle or end of an action), or also when 
the way and manner, in irhich the beginning of an action takes place, is to be 
stated ; with an Inf, to begin to do something, to commence {something intended^ 
aimed at), 'Kp^avT ra relxv o'lKoSo/jLovvTes and olKoSo/xeTv. Th. 

1, 107. i^p^avTO Kal to. fxaKpa Teixv 'A^r)va7oi oi Ko5ofi€7v. X. Cy. 8. 8, 

2. &p^ofxai S iSdff Kwv (k twv beiwv. C. 3. 1, 5. Tr6^ev ^ p^aT 6 (re 5t- 
Sacr/ceii/ ttiv (TTpar-q-yiav. 5, 22. 6ir6Te iraXaieiv ^p^CD fxav^dv eiv. 6, 3. 
fiirov 7]iJ.7v, €« Tivos fip^J? T7JJ/ ir6\Lv eve py eT e7v. 5, 15. 'A^vcuoi atrh 
ra)V Trarepuv 6,pxovT ai KaT a(ppove7v twv yepanepwv. 

17. Uaveiv with the meaning to hinder, is constructed with an Inf., e. g. PI. 
Up. 416, C. Tos olicf)(reis koI Ti]v &\\r]v ovaiav Toiavrirjv avTo7s TrapeaKevdff^ai 
(Se?), ^Tis iJLr\Te tovs <pv\aKas us apiarovs elvai iraixroi avrovs kt\. 

18. Ueipaa^ai "with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise [^ 310, 4, 
(h)] ; still this consti-uction is rare; with the Inf. to attempt to do something ; 
irapaaKevdC^abat is very often also connected with the Inf. The 
Ionic phrase iTavTo7ov ylyv ea^ai, is constnicted with the Ace. and 
Inf. Her. 3, 124. iravToir} eyeveTO fxr] cnr o8T]fXTJ(rai rhv UoXuKpd- 
Tea {she used every expedient, etc.). 

Remark. Bv comparing ^ 306 with § 310, it will be seen that the Inf., as a 
complement of "the verb, denotes something aimed at, intended, something ef- 
fected, while the participle, inasmuch as the idea expressed by it is prior to, or 
coincident ^\lth that of the verb with which it is connected, implies the actual 
existence of the idea designated by it. The participle, therefore, implies that 
the action denoted by it actually takes place, while the Inf. does not. 



480 SYNTAX. [i 312. 

§ 312. The Participle used to express Adverbial cr 
\Cir cumstantial Relations. 

1. In the s\Scond place, the Part, is used to denote such an 
attributive qualification of a substantive, as "will, at the same 
time, define the predicate of the sentence more exactly. In 
this case, the Part, expresses the adverbial relations of time, 
cause, motive or purpose, condition and concession, manner. 

The English often uses a Part, in this case, e. g. lie said laughing (yeXuv)] 
the city, besieged by the enemy, suffered much distress (ttSXis inrh ruv iroXefiluv iro - 
XiopKovfiepTj). Instead of the Part, the English often uses either a subor 
dinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, because, as, inasmuch 
as, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. Kvpos rijy 
tt6kiv k\<t)v avriX^ev {after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or ajler taking 
the city, etc.). 

2. In Enghsh we often translate the participle by a verb, 
connecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named 
conjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the 
participle agrees, or a pronoun referring to it. 

Ot iroXefiioi (pvyoures vTrh rwv woXefiluv 4Sia>x^(Tay (wHEX the enemy FLED, 
THEY were pursued by the enemy, or the enemy fled and were pursued). To?? 
Hep (Tais els r^v yrjv elsfiaXovaiv ol "EWrjves i]vavTiu>dT]<Tav (wHEN the 
Persians made an irruption into the country, the Greeks loent out against them). 

3. In the examples given under No. 2, the participle always 
agrees with a substantive or pronoun wliich is comiected \\'ith 
the principal verb, either as subject or in some other relation, and 
may then be called the dependent participle. But very often the 
substantive with ^vhich the participle agrees has no connection 
with any verb, but stands alone in the Genitive. This is called 
the Genitive absolute or indepe^ident, because it has no gram- 
matical connection with any other word in the sentence. 

X. 0. 4, 2. tS>v (T (o fidruv bi]\vvofji,e(ov, koI eu ^^X*" ■""oAu apf>u>(rr6Tep(u 
ylyyovrai {when the bodies are exhausted, the animal spirits becomi xceaJcer). 

Remark 1. The Genitive absolute can never be used when the action refers 
to the subject ; in this case the participle must always be made to agree with 
the subject. It is otherwise in Latin, on account of there being no active par 
ticiples in the past tense ; the Latin must, therefore, use the Abl. Absolute, 
even when the action refers to the subject, e. g. oi aTpaTiwrcu t^v ttoXiv Ka^e- 
\6vTes els rh (rTpaT6TreSov avexf^pW^v (milites, URBE DIRCTA, in castra se re- 
ceperunt, after the soldiers had taken the city, they returned to the camp). In this 



i 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 481 

example, the actions denoted by the participle and the verb, both refer to 
ffTpariwTai, and therefore the Gen. Absol. could not be used. 

Rem. 2. The reason why the Greeks chose the Gen. absolute, has been 
seen in treating of the Gen., § 273, Rem. 11. Subordinate clausee also may bo 
used instead of the participial construction, either for the sake of greater em- 
phasis, or for perspicuity. 

4. The Participle as described under 2 and 3, is used to 
denote : — 

(a) A specification of time, where the English uses subordi- 
nate clauses, with the conjunctions lolien, while, during, aftei\ 
since, or a substantive with a preposition. 

X. C. 1. 2, 22. TToAAoi Ttt xpVH-^-TC- aya\a>aav t es, wv Trpoa^e]/ a-jreixovTO 
KcpSwv, al<rxP°- vofil^ovrcs eJfai, tovtwv ovk arrexovTai {after wasting their money, 
after, when they had icasted). An. 'A /c o y <r o <r t ravTa rols arrpaTTfydis rh iv^vfn]p.a 
Xap^ev iSoK€7 (when tfie generals heard this, on hearing this, after hearing this, they 
thought the device ingenious). So the frequent circumlocution with Troi^cras 
in the sense of thereuporu Her. 6, 96. ive-rrpricrav koI to. Ipa Kal ttju ttSXiu • ravra 
5e TTO lit ffavr € s M ras &\Xas yfjaovs aydyoyTO (tuerbutoix they set sail for 
the oUier islands) ; or with the repetition of the Part, of the preceding word. 
Her. 7, 60. Trij/Tas TouTo; Ty Tpoiru) i ^r] pi^ /mti (T av apib y.-{]cr avT €S Se /cara 
tbvea SifTaaaov [in this way they numbered all; thereupon they arranged the 
army by nations). Gen. absolute, X. H. 5. 1, 9. vav fxax'-o-s nphs t)]v a^KT]V7]v 
•jj€ V fjLiVT] s, TfTTopas Tpffipds Xafi^dvei Toipyunras {a naval battle having been 
fought by moonliglU^. 4.58. viro<paivoyros rod ^pos, 'AyTjaiXaos kXlvott^- 
•r)]s ?iv {when the spring appeared). II. o, 88. o6tis i/xev ^uvros koL eVt Xi3-o;/2 
iipKopiiv 010 aoX KoiKrjs irapa irqval ^apeias x^^P"-^ eVotcrei (ivhile I live, as long 
as Hive and look ujion the earth). 

Rl.v. 3. The following participles, which may be sometimes translated in 
English l)y adverbs, also belong here : (a) apx^^^^t'os, in the beginning, origi- 
nally. Th. 4, 64. air ip Kal apxofievos eJirou. (This is to be distinguished 
from op|a^6vos air 6 tip as, which may be translated, especially, before all. 
The Part, ap^ajx^vos agrees, for the most part, in Number, Gender, Case, with 
the substantive which is more exactly defined, e. g. PI. Rp. 600, e. ovkovv ti^w- 
fiev airh 'Op.T] pov dp^ajiivovs Tvavras rovs iro it] t ikov s fj.i/j.r]Tas eiSa>- 
\wv apfTTis ihai {that all the poets, jiarticularly Ilomer, etc.). Sometimes, ]iow- 
cvcr, tlie Part, ap^aixevos agrees with the subject of the sentence. PI. Symp. 
173, d. 5oK€rs /xoi aT6x»'<is iravTas av^piowovs ct^\iovs riyeicr^ai ttAV ^w/cparous, 
tiTrb (Tov ap^aixevos, you seem to me to think all men unhappy except Socrates, 
particularly yourself). — ($) TeXevruu, properly ending, finally, at last. PI. 
Rp. 362, a. rcKivrSiv izavra Kara ira^wu ai/c(TKLvBv\ev^r}(TeTai. X. An. 6. 3, 8. 
reKevTwvTfs Kal airh rod vSaros eJpyou (rovs "EWw^s) ol GpuKes {at last the 
Thracians kept the Greeks from the icatcr). — (7) Aiakiirwu^ xp^^y^ ^fif 
some time, after a while, subsequently, or SioA. ttoXvv, oXiyov xp-i eTr^to-xwi/ ttoXvv 
Xpivov, pLiKp6u. PI. Phacd. 59, e. oh iroXvv olv xpoi'ov iiriffx^^ W^- 

Rem. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, when 
the subject can be readily supplied from what goes before, or when the subject 
is indetinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words irpdyfxaTa xP'hfJ-^'^a, 
iv^puTToi, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. Th. 1, 116. Uepi- 

41 



482 SYNTAX. [^ 312. 

» 

kXtjs wxero Kuril, rdxos iirl Kavvov /col Kapias, isayyeX^ ivrcov, Zri^oivKracu 
vries in avTovs TrXeovariu (it having been announce^that Phoenician ships were sailing 
against them). X. Cy. 1.4, 18. ar-^ /nav^eyruv Se t^j 'Aarvdyei, on ■jroXffiioi 
elffiv eV rij x<^P? i^efior]^et, Kal ahrhs rrphs to opia {it having been signified to 
Astyages). 3. 1, 38. hiaCKrjvovvrav 5e (sc. ahrwv) fJHTo. rh Seiiruoi'f iTr-fjpeTo 
6 Kvpos. Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. (ra(pa}S dT]\w^4pT o s, on iu reus vaval 
ruv 'EW-fjvcov ra irpd-yiiara iy^vero {it having been made very evident that). Ck)rn.p. 
the Latin cognito, edicto, petito, etc., instead of postquam cognitum est, etc. 

Rem. 5. In order to define the time more exactly, the preposition iiri is 
frequently connected with the Gen., yet only when the Part, is in the Pres. 
tense, e. g. 'EttI Kvpov fiaa iXevopros {while Cyrus washing). See ^ 296, 

1, (2). The relation of past time is sometimes made more definite by the prep- 
osition IX era, after, with the Ace. e. g. Her. 6. 132. fiera Se ev TAapa^Sovt 
rpufxa yevS/xevov iSliXndSris av^ero {after the slaughter made at Marathon). 
See § 294, II, (2). The relation of indefinite time expressed by about, nearly, 
is indicated by 1)176 witli the Ace, e. g. virh rrjv Trpurrju iire \^ov trap 
vvKra [§ 299, III, (2)], the coincidence or contanporaneousness of one thing with 
another, is expressed bj d/xa with the Dat., e. g. d/x fj/xepa d lacpwc Kova-rj 
{as soon as daybreak); d/xa r^ cirai oLKfxd^ovr i {sirnulac frumentum adul- 
turn est). 

Rem. 6. In order to determine more exactly the relation of time, temporal 
adverbs are often used with the dependent participle and the Gen. absolute : 
avr i Ka, ev^vs, i^ai<pviq s, fxera^v, d/xa. PL Rp. 328, C. ei/^iis ovv fxe 
lb 03V 6 KecpoKos 'n(nrd^er6 re Koi elirev {simul ut me conspexit). Lys. 207, a. 6 
Mevei^evos eK rris avKrii fxera^v irai^cou elsepx^rai {while he played). Phaed. 
77, b. Uttcos 1X7) d/xa a-K 0^ vt](T ko vr s rod dy^pwirov Siao'Keddi'vvrai t} 
rpvxv {as soon as man dies). Her. 9, 57. /cal dfxa Kara\a$6vr e s irposeKearo 
a(pL {as soon as they had come up with the enemy, they pursued them closely). Th. 

2, 91. eiraidiviC^v re d/xa irXeovr es {inter navigandum, while sailing). 

• • 

Rem. 7. In order to denote more clearly and emphatically the succession of 

time and a consequence or result, the following adverbs are very often appended 

to the predicate of a sentence: evrav^a, oi;t«(s), ovrw Sii, wSe. X. C. 

3, 10, 2. iic TToAAwi/ (Tvudy ur e s to e| eKaarrov KdWicrra, our us o\a rek 
ffcafxara koAo iroLelre (paiuea^ai {collecting from many the most beautiful features of 
each, IN THIS way you make the entire foinis appear beautiful). 

(b) A cause or reason, ^vhere the English often uses subor- 
dinate clauses with since, because, as, inasmuch as, or a substan- 
tive with a preposition. 

X. C. 1. 2, 22. tro'SXoX rh. xP^JMOto dvaXuffavres, S>v irpSar^ev aireixovro Kephcev, 
altrxpo. V fxl^ovr es etvai, rovrav ovk air exovrau {many having squandered their 
estates, did not abstain from those gains from which they before abstained, because 
they accounted them base). To emr-qdeia exoiev e/c rrjs X^P°-^i iroKKris Koi dya^s 
oij(Tr]s {they might obtain supplies from the place, since, because, inasmuch as, it was 
extensive and fertile). 

(c) A motive, pwpose, or object, where the EngUsh uses the 
Inf. with to, in order to, or a finite verb with that, in order tJiat^ 
so that. Generally, only the Fut. Act. Part, is used to denote 
this relation; sometimes also the Fres. Act., {^266, Rem 3). 



$ 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 482 

This usage occurs most frequently with verbs of going, coming 
sending. 

Her. 3, 6. rovro epxofiaL (ppdauy {I have come to say this). 6, 70. es Ae\ 
(povs xpV(r6fj.euos t(^ xpV<rTVpiv Topeuerat {he goes to Delphi to consult tht 
oracle, in order to, that he may consult, etc.). X. C. 3. 7, 5. ci ye Sidd^wp 
wpurjfiai. Uf/xiru ae xi^ovra [I send you that you may, to, in order to, say). 

(d) A condition, where the English often uses a subordinate 
clause with if; or a concession, where the Enghsh uses a sub- 
ordinate clause with although, though. 

X. Cy. 8, 7, 28. rohs tpiKovs ev epyer ovvt es /tai roiis ix^po^s Svvijcrea-^e ko- 
kdCeiv {if you confer benefits on friends, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 41, 2. tS>v a^Xr}- 
rwu Sis roaavTr)u f>d)fMr]v \a$6vTci)v, ovSev hv TrAeov yevoLTO to7s &\\ois, kvo s 
Se auhphs e6 (p povfj cravTos, oTravres &«/ airoXaiKTeiav oi fiouX6fievoi koivwvuu t7}s 
iKiivov hiavoias. X. Cy. 3. 2, 1 5. ws oXiya 5v i/dfifvo i irpoopav ^v^pcoirot nepl 
Tov fifWovros TToAAa iirixfipovfiei/ irpdrreiv {although men can foresee little, yet, 
etc.). 

Rem. 8. When the Part, expresses a concession, the particles Kai (neg. ovBe, 
firiSf), Ka'nrep, Ka\ ToCra, are commonly joined with it. X. An. 1. 6, 10. 
Trpos€Kvyr}(Tau (^OpSyTtfv) k aiwe p elS 6t€ s, on 4ni ^avdrco &yoiTo {although they 
saiv, tJtat), Eur. Ph. 1618. ouk ftv Trpodoirjv ovSeirep tt pdacwv KaKws. PI. 
Rp. 404, b. "Ofx.rjpos iv rati tuv rjpaiwu karidaeffiv ovre Ix^^criv avrovs e<TTi^, k a I 
Tavra iirl ^oXdrrT) eV 'EX\r]STr6i/TU} ot/ras {andthat too, thoughthey were, etc.). Tavra 
in such connections, may often be governed by the verb Troiew : and he did this, 
although they were, etc. The words '6ixu>5, e?To, Kara, eTretra, k&tt e ir a, 
are often added to the predicate of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. vcTepoi Se dTri- 
K6fi€V0i T7J5 (TvixfioXris l/xeipovTO o/jlcos ^eija-aa-^ai rovs Mt']5ovs {although they 
came after the battle, still they desired to see the Medes). PI. Charmid. 163, a. v-n o- 
^cfifvos (rw(ppo(Tvt/rju eli/ai rh to, eavTOv irpdrreiv, eTretra ovSey <p7](ri KuXveiu 
Kal reus T^ Tuv 6,\\a}v trpaTTovTas aacppoyeTu. "Ofxas is often in poetry 
joined to a Part., e. g. Aesch. S. 712. Trei^ov yvyai^l Kaiirep ov at^pywv op.ws, 
or (what also sometimes occurs in prose) is placed before the Part., e. g. PI. 
Phaed. 91, c. Sj^u/iias <po^etrai, fJ.^ f) ^puxh Sjuws Kal ^et6Tepoi/ Kal KaXXiou ou 
TOV (TufiaTos iTpoaiToXX{rnrai {that the soul, though more god-like and beautiful than 
the body, will neverthekss perish). 

(e) The manner and means, where the English sometimes 
uses a participial noun with a preposition. 

VeXuv elirev {he spoke laughing). X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. XT]~iC6iJ.evoi C<^(np 
{raptu vivunt, they live by plundering). C. 3. 5, 16. irpoaipovvTai fiaXXou outu> 
KepSalpeiu an aXXriXwv, fj cvvaxpeXovvT es ainovs { prefer to gain some advan- 
tage from each other, rather than by assisting themselves). Isocr. Panath. 241, d 
Toi;s''EAA7jvos eSi5o|ai/, hv rpSirov SioiKovvres ras aurwv irarpiSas Kal irphs ovs 
iroXefjLOvvTes fieydXrju t V 'EXXdSa iroL-fja-eiav. So often xp^f^^^'os with the 
Dat, where the English may use the preposition with, e.g. TroXXfj rix^V 
Xpuixevos rovs iroXe/xiovs evUriaiv {conquered the enemy with great tact). 

Rem. 8. Here belongs the phrase Xrjpels ex^v, or in a question, rl 



484 SYNTAX. [$ 312. 

A rj p e7s e X &> J/ ; i. c. you Jceep trifling so, or why do you keep trifling so ?, excu here 
expressing the idea of duration. PI. Gorg. 490, e. TroTa vTrod-f^fj-aTa (pXv-apeis 
€ X « »' ; { what shoes are you always prating so much about ? ) . Here belong also the 
Part, ^e p6 fjievos, and (p€pa>v used intransitively, summo studio, raaximo impetu, 
dedita opera, with verbs of motion. Her. 8, 91. 'oKas Se nves Toys ' ASrnvaiovs 
Siacpvyoieu, (pepS/JLevo i (cum impetu delati) is^-nnrrov is tovs Atyiurjras (as often 
as they escaped the Athenians, rushing on violently they fell into the hands of the 
Aeginetae). 8,87. (i/avs) SLWKO/xeur] virh rrjs 'Attiktjs <p4pov(ra iuefiaXe vrjicpiXiri 
(cum impetu aggressa est amicam navem, being pursued by the Attic ship, made a 
violent attack on a friendly ship). Aeschin. Ctes. 82. es tovto <p4puiv irepiecTTrja-e 
TO. irpdy/mTa (he designedly brought things to this state). Comp, ib. 90 and 146. 

Rem. 10. In like manner the Greek employs the participles ex'^^'j &yuv, 
(pepwu, \a^u>v, where the English may use the preposition with; ex«J' is 
used both of animate and inanimate objects, which may be in the possession of 
any one, dyccu of animate objects, (pepwv of inanimate, Xa^wv of both. e. g. X. 
Cy. 1. 3, 1. ^px^TO-i- r] MavSavT] irphs rhp irarepa koI rhv Kvpov rhv vlhu exovca 
(loith her son Cyrus, etc.). So 6 Kvpos ^i<pos (pcpcav irpos^Xcurei', 'i-mrov dyuv 
^A^ej/, iTTTreas Ka^ibv rovs TroAe/xious KaT^biw^eu. The Homeric and Poetic 
language often connects the participles ex'^*'> (p^pt^v, Xa&wv. and ayav with verbs 
of giving, placing, etc., in order to present the idea of the action that preceded 
the giving and placing, graphically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer. 
11.97, 305. SoJKe |i<^os a.pyvp6r]Xov avv KoXe^ re <pepu>u kcH iv^iaTcp reXafiuvt 
(bringing he gave, he brought and gave a sword studded with silver). 

5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Accusative is also used, 
but for the most part only when the Part, has no definite sub- 
ject, consequently where the verb from which the participle 
comes, is impersonal, e. g. i^ov (from e$ea-TL, licet), quiiin liceat, 
liceret, tvJiile, when, since it is or was alloived; or with impersonal 
phrases, e. g. ala-xpov ov {quwn turpe sit, esset, ivhi/e, because, 
since it is or was shameful^ The idea of extension in time, which 
is expressed by the Ace. (^ 279, 6), is, in this construction, trans- 
ferred to the 5i:«^e or condition of an object; the conjunctions 
ivhile, when, express tliis corresponding relation. 

(a) Accusative absolute. PI. Menex. 246, d. t]iuv i^hy Cn^ l^h KoXas, koXus 
aipovfxe^a /jLciXXov TcXevrav (since it is not in our poicer to live honorably). Protag. 
358, d. OTav avayKaa^ Zvolv kukoIv rh erepov aipf7cr^ai, oi/Sels t5 fi^l^ov aip^ffe- 
Tot, i^hv rh iXarrov (alp^laStai), no one will cJioose the greater, when it is in his 
power to choose the less. Her. 1, 129.''Ap7ra70J, irapehy avrcp fiatriXda yeyea^cu, 
&XXq} Trepie'iS-Tj/ce rh Kparos (when it teas in his power to become a king). 5, 49 
irapexov (quum liceat) Trjs A<ri7}s irda7]s Spx«»' eHTrereajs, &XXo ri cup-qa-eo-^f '^ 
Th. 5. 14. (01 'A^-TjvaToi (Uere/xeAovTO, on fieTa to. iv UvXa (yevoiJieya)^ koXus iro 
J o (Tx <^ »'> ov ^vve$r)(rav (when a favorable opportunity presented itself). So virip- 
Xov, quum liceat, liceret; heov, quum opus (necess-^) sit,esset; S6^av airroTs (quum 
lis visum sit or esset, when it pleased them, when they had decreed) ; So k avv (quum 
videatur, videi'etur)\ ir po srjKov (qman deceat, deceret). Passive participles: 
Th. 1 125 SeSoyfxivov Se avrols, ev^vs fxey aSvvara ^v iirixeipeTv arapcur- 
tceiot > od(rip (and though they had determined, it vxts not possible for them, etc.). Elov 



I 



9 312.] THE PARTICIPLE. 



485 



fieuou {quum dictum sit, esset). Adjectives with 6v, e.g. SriXov 6v {quum 
appareat, apjKireret) ] &SnKoy 6v, Swarhv ov, advuarov 6u. Also some- 
times without 6v,e.g. Sri\ov, avayKa7oy. 

(b) Accusatives absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs usu- 
ally have no subject joined with them in the Ace. AbsoL, yet a neuter pronoun, 
not a substantive, may be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66. 
Tudra yivSfieva, irev^ea fxeyd\a rohs Alyvirriovs KaTa\a,ul3dvei. [lohen this 
is done, the Egyptians are filled with great grief). Th. 4, 125. ¥,^ a/xcporepois 
fi\v ZoKovv a.vax<^p^'tv, Kvpablv Se ov^ev {sed quum nihil decretum esset), ix^- 
povv 4k oIkov. X. H. 3. 2, 19. So^avra Se ravra koL irepauSi ivra, to. (m^u 
oTTparevfiaTa airriXbeu {when these things had been agreed upon and accomplished). 

Rf:M. 1 1 . The Genitives ahsohite, however, are more frequent than the Acc.,when 
a neuter pronoun is joined with the impersonal verb. X. H. 1, 1, 36. S (J | a i/tos 
r oiiT ov wx^To [hac re decreta, this having been agreed to, ichen this had been, etc.). 
7, 30 and 5. 2. 24. So^dur cav tovtu v. Cy. 4. 5, 53. t ovtov cvp^okovv- 
ros (ace. to the best MSS.). 4.5,53. tovtov outcos €Xovtos. Also 5o|- 
av ravra (from eSo^e ravra) occurs. X. An. 4. 1, 13. So^au ravra, iKT}' 
pv^av ovru iroidy {when this was approved, they gave orders by the herald to do ac- 
cordingly). With such impersonal verbs as contain the subject in a measure 
in themselves, the Gen. is used, e. g. vouros, aaXiri^ovros [§ 238, 5. (b)]. 
Elsewhere the Gen. but very seldom occurs with impersonal verbs and phrases, 
e. g. X. Hipp. 4, 2. aS ii] A. ou ovros, ei ktA. .''' 

6. The particle of comparison w s, is connected both with the 
dependent Part. (^ 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Ace 
absolute, when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be in- 
dicated as a representation, as a subjective vieiv, opinion, oi 
purpose of the actor or speaker. This w? has the same signifi- 
cation as a Part, of a verb of thinking or saijivig, followed by 
an Inf , or Ace. with an Inf The Enghsh can express this ws 
by the expressions thinking, intending, ivith the intentiofi of, 
saijing, or by as though, as if under the pretence that, because. 

(a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1. 1, 1. olrvpavve7v i-mx^ip-fia-avres, kUv otto- 
covovv xp^vov &pxoyres Siayeuwvrai, ^av/xdCovrai, us <ro^oi re kuI evrvx^'is ye- 
yiVT}fjLevoi (properly, as those are admired, who are wise men = voixiC^lJ-^vot 
ffo<poi re Ka\ evrvx^'ts yeytvija^ai, thought or reputed to be wise). PI. Rp- 329, a. 
ayavaKrovffiu, d: 5 fxeydXav rivwv air effr e pri fievo i (i.e. rjyovfj-evot fiey. r. 
iiwearepTia^ai {as if they had been deprived, thinking they had been deprived). X. 
An. 1. 1, 11. 'EKe\ei/o-e {Up6^evov) \afi6vra avZpas on TrXeicrrovs Trapayeuia^ai, 
is isUei<riZas fiovK6ixevos ar pareiecrbai {pretending that, under the pretence 
that, saying that, he wished to march against the Pisidians). 'ns is very often 
connected with the Put. Act. Part., when a purpose in the mind gf another 
is expressed. X. An. 1. 1, S.'Apra^^p^vs (rvWafi^dpei Kdpop &s dTroKreyuu 
{an-ests Cyrus for the purpose of putting him to death). The writer here states the 
view or purpose as it existed in the mind of Artaxerxes, and not his own vie^ 
of the matter. So also very often with trapaffKevdC^ff^ah § 310, 4, (h). 

41# 



486 SYNTAX. [$ 312 

(b) Genitives absolute. X. H. 7. 5, 20. irafrfiyyeiKev avrois irapaxTK^vi^effbcu, 
a)s fidxHS i(rofji.4j/7js (i. e. \eywv /xtixrj;; e(recr<&-at) {he commanded them 'to pre- 
pare themselves, because, as he said, or saying that, there was to be a battle). 5. 4, 9. 
iK-fipvTTov i^idvai 'Trduras Qrifialovs, ws tuv rvpavvav r e^yedr oov {quia iyranni 
mortui essent, because, as he said, the tyrants were dead). Th. I, 2. is 'luviav va-re- 
pov, us ovx iKauris ovffTis Trjs'ATTiKrjs, awoiKias i^eirefjLipav (i. e. yo fjLi^ovre s 
ovx lKavr\u elvai) {afterward sent colonies to Ionia, thinking that Attica was not large 
enough). 

(c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5. 2, 12. 6 5e ro7s ireXracrra?! ttckti -rrap-fjy- 
76\A6 ZL7}'YKvKo}fj.evovs Uvai, o) s, 6ir6Tav (TTjiM-fjinj, aKovri^eiv SeTi(rov {he com- 
manded all the peltasts to advance, ready to shoot, saying, that it would be necessary 
for them to hurl their javelins, etc.). PL Rp. 425, a. rdls Tj/xeTepois Traialv iv' 
vofjiUTepov ev^vs TraiStSy fie^eKreov, & s, irapavS/jLOV yiyvofi€V7}s avTTJSy ivvofiovs re 
Hal ffTTOv^lovs &vdpas av^dvecr^ai adivarov ov. Sowy e|oy, a>s irapov, etc. 

(d) Accusatives absolute. X. C. 1. 2, 20. hih koI tovs vleis oi irarepes airh 
ruv TTOUTipoiiv av^pdoircau e'ipyovaiv, w s t^ v fi€V rav xpy](TTwv 6 ^iKiav 6.(TK7](Tiv 
oZcrav Tjjs ap^rris, t^v 5e t«j/ iroyrjpSJv KaTaXvcriv {assured that, knowing that, 
the intercourse with good men leads them to practise virtue). 3, 2. eijx^To 2«k- 
pdTTjs TTphs TOVS ^eous airKus raya^h, di^ovai, w s tovs ^eov s KdWicrra 
€ld6Tas {thinking that, convinced that, the gods knew what was best). This con- 
struction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the 
one mentioned in No. 5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but 
depends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by ws. 

Rem. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with ws, oc- 
curs with the verbs dSevai, iTrla-Ta<r^ai, yoe7t/, ex^"' yvwyLtiv, Sia- 
Keia-^ai Tr\v yycafxrjp, ^poi'Ti^etj', also sometimes with Xe^eij/, and the 
like verbs, with which, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. of the substan- 
tive with a Part, or tlie Ace. with an Inf., would stand as the object. The 
consequence resulting from the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by 
ovTa}{s) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3, 6. as ifiov oZv Iovtos, ottt} tn' 
Kal viJ.e7s, 1/ TO) ttjj' yy(t}V7)v ex ere {as if then I shall go. etc., seeing then that 
I shall go, so form your opinion, i. e. be assured that I shall go wherever you go, me 
iturum esse, quocunque etiam vos, statuite). Cy. 2. 3, 15. ws ovv ifiov ye koI 
ayuviov/j-euov Kal, oirolos &v tis S), Kara t^v a^iav jue Ti/xav a^ i cixrovr o s, 
ovTus, e(pr], S> Kvpe, ylyva^cTKe. PI. Cratyl. 439, c. h lavorib evT es is 
l6uT wv re airdvT (av del Kal peSyrav { reputantes, omnia semper ire et Jiuere ) . 

Rem. 13. Instead of ws, SsTrep {quasi) is sometimes joined with the Part 
In order to bring out emphatically an d>jective {actually existing) ground or 
reason, the particles aTe (are Stj), seldom oTa, oTov (in the Ionic -nTiters. 
also, &sTf), in the sense of inasmuch as, because, quippe, are connected with the 
participle. Her. 6, 59. are itvkuov i6vTOs tov iXcreos, ovk. wpav oi iurhs 
Tous ckt6s {because the grove was thick). X. An. 4.8, 27. are ^ewfiet up 
T civ kraipuiv, ttoW^ (piXovsiKia iyiyvsTo {because the hetaerae were lookinq on, 
there icas much rivalry). 5. 2, 1. ol KoXx^'j "■'''^ 4 KTreirrcoKSTes [^k] tojj 
oIkiwv, ttqAAoi ^(rav a^pooi /cat virepeKdb^rjvTo im roov &Kpwv {inas}nuch as they had 
been driven out of their houses, etc.). Tli. 2. 5. i)aav kcu 'dvSfpccTroi Kara tovs aypovs, 
oTa dirposhoKTiTov kukov iu eip-fjUT) yeuofjLevov. PI. Charm. 153, a. olov Sti 
Xpovov acpiypLey s a(r(jt.eyw5 ya etii rds ^vyrj^eis Biarpifids. 



$ 313.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 



487 



§ 313. Special 'peculiarities in the Participiao con- 
struction. 

1. The Nom. of a Part, often refers to a preceding substantive in the Dat, 
Ace, or Gen., when the Dat., Ace, or Gen. in the preceding clause denotes the 
object in a grammatical point of view, but the subject in a logical respect, e. g. 
in SoKet tioi = iyci} riyovfiai, I think. This is a species of Anacoluthon 
(^ 347, 5). 

(a) Dative.^ Th. .3, 36.^ e5o|ei/ avTo7s (i. e. i\pT](f)i(TauTo, voted) ov tous ira- 
p6vTas tx6vov airoKT€ii/ai, aWa Kal robs airavras MirvAvvaiovs, iir iKaAovvre s 
tV ^AAtji/ aTToa-raait k. t. A. (as Sallust.Jng. 102. popido JRomano melius visum = 
rati). 6, 24. epws eVeTrecre iraa-iv (= iire^viuiovi/ irdvres) o/xoicos eKirXeva-ai- 
To7s iJ.kv TT pea ^vT 4pois ws . . KaTa(TTpe\l/op.4voLS i(p' & eirXeou, ..to7s S' ii/ 
7}\iKia. . . eveAiTiBes oj/res (rcv^aeaSrai. — (b) Accusative. Eur. Hec. 970. 
alSus fj.' ex^* (= alSovfiai) 4u ToUSe ir67ixca rvyxaj/oua-' tV elfii vvv. — (c) Geni- 
tive. Her. 4. 132, Aapeiov rj yvu/xr) e-rju (= iyiypcoaKcv) eiKd^oov. Th. 4, 
23. Ttt Treol HvXov inr aficpor e po}}/ Kara Kparos inoKe aeTro (= ra irepl IT. 
afM(p6Tepoi 4Tro\e/j.ovy), *A^7]ua7oi /xkv . . ti]i/ vricrov 7re/)*7r A. eovTes .. , IleA- 
OTTowTja- loi 5e iv rfj 'Hireipw (Tt paTOTr ed evSfMeuot (comp. § 266, 3). — 
Sometimes also the Ace. and Dat. of the Part, is constnicted according to the 
se7ise of the preceding phrase or clause, and not according to its grammatical 
form, e. g. S. El. 479, sq. vireaTl fioi ^pdaos advirvouv KKvovcav apricos 
oveipdrwv (instead of ^pdaos jx exei KKvovaav). Th. 1, 62, ^v yuufiri 
Tov ^Apicrreus (= e5o ^e t^ 'A p t (T t e 7) rb fjieu fxe^' eavTov CTpaT JttfSoj/ 
exovT I iv Tcp 'Ic^fif iiriTrjpeTy tovs 'A^vaiovs. 

Remark 1. On the Nom. of the participle in the partitive apposition, seo 
§ 266, 3. — The Nom. of the Part, sometimes stands in a sentence alone, with- 
out a finite verl), so that the Part, apjxirentli/, but only apparently, takes the 
place of the finite verb. The finite verb must then be supplied from the pre- 
ceding or following sentence. Her. 1, 82. AaKeSai/iioyioL ra ivavTia tovtuiv 
edeufo V 6 flow ov yap ko fitovTfs Trph tovtou airh tovtov KOfiav (sc. v6[j.ov 
f^evro). So also conjunctions stand without a finite verb, e. g. €t, idu, oTau, 
etc. X, C, 2. 1, 2.3. 6p(i> <re airopovvTa, TToiav 6'5hv eVt rhv fiiou r pdinj ' iau ovv 
ipX <t>i\r]V Tronja-d/xcvo s (scil. ttji/ iTrl rhu ^iov b^hv rpdirri). In very many 
passages, however, the Part, may be explained by inserting elpii. 

2 The genitives absolute sometimes occur where the subject of the participle 
is not different from the subject of the predicate or an object of the predicate ; here 
it is to be noted, that the "subject of the participle is often wanting, since it can 
be easily supplied (§ 312, Rem. 4). The reason of this peculiar construction 
is commonly found in the efl:brt to express the member of the sentence with 
greater emphasis. 

Instead of the Nominative. Th. 3, 13. fio-nSfnffdvrwv vfiwu irpo^v/xas 
v6Kiv Trpos\r}\pe(T^€ {you aiding, you will more readily, etc.). 70. Kal is Xoyovs 
KaraffTavTuv (KepKvpaiwv) ixp-ncpiffavTO KepKvpaToi {the Corcyraeans having^ 
had a coiwersation, determined). X. C}'. 1.4, 20. ravra etirovTos avrov eSo|6 
Ti (sc. avTos) \4yeiu ru 'Aa-rvdyei. Instead of the Accusative. Her. 9, 99. ot 
:S.d/xioL, a-KiKOixiwuv 'ASr-q i^ aiwv aixi^aXcorasu . . tovtovs Xva-dfievoi irdu- 
ras a-noTri^nrovai . . is ras 'A^vvas {ichen the Athenian captives had come, the Sami- 
ans having ransomed them, send all back to Athens). Instead of the Dative. ^Th^ 
1, 114. Kal is avT^v S la $€ $7} k or os f/Sr? He piKAeovs . .jiyyeX^rri avr^ 
{n€piK\f7) {ivhen Pericles had aossed over into it, it ivas announced to him). 

Rem. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, where 
the Gen. of a Part, follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a Part, follows 
a Gen. ; then instead of the possessive Gen., Homer sometimes uses the Dat 



M 



48a SYNTAX. [§§ 314, 3l5 

Od. i, 257. 7) flip S' avre Kar€K\d(r^ <piKov ^rop S e Krayrcov (p^6yyor re ^apvt 
avTov re TreKcopov {^^ rjfxajv ^rop). 458, sq. t^ k4 ol iyK4(pa\6s ye dia (nreos 
&Wvdis aKXri ^eivo jxev ov paioiro -rrphs ovS^'i. II. |, 140.' At pelSr], vvv dr] irov 
'A X i A A^ s oKohu Krjp yf}^ei ivl aTij^eacn (p6vov koX <pv^av 'Axcuwv SepKO fievco. 



CHAPTEE VI. 

$314. The Adverbial Objective. 

The objective construction, finally, is expressed by adverbs. 
Adverbs ^denote the relation of place, time, manner, the quantity 
of a predicate or attribute, or of another adverb, e. g. k-^^v^f-v 
^X^ev, X*^^^ OLTre/Sr], KaXws aTriS^avev, TroXXctKts TJX^ev', adverbs 
are to be viewed in a measure as resembling the Cases of sub- 
stantives, since by these also, as has been seen, the relations 
just mentioned are expressed. Hence it is evident why most 
adverbs have a definite Case-inflexion, e. g. ov, where, dvo), koltw, 
61, OLKOi, TTrjy OTT-q, etc. (k 101, 2). 

Remark. In addition to the above adverbs, the language has other adverbs, 
which do not, like those mentioned, define the predicate more exactly, but ex- 
press the relation of the predicate to the subject. These are called Modal 
Adverbs. They denote the certainty or uncertainty, the extension or limita- 
tion, the affirmation or negation of the proposition ; or they exhibit the propo- 
sition interrogatively. Several of them have been changed from adverbs to 
mere suffixes, and hence always depend on a particular word, which by them 
is made emphatic. The interrogative adverbs will be treated under the sub- 
ject of is errogative sentences. Of the other adverbs aUuded to, the following 
deserve a more particular consideration. 

$ 315. A. Ar^, 8^a, •^T^v, S^^ev, 8r/7rov^€v, 8ai. ; 

1, A 7} is the abridged form of ^Stj, being conformed to it in usage; but it 
can never, like ^Stj, stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic 
8')j T(^T€, turn vero, S^ yap, jam en?m), but is used only as a mere suffix (§ 314, 
Rem.). It denotes in general that which is certain, sure^ settled, a reference to 
something known [already, now, even, precisely, exactly) ; it is not used of a par- 
ticular time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed, 
in order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being 
taken into the account. TaCra, & vvv S)j Keyeis {just noic,atthis very time) : & 
vvv d^ i\eyes (just noic, just then). X. Cy. 4. 1, 23. vvv S^ <tv SrjKuxTeis, el 
oAtjSt? eXeyes [now certainly). OvSev S)j KaKhv 'ireir6v^aixev (nihil jam or nihil 
du7n, thus fa7\ as yet, up to this time). Ovdev Si] Kcuihv ireia-ofjie^a (nihil jam == 
further). "With an Imp. or hortative Suhj., it signifies, now, then, now then, I pray. 
X. C. 1. 2, 41. Sida^ov 8^ irphs ruv ^ewv (now then teach, teach then, I pray). 



4 315.] AtJ, S^a, Sifjv, SPev, S^TTovSev, Sat. 489 

'Iwfifu S-fl {now then let us go, come now). After relatives, it often denotes a ref. 
erence to a thing which is known. X. Hier. 11, 8. «ai ^pS>Tou fiku ,hS^hs Karetp. 
yaafieuos ^u e^vs rh (piMlc^ai virh rwu apxo/xeua>y, o5 5^ <ri; iiriSfvfxwu rvyxdveis 
(quod, uti satis constat, expetis). Hence e' tt e 1 5 7'/ (since now, quomarn, i. e. quum 
jam), because now, puisque, in respect to something conceded, known ; 6}s Stj, 
seeing that, quandoquidem, el Srj, si jam, if now. In a series of sentences con- 
nected by /cot, S17 is placed after the word which is to be made emphatic. PL 
Men. 87, e. vyieia., (pafxeu, koI Iffxvs Koi KaWos KOt ttAoG to s St/. So k al rh 

5 v fxtyicTTov ; further, 6\Aos re — Kal St? /cat. Her. 1, 30. els KXyvirTov aTrtKero 
-napa "Aixacriv, kuI 5)? k a\ is :S,dpSLS irapa Kpolaou {and even also, and moreover 
also to Sardis). — Ti oZv Stj; (why therefore, I pray ^) Uas oZv d-q, (how now 
then, how, I pray ?). 

2. In general, 8^ is very often used in order to render emphatic and define 
more exactly, the word after which it stands : precisely, exactly, even (in English 
o'ftcn indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2. 3, 13. fieya <f)poyov<Tiv, 
Srt TTCTToiSeui/Tai 5 7] Koi irphs Xifxhv Kal irphs di\pai' Kal irphs p7yos KapTepe7u (just 
because they have been taught, because they have been taught, forsooth). PI. Prot. 
320, a. SeSiws irepl avrov, /jlt] Sia<l>^ap^ S t^ vir 'A\KifitdSov (lest he should be cor- 
rupted, forsooth). With adjectives and numerals, it has either a limiting or en- 
larging sense, according to the nature of the adjective or numeral, e. g. fiSvos 
S-f) (quite alone), ev Ppax^l S^ (in a vei-y short time), aa^ev^s S-fj (very weak), 
iroAAot 5t], iroWaKis 5 tj, Kpdricnoi 5^ (the very best, confessedly the best). With 
a pronoun, it expresses the distinction, importance, prominence of a person 01 
thing as kno^vn, e.g. iKe7vos Stj, that (well-known) man, (rv Si] ravra irSKfirfffas ; 
(did you especially, you of all others dare this ?) ; ovto} 5^, ivrav^a S^ ; so with other 
interrogative pronouns, X. C. 4. 4, 10 koI ttoTos Stj aoi, ecprj, ovros 6 \6yos eariv ; 
(what kind of reasoning, I ask, I pray ?). Eur. Med. 1012. t/ St) KaTr]<peis ofifia 
Kol haKpvp^oels ; So Ti iij Trore; (what then in all the world?). Tls Si} oZy; 
(who then now, who I pray ?). With an indefinite pronoun, it increases the in- 
definiteness, e. g. &W01 5^ (others, whoever they may be), baos S-f], dTr6(ros Sifj, bsris 
5/; (some one or other, any one whatever, nescio quis), (tjv 6ir6oov St; xpJvo;/ (I know 
not how long). With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies : (a) even, 
precisely, e. g. us S-fi, 'Iva S-fj, indeed, just exactly, just even ; (b) truly, assuredly, 
when a thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. ^ S-f], ^ 
IxdKa St], Kal S-f], Si] trov, certainly indeed, assuredly, oh S-f] ttov, yet surely 
not at all, certainly not, yap S-f], for surely. 

3. ArjTa, which is formed from S-f], serves like S-f], only in a higher degree, 
to render prominent, and more.exactly define the word, which stands before it. 
It may be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to define them, whether 
it be to extend or restrict them. It is very often used after inter rogatives, e. g. ri 
S 9] T, ineiSa,^ rovro yevnrai ; (quid turn demum dicetis, quum hoc factum eritf). It 
is also quite frequently employed in answers (even so, precisely so, certainly so). 
Also. ^ Srira, yes, forsooth, oh Srjra (minime vero, no, by no means), ^^^ St}to 
'^ay,donot),e.g.,li] Si]Ta Spdcrys ravra; Kal Srjra (and forsooth, and truly). 

4. The enclitic ^t^v is a Doric particle, but it also appears in the Epic Ian- 



490 SYNTAX. [k 316 

guage. In Homer, bijv has always an ironical sense, like the Attic S^-n-oy, 
without doubt, certainly. II. ^8, 276, ov d^-fjy /xiy irdXiv aims b.vi)crei ^vfios ayiivwp 
veiKeUiy ficurihrjas oueiSeiois eTreeao't*'. 

5. Arj^eif (from S^ and 3^;/) almost always expresses scoim, irony [scilicet, 
truly, indeed) ; it is very seldom used as a mere explanatory particle. X. Cy. 4. 
6, 3. aTreirefiypdfX'qv (rhv vl6u), fi^ya (ppovoou, '6ti drj^ev rrjs fiaaiXecos d-vyarphi 
d^oi/xr}y rhy ifihy vlhy ya/ierriy [because, forsooth, I should see my son the husband of 
the king's daughter). 

6. A7]Trovbiy (from S'^ittou and ^v), I hope so indeed, I suppose, certainly 
(nempe, ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. iyw 5\ ^v 'nnrfueiy [id^o), orav fiey inl rov 
'liTTvov y^vwixai., lb. rov linroKeyTavpov S-fjnov^ey Siairpd^ofxcu [I shall, as I hope^ 
act the part of a centaur). 

7. Aot is a lengthened form of 5^ (as yed of yri). It is nsed only in the 
phrases rl Sal; nws Bal; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder [what then f 
how so ? ain^ tu ? itane 7 itane vera f). 



§316. B. Confirmative Adv erbs. 

1. Mi^j' (Dor. and Ep. /icii/) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as- 
severation, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used adversatively : still, but. Bat it 
cannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another 
word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles. 
Its use with particles is as follows: (a) "^H /h^j', surely, certainly, hence used 
particularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. rh 
TrtcTa SiBuKTiy avTo7s, ^ jx^jy u)s <pi\oLs kolL iti(tto7s XPV<^^<^^<'^ avTo7s [that he as- 
suredly would treat them as friends). — (b) Ob fj-vy, fii] f^-iiv, truly, assuredly 
not. — (c) Kol iJLT\y,and indeed, yea surely, nay more. PI. Phaed. 58, e. Ka\ 
in^y iyoiye ^av/xdaia eira^ov napayeySfifvos. Ka\ fiTjy is often used, when a 
new assertion is adduced to strengthen or corroborate the meaning. Od. A, 
582. Kal n^y TdvToKov elseldoy; so, often in the dramatic writers when atten- 
tion is to be directed to the entrance of a new person : and see ! and lo ! Also 
Ka\ fJL^v /cot, et vero etiam, and indeed too ; Kal ix)}v o u 5 e, and indeed not even. 
— (d) 'AWa /X7JJ/, at, sed vero, but indeed, but assuredly. In a question, Tt 
fx'fiv ; IT cos iJ.T]v ; quid vero ? quid quaeso ? what indeed ? what I ask f 

Remark. Instead of /i-fjv, the Ionic writers employ the shorter form fi 4 v, 
which, as well as /lc^j/ and fj-dv, is found in Hom. also. Even in the Attic dia- 
lect, fi4v is sometimes used instead of juV? 6. g. in an answer. X. C. 1. 4, 4. 
ir6r€pa yyei/xTjs epya Kplveis ; Upeirei fxe y to, iir' oxpcXcla yiyyofieva yvwfir^s fpya 
cJuai. This confirmative /j. 4 v, instead of fi-qy, occurs in the following con- 
nections : (a) MevTot expresses confirmation, surely ; very often in antitheses, 
like vero, to denote a limitation; thus, Kal }i4vroiy ov fi4yToi, dAAa fiep- 
roi. — (b) Mevovv or /ief ovy, sane quidem, quite certainly, yea indeed, is 
used, for the most part, only in replies, e. g. irdyv fiey oZy; very often when 
some correction is made. X. C. 2. 7, 5. ol irapa <xol rovrtay ovS\v ^xioTovToi 
TTOLiiv ; TlduTa fj.ky ovy [but do those ivith you know nothing of these things f 
yes, everything, immo vero omnia). So ou or ju.^ neyovv, immo non. — (o) 
Meyd'^ or fxky Si], quite certainly, yea indeed; always in the phrases ij pity Sir 



M17.J EMPHATIC SUFFIXES Trip, yi, roL 49l 

ov M€vS^, a\xh fieuS-f, Kal fxevS-f], yh (a.4u — 8-{} instead of ^ uV S^ 
etc. On the concessive /jlcv, see § 322, 3. '* 

2.^H expresses confirmation (profecto). In order to strengthen it, fi-fiy is 
often joined with it. ""H irov, surely indeed, often ironically. The Epic ^tol 
like ^, expresses assurance : surely, certainly. 

3. N u in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, but generally in an ironical or 
scornful manner (like the Attic Stjttou), indeed, forsooth, ceitainly, nemm. 

4. N ^, the Lat. nae, expresses an assevei-ation, but only in affirmative sen- 
tences, e. g. v^ rhu Ato, in truth, surely. — From v-f) is formed the lengthened vai 
(as 5oi from Stj), which has the same meaning, and is often used with ^a. — 
Md likewise denotes an asseveration; in affirmative sentences: yal /a a rhv 
Aia ; in negative : ov f/.a Thv Aia. But where /xa Aia stands without a nega- 
tion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context 
and from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be un- 
derstood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3, 

§ 317. C. Emphatic suffixes Trip, ye, rot. 

1. Ilcp is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb irepi, 
through and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of -nrep is through and 
through {throughout). Uep agrees with ye in that, like the latter, it gives empha- 
sis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from 76, in making the 
emphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the 
idea) ; ye, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de- 
noting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common 
Language, ir4p is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it 
is often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. osirep, throughout, en- 
tirely, the very samg who, Scronrcp, altogether as great as, precisely as great, oT6s ire/?, 
entirely, exactly of such a character as^ etc., orrov irep, just ivhere, wherever, '6^ep 
vep, just ichence, whence soever, ecus irep, up to the very time, as far as, until, iireiTrep, 
since, infiSTf irep, forasmuch, seeing that, ichereas, eiirep, if indeed, if even. In Eng. 
the meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word 
to which they belong. 

2. r e' denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren- 
ders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others ; it may be used either Xo 
augment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. iyu ye (7 indeed, I for my part, 
however it may be with others), ev ye, ovt6s ye, iroKkd ye, oKiya ye, etc. It 
depends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning it renders emphatic. 
In connection with relatives and conjunctions, it serves to confirm or complete 
the preceding statement. Thus, osye, who or which indeed, who certainly, qui 
quidem; & strep ye, just as indeed ; etye, if indeed, if however, siquidem ; after 
adversative conjunctions: Kalroi ye, aK\6. ye, etc., and yet indeed^ (like 
quamquam quidem, verum quidem), ye makes an antithesis prominent, smce it 
defines more exactly, limits or corrects what precedes. X. C. 1. 2, 3. ko(toi 



492 SYNTAX. [§ 318 

ye ovbeTTciTTOTe mreax^To StSa<r/caA.os elvai tovtov (certaixlt Socrates made his 
pupils useful men, although, etc.). Te is very often used in replies and answers, 
in order to indicate that they either confirm, augment, complete, limit, or 
correct, the thought contained in the preceding question. 

3. Toi (enclitic) means surely, certainly, certe, and serves also to render an 
object marked and prominent. It is often connected with pronouns, e. g. iyd 
TOL, eycoye rot, I surely, I most certainly, rjimis toi, ravToi toi. It is particularly 
employed in quoting general propositions and proverbs, since by it an assertion 
is referred to a general truth and thereby confirmed. Theogn, 74. vavpoi toi 
iroXKoiiv TTicTTOu exovai v6ov. With adversative particles, e. g. Ka'noi, tamen, 
quamquam (properly and surely), ^levToi, tamen (§ 316, Rem.), aTdp toi, 
aXkd TO I, but certainly. Also, ovtoi (/HTjroi), certainly not, ydp t o i, for 
indeed, for certainly, iJT o i — ^, still stronger ijT oi ye — ^, either indeed — or. 



§ 318. D. Negative Particles ovk and fxi^. 

1. Oxf (like its compounds, e. g. ovSe, oijTe, ouSety, etc.) is an objective 
negative; /x-fi subjective, i. e. ov is used when something is denied absolutely, 
independently, by itself (objectively) ; fi-fj (and its compounds), on the contary, 
when something is denied in reference to the conception, view, or uill of the 
speaker or of some other person (subjectively). Both are commonly placed before 
the words to which the negation is to be applied. On the position after the 
word to be negatived, see § 15, 4. 

2. Hence ovk stands : (a) in all sentences containing a direct assertion, wheth- 
er these are expressed by the Indicative or Optative ; hence also (b) in subor- 
dinate clauses with (in and us (that); (c) in simple interrogative clauses, 
both direct and indirect ; (d) in subordinate clauses denoting i/me, with Stc, 
iireid-f}, etc.; (e) the ground or reason, with oti, Sioti, iirel, etc.; (f.) the 
co7}sequence, yvith. &sTe either Avith the Ind. or Opt. ; (g) in adjective clauses, 
with '6 s, '6 ST IS, etc., Avhich denote a concrete, objective attributive explanation; 
(h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a single word in a 
sentence, e. g. oh k aya^os, o v kukus ; in this case ov sometimes changes the 
idea of the word to an opposite sense. 

(a) Tovro oil yiyveTai, ovk iyeveTO, ov yeyfjcreTai. TavTa ovk tw y'lyvoiTO, 
— (b) OTSa, OTi TavTa ovk eyeVero. ""EKeyev, oti tovto ovx ovtws cT^e*'. — 
(c) Tts OVK alaxvveTai. (or ovk^lv alax^voiTo) Kouch \eyav Thv aya^hv ay^pa: 
— '^Ap^ ov ^avfid^eis Thv 'SiOOKpaTT] ; — Ov Spdaeis toDto ; — Ov wepifievels (§255, 
4). — *J?s, ?) ov ; or <p'^s, 5) ov (p^^s^, — Ae|oi/, el (whether) ovx Vfjutpres Toxna 
Ae'las. On the dependent double question, see No. 3. — (d) "Ore ovk ?i\^qv 
01 troKeixioi, ol "EWrjves rjavxaCov. — (e) "Oti ol ^dp$apoi ovx r]'^T7)bT}<rav, oi 
^EWrjves ra opt) ov KaTe\nrov. — (f ) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Taxv toi brjpla amrjKuKei 
(Kvpos), wsTe 6 'AcTuoyjjs ovKer eTxc avr^ cruAAe'veij/ i^p/a. — (g) 'Ayiip, 
tv ov K elSes. 'A.vf]p, t)V ovk hv ^avixd^ois. 

3. M:^ on the contrary, stands : (a) with commands, learnings ; hence with the 



4 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND /xyf. 493 

Imp. and with the imperative Suhj.; (b) with wishes and exhortations; (c) in 
deliberative questions [§ 259, 1. (b)] ; (d) in clauses denoting purpose, with Xva^ 
etc. (also with owws and the Indie. Put.) ; (e) in conditional clauses, with el with 
the Indie, or Opt., idv,orav, iTr<iu,ews &u with the Subj., gre ye = si^^m- 
dew ; so also in subordinate clauses which denote a repetition, whether they are 
introduced by a temporal conjunction, or by el, idv, or by the relative, etc. ■ 
(f) in clauses denoting consequence or result, ^vith 'disre and an Inf.; (g) in 
adjective clauses with os, Bstis, etc., which imply a condition or purpose, in 
general when a subordinate clause contains an idea which is expressed only as a 
conception, supposition ; hence when the idea of a class or species as such is more 
precisely defined, and the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the subjunctive 
(= ita comparatus, ut); (h) in the second member of a dependent disjunctive 
question {whether — or not), oh as well as /x^ is used. PI. Phaed. 70, d. (TKe\\i(i- 
fieba, eXr apa iv aSov el<T\v al xpvxal Te\evT7](TdvTwv twv av^pwiroov, elre Kal ov. 
Crit. 48, b. aKe-meou, Trorepov h'lKaiov ejxe ev^eySe Treipaa^ai i^ievai, (Jt.^ acpievTwv 
*A^r}vaiwy, fi ov SiKaioi/. PL Ep. 339, a. el a\r]^es (t Aeyeis), ^ /x^, ireipda-o/jLai 
fia^elv. Phil. 21, b. tout' auW, €t ^ X«»pe'^> ^ H-h X^^P^'^'j avdyKt) Stjttoi; ce 
iyvoeTu, Kev6v ye 6vra iraerTjs tppov^aews. Isae. 5, 14. ov Set viias t/c t5)v tov ku- 
r7]y6pov \6yuif rovs \6yovs KorayLav^dveiy, el koXws vjXiv Kelvrai, ^ fi-fj, aW' e/e 
Tcau v6ixwv rovs rov KaTrjySpov \6yovs, el op^us vfxas Zidd^ovcn rh irpayixa, ^ ov. 
But in those dependent questions, in which there is merely a distinction between what 
is, and what is not, fir) is used, when the predicate of the first member is not repeated, 
but must be supplied ; but o u as well as fj. tj, when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. § 142. 
\oyi<ra<T^e vphs v/xas avrovs, ri re (xvfx^rtcrerai. Kare^r\(picrixevois vfuv rov uS/xov Kal ri 
fi i]. X. C. 3. 6, 10. ol<r^a, 6ir6(rai re (pvKaKol eiriKaipoi elai Koi OTrSaai fiif, Koi oirScrai 
re (ppovpol iKavol elffi Kal SttSctoi jx-I] elffi. Aesch. 1, 27. 6 vofio^errfs hiappT]hr]v 
kiredei^eVf otis xph ^Tlfir^yopelv koX otis ov Se7 \eyeiu ev rip S-fifxcp. — Mij is also used 
in direct and indirect interrogative sentences, which express fear, anxiety on the 
part of the inquirer, and hence require a negative answer; (i) in forms of 
svoearing, and not seldom when one swears that something shall not happen, but 
sometimes also, when one swears that something has not happened; in the latter 
case, the feeling by which the denial or abhorrence is expressed, is denoted 
by u •>, 

(a) M^ ypd<pe, fi^ ypdrprjs (§ 259, 5). — (b) E^e jx)} ypd<l>oisl —Mi] rovro 
yeuoiro ! — M ^/ tutixev ! — M)? ypd<puixeu ! — (c) PI. Symp. 213, a. aWd /xoi \e- 
7eT€, elslw, fj fx'fl\ (Tv/xiriea-Sfe, fj oH ; Rp. 337, h. irus Keyeis ; fx^ avoKpivwfiai ; 
(shall I not answer thee?). — (d) Ae^w, 'ha fxj) Troifjs. — (e) El fx^ \eyeis. — 
'Eaj/ fxi) Keyris. —"Orav ravra fXT] yevT]rai. PI. Prot. 345, e. f>s Uv fx)] Kanh 
Kotrj eKdv, rovrwv <pr]c\v eiraiverrjs ehai {as often as one does not willingly do evd, 
etc.). X. Cy. 2. 3, 20. et (^Te) fx)) &XXo ri airovZaiSrepov Trpdrroifu, ravrri rfj 
TaiSiS. expuvro {as often as, tchenever, they icere not engaged in more important busi- 
ness).— (f ) PI. Phaed. 66, d. r)) aufxa rj/xas eK-rrX'iirrei &sre fxr) Svuacr^ai vir avrov 
Ka^opay ra\r]bes.— (g) PI. Ap. 21 . & ytt ^ oJda, ovde oXop-ai elheyai { = el riva fx^ 
oT5o). Hence '6rnx-i], unless, nisi (properly ouoej/ '6ti fx-f), then generally instead of 
ti 1X7]}, '6(Toi fx-f), except those who not. Her. 1, 32. iy r^ fxaKp^ XP^'^V T^oWa fxey iart 

42 



:» 



494 SYNTAX. [$ 318. 

iBeeiv, TO ( = &) iM-fj ris i^e\€i {multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut, one can see many 
things of such a nature that he would not mshto see). Andoc. 3, 41. i^ricpiacur^* 
r lavra, c| Sy fiirjd eirore v/mv fieTafieK'fiarei. — (h) Mt; re^yrjKcy 6 'KaTi]p ; 
[my father is not dead, is he? = is it not to be feared that my father is dead f) 
'^ofiovfiaif fi^ 6 iraT^p ribvi^Kev ; [I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to 
know whether my father is dead). M77 Spa/reis tovto j {you will not do this, will 
you?). Mt] SeiXol iarSfic^a; {we shall not he cowards, shall we? shall we he coW' 
ards?). Mt? votrus ;'^hpa /jlt] vocreTs ; {you are not sick, are you?). — (i) Ar. 
Eccl. 999. fih. TTjy ^A(ppo5lTr]v . . /j.^ *7ct> 0^ d^ccw (/ will not let you go, the thing 
sluxll not be). Aor. 194. fik y^ v . , /xr] 'yd) ySrjua KopApdrepoy ^Kovaa •jtw, Beware ! 
1 have not listened. M-fi is not unusual with the Inf. X. An. 7. 6, 18. ofivvm 
vfjuy ^fovs 8,Trayras Kol irdtras fiTjSe t ifiol ISia uTreVxero Seui^s cxet»'. 

Remark 1. In all the instances above given, except (a) (b) (g), ov is used 
when a single word in the sentence is to be made negative, e. g. O y tpufiey ; 
negemus? Isocr. Paneg. 71, 6. \aP6vTes i^aKisx^^^ovs twv 'EW^vwy, 0? iv reus 
avTwy ovx oloi r ^(rav (^y {nequirenf) ; hence in the combinations ovBels 
UsTis ov; ovSevhs Stow ov, etc. (^ 332, Rem. 12); so also in ovk la^' 
8 IT 00 5 ov: for these expressions are, as it were, blended in a single word, like 
Hullus non. Et ov Sdoei {recusabit). Dem. Cor. 320, 283, &st' ov fiefiyrja- 
^ai {= oblivisci). Moreover c* can stand with ov, when the clause takes the 
place of a causal sentence. 

Rem. 2. On ovk tiv \4yois ravra, instead of /u^ AeV, see § 260, 2. (4) (b) ; 
on oil Spdtreis rovro (instead of fii] Spdurrjs) and ov Spaaeis rovro; {= do this 
indeed), see ^ 255, 4. 

4. Mr] is regularly used with the Inf. But after verbs of thinking: otofiai. vo- 
uiCo), yiroAojujSafw, Sokw, as well as after (prjixl and olkovu, ov is 'commonly used, 
since the Infinitive (Ace. with Inf.) in this case has the force of an affirma- 
tion ; much more seldom after other verba putandi et dicendi. When, however, 
these verbs are in the imperative, or in the imperative Subj., or in another con- 
struction which requires /*^, then fxS] follows. 

PI. Theat. 152, b. elKhs cocphy &yBpa fj.^ Xijpuy. X. C. 2. 1, 3. t6 fi^ <p(vyeiw 
rovs irdyovs. 1. 1, 20 ^avud^u}. Situs Tore iv e ic^rjaay 'A^vcuoi ^ccKpdrriw 
wept Toiis Sfeovs fi^ »io<ppoye7y. An. 7. 6, 18. o/xvvo) vfuy, fir}S' it. ifxol iSi^ 
wire'sxeTO 2cv3i7S exef. X. C. 1. 1, 19. (oi iroXAoi) otovrai Toi/s beovs rh fifp 
ciSeVat, T^ S' oiK elSeyai. 2. 4. ravTTjy r^y e^iy {vivendi rationem) rrjy ttjs t^o/x^J 
^irt/teActoj/ ovk ifiiroBi^eiy t<pf). 1. \^. Trumvwy ^€o7s vus ovk flycu ^eovs 
iyoni^ev; X. C. 4. 8. 2. 6 fioKoyeiTat ovS4ya trca Tuy fiyrjfjLoyevofJLeyuv av- 
^pdiruy KaWioy ^dyaroy iyeyKuy. More frequently /i^, as: Isocr. Phil. 109. 
&lxo\6yovy firjSeyhs ir^iroTe roo'ovrov irpdyfiaros SiofiapTeiy. Id. Dem. 22. 
VO/xi^f iJL7]Sey eiyai Tuy ay^pwTriyuy ^e$aioy. 

Rem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in- 
stead of the Inf, then either ovk or /xr) may be used, according to the nature 
of the clause into which the substantive or the substantive adjective may bo 
resolved, e. g. Ai*. Eccl. 115. Seivhy S' ier\y ri fiij ifnrtipia (= €t fi'ij ris ^<r- 
riy €fJiir€ipos). Th. 1, 137. ypd^pas r'ijy rwy yetpvpwy ov Sid\v<riy (= Sti Of 
&S [ihal] ai y4(pvpai ov SieXv^rjaav), 



^^^^•] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND fjiij. 49^ 

Rem 4. With some verbs, eg. <i>d.ai, oUcr^a^, k^^ovv, 67r..rx velcr. 
?"• '' t^\"\g^t^^'^; ^^hich properly refers to the Inf, is usually joined with the 
finite verb, thus ot<t>r,f.i, like nego, I deny, refuse. X. An. 1. 3, 1. ol a-rpanl 
Tai OVK ecpaa-au nvai tov irpdarw (iiegaverunt se ituros esse). Th 2 89 ^i/j-e/caA. 
6(ra {6m£s), ohK 6.Jiiy Tk f,^ deiA 4v bpf,wU^ ^x^^" {desiring that you should 
not fear what is not to he feared). j j 

5. With the participle or adjective, fi^ is used only when these can be re- 
solved by a conditional clause, or when they stand in a connection which 
requires f^-ff ; in all other cases, oi is used. Ob Svpd/x^uos, one who cannot, or is 
unable, ov $ov\6fi€uos, nolens, ovk ava-yKotov, unnecessary, ra ov Ka\h j8ouAej5- 
uara, turpia consilia ; & ov maTevuv {one ivho does not believe, is qui non credit, or 
quum (since) non credit, or quia non credit) -,6(1 <pi\o(ro<pwu {is qui non philoso- 
phatur) ; 6 fii] iriarevuv {if one does not believe, si quis non credit). X. An. 4. 4, 
15. ovTOs yap fS6Kfi koI wpdrepov TroWh ^S-q a\7}^evaai roiavra, to, ovra re us 
tvra, Kol TO /XT? oma ws ovk ovra {if amjthing was not, he represented it as not 
being). So 'H co<pia rSiv ZeivSiv koL fij] Seifuv avSpda iariv, PI. OlSci ce Tavra 
ov iroi-f^aavra. *'H77etA€ rrfv ir6\iv ov iroKiopK-n^eTaav, Protag. 360, d. used 
in philosophical definitions of an ideal assumption ; on the contrary ra ov Beiud 
objective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. hu hi^ yvwcri Svj/dfj.€uov /aeu xap'*' 
airoSiSSvcu, fi^ airodiBSyraShy KoXd^ovari rovrov larxvpSis {= idv rivaKrX.) [whoever 
they knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it^ they, etc.). 3. 1, 16. 
ri yhp h.1/ . . xpV'^f^'^' ^ Tty lax^PV ^ a.vZpfia> fxr] cdtppovi {= el /j.^ ffd^pwv elfrj). 

6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or adverbs, e. g. any 
one, any how, any where, at any time, ever, etc., these are all expressed negatively 
These negative expressions neither destroy nor strengthen each other, as they 
do not stand in an opposite relation, but each of them is to be considered inde- 
pendent. The negatives must be of the same kind, i. e. either compounded 
of OVK or fii). Double negatives in Latin, English, and the modern languages, 
destroy each other, but not in Greek. <| 

PI. Rp. 495, b. (T/it/cpA (pvffis ovSey fiiya ovdeirore ovBeva oUre lSi(i>Triif 
oCt€ Tr6\iv Spa (a mean nature never does anything noble either for ant private 
individual or for the State). Hipp. Maj. 291, d. (rb KaK6u) t firtSeiroTe alff- 
Xphv /t7j5a/xou /iTjSej'l <pave7Tai {which never anywhere seews to ANY ONE 
displeasing). Lysid. 214, d. 6 Kouchs oUr aya^w, ovre KaKw ovdeiroTe els 
dArj^^ <^tA(oj' cpx^TM. In like manner the simple negative {ov, fxi})^ which in 
this case must always precede the other negatives, is so connected with its 
comjwunds that neither lose their force ; hence ovk ea-riy ovSiv {there is not 
anything, there is nothing) ; so also the negative parts are joined with the nega- 
tive whole, e. g. Ov Uvarai oijr' c5 Xeyeiv oUt' ed voieiv rohs <pi\ovs, he can 
neither^ nor; in like manner also ovSe, /^lt^S e, not even, ne — quidem, are used 
in a negative sentence, e.g. ov Svuarai oiiSe yvv e5 -rroietv rovs (pi\ovs {he is not 
able, not even now, to benefit his friends). 

Rem. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle, the negative, when 
it refers to both, is usuallv placed with the Part., though only when the Part, 
precedes the verb. Th. l', 12. fierk rb. TpwiKa rj 'EAAas 6T( tieraULaraTo '<«"f«T- 
yxrC^To, Srre /i)j 7]<rvxd<ra<ra av^ri^rjuai (i.e. S>sre fih Tjo-vxaaat Kal fiii 



496 SYNTAX. [^ 318 

av^r)^pai). Where the negative is so placed, it must be considered as belong- 
ing to the whole sentence, and not to a single word. 

7. Ou fi-fi with the Subj. or Fut. Indicative, is elliptical, since with ovk a 
verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also expressed, must be sup- 
plied, and fi-f] must be referred to this verb. Hence ov jxi} is used, when the 
idea to be expressed is, it is not (o h) to he feared that {fi-fi) something will happen, 
e. g. ov {(pofiov/xai) fi^ yeuTjTai tovto (non vereor, ne hoc fat, Ms certaixlt 
will not happen). PI. Crit. 46, c. eS ia^i, '6ti oif jxi) <roi ^vyxcop^ao} {be assured, 
that I do not fear that I shall make concessions, i. e. be assured, that I certainly shall 
not make concessions to you). In a question with the second Pers. of the Fut. 
Indicative. Ar. Jtfub. S05. ov /j.7] \a\-f}(reis, a\X' aKo\ovb^<reis e/jLoi; I shall not 
expect that you will talk = do not talk (§ 255, 4). 

8. After verbs and expressions of fear, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, distrust, — 
denying, hindering, abstaining, — preventing, forbidding, contradicting, the Inf. 
with the negative /^^ commonly follows instead of the Inf. without fi-f), the 
Greek repeating with the Inf the negative idea implied in these words, for the 
purpose of strengthening the negative view of the sentence. This use of fi^ 
is sometimes regarded as pleonastic ; but it is entirely in accordance with the 
frequent usage of the language in employing two negatives for the purpose of 
increasing the negative force of the sentence ; hence, when a negative was 
contained in a preceding word, it was not unnatural to join a negative with 
the Inf. that followed, v v^ 2 (>^^ ^'7 

KcoXva) (Te fj.^ toDto ttoiuv (I prevent you from doing this). Her. 3, 128. 
AapiTos aTrayop ev €1 vfiiv (x^ Sopvcpopeeiy 'Opoirea {Darius forbids you to act as 
a body guard to Oroetes). 66. 6 Up-n^daTn]s t^apvos -fiv nij airoKTe7vat "ifiepSip 
{denied that he killed Smerdis). Th. 3, 6. rrjs fiiv baAdcra-ris elpyov /i^ xPV'^^c^'' 
rovs MiTvXrjualovs. 5,25. awe cr xovr a /x^ iirl r}]v eKarepau yqv (rrpaTevirou 
{they abstained from marching into the country of each other). (But ojVxvvo/uot 
fii] Trojetc Tt signifies, lam ashamed not to do something, X. An. 6. 5, 4.) 

Rem. 6. "When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed 
by firi with he Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), fi-f] must be considered as an interrogative, 
numne, whether not, and may often be translated by that;^ e. g. SeSoiKa, fi^ airo- 
^dvp {metuo, ke moriatur, 1 fear whether he icill not die = that he icill die) ; eSe- 
SoLKeiv, fiT] aTTo^dvoi {metuebam, ne moreretur) ; ScSoixa, fii] rebvuKev (ne mor- 
tuus sit, I fear whether he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is 
dead). On the contrary, fj.^ oii with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after 
the above expressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not 
take place, or has not taken place ; e. g. SeSoiKa, fx^ ovk avo^dyT) (xe non mo- 
riatur, I fear that he will not die) ; iSeSoiKeiv, /x^ ovk airobdyoi (ne non morere- 
tur, I feared that he icould not die) ; SedoiKa, fxi) ov re^yrjKev (ne non mortutts 
sit, that he is not dead). 

* In expressions of fear, there is always a double idea in the mind, the fear, 

that something will take place, and the hope that it vnW not. This double'idea 
both the Greek and Latin seem to indicate bv using: a negative after verbs of 
fear, the negative being referred to a verb of hoping understood ; but as the idea 
of fear only is expressed in English, the negative is rendered that. Hence Ae'Sot- 
«•, /i^ aiTo^dvu {metuo, ne moriatur, I fear that he will die, but hope that he will not) 



^ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND ixrj. 497 

9. Even when, instead of the Inf., the conjunctions '6ti, &5 with the finita 
verb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes repeated 
m the dependent subordinate clause by ov. 

X. R. Ath. 2, 17 apv^laSrai ro7s &\\ois, '6ri ov iraprju {to deny to others that 
he was present). PI. Meno. 89, d. oVt S* ou/c eariu iTriar-fifj-ri, CK^ai, idu aoi 
SoKw eUSTws aviffTelv {but consider whether I seem to you justly to doubt that 
this is knowledge). Dem. Onet. 871, 14. ws y ovk iK^7vos iyedipyei rr^v yrju, ovk 
i)BvvaT apvTj^rjvai {he could not deny that he cultivated the land). Isoc Archid. 
§ 48. ovSels h.v To\n-f]creiev avTcnrelv, ws ov tV eiiireipiav p.a.KKov twu &\\<av 

Rem. 7. So even after ov fiaWov (or when the clause in which fxaWov 
stands, has a negative sense), ov is sometimes used, which in English is pleo- 
nastic. Comp. the French, where after a Comparative que ne is regularly 
used, c. g. II donne plus que vous n' avez donne, for the purpose of giving em- 
phasis to the idea of diversity (consequently a negative idea), which is contained 
in the Comparative (the gift of one is different from, not like that of the other). 
Her. 4, 118. 7}/fet 6 Ufparis ov54v n /xaWov eV rifxeas, ^ ov Koi iirl vjxeas 
{does not come against us more than against you). X.H. 6.3, 15. Tt odi/ Set (= ov Set) 
iKuvov rhv xpovov avajxeyeiv, ews tiv vnh 'irK-f}^ovs kukwu aveiirajfiep, fiaWov, ^ ovx 
us T(ixi<T'''o, Trju clp-fiprjv Troiriffaa^ai ] in Th. 3, 36. the negation is contained in juera- 
void Tis ^v avTols {they repented = they no longer approved). 'n.\r)v ov is some- 
times used in a similar manner. X. R.L. 15, 6. '^Spas Travres inravla-TavTai ^aaiAeis, 
V \^v oifK ^(popoi {all the kings rise from their seat, except the ephori). 

10. Mtj ov with t\\t Infinitive is used instead of the Infinitive without nega- 
tion, with the expressions mentioned in No. 8., when the negative ou or 
another word which may be considered a negative, precedes /jl^ oh. M)j oh is 
here merely equivalent to the simple ^u^, and hence is not expressed in English 
where tii] would not be (comp. No. 8, above). 

Ohhiv KwKvei ffe /xt) ovk a-rrobat/eTu {nothing hinders you to die, from 
dying). X. An.3. 1,13. el ycinicr6iJ.€^a iirl fia(TiXe7, ri ifiirodcat/ {— ovShv ifi- 
voiwu) fii] ovxi (^M«s) v&piCofJievovs aTrobaveiv {what hinders us from dying after 
being treated with insult); Vect. 3, 7. ov Sv5e\Trls elfii nh y.^ ovxl Trpo^v- 
fiws &!/ Tovs TToXiras els to roiavra els<pepeiv {lam not without hope that the citizens 
would contribute for such purposes). Cy. 2. 2, 20. atVxp^v {= oh KaXhv) Iv 
avTiKeyeiv, f/.^ o " X ' "^^^ nKeiara KoX irovovma Kal w^eXovvra rh Kotvhp, tovtov 
Kcd fj.eyi(TTuy a^iova^ai. ^ 

Rem. 8. It is seldom in this case that fiij is used instead of fi^ oh with Ae 
Inf. With the real negative expressions, u Shvafiai, aSvyaros, ovx ot6s 
r eiixl, ohSefila fiVXayV i(rri (=oi» SvuarSv eai iv), oh ireiSfw,ohx 
'6<Ti6v icTTiv, ohK elK6s iariu {it is not prd>able), o i^ </) 77 ^ ', and ihe hke, 
and also such as &uoLa, ay6vT6u ian, the following Inf is actually made 
neoa^/rc by the accompanying fii] oh (sometimes also by ^tj alone), since the 
above expressions, when separated from the negative connected with them (or 
the o privative), have no negative force. Ou 8vmfj.aL fi^ ov joieiv {non pos- 
sum non facere, L cannot not do, i. e. / must do). X. Apol. 34. oure /. rj fiefiurja^ai 
Uvaixai ahrov, oUre ,.e,..vf^4uos (.^ oh>c iira^uelu (/ must think oj him, and^ if 1 
think of him I 7nust praise him). PL Rp- 427, e. ohShu Aeyeis- av yap v^recrxov 
CtjtW, ^s ohx 'SaiSu a-oitu fiii oh fiov^elu diKaioavur, eis dvuafuwiraurl 
rpdira, {since it ivould not be right for you kot to render assistance). Her. 7, 5. u « 

42* 



498 SYNTAX. [§ 319. 

cIkSs iffTi 'A^uaiovs ipyaaafievovs iroWci, ^Utj /cafci Tlipffas, fir] ov 5ovi/cu Si 
Kas, rS)v {= wv) iirolrjaav {it is not right that the Athenians should KOT atone for 
their injustice). PL Symp. 218, c. ttcij/u av6r]Tov i]yovfj.aL eivai aoi fxr) ov /col 
rovTo '/api^ea^ai {non sanum judico tibi hoc 'SO'S gratijicari). Ov (pT]iii. tovto fj-i] 
ovTws exeij/ (nego id sic se non habere, I deny that this is not so). — Also after the 
expressions Seiyhu elvai, alcxP^^^ alcr x^vrjv elvai, alax'^^ ^'^^"•h 
which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with /jlti ov, when it is to be 
made negative. X. An. 2. 3, 11. S^sre tracnv alo'x^'^VV eluai, /xt] ovx^ 
(rvcTTrovSd^iiv {so that all were ashamed [= none were willing^ kot to be busy). — 
Sometimes fi}] oif occurs after negative sentences with participles also, in the 
sense of if not, except, instead of the usual /xij. PI. Sys. 212, d. ovk can (pi\op 
to) (j)i\ovvTi ovdev /J.}] OVK avTKpiKovv {nothing is lovely in the eyes of the lover^ 
except that which returns love). 



SECTION II. 
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 



CHAPTER VII. 

I JUx^^^ § 319. A. Coordination. 

'' *" When two or more sentences stand in a close connection 

with each other, there is a two-fold relation to be distin- 
guished. They are either so related to one another as to 
exhibit a unity of thought, though each is, in a measure, 
independent of the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise,, 

I Plato also was very ivise ; or so, that they are wholly uni- 

■' ted, the one defining and explaining the other, the one 

being the dependent member of the other, e. g. when the 
spring comes the roses hloom. The first kind of connection 

'I is called Coordination^ the last Subordination, and the sen- 

tences Coordinate and Subordinate. Li coordinate sen- 
tences, therefore, the members are independent of each 
other, but in subordinate sentences, one member is de* 

I pendent on the other. 

! I came, I saw, I conquered, — Coordinate. 

Wlien I came, I conquered. — Subordinate. 



^ 320, 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 499 

Remark 1. The coordinate as well as the subordinate conjunctions are 
properly used only to connect whole sentences ; but when several sentences 
have single members in common, these common members are usually expressed 
but once. In this way the sentences are either contracted into one sentence, the 
subject or predicate common to the sentences being expressed but once ; or 
there is at least an abbreviation of the sentences, each sentence having its own 
separate subject, but the predicate common to the sentences being expressed 
only with the subject of one sentence. Ot "EXX-ques to7s ■jroXefxlois i-rre^eu- 
TO Kol KaXcos i/j.ax^o'avT 0. Sco/cpdTrjs Koi UXdruu ffo<pol ^aav. Oi uhy"EX- 
K7]U€S irapa rhv iroTajxSu, ol Se Ilepcrai iv opeaiv iar paT OTreSev crai^T o. 

Reji. 2. In respect to the grammatical form of connection, all coordinate 
sentences are alike ; they are all treated gravimatically as principal sentences ; 
but in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different. 
For every thought which forms a complementary member of another thought, 
can be expressed in a coordinate sentence, as was always the case, in the ear- 
liest use of language, e. g. Th eap ^XSre, kuI ra p6da av^eT, instead of ore rh 
eap ^ A ^ e, to, p. a. (the spring came and the 7vses bloom, instead of when the spring 
has come the roses bloom). 



$320. Different forms of Coordination. 

Coordination consists either in expanding, contrasting, or ex- 
cluding a thought. The first is called copulative coordination, 
the second adversative, the third disjunctive. Sentences also 
which stand in a causal relation to each other, may be coordi- 
nate, and are called causal coordinate sentences. 

§ 321. I. Copulative Coordination, 

1. A copulative coordinate sentence is one in which two or more thoughts 
which are considered independent, are so united together, that the thought ex- 
pressed in the coordinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the thought of the 
preceding sentence. A copulative coordinate sentence is either annexive or 
enhansive ; in the former, a second thought or clause is merely joined to a pre- 
ceding one ; in the latter, the statement made in the sentence applies with more 
force to the second member than to the first. An annexive coordinate sentence 
is made : — 

{a) By Kal, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic re, que, and; 
Kai and tc have, in general, the same difference of meaning as^ et and que. 
K a I connects members of a sentence equalli/ important, or those in which the 
one following is stronger than the one preceding; hence it often strengthens or 
enhances the idea of the preceding member or is a more full explanation of it 
{ac,atque,et quidem) ; t f' appends some addition whicli belongs to the preceding 
virmher ; in prose, words are seldom connected by a simple ti, but sentences 
muchoftener. — (b)in a more emphatic and definite manner by k a /—/cat, 
"i — et, both — and, not only — but also, more seldom by t e' — re' ; the difference 
between the two in tliis case is, that with the former (/ca^ — KaO the singe 
members appear more independent and forcible, than with the latter (tc-t^) j 



500 SYNTAX. [§ 321. 

hence the fonner is used, when the members are of different kinds or are anti- 
thetic ; — ( c) by T 6 — Kal, both — and, not only — but also, when it is to be indi- 
cated that the connected members stand in an intimate connection with each 
other; by the stronger Kai, the second laemher is emphatically joined to the 
first ; they often correspond with the Lat. quum — turn, when the discourse pro- 
ceeds from the general to the particular and more important. 

'2,0}KpdT7]s K a I HXdTwv (Tocpol ?i(rav. PI. Apol. 23, a. t] av^pumim] (TO(pia oKiyov 
Tiyhs a^la ecri Kal ovSey6s, So TroAAa k a I iroyrjpd, TroAAck Kal iJ.eyd\a ; hence 
Kal ravra, and that too. X. An. 3. 2, 16. &irfipoi outcs rwv iroXeyiicav to re irX^^oj 
&IJ.€Tpou bpojvres., '6p.ws eTo\ixi](TaT€ livai eis avrovs. PL Phaedr. 267, Si.Ticriai/ 5e 
Topyiav T€ edaofx^v euSetj/; — "Av^puiroL Kal aya^ol Kal kojcoi (but not Kal kokoI 
Kal TTovrjpol). K al irevrjTes K al TrAovaioi. Kal xpTj/uara/col &vSpe5. Kal pvv 
Kal aei. Kal irpoora Kal varara. X. C. 1. 2, 4. (Sw/cpaTTjs) rov adofjLaros 
auTos T6 ovK T]iJ.4\€L, Tovs T afj.€\ovvTas ovK iir'puei. KaXos re Kal aya^os. In 
antitheses: 'Aya^d re Kal KaKd (the good as well as the ci?//), xp7?«''Toi re ko* 
TTOvripoi, rd T e epya dfioius Kal ol \6yoi. IloWd t € kj.1 Ka\a epya airedfi^aTo. 
Her. 6, 114. iroWoi re Kal iwofiaxTToL "^XXoi re Kal 'S.uKpdrrjs {quum alii, 
turn, S.). Her. 6, 136. MiXnadea ecxov iv ar6^JiaTi ol re 6.KK01 Kal fidXuTTa 
adv^iinros. Hence &\\us re Kal {quum aliter, turn, 7iot only in other respects, 
but also), especially (but 6.XKWS re without Kal signifies praetereaque, adde 
quod, i, e. and especially). The connection is expressed still more strongly by 
re — Kal S^ Kal (quum — turn vero etiam). PI. Rp. 357, a. 6 TKavKuv a^l re 
avdpeioraros &v rvyxdvei irphs airavTa, Kal 5^ Kal r6r€ rov Qpacrvfxdxov r^v 
avSpp-qaiv {desperationem) ouk a7re5e|aTo. — It is to be observed that, after a/ia, 
^8rj, oviro), oh cpbdvu and the like, a coordinate clause with Kal or re — koI often 
follows, instead of a subordinate clause with ore. X. An, 7. 4, 16. ^5tj re Zih 
rov 6p6<pov icpalvero irvp, Kal SiAavbs (r7)fialvei rfj cdhiriyyi {the fire already began 
to appear through the roof, akd [?fAe?j] Silanus gives notice with his trumpet). Isocr. 
Paneg. 119 aixa ridels re rr]s apxvs aTrearepovixe^a, Kal ro7s "EWTjaiy apxh tcuv 
KaKbbv eylyvero. 

Remark 1. Kal has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands 
at the beginning of a question, where the interrogavc/ takes up, with surprise, 
the remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul- 
lity or absurdity of the other's statement. X. Cy. 4. 3, 11. oAA' eXnot rts ii», 
OTi TTOiSes 6yres i/xdv^avov ; — Kal irSrepa iraTSes elai (ppovifiurepoi, a<rre namely ra 
(^pa^Sfxeva Kal heiKvvixeva, ^ &vhp€s ; = ac multo minus prudentes sunt. So espe- 
cially Kal IT us; PI. Ale. 1, 134, c. SwaiTo hf ris fieraSiSdyai, h jx^ ^xfj; — Kal 
irws : = ac minime quidem. 

Rem. 2. If more than two numbers succeed each other, they are connected 
in the following manner: (a) with the first member the connective is omitted, 
and the other members are annexed hj Kal repeated; (b) /cai — Kal — *cot, 
etc.; (c) re — re — re, etc.; (d) re — Kal — Kal, etc. X. Cy. 1.4. 7. &pKToi 
re TToWovs i^df} Tr\T](Tid(ravras Sie(p^eipau Kal Xeoyres Kal Kairpoi k al irapSdXeis • 
at Se eXacpoi Kal SopKdSes Kal ol dypioi oies Kal ol ovoi ol iypioi actveTs eiaiv: (e) 
re — re, etc., Kal (Epic.) Od. y, 413. 'Exe(ppwv re SxpaTtoy re Ylepa-evs r' 
^ApT}r6s re Kal ayrl^eos &pa(rvix-f)Sr)s. (f) re — re Kal — Kal, etc. (seldom) X. 
C.2.2, 5.7u»')) virode^afxevr] re (pepei rh (poprlov rovro, ^apvvo/xeyr] re Kal KiySvyev- 
ovffo, . . Kal . . Kal Kr\. After Kal two members, considered, as it were, one 



^ 321.J COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 501 

Whole, can follow with r ^ « a L Her. 7. 1. (eVeVa^ kKi^ro.<n] Ka\ vias re 
Ka^ aiTou Ka\ irXoia X. An. 4 4, 2. (^ci/^r,) ^eyc{A„ re ^u Kal /Sacr.'Xe.oV re 
€ixf Tw aaTpairr), Kal em rais TrX^icTTais olKiais Tipaeis iirrjaav. —Bnt kuI — t^ 
are never used as corresponding particles, in Attic Greek: where they are 
found in this position, the member introduced byre', is subjoined only as a mere 
addition to the preceding one. Th. 1, 54. Kopiu^ioi fihu Kpar-hcravr^s . . Ka\ &u- 
Spas ^xovTfS aixfiaXiirovs ovK i\d(T(rovs xi^iw,^, uads re { praetereaque) KaraU- 
aavres irepl e^SouvKoura eaj-qaav Tpotraiov. As infrequently, likewise, is /c al — 
T 6 used in the sense of etiamque. 

Rem. 3. As an enclitic, t 4 must always rest upon a preceding word, and indeed 
on that word, to which re specially belongs in the member to be connected. But 




sentence, it is usually joined to the first word of the sentence. Her. 6, 12.3. 
oLrivis €(p€vy6v t e rhv iravra xP^vov robs rvpavvovs, e« ixrjxavris t e Tr)s tovtcou 
i^ehiTTov 01 UeiaiaTpaTiBai r))v TvpavviBa. It is, also, often joined to the predi- 
cate of the sentence, if that precedes, although it would stand after another 
word. X. C. 3. 5, 3. <^ [qua re) iroWol iiraipSfievoi irpoTpiirovrai re dperijs 
^Tri^€A.ero-,^oi Kou iKKifioi yiyyea^ai (instead of aperris re err.). 

Rem. 4. In the Epic writers (and in imitation of these in the Lyric writers 
also, though more seldom in the latter, and in the Attic writers in only a few 
fragments), re is very frequently joined with conjunctions and relative pro- 
nouns, in order to represent, in a more definite manner, the mutual relation 
and intimate connection between the corresponding members {as well — as^ 
as — so). This t€ either stands in both of the members, in which case the first 
T€ refers to the following member, anticipating it, as it Avere, and the second 
refers back to the preceding ; or more frequently it stands in only one of the 
corresponding members ; thus often ctirep re — t€, or eivep — re; ixev re 
— 5e Te or aWd r e, as on this side, so on that, or /xeu — Se re {aWd re); 
lj_ff/ Tf — 5c (dWo); also the whole of the first member can be omitted, and 
be supplied by the mind, from what precedes; thus Se re, dAAo re, also 
often without the corresponding fieu: 5e — re; re — 5e; re — aurdp; then 
/cot T €, atque, yet moreover, when the corresponding member is contained in 
what precedes (not only — but also). 11. i, 509. rhv Se fxey &vr}(Tav, Kai r skKvou 
fv^ajxevoio. Also gyre, he\ who (not only in the poets, but also sometimes in 
Herodotus), ostls t6, oX6s re, 'oaos re {= ro7os, ofos ; rocros, oaos, of such 
a nature, so great, as much as), &s re, so as, so that, us el re, ar e, ijvr e, o w us 
re, ore r'e, then, ichen. o^ i r e, "ua r e, there, where. In Attic prose, the fol- 
lowing combinations still remain, viz., oUs re elfii with the Inf., signifying 
I am in the condition, Sisre {so that), wseire and esre {\. Q. es o re), quoad. 
Moreover, ^ ire /re, postquam, as used by Herodotus, should also be mentioned. 

Rem. 5. Kal is originally an adverb, also, even, etiam. But the idea of 
emphasis wliich is expressed^bv Kai, also, even, necessarily supposes a reference 
to another clause, e. g. Kal 6 ':^wKpdTVS ravra tKe^ev (sc. oh ^lovov oi S.\\oi, or 
fijirep Kol oi &\\oi). According to the nature of the correspondmg member to 
be supplied, the emphatic ko/ may have either a strengthening {even, yet, entirely, 
etc.) or a weakening force [even only, only even), e.g. Kal KarayeXas p.ov {you 
even laugh at me). Kal crh radra lAe|as {even you said this) ; — Kai p-aXXov [yet 
rather). Kal rpis, Kal Kdpra, {very much), Kal -rrduv, Kal noXvs {not much) 
Kal Lyou, Kal\^Kp6v{but little), Kal ^as-Kal nrdxac {even long ago Kal 
X^e's, Jal abrUa, Kal udu or e^rt Kal ''i^"- ««1^^ ^.^ ovr.s vel sic),-- 
Kal ].6uos, Kal eh. With questions, e. g. Dem FhiL 1, 53. -' XP^yj^J -po - 
SoKa.; {what isonlytohe expected even?) {=mhil plane Jll^^^^^^'^J'') 
In Homer, after a temporal protasis, this Kai often introduces ^ ^P^^^ 
and may then be translated by immediately. B. o, 4/8, iip.os S -npiy^veia 



505: SYNTAX. [§ 32. 

ipdvr] ^odoSdKTvXos ^HcCs, Ka\ t6t' eneiT avdyovTO fiera ffrparhv ihpvv Axcuuy. 
The use of «ai in such concluding clauses, shows that the two clauses are co- 
ordinate, and Kai may be said to have its usual connective force, though that 
force cannot well be expressed in English, 

2. If the annexive coordinate sentences are negative, they are connected : — 
(a) By u 5 € {/xrjSe), not — nor, when a negative member precedes ; (b) by 

Kal ol (Ka\ fi-f}), and not, when an afl&rmative member precedes; this is the 
regular form in Attic prose ; but in the Ionic and poetic writers ovSe or utjSc 
can also be used here ; (c) in a more emphatic and definite manner by oGt€ 
— otjTi ()tt^T6 — fi-ffre), neque — neque {neve — neve), neither — nor; (d) by 
oUre — re (seldom Kai), neque — et, — on the one hand not — and on the other ; 
as not — so also. 

X An. 1. 4, 8. ovK ty(t)yc avrovs Sid^cD, ovS' ipei ovSeis, us iyu ainovs kokws 
TTOiSo. C. 3. 7, 9. Ziareluov fxaWov wphs rh awrrt^ Trpose'xet*', Ka\ fir) o/ieXet tup 
TrjS 'Tr6\€(DS. Dcm. Cor. 254, 85. (paivo/iai iyw x^P'^os Tcri/XTJKwy t<^t€ Ka\ ov 
/xefji^^ews u 5 € rifiaipias. Th. 3, 14. iirajxiiuaTe ..Kal fJLT] Trp6r](Th( rjfMS. PI. 
Lysid. 207, e. iuciv &pa (xe a ^ovKei woieTy Kal ovSev i-wiwK'qTTOvtriy, ouSi 
SiaK(i}\6ou(ri iroulv S>v hv iirL^vfifis. — OCre ^e ol, oUre ^.v^ponroi. — X- An. 2. 
2, 8. H/xoaau . . ixr^re Trpo^uxruv aX\r]\ovs avyLfxaxoi t€ ((reabai. 5. 1, 6. oCrf 
ayopd ear IV iKavj], ^ re X^P^ TroAc^/a. Th. 1, 118. o/ AaKeSaifi6yioi alabofi- 
(voi otjT€ tKcaXvov, et fx)] iirl fipaxv, 7}(Tvxa^6v t e rh ir\4oy rov xp^i^ov. 

Rem. 6. The following connective forms are more rare, and belong mostly 
to poetry, viz., oUre — ov, ov — oUre; re ov — re; oCrf — t€ oi/] in the 
two last forms ov combines with the verb and forms, as it were, one thought. 
Th. 2, 22. 'EKKKr^aiau re ovk iiroiei.., r-i)v re ir6Kiv 4<pv\aare {he called no 
issembly and guarded the city)-. 1, 126. otire iKelvos en Karev6r}(Te, t6 re 
aaurelov ovk iSr^Kov j ovre — ovde, neither — and not. which is found often in 
prose also. 

Kem. 7. OvSe expresses either an antithesis {but not), or it serves to con- 
nect a new clause {and not, not even). When ovSe — ovSe follow one anu ' 
they are not to be considered correlative particles and translated neither — 
but are to be translated 7Wt even — and not. X. C. 3. 12. 5. eC yap Xabi, biz 
ovSe ev d\\(a oh^evl ayupi, oiiSe iy irpd^ei ovSefjiia fielov e^eis 5ia rh 0e\rioy 
rh crw/xa Trapea-Kevdcr^ai. OvSe as a connective in negative sentences, corre- 
sponds to Kal in positive sentences, mentioned in remark 5, and signifies not 
even, ne — quidcni, c. g. ovS' d Kpn^iaros iroKfi-qaey avr^ fidx^o^ai — ovSe els 
{ne unus qnidevi), ovS' &s {ne sic quidem), etc. 

3, An enhansive or emphatic coordinate sentence, as has been seen (Rem. 
5), is expresssed by the simple Kai, but more definitely by: — 

(a) ov 1x6 yov or ov (lovov tr i (also ovx Srt pi6vov) OT fi^ Sr t — 
aWh Kal, not only — but also. {Ovk Bri originates from oif Atyai, Srt, as 
/JL-^ Sri from /xi] Keye, Sri.) 2«/cpoTTjs ov fx6voy aocphs ?iv, oAAo Kal aya- 
^6s. PI, Symp. 179, h. virepairo^yn)(rKeiy i^eKovariy oi epuyres, ov fx6vov Zri 
&vSpes, a A A ^ Kal yvvaiKes. X. C. 2. 9, 8. o u x ^ "J" * fxovos & Kplrwy iy fiavxia 
^y, aWh Kal ol <pi\oi avrov. Cy. 8. 1, 28. fxi] yiip 2t: S/)xoi^o, oAAek Kal 
OVS ov (pofiovyrai, [xaWoy rovs aiSovjxeyovs alSovyrat rwy ayaiSuy oi tiy^panroi. 



$ 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 



503 




Rem 8. Ob fxSvou — ^wd without Kai is used, when the second mem- 
ber includes the hrst, whether the second is stronger than the first in extenf or 
degree. ^ r,^-■^^■..^ . / 

M 

X. C. L 6, 2. IfiaTioi/ 7in<{>U(rai. ov fi6vov (pav\oy, a\}ia Th avrh ^Ipovs're 

(b) Ovx ^irus — dAAo Kal, not onlynot — hut even, or ovx Sttws or fx^ 
tvws — d A \' o u 5 e, noi only not — hut not even. I^O-irm = how, I say not or ( Imp.) 
say not how, which involves the idea, /say not or say not, that not.) Also fi))'6rt 
(followed by dAA' ovU) is used in the sense of not only not, when both clauses 
have a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Coi^ 271, 1. o ux 
Situs X»P"' a-brols (to7s 'A^valois) exeis oAAd fiia^c^ffas (Teavrhu Karh tovtcovI 
■KoKiTfvri {non modo non — sed etiam). Dem. Phil. 2, 67. [tovs @r}^aiovs rj-yeTro) 
ovx iirus avTiTTpd^fiv Kcd 5iaKUi\vcreiv, dA\d Kal crvaTparfvo'eiv. Isocr. 
Plataic. 586. ovx '6iros ttJj Koiyrjs i\ev^epias HfTexo/x^u, dAA' ovSe dovXelas 
fUTplas ^^lu^ixfj rvx^lv (non modo 7wn — sed ne — quidem). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. 
/i^ 'onus opx^^o^^ox iy ^u,^/i.<^, dAA* ouS' op^ova^ai idvvaa^e (non modo non 
saltare poteratis, serf ne rectis quidem pedibus stare). Isae. 10,*1. eyi ju-); Sn 
inrip iAAow, dAA* ovSf inrtp ifiavrov irwirore S'iktiv Idiau etp'qKa (as in Latin: 
non modo de alio, sed ne de me quidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non 
modo non, the Latin using non modo — sed ne — quidem, instead of now modo 
non — sed ne — quidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common 
predicate of both is in the latter clause). 

Rem. 9. When ovx 2ti — dAA' ovSe has the sense of not only — but not 
even, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a 
negative sense. Th. 2, 97. Tavrj] (rfj ^kv^uv laxvi) aSivara (sc. ia-riv) 6|- 
KToiiabai ovx ^Tt to. iv ttj Y.vpwirrj, a\\' o v S' iu rfj 'Aaia €^uos. (Scytharum 
potentine non modo Europiie irapcria exaequari non possunt, sed ne Asiae quidem 
gens). Dem. 702. oi/x Stj ruv 6vro3v aTrea-r epiiix-qp &u, aW' ov5' fev 
((vv. (In dTTco-TfpTj/xTjv is contained the idea: non haberem.) Also /x^ 'on 
followed by dAA' ouSe is used in a similar manner, since a negative precedes fi^ 
Sti. X. C' 1. 6, 11. TTji/ oiKiav fi &K\o ti wy KeKTrjirai, voiJ.i(wv apyvpiov &^Loy ehai, 
ovSfvl hy fi^ Srt irpolKa Sol-qs, dAA' ou5' eAarro*/ t^s d|ias Aa^cov (you 
would not only not gice your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price, 
tJian it ts worth ; properly you would give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not 
even for a less price, etc.). 

(c) Oi(K) — dAAd KaL, not — hut even; ou(/c)— dAA' ouSf, not — nay 
not even. Dem. Mid. 24. ou irovT]p6s, dAAd Kal -n-dw xpV<rT6s. X. C. 2. 3, 8. 
rhy KOJL \6yef} Kal tpycp irfipcifiMfvoy i/xe aviav ovk tv Swaifiw ovt ed \eyety out* 
eZ iroiilv, dAA' ovh\ irupdffofiai. An. 1. 3, 2. (SapeiKohs) \afiii>y ovk fls rh 

I Kioy Kare^f^rfu ifioi, dAA' oifSh Kci^duird^(ra, dAA' els vfias iSairdyuy. 
i (d) Ovde—fii) Sti, not even — not to say, much less (ne-quidem — nedum). 

I X. SjTnp. 2, 26. Kol ou5€ d»/a7rv6?v, fih ^ri xdyeiy ri hw^icr'Sixe^a (we shall be 
able not even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much lees to speak). 




504 SYNTAX. [♦ 322. 



§ 322. II. Adversative Coordinate Sentences. 

1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand 
in opposition to each other, are united and form one thought. 

^o) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the 
coordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause, 
since another thought is substituted for it ; this is done : (a) by placing the 
conjunction oAAa (but) in opposition to a preceding negative; (b) by placing 
the conjunction awd together with the negative ou in opposition to a pre- 
ceding affirmative ; in the last case, oAAa may be translated and, or be wholly 
omitted: (a) ovx ot ir\ou<noi eu5ai/xo»'es elcriv, aW' ol aya^ol. (b) 'E/ceZ^cv, 
oA.A' ov k ev&eV5e Tjpirda-^T} (he was seized there, and not here, or not here). 

(/8) Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate 
clause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is 
expressed by Se,.dA.A.(£ (but), arap fouT<£p, Epic), icatroi, ftevroi, Sfius. 

'2. Ae most generally has an adversative force, and hence can Express ever}- 
kind of contrast or opposition. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like 
the Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives (re, kou) and the adversa- 
tive (aWd, etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, and 
hence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely contrasts 
it (copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the English 
uses a7id. The new thought being diflferent from the preceding, is placed in 
contrast with it. 

3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, is 
commonly expressed by the concessive fi 4 v, which, as it denotes concession 
and admission, points forward to the limitation expressed in the second member 
by 5 4. As Se can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so the signification 
of ijl4v is sometimes stronger and sometime? weaker. 
y^J i.i:J<ki.^ <i^ li; »rhe original signification of /teV (arising from ^V, ? 316; Rem.) is tr \. 
in truth ; yet its signification is not always so strong as this ; indeed, in innu- 
merable places its force is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all into 
English. Th fxev w(p4Xi}jL0v Ka\6v, rh h\ ^\a$(phv al<rxp6v. Th. 3, 68. Si4<p^fi- 
pav Il\aTai4wv fxev avruv ouk i\daaovs Siouco(ria)v, 'A^youwv S e 7r4vT€ koI 
eiKoaiv. 

5. M e 1/ — 5 6 are especially used in the following cases : — 

(a) With divisions of place, time, number, order, and persons, e. g. ^'Lvravba 
jxeu — e/cel Se, ev^a ijl4v — 4v^a 8 4, Tore iJ.4v — Tore S4, xore fjL4v — 
TTOTe S 4, at one time, — at another, sometimes — sometimes, HWore fi4v — iA. 
AoTe 5 €, afxa ij.4v — a/ia S 4, sometimes — sometimes, vpurov ^ev — cxetro 
Z 4, rh iJ.4v — T^ Se, TO ij.4p — to, S 4 and tovto ii4v — tovto 5e, partly. — 
partly, on the one side — on the other, both — and, 7iot only — but also, 6 /le'v — i 
d4f hie — ille. 

(b) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also, when ser- 



505 



^ 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 

eral actions refer to the same object. S. Ph. 239. iy^ ydvos fi4u eiVt ri)s ir^p- 
i^^vTOv ^Kvpov, ir\4w 5' 4s oIkov, avdwfiai Se irah 'AxiKeccs NeoTTTo'Aeyuos, So 
also in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. ot is4l3a\ou ixhu is tV 
'A<r/77»/, Kifif^^piovs iK^a\6vr^s iK rrjs Evpc^irrjs, roiToicri d'e imanSneyoi (peiyovai 
ovTO) is TT)y M.riSiKr)y X'^P'^^ airiKovTo, 

c. Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in two different clauses. 
X. C. 2. 1, 32. iyiii (Tvv€ifii fxhv ^eo7s, (rii^cLfxi S^ au^pdnois to7s aya^oh. 
1. 1, 2. luKpaT-ns Srvoiv (pavephs ^ woWdKis fihv oXkoi, ivoXXaKis Se iirX 
ruv KoivS>v Ti]s iroXcws ^u^iuv. Yet this principle is not always observed. 
Mev is regularly omitted, when 5e Kai follow, e. g 2. 8, 5. xaAeTriiz/ ovrta 
TJ iroiriaai, Sisn firjBev afxapriluy xa^e^i;/ 5e Kal ayafiapT-fjTus re iroiyaavra 
fi^ ayyufjLoyi Kpirf vfpiTvx^^v. 

_ Remark 1. When n4v stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is some- 
times repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in iie corresponding demonstrative 
or concluding clause.^ Her. 2. 121. koI rhv (l e.hv) fiev KaXeovat. Sfepos, 
rovTov fieu irposKvyfova-'i re Kal eZ irotovai- rhi/ Se x^^l^^^°^ 'f- "^^ ^- So also, 
when, instead of the adjective clause, the Part, with the article is used. Isocr. 
Paneg. 52, 60. t^ juej/ imepeveyK6vTi r^u a.vSrp(amvT]v ^vaiv ('Hpa/cAe?), . . rovra 
fiev {Eupvabevs) iTriTOLTTuv . . SifxeAeo-ej/. So also sometimes two preceding 
/tfV's correspond with two following Se's ; this always implies a strong emphasis. 
PI. Apol. 28, e. 670? o5y Seiva hv eir) elpyacrfxevos, S> duSpes 'A^r]va7oi, el, ore 
fxfv fie 01 6.pxovTes erarroy, ovs v/xeTs e'iXeor^e 6.pxeiy /aov, Kal iv IloTiSaia Kal iv 
^Afj.(pnr6\ei Kal iirl Ar\Kicf), rore fie y ov iKelyoi erarroy e/xeuoy — Kal iKLvhvvevov 
OLTTo^aye^y, r ov he beov tolttovtos, ws iyu uiT]bT]v re Kal viveKa^oy, (piKoaotpovvri 
fie Se7y ^y Kal i^era^oyra i/xaurhy Kal rovs &Wovs, iyrav^a Se (l>o^r]^els ^ 
^dvaToy f) 6X\o driovy irpayfxa Xiiroijii rrji/ Ta^iy. Yet this parallelism is but 
seldom found so regularly carried out. 

Rem. 2. On the position of fie y — St, the following points are to be no- 
ticed : They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed to each 
other ; yet they are often to be referred to the predicate or to the whole clause. 
X. C. 1. 1, 10. Kal eKeye fxey (Sw/cpciTTjs) ws rh ttoXv, to7s Se ^ovXofxeyois i^ijv 
OLK ove ly. An. 3. 4, 2. eirabe fiey ovSey, ttoXXol Se KaKo. iv6fii(Te iroiTJcrai. 
When a substantive or adjective is connected with the article or a preposition, 
fxey and Se are commonly placed between the article and the preposition, and 
between the preposition and substantive or adjective, e. g. wphs fiey rovs Mi- 
aous — irphs S' ix^povs; yet this conformity is by no means observed in cor- 
responding members, e. g. X. C. 1. 1, 12. to. fxev av^pdiireia irapeyres, rk 
Sai ^6 y la Se (TKOTrovyres r^yovyrai r a irposriKOVTa irpdrreiy. 2, 24. Sia fxey 
KaKXos — SiaSvya/jLiySe. Or inversely, Isocr. Paneg. 64, 114. iy Ta7s ttoX- 
ir eiais fie y — 4 y Be ra7s <Tvy^r)Kais. 

Rem. 3. It is evident that an v other adversative connective instead of 5 e, 
can follow fiey, e. g. oAAa, orctp, etc. But in place of the adversative connec- 
tives, sometimes also the copulatives re, Kai, are used, by a kind of anacoluthon, 
OT iie construction is entirely changed, no reference being had to the preceding 

Rem. 4. The adversative connective which would be expected to follow 
fiey, is sometimes omitted, although there is a corresponding adversative mem- 
ber. This is the case, when the word expressing the contrast is such, as of 
itself without Se, to make this contrast sufficiently manifest, as e^g. with 
^I'ToO^a fiey — iKe7, and almost always with trpuToy jxey — eTre ira. 
Secondly, even the clause expressing the contrast, can be wholly omitted, in 
which case, it must be supplied by the mind {fxev soUtarium). Her. 3, 3. My 

43 



•VOwvX * 



506 SYNTAX. [§ 322 

€Tot ode 6 \6yos, i fiol /x^v oh irihavos (to 3ie improbable, perhaps probable to 
others). 'Eyw ii\v ovk ol5o: ws jLtev Keyovaiv '■) ravTa fiev rjfjuv ^yyeiXi 
Tis; olfxai fxev, riyov'/j-ai fx4u, Sokw (J.ev, ovk olZa fiey and the like. I 
INDEED, CERTAINLY, t?dnk. 

Kem. 5. On account of its general signification, St, like autem, frequently 
connects sentences even, which stand in a causal relation to each other : then 
the hearer or reader can gather from the context the i)articular mode of con- 
nection. Thus 5e very often expresses the reason, and is used instead of yap. 

Rem. 6. In questions, 5e has either an adversative force, when the interro 
gator gives vivacity, by omitting the concessive member, e. g. X. C. 2. 9, 2. kcu 
6 5. EiVe fjLoi, €<pr], S> Kpiruiu, Kvvas 8 e rpecpfis, Xva aoi roi/s \vkovs avh rCev irpo- 
3a.Twv airepvKwffi ; (you are unAvilling to support a man who could protect you 
from your enemies, and yet do you keep dogs ?). Or, hi has a copulative force 
and continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the 
other, e. g. X. C. 3. .5. 2. o^kow olff^a, ^<pVi 3ti irK-q^ei /lev ovScv fitiovs fiVl*- 
'AidijvaTot BoiajTwi/; — OlSa ydpy t<pr}. "Swfiara 5c aya^a koI KoXa Tr6T(poy ix 
BoioiTuv oUi irAetw &»/ e/cAex'^J'cu, ^ ^| *A^yu>r. The same principle holds in 
answers. 

Rem. 7. Kal — 5 e (in the Epic writers Kal S4 not separated), and, though 
more seldom, the negative ou5e — Se, in which connection 8e has an adver- 
bial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also ; and on the other 
hand not. X, H. 5. 2. 37. o'l re 6.XX01 irpobvfius rtf TfAeirria vrnipfrovvy Kal ^ 
rS)!/ Qrj^alcvv Se tt6\is ■trpobvf.LOis ^vvfirefnre Kal STrXiras Kol linrfas. An. 1. 8, 20. 
Kal ovSeu oi/Sf tovtop va^eTy ((paaav, oiiS' liWos 5 € rciy 'EWijywy iv raxrrp t^ 
luLOLXll ("TO^ey ovSels oviey. 

Rem. 8. In the apodosis, as in principal clauses, 94 has a double force, either 
adversative, or merely contrasting (copulative). Sometimes fUv stands in the 
first member. 

a. The adversative S4 in the apodosis, denotes the contrast between that and 
the protasis. It is used : (o) after hypothetical antecedent clauses, though 
dAAa also is often found instead of Se ; (/3) after relative antecedent clauses, 
and such as denote comparison, (a) X. Cy. 5. .5, 21. oAA* d urfSt toDt', ?^, 
fiovKfi atroKpiyacr^at, av Se rovyrfv^fy \(ye {tiay on the r (/8) 8. 5, 12. 

iisTTfp 01 6ir\7Tai, ovTOj 5 6 K-al 01 ireATouTToi Kal 01 ro^6rai (- other hand). 

(h) After a temporal protasis, 5e commonly has a contrastinff or merely copu- 
lative force, though sometimes adversative also (very often in the Homeric lan- 
guage, also in Herodotus, but seldom in the Attic writers) : this Sf may often 
be loosely translated by then. Od. X, 387. airrap cVei ^vxas fity antTKiiair &A.- 
Ai»5is 6.Wri ayv)) T\fp(Te(p6viia yvvaiKccy ^f\vTf pduy, ^\de 5' ^xl ypvxh 'Ayofxcfu^yos 
'Arpe/Sao. So 6<ppa — T6(ppa 5 e, irrc^Te — 5 6, ews — 5 f . X. An. 4. 1, 2. iirfi 
§6 atpiKovTO, ev^a 6 juev Tiyprjs iroTa,a6s irayrdiraffiy iwopos ^v Bik rh $a^s tral ftt- 
ye^os, irctpoSoy (transttus) Se ovk ijv. ., eSofcet 5f Toii tTTparicinais htk tw 6p4mw 
TTopfvTfoy flvai (then, or on th' contrary). As 5c is used after the protasis, so also 
in like manner after }>articiples. which supply the place of a protasis. PL 
Symp. 220, b. Ka( TTOTc ovros irayov oiov SeivordroVy koI irdyrw . . iv ttXiy' 
jii c I' w 1/ Tovs 7r6Sa5 (Is viXovs Kal apyaaiSas, ovtos 5' iy tovtois ^^j?cj fx**' Ipukriop 
. . olSmrep Kal npSrepoy fid!>^ei (popetv. X. C. 3. 7, 8. ^vymk^v aov, ci (Ktlyovi ^- 
Sicoy x^'poujuet'os, tovtois 5 c /xtjScVo Tp6iroy oUi 5u»T^<rc<r^eu irposc»^x^*'*"« 

G. 'A XXd (Neut. PI. of 6.XXos)y but (sed, at), yet, hoirei'rr, generally expresse* 
difference and separation. It always stands at the beginning of the senf^nod. 
According to the nature of the preceding meml>er, it either abrogates what is 
affirmed in that member (see No. 1), or it r«^r/cte and /i mite it (yet, houxmr) 



f 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES, 



507 



Ee is indeed poor, but brave — he is not brave, but cowardly ; (here the clause hux 
brave restricts the one preceding, and but cowardly whoUy denies or abroo-ates 
the idea of brave). ToGto rh irpay^m wtpeKifiov fiev iariv, ^ A V oh KaK6v. *'The 
use of o A\t£ is very frequent in objections (= at), also in questions, when the 
question expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the form 
of a question. Dem. Cor. ri yap kou fiov\6ficvoi fiereTre/xirecrS)-' &*/ avrovs, iirl 
-TTfV (lpT]y7)y\ a\\' viriipxfv airaaiv. 'AW iiri rhu iroK^iiov ] aXK' avrol ircpl 
tlpriyrjs (^ov\fv«T^e. Eur. ^Med. 325. \6yovs ava\o7s • oh yap Uv Trdcrais Trore. 
'■'A\A' f'^eX^s /if, Kohdev alB4<Tcu Atros ; " verj' frequently aW ?]-*,. but 
retdli/ — ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. koI ot dirov 'AW ^ Srjfxayuyu 6 avrip tovs avSpas ; 

Rem. 9. 'AAXa is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when by it the gen- 
eral si;rnifioation of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an excep- 
tion. Here aXXd is the same as irX^v or el jutj, nisi, and can be translated into 
English by except, tfuni. In the first member, &\Aos (erepos) is commonly 
placed, c. g. ohids &Wos, aWd, and this &K\os points fonvard to the following 
iiWd, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. eV rc^i nea-oi iW-q fiev iroAis ovSe- 
fiia oSjTf <pi\iay oCre 'EWrjvlsj aWa ©pot/fes Kal Bibvuoi {between there is no other 
friendly or Grecian city \there are none] except Thracians and Bithynians). 

Rem. 10. In the frequent combination of o \\' ^ after a preceding nega- 
tive, or after a question implying a negative, or even after the addition of 
&AAo9, %Ttpo% to the nc;.'ative, consequently, ouk, ouSev aAA' ^; oh^lv 6.K- 
Ao, dW' <i; ovhiv €T€poy, oA A* ^; ri &AAo, ciAA'^; 6aAo t i (with a pre- 
ceding interrogative pronoun), aAA* ^, — d A A' seems to be merely Saao, but 
on account of its close connection with ^, it appears to have changed its ac- 
cent (dAAi» fi) and to have lost it (dAA* ^). X. An. 7. 7, 53. apyvpiav ^Iv ovk 
fX'*'i d A a' ^ pLiKp6v Ti. (). 2. 13. ovre iAAos irurroTf fioi irapicrx^ '^^ kavrov 5iOi- 
Kflv, dAA* r) (TV vvvi ib(\fii irope'xfiv. PI. Phaed. 97, d. ohSev &Wo ffKOir^lr 
Tposr^Kfiy ay^ptinriff dAA' >; tJ> IkpKnov /col rh fifKriffTOU. 

Rem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned: 
ob fi^v aWd or oi/fityroi aWd, yet, veruntamen, oh yap aWd, then 
'xrtninh/, certainly. These must be completed by joining with the »egative the 
verb ot the preceding clause, or in place of it, such expressions as rovr iyjue- 
TO, tout' icTTlv. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. i linros TrlwTei ds ySvara, Kal fuKpov KaK^vov 
i^fT paxv^ifftv ov fji^'v (scil. ^|€Tpox^Ai<rev) dAA' iiriyL^iViv b YJvpos p.6\is irws, 
KoL 6 Tiriroj i^avftTTt}. 

Rem. 12. 'AAAci is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or an 
opiHisitt' thouqht ; this is the case in exhortations and exclamations, in general, 
when the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and sometliing new is quickly m- 
troiluced, e. g. dAA' tinvxoi-ns • {well then !) — dAA' &pa {ivell now) — dAA' da\ — 
also when one answers or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. oAAo fiovKofiai, 
loell, 1 will. 

7. From the adverb oS, on the contrary, again, rursus, and &pa, igitur, h&ye 
originated the Epic ahrdp and the prose aT dp. They always stand at the 
beginning of the sentence, and have the signification of Se or dAAc^, but; yet, as 
it seems, with this difference, that, on account of their composition with &pa 
(igitur), thev are more closelv and intimately connected with what precedes^ 
-Me'vTo.'ha-s been already treated (§ 316, Rem.). Kalro^, yet, verum, sed 
tamen.at(pu{^ 317, 3), \s used especially, when the speaker wishes to correct 
sometliing he had said ;*the Latins use guamquam in the same way e. g. 
^alTOi rl ipvfu; {quamquamquidloguor?, and yet ivhy do I speak?). 0/t«» 



508 SYNTAX. [^ 323 

(from 6fi6s, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places the second clause as au 
unexpected one, in opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. Adfmxos fitw ravra tlwup 
^fi<os irposi^iTO KoX avrhs tt? 'AXxifiidSov yvdfir). 'AAA' Ofxus is Still Stronger. 



^ 323. III. Disjunctive Coordination. 

1. A disjunctive coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses composing 
the entire sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes the other; 
henc? the one can be considered to exist only when the other does not. This 
disjunctive relation is denoted by : — 

"H, (XT, out, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by ^ — ^, and when the 
first member is to be made emphatic, fiToi — ^, aut — aut, vel — vel, eitlier — or ; 
eJfrc — cfre (with the Ind.) or iivTt — idyre or ivrf — Hyrf (with the 
Subj. ), siye — sive, whether — or, when the speaker wishes to indicate, that he 
does not know whether he should decide for the one or the other ; on the mode 
used in these hypothetical disjunctive clauses, see § 339. 

'O iraTTjp, ^ 6 vihs auTov atrf^ayfu. — *H 6 war^p, fj 6 vihs airrou aitfbajxv. Th. 
4, 118. €t Se Tt vfjAV ftre koXKiov, ftrt SiKcuoTtpoy rovruy &oie(7 flvcu, Urns 4s 
AaKfZal^LOva SiSdd/ceTf. PI. Rp. 493, d. efr' 4y ypa^itcfi, fJr' iv yuovcir^^ ttrt 
5?? iy iroXiTiKfi. Apol. 27, C. tXr oZy Kaiyd^ tXrt waXaid. 34, e. tXr oZp 
i,\-n^fs, etT oZy \//et/5ej- Rp. 453, i..Ji,vr( m us KoXvfifirfi^pay fUKpiuf ^/iWoTj, 
Ai' T e ils tJ) fxiyiarov irf Kayos fiftrov, Zfiws yt vil oi/ity firroy. 

Remark 1. The following forms, also, are sometimes used: ci — cfrt 
{si — sive); etre — et 8 c' {sive — si fcro), when the second member contains 
6omcthin<; opposite to the first; fXvf — f); fj — cfre (seldom and only Poet.); 
elfre but once (poetic). 

Rem. 2. The disjunctive connectives 1} — <J, in the Epic writers, verr seldom 
in the Tra<:edians, are united with /litVandSc: T)u4y — ifhi. In this case, 
they do not liavc a disjunctive, but like kcu — kcu, tc — tc, a copulative force. 
Instead of -^Se, Iht is also used according to the necessities of the verse. II. c, 
128. 6<pp eS yiyvu(TKTps ij/xfy df6y, ^8^ Kol Siyipa^ both — cuid, not only — hui 
also. 

2. The particle ^ is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, bat also 
in expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude, or express the opposite 
of the preceding member, but only expresses separation or difftrenct. As in it3 
disjunctive relation, one ¥i corresponds with another, so here <J stands in rela- 
tion to a word, which expresses a difference, e. g. &AAos, ovh^is &AAor, aXXoios^ 
iyaanlos, ?5ioy, ha<f>fp(i), etc. ; also in relation to comparatives, as well as to all 
woi-ds which have the force of a comparative, e. g. StrAcurior, »p(r, ^ddpm, etc 
PL Phaed. 64, a. oi/Sey SAAo ainol 4irtTriS€vov<riy, ^ a-ro^Kfi<rK€i9 re kcI 
Tc^ydyai. 

Rem. 3. The comparative ^ is sometimes used after the omitted fiaWoy or after 
a positive. This is the case after expressions of wiilinp, choosin(f. and the like, 
because these contain the idea of preference ; thus after 3 o v A c a d a <, e .^ «' A f i v. 
alpeicr^ai, aXpeaiy hovvai, iv i^vfxely, 56'xco".^oi, ^rjTf ly, Ai/<riT€A- 
cTv {= potius esse). H. o, 117. fiov\o/x iyc» kahy aooy Hfi/itytu, Ij awo\4<rbam 



* 323.] DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 



•509 



Lysias de aff. tvr. x. Cvrovat Kcp^aheiv, ^ ^fxas ird^au. X. Ag 4 5 ('a-v-tj 
(rlKaos) ^prtTO KoL ahv to? y^vvai^ fiuoueKr.lu, ^ alu t^ aS//c« ir\4ou Vyezv 
Andoc. Myst. 62. rf^yayai vofjuQovaa \vaiT€\e7i/, ^) ^^v. ' 

3. The other member of the comparison is joined to the Comparative by ^, in 
the same Case as the comparative, and without a verb, when both members have the 
same verb in common. When this is not the case, the second member must stand 
as a complete sentence with its subject and predicate ; commonly, however, merely 
the subject is expressed, but the predicate omitted ; often also after the omitted 
copula, by attraction the same Case is used as in the first member. Instead of ^ 
the GVh. also can be used (§ 275, 2), most frequently for the AW. and' ^cc, 
often also for the Dat. But the Gen. is avoided, when the use of it would occa- 
sion ambiguity ; it must l»e avoided when the time of the two clauses is different. 

Eur. Or. 1148. oi/K tarty oWfc Kptltraov, ^ <p'i\os (ra<j)-fis, ov irXovros, ov tv- 
pavvls. 'O 4>iK6(ro<f>os fxaXKov ^irt^u/xe? rris (Tocpias ^ tuv xPVI^oltcov. Xapi(6iJ.iSra 
ftaWoy raits aya^ois I; rots koko^s. '^iKoviteu nuWou rohs aya^ovs -^ tovs KaKovs. 
Isocr. Pac. CXtr. ro7s vtwripois koL fiaKKov aKiid^ovaiv, ^ iy(a{sc.aKfxi- 
(w) , irapatyu. Th. 7, 77. ijSn riyfs Kcd iK 5( lyorf pwy ^ rotcouSe iau^-qaav 
(from a more davrjerous situation, than the present is). II. a, 260. ijS-rj yap ttot iyi) 
Kol apfloaiy iitirep vfi7y avh patr ly w/xjAt/co [ivith braver men than you 
are). Her. 7, 10. <tv fitKXm iir' iyBpas arpanvia^ai ttoXv afieivoyas, fj 
'iKvdas. Kur. Or. 715. wurrhs iy kokoIs ay^p Kpfiaawy ya\-l]vr]s vav- 
rlXotaiv (Isopay (instead of ^ 70X^*07). Th. 6, 16. TrposTjfcet ^lol ixaWov ere- 
pwy . . lipxfiy (instead off) tTc'pojj). 7,63. ravra ro7s dnkirais ovx y](T<Tov 
Tuy yavrwy napoKtKfvonat (instead of ^ raits vavrais). Od. i, 27. ovtoi eywye 
^j ya'tr]S Si/fOfuu yKvKtpur t pov 2iAAo l54<rbai. X. Cy. 2. J, 12. i[jLol SoKel 
Kvpoj, ovsriyas iv 6pi aya^ovs, <pi\(7y oviey rirroy eawTo' (instead of i^ cav' 
r6y). Her. 2, 134. yivKtp7yos irvpafiiSa awfAjVfTo iroWhy e * J-affu rod irarpSs 
(in>Irail (if i) ,' ira-rrn. or nnnicily instead of tTjs tov TT<Ztp6s). 

l:iM. 4. Willi TrAtiu)!', i\irro)v, ir\( ov, tharrov, ti^7ov,\\\itn they 
miihI in connection with a numeral. ^ is commonly omitted, without change 
of constniciion, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the 
sentenec (comp. Jtctnt phis or amplius homines). PI. Apol. 17, d. yvu iyw irpw- 
roy iir\ htKacrriptoy a.ya^(^r)Ka, (rr\ yryovws TrXfio) eUSo/x-fjKOUTa {annas plus 
> itus). X. An. 6. 4, 24. oltimts airoKTeiyov(ri ruiu aySpwy ov fX€7ov 

■n, Th. 6, 9.'). i] \fia iirpa.^i) raXdvrwv ovk tXarrov ireyre Kal eiKO- 

aiy. X. ( y. 2. 1, 5. tmrfas /xtv &^(i ov fi(7oy hiaixvpiuiv. With the Nom. and 
Arc. irK«oy\ (Xarroy, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g. 
'Exw ov irKfoy (fKarroy) S(Ka ra\dvTu>y. The Greek can consequently say: (a) 
- r'XttTTOuj, fi(iovs) }} StKa i]fifpat ; (1>) wKiiovs SfKa T]fiipwv] (c) TrAeov ^ 

?. .ai; (d) irAf'oi/ hUa vfxfpat. It will he observed froni several of the 

above examples that irAcW, fji(7oy, etc. stanc' as mere adverbs in the Ace, with 
substantives of a diftcrcnt gender and number. 

Eem. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle ij is found with the Gen. Such exam- 
ples are to be explained in a two-fold manner. The Gen. either expresses its 
own appropriate relation, being whollv independent of the comparative, e. g 
PI. L. 765, a. /i^ rAoTToi/ f, r pt6.Kovr a' y^y ovibs Irwv [just as the Greek say8 
yiyy^a^at rptlKovra IrHy ^ 273, 2. (c)] ; or the Gen. is a preparative demonstra- 
tive pronoun, with which the clause introduced by ^ may be regarded as an 

43* 






510 SYNTAX. [$ 323 

appositive or explanatory clause. Od. ^, 182. ou fiev yap mvyt: ipela-aop 
Koi &p e lou, ^ 0^' 6fio(f>pou€OUTe vorf/juuriv oIkou t^Wov a.vT]p ■^Se yvvi] ( = toD 8tc 

"Rem. 6. (Comparatio compendiaria). In comparisons, instead of comparing ^ 
the attribute of one object with that of another, the Greeks often compare the » 
attributive of one o1)ject with the other object itself to which the attribute | 
would belong. In this case the Gen. is regularly used. X. Cy. 3. 3, 41. x^P^ 
exeTe ou5ei/ t]ttou T]fJL(i>y (instead of rris rjfierepas) tmlyMv. Moreover, in er- 
ery other comparison, this mode of expression is often employed, e. g. II. p, 51 
ai/xaTL ol SevovTO K6fJLai Xapirea-criy byLolai (instead of TaTy t«v Xaf)(T»k). 
Comp. the examples under f 284, 4. This mode of comparison, though not 
strictly correct, is frequent in English, e. g. he Jtas an expression like his father^ 
instead of like his father^s. 

4. When two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverb.-;, ne; to 

the same object^ are compared with each other, then both are put in th ^ .r- 

ative, and the last is annexed by ¥i. 



Qdrrwv, 1) (TO(pd)T e po s, celerior, quam japientior (more stoft thi^n tcise^ or 
not so wise as swift). PI. Rp. 409, d. irXeoi/eUij irovrjpois, ^ xPV^'f'O'f iyrvyx^"^ 
(TO(p(*>T cpo 5, fj OLfia^ 4 (TT e po s SoK(7 elvau airr^ rt koI &AAois. Her. 3, 65 
i7rolr]<ra rax^repa, ft aocpurepa (celerius^ quam prudentius). 

5. The subject is compared with itself, i. e. the subject exhibits at some time 
a quality in a hitjher difjrec than usual. In this case, the Gen. of the reflexive 
pronouns ifxavrov^ afavrov^ iavrov, is used with the comparative, and the pro 
noun aifrSs with the pronoun of the third person. The other mode of ex- 
pression by 1) is not admitted here. 

B 6 \ T t a> f fl/A i ^lav T ov. B^Kr i w y ti a f avr o v. BcXTia-*' t*. 
rhs (avTov. Th. 3, W. SuyaTUTtpoi avrol avruy iyiyyovro. In i . 
ler, the superlative is used in connection with avr65 and the Gen. of the r«^- 
flexive pronouns, when the subject is to be represented, as, at a given time^ 
exhibiting the quality belonging to it, in the highest degree (in a higher degree 
than at any other time). "Ap laros aitrhs iavrov. 'Apiarri awrij iav- 
TTjs. X. C. 1.2, 46. iX^e <roi, 2> Tlf piKKfts, r6ri avvfyty6fir)»y 8t« itiy6raros 
aavTov ravra -^aba ( when you surpassed yourself in these things^ what you had the 
highest disti7}ction in these things, higher than at any other time). 

6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison : When an object in re- 
lation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but uri*^ • • ' - 
thought (sentence), this thought is compressed into one substantive . J 
this substantive is put in the Gren. depending on the comparative. Here, aL^o 
the other mode of expression by ^, does not occur. 

Her. 2, 148. ^(Tav al irupajuiSes \6yov fif^o*'^^ {orobone majcres, i. e. i»n- 
jores. quam ui oratione erplicori jXK'isit). Th. 2, 50. yty6fifyor KptTtrvoif A^7«» 
T^ elSos tPjs y6<rov {the nature of the disctise being too seiYi'v to be described, seeere 
bci/ond description). Tlpayijxi i\iri5a>v Kp^Tr top {too great to be hoped fur, 
beifond hope). Insteail of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. 8«>j^oj. 
n. Rp. 410, d. oi yvfjivatmK^ oKpaTtf xpV^^^^'oi ay ptetTt poi rov Seoi'TOi 
kirofiaiyovaiy. 



I 



$ 324.] CAUSA.L COORDINATE SENTENCES. 



5U 



7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attribute is in a higher 
or lower degree than could be expected, in proportion to another object, then 
the comparative is constructed with ^ Kara, or (though seldom) fi irpos 
with the Ace. (= quam pro). 

Th. 7, 75. fifiCb) fi Kara So/cpua ireToy^a {I have suffered too muck for 
tears ) . PI. Rp. 359, d. yenphs /jl^I^uv fj kut ^v^puiroy {a dead body greater 
f' I in accordance u-ith a human being, greater thayi could be expected for a human 
U.nj, too great for tfiat of a human being). X. H. 3. 3, 1. {"Ayis) iVuxe (Tefivo- 
rtpasii Kmra &ybp<aToy to^^s, Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelium atrocius, 
quam pro numero pugnantium, editur {more bloody than could have been expected 
considering the number). 

8. If the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low a 
decree, that another cannot coexist with it, then the comparative is used with 
^ 'isT€ and the Inf., e. g. Koxa ^ef^w ^v, ^ Ssre KKaieiv, evils greater 
th'iii one could weep for). X. An. 1. 2, 4. irrr](TaL}iivos Hvoli ^ us eVi IletatSas t)]v 
wapatTKfvfiy {having thought that the armament uxis too great to be [greater, than to 
}h ] <ii!>iutst the 7' ' <). 3. 3, "i . $paxvTfpa tik6v%i^ou fj cos i^ixvi7<r^ai tuv a<pcv- 
^uinnruiv {threw r_ : a distance to reach dtc stingers). See § £41. 3, (a). 

RrM. 7. The comparative is frequently used without the second member of the 
coiiip.uison, and can iht-ii 1k» translated by giving a strong emphasis to the 
ji'.-iti , \' joining the adverbs too, pretty, somewhat, a little, 

ri'/iJ. t" , _ English, too sweet, pretty, somewhat, a little icarm.) 

This usage is found when the second member is evident from the connection ; 

but very fn- -v '■• ■■' ■■ ■■ ' ■;ch thoughts a.s, than it was before, than was 

' ■ rf. than brooming, were more or less distinctly before 

till 1 40. Maxeu'Spiw Se rtf Tvpavva ijv a.heK(pi))s viroix- 

ap'/ , , . '. rtry dull of perception, a little crazy). 6,108. 

7iuMj iKavTt pu oiKtoftty [we aicell too far, very far from you). So particu- 
larly the neuti - ■' ..a*', fifKnoy {Utter than is right). KaWiov, ^aAAor, xeipoy^ 
aSaxtoy, Kd.Ktoy : - rtpoy, intuv .seldom Kaiv6T(poy,{i^'niv(i Kaiv6s is used synony- 

mously with j'to'Tt^wj, and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. ov KaXXiov, 
oi'K ftMCivof, OV KOUduy, oi> Kpilrrov, ov xe'fo»'» ov paov {not so easy, as it seems), etc. 
lb r. 3, 71. woiff ly cuniKa noi ioKfti Kcd fi); inrfpfiaXeabai- ov yap &/j.€iyoy {for 
' ' of ^■ brttu; than if u^ did it immediately). PI. Phaed. 105, a. irdXiv 
TKov OV yap x^^poy iroWaKis aKoveiy. Finally, also, when antith- 
• - uic euiupa: 'i each other, e. g. Ta xc^P*""* itoXXoh irX^ia} iffrl rav 

afj.(iy6ywy { r., „ . . . »-< tnari m nniu^n r than the bcUer) . 



^ 321. IV. Causal Coordinate Sentences. 

1. Finally, those sentences are coordinate, the last of which denotes either the 
ground, cause, or consefjuence of the preceding sentence, or the conclusion from it 

2. The fireeks denote the ground or reason by yap, which is never the first 
word in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word. 
rap is compounded of 7^' and Up a, and hence denotes proof confirmation, 
(7^, yes, certainly), and at the same time, an inference, or conclusion {apa, igitur, 
uow, tlierefore). Hence, according a.s the one or the other meaning prevails, 



^1 ' 



1 2 SYNTAX. [^ 324 

ysip may express : (a) a ground or reason, (b) an explanation, (c) a conjirmiition 
or assurance; and hence it may be translated* (a) hy for, (b) iAof is, for ex- 
ample, (c) indeed, certainly. 

PL Phaedr. 230, b. ^/r; ttjj/ "Hpav, KoXi] ye 7] KaTorytoyfj • ^ re 7 «t p irA({Toj»oj 
aiJTr] [idx' afxcpiXaipTis re Koi vi/ztjAt} {yes, certainly =for). Fdp has its explanO' 
tory sense, especially after demonstratives and the phrases TeKfirjpiov 5e, naprxy 
piov Se, <rriiJ.e7ou Se, 5ri\ov Se scil. iari, Se'iKuvfu 54, eSiijAftxre 5e, <rK4\^>a<r^f Sc, and 
the like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, particularly in rejoinders and 
replies. X. C. 3. 5, 10. apa Aeyets tt/v twj/ .^^eaJi' Kpiaiv %v ol vepl KcKpoira 8t' af>€- 
tV ^Kpivav ; — Aeyw yap, ^es, certainly. 10, 2. e/c ttoWwu crvydyovres to. e| ckoo*- 
Tou KaKkKTra, ovtus o\a to, awpuxfa KoXa irotilre <f>alye{r^cu; — noiovfxfv ydpt 
e(p7}, ouTus [certainly, we do so). — In addresses, wishes, commands, and ques- 
tions, the meaning of 7 op, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly 
appears. Arist. Han. 251. tovtI nap vpJav \afj.^dyw ; Aeiya yap •K€uj6tii- 
^a ! (a7n I so treated by you ? well ! then tve shall have hard things to bear I) Ka- 
KMs 7ctp €^6koio\ may you perish then! So, fl ydp^ ct^f ydo. X. C. 1. 7, 
2. oTi S' a\7ji^7) eKfyev, uSe i5l5fi<rKfv tv^vfid/xeiba ydp, e<pri, tX ris fi^ tev aya- 
hhs auXrjTTjs So/ceij/ fiov\oiTo, Tt h.v auT<f iroir)T(ou t^rj ; (now then let us consider). 1. 
4, 14. ov yap irduv <roi KaTdor]\ov, on irapa to. &AXa ^wa wsircp iieol iv^pntroi 
6ioT€vova-i ,- is it not then clear to you f (nonne igitur — ?). II. <r, 182. ''Ipi dfd, rls 
yap (re ^ewv ^fiol &yy(koy rjKfv ; [therefore who Oien has sent you t). X. C. 2. 3, 
17. Ka\ 6 XaipeKpdrrjs elirev *Eav ovv, t/jiov ravra iroiowros, iKfivos njfiev $e\rloeif 
yiyvi)Tai ; Ti yoLp &k\o, e(prj 6 "XojKpdTiis, ^ KivSvvevafis, k. t. A.; [what else 
then will happen except that you will run the risk, etc. ^) Dem. Ph. 1. 43, 10. 
y4voiTO yap &v ti Kaiudrfpov, ^ McuceSoji/ ay}}p 'A^valovs KarawoXffiMy ; (whjf^ 
can there he a greater nocfJty ?). So, T^ 7 op; 7'"V/ ergo? KaL rl ydp ,- and how 
then? Uios ydp; and ir6l^ev ydp; as an emphatic negative answer = by no 
mea7is. 11 ws 7ap oH; (instead of il, -K6^fy Si 06 is used with an antithesis) 
as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ovkovv 6 fiey rh S'lKoia rpdr- 
TU3V ZiKaios, b Z\ TO 65t/ca oBikos ; Tlus yap oC; (is he, therefore, who does what 
is just, just, but he who does ichat is unjust, unjust f to be sure, how not ?). 

Remark 1. The explanatory sentence with 7<fp very often precedes the 
sentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6. 102. iro/, ^r 
yhp 6 Mapa^tiiv iiriTjjdeuiTaTov x'^P''"' '''V^ 'Attikt}s iyimrewrai, is rouro <ripi Karii- 
yfero 'Ittttitjs [tind, for Marathon h\is the 7nost suitalJe place in Attica for the cav- 
aln/. Ilippias led them to this place). So' especially with oAAo ydp, at enim. but 
certainly, really, indeed. oAA' ov ydp. PI. Apol. 20, c. r}$pvy6fi-ny &*>, ci ■^itio-to/xii* 
toOto' oAA' ov yap iirlaTafuu [I should be proud, if I knew this, but certainly I do 
not know). 

Rem. 2. The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one with ydp^ and 
the following one whose meaning is to be continued, are often so closely con- 
nected with each other, that the* subject of the last is transferred to the first, 
and its government made to depend on it. Th. 8. 30. rois iv -rp "SJ^uf 'Arri- 
val is ir(fosa<piyin€yat yap -^(ray Kal o'lKo^fy &.\\ai yt)€S Kol orpaTttyoi, koI rhs 
a-rrh X'lov irdaas koI ras &\\as ^vyayaySuTes i^ovkoyro, etc., instead of oi — 
'A^r}ya7oi — ifiovkoyTO, aino7s ydp^ k. r. A. 

Rem. 3. Ko' 7 op commonly means /or also. rai*ely rfeniw, but sometime! 
the Kai con-esponds to a following /coi, thus nam et — el. 



♦ 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. . 513 

3. The consequence or inference is denoted : 

(a) By Jkpa (hence, then), which never stands as the first word in a sentence, 
though commonly near the beginning, also sometimes emphatically at the end 
It expresses a consequence which comes as a matter of course, which is wholly nat- 
ural. In many passages, it hardly admits of translation into English, since it 
often implies only a very slight consequence, and merely refers to something 
mentioned, to something existing in the context, or only in the conception of 
the speaker, in conformity with which the thing is in the state in which it is 
affirmed to be. Hence it is very often used like the English indeed, as it seems, 
in such explanatory causes as more exactly define, or distinguish, something 
before said, or pointed out. 

Luc. Jup. trag. 51. tl elal $ufioi, ual koL S^eoi- hwh fx.^v eW ^wfxol flah &pa 
Kol dfoi {then there are, consequently there are gods also). X. Cy. 7. 3, 6. ravra aKoiaas 
J Kvpos ivaicraTO &pa rhy fi-npov (ichen he had heard of the duath of his friend, 
riiEX he smote on his thitjh, as was natural). It is often connected Avith an 
Irapf, when, in consequence of a better view of the subject at present, one is 
undeceived in regard to a former opinion, e. g. 1. 4, 11. & iraTSes, ws &pa 
iipXvapovfxtv, Sxf TO iy tw irapai(l<ru> ^pla ibjipufiew ofioiov e/xoiye So/cel 
(hai, oToinrfp ft tis BfSta^fya (u>a ^pcfr] (now how childish ice were then, as I now 
indeed see). 1.3, 8. 'Xolko. 5f, <payai rhu 'AtrTvayriy, t^ oluox^w, t>y e^cb p.a\i(TTa. 
rifiu, ovify iiS(DS ; 'O it Sawa; 6.pa Ka\6s T€ &y irvyxaye, Kal rifi^v ex(>}V ivposir 
yfiy Toi/s itofifyovs 'Acrrvdyovs {now the Sacian happened to be beautiful, the Sacian 
was beautiful, as it seems). 9. 2> 2aKo, dWAcoAas • e/f/3aAw tre e/c rfjs rifjLTJs' rd re 
yiip &AAa, (pdyai, aov /coAAiof olyoxoriffw, koI ouk (KTrio/xai avrhs rhv olvov • at S' 
ipa ruy 0a(ri\(wy oiyox^oi — KaTap^o<pov<Ti. Dem. Cor. 232, 22. iT6\f.ia heyeiy, 
its 6. pa iyw — kcitwAi/kws (trjy r^y ir6\iy {ri]y eip-fimjy) Troi-fjaaa^ai {that I indeed, 
that I, as it seems). Hence the use of 70/) and the strengthened form 7^/ 
ipa. — E» &pa and «t fiit ipa correspond to the Latin si forte, nisi forte, if 
perchance, unless perchance, the inferential force of apa being reduced to a men 
conjecture, and arc often used ironically. X. C. 1. 2, 8. irus tiy oZy toiovtoj 
&,v^p Siaxp^fipoi rous yfovs : fl firj ipa t] rrjs apexTjs cTrt^eAeta Siacp^opd icrip 
(properly, that if such an excellent man can corrupt the young, then we must draw 
the conclusion that, etc.). So also, et apa, num forte, whether then, whether per- 
chance. X. C. 4. 3, 9. (TKOirw, (I ipa ri iari to?s (&eo7s epyov, ^ ay^pdoirovs ^e- 
pairdfiy {whether jterchance, forsooth, the gods have any other employment than, etc.). 
"Apa stands very often in interrogative sentences. Aesch. S. 91. tIs ipa 
bixTfTat; rts S' i p iiraptLiffd bfuy ; {quis igitur defeniet 1 quis igitur SLTcehit 1). 

Kkm. 4., "a pa seems to be derived from the verb 'APn, i. e. to be adapted, 
suitable, and hence to express the inward relation, the immediate connection 
of two thoughts, and in such a niiinner that one seems, as it were, to be en- 
tirely fitted to the other, — the one perfectly corresponding to the other 
(=r precisely, exactly, just). In this sense it is used in Homer, e. g. II. v, 182. 
4k 5" $S>op( Kkvpos Kvvf-ns hy ip IjSreKoy ahroL precisely the one which, just the one^ 
which, T 11,1 OS ipa, just then, 5 T ipa, just when, tot i p a, precisely then, e < 
fih ipa, if not precisely, us ipa, exactly so; ovk — , a A A' ipa, not— -but 
just; iiTf'l f>a, since just, ydp ^a, for just. Homer uses ipa, m general, m 



514 SYNTAX. [^ 325 

order to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are do- 
veloped from each other. 

Rem. 5. The lyric, tragic, and comic writers also employ the lengthened 
form Spa instead of Up a. Thus el S,pa, eir dip a, instead of fi &pa, c?-^ 
Upa. On the interrogative 5 p o and on &pa in a question, see ^ 344. 

(b) Ody (Ion. Sv), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen- 
tence, means, consequently, hence, therefore {ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points 
out the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is ac- 
cordingly far stronger than fipa, but is also used in a more general sense. 

Rem. 6. O S y is used as a suflBx to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case 
also, retains its conclusive sense : Zens oZv, omp oZv, oaot oif, fiky oZv, yovv, S" oZy^ 
dA\' oZy, fW oZy, yap oZv. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every- 
thing else, and a persisting in that which is athnned \ hence it may e.\ Uo 
confirmation and assurance. So oVrts oZv^ osTrep oZ y, wfioever he lu^^ _...un, 
HaoL oZyy how many so ever then, fihy oZy^ yes indeed (§ 316, Rem.), yovVf cer- 
.tainly, surely, oHkovv, truly, certainly not, 5' oZy, aAX* oZy^ arkp oZy^bvi 
surely, clfre oZv, he it this or that, yap oZy, for surely, et 5* oZy, if Oien. 

Rem. 7. Oi/Koui', asa Paroxytone, means: (a) non ergo, without interro- 
gation (consequently ouk in connection with the - " ' ^^^) j still in 
this sense it is also written ovk oZy; (l>) mh/Zo - i, by no means, 
without interrogation (consequently ovk in connection with the emphatic suffix 
oZy) most frequently in answers, e. g. X. O. 1, 9. oCkow tfioiyt SoKti. — Ow- 
Kovy, as a Perispomenon : (a) in a question : nonne igitur f nonne ergo f X. C 
2. 2, 12. ovKovy, (<prt 6 2., kou rtf ytiToyi fiovKci av apf<rK(iy\ — 'E- "-■tj. 
Also in this case it is written ovk o&i', as well as oCKovy; the lattt: en 
adopted in modern times, yet it is to be limited to such questions as involve a 
special empliasis in the negative, and so ot/Kovv is equivalent to nomiefcerte ; 
like S. Aj. 79. oHkovv ytKws i^Siaros fis ix^povs ytKay ; (b) without interrogation, 
ergo, igitur. X. C. 3. 6, 6. ov kov v, tcprj, rh fify irKownoarfpay r^jy ir6\iy Toiclr 
ava^aKov/xfba. This last arises from its use as an interrogative, and ovKovy is 
in this case properly nonne igitur ? The frequent use of this interrogative form 
has caused a gradual weakening in the interrogative tone, and thus its sense 
has become obscure, e. g. ts it not true tJierifore we shall put off? (= conse- 
quently we shall put off). 

(c) Tolyvy, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is derived 
from the Epic t^, therefore, and the slightly inferential or deductive yvy, noir, 
which is derived from the temporal adverb yvy ; it is used : (a) to make 
a transition; thus especially, Ka\ Toivvy, and now, ^t* rolyvy, moreover 
then; (b) to mark a conclusion, therefore now, so then. Toiyap (from the Epic t^, 
therefore, and yap) corresponds to the Latin ergo, therefore, but is poetic ; still 
stronger is roiydproi, just on this account, precisely so, and roiyapovyt on this 
account then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence. 



k 325. Asy7idcton. * 

1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (eurwr- 
JeVots). Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned : — 

(a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. x» 295. (of Hector) <rrii 
S^ KaTa(pi]<Tas, ovS" oAA' ex^ fiii\iyoy cyxos' Ar]t<po&oy 5" iK<L\(t KfVK<i(nriBcL, fuuc- 
phy aitaoi p t e e (uy S6pv fuxKp6y. — (b) Asyndeton is very common in explana- 



J 326.] PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENIENCES. 515 

tory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by &pa {therefore, then, that is) and 
ydp. The second clause gives a more exact explanation of what was stated 
only in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. So particularly 
when there stands in the first clause a preparative demonstrative, e.g. tovto, ro'Se 
ovrus, w5e, etc. X. An. .3. 2,19. evl fj^yco irpoexovaiy rifias ol lTrire7s- (pcuycLu avroTs 
iuT(pa\4<}-T(p6y i(mvy ^ rjfuy. — (c) Related to the above is the asyndeton' in the 
beginning of a discourse or new paragraph, which is intended to strengthen a pre- 
ceding thought. PI. Phaed. 91, c. 'AA\' tVeov, ecpr}. Upurou ue viro/xvfia-aTe 
h i\€yerfy iav /xi) (paiuufiai ti(fxvT]ix4vos. — (d) The connecting particle is often 
wanting, but is, in a measure, involved in another word. This is the case es- 
pecially with demonstratives, e. g. out«s, r6<Tos, toTos^ etc., as in Latin with sic, 
talis, tantus, etc. — (e) Before to roiavra. cetera, &\\a, at &\\oi in the 
enumeration of several objects, Kal is very ccmmonly omitted, as et before ce- 
teri, alii, reliqai, in Latin, when these words have a collective sense, i. e. when 
one would include in these expressions all which is still to be named in addi- 
tion to what has been already mentioned. PL Gorg. 503, e. ohu el ^ovXei ideiy 
rovs C(MrYpd.(povs, robs olKoh6fjiovSj rovs vawTjyovs, robs &K\ovs iravras hr)jxiovp' 
yovi. — (f ) In atUithcsfs, which are to be represented as taking place equally, 
and without distinction, the conjunctions are omitted. PI. Prot. 319, d. o-y/z- 
/Soi/Xcuct wepl TovTuv 6fi.oltes fiey t(kt<dv, Sfiolws Se x^f^^^^ (rKVTor6ixos e/xiropas 
yavK\7}pos, ifKovffios »<»^y, yeyvaios ayeyviis. In poetry, particularly in Epic, 
two or four adjectives, belonging to one substantive (of which each two 
form a whole), or even three, arc often placed together, without a connec- 
tive, if they are merely ornate epithets which, as it were, paint and vividly 
describe the object. H. ir, 140 and 802. liyxos fipi^v, fiiya, (TTifiap6y, K^Kopv' 
^fjLtyoy. Od. a, 96. KoXh. ircSiAa, a/xfipScria, XP^^^^^"^ 



CHAPTER Vin. 

B. Subordination. 

§326. Privripal and Subordinate Sentences. 

1. When ciuiiscs, which together present one united thought, 
are so related, as to their import, that the one is a dependent 
and merely complementary^ or limiting member of the other, 
then their connection may be expressed either by coordinate 
conjunctions, as Kai, hi, yap, apa, etc., e. g. ro tap rjU€, ra Be poSa 
dvSil (the spring camcy and the roses bloom) ; or in such a man- 
ner, that the clause, which merely completes or limits the 
other, is manifestly in its outward form, a dependent, or a sim- 
ply completing or limiting member of the other, e. g. ot€ to 






516 SYNTAX. [$ 326 

tap ^XS^e, TO, poSa avS^eu. Tliis mode of connection is called 
Subordination, and the clauses or sentences Subordinate, 

2. The clause to which the other as a complementary or 
limiting member belongs, is called the principal clause ; the 
complementary or limiting clause, the subordinate clause, and 
the two together, a compound sentence. Thus, for example, in 
the compound sentence, "Ore to top ^X^e, to. p6Sa av&eZ, the clause 
oT€ TO tap ^\&€, is the subordinate clause, the other the principal 
clause. 

3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of a substantive 
(substantive subject or object), or of an attributive adjective, 
or of an adverb, and hence must be regarded as substantives, 
adjectives, or adverbs, expanded into a sentence; accord- 
ingly, there are three classes of subordinate clauses: sub- 
stantive, adjective, and adverbial clauses. 

Thus, for example, in the sentence, " The victory of Cyrus orer the enemy 
was announced," the subject may be expanded into a subordinate clause, 
viz., " That Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ; " further, in tha 
sentence, " Sing to me, Muse, the far-wandering man," the attributive fiW' 
waiukTi'tHj, may be expanded into a subordinate clause, '• HvSpa fwi (yyer€f 
MoOcra, iroKvTpoirov, ts ixd\a TcAXi irxdyx^v" {fho hag wandered Jar). 
Comp., " He announced the victory of Cvrus over the enemy," with " He an- 
nounced, that Cyrus had conquered the enrmy ; " " In the Spring the roses bloom," 
with, " when the Spring is come, the roses bloom." 

Remark 1. The use of subordinate clauses in Greek is not so common 
as in English, since the Greek makes a much more frequent use of Participles 
than the English. Comp. " when the enemy had come." with raur iroXffuW 
iX^oyTODv ; " wlien he had done thi-. he went away." with ravra wpd^as aw(0rf ; 
" Cyrus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to the camp," with Ki'pos 
Tovs iro\ejj.iovs yiKrj<Tas els rh aiparoirfSoy ojfTjKi^cy. 

Rf.m. 2. To substantive clauses belong also dependent or indirect inter- 
rogative clauses ; for these form the object of the <jr<iven)ing verb. e. g. " He 
asked me whether my father had nturned, i. e. ct>' or in rerjord to, the return 

of' mi/ father ; '' He showed, who had plotted th -^ icy. i. e. he showed the 
author of the conspiracy : " " He wrote me, when he shou/d depart, i. e. the time 
of his departure," etc. Still, as the laws relating to dependent and to direct 
interrogative clauses, are often blended together, both will be treated m a 
special section in the sequel. 

Ekm. 3. The subordinate relation of the dependent to the principal clause, 
is indicated in Greek by conjunctions, and also by the rehititY pronoun. Avhich in 
an adjective clause has the meaning of an adjective. The conjunctions are 
correlatives, i. e. relatives which stand in a reciprocal relation to demonstra 
lives in principal clauses, e. g. Ovt 6s i<TTiv 6 ay^p, h y elSts. T h ^6Soy, h eu»dtr ip 
red KTjTTcc, KdWicrrSy iariv. "'EAf^e rovro, hri 6 6.vbpoiTos a^iLyaris iirrtp, 
^a7os — ofos; Say — t oaovr (f. 'ds tKe^a, ovrws iytytro. OSrtt ica- 



♦ 327.] SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 



517 



\S,s irdura (Trpa^fv, &sr(^ Haivov fi^yiarov &^ios i^v. "Ore 6 Kdpos ijx^e 
rSre yai/Tfj ti^yaXws €'xapr,(rav. 'Efieiue f^^xpi roiiov, oZ 6 ^aaiXehs iirvC 
df,/. A substantive may also stand instead of a demonstrative correlative 
e. jr. €'v ToiTo, rcpxpjuw, '6t€ (mstead of roVe, Sre). Still, when the reciprocal 
relation is not to be brought out emphaticallv, the demonstrative is commonly 
not expressed, e. g. ^EAe^ei/, Bn 6 &u^pciros a^dpaT6s itnii^. KaAis Trdura 
Unpa^cw, &STf KT\. "On 6 Kvpos fiK^e, irdvTes /xeyaKccs ixdpvcrav. "Efxcive 
fifXpt ov 6 $aai\fvs tV^X^cj/, etc. Even both pronouns may, in certain cases' 
be omitted, e. g. "E/ifive, /ic'xpt ^ ^aaiKivs iirriX^eu. ' 

Rem. 4. The form of the demonstrative, in the principal clause, either 
actually expressed or undei-stood. determines the nature of the subordinate 
clause. The substantive demonstrative denotes a substantive clause ; the ad- 
jective, an adjective clause; the adverbial, an adverbial clause. But the 
Bubcrdinatc clauses themselves have special characteristics by which they 
may be distinguished from each other, viz., the introductory conjunctions and 
the constructiuns connected with these. 



♦ 327». Sequence of the Subjunctive Tenset in Sub- 
ordinate Senteyices. 

1. For the use of tenses in subjunctive subordinate ..Iauses,t]ie 
following general rule apj)lies in Greek, as in Latin: — 

The tenses of the subjunctive subordinate clause correspond 
to those of the principal clause; i. e. 2i principal tense (Present, 
Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect) in the principal clause, is fol- 
lowed by the subjufictive in the subordinate clause, and an his" 
torical tense (Imperfict, Pluperfect, and Aorist) in the principal 
clause is followed in the subordinate clause, by the Optative, 
i, e. the Subjunctive of the historical tenses. 

Tovro \4yVf rovrS fioi \4\tKrai, tovto \4^tD, Xva yiyvdxTKris {yv^s)f 
hoc dicx>, dixi ( Perfect um praesens), dtcain, ut cognoscas. Tovto tXeyov, tovtS 
fioi 4\t\tKro, rovTo f \( ^a, Ua yiyyaxr ko is (y voir) s), hoc dicebam, dix- 
eram, dirt (Perfect. Hisior.), ut cognosceres. Ovk ex«» ovoi Tpevafiai [rpd 
Tot n a i), non habeo, quo me vertam. Ouk elxov, ottoj r pirro'univ (rpairol- 
^Tjv), non fiabebam, quo me verterem. Oi iro\(fj.ioi irduras, oto) hv ivrvxo'O'h 
KTdyovtrif. Ol iroK^fiioi irdyras, iT(f) ivTvxoi€y, €KT€IU0V, 

2. But it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less 
regularly to the above rule, than the Latin, but has much 
greater freedom. Very often in lively naiTation, the Greeks 
refer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the 
present time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal 
clause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause 
is foUowed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses which 

44 



518 SYNTAX. [i 327. 

accompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis- 
course then assumes the character of independent or direct dis- 
course (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in his 
lively conceptions, brings the past into present View ; the past 
becomes present to him. See ^ 345, 5. 



$327^ Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses. 

The use of modes in the different kinds of subordinate 
clauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by 
itself Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which 
are common to several kinds of subordinate clauses. 

1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi- 
nate clause which forms an intermediate member of another 
clause, taking the mode of this clause. 

(a) This occurs with the Indie, of the historical tenses in those subordinate 
clauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical 
proposition with ct and a preterite Indie in the Protasis, and a preterite Indie 
with &v in the Apodosis [^ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. {&y^fwwos) othf fiohs 
ttu ^xwj/ awfia., av^pwtrov Se yywfiriUj iSvyar hv TrpdrruVy & i fiovKero (as in 
Lat. efficere posset, quae vellet). 3. 5, 8. el ifiov\6fie^a xpVI^'''f^*' *'" o/ &Woi 
flxov awTiTToiua-^ai {si vellemus cxpetere opes, qtias alii haberatt). Isocr. Paneg. 
19. ^XP^*' {"^ovs fi-r^Topas) fii} irpoTfpovirepl rwy dfioKoyovfifywy <rvfjt.fiov\fvtift vplr 
iTfpl rwv a.^(pis^r]Tovp.iV(i}v r]/j.as 45 ISa^ay (oportebut . . priusquam . . docuissent). 
PL Gorg. 506, 6. r]S4a>s fev KoAAiKAe? tovt^ ?ti 5i€\fy6fifiyf ftes avr^ . . 
aTreSwKa (usque dum reddidisscm). From this may be explained the use of 
the Indie. Imperfect or Aorist in final clauses after an Indie of an historical 
tense with or without &y. See § 330, 5. 

(b) Very often with those subordinate clauses which are intermediate or ac- 
cessory members of optative clauses, i. e. clauses expressing a wish ; hence with 
adjective, adverbial, or jinal clauses, as members of a clause expf urisk, 

or as intermediate members of an o/j/afjVe proposition expressed ^naUy. 

n. p, 640. 6^17 5' Ssris eraipos airayyelXeit Tdxi<rra nrjXiiSri {0 that then 
were a friend to announce as quick as possible). Ar, Vesp. 1431. f pSoi ns, ^ ► 
tKaa-Tos clSelri rextnf}y. PI. Phaedr. 279, c. t^ xP^'^'*^ trXribos ftri fioiy taov 
fxiire <p4pfiv, ixi\7^ i-yny Zvvair iXAos, ^ 6 auxppccy. II. <r, 464, sqq. a't ydp 
fJLiv bavdroio SusTjx^oy wSe Svyaifxrjy v6ff<piy airoKpv^cu, Sre fuv fi6pos cu*^. 
I K (£ V (. — X. S. 8, 17. rls fuffeiy Svyair &,y, wp" ov flSfiri Ka\6s re kou iya- 
dhs yofii(6fjifyos. C. 4.6, 7. irws yap &.y ris, a ye fi^ ^irfffToi to, ravra iro^s 
e^Tj; PI. Phaed. 72, c. el airo^yr]<rKoi fiey wdirra, Saa rod ^y ficra AcT/Soi, 
iireiS^ Se airo^ dvo i, fievoi 4y tovto} t^ axVfJMTi ra re^ye&ra koI fi^ wdXiP 
kyafitdffKoiTO, dip ou iroAAi) aydyicT reKetnceyTa wdyra re^rdoftu Kol Mf^*' C^*' * 



♦ 327.] MODES IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 519 

X. O. 1, 13. crrts XPV'To T'^ apyvpla, Sisre kolkiov rb cruixa exoi, irws hu en 
rh apyvpiou aury u(pe\ifxou €?7j ; S. Ph. 325. ^ufx.ou yivoiro xetpi TrX-qpaxral 
woT€, \v ai MvKTivou yuo7€v . ., OTixv :2,Kvpos avdpwv aKKifji.wv pL-i]T-np ecpv. Eur. 
Troad. 698. TiorSo rSySe irai^hs iK^p4\l>ais &v, Tpoias fxeyiaTou u<p4Krin\ 'i-v ol 
iroT€ 4k <rou y(v6(j.€voi iroTSes "iKiov irdXiu kuto iKicre lau Kal irjAty yevoiT ^ti. 
X. An. 2. 4, 3. ovk iiri(rTdfj.€^a, grt ^a(Ti\fus rjfias awoXeaai irepl Travrhs &y 
IT oil] era no, tva Kcd to7s &XXoLs''E\\T]<Tnb6^os eJfTj itrl ^aaiAea /xeyav (TToaTev 
fiv (according to the best MSS.). Comp. 3, 1, 18. X. Cy. 2. 4. 17. e? S^ Tret'- 
7ats i-iraivuv tre voWovs, 8vus So^av \dfiois, ipri e'lTjTroTTj/ccos eX-ns &u. Comp. 
2. 4, 17. But since the Optative in a clause expressing a ivish as well as the 
Optative in hypothetical propositions, has a present signification (§ 259, 3), ac- 
cording to § 330, 2 the ."iubj. must properly follow after the Jinal conjunctions, 
as is frequently the case. PI. Apoi 28, d. avTUa reStval-nv, 'Iva /x^ eV- 
daSc fieyw KaraydKauTTos. X. An. 3. 1, 38, olfo/ioi &j/ vfias fieya ovrjarai rh ffrpd- 
TfVfui, fl iir ifif\r]^(ir]T f, Sirws ayrl tS>v airoXwhSTccy ws rdx^rra (TTpaT-qyol 
avTiKaTaoTa^waiy. Cy. 3. 2, 28. xPVH-'^tO' "Tposyevec hai ert tlv ^ovKol- 
fitfy vfuy, birujs ^x* M*<^'^^'' o,(p^6y(t)s BiSoyai. Also with fx-fj (whether not = 
Uiat). An. 1.3, 17. iyot OKyoi-nv /icv h/ els to v\o7a ififiaiyeiy, h rjfuy doiri, /x^ 
rjnas aifTcus reus rpii^pfcrt k ar aivvr), tpo^olfi-qv 5' h.v rep Tiye/xSyi ep SoIt] eTreo*- 
bcu, fii) Tjfias ay ay rj, S^ey oux oT6y re itxrai i^cX^eiy. 

^' i:K. But in su' ■ ■ e-clauscs with 8t» or ws, that (^ 329), and in 
d' t intcrro^'ativr -. after a conditioning or conditioned Ind. of 

the liistorital tenses, the lud. of the principal tenses remains; also after an 
optative principal clause, since these clauses have but a loose connection with 
the principal chufc, and hence they readily assume the form of direct discourse. 
X. An. 5. 1, 10. et fify i]ir ttrr dfif^a aaepws, Bri 7j|€i Xfiplcro<pos, ovSev hy 
thfi uv n(K\<D Xiyfiy. {So in the best and most of the MSS. instead of ^^oi.) 
Dem. 19,40. ty pa<poy h.y hia^f>-)]5r]v, ¥i\iKa v/xas ei ir o i-qcr oj, e/ ev fjSeiy kcH 
rrjy avfj-naxicw M<" yfyrjcropLfyy^y. — Dem. 16, 4. ovS' tiy efs ayreiTroi, us ov 
a V fi<pf pf I Ti) ir6Kfi, Kai AaxfSaifjLoylous aur^eyels eJyai koX &r]^aiovs. X. An. 3. 
2. 36. €( yijy kir oS t ix^ f iv, rlya XP^ r]y€7a-^ai (ducere) rod Tr\ai<riov, . . ovk 
tiy . . fiovKfvfcrdai i)fias ifoi. 

2. Tlie Siibj. and Opt. are used in subordinate clauses to de- 
note indefinite frequency or repetition ; the Subj., when the prin- 
cipal clause contains a principal tense (Pres. or Fut), the Opt., 
when the principal clause contains an liistorical tense (usually 
the Lnpf.). This relation in Greek is regarded as a conception, 
inasmuch as the idea of repetition arises from bringing single 
actions together in conception. The conjunction or relative of 
the subordinate clause is translated by as often as. 

D. /3, 391. %y 5e k 4ywy airdyevbe fidxvs (SteKovra yo^ao) fiifiydC^iv iraph 
vrivffi Kopwylaiy, o6 ot eirfira &pKiov iaaelrai <pvyUiv Kwas vd' olwvois {as often as 
I shall observe). X. Cy. 3. 3, 26. &TT6rav {ol pdp$apoL fiaai\e7s) (TTpaToy 
Sevwyrai, rd(ppoy irfpifidWoyrai evireTws Sia rT]v T^okvx^ipiav. C.3. 1, Lot* 
^v (2a>Kpe(T7js) .ainhs dSeivy irdvrwy irpo^v^Srara idlSaffKeit '6rov Se airhs 



520 . SYNTAX. - [H 328, 329. 

^TreipSrepos elf 77, irphs robs iiriffTafjievovs ^yev auTovs. An. 6. 1, 7. Sirore o. 
"EWrjves ro7s 7ro\€/j.iois erri oiev, paZlas iirecpevyov. 4. 5, 30. ottov s.fyocp&p 
irapio I K(iiixr]v, iTpfvero irphs rovs if raTs K(i}[xais. 1. 9. 18. elf t^s y4 ri Kvpai vpos- 
rd^avTi KaAcis vTrrj per-^cr eievy ovSeyl irdirore ax(ipi<rrov ^aire r^v Trpo^filav. 



§328. I. Substantive-Clauses. 

Substantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand- 
ed into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive, 
and stand as the subject, as well as the attribute or object of 
a sentence. Comp. § 326, 3. 



§ 329. A. Substantive-Clauses introductd by 6tl o? 

0)5, that. 

1. Substantive-clauses introduced by otl and ws, that, 

express the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. 6pav, 

cIkovciv, voCiv, /xav'^avctv, yiyvioarKiiVy etc. ; Xcyctv, SrjXovv, ScifaaVai, 

dyyeAActv, etc., ['J 306, 1, (b)] ; in the second place, subordinate 

clauses introduced by otl, express the object of verba affectuum, 

e. g. Savfid^eLV, ap(^ccr«^at, ayavaKT€tv, ala)(yv€a&ai, fjLtfji<f>€aS(Uy etc. J 

OTL is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con 

tains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single word 

in it. 

Remark 1. 'fls, properly, how, differs from Sti, in expressinjr the thonfrht 
more indefinitely and undecidedly, than Sn \ hence us is used particularly after 
verbs of believing, thinking, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi. 
— After verbs of believing, thinl-in(j, judginrj, hopinq. promising, swearing, denying, 
the Lif. or the Ace. icith the Inf. usually follows, very seldom or i or us: after 
verbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occur with equal 
frequency; after verbs of knoicing, showing, and the like, either Sti or us 
follows, or a jxiiiiciple, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. with the Inf. See 
§311. Sometimes, also, OTT cos and the Poet, o u v e k o, also 6,^ouve»co in the 
Tragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with on, that. 

Rem. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass, verb or to an imper- 
sonal phrase with icniv, e, g. SrjXoy, Scivou, cuaxp^" ioTiv, and the like, it stands 

as the grammatical subject. 

2. The predicate of this substantive -clause may be ex- 
pressed : (a) by the Ind., (b) by the Opt., (c) by the Opt. with 
av, (d) by the Ind. of Hist, tenses with av. 

3. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when the statement is 
to be represented as a fact, sometliing certain or actual. Par- 



§ 329.] SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. • 521 

ticularly is the Ind. used regularly, when the verb of the prin- 
cipal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut.). 

4. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when the statement is 
to be represented as a conception or supposition, therefore, par- 
ticularly, when what is stated as the opinion of another is to be 
indicated as such {) 345, 4). When the Ind. interchanges with 
the Opt., then one thought is represented as a fact, the other, 
as a mere thought or conception, something uncertain. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 7. oi S' tXeyov, on &pKToi ttoWovs ^Stj irATjencio'aj'Tos Sie^^ei- 
pay. Th, 1, 114. fj77eAi^, on Meyapa a<p4aT7]Ke, koX UeXoirovu-fiaioi /xeA.- 
\ov<T IV is&dWeiv is ttji/ 'ATTiK-f)v. Her. 3, 140. TrvySniveTai (Hist. Pres.) d 2u- 
\o(rwy, 0} s 7) fia(Ti\rji'r) ir e p le \r}Xv^o i is tovtov rhv &udpa. X. An, 1. 1, 3, 
Tiaaa<ptpin}s SiafidWei (Hist. Pres.) rhv Kvpou irphs rhu ad€\(p6v, ws iirifiov- 
\evoi avr(p. Cy. 1. 1, 3. otc /xev Sr) Tavra ive^v/xovfie^a, ovtus iyiyvcoCKOfi^v 
nfpl avTwu, us avhptiirca irf(f>vK6Ti irdvTwu twu ^AA.cdi' paou etri C^cou, fj av^pca- 
iruv &pxfif' An. 2. 1,3. ovTOi eXeyov, '6n Kvpos [x^v r 4^yr] Kev, 'ApiaTos Se 
IT e<{>e vy w s eXi] kou Key o i, on Tavrrju t^u rj/xepap Tepifxelvei^u h,v ai/rovs. 

Rem. 3. When the Lid. Imp/, instead of the Opt. follows an historical tense 
in the ])rincipal clause, the mode of expression resembles the form of direct 
discourse, since the Ind. of direct discourse remains, e. g. s,evocpoiv ^Key^v, '6n 
6p^u)S ]^T iwuT o Kol avrh rh epyou auTo7s fxapTupo'iT], X. A. 3. 3, 11. (oratio recta: 
opbws alnuvrai). See § 345, Rem. 5. But when the Ind. of the principal 
tenses follows an historical tense in the principal clause, then the subordinate 
clause assumes wholly the coloring of direct discourse (§ 345, 5). Hence it 
sometimes happens, that the form of the oblique discourse is either partially 
or wholly changed into that of the direct. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. iurav^a S)] rhv 
Kvpov yfKaffai re iK rwv vp6<T^fV SaKpuwv kuI flireTv avrw a.iri6vTa ^appetu, on 
V apt (TT ai avTols o\iyov XP^'^^^' Sisre dpau ff o i i^ecrai «&;/ fiovXri affKap- 
SafivKTfi. Hence qti may be used, when the exact words of another are quoted 
in the same form in which they were spoken by him, when in Eng., a colon or 
marks of quotation are used,'e. g. X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. e?7r€ 5\ on- Els Kaiphv i/jKeis 
^<t>ri, he said: ''you have come at the right time." An. 2. 4, 16. Upo^ems 
flv€u, 8 T : • AvTos'flfjii, tv CvTfh. It is used even before the Imp., e.g. PI. Criton. 
50, c. taws tLV eUoiev {ol y6fj.oi), ori-'^n 'S.wKpares, fi)] ^avfxaCe to. XeySfxeva. 

5. The Opt. with av is used, when the statement is to be 
represented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, 
or as an undetermined possibility [^ 260, 2, 4, (a)]. 

X. An. 1. 6, 2. KaraWayih Se ovtos Kvpco, elirev, el auTif dolv l-mreas X'^t 
ovs, St I rovs TrpoKaraKaiovTas iirireas f) KaraKavoi hv iueSpeicras, ^ (uvras 
TToWovs avTwu 'iXoi, koX KcoKvaeie rod Koneiv iiriSyras. Cy. 1. 6, 3. ne/iurinai 
CLKOvaas ttotc <rou, 3 t i elKoras & v /cat -rrapa ^ea>y TrpaKTiKci>Tepos e tv, i^sirep kcu 
irapa avSfpdnvwu, 'osris /utj, ^JTrJre eV arc6pois dr), roVe KoXaKeioi, ahX' gre t^ 6,pi<Tra 
npdTTOi, tJt6 fxdKiara rwu ^ewu fiefxpwro {'6sns (i-h ktK. instead of e3f rty /*< 
ictA..). Dem.Aphob. 851,22. oI5a, oTi Trai/TM ^y 6/ioAo7^(ro iT 6. 

44* 



f)22 SYNTAX. [$ 329. 

6. The Ind. of the Hist, tenses with av is used, when the 
affirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual 
existence or possibility is denied [^ 260, 2, (2) (a)]. 

Dem. Aphob. 830, 55. el fieu 6 irar^p i}irl(rT€i tovtols, SriXov, Sri oUr' a 9 
rSWa irr €T peTT ev, oUt tiv rav^^ outcd KaToXnrojv avrois €<p pa^ev. L.ys. c. 
Agor. 137, 75. ovSeirore Treiceis ovdeua avbpdiirwv, w j ^pvvixov airoKTiivas aipei- 
(&^7js &v, el fi^ jxeydXa rhv Srjjxov ruu ^A^vaiwv koX avftKeara Kcuca elpjdaa. PL 
Rp. 1. 330. ©e/iiCTO/cA.^s airiKpivaro, Zri otiT "hv ahrhs 1fpi(pws ttv ovofKurrhs 
iy ever Of otr eK(7yo5 'A^va7oT (&»'). 

Kem. 4. Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed into those which 
are personal, the subject of the substantive-clause being transferred to the 
principal clause and the impersonal expression becoming its predicate. 
Comp. ^§ 307, Rem. 6, and 310, Rem. 3. Th. 1, 93. koX S^Atj v oUoSoula 
in KaX vvv iCTTiv, Ht I Kara (TttovS^v iyevero, X. C. 4. 2. 21. (SoKfi 6 roiovros) 
5ri\os VT] Ai' ilvai, or i & <^eTo etScVcu ovk olicy. X. 0. 1, 19. 2Tt iroin}p6r- 
aroi etVi, ovdh (Te Xavbdv ovaiv. 

Rem. 5. In the place of a substantive-clause introduced by 5tx or us, the 
Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part, may stand after verba declarandi and sen- 
tiendi. That there is a difference of meaning between the construction with 
the Inf. and that with the Part., has been seen in § 311 ; but the difference be- 
tween the construction with a Part, and that with 3ti or is, is only in form. 
The difference between the construction with 5ti and us with the iiuite verb 
and that of the Inf. (Ace. with Inf ) is, that in the former, the affirmation is 
more objective and dcjinite (as a fact) ; in the latter, on the contrary-, subjective 
and indefinite (as an assunijition). Hence verbs which express a merely sub- 
jective meaning, as, otfa^at, SoKfiy, iKirl(fiy, and also <pdyai (i.e. 
vei-bs which denote such a subjective view), are constructed almost exclu>ivcly 
with the Inf. (xVcc. with the Inf.), very seldom with 8ti or ws. That the distinc- 
tion between the three modes of construction is very often unessential, is clearly 
seen from the fact, that examples are found in wliich the same :' ' t is ex- 
press'^d by the same writer in different places in each of the thi .-, e. g. 

Her. D, 63. f^ayyfWei, ws ol vaTs ytyoye. 65. Stc ol ^^•iTyyeiXc 6 oucenjs 
iraTSo yeyoyeyai. 69. ore avT(f <rv rfyyi\^s yfyfyrjfiiyos. 

Rem. 6. The verbs ixdfj vrjfiai, olSa, olkovu and others of similar mean- 
ing, are not unfrequcntly followed by an adverbial clause, introduced by Sre, 
instead of a substantive-clause introduced by Srt or us. This construction 
seems to have arisen from an ellipsis, as rod xpoyov, e. g.fiffirrjfjLcu (rov xp^*vv), 
2t€ ravra eA.e|os, as in Eng. / nmtinber veri/ wtll when the war broke out. X 
Cy. 1- 6, 8. fie nvr] fjiai Kol rovro, 8t€, aov \4yoyros, avyeSoKfi Kcd ifiol inrfofiey- 
€(^6s etyai ^pyoy rh koXus &pxei'V- Dem. 01. 2(3), 29, 4. /i€/iii'»j(r3€, Sr arrfy- 
ye\^ ^i\nnros ircpiopKuy. Comp. memini, quum darem ; vidi, quum prodirei , 
audivi eum, quum diceret. 

Rem. 7. Verbs expressing emotion (No. 1 ), instead of being followed by a sub- 
Btantive-clause introduced by 8ri or us, are often followed by a subordinate clause 
introduced by a conditional or interrogative et, if whither, when the object of 
admiration, etc., is not to be represented as actually existing, but as merely pos- 
sible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. davud^^u, on raOra yiyyereu and u 
ravra ylyyerai. Attic politeness, which often blends in its lansruage a coloring 
of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs 
this form even in settled and undoubted facts ; in this case el has the force of 
Stj. Aeschin. Ctcs. ox/k ay air a, el /j.^ Sitcnv eSuKey (he is not - ' •). 

Fl. Lach. 194, a. ay ay aKru el ovTual h you /j.)} oios r elfJtX tint. l.^ -tS, 



§ 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 



523 



/ca<oo-u;a?i/ eV toTs eVairtois. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. ovk v^X^^v^t), et toiovto 
Koxhi/ iwdyn rca {tJiat he brings such a calamity upon one). 

Rem. 8. Instead of^Srt oD'tws, the relative u)s,that, is often used, and 
instead of 8tj tojoCtos or Srt t Jo- os, the relatives oTos, oaos. PL 
Phaed. 58, e. cu5a//xa>v /lot 6 avrip icpaiuero, ws aSews Kal yevvaiws ereAevra {that 
he died so fearless! i/. etc.). Her. 1, 31. ai 'Apy^Tai i/xaKapiCoy tV f^vrepa, o'iuv 
rfKvoiv iKVfrqtre {that she is possessed of such children). 



^330. B. Final Substantive -Clauses, de7ioti7ig pur- 
pose and result, introduced hij ws, tva, etc.^ 

i.. The second class of substantive-clauses are those which 
denote a purpose, object, or a residt. These clauses are intro- 
duced by the conjunctions ii/a, ws, ottws (o<^pa. Poet), Iva. 

/!>/, (1)9 \X.'l]y OTTO)? /i.7;. 

2. The mode in final clauses is commonly the subjunctive 
or optative, since the purpose or object is something merely 
imagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause 
is a principal tense : Pres., Perf , Fut., or an Aorist with the sig- 
nification of the present \S 257, 1, (a) and (b)], then the final 
conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc., 
is followed by the Suhj. ; but when the veil3 of the principal 
clause is an historical tense : Impf , Plup., Aor., then the final 
conjunction is followed by the optative (but never by an Opt. 
Fut.). 

TaDro ypdipu, yey pacpa, ypd\\/a),'iv eX^rjs {id venias, that you may 
come). Ai^ov (with the sense of the Pres.), tv eiSi (die, ut sciam.that 1 
may know). TaDro eypa<poy, iyeypatpeiv, iypa^a, 'iv e\^ois (ut ve- 
nires, tliatuou might come). II. X, 289, sq. oAA' l^hs iXavuere ficivvxas 'iirirovs 
Itpdlfiwy Aayao:,v,Xp" inrfprtpou (?>xos &pv<r^^ (ut gloriam vobis paretis) ] but, 
II. €, 1—3. r^y aZ Tu5et5r7 Ato/uTjSer UaWas'A^vv Sw/ce fxeyos Kal ^dpaos, %v 
KkStiKos fifTa naffiy 'Apydoiffi yevouo, I5'e k\€os iffSrXhv apoiro (ut clarus 
feret et gloriam sibi pararet). t, 347. Jupiter said to Minerva, aW i^i otueKrap 
re Kal d/x/Spoo-fr,!/ ipaniv^v (rrd^ou (with the sense of the Pres.) iul o-TT^^ecrcr', 
lya (xi] tiiv Kifihs UvTai (ut ne fames eum occupet) ; but, 352, ^ 5' 'Ax«^^i>eV 
rap iy] <rri)bi<r<Ti koL i^fipoairjv ipaT(iu>ny crrd^', Ua fi-f] fitu Mi^hs ^.repTr^s yo6- 
yaSf' Xkoito (ut nc occuparet). Dem. Cor. 239, 39. y4ypa(pa ifuu, 'iva m^ 
M irXuoy ^./oxA^o-^f ir,p\ roirwv. X. Cv. 2. 1, 4. r/ olv, ^v o KOpos, oh 
KoL rhu UyofXLy ^Ke^ds ^oi [^K^ov fxoi, § 256,4, (e)], g^cos — /3 oi; Aei;^ 

' For practical reasons both kinds of subordinate clauses are brought together 
here although they properly belong to adverbial clauses denoting purpose. 



524 SYNTAX. [§ 330 

ue ^a, Hiras tt,v &pi(rra a-ycovi^oific^a] 1. 2. 3. (e/c rris ruv Tleprcof iKev^ipas ayo- 
pas Ka\ovfjLef7}s) ra /xhu Hiuia Kal ol ayopatoi air f\-f} \avTai els 6,\Xov r6iroVf ws 
fiT] fiiyyvrirat 7) rovrwy rvp07] r^ tuu weTraiSevfieucou evKOfffiia. 15. 7va 5J 
ffacpicTTepou $r)\ci>^f} iracra r) nepawu iroKiTiia, /xiKphu eirafei/ii (paucis repe- 
iam). 4, 25. Kaix^varjs rhu Kvpou air e Kd\f t, oirus to iv Tlfpacus iwixoopM 
eiT iTeKoiT). PI. Apol. 28, d. avTiKa rebvairiv (with the sense of the Pres.), 
'Lva fir] eVi^aSe fxevoo KaTayeKcuTTOs. 

Remark 1. The Subj. often follows an historical tense : (a) in vivid nar 
ration, where past actions are regarded as present {objectii'e manner of repre- 
sentation, § 327, Rem. 2) ; (b) when the purpose or effect is to be repre- 
sented as continuinf? in the present time of the speaker, (a) Her. 1, 29. :i6\a>v 
aTT (St) fjLTi cr e erea Se/ca, Vvo Stj /x-f] riva ruy v6fiuv av ay Kaff^fj \v<rai tujv 
(= S}v) t^€To (Solo7i was absent ten years, in order that he mifjht not be compflleJ, 
etc.). 7, 8. £ruXAo70j/ Tlepaeuu tuv aplffTcov iiro lefro, Xva yvufxas re "rvbr)- 
rai (Tcpewu Kal avrhs Iv iraai elirr) to. ^4\ei. Th. 4, \. koI i s ( fif fiX'tj k € ff ay 
a/jLa is rr)y 'P7}yiyccy ol AaKeSat/xovioi, "ya fii) {ol Priylyoi) iir ifior) ^ u ir i to7s 
Micariviois. — (b) Od. X, 93. rlTrr' aOr', & SuaTTjye, Xiiruy <fnios rifKioio IJKvdfS, 
o(ppa iSrj y^Kvas koI arfpirfa x'^poi/. Her. 7. 8. Sih vfitas vvv iyia avfcXc^o, 
'lya rh ( = &) yoem irp-fjcraeiv vir e pbfwfiai vfjiiv. Dem. Phil. 3, 117.26. toj 
ir6\€is avTuy irapT^pr]rai Kal Ttrpapxlcis Kar e a rrjo' ey, lya fi^ n6voy Kara t6- 
Aeis, hXKa koL Kara ibvt] h o vKevwa ly. PI. Crit. 43, b. €iriTi}i(S ae ovk llyei- 
poy, 'Iva ws t^Sjotto Sidyps. 

Rem. 2. On the contrary, a preceding principal tense, or an Aor. with Pres. 
sense, is sometimes followctl by an Opt. : (a) when the present of the principal 
clailse is an historical present, or when, in the use of the Pres„ the speaker has 
ut tlie same time contemplated a past action : Eur. Hec. 10. troKvy Se <rvy ifioi 
Xpvffhy i K IT e fxTT f t \d^pa iraTrjp, Xy\ cfTror' 'iKiov Tflxv Triaoi, to7s ^cixriy ftri 
iraial fx^ (nrdvis fiiov. X. An. 4. 6, 1. rovroy 5' 'F.iri<TbfVfi . .irapaSiiuai ^u- 
Xdrreiy, tin us, fi /foAwy i)yi]<Tairo, ex*^" *^°^ rovroy airloi. Ar. Kan. 24. avrhs 
^aSi^ci) Ka\ TToyu), rovroy 5' 6x''>f Xya fiT) raXairai'wwpoiTO, ftrjS' &x^os 
(p 4 p I {I let this one ride on an ass = / placed / 

7ni(/ht not sujfer hardship), (b) when the speaker;. ^ ,r- 

pose which a person entertains, not as coming from his own, i. e. the speaker's 
mind, but from that of the person himself, so that the intention is indicated as 
one that had a ]nevious existence; PI. Rp. 410. h. Sp oZy, ^y 5' iyv, & VKov- 
Kwv, KoL ol Ko^icnaPrfs jxavtriKfj Koi yvfiyatrritcji iraiBfVfiy oi/x oZ (VfKa riyfs oloy 
rai Ka^ icrraa- IV, Iva rfj fxev rh trwfxa ^ epair (v o ivr o, rfi 5c rijy !^i;xi7»' ', 
(the A'icw of the lawgiver, i. e. his puipose). X. An. 2. 4, 4. Jaets S4 tov (0a- 
(Tikfvs) i) airocKaimi ri 1) .airoreixlC^i, on s &iropos fttj if 656s (the view of the 
king), (c) Avhen in the prinoij)al clause, the Opt. stands with or without &y 
[§§ 259, 3, (a)and 2G0. 2. (4), (a)], tlien an Opt. comnv ■ ■■ .,. 

ceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are ^ d 

trom the present time of the speaker (^ 259, 3) ; still, a Suhj. mav follow by 
attraction of the mode, since the present sense of the Opt. is assumed. See 
§ 327l\ 1. (b). Theogn. 881. elpjivr) koI irKovros €xo« ir6Kiyy 6<Ppa ficr iXXwp 
KC^Trd{^oifxi. Soph. Aj. 1217, sq. yevolfiav, tv vKaev ^-rfart royrov irp60- 
\r}fx aXiKKvaroy — , rhs Upas Siruis it poseiTroifJiey 'A^vas. 

3. ^Mieii two or more final clauses follow each other, the 
Subj. sometimes interchanges Avith the Opt. The two clauses 
are then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, tlie former 
representing the result of the purpose or aim as certain. 



♦ 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 



526 



the latter, \^thout this accessory idea, and consequently as 
uncertain, undetermined, or only derived from what precedes. 

II. 0, 597, sq.^E/CTopt y6.p ol Stvfihs i$oi\€TO Kddos op4^ai UpiafiiSr,, Ua vnvai 
Kopuiuiai ^co-TTiSaes irZp ififidXy aKd^arop, Q4tlSos 5' i^aiaiou ap^u iraaau i-jri- 
Kpi]vm. Her. 9, 51. ^s rovrov S}) rhu x<^pov i^ovX^Uavro ^leraarrimi, 'ivoL 
Kou eSoTt tx^<ri. XpStr^a* a.<p^6v(f, koL ol linrees acp^as fih (Tivoiaro, 8,76 
T^i/5€ 5€ dvfKiv kvriyov {ol ntpaai) rhs v9ias, 'iva S^ TO?(ri "EAAtjo": ytiTyS^ <piryi^iv 
f'lp oAA' a.TroKatJ.(p^fin€s iv rfj ^aKa/juyi 5o7cv riffiy rwu eV 'Apre/jLioia}. 

4. The modal adverb av, referring to a conditioning clause 
(generally not expressed), is sometunes joined with the final 
conjunctions <I)s and ottws (more seldom Iva). 

Od. e, 167, sq. irfVil'w 5c rot olpov uTTiabev, 3>s Kf fid\' aaK-n^s ff})v naTpidv 
ya^av T»c7joi, at k e ^toi y 4^f\wa-i. ,^, 20, sq. Kal /iiv ixaKp6T^pou /cal Traff- 
<Tova ^i\Kf ihtabai, Sis Kt v ^curiKeaffi (pikos irdm-ecra-i yeyoiro (sc. et irphs Toiis 
*air)Kas a<piKoiTo). Her. 3, 44. iSe-rj^, Skws tiv koI trap kuinhv Tre/xypas is 2d- 
fioy SfoiTo arparov (u/, si opus esset, exercitxim a se peteret). X. Cy. 5. 2, 21. 
Sik rrjs aris x<^P"^ &|««y nM«r> Bttus tiv clSufiev, ore Se? <^iAto Kol iroXf/jLia 
yofii^du {in ordtr that, when tve set our foot on the land, we may know, etc.). H. 4. 
8, 16. thuKf xP'hy^'^o^ ' htnoLkKlha. iirws iv, irKrjpu)^ e vto s vavr ikov virh 
AaKfSaifjioy lav, 61 rt 'A^vaioi «ca2 ol cvfifjuixoi aifruu /jluWov ttjs elp^v7]s 
irpo s 8(011/ TO. 

5. Tlic final conjunctions Iva and ws (more seldom ottojs), 
are connected witli tlie Ind. of the liistorical tenses, when it is 
to be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished, 
or is not to be accomplished. In tliis case, in the principal 
clause, the Ind. of an liistorical tense stands both with and 
without av. See ^ 227^ 1. (a). 

Ar. Pac, 135. ovkovi/ ixpy^v o"e Tlriydaov ^fv^ai vnpSv, '6tto>s icpaluov rots 
bfols TpayiKwTipos. PI. Criton. 44, d. cj 70^ HxpiXov oTol re ehai ol ttoWoI rk 
/jLtyia-ra koko, f^(pyd^€<T^au, Iva oTol re 9i<Tav av Ka\ aya^a to. fxeyiara, Kai 
KoXwi h^ (Ixf- Lys. Siinon.«98, 21. i0ov\6/j.r}v 5' &v 'Zlfiava r^v ahr^v 
yvufir}Vy ifioX ^x^^^'y'^*'^ afi<poT(puv Tjfjuov oKOvaavres tolKt]^ paSiws eyvare ra 
SiKoia, 

6. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor- 
ing or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. eTrifieXeLo-Sat, cfypovn- 
^€LV, ScSievat <f}v\dTT€Lv, a-KOTTCLV, aKexf/aa-^at, ^ovXcvea-^at, bpav, ttou'lv, 
7rpdTT€LV (curare), fx-qxavaa-^ai, irapaKaXeiv, TrapayyiWetv, TrpocLiriiV, 
aiTilaSai. a^tow, aye (up then), and the like, are followed by the 
conjunctions oVw? (ottco? /ztJ), sometimes also by o)?, either 



f 



526 SYNTAX. [^ 331. 

(according to No. 2) with the Subj. and Opt., or with the Fut 
Ind., when the accomphshment of the purpose is to be repre* 
sented as something definitely occurring and cmitinuing. 

X. Cy. 1. 2, 3; oi TlipaiKoi v6fioi iir i/xeX ourai, Sir coy T^jr apxh" f^h TotoO- 
rot %<Tovrai ol iroXTrai, oloi {= fisre) trov-qpov ^ cuaxpf^^ epyou i<pU<r^ai. 3. 2, 
13. w y 06 KaAws €|et rh v/xeTepa, ^u <pi\oi yetmja^e, i/xol fieXijO'ei. Dem. 01. 
1. 21, 12. a K oirela^e rovro, 2> ivSpes 'A^yaloi, Sirws fi}} \6yovs ipovfft 
p.6vov oi Trap' v/xwy rrpeaPeis, oAXa koI fpyov ri SeiKUveiv e^ovaiv. PL Ion. 530, 
b. ii7€ St], Uttus Kal ra Ylava^vaia v LKi](r o n^v. The Fut. Ind. also stands 
very often after an historical tense, according to § 327, Rem. 2 : far more rare 
in this case is the use of the Fut. Opt. X. Cy. 8. 1, 43. ^we/ieXcTTo 5" iirus 
fi-ffre &(riroi, fii\T€ &Troroi irore taoivro. 

Rem. 3. Sometimes 8 tt w s 6.v is connected witr the Fnt. Ind.. and is then 
to be referred to an implied condition. Her. 3, l.>4. ol 'IvSol Tp6ira) roiovrcp 
Koi C^v^ei pfpewjU6»'ot iXavvovfft eVi rhv xpvtrhv \i\oyi<Tp.(vwSy Zkus h,u Kavfiarup 
rS)v ^epiioTaTcou iSvruy eaovr ai 4^ rfj apTrayfj (i. e. Srav Koufiara ^fpfiSrara ri). 

Rem. 4. "Ottcds or 'Sttods fi-f) with the Fut. Ind.. sometimes refers to a 
word to be supplied, viz. Spa, dparf, rule, videte. X. An. 1. 7, 3. 5iroi>y oJJv 
^(rea^e 6,v5pes &^ioi TTJy 4\(vdfpla5, (see) then that ye are men worthy of liberty. 
PI. Menon. 77, a. dAA* Sirwy fi^ oux otos t* taoiiai xoAAo roiavra Keyfiy. A 
similar ellipsis occurs in the phrase, St? a (sc. (TKoir(7y) Ztus in the Attic poets. 
Soph. Aj. 556. 5e?(r* Uttus irarphs 5 e 1 1 e i y iy ^X'^poiy, oios i^ ou)v Wpdifnis. 

Rem. 5. Verbs expressing care, anxiety, arc very often followed by Bwus 
(sometimes also by iy) 6.y with the Opt., in order to express the idea of anx- 
iety, solicitude how somethinff migJit happen [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. In this case, 
STTcoy and iy are clearly adverbs (noiv). X. Cy. 2. 1.4. )3 ouXci/o-J/tc^o, 
{)7r«y h.v &pi(TTa ay uy i ^olfie ^ a. 



§331. 11. AdJective'Clauses. 

Adjective-clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into 
1 sentence, and, hke adjectives, serve to define a substantive 
or substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro- 
duccu by the relative pronouns os^ ^, o, osns, ^rts, o ti, 
oto9, etc. 

Oi TToXefiiot, ot avfcpvyov {=^ ol airo<pvy6yTfS iroXffuoi). Tk xpdyfucr<L, ft 
'AXc'lavSpoy errpa^fy (to vTrh 'AAe|ov5pou irpax^^yra irpdyfuera or to rov 'AAf^- 
JiuSpov Trpdyfjiara). 'H iroXis, 4y ^ 6 netcrlcrrpoToy rvpayvos ^y (= 'h v^i> tov 
Tie KTicrTpdrov rvpavvev^eTa'a ir6\is). 

Remark 1. Homer often uses the pronoun oy in a demonstrative sense, 
n. <p, 198. ctWo Kol ts Se/SoiKe Aihs ixeydXoio Kfpavv6y. So also. oT — oT, /Arte, 
{hose, the one, the other. In the Attic writers, as well iis in Ionic prose, this usage 
is confined to the following instances: (a) koI 8 y. «col ^, instead of koI 
oSroy, Kcu avrr]. X. Cy. 5. 4, 4. Ka\ ts i^airaTrt^cls Si^KU ori itpiros. 4. 5, 



♦ 331.] ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 



527 



52. Kol ot y€\a<rapr,s ,iirou Antiph. 1. 113, 16. kuI ^ ii^icrx^ro. In the ob- 
hque Cases the article (§247, 3) is used instead of it, e. g. ia\ -rdu, et ewn.^ 
{h)t>5 ^€y — hs 5 6 in Demosthenes, yet very seldom, often in later writers 
and earlier in Doric writers, as well as in Hippocrates ; and it occurs not only 
in the >om.. but also in all the Cases of the Sing, and Plural. Dem Cor 
24S.ir6\€i5 'EAAWSas tis fiky avaipHv, els &s 5e rovs (pfiydSas Kardywu. — (c) 
U Kal OS, this and that, n not being determined who, a«y o«e that you please 
(very seldom). Her. 4, 68. ris ^acriK-nlas larias iniSpKW^ ts Kal is exclu- 
sively in the Nom. (in the Ace. rhv kcH t6u, rh koI t6, see § 247, 3) — (d^ in the 
phrase ij 5' 6 y, t? 5' ¥i, said he, she. ^ ' 

_ Rem. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an ad- 
jective-clause, and an adjective-clause to a substantive, is expressed thus : a 
demonstrative adjective pronoun or the article 6 ri r6 standing in a principal 
clause, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a subordinate clause, 
and the latter, on the other hand, refers back to the former, e. g. ovtos 6 
avvp, hu flSfs, rh f)6Sov, h aub(7. So also, toiovtos, oTos, toctovtos. 
So- OS (§ 326, Kern. 3). But when the object, to which the relative refers, is to 
be represented as a general one, then the article is omitted, and the relative 
refers immediately to the substantive, e. g. on7p, &y koXSs iariv {= aur)p Ka- 
X6s). When the relative refers to a personal pronoun, then the relative takes the 
place of the dem. iyd, '6s — (tv, os, etc. When the personal pro- 

nouns have no . . -is, they are omitted, and the relative refers to 

the person indicated by the intlection of the verb, e. g. koXus itroiijaas, %s tovto 
iirpoL^as. 

Rem. 3. The demonstrative, to which the relative refers, is often omitted^ 
and not only when the Cases are the same, but when they are unlike, if tha 
pronoun has no special • i ' i- ; hence especially when the omitted demon- 
strative denotes some n ;e object, and is equivalent to tIs, some one, or 
when the relative 2s, 8stis, may be resolved into siquis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. ydfioi 
S" Sffois fiey fZ wlirroutrii/ ^porwv, (rovrois sc.) /xaKapios aldov ails Se //^ TriirTov- 
ffiv «3, (ovToi sc.) Tti t' tviov flffX rd re bvpa^e Sustvx^^s. Th. 2, 41. ouSej/ 
rposStoiMfyoi otrrt 'Onrjpov itrcuvfrovy o&re [r ivhs SC.) '6sris eireai /xku rh avriKot- 
TtP^fi icrK. 

Rem. 4. When the relative is used substantiveli/, i. e. when it refers to a sub- 
stantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective-clause, 
like the adjective standing without a substantive, has the meaning of a sub- 
staniive, e. g. '*H\bou oi &.pi(rroi -ficrav = fi7\^ov oi &.pi(rT0i (sc. &i/5pes), — 
Here belongs also, the formula f<TTiu, o'l, wvy olsy oiis, a. This formula has be- 
come so fixed, that commonly neither the number of the relative has any 
effect on the verb ^o-n, nor does the tense undergo any change, when the dis- 
course relates to pjust or future time : thus it has assumed entirely the charac- 
ter of a substantive-pronoun {tt^ioi), and also, since ecrriv may be connected 
with every Case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g. 

Nora. tarivoX (=tvioi) air4(pvyov 
Gen. tar IV wv {= eviwv) airecrx^TO 
Dat. tarivots {=4viois) ovx ovtws edo^ey 
Ace. tffriy ovs {=^iulovs) aircKreiveu. 

The Nom. ttrriv oT is rare.for example,X.Cy.2.3,18; in place of it, commonly 
el<r\v oX. Th. 2. 26. KAeJiro/xTros ttjs irapaAaXaffaiov earLvd iSywae. So in the 
question. eo-Td/ oTtjj/6s; X.C.I. 4. 2. eo-TJi/ ovsnvas avSrpwTrwvre^av/xaKas 
iirX (To<pia : in Xcnophon ^u also occurs. An. 1. 5, 7. "^H v Se tovtuv rwu (Tto^- 
Huy ovs irdvv /xaKpovs tjKavvev {and some of these inarches which he^made, were 
very long, or he made some of these marches very long). H. 7. 5, 17. rwv iro\e/xiwi/ 
^y oSs viro<Tir6ySous airtSoiray (there was some of the enemy which they restored by 
Intee^ or they restored some of the enemy by truce). 



1 



528 SYNTAX. [$ 332. 

Eem. 6. In like manner, the following phrases, formed with ta-riVy z^m 
UBed wholly as adverbs with reference to all relations of time. 1 

icrrtv '6 re = eviSre, est quando, i. e. interdum, e. g. co-Ttv ore eXe^ev] 

ear IV 'iva or ottou, est ubi, i. e. aliquando ; 

effriv ov or € f ^ a, est ubi, somewhere, in many places ; 

ovK e(r^' Sttov, nunquam ; 

iar IV ^ or Sttt;, quodammodo, in many places ; 

OVK ear IV ottus, nulla modo, ovk eariv oirus oiij certainly. 

ear IV 'Sir (i)s; in the question, Is it possible, that? 



a^ 



$332. Agreement of tfie Relative Pronoun. 

1. The relative agrees in Gender and Number with the sub- 
stantive or substantive pronoun (in the principal clause) to 
which it refers ; the Case of the relative, however, depends on 
the construction of the subordinate clause, and hence is deter- 
mined either by the predicate, Cx by some, other word in the 
subordinate clause, or it stands as the subjecc m the Nom. 

*0 av^p, tv elSes, (pi\os fiov iariv. 'H kperri, ^y iruvres oi ayabol iiri^fiou- 
ffiv, neya aya^6v iariv. Ol arpariurai oTs ^/oaxeo'a/uei^o, avSp€i6TaTot ^aay. 
&avfxa.^ofjLfv Sw^parTj, ov 7] ao(pia neyiarr] t)j/. ^Eiri^viMOvfjiev rrjs aperies, % 
■nrjyf] iari irdvruv rStv koKwv. 

2. The person of the verb in the adjective-clause is deter- 
mined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (expressed or 
implied) to which the relative refers. AVlien the relative is 
connected with the first or second person, then the Enghsh uses 
the form, I am the mie who, Iicho, Thoic uho, etc. 

^'E.ydi}, t) s ypd<pUf av, t s ypd(peis, 6 avfjp or eKelvos, hs ypa<pei. Th. 2, 60. 
ifxol roiovrca avSpl opyl^ea^e, ts ovSevhs oXofiai ^aauv elvai. Isocr. Paneg. 
irws OVK ^Sr) MKai6v eariv rj/xas iircuve7v, olrives r^v apxh^ Karcurx^^y 
ijd vvTj^T] /lev, X. Cv. 5. 2, 15. koI oiKia ye Tro\v fieii^cuv r] i/fierepa rijs e^u^T, 
oXyeoiKia xpvo'^^ yfj re Koi ovpav£. Hence after the Voc, the second per- 
son is regularly used, e. g. iv^puiref ts rj/jLois roiavra Kcuca eiroirfaas. 

3. Wlien the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in 
the plural, and agrees m Gender with the substantives, when 
they are of the same Gender ; often, however, it is in the neu- 
ter, when the substantives denote inajiiniaie objects. Comp 
§ 242, 1, (a), (^). 

Th. 3, 97. T] fid-xVi 5iw|ety T€ koL xrrayasyai, ev oXs a/Kporepois Tljaaovs ^aav ol^k 
*A^vaioi. X. Cv. 1. 3, 2. (Kvpos) Spuv {rhv ird-mrov) KeKoa/jLTjixevov Kcd o<i>^aA/M»r ^^ 
t>iroypa<P'p, kcu xp(*>H-o.ros evrplxpei Kol Koficus irpos^erois, & Sii vofufia ^v ev MytSotu 



1> 

i 

1 



^ 332.] AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 529 

Isocr. Panath. 278, b. ravra eUov, oh tt^s tV ela4$eLau, ohSh irphs tV ^iKatoai- 
vnv^ ou5e TTphs rr]v (pp6yriaiy a.Tro^\e^\/as, h. av hiriT^es. 

4. If the substantives are of different gender, then the rela- 
tive, when persons are spoken of, agrees in gender with the 
Masc. rather than the Fern., etc. (^ 242, 1) ; but when things 
are spoken of, it is usually in the neuter. 

Od. ^, 284. Siauarov Ka\ Kripa ixfXaiuav, h s Sy (r(pi (Tx^56u 4<rTi. Isocr.de 
Pac. 159, a. ^KOfiev iKK\r)(ndCovres irepi re TroXe/iou Ka\ dp-qvqs, & neyi<TT7}v ex^t 
Uvafiiv eV Ty fiiu, Twv avStpwnwv. Dcm. Cor. 317, 273. iKmSaiy koI Cv^^ov koi 
Tifiwu, & irdm-a irposTji/ Tors t6t€ irpaTTOfiivoLS wr' ifxov. PI. Apol. 18, a. eV e/cetj/r? 
r^ (Poyrj re koI t^ TpSirw iv ofsirep irebpdfjLfjLfju. Sometimes, also, the rela- 
tive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. fiv Se tV 
i]pi]vt)v iroi7}(Tufx(^a, fifra iroWris a(T<pa\eias tV ttoAlv olK-fjo-ofieu, cLTraKKay^vTes 
iroXifiav KoiX KivSvvwv Kal rapaxv^, eh ^ v vvv vphs oAAtjAous KareffTiiixev. 

5. The following exceptions occur to the rule stated under 
No. 1, respecting the agreement of the relative :- 

(a) Constructio Kara crv'vco-tv ('5 241, 1), not often in prose 
with the names of persons, but frequently with collective nouns, 
or substantives which are to be considered as such. 

Her. 8, 128. irepieSpafJie OfiiXos — , ot avriKa rh rS^ev/jLa XafiSvres — ecpepov 
firl Toi»y (TTpaT-qyous. Th. 3, 4. tJ> Twv'A^rjualwu vavr ik6u, oi wpfJLOVj/ iu ry 
MaXea. PI. Phaedr. 260, a. irXri^ei, o'lirep SiKacrova-i. 

Remark 1. The following cases belong here : — 

(a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela- 
tive in the P/., wlicn it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but 
to the ichole class, and in this way takes the signification of oTos. .This usage, 
however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. ft, 97. Krjros, & fj.vpia 
$6(rKfL aydcTTOvos 'AficptrpiTrj, Pi. Rp. 554, a. avxi^VP^^ 7^ '"■'^ ^^ '^c'^ ^'"'^ iraurhs 
Ttepiova-iav Troiovfxfuos,^(TavpoTToihs auripy ovs ^^ [cujusmodi homines) Kal iiraiuel 
rh irXrj^os. 

(b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a PL substantive, 
when the relative has a collective signification, e. g. ostis, ts 6,v with the Subj.. 




TrarSas Kai yvyaiKas KreivovTfs. PI. Rp. 566, d. aa-rrdCeTaL rrdvTas, (p av 
ir ep IT vyxdyrj. 

Rem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender 
of its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con- 
sidered as a particular one, but as general (§ 241, 2), or when the relative is not 
so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence, o. 
O. T. 542. dp' oi»xi iJi^pov eo-Tt TovyxeipVf^d (Tov, dvev re ttXtj^ous Kal (piXcoy r v - 
pavui S a Sn)paVy % xP'hl^a^^*' i^' aXlaKcrai. 

45 



] 



530 SYNTAX. [^ 332 

(b) Connection of the Dual with the Pkiral (^ 241, 5). 

To) )(€2pe, as 6 Sebs cttI to avXXafx^dveLV aXX-^Xaiv liroi-qareVy X. 
C. 2. 3, 18. 

(c) When a predicative substantive, in the adjective-clause, 
is in the Nom. {k 240, 2) or in the Ace. (k 280, 4), the relative, 
instead of agreeing in Gender and Number with its substan- 
tive, by a kind of attraction often takes the Gender and Num- 
ber of the predicative substantive, which is considered the more 
important. 

Her. 2, 7. r] bZhs rrphs 7]S> rpeireTcu, rh {= h) KoXUrai UriKovffioP 
(rrSfia. 5, 108. r^v 6.Kpriv, oi KoXevmcu < ATjfSes rrjs Kinrpov. 7, 54. 
U e p (T iKhu ^i<pos, rhy {=hy) clk lyaKTjv KtXfovcri. PI. Phaedr. 255, c. iy 
rod f>iVfiaTos eKfivov Trrjyr], t)v "fitpov Zevs rcu/iz/i^Sous ipwy uyofiaure. Phileb. 
40, a, \6yoL etaiv iy (KacTTOts ijfiaiy, hs iKiriSas oyo/xd^Ofity. 

Kem. 3. So also, when the relative does not follow its own substantive im- 
mediately, but a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees by means of at- 
traction with the latter, as being the more important, instead of agreeing with 
the former. PI. L. 937, d. nal SIkv iv avbpwirois irus ov Ka\6y,h itlyra TifiA- 
pwK€ ra oLf^pwirtya ; Gorg. 460. e. ovSeiror' h.v (Xrj i} {>TiTop ik^ iSiKoy trpay- 
fia, by oei Trepl SiKaioavyrjs roi/s \6yovs ttokItou. 

6. Wlien the relative would be in the Ace, and refers to a 
substantive in the Gen. or Dat., then, when the adjective-clause 
has almost entirely the force of an attributive adjective, tlie 
relative commonly assumes the form of its substantive, i. e. the 
relative takes the same Case as its substantive. Tliis con- 
struction is called attraction. Attraction also takes place, when 
instead of the substantive, a substantive demonstrative {k 331, 
Rem.), is used. The demonstrative, however, is omitted, when 
it contains no special emphasis. By means of attraction, the 
substantive is frequently transposed and stands in the adjective- 
clause. See No. 8. 

Th. 7, 21. tSiyftsy airh t wv -rrSXcwv wy thnurf {= roiiv irfKTbfKTKv) arpaTidr. 
X. Cy. 3. 1, 33. (Tvy ro7s ^-qa avpo7s oTs S iraT^jp KarfXtxey (= rois irrh toS 
iraTphs KaraX€i<pb(7<Tiv). 2. 4, 17. Strore oxt irpo€\rt\v^oirts <rvy p ^X<"^ Svrdfitu 
3. 1, 34. iyi} 67ri<rx»'ot5/toi, ^y 6 ^ehs €v 5<5<^, ov^ wr tty ifiol Saye'urps 6X\a wKeio- 
V05 fi|ja eve/yyeri^cretv (instead of avrl Tovrocf^a.). PI. Gorg. 519, a. iray rh ao- 
;;^a?o irposaTroWvaxri vphs oTs iKTrja-ayro (instead of irpbs toutois, a). Phaed. 70, 
». (7; ^vxh) awriWayneyrf rovrajv Ttcv KaKuv wy crh vvv S)) SnjXi^s. Isoor. 
Paneg. 46, 29. S>v iXa&^y avaaiv ^creSwKev (instead of rovrwy &). Evag 198. 
roiovTots ^^eaiy olois Evayopas fx^y e?xf»'- Th. 5. 87. iK rSiy mp6vTvp 
Koi &v 6paT€ (instead of koI iK rovruy, & dpart). The preposition is frequently 



♦ 332.] ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE IRONOUN. 53] 



L€Tor 



repeated, e. g. Dem. Chers. 96, 26. o (/>' « j/ ^yeipei koI TrposaiTe7 Ka\ SavelCe 
airh Tovruv Sidyei (instead of airh tovtwv SidyiL S)v ayeipei or d^' at 
ayelpfi — Sidyei without avh tovtuv). 

Rem. 4. By attraction, the adjective-clause acquires entirely the nature of 
an adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a single 
idea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. xa/pw Tats eiria-roXals 
ofs eypaxiias (= x«''P<^ toTs inrh aov ypa0€iaais eTncrToAarj). The blending of 
the adjective-clause with its substantive by attraction, is still more clear and 
beautiful, when the adjective-clause is transposed and stands in the place of the 
substantive, e. g. xouV"^ O'^s typaxpas iiria-T o\a7s. 

Rem. 5. When predicative substances or adjectives belong to an attract- 
ed relative, these also must be attracted. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. e>e ovre Kaiphs 
vposrrydyiTO wv (Kpiva SiKaiwu koI (Tv jxcp ^ p6 yr oiv rrj iraTpiSi ovSku irpoSov- 
yai (instead of a (Kpiya SUaia koI avfjLCpepovTa). Fh.2.70, 17. ols ovaiv vfisT' 
fpois (♦iA.iiriros), r out ov s a.(T(pa\ws KeKrrjTai. 

Rem. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative very seldom suffer attraction, 
Th. 7, 67. ToAAol (yrjts) (taarai is rh ^Kd-rrrea^ai atp' wv rjfuv TrapecrKevacnai 
(instead of airh rovTuv^ d). X. Cy. 5. 4, 39. ^yero Se koI twv kavrov twv re 
■wiffTwy, ols ^StTo, Kal us v (f<jr iKfivwv, ois) ■^irto'Tet iroKXovs (i. e. secum duxit 
multus suoruiiij et jidurunt. (juibuis ddectabiitiir, et eorum, quibus diffidebat). 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, the relative 
advorl) taking the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead of the 
demonstrative adverb a substantive precedes the form which expresses the 
direction denoted by the substantive. Th. 1, 89. SieKoiiiCovTo cv^vs (sc. eVreO- 
dfv) o!i(y (instead of oZ, ulu) virf^f^eyro iraiSas. S. Fh. 481. ifx^aXov fj.' otttj 
df\(is iywy, is dyr Kiay, is irpupav, is irpvfi,yr)v oiroi (instead of ou, 
ubi) ^Kurra /icAAw foiis irapdyraLS akyvyety. 

7. The relatives 0109, 00-09, o<;tlsovv, rj\Uo<s, are attracted 
f not only iu the Ace. but also in the Nom., when the verb elvat 
and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, 
e. g. oloi (TV tZ, olos tKilvo^ or 6 SojKparr/? iarl (such OS you are, such 
CLs lie or Socrates is). This attraction is made in the following 
manner. The demonstrative in the Gen., Dat, or Ace, to which 
the relation refers, is omitted, but the relative is put in the Case 
of the preceding substantive or (omitted) substantive demon- 
strative, and the verb ctmt of the adjective-clause is also omit- 
ted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the Case 
of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause 
has, m all respects, the force of an inflected adjective; the 
connection of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still 
more complete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in 
the adjective-clause ; for example, in the fuU and natural form 
of the sentence xap^'^o/iat dvSpi toiovto), oXo<i av d, by omittmg the 
demonstrative rotovra), to which the relative olo'i refers, by at- 
ti-acting olos into the Case of the preceding substantive dvS/>4 



532 



SYNTAX. 



l\ 332. 



and by omitting cT of the adjective-clause and attracting the 
subject av into the Case of the relative, we have the common 
form )(apL^ofxat avSpl olio croi, or, by transposition, •^aplt.oftai out* (to\ 
avhpi. In English the above relatives may be translated by as 
or such as. 



ipu olov aov 
XapiC^fJMi otu <rol 
itraivu) olov a i 

ip(ji> oXo) V V flUV 
XapiC°f^°^ oTotj vfjiiy 
itraiva) o1 ov s v fias. 



Gen. ipu o'lov (Tov avSp6s 

Dat. x^'P^C'^M*' o'lca <rol a vS p i 

Acc. inaiyu olov at 6.vhpa 

Gen. ipS) oloiv vfxSbv avhpuv 

Dat. x^P^Coj"''** olois iifily avZpiaiv 

Acc. iiraivu o'lov s vfias &ySpas 

Th. 7, 21. irphs &p^pas roKfiripovs oXovs Kol 'A^tjvalovs (instead of oHoi 
*A^r]i/a7oi dffiv). Lucian. Toxar. c. 11. ov <pav\oy rh tpyoy, aySpl olw ffol voK- 
fjiicrrfi fioi/oiJLaxv<rat. PI. Soph. 237, C. oXf -ye ifiol -rayrdircura' iwopop 
(sc. iarl, instead of T(p toiovtw, 6i6s ye iya> ufii, &.wop6y i<my). Her. 1, 160. 
iirl fiio-b(^ oao} 5^ {mercede, quantulacunque est). PI. Rp. 335, b. f<rrw ipa iiKoioh 
i.uSphs ^KdiTTfiy koI bvT ivov v avbpanruy (instead of ati^puiruy koI Smsovp 
iariy). X. An. 6. 5, 8. iffrijaav oire'xoKTcr Haoy ir f yrtKaii fKa arailovs 
(instead of rotrovro, S<rov tlal ir. trrctSioi). 

Rem. 8. Attraction also takes place, when olos or oJos t«, is n»ed in- 
stead of £sT€, and is constructed with the Inf., sigmifving, / am of such a na- 
ture, character., thai (is sum <jui with the Sulij.). lience / cftn, am ' am 
readi/ (§ 341, Rem. 2). Dem. 01. 1. 23, 19. (wfpl ainhy ♦jA.ixtto. . i- - 
r ovs aybpuir ovs oXovs yah vab fvr as opx^^o^O'i- Luc. iiermot. c. 76. 
SrciJiKcp T oiovT a) oX<f> (x-qre \vir(7<Thai ixitr' opy i((<rhat. Tlie demon- 
strative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. fi6yriy r^y rwy iu^dpanrwy 
{yXwrr ay) iiroiijo'ay [oi htol) oXay kphpovy re r^y ifxayifyf k. r. K. 

Rem. 9. When the adjective-clause has the sig:nification of a substantive 
(§ 331, Rem. 4). the article is sometimes placed before the attracted oTos, 
rjKiKos, and in tJiis way, the adjective substuntive-clause acquires entirely 
tlic fi)rce of an indected substantive, e. g. 

oi otoi vfi«7s aySpts 
Twy oXuy vfiQ>y iwSpeiy 
rois oXois it^kiy kyipdaiw 
Tovs oXovs vfJMS SiySpas. 

X. Cy. 6. 2,2. oi oTol irep vfieXs AySpts iroXXdiKis teal ra 0ov\(t>6iJifya icara' 
(xav^dvovaiy {men like you). H. 2. 3. 23. yydyres ro7s oXois Vfity t« ical 
v(j.7v x'^^f""^*' "'oAjTf/a*' fivai hr\y.0KpaTiav (such men as ut and ifou). Ar. 
Eocl. 465. (KeXyo Seiyhy To7<riy t] KLkoic i yify (instead of imKucovToiSy '^Xiiroi 
v(^ ia/xfy). 

Rem. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- 
pi'essiou as hav /lacrThy S<roy irpoi»x«*'pi7<''c = davfixurrSy i<my iffoy wpovxtlt- 
priae (mirum quantum processit. instead of mirum est, quantum processerit). 
Even in PI. Rp. 351, d. juera Ibpwros b avfiaar ov Saov (instead of davfuurrSw 
iariv nch' baov). Hipp. M. 2S2. c. xP)MO'''o eXo^f davfiaark 5<ra (instead 
of hav/xaa-rdv (criv, haa). Her. 4. 194. oi 8c (sc. ttL^koi) apt &<pboyoi Saoi 
4y To7s obpfai yivoyroi. Also in the adverbs davfiaor Us oi s, hav na<r itts 
uSi etc., e. ^.bav/xaa- iws ws &h\ios yeyovt ( instead of ^Vfuiai6y imriy, us &hKu»$ 
ytyove). PI. Pliaed. 66, a. ixe p<pv a> s ojs dAi}<^i) Xeytis. Symp. 173, C 
vir t p((>vw s a>s x<^P^> instead of irrfp<pv4s itrriy^ ois xaipot. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Acc. 



d 01 OS <Tv ayrip 
TOV oXov (TOV avhp6s 
T^ oto) <To\ avhpi 
rhy oJov cf avSpa 



♦ 332.] INVERTED ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE. 533 

Rem. 11. Sometimes an attraction takes place in the adjectire-clause di- 
rectly the opposite of that mentioned under No. 6, the substantive beins 
attracted mto the Case of the relative which refers to it, instead of the 
relative mto the Case of the substantive. This is called invented attrac- 
tion vAttraciio mversa). This attraction occurs most frequentlv when the 
substantive of the principal clause attracted bv the relative, 'would -^tanc 
m the ^.ora.or Ace. S. Tr. 283. rds^ (instead of ai'5') fisTrep dsoois, H 




lomonstrative pronoun is found in the principal 
clause, to M. ' 'of the substantive which is attracted into the Case 

and mto th. ..relative. VL^Sl^n.^^, c. i^ixoXoyiiKaiJi^v, -rpdy fxa- 

roi ov firrrf BibatTKoAoiy fiitrf na^rjTcd eiev, tovto SiSaxrhv fj.i} ehai. 

Rem. 12. This inverted attraction is very common with ovSels Sstis 
ov after an omitted tVnV. PI. Prot. 317, c. ohSfyhs otov ov irivrav &j/ 
ilJMV $fa^" riKiKlay -Kar^p (trjy (there is no one of yon all whose father I mi<jht not be, 
consUhring my age). Phaed. 117, d. kXouuv koI ayavaKTuv ovS4va ovriva ob 
KariKKaiHTf rwv -KopovTuv. Dem. Cor. 295, 200. irepX wv ov54i>a klvSvvov 
iv-riw ovx {rwffidyay ol irpoyovoi. In this way the phrase ovSels osns ov 
appears as a pronominal substantive [nemo no/ij, which can be declined throuo-h 
ail the Cases, e. g. '^ 



Nora. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 



ovh(\s ?jT<y ovK hv Tavra TToiriaeiev 

ovS f yhs 5tou oil KareyiKaafy 

ouScvl Stoj oi/K aneKpiyaTo 

oi/S ( ya SvTivo ov KaTtK\av(T(y. 



Rem. 13. T' ' • ion is also fonnd sometimes ^\nth adverbs of 

place, the den takinj; the form of the relative. S. 0. C. 

1227. finyeu «rc<d(v 6dey wtp V (instead of Kflaf, o^ey). PI. Crit. 45, b. 
9oWaxov ykp Kol &.K\o(r€ Siroi tu^ aipiiaj, ayairfiaoval cr€ (instead of aWaxov 
ttroi). 

8. The adjective-clause very frequently stands before the 
principal clause ; then, when the relative refers to a substan- 
tive, the sul)stantive is transferred from the principal to the 
adjective-clause (though it is not generally placed immediately 
after the relative), and is governed by the verb in the adjective- 
clause. Tliis change of the substantive into the adjective- 
clause is called tnuisposition. When the attributive relation 
expressed by the adjective-clau.se, is to be made emphatic, a 
demonstrative, referring back to the substantive wliich is joined 
with the relative, is suppHed in the principal clause ; tliis 
demonstrative, however, is often used for perspicuity also. 
Tlie substantive can also be transposed, when the demonstra- 
tive stands before the adjective-clause. 

*Oy TitULS -KoXXk aya^a ivoi-naey, ovros airtbav^v, OX % s was TroWa aya^h 
iTroir)<T(v, airiSiaviyy or ovtos aTribayfv, %s vfuis /ct\., OT aireStaycy, hs ktA. — 
'Oy flSfS iySpOy ovr6s iariy, or ovris iariv, hv elSes &ySpa. PI. Lys. 
222, d. ireOuv &pa, ots rh irpwroy \6yovs arreficLK6fi€^a vepl (ptXlas, els rov- 

45* 



634 SYNTAX. [^ 333 

rovs elsTreiTTdoKaixsv. Eur. Or. 63, sq. ^ v ykp kut oXkovs €\i<p', or* is Tpoiar 
fTTAet, irdp^ev ou . . ravrri yeyrj^e. 

Hem. 14. When attributive adjectives belong to the substantive, they are 
frequently separated from their substantive in the principal clause, and intro- 
duced into the adjective-clause, when they serve at the same time to explain 
more fully the adjective-clause or are to be made emphatic. Or the substantive 
together with the attributives is introduced into the adjective-clause. Some- 
times also the attributive adjective remains, while the substantive with which 
it agrees, is transferred to the adjective-clause ; then the attributive is emphat- 
ic. Eur. Or. 842. i^6tvC 'HKeKTpa, \6yovs 6.Kovaov, ovs <roi SvsTvxfis ''A« 
(pepwv {hear the words which I bring to you as sad, i. e. the sad words, etc.). Th. 6, 
30. ro7s OTr\ois xal 'Sar] &\\tj irapacTKe vtj ^vyfiirero, irpSrepoy fXpTiTO ktK, 
(instead of kolL rfj &\\r] irapaaKevfj, o<Tr]). Eur. H. F. 1164. riKco ^i/y &A.Aoif, 
? Trap" 'A(T(t>Trou f)oas pifvovcriv tv ottKoi yris ^A^yatwy Kopoi. As. Ran. 889. 
CT e poi yap elcLU, oTciv etjxofj-ai ^fo7s] 

Rem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative 
clause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subor<^ 

upon that clause for its government. In this case ju ^ ^ , - 

tive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. K6K\uiros 
Kfx^^'^'^°-^i ^^ 6(p^a\fA.ov aKa.u)ff(y ayrl^eov HoKv^rjfACV {whom Ulysses 
blinded, althouf/h he was the fjod-like Pol^/ihemus). PI. Ilipp. Maj. 281, c. ri wore 
rh aiTiou, OTL oi traXaiol iKc7yoi, wv oySuara nfyaKa Xty^Tou 4irl aotpia^ 
Hit T aK ov K al Blayr os, (paiyoyTat airexoH-^^oi Tuy iroXiTuciiy irpa^fcey ; 

9. Wlien the adjective-clause has another clause subordinate 
to itself (or a participle used instead of such clause), the two 
aie commonly united, the relative, instead of taking the con- 
struction of its own adjective-clause, taking that of the subor- 
dinate clause, i. e. the relative has the constmction wliich the 
omitted demonstrative of the subordinate clause would have 
had ; in such cases there is no relative connected with the ad- 
jective-clause. 

Isocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. av^punrovs alpovfie^a rovs fifv dWAtSa;, tows 8* cano- 
Pl6Kovs., oXs 6ir6rav ris irKelova fiiabhy SiJ^J, /xer* iKelvwy 4^' tjhos 
aKoKov^i^covaiy (instead of o", dvdray ris avroTs 5i5y, axoKov^aovtriy). 
PI. Rp. 466, a. oTi Tovs ({>v\aKas ouk (vSaSnoyas Troio7fjLfy, ols i^hf rdrra 
^X^*** '''^ Tciv TT oKiT a>y, ovSey c x •" * »* 5 ( instead of oT, ^{^»' ainois — , ovSiy 
e'xoJei'). Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. iroWa h.y (lirfly txoi^v ''OXvybioi yvy, & t6t* fl 
IT poeiS ovT 0, ovK &v aTTwXoyTo (instead of ot, €i ravra t6t€ xpoeiS.f ovk tty or.). 



$333. Modes in Adjective- Clauses. 

1. Tlie Lidicative is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
pressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as actual 
or reed, e. g. rj ttoXis, rj 'KTi^erat, rj eKTiaSTj, yj KTurStfo-CTai. The Fut. 
Ind. is very frequently used (even after an historical tense, 



4 333.] MODES IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES 535 

^ 327, Rem. 2), to denote wliat should be done or the purpose 

(k 255, 3), e. g. o-rparrjyoi"; alpovvTai, ot rw ^iXtTnTia TroXefx.-^crov- 

<r L V {they choose generals who sliould carry on war, or to carry on 

war). Also after negatives, the Greek employs the Ind., where 4%^^^^- 

the Latin has the Subj., e. g. Trap c/xot ovScts, ostis /x^ iKavos 

coTtv to-a TToiciv' €/xot {iicnio, qui lion possit). 

2. The Ind. is also used, as in Latm, in such adjective- 
clauses, as are introduced by the indefinite or generalizing rela- 
tives, e. g. 09Tt9, quisquis, 6<m<: ^, quicunque, octtls hrj ttotc, ocros "^^ '^^^ 
Sy, oo-os ovv, quantuscufique, ottoctos, ottoo-osoCi', etc. 

Her. 6, 12. Sov\rit7]v vwotxilvai, ^tis ear at, quaUscungiie erit. X. An. 6. 5, 
6. ^dairroy, dir6<rovs i tt € Kdfxfi ay ey t] arpaTid. Here t le idea of indefinite- 
ness is denoted by the rdative ; but ilFis othenvise, when this idea is contained 
in the predicate^ see No. 3, and 4. 

Keuark 1. Tlie Fut. Ind. with «€ (only Epic) is used, when it is to be 
.' " * 1. that somethint; will take place in the future under some condition 
, 2. (1)]. II. <, 155. iy 5' &v5pes vaiovffi ■rro\vpf>r}yes, voXvfiovTai oT k4 k 

hu)rnrri(Ti bthy &s T ifx-f)(r ov (T ly {w/io will fvoiior hi iiL, IF he shall C03IE to 
them). 

3. Tlie relative with av, e. g. Ss av, rj av, o av, 05x15 av, etc., is 
followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is 
a principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut.), if the attributive rela- 
tion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as 
one merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also used in in- 
definite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote 
irule finite frequency (as often as, § 227**, 2). The adjective- 
clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e. 
as one wliich expresses the condition under wliich the action 
of the principal clause will take place ; and the relative with 
dv can be resolved into the conjunction idv vnih tU or any other 
pronoun followed by the Subj. 

X. Cy. 3. l,20.otstLy{= idyriyas) $e\Tlovs rives eavruy fjylja-uyrai, rovrois 
woWaKis Kol &yeu aydytajs i^eKovai ireiS^eff^ai. 1.1,2. duStpwiroi eV ovSeyas fiaWuu 
avy'iaravrai, ^ iirX rovrovs, ot>s tiv {= edv riyas) ataStwyrai &pxeiy avruv eiriX' 
ttpovyras. 7. 5, 85. & y tiv Sp a> ra Ka\a koI raya^a iirirnSevoyras, rovrovs rifi-fj- 
<Tu. S. S,5. 6no7ol rives yap tiy ol irpoffrdrai Sxrt, roiovroi Kat 01 vn avrov5 
ws M tJ> iroXu ylyvovrai. Her. 6. 139. v Uv^in (TCpeas (KeXevei) 'ASn]vaioicri BiKas 
BiUvai ravras, rks {= as) tiv avrol 'A^va7oi SiKd(rw(ri (quascuxQDE-- 
const it iieri lit). II. ^,391. tv 5 e «' iyu>y aTrdveu^e fidxvs i^e\oyra yo7)<rca 
mtLydCeiv irapa vnvffl Kopuylcriy, oH 01 eireira &pKioy iacre^rai ^vyeexy Kwas ^8* 
aittyovg (a8 OFTEN AS / percsive or shall perceive). 



536 SYNTAX. [^ 333. 

Rem. 2. Tlie Subj. is also used, when the adjectire-clause forms a member 
of a comparison, viz. when the attributive idea expressed by the adjective-clause 
is the condition or assumption, under which the object to which the adjective- 
clause refers, belongs to the comparison. In this case, the princ-ipal clause 
may have either a principal or historical tense. II. v, 179. 6 Z' aW iiraTevy 
fieXU] ws, 1^ t' 6peos Kopv(p^ , . xoA/coS Tajxvofi4y7f rtpeua x^oj/i (piXXa ire Kdaerri. 
p, 110. &ST€ \7s 7]vy eyetos, '6 y (>a Kvvts re Koi 6.vZpes airh (Tto^/xoTo Sicevrai. 

Rem. 3. The modal adverb au is so closely united with the relative, as to 
form with it one word, as in orau, itrdu, etc., ^ 260, 2. (3) (d), and hence .should 
be separated from the relative only by smaller words, such as 5c', i ' ' is 
very frequently omitted in the Homeric languafrc, often also in the Ti ,_ is, 
and sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic prose-writers. 

4. The relative {icitliout av) is connected with the Opt, in 
\ki.Q first place, v^iWx the same sigLification as when followed 
by the a.v and the Subj. (No. 3), but referring to an historiccu 
tense in the principal clause, lience it is used in general and 
indefinite statements ; also in expressing indefinite frequency 
{} 227^ 2), — in wliich case the verb of the principal clause is 
usually in the Impf or in the Iterative Aor. Here, also, the 
adjective-clause may be resolved by ci with the Opt. 

Th. 7, 29.^0*^01 f|fjs Sry {=^ iX rivi) ivTvxoiev, icai vcuSas koI fvyauKOi 
KTiiuoures. II. )3, 188. '6v t tya {= iX riva) yikv $ari\^)a Kal ^oxoy 6ySpa kix^^V 
rhv S^ ayayo7s iirtfaffiy ipt]r ixraff kc TrapatrTds. 198. hv S' ai Hifiov r* 6yipa 
15oi, fioSwurd r i (p tv poi, rhy (TK-fjirrp^ i \d<rac k «. Th, 2, 67, »i£ja'ay yiip 
S)} Kar^ apxo-S tov troXfiJ.ov ol AoKfSainuyioif oaovs {= ft rtras) KafioKy 4p 
TTJ ^a\d(Tcrr}f is iroXefiiovs 5if<p^fipoy. X. Cy. 3. 3, 67. .' - ' -^ f t' o i» (f i {IlisL 
Prcs.), OTOJ iyTvyx<'-*'0^^*'t /^^ ^<iO'«"'« 

5. In the secoyid place, the Opt. {xcithout av) is used without 
reference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attrib- 
utive relation expressed by the adjective-clause is to be repre- 
sented as a mere siqypositioyij conjecture, or assumption. Then, 
the adjective-clause is to be considered as an uncertain, doubt- 
ful condition [k 259, 3, (a)], 

X. Cv. 1. 6, 19. ToG/iev avrhy Xeyeiy, & /u^ aa<p6is f IS fir), ^iStabw. 9ft {he 
must Imcare of saying anything, which he does not knotc, or if he does not know li). 
For examples of Optatives used by moans of an attraction of the mode, see 
§ 327b, 1, Ar. Yesp. 1431. (pSoi ns, i)v ckoo-tos tlSeiri t^x*^" (<"'." '^""' *^^'* 
practise the art with which he is acquainted (= if he is acquainted with it). 

6. The Opt. tcith av is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
pressed by the adjective-clause is to be represented as a comli- 
tional supposition, conjecture, assumption, or ufidctemnticd possi' 
hUitij \} 260. 2, (4) (a)]. 



537 



4 334.] ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 

X. C. 1. 2, 6. XwKpdTT,s Tohs \afifidvovTas t^s SfiiXias fiKr^hi^ auSpaTTodKrrhs kavrSiP 
iire»ca\€i, Jii rh avaryKalov avroTs ehai dia\4ye(r^ai, Trap' av tv \d&o lev rhp 
iuaUv (from whom they might or could receive a reward). PL Phaed. 89. d. ohx 
HaTiyi ri &u TLs ixf7Cov roirou KaKhy ndStoi (there is no evil which any one could 
experience greater than this). 

7. The Ind. of the historical tenses is used with av, when it 
is to be indicated that the attributive idea denoted by the ad- 
jective -clause could exist only under a certain condition, but 
did not exist, because the condition was not fulfilled [^ 260. 2 
(2). (a)]. 

Od. «, 39, sq. ir6K\' Za" tiv ouScVotc Tpolris e^^por 'OZvaceis, elfirep ott^ 
iiu)v ^\bt, \axiiv airh \r)tSos aJaoLV. Eur. Med. 1339. ovk icriv '^tis tovt' 
tv 'EAA.tji'Ij yvvT] (r\rj (qitae sustinuisset hoc). PI. Apol. 38, d. ots Uv (\6yois) 
t-Ktiffa^ «i tfifii}w Suy airayra Toi(7y kcu \fyciv. On the Ind. of the historical 
tenses in intennediate clauses of a conditional proposition, see § 327b, i. (a). 

Rkm. 2. On the Inf. in adjective-clauses, in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 6. 



♦ 334. Connection of several Adjective- Clauses. — Interchange of 
the Subordinate Clause loitfi tJie Adjective- Clause. — Relative 
instead of the Demonstrative. 

1. When two or more adjective-clauses follow each other, which either have 
the same verb in common, or different verbs with the same government, the 
rchuive is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective-clauses are 
unitt'd in one, e. <^. d*7Jp, ftr iroAAo nfv aya.^a tovs (piXovs, iroAAa 5e kuko, robs 
woKfu'iovs fwpa^fy — i.y7tp, hs wop' VH'^f t^ ^aX (hs) inrb irdvTwv e(pi\e7To — ayfjp, 
ty 4davfid(onfv Kol (hy) Ttdyrts 4<p'i\ovy. But when the adjective-clauses have 
ditferent verbs povcminjr different cases, generally, the Greek either omits the 
relative in the sect)nd adjective-clause, or introduces, in the place of the rela- 
tive, a i! 'rative pronoun (mostly aiirSs), or a personal pronoun: in this 
way the e clause is changed into a demonstrative one, and acquires the 
nature of a principal clause, (a) Od. j, 110. ifiirfXai, a'ire <p4pov(Tiv olvov ipier- 
rdtpvKoy Kod (sc. &i) ff<piy (KvKKwirfaari) Aihs 6/j.^pos ae^ej. Isocr. Panath. t^j/ 
\6yov, h y oKiyu fify irp6T(poy fifd'' ijSoyrjs SirjKboi^, (iiKpw 5' vcrrepou ij/xeWe p.e 
KinHiatiy (ami wmcJl ti\is to grieve me). Lys. Dardan. 166. oTs vfj.e7s x<^P^^^(^^^ 
Kol (scot's) -rpo^v^ioTfpovs Troiri<T€TC. Dem. Cor. 252, 82. avrcoy, ovs t) fikv 
ir6\is ws ^X'^poiT • • aiTT^Aoo-f, aol 5e fjcray <pi\oi (sc. o'l). X. An. 3. 2, 5. 'ApiaTos 
8«, hy r)ixf7i T}d(KoiJ.fy fiaffiXta KoSnardvai /col (sc. w) iSd^Kafxey Kal (sc. Trap' ov) 
i\d$onfV iriard . . , rj/xa • tovs Kvpou <pi\ovs KaKws Troie7u Treiparai. — (b) PI. Rp. 505, 
e. h h)) BiuKfi ficy diraffa ^^/uxh xoi tovtov (ViKa irdvra Tvparrei. Dem. Phil. 3 
123. 47. \(^K(hcu^JL6vlOl, o\ baXdrrris /xty ^pxov kuI yrjs airdavs, ^aaihia 5e orufifia- 
Xoy tJxoy, ixpiararo 5' ovZfv avTovs ( fnstead of ovs ovhev ixpia-TaTo, quibus nihil non 
cessit). X. Cy. 3. 1. 38. ttov (Kf7y6s itrriy 6 au-hp, hs ffvve^pa r]fx7v Kal av fioi 
ud\a iS6Kns davfid^eiy avr6v. 

2. The adjective-clause frequently takes the place of other subordinate 
rl;in^.--. Q. ^.'eavpLOffrhv iroius, &s r}fl7y fifu ovStv SiSws (iN THAT or BECAUSE 
you j< re us nothing), X. C 2. 7, 13. The adjective-clause is very frequently used 



538 SYNTAX. [^ 335, 336 

instead of a hypothetical adverbial clause (comp. § 333, 3) ; so also instead of 
an adverbial clause introduced by &st€\ the last case occurs : — 

(a) after o'^tus or w5e. Dem. Chers. 100, 44. ou yhip ovtw y ^irfj^s itrrif 
vnSiu ovdeis, i>s inroAa/jifioivei (neither is there any one of you so simjile, as to 
suppose). X. Cy. 6. 1, 14. ris ovrws 'ktx^P^s, hs \lfita koI plyti Svyatr hy 
fxax^H-^yos (rTpaTev€<r^ai ; 

(b) after TO to Oto y, ttiXikovtos, to<t ovtos. In most instances, these 
demonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives oloSf ivos, 
wliich, like the adverbial clause introduced by wst€, usually have an Inf 
depending upon them. X. An. 4. 8, 12. aXXi ftot Sojce? r oaovrov x^P'-' 
ov Karaaxf^" (sc. rj^ias), o<rov €|« roi/r i^xo-^ous X6xovs yey 4 ff^ai tup 
•noKfixiwy KfpaToau (it seems to me best tluit we should occupy so much (/round, 
as that, etc.). PI. Apol. iya> rxtyx^^'^ ^v tojovtoj, otoi xnih rov ^eov 
rfi ir6\€i dddff^ai. 

3. The relative pronoun serves not only to conn- ■ - witli 

the principal one, but it is also used to connect cl. . h as 

it takes the place of a demonstrative which would reler to a word of the pre- 
ceding clause. This mode of connecting sentences l>clongs to the Latin as 
well as to the Greek, though it occurs very rarely in the latter compared with 
the former. Thus in Greek, e. g. it is altogether « for clauses to begin 

with Taina 5e finSmfs, ravra 5e OKOvaavrfs, fifrk I- a, Ik rovrov 5<, Set Z\ 

•ravTa iyiviTOy etc, where the Latin generally uses the relative qui. 



^ 335. HL Adverbial Clauses. 

Adverbial clauses are adverbs, or participles used adverbially 
{k 326, 3), expanded into a seutence, and, like adverbs, express 
an adverbial object, i. e. an object wliich does not complete the 
idea of the predicate, but merely defines it, e. g. ore to lof) r^XSt, 

$336. A. Adverbial Clauses of Place. 

Adverbial clauses denoting place, are introduced by the 
relative adverbs of place, ov, ^, oTnj, oirov, eySa (ubi) ; oSa', tvSey 
{unde) ; ot, ottoi, tJ* otttj (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express 
the tluree local relations, where, ichence, and ichither. The use 
of the Modes in these clauses, is in all respects like that in 
adjective-clauses {^ 333). 

Her. 3, 39. Zkov l^v<Tm (rrpaTfvfa^cuy -rdrra oi ix<^P^* evrvx^i (indefi- 
nite frequency). Th. 2,11. hrea^f (iKuae), ixoi &p ris ^^^toi. X. An. 
4. 2, 24. fiax^t^ffoi 5^ ol iro\(fuoi Kai, 5 itt? €f tj ffrfvhv x^P^*"' "'poKCcraXofifiJi^P' 
res iK(i\vov rhs irapoSovs (Opt. on account of iKuKvoy). Cy. 3. 3, 5. i^pa 
dirovtrfp iiriTvyx<iyoi€V ^piois (uhereva). PI. Apol. 28, d. oC Ar ris 
eak rhy r (£ { 77, iyraui^a Set fxtyoyra KiySvy^veuf. 



4 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 



539 



4 337. B. Adverbial Clauses op Time. 

1. Adverbial clauses denoting time, are introduced by the 
conjunctions ore, ottotc, is, rjvUa (wheii), iv cS, Iws (while) ; ^Tret, 
iirtt^ (postquam), C7rei8^ raxurra {irpwrov), or ws raxKrra {as soon 
as), i$ ov, €$ orov, also i$ (Li/, ez quo, and acf/ ov (since) ; irpiv, irplv 
ri (priusquam), €o>9, iux; ov, cts o, e<;Tt, fxexpL or a^pc ov, fiexpt orov, 
^€xpt (tilU until). 

2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be 
observed : — 

3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented 
as Si/act; hence in speaking of actual events cr facts. 

Her. 7, 7. i>s kyfyyiiffb-i afp^rfs arpaTevear^au eVl ttji/ 'EAAaSa, iuStavra 
vrpaT-ntify ToiffTcu {when Xerxes ivas persuaded, etc.). 1, 11. is Tj/jLep-q rdxia-Ta 
4y«y6p«t {quum primum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, .3. iixdxovTo, /xexpis ol 
A^yaioi iiytirKfvaay. An. 1.3, 11. koI tws fi^yo/xey aurov, (TKeTrr4ov (jloi 
ioKii tlytUy inevs ics a/r<paKi<Trara ixfvovfiey. 

4. The conjunction €to9 (till), is followed by the Ind. of the 
historical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat- 
taiued or not to be realized. Comp. k 327^ 1, (a). 

PI. Gorg. 506, b. T,hiu)i tiv KaAAtKAe? rovita tri S i e\ey6ix7]v, eus avT$ 
iir^iwKa { usque dam reddidissun ). 

5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated 
as a conception or representation, and must be referred to the 
predicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one 
of the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con- 
junctions take the modal adverb av, e. g. orav, oTrdrav, rjVLK av, 
<7rai' (c7n/i/), nnvbav, ev a> av, irpw av, cws av, p-^XP'- ^^> ^^r av [^ zoV, 
2, (3). (d)). 

6. Accordingly the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions 
from orav to TTplv av, when the statement of time is also to 
be represented, at the same time, as the condition under which 
the predicate of the principal clause will take place. But with 
the conjunctions which signify until, the Subj. expresses a limit 
expected and ainied at. The Subj. is also very frequently used, 
to denofe indefinite frequency (^ 333, 3), 

PI. Prot. 335. b. iimlav tru /SouA?/ liaXh^ahai, ws ly^ Sum/xai eTreo-^at 
T^f(roiSta\4^ofiai ( whenever you wish to, if at any time you wish to discourse. 



540 SYNTAX. [$ 337. 

etc.). Th, 1, 21. 01 du^puTToi, iu ^ Uv ir o\€ fiua i, rhv irap6vTa iroX^uov ael 
fi^yicTTOu KpLvovciv. X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. iroKiv oHirw kdopaKas a.vTtraTTOfi4yri9 
irphs Tr6\iv eTfpav, '/itls, iir e iS av 7]TTr)^f), irapaxpVH^ ravr-p olvti rod fui' 
X^ff^ai Trei^recr^aL i^e\ei. 3. 3, 26. dirorap {ol fiap^apoi BauTiAels) ffrparo 
TTcSeuwj/Tat, rdcppou rrep i^dWovrai einreTus Ota r7]y vo\vx(ipiav {as often 
as). Dem, Ph. 3. 128, 69. ecos Uv ado^Tirai rh <rKd(pos, rSre XP^ '^"^ ravrtfr 
Kal Kv^epv-fiT-qu irpo^vfwvs ehai {durti servari possit). 

Remark 1. The Subj. is also used in the Epic language, when the adver- 
bial clause forms a member of a comparison, since a case is then supposed 
(comp. § 333, Rem. 2). II. ^, 16. us 5' on irop<pvpr] TriXayos . . &s d ycpar 
S)pfiaiue. 0, 624. iu 5 eTrec', us ore Kvfxa ^ofj iv yr{t ire aria ly. 

Rem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt. and on 
Uray, iiriv, it p\v & v, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 
Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The mode of connection by Stc, inr6rc^ vply, etc, without &v with 
the Subj., occurs only in the Epic language frequently, sometimes also in 
Ionic prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers with /ix€x/>* and -rpiv. 

7. The Opt. is used ^\'ith conjunctions of time, without av, just 
as the Subj. is, but referring to an historical tense of the princi- 
pal clause. Wlien the Opt. is used to denote indefinite fre- 
quency (^ 327^, 2), an Impf or an Iterative Aor. usually stands 
in the principal clause, and the conjunctions ore, circ^ etc. (ex- 
cept those which signify before and until), are translated by a$ 
often as. 

II. K, 14. avrap Zt is vTids t€ tSoi koI Xahv 'Axouuv, iroAA^s in K((paXr)s rpo 
^iXv/jLj/ous €\k€7o xa''''«s (^^ o/7en as). Her. 6, 61. Skids (= Stc) ^vci«rci« 
7] rpocphs {rh TratSiov), irp6s re T&yaXfia Itrra #tal iKlaaer o t^v ^thv avoA* 
Aa|ai Tjjs SvsiJ.op(pir)s rh iraiSlou {as often as). X. An. 6. 1, 7. birorf oi"'EXA»ji'€5 
Tois TToXf/xlois iirloieu, fiaZius iire <p€ vyoy {as often as the Greeks made an at- 
tack, whenever they made on attack). Od. e, 385. Sipae ^ iir\ Kpatrvhv Bopftjy, irph 8< 
Kv/xar ea^fv, eus oyc ^aiT\Kf(T<n (piXripfrixoiffi fiiyt'trf (but 6pyvci Boperfv koI 
&yvv(ri Ki'/^oTo, ecus hu . . fi-iyfl). PI. Phaed. 59, d. irepie/icVo/ie*' cicctirroTC, tois 
avo ix^ ^^V ''■^ Secr/jLUT'fjpiov. 

Rem. 4. On fiv in the principal clause, see § 260, 2, (2), {0). 

8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used u-ith conjunctions 
of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, 
when the statement of time is to be represented as an uncer- 
tain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or 
(issiwiption ; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms 
;i part of a principal clause expressing a \\'ish. 

PI. Aniat. 133, a. SttSt^ rh <pi\o(ro<pe7i' al(TXpi>y ■fjyria at fifir flrai, oi»5* hr 
dv^pw-Tov voixiaaijxi i/xavrhv fhat (tchen I shall assume, if I shall ever assume). X. 
Cy. 3. 1, 16. irws hy Wre vXdarov d^iot yiyvotvr ol &vbp<aToi, 6x<Jt€ dSurovr- 



* 337. J ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 541 

r€s k\l<TKoiuTo (ivhen they are, if the^ are, convicted of acting unjustly) - — 11. 
ff,^ 465.^ at yip (iiv S^aydroio dvsrjx^os £5e 5vuaifjLT,u v6c<piv hiroKpi^^ai, o're /xtv 
fwpos cuwhs iKdyoi, 

9. The conjunction vpcv (Trporepov ^), besides the construc- 
tions already mentioned, is also followed by the Lif. The dif 
fereut constructions of -rrpiv are to be distinguished as follows : 

(a) When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the Ind. 
of an historical tense is u?ed (No. 3). The principal clause is negative; yet it 
is sometimes also atfirraative, when irpiy signifies until; thus often in the Tra- 
gedians and Thucydides (in the latter irplv Sii and irpl;/ ye 5^). 

(b) When & future, merely conceived action is spoken of, which can be con- 
sidered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is used, when the sub- 
ordinate clause refers to a Prcs. Perf. or Fut. in the principal clause ; but the 
Opt., when the subordinate clause refers to an historical tense in the principal 
clause (No. 5 and 7) ; yet only when the principal clause is negative, (jc aontaina 
a question implying a negative. 

(c) But when .|e action is to be represented only as a conception, a conceived 
limit, not as an independent occurrence, but only as a subordinate matter, and a 
casual or incidental designation of time, the Inf is used (= irpS with the Gen.). 
Hence the Inf. can stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the 
8ubj. or Opt., both after an affirmative and a negative principal clause, when it 
does not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause. 

Isocr. de Big. 348, b. ov irpSrfpov iiravaavTO, irplv t6u re irarepa e/c Tor 
OTpaTonfSov ft(T €ir( fi\\>ayr 0, koI twv (p'lKwv avrov tous fieu aireKTciuaUf 
rohs 5' ^»c T^j ir6\e(D5 i^4 fiaKov. X. An. 6. 1, 27.01* irp6(T^eu iiravaavTo 
■woKtfioiyTfSf jrply tiroiriaay iraaay r^y 'rr6\iu bfxoXoyeiv AaKedai/xouiovs 
Kal avriiiv rrytfiSyas (iyai. — Kur. Med. 279. oi/K dneifii irphs dSfJLOus 7rd\iy, 
vply 6,y (T( yaias rfpfj.6ywy t|w fid\(i) (= iay /jlt] TrpoiepSv ae e«)8oAw). 
X. An. 5. 7, 12. n^ aT(\br)Te, trpXy ttv aKovarfre. II. ^, 580. 'Ayfivwp 
oxjK H^eXty <p(vy(iy, irplv vfip-qaaiT 'Ax'^i'/os (= et /x^ -irp6Tepov ireip-fi- 
(raiTo). X. An. 7. 7, 57. oi eniT'f]5fioi iv t<^ aTpaToirfSw {avrov) iSeovro ixij 
iLTrf\^f7y, irply airaydyoi rh (TTpdrfv/ia Koi Qi^puvi irapaSoir). — Her. 6, 
119. AapfTos, vply fiiy oiXMo^'^TOi'S y eye<r^ai rovs 'Eperpieas, iyeTx^ <r(pi 
5f ivhy x^^o"- "» 2. (<ray ^apflea, koI Trpdrepou ^ $aai\€V(rai, yeyoyores 
Tp(7s vaTSfs. X. An. 1. 8, 19. irply ro^cv/xa i^iKyeTa^ai, iKKXivovariv ot 
0dp0apoi Kcd (pfvyovffi. 10, 19. vp\y KaTa\v<rai rh a-Tpdrevfia vphs &pi(rToy, 
fiaoriKefs i<pdvri. 4. 1,7. M rh &Kpoy aya^aivei Xeipi(TO(pos, irpiv riva alff- 
biffbai ruv iro\fnla>y. Cy. 7. 1, 4. irply Spay rovs iroXefiiovs, els rpls 
kv4irav<T( rh arpdrevfia. 2.2,10. iribayol olircos (lai rives, &STe irplv eiSevairh 
rposra(T<T6fJLfvov, irporepov ireibovrai. With attraction (§ 307. 4) : ib. 5. 2, 9. 
(iroWo'i Av^pwiroi) airobvi](TKOV(n irp6repoy, irply S^Aot yeveffbai, ohi ^arav. 

Rem. 5. The Homeric irdpos, when it is not used as a mere adverb, is al- 
ways cor..structed with the Inf. 11. <r, 245. is 5' ayopyjv ayepovro, irapos SdpiroM 

H 6 5 6 (T i& a i. 

46 



642 SYNTAX. [j} 338, 339. 

C. Causal Adverbial Clauses. 
$ 338. I. Adverbial Clauses denoting Ground, Cause. 

1. Such adverbial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
the form of temporal adverbial clauses by the temporal 

JS'W.I.^- conjunctions ore, ottotc, ws, kiniy quoniam, puisque, because, 
^•'* since, iTreiSrj, quomam, and ottov, quandoquidem. In these adver- 

bial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode ; but the Opt. \^ath 
av may be used according to k 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Ind. 
of the historical tenses with av, according lb k 260, 2, (2) (a). 

11.^, 95. /x^ fi6 KTeiUy 4ve\ ohx ApKryicTpjor "E/njopor flfii (quoniam sum). 
X. An. 3. 2, 2. X'^^f^'ct rck vapoyra, dx6Tf aydpaiy ffrpmrrtyAy roioirtiy art- 
p6fie^a KOI \oxayuy Kcd (rrpariuTwv [since we are deprived of such generals, etc.). 
Dcm. 01. 1, in. ^re roivvv rav^* ovrus ?X**» ""por^ifcj wpo^fiui ibfKtuf iLKOvtw. 
X. C. 1. 4, 19. ^uKparr)! oil ii6vov rovs avy6yras ihoKti woKiy, 6ir6r( irrh rmr 
iy^puTTwu Spcfirro dir€;(«rc^at ruiv iiyoffiujy t« «ral aZ'iKwy, itWa xal l>it6r( iy ipTifd^ 
fl(y, iff flirt p T)y{]<T aiyT fiTjSev 6.y vore uy trpdrroify i^cour SiaXa^e7y. — PI. 
Prot. 335, d. hiofuu oZy <rov ■rapafi.(7ycu rjfiiy, &s iyi» ovV h,v iyhs ffiioy imov • 
or at fit fi ffov. — II. o, 228. vw6ei^fy x^^P^' ^l*^i ^'"'ti 06 k*v iyiipotrl y ir«k- 
4a-^rj (since, if he had not escaped, the thing would not have been aecompitMhed with- 
out effort). 

Remark. *Eire( also introduces interrogative and imperative claosea, 
where we must then translate it by for. For the explanation of this use. SM 
§ 341, Rem. 4. 

2. Such adveibial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
the form of substantive clauses by the conjunctions on and 
8 ton (arising from 8ta toOto, on) and the Poet, ovvcica (arising 
from TovTov ev€Ka, o) or oSovvfKa (instead of orov O'Cica, o). 
Tlie Ind is here, also, the prevailing mode, when the statement 
is not conditional. 

PL Euthyphr. 9, e. apa rh Hatov, S t i Sat6y ^(r t «, ^iXdreu irwh riiv d««r, <J, J r » 

^ ( \ ( 7 T a 1, ^ai6y 4(ttl ; 

$339. II. Conditional Adverbial Clauses. 

1. The second kind of adverbial clauses are the conditional 
clauses, which are introduced by the conjunctions ti and car 
(^Vy av, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb 
av). The principal clause expresses what is conditioned by the 
subordinate cliiuse, or the consequence and eflect of the sub- 



$ 339.J CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 543 

ordinate clause. As the conditioning clause precedes the con. 
ditioned, the cause, the effect, the subordinate clause is called 
the introductory clause or Protasis, and the principal clause, the 
conclusion or the Apodosis. 

2. The Greek has the following modes of expressing condi- 
tionaJity : — 

L In the first place, the condition is expressed as a reality or 
fact, as something certain, and hence by the Indicative. Two 
cases are here to be distinguished : — 

(a) Tiie Protasis has «t with the Ind., and the Apodosis, 
likewise the Ind. Then both tie condition and conclusion 
are considered by the speaker as a reality or fact, and hence 
as certain, whether the thing be so objectively or not. The 
result is very frequently a necessary one. If the Apodosis 
contams a command, the Imp. is used, and when this command 
is negative, the Subj. also {h 259, 5). 

E i rovTO \4yfts, afxaprdyfis. — Et ^e6s iari, (ro(p6s i(TTiy. — X. Cy. 
1. 5, 13. «i ravra iyw \«7« wfpl vfiuv &AAa yiyvuaKoiv, ifiaurhu 6|o7roT« 
(here something is spoken of, which in his heart the speaker wholly denies). — 
E r Ti ^x*"» ' <^ J' — E< Toirro Tcxolrjicay, iiraivflffdai 6^ios e T. Her. 3, 62. S Secr- 
■"OTo, oi/K fori ravra oXT^ca, ixets (= 5ti) /tore aoi 'XfitpBis a.Sf\<l>(hs 6 ahs iirap4<r- 
rriK* ' iyie yhp aifrhs idw^d tu¥ X'P*''^ 'H?*''* ^M*<*''^oG • e i /neV wv oi re^ewres aueff- 
r t ao" I, w posS«Kt 6 roi koI 'Affrvdyta rhy M?]Sov ivavaaT-qaecr^ai • e 2 S' carr i, 5s- 
wtp wporov, oh fi4i rl roi (k ye iKfivov yfuntpov aya$\a(rrr}(T€i (here in the first con- 
ditional clause, something is spoken of, the opposite of which the speaker is per- 
Biuulcd is true). — Ef n tlx^y f*i Hihov, — Et rovro iireiroi-fiKeis, Cvp-las 
if 191 ^abtL. — El i $p6yrri<r«, koI fjarpa^ey. Et rovro \4^eis, a/xap- 
T^o-p. X. Cy. 2. 1, 8. ffrj Xflcroyrai MriSoi, h Uepffas rh Scivhy t^^^ i. 7. 
1, 10. *l <pddffopi.fP robs iro\ffiiovs KaroKTavdyres, ouSiis rj/xwy airo^avei- 
rai. 

(b) The Protasis has ci \\nth the Lid. of the historical 
tenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense 
with av, then the reality, both of the condition and con- 
clusion is to be denied. Tliis form is used only of the past, 
or where there is a reference to the past; here it is affirmed 
that something could take place under a certain condition, 
but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The 
use of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences. 
See ♦ 25G. 

Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of expression 



544 SYNTAX. [§ 339 

itself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily alway^ denotes a past 
occurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con- 
sists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past and applied 
to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in 
the present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in 
opposition to another present reality (either expressed or to be supplied from 
the context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g. 
if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if the enemy had come, we should have 
been destroyed, but now the ekemt has not come ; from this contrast it 
is now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place. 

Et TovTo €A€7es, TjfjidpTaves &u (si hoc dixisses, errares, if you said this 
you erred, or if you had said this, you would Jiave erred ; but you have not said it, 
consequently you have not erred). PI. Apol. 20, b, c. ris, ?iv S' ^yw, koL iroSa' 
'ir6s 5 Koi TTocrov SiSdaKci ; Evrjuos, ^(prj, & '2<t>KpaTes, Tldpios, irevrc fivStv. Kal eyi 
Thu Eijrjvou ifiaKapKra, el ws aXri^us exet Tavrrjv r^v rex^^ f^l ovrws e/x/xeAftis 
StSctCAcet • iyii yovu Koi avrhs i Ka\\vv6 firju re Kcd tj fi pvvSixrjv &»', el 
i] TTiffrdfiTju Tavra- oAA* ou yap iirlffrafiat, & &v5pei 'A^uouoi (here also 
something past is spoken of, as is evident from e/xaKdpKra). 31, d. €( eyi: 
•ird\ai eTrexefpTjcra irpdrreiv to iroXniKh. rrpdyfiaTa, irdXai i.v aTroKuXr] /coJ 
oVt' it,u vfias bX^eXiiKT}, ovt tiv ifiavrdu. Th.l, 9. ovKtiv ouy vfjawv i Kpdr e i 
{' Ayajxeixvcav) , el fii] ri koI yavriKhv elx^v (^ would not have ruled over the 
islands unless he had a fleet ; but he had a fleet, consequently he could also rule 
over the islands). PI. Gorg. 516, e. €t -fiaav dvhpes aya^oi, ovk &u noTe ravra 
eiracrxov (if they — Cimon, Themistocles, and Mdtiades — had been good men, 
they would never have experienced this injustice). X. Cy. 1. 2, 16. ravra ovk tip 
iSvvavT (at Tlepffai) iroieiu, el fiT} koX dialrrj /xerpia exp^vf o. 3.3, 17. €1 
fxev fxei^av ris KivSvyos e /x eWep rifxiv eluai e/cet (sc. ey rfj iroXe/jLia), fj ev^dSe (sc. 
iu rfj (piXia), taws rh acTcpaXecrTaTov ^v hv alpereov vvv ^eXtroi fiey eKelvoi (oi 
KLP^vvoi) eaovrai, ¥)V re iv^dSe xnTOfievwfxeVy ¥iv re els r^v eKeivuv (rwv voXefiiuv) 
loyres viravrwixeu avrots (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as we were 
unarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly 
country, it was necessaiy for us to remain here ; but now, since we are armed, 
the danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. aXri^, ecprj, Xeyeis' el ydp 
roi rh ex^iv oijTus, SsTrep rh Xan^dveiv, r)dv ^v, iroAu hv Sie<p e poy evSai/xoyia 
01 irXovffioi rwv ireu-fjrwv (in reference to the preceding conversation). An. 7. 6, 
9. 7)ixe7s fxev, S) AaKeSai/xovioi, koI irdXai av ^ /xev Trap iifuy, ^l H-h aeyo<puy Sevpo 
"finas Trei<ras air-f}yayev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, 1. el (ley irepl &Wov rivhs ^ 
rev ffci/xaros KaXXias ^ywyl^erOy i^'f}pKei &y fioi Kol rh irapai rS»v fiAAwv 
elprfuiya' yvy 54 ixoi 5 o k e ? otVxp^J' eTvat /x)j ;8o7j/&^^o"at KoAAta ra St/ccwo. Purg. 
sacril. 109, 15. el {lev aiffxp^v ^y fiovoy rh irpayfia^ Xaws 6.v ris rwy irapioyruy 
i) fie X7](r e' yvy Se ov irepl alcrx^^'H^i oAAct irepX rris fieyiarrjs ^rjixias eKiySvyevoy. 

Remark 1. On the omission of &y in the Apodosis, see § 260, Rem. 3. Oc 
the Ind. of the Hist, tenses in the intermediate clause of such a proposition, 
^ 327b, 1. (a). 



^ 339.J CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 



545 



11. The condition is expressed, in the second place, as a 
conception or representation. The Greek has two different fo-ms 
to denote this relation : — 

(a) The Protasis has ei with the Opt, and the Apodosis, the 
Opt. with ^v. (The Fut. Opt. is here not used.) By this form, 
both the condition and the conclusion are represented as a 
present or future uncertainttj, as an undetermined possibility, a 
mere conjecture, assumption, or supposition, without any refer- 
ence to the thing supposed being real or not real, possible or 
impossible. 

EJf Tt exoty, Sot Tjy 6v (si quid habes des, if you had anything, you would 
give it ; here it is neither assumed nor denied that you have anything, but is 
merely a supposition. E I radro \eyois, afiaprdvots &v (if you should say 
this, then you would err). — PI. Symp. 175, d. ^Z h.v ^xoi, ^i toiovtou etr, rj 
aoipia, S)ST €/c Tov irXrjpea-T^pou els rhu Kevwrepov ^e7u r^^xav, iav aTrT<a/ji.e^a aXK-fj- 
\(au • €t yap ovtojs exet Kal t) (ro(pia, iroWov Tifiw/xai ttjv irapa aoi KaraKXiaw. 
Lysid. 206, C. iX fioi i^eXijcrais ahrhv iroirtaai els Xoyovs iXSteiv, Xaws au ^v 
vaiix-nv a- 1 (TTiSu^ai, & xph awTo3 SioA-eyeo-^at. Menex. 236, a. koI ti ttv 
6X0 ts elire7i/, el Seoi <re \4yeiv; Hipp, Maj. 282, d. el ycip eldeirjs 'iaov 
apyvpiov etpyaa-fiai, ^avudcrais &v. Ion. 537, e. eX ae epolfirjv, el {wheth&-) 
TTJ avTTJ Texvri yiyvwaKOfxev rij apL^fjLr]TiKfj to aura iyca re Kal <tv, t) &\X-p, (pal-qs 
ti,u 5-nirov T?7 avT^. 5. 6, 9. Kal 6 Uap^eyios &0aTOS' e^' hy eK^oire &u, el rhv 
"AKvu Sia^aivTe. 6.2,21. el KaraXnrSvTes to. arKevrf ev r^ epvfiv^ X'^pW 
ws els pidxriv TrapeffKevaa/jLeuoi toifJiev, laws Uu to. lepa fxaXXov if poxop oiri 
7]fuu. (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [§ 260, (4) (aj] 7, 
214. e 15 elf] i>v K(d ewv p.^ M-qXievs TavTr}U rr]u arpaTrhv 'Oi/'firrfs, el ttj x^PV 
iroKKa u> puKr) kw s etri, Onetes might have known this way, if he had been very 
familiar with the country). 

(b) The Protasis has idv (^v, av) with the Subj., and the 
Apodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu- 
ture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep- 
resented as a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of 
which, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as 
possible. The conclusion resulting from the subordinate clause, 
is represented as certaiD (necessary). 

Rem. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, edv with the Subj. 
almost wlioUv corresponds to e I with the Fut. Ind. ; the only distinction is, 
that by c t with the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies that the action 
will actually take place in future : but by edv with the Subj., the form of the 
condition implies that the actual ' occurrence of the action is merely assumed 
or expected by the speaker. The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to be 
found in the conditioned relation itself, which it is necessary to express, but in 

46* 



546 SYNTAX. [{ 339 

the fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected 
by the speaker ($259, Rem. 4). 

'Eai/ TovTo Keyps, afiapr-fiirrti if J/ou say this, shall say it, you will err. 
(Whether you will actually say this, I do not yet know; but I expect, I as- 
sume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) 
— 'Ea*' Tovro Xe^rjs, afiapT-f}(Tr) {si hoc dixeris, errabis). Dem. 2, 14. Sirot 
\6yos, Uv oirp to irpdyfJiaTa, h6.tcu6v 'ti <f>aiy€Tou Kol Kev6v. PI. Rp. 473, d. ^^r 
117] ^ oi (pi\6(ro<poi $a(r i\€v<T<i}a ly iv reus Tr6Kf<Tii', ^ ol fiaaiXris re vDy Xeyofi- 
cvoi Kol ZuvdcXTai (piKoaotpijcru} (T t yvr^aius re /col Ikovus, kcu tovto fls ravrhp 
^v fxir € (Tji, dwafiis t6 ttoKitik}) koI <pi\o<ro<pla, ovk tar i Koxufy iroDXa reus xJXe* 
<rt. Lysid. 210, c. 4hv fikv &pa <rq<phs yfvpt 2> iroT, wdvTfs aoi tplKoi kcu -rdyres 
aoi oiKfToi iffovrai. X. An. 1. 8, 12, Kh.v r ovro^ e<pi], y i k w fi € v -rdy^' iffuif 
irenolriTai. 

Rem. 3. 'Edy with the Subj. and €t with the Opt. are also used to denote 
indefinite frequency. Comp. ^ 327b, 2. In the place of ^«£i' with the Suhj. c« 
with the Opt. occurs, when the conditional clause is made to depend on «n 
Hist, tense. Still, see $345,4. On idv with tlic Oi.t. .ind d with the Inf. 
in orat. obllg., see § 345, Rem. 4, and No. G 

3. Besides the common forms of the Apodosis abeady men- 
tioned, which correspond to those of the Protasis, the Apodosis 
is very often found in a form that does not correspond to the 
Protasis. This interchange of forms gives great dehcacy of 
expression. The following cases occur : — 

(a) The Opt. with Ay in the Apodosis, very often follows cl with the Ind. 
and idy with the Subj., when the conclusion as tmcertain, doublfxd, an undeter- 
mined possibility, is to be contrasted with a condition which is certain^ or which 
is expected or assuwetl as certain. But the Greek, particularly the Attic dialect, 
very often employs this form of the Apodosis with a degree of civility, 'even 
when speaking of settled convictions [$ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. 

(o) Ei rovTo \iyfis, atiaprdvots tiv {if you assert this^ you would err). 
PI. 30, b. ct /xey ody ravra Xcyuy S ia<pd€lpw rovs yeovs, toDt' tiy fttj $\a&(pd. 
Ale. II. 149, e. Kcd yap & v Seiyhy elrj, e I irpbs rk 5wpa kcu ras ^wr/as airofiKfV' 
ovffiy ijfiwy ol ^(ol, aWh fi)} irphs t^v ypv^'fiy, &y Tts 5<rios kcu Sliuuos itv Tvy 
xdiT]. X. C. 1. 2, 28. 6 1 2o»cpoT7js caxppoyury 5i6T€X€», wis &r iiKcdms r^s 
OVK iyovffT}! airr^ kok as alriay ^ x <" i Th. 6, 92. ei wo\4fu6s yt &r ff^dioa 
(^KaiTTov, Kol & y <p't.\os i)y iKoyois wipeKoiriy. 

()8) X. Apol. 6. ffy Be alcr^dyu fiai x^'V*"*' ytyyoH-^ios koI «carafi»u- 
ipoDfxai ifxavrSyt ttus tiy iyw &v jjBeus fi lot e voi fit; PI. Menex. 239, c. ikr 
ody r)fieis ^■jrix^'P'i'^f*' '''^ aitrii \&y(() \^i\^ KOOfieiy rdx Ai' Sevrepoi ^aiyol- 
fie^a {then we should be inferior). 

{y) Ei with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the 
denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with Sk is used in speaking of 
the past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist, tenses with &y. This use is not 



^ 340.] ELLIPSES OF THE PROTASIS. 



547 



frequent, and is found only in Homer [§ 260, (4), (a)]. D, ^8, 80. eJ m^V tu 
rhy iviipov 'Axaiwu iAAos ^vktv^v, ^^^vUs K€u <f>a7fi€p Kal vo(r((>iColfJLf 
ba (ioWoy vvv 5' rSe*/, %s ^ey' ^piaros^Axaiuv cijx^Tai chai {if another had 
told the dream, we should pronounce it false, and not believe it). II. e, 311. Kai v6 
KfV tvb' air 6 \o no iya| av^puv Alueias, et fi^ &p o^h u6i](Te Aihs ^vyar^p 
'A<f>poSiT-n {and J^neas would certainly have perished there, if Aphrodite had not 
obserced it). Comp. § 388. p, 70. [On et with the Opt. in the Protasis and the 
Opt. with &u in the Apodosis, in speaking of something pas^, in Heroaotus, see 
No. II. (a) at the end.] 

(b) On the contrary, the Ind. in the Apodosis sometimes follows et with the 
Opt. X. C. 1. 5, 2. €1 S" iirl TeAeimj rod fiiov yeySfievQi fiovXaiixe^d rw 
iirnpfy^au I) iraT^as H^fxyas vcuSfvaai, i) bvyarfpas irap^ivovs 5ia((>v\d^ai, ^ xp'h' 
fiara Steur^crcu, ap* a^i6Tri<TToy els ravra f}yr]<r6 fie^a rhv aKpairj ; 

(c) The Ind. of the historical tenses with Ay in the Apodosis follows: — 

(a) sometimes c I with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is re- 
garded as a fad or something actually existing, while the conclusion is consid- 
ered as not real or actual. X. Ilier. 1, 9. ei yap ouru toGt' ex ft, tws tty ttoA.- 
Kol fi^y iirebvfiovy tvpeun/eTy . . , irws 8e irdyres e^ijKovy ti,y rovs Tvpdvyovs ; 
{if this it really go, why should many strive after sovereignty, and all esteem, tyrants 
as hajifiyf) Eur. Or. 565, sq. et yiip yvycuKes is t6^ t^^ovciv 3-pacrous, &v- 
Spas <poy(6eiy, Kara^vyas iroiovfxevai is TtKya . . , nap' ovSeu aitrais ^y tiy oWvuai 
w6a(is ; 

(0) rarely idy with the Suhj. (PI. Phaedr. 256, c), but very often el with 
lie Opt., when, in the Apodosis. an action is to be represented as repeated in 
pa.st time [see ^ 260, 2. (2), {$)], but seldom when the reality of the conclusion 
'- to be denied, e. g. X. Cy. 2. 1, 9. el ?x<"M'» ojs TdxicT tiy Sir\a iiroiov- 
fAt^y iraai Tl(p<rais roTs rrposiovcriy. PI. Alc. I. lll,e. ei $ov\T)^€ir}/jiev elSe- 
yai fi^ fi6yoy, iroToi iy^pwtrol elaiy, oAA^ dxoioi vyieiyoiy fj yocrwSeis, d.pa iKavoX & y 
^<Tay hiidoKaXoi oi iroWol] 

(d) The Ind. of a principal tense in the Apodosis, is sometimes contrasted 
with the Ind. of an historical tense in the Protasis: (o) affirmatively: Dem. 
Cor. 293, 195. ei pLera rwv BrjjSoiwf T}fuy ayajyi^o/xeyois ovtws e'lfiapro {fato 
constitutuin ekat) irpa^ai, rl xph irposioKay ; — (/3) negatively: Th. 3, 65. el 
fify yap ijfifTs avrol irpos re tV v6\iy i\b6vres ipiax^t^^^f' {pugnavissemus) 
Koi r^v yfjy iiriovfiey {devastassemus) us iroKefiioi, aSiKov/xew el Se &ydpes 
vfuHy ol irpuroi . . itreKoXeaairro {advocaverunt), rl aSiKovney. 

§ 340. Remarks. 

1. Ellipsis of the Protasis. The Opt. with &y often stands without the 
«)nditional Protasis ; yet this is contained in an adjective-clause, or in a par- 
ticiple, or, in general, in a word of the sentence which may be expanded into a 
conditional Protasis, e. g. in the adverb ourasy in a preposition, or it is indiea- 



548 SYNTAX. [k 340 

ted in what precedes or follows. *Os ravra \4yoi (=ef tij rturra ?<«yoi)y 
a/jLaprdvoi &u ( whoever should say this, if any one should say this, he vxndd err). 
TavTa \f^as {= el ah \4^cu5) a^iapr dvois 6.v. Out« y* (= et o5t« y« 
iroiiiaais) Uu a/iaprduo is. Very often, however, the Protasis is actually 
wanting ; particularly, general Protases are almost always omitted, since they 
can be easily supplied by such phrases as : if one wishes, if it is allouxd, if I 
can., if circumstances should favor, e. g.BovKoifiijv &v (scil. el Suvcufxriif)^ velim 
'HSfus h.v aKovaaini; often also, the conditioned Apodosis must be supplied, 
as the conditioning Protasis, e. g. Her. 9, 71. a\A^ rat- a. fifw koI <pb6y^ av 
etiroiey (sc, el eXiroiew). Comp, § 260, 2, (4), (a). So also, the Ind. of 
the historical tenses with &v is often used without a conditional Protasis, 
e. g. ToGra \e ^as ?! fxapr e s &v. ''Ayevtreicrfjiov ovk tiy rovro <rvy«0ri. 
Efiov\6firiv 6.V or ^ $ov\r)^riv &v (sc. el iSwdfiriv), ixJuissem, velkm (diflfer- 
ent from fiov\oi n-r^y dv, as vellem from velim). "Eyl^ai^i eyytfS iy (sc ci 
irapT]<r^a}, turn vero videres. See ^ 260, Rem. 2. 

2. Ellipsis of the Apodosis. On the contrary, the Apodosis may be omitted 
in certain cases : — 

(a) In the expression of a wish, e. g. eXbt rovro y4voiro (sc. exnvxhi ^ 
eXriv), that this might be! eXbe rovro iy(yero (sc. eirrvx^s h» ^y)^ O Otat 
this had been ! Comp. ^ 259, 3, (b), and Rem. 6. 

(b) Often in excited, impassioned discourse {Aposioj>€sis). II. a, 340, sq. etwort 
8* aire XP^^^ 4ne7o yevr)Ttu aeiKea Xoiyhy ktivvai rots &Wois — . 

(c) Wlien the Apodosis may be easily supplied from the context. This oc- 
curs in Homer in the i)hrase el 5' d^eKeis with or without an Inf 11.^, 
487. el 5' i^eXeis iroKf/xoio Sa^fieycu (sc. &y(, y^dxov ifuoi)' 6^' cJ eH^s. 
Very often also in Attic writers, where two conditional clauses are placed in 
contrast by el (^ekv) fiey — el {iky) Sk fi^; in the first the Apodosis Is 
omitted, since it contains a thought whirh can !>e easily supplied, and the dis- 
course hastens on to the following more important thought. PI. Prot. 325. d. 
Kol eay /xey eKo^y irei^Toi (sc. koXus ^X*') ' *^ ^* M^> — ev^yovaiy axeiXaus Koi 
TrKtjycus. 

3. A partial ellipsis of the Protasis occurs in the Homeric phrase el 5* &yt, 
i.e. el §€ $ov\ei. dye. II. a, 524. el S" Aye roi Ke<pa\fj Karrayevvofjuau. Also 
when el Se or el 5* &ye is used as an antithesis, where a verb must be sup- 
plied from the context. II. a, 302 ; i, 46. oAA* &AA01 fxeyeovai KapriKOfiit$yres 
*AxcMo(, els6Ke irep Tpoir}y Siairepaofiey ' el Zk Kol airroi (sc. fi^ fieyeoviri)^ ^rvy^r- 
rwv ahy yrjval <pl\riy is varplSa yahv. 

4. El Se instead of ei 5e /i^ and el 5^ /n^ instead of el i4. "WTien two 
hvpothetical clauses are contrasted with each other, el 8c is often used instead 
of el Sh fi-fi, since the opposed or contrasted member of itself abrogates 
the first member. PI. Prot. 348, a. Khv /xev fiovKri Uri ipvrar, froifi6s elfil aoi 
vapexeiy (sc. ifie) aTroKpiy6neyos ' iky Se &ov\t), irb ifui wapdaye (if yarn yrisk to 
propose further questions. I am ready to ref^y. but if you do not tcish. etc. ). On the 
contrary, a negative clause is followed by el Se fii), instead of e* 5«, this form 



♦ 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 



549 



being very common in abrogating or expressing the opposite of the preceding 
clause. X. Cy. 3. 1, 35. irphs -ruv beuv, fi^ ovtco Aeye- €t Se (Jii) {otherwise), oh 
hap^ovvri. fie e^eis. 

5. When €t fii} has the meaning of except, another el is sometimes sub- 
joined, thus ft nh e t, like nisi si, except if, unless, the predicate of d f^-f, being 
omitted. PI. Symp. 205. e. ov yap rh Uvtuv, oJnai, eKa<TToi aaTrdCoyrai, el fi^ 
c t TIT rh ^iy hya^hu oIkcIou koXu. 

6. "Av in the Protasis with et and the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical 
tenses. Sometimes &v is found, also, in the Protasis, so that it contains a con- 
dition for the Apodosis, but it is itself dependent on another condition, com- 
monly not expressed, but implied, e. g. « ravra \eyoi5 &v means : If you should 
iay this UNDER C1KCUM8TAXCE8 (=.m case circumstances require, in case an oppor- 
tunity should present, in case one should ask you), etc. X. Cy. 3. 3, 55. roi/s S* 
kirauitvTOvs irairrdwcuny apfrris bavfjLd^oifjL 6.v^ ef TiirKiou tiv ox/ieArjo-eie \c- 
yos KoXus ^TjbfU (Is aySpaya^lay, I) rovs araiSfvrovs fiouaiKiis StTfia fid\a KaXus 
^ff^iy els fjLOu<TiKi\y. Pi. Prot. 329, b. ^70* fXtrep &AAw T6i> dvi^pwTrwv irei^ol- 
fjLTfy &y, Kcd <Tol wflboftat (si ulli alii, si id mihi affirmet, fidem habeam). 

7. When koI is connected with ci (^dv), the hypothetical Protasis contains a 
">ncessive meaning, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning: the Protasis 

denotes a concession; the Apodosis, often in connection with 8/xws, tamen, 
denies the expected consequence, Mid places another consequence in opposi- 
tion to that i -■. Koi either follows € I, — e* waT or precedes it, — kuI 
fl — . In lii- - : -, Kol moans also, and refers not merely to et, but to the 
entire concessive clause, and ct Kal means although. In the last case, Kcd 
means even (enhansive), and refers only to the condition, and Kal el means 
even if, c. g. f i Kal dyT]T6s dfu, although I am mortal (conceding what is actu- 
ally the case, Kal «* a^dyaros ^y, cvin if I were immortal (conceding what is 
not the case). S. O. II. 302. 'ir6\ty neyy ci Kal /x^ fi\eirfis, (ppoveis 5' oiJiuts, o'lCf, 
y6fTw {uveffTiv, etsi (quanuptam) caeais es, vides tanien, quo in malo versetur civitas. 
Aesch. Choeph. 296. Kfl fiif irfiroi^a, roZpyov ttXT iypaareov, etiamsi non fido, 

J '■■ '-/I ficinus est. To the el (iav) Kal, the negative el {iav) fjLrjSe 

1' _ J to the Kcu (t (^av), ou8' (/xtjS') el {idy). 

Remark. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged form 
by the participle, either alone, or in connection with Kal, Kalirep, etc., § 312, 4, 
(d) and Kem. 8. 

k 341. III. Adverbial Clauses denoting Consequence 

or Effect. 

1. Adverbial clauses, denoting consequence or effect, are 
adverbs of manner expanded into a sentence, and are intro- 
duced by the conjunction wstc (more seldom wg), which refers 
to the demonstrative adverb ovTa)(s), either expressed or under- 
stood, in the principal clause, e. g. ovrm KaX6<i icrnv, ui<sri Sav 



550 SYNTAX. [§ 341. 

fxd^caSaL (== Sav fxaa-tui? KaXos eo-rtv). Yet these clauses often 
have also the meaning of a substantive or Inf. in the Ace. and 
denoting an efect, and must then be considered as substantive- 
clauses. In this last case, the relative a><5T€ of the subordinate 
clause corresponds to a demonstrative substantive-pronoun, 
either expressed or to be supplied, e. g. tovto, in the principal 
clause, e. g. 'AveTretcre Hep^ea tovto, wst€ ttoUuv ravra (Her.). 

2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence 
or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actual. 
The negative is in this case (ov, { 318, 2). 

Her. 6, 83.''Apyos auBpwv ixvp<*'^V ovra, Sisre ol SovXoi avT^ccv tffxov 
Trdvra ra irp-fiyixara. X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Kvpos raxv koX to \y Tcp Trapa^ii(TCf ^pla 
ai/7}\(iKeL, &STe 6'A<TTvdyr]5 ouKer' eXx^v avrif <TvKXe')^iv ^rjpia. 15. ovtws 
l^tr^T} rp rSre ^pa {6 'AcrrvdyTis), Sisre dei, 6ir6r€ 6i6y re e^jj, trvpe^'p e i r^ 
Kvpw, Koi 6,Wovs re ttoWovs Trap€\dfifiaye. 

3. The Inf , on the contrary, is used, when the consequence 
or effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or supposed 
one, inferred from the inward rel(flion of things, or assumed as 
possible. (On attraction with the Inf, see k 307, 4, and on the 
negative, $ 318, 2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used, 
are the following : — 

(a) When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its 
ground in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1. 2, 1. ert Se irphs rh fier- 
picou de7(r^ai TreTraLSev/xevos "fjy ^WKpdrrjS ovrcos, uisr e irdvv fiiKpa KeKT-qfievos irdw 
paSictiS ex^tJ' apKOvvra. Cy. 1. 1, .5. idwdc^ Kvpos iTri^vfiiav eiJ.$a\€7v roaav- 
TT}U Tov irdvras avT^ x°/''C'f "''^'"'j SI> sr e ae\ Tp avrov yvw/xri a^iovy Kv^epvda- 
^ai. 2, 1. (pvuai 6 Kvpos Xeyerai, fpiXorifxSTaros, &STe irdvTa jxhv ttSvov avar- 
\rjvai, irdvTa Se kIvZwov viro/xeTvai rod itraLveTa^ai evcKa. For the same 
reason, ^ asre (quam ut) is used with the Inf, after a comparative. Her. 3, 
14. S TToI Kipov, ra fikv oiKifia ^v fie^co KaKa, ^ Ssre avaKXaieiv {greater than 
that any one can bewail, i. e. too great for one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. (pofiov/xcu 
aei, jU'/; Ti (lu^ou ^ oSsre (pepeiv Svvaa^ai KUKhy rp irSXei avfififj. Hence 
SsT6 with an Inf may also be used to explain a preceding clause, e. g. Tb. 4, 
23. 'n.eXoirovv{](noi ip rp ijireipcp (rTpaTOTreSevcrdfjievoi, Kcd irpo5$o\as Troiovfxevoi t^ 
reix^ii o'Koirovures KUipov, eX ris TrapaTreo'oi, usre tovs ivSpas (Taxrai [icaich- 
mg for an opportunity, if any should occur, by which their fellow-citizens could be 
saved). X. C. 1. 3, 6. t to7s Trhelarois ipyoy^eararSv iariv, Ssre <pv\d^a<rd^ai rh 
vvep rhy Kaiphv e^iriTrAacriS^at, t'-Ito ^aSioos irdvv '2,(aKpdrr)S e<pvKdrrero. 

(b) When the consequence is to be represented as one merely possible. X. 
An. 2. 2, 17. KpavyrjV iroKX^v iirolovy KaXovvres aXXriXovs, Ssre kcu tovs TroXeui- 
9VS uKoveiv {ut etiam hastes audire possent), 8}sre ol fiev e77UTaTo rav noXefxl' 



f 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 551 

av KoL ^<pvyoy {a fact). 1.4, 8. ovre airoiri^eiyaaiv • ^x« y^p rpLr^p^ir, & srt 
€\e7y rh iKeipwv w\o7ov. 

(c) When the consequence or effect includes, at the same time, the idea of 
purpose or aim. Th. 2, 75. irpoKaKvfJLfiaTa elxe Seppezs koL SicpSyepas, wsre tovs 
ipyaCo/xevovs koI ra |vAo fi7]r€ irvpcpopois oiaToTis ^dWecr^ai, ev a(T<pa\eia t€ 
elvai {so that those at work and the wood might not be hit, etc.). Dem. Cor. ^ 81. 
ToWa fieu tt,v xPW^Ta eSw/ce ^tAttrrtSTjs, &sr' exeij/ 'HpeoV {ut obtineret 
Oreuni). 

(d) When the consequence is to he indicated at the same time as a condition of 
the statement in the principal clause {under the condition, that, or it is presupposed, 
that). Dem. Ph. 2. 68, 11. i^hv avro7s rS>v Xoiirwv ^px^iv 'EW-fjvwv, & st avTous 
viraKoveiv fia<ri\ei {quum possent ceteris Graecis mx imperitare, tjt ipsi dicto 
audientes essent regi, since they could rule the rest of the Greeks, provided they 
themselves obeyed the king). X. Cy. 3. 2, 16. koL tovto eTrio-rco, ^(prj, 5 Kvpe, '6x1 
iyci, &5T€ OTreA-acot Xa\dalovs avh tovtwv rS>v ^kowv^ iroXKairXaaria ti.v edwKa 
Xfi'fliJ.ara, uu av vw ^xeis Trap' ifiov. 

(e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with &st€ is used for the sake 
of emphasis. Th. 1, 119. {iSe-fj^rj cav) l/cacrTwv iSla, &sTe \l/rf^i(ra(r^ai 
rhu iroKefJioy. 2, 101. aj/aireiS-eTot inrh 'Xev^ov . . , a) s t iy rdx^i OTreAid'ery. 
6, 88. Kol 01 Koply^ioi cv^vs i^l/Tj<pi<rayTO avrol irpwroi, &STe irdari irpo^vfxla 
a/jLvveiy kt\. X. H. 6. 1, 9. Ka\ 'ASrTiva7oi de irdyra Troi7i<raiey &y, Hsre 
avfifiaxoi VH-^t^ yevea^ai. 

(f) In general, when the speaker, without respect to the objective relation 
of things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection between the cause 
and the effect. In this way, a consequence actually existing may be expressed 
by &ST€ with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. ^Xauvey iirl robs Meyuyos {ffrpaTtcoTas), 
Sst' iKelvovs e/c7r67r\^X3-ot koI avrhy Meucava Kai rpex^t'V iirl rh oir\a. 

(g) In obiique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. {rhy Kvpov) ehffxtiP-^vws irws irpose- 
veyKelv /cat iySovvai rrjy (pLaXrjy t^ 7ro7r7r<jf>, Sosre r-p fjLTjTpl koi t^ 'Aarvdyei, iroKvy 
yeXcora Trap acx t ' ''• 

Rem. 1. When the Inf connected with S>st€ depends on a condition, the 
modal adverb du is subjoined to the Inf [§ 260, 2, (5), (a)]. Th. 2, 49. raiyrhs 
ovTcos iKaiero, fisre 7)5i(Trahyis vScop ^pvxphy ccpas avTovs piirreiy. X. An. 
6. I, 31. Kai jxoi 01 ^eol ovtcos eV to7s i€po7s iar]ixf]vav, & st e Kol iSidorrfy ti,y yyw- 
yai, '6ti TauTTjs t^s fioyapx^as airex^o'^al fie Sel (i. e. koI ei tis ISkvttis etrj). 

Rem. 2. Instead of Sisre with the Inf or Ace. with Inf, a relative, particu- 
larly at OS, '6<Tos, is very often used in connection with the Ace. with Jnf., 
this relative corresponding to a demonstrative, particularly toiovtos, to(tovtos, 
either standing in the principal clause or to be supplied. PI. Crit. 4^6, b. iyib — 
TOIOVTOS (sc. dfii), oTos Twv i/xwy fjLrjSeyl SAAo) irei^ea-^ai, fj ry \6yj. X. 
Cy. 1. 2, 3. ot nepa-iKol ySjxoi iTrifieXovrai, Hiras T7]V apxV /"^ toioOtoi iffovTU 




I. 2. yeiJ.6fj.evoi Tk avruv eKaa-Toi, '6 (Toy aTroC^v {so far that they could live on 
them). On the attraction in this mode of expression, see § 332, Rem. 8. 

Rem. 3. Special mention must be made here of apparently independent 



552 



SYNTAX. [^ 341. 



parenthetic clauses, which often occur, and which are intro^aced by &s (seldom 
&ST€) with the Inf. In this way the Inf , particularly of verbs of saying, thdrX- 
ing, judging, hearing, is used with d>$ for the purpose of expressing restriction or 
limitation. That, of which such a subordinate clause expresses the consequence 
or effect, must be supplied, e. g. toiovt^ rpoTrw. Th. 4, 36. ws (iiKphv ficydKo) 
e^/cao-at (to compare small with great). So oss eiros e'nrfty (especially with 
"iras Bind ovSeis), ut ita dicam, propemodum dixerim, ws (rvve\6vTi elvelv, ut 
paucis nbsolvam, ws ye fxoi So/ceTj/, ut mihi quidem videtur, -properly tali mode 
ut mihi videalur, cos ifie eZ /xe fiufjcr^ai (as far as I well remember). S)5 ye 
ovTcoa-l aKova-ai (so far as we hear). Such clauses are very often expressed in 
an abridged form without wr, e.g. OUT wo-l aKovaai, Zok^Iv ifioiy ov iroA- 
\^ \6ycf} el-rreTv, especially 6\iyov, /xiKpov Se7i/,ita ut paulum absit, and 
in the still shorter form, 6\iyov, prope, paene. — According to the same analogy, 
h(Tov, '6 a a, '6 ri connected with an Inf, are used instead of w s. (Rem. 2), e.g. 
Haou ye fx elSevai, as far as I know, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto, 
quantum scire possim), '6 ri fi elSevai. In like manner, ws with' the Inf is 
used in Herod, in sentences which express a limitation. 2. 8. ro &V 5/? uTrh 
*^.i\iovTr6Kios ovK€Ti TToWhy x^P'^o'^j ^^ el vat AlyvirTov (ut in Aegypto, for 
Egypt, i. e. considering its whole extent). 

4. The Opt. with av is used when the consequence or effect 
is to be represented as a conditioned supposition or presumption 
l^ 260, 2, (4), (a)]; finally the Ind. of the historical - t>i^^§ .is 
used with av, when it is to be stated, that the consequ?!l^lij 
would take place under a certain condition \} 260, 2, (2), (a)].^ 

Isocr. Archid. 130, 67. e\s rotravrrtv a^ii^iav i\r)\v^a(riv, & s r' ol fiev Keicnjfie- 
pot rhs ovalas i^Siov & v els t}}v ^d\aTTau to, <r<peT(p^ avruv e fi^dWoiev, 1) to7s 
Seofieuois iirap Kea e lav. PI. Menex. 236, d. aol ye Se7 x^^C^^^^^y S>sre 
Kav 0A./70U, et /xe KeKevois airoSvuTa opx'fio'aabcu, xap'<^a'A'i7'' ^^' — Symp 
197, a. (JiavTiKT]v ^hirSWuv avevpev, 'Etri^viJiias Kod'EpuTos ijye fioyevaayroSy usre 
Kal ovros ''EpuTos "hv eHr] /jLabrjrrjs. — Dem. Cor. 236, 30. ovk hv upxl^ofiev 
^IXiinrov, & sre ttjs elpi]in]S tiv 5 ir} fxapTT} Ke i Kol ovk i y afitpdrefm el x^i ^^ 
r^jy elprjur^y, /col to x^P^"* ^' -^S- ^•. -^- "f^dyTes TroXefiiKo, oirKa KoreffKeva^oyf 
&STe ri]y Tr6\iy oyrus &v i]yf]cru) iroXe/jLOv ipyatrTtjpioy elycu. 

Rem. 4. The Opt. without &y is used only in the case mentioned in § 227b, 
1, (b). When wsre is connected with the Imp., or the imperative Subj. [4 269, 
1, (a)], the dependent discourse is suddenly changed, with rhetorical emphasis, 
into the Oratio recta. Dem. Phil. 3. 129. 70. ypdpu he, Zsre, iv fiovKrja^e, 
Xe ipoTovt](Tar e (I ash that you icould decree, if you icish. properly : decree, if 
yon wish). So, likewise, Zsre can be connected with a question. Dem. Aphob. 
838. 47. el 6 Trar-^p Tjiriarei tovtois, STjAoy Srt oCt' &v ToAAa iTrerpe-rey, o&t 2t» 
iKe7v ovToi) KaraXiTTwy auTo7s e(ppa^ey, Sisre ir6^ey tffaaiyj {ergo wide scie- 
runt ?) Comp. § 344, Rem. 6. 

Rem. 5. Instead of Zsre with the meaning ita or ea conditione, irf, the post- 
Homeric language also uses ^<^* ^re (more seldom itp' ^), which refers to 
the demonstrative iir\ touted in the principal clause, either expressed or im- 
plied ; either the Put. Ind.. or the Inf arc here used, e.g. Her. 3, 83. iwl 
rovTCf} 8e vire^icrTaiJ.ai Tfjs apxvs, en uTe inr' ovSevhs vixewv 6.p^o fxai. X. 
H. 2. 2, 20. eiroiovyro elp-i^vTjy, e<p' ^ to re /xcufpa reixv kcu rhy Ueipaua Ko^ekdy- 
ras AajceSai/xoylois eirea^ai. 4, 38. 01 Sc Sti^AAafeu', i<l>' yre elp^yni' ^X***'* 



♦ 342.) COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF MANNER. 553 

D. Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner and 

Quantity. 

$ 342. I. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Manner. 

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quality and mari- 
ner, compare the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to 
quality and manner, with the predicate expressed in the adver- 
bial clauses. They are introduced by the relative adverbs, w?, 
w9Te, wsTrep, otto)?, which refer to a demonstrative adverb, e. g. 
ovTo)?, in the principal clause, either expre.4sed or understood. 

2. The use of the modes in these adverbial clauses corre- 
sponds with that in adjective clauses (^ 333), e. g. Aeya? ovTOi'iy 
0)5 <f)pov€L<; (you speak as you think) . Zeus StSojo-tv, o tt w s e .^ e - 
Xci or oTTws av i^eXtf 333, 3), eKao-rw (gives to each, as he 
wishes). Very often ws av or wsTrep a v is used with the Opt. 
($ 333, 6). PI. Phaed. 87, b. lixol yap Sokcl 6/xotcos Aeyeo-^ai 
ravra, ojsTrcp av ris Trepc av-^poj-rrov vcfidvTov TrpecrjSvTOV aTro^avovros 
Aeyot TOVTOV tov \6yov. 

Hemark 1. In comparisons, either the Present tense is used, since the com- 
pared objert is i)laced in present view, or the Aor. [§ 256, 4, (c)]. In respect 
to the Modes, it is to be noted, tliat in Homer, tlie adverbs of comparison ws, 
&sTf, ifvre, are connected either with the Pres. or Aor. Ind., when the com- 
parison is stated as an actual fact, or with the Pres. Subj., or commonly with 
the Aor. Subj. (^ 333, Rem. 2. ; the Aor. Subj. often retains the appearance of 
the Fut. by the shortening of the mode-vowel). II. /c, 183. ws Se Kwes vepl 
ljL?]\a Sus w pi] (T o vTa t iy avKfj — , &s twu viiSv/xos viryos airh fi\€(papouu oAwAei. 
p, 434. &ST€ ffrriKj] fxeyei (/xiTfSou, t^t iirl tu/jl^co avepos ecTTrjKei. k. 485, sq. 
ws Se \e(Di/ fir]\oiaiu aar^p^auToiffiu irreK^wv atyeatv -tj Qi'e(T(ri KaKO, (ppovecov iuo- 
pova-T]- &r fiiv QpTjiKas ivSpas iircfix^To Tv54os vl6s {as it may happen that a lion, 
etc.). 

Rem. 2. Ovtms (ws) — ws are used in wishes or asseverations, the clause of 
comparison, introduced by ws, expressing the asseveration or protestation. 
Thus in Latin, ita vie da anient, UT ego nunc laetor, may the gods love me, as 
I rejoice, = may the gods not love me, if t do not rejoice, or as sure as I loish the 
gods to love me, so sure I now rejoice. 11. v, 825. el yhp iywv ovrw ye Aihs irais 
alyiSxoio iXT]u . . , ws vvv rjf^^PV ^^^ Kanhv <p4pei 'Apyeioicri jaai fj.d\a {ivould that 
I were the son of Zeus as truly as this day brings evil to all the Gh'eeks). 

Rem. 3. In clauses introduced by ws, &sTrep, wsre, an attraction of the 
Case sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, 136. 
ouSaixou eo-Tti/ ' Ay 6paTov "A^vaTou ehat wsirep Q paarv ^ovXou {should be 
such as Thrasijbuhts is). But the Nom. is often found, for which a verb must be 
supplied from the context. Dem. Mid. 363. ixP^'^ «^'^^'' ^" ^""^^ avahlaKovra 
Sisirep 4yw, ovrw pikv a(paipe7<r^ai tt]v viK7)V. 

Kem. 4. An appositive is often used with ws denoting comparison, as in 

47 



554 SYNTAX. p 343. 

Latin with ut, for the purpose of explaining the predicate of the principal 
clause. This cbs, ut, expresses either comparison or limitation, and in the first 
case is to be translated by as, in the latter by for ; the former occurs, when it 
is presupposed that the object connected with w s possesses in a high dejrree 
the thing affinned in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is pre- 
supposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by 
the predicate of the sentence, S. O. R. 1118. Aatov yap ^v, e^Trep t«s 6x\os, vur- 
t6s, cos vofievs avi\p {ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be- 
ing presupposed). But Th. 4, 84. ^v Se «vBh aduvaros, us Auk f5aifi6vios, 
eiireTu {ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian ; it being presupposed of Lacede* 
monians as a thing known, that they were not great orators). 



$ 343. IL Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Quantity. 

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare 
the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to quantity or 
degree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con- 
trasted either as equal or unequal to each other. 

2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the follow- 
ing manner : — 

(a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative o<r^ 
{ocrov), wliich refers to the demonstrative Tocrovna (too-oC- 
Tov), in the principal clause. 

X. Cy. 8. 1, 4. TOffovTov Biacpepfiv Tjfjuis Sei t«v iov\a»^, iorop ol /liv SoDXoi 
&KovTes To7s S(air6Tais vinjpeTovffiv {it becomes us to excel slaves as much as slaves 
unwillingly serve their masters). 

(b) Tlie adverbial clause is hkewise introduced by oo-w 
(oo-ov), wliich refers to the demonstrative too-ovto) {Toa-ovTov)y 
in the principal clause ; the predicate of both clauses, however, 
stands either in the comparative or superlative. 

X. An. 1. 5, 9. {Kvpos) vo/jlI^wv, J<ro> fiiv tv barror t?^ot rovovrtf 
hvapaffKevaa-Torepa) $a(n\f7 fjidx^r^ai {quo [quanta] cekrius — eo [tan!',] 
imparatior, thinking that the quicker he came, the more unprepared he would fnJ 
the king to fght). 0. 7,42. 5<raj tv koI ifiol Koiya}v6s, koI iraua\y oUov <pv\a^ 
a/JLeivo}V ylyr), roffovrtp koI rtfjuur^pa iv r^ otKcp l^<rp {quo [quanta] melior 
— eo [tanto] honoratior, the — so much the). Ilier. 1, 19. So-y tiy -rXflot t»j xa- 
pa.^?}Tai TcnrepiTTa ruv iKva>S)V, roaovrto baaaov KOpos ifi^i-rrfi rris iSooSris. 
Th. 8, 84. oacf) ix(i\i<rra koL i\fvdepoi ^aav yavrcuy rotrovrta koX bpacv- 
TOT a TrposiTi(T6vres tIv fxiobhv air^Tovv. The Superlative may also stand in 
the first member, the Comp., in the last. Dem. 01. 1. 21, 12. 5<ry 70^ krot- 
u.6rar^ ahr^ {r^ \6ya>) BoKOVfiey x/>'5<'"'^<". roaovrtfr naWoy a-rurrovn 
wdyTfS ovry. 



^ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 555 

Kemark 1 . Sometimes Toffoircois omitted, especially when the relativa 
member of the comparison follows PL Gorg. 458, a. ^elCov yhp ahrh ^ya- 
bhv rryovfiat, ba-cpire pfi e iCov aya^6u ianu ahrhv ^iraWaywai kokqv tovL- 
yiffr ou ^ &.K\ov o7raAAa|at. Also after the omission of o&co — ToaovTw both 
clauses maybe blended into one, e. g. X. C. 4. 1, 3. at dp^arai doKovaa\ ehai 
<t>vafis fjLoXiaTa iraioeias oeouTai. 

Rem. 2. A comparative clause, introduced by &s, Sttws, ^ (as), Scrov, and 
expressmg a possibdity,^ often serves to strengthen a superlative. X. C. 2. 2, 6. 
iTTineKovyrai ol yoyeh irdma TToiovyrfs, Strws ol irui^is ahrois yivuvrai us 5uj/'o- 
rhy $4\ri<TToi {as good as possible, quam fieri potest optimi). Cv. 7. 1, 9. ^ 
hv Svywuai rdx^rra {as quick as possible). For the like purpose, also, 
oTos, 8ri are used in connection with eJvai. X. C. 4. 8, 11. iSSKei roiodros 
fhai, oTos tiy etv 6.pi(Tr6s y^ ai^p evbaifiovearraTos. The foUowino- 
elliptical expressions originate from the omission of the verb: ws ^pia-r'a 
oToy x«^«''^'r«^oi/, OTi fid\i<rTa, etc. (^ 239, Eem. 2). In the same 
manner, the expressions is aK-n^wSy in fact, really, us arexvus, utterly, ws iravv, as 
iirl rh iroKv, pieminque, are to be explained ; also ws eKaaToi, i. e. eKcwTot, ws 
tKcuTToi ^aay. 

3, The inequalitTj of the predicates compared, is expressed 
by appending to the Comparative a coordinate clause with the 
comparative particle ^. See h 323. 

Rem. 3, The relation of quantity is expressed by comparing the predicate 
of the principal clause, in respect to its magnitude or degree, with the conse- 
quence or eftect of that clause, the consequence being expressed by a subordi- 
nate clause with firre and the Inf. If tlie degree of the predicate in the prin- 
cipal clause stands in an equal relation with its effect, then the predicate of the 
principal clause is in the positive, e. g. ovtws av^pi76s iffTiv, Stsre ^av- 
p.d((0-bai. But if the relation is unequal, i. e. if the predicate of the princi- 
pal clause is represented as one which exists in a higher degree than another 
standing with it, then the Comparative is used with ^ &st€ and the Inf, e. g. 
rk Koick n«lC(i> iffriuy ^ wrrf avaKXainv {greater than that one, i. Q. too great 
to be bewaiUd). See S 341, 3, (a). 



CHAPTER IX. 

$ 344. I. Interrogative Sentences. 

1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence 
or dependent upon it, e. g. Has the friend come J and I do not 
know w}i£th€r tlie friend has come. The first is called a direct 
question, the last, indirect. Both may consist either of one 
member, or of two or more members, e. g. Has the friend come, 
or Has he not yet come? Do you not know whether he is come or 
whether he is not coming ? According as the question refers to 
an object (person or thing) or to a predicate, the questions are 
divided into nominal and into predicative questions, e. g. who 



556 SYNTAX. [$ 344. 

has done this ? (nominal question), and hast thou written tJie 
letter ? (predicative question). 

2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which th^£^ 
inquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single word in the 
sentence (subject, attributive, or object), are introduced by the 
substantive, adjective, or adverbial interrogative pronouns, rts, 
wdtos, -TTocros, Trorepos, ttoos, tttj, ttov, tto^l, tto^cv, ttoctc, etc. If the 
nominal questions are indirect, then they are introduced by the 
interrogative pronouns (^ 93, Rem. 1.) compounded with a 
relative : osrts, bTrolo<;, ottocto?, OTTorepos, ottw?, otttj, ottov, oTro-^ev, 
OTTOcre, etc. 

Tis ^\^ey] — Tt 7roie?s; — Iloldy ffe ^iros <pvyeu UpKos o^Sutwv ] — Hws Xe- 
yeis ; — U6a'e (pevyere ; — Ouk o75a, o st is iariy. — Oi/K olSa, oirco s tovto rh 
vpayfjLa eirpa^ev. 

Remark 1. Often, however, the indirect question takes the character of 
the direct, and then the direct interrogative pronouns are used instead of the 
indirect. Sometimes, indeed, in clauses that immediately follow each other, 
the first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, the direct. 
OvK ol5a, Tis ravra eTrpa^ev. X. C. 4. 6, 2. elire /lloi — Tro76v ri vofii^eis evcre- 
0eLay elvai; yet there follows immediately, ex^i^s oZv flireLV, 6iro16s ris 6 ei/ae- 
fi-fjs iariu] Comp. Rem. 2. PI. Crit. 48, a. ouk &pa rjfuv ovrw (ppovriareov, ri 
ipovcty ot TToAAol rifxas, ctAX*" 3 r x i ^iraCcov irepl tuv SiKaicay Kol aSiKwy, X. C. 4. 
4, 13. ov yap alcr^dyojuLal crov, 6iro7ov vS/uLifiov, ^ irolov SiKaiov Xcyeis. — In 
indirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect 
interrogative, e. g. os instead of ostis, olos instead of dirolos, etc. 

Rem. 2. The adverb TrcJS-e, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended 
to the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer 
for an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. C. 1. 1, 2. 
irolco iroT ixprjcrauTo TeK/j.Tjpi(i} ,- {u'hat proof, I pra)/, did they bring?) 1. iroA.- 
KaKis i^avij.a(Ta, ricri irore \6yois 'A^vaiovs ^ireiaav ot ypa\pdfA.eyoi Sw/cpaTTji/, 
ws 6^105 e^Tj Sfavdrov tt; TroAet. R. L. 1, 1- i^aifxaaa, Stco irore Tpoirca tqvt 
iyiviTO. 

Rem. 3. The article is prefixed to the interrogative, when one of the speak- 
ers has mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while 
the other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis- 
course, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, asks 
" what that means." PI. Phaedr. 277, a. 'S.wKp. Nuv 8?? in civ a f?'5i7, 5 ^oTSpe, 
Svycifj.(^a Kpiveiv, tovtwv 6>p.o\oyr]ix4va>v. 4". Ta irola; (in reference to the 
preceding ejcetj/a). 279, a. liOiKp. Neos ert, S> ^aTdpe, 'l(T0Kpa.Tir\s ' h ii4vtoi fuxv- 
Tevo/xai Kar avrov, Xeyeiy i^eXu. 4>. Tb iro7oy 5?); So Ta Tro7a ravra 
X4yeis ; From this mode of expressipn, that is to be distinguished, in which a 
substantive with the article or a demonstrative follows an interrogative with- 
out an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an 
object already existing. II. ir, 440. iroTov rhy fiv^ov genres ; which the 
Eng. translates by means of two sentences, '' What is that woi-d, that thou 
hast spoken 1 " The word is already spoken, and the other now asks what it 
means. Her. 7, 48. SaLfj.6yie aySpuy, Ko7a (= iroia) ravra \4yeis elyai Svo fioi 
voX^lxiwrara; (what are these two things which you say are most hostile to me?) 
PI. Gorg. 521. a. iirl Tror e pay oly fxe irapaKaXels rijy ^epdireiav rijs iroKftei 
(= TToreoa itrrly rj ^epdireia, i<p' f}v /xe irapaKaXus ;) 



$ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



557 



EE3r. 4. In order to make the subject matter of the question emphatic when 
there is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words whicli denote this 
subject matter are often taken from their own sentence and phxced first with ri 




^ irphs rh fieKriaTou fiXiirwv iS6Kei aoi KibapwZeiv ; 

Rem. 5. The expressions, ri fxaStuv, ti iraSKou, cur? ivhy? always ex- 
press disapprobation or censure of that respecting which the question is asked. 
The former implies that the thing censured was done designedli/ ; the latter that 
it was done accidentally, e. g. Ti ytto^cbi/ toCto iiroirjaas ; [what has come into 
your mind to do this, with what object in view did you do this?) Tl ira^wv tovto 
4volr](Tas ; {quid erpeiius hoc fecisti ? what happened to you that you did this ?) PI. 
Apol. 36, b. ri 6^l6s el/iii Tra^eTi/, ^ aTroT7<rai, ort fxa^cSov iu tw fiiw ovx rjavxiav 
^yov ; ( what punishment do I deserve, that 1 purposely have had no rest in my life ?). 

Eem. 6. A rhetorical turn of the Greek language, of frequent recurrence, 
consists in suddenly changing a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjunc- 
tion, into a direct interrogative clause, yet in such a way that the earlier con- 
struction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. changes the subordinate 
clause into the principal, and the principal into the subordinate. X. C. 1. 4, 
14. (TV Se a/xcpOTepcav riau irXeiarov a^icou reruxv^^s ovk oUt crov ^eovs i7ri[jie\c7(r- 
bai, aA.\' orau ri it o i-i] a (a a i, vofj-L^ls avrovs aou cppovTi^eiv ; [but what must the' 
gods do, to make you believe that they care for thee?}. Dem. Phil. 1. 43, 10. Wre 
& XP^ ■"■p^l^'f • eTreiSai' ri yeurjrai; {but what must take place if you are to 
do your duty?). Hence the elliptical expressions, 'Iva ri; ws ri; {scyhrj- 
rai) to what purpose, for ivhat object? or i ri; {sc. yiyverai), on what ground? 
So also in the adjective-clause, e. g. PL Phaed. 105, b. d yap %poi6 fie, S hv r i 
iv ro) (Tw/JLari iyye I'Tjr ai, ^fp/xhu earai, ov r^u aacpaXr] aoi epw aTr6Kpi(Tiv (if 
you would ask in what condition of body he must be, so that it might be warm ?) So 
also ri oh is inserted in the midst of clauses without change of construction 
{nihil non). Dem. Cor. 241, 47. v0pi^o[x4u(au koI ri Kanhv ovx^ iracrxivrwv 
iraffa 7) olKovfiivrj fj-ear^ yeyove irpoZorwv. 

Rem. 7. The Greek may place two, or even more interrogatives, without 
Kai, under one common predicate, e. g. Ilws ri &p tuv aywi/i^oi/xe^a ; (how and 
what?). [Comp. Eng. " ichat and what manner of time," riua ^ iroiov Kaipov, 1 
Pet. 1 : 11.] PI. Rp. 400, a. iro?a 5' 6 iroiov fiiov fxifx-ffixara, ovk exw \eyeiu 
{what imitations and of what life?). Dem. Cor. tis rivos aXrids iari ; So 
also witli the relative. Isocr. Arcliid. 124, 42. ris ovk olSeu, €| o'lwv ^v/xcpopcou 
€ts offrjv ivZai^ioAav Kari(TTr](rav. 

Rem. 8. Both the relatives and interrogatives in Greek are very often con- 
nected with a participle. Thus a great brevity in expression is effected ; the 
Eng. in this case changes the Part, together with the interrogative or relatiA'e 
belonging to it, into a principal clause, and the finite verb into a subordinate 
clause. X. C. 3. 7, 3. rT]v Se 4ix)]V Swa/xiv, e(pT] 6 Xap/xiSrjs, iu iroiw epyco fca- 
rafxaStiav ravrd fxov KarayiyvaxxKeis ; {by ivhat icork hast thou learned my ability, 
so that thou couldst pass such a sentence about me?). The Greek may also insert 
an interrogative clause between the article and the participle belonging to it, 
and in this way blend the two questions into one. X. C. 2. 2, 1. Karafj.e,ua.^Kas 
ovv rovs r i TToiovvras rh ouo/xa rovro airoKaKovat ; instead of Karafiefxa^riKas, 
riuas ih Suofxa rovro airoKoXovcnu, Kai ri tvoiovctlv ovroi, ovs rh ovojxa rovro airoK- 
aXovaiv ; 

3. Predicative questions, i. e. those where the inquirer de- 
sires only an affirmation or denial to his inquiry, are expressed 
in English merely by placing the finite verb first and by the 

47# 



558 SYNTAX. [§ 344. 

accentuation, e. g. Art thou sick ? Hast thou seen thy friend ? 
Tn Greek, also, the predicative question is indicated, in the first 
place, merely by the tone of the question and the position of 
the words, the word on wliich the stress of the question hes, 
being placed first in the sentence ; still this mode of expression 
is not very common ; it is used most frequently, when the ques- 
tion involves a certain degree of emotion. 

Od. €, 204. ovTO) Stj olKoi/ic «pl\-t)v is TrarpiSa ya7ay avriKa vvv ibdKeis Ifvai; 
Tliis is found very often with negatives, e, g. Ovk i^eKds Uvai; 

4. In the second place, the predicative question is introduced 
by certain interrogatives ; this is the more common usage. In 
indirect questions, these interrogatives are trans. ated hy whether. 
When the predicative question consists of more than one mem- 
ber, and of such a nature that one member is excluded by the 
other (disjunction, ^ 323), then one of the interrogatives stands 
in the first member, while ^, or (an), stands in the second and 
following members. 

5. The interrogatives in the predicative questions are the 
following : — 

(a)'^H implies an asseveration (§ 316, 2). and hence is used when it is sap- 
posed that that which forms the subject of the question actually exists. X. Cj. 
1. 4, 19. tJ ovToiy S) iraTTTre, iroKfuioi flirtv, 6i i<pc(TTT]Kaai rois rjpfua] Tlo\(fuoi fi4r- 
Toj, ^(prj. PI. Rp. 341, e. ^ op^ws aoi Sokw, (<pr)v, tw fltrtlif ovrw Xeyttv, ^ 06 ; 
'Op^usy ?<^7j. Very often used in connection with other particles, e. g. /x^* 
(§ 316, 1), 5^,, 5^ ^ov (§ 315, 1, 2), S^ra (§ 315, 3), Apa, yiip [^ 324, 2, 3, (a)l, 
Kal, irov (§ 316, 2), irov Upa. X. 0. 4, 23. ri Keyds, 2> KOpe ; ^ yiip ab 
Tois (Ta7s x^P'^^ TovTwy ri i<pvTevaas ; (Now did you actually jJaut any of Oust 
with your own hands ?). "^H ydp; (is it not true f). PL Ilipp. Alin. 363,c. ^ ydp^ 
2) 'lirirla, idf ri ipwraae 'SojKpaTrjs, 6.iroKpiyei ;'*H irov; (surety f srtrdy indeed?). 
PI. Lysid. 207, d. ^ tr ov, ?iv 5' ^7^, & Ai;<n, (r<p6Zpa <piKii are & rar^ip koI t} fi'ffTvp] 
ndvv ycy ^ S' 8s. Still, ij irov is also used wlien the inquirer would express 
doubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. 
Eur. Med. 695.^ irov reT6\tiijK ipyov aXtrxurroy rdSe; (has Jason INDEED, 
ACTUALLY darcd this thing ?). 

(b) "^Apa (only post-Homeric) originates from the inferential ipa, i^;iiur 
[^ 324,3, (a)], and hence implies the idea of consequencf, effect ; by frequent 
use, however, the appropriate meaning (igitur), becomes weakened and ob- 
Bcured : hence the inferential particles fi p o, 5 v are sometimes added to a 
question introduced by Sipa. "^Apa leaves it undecided, whether the inquirer 
expects an aj[finnative or nepaiive answer. Hence, when it is to be definitely 
indicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is expected, then in 



I 



♦ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 55S 

the first case, 5/j ou (nonne), is used; in the last case, Spo /t^ {mm, whether? 
is it not?) ] ^i-fi ahvays expresses solicitude, fear. X. C. 3. 6, 4. ^p ^n 6 Sw/cpdxTjs, 
S)SV€p, <t>i\ov oIkov el av^rjaai fiov\oio, irKoua-icirepou avrhv eVixeipotT/s au Troirjo-ai ; 
ndvv fihv olv, e<^77. 10,1. Spo, %<pT\, & Uappdcne, ypacpiKT] iariv 7] eiKaaia 
rwy Spwfieyuu ] — 'AAtj^^ A 6 yets, €<p7]. 2. 6, 16. Sp ovv olcr^d Tivas, ot avu- 
<p€\(7s iyres u(pe\iiJLovs SvvafTaL (pi\ovs iroie7a^ai ; Ma Ai' ov 8t]t e(^7j. 3. 13 
3. S. p oZv, €4>i7, KoX oiKfTai (Tov ^X'^o^Tfl' TTivoi/Tes re aurh /cot Xovofievoi avTcS ; 
Ma rhv Af, €(^ (profecto non aegre ferunt). 4. 2, 22. dp' oSv Sta tV toS x"^- 
KfViiv OLfia^iav rov 6y6fiaTos tovtov rvyxdvovaiv ; Ou Stjto. 1.5,4. a pa ye 
V XP^ irdvTa iuSpa, 7}yT)adnevou rrjv e-yKpareiav dpeTrjs fhai Kp7]ir7Sa, ravTr]v 
vpuTov 4y Trj \iivxV KaTouncevdaatr^ai , inonne certe). 2.6,34. a pa /xt] 8ia^d\- 
Kfcrbai S6^eis xtk ifxov ; 4. 2, 10. ti Se Stj ifiov\6fjievos ayaSths yeveaSfai, ecprj, & Eu- 

^i557j^6, avWeyeis ra ypdfxfiaTa ; — '^Apa fi^ taroos ; ecpr] Kal 6 EvStvdrjfxos ' 

Ma At", ^(^, ovK eyarye. 0. 4,4. Spo /*?? atVvuvi^w/xef rb;/ nep(rci)j/ fiaaiXea 
fiifi-na-cuT^ai ; Double question : PI. Euthyphr. 9, e. Spa rh oaiou, on oVtcJ;/ eVrt, 
<PikfiTai irrh riiv bewy, IJ, Sri <fn\e7Taiy oaidu ecrrt ; {is then that which is holy loved 
by the gods because it is fioli/, or is it holy because it is loved ?) 

(c) Miiv (probably originating from fi-f] and the confirmatiA'e ovv, §316, 
Rem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, is it not? is it so? whether? and 
hence always leads one to expect a negative answer. For the sake of perspi- 
cuity, the particles oZif and fir) are often added, e. g. fjLuv ovv, fiuv /n^. But 
if the negative oit is added to fiwy, then the question is affirmative {nonne). PL 
Lysid. 209, c. oAA* itpx** '''^^ <tov ,- "OSc naiBayuySs, i<pT]. Mwi/ SoDAoj &v ; {hut 
not a slave, is he ?) Eur. llec. 754. ti XPJM'* fiacTTevovcra ; fiwv iAev^epou aiwva 
dtabca ; pdZiov yap 4iTri <roi. Hecuba answered : Ou hrira' tovs kukovs Se ri/jLoo- 
povfx«vi\ aliiva rhy ^vfjiiravra hovXewrcu beKw. Eur. Andr. 82. fiwv odv 8oKe7s 
trot <t>poyri<rau riv kyyeXtSiv ; PI. Phaed. 84, C. t/, c^tj, viitv ret Kex^ivra, ; (xwy 
fi^ SoKft iyieSiss Kfytabai; — 'Ei' oh ri XPV" iroieiy ifie; fiwu ovx airep iiroiovy; 
(nonne^ quod jlicicbiim .■') 

(d) There is the same diflFerence between ou and fi-f} when used without 
Jpa, as when used with it, see (b) : i. e. ov is used in affirmative questions, fj.^ in 
negative. Ovk ibtkfis Itycu ; {tion or nonne vis ire *? do you not wish to go ?) PL 
Prot. 309, a. ov <rv /xevrot 'Onrjpov iiraiyeTijs el; {are you not in fact an eulogist? 
on /i<Woi, see § 316, Rem.). Ou ovkovv {nonne igitur) and ovkow {nonne 
certe) in a question, see § 324, Rem. 7. X, C. 4. 2, 10. aAA.a fi)) apxireKTwv 
$ov\fi ytyeabai; Ovk oZy J'ywy', €*^7j. 'AAAo fxr} yewfj.eTpr)s e7rt^vij.e?s, €<pri, 
yeyeo^ai a.ya^6s ; Ovhe yeuueTpris, e(p-n ktK. 2, 12. /t^ oZv, ecpr] o I^v^v^ixos, 
ov Svyufiai iyu to Trjs SiKaiooinnjs epya e^Ttynoao^ai ; {shall I not be unable, etc.? 
the negative ou Wlongs to the single word Svyup-ai). This inteiTogative fi-f] is 
used very often in an indirect question, after expressions of considering, ask- 
ing, int/uiring, of solicitude and fear. It appropriately means, whether not, but m 
Eng. can be often translated by that. X. C. 4. 2, 39. (ppovriCu, nh KpdTKXTov 
^ fioi oiyay {lam anxious whether it is not best). For more examples of ^1117 and 
also for the construction, see § 318, Rem. 6. 

(e) E7ra and ^ jr ft t a, and more emphatically /cfro, Ktireira, introduce 



560 SYNTAX. [$ 344 

questions of astonishment, indignation, and irony. They express antithesis of 
contrast, and yet, since they show that an unexpected conclusion has been 
drawn from a previous thought (§ 312, Rem. 8). X. C. 1. 4, 11. eS Xahi^ f<f>v, 
Htl, €t vo/xi^oifii ^eovs ap^pdlfvwv tj (ppovTi^eiu, ovk tiv afie\oir]i/ airruv. 2. **£ ir f » t* 
ouK oXei (ppouTi^iiu ; o* irpunov fieu fidvov tuw ^mcov 6,v^puirov op^hv aviffTnaav ktK. 
{and yet do you not think tliat they do care far men?). Cy. 2. 2, 31. K&Tcira 
ToiouToy uvTa ov (piX^ls aur6v ; 

(f) n^repoi/ (TrJrepo) — ^ (Homer ^ — ^) is nscd like the Latin u/rum — 
an, in direct and indirect double questions. UoTfpov is sometimes omitted in 
the first member. X. C. 2. 3, 6. koX 6 ^ZcaKpdrris t<frn' Hot ^ pa Se, 2> Xaiptxpa- 
T6S, ovSeA apteral ZvvaTOA. Xa^pf<pwu, 1} eariv ofr koI irdw ap4<TKei ; Cy. 3. 1, 12. 
Ti 8e, ^u xpijixara iroWa txxii ^9^ irXoxniiv^ fj itckijto irotetj; C. 1.4, 6. ravra 
ouTW TTpoyoTjTiKws TTeTTpayfifya, avop(7sy TTorepa tvxv^j ^ yvwfjLtis tpya. iariv; 

(g) "A A. A T J tj (arising from &Wo ri ivrifix yiyvtraiy ^ or ytyoir' ivy ¥f) and 
&\\o Ti,has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4. 7, 5. &X\o ti I) ovieif 
KcoKvfi TTapUuai ; (does anything else than nothing hinder = does anyttdng hinder f) 
PL Hipparch. 236, e. &Wo ri oZv ol yf <piXoKfpS(7s tpiXovai rh Kfpios ; 

(h) "H, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of the 
question ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, bat is contained 
in what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. "H can then be translated 
by perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. iriur &pa av yi ri i» kvbpwwois ^iKrpa 4wurrdfiit- 
vos iT(i\ai atreKpvirrov ^ 6kv(7s, t<pi\, if^a'* fi^ cuVxpii <i>ayrii. iav vpirtpoi thv 
a5i\(phv (ii TToifis ; (= if &pa — awfKpvwTou, f} oKueis — .- 

(i) El and iiv [with the Subj., comp. ^ 339, 2, 11, (b)], u^oAer, is used only 
in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, and de- 
notes a wavering or doubting between two i)Ossil>iliiJes ; but often only ono 
member is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. 
Hence ci and idy are especially used after verbs of rejlecting, ddiberating, inquir- 
ing, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must determine whether 
the interrogative sentence has an affirmative sense (itV/Act* — not), or a nega- 
tive one (tvhtthcr). X. An. 7. 3. 37. <rK«v^ai, (16 'LWriroep vofios itdXXtov ?x«*» 
(whetlof — not). C. 1. 1, 8. of/rc ry (TTparrjiyiK^ 3^X0*', ti {whether) avfi^ptt 
trrpaTr)'}f7v' oijTe rip itoXitik^ SfjAov, d {ichcOter) cvpu^pti t^j r^Acwy 
irpoaTaTelv ovre toj Ka\j)y yfjfiayri, Xy (v^paiyrfreUy SjjXo*', d {whether—' 
tioi) Sjct Tavrrjv ayidaeToi, otre Tij3 Svyarovs 4v rp xdA.€» ioj5e<rreij Xa^mi ^r^Xoy^ 
et {whether — not) Sia rovrovs OTep^ccTcu rris troK^ws. C 4. 4, 12. <rirr<|««u, iiim 
Tode aol /LiaWoy a p e 0* K p. PI. Apol. 1 8, a. Seofioi vpuSiv rovry rhr rovy vpost~ 
pteiv, (1 S'lKaia K^yuy fj fiij. — On ei after verba ajffectuum, see ^ 329, Rem. 7. 

Rem. 9. Very frequently, especially in Homer, A-erbs wlr ' rcss some 

action, are constructed with this deliberative idy with the ^ <! d with 

the Opt. (KjMc fX K€, aX Kt), in which case a verb like trKonly, -rt. '.^:*3^, 
is to be 8U}>plicd by the mind. Th. 1. 58. TloTiSaiaTcu Ircfii^cu' ul. _. -j^' 
'Ai^Tji'afous irpfo-^ns, (t irtos tc ( <r € i a y {having sent envoys to the A e, 

to ascertain] whither thi y could persuade them). ' 11. u, lI'LyKaumtittr o Av»ti y*/**- 
rai /leV e(, ^v riya ir 4 <pyi) dydpciy. 

(k) Elfre — €JfT€ ai-e used in indirect questions like el — <, except thai 



♦ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 561 

by eirt — cJt6 the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two possi- 
bilities, are made more prominent. S. Ant. 38. kcI Sei|e<s T<ixB> e^^i" evy^v^s 
ir€<pvKaSt etr iabXcov kokt). The poets also say ejfre — ^, or et — eiVe, or they 
omit the first cfre altogether. 

6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, the fol- 
lowing points are to be noted : The Ind. is used in direct and 
indirect questions ; it is also used after ^rj in indirect questions, 
when the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that 
that which is the object of liis anxiety or fear actually exists. 
The Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative questions [^ 259, 1, 
(b), and 2] ; but the Opt. also (after an Hist, tense), when the 
question is to be represented as the sentiment of another (^345, 
4), and also when the question depends on a clause expressing 
a wish (^333, 5). The Opt. with av and the Ind. of the histor- 
ical tenses with ai/, are used as in principal clauses, k 260, 2, 
(2) and (4). 

T( Kiytts: (Also in questions expressing wonder or astonishment, the 

Greeks use the Ind., e. g. irwj oISo; {how could I know?) — Etire, Hn Ke 

ytis; Th. 3, 53. <^o/3ou/x€da, ^^ an(poTfpwy r} fxapr-fjKan^v. X. Cy. 3. 1, 27. 

gpa, n^ iKtlvovs ai Se^aci ae aoxppoyiCfii' hi fxaWov, ^ ^;u5s vvv iderjffev. Ti 

tXwwixty; (what can we say, irhat are we to say ?)--Ovk oJda, '6 ti eXirwixep 

{/ knou) not what we can, shall say). Od. e, 473. 5ei5co, f^v Srfipeaffiu e\cop /cal 

Kipfia ytywfxai (that I shall become). X. C 4. 2, 39. cppoyriCw, [x^ Kpiriarov 

^ ^i eifay ( whtther it is not l>est ) . Ovk elxov, Uttol r pairoifivi^' PL Rp- 614, 

b Aj/a3aioi.r (Ktyty, t iKu r 5 o i ( ichat he had seen tlies). -"Apd /xoi i^eh-fjaaLS 

tty uir,:y (so. cf (xc ipc^t^v^) ] X. An. 6. 1, 28. iKuyo iyyow, fih A^a" &" raxh 

ffo»<t>poyiabtivy- C. 4. 2, 30. rrphs ch airoP\4Tw, ^t fioi e'^eATjcrazs ^y 

ifrrrn<ra<r2m (sc.ci $o6Koio).-^Apd ere .^Tre.cra &y (see? <roi ravra ^eXe^a); 

i,.. nasissemne tibif) X. Apol. 28. ch Se, & cpiKrar, 'AiroXA6dc.pe, fxaXXoy Uy 

id.OKov Me 6pay iixaic^s, f, A5i'K«s ano^y^icrKoyra ; {vellesne?) OijK old et ere 

iwftaa &y. 

Rfm 10 On a4, [wkelher-nol) with the Opt. after a principal tense see 
» 145 ken. 2 On he Ind. of tl c principal tenses, and also on 'he S^Vf 

er .; h ,ori?ul ,cL. see i 345. 5. ;\S.en the Snbj. '^ J" 7/^*„ J "oSiV " 
the latter, a, in final clauses (5 330 3), ^'^P™^^'^,' ' = "°7/™;''ilX^ 

7 Tlic answer made to predicative questions by yes, is cotn- 
moaly expressed by repeating the word which contains the sub- 
stand of' the queLn. The answer made by-, is usimUy 
expressed by prefixing oS to the word which ^«™ ^^"^ 
staLce of the question. Yes is also expressed by v., vr, ro. 



562 SYNTAX. !♦ 34A 

At'a, wavv, Kapro, cv and the like, <f>7)ixL <t>-qfjJ iytif, cyw with- 
out (jirjfxC; and tzo, by ov, ov <i>-qfxi^ ovk eyw. Commonly also 
strengthening adverbs are joined with the words which answer 
a question: ye 317, 2), e. g. cyo^c, ovk cyoryc; yap (^ 324, 2), 
Tot 317, 3), /acvrot (^ 316, Rem.), oZv [^ 324, 3, (b)], ^cv- 
o{!»/ ($316, Rem.). The answer to nominal questions is made 
by naming the object respecting which the inquiry is made. 

Eur. Hipp. 1395, sq. Spas nfyUcnroit^, ws ^x«> ''b*' 6^\ioy; — 'Op«. lb. 90, 
Bq. olad^ oZv, ^poTotciv ts Ko^earriKey ySfios ; — Ovk olSa. X. C. 4. 6, 14 
^j) J <Tu iLfiflyw TToAirriy tlycu, ty av itrauytis^ ^ %y ly^ j — ^ilh^ t^P oZp. 



$345. II. Oblique or Indirect Discourse. 

1. When the words or thoughts of a person, whether the 
second or third person or the speaker liimself, are again re- 
peated, unaltered^ in precisely tJie same form as iJieij were 
stated by us or another person, then the discourse or thought 
quoted, being independent of any view or representation 
of the narrator, is called direct discourse {oratio recta), e. g. 1 
ihouffht: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED. 27i€ mcssenger an- 
nounced: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED, — OT without a preced- 
ing verb : peace has been concluded. 

2. AVhen the words are not repeated in the precise form in 
which they were first sj)oken, but are referred to the rep- 
resentation of the narrator, and thus are made to depend 
upon a verb of perception or conmiunication (verbum sen- 
ti'iuH or declaramli), standing in the principal clause, the 
discourse is called indirect {oratio obliqua), e. g. IVe believed, 
THAT PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. T/ic mcsscngcr announced, that 

PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. 

3. Tlie principal clauses of direct discourse, to which also 
belong clauses introduced by coordinate conjunctions, e. g. 
Kttt, 8c, yap, ow, KOLToiy etc., are expressed in obhque discoiurse, 
when they contain a simple ajfirmation or an opinion, and de- 
note something which happens, has happened, or will happen : 
(a) either by the Ace. with the Inf (k 307, 6), or by on and 
ws with the finite verb ($ 329), or even by the participle [♦ 310, 
4, (a)], e. g. *E7r7/yy«tX€ Tovs rroXc/ixiovs dvo^ vyctF — ot4 o< 



♦ 345.] OBLIQUE OR INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 563 

froX€>.otti7ro<^vyot€i/ — To{;s TroXcfJiCovs a7ro<^i;y6vTas; when 
they express a command, wish, or desire: (b) by the Inf. and 
in continued oratio obliqua by 8 civ, xpW with the Inf., more 
seldom by the^ Inf. alone.. (^ 306), e. g. "EXeie rots crrparul^rai, 
c TT I ^ € <r ^ a t Tots TToXc/xtots (oratio recta, cTrt^eo-^e) . 

Rehark 1. Intermediate clauses of the oratio obliqua. and particularly «;uch 
as are connected with the preceding by ydp, although they are grammatically 
T ' lauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without any 

. to introduce them; commonlv a sentence expressed by oVi or d)y 
w iih the *.>|.t. or by the Ace. with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. ^Xeyov iroXhol 
Kara raWd,^ brt wavrhs i^ux keyoi Seii^s • xctM^v yap etVyKot ovre oiKade airoTr\e7,/ 
T<p fiouKofifytf ivyariy efij, »c. t. \. H. 3. 2, 23. airoKpiyaiieiywu Se twj/ 'HA^etW, 
^Ti ov voi-ntrtiay lavra' iwiKrjtSas yap exote*' rasir6\eis' (ppovpav ^-qvau ol 

4. The subordinate clauses of direct discc arse, undergo no 
change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical 
tense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of 
the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- 
sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- 
ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of 
tlie person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. "Av, which 
is joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still 
remains in indirect discourse. 

X. An. 7. 1, 33. (KcupariSiff) tkiytv^ 5x1 (toi/xos efrj Tjyeicr^ai ainois . . , ev^ 
voXAa Koi iiyad^ A^ifotKTo (oratio recta : troifxSs dfjii . . , e^'^a \-f}\p€a^€). Ag. 1, 
10. Tic <rwipipyr\s &fio<rfy 'Ayr}<ri\d(f}, d <rir( l<raiTO, eus eX^oiey, ot>s ttc/x- 
^t It wphs $a(rt\4a iyytKous, Siairpd^fa^au out^J a(pf^yai avToy6/j.ovs ras 4y r^ 
'Affi^ w6\*ts 'EWr}ytias (oratio recta : iay <TVii<nj^ ecos tiy (Kbaaiy, o'vs irei/.rj/u , . 
Siavfxl^ofuu). 

Ki M. 2. WI ■ ■ " 'dinnte clauses of direct discourse would 

' -•«!sf>d h. !.al tense, the Ind. remains even in indi- 

lu-se the Upt. would leave it undetermined, whether in direct 
w„.-. ...c lii.i. of a principal tense, or the Ind. of an historical tense had 
!■• -n used. X. An. 7. 7, 55. ol arpanwrai tK^yov, ws s.ivocpuy otxoiro irphs ^ev- 
^r,y oltcftiTtty Kol & yiTf <rx«To avT<f airoXrixl^Sfifyos (oratio recta: E. oKx^to Trphs 
i. 4 vw4ax*'ro awo\r]\i,6/jifyos). X. C. 2. 6, 13. iJKOVffa, '6ri UepMkris iroWas 
(ivotiki) i-Klff-rairo, ii i-rifhuy rr} ir6\(i ^rolei alnrjv <pi\(7u avrSy (oratio recta : 
n. i-rlarariu, tis . . iv oi( i). But subordinate clauses with on (quod, quia) fol- 
low the principal rule (No. 4). X. 11. 7. 1, 34. fixe (neKoniSas) Aeyetv, us AaKS- 
iai/xSytoi Sia rovro iroAf^Vf'O*' auToTs (to7s QT]&aiois), on ouk i^eXvaaiev 
u(t' 'AyritTiKdov ^K^f7y W alr6y (rhy fiaaiKea), oratio recta: A. Sia tovto eVo- 
\ffiri<ray, 5tj ouk Tj^fAijcra*'. The reason wliy the Greek avoids the Subj. m 
indirect discourse after a principal tense, is, that it always uses its Subj. only 
with reference to the Future U 257, 1, (a)]. But the use of the Opt. alter a 
I ■ ■ because this, as being the Subj. of the histor- 

1 ^ the historical tenses. There are, however, a 

fos - ^le examples, in which the Opt. foUows a principal tense. But then a 



504 SYNTAX. [^ 345 

thought is quoted as the sentiment of another, who. at the moment of quota- 
tion, is to be represented as one no lonrjer present. Her. 7, 103. opo, pi^ futrrip 
k6ixitos 6 \6yos 6 elprifiei/os eir) {whether the statement made was not idle lioasting) 
X. Cy. 2. 4, 1 7. av tis e/cetcre e 1 077 (i\r) 9-f},us iyw ^ovKoifiJiv fnyaK-rfv ^if 
pav rrotriaai [if ariy one announces t/i(re, that I iNTENDtu). C. 1. 2. .34. el ^tF 
yap {t)}u twv K6ywv rexj/Tjf ) <xvv toIs hpituiS {Keyofieyois dfcu yofti^otrres airfxfirdcu 
KeAeu€Tc), SfyAoj/ on atpeKreov ftr) rov op^us Keyetv (if you mean that piiiiosopha 
18 not to be used in reasonimj rinht, it is evident tjiut it WA8 YOUR view, that tee 
must abstain from reasonimj ri(jht). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense, 
wislies to rcjiresent a statement as tlie sentiment of another person, it must use 
the Ace. with the Inf. instead of ort with the Sulj. Thus. e. g. the English 
phrase. He sai/s that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Kiyti.^ 
5t( 7]ix€is abavaroi S)fxfv, or ori t), oA, flutVf but by Aryct ijfias kdavd- 
T ovs elvai. — In hypotlietical Protases with ct and the IntL, the Ind. remains. 

Hem. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in the subordinate 
clauses of direct discourse, when the sjK'akcr wishes to brinj: fonvard an ex- 

])ressi(jn or thought, not in his own jjerson. Imt as the > K>r. Hi-r. 

7, 2. i<TTa<ria^oif (oi iraiZfs), 6 fxtv 'ApTafia(dirqi, Karon >^ ftrj iray- 

rhs Tov yoyou, Koi on vofiiCofMfva cfrj -Kfthi irdyruy ayopo/xosy, rhy Tp«T$'rraToy 
T^y apxv'' fX*'"' Hf'p^Tjs 5«', is 'AToacTjj re irais (Xrj, Kod bn Ki'pos cTtj i icniad^- 
fVQS roiai TltpaTjai tiiv iKfv^pirjy. 

Rem. 4. When the Opt. of oblique disconrse is used instead of the Sabj. of 
direct discourse, all the conjunctions may be connected with iy. Th. 8, 54. koI 
(\l/r}(pi(TayT0 irKfvaayra rhy nfiatwSpoy koI itKa Swipas nfr' airrov irpiia<r«Wf Swri 
tiy aifTols SokoIt) &.piaTa <{«u'. X. H. 2. 4, IS. 6 ndvnt irafrfjyyfiXfy airrois, fi^i 
irp6Tepoy iiriTibfa^aif irply h. y Tuy atptrfpoty ff irtiroi ris, t) r pud f it}. 5.4, 
47. iict\eve irpoKaroiKafif'iy re 6.Kpov koX tpuKarrruv^ (tes tiy ainhs iXboi. 

5. Very often, however, in Greek tlie oblique discourse takes 
the form of the direct, since even after an liistorical tense in 
the principal clause, the predicate of the subordinate clause is 
expressed by the Ind. of the principal tenses and by the Subj., 
as in direct discourse. The actions and representations be- 
longing to the past, are thus transferred to the present time of 
the speaker, and assume a more direct and definite character 
than if they were stated in the form of indirect discourse 
{k 3-27, Rem. 2). 

X. Cy. 2. 2, 1 . dfl pl\v oZy ^X€^€X«to b Kvpos, 6ir6rt tnnncurditp^ S v w r fvxapiff- 
T^TaTOj A(i7ot ^^/SAtj^^o-o vTai. Comp. § 327, Rem. 2. U. 2. 3, 2. f 8o{( ry 
Sr^/xw rpidKovTa iXfffdaiy ot tovs trarpiovs yo/iovs ^vyypdii^ovffi^ ko^' oVs »o- 
KiTfvaovai, Her. 1, 1G.3. iKe \fve t^j iamov x«^/"?* olxfiy, Skov fiovKor- 
rat. Th. 2, 4. oi nXaTatjjs i fiov\evoyro^ (trt Kar aKaveovair^ Strrtp 
ix^^^'^*'^ ^/xTrpV)(rou^c5 rh oXicnyM, drf n &Wo xp^o'crrat. 1, 107. f 5o{c 8* 
avTo7i a-Kf\i>a(rdcu, Stoj Tp6ir((> a(r<t>a\(<rTara itawopevvowrat. Her. 1, 29. 
dpKloKTi fi.fyd\oiai KartlxovTO^A^ycuoi, SfKai^rcaxpi'Tfadai yofuntri, robs &> 
c<pi ISJAa'i' (^ fj T o I. X. Cy. 4. 5, 30. tovs I'lnreos 4 k f Kfva ( ^vkdrrtiy rohs iry 
y6yTas, € us 6.V ns ar] fxdyri. H- 2. 1, 23. AvcavSpos b( ras raxioras rw r*mr 
iKf\ev(r€y eircffi^ai Tors 'A^ycdoiS' ixtiSay Sf ^K/Sw(ri, KorMrrms S ti 
roioGffii', aroirKfly. Ou gri, is (that), see ^ 329, 4 and Rem. 3. 



♦ 346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. 565 

Rem. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plupf.) Indicative, referring to the hig- 
torical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres. 
(Perf.), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other subordinate 
clauses in the Opt. X. An. 1. 2, 2. Kvpos tous <pvydl)as e/fe^euo-e aw outoJ (TTpa- 
Tfvfcrdai, vKOffx^H-^vos avrols, el koXws Karairpd^deu, e(/)' & i (Tt parev ei o, fi)] 
irp6abiv travaaabau, Trplv avrovs KaTaydyoi oJf/caSe. (Oratio recta: iav KaTairpd^ca, 
i(p' a (TTpaTewo/xaj, ou irp. rravaofiaiy irplv &»/ vfjLas Karaydyw). But the Ind. is also 
u^ed in the subordmate clauses of oblique discourse, when the narrator intro- - 
duces his own remarks and explanations into the statement or thought of 
another, or when the thoughts in the subordinate clause do indeed belong to 
the statement or idea of another, but are to be exhibited as definite facts or as 
general truths, or when the thoughts of the other are to be represented, at the 
game time, as those of the narrator. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj. 
are often inter' 1 with the Opt. Then there is a mingling of the direct 

and indirect tli in order to form a contrast between the certainty, reality, 

fact, and dircctutsg cxi)ressed by the two former, and the uncertainty, possibility, 
mere conception, and inilinctness denoted by the latter. X. An. 2. 3, 6. iXeyov 
Sti €iK6Ta SoKolfy Xtyfiv ^aaiKei, Kcd fiKOiev Tiyen6vas txovres, alt avTOus, 
ikv ax airovZaX y ivoivr ai, 6.^ov(TiVy evbev e^ovari rb. iiriTifSeia. 3. 5, 13. 
ifioioi -ftaav bavud^oims, Sirot irorc t pi-^ ovrai oi "EWrjves, koX ti iv yy 
I ;( 1 c V. 

6. Tlie Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of 
the finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. 

Her. 6, 117. irSpa ol BoKtfiy 6ir\iT-i]V avriarrivai fxeyav, tov (instead of ov) 
rh yivfioy tJjv iunrlia Kaaav ffKid^tiv. 6, 84. Sku^os (sc. <^o<ri) tous yo^oSay, 
^ ir € f T « (r«^i ^ ■" ts&a\(7v isr})V x<^PVV, Mf^i toDto fj.efj.ouepai fiiv rlffaxT- 

dat {posti/tuim 0- '^'*i- **» 9^- <"' 'A^J'ttTot ((paaau, et fxh imirXeov Swrj- 

bri vat r9is Utivf^y Kparrjaau, roOr' tiv tx^iv (si ampUorem illorum agri partem in 
suam potestatem rtdigere rossENT se earn retenturos). See Larger Grammar, 
Fart II, S 849. 

Rem 6 The ^ mode of representation among the Greeks, and the 

desire to make pa. . ... :its appear as present, often changes the iiidn-ect dis- 
course into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there is of- 
ten an in " of person, comp. ^ 329 Rem 3. X. Cy. 1. 4 28. eurav^a 

8l^3 On the conTrar^^ An. 7. 1, 39. iKS.^y S^ KXUyZpos; MdKa ^.s, e>,, 
IZpa^c^^yos V«- K^y.lyyap'Aya^lfiioy, grt oi,K i^nifSuoy «^, k. r.X, 

• 

m. Special pkculiarities in the constbuction of 

WORDS AND SENTENCES. 

iSiG. Ellipsis. Br achylogy {Zeugma). Contraction. 

Pleonasm. 
1 Ellipsis is the omission of a sentence or a part of a sen- 
tence which is logically suhordinate, and hence of less impor- 
tance, but viewed grammatically, must necessanly ^^ «»PP^J 
in order to express an idea or thought. The idea of the omit- 

48 



■ 1 



566 SYNTAX. [k 346 

ted woid can only be of a very general and indefinite nature, 
and is frequently contained in the idea of the quahfjang word, 
as, e. g. ot SvrjToC (sc. avSponroi), rj avpiov (sc. rjfxipa), or is evident 
from the context or frequent usage, as e. g. in cis StSoo-KoXou 
uVat. In like manner, the omitted sentence must express a 
general idea, and hence one which may be readily supphed, or 
one which is indicated by the context. The single instances 
of EUipsis have been noticed in the course of the Grammar. 
See Index under Ellipsis. 

2. EUipsis is to be distinguished from brevity of expression 
or Brachylogy. In Ellipsis, there is an actual omission of an 
element, grammatically necessary to express an idea or thought; 
but in Brachylogy, there is not a real, but only apparent omis- 
sion of such an element, that element being in some uiiy in- 
volved in the sentence or in a member of it The simplest 
instances of brevity of expression have already been presented 
(i 319, Rem. 1). The following additional instances may here 
be mentioned : — 

(a) One form of a verb must often be borrowed from another. Th. 2. 11. 
(ii^iovai) tJjv Tuy ir«\as {yrj*') Sjiovy ^ t^¥ icurriiy Spof (sc Spovfidnip). 

(b) In antitheses, one member must often be supplied from the other. I> 
01. 3. 30, 17. iirpd^ofxfy r}fif7s (so. irphs iK(lvovs) koI imtiroi wpits riftis *lp4itnir. 

(c) From a negative word, an affirmative one mu5t often be borrowed ; this 
takes place most frequently, when an antithetic clause is introduced by an ad- 
VJrsative conjunction. Her. 7, 104. 6 v6fjMs kytiyfi -rrnvrh ^/, «vir ^Ar ^vy*tM 
ovSh irKri^os iwbpwirwv ^k fiixv^ ixxh (sc. iytifyww) fitrorras iv rp rji^*i twucpa- 
r4uvy fl iWAAiwrdcu. PI. Apol. 36, b. hfit K-fiaaSt w** •♦' «"o^A«/ (sc. /«-<fi«Xawr- 
Tai). So from ovBds the idea of fls or tKcurros is to be borrowed, as in the fol- 
lowing sentence,from ovS' fU, the subject of the first clause, tU or iitarros is to 
be borrowed as the subject of the second clause. PI. Symp. 1 92, e. ravra ojcov- 
aas oifS" iiy tTs i^aptrn^fivt i^ iT«x»^y otoir' tif ixjiKOtreu k. t. X. 

(d) From a following verb with a spedjic meaning, a verb with a gemeral 
meaning must be borrowed, e. g. noieTi', ipyd(*<rbat, ylyvKT^ai^ errtu, avftfialrtiw j 
This is the ca*e in the expressions, rl iWo <f, — oi/iti' &XXo ^ — &XA* 
Ti ijy instead of rl iXXo iroi«ror itrrip or the like, ff Sru Th. 3, 39. rl AXX* 
•5toi, fj iwffiovKevccw \ 4, 14. ot AoKcSeufioViot 4XXo owJir {( 4k -y^f iimtftid- 
Xovv. 

(c) When two verbs connected together hare a common objer*^ tma if ther 
govern different Cases, the Greek usually expresses the o*^;cct Imt once, and 
makes this depend on the nearest verb. Indeed, the «//«<t of a clause is not 
unfrequently transferred and made the subject of th<» iollowing clause, without 



4 346.] ELLIPSIS. — BRACHYLOGY. — ZEUGMA. 567 

its place being supplied by a pronoun. X. 0. 4, 8. r o ,5 r o t . ^u^v x<ipau r^u &K. 
\riy xposri^riiTi «al S<i,poLS KoafieT (sc. abrois). PI. Gorg. 460, c. oh Sei 
ro:s iraiSorpi&ais iyKa\,7, ou5' i k fid \\, ,p {sc. ahrois) iK T^J^6K,c.y, 
Rp. 465, a. 7rpt<r0uT4pc,> y^cvr^pwu irduruv Apx^Lu re Kal KoAdC^iu (sc. 
ai,To6s) Tporrfrdi,rai. Th. 5, 54. {'ApyuoL) is^fiaKoy is r^p 'ETtSavplau 
K(d iSrjovy (sc. avT-fjy). This case occurs most frequently where a partici- 
ple is connected with a finite verb. Th. 1, 20, t<? 'lirir dpxv t^u Uaua^. 
FoiVfV iro/iw^v iiUKoafioiyTi air Ureiy ay (sc. aMu) {while Eipparchus 
was arramjim/ Vie Pamtthenaic procession, they killed him). lb. 144. to{,tois 
&woKpiyd,xtyoi airove^t^wfify {sc. ainois). But sometimes the Case is 
made to depend on the more remote finite verb. Th. 2, 65. oaou xpovoy 
wpoUffT-n {n«piK\^s) rrjs w6k«us . . , aurcpaXws SiecpvKa^ey avr-qu, koL iy^yero 
(sc avrfi) ir' iKtirov nfyitrrri. X. An. 2. 5, 24. ravra {Ti(r<ra(p4pyris) eliriiy ^So^e 
T^ K\(dpxv aATj^'; Atytiy, koI dmy (sc. 6 KXiopxos). 

3. An important figure of Brachylogy is Zeugma, i. e. a con- 
struction in wliich a verb, that in sense belongs only to one 
su])ject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects. 
The verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to ex- 
press an idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited 
sense. 

II. y, 326. ^x' itdcrrte Tirroi kfpciiroifs koL rroiKika tcuxc' cKeiTO {to lie, as 
well as f." " to be in a place, to be in store). Her. 4, 106. cVi^tjto Se (()op4- 

ova I irfi 1 . ,. dfioiify, yKwcaay it iSirjy (they \^E,\R garments like the Scythi" 
ans, but IIAVK or bpcak a language of their oven). A compound verb is often 
used in a pregnant sense, since along with the signification of the compound, 
tf: M-ation of the simple is at the same time to be included. Th. 1, 44. 

o« rtN^f/ruiOi iitr iyvoKT ay KtpKvpaiois ^ufi.fiaxi(iy H-h Troi-qaacr^ai {instead of /j,€- 
T4yyw<Tay kcH tyvwvaif) CIIANGLD TiiEiR MINDS and detehaiined not to form an 
alliance with the Corcyrtutins. \ 

A. Contraction in coordinate clauses has already been spoken 
of (♦ 319, Rem. 1) ; this is more seldom in subordinate clauses, 
thousrii fiiMinont with those introduced by osTrep, w^Trep. 

Eur. McU. I ITia. (pi\ovi yom^ovff' ovnrep ty ir6ais cre^fy (sc. vajJ-iCv)' PI- 1*- 
710, d. ir<£Kra <rx«5i>»' int * ipyaffr at r^ buf airep {sc. OLTrepydCfTat) oray fiow 
Xn^ iia<f>fp6yrws «l irp^al riya 'ir6Kiy. So also et or fUfp Tis or &Wos ris or 
t1w*p irou, ttwtp »0T*, etc. Her. 9, 27. vp^y iari icoWd re /ca2 eS exoyra, el t4oi- 
91 Kol tiWoiai 'T.KKT]ywy. 

5. Pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical 
point of view, is superlluous, the idea conveyed by it having 
been aheady expressed in what precedes, either by the same 



568 SYNTAX. [* 347 

or by another word. The desire of perspicaity or emphasis is 
commonly the cause of Pleonasm. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. 0%, ^v iir fKeluovs rjfiflf iXavvoafiev, vTOT€novtrrau fjnas iKf7- 
vol. 3, 15. TreipdfTOfiai ry ire^Triry aya^iuu iirircW Kpd.Tiaros itv iinreus avfifjui' 
X€«' avT (p. 

Remark. Grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the rhetorical^ 
which consists in the use of two or e>«n more words of a similar significatioQ 
to strengthen an idea or make it more palpable (o) A verb with an abstract 
substantive, as fKixv m'^X*''''^'"* ■n'6\(tiov Tro\(fxft ; — (/8) A verb with a partici- 
ple, as (pevywu (<piry(, ('liroi' Kfywv ■. — (7) An adjective with an abstract substan- 
tive in the instrumental J^at., as iJL(y4i^ei fifyas, xA^^et woWol; — (8) An adjec- 
tive or adverb with an adverb (mostly poetic) as oi6dfy olos (vcbolly alone) ; — 
(e) Synonymous adverbs, as di^vs trapaxpritia, iroAiy aCbis. ad ovyex^^ \ — (0 
Tlic part is very often joined with the whole by Kai or Tf, for the purpose of 
making the part ])rominent, as "Eicropt nty Kcd Tpwal (Ilom.); Ztv wcu dtol-j 
'Ai^vatot Kcu 'l<f>iKp(iTr)s ; (tj) For the sake of emphasis, the same thought is 
often expressed twice, once positively and then negatively, or the reverse, as 
At'^o) TTphs v/j-as Kol ouK a.iroKpv\\>ofjMi (Dem.) ; II. a. 416. iwd roi cUco "-a »«p, 

a(ni fiaKa Stjv (since your life is shorty and ixot very long). See Lar^ iim&r, 

Tart II. ^ 858. 



§ 347. Contraction and Blending of Sentences. 

Anacoluthon. 

1. In the contraction of a compound sentence, sometimes 
the verb which is common to the principal and subordinate 
clauses, is placed in the subordinate clause and made to 
agree witli the subject of that clause; in this way the two 
clauses are much more closely united, than in the common 
mode of contraction {k 319, Rem. 1). 

X. Cy. 4. 1, 3. avrhs oTSo, oXos ^v rh. fity yitp iWa (scil. i-roiu) icvrtpf-cl/taif 

Kol irdyrts vfxfis iiroieTrf. 

2. When a participle stands in a sentence with the finite 
verb, the parts of the sentence are frequently blended with 
each other, by making the substantive which would be gov- 
erned by the participle, depend upon tlie finite verb, as the 
more important part of the seutence. Comp. Larger Grammar, 
Part II. ^ 856, b. p. 609—611. 



Soph El. 47. SyyfAAc 5* SpKtp wposribflsy instead of iyytXXt voosri^ls 
X. Cy. 1. 6, 33. Swais cvv roiovrtu ^^n idi<rdeyT(s itp^6T(pci ^0X2x01 yiirouh- 
to; %d(i is here governed by avv and connected with yiyourro. instead of being 
in the Dat. depending on idia^fyres, which would have been the natural con- 
Btruction. X. Cy. 7. 1, 40. olrot St iwuSij ijropoiyroy icukK^ wdrro^tp "(^ 



♦ 347J CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 569 

<rdf..uoi, firre dpaaS^a. -rk 5nXa, M Ta7s h-c-ria^v iKd^yro (instead of «,5kAov 
iroir,aat..yoi iKo^^roY 2. 3, 17. to?. ^ lre>o« e?7rev, o'r: ^6.KK.^^ SeW a.a*. 

3. A very common mode of blending the principal with the 
subordinate clause, in the manner of attraction, and one which 
belongs to almost all kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in 
transferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal 
chiuse, and making it the object of the principal clause. 
(Comp. nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit, instead of quam 
tardus sit Marcellus). 

Her. 3, 68. oZros Tpunos u ir (J ir t e u o- e rhv M a 7 o »/, is ovk e^rj 6 Kipov 2fJ.ep- 
6is (he Jirst suspected the Maijian, that he was not Smerdis the son of Cyrus = sus- 
jyected that the Mag {an was not, etc.). 80. etSere t^v Kafifivcrew rifipiv, eV 
S<roy i-r«^ri\bt {set the insolence of Cambyses what a pitch it reached = see what 
a pitch the insolence, etc.). 6,48. aircirejpoTo t u 1/ 'E AAtji/w j/, ri eV y^ 
Ifxoify. Th. 1,72. tijv atptrtpau ir6Kiv ifiovKovro arifialveiv, oar} dr] Zvva- 
fup. X. Cy. 5. 3, 40. ol iipxovTfS ai/Tuy 4ir inf\fla^uv, Hirus (rv(TK€va(rii4vot 
iffi wdyra. In the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob- 
ject of a <^:' • - ♦ive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate 
clause is fi ■ . y transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the Gen., 
as the object of that substantive. Th. 1, 61. fi\S^e Sk koI roh "AS^vaiois iv^vs 
ri kyytKia rmv TtJAcwv, in cupfaTacri (the report immediately reached the 
At}< ' ' cities, that they had revolted = the report reached the Athe- 

niui.^ i reviAttd). 97. afia 5e koI ttjs apxvs airSdei^iy exet 

T^i Tuy 'A^yaiwy, iy oltf rpoirtf KartCTt). So also a substantive on which an 
Inf depends is often attracted by the verb or substantive which governs the Inf 
Th. 3, 6. T^r daXJiffCus tlpyoy fiij XPW^(U tovs MtTv\r]yaiovs. 5, 25. 
ivt^vfila rwy hyiptlfy rwy 4k tT]s yriaov KO/iiaaa^ai. PI. Grit. 52, b. ou5* 
iw tb»nia at SxXtjt iroAeotfr, ou5' fiXAcuv vS^uv eAojSev — eiSeVoi. 

4. Tlie priucumi clause is frequently blended with the sub- 
ordinate clause, by making the former, as a substantive- 
clause introduced by ort or w?, or still more frequently, as a 
substantive-clause expressed by the Ace. with the Inf, depen- 
dent on the subordinate clause. 

X. An. 0. 4. i>. cl»i yap iyw ¥ikov(t6. tivos, 'oti KKeavSpos e/c Bv(avTiov ep- 
fiotrrifs fjL«KK«i fj^eif (instead of ws ijKovaa, KA. fieWei U^iv), for as I heard 
from some one, tfiat Cleandros is about to come, etc. =for Cleandros is about to 
come, as I heard from some one. Her. 1, 65. is 5' avrol AaKedai/xSuioi xiyovai 
AvKOvpyoy i ir it powe vffavr a iK Kp-qr-ns ayayeff^ai lavra. 3. 14. ws 
5i Xtyfrai inr' Aiyvwriwy, SaKpvfiy fxtv Kpo7(Tov. 4.5. ws Se 2«y^a« 
\4yov<Ti^ yturaroy aKoyrwy i^ytcay eJyai rh (r<p4repoy. 

48* 



570 SYNTAX. [i 348 

5. Anacoluthon (from a privative and aK6\ov^(K, -ov, following) 
is a j&giire used to denote a change in the construction. It 
takes place when the construction "with which the sentence 
begins, is not continued through it, but changed into another, 
which grammatically does not correspond with the former, but 
logically, i. e. in relation to the signification and meaning, is 
like or similar to it. The cause of Anacoluthon may be attrib- 
uted to the vivacity of representation among the Greeks, or to 
their desire of perspicuity, brevity, strength, or concinnity (pro- 
priety or keeping) of discourse. There are two kinds of Ana- 
coluthon: (a) grammatical, (h) rhetorical. There are also in- 
stances where it ev^idently originates from carelessness and in- 
attention. The grammatical Anacoluthon, which is, for the 
most part, caused by attraction, has been treated in several 
places in the course of the grammar. Only two instances of 
the rhetorical Anacoluthon, need now be mentioned : — 

(a) A very natural and fr<?qu< » • - ' * icolathon u, where inc word 

irhich gave rise to the whole ti-,.- . .ncc, is placed as the logical 

buhject in the Nom. at the bepnning of the sentence, but after the interrnption 
of the sentence by an intermediate clause, is made the grammatical object of 
tlie verb of the sentence. X. Hier. 4, 6. Strrtp ol i^ Kiiral ovx, irtw tiufriii^ 
ytvaiyrau KpflrroyfS, rovro ainovs fv<ppaly(ty oAA* Sray riy ijrrarfuwiariv ^frrovs^ 
rovT avTovs kvi^ (instead of rovrtp fv<ppaiyoyrau — di'iuvrai), as the atkletet^ wkem 
tJiey are superior to common tnen, this does not elate them, but when they are in/erior to 
their competitors, this gives them pain = as the athletes are not elated whem^ etc 

(b) lu order to make the coir ; ideas in a sentence prominent or em- 

phatic, they are often placed in : — .:e form at the beginning: of thrir n «ik-c- 

tive sentences, although the natural construction of each would necc t 

different. PL Phaedr. 233, b. roiavra 6 (fws iwiitUanmi' ipsrux^vwraf 
U^y, ft /uJj Xvirrfy ro7s 6.Wois »of>«'x<». i^iapiL 9oi(7 trofii(fiM, t vTvxovpras 8i 
Kod ra /J.^ rjhoyrjs &.^ia Trap* ^Kflywy ixalyov ^ayxd^tt Tvyx^^c (instead of ntp 
fvTvxoiiyrccy be koI Tck /x^ t;5o»t)s &^ia ivalpov oiwyicet^'ci rxryxdrfiTf or tim/xovrras 
it Kol rcb fii) T}5. &{. iitaivuv ovayKii^ft)'. 

CHAPTER X 

M48. Position of Words and Sentences. 

1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence 
and between one sentence and anotlier, and the connection of 



♦ 346.) POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 571 

these so as to form one thought or idea, are expressed as has 
been seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words (^ 38 4) 
which supply the place of inflection, partly by the accent and 
position of the members of a sentence and of the sentences 
themselves. As the accent can be made prominent only in 
Uving discourse, and commonly agrees with the position, only 
the position needs to be treated. 

Kemark. The position of particular parts of speech, as the pronouns 
[.;. ;..s,tions, etc., has already been stated, in the sections where these are 
ut atud. See the index under Position. 

2. There are two kinds of position : the usual or grammati- 
cal, and the rhetorical or inverted. Tlie first denotes the 
If.'jical and grammatical relation of the members of a sentence, 
and of the sentences themselves to each other, and the union 
of these in expressing a single thought or idea; the second 
makes one member of a sentence, which is specially important, 
more prominent than tlie other members, by giving to it a posi- 
tion dilferent from the usual or grammatical order of the words. 

3. Tlie usual or grammatical position of the words in Greek 
is the following : — 

The subject stands Jirst in the sentence, the predicate lust; 
tlie copula cifti stands after the predicative adjective or sub- 
stantive ; but the attributive follows its substantive ; the object 
is placed before the predicate ; the objectives, i. e. the qualify- 
ing statements or circumstances, are so arranged, that the most 
important one is placed immediately before the jiredicate, and 
tlie other objectives precede this, following each other in such 
order as they would naturally be joined to the first objective, 
the one suggesting itself last to the mind being placed before 
oi.e already existing ; or in otlier words, the broader limitation 
usually precedes the narrower, the less necessanj, the more 
necessary. 

Kupor, 6 fieuriXtvs, koXws iirtdavtv. Kuirpioi irdyv Trpo^u/xws avT<f (rvueffTpciTev- 
9ay. na7s fityas — i*^p aya^6s — 6 ircus 6 neyai — 6 av^p & aya^os — 6 irais 6 
rov Kupov — 6 ir6Ktfios 6 wphs rovs Ufptras. But the Inf. or the Ace. with the 
Inf. and the Part, fv.llow the goveniing word. See the examples under H 306, 
307, 310. Oi' 'EXXrjyfS rohs Ufptras ivlK-naav. 0/ "EMTjves eV ^apa^&ui rohi 
Uipaas iyutriaay. Oi "EAATji'ts ravry] rf} Tjixtpa iv Uapa^wvi rovs Uepcas iyUrjcrav. 
In this waj, the adterb of place and time commonly precedes the causal ob- 



572 SYNTAX. [♦ 348. 

ject {r6r€ or ravrri rf] vfifpcf, robs n. ivimjcay), the personal object precedes 
that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. {rhy iraTSa ttiv 'ypanfiariKifiv SiScurwe* 
— T^ TTotSl rh fii^Kiov SlSu/xi), the adverb of time the adverb of place {T6Te or 
TavTT) rrj rjfifpq, iv MapaJ^wi/i tovs FI. ipiK-rftray). The adverb of manner, even 
when another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be- 
fore the predicate, e. g. ol "EWrfycs ravrrj rp ^^cp^ ^y Mapa^utvi rovs Htpiras 
Ka\a> s ii/iKT}<rau. 

4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the 
position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose 
place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, fot 
example, occupies the place which the adjective would take ; 
and so of the others. 

PI. Phaed. 50, c. S dvp<i>p6s, Ssirtp tlwbti viraK u ut ly^ tjwt w*f.uutr*iy. 
X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. 6 5e KDpoj, iy ^ a vvtXiyovr o, idvtTO' iwtl 8< KaX^ ^p 
T k i« pk auT</J, <Tvv(Kd\(irf rovs r« rwv Tltpciiv riy*fi6yas iral roi/s rmw Viifimv. 
'Eirel 8i bfiov ^0-av, ^A«|e -roiiit. Yet the substantive-clauses, even when 
they express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1. 
A, 1 . ol Z' t Kf y o V, Srt &.pKTOL TtoWovi <f8e 9\r\<TiA.aavTai iitA^tf 
oav. 

5. In the rhetorical or inverted^ position of words, the predi- 
cate is placed before the subject, the attributive before the sub- 
stantive to be defined, but the objective, particularly the adverb, 
is placed after the predicate. 

*Ayabh5 6 ayrip. 'O $a<ri\«vs Kvpos. 'O wphs rohs Udpaas viXtpios. 
'EMoxcVavTO Kahws. Th. 2. 64. ^tptof re xM "^^ "^^ ieufiotna iyayttaims, rd 
Tc &irb Tuv iro\(filwy aySptius. 

6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is 
placed at the end of the sentence ; and when two words in the 
same sentence are to be made emphatic by their position, one 
is placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen- 
tence, C. g. Ilao-uiv apcTuiV -tjytfuiiv iariv rf cvae/Jcia. Gener- 
ally, both the first and the last }>lace in a sentence is considered 
cm}>hatic, when words stand there, wliich, according to the 
usual armngement, would have a different position. 

7. Inversion is still more frequent in subordinate clauses 
than in the case of the words whose place they take, perspi- 
cuity often rendering such an inversion necessary. Substan- 

* This inverted position is a species of Hi/pfrhatonj a constmction by whick 
the natural order of words and sentences is inverted. 



f 348.] POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 573 

tive-clauses with ort, d,? (^to), and final substantive-clauses, 
are placed before the governing verb, when the ideas they 
express are to be brought out prominently. 

irao-a ff Utpaiu woKirda, fiiKphv indyufit. The inversion of adjective-clauses 
{hv (I9(s &yipay out6s (any) lias been already treated, § 332, 8. Inversion ig 
not ased in adverljial clauses of time and condition, since these, according to 
the common position, usually precede the principal sentence. 

8. When a word m a subordinate clause is to be made more 
l)romincnt than the others, it is sometimes placed before the 
ronnective word (relative, etc.) wliich introduces the clause, 
<•. g. TouxOr* i<Trl koX toAXo, ire pi c/xou aot tfoXAoI Xiyovatv. 

9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi- 
tion, i»the separation (Ilyperbaton) of two words which would 
1)0 naturally connected together, as forming one thought, by 
introducing one or more less important words between them. 
By tliis separation, only one of the two words is commonly 
made emphatic, though often both even, especially when both 
stand in an emphatic part of the sentence. 

Dcm. Phil. 3, 110. woXKuVf 2) 6^>hpis 'AbT)vcuoi, \6ywv yiyvajxivoiv. X. S. 1, 
4. otfuu oiy voKv tw r^y KaraffKdrljy fioi Kofiir port pay (pavriyai (instead of iroXb 
Xa^wpoT4pay. ) This separation ( Hj-perbaton) very often takes place even in sen- 
ttncet as well as in case of words. This consists in placing the principal 
( 1 II' i 1- 'V*' one lets important, within the subordinate clause, and thereby, in a 
1 V , .il j.'<i;.t of view, makin{^ it secondary to the subordinate clause. PI. Prot. 
.'Ml. d. t5 yap XtvKhy t^ fitKayl iffriv Hirr) irposeoiKe (instead of ecmv yap owp 
rh X«i/K<(y, etc.). X. C. 3. 11, 10. <fn\(7y yf /xV €? olS' Bti iiriaTaaai (instead of 
tl olV tri ^lAtt*', etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 53. 5rrc irtpX fiev rrjs iv To7s''EWr](n Svva- 
trrtlas oi/K oli' Svwr iv ris tratpiarfpov i-KiZii^ai Zvvr]b(ir]. Dcm. Phil, ovtoi pXv 
yap ipxoyjts ov woXvs xp^»'or i^ ou , . ^K^ov. 

10. Ideas that are (UiJ^e or similar, or especially such as are 
antithetic or opposite, are made emphatic in their position, by 
being placed near each other. 

Thus avrhi aviov, etc. e. g. i) irdXis avri] Trap' avTTJs 5iK7}y K^eTai. 
X. Ilicr. 6, 2. {i/KTjK flit' r)kiKiuTcus T)S6iJifyos rjSofifyois ifioi PL L. 934, d. 
nalyom-eu woKKol voKKovs Tp6irovs. Hence, 6.\\os &\\o, alius aliud, 
iKKos iWobi, alius alibi, iWos HWocre, alius alio, &A\os &\\o^ev, 
alius aliunde, iXKos iXXj,, alius alid (sc. vid), etc., of which the English 
makes two sentences, the one did tJiis, Vie other that, etc. 



APPENDIX A. 



VERSIFICATION. 

? 349. Rhythm f Mrfrr Ar\>\ nynl Ttrc/c 

1. Rhythm (pi>.9/xos) is the hamion; ; by me aitcroabon of 
long and short syllables, accompanied L; un- incurrence of an rm/)Jlanf 
at intervals ; when the cm])liasis occurs at fixed inten'aU^ the rhythm be- 
comes meter, each one of the intervals forming a metre or measure. 

2. The emphasis with which particular parts of a verse are pro- 
nounced, is called the Arsis^ and the corresponding weaker tone with 
which the other parts are pronounced, the Thesis. The former imphes 
an elevation of the voice with an accompanying stress (§ 29. 1.), the latter, 
a depression of the voice. The terms Arsis and Thesis are also traD5- 
ferred to the particular syllable or syllables on which they rest, and 
hence the syllable on which tlie emphasis fidls is called the Anis. The 
Arsis is often called the metrical ictus, or merely the icttts, 

3. The Arsis is naturally on the long syllabic of a foot ; conseqnentlj 
in the spondee ( — ) and the tribrach (- ^*'), the place of the Arsis can 
be dctcmiined only by tlio kind of verse in which they are found. In 
every verse, the original foot determines the place of the Arsis in all the 
other feet which arc sul>stituted for it Hence, as the second syllable of 
an iambus is long, and as the Arsis naturally falls on the long syllable. 
the spondee in iambic verse would have the Arsb on the second syllable, 
thus - - ; so also in anajviestic verse. But as the first sv-llable of the 
foot is long in the trochee and dactyl, the spondee in trochaic and dao 
tylic vei*se takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus — — . Again, as a 
short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, and as in a long 
syllable the emphasis or ictus necessarily faUs on the first of the two 
units composing this long, it is evident that, in iambic verse, the tribrach 



* ^^^'-J VERSIFICATION. 5-75 

would take the Arsis on the second syUable, thus --; and in trochaic 
verse on the first So where the dactjl takes the place of the spondee 
with the Arsis on the last syllable, the arsis of the dactyl is on the first 

short, thus -- -; but where the anapaest stands for the spondee (--), its 
Arsis is on the first short, thus " - - . 

§ 350. Metrical Feet. 

1. The portions bto which every verse is divided, are called feet. 

The feet are composed of a certain number of syllables, either all 
long, all short, or long and short together. 

A short syllable is assumed as the tin ti in measuring time, every short 
syllable being one mora or time, and every long one two morae. 

The feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of 
syllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four 
syllables. 

The dissyllabic feet are four : 

— - P>Trhich 1 (tvttov) 

— Spondee (tiVt(i>) 
" - lamb (rtTTuji') 

— " Trochee (nWc) 

' DpniVATioy OF xames op feet. — Pi/rrhich. This was so called from 
-^ (wvfifiixri), in which it was used, as being rapid and 

— .. . . ...in Idmrw, to abuse; because Archilochus the inventor 

it in violent invectives. — Trochee. From rpfxa, to run ; because of its 

-tyle. — 7" " ' T N Rpaxvs, because consisting of three 

"Ttfff^. ^ aise it was used iv toTs airov5a7s, in 

h iiii sound. — Dactyl. 'Anh rod SaKTvKov] because 

ii... ..„ - '. - ,... . of one long joint and two short ones. — Aria- 

paest. From arawauv, to strike back ; because the Ictus was contrary to that of 

111 T" ' ... 'j^^i fipaxvs; because the short syllables are on 

«■ i^^O — Cretic. Because much used by the Cretans. 

11 tlie l>itliyninibic Ciaines in honor of Bacchus. — Antihac- 

^^ (ami) of the fonner. — Proceleusmatic. From KeXeva-fxa, the 

wain's cull or command; because rapidly uttered. — Paeons. Because 
11 the rueonic Hvnjns. — CAonaniA. Trochee or Choree -f- Iamb. — An- 

I 'At^iawduf, to draw to the opj>osite side; because, being converse of 

t' .r. it apnears to draw the Trochee to the other side of the Iamb. — 

/ ,„.,:,„: lofticus a minore. Feet much in use with the lonians ; a jnajore, 

when b. with the lonp syllables; a minore, when beginning with the 
short oncv — /: , ' Most probably from iirl and rp^ros ; because, in addition 
to {ini) the .3d ' it has a short one over. — The Z)uawi6 is an Iambic 
fcyzypy, adn.ittii in the first place. — The Ditrochee is a Trochaic 

•jzjgj, admittiiip .— ^, m the second place. 



576 VERSIFICATION. (♦ 350. 

The trisyllabic are eight : 

"' " " Tribrach {ervTrov) 

MoloSSUS (TVTTTtO/Xai) 

" ^ — Anapaest (tct-u^ws) 

— - " Dactyl (TUTTTCTe) 
^ — ^ Amphibrach (trvrrov) 

— ^ — C re tic (rvTrrofJuox) 

«- Bacchius (rvTn^uj) 

^ Palimbacchius (tx-tttt/tc) 

The tetrasyllabic are sixteen : 

" ^ " *- Proceleusmatic (cnVrro) 

Dispondee (Tv<f>^€LijTr]v) 

*'—''— Diiamb (crfTrrd/xT/v) 

— w _ w Ditrochce (rvTrrtTuxrav) 

— — ^ Antispast (€tv<^.^t7toi') 
~ - - — Choriamb (txttto/xckou) 

— " — lonicus a minori (ctcti'/i/xiti') 

— « - lonicus a majori (rxil/aifuSa) 

— ^ - ^ first Paeon (txitto/xcvo?) 
w _ w w second Paeon (cTtWrrc) 
V w _ ^ tliird Paeon (ctct-i-i/o) 
w w - _ fourth Paeon {irvTrofirji) 
V. first Epitrite (cTvi^tur^i') 

— »* — second Epitrite (u» nm-oivai) 

— - - third Epitrite (Tvtf>3Tjcrofiax) 
^ fourth Epitrite (rvt^tirjaav) 

2. Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet; 
pound, by combining the simple feet with each other. 

Simple feet consist of but one Arsb, and one Thesis, e. g. 



, , , \. i\. • 



Comjwund feet consist of tvro Arses and Theses, of which one Arsis 
and Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e- g. 



I 



f y f \ f f ' « 



Of the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Anb 4 
and a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. - - - 
---. Hence the trochee and dactyl, the iamb and anapaest, are ccus:'.- 
ered as the fundamental feet of all rhnhm. The other feet may be 



^ 351.] VERSIFICATION. 



577 



combined with these by resolving a long into two short syUables, or by 
contracting two short into one long syllable. 

4. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are not measured by single 
feet, but by dipodies, or pairs of feet, two feet being necessary to make 
an independent metre or dipody. Hence, four iambs make an Iambic 
dimeter, and six an Iambic trimeter. Dactylic verse, on the contrary, 
is measured by the single feet ; six dactj-ls, therefore, form an htxameter, 
and five a pentameter. 



$ 351. Caesura. 

Caesura (a cutting) is the separation, by the endjig of a word, of syl- 
lables metrically connected, — or the cutting of a metre by the ending 
of a word, before the metre is completed. 

Remark I. The dcsjpn of the Caesura is to give varietv and harmony to 

»!,,. V. r .• (■<•■ 'f • tre or foot torininatcd with the end of a word, there 

Nv.uM !.-• (.Mi\ ;t itly rcciirriii«: monotony. But the Caesura, by pre- 

venting,' a uniform cr.'itir,<ience between the ending of the metre or foot, and the 
ciidiii- (if ■ "• ■ ' ■ •• ■ • •' variety, beauty, and harmony of the verse. It 
'■- I'"' '" I th«' rhythm of the verse that the ending of 

''i *^"'*1 ' s coincide; this coincidence is called 

'"' ■ The J >f< are after the first, second, third, 

and fourth foot. 

^adtof • I airrap i \ rolaif dt^ciXcro | ydarifioy \ ii/xap. 

There are three kinds of Caesura ; 

1. Caesura of the foot. 

2. Caesura of the rhythm. 
S. Caesura of the v^rse. 

(1) Caesura of the foot is where the word ends before a foot is com- 
pleted. 

NiictJ j era? iS^ j Xci oTi-yf | fi^l^ €/^f | oiicaS' | ayeaSot. 
In this line there is a Caesura of the foot afler each of the syllables o-a?, 
Act, pTjVf and #ca^. Only two cases of this Caesura can occur in a dac- 
tyl ; for the word either ends afler the Arsis, - 1 - ^, and forms the mas- 
cUine Caf^sura, or in the Thesis, - " j **, and forms the feminine or trochaic 
Caesura. Thus the Caesuras after o-a?. Act and pr]v are masculine, that 
after niKa^ is feminine or trochaic. 

(2) The Caesura of the rhytlun is where the Arsis falls on the last 
(O'llable of a word, and thus separates the Arsis from the Thesis. In the 
line above quott?d, the Caesura of the rhythm occurs after the syllables 
ora<:, Xci and prjv, the Arsis felling on each of these and being separated 

49 



578 VERSIFICATION. |^ 352 

from the following Thesis by the Caesura. This Caesura can take placi 
only in such feet as have the Arsis on the first syllable. 

(3) The Caesura of the verse is a pause introduced to render the re- 
citation more easy. This is also called the Caesural pause, and divides 
the verse into two parts. 

In several kinds of verse this Caesura has a fixed place ; this is the 
case in the Trochaic, Iambic, and Anapaestic tetrameter, which have tb- ir 
natural Caesura at the end of the fourth foot See under these ver > 
below. Other kinds of verse may have more than one Caesura, ti. 
place of wliich is not fixed. In Hexameter verse, however, the Caesura 
of the verse more usually occurs after the Arsis of the third foot. Thus, 

KlXVui' T€ ^«l.'ici/l'. II Tci't&MO T€ l(j>L aVUJiT<T€Li, 

or in the Thesis of the third foot, thus, 

Kcu Tore 8ij 3dp<rrj<T€, \\ kox rjvSa fuxyrt^ S^vfiuiv. 

Rem. 2. The three kinds of Caesura often occur together; for exam] '• 
ftfter the - " * ' tj* of (a^driy, there is the Caesura of the foot, of the rhythm, 
and of the 



♦ 352, Different kinds of Verse. 

1. A verse is often named from its pred(»ninant foot Thus Dacf- "■- 
verse is so called, because the dact]»'I is the predominant foot, an4 Iambic 
verse, because the iamb b the preilominant foot ; so TirocAotic, Anapaestic, 
etc. Verses arc also named from their inventaMrs, as the Sappkk^ finom 
Sappho, Alcaic, from Alcacus, etc. ; likewise from the kind of composi- 
tion in which thoy arc used, as the Heroic, used in desciiUng the 
achievements of heroes, also fn^m tho numlM^r of maainiTes. as monMn^t^r, 
dimeter, trimeter, Jtexatnctcr, etc. 

2. A verse is called acaialectic, when it has its full number of feet or 
syllables, as trimeter iambics, »' — •'-|-— *«-]--' — . A verse is called 
catalectic, when one or two sj-llables are wanting to complete the verse, 
as the <nm«/«*, ^— '-- I^-'^-j*' — **. In dactylic verse, if the last loot 
wants one syllabic, the verses are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g. 
Jww_ww_wj if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one sjfUable, e. g. 
J vw_w«_. Verses in which the last dipo<ly (a pair of feet) wants an 
entire foot, arc called hrach if catalectic, e.g. ^--^ --|*' — *- — J" — . Verees 
which have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercaUh 
lectic, e. g. ''-*' — I** — " — I"-"-"'. 

RiiMAKK AVh.-n th.^ r.^!rn1:H- rlivthui ot averse is preceded bv an onem 



^ 353 — 355.] VERSIFICATION. 579 

phfttic introductory syllable, such syllable is called an Anacrusis, an upivard or 
back beat; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot, 
they are called a Biite. The atiacrxisis and base belong to Imc verse. 



$353. View of the different kinds of Verse. 

ITie most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repeti- 
tion of the same foot Of these the most frequent are the Dacti/Uc, lam- 
hic^ Trochaic^ and Anapaestic. 

k 354. Dactylic Verse. 

The fundamental foot in this verse is the dactjl, the place of which 
may be supplied by a spondee. 

♦ 355. Hexameter. 

The Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and 
is the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. 

The Hexameter consists of six feet ; the fundamental foot is the dac- 
tyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactj-l with a dis- 
syllabic catalectus. The sixth foat is usually called a spondee ; but when 
the last syllable is short, it may be considered a trochee. 

In each of the firbt four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac- 
tyl. The fiflh foot is regularly a dactyl ; but sometimes it is a spondee, 
and the line is then called a spondaic line, as 

Ou yap /yui Tputurtf €V€k yjkv^ov al)(p.rjTami}V, 

The principal Caesura in Hexameter vene occurs afler the Arsis or in 
the Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a 
Caesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the 
HepJdhemim, This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by 
one in the second foot, which is called the Triemim, The Caesura oc- 
curring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from 
In OM in pastoral poetr}' 

'AAA* 6 pev AlSioT-a^ i| fi€T€KtaS€ t7]\6S iovTa<; 

At'^pa ^ot u'vcTTC, MoOca, ij TroXiVpoTrov os /xoAa TroAAa 

*H Aia<i I; yj 'l3o/icvci-s j] i) Sw>? '08ucro-eu5 

'Hytpovuiv, j I ooTis oi aprjv \ j iTopoicnv d/xvvai 

MifiKOL^civ irapa vrpxrX Kopwvurtv, \\ ov ot cTrcira. 



580 . VERSIFICATION. [H 3-56, 357 

a 

The beauty of Hexameter verse is promoted hj varying the feet by 
an interchange of dactjls and spondees, and by introducing these in dif- 
ferent places in different verses. For the same reason it is desirable that 
the Caesuras should occur in different places in different lines. 



§ 356. Pentameter. 

This verse is divided into two parts, each of which consMts of two 
dactyls and a catalectic sj-llable, thus, 

-':, -. -' - -. -.11 -; - .--.-.:- 

Mt/Sc ^vpa^e KcXcv j| oik fSiXovr uvau 
Spondees may take the place of the dact^-ls in the first half, but not in 
the second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more 
freely, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees. 
The long syllable at the end of the second half can be short The 
Caesura is here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be 
a division, by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When 
the word, however, has more than two syllables. Elision may take place. 

This kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hex- 
ameter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately. 
A poem composed of these two measures is called EUgvac^ being at first 
devoted to plaintive melodies. 

ApTi fx€ ycv6fi(vov ^wa^ /3p€<f>o<: r)pTraa-€ AaifUiMf Hexam. 
€It aya^oji' |j alrio^, circ Kaxun\ 

t » 4 jj 



OvK oiS* fir dyaSiav 1 1 aiTio?, circ Kaxa>»', Pentam. 



AnXijpoyr Atda, ti /x€ vrpnov ^pTrcura? a<f>iXi) ; Hexam. 
Ti cTTTci'Stis ; ov <roL \\ ircuacs o^€iAo/K<9a ; Pentam. 



$ 357. Dactylic Tetrameter. 

The dact}'lic tetrameter catelectic on one sj'llable consisti of three feet 

and a syllable. 

The dactvlic tetrameter catalecdc on two svllables ooiUMtB of Uiree feet 
and two syllables, which may form a spondee or trochee. 
«i>atroucvo»' kokov oucaS* aytaSai. 

-' -I- "I -'"I - - 

The dact}'lic tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet ; instead of a 
dactyl, in the last a cretic b admissible. 



♦ 358—361.] VERSIFICATION. 581 

MJia', <Iye KoAXtoVa Svyarep Ato's. 



i 358. Dactylic Trimeter. 

The dactyUc trimeter catalectic on one syUable consists of two feet 
and a s^'llable. 

EvSev ae^duevov. 

The dactyUc trimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of two feet 
and two syllables, which may form either a spondee or trochee. 

Eivpti KVfiara ttovtu). 



♦ 359. Dactylic Dimeter. 

The dact>'lic dimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of a dactyl 
and a spondee or trochee. 

4><JUT/xaTa (TTpovSuiV 
I our 6 ofJL6<f>uiVov . 



The dactylic aoatalectic dimeter consists of two dactyls, and usually 
stands in connection with tetrameters. 

Or? VTTO Tft^eCTL. 



«. ^ ^ I ^ ** ^ 



♦ 360. Trochaic , Iambic and Anapaestic Verse. 

It has been already observed (§ 350, 4.) that Trochaic, Iambic, and 
Vnapaestic verse is measured by dipodies^ i. e. by pairs of feet Hence 
verses of two feet, are called monometer, of four, dimeter, of six, trime- 
ter, of eight, tetrameter. The Latins named these according to the 
number of feet, and not by dipodies. Thus a verse of four feet was 
called quaitrtiiu.^. of ^^Iv. s^iuar'nis^ of eight, octonarius. 

♦ 361. Trochaic Verse. 

The Trochee is the predominant foot in this verse. The last syllable 
of each dipody may be doubtful ; hence the last foot of each dipody may 

49* 



582 



VERSIFICATION. 



[^* 362, 363. 



be a spondee. Therefore, a spondee is admissible in every even place 
(2, 4, 6, 8). The Arsis or long syllable of every foot can be resolved 
into two short ones, and hence, a tribrach can stand in everj' place ; a 
dactyl and anapaest can stand in the even places, instead of the spondee. 
A dactyl is not admitted, however, except in a proper name, and then 
may stand in all the places but the fourth and seventh. 

A trochaic tetrameter acatalectic would then present the following 
scheme : 



/ / / / / / 

/ / ' ' 

WW_WW _bW*« ^ ** ** 

lit I 



Remark. Trochaic vov 
iu the chonil j)arts of ('t)ii 
ordinary wit and spirit into the < > 
vary the grave monotony of the J 



!>ccially 

re than 

to arrest the spcctAtors attentioa aod 



$ 362. Tr OCha i '^ "^Tn » n m r f r r _ 

The trochaic monometer acatalccuc consisu oi two feet It is gener* 
ally found in systems of trochaic trimeters. 



^363. Trochaic Dimef^* 

The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of four iccL 

The trochaic dimeter catalcctic consbts of three feet and a sjflaUe. 
It is usually found among acatalectic dimeters. 

Kai ^Kv^ri<; o/xiA.09, oi yas (acatalectic). 
"^(Txarov ToTTov aix<p,l >Iou- (cataleclic). 
luriv evoixrt Xifii-av. 

- " I - " II - " -' -• 
ill 11 / / 

I II 

* See Manual of Greek Prosody, by L. P. Mercier. 



H 364, 365.1 



VERSIFICATION. 



583 



$ 364. Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable 
(two dimeters, the second catalectic). Its Caesui-a is at the end of the 
second dipody, and \s often omitted by comedians, but rarely ever by 
tragedians. 

T]38€ TTU'? cTTov, StcjKc | \ KoH Tov OLvSpa TrvvSdvov 
At TiJ'ts rr)povfi€v v/Aas \ \ rjv yap « ti§ e^oSos. 



Remark. The Trochaic tetrameter acatalectic, which consists of two tro- 
alectic, and the trochaic pentameter, which consists of nine 
. are very rarely used by the Greek poets. 

JLvp bf^i yap Toi ^irrew^els 6\fios ay^pwiroiai irapiiOvdiTepos, 



i 365. Iambic Verse. 

The fundamental foot in this verse is the iamb. Instead of the first 
iamb, everj' dipody may have a spondee. Hence a spondee is admis- 
sible in the odd places (1, 8, 5, 7). 

Again, as the long syllable of every iamb may be resolved into two 
short sylhbles, a tribrach may stand in every place, except the last ; and 
as the last syllable is common, a pyrrhic is admissible. In the odd places 
a dactyl or anajxiest may stand instead of a spondee. 

Hence the iambic trimeter or senarius, would present the folloAving 
acheme : 



/ / ' ^ ^ ^ 



TU-MARK 1 The il.> vcver, is most frequent in the first place ; it occurs 

h/llK thrrd'-pl'e o... ■. the H.t sylhible of the f^^^^^^^^^ 

,>.«/A,«/,«m,/ Caesura, or when the word is amono> liable ^^^/^^^^^^^ 
. the tifih place only in Comedy, where it is admitted in all the uneven 

' R.H.2. The anapaest is admitted only in. 1^^^ 

and in proper names ; m tlie.e ca.c^ '^^^^f i^^'^.^eluded in one word, except in 
hist. The anapaest m the hrst fuo mu^t^be ^^^J^^^ ^ ^ names 

case of the article or jiivposition and its Case, xne du^pa f f 

must not be divided between two Avords. 






584 



VEBSIFICATION. 



[H 366—368 



Kem. 3. The Iambic is the opposite of the Trochaic, being a stcadr, grave, 
but easy metre, and was applied to the stage as best adapted to the langaag« 
of ordinary life.^ 

§ 366. Iambic Monometer, 

Iambic monometer consists of two feet Its use is yery rare, and it 
occurs mostly in systems of dimeters, 

Kat TOtS KoXot? 



067. Iambic Dimeter. 
Iambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. 

"OdiV 66uiOtXTL Tols €UOL^ 

'I ' 't 'I ' 

Iambic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllaWe. 

©tAo) Xcytiv Arpcioas, 
XatjpOlTC XoiTTOl' "fjfuv 



This verse is commonly found in systems of acatalectic diii.atenk 



^368. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic, commonly called 

Senarius. 

This is tlie most noted of the Iambic verses. It conasts of ax ftei. 

O TCfcva, Ka3/iov rov ttoXox via rpo^f 
lKTr]pLOL<i KXdSouriv c^coTf ^/uici'oi ; 
AAAcjv dxoi'Ctv, avTos i^ iXijkvSa 

• I _ J 



The tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and third foot ; they ad- 
mit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot 
except the last 

Mcve\(U9 "EXoTyv 6 8c KXvrou/in^oTpa? Xri<09, 
IIoTa/Ltuiv T€ TnjyaL, ttovtuov t€ Kx-naTwv 
OvK apiSfiov oAAxas oAA' v-Trfpraroi's ^pvywv 



' See Mercior. 



H 369, 370.] 



VERSIFICATION. 



585 



The most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot (Penthemim) 
This Caesura, however, is often neglected, others being used, or some- 
times, none. 

*Ex^pC)v aSwpa II Swpa kovk ovrjaifia. 
The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe. 
mim). 

'Ettci Tra-njp ovtos o-o'?, || ov ^pT/vci? det'. 
The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent. 

♦ 369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic, 

The iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con- 
ciata of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of 
the fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the 
same as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot 
only in case of a proper name. 



' I ' / / I / / / 
_' / I / 

/ / 

' ! / ' / ' f \ / / / 



Ov <f>jj<Ti YprjvaL Tov<; viov<! 1 1 daKeiv • cyw 8e cbriai, 

_--' i-'ii--l--ll--h-'lh-h 

The iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek poefa. 



? :M0. A7iapaestic Verse. 

1. The anapar-i is ihe predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting 
the two short syllables in one long, the spondee may be substituted for 
the anapaest Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be 
resolved into two short svllablps. and hence a dactyl take the place of a 
spondee. 

2. In Anapaestic verse the most usual system is the dimeter, consist- 
ing of a greater or less number of perfect dipodles, followed by a 
pair of dipodles, the second of which Is catalectlc. This catalectic dime- 
ter, consisting of three feet and a syllable, Is called paroemiac (-n-apoL- 
/xtai) from its use in proverbs. The anapaestic verse is, therefore, al* 
ways terminated by a catalectic dipody, and also by a long syllable ; i. e, 
if the final syllable is not long by itself, it is made long by its position 



] 



586 



VERSIFICATION. 



[*j 371—373 



Yrith respect to the next line, the scanning being continuous, and an an 
apaestic series being constructed as if there were but one verse. The 
following is the scheme for an anapaestic tetrameter ootalectic. 



I / r ' j f \ / f 

I I II / j 

- w .WW ^ _ww .WW I 



Remark. An anapaest docs not follow a dactyl in the same dipody ; gen- 
erally a dactyl docs not follow an anapaest or spondee in the same dipodj. 
The third foot of the paroemiac is usually an anapaest 5 but a spondee \a some- 
times found. Tlie dactyl docs not occur in tlie sixth and seventh feet. The 
Anapaestic metre was the favorite one for martial music. 



^371. Anapaestic Monometer Acatalectic, 
The anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet 



$372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 

The anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet The legiti- 
mate Caesura occurs after the second Anns, at the end of the second foot 
But the Caesura is often found after the short syllable which follows the 

Arsis. 

'AttoXci? /a*, aTToXcts. Ij ov Karapr^cis 
llpwri^t] fjuavla. \ 1 tis 6 in;8ij<ras, 
nrepvywv cpcr/xotcriv | [ tp€a(TOfJL€VTj. 



I \ f ' 

w ^ ' y»-^» ^» v_ w w \ _ 

/ ; / / ! 

I 2 I >- - 2 i — I: -~ 



$373. An^ipmestic Dimeter Omtmieeiic. 

The anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) coo&sts of three feet 
and a syllable, and has no Caesura, the Caesura not being used in the 
pai-oemadc. 

Aia TOt' crov TrpioKTov o^^XtJctci. 



♦ 374.] 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



587 



^374. Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla- 
ble, being formed by adding the anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) 
to the anapaestic dimeter acatalectic. This verse is also caUed Aris- 
tophanic, from its use by Aristophanes, though not invented by hhn. 
The spondaic paroemiac, which sometimes occurs in the regular system, 
is not admissible in the tetrameter. 

The Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely, 
after the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also 
an incisure at the end of the second foot 

II ■rt? "« TtLi' opvx.9(ov 1 1 /lan-cvo/Liei/o) TTcpt Tov TrXov ; 

li^> '^<av 8uxTov(T avTOL<:. \\ ova-av Trapa roto-t ^eot(7tv; 

TuM/ . ^ Ji/ ' ovTOL yap uraxri. || Acyov(n Bi tol rdSe Travres. 



Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic does not seem to have been used by 
the Greek poets. 



APPENDIX B. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

1. For the convenience of those who may wish to read some of the 
earlier editions of the Greek writers, the following table, containing old 
forms of some of the letters, and also abbreviations of certain words 
or parts of words, is subjoined. 

2. No. I. contains certain single letters or elements^ which are of con- 
stant occurrence in tlie compound characters, and are found nowhere else. 
No. 11. contains characters, the elements of which would not at once be 
obvious, and lor this reason alone they are not placed alphabetically in 
columns III — VI. Indeed, the characters in Nos. I. and U. might all 
liave been arranged alpliabetically in columns m — VI. The characters 
in columns III — VI. are arranged alphabetically; the initial letter of 
these characters, by the aid of those in No. I^ will be readily known.^ 



' See Robinson's Buttmann, p. 466. 



588 



TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 



a 



r 

y 






c 



I. 

^ It. 



y 



F 

V 



Kf 



' oy yap yap £i €l 
IV. 



€X 



III. 

^^ aO-i 

^ ay 
"^ orp 

>i' y«V 

OjT'' ylveiai 
y yo 

Sj^ dia 



^ 



ov 



eivat 

y 

tv 



II. 

Zcy or J^* 

TjV OV JCO 

V. 



xa 



e J 

VI, 

^^ lavO-a 






?^ ineidrj 
^ inl 

;)^' x«ra ^ 

J^T^' yecfaXaiov 



oioy 



onx outog 
^t^^^napa 

^ 7l(p 

Tie pi 






7f 



LL^ fxdlCOV 






no 

po 
aa 

c&ai 
oo 



G 

CUT 0^ 

OS 00 

^ oco 

d -«' 



TTJg 

JO 

JOY 

TOV 

JOV 



n 

r 
r 

ZS '^ 
t5 » 



I. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



N. B. The figures refer to sections. R. is used for remark 



Abbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588. 

Ablative expressed by Dat. 285, 1. 

^a.-./mm^ Case Absolute, sec Cases. 

A on of clauses by tlxAa 322, 6. 

Abstracts 39, in PI. 243, 3, (3). 

Absorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10, 
4,5. 

Acalalectic verse 352, 2. 

Accentuation 29 ; change and re- 
moval of the accent by Inflec., 
C«^"^" '- and Contract 30 ; in 
c*' 1 discourse (Grave in- 

stead of the Acute), in Crasis, 
Elision, A nastrophe 31. Accent 
of first Dec. 45 ; second Dec. 49 ; 
thinl Dec. 65 ; adjectives and 
participles 75 ; words ending in 
t-f, eitt, V 76, II ; tag, (dv 78. R. 
7, and 29, R. 5 ; wr, ov 78, R. 9, 
and 65, 5 ; ijj, tg 78, R. 11 ; verb 
118. 

Accusative 276 s(\. ; local relation, 
limit, aim 277 ; of the object pro- 
duced with a verb of the same 
Btem or one of a cognate signifi- 
cation (^ti/rfV fiii/tai^ai ; lf]v ^lov) 
278, 1 and 2 ; with verbs denot- 
ing to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; 
object, design 278, 4 ; manner 
278, R. 3 ; of the object on which 
the action is perfonned or the 



suffering object 279 ; with verbi 
signifying to profit, to hurt, etc. 
279, 1 ; of doing good or evil to 
any one, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, 
to wait for, etc. 279, 3 ; to turn 
back, flee from, etc. 279, R. 3 ; to 
conceal, to be concealed, to swear, 
and with cp&dvsLv, Xhjieiv 279, 4 ; 
with dtl XQV 279, R. 4 ; ^aivsiv, 
nkslVf etc., which denote motion, 
etc., with verbs of sacrificing or 
dancmg in honor of any one 279, 
R. 5 ; denoting an affection of 
the mind 279, 5 ; of space, time, 
quantity 279, R. 8; (xalog roc 
cfifiaza, uXyil tijv xscpah'jv) 279, 
7 ; double accusative : (pda 
(ftXiav as, etc. 280, 1 ; xalu, 
xaxa TTO/w, Xiyo) as 280, 2 ; with 
verbs of beseeching, asking, teach- 
ing, reminding, dividing, depriv- 
ing, conceahng, clothing and un- 
clothing, surrounding, etc. 280, 
3 ; with verbs of appointing, 
choosing, educating, naming, etc. 
280, 4 ; in the a/ijfia xad^ oXov 
v.. fiiQog 266, R. 4 ; Ace. in 
adverbial expressions, e. g. ^a- 
1CQ0V xXalsLV, fiiya /algsiv 278, 
R. 1 ; /«?'»', dca^sdv, touto, 
therefore, 278, R. 2 ; tovtov tov 



690 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



TQonov, dixrjv, ofioia 278, R. 3; 
trjv Ta/lazrjv ; uQyJ]v, etc ; noVka^ 
snfipe, oXlyov, etc. 279, R. 8 ; 
tVQog^ vipog, tdXXa, etc. 279, R. 
10 ; with Pass, verbs 281 ; with 
verbal Adjectives in ziog 284, 
R. 7. 

Accusative with Inf. 307 ; instead of 
Norn, with Inf. 307, R.4 ; instead 
of Gen. or Dat with Inf 307, R. 
2 ; as a subject after Xf/fTui, do- 
nii, etc. 307, R. 5 ; with the Art 
sec Inf ; with exclamations 308, 
R. 2 ; in the subordinate clauses 
of the oratio ohliqua 315, 6. • 

iccusative with the Part. 310, 2 ; 
absolute 312, 6 ; with w$ 312, 6 ; 
Ace. of Part, instead of another 
Case 313, 1. 

Active verbs 102, 248, 249. Comp. 
Transitive ; with the meaning to 
cause to do 249, R. 3. 

Acute accent 29, 4 (a). 

Addition of consonants 2-1. 

Adjective (and Part) 74 sq. ; Dial. 
215; Accent 75 ; of three end- 
ings 76, 77 ; of two endings 78, 
79; of one ending 80; Com- 
parison of 81 ; used as a Subs. 
2G3, a ; Attributive 264 ; as Subs, 
with the Gen. (^ nokkii Tt%' ytji 
instead of to noXv rffg yiig) 264, 
R. 5 ; instead of the Adv. 264, 3. 

AdJ '■ ^ A^'erbal, see Verbal Ad- 

J' 
Adjectives Numeral 96, 2. 

Adjective Substantive Clause 831, 

k 4. 

Adjective pronoun used as a Subs. 
263, a. 

Adjective clauses 331 ; several con- 
nected together 334, 1 ; inter- 
changed with other subordinate 
clauses 334, 2. 

Adverb 100 ; formation 101 ; com- 
panson So ; expressed by an ad- 
jective 264, 31 as expressing an 



objective relation 314 sq.; xu&ti 
as adjectives 262, d; as substan- 
tives (ot vvv) 263, c ; in a preg 
nant sense (onoi yr^q iafitv, etc.) 
300, R, 7 ; (o ixu&sv nokifioi 
dii'QO ilUt instead of 6 ixtl n.) 
300 R. 8 ; adverbs of place at- 
tracted 332, R, 7 ; inverse at^ 
traction of Adv. of place 332 
R. 13. 

'// clan sq. ; of place 

336 ; time 337 ; cause 338 ; con- 
dition 339 ; concession 340, 7 ; 
consf"^"'"""*^ or effect 341 ; wtv 
and . r 342; quantity v.. U 

oao), o<rov 343. 

Adversative coordinate clauses ex- 
pressed by Ji, uAAo, etc. 322 ; 
negative adversative coordinate 
clauses 321, 2. 

Agr 240 sq. ; of the Aitrib. 

A ... -.1, 1 ; of the Rel. Pron. 
in Gend. and Numb. 332 ; in 
Case 332, 6 



.1' 



]-}■ 01, -.: '. 



.1 .47, 5; in the Part 

construction 313, 1, (a). 

Anacrusis 352. R. 

Anapaestic dimeter a < 2. 

Anapaestic dimeter ca " ^. 

Anapaestic monometer 
371. 

Anapacfiic icLnuucuir acai^utrcuc 
374. 

Anapaestic verse 370. 

Anastrophe 31, IV. 

Anomalous substantives third Dec 
67 sq.; Dial. 214 ; verbs 157 sq. 

Ai^wer YES or no 344, 7. 

Aorist 103 ; Aor. Pass, with <r 131 ; 
first Aor. Act without c 154, 7 ; 
second Aor. with a 154, 8 ; sec- 
ond Aor. Act. and Mid- accord- 
ing to analogy of verbs in pi 191 
St]. ; Aor. of some verbs with 
both a Mid. and Pass, from 197, 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



591 



K. 1 ; Aor. of some Md. verbs, 
whose Fut. has a Pass, from 197, 
IL 3 ; second Aor. Act. with In- 
trans. meaning and first Aor. Act. 
with Trans, meaning 141, 4. — 
S^Titax 25 G ; iterative meaning 
256, 4, (b) ; in comparisons 256, 
4, (c) ; instead of the Pres. 256, 
4, (d) ; Aor. with it ovv ov 
256, 4, (e) ; instead of the Fut. 
256, 4, (f ) ; to denote the com- 
ing into a condition 256, 4 (g) ; 
signification of the Aor. Subj., 
Opt., Imp., Inf and Part, 257. 

Aorist, first and second Alid. always 
rt'llo.xivo (or Intrans.) 251, 3; 
Aor. Subj. in subordinate clauses 
instead of the Fut. Perf. as used 
in Lat 255, R. 9. 

AphacrtsU 14, 5. 

Apodosis 339, 1. 

Ar ^''»7, 7. 

A 340, 2, (b). 

13, It 1. 

Apposition 26 G ; in Gen. with Poss. 
Pron ' TO i* tt diiof^/oc) 200, 
2; h or Partitive apposi- 
tion 2G6, 3. 

Arsis and Thesis 349, 2 ; place of 
349, 3. 

Artidt 91 ; 244 sq. ; demons, and rel- 
ative 247 ; as proper article 244 
with common nouns 244, 2 — 5 
witli ab>t lis of material 

proper u _ . i. o and 7 ; with 

the Adjective and Part used as 
substantives 244, 8, 9 ; with ad- 
verbs of time and place, used as 
atljeclives 244, lU ; with pro- 
nouns and numerals 246 ; {xa 
T^f reoilca);, o» ntql Tiva, ol vvv 
avdffotnot) 244, 10. 263; with 
every word or part of speech 
244, 11 ; position 245 ; with nag, 
okog 246, 5 ; with cardinal num- 
bers 246, 9. 

Article omittod with common nouns 



244, E. 8 ; with abstracts 244, R. 4 ; 
with proper names 244,7; with Adj. 
and participles 244, R. 8 ; with 
demonstrative pronouns 246, R. 1. 

Article with the subject and predi- 
cate 244, R. 1. 

Article in apposition 244, R. 6. 

Article repeated 245, 2. 

Article in place of the Poss. pro- 
noun (o 7r«T?j^ instead of ipcq 
71.) 244, 4. 

Asper, see Spiritus. 

Aspirate before another aspirate 
changed to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21, 3. 

Aspirates 5, ^^a). 

Asyndeton 325. 

Atonies 32. 

Attic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup. 
see Redup. 

Attraction of Gend. 240, 3 ; Numb. 
241, 6 ; with Prep, and Adv. 300, 
4, comp.300,3; with the Inf. 307, 
4. 308, 2; with iogje, 341,3; with 
the Part. 310, 2; of Modes 327^ ; 
of the relative 332, 6 ; of olog, 
oaog, fiXixog, 332, 7 ; inverted 
attraction 332, R. 12 ; with ovdug 
ogjig ou; with adverbs of place 
332, R 13; attraction of the 
relative in position 332, 8; at- 
traction of the relative in a 
clause subordinate to the adjec- 
tive clause 332, 9 ; attraction of 
the Case in comparative sen- 
tences introduced by wg, agmg, 
iagie 342, R. 3., comp. 344, R. 7. 
and 324, R. 2. 

Attribute 239, 2. 

Attributive relation of sentences 
262, sq. 

Augment, 108, 3 ; 119 sq. and 219 ; 
in compounds 125 and 215, sq. 

Blending of two or more interroga- 
tive sentences into one (rig rivoi 
al'riog iyivexo) 344, R. 7. 

Brachylogy 346, 2. 



INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 



692 

Barytones 29, R. 7, (f). 
Bucolic Caesura 355. 



Caesura 351. 
Cardinals 96, sq. 

Cases 41; Synt. 268, sq.; Case 
Absolute: Gen.' Abs. 312, 3; 
Ace. Abs. 312, 5. 

Caialecfic verse 352, 2. 

Characteristic of the verb 108, 5 ; 
of the tenses 110 ; pure and im- 
pure 142, 2 ; of verbs in /it 170. 

Circumjiex accent 29, 4. 

Classes of verbs 102. 248. 

Clauses^ principal and subordinate 
326 ; substantive clauses 328 srj.; 
adjective clauses 331 ; adverbial 
clause 335. 

Camparado d "23, R. 6. 

Com])arison o. ..., 81 sq.; 

Dialecta 216 ; of . Lives 84, 

R. 4. 216, R. 2; of adverbs 85. 

Comparative dcjjree 239 ; strength- 
ened and more definitely stated 
_'39; use of »J and of the Gen. 
■with the comparative 323, 2 sq. 

Comparative without a second mem- 
ber of the comparison 823, R, 7.; 
a])i)arently used instead of the 
positive 323, li. 7. 

Comparative i^ and the compar. 
Gen. 323 sq. ; compendious com- 
parison 323, R. 6. 

Comparative subordinate clauses 
342, 343. 

Composition of words 236. 

Compound wortls 236 sq. 

Concessive clauses 340, 7. 

Concretes 39. 

Conditional sentences, see il in the 
Greek Index. 

Conjugation 107 sq. ; in a> 115 sq. ; 
in pt 108 «]., in the Dialects: 
in w 219, in pt 224. 

Conjunctions 199, 319. 

Consctpience, clauses denoting, with 
itQUf ovy, joivvv, etc. 323, S. 



I 



Consonants 3, 2 ; di>Tsion 5 ; mavs^ 
ble at the end of a word 15 ; chan- 
ges 1 7 sq. ; metathesis 22 ; doub- 
ling 23 ; strengthening of and ad- 
dition 24 ; expulsion 25, 3 ; omis- 
sion 25 ; final consonant of a 
pure Greek word 25, 5 ; inter- 
change of consonants in the dia- 
lects 202 — 204 ; changes of in 
the dialects, 208. 

Coordinate attributive a^jectivet 
264, 2. 

Coordinate sentences 319 sq. ; cop- 
ulat coordinate sentences (ii — 
y."'' 1, 1, a; negative (oiil, 
oi> .y .-1,2; (ot'/ioyor — alia xai^ 
etc.) 321, 3. adversative coordi- 
nate sentences, (jtip—di) 822, 1 
— 5; {alio) 322, 6 ; disjunctive 
(ij — ij, etc.) 323 ; reason, cause 
(/Off) 324, 2; consequence or 
inference (apn, toiVit) 324, 8. 

Copula R. 6. 

Copula: itr- <«nti'nros 321. 

CorOnis 10, R. 1. 

Correlative pronou n ^ ;i ; i i a' h . : ; 

Crasis 10 8<j.; in tin- l>i.iU. t- _' >■ ; 
in relation to the accent ;n. II. 

Customary f iron/, 256, 4 (b). 

Dative 282 sq. 

Dative local (where f) 283, 1 : (a) 
avroig toi^ Unnoig 283, J 
aiQarta, cjolm^ nlt',&n^ > u <, 
etc. 285, R. 2 ; of time (ic^e/. >) 
t^hfi ttpi^a; of the oonditioa 
under which an>thing happens, 
283, 3. 

Dative as a penonal object 284 ; in 
a local relatioo (ickitker) with 
verbs of nootion {irixftr /u^at 
oi^ario) 284, R. 1 ; Dat of com- 
munion 284, 3 ; with verbs ex- 
pressing mutual interrourse, as- 
sociating with, parlicij^ation 284, 
3, (1); with verbs of contend- 
ing, approaching, nelding : witi 



INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 



593 



the adjectives and adverbs, tiZij- Declension of the substantive 41, 3 ; 
oiog, fvavjLog, niXag (f'/yvg) etc. first Dec. 42—44 ; quantity 'and 

Dialects 211 ; second 



284, 3, (2) ; with verbs of com- 
man'! - ng, counselling, 

inciii ^ ^, sernng, obey- 

ing, accompan}'ing, trusting, with 
the adjectives and adverbs, axo- 



46 — 48 ; accent 49 ; gen- 



accent 45 

Dec. 

der 50 ; Dialects 212 ; third Dec. 

51 — 69 ; quantity 64; accent 65; 

gender 66 ; Dialects 213 ; anoma- 



lov&og, diudoxog, i$»]$, etc. 284, , lous nouns 67 sq. 214; defective 
3, (3) ; with t-xpresaons of like- nouns 69. 214, K 2. 
iieas ayd unlikeness 284, 3, (4) ; Declension of adjectives and partici 
with expressions denoting to be pies 74—79, see adjectives. 
l^^.(,r.■■ ' ...:...» t .1 . :,jg 284, Declension of pronouns 87 sq. 
3, (.^ , 1, blam- Declension of numerals 99, 5. 



ing, reproaching, being angry 
with, envying 284, 3, (G) ; of 
helping, averting and being use- 
ful 2S4, 3, (7) ; with all verbs 
and adjectives when the action 
takes place ' honor, advan- 

tage or ' aiiiage, etc. of a 

person \^i a coinmo<li et in- 

cammodi) 284, 3, K. 4 ; with 
Terbfl of observing, finding, meet- 
in a person 
j>0!vsession 



Defectives of the third Dec. 69, 73, 
2. 214, R. 2. 

Demonstrative pronouns, see Pro- 
nouns. 

Denominative verbs 232, 1. 

Deponents 102, 3; Passive Depo- " 
ncnts 197, S}-n. 252. 

Derivation of words 232 sq., of ten- 
ses 128. 

Dtrivatives 231, 2, 4, (b). 

Dtsiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3. 

Diaeresis 4, R. 6 ; in the Dialects 
205, 6 ; metrical diaeresis 351 R. 

Dialects page 13 ; 202 sq. 

Diastole 37, 2. 

Difjamma 5, 2, (a) ; 25, 2 ; 200. 

Dimeter 360. 



ing with Bomct^ * 

284, 3. (8) ; 1 

with ttrai and /i/ria&ai 284, 3, 

(9); instead of Lat Dat (ali- 

quid mihi est hono- ^ "^ 1 ' (9) ; 

when an action • c in 

reference to a person 284, 3, 

(10);. Dat. 284, 3, (10), Diminutives 2S3, 2, (c). 

(d) ; wmu ioaa. ve^^• "^\, 3, Dipody 350, 4. 

(11); wiih Terfaal a«i^ s in Diphthongs 4, 3. 

i6( and leag instead of vtio with Disjunctive coordinate sentence* 

t^ !. 284, 3, (12). 323. 

Da ;bc thing, or instrumental Distributive apposition 266, 3. 

J ' ; of the ground or rea- Division of syllables 36. 

SOD with verbs denoting tlie state Double consonants 5, 4. 

of the '" > 285, 1, (1); of i)ouW/n<7 of consonants 208, 4. 

Dual number 41 ; 106 ; with a PI 
verb 241,5; interchanged with 
the PI. 241, R. 8; Dual verb 
with a PI. Subj. 241, R. 9 ; Dual 
of the Fem. with the Masc. (tov' 
Tw T« n'xva) 241, R. 10, (b). 



' 1113 .iw.i instrument with 

a and voui^nv 285, 1, 

manner, material, standard, 

1 measure 285, 1, (3). 
iiii the Inf. 3C7, 2, (b). 
Dative with the Part. 310, 2. 
Datict of participle instead of anoth- 
er Case 313, 1, (a). 



(2); 

r 
Dai.' 



Elision 13 sq. ; in the Dialects 206, 



50* 



694 



INDEX OF BCBJECTS. 



6 ; elision in respect to the ac- 
cent 31, in. 

Ellipsis 346, 1 ; of the subject and 
especially of the Subs. 238, 5 ; 
of the copula tlvui 238, R. 6 
and 7 ; of the Subs, to which 
the attribute belongs 2C3 ; of liv 
260, 11. 3. 6, 7 ; of the Protasis 
and Apodosis 340. 

Emphasis in sentences 321, 3. 

Enclitics 33 sq. ; accented 35. 

EnhansLve sentences expressed by 
xa/. Of fiovov, ulku xui 321, 3. 

Epicenes 40, R. 5. 

EsscntitU words 238, 1. 38, 4. 

Etymology 13. 

Euphonic Prothesis 16, 10. 

Expulsion of consonants 25. 

Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). 

Feminine PI. with Sing, verb 241, 
R, 6 ; with the neuter (ul fifia- 
fioXai XvTftjQOf) 241, 2; with a 
Neut (ro yiiuixwy ian kuXi\) 
241, 2, sq. ; Fern. Dual with the 
Masc.(Toir(u la tixva) 241, R. 10. 

Final clauses 330. 

Frequentative verbs 232, R. 2. 

Formal words 238, 1. 38, 3. 

Formation of words 231 sq. 

Future tense 103 ; Attic 117; Doric 
in aovfjm 154, 3; without a 154, 

4 ; in ovftai with mute verbs 154, 

5 ; Mid. instead of Act (axot-oj, 
axovffOfiui instead of axotacu) 
154, 1, and 198 ; Synt 255, 3, 
4 ; Fut Inf after verbs of think- 
ing, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. 

Future Perf. 103 ; in Act, form 
154, 6 ; Synt 255, 5 ; instead 
of the simple Fut 255, R. 8 ; 
the Lat. Fut. Perf., how e.\- 
jn'ossod ill Crook :?'>"). R. 9. 

Gender of the substantive 40 ; first 
Doc. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third 
Dec. 66 ; of Aiy. and Part 74. 



Gender of the adjective, etc. in the 
const xarii avvtciv 241 ; in gen- 
eral statements 241, 2 ; with sev- 
eral subjects 242; of the SuperL 
with Part Gen. 241, 7 ; of the 
relative pronoun 332. 

Genitive, attributive 265 ; used el- 
liptically 263, (b). 

Genitive in the objective relation 
270. 

Genitive, separative, with verbs of 
removal, scjiaration, loosing, de- 
sisting, freeing, oiisaing, depriv- 
ing, differing from 271, 2, 8 ; 
with verbs of beginning 271, 4. 

Genitive of ori-'in .tud -unlior, with 
verbs of o. ig pro- 

duced from 2 1 3, i 

Gej' <metBire<, {aj wi: 

y^^ ; 'III. (3^ iSto; olni' 

273, 2. 

' •• of quality 273, 2, (c). 

(./< " -'-•- — ■•'- -"■} : and 

;, * '"*. 

i,ytlaOai 273, 3, (a) ; in attribu- 
tive rtdation with sub8tantire$t 

?"'^ ••■'■• i:. .:.... cubstan- 

ti and ad- 

verbs 273, K rith wordf 

•f pard- 

''^ 'o ^^ touch, be in connec- 

tion with ; of acquiring and at- 
taining ; of physical and intellec- 
tual contact, of la^in ' >>old of; 
of hasty motion, s: after an 

object 273,3, (b), and R. 7; with 
verbs of entreating and supjili- 
cating 273, R. 6 ; witli t1ii« ad- 
verbs evOVf idv, fit with 
verbs of meeting and approach- 
ing 273, 3. R. 9 ; Part Gen. in 
poetry 273, R, 7. 

Geniiice of place 273, 4, (a). 

Genitive of time 273, 4, 

Genitive of material 27^, o, with 
verbs of making, forming 273, 6» 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



595 



(a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of 
eating, drinking, tasting, enjoy- 
ing, having the enjoyment of 
something iutellectuaUy, etc. (c) ; 
of smelling (d) ; of remember- 
ing and forgetting ; with expres- 
sions of being acquainted and 
unacquainted with, of experience 
ADd inexperience, ability, dex- 
terit)', of making trial of, with 
verbal adjectives in -ixog, etc. ex- 
pressing the idea of dexterity 
(e) ; with words of sensation and 
perception (uxoifir, ux^uuai^ui^ 
'^oytadui, oa(f(Juiria&ui (f) 
... i R. 19.; with verbs of hear- 
ing 273, It 18; with verbs of 
seeing, hearing, experiencing, 

wing, 
,..-, ad- 

20. 
Qt of cause 27 i ; with verbs 

..i.tg a desire, longing for 
, / ; care, concern for (b); pain, 
grief, pity, with adjectives having 
a similar meaning, pa ' ly in 

ex<LiuKitions, with i lions 

i^i) ; wlih verbs expi\~-iiig au- 
ger, indignation, envy, admira- 
• and blame (d), (e), 
iiiUi verbs expressing re- 
j^ iial, revenge, accusing and 
condemning 274, 2; lov with 
Inf. 274, 3, (a) ; with the 
'^ >' II', nalbjgj fitTQiug, w?, 
io>,', oi' rui,-, etc. connected 
with ix^iVf itXiiv, iivai 27-1, 3, 



r CUT in. 



Or/wiitf with verbs of rulin 

riority, and inferiority, 

tion, with the adjectives ^/x^ur/jj, 

aKfiaii]g 275, 1. 
Genitive after the comparative 275, 

2 ; use of the Gen. and ij with 

the comparative 323, 2 sq. 
Genitive of price 275, 3. 



Genitive with substantives and ad- 
jectives 275, B,. 5. 

Genitive, double, governed by one 
substantive 275, R. 7. 

Genitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a). 

Genitive with the Part, 310, 2. . 

Genitive absolute 312, 3 ; when the 
subject is the same as that of the 
predicate 313, 2; with ug after 
ddivai^ voelv, etc. 312, R. 12. 

Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a). 

Grave accent 29 ; instead of the 
acute 31. 

Heteroclites 59, R. 2; 67, (b) ; 71. 
Utterogeneous substantives 70, B. 
Hexameter verse 355. 
Hepthemim 355. 
Hiatus 8 ; 206, 7. 
Historical tenses 103, 2; 254, 3. 
Hypcrcatalectic verse 352, 2. 
Hypodiastole 37. 
Hypothetical sentences, see u. 

Iambic dimeter 367. 

Iambic monometer 366. 

Iambic trimeter acatalectic 368. 

Iambic tetrameter catalectic 369. 

Iambic verse 365. 

Imitative verbs 232, 1, (a). 

Imperative 104, III ; Synt. 258, 1, 
(c) ; use of the Imp. 259, 4 ; 
tliird Pers. Sing. Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. 255, R. 6. 

Imperfect tense 103; analogous to 
verbs in /it 196 ; Synt. 256, 2 — 4. 

Impersonal construction, see per- 
sonal construction. 

Impersonal verbs 238, R. 2. 

Inclination, see Enclitic. 

Indeclinable nouns 73, 1. 

Indicative 104, 1 ; Synt. 258, (a) ; 
Put. with av 260, 2, (1); 
Impf., Plup. and Aor. with aV 
260, 2, (2) ; difference between 
the Impf., Aor. and Plup. 256; 
Put instead of the Imp. 255, 4 j 



696 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



■with oy, e.g. ov nuvatj Xi/oiv ib.; 
Ind. of the Hist, tenses with words 
expressing a wish 259, R. 6; Ind. 
in subordinate sentences, see the 
separate conjunctions; Ind. in 
oral, ohliq. 344, 6. 

Indirect form of discourse, see ob- 
lique form. 

Infudlive 105, (a) ; Synt, the 
Pres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c) ; 
Aor. Pres. and Fut after verbs 
of thinking, etc. 257, R. 2 ; with 
«V 2G0, 2, (5). 

Jnjinitive 305 ; without the Art 306 ; 
with verbs of willing and the 
contrary, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; with 
verbs of thinking, sui'iif-i" r, 
saying 306, 1, (b) ; after <■ 
sions denoting ability, cause, 
power, capacity 306, 1, (c) ; with 
adjectives and substantives, with 
uviii, TiKfVxivat and ylyriadai 
with a substantive, after avfti^al- 
vd, dth xiiH ^^^ ^^JG Hke, after 
sub.-tantives, adjectives, demon- 
strative pronouns, after verbs of 
giving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). 

JnJinitivCy or Ace. Avith Inf. dilFor- 
cnt from Part. 311 ; Inf., or Ace. 
with Inf., different from or*, wj, 
that 329, R. 5 ; in forms express- 
ing command or wish 306, R. 11 ; 
in forms expressing indignation 
306, R. 11, c ; with at ycip, 
(l&s 306, R. 11, (d). 

Injinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat 
and Ace. 307. 

Infinitive with the Art instead of 
the Inf. without the Art, 308, R. 1. ; 
in Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
308, 2 ; in exelanuitions and 
questions implying indignation 
308, R. 2 ; as an adverbial ex- 
pression (to vvy (irai and the 
like) 308, R. 3. 

Infinitive Act. instead of tho Pass. 
306, R. 10. 



Injlection 38. 

/n/?cc/ion-ending3 of the verb 109 
sq. ; Remarks on 116 ; of verbi 
in fit 171, 172. 

Intensive verbs 232, R. 2. 

Interchange of vowels 201 ; omao* 
nants 202—204. 

Inter: ' /i-marks 37. 

Inten, J ....■■ pronouns, see PrO' 
nouns. 

Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes 
in 344, 6 ; connection with a 
rebtive sentence 344, R. S ; 
change of a subordinate sentence 
into a direct interrogative seo- 
tencc (oiar t* noirjautat^ 844, 
R. 6 ; blending of two or more 
interrogative sentences into one 
(iLg lirog ofrio; ^au) 844, R. 7. 

Intransitive verbs 248, (T ^ ^^ as 
Trans, with the Ace. .... ^.- 2 ; 
instead of the Pass. 249, 8 ; in 
the Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6. 

Interrogative sentence with the Art. 
344, R. 8. 

Inversion 348, 5. 

Iota subscript 4, R. 4. 

Iterative form in axov 221. 

Lengthening of the vowels 16, 8. 207. 
Lenis Spiritus 6. 

I . sounds of 2*. 

J. m of sentences 822, 1 — 5. 

Litotes 239, R. 8. 

Local substantives 233, 2, (d). 

Masculine PI. with Sing, verb 241, 
R. 6 ; connected with the Neut 
(oi TTOJUoi dfiror) 241, 2; Masc 
with a Neut (i;- • '-" V fan x«r- 
Xoi) 241, 1 ; >i with Fern. 

241, R. 11. 

Mctaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1. 

Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208, 
3 ; of the aspirates 21, 8; verb 
156. 

Middle form 102 ; Sj-nt. 248, (2) ; 



INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 



597 



with reflex, sense 250 ; with the 
meaning to cause to do 250, R. 
2; when an action is performed 
to the advantage or disadvantage 
of the subject 250, R. 3 ; with a 
reflex Pron. 250, R. 3; with a 
subjective m ' ' \tively 
250, R. 4 ; WiL_ „ , „„ ._.e 251. 

Jdodea 104 ; Synt 258 sq. ; in subor- 
dinate clauses 327^*, 1 ; attraction 
of 327^ ; comp. the separate con- 
junctions, in Greek Index. 

Mode vowels 111; summary of 11 2 ; 
of verbs in /it 171; in the DiaL 
220. 

MovaU*' fiiwU consonants 15. 

Multi '.'$ 96, 1, (d). 

^ Jib; accumula- 

L— .- - :-^, -s 318, C; apjja- 

rent Pleona-sm of 318, 6 — 9. 

Neuter of i of persons con- 

nected wi y 241,2, 

R.3; ri. .. .... .-...g.with 

verb, adl 241, 3 ; PI. of 

pronouns 243, 4 ; PL with Sing, 
verb 241, 4. 

N""'''"'' <nii->.tion 344, 2. 

i\ I the change of the 

AcL construction of the verb 
with the Gen. or Dat into the 
P;iss o. g. maitiofiui 251, 4. 

J\ :ce Case 269; with Cvofiu 

iaii fioi, ovofta T^fo), with verbs 
of naming 2G9, R. 3 ; Noni. of 
an abstra*' 'n-t.-aj of a Lat Dat. 
(mihi est i 269, R. 2 ; Nom. 

instead of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in 
ajjf'^un xatt oloy xul fiigog 266, 
'5 ^'? 4. 

A u*e with the Inf 307 ; in- 

stead of the Ace. with the Inf. 
307, 4. 

Nominative with a Part. 310, 3 ; in- 
stead of another Case 313 ; with- 
out a finite verb 313, R. 1. 

Numerals 96 sq. 218. 



Nuniber 41. 106 ; Synt. 243 ; in the 
const. xuTct avvsaiv 241 ; with 
verb, adjectives iu T05 riog 241, 
3 ; the number of adjectives 
when they are connected with 
several subjects 242, 1 ; number 
of verb with several subjects 242, 
2 ; with several subjects disjunc- 
tively connected 242, R. 3 ; num- 
ber of the ReL Pron. 332. 

Object in a sentence 239, 2. 

Objective construction of sentences 
267 sq. 

Oblique discourse 345 sq. 

Omission of consonants 25. 

Optative mode 104, 1[. see the Subj. 
S}Tit. ; nature of the Opt 258, 1, 
(b). 259; with «V 260, 2, (4); 
without av 260, R. 7 ; in exhor- 
tations 259, R. 1 ; Opt Delib. 
259, 2 ; to express frequent rep- 
etition {as often as) 327^, 2; to 
express a supposition, uncertain- 
ty, possibility, presumption, ad- 
mission 259, 3, (a) ; wish 259, 3, 
(b) ; instead of the Imp. 259, 3, 
(c) ; desire, wish, inclination 259, 
3, (d) ; in direct questions 259, 3, 
(e) ; Opt without uv instead of 
with «V 260, R. 7 ; Opt in sub- 
ordinate clauses, see the separate 
conjunctions; in oi'atio obliqua 
345, 4. 

Oratio obliqua 345. 

Ordinals 96 sq. 

Organs of speech 3. 

Participle 74 sq. 105, (b) ; Synt 
309 sq. 

Participle as the complement of the 
verb 310 ; Nom., Gen., Dat, Ace. 
of the Part 310, 2 ; after verba 
seutiendi 310, 4, (a) ; verba de- 
clarandi 310, 4, (b) ; verbs de- 
noting an affection of the mind 
(verba affectuum) 310, 4, (c) ; to 



598 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



be satisfied i^ith, to enjoy, be full 
310, 4, (d) ; overlooking, permit- 
ting, enduring, persevering, 310, 
4, (e) ; beginning and ceasing 
310, 4, (f) ; to be fortunate, to 
excel, to be inferior, to do well 
or ill 310, 4, (g) ; after 7r«t()w/i«i, 
7iu()u<Txivu^ofiaL, etc. 310, 4, (}]): 
after the phrases it is Jit, ustj i^. 
etc. 310, 4, (i) ; after i'xfiv, to be 
in a condition, or stat^, e. g. t/ta 
xTTjaufxtvog 310, 4, (k) ; with 
iv'/xuvbi, ),avx>uyo), diutuut, diu- 
yo), (f.&uva), oi/ofiat, 310, 4, (1). 

Participle different from Inf after 
several classes of verbs 311, and 
R 

Participle as the expression of ad- 
verbial suljordli 

Participle with oj^ ..*.. ... ., ^m 

oJ^if, ^gnfQ, iixr, oia, o\ov 812, 6, 
R 13. 

Participle with lirui, in-t- al c-f a 
simple verb 238, K. 5. 

Participle with av 260, 2, (5). 

Participials 105 ; see Inf. and Part 

Particijiial construction 309 ; ana- 
coluthon 813, 1. 

Particles 38, R. 

Particles expressing purpostf design 
330. 

Parts of Speech 38. 

Passive verb 102; SjTit 248, (3). 
251. 

Patr \:< 233, 2, (b). 

Pen: verse 856. 

Perfect tense 103 ; with <r 181 ; ;re- 
nvapai, etc. 223, 14 ; Subj. and 
Opt. Porf or Plup. Mid. or Pass, 
formed without the aid of an aux- 
iliary verb 154, 9 ; Perf and 
Plupf. of verl>s in pt with short- 
ened form 193; Perf and Plup. 
analogous to verbs in pi 193 — 
195 ; second Perf with Intrans. 
meaning 141, 4. 249, 2 ; Syut 
255, 2; in the tlurd Pers. Sing. 



Imp. Mid. or Pass. 255. A. 6 ; 
with the signif of the Pre>^ 255, 
R. 5; instead of the Fut. 255, 
R. 7. 

Person of the verb 106 ; with sev- 
eral subjects 242; in adjective- 
clauses 332, 2. 

P^- '>-^°. interchange of in the oraL 
1. 345, R. 6. 

Personal construction, instead of 
the Impers. with Inf 307, R. 6 
and 7; with Part. 31" P 3; 
with oTt, w^ 329, R 7. 

Personal endings 111; view of 11 3 ; 
difference between endings in 
the principal and subordinate 
tenses 114 ; of verbs in pt 172; 
Dialects 220. 

' mal pronouns 87 — 90. 

i ....(ii number 41 ; with the sab- 
stantire in the Gen. 241, R 2; 
PI. subst with Dual verb 241, R 
9 ; PI. of subst in proper names, 
names of tin»'t^'<i- -»»>'^ '•^•stracts 
243, 3; . ^. 241, 

R 12 ; in .lu aidress to one per- 
son 241, R la; the first Pers. 
PL instead of the Sing. 241, R 
12 ; Neut PI. in verbal adjeo* 
tives instead of the Sing. 241, S; 
n. of verbs with cf" nouns 

in the Sing. 241, . , .lii sub- 
stantives in the Dual 241, 5; 
TatTfc, Tci^f, /xtira used of one 
i«l 'V ^V 3 ; PL interchanged 
w: ^^A 241, R. 8. 

Pluralia tantum 73, 2. 

i c/ 103. Comp. Per£ Sj-nL 

•> 

1 of words 348. 

Position of ac 261 : article o, ^, to 
245 ; pr ns 300, 6 ; pro* 

nonn^s sec tnr M.parate proDOons. 
Adverbs and particles, see die 
separate adverbs and particles; 
of Ts 321, R 3 ; /iiy and ^' 522, 
R2. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



599 



Positive degrei, see Comparative. 
Possessive pronouns 90. 

P? ion of sentences 238. 

Pregnant construction 300, 3. 

Pr ■ fj^ 199 ; Sj-nt 286 sq. ; as 

. . jS of place 300; Tmesis 

300, R. 4 ; in const Praeg. Tit.T- 

xuv iv yovvaai) 300, 4 ; with 

the Art, attracted (ol in t^$ uyo- 

(fai uy&Qtanoi t(f v/ov) 300, 4 ; 

repeated and omitted 300, 5 ; po- 

sitioQ 300, 6. 
Present teoBe 103 ; Pres. and Impf. 

analogous to verbs in /ut 19G; 

S>Tit 255, 1 ; Hist Pres. 255, 1 ; 

instead of the Perf 255, R. 1 ; 

inatead of the Fut 255, R. 3. 
iVtmiriMf 331, 2. 
Principal clauses 326. 
Principal tenses 103, 2. 254, 2. 
Proclitics " \ 
Pronoun:! : . , Dialects 217; De- 

clenAon 87 sq. ; Synt 301—304. 
Pronoun^ correlative 94 ; demon- 

•tnuive, Duel. 91 ; Dulects 217, 

4. 803, 1 and 2 ; avj6g 803, 3 ; 

prospective and rcLros|)ective 

804 ; omitted before a relative 

831, R. 8. 
Pronoun indefinite t<; t« DecL 93. 

303, 4 ; position SOS, R. 5. 
Pronoun interrogative, ti( Dccl. 93 ; 

seo ' • " with Art 

prv: 
Pronoun personal DecL 87. 302; 

third Pera. prospective 304; re- 

tra«i>ective 301, 3. 
Pronoun jKiNSt'Ssive 90 ; Dialects 

217, 3. 
Pronoun nM.'lpnxal Decl. 89. 
'* 'exive Decl. 88. 302, 2 ; 

-. instead of the first 

and second 302, 8 ; instead of 

the reciprocal 302, R. 7. 
Pronunciation 29, 86 ; of letters 3. 
Purpose, particles denoting 330, 1. 



Proportionals 96, 1, (e). 
Protasis 339. 

Prothesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8. 
Punctual ion-maiYks 37. 

Quantity 27 sq. ; in Dialects 209; 
first Dec. 45, (a) ; third Dec. 64 

Redundant nouns 70. 

Reduplication 108, 4. 123, 219; in 
sec. Aor. 219, 7 ; Att in Perf. 
and PIup. 124 ; second Aor. 124; 
R. 2 ; in compound words 125 
sq. ; as strengthening of the stem 
163. 

Reflexive verbs 102 ; Synt 248, (2). 

Reflexive pronouns 88. 

Relation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2. 

Relative construction changed to the 
Demonstrative 334, 1. 

Relative pronoun Decl. 92; Synt 
331 sq. ; instead of the demons. 
331, R. 1; agreement of gender 
and number 332 ; Case (attrac- 
tion) 332, 6 ; attraction with 
olo,', uaog, iiXlxog 332, 7 ; inverse 
attraction 332, R. 11 ; with ovdelg 
ogng ov 332, R. 12; with ad- 
verbs of place 332, R. 13 ; at- 
traction in position 332, 8 ; rela- 
tive pronoun of an intermediate 
clause attracted 332, 9 ; construc- 
tion of the relative pronoun 333 ; 
rel. pron. changed to a demons. 
or pcrs. 334, 1 ; rel. pron. in- 
stead of a demonstrative 334, 3. 

Relative clause, see adjective clause. 

Reciprocal pronouns 89. 

Reciprocal verbs 248, R. 1. 

Resolution of contract verbs 222. 

Restriction of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 

Rhythm 349. 

Roots 231, 2. 

Scheme, see ayvtia in Greek Index. 

Sentences 238, 1. 

Sentences denoting effect or re- 



600 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



suit with uQu^ ovVf Tolvvv, etc. 
324, 3. 

Sequence of tenses 327*. 

Skortening of the vowels 16, 4. 
207,4. 

Singular verb with Masc. or Fcm. 
Pi. 241, R. 6 ; with Neut PI. 'J 11, 
4 ; with several common nouns 
in PI. 242, R. 2. 

Singular of substantives 243, 1 ; 
changed to the PI. 241, R. 12; 
Sing. Imp. e. g. tXni in an ad- 
dress to several 241, R. 13. 

Spiritus Lcn. and Asp. C. 

Stem of the verb 108, 1 ; pure and 
impure 138; strengthening the 
consonant and prolonging the 
stem-vowel 139. 

Stems 231, 4, (a). 

Strengthening of the vowels 16, 1 ; 
consonants 24 ; stem of impure 
verbs 139. 

Subject 238, 2 ; cliange of the at - 
tivo construct into tlie Paas^ e. g. 
nidjiiofiai from Tuarivot tiW 
251, 4 ; ellipses of 238, 5. 

Subjunctive !NIode 104, II. Perf 
and Pip. Mid. or Pass, without 
an auxiliary verb 154, 9 ; Subj. 
and Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
in Vfit without au.viliar)' verb 
176,5. Sj-nt 258, 1, (b). 259; 
Subj. Aor. instead of Fut Perf 
of Latin 255, R. 9. 

Subjunctive with uy 260, 2, (3 ) ; 
(with and without av) instead of 
the Fut, Ind. 259, R. 4; Subj. 
hortative 259, 1 (a) ; deUbera- 
t-vo 259, 1, (b). 260, 2, S, (b) ; 
Si'bj. to den. indefinite frequen- 
cy {as fljlcn as) 327'', 2, 333, 3 ; in 
comparisons 333, R. 2 ; with ftij 
instead of the Imp. 259, 5 ; in 
sul)ordinate clauses, see the ^o]^- 
arate conjunctions ; in Or. oUi ; 
o-t o. 5. 

<Sii^r(fina/£ sentences 326 sq.; class- 



es 326, 3 ; characteristics 326, R. 

4 ; subordinate sentences ( ' 1 

into direct interrogative =^ciii-ii- 

ces 344, R. 6. 
Substantive 39 sq. ; Gen. 40 ; Numb., 

Case and Dec. 41 ; Dec. L 42 

sq. ; Dec. IL 46 sq. ; Dec. IIL 

51 sq. 
Substantive 39 sq. ; number 242. 
Substantive instead of adjective 264, 

R. 3. 
Substantive clauses expretnngdesign, 

aim, with ci^*, on^, 7wa, etc 



Hv (•lau.'i<'5 with *T<, a»,\ that 



329. 



»•! _ . : '• exact (leuiuuon 

of. - •, li. .; ; Gend. with the 
Part. Gen 241, 7. 
SyllmUeM^ d 

^' ■ ■•- -is 1:;. i ■ - ■■. 5. 

■ 16, 8. ; ill »ul<;Lin- 

tives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. 
Sjfntax 238 sq. 

Tenses of the yerb IDS ; of themb- 
onlinate modes 257; denvatioii 
1 28 ; formatioQ of iIm secondaiy 
tenses, use of the same in con- 
nection with the primary 141 ; 
Tenses primary and Sec 103, R. 
141. 

Tenses. *5vnfAx ?''»4 • <-i^.iii*»iic« of 
in si: 

TVfUtf-fomi : verbs in m 127; 

pure verb.- iL".«; mute 142 sq. ; 
liquid 14P : vitIk \n m 17*: In 
Dialects . 

TVfM^-characteristic, see cbarscicr> 
istic. 

7Vn.<^<ndings 110. 

Tense^tQXD. 110, 2. 

T' mt of the verb 138, S. 

^een Gen. and 
Dat of time, 27S, R. 13. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



60i 



Dnesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4. 
Trarmtice verbs 248, (a) («) ; with 

Intrans. or Reflex, signlf. (jQenoj 

h ■ ' -• - - - 249, 1, 2; 

\\ . '.- lo do 249, 

R. 3. 
TV' from direct discourse to 

iiiuir<< I and vice versa 345, R. 6. 

Trnn'TJOsiUon of the attributive 

''live and Subs. (o» /^r^aro^ 

Tuir utd{iiotitiv instead of o» x^^r 

Iff ' ''; ** jnoi) 264, R. 5. 
Tr, 

Trochaic verse 361. 
Trochaic moii 862. 

Tn • ' - ••- 



..J. 



ler catalectic 364. 



Variable vowels 16,6; In the stem 
of impure verbs 140 ; change of 
II into 01 140. 4 ; of ? imo o 
231, 6. 

Verb 102 sq. 219 §4.; divu^on of 
V. '^18 in M acroni'" ' • ■ '' ■ char- 
. ri«tic 127 ; 127, 

K.; pure verbA (and contract) 
I jt — 137; Peris|>oinfna 127, R; 
iiM;.urt3 127. 138—141 ; mute 
ur. 142—148; licjuid 127. 149 
—169 ; special peculiarities of 



verbs (purvj and impure) 154; 
anomalous in oj 157 sq. ; in ^ui 168 
sq. ; in w whicli in certain tenses 
are analogous to verbs in (it, : sec- 
ond Aor. Act. and Md. 191 sq. ; in 
Dialects 227; Perf. and Plup. 
193—195; in Dialects 228; 
Pres. and Impf. 196 ; verbs De- 
nom.. Frequent., Imitat, Intens., 
Fact, Desid. 232. 

Verbs active, with Mid. Fut. 198 ; 
those which have both an active 
and middle form for the Fut. 
198, R. 

Verb Act Trans., Reflex., Recip., 
Pass., Intrans., Mid. 248—251. 

Verb Jinitum and injinitum 105, R. 

Verbal adjectives in to?, and xioq 
234. 1, (i) ; PI. instead of Sing. 
241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12). 

Verb characteristic 108, 5. 

Versification 349. 

VoweU 4 ; cluinge 8 — 16 ; weaken- 
ing or attenuation of 16, 2 ; in- 
terchange in the Dialects 201; 
change m the Dialects 205—207. 

Weakening of vowels 16, 2. 

Zeugma 346, 3. 



61 



II. GREEK LXDEX. 



Abbiikviatioxs. .\ 
Dfired ; c, a. "'''/' ''■■' "■ 
mf. with tfu 
l)c<-. J" 
intr, iuh 
trans, tranailive. 



' nh; Bi 



mp. compare, 

I' *^ II-, tr^ f^f^ 



: C 



A pure 43, 1, (a) ; a priv., 
coll., int. 2.")6. ll.3,(b); 
a eaph. 16, 10. 

a.ya^6i (-ouip. 84. 1 

ay(liK\f(Tiiou V. 
1,(1); r. i,.u 

(c). 

hyavaicrtti' i. u. ^-.i. t, 

(1); 0. part. 310, 4, (c). 
iiyarruy c. a and d. 274, 

n. 1; c. d. 283, 1,(1); 

r. i)art. 310, 4, (c). 
iyacrH^ai c. ; ''1 flCC. 

12T.'J, H. :. . riyot 

274, 1, un.l K. 2. 
iyyiKKfiy c. Ii»f an. I 

311, 10. 
Ay>/AXc 7 

and i' 
Ay* l; Ui ^■ 

p. _ll, H. 1 . 

iyyotiv c. part, 310. 4, (a). 

:::). 3. 

\{. 2. 
A-) \» I". }r. 27.'i. K. 9. 
t-,^1', ir/VA, 312. K m 



aSiKf «V r, a. 27y, I ; c. two 
aoo.280,2; c part "in 

otjStt'r i1 " " T\. 2. 

"A^il)tt•S <! .7. 

al soo f » ; ai ydp c. inf. 

30i>. R. 11, (d). 
aiBfTadcu c. a. 279. 

part. i\nd inf. 311. 14. 
Bi'5v)ros oonip. 82. 1. (d). 
ai5a>s dec. 60, (b). 






c. g. «od a. 
^. >. .> iw 19; c. pwt. 
310, 4. (a). 
iifffftw ' 5. 

cJ<rxr<J< il. 

<uV. I. 279, 5; 

t .. (1); cpart. 

n ;ll, 14. 

iMua.2^, S. 
jjuc. 1' 274. 2. 



i;. 7. 



out Kcd in a «rnpt .125. 



4: r/&AAo. AXA' 






K. 1. 

(! 

c inl , 1. 

iucparfii c. p. 27."). 1 
• . V 82. 1. \v\. 

Oil. -273,6,(0 

and U. 19 
iXyirv c. d. 2>:>. 1. (1). 
oAYeivifj com p. 84. 4. 



iXif c. jr. 27.1. ."». ii«^ 
aA^<rir«r.)«u c. p 8 h». 4. (h). 
cLKKd. 322. 6; in a .jucs- 

tion i6. ; oAAq -^of .■i24, 

R. 1. 



275,3. 
Axx4\«fr dec. t-^f . um: uI 

3U2, R 7. 
&\Aa or &XAo rt ^ ellipti* 

cal346, 2. (d). 
iWtues c. p. 271, 
&AAor &AAor (IXAc 

^v) with aaotbi 

266,3. 
iXXo Ti 4 ftod iAAtf Ti in 

• qaeatkm : momm 344, 

'■ :). 

•ate. £-271.3. 
&Ai di MdB. 1 

oXmMmi i. 2. 

SXwr <i 

(*). 
ifta c d. 

I. art ,11 . 

pan 
Afi«iB««», -(^Oai i. g. 27^ 

3 ; r. a. 279, 1. 
Afi«inrr S4, 1. 



.1- • 1 



R-6, 






GREEK INDEX.' 



603 




d. in a pregnant signif. 
i 300, 3, (a). 

iM ;oo, R. 1. 

ifd^ifyyuyau C two a. 

2»Lt. 3. 
4^»f^irT«ii' c.d. 284,3, (2). 
ifiip^ •! u. 

ay- pri K. 3, (b). 

&*' 2G0; c. ind. fut. 260, 
(1 j ; ind. imjif., plup. 
id aor. 'JCtii. <2) ainl 

.7;' 
oi)t. 1' i , . ;. 

<J, (5); po- 

f ■'■■' 11 of 

if Its 260, 

tfj' >pt. 

i I'ret. 

1 ..,. .v P « 

uikI 6. 
A*" 

itra 

iya IIUI. 01 4*^aJTroi 31, 

U. 3 
&>^ (irrp. 290, 1 
LmfidJ^Xt^bmi c iuf. 306, 

1. fal. 
Arc rm( ri 278, 4. 

iwoMa-f-ja^ttf V. u. 279, 3. 
iafatufufiiaKtir c. two a. 

2W. 3. 
iro^ dci.". J i . , , 
ai^^fur c. d. 2H4, 3, (5). 
drrvMTiil^Mfr C. g. 273, 5, 

ttr«v c. (^. 271, 3. 

?""'^"'-*ff •• " 275, 1. 

f. 311, 15; 
•). 
if* 



a.... ,' 1. 

ii.T , 280.3. 

arytX*o^ai V. g. 273, 3, 

ayri i.r»»p 2«7 I. 

ijT -»). 

iia « -«3, 

3,(1.). 
Aktioi and Oi r. -73. 

K. y. 



ovfitfyewi/ dec. 48. 

Sl^ios (Ifii c. inf. 307, E. 6 

i^toy, a^t'ws, a^iovy, -ova-- 

^ai c. g. 275, 3 ; &|iJs 

Tir*^? fifil Tivi 2S4, 3, 
, (10) (b). 

o^toiV c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
axayopfveiy (tS, Koicws) C. 

a. 279, 2; c. inf. 306, 1, 

(a). 
dircuSfin-os C. g. 273. 5, (e). 
iiTcuTfiy c. two a. 280, 3. 
iivaWdTruy C. g. 271, 2 j 

-cadcu c. paru 310, 4, 

(f). 
ATovrat- c. g. 273, R, 9 ; 

i.3. (1). 
"- " g. 27.3, R. 19; 

.-.d. 284,3, (3). 
QFiiWtrK c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
&v<ipos c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
ar<ifwt Ix*"' c. g. 273, 5, 

y, a«-«x«ri^(u C. g- 

&« inf. 306, l,(b). 

awKovSf -ii, -otJr dec. 77. 

"' • 82,l,(b). 

ar "*. I i with 

ins. ^1/ 

with the art. ins. ^v 

( oi A V ^ r r " f 

4, (u). 
iwh -ri.-«a300, R. 2. 
A* ai c. g. 273, 

A* oi c. g. 275, 3. 

avo^i6fi^K*iy c. a. 379, 3. 
AroXo^iy c. g. 273, 5, (c). 
AvoAoycurdcu c. d. 284, 3, 

*A-r6\Ku'y dec. .M, 4, 1, 
R. 1. 

u^ r.ti^,in,<)eu c. g. 273, 

Awov^i II. 1. 

,kwofHi. „ -73, 5,Jb). 

iMtHTTtfuiy c. g. 271, 2; 
Ti»^ Ti, riy6s rt, Tiy6s 
riya 2K(». .'i. and R. 3. 

ir -.273.IM6. 

a»-- . . • c. g. 279, 

R. .; 

iwixpcui'ni' >-■. ji.u I. and inf. 

311, 11. 
inhjHvytiy c. a. 279, 3. 



oTrpeTTws c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
aTTTco-^at c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
&pa 324, 3. ' • ^ ^ 

opa ins. apa 324, R. 5. 

a/)a interrogative 344, 5. 

, (b). 

apea-Keiv riva 279, 1 ; op- 
eoTKca^ai c. d. 284. 3, 
(5); c. dat. of the in- 
strument 285, 1, (1). 

apriyeiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

"Apris dec. 59, R. 2. 

&pi<TTOS 84, 1. 
'Api(TTO(f)dyT}s dec. 59, R. 2. 
apK€7(Triai c. d. 285, 1, (1). 
apix6TTfiv c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
apyi7(rdai c. inf. 306, l,(b). 
apy6s 55, R. 3. 
ap^dfifvoi a,ir6 riyos, par' 

ticularly 312, R. 3. 
ipX*'"* ^<^ ^^V'"> c. g. 271, 

4; to rule, c. g. 275, 1. 
&pXfO''^a* c. g. 271, 4 ; c. 

part. 310,4, (f); c.part. 

and inf. 311, 16. 
apxoixfyos, in the berjin- 

uini/, originally, 312, 

R.3. 
afff^ety c. a. 279. 1. 
auTKov, a(TK6p.T}y 221. 
&(Tpi(yos tonip. 82, R. 6. 
icaa, aaaa 93. 
a<TTi\p dec. 55, R. 3. 
aaTpcLTTTUv c. a. 278, 3. 
&,ffTv dec. 03. 
oTcu ins. vrai 144, R. 1. 
drap 322, 7. 
arc c. part. 312, R. 13. 
SLTtpos 10, R. 2. 
"ATAa Voc. 53, R. 2. 
VTo ins. vTo 144, R. 1. 
OTpf'/iafs) 25, 4, (c). 
ixTo and otto 93. 
ai>, aurdp 322, 7. 
awTiVa witli part. 312., R.6. 
airrcis dec. 91 ; Dial. 207, 

4, (c). 
a{n6s u.se 302, 4; 303, 

3 ; with the art. 246, 

3, 8. 
ainos in avrois 'ittttois, to- 

qtther with the horses etc. 
'2S3, 2, (a) ; 6 uvtSs c. 

d. 284. 3, (4). 
aOroD dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. 
a(paipe7(r^ai c. two a. and 
Tivct Tiuos, riv6s Ti 280, 
3, and R. 3. 



604 



GBEEK INDEX. 



ii<f>^oi/os comp. 82, R. 6. 
i.'pUuai, -Ua^ai c g. 271, 2, 
&.(pt/(D(s} 25, 4, (c). 
&X^e<TSrai c. d. 285, 1,(1); 
c. part. 310, 4, (c). 

B cuph. 24, 2. 

fiaiyctf TToSa and the like 

279, K. 5. 

fiapfus (pep f IV C. d. 285, 
( 1 ) ; ini Tivi and c. a. 
28.5, R. 1. [(c). 

BapvvfCT^ai 0. part. 310, 4. 

BaoriKtviiv c j;. 275, 1. 

^turiKfit dec. 57, 2. 

fiatTKaipfiv c. d. and a. 
284,3, (I.). 

BdrTfw 212, 3. 

BoC 97, 2. 

fifATaros 84, 1, 

$(Krtpoi 84. 1 . 

^fknaTos, ^fKriuv 84, 1. 

^Kaimiv c. a. 279, 1. 

fi\dirT(iv fitydKa, «'<• f a. 

280, R. 1. 
fikfiruv c. a. 278, ;J. 
/3o7jd«:j/ c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
fiop{>us Dec. 44, R. 2. 
fiovKfi c. sul>j. 259, 1, (b). 
/3ouA€(r^ouc.inf.306,l, (a). 
fiovKtvfffdai c. inf. 306. 1. 

(a) ; r. Sitcdj and ind. 

fut. 330. 6. 
$ovs dec. 57, 2. 
/8p«Tai dec. 61, R. 1. 
fipldfiy c. p. 273. 5, (h). 
fipinova^cu c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

r<£Aa dec. 54. (c). 
ydKus doc. 212, 7. 
7{{p 324, 2 ; in an answer 

344, 7. 
•ya<rri\p dec. 55. 2. 
7«' 317, 2 ; in an answer 

344, 7. 
7«\ai' c. a. 278. 3. 
7<'Aa>s dec. 71. B, (c). 
ytfieiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
ytvvav, jxiraitem esse 255, 

R. 1. 
ydvos dec. 61 (b). 
yf pants comp. 82, I, (c). 
ytpas dec. 54, R. 4. 
yfvay^ yfvtal^ai c. g. 273, 

5. (c). 
yrjpas dec. 54, R. 4. 
yiyvftr^ai syncopated, 

155, 2 ; witli the sense 



of the Pres. 255, R. 1 ; 

c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. g. 

posses. 273, 2 ; c. g. 

partit. 273, 3, (a) ; c.d. 

284,3, (9). 
yiyvfrai fioi ri fiovKofifyoy, 

iK-Kotifvw 284, 3.10, (c j ; 

yiyvfrai and an ab.'^t^act 

substantive with an inf. 

306, 1, (d). 
yiypuxTKifivc. g. 273. R. 20: 

Ti Tivi 285, 1, (3); c. 

]■ irt. 310. 4. (a);c. inf 

;i:i.l part. 311, 4. 
yiyvdxjKu c. »r and gen. 

abs. 312. R. 12. 
yiy ywcKu ins. tyvutua 255. 

R. 1. 
yXiix^^y dec. 56, R. 1. 
yKix*<r^<u c. g. 273. 3, (b). 
y6yv dec. 54. (c) ; 68, 1. 
ypavi dec. 57, 2. 
ypJupta^at c. g. 274, 2. 
yufu^6s c. g. 27 1 , 3. 
yvyfi dec. 68, 2. 

A cnnhon. 24. 2. 

«Mp Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a). 

8ai 315, 7. 

Scdtadtu c. two ace. 280, 3. 

Sd. ■ •' . 70 B. 

«a (b). 

3c o22. ill a <{Ur<«tiun R. 6. 

5« sulbx l>-i". T =111.1 Iv 1 : 
aficr a 

St? c. _ 

and dat. 279, K. 4 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1. (d); c. d. 

and ace. c. iuf. 307, 

R. 3. 
fiei a' iwws 330. R. 4. 
Sfucyvvcu c part. 310. 4, 

(b) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 11. 
Sflva dec. 93, R. 2. 
Sfii'6s c. inf. 306, I (c), 
Sftffcu c. a, 279, 5. 
S(7(Tdcu c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; 

e. inf 306. 1. (a). 
Bffuis e. g. 208. R. 
StvSpos doc. 72. (a). 
Srxaj dec. 61, (a). 
StpKfcr^au c. a, 27S, 3. 
Sanro^fiy C. g. 275. (1). 
S«nr6Tt}S dec. 45, 6. 
Sfiifty c. a. 278. 2. 
SfVTfpos c. g. 275, 2. 



ifX^a^cu c. two ace. 280, 
4 ; Tiyl TI 284, R. 4. 

M) 95, (b); 315, 1.2. 

8^€r315, 5. 

SrjKoy (lycu, iroifiy with 
part. 310, 4, (b) ; ir,K6s 
tlfu woiuy T< 310, R. 3. 

iri\6s (ifu Sri 329, R. 4. 

iijKovy c. g. and a. 273, 
R. 20 ; c. part. 310, 4. 
(b) ; c. inf. and part. 

311, 12. 
Aftfiip-np dec. 55. 2. 
Arifiociytyyif dcc. 59. R. 2. 
HwoTt 95, (b). 
Hrou^fy 315, 6. 

irira 315. 3. 

8u£l' 

Jii »^ . jL 1- 

Sidytu^ c. part. 310, 4, ( I ). 

8ia7f7i^(rdcu c. part. 310, 

4.(1). 
8ia8«x«o'^ai, 8i4(8ox^~ 

t^X'h ^ (1- 284. 3 
8ui8i8^rcu c. g. 273, .1 
8tf(8oxof d d. .i,^^ 

3. (b) (3). 

8uup<tj' c. tMu ace. 280, 3. 
8tair(<o'i^ai r^r yrmfjoi^ 

with ^f and gen. aba. 

312, R 12. 
8iaA(7«ri^cu c d. 284, 3, 

(»)• 
8iaAnrwr xp^*^ 312, R. 3. 
8iaAAiiTT«u' c pan. 310, 

4.(f). 
8<AAAarT<u», -Arrfcbtu C 

d. 284, 3. (1). 
8iafi«//3«rdaj c. g. 275 "^ 
8uu'«V<c e. two ace. 2 ^ 
StarcMur^tu c. 8rwr c. : : . 

fuu 330. 6 : cits ;i: J 

g. aba. 312. R. 12. 
8iarp((-rrctf'^ai c. inf. 3U6, 

l.(c). 
SurrcXcIr c part. 310, 4, 

(b). 
lia^p*tw c g. 271. 2. 
Iti^popos e.g. 271,3; cd. 

284. 3, (4). 
itdpmws c. d. 284. 3. (4). 

Buixp^^*^ ^- d- '^^ *<^ 

2^5. 1, (2). 
SiSdaKttr c. two acc. 280^ 

3; c. inf. 306, 1, (c . 
SiSoMi c g. partit. 273 

S, (b) ; c. g. price, 27a< 

3. 



GREEK INDEX. 



605 



8u'x«'»'C- g-271, 2. 
8u(2C(iv <". p. 274. 2; 5t- 

icoC«<^^aiC.d.284,3,(2). 
SiKouis (Ifu c. inf^personal 

ins. iijctu6y ierri c. a. 

and inf. 307, K. 6. 
iiKcuovy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
iiKTjy c. g. 288. 11. 
Siof>i(fiy c. g. 271, 2. 
8i:yT« ^<e on. 
Si'xa '■ i^- 271, 3. 
6i\la and Ji'ifoi 70, B. 
8jC>> c. g. 274, 1. 
iiu'KfUf c. g. 274. 2. 

8jk*;;' «•. ill'' 1- («') ; 

r/'i'/i. I"-: 1^ 7. 

5<iuw dec. 54. (c) and 68, 3. 
iopuipop«7y c. &. 279, 1. 
5pa»«T«w«iJ' c. a. 279, 3. 
ipdrr*a^at c g. 273, 3, 

Jui'offda* c. a. 279, 6 ; c. 

i- - l,(c). 
Jura <• i"f- 306, 1, 

(c) ; ; ' >n«. 8i/va- 

T^r ^t>.. • ""^ iiif- 

307, R. 6. 
tvc dec. 99, 5 he 

Subst. in ill -*1. 

R. 10. 
9ut in <;ition, 236, 

R.3. ,h .;). 
Bi/fx*/'**^''***' *^' *■ 2<9, 5j 
. c.d. 285, 1, (j). 
B(t>p«ap, QratU 278, R. 2. 
8u • -'y* Ti and Tiy<£ 

7 . K. 2. 

AttpitifS dec. 57, R. 2. 

•E5y c. inf. SOfr, 1, (a). 
4^ cor ■ 2, II. (»•); 

leAffA i44. 4 ; iky 

8^ins.ifiy8«/i^ 340.4; 

/Av Kol ih. 7. 
idyrt — idyrf 323, I. 
fo^ dec. 56, R. 2. 
^crroj, toTo ins. ii»^«*» 1>" 

TO, orro 220, 13. 
ia. • 88; use 302,2. 

irr^ittp c. g. 273, R. 9 ; 

c.d. 284, 3, (2). 
^yyiJt c. g. 273, R. 9 ; C 

4^. g. 274, 2;c.d. 

284, 3, (6). 
^yifpoT^r c. g. 275, 1. 
|yx*^w» dec. 63, R. 5. 



^w dec. 87 ; use, 302, 1. 

eyurye 95, (a). 

€^os fr jm eiis 215, R. 

iStfKfiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 

c( ins. 7j aug. 122, 3. 

€1 ins. redup. 123, 3. 

ei II. Pers. ins. tj 116, 11. 

€t cons. 339. 

ti concessive 340, 7 5 in 

wishes 259, 3, (b). 
CI an, whether 344, 5, (ij. 
(l yap 259, 3, (b). 
ei 5' &ye 340, 3. 
fl Sf ellipt., 340, 3 ; et 5c 
ins. ct 5c fjL-f] and ct 5c 
nil ins. c( 5c 340, 4. 
(( Kol 340, 7. 
cf Kc see iiv. 

(I fjiri iron. 324, 3, (a); el 
fj.-'' ' 340, 5 ; ci /i'J) 

« , -', ib. 

(to, cias, etc, eioi' opt. ins. 

cufu and etc. 116, 9. 
ulivai c. g. 273, K. 20 ; C 
partie. 310, 4, (a); dif- 
ference between inf. 
and part. 311, 2; c. us 
and ' :n2, R. 12. 
eOe in 259, 3, (b) 

ami K.3,6.;c. inf.306, 
R. 11. 
«»it«iC"»'T^T«i'» 285, 1,(3). 
fU*iy c. g. 271, 2; c.d. 

284, 3, 2. 
uk6s, «Ik6tws c. dat. 284, 

3, (5). 
,Uwy dec. 55, R. 2. 
fifify, t'iTf, (Uy ins. ct?;- 

fify, etc. 116, 7. 
cli'cu Jis copula 238, 6 ; as 
an essential word {to be, 
to exist, etc.) 238, R. 4 ; 
with adv. 340, R. 4 ; 
eiroi with a part. ins. 
of a simple verb 238, 
R.5 , omitted 238, R.6,7. 
tlyau apparently unneces- 
sary with 6vofxd(fiv, 
-c<r^«u 269, R. 1. 
thai c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. 
273,2; e.g. 
^ 3, (a); c.d. 

284,3,(9); ehai and a 
subs. c. inf. 306, 1, (d). 
eiVc referring to several 
persons 241, R. 13, (a). 
c«irt7v eS, kokus riva 279, 
2;>caxo,KaAic.a.2SO,2. 

51* 



€iTrc7v c. d. 284, 3, (1) ; c. 
d. anda. c.inf.307,'ll.3. 
iipy^iv, -ffhai c- g. 271, 2. 
(is (es) Prep. 290, 2; in 
pregnant sense ins. ci^ 
c. d. 300, 3, (b) ; with 
the art. ins. cV (^ Xiiurq 
ckSiSoT is tV 'XvpTiv 
^4s Ai^vnv) 300,4, (b). 
els, (xia, cV dec. 99, 5. 
els with Superl. 239, R. 2. 
ctsoycjj/ c. g. 274, 2. 
CKrav ins. eo-av in plup. 

116,6. 
cisopai/, to permit c. part. 
^ 310, 4, (e). [3. 

ilsTrpoLTT^Lv c. two.acc.280, 
cTra -^ith Part. 312, R.8; 
eiTtt in a quest. 344, 5, 
(e). 
cfre— cfrc 323, R. 1 ; et— 
crrc, Htc — el 5e' etc. 323, 
R. 1 ; in an indirect 
question 344. 5, (k). 
ciwdeVai c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
{K,Ji 15, 3; Prep. 288,2; 
in Preg. sense ins cv 
c. d, 300, 3, (c) ; e« 
with the Art. ins. ev 
(ot €K TTJs 07 op ay 
iivhpwrroi aiTiipvyoy) 
300, 4, (a). 
€Kds c. g. 271, 3. 
€Ka(TTos with the Art. 246, 

6. 
^KSveiv c. two ace. 280, 3. 
^Kel^^ec witli the Art. ins. 
iK€7 (6 ^ K e r,^ € J' TToAe- 
fjLOS 5eCpof5|ei)300,R.8. 
ckcTj/os dec. 91 ; Dial. 21 7, 
4, (d); use 303, 2; with 
the Art. 246, 3. 
4Kfivo(ri{v) 15, 1. (c). 
e'/ceTo-e in Preg. sense ins 

iK(: 300, R. 7. 
c'f07T» c. g. 288, R. 
iK\fiir€iy c part. 310, 4, 

(0- 
iKiT\-{}TT€(r^ai c a. 279, 5 ; 

c. d. 285, 1. 
iK<TTr)vai c. a. 279, R. 3. 
fKTpeirea-^ai c. a. 279,R.3. 
(Kuv eJvai 306, R. 8. 
iKarTOV without ^ 323, 

R. 4. 
i\aTTOva^ai C. g. 275, 1. 
iKoLTTwv 84, 6. 
iKax^ffTos 84, 6. 



606 



GEEEK INDEX. 



iXtyXtiy c. part,310,4,(b). 

4\4yxKTTos 84, R. 4. 

iKe f7t^ c. g. 274, 1, (c) : 

c. a. 279, 5. 
i\(v^epos, i\(vb(povv c. 

K. 271,2, .3. 
iXitrativ Si(6v 279, K. 5. 
'4\nivs dec. 54, (c). 
^ATTj'^ftj/ r. (1. 285, 1 (1); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (I)), 
4fiavTov dec. 88 ; use 

302, 2. 
4n6s ins. fiov, 302, R. 2. 
r/x»ra(j)25, 4, (c). 
$fjLirfipos V. ^r. 273, 5. (e). 
ifiirtKd^njbai C. ^. 273, U. 

9; c. d. 284,3, (2). 
ifiviirKatrdeu C part. 310 

4, (d). 
(nirpoff^ty c. p. 273, 3, (h). 
ifKptpili V. d. 2H4. 3, (4). 
«i/ ins. 7;(rai' '2'JO. 14. 

(a)j eg. 263, (».) 
^r TO?*, /i» ToTr r "^ 

(e.g;. ir^^orroi) - J. 

ivamiov, -loj r. : 1. 

273, K Hand li ^ ,_;. 
M«^$ c. p. 273, 5, (l»). 
^KSo^tK with t' * '. in<. 

fySov (r^f rpd- 

irt^aj' (■ '. S. 

/fSi'dv r. .. . _ 'U, 3. 

iytiptvfiv c. a. 279, 1. 

f*Kfy,ovf*Ha <•• , 
fyf<my c. inf. 3(M». I 
iydvti(7(Tdcu c.p.273.1i.- 

c. part. 310, 4 (a). 
fyi ins. fytari 31, H. 3. 
^»'»'o«7»' c. p. 273. K. 20. 
/yox^iti 1-. a. 279, 1 i cd. 

284,3, (6). 
iyTai>dA with Part. 312, 

K. 7. 
4yrp(Wf<Td<u 273, 3, (b). 
^^ Prv'p. 2S8, 2 ; see />t. 
i^al<pyris with Tart. 312, 

K. 6. 
4llpX*ty c. p 271, 4. 
ilfKtyxfiy f- prt't. .Tin 4 

(h). 
^fOTiy c. inf. 30i.. i 

c. d. and a. o. int 

K. 3. 
;{«T<iC«"' c. g, 373, R. 20; 

c two ace. 280, 3. 



«|^t c. g. 273, 3. (b) ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (3). 
illaraff^QU c. p. 271, 2. 
i^opKovy c. a. 279, 4. 
f^« 0. ;:. 271. 3. 
ioiKtvat c. d. 284, 3, (4); 

c. inf. 307, R. 7.; c 

part. 310, R 2; c. inf. 

and part. 311, (9). 
i<Jjins.^^i, o-<^j;j02.R.8. 
ifouvily c. p. and a. 273, 

R.20;T«*'«£T<»'Of 274, 1. 
iirai. ■ ' " 4. 

iitaiaatty c. 

^TOiTuurdcu ( _ -. i. -. 
dwix^fit dec. 213. 19. 

^▼(^(f >«••-• OTO ' : OT0. 

irapxt'ty c. ;. ■, (b) ; 

c. d. 284. 3. (7). 
/»■«/ Rcc 5t« ; in interrop. 

and imp. clauses 341, 

4. ^ 1(b). 

Vfffdoi c. p. 273, R-7, 

• rtiid^ tee irajy under 

Brt. 
iwtiHi gee St' 
Iwura in a question 34 ; 

:>, (e). 
r»«.Tawithp«rt.312.R.8. 

. • -4.2. 

i J.3, (3). 

f„. ri31,R.3. 

M ] b ; c. dat. in 

T ^ C. ft. 

... ftud 

ILb. 
. oi c. P.273.R T 
titu c. inf. 3t 



itrnrTd/jLfyos c. 

* ■ 

pan. aiid inf. 311, 2 ; c 
ifs and gen. ab- <'•> 
R. 12. 

ivurraruw r ""' 
^■wifff4-'uvy 

t ztiy ^ '' ; I 

iwtrtXXtu, , I 

/'-'-.. -^. 

/viTprrcir c. inf. aad pait. 

311. 15. 
iwtrpowttnof c. g. 275, 1 ; 

c. E. 279. 1. 

274, I, (e). 
iwtxt*p*' •"'■ '^'^ ' n). 



... ■-:* c. tWOftCC. 2^a. 

.^tL^.j- c.rwo ftccsm^s. 

2"' ' '" 
fr- - 271 2. 

<parTar C. t^ '^ 



(c; and R. 16. 
'"■"'w, t^K^ft^p 221. 

iM see {art. 
{iT« tee Imt, 



•^. 



274,(1); 


hrt uoi ri BomKtith^ 2H 


c inf. 3o6. 1, (a). 


3 ). 


^iroAcrr c. d. 2"^ - '^y 


r<rr. :..^i^- . .). 


4viKovp*7y c. d. 'J •• 


i<rr. 6. 


^irtA.QM^^i'fcr.^eu c. ^vu. 


f tfTU^ M, 4* 


273. 3. (b). 


trruf Irt, f - 


/irtAai<dcb'«ri^ai c. g, 27*, 


•(,Xrmf> l.RS. 


5.(0); c pan,3IO,4,{e). 


. mit.i 


^»<A«/ir*ii' r a 279, 4 : c 


KV .V 


p;v 


ia,i;,2i 


t \«rd«u, -uadat c. p. 


, - ^ ■ — - - ■ ■ - 

Iti with the Comp. 239, 


1 : c. 5»«#$ c. iud. 


R-1. 


.*>. 6. 


frt Yovx^ with the Comp. 


«iriT» 


K. 1, 


i-WlW\.iC,<., V. „ 


t. td in the Aug 121, 


284,3,(6). 


R,; 125,2. 



GREEK INDEX. 



60/ 



, voitur, etc. c. a. 

(5 wottly c. part. 310.. 

(!/Sa. 

V - I. 1, (O- 



:hl'art.3l2, R.6. 



(b] 






73, a, 



t' 



after the oniis.sion of 
fiaWoy 323. U. 3 : omit- 
ted with irXfoi/, Tr\flwf 

>n 

23, 

K. 4; with the Gen. 
after a comparative 
323. R. 5. 

.r in Phip. 116, 6. 
; vowel 237, K. 1. 
fl Kard or fj vpos c. a. 
•23, 7. 

re 0. inf. 341,3, (a). 

■ > 

r. ? 

:. 2. 

t) i Of 3.il, li. 1. 

-'-.:—. .. ;;. 273, o. ^..,. 

J. 275, 1. aiKl 

J. 



c. (;. and d. 



5 



:e;4. 3, (bj. 



:.6. 
etc c g. 



i. 



. . .ma g. 






/ 

t 
i, 

fy^^ k««i»ii ifiXitfux it 31 •- . 
312, 

4«. R.1. 
hn coD«truction 337. 

ZaxfntA¥ 213, 14. 
l" 235. H. 3. 

7 CS. 4. 

I 274, \m t' a. 

V inf. S06. 1. |r). 

ivyot Aud C"0^»' **^« A,(b). 

'H, (a) if a/(frii 

323, 2; in a .jtp - ku 
344, 5, (h)i — tl.) ft 
ooaqiaruUcum 323, :> 



jios. 236, K. 3, 



.ir ft7. R. 4. 



■ 2;^ 

. , !i»l the 

1 R. 5, c. 

4r »e« t 

^r6ra, in'irn, see Stc. 

1i|M»r d< 

||i<r3ai c. a. ::7J. li. t. 
fff^wy, Attic f/TTwK 84. 
^acroMr «v«i c. inf. 30C, ] 

(c). 
^ffvy** f«rap. 82, I, (d). 

at <*- g. and y»J 
7;.ui 275. I. R. 2. 
rTTaa^joi with the sense 
|- liiis Terf. 255. R. 1. 



ijTTaa^ai c. part. 310, 4, 

^Xw dec. 60, (b). 
r]u>s dec. 60, (b). 

eoA^s dec. 71, A. (a). 
^(xAAeiv c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
dap^fiv c. a. and d. 279. 3, 

and R. 3. 
ddtrafiv c. a. 279, R. 6. 
ddaa-oov 83, I. 
^6.T€pa, etc. 10, R. 2. 
^avad(^(iy c. g. and a. 273, 

K. 20 ; T<ra T^vos 274, 

1, (f) and R. 2; c. d. 

285, {l)]iirl rm 285, 

R. 1. 
bavfuurrhy Sa-oy 332, R. 

10. 
dcoffdai V . ;:. 273, R. 20. 
bfKtip c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 

N 3, and R. 
1 and 2. 
"^ - vfty c. a. 279, 1. 
. I' doc. 68, 5. 
:., 4. 

„ X 235,3. 

btY)dyfiy c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
dtriiOKfiy ins. IVrf. 255, 
R I; inr6 rivos 249, 3. 
bpdaaw 17, R. 4. 
bpi^ .h-c. 54, (c). 
biryaTrip dec. 55, 2. 

bvfjMia^cu c. g. 274, 1 i 

e. d. 284, 3, (6). 
dwrcudv, dwrn-fiy C. a. 

279, 1. 

:>t:v (!rr. CO. fa). 

i ii!iiiiii-vo\> cl Sol, 1, and 
R. 2. 

i5«, referring to several 
porson.'J, 241,R. 13, (a). 

Rior comp. 82, I, (d). 

riios c. g. 273, 2. 

j'S.wTTjT c. g. 273, 5, (c). 

/'.irdec. 213, 7. 

ityaij (Ifii with the mean- 
ing of the Fut. 255 
R. 3. 

ifp6s c. g. 273, 2. 

i^t;(s) c. g. 273, R. 9. 

iVai'ds c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 

iKfTfifiy C. g. 273, R. G 
c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 



608 



GREEK INDEX. 



iKvua^ou c. g. 273, R. 6. 
7</a, that, in order that 330. 
'{i^a Ti 344, K. 6. 
tffos comp, 82, I, (d). 
taos c. g. and d. 273, 3, 

(b), and 284, 3, (4). 
laropuv c. two a. 280, 3. 
Ix^vs dec. 62. 
i\(i) ins. Ixupa 213, 11. 

K movable 15, 4. 
$caJ^ap6s c. g. 271, 3. 
Ku-diCfiv c. a. 279, K. 6. 
Kcuiiariuai c. two a. 

2H0, 4. 
Koudopay, to permit, c. part. 

310, 4, (C-). 
xal 321, 1 ; with Sup 239, 

II. 2; with part. 312, 

K.B.Ko/ ins. 5rc321,l. 
Kcd ydp 324, K. 1 and 3. 
Kol ^or, Kol ft 340, 7. 
Kal fici\iarra with Snp. 

239. H. 2. 
«ra) 8s ins. Koi o^ror 331, 

K. 1. 

Kol oil, Koi fX-'' '. 

KoX lavTa wr. .. 312, 

R. 8. 
Kaiir«p with part. 312.R.8. 
KalTn 322. 7 J with part, 

:n2, K. 8. 
»ccbc»<rTos, K^KitnVy 84, 2. 

KCUCOAO)*?!', KCUKOirOKlV C 

n. 279, 2. 
Kcurd; comp. 84, 2. 
Ka»c<5r *.>» c. inf.30f). l.(c). 
KaKovpfytlv c. li. 270. 2. 
KOKws K4y«iy, ironly, Spay 

ttc. c. u. 279, 2. 
tcaXuy 0. two a. 280, 4. 
KaWiCTfVfiy V. p. 275. 1. 
KdWicrros, KoWiaiy 84, 3. 
iraA<$v comp. 84, 3. 
KoXovutyost SO called 264, 

H. 1. 
KoXws doc. 48 ; 70, A, (a). 
Hi/jLytiy c. part. 310, 4.(c). 
K&wttra with part. 318, 

K. 8. 
rel^a doc. 68. 6. 
KopTfpfly o.pnrt.310, 4,(o). 
Kard l*iTp. 292 ; Kard in 

composition, consmic- 

tion with 292. K. 
K^ra with part. 312. R, 8. 
KaTaxoi'dv, /() o/v V, c. g. 

273, R. 18 and 19. 



KaTa\\d.TTeiVf -drnffbai, 

(.: d. 284, 3, (1). 
Karavf fifty c. two a. 280 ..3. 
KaTatrK-ftTTfabai t. a. 279, 

5; c. d. 2^5, i). 
KaTaptarHicu c. d. 284, 3,( 1 ). 
Kardpxfiy f. g. 271, 4. 
KaTaxpriCbau c. d- and a. 

285, 1, (2). 
KaTfyayrioy c. g. 273, R. 9. 
KaT(pyd(nrdeu c. inf. 306, 

1.(0). 

Korixfiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
KvritKoos c. g. and d. 273, 

R. 18. 
Ki, Kty, sec &y. 

A R. 6. 

KtKtvtiy c.ii (i^) i 

c. a. et ini. »",. i;. i. 
Kty6s c. p. 271, 3. 

K- ■ 1. 

*. R. 4. 
Kf^Siwr 216, li. 2. 
Ktf.Xi*' c. two a. 2W), 3. 
tciiiteieu c. g- *i74, 1. 

K(r9i/r<i/< f. 306, 1. 

(b). 



A .«!> c g. 873, S| 

1 . 

K\!«/rc. d. 2M. R, 4. 
273, 8. (b). 



Koirofytw o. '. (b) J 

. d. 284. - .-, 
^•y6t dec. 72, (a). 
«i* c, a. 279, 1. 
^. ^^tu c. g. 273, &, 

Kotfs dec. 212. 7. 
KpoTctv c. g. and a. 275, 1, 

and R. 1. 
KpaTfTr c. p.irt.310, 4, (g). 

♦f^KlTlCTTOJ 84. 1. 

Kptas dec. 54. K. 4. 

Kptitrtroty^ Kpthroey 84. 1. 

Kpiyfir * " ' <l 

20; K. 4 

2 ; Kpirtof ri run 26J. 



Kpivov dec 72, ',a). 
Kpoia(u> 212, 3 
Kpora\i((iy c. a. 279, R. i 
Kporuy c. a. 279, R. 5. 
Kptnrrtiy -fffbai c. a. 279^ 

4 ; c. two a. 280, 3. 
Kpv^ c. ^. j"" " I'e). 
KTuaOau c. ^ - i. 

Kvip6% comp. 63, iL 
fri/K<»56. R. 1.213, 11. 
Kvyrtpos 216. R. 2. 

Kias dec. 61, R. 1. 
ir»Au«<y c. g. 271, 2 ; c 
inf. 306, i, (a). 

A£t dec 72, (a). 
\afi<iy, tcilM, 3\2, R. 10. 
X«7x<i*^' - ' .»73,3,(b). 
Kd-ftti R. 1 ; 70, 

A, (a). 
kibf^ Aa^fsW c g. 273, 

Xa^:- -"vtfy310. Tl 4. 
X£lA 88, 1, t ; 

Xafi^*»>««i»«« C g. 373, 3, 

c. a. 27 

AX)oa>fiF C. a. ^> J*. -I. 

Xarbdrtff^Ui c g. 273, S, 

(c). 
Aofi^^iv c. rirt. 310, 4, 

(I). 

iMu a. 2^0. 4 i C 
t 1 fl); c. infl 

3 d. and a. 

atiu ii:i wi, . R. 3. 
Kiyitr c. in and g. aha. 

312. R. 12. 
K4y*tM •£, Kwtmt c a. 879, 

8 ; nAi, nur^ etCC^ 

280, 2. 
Xfvrrai c. a. ct inf. 307, 

X*y6mys 864, R. 1. 
AcirtiF c a. 879, 4. 
X*lrtM^ c part. 310, 4» 

Xf->«*r c. p *•(«)• 

ATjf>«4$ » > '^ 9. 

A/w' <A. 
Af»c. 



<■ 



(3). 



214. R- 2. 
•,. r r. 273. B <^ 



GREEK INDEX. 



6oa 



•l.(b). 
■ , .1. 

Koihopt'uriiai run 2S4, 3, 

(G). 
Aou«rd(u c. g. 273, R. 16. 

UK c. a. 279, 1. 
\ *.y c. g. sep. 271,2; c. 

g. Of price 275, 3. 
Kvnaittfabat c. a. S""" ' 

c. a 279. R. 1. 
Kv d. 285, (l>. 

A . d.284,3.(7j. 

u c.tL 279, 1 J c 
' 11. I. 



Met 316.4; m^ A(a279,4. 

uaK(>4' And 

hi 

K. 2. 
Aor Willi Com. 239, 

R. I. 

fioAAor l)oA318, R. 7. 
MAT 316, 1. 
fiop^Jn^ttv with miM of 

t! " I. 

Itcvc ^ ^1.273, 

R SO; c part. 310, 4, 

(a); c. part, and in£ 

811,3. 
ftdpTvi dec 68, 10. 
Itiaamv 84, 5. 
^npy, iMcOMiMi S78, R. 9. 



■!». 



.__:*, I. 

.77;comp.84,8. 
with Sup. an" 

1 c part. 310, 



/ j^ai C g. 273, 

fit^.n \\r.\'.<-\xt ^ 323, R. ; 
t<i<i 214, 4. 

^i.uKfcTtlr c. g. 275, 1. 
^«iui(Tdeu c. g. 275, 1. 
H*iuy 64 • 
/i<'A«i ftol Tirot and ri 27 

l,and R. 1. 
Ii4k\*iy c. inf. 306, 1,{h). 

U<M^H^ ^< ^i^- ^* ^'^^1 

It b. 



Iitfxcpfff^cu c. g. and a. 273, 
K. 20; Tij/^ Tjvoy 274, 
l,(f); c d. and a. 284, 

3, (6). 

fi«y ins. fjL-ffy 316, R. 
/*«V — 5« 322, 5. 
ti(y^V 316, K. 
/ic>«y c. a. 279, 3. 

r o,.. R. 

H. 322, 7. 
■ (c). 
^-- , -,I, {d)and 

R. 5; with the Art. 245, 
R. 5. 
furrhy thtu c, part. 310, 

ft^ra 1': . ; nira ins. 

fi*r*aji vil, K. 3. 
/i«Ta?i?t>; ai C g. 273, 3, 

( 
/*rr-.-,,x4. >*o/ ruvr and ti 

274, 1, (b) and R. 1. 
>MTa^«A«r c part. 310, 4, 

firrofuKttff^tu c.part. 31C. 

4. (0). 

UtraiO c. p. 273, 3, (b). 
fitraiv with part. 312. 

R. 6. 
lUrtrri fiot Tirot 273, 9, 

(b). 
ftfrJx'Uf <* jr- 273. 3, (t). 



R. 9; 
SroVf 



h 



M^ '5. 

fit] .)i>, . -.ic, 

alter cxj,.. ^ni- 

fvinp to J'tur, to doubL, 
• S. 

344, 5, (d). 
firi OTi, ft.il Svwf — diAAA 

firii. 

.(TTOf »4. 

M . 316, 1. 
Hr)viti¥ C. p. 274, 1. 
/ii7^(r d' ^'.5. 

utn- -1,2, (c). 

.5, 2. 

U7; ,u. , 71, B, (C). 

^Tj<(ua<T^ai c. inf. 306, 
1 hrws and ind. 

fu 6. 



luyvvvai, ui-yvvcrbat c. d. 

284,3, (.). 
tJiiKp6s comp. 84, 6. 
fxifieTabai c. a. 279, 1. 
(jLijjiin](rKeiv -eabai C. g. 

273, 5, (e). 
uifiyriffKca-bai c. part. 310. 

4, (a) ; c. part, aud iuf. 

311,2. 
Mluusdcc. 7!, C. 
Hol, ethical Dat. 284, 3, 

(10) (d). 
fi6yos with the Art. 245, 

R. 6; dirtcrcnt from 

IJ.6yoy 264, R. 7. 
n6yos c. g. 271, 3. 
fwytxpayos comp. 82, 1, (f ). 
/ioC, fjLoiy fi€ use 87, R. 1. 
HVKr)s dec. 71, A, (a). 
fiuaiTTfabat c. a. 279, 5. 
uuy 344, 5, (c). 

N /<^«Ajcu(rTJKoV 15, 1 and 
in tlie Dialects 
6. 
y«u 316, 4; vol fteb A/a 

279, 4. 
rcu^f und i/evs 70, A. (a). 
ydirtf and ve(iror 70, B. 
ydfffffty c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
rail dec. 68, 11. 214, 5. 
WttTos 82, R. 5. 
ytus and ya6s 70, A, (a). 
Hi 316, 4; k)) A/a 279, 4. 
#^ij from i'€oj b2, R. 5. 
yutay 'OAu/iirta, yywfiriy 

278, 2. 
rtirav with sense of the 

1 -., R. 1. 

rotu. ,.jt. 310, 4,(g). 
yiy {yiy) ins. aurovs or 

ainds 87, R. 3. 
yody c. part. 312, R. 12. 
yofACuy c. two a. 280, 4 ; 

c. d. («//) 285, (2) ; c 

inf 306, 1, (b);c. part. 

311, 2. 
yo<r<piC(iy c. g. 271, 2. 
yovdtr(7y c. iuf. 306, 1, (a). 
yv 316, 3. 
yanos and ywroy 70, A, 

(b). 

ntyovffSfai c. d.284. 3, (1). 
liyus ^Xf"' *^- S- 273, 5, 

lufi<pop6v i(TTi c. d. aud a. 
c. iuf. 307, R. 3. 



610 



GREEK INDEX. 



^vi/ Prep. 289, 2. 

O union-vowel 237, 2, 
6- in d-rrolos, SirSaos, etc. 

93, K. 1. 
6, 7), t6 dec. 91 ; relat., 

demons., as a prop. Art. 

sec under Article. 
6 i]\iKos attract. 332. R. 9. 
6 oJos attract. 332, K. 9. 
87? use 303. U. 2. 
85€, ^86, To8« dec. 91 ; 

Dialects 217, 4, (b) ; 

use 303, 1 ; with the 

Art. 246, 3. 
6ii 95, (c). 
6C(iy c. fr. 273, 5, (dj; c. 

a. 278, 3. (h). 
S^owfKa : 329, R. 

1 ; bcru -, 2. 

olifKpl {iTfpl) Tjvo263,(d). 
oJa c. part. 312, H. 13. 
Oliivovt dec. 71, B, (b). 
oiKflos c ;;. 273, 2. 
oiKTtlpdy V. p. 274, 1, (c). 
oiKTpis tomji. 83, II. 
otov c. part. 312. R. 13. 
otos with Sup. 239, li. 2: 

oToif 01 6 1 r' ufil c inf. 

306, l,(c). 

otoi ius. 8rt ToiovTos 329, 

R. 8. 
oTo; attracted 332, 7 ; c. 

inf. 332, R. 8. 
oTos ins. Sirrt 341, R. 2. 

Tolriaoi '" '■ IJ. 10. 

otx^M*"* ' • R- 3' 

otxo^lal c. \t^t. olO, 4, (1). 
inyiiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a.) 
i\iyos com p. 84, 7. 
6\lyw, ixZ-yov with Com- 

paV. 239, R. 1. 
iAj7a.>fifr»' c. j;:. 274. !,('>)• 
6\o(pvp«rd<u 0. p. 274, 1, 

(c); c. II. 279,5. 
SniXtlyC. d. 284, 3, (1). 
ifiywai C. a. 279, 4. 
8/iOJo Toli c. Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
8)uoiov fJvtu c. partic. 310, 

R. 2. 
tfioios c. p. 273, 3, (b); 

8/Liotos, ijuoiof'i', -or>(rdai, 

i/io(a<y c. d. 284. 3, 4. 
ifioKoytly C. d. 284, 3, (6). 
i/xoXoytlrai c. iv and inf. 

307, R. 6. 



8/i«y 322, 7 ; with a part 

312, R. 8. 
oyeiiiCuv c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
ov(ipo% dec. 72, (a). 
ovivavai, -aucrbai C. a.279.1. 
ovofjLai iari fioi and the 

like 266, R. 1. 
ovo^La(tiy c. two a. 280, 4. 
oWo;*' ins. (Tucray 116. 12. 
8ir»ad€*' c. g. 273, 3, (\>). 
hroi inprepnant sense 

ins. 5»ou 300. R. 7. 
^OTtu' sec STOi* under 8t«. 
diroT* sec 8t«. 
8«-oi; ia pregnant tense 

infi. Iwoi 300, R. 7; 

iwov, quandoquidem see 

8t#. 
h- R. 2. 

t- I. 

SiTMf, theit^ in order that^ 

330 ; Svwt and 8«-wr m4 

c. ind. fut. cllip. 330, 

R.4. 
Sirwf, %chru. 'fo Zrf. 
twtas. Oh 

ipOf opajr 

Lk with 

TerU» of ttpiK.'Aring, 
showing 306, R, 9 : c. 
part. 310, 4, (a). 

ipyl(«adeu c. g. 274, I , c. 
part. 310. 4, (c). 

iptyta^au c. g. 273,3, (b). 

Sp^ptos comp. 82, I, (d). 

dpfiaadtu c. g. 273, H. 7, 
(b). 

iprtdoHr<»^ di»c 44. R. 2. 

Ipyts *"'S,12. 

Op^KU., 

8j, U, 8 dec. 

hq 
ail 

(«: 

•!'• - 

K. II; ji n in 

po ■■ - "s 

ate (.lau-^cs, attDicted 
332, 9 ; mode^ 333 ; is 
changed into a demons. 
334, 1 ; 6s ins. the de- 
mons. 334. 3; 8s ins. 
8ti, Si -usf^ ins. 

Iko, ul ,- r o&rwt, 
w8<, rouNTTor, TTjXuroi^ 
Tor, TomHrros ) firrc, ins. 
^cU' or (t 334, 2. 



8j, ^, 8 ; ftj /i«i> — hs 94 ; 

is Ked Ss demons. 331, 

R. 1. 
iaotf {Setfi) — To<rouroy{ro 

aolrtp) 343. 
Scror, 8vy with Comp. 

and Sup. 239, R. 1 and 

2; ocoy, 5<ra c. inf.. e. 

p. Zcov y' ifi fiitrai 

341. R. 3. 
S<ror ins. 8ri riff0§ 329. 

R. 8. 
SiTos attracted 332, 7. 
8<rof ins. Arrc 341, ' 
icrtoy = iarow dt:.. i . ,.. 
8fTtj dec 93. 
ic^palptcbtu c. g. 273, S, 

(f ), and R. 19. 
Ic^ — raw^y 343,2, (b). 
iraM see 8r«. ' 
5t< and 8rajr const. 337. 
IfTt fundamental mean* 

inp.ni*. I. 
5ti .. 239, R. 2. 

Sri, «t 329; diA 

jti, a. 

"» It 
5 ii 

of aiK 
8rt. xi'n 

^1 Ti .>44, K. O. 

M>(c) 15, 4. 17. R. 3; •« 
at the end of a sen* 
tcnce ir> 4. 

•^318: lastic af- 

ter r\ . -■ !< denot- 
ing : .. :. 'U :...il. .iiicr 
Comp. and i>up. cx- 

Sressions 318. S. and 
L7. 



a . ■ . . 

ov iiirrot 4AAi 322, K. 11. 
•*/4 318,7. 
•i m4 c. second pen. ind. 

Alt. interrog. (ci ^ 

fAiMipi|^«a ; ina. ui 

fA^Mi) 255. 4. 
•i mV AXAi 322, R 
•w /« iw w> — iXAa icai 
•S pron. dec 87 ; « 

rTtV2. R. 3. 

.. 61, R. I. 

O. r .1.2. 

0; :c.i ^cc 99, H. 



GREEK INDEX. 



611 



•Mfif Srrtf ov attracted 

332, R. 12. 
•VK (rrriv &rot/, hms 331, 

R.6. 
&lMiou9 and o(^«roi'>' -'^'?^ 

tZf "' " (b) ; cuu- 
^ t. 3, (b) \ iu 

an answer 344, 7. 

o{?r<ira C. g. 288, K. ; oC 
rcKa ins. Sri 329, K. I , 
utice^ becaute 338. 2. 

•£i dec. 54, R. 4. 

•frr* — otr* ; o(rr« — t« 
321, 2. 

etror der. 9! ; Dialects 
217 use 303, 1 ; 

with t. 246, 3. 

•^rof , keu$ ! 269, 2, (a). 

•(W-wt. »t iU \v 142. 

U. 2. 
•0rM> with part. 3 12. R.7. 

— d 3. 



f). 



Hal Voc. ^i. 4. ^ I ), («. /. 
TcuSit^u' c. two a. 280. 3. 
voAaiif com p. 82 
varroSBC clivi, 71; 

c Part. 310. 4, (h); c. 

a. c ■ * "1. 18. 

^ 

wapau^tuf «' tl. 2^4, 9, (3) ; 

c. ii- I. (a). 

voftoNi oi c. d. 2S4, 

3, (3). 
ycytt>nvi/V<r».7 c. g. 275, 

3; c. two a. 280. 4. 
myoarX^MV < ~ ^ H. 

9; c. d. 284 
vo^o^KCud^flffdai 3o6, 1 , 

(a) \ c. 8vwf c. ind. fut. 

330, 6 : c. part, and c. 

Us M ■ (h). 

vopax^. ^; 

C d. 2»4, 3, (-') 
voWir, T«i^, w«ip«4, ^MW, 

w^erof c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 



I^iat 



«-apo{i;vf 11/ c. inf. 306, 1 , ( a ) 
xuj with the An. 246, 5. 
ras Tis with the second 
pers. imp. 241, R. 13, (c). 
■rda-auy 216, 2. 
wdtTXfty inr6 rtvos 249, 3. 
var-ijp dec. 55, 2. 
reLrpvs dec. 71, B. (c). 
vai/fiy, -(0-.^ai c. g. 271,2; 

c. part. 310, 4, (f ) ; c 

pan. and inf. 311, 17 
wox^f comp. 216, 2. 
wtidttw nvd ri 278, 4 *, c. 

a. 279, I ; c. inf 306, 1, 

(a) ; c. ir 306, R. 2. 
9tl^*<rbeu c. c 273, R. 18 ; 

c. d. 2- 
vtirijy c. ^ I. 

n«ipai«i/f dec. 57, R 2, 
wttpic* 1:. 273, 5, (e); 

c. , 1, (a); c. 

pan. ttad iiif 311, 18. 
w*\Ji(tu^, wihAS c. g. 273, 

It 9; c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
»«'. . wtnis c. g. 273, 

1. (e). 
Wv«p« dec. 63, R. I. 
w. 1.284,3,(3). 

T. !«, 11. 

vnt. 317, 1. 

w/pOP C. L 

»tp^ 1 . . 1 3. 

wtpl — <r««a 3O0, R. 2 
wfpl c. d. in prc^riKiiii 

senM ins. of the :;>. 

3iK>. 3, (a). 
«</;i \us. wtpltirrt 31, R. 3. 
Ttpt/i^AAcu' c.two a. 2^u.:i. 
wtpcfiywc^oi c i: "" 1. 
y j p Al a r ftai c g. - ^ 

v«PmIj'«u c. g. 275, 1. 
T«pi«x«<rdcu c. g. 273, 3. 

n 2. 

w. c. a. 279, 3. 

»«^ . K"' c. part. 310, 4, 

( «■ ) ; c. part, and inf. 

311. 15. 
wtpiopacdai C. g. 274, 1. 
wtpl rcpo 300, R 1. 
*«piTT<<j c. g. 275, 2. 
wf^i/««»'ai c. iuf. 306, 1, (d). 



■wlcipa 78, R. 8. 
■iri/nr\nfii c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
Tiynv c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) and R. 15. 
xlirrfiy inr6 rivos 249, 3. 
irKTTfVfiy c. d. 284, 3. (3). 
irlwv comp. 84, 12. 
xK(7v c. a. 279, R. 5. 
irA6?<rTov with Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
ir\€7oy without 1j 323, R *. 
»A€<W, irAeTcTTos 84, 9. 
tKiop ins. TcXiuu 78, R, 5. 
irAeW without <J 323, R. 4. 
TXcoveKTcrv c. g. 275, 1. 
•■Afds c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
it\(ws dec. 78, R. 5. 
»A^« c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
»XV c. g. 271, 3. 
«-Xi^pi}r, v\7}pow c. g. 273, 

5,(1.). 
»X7j(r»oJ,'«ji', trKricflov C. g. 

273,R.9;c.d. 284, 3,(2). 
»XTi<Tiov comp. 84. 
9\6os = irXoi); dec. 47. 
irXovaios c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
Mvtlw c. g. 273, 5, (d) ; c. 

a. 278, 3, (b). 
TKv^ dec. 68, 13. 
ir - R. 1. 

ir - ins. wov 

(U04) aoo, R. 7. 
vot«I> c. g. of material 

273, 5, (a) ; c. two a. 

280, 4. 
woulv <^, kokHs c. part. 

310, 4,{g);c. a.279,2i 

irja^i., Koucd etc. C. a. 

2S0, 2; c. inf 306, l,(c). 
woitty e. part. 310, 4, (b) ; 

c. pan. and inf 311, 

13. 
woiflffbai c. g. 273, 2 and 

3, (a) ; c. g. of prico 
275,3. 

wo7os with the An. 344 

R.3. 
wo\fH(7y C. d. 284, 3, (2). 
ir6\is dec. 63. 
■woWhy (hat, iyK(7(rdaiy 

ylyvfa^cu c. part. 310, 

4, (h). 

iroXXou 8<» c. mf 307, 

R. 6. 
iroXXv) with comp. and 

Buperl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
woKv with Comp. and 

Superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 



612 



GEEEK INDEX. 



iroxi/s dec. 77. 

UoadZuv dec. 53, 4, (1) 
(d) ; 56, R. 1. 

trori, ris irore etc. 344, 
K. 2. 

v6Tfpa, 'n6r€pov — ^ in a 
direct and indirect 
question 344, 5, (f ). 

irpuos dec. 76, XIV. 

trpdTT€iu (Zy KOKws C. n. 
279, 2 ; signification of 
the first and second 
Terf. 249, 2 ; iLyaStd, 
Kutd etc. c. a. 280, 2 ; 
irpdmiVy -ta^au, to de- 
mand, c. two ace. 280, 
3; c. d. 284, 3, (1). 

nptTTfiy, vp(ir6yT(i)s c. d. 
284,3, (5); c. inf. 306, 
1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. 
inf. 307, K. 3. 

wpinn c. part. 310, 4, (i). 

wptafffis, irpffffiirrfiSf irpi- 
trBvs 70, H. 

Trp>(T^(V(lV I "', 1. 

irptCT^iaTOi "• . 1 J. 

irpiaa^ai c. g. 275, 3. 
irpiv, irp\v i*', irpXv fi COUSt. 

337. 
irp6 I'rep. 287, 2. 
wpotxfty c. {?. 275, 1. 
irpodv^hy fJyai, wpodvutuT' 

3ou c. inf. 306, 1, (ft); 

c birws c. ind. fut. 330, 6. 
irpdiKa 278, K. 2. 
irpoKa\u<rbcu rivd rt 278, 

4. 
If. ' ,iy c. p. 275, 1. 

O.R.274, 1. 
irpooifxiov 17, K. 4. 
itpoopav C. g. 274, 1. 
irp6s Trcp. 298 ; c. d. in 

Prog »enso ins. c. a. 

300, 3, ^a). 
ir/Joj/SoAAeo' c. g. 273, 5, 

(d). 
wpo$5«5<i»w C. g. 273, 3, (b). 
irpovV ,1. 284.3,(5); 

c. : .. 1. (d); c.d. 

and a. c. inf. 307, K. 3. 
iiporl]K(.i fioi c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
trposdfy 0. p. 273, 8, (b). 
irposKaXdc^eu c. g. 274, 2. 
irposKvyeiy o. a. 279, 1. 
npo(naT(iy c. g. 275, 1. 
irposTdTTeiy c. d. 2S4, 3, 

(3); c inf. 306, 1, (a). 



irpo(T<pepiis c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
irpoTtfiay c. g. 275, 1. 
irpovpyiaiTepos 84, R. .3. 
irpo<P(p€iy c. g. 275, 1. 
TTpoxovs dec. 71, B, (b). 
TTpdiios cornp. 82. I, (d). 
irpwTfVfiy c. g. 275, 1. 
irp&Tos and tpCiTov 264, 

R. 7. 
irr^orcTfJi' c. a. 279, 5. 
xTuix^i comp. 82, I, (f ). 
•wvybavfobai with the sig- 

nif of Tcrf. 255, R. 1. 
trvybdvftrbau c g. 273, R. 

20; ' 4. (a); 

C. par ni. C. 

iruXtiy c. g. 27 
ir«y db' C. opt. 2uu. i. (■*; 

(d). 

'P^(wf ^//Mii' c. n.irt. 310. 
4. (C). 

P4**Pt pa '^ t. 1". 

Pf7y C. ;. . (a). 

. tt. 27!*, R. 5. 
,- 47. 

2 0111 at CM ' " " VI- 

ble at : a 

woni 15; in the for- 
mation of tcnsc« of 
pure verbs 131, and 
l"'^ ' ■ -n- 

1. - I 

and K 2. 

ffdrrfiy c. g. 273. 5, (b). 

(Tcunov or etavrov dec 
88 ; use 302. 2. 

fff Snffix 235.3 and R,3. 
'1, (a). 

c.,, .^. 14. 

ff^ in inflcx. changed to 
3 25. 3. 

taintlcx. 116. 2. 
wy ins. ad^KToy 1 16. 12. 
ffi union syllable 2.*^" 1 
ciya-rt dec. 63. 

<riror, cr^ 

(TKOirtly c, g. and a. 273, 

R. 20 and 21. 
ffKvp dec. 68, 15. 
ffofr/AiCo/ZXi/. 284, 3.(10) 

(d). 
e6s ins. aov 302. R. 2. 
(nra»'t<f<iJ' C. g. 273, 5. (b). 
airtyitcdcu C d. 284, 3, 

(1). 



<rr€«/5cii/ c. a. 279, R, S. 
rrovidCfiy C. inf. 306. 1,«> 
cxouSoior comp. 82, R. 6- 
(TTdCtiyc. a. 278, 3, (a). 
CTcuiyMT^cd ri rwi 2S3, 1, 

(3J. 
oTeV dec. 68, 16. 
<rrfyd(tiy c. d, 285, 1, ( 1 ). 
artpyfuf c. a. and d. 274, 

R. 1 ; c.d. 285, (1). 
artpfly c. g. 271, 2 ; c. 

two ace, riyd rimos 2«0, 

3 and R. 3. 
trnivai c. a. 279, R. 6. 

2t: - 1. 

CT . g. 273. 3. 

av dec 

part, 310. R 2 
ovyvrwuar; <,5, (e). 

«JV)\«f^^ ' ' ;a). 

cv\My ■ J. 

<rvfiSalytw c. lui. ^M>6. 1, 

i'<! ^ : c. d. and a. c inf. 
R. 3 ; personal 307, 

IV. o. 

evfifiovKtvttr c. in£ 306, 

I, (a). 
ax/firpd-TTtiif r. d. Sd4, 3, 

(7). 
nfif^^it' ( . ii • : 7). 

r^Mf^p«i c 1 .4, 

(i). 
V^yt^op^ /<rT< r. d. and 

acc c ii 

VMxai^fWku 3, 

(b). 
n^Kirri 2P4 3 10. Lh). 
rvr<v«r^a. '•). 

9^pyos c 

OVrirVai c _ - .ad 

^t)aDdK.19. 

«ii»' ^r-jun^ c, n-irt. 

310. R. S. 
wrrtfUrri 384, 3, lu, ^a;. 
4rvt dec 62. 

ff^latp i' - _ -V- *. 

V 3; 

V .. U.4. 

rxo..— , -.1 (c), 

SMcp^t dec 59, 3 and 

R.2. 



a-tts dec. 78, R. 6. 
9^(p Voc. 53, 4, (IJ (a). 

T^ Toiavra without Kod 

followinj,' 325, 1, (e). 
rapdrTfiy v6\.(fiov 278, 2. 
TO'" i;^ to one 

i . ! , R. 3. 

Tox^f coinii. 83, I. 
raws dec. 72, (b). 
T« 321, 1 ; T» — ica/, ib. 
TtTyfiK c. a. 278, 3. 
rtK^uufuvdai ri run 285, 

1, (3). 
rvityoDy, paraitem eMe255, 

R. 1. 
rdKtio '>, (e). 

rtXfuT^ * lastly 

312, R. 3. 
riu. 280,3. 

T«, I. 

ripmtacui c. part. 310, 4, 
r4rrttp*t dee. 99, 5. 

TljXldfo" " ' 

Ti 5« .. . 

t/ ^ta^iitPy ri wabmtf 344, 

R. 5. 
Wov, Ti'o2ro^256.4. (e). 

3,(*);c. t*. 
rdrrf ir, jooraiCCM <«M 255, 
R.I. 

rtftia^^ rtfiaffbtu c. |;. 275. 3. 
rii»mf»*lp c. d. 2H4. 3, ( 7 I ; 

rinttptlaiiui Tif-a nyos 

274, 2 ; 0. a. 279, 7. 
tU and t/» dec. 93. 
rU or Tas T(t with the II. 

pen. Imp. 241, R. 13. 
tU tiae 303, 4 tJt 

omitted 238. 5 
ris ins. hsns in iiiaiixci 

question 344. R. 1. 
T^, ToG, T^p c. inf. o» c. a. 

c. inf. 308 ; r6 c. inf. or 

c. a. c, inf. in cxdam. 



247, 3. 

fjyoi, T^ iraTtt roi-roy 

tl^cu 308, R. 3. 
rol 317, 3: ia an-wcrs 

344, 7. 
ro/>of>, ror)rapov>' oz4, 3, 

Toi7«(f»Tei 334, 3, (c). 



GREEK INDEX. 

rolvvv 324, 3 (c). 
roiovTOs dec. 91 ; roiov- 

r6s (l/xi c. iuf.341,K.2. 
To7sSf<ri 217, 4. 
ToX/imy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
ro^fvfiy c. g. 273, R. 7. 
rocoxrrov — haov \ roaoxrrto 

— 3<ry 343, 2, (b). 
roaoino -oxnta with Com. 

and Sup." 229, li. 1 

and 2. 
rocovros dec. 91. 
roaovrov Stu c. inf. and 

6srt c. inf. 307, R. 6. 
rov or TOW fjL^ c.iuf. 274.3, 

rpoi^it T: . R. 5. 

T^Zr c. a. 

rpiis dec. 99, 5. 
rplfitt^c. ■'-■' '■ ' ■ 
rpt^ipris d 
rvyx^*ty f. K- :i73.3, (b); 

c. part. 310, 4, (1). 
rvptwytly, -rtvtiy c. g. 

275, I. 
Tu^r dec. 72, (b). ((e). 
rttur6 ins. rh ain6 217, 4, 

TBpiCttp e. a. 279. 1. 

40^^ II. 

Ump • 

v2^s dec. 72, (a;. 

t/iwp, C^K, {'iu*' 87. R. 4. 

Owdyttf «*. i.'. 274. 2. 

I- M{. 1^: 

.._... j. 
^warirroffdai c. g- 271, 2. 
^OKTiu', vwayrid(«iy c. p. 

273. R. 9j c. d. 284, 

3. (2). 
':w.4..y_fi^ c. p. 271, 4 ; c.d. 
;, 3, (9); c part. 

Jiu, 4, (f.) 
vv«tKfir c. (?. 271, 2; c.d. 

284,3,(2). 
{nrtK 300, U. 1. 
vwticrptvtcdttt C a. 279, 

- 1. (): 

, vf<r5a< C. a. - 
inrtp >' 

27.^). 1. 
inrtpixfiy c. f;. 275, 1. 
inrtpopuy v. j:. 274. 1. 
inetp^iptw c. j;. 275, 1. 
{nrf\Koos c- g. and d. 273, 

R. 18. 
vinjx«I> c- a- 278, 3, (b). 
02 



615 

{nr6 Prep. 2)9; c. d. in 
Preg. sense ins. c. a 
300, 3, (a) ; c. a. and 
part. 312, R. 5. 

viro ins. vir^cm 31. R. 3. 

vTro/LteVci;/ c. inf. 30G, 1, (a) 
311, 15; c. part. 31Q 

imoixifivr\(rKiiv c. two ace 

280, 3. 
inrovouv c. g, 273, R. 20. 
wircKTTTJveu C. d. 284, 3, (2) 
vroxcupetv C. g. 271, 2. ■ 

c. a. 279, R. 3. 
wrrtpiiv^ vaiepcv c7i/ai, 

v<TT(pi((iy C. g. 275, 1. 
viftiffraadat c. d. 284, 3, 

(2). 
v^iaros 216, R. 2. 

*ay«7y c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) and R. 15. 
^ytiy, ipaiyfa^tu c. part 

31U. 4, (b) ; ipalyo^ai 

xoiwy Ti il). R. 3. 
^lytaliai c. inf. and part. 

311, 8. 
<(Kiy<u c. inf T06, 1, (b.) 
^ayfp6% tifu "Koiuy rt 310, 

K.3. 
^«t5«<rdai c. g. 274, 1, (b). 
^p*t referring to severa) 

■ - T1S241. R. 13, (a), 
c ^, tptpmy^ maximo 

udii ib. H. 10. 
^ipraios 84, I. 
<p*fn(pos, iptpiaros 84, 1. 
^(vyfiy with signif. of 

Perf. 255, R. 1 ; <p(v- 

ftiy C. g. e. g. ifXoirfjs 

274,2; wiroTivoi 249.3. 
^txr^ay c. a. 279, 3 ; c. inf. 

3U6, 1, (a). 
<^a/i€»'05, ^(fy, quickly 

310,4,(0). 
^eu'Cif' c. a. 279, 4; c. 

part, followed by ^, 

irpi*/ ^ 31u, 4, (1) 
(pdfyyfff^ai c a. 278, 3. 
^<<77os and <p^oyyii 70, 

R. 
<^o'ij dec. 68, 17. 
(p^oyfly C. g. 274, I, (l); 

c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
<pl\05 comp. 82, R. 4. 
<pl\os c. g. 273, 3, (bj. 
<pl{y) suffix 210. 



614 



GREEK INDEX. 



tpo^ela-^ai c. a. 279, 5 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (a). 
(poit/iKovs 70, R. 3. 
ipouevu with signif. of 

Peif. 25.5, R. 1. 
<pp(i(fiu c. d. and a. c. inf. 

307, R. 3. 
<f)peap dec. 68, 16. 
<t>poi/xiov I 7, R. 4. 
^povTi^iiu e. ^^ and a. 274, 

1 and R. 1 ; c. is and 

g. abs SI 2, R. 12: c. 

'6-nm c. md. fut. 330, 6. 
<ppovhos 17, R. 4. 
(pvfiu ; (pijvai v. g. 273, 1. 
(pvKdrrea-^ai c. a. 27^). 1, 

Xafpcjf c, d. 285, ^ i ; . i; 

jtiirt. 310, 4, (c). 
XaAtTraiVeij' c. g. 274, 1 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (G). 
XoAfWs ct/At c. inf. ins. 

Xa\fir6v i<TTi with ace. 

c. inf. 307, R. 6. 
Xa\(iru>s (pepfiv c. g. 274, 

l,d; c. d. 285, (1); c. 

4irl rivi and c. a. 285, R. 

1 ; c. part. 310, 4 (c). 
Xdpris dec. 71. A, (o). 
Xdpiu 278, R. 2 ; c. g. 288, 

R. ; X'^P^" ^y^Wt <^'h*' '^' 
X«^p dee. 55, R. 1 . 
Xfipi(rros, x^^P'^*' ^"^^ 2. 
XeA.j6w*/ dec. 55, R. 2. 
XVpovu c, g. 271, 2. 
Xvovs dec. 47. 
XOfvs dee. 57 and 68, 18. 



Xo\ov(T^ai c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (6). 
XOpevfiu ^f6i/ 279, R. 5. 
Xovs dec. 68, 18. 
XpaianeTu c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
Xpeci'J/ 73, 1. (c). 
XPidJS dec. 69. 
XP^ c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. a. 

and d. 279. R. 4. c. inf. 

306, 1, (d); xM c. d. 

and a. c. inf. 307, 6, 

and R. 3. 
Xpvo'^ai rifl ri 278, 4 ; e. 

d. 285, (2). 
Xpdis dec. 68, 1 9. 
XU!pf7v c. d. 284, 3, {2). 
Xft'plCfty c. g. 271, 2. 
X«p^r c. g. 271, 3. 
Xupos and x<^P« "^j B- 

^oiJfti' c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
x^fytiy c. g. and a. 273, 

}{. 20. 
}^fv5«Tdai c. g. 271. 2. 
ii/€w8^y eotnp. 82, II. 
if.X($j e.g. 271, 3. 

*n«f with Part. 312, R. 7. 

tl'vo^, ii'i/a 53. R. 4. • 

tcufiffbcu c. g. 275, 3. 

us IVep. 290, 3 and R 2. 

d?j fA«f, see Srt. 

is h/. »;i m'slics [^uunam) 
259. 3. (b). 

i)S, (IS. so as. const. 342 : 
oSt»s (us) — is in wish- 
es aud asse^'cratioiis 



242, R. 2; is «ith t 
Subs, (as might be ex- 
pected, is A: " j'j- 

VtOi, iif JjirnJ ;. 

ce<' li. 4. 

is wr : ^ K.2. 

its C. d., as : is y(p6yrt^ 

ics ifioi - ■ ' t, 

ipL^ZC'i 

is c. pait. and 

312, 6: c. i.art :_ ,.j, 

6, (a), 
is in- - " - 

is, / 

c. ' 
is, V ...... 

is ins. £sTe, so that^ see 

fisTf, ^ 

is (ixfrv and is i-uos €»- 
Tta'341, R. 3. 

is (Is, iiri, itpSs C. a., it 
i-ri c. d- 29i>, R. 2. 

i>i rl 344, R, 6. 

^s S^fXov, -fs, •« c. in£ 
259, R. 6. 

£s>r(p, as, const 342 ; with 
Part, 312. R. 13. 

&rtf c. i: '^ if a sim- 

ple in! .3. 

fisT« c. ] K. 1.3. 

5sT€, so 1 ..St. 341. 

&iTt, as, so as, const. 342. 

miT6s ins. 6 minis 2 ' ~ ' 

wtfuKuv c. a. 279. 1 j c 
two a. 280 n 1 .V d. 
279, B. I. 



III. INDEX FOR THE EORMS OF THE VERBS, 



Abbreviations. A. Aorist ; A. l.^first Aor.; A. IL sf<vnd Aor. ; Au^'. -4«"/- 
metit : Char. Characteristic ; Comp. Com^xire ; Dial. JjiuUci : F. Futurt ; 1*. 
Passive: Pf. PirfWt; Pf. M. Pcr/icf Middle; Plup. Pluperfect; R. Ptmark ; 
Red. Ixcdui'liciUion. 



Adw 230. 
d7ah»,ua( 230. 
ii')a,uai 179. I. 
a7do^ai, ayaio/ua* 230. 
iyeipw Pf. with Att. Rod. 
124, 2, (6). Dial. 230. 



4Sct (Poet. a«:S«). F. d((r»- 
luu (afiVrouAi). .\tL 



R-)r(itCi,' 2.30. 

«7ri-ui 187. l.Dial. 2.30. 

&7U'. A.I. T5|a, a^ot in I 

and Xen. ; A. II. i . . .\ _ 

R. 2 : 1^. I. Act. 124,2 ; atiptt23( 
Pf. M. fiyMu. Dial. 230. iafilCoftm ^xu 



a. 



l22,1. 



INDEX FOB. THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



615 



•AHMI 230. 

uidCu Char. 143. 6. 

alSfOficuy auoofiai 166, 1. 
Dial. 230. 

cufc'v, fonnation of ten- 
ses 130, (d), 2. 

aJyvncu 230. 

aipfuj 107. 1. Dial. 230. 

aTj^'u.' -re adpa 'I'M. 

cua-i6.yofixu 160, 1. 

ataau) Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 
230. 

ctto An- 122, 1. Dial. 230. 

I. 

«,.a^ . -.JO. 

aKfomu, formation of 

■ '), (d), 1. 
(.1 
CLKowa, Vi. with Att. Red. 

124, 2; F. OLKOwronai. 

I'ass. with <r 131, 2. 
oxctiflio^ioi, F. 'dffofuu 129, 

K. 1. 
iAoAoC«, Char. 143,6. 
aKdoncu 230. 

a\airaC<» 223, 5. "*" 

oASoiVw 230. 
a\(l<pw, lY.witli Aft. Ro.l. 

124,2. 
a\t(o 106. 2. i>i.u _'»'•. 
ii\fouai or dAcvo^at 230. 
aA«u "ion of lenst's 

1..', , . . 1. , 
aK^ffKw, -d'nTKw 230. 

OAiT.. 

d\«ra>>t<i/, si'o oAc^o; 162. 

aWdaau, Char. 7. 143, 1. 

—A. I. and II. T. 141, 

4. (!.). 
&\\ouai, d in format. 149, 

K. 2. Dial. 230. 
diXodu, y.-diret. 129, R. 1. 
aKvicrtut 2.30. 

a\<pa ui 230. 

aui^rTdLi>6o 100, 2. DiaL 

230. 
kn&KiaHoa 161. 2. 
A/air. 4. 

i^WA. .'.'JO. 

a/n/rw, afiut'o^of 162. 
fn^iipiyvoiv, Aug. 126, 1 

and 3. 
kfi<pi(yyv^ 1^4, 1. 
iin<pis0TiTiw, Ann. 126. 2. 
aya^iuxTKOfiou 161, 3. 
kiKxXiffKv 161,4. 



avSc^foj 230. 

*ANE0n 230. 

dj'f'xojucu Aug. 126, 1. 

dMfJj'O.^a (Kp.; 230. 

d;/oi7i/t/;ai, avoiyu) 187, 6. 

d*'opd(Ja>, Aug. 126, 1. 

avTow 230. 

di'trrw, avvoi formation of 
tenses 130, (b), l.Dial. 
230. 

Hivwya 230. 

dirat/paw 2-30. 

aircupiffKU} 230. 

dreiAfctf 230, 

awtx^ayofjuu 100, 3. 

dxdfpffe 230. 

*'''<^X^^ I ''7, 3, contrac- 
tion 137. 3. 

awoxpHfjiai 230. 

•APAn 230. 

a.p((TKti> 161. 5. 

apKfv, ' '')n of ten- 

ses 1. 1. 

apfiArrv^r^tey Char. 143,3. 

ifKVfuu 188, l.Comp. 230. 

iLp6<a, fitnnation of tenses 
1 

Offwa^ , M. 143, 7. 

apvrv, ipvot, formation 
of tenses 130. (h), 1. 

*APn, apapi<TKu> 230. 

aaffWy ataati) 230. 

oucui-w, Aug. 122, 1. 

•ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143, 
6. 

'ATP.An, see awavpaw. 
( ;o. 

aw^tt.-, -.»;(*>, 160.4. 
•ATPI2KOMAI, ^xai;p.230. 
atpiKytoficu 15'J. 2. 
d4i>t'<r(r(tf, Char. 143.4. 
'A^n, dira(^i<rK(i; 230. 
&X^<'M<u 1 66, 4. 
*AXn, ^KaxiCo 230. 
•Afl, (F 

iwfTTO (U , - iO. 

B<£C«. Char. 143, 6. 
$aii'w I.jS, 1. Dial. 230. 
/3oA\a» l.'iO, 2. Com p. 230. 
fidrru, Cliar. <;>. 143, 1. 
/Sofcw 230 

/3a.TTc(C«, Char. 143, 7. 
B.\.1, see Balvu. 
fitio^icu, ^(Oficu 230. 
fiidofiai 230. 

flt/SaCctf 163, 1. Comp. 
fiaivui 230. 



fiifipdjo-Kd) 161, 6 Dial 

230. 
jStJw 192, .0. 

filUaKOLLUL 161, 3. 

^AaTTTo), Char. j8, 143, 1 

lied. 123, 2. 
fiXaardvo) 160, 5. 
^Aaa-(^rjjU6a>, Ked. 123, 2, 
)3Ae'7ra,, A. II. P. 140 H. 1. 
yQAtTTw Char. 143, 3. 
&\w(TKa 230. 
/3o({a> 230. 
^ocTKtii 166, 5. 
^ovKofiai 1 66. 6. Dial. 230. 
^pdaaoy, Cliar. 143, 3. 
/Spe'xw A. II. P. 140, 2. 
iSpi'Cw, Char. 143, 6. 
fipv^dofiai 230. 
fivyfu, fivyofiai, /3uw 159, 1 

raM€« 165, 1. Comp, 23a 

ydyufjLai 230. 

TAri, see yiyyo/xcu. Comp. 

230. 
yeyojyiffKw 161, 7. Comp 

ytywya 230. 

ydyofjLai 230. 

7€Aao>, formation of ten- 
ses 130 (c). 

yfyro 230. 

FENfl, see ylyyofiai. 

7«yft>, A. P. with <r 131, 3. 

yn^fw 165, 2. 

7ijpo[(r»co>, yqpdoj 161, 8. 
Dial. 230. 

yiyyofxaif yiyofiai 163, 2. 

ytyy(i)(TKC6,yiyu><TK<i) 161,9 

yodta 230. 

ypi)yopiu), see iyelpw. 

AaiCot 143, 6. 223, 5. 

SaiyvfjLi 230. 

Jafa> 230. 

Sa/cyctf 158, 9. 

5a/xaw, Safid^u 156, 2. 

Sapiydoj 230. 

5a/jdo»'a) 1 00, 6. Dial. 230. 

5aT(o/xai 230. 

AAA 230. 

Searo 230. 

56? 160, 7. 

SetSw, Pf. Se'Sio 193. 

Comp. 230. 
5€i/c»'i;/uil75, 187, 2. DiaL 

230. 
SeTi/, sec Se?. 
AEKfl, see SeiKyv/jii and 

Sf'xo/iot. 



616 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



Se'/Mo, formation of ten- 
ses 156, 2. 

SfOfjiai contract. 137, 2. 

SepKOfiai, Pf. SfdopKa with 
the meaninj^ of the 
Pres. 140, 4. Dial. 230. 

«€>«, A. II. P. andPf.A. 
140, 2 and 4. 

SfXopiai 230. 

Sfvu 2:i0. 

i(a>, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 2, contraction 
137, 2. 

J«», see 9(7. 
Smirdw, An{r. 126, 2. 
hiaKovtu, An;;. 126, 2. 
StoAf^o/xai, Aug. 123, R.2. 
SiSacrfw 161, K. 
AIAHMl 230. 
SiS^ao-Kw 161, 10. 
St'Swjut 175. 
S^jTrj/ia* 180, R. 3. Dial. 

230. 
AIHMI 180, R. 3. Dial. 

230. 
8«(rT<iC«. <^''»«>". 143, 7. 
hi\\iiu)y contracted 137, 3. 
Zlo) 230. 

hlfilKW. ihl'SiKO^OV 162. 

JoeCccroTo 230. 

BoKtw 165, 3. 

Zoimiof 230. 

Sfxio), formation of tenses 

131, 3. 
^PEMn sec rp^xV' 
ivyaficu 179, 2. Accent 

176, 1. Dial. 230. 
Uvw, ivu, 158, 2. Dial. 
230. 

'Ed<p^ sec fiirrfl# 230. 

ddtio, Aug. 122, 3. For- 
mation of tenses 129, 
R. 1. 

^yefpoj Pf. with Att Red. 
124, 2. (l>); Pf II. with 
variahle vowel 140, 4. 
Aor. II. M. 155, 1. 
Dial. 230. 

'EFKn, see <^*'po>. 

^yxtipfOy Aug. 126, 5. 

fdw see fVd/w. 

c^ouot, see frad/^w. 

^^f\a> 166, 8 

4diCci>, Aug. 122,3. 

'Een Aug.l22,3,Dial.230. 

'EIAH, see iptiw. 

fucd^w, Aug. 121, R. 



•EIKn, Pf ^oiKa, Plup. 

^aJwe/v 140, R. 3 ; Aug. 

122, 5. Inflection of 

foiKa 1 95, 2. Dial. 230. 
(1k(i), (tKo^oy 162. 
CiAf'ctf, ciXc'ci?, efAActf and 

eiAAtf, see (fXitf. 
*rXu« 230. 
(fAfltf 166, 9. 
c/m^ 181 bt ■ 
fjfu 181 ai 

ftvu/xi, see Afjipidyyvfu. 
*Einn, see tfniuL 
(Ipyfvfii 187, 3. 
ftpyu 1 87, 3. Cot.' 
'EIPOMAI 166,11. ' 

230. 
'lUPTMI, sec ipitt 230. 
etpvtt, see /pvw. 
crp« 230. 
«T<To. Aug. 122, 3. Dial. 

ttufOa, sec idi^u!. 

iKav^w 1 58, 3. Dial. 230. 
i\dtt, see ^Kavyw. 
4\tyx», l*f.wiih AU-Red. 

124. 2. 
iKt\i(w, Char. 143, 6. 

Dial. 230 
•EAETen. yfuu. 

ikitraw, A-, 3.— Pf. 

with Att. Red. 124, 2. 
'EAKTn, sec i\tcm. 
ikKtt 166. 10. 
lAirw, IT foATo, Plup. 

iuKKfiv 140 n .1 .\ug. 

122, 5. 
'EAfl, see o^p**-. 
//xf cr. formation of tenses 
. 1. 

^Mf*- 

ifxtrfinvKt, see ^fiu«». 
ifiwlwKrjfjii 177, 5. 
^fopi (,'*'♦ Char. 143, 6. 
iyavo!, Pa^s.with a 131,2. 
'ENEen, see ir^iro^a. 
•ENEKH, see <f>«pm. 
dy^Tw, see ^fu. Comp. 

230. 
dy^iro^a 230. 
iyiwTw 230. 
iyytTotf see ^M^. Comp. 

230. 
Ifxi'i'/Lii, see iLfi^^rrvfu, 

Comp. 230. 
^wxXew, Aug. 126. 1. 
/oufo, see 'EIKG. Comp. 

230. 



€opycu, see 'EPm. 
iopTd(u, Aug. 122, 5. 
dvdia, 230. 
iiravpiaKu 230. 
i-irfiyofjuu 197, R. 2. 
(TTi^v^fuiy Aug. 126, 5. 
Marofuu 179, 3. Dial 

230. 
rr», Aug. 122, 3. Comp 

230. 
fpofuu 179, 4. 
/pdLw Kee fpofuu, 
ipyd(ofjLat, Aug. 122, 3. 
fpT-w 230. 

"EPrn. j.'.ip. ' --' 

5.— Pcrf. V . 1^- 

vowel 140. R. 3. 
(pic0 see 'EPrn. Comp. 

230. 
ip*ih«ty perf. with Att. 

Red. 124,2. Dial. 23a 
ip^'i-rm 230. 
ip*aau 14" " 
ipthojiym 2 
/piCo* 230. 
'EPOMAI see 'FTP. 
ipmv^m, iprtt, 2.3 

f^ 166, 12. i'iat .^^oO. 

dpvyydrm 160, 13. 

^pudairw 230. 

/piMcw 230. 

fpvftai see VpM* S30. 

/puw, formation of teii*ds 

223, I. Comp. 230. 
(pXOfitu 167, 2. Comp. 

230. 
iedltt, fffbti 167,3. 
IttmU*, Aug. 122, 3. 
fffcSc see oMum. Comp. 

230. 
«IS« see KtAtiim. 
9&pUntm 161, 11. 
c#^«fMi Aug. 121, R. 
ix^^i^'Ofuu see ^vcx^. 
rx« 166, 14. Comp. SSO 
jvj-<>- ir,r. 1.'. 

Zc U 137, 3 

((,. :.. Comp. C««^ 

Jfv-^i--. -r . 4. 

^f«, formation of teosM 
130. (I), d 

j^3<urir«, ^^3^, 161, IS- 
^pcdoMot see ^^ 
Comp. 230. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



617 



tlfptbofuu sec aUpct. Comp. 

230. 
fifuu 190. Dial. 230. 
1ifjS(>oToy sec a^iapTiivu. 
ilfii 178, R. 3. 
ijiwa 230. 

e<£»T«, Char. <> 143, 1. 
df\v see ^dcAw. 
btpoiuu 230. 
d(« 154, 2 ; contract. 137, 

1. Coinp. rpfx»*' 
briKtu 230. 

eHnn 230. 

diyyafw 160. 14. 

bkitt^ furraation of tenses 

130. {(•). • 
dr^KM 101,I3.Comp.2dO. 
bp&TTet frum Tofidrrtt 1 56, 

K 
dpauM Past, with a- 131,3. 
dpvKKi(w, Char. 223, 5. 
dpvsTw, Char. ^ 143, 1. 
3^<rK» 161, U. 156, 2. 

Dial. 230. 
bvfw iinti diW 158, 4. 
di II of tenses 



1. i >». 

TC«* sec tta^l(w. 
Iritu IM). Dial. 230. 
Uvionai^ uttt 159, 2. Se« 

di^urvio/uu. Cuiup. 230. 
IXuriro^iai IGl, 15. 
'UHMI 230. 
IXAw sec <tAw. 
Itidaat*, Char. 143, 3. 
r^dM* 230. 
T(m;/u 175. 
iVx»'aiKw, d in fonnat.I49, 

K. 2. 

•ee 6«'urx>'*ot^<Lf 
*ia see tJfu. 

KAA-, KAIA-, Me ko/- 

Kt/UOi. 

ifa->..'Mi/i(, Aug. 126, 3. 
Ka . 154, 5. 

Ifa • 13. 

Mu .126,3. 

ircu^t^'cuw set] KObdi\'iv. 
«cai>n/Axai 230. 

Koiw jcdw 154, 2. Dial. 
230. 



KoXfWy formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d) 2; Opt. 
Plup. yL or. P. 154, 8; 
metaih. in Pf 156, 2. 

KOfifw 149, 5, and 158,10. 
Dial. 230. 

kIuttw pf. M. or P. 144, 
K. 2. 

itarrryopfw, Aug. 126, 5. 

Kdct sec Kedu. 

K«7nai 189. Dial. 230. 

K > KCIfUU. 

K<A«uo», Pass, with (T, 

131,2. 
ic«AX(» 230. 

If. m 

#t« .0. 

KfftAri^vfii 183, 1. Dial. 

230. 
ir<p8aivw, d in format.149, 

U. T Act. 149,6. 

r. - K 

tc- •. 

mjow I'M, 17. Dial. 230. 

Kiiponat 23U. 

Kit^vfiat 230. 

Ktpp^M 230. 

irtX'U'ctf, -OM<u 230. 

*: ■-- 1. 

mAMTfyaitm 160, 8. 

Dial. - 
Kkaiu ' itjo, ib. 

kXcUl' . 'f tenses 

130, (c). 
mXtiv Pass, with a 131,3. 

Dial. 23(». 
icA<Vrw, Char. » 143, 1. 

P. M., A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf. I. and l*f. M- or P. 

140 ^ 

«A<b< - 

irAiitw, KAp«* tee acA«^ 

230. 
kA/*w, PC A- and M. or 

P. and A. 1. P. 149, 7. 

and R 4. 
mXxm 230. 

Kvai>0 Pass, with (T 131, 2. 
icKciw Pa^s. with <r 131, 2. 

contract. 137, 3. 
Kvutoau:, Char. 143, 3. 
Ko»i»» Char. 143, 6. 
jcoiAouw, d in form. 149, 

K. 2. 
icoAoww.Pass.with <r 131 , 3. 



K(JxTa), Char. IT, 143, 1 

Dial. 230. 
KoUwvixi 182. Dial. 23a 

KOTfW 230. 

KpdCw, Char. 7 143, 6; 

Pcrf. 194, R. Comp. 

230. 
Kpaivw 230. 
Kpeixa/jLcu 179, 5. 
Kpf/xdyvvm 183, 2. 
/cpjVw Pf. A. and M. or 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7, 

and K. 4. 
Kpovo), Pass.with <r 131,3. 
Kpvvru} 143, 1. 
Kpdi^w, Char. 143, 6. 
KTaoficu^ Red. 123, R. 1 ; 

Sul)j. Pf and Opt. 

Plup. 154, 8. 
Krdvvyn 1 88, 2. 
tcTfiyta, F. KTci/w. A. I. ^jc- 

rciva, (A. II. iKTovov 

doubtful in prose) ; Pf. 

A. iKTova 141, 4; Pf. 

P. iitrtmai and Aor, 

P. itcra^v ( iKTa.vby\v 

in later writers) 149, 

R. 3. Poet, and Dial 

230. 
Kilvyvm see tmivvpn, 
KTUTriui 165, 4. 
KvKiu, Pass witho- 131, 2. 
ri/ffw 159, 3. 
KVpffU, Kvpot 230. 

Aayx<iyo» 160, 15. Dial. 
230. 

AAZTMAI 230. 

Xa^ifidyu 160, 16. Dial. 
230. 

Xaw^ayu 160, 17. Dial. 
230. 

KdtTKot 230. 

Af7<w, (a) ^0 say, without 
Pf. A.; Pf. AI. A€A€y- 
fiai. A. P. ^At'x^". — 
(b) /o collect, and in 
compounds Pf cfAoxa, 
M. or P. (Uey/xou 140, 
5 ; Aug. 123, 3 ; A. II. 
P. iKfyny and A. I. P. 
140,R.l. Comp.AEXn. 

\cUw, A. fKiTToy, Pf. IL 
KfKoiira 140, 4. A. II. 
A. and P. 141, 3. cor- 
responding form 160, 
18. 

A€V«, A. IL P. 140, B. 1 



618 



INDEX FOE. THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



K(VKaiv(a,a in for.149, R. 2. 
Xeva-croo, Char. 143, 3. 
\eva}, Pass, with a 131,2. 
AEXn 230. 
Ki/jLirdva} see Xeiiro). 
XificvTTco, Char. T 143, 3. 
Kiaao/xai, Char. 143, 3. 
\ovw, contract. 137, 5. 

Dial. 230. 
Kvfxaivoixai Pf. M. or P. 

149, 8. 
\{jw, formation of tenses 

130, (h) 2. Dial. 230. 

Vlalvoixai 230. 
/uaiofiat 230. 

tisLvkiduo} 1 60, 1 9. Dial.230. 
fidpvauai 230. 
fiapTvpiu} 105, 5. 
/wctjrrrai, Char. 7 143, 1. 
fia(TTl(u), ('har. 143, 6. 
ndxofxai 106, 19. Dial 

230. 
MAn 230. 

flf^VffKW 101, 10. 

fX€ifiO/jLai '2'iO. 

H(K€i 106, 21. Dial. 230. 

fifKKo) 106, 20. 

/jliKu) see /LicAct. Comp. 

231). 
/^{foifactf 230. 
/LifW 149, .5; 166, R. 2. 

Com J). MAfl. 
fjifTafiiKfi, fjLfTaiJLfKofjLai, 

100, 21. 
Hrpij.r}pi(o, Char. 223, 5. 
fi.T]Kvo/j.ai 230. 

/Liiaiyo), /xirjyai, fjuavai 149, 
J\. 2. Pf. Act. ixfuiayxa 
149, 6. Pf. M. or P. 
fitniaanai 149, S. Dial. 
230. 

ixlyyvfii IS", .'>. DiMl. 230. 

fn/.u'T](rK(i> Subj. Pf. and 
Opt. IMpf. M. 154, 8; 

101, 17. 

/xlcryo) see fxlywfxt. ^ 
fjioKovjuai SCO ^Ku'tTKO), 
/Lio\iW Pf. M.or P.149,1. 
fj.vC(^\ to siicl\ 106, 22. 
jui''(,'a», to ifnxin, 143, 7. 
fiVKdofxai 230. 
/ui'tw, formation of tenses 
130, (b) 1. 

Nafa> 230. 
pd<r(ra! 143, 4. 
veiK€<n 230. 



velacoficu see viaaofuu. 

vefio) 166, R. 2. 

veo* 154, 2. 

i/ew (W)^w). Pass, with 

<r 131, 3. 
veco, Pf. M. or P. with 

and without ir 131, 3. 
vlaraofiaif Char. 143, 3. 

Dial. 230. 
vofco contract 205, 5. 
yvard^u) 143, 7. 

Hew, formation of tenses 

130. (d) 1. 
^i7pajVa>Pf. M.or P. 149,8. 
^vpfu 105, G. • 

^va>, Pass, with a, 131, 2. 

'OWC«, Char. 143, 6. 
«8i'(ra<T.>ai OAT2- 

20MAI 1; 
oCo -**). 23. 
olaxl^v An;:,'. 122. 1. 
oiyuvfxiy otyw sec ayoiy. 
olta see ^p(L>. Corap. 

230. 
oiSa/fctf, oiidyUf oiidu 

16(>, 9. 
olKovpfu 122. 2. 
o^ftoi sec ofo^Luu. 
olfidu 122. 2. 
oifivCu 143, 6. 
ojVjX* 122. 2. 
otyoxofw 219, 5. 
o«V(ia>, Au'^^122. 2. 
oiouai 1 00. 24. Cuuip. 230. 
ol6w, oi(t>^y 122, 1. 
oiarpfu) 122, 2. 
of'^ouai 100, 25. 

id ^fpw. 
1 1». 
6\Au/;m 1^2. B. 
oAo\i'{,w, Char. 143, 6. 
dfiapTtu, Kpic dfjLOpT^jrrjy 

222, K. 1. 
^jLU'u^ii 182. B. 
dfioKkdtc, Kpic ifiOKkfoy 

222. I. A. (2). 
OU({<ryiaiu( 187. 7. 

■■ Ul. 

ji'^Kij^ 177. 4. 
byu^tai 230. 
'OriTn SCO 6pda.\ 
dpdw 167, 4. 230. 
opyaiyo), a. in form. 149. 

H. 2. 
'OPEFNTMI 230. ' 



6p4yu 230. 
opyufjii 230. 
opv(T(Tu>y Char. •) 143, 1 

Pf. with Att. Red.l 24,2 
6(T(ppaiyofuu 160, 11. Diftl 

230. 
oaippaabcu see ocippalyo 

fiai. 
ovpfu, Ang. 122, 4. 
otrrd« 230. 
o<^c(Aw 166, 26. Dial 

230. 
o<pf\Xu> 2.30. 

UtpKuTKOMW 160, 12. 

na/C«, Char. 143, 7. 

irai» 166, 27. 

■iraXaiw Pass.with c 131,2. 

irdWu 230. 

wapavo 5. 

vapoiy* . 

Topo^i/vat Pf. AL or p. 

149. 8. 
-rdaau. Char. 143. '. 
»d- - Dial. 23a 

TOT 

irai>w, A. p. with «r 131,4. 
iraxv*^ Pf.M.or P. 149.8. 

TClt^W, Pf. II. TtVOlt^a 

140, 4. I ' 

v«im(«, COI : >7. 2. 

ir(irrM»,s-('irrw,T<tira» 143,2. 
ireA(£C« 230. 
ir«A«/iJi(w, Char. 223, 5. 
»«>»». Pf 1. and l*f. M. 

or P. 140. 5. 
riEXe.a. sec ycurx«». 
vrrcuVotf, d in the format. 

149. H. 2. 
ir*, R. 

- 8. 

wfpdw, '>n of ten* 

SOS l.i'-. \\ |. 

ir«/>5w 1 00, 28. 
v(>3w 230. 
Trreb'vv/u 1S3, 3. 
vcrofiflu svncu|Mite<] Act. 

^— -* '*•• '•'.6, 29. 

1 



«"^Kw^ 1S7. ^. i'l.u. _M^'. 

v/Aj^MiOi 230. 

Ti.uTAn.tti 177, 5. Dial.23a 

wifiwfrnut 177, 6. 

v/r« 158s 5. 

»nriVW! 161, 19. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



619 



wtwpdtTKca 161, 20. 

wiTTTu) 1G3. 3. Dial 230. 

wiTydiij 2.J0. 

w\dCw, Char, -yy U3, 8. 

vAdLdw, see TcAa^w. 

irAa<T(rw, Char. 143, 3. 

TAfKW A 11. P. UU. R. 1, 

irAf'w, furmatiou of ten- 
ses 154, 2 ; contract. 
137, 1. 

v\-fiaau, Char. 7 143, 1 ; 
^V. 11. V. UU, H. 2. 

vAvi'M, Pf. ..v. and M. or 
A. LP. 149,7 andU.4. 

ir\uu 23U. 

irv(u), torinatioD of ten- 
ses 154, 2 J contract. 
137, 1. 

vod«u, format, of tenses 
130, (d), 2. 

wo\tfjii(o>. Char. 223, 5. 

woi' Miat. of tenses 

I 2. [143,1. 

wpdffaw, wpdrritf Char, y 

: "Ty, 6. 

with «r 1.31, 2. 
.5. 

iTr__ ^- 

«T^a<r« 230. 

wriaau; ' ' ' 

«Twa» 1 

vtrnftctyo/MM loo, 20. 

•Pa/M»Pf.M. orP.149,8; 

Mt .r. <^ 143, 1. 

ii\». Char. 14 !. '• 

i<«, fo of tenses 

154, ~ 

'PF.Cl, ' 

. 107, «. 
^.,.* -;30. 

6ty6w, contract. 137, 3. 
(mrrof, < », 1. 

Puard^ttt Char. 143, 6. 
^it/yyvfjn 1^0, 2. 

v, Char, yy 143, 8 

>0. 
atifyyvfu 184, 4. 
o-ctw. Pass, with (r 131, 2. 
at ill) 230. 

I d in for- 
mat. 149, ii. 2; Pf. M. 
Ua, 8. 



(TKaxT&j, Char. <p 143, 1. 
o-Ke5avvu/xi 182, and 183,4. 
(TKfWta), (TKeKeot 166, 30. 
aKiSvafiat 230. 
o-ftcui?, contract. 137, 3. 
aodrai, aovao ((tov), see 

fffVW. 

c-rdw, format of tenses 

130, (c). 
ajrdpa}, Pf. tan. pa 140, 4. 
a-Kiyhu> 144, li. I. 
arai^ii}, Chur. 143, 6. 
<rroAoi,w, Cliar. 143, 6. 
ortKXu.A. 11. P. 140,2. 
<rr«v<£C«. Char. 143. G. 
aripyv, Pf. IL iaropya 

140, 4. 
(TT*tJiiTK«, arfpiu 161, 21. 

1. 230. 
<r7. . < 'har. »-t>. o. 
(TTiv ir. 143, 6. 

aToptyyufjii,(Tr6pyvm 184,5. 
arptip,^ A. II. 1*. UO, 2. 

Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
(TT. 182 and 186,3. 

avKamy iL{>. avKifTriv 222, 
M 1. 

(<ri»p(TT»), Char. 

14 i, 6. 

o-^C". <r«;><£TT«, Char. 7 

143, 1 and 6. 
a<piyyu, C'har. 144, K. 2. 
o^^vCwt Char. 143, 6. 
ff^S :iiat. of tenses 









TA ■). 

rayvw, tonnat. of tenies 

223, 1. Comp. 230. 
rapdaau, dpirrtit 156, R. 

Dial. 2.30. 
rdaaw, TtirTo?, Char. 7 

143, 1. 
rtlyw 140, R. 3 
rcX(», format, of tenses 

1 1. 

T«. 11. 

rtpirw 1: . '. 
TfTfMoy, >^e'* TEMH. 
rtrpaiyti) 163, 4. 

T^Ko. 140, U. -' 
TIEn 230. 



Tt^TJ/Xi 175. 

t/ktoj 143, 2. 

TlvvvfjLi 185 ; Comp. 230. 

rfyw 158, 6. 

rirpdci} 163, 4. 

TtrpuaKio 161, 22. 

t/w 158, 6. 

TAAn, 194,4. 

TAT^ai 177, 7. 

Tfirjyo) 230. 

Tpoxi^vw Pf.M. or P. 149,8. 

rpevu), variable vowel in 
A. II. Act. M. P. 140, 
25 A.I.Act.M.P.141, 
3 ; Pf. I. Act. and Pf. 
M. or P. 140, 5, 6. 
Verb. Adj. Tpeirr6s and 
witli middle sense 
Tpain\Tios. 

Tpf<pu>, Vf. r€Tpo<pa 140, 
4. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
A. I. P. ibpi<p$n\Vy ra- 
rer than A. 11. P. iTpd- 
^•ny 140, 2. Dial. 230. 
verb Adj. bp(irT6s. 

rpfxo 167, 5. 

rpto), format, of tenses 
130, (d), 1. 

Tpl(», Char. 7 143, 6. 

rvyx<Lyoi 160, 21. 

rinrru 166, 31. 

'Tir«)iu^/uivic6 sec iifjLVw 230. 
vwiaxv^oyuax 159, 4. 
inrvu>7- ' ' ir. 143,3. 
0w, t( . of tenses 

with a 131, 2. 

♦Arn sec iabl<a. 

^vo Pf. M. or P. 149,8. 

Pf. 11. iTf^njm 149, 9. 

151. Dial. 236. 
^(TKCtf 161, 23. 
(pdSofjuu 230. 
♦ENn see Tr(<pvoy 230. 
<P(pw 167, 6. comp. 230 
<f>fvyu see (furyydy'j). comp. 

230. 
<p7]}ii 167, 7, 178. 
(j^dttJ/w 158, 7. Dial. 230. 
<f>dfipco, A. II. P. 140, 2 

Pf.ll. 140,4. comp. 230. 
<pS>lyu 158, 8. Dial. 230. 
<pi\(a> 135. Dial. 230. 
(p\eyw,A. 1I.P.U0,R. 1. 
^XvCai Ciiar. 143, 6. 
<pond(i), Ep. (pQiTTiTrjv ^2^ 

K. 1. 



620 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



4>pdyvvij,i 187, 10. 
<ppdCa) 148. Dial. 230. 
(ppda-au. Char, y 143, 1. 
ippeu, formation of ten- 
ses, 131, 2, 
<Ppi(r(ru, Char. k. 143, 1. 
•piryyduco {(pevyw) 160, 22. 
(pvpw 230. 
<pvu3 192, 11. comp. 230. 

XdCofiai 230. 

Xaipu 1 66, 32. COmp. 230. 

XoAttcu, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (c). 

XovSdvu 160, 23. comp. 
230. 



Xda-Ku 161, 24. 

XeC«. Char. 2 143, 5 ; Pf. 
II. Kfxo^a 140, 4. Fut. 
Xfcrovfiai 154, 3. A. II. 
Act. according to the 
analogy of A. 1. 154. 8. 

Xfo, formation of tenses 
154, R. 1. 230. 

x6w, Pass. \%ith <r 131, 2. 

Xpdofmi, formation of 
tenses 129, R. 2.; A.P- 
with «r 131, 4; con- 
tract. 137, 3. 

XpdtDy formation of ten- 
ses 129, R. 2; contract 
137.3 



Xpil 177, 2. 

X/)t«, formation of tenses 

130, (a), 
Xj>uvvviu 186, 4- 

Yauoj, Pass, with (r 131,2. 
^cC», Pass, with er 131, 3; 

contract. 137, 3. 
^4yu, A. II. P. 140, R. 1. 
«f iJx«, A. XL P. 141, R. 

i^iu 165, 7. 
aWofuu, Aug. 122, 
comp. •rpiairbat. 



y-^ 



; 



I 



•■■>-'i ■-;■.' ^■■'•^: ■'-'*. SS^;:^''^i<fS^ 









LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 







fir7^ 








